29 CFR Part 1910 — Occupational Safety and Health Standards

PART 1910—OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS Editorial Note: Nomenclature changes to part 1910 appear at 84 FR 21597, May 14, 2019. Authority: 33 U.S.C. 941; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754); 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31160), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), 08-2020 (85 FR 58393), or 07-2025 (90 FR 27878); 29 CFR part 1911; and 5 U.S.C. 553, as applicable. Source: 39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, unless otherwise noted. Source: 39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, unless otherwise noted. Redesignated at 40 FR 23072, May 28, 1975. Subpart A—General Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order Numbers 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736),1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. Sections 1910.6, 1910.7, 1910.8 and 1910.9 also issued under 29 CFR 1911. Section 1910.7(f) also issued under 31 U.S.C. 9701; 29 U.S.C. 9a; 5 U.S.C. 553; Public Law 106-113 (113 Stat. 1501A-222); Public Law 11-8 and 111-317; and OMB Circular A-25 (dated July 8, 1993) (58 FR 38142, July 15, 1993). § 1910.1 Purpose and scope. (a) Section 6(a) of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (84 Stat. 1593) provides that “without regard to chapter 5 of title 5, United States Code, or to the other subsections of this section, the Secretary shall, as soon as practicable during the period beginning with the effective date of this Act and ending 2 years after such date, by rule promulgate as an occupational safety or health standard any national concensus standard, and any established Federal standard, unless he determines that the promulgation of such a standard would not result in improved safety or health for specifically designated employees.” The legislative purpose of this provision is to establish, as rapidly as possible and without regard to the rule-making provisions of the Administrative Procedure Act, standards with which industries are generally familiar, and on whose adoption interested and affected persons have already had an opportunity to express their views. Such standards are either (1) national concensus standards on whose adoption affected persons have reached substantial agreement, or (2) Federal standards already established by Federal statutes or regulations. (b) This part carries out the directive to the Secretary of Labor under section 6(a) of the Act. It contains occupational safety and health standards which have been found to be national consensus standards or established Federal standards. § 1910.2 Definitions. As used in this part, unless the context clearly requires otherwise: (a) Act (b) Assistant Secretary of Labor (c) Employer (d) Employee (e) Commerce (f) Standard (g) National consensus standard (h) Established Federal standard § 1910.3 Petitions for the issuance, amendment, or repeal of a standard. (a) Any interested person may petition in writing the Assistant Secretary of Labor to promulgate, modify, or revoke a standard. The petition should set forth the terms or the substance of the rule desired, the effects thereof if promulgated, and the reasons therefor. (b)(1) The relevant legislative history of the Act indicates congressional recognition of the American National Standards Institute and the National Fire Protection Association as the major sources of national consensus standards. National consensus standards adopted on May 29, 1971, pursuant to section 6(a) of the Act are from those two sources. However, any organization which deems itself a producer of national consensus standards, within the meaning of section 3(9) of the Act, is invited to submit in writing to the Assistant Secretary of Labor at any time prior to February 1, 1973, all relevant information which may enable the Assistant Secretary to determine whether any of its standards satisfy the requirements of the definition of “national consensus standard” in section 3(9) of the Act. (2) Within a reasonable time after the receipt of a submission pursuant to paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the Assistant Secretary of Labor shall publish or cause to be published in the Federal Register § 1910.4 Amendments to this part. (a) The Assistant Secretary of Labor shall have all of the authority of the Secretary of Labor under sections 3(9) and 6(a) of the Act. (b) The Assistant Secretary of Labor may at any time before April 28, 1973, on his own motion or upon the written petition of any person, by rule promulgate as a standard any national consensus standard and any established Federal standard, pursuant to and in accordance with section 6(a) of the Act, and, in addition, may modify or revoke any standard in this part 1910. In the event of conflict among any such standards, the Assistant Secretary of Labor shall take the action necessary to eliminate the conflict, including the revocation or modification of a standard in this part, so as to assure the greatest protection of the safety or health of the affected employees. § 1910.5 Applicability of standards. (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, the standards contained in this Part shall apply with respect to employments performed in a workplace in a State, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Wake Island, Outer Continental Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, and Johnston Island. (b) None of the standards in this part shall apply to working conditions of employees with respect to which Federal agencies other than the Department of Labor, or State agencies acting under section 274 of the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, as amended (42 U.S.C. 2021), exercise statutory authority to prescribe or enforce standards or regulations affecting occupational safety or health. (c)(1) If a particular standard is specifically applicable to a condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process, it shall prevail over any different general standard which might otherwise be applicable to the same condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process. For example, § 1915.23(c)(3) of this title prescribes personal protective equipment for certain ship repairmen working in specified areas. Such a standard shall apply, and shall not be deemed modified nor superseded by any different general standard whose provisions might otherwise be applicable, to the ship repairmen working in the areas specified in § 1915.23(c)(3). (2) On the other hand, any standard shall apply according to its terms to any employment and place of employment in any industry, even though particular standards are also prescribed for the industry, as in subpart B or subpart R of this part, to the extent that none of such particular standards applies. To illustrate, the general standard regarding noise exposure in § 1910.95 applies to employments and places of employment in pulp, paper, and paperboard mills covered by § 1910.261. (d) In the event a standard protects on its face a class of persons larger than employees, the standard shall be applicable under this part only to employees and their employment and places of employment. (e) [Reserved] (f) An employer who is in compliance with any standard in this part shall be deemed to be in compliance with the requirement of section 5(a)(1) of the Act, but only to the extent of the condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process covered by the standard. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1910.6 Incorporation by reference. (a)(1) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) must publish a document in the Federal Register (i) The standards of agencies of the U.S. Government, and organizations which are not agencies of the U.S. Government which are incorporated by reference in this part, have the same force and effect as other standards in this part. Only the mandatory provisions ( i.e., (ii) Any changes in the standards incorporated by reference in this part and an official historic file of such changes are available for inspection in the Docket Office at the national office of OSHA, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210; telephone: 202-693-2350 (TTY number: 877-889-5627). (2) All approved incorporation by reference (IBR) material is available for inspection at OSHA and at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). (i) Contact OSHA at any Regional Office of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), or at the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW, Room N-3508, Washington, DC 20210; telephone: 202-693-2350 (TTY number: 877-889-5627). (ii) For information on the availability of these standards at NARA, visit www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations [email protected] (3) The IBR material may be obtained from the sources in the following paragraphs of this section or from one or more private resellers listed in this paragraph (a)(3). For material that is no longer commercially available, contact OSHA (see paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section). (i) Accuris Standards Store, 321 Inverness Drive, South Englewood, CO 80112; phone: (800) 332-6077; website: https://store.accuristech.com (ii) American National Standards Institute (see paragraph (e) for contact information). (iii) GlobalSpec, 257 Fuller Road, Suite NFE 1100, Albany, NY 12203-3621; phone: (800) 261-2052; website: https://standards.globalspec.com (iv) Nimonik Document Center, 401 Roland Way, Suite 224, Oakland, CA 94624; phone (650)591-7600; email: [email protected]; website: www.document-center.com (v) Techstreet, phone: (855) 999-9870; email: [email protected] www.techstreet.com (b) The following material is available for purchase from the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 1014 Broadway, Cincinnati OH 45202: (1) “Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice” (22nd ed., 1995), incorporation by reference (IBR) approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(iii). (2) Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices for 1986-87 (1986), IBR approved for § 1910.120, PEL definition. (c) The following material is available for purchase from the American Society of Agricultural Engineers (ASAE), 2950 Niles Road, Post Office Box 229, St. Joseph, MI 49085: (1) ASAE Emblem for Identifying Slow Moving Vehicles, ASAE S276.2 (1968), IBR approved for § 1910.145(d)(10). (2) [Reserved] (d) The following material is available for purchase from the Agriculture Ammonia Institute-Rubber Manufacturers (AAI-RMA) Association, 1400 K St. NW, Washington DC 20005: (1) AAI-RMA Specifications for Anhydrous Ammonia Hose, IBR approved for § 1910.111(b)(8)(i). (2) [Reserved] (e) American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, Fourth Floor, New York, NY 10036-7417; phone: (212) 642-4980; email: [email protected] www.ansi.org (1)-(2) [Reserved] (3) ANSI A11.1-65 (R 70) Practice for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for §§ 1910.219(c)(5)(iii); 1910.261 (a)(3)(i), (c)(10), and (k)(21); and 1910.265(c)(2). (4) ANSI A11.1-65 Practice for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for §§ 1910.262(c)(6) and 1910.265(d)(2)(i)(a). (5) [Reserved] (6) ANSI A13.1-56 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems, IBR approved for §§ 1910.253(d)(4)(ii); 1910.261(a)(3)(iii); 1910.262(c)(7). (7) ANSI A14.1-68 Safety Code for Portable Wood Ladders, Supplemented by ANSI A14.1a-77, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(iv) and (c)(3)(i). (8) ANSI A14.2-56 Safety Code for Portable Metal Ladders, Supplemented by ANSI A14.2a-77, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(v) and (c)(3)(i). (9) ANSI A14.3-56 Safety Code for Fixed Ladders, IBR approved for §§ 1910.68(b)(4); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(vi) and (c)(3)(i). (10) ANSI A17.1-65 Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Moving Walks, Including Supplements, A17.1a (1967); A17.1b (1968); A17.1c (1969); A17.1d (1970), IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(vii), (g)(11)(i), and (l)(4). (11) ANSI A17.2-60 Practice for the Inspection of Elevators, Including Supplements, A17.2a (1965), A17.2b (1967), IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(viii). (12) ANSI A90.1-69 Safety Standard for Manlifts, IBR approved for § 1910.68(b)(3). (13) ANSI A92.2-69 Standard for Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms, IBR approved for § 1910.67 (b)(1), (2), (c)(3), and (4) and 1910.268(s)(1)(v). (14) ANSI A120.1-70 Safety Code for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance, IBR approved for § 1910.66 app. D (b) through (d). (15) ANSI B7.1-70 Safety Code for the Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, IBR approved for §§ 1910.215(b)(12) and 1910.218(j). (16) ANSI B15.1-53 (R 58) Safety Code for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus, IBR approved for §§ 1910.68(b)(4) and 1910.261 (a)(3)(ix), (b)(1), (e)(3), (e)(9), (f)(4), (j)(5)(iv), (k)(12), and (l)(3). (17) ANSI B20.1-57 Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related Equipment, IBR approved for §§ 1910.218(j)(3); 1910.261 (a)(3)(x), (b)(1), (c)(15)(iv), (f)(4), and (j)(2); 1910.265(c)(18)(i). (18) ANSI B30.2-43 (R 52) Safety Code for Cranes, Derricks, and Hoists, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xi), (c)(2)(vi), and (c)(8) (i) and (iv). (19) ANSI B30.2.0-67 Safety Code for Overhead and Gantry Cranes, IBR approved for §§ 1910.179(b)(2); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xii), (c)(2)(v), and (c)(8) (i) and (iv). (20) ANSI B30.5-68 Safety Code for Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes, IBR approved for §§ 1910.180(b)(2) and 1910.261(a)(3)(xiii). (21) ANSI B30.6-69 Safety Code for Derricks, IBR approved for §§ 1910.181(b)(2) and 1910.268(j)(4)(iv) (E) and (H). (22) ANSI B31.1-55 Code for Pressure Piping, IBR approved for § 1910.261(g)(18)(iii). (23) ANSI B31.1-67, IBR approved for § 1910.253(d)(1)(i)(A) (24) ANSI B31.1a-63 Addenda to ANSI B31.1 (1955), IBR approved for § 1910.261(g)(18)(iii). (25) ANSI B31.1-67 and Addenda B31.1 (1969) Code for Pressure Piping, IBR approved for §§ 1910.103(b)(1)(iii)(b); 1910.104(b)(5)(ii); 1910.218 (d)(4) and (e)(1)(iv); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xiv) and (g)(18)(iii). (26) ANSI B31.2-68 Fuel Gas Piping, IBR approved for § 1910.261(g)(18)(iii). (27) ANSI B31.3-66 Petroleum Refinery Piping, IBR approved for § 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b). (28) ANSI B31.5-66 Addenda B31.5a (1968) Refrigeration Piping, IB approved for §§ 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b) and 1910.111(b)(7)(iii). (29) ANSI B56.1-69 Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR approved for §§ 1910.178(a) (2) and (3) and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xv), (b)(6), (m)(2), and (m)(5)(iii). (30) ANSI B57.1-65 Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, IBR approved for § 1910.253(b)(1)(iii). (31) [Reserved] (32) ANSI B175.1-1991, Safety Requirements for Gasoline-Powered Chain Saws 1910.266(e)(2)(i). (33) [Reserved] (34) ANSI C33.2-56 Safety Standard for Transformer-Type Arc Welding Machines, IBR approved for § 1910.254(b)(1). (35) [Reserved] (36) ANSI H23.1-70 Seamless Copper Water Tube Specification, IBR approved for § 1910.110(b) (8)(ii) and (13)(ii)(b)(1). (37) ANSI H38.7-69 Specification for Aluminum Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.110(b)(8)(i). (38) ANSI J6.4-71 Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets, IBR approved for § 1910.268 (f)(1) and (n)(11)(v). (39) ANSI J6.6-71 Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves, IBR approved for § 1910.268 (f)(1) and (n)(11)(iv). (40) ANSI K13.1-67 Identification of Gas Mask Canisters, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvi) and (h)(2)(iii). (41) ANSI K61.1-60 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for § 1910.111(b)(11)(i). (42) ANSI K61.1-66 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for § 1910.111(b)(11)(i). (43) ANSI O1.1-54 (R 61) Safety Code for Woodworking Machinery, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvii), (e)(7), and (i)(2). (44) ANSI S1.4-71 (R 76) Specification for Sound Level Meters, IBR approved for § 1910.95 appendixes D and I. (45) ANSI S1.11-71 (R 76) Specification for Octave, Half-Octave and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, IBR approved for § 1910.95 appendix D. (46) ANSI S3.6-69 Specifications for Audiometers, IBR approved for § 1910.95(h)(2) and (5)(ii) and appendix D. (47) ANSI Z4.1-68 Requirements for Sanitation in Places of Employment, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xviii) and (g)(15)(vi). (48) [Reserved] (49) ANSI Z9.1-51 Safety Code for Ventilation and Operation of Open Surface Tanks, IBR approved for 1910.261(a)(3)(xix), (g)(18)(v), and (h)(2)(i). (50) ANSI Z9.1-71 Practices for Ventilation and Operation of Open-Surface Tanks, IBR approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(iv). (51) ANSI Z9.2-60 Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for §§ 1910.94(a)(4)(i) introductory text, (a)(6) introductory text, (b)(3)(ix), (b)(4)(i) and (ii), (c)(3)(i) introductory text, (c)(5)(iii)(b), and (c)(7)(iv)(a); 1910.261(a)(3)(xx), (g)(1)(i) and (iii), and (h)(2)(ii). (52) ANSI Z9.2-79 Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(i). (53) ANSI Z12.12-68 Standard for the Prevention of Sulfur Fires and Explosions, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxi), (d)(1)(i), (f)(2)(iv), and (g)(1)(i). (54) ANSI Z12.20-62 (R 69) Code for the Prevention of Dust Explosions in Woodworking and Wood Flour Manufacturing Plants, IBR approved for § 1910.265(c)(20)(i). (55) ANSI Z21.30-64 Requirements for Gas Appliances and Gas Piping Installations, IBR approved for § 1910.265(c)(15). (56) ANSI Z24.22-57 Method of Measurement of Real-Ear Attenuation of Ear Protectors at Threshold, IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(xxii). (57) ANSI Z33.1-61 Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, IBR approved for §§ 1910.94(a)(4)(i); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxiii) and (f)(5); and 1910.265(c)(20)(i). (58) ANSI Z33.1-66 Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, IBR approved for § 1910.94(a)(2)(ii). (59) ANSI Z35.1-1968, Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs; IBR approved for § 1910.261(c). Copies available for purchase from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1-877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com. (60) ANSI Z41-1999, American National Standard for Personal Protection—Protective Footwear; IBR approved for § 1910.136(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z41-1999 are available for purchase only from the National Safety Council, P.O. Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143-0558; telephone: 1-800-621-7619; fax: 708-285-0797; Web site: http://www.nsc.org. (61) ANSI Z41-1991, American National Standard for Personal Protection—Protective Footwear; IBR approved for § 1910.136(b)(1)(iii). Copies of ANSI Z41-1991 are available for purchase only from the National Safety Council, P.O. Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143-0558; telephone: 1-800-621-7619; fax: 708-285-0797; Web site: http://www.nsc.org. (62)-(63) [Reserved] (64) ANSI Z49.1-67 Safety in Welding and Cutting, IBR approved for § 1910.252(c)(1)(iv) (A) and (B). (65) USAS Z53.1-1967 (also referred to as ANSI Z53.1-1967), Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI approved October 9, 1967; IBR approved for § 1910.97(a) and 1910.145(d). Copies available for purchase from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1-877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com. (66) ANSI Z535.1-2006 (R2011), Safety Colors, reaffirmed July 19, 2011; IBR approved for §§ 1910.97(a) and 1910.145(d). Copies available for purchase from the: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: 212-642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: 877-699-9277; Web site: www.techstreet.com. (67) ANSI Z535.2-2011, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs, published September 15, 2011; IBR approved for § 1910.261(c). Copies available for purchase from the: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: 212-642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: 877-699-9277; Web site: www.techstreet.com. (68) ANSI Z54.1-63 Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-Ray and Sealed Gamma Ray Sources, IBR approved for § 1910.252(d) (1)(vii) and (2)(ii). (69) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1-2010, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, Approved April 13, 2010; IBR approved for § 1910.133(b). Copies are available for purchase from: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: (212) 642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site: http://global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (877) 699-9277; Web site: http://techstreet.com. (70) ANSI Z87.1-2003, Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Personal Protection Devices Approved June 19, 2003; IBR approved for §§ 1910.133(b). Copies available for purchase from the: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: (212) 642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site: http://global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (877) 699-9277; Web site: http://techstreet.com. (71) ANSI Z87.1-1989 (R-1998), Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection, Reaffirmation approved January 4, 1999; IBR approved for § 1910.133(b). Copies are available for purchase from: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: (212) 642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site: http://global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (877) 699-9277; Web site: http://techstreet.com. (72) ANSI Z88.2-1969, Practices for Respiratory Protection; IBR approved for §§ 1910.94(c)(6)(iii)( a (73) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2009, American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection, approved January 26, 2009; IBR approved for § 1910.135(b)(1)(i). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-2009 are available for purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. (74) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2003, American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection; IBR approved for § 1910.135(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-2003 are available for purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. (75) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-1997, American National Standard for Personnel Protection—Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers—Requirements; IBR approved for § 1910.135(b)(1)(iii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-1997 are available for purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. (76) ANSI Z41.1-1967 Men's Safety Toe Footwear; IBR approved for § 1910.261(i)(4). (77) ANSI Z87.1-1968 Practice of Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection; IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(xxv), (d)(1)(ii), (f)(5), (g)(1), (g)(15)(v), (g)(18)(ii), and (i)(4). (78) ANSI Z89.1-1969 Safety Requirements for Industrial Head Protection; IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(xxvii), (b)(2), (g)(15)(v), and (i)(4). (79) ANSI Z89.2-1971 Safety Requirements for Industrial Protective Helmets for Electrical Workers, Class B; IBR approved for § 1910.268(i)(1). (f) The following material is available for purchase from the American Petroleum Institute (API), 1220 L Street NW, Washington DC 20005: (1) [Reserved] (2) API 12B (May 1958) Specification for Bolted Production Tanks, 11th Ed., With Supplement No. 1, Mar. 1962, IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(i)( a 3 (3) API 12D (Aug. 1957) Specification for Large Welded Production Tanks, 7th Ed., IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(i)( a 3 (4) API 12F (Mar. 1961) Specification for Small Welded Production Tanks, 5th Ed., IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(i)( a 3 (5) API 620, Fourth Ed. (1970) Including appendix R, Recommended Rules for Design and Construction of Large Welded Low Pressure Storage Tanks, IBR approved for §§ 1910.103(c)(1)(i)( a d 1 (6) API 650 (1966) Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage, 3rd Ed., IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a 2 (7) API 1104 (1968) Standard for Welding Pipelines and Related Facilities, IBR approved for § 1910.252(d)(1)(v). (8) API 2000 (1968) Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Storage Tanks, IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(2)(iv)( b 1 (9) API 2201 (1963) Welding or Hot Tapping on Equipment Containing Flammables, IBR approved for § 1910.252(d)(1)(vi). (g) The following material is available for purchase from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), United Engineering Center, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017: (1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, and 1962 Ed., IBR approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(10)(iii) (Table H-26), (d)(2) (Table H-31); (e)(3)(i) (Table H-32), (h)(2) (Table H-34); and 1910.111(b)(2)(vi); (2) ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, 1968 Ed., IBR approved for §§ 1910.106(i)(3)(i); 1910.110(g)(2)(iii)( b 2 (3) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, 1968, IBR approved for §§ 1910.103; 1910.104(b)(4)(ii); 1910.106 (b)(1)(iv)( b 2 i b a 1 (4) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, Paragraph UG-84, 1968, IBR approved for § 1910.104 (b)(4)(ii) and (b)(5)(iii); (5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, Including Addenda (1969), IBR approved for §§ 1910.261; 1910.262; 1910.263(i)(24)(ii); (6) Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels for Petroleum Liquids and Gases of the API and the ASME, 1951 Ed., IBR approved for § 1910.110(b)(3)(iii); and (7) ASME B56.6-1992 (with addenda), Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks, IBR approved for § 1910.266(f)(4). (h) ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959; phone: (610) 832-9585; email: [email protected]; www.astm.org. (1) ASTM A 47-68, Malleable Iron Castings, IBR approved for § 1910.111. (2) ASTM A 53-69, Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe, IBR approved for §§ 1910.110 and 1910.111. (3) ASTM A 126-66, Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fitting, IBR approved for § 1910.111. (4) ASTM A 391-65 (ANSI G61.1-1968), Alloy Steel Chain, IBR approved for § 1910.184. (5) ASTM A 395-68, Ductile Iron for Use at Elevated Temperatures, IBR approved for § 1910.111. (6) ASTM B 88-66A, Seamless Copper Water Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.252. (7) ASTM B 88-69, Seamless Copper Water Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.110. (8) [Reserved] (9) ASTM B 210-68, Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes, IBR approved for § 1910.110. (10) ASTM B 241-69, Standard Specifications for Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.110. (11) ASTM D 5-65, Test for Penetration by Bituminous Materials, IBR approved for § 1910.106. (12) ASTM D 56-70, Test for Flash Point by Tag Closed Tester, IBR approved for § 1910.106. (13) ASTM D 56-05, Standard Test Method for Flash Point by Tag Closed Cup Tester, Approved May 1, 2005, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. (14) ASTM D 86-62, Test for Distillation of Petroleum Products, IBR approved for §§ 1910.106 and 1910.119. (15) ASTM D 86-07a, Standard Test Method for Distillation of Petroleum Products at Atmospheric Pressure, Approved April 1, 2007, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. (16) ASTM D 88-56, Test for Saybolt Viscosity, IBR approved for § 1910.106. (17) ASTM D 93-71, Test for Flash Point by Pensky Martens, IBR approved for § 1910.106. (18) ASTM D 93-08, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester, Approved Oct. 15, 2008, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. (19) ASTM D 240-02 (Reapproved 2007), Standard Test Method for Heat of Combustion of Liquid Hydrocarbon Fuels by Bomb Calorimeter, Approved May 1, 2007, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. (20) ASTM D 323-68, Standard Test Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid Method), IBR approved for § 1910.106. (21) ASTM D 445-65, Test for Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids, IBR approved for § 1910.106. (22) ASTM D 1078-05, Standard Test Method for Distillation Range of Volatile Organic Liquids, Approved May 15, 2005, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. (23) ASTM D 1692-68, Test for Flammability of Plastic Sheeting and Cellular Plastics, IBR approved for § 1910.103. (24) ASTM D 2161-66, Conversion Tables for SUS, IBR approved for § 1910.106. (25) ASTM D 3278-96 (Reapproved 2004) E1, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup Apparatus, Approved November 1, 2004, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. (26) ASTM D 3828-07a, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Small Scale Closed Cup Tester, Approved July 15, 2007, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. (27) ASTM D4359-90 (Reapproved 2019), Standard Test Method for Determining Whether a Material is a Liquid or a Solid, approved July 1, 2019, IBR approved for § 1910.1200. (28) ASTM F-2412-2005, Standard Test Methods for Foot Protection, IBR approved for § 1910.136. (29) ASTM F-2413-2005, Standard Specification for Performance Requirements for Protective Footwear, IBR approved for § 1910.136. (i) The following material is available at the American Thoracic Society (ATS), 25 Broadway, 18th Floor New York, NY 10004; website: www.atsjournals.org/. (1) Spirometric Reference Values from a Sample of the General U.S. Population. Hankinson JL, Odencrantz JR, Fedan KB. American Journal of Respiratory and Critical Care Medicine, 159:179-187, 1999, IBR approved for § 1910.1043(h). (2) [Reserved] (j) The following material is available for purchase from the American Welding Society (AWS), 550 NW, LeJeune Road, P.O. Box 351040, Miami FL 33135: (1)-(2) [Reserved] (3) AWS B3.0-41 Standard Qualification Procedure, IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(i). (4) AWS D1.0-1966 Code for Welding in Building Construction, IBR approved for § 1910.27(b)(6). (5) AWS D2.0-69 Specifications for Welding Highway and Railway Bridges, IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(iv). (6) AWS D8.4-61 Recommended Practices for Automotive Welding Design, IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(ii). (7) AWS D10.9-69 Standard Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(iii). (k) The following material is available for purchase from the Department of Commerce: (1) [Reserved] (2) Publication “Model Performance Criteria for Structural Fire Fighters' Helmets,” IBR approved for § 1910.156(e)(5)(i). (l) The following material is available for purchase from the Compressed Gas Association (CGA), 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202: (1) CGA C-6 (1968) Standards for Visual Inspection of Compressed Gas Cylinders, IBR approved for § 1910.101(a). (2) CGA C-8 (1962) Standard for Requalification of ICC-3HT Cylinders, IBR approved for § 1910.101(a). (3) CGA G-1-2009 Acetylene, Twelfth Edition, IBR approved for § 1910.102(a). Copies of CGA Pamphlet G-1-2009 are available for purchase from the: Compressed Gas Association, Inc., 4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor, Chantilly, VA 20151; telephone: (703) 788-2700; fax: (703) 961-1831; email: [email protected]. (4) CGA G-7.1 (1966) Commodity Specification, IBR approved for § 1910.134(d)(1). (5) CGA G-8.1 (1964) Standard for the Installation of Nitrous Oxide Systems at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for § 1910.105. (6) CGA P-1 (1965) Safe Handling of Compressed Gases, IBR approved for § 1910.101(b). (7) CGA P-3 (1963) Specifications, Properties, and Recommendations for Packaging, Transportation, Storage and Use of Ammonium Nitrate, IBR approved for § 1910.109(i)(1)(ii)( b (8) CGA S-1.1 (1963) and 1965 Addenda. Safety Release Device Standards—Cylinders for Compressed Gases, IBR approved for §§ 1910.101(c); 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)( a 2 (9) CGA S-1.2 (1963) Safety Release Device Standards, Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases, IBR approved for §§ 1910.101(c); 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)( a 2 (10) CGA S-1.3 (1959) Safety Release Device Standards-Compressed Gas Storage Containers, IBR approved for §§ 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)( a 2 b (11) CGA 1957 Standard Hose Connection Standard, IBR approved for § 1910.253(e) (4)(v) and (5)(iii). (12) CGA and RMA (Rubber Manufacturer's Association) Specification for Rubber Welding Hose (1958), IBR approved for § 1910.253(e)(5)(i). (13) CGA 1958 Regulator Connection Standard, IBR approved for § 1910.253(e) (4)(iv) and (6). (m) The following material is available for purchase from the Crane Manufacturer's Association of America, Inc. (CMAA), 1 Thomas Circle NW, Washington DC 20005: (1) CMAA Specification 1B61, Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes, IBR approved for § 1910.179(b)(6)(i). (2) [Reserved] (n) German Institute for Standardization (DIN) (Beuth Verlag GmbH) Am DIN-Platz Burggrafenstraße 6 10787 Berlin, Germany; phone: +49 30 58885 70070; website: https://din.de/en/about-standards/buy-standard (1) DIN 51794:2003-05—Determining the ignition temperature of petroleum products, May 2003, IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200. (2) [Reserved] (o) The following material is available for purchase from the Fertilizer Institute, 1015 18th Street NW, Washington, DC 20036: (1) Standard M-1 (1953, 1955, 1957, 1960, 1961, 1963, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1968), Superseded by ANSI K61.1-1972, IBR approved for § 1910.111(b)(1) (i) and (iii). (2) [Reserved] (p) The following material is available for purchase from the General Services Administration: (1) GSA Pub. GG-B-0067b, Air Compressed for Breathing Purposes, or Interim Federal Specifications, Apr. 1965, IBR approved for § 1910.134(d)(4). (2) [Reserved] (q) International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), IEC Secretariat, 3 rue de Varembé, PO Box 131, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland; phone: +41 22 919 02 11; email: [email protected] https://www.iec.ch (1) IEC 60079-20-1, Explosive atmospheres—Part 20-1: Material characteristics for gas and vapor classification—Test methods and data, Edition 1.0, 2010-01; IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200. (2) [Reserved] (r) The following material is available for purchase from the: International Code Council, Chicago District Office, 4051 W. Flossmoor Rd., Country Club Hills, IL 60478; telephone: facsimile: e-mail: [email protected]. (1) IFC-2009, International Fire Code, copyright 2009, IBR approved for §§ 1910.34, 1910.35, 1910.36, and 1910.37. (2) [Reserved] (s) The following material is available for purchase from the Department of Health and Human Services: (1) Publication No. 76-120 (1975), List of Personal Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data, IBR approved for § 1910.95 App. B. (2) [Reserved] (t) The following material is available for purchase from the Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME), 420 Lexington Avenue, New York, NY 10017: (1) IME Pamphlet No. 17, 1960, Safety in the Handling and Use of Explosives, IBR approved for §§ 1910.261 (a)(4)(iii) and (c)(14)(ii). (2) [Reserved] (u) The following material is available from the International Labour Organization (ILO), 4 route des Morillons, CH-1211 Genève 22, Switzerland; telephone: +41 (0) 22 799 6111; fax: +41 (0) 22 798 8685; website: www.ilo.org/. (1) Guidelines for the Use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses, Revised Edition 2011, Occupational safety and health series; 22 (Rev.2011), IBR approved for § 1910.1001. (2) [Reserved] (v) International Organization for Standardization (ISO), ISO Central Secretariat, Chemin de Blandonnet 8 CP 401—1214 Vernier, Geneva, Switzerland; phone: +41 22 749 01 11; email: [email protected] www.iso.org/store.html (1) ISO 817:2014(E), Refrigerants—Designation and safety classification, Third edition, 2014-04-15; IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200. (2) ISO 10156:1996 (E), Gases and Gas Mixtures—Determination of Fire Potential and Oxidizing Ability for the Selection of Cylinder Valve Outlets, Second Edition, Feb. 15, 1996; IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200. (3) ISO 10156:2017(E), Gas Cylinders—Gases and gas mixtures—Determination of fire potential and oxidizing ability for the selection of cylinder valve outlets, Fourth edition, 2017-07; IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200. (4) ISO 10156-2:2005 (E), Gas cylinders—Gases and Gas Mixtures—Part 2: Determination of Oxidizing Ability of Toxic and Corrosive Gases and Gas Mixtures, First Edition, Aug. 1, 2005; IBR approved for appendix B to subpart Z. (5) ISO 13943:2000 (E/F); Fire Safety—Vocabulary, First Edition, April, 15, 2000, IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200. (w) The following material is available for purchase from the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): (1) NEMA EW-1 (1962) Requirements for Electric Arc Welding Apparatus, IBR approved for §§ 1910.254(b)(1). (2) [Reserved] (x) The following material is available for purchase from the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269; Telephone: 800-344-3555 or 617-770-3000; Fax: 1-800-593-6372 or 1-508-895-8301; Email: [email protected]; http://www.nfpa.org. (1) NFPA 30 (1969) Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, IBR approved for § 1910.178(f)(1). (2) NFPA 32-1970 Standard for Dry Cleaning Plants, IBR approved for § 1910.106(j)(6)(i). (3) NFPA 33-1969 Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Material, IBR approved for § 1910.94(c)(2). (4) NFPA 34-1966 Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(iv). (5) NFPA 34-1995 Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(ii). (6) NFPA 35-1970 Standard for the Manufacture of Organic Coatings, IBR approved for § 1910.106(j)(6)(ii). (7) NFPA 36-1967 Standard for Solvent Extraction Plants, IBR approved for § 1910.106(j)(6)(iii). (8) NFPA 37-1970 Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines, IBR approved for §§ 1910.106(j)(6)(iv) and 1910.110 (b)(20)(iv)(c) and (e)(11). (9) NFPA 51B-1962 Standard for Fire Protection in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes, IBR approved for § 1910.252(a)(1) introductory text. (10) NFPA 54-1969 Standard for the Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas Piping, IBR approved for § 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(a). (11) NFPA 54A-1969 Standard for the Installation of Gas Piping and Gas Equipment on Industrial Premises and Certain Other Premises, IBR approved for § 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(b). (12) NFPA 58-1969 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (ANSI Z106.1-1970), IBR approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) and (i)(3) (i) and (ii); and 1910.178(f)(2). (13) NFPA 59-1968 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants, IBR approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) and (i)(2)(iv). (14) NFPA 62-1967 Standard for the Prevention of Dust Explosions in the Production, Packaging, and Handling of Pulverized Sugar and Cocoa, IBR approved for § 1910.263(k)(2)(i). (15) NFPA 68-1954 Guide for Explosion Venting, IBR approved for § 1910.94(a)(2)(iii). (16) [Reserved] (17) NFPA 78-1968 Lightning Protection Code, IBR approved for § 1910.109(i)(6)(ii). (18) NFPA 80-1968 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, IBR approved for § 1910.106(d)(4)(i). (19) NFPA 80-1970 Standard for the Installation of Fire Doors and Windows, IBR approved for § 1910.253(f)(6)(i)(I). (20) NFPA 86A-1969 Standard for Oven and Furnaces Design, Location and Equipment, IBR approved for §§ 1910.107 (j)(1) and (l)(3) and 1910.108 (b)(2) and (d)(2). (21) NFPA 91-1961 Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying (ANSI Z33.1-61), IBR approved for § 1910.107(d)(1). (22) NFPA 91-1969 Standards for Blower and Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for § 1910.108(b)(1). (23) NFPA 96-1970 Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment, IBR approved for § 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(d). (24) NFPA 101-1970 Code for Life Safety From Fire in Buildings and Structures, IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(4)(ii). (25) NFPA 101-2009, Life Safety Code, 2009 edition, IBR approved for §§ 1910.34, 1910.35, 1910.36, and 1910.37. (26) NFPA 203M-1970 Manual on Roof Coverings, IBR approved for § 1910.109(i)(1)(iii)(c). (27) NFPA 251-1969 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, IBR approved for §§ 1910.106 (d)(3)(ii) introductory text and (d)(4)(i). (28) NFPA 302-1968 Fire Protection Standard for Motor-Craft (Pleasure and Commercial), IBR approved for § 1910.265(d)(2)(iv) introductory text. (29) NFPA 385-1966 Recommended Regulatory Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for § 1910.106(g)(1)(i)(e)(1). (30) NFPA 496-1967 Standard for Purged Enclosures for Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Locations, IBR approved for § 1910.103(c)(1)(ix)(e)(1). (31) NFPA 505-1969 Standard for Type Designations, Areas of Use, Maintenance, and Operation of Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR approved for § 1910.110(e)(2)(iv). (32) NFPA 566-1965 Standard for the Installation of Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for §§ 1910.253 (b)(4)(iv) and (c)(2)(v). (33) NFPA 656-1959 Code for the Prevention of Dust Ignition in Spice Grinding Plants, IBR approved for § 1910.263(k)(2)(i). (34) NFPA 1971-1975 Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting, IBR approved for § 1910.156(e)(3)(ii) introductory text. (35) NFPA 51A (2001) Standard for Acetylene Cylinder Charging Plants, IBR approved for § 1910.102(b) and (c). Copies of NFPA 51A-2001 are available for purchase from the: National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471; telephone: 1-800-344-35557; e-mail: [email protected]. (36) NFPA 51A (2006) Standard for Acetylene Cylinder Charging Plants, IBR approved for § 1910.102(b) and (c). Copies of NFPA 51A-2006 are available for purchase from the: National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471; telephone: 1-800-344-35557; e-mail: [email protected]. (37) NFPA 30B, Code for the Manufacture and Storage of Aerosol Products, 2007 Edition, Approved August 17, 2006, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. (y) The following material is available for purchase from the National Food Plant Institute, 1700 K St. NW., Washington, DC 20006: (1) Definition and Test Procedures for Ammonium Nitrate Fertilizer (Nov. 1964), IBR approved for § 1910.109 Table H-22, ftn. 3. (2) [Reserved] (z) The following material is available for purchase from the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH): (1) Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances, 1978, IBR approved for § 1910.20(c)(13)(i) and appendix B. (2) Development of Criteria for Fire Fighters Gloves; Vol. II, part II; Test Methods, 1976, IBR approved for § 1910.156(e)(4)(i) introductory text. (3) NIOSH Recommendations for Occupational Safety and Health Standards (Sept. 1987), IBR approved for § 1910.120 PEL definition. (aa) The following material is available for purchase from the Public Health Service: (1) U.S. Pharmacopeia, IBR approved for § 1910.134(d)(1). (2) Publication No. 934 (1962), Food Service Sanitation Ordinance and Code, part V of the Food Service Sanitation Manual, IBR approved for § 1910.142(i)(1). (bb) The following material is available for purchase from the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 485 Lexington Avenue, New York, NY 10017: (1) SAE J185, June 1988, Recommended Practice for Access Systems for Off-Road Machines, IBR approved for § 1910.266(f)(5)(i). (2) SAE J231, January 1981, Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS), IBR approved for § 1910.266(f)(3)(ii). (3) SAE J386, June 1985, Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines, IBR approved for § 1910.266(d)(3)(iv). (4) SAE J397, April 1988, Deflection Limiting Volume-ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation, IBR approved for § 1910.266(f)(3)(iv). (5) SAE 765 (1961) SAE Recommended Practice: Crane Loading Stability Test Code, IBR approved for § 1910.180 (c)(1)(iii) and (e)(2)(iii)( a (6) SAE J1040, April 1988, Performance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry and Mining Machines, IBR approved for § 1910.266(f)(3)(ii). (cc) The following material is available for purchase from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 207 East Ohio Street, Chicago, IL 60611: (1) UL 58-61 Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, 5th Ed., IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a 1 (2) UL 80-63 Steel Inside Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel, IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a 1 (3) UL 142-68 Steel Above Ground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a 1 (dd) United Nations (UN), United Nations Publications, P.O. Box 960 Herndon, VA 20172; phone: (703) 661-1571;; email: [email protected] https://shop.un.org/ (1) ADR 2019, European Agreement Concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road; Annex A: General provisions and provisions concerning dangerous substances and articles; (Volumes I and II) including December 2018 corrigendum to Volume II, applicable January 1, 2019; IBR approved for § 1910.1200. (2) ST/SG/AC.10/Rev.4 (“UN ST/SG/AC.10/Rev.4”), The UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Manual of Tests and Criteria, Fourth Revised Edition, 2003; IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200. (3) ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (“UN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6”), Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods: Manual of Tests and Criteria, sixth revised edition, copyright 2015; IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974] Editorial Note: For Federal Register www.govinfo.gov. § 1910.7 Definition and requirements for a nationally recognized testing laboratory. (a) Application. nationally recognized testing laboratory (b) Laboratory requirements. nationally recognized testing laboratory (1) For each specified item of equipment or material to be listed, labeled or accepted, the NRTL has the capability (including proper testing equipment and facilities, trained staff, written testing procedures, and calibration and quality control programs) to perform: (i) Testing and examining of equipment and materials for workplace safety purposes to determine conformance with appropriate test standards; or (ii) Experimental testing and examining of equipment and materials for workplace safety purposes to determine conformance with appropriate test standards or performance in a specified manner. (2) The NRTL shall provide, to the extent needed for the particular equipment or materials listed, labeled, or accepted, the following controls or services: (i) Implements control procedures for identifying the listed and labeled equipment or materials; (ii) Inspects the run of production of such items at factories for product evaluation purposes to assure conformance with the test standards; and (iii) Conducts field inspections to monitor and to assure the proper use of its identifying mark or labels on products; (3) The NRTL is completely independent of employers subject to the tested equipment requirements, and of any manufacturers or vendors of equipment or materials being tested for these purposes; and, (4) The NRTL maintains effective procedures for: (i) Producing creditable findings or reports that are objective and without bias; and (ii) Handling complaints and disputes under a fair and reasonable system. (c) Test standards. appropriate test standard (1) Recognized in the United States as a safety standard providing an adequate level of safety, and (2) Compatible with and maintained current with periodic revisions of applicable national codes and installation standards, and (3) Developed by a standards developing organization under a method providing for input and consideration of views of industry groups, experts, users, consumers, governmental authorities, and others having broad experience in the safety field involved, or (4) In lieu of paragraphs (c) (1), (2), and (3), the standard is currently designated as an American National Standards Institute (ANSI) safety-designated product standard or an American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) test standard used for evaluation of products or materials. (d) Alternative test standard. (e) Implementation. (f) Fees. (i) Processing of applications for initial recognition, expansion of recognition, or renewal of recognition, including on-site reviews; review and evaluation of the applications; and preparation of reports, evaluations and Federal Register (ii) Audits of sites. (2) The fee schedule established by OSHA reflects the full cost of performing the activities for each service listed in paragraph (f)(1) of this section. OSHA calculates the fees based on either the average or actual time required to perform the work necessary; the staff costs per hour (which include wages, fringe benefits, and expenses other than travel for personnel that perform or administer the activities covered by the fees); and the average or actual costs for travel when on-site reviews are involved. The formula for the fee calculation is as follows: Activity Fee = [Average (or Actual) Hours to Complete the Activity × Staff Costs per Hour] + Average (or Actual) Travel Costs (3)(i) OSHA will review the full costs periodically and will propose a revised fee schedule, if warranted. In its review, OSHA will apply the formula established in paragraph (f)(2) of this section to the current estimated full costs for the NRTL Program. If a change is warranted, OSHA will follow the implementation shown in paragraph (f)(4) of this section. (ii) OSHA will publish all fee schedules in the Federal Register. (4) OSHA will implement periodic review, and fee assessment, collection, and payment, as follows: Milestones/Dates Action required I. Periodic Review of Fee Schedule When review completed OSHA will publish any proposed new fee schedule in the Federal Register Fifteen days after publication Comments due on the proposed new fee schedule. When OSHA approves the fee schedule OSHA will publish the final fee schedule in the Federal Register, II. Application Processing Fees Time of application Applicant must pay the applicable fees in the fee schedule that are due when submitting an application; OSHA will not begin processing the application until it receives the fees. Before assessment performed Applicant must pay the estimated staff time and travel costs for its assessment based on the fees in effect at the time of the assessment. Applicant also must pay the fees for the final report and Federal Register III. Audit Fees Before audit performed NRTL must pay the estimated staff time and travel costs for its audit based on the fees in effect at the time of the audit. NRTL also must pay other applicable fees, as specified in the fee schedule. After the audit, OSHA adjusts the audit fees to account for the actual costs for travel and staff time. On due date NRTL must pay the estimated audit fees, or any balance due, by the due date established by OSHA; OSHA will assess a late fee if NRTL does not pay audit fees (or any balance of fees due) by the due date. OSHA may still perform the audit when an NRTL does not pay the fees or does not pay them on time. Thirty days after due date or, if earlier, date NRTL refuses to pay OSHA will begin processing a notice for publication in the Federal Register Note: For the purposes of 29 CFR 1910.7(f)(4), “days” means “calendar days,” and “applicant” means “the NRTL” or “an applicant for NRTL recognition.” (5) OSHA will provide details about how to pay the fees through appropriate OSHA Program Directives, which will be available on the OSHA web site. Appendix A to § 1910.7—OSHA Recognition Process for Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories Introduction This appendix provides requirements and criteria which OSHA will use to evaluate and recognize a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). This process will include the evaluation of the product evaluation and control programs being operated by the NRTL, as well as the NRTL's testing facilities being used in its program. In the evaluation of the NRTLs, OSHA will use either consensus-based standards currently in use nationally, or other standards or criteria which may be considered appropriate. This appendix implements the definition of NRTL in 29 CFR 1910.7 which sets out the criteria that a laboratory must meet to be recognized by OSHA (initially and on a continuing basis). The appendix is broader in scope, providing procedures for renewal, expansion and revocation of OSHA recognition. Except as otherwise provided, the burden is on the applicant to establish by a preponderance of the evidence that it is entitled to recognition as an NRTL. If further detailing of these requirements and criteria will assist the NRTLs or OSHA in this activity, this detailing will be done through appropriate OSHA Program Directives. I. Procedures for Initial OSHA Recognition A. Applications. 1. Eligibility. b. However, in determining eligibility for a foreign-based testing agency or organization, OSHA shall take into consideration the policy of the foreign government regarding both the acceptance in that country of testing data, equipment acceptances, and listings, and labeling, which are provided through nationally recognized testing laboratories recognized by the Assistant Secretary, and the accessibility to government recognition or a similar system in that country by U.S.-based safety-related testing agencies, whether recognized by the Assistant Secretary or not, if such recognition or a similar system is required by that country. 2. Content of application. b. The applicant also shall identify the scope of the NRTL-related activity for which the applicant wishes to be recognized. This will include identifying the testing methods it will use to test or judge the specific equipment and materials for which recognition is being requested, unless such test methods are already specified in the test standard. If requested to do so by OSHA, the applicant shall provide documentation of the efficacy of these testing methods. c. The applicant may include whatever enclosures, attachments, or exhibits the applicant deems appropriate. The application need not be submitted on a Federal form. 3. Filing office location. 4. Amendments and withdrawals. b. An application may be withdrawn by an applicant, without prejudice, at any time prior to the final decision by the Assistant Secretary in paragraph I.B.7.c. of this appendix. B. Review and Decision Process; Issuance or Renewal. 1. Acceptance and on-site review. b. OSHA shall, as necessary, conduct an on-site review of the testing facilities of the applicant, as well as the applicant's administrative and technical practices, and, if necessary, review any additional documentation underlying the application. c. These on-site reviews will be conducted by qualified individuals technically expert in these matters, including, as appropriate, non-Federal consultants/contractors acceptable to OSHA. The protocol for each review will be based on appropriate national consensus standards or international guides, with such additions, changes, or deletions as may be considered necessary and appropriate in each case by OSHA. A written report shall be made of each on-site review and a copy shall be provided to the applicant. 2. Positive finding by staff. 3. Negative finding by staff. Notification to applicant. b. Revision of application. ( a ( b (ii) This procedure for applicant notification and potential revision shall be used only once during each recognition process. 4. Preliminary finding by Assistant Secretary. b. Notification of this preliminary finding will be sent to the applicant and subsequently published in the Federal Register. c. This preliminary finding shall not be considered an official decision by the Assistant Secretary or OSHA, and does not confer any change in status or any interim or temporary recognition for the applicant. 5. Public review and comment period Federal Register b. Any member of the public, including the applicant, may supply detailed reasons and evidence supporting or challenging the sufficiency of the applicant's having met the requirements of the definition in 29 CFR § 1910.7 and this appendix. Submission of pertinent documents and exhibits shall be made in writing by the close of the comment period. 6. Action after public comment Final decision by Assistant Secretary. b. Public announcement. Federal Register. c. Review of final decision. 7. Action after public objection Review of negative information. b. Supplementation of record. (i) Reopening the written comment period for public comments on these reviews; or (ii) Convening an informal hearing to accept public comments on these reviews, conducted under applicable OSHA procedures for similar hearings. c. Final decision by the Assistant Secretary. d. Public announcement. Federal Register e. Review of final decision. C. Terms and Conditions of Recognition. 1. The following terms and conditions shall be part of every recognition: a. Letter of recognition. b. Period of recognition. c. Constancy in operations. d. Accurate publicity. 2. [Reserved] II. Supplementary Procedures. A. Test standard changes. A recognized NRTL may change a testing standard or elements incorporated in the standard such as testing methods or pass-fail criteria by notifying the Assistant Secretary of the change, certifying that the revised standard will be at least as effective as the prior standard, and providing the supporting data upon which its conclusions are based. The NRTL need not inform the Assistant Secretary of minor deviations from a test standard such as the use of new instrumentation that is more accurate or sensitive than originally called for in the standard. The NRTL also need not inform the Assistant Secretary of its adoption of revisions to third-party testing standards meeting the requirements of § 1910.7(c)(4), if such revisions have been developed by the standards developing organization, or of its adoption of revisions to other third-party test standards which the developing organization has submitted to OSHA. If, upon review, the Assistant Secretary or his designee determines that the proposed revised standard is not “substantially equivalent” to the previous version with regard to the level of safety obtained, OSHA will not accept the proposed testing standard by the recognized NRTL, and will initiate discontinuance of that aspect of OSHA-recognized activity by the NRTL by modification of the official letter of recognition. OSHA will publicly announce this action and the NRTL will be required to communicate this OSHA decision directly to affected manufacturers. B. Expansion of current recognition 1. Eligibility. 2. Procedure. a. OSHA will act upon and process the application for expansion in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, except that the period for written comments, specified in paragraph 5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be not less than 15 calendar days. b. In that process, OSHA may decide not to conduct an on-site review, where the substantive scope of the request to expand recognition is closely related to the current area of recognition. c. The expiration date for each expansion of recognition shall coincide with the expiration date of the current basic recognition period. C. Renewal of OSHA recognition 1. Eligibility. 2. Procedure. a. OSHA will process the renewal request in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, except that the period for written comments, specified in paragraph 5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be not less than 15 calendar days. b. In that process, OSHA may determine not to conduct the on-site reviews in I.B.1.a. where appropriate. c. When a recognized NRTL has filed a timely and sufficient renewal request, its current recognition will not expire until a final decision has been made by OSHA on the request. d. After the first renewal has been granted to the NRTL, the NRTL shall apply for a continuation of its recognition status every five years by submitting a renewal request. In lieu of submitting a renewal request after the initial renewal, the NRTL may certify its continuing compliance with the terms of its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7. 3. Alternative procedure. D. Voluntary termination of recognition. At any time, a recognized NRTL may voluntarily terminate its recognition, either in its entirety or with respect to any area covered in its recognition, by giving written notice to OSHA. The written notice shall state the date as of which the termination is to take effect. The Assistant Secretary shall inform the public of any voluntary termination by Federal Register E. Revocation of recognition by OSHA. 1. Potential causes. 2. Procedure. b. If the alleged deficiencies are not corrected or reconciled within a reasonable period, OSHA will propose, in writing to the recognized NRTL, to revoke recognition. If deemed appropriate, no other announcement need be made by OSHA. c. The revocation shall be effective in 60 days unless within that period the recognized NRTL corrects the deficiencies or requests a hearing in writing. d. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C. e. The parties shall be OSHA and the recognized NRTL. The Assistant Secretary may allow other interested persons to participate in these hearings if such participation would contribute to the resolution of issues germane to the proceeding and not cause undue delay. f. The burden of proof shall be on OSHA to demonstrate by a preponderance of the evidence that the recognition should be revoked because the NRTL is not meeting the requirements for recognition, has not been reasonably performing the product testing functions as required by § 1910.7, this appendix A, or the letter of recognition, or has materially misrepresented itself in its applications or publicity. 3. Final decision. b. Upon issuance of the decision, any party to the hearing may file exceptions within 20 days pursuant to 29 CFR 1905.28. If no exceptions are filed, this decision is the final decision of the Assistant Secretary. If objections are filed, the Administrative Law Judge shall forward the decision, exceptions and record to the Assistant Secretary for the final decision on the proposed revocation. c. The Assistant Secretary will review the record, the decision by the Administrative Law Judge, and the exceptions filed. Based on this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision as to whether it has been demonstrated, by a preponderance of evidence, that the recognized NRTL has not continued to meet the requirements for OSHA recognition. If the Assistant Secretary finds that the NRTL does not meet the NRTL recognition requirements, the recognition will be revoked. 4. Public announcement. Federal Register 5. Review of final decision. [53 FR 12120, Apr. 12, 1988; 53 FR 16838, May 11, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 65 FR 46818, 46819, July 31, 2000; 76 FR 10515, Feb. 25, 2011; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1910.8 OMB control numbers under the Paperwork Reduction Act. The following sections or paragraphs each contain a collection of information requirement which has been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under the control number listed. 29 CFR citation OMB control No. 1910.7 1218-0147 1910.23 1218-0199 1910.27 1218-0199 1910.28 1218-0199 1910.66 1218-0121 1910.67(b) 1218-0230 1910.68 1218-0226 1910.95 1218-0048 1910.111 1218-0208 1910.119 1218-0200 1910.120 1218-0202 1910.132 1218-0205 1910.134 1218-0099 1910.137 1218-0190 1910.142 1218-0096 1910.145 1218-0132 1910.146 1218-0203 1910.147 1218-0150 1910.156 1218-0075 1910.157(e)(3) 1218-0210 1910.157(f)(16) 1218-0218 1910.177(d)(3)(iv) 1218-0219 1910.179(j)(2)(iii) and (iv) 1218-0224 1910.179(m)(1) and (m)(2) 1218-0224 1910.180(d)(6) 1218-0221 1910.180(g)(1) and (g)(2)(ii) 1218-0221 1910.181(g)(1) and (g)(3) 1218-0222 1910.184(e)(4), (f)(4) and (i)(8)(ii) 1218-0223 1910.217(e)(1)(i) and (ii) 1218-0229 1910.217(g) 1218-0070 1910.217(h) 1218-0143 1910.218(a)(2)(i) and (ii) 1218-0228 1910.252(a)(2)(xiii)( c 1218-0207 1910.255(e) 1218-0207 1910.266 1218-0198 1910.268 1218-0225 1910.269 1218-0190 1910.272 1218-0206 1910.302 1218-0256 1910.303 1218-0256 1910.304 1218-0256 1910.305 1218-0256 1910.306 1218-0256 1910.307 1218-0256 1910.308 1218-0256 1910.420 1218-0069 1910.421 1218-0069 1910.423 1218-0069 1910.430 1218-0069 1910.440 1218-0069 1910.1001 1218-0133 1910.1003 1218-0085 1910.1004 1218-0084 1910.1006 1218-0086 1910.1007 1218-0083 1910.1008 1218-0087 1910.1009 1218-0089 1910.1010 1218-0082 1910.1011 1218-0090 1910.1012 1218-0080 1910.1013 1218-0079 1910.1014 1218-0088 1910.1015 1218-0044 1910.1016 1218-0081 1910.1017 1218-0010 1910.1018 1218-0104 1910.1020 1218-0065 1910.1024 1218-0267 1910.1025 1218-0092 1910.1026 1218-0252 1910.1027 1218-0185 1910.1028 1218-0129 1910.1029 1218-0128 1910.1030 1218-0180 1910.1043 1218-0061 1910.1044 1218-0101 1910.1045 1218-0126 1910.1047 1218-0108 1910.1048 1218-0145 1910.1050 1218-0184 1910.1051 1218-0170 1910.1052 1218-0179 1910.1053 1218-0266 1910.1096 1218-0103 1910.1200 1218-0072 1910.1450 1218-0131 [61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 29668, June 2, 1997; 62 FR 42666, Aug. 8, 1997; 62 FR 43581, Aug. 14, 1997; 62 FR 65203, Dec. 11, 1997; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, 1998; 63 FR 17093, Apr. 8, 1998; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006; 72 FR 40075, July 23, 2007; 81 FR 48710, July 26, 2016; 82 FR 31253, July 6, 2017; 83 FR 9702, Mar. 7, 2018] § 1910.9 Compliance duties owed to each employee. (a) Personal protective equipment. (b) Training. [73 FR 75583, Dec. 12, 2008] Subpart B—Adoption and Extension of Established Federal Standards Authority: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Walsh-Healey Act, 41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.; et seq.; et seq.; § 1910.11 Scope and purpose. (a) The provisions of this subpart B adopt and extend the applicability of, established Federal standards in effect on April 28, 1971, with respect to every employer, employee, and employment covered by the Act. (b) It bears emphasis that only standards (i.e., substantive rules) relating to safety or health are adopted by any incorporations by reference of standards prescribed elsewhere in this chapter or this title. Other materials contained in the referenced parties are not adopted. Illustrations of the types of materials which are not adopted are these. The incorporations by reference of parts 1915, 1916, 1917, 1918 in §§ 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16 are not intended to include the discussion in those parts of the coverage of the Longshoremen's and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act or the penalty provisions of the Act. Similarly, the incorporation by reference of part 1926 in § 1910.12 is not intended to include references to interpretative rules having relevance to the application of the Construction Safety Act, but having no relevance to the application to the Occupational Safety and Health Act. § 1910.12 Construction work. (a) Standards. (b) Definition. Construction work (c) Construction Safety Act distinguished. (d) For the purposes of this part, to the extent that it may not already be included in paragraph (b) of this section, “construction work” includes the erection of new electric transmission and distribution lines and equipment, and the alteration, conversion, and improvement of the existing transmission and distribution lines and equipment. § 1910.15 Shipyard employment. (a) Adoption and extension of established safety and health standards for shipyard employment. (b) Definitions. (1) Ship repair (2) Shipbreaking (3) Shipbuilding (4) Related employment (5) Vessel [58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993] § 1910.16 Longshoring and marine terminals. (a) Safety and health standards for longshoring. (2) Part 1910 does not apply to longshoring operations except for the following provisions: (i) Access to employee exposure and medical records. (ii) Commercial diving operations. (iii) Electrical. (iv) Hazard communication. (v) Ionizing radiation. (vi) Noise. (vii) Nonionizing radiation. Note to paragraph ( a vii Exposures to nonionizing radiation emissions from commercial vessel transmitters are considered hazardous under the following conditions: (1) where the radar is transmitting, the scanner is stationary, and the exposure distance is 18.7 feet (6 m.) or less; or (2) where the radar is transmitting, the scanner is rotating, and the exposure distance is 5.2 feet (1.8 m.) or less. (viii) Respiratory protection. (ix) Toxic and hazardous substances. (A) When a substance or cargo is contained within a sealed, intact means of packaging or containment complying with Department of Transportation or International Maritime Organization requirements; 1 1 (B) Bloodborne pathogens, § 1910.1030; (C) Carbon monoxide, § 1910.1000 (See § 1918.94 (a)); and (D) Hydrogen sulfide, § 1910.1000 (See § 1918.94 (f)). (x) Powered industrial truck operator training, Subpart N, § 1910.178(l). (b) Safety and health standards for marine terminals. (1) The provisions of part 1917 of this chapter do not apply to the following: (i) Facilities used solely for the bulk storage, handling, and transfer of flammable and combustible liquids and gases. (ii) Facilities subject to the regulations of the Office of Pipeline Safety of the Research and Special Programs Administration, Department of Transportation (49 CFR chapter I, subchapter D), to the extent such regulations apply to specific working conditions. (iii) Fully automated bulk coal handling facilities contiguous to electrical power generating plants. (2) Part 1910 does not apply to marine terminals except for the following: (i) Abrasive blasting. (ii) Access to employee exposure and medical records. (iii) Commercial diving operations. (iv) Electrical. (v) Grain handling facilities. (vi) Hazard communication. (vii) Ionizing radiation. (viii) Noise. (ix) Nonionizing radiation. (x) Respiratory protection. (xi) Safety requirements for scaffolding. (xii) Servicing multi-piece and single piece rim wheels. (xiii) Toxic and hazardous substances. (A) When a substance or cargo is contained within a sealed, intact means of packaging or containment complying with Department of Transportation or International Maritime Organization requirements; 2 2 (B) Bloodborne pathogens, § 1910.1030; (C) Carbon monoxide, § 1910.1000 (See § 1917.24(a)); and (D) Hydrogen sulfide, § 1910.1000 (See § 1917.73(a)(2)); and (xiv) Powered industrial truck operator training, subpart N, § 1910.178(l). (c) Definitions. (1) Longshoring operation (2) Related employment (3) Vessel (4) Marine terminal [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 48 FR 30908, July 5, 1983; 52 FR 36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 62 FR 40195, July 25, 1997; 63 FR 66270, Dec. 1, 1998] § 1910.17 Effective dates. (a)-(b) [Reserved] (c) Except whenever any employment or place of employment is, or becomes, subject to any safety and health standard prescribed in part 1915, 1916, 1917, 1918, or 1926 of this title on a date before August 27, 1971, by virtue of the Construction Safety Act or the Longshoremen's and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act, that occupational safety and health standard as incorporated by reference in this subpart shall also become effective under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 on that date. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.18 Changes in established Federal standards. Whenever an occupational safety and health standard adopted and incorporated by reference in this subpart B is changed pursuant to section 6(b) of the Act and the statute under which the standard was originally promulgated, and in accordance with part 1911 of this chapter, the standard shall be deemed changed for purposes of that statute and this subpart B, and shall apply under this subpart B. For the purposes of this section, a change in a standard includes any amendment, addition, or repeal, in whole or in part, of any standard. § 1910.19 Special provisions for air contaminants. (a) Asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, and actinolite dust. (b) Vinyl chloride. (c) Acrylonitrile. (d) [Reserved] (e) Inorganic arsenic. (f) [Reserved] (g) Lead. (h) Ethylene oxide. (i) 4,4′-Methylenedianiline (MDA). (j) Formaldehyde. (k) Cadmium. (l) 1,3-Butadiene (BD). (m) Methylene chloride (MC). [43 FR 28473, June 30, 1978, as amended at 43 FR 45809, Oct. 3, 1978; 43 FR 53007, Nov. 14, 1978; 44 FR 5447, Jan. 26, 1979; 46 FR 32022, June 19, 1981; 49 FR 25796, June 22, 1984; 50 FR 51173, Dec. 13, 1985; 52 FR 46291, Dec. 4, 1987; 57 FR 35666, Aug. 10, 1992; 57 FR 42388, Sept. 14, 1992; 59 FR 41057, Aug. 10, 1994; 61 FR 56831, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1600, Jan. 10, 1997] Subpart C [Reserved] Subpart D—Walking-Working Surfaces Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), and 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Source: 81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, unless otherwise noted. § 1910.21 Scope and definitions. (a) Scope. (b) Definitions. Alternating tread-type stair Anchorage Authorized Cage Carrier Combination ladder Dangerous equipment Designated area Dockboard Equivalent Extension ladder Failure Fall hazard Fall protection Fixed ladder Grab bar Guardrail system Handrail Hoist area Hole Individual-rung ladder Ladder Ladder safety system Low-slope roof Lower level Manhole steps Maximum intended load Mobile Mobile ladder stand Mobile ladder stand platform Open riser Opening Personal fall arrest system Personal fall protection system Platform Portable ladder Positioning system Qualified Ramp Riser Rope descent system Rung, step, or cleat Runway Scaffold Ship stair Side-step ladder Spiral stairs Stair rail or stair rail system Stairway (stairs) Standard stairs Step bolt Stepladder Stepstool Through ladder Tieback e.g., e.g., Toeboard Travel restraint system Tread Unprotected sides and edges Walking-working surface Warning line Well § 1910.22 General requirements. (a) Surface conditions. (1) All places of employment, passageways, storerooms, service rooms, and walking-working surfaces are kept in a clean, orderly, and sanitary condition. (2) The floor of each workroom is maintained in a clean and, to the extent feasible, in a dry condition. When wet processes are used, drainage must be maintained and, to the extent feasible, dry standing places, such as false floors, platforms, and mats must be provided. (3) Walking-working surfaces are maintained free of hazards such as sharp or protruding objects, loose boards, corrosion, leaks, spills, snow, and ice. (b) Loads. (c) Access and egress. (d) Inspection, maintenance, and repair. (1) Walking-working surfaces are inspected, regularly and as necessary, and maintained in a safe condition; (2) Hazardous conditions on walking-working surfaces are corrected or repaired before an employee uses the walking-working surface again. If the correction or repair cannot be made immediately, the hazard must be guarded to prevent employees from using the walking-working surface until the hazard is corrected or repaired; and (3) When any correction or repair involves the structural integrity of the walking-working surface, a qualified person performs or supervises the correction or repair. § 1910.23 Ladders. (a) Application. (1) Used in emergency operations such as firefighting, rescue, and tactical law enforcement operations, or training for these operations; or (2) Designed into or is an integral part of machines or equipment. (b) General requirements for all ladders. (1) Ladder rungs, steps, and cleats are parallel, level, and uniformly spaced when the ladder is in position for use; (2) Ladder rungs, steps, and cleats are spaced not less than 10 inches (25 cm) and not more than 14 inches (36 cm) apart, as measured between the centerlines of the rungs, cleats, and steps, except that: (i) Ladder rungs and steps in elevator shafts must be spaced not less than 6 inches (15 cm) apart and not more than 16.5 inches (42 cm) apart, as measured along the ladder side rails; and (ii) Fixed ladder rungs and steps on telecommunication towers must be spaced not more than 18 inches (46 cm) apart, measured between the centerlines of the rungs or steps; (3) Steps on stepstools are spaced not less than 8 inches (20 cm) apart and not more than 12 inches (30 cm) apart, as measured between the centerlines of the steps; (4) Ladder rungs, steps, and cleats have a minimum clear width of 11.5 inches (29 cm) on portable ladders and 16 inches (41 cm) (measured before installation of ladder safety systems) for fixed ladders, except that: (i) The minimum clear width does not apply to ladders with narrow rungs that are not designed to be stepped on, such as those located on the tapered end of orchard ladders and similar ladders; (ii) Rungs and steps of manhole entry ladders that are supported by the manhole opening must have a minimum clear width of 9 inches (23 cm); (iii) Rungs and steps on rolling ladders used in telecommunication centers must have a minimum clear width of 8 inches (20 cm); and (iv) Stepstools have a minimum clear width of 10.5 inches (26.7 cm); (5) Wooden ladders are not coated with any material that may obscure structural defects; (6) Metal ladders are made with corrosion-resistant material or protected against corrosion; (7) Ladder surfaces are free of puncture and laceration hazards; (8) Ladders are used only for the purposes for which they were designed; (9) Ladders are inspected before initial use in each work shift, and more frequently as necessary, to identify any visible defects that could cause employee injury; (10) Any ladder with structural or other defects is immediately tagged “Dangerous: Do Not Use” or with similar language in accordance with § 1910.145 and removed from service until repaired in accordance with § 1910.22(d), or replaced; (11) Each employee faces the ladder when climbing up or down it; (12) Each employee uses at least one hand to grasp the ladder when climbing up and down it; and (13) No employee carries any object or load that could cause the employee to lose balance and fall while climbing up or down the ladder. (c) Portable ladders. (1) Rungs and steps of portable metal ladders are corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-resistant material, or otherwise treated to minimize the possibility of slipping; (2) Each stepladder or combination ladder used in a stepladder mode is equipped with a metal spreader or locking device that securely holds the front and back sections in an open position while the ladder is in use; (3) Ladders are not loaded beyond the maximum intended load; Note to paragraph ( c The maximum intended load, as defined in § 1910.21(b), includes the total load (weight and force) of the employee and all tools, equipment, and materials being carried. (4) Ladders are used only on stable and level surfaces unless they are secured or stabilized to prevent accidental displacement; (5) No portable single rail ladders are used; (6) No ladder is moved, shifted, or extended while an employee is on it; (7) Ladders placed in locations such as passageways, doorways, or driveways where they can be displaced by other activities or traffic: (i) Are secured to prevent accidental displacement; or (ii) Are guarded by a temporary barricade, such as a row of traffic cones or caution tape, to keep the activities or traffic away from the ladder; (8) The cap (if equipped) and top step of a stepladder are not used as steps; (9) Portable ladders used on slippery surfaces are secured and stabilized; (10) The top of a non-self-supporting ladder is placed so that both side rails are supported, unless the ladder is equipped with a single support attachment; (11) Portable ladders used to gain access to an upper landing surface have side rails that extend at least 3 feet (0.9 m) above the upper landing surface (see Figure D-1 of this section); (12) Ladders and ladder sections are not tied or fastened together to provide added length unless they are specifically designed for such use; (13) Ladders are not placed on boxes, barrels, or other unstable bases to obtain additional height. (d) Fixed ladders. (1) Fixed ladders are capable of supporting their maximum intended load; (2) The minimum perpendicular distance from the centerline of the steps or rungs, or grab bars, or both, to the nearest permanent object in back of the ladder is 7 inches (18 cm), except for elevator pit ladders, which have a minimum perpendicular distance of 4.5 inches (11 cm); (3) Grab bars do not protrude on the climbing side beyond the rungs of the ladder that they serve; (4) The side rails of through or side-step ladders extend at least 42 inches (1.1 m) above the top of the access level or landing platform served by the ladder. For parapet ladders, the access level is: (i) The roof, if the parapet is cut to permit passage through the parapet; or (ii) The top of the parapet, if the parapet is continuous; (5) For through ladders, the steps or rungs are omitted from the extensions, and the side rails are flared to provide not less than 24 inches (61cm) and not more than 30 inches (76 cm) of clearance. When a ladder safety system is provided, the maximum clearance between side rails of the extension must not exceed 36 inches (91 cm); (6) For side-step ladders, the side rails, rungs, and steps must be continuous in the extension (see Figure D-2 of this section); (7) Grab bars extend 42 inches (1.1 m) above the access level or landing platforms served by the ladder; (8) The minimum size (cross-section) of grab bars is the same size as the rungs of the ladder. (9) When a fixed ladder terminates at a hatch (see Figure D-3 of this section), the hatch cover: (i) Opens with sufficient clearance to provide easy access to or from the ladder; and (ii) Opens at least 70 degrees from horizontal if the hatch is counterbalanced; (10) Individual-rung ladders are constructed to prevent the employee's feet from sliding off the ends of the rungs (see Figure D-4 of this section); (11) Fixed ladders having a pitch greater than 90 degrees from the horizontal are not used; (12) The step-across distance from the centerline of the rungs or steps is: (i) For through ladders, not less than 7 inches (18 cm) and not more than 12 inches (30 cm) to the nearest edge of the structure, building, or equipment accessed from the ladders; (ii) For side-step ladders, not less than 15 inches (38 cm) and not more than 20 inches (51 cm) to the access points of the platform edge; (13) Fixed ladders that do not have cages or wells have: (i) A clear width of at least 15 inches (38 cm) on each side of the ladder centerline to the nearest permanent object; and (ii) A minimum perpendicular distance of 30 inches (76 cm) from the centerline of the steps or rungs to the nearest object on the climbing side. When unavoidable obstructions are encountered, the minimum clearance at the obstruction may be reduced to 24 inches (61 cm), provided deflector plates are installed (see Figure D-5 of this section). Note to paragraph ( d Section 1910.28 establishes the employer's duty to provide fall protection for employees on fixed ladders, and § 1910.29 specifies the criteria for fall protection systems for fixed ladders. (e) Mobile ladder stands and mobile ladder stand platforms General requirements. (i) Mobile ladder stands and platforms have a step width of at least 16 inches (41 cm); (ii) The steps and platforms of mobile ladder stands and platforms are slip resistant. Slip-resistant surfaces must be either an integral part of the design and construction of the mobile ladder stand and platform, or provided as a secondary process or operation, such as dimpling, knurling, shotblasting, coating, spraying, or applying durable slip-resistant tapes; (iii) Mobile ladder stands and platforms are capable of supporting at least four times their maximum intended load; (iv) Wheels or casters under load are capable of supporting their proportional share of four times the maximum intended load, plus their proportional share of the unit's weight; (v) Unless otherwise specified in this section, mobile ladder stands and platforms with a top step height of 4 feet (1.2 m) or above have handrails with a vertical height of 29.5 inches (75 cm) to 37 inches (94 cm), measured from the front edge of a step. Removable gates or non-rigid members, such as chains, may be used instead of handrails in special-use applications; (vi) The maximum work-surface height of mobile ladder stands and platforms does not exceed four times the shortest base dimension, without additional support. For greater heights, outriggers, counterweights, or comparable means that stabilize the mobile ladder stands and platforms and prevent overturning must be used; (vii) Mobile ladder stands and platforms that have wheels or casters are equipped with a system to impede horizontal movement when an employee is on the stand or platform; and (viii) No mobile ladder stand or platform moves when an employee is on it. (2) Design requirements for mobile ladder stands. (i) Steps are uniformly spaced and arranged, with a rise of not more than 10 inches (25 cm) and a depth of not less than 7 inches (18 cm). The slope of the step stringer to which the steps are attached must not be more than 60 degrees, measured from the horizontal; (ii) Mobile ladder stands with a top step height above 10 feet (3 m) have the top step protected on three sides by a handrail with a vertical height of at least 36 inches (91 cm); and top steps that are 20 inches (51 cm) or more, front to back, have a midrail and toeboard. Removable gates or non-rigid members, such as chains, may be used instead of handrails in special-use applications; and (iii) The standing area of mobile ladder stands is within the base frame. (3) Design requirements for mobile ladder stand platforms. (i) Steps of mobile ladder stand platforms meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section. When the employer demonstrates that the requirement is not feasible, steeper slopes or vertical rung ladders may be used, provided the units are stabilized to prevent overturning; (ii) Mobile ladder stand platforms with a platform height of 4 to 10 feet (1.2 m to 3 m) have, in the platform area, handrails with a vertical height of at least 36 inches (91 cm) and midrails; and (iii) All ladder stand platforms with a platform height above 10 feet (3 m) have guardrails and toeboards on the exposed sides and ends of the platform. (iv) Removable gates or non-rigid members, such as chains, may be used on mobile ladder stand platforms instead of handrails and guardrails in special-use applications. [81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 FR 68795, Dec. 17, 2019] § 1910.24 Step bolts and manhole steps. (a) Step bolts. (1) Each step bolt installed on or after January 17, 2017 in an environment where corrosion may occur is constructed of, or coated with, material that protects against corrosion; (2) Each step bolt is designed, constructed, and maintained to prevent the employee's foot from slipping off the end of the step bolt; (3) Step bolts are uniformly spaced at a vertical distance of not less than 12 inches (30 cm) and not more than 18 inches (46 cm) apart, measured center to center (see Figure D-6 of this section). The spacing from the entry and exit surface to the first step bolt may differ from the spacing between the other step bolts; (4) Each step bolt has a minimum clear width of 4.5 inches (11 cm); (5) The minimum perpendicular distance between the centerline of each step bolt to the nearest permanent object in back of the step bolt is 7 inches (18 cm). When the employer demonstrates that an obstruction cannot be avoided, the distance must be at least 4.5 inches (11 cm); (6) Each step bolt installed before January 17, 2017 is capable of supporting its maximum intended load; (7) Each step bolt installed on or after January 17, 2017 is capable of supporting at least four times its maximum intended load; (8) Each step bolt is inspected at the start of the workshift and maintained in accordance with § 1910.22; and (9) Any step bolt that is bent more than 15 degrees from the perpendicular in any direction is removed and replaced with a step bolt that meets the requirements of this section before an employee uses it. (b) Manhole steps. (2) The employer must ensure that each manhole step installed on or after January 17, 2017: (i) Has a corrugated, knurled, dimpled, or other surface that minimizes the possibility of an employee slipping; (ii) Is constructed of, or coated with, material that protects against corrosion if the manhole step is located in an environment where corrosion may occur; (iii) Has a minimum clear step width of 10 inches (25 cm); (iv) Is uniformly spaced at a vertical distance not more than 16 inches (41 cm) apart, measured center to center between steps. The spacing from the entry and exit surface to the first manhole step may differ from the spacing between the other steps. (v) Has a minimum perpendicular distance between the centerline of the manhole step to the nearest permanent object in back of the step of at least 4.5 inches (11 cm); and (vi) Is designed, constructed, and maintained to prevent the employee's foot from slipping or sliding off the end. (3) The employer must ensure that each manhole step is inspected at the start of the work shift and maintained in accordance with § 1910.22. § 1910.25 Stairways. (a) Application. (b) General requirements. (1) Handrails, stair rail systems, and guardrail systems are provided in accordance with § 1910.28; (2) Vertical clearance above any stair tread to any overhead obstruction is at least 6 feet, 8 inches (203 cm), as measured from the leading edge of the tread. Spiral stairs must meet the vertical clearance requirements in paragraph (d)(3) of this section. (3) Stairs have uniform riser heights and tread depths between landings; (4) Stairway landings and platforms are at least the width of the stair and at least 30 inches (76 cm) in depth, as measured in the direction of travel; (5) When a door or a gate opens directly on a stairway, a platform is provided, and the swing of the door or gate does not reduce the platform's effective usable depth to: (i) Less than 20 inches (51 cm) for platforms installed before January 17, 2017; and (ii) Less than 22 inches (56 cm) for platforms installed on or after January 17, 2017 (see Figure D-7 of this section); (6) Each stair can support at least five times the normal anticipated live load, but never less than a concentrated load of 1,000 pounds (454 kg) applied at any point; (7) Standard stairs are used to provide access from one walking-working surface to another when operations necessitate regular and routine travel between levels, including access to operating platforms for equipment. Winding stairways may be used on tanks and similar round structures when the diameter of the tank or structure is at least 5 feet (1.5 m). (8) Spiral, ship, or alternating tread-type stairs are used only when the employer can demonstrate that it is not feasible to provide standard stairs. (9) When paragraph (b)(8) of this section allows the use of spiral, ship, or alternating tread-type stairs, they are installed, used, and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. (c) Standard stairs. (1) Are installed at angles between 30 to 50 degrees from the horizontal; (2) Have a maximum riser height of 9.5 inches (24 cm); (3) Have a minimum tread depth of 9.5 inches (24 cm); and (4) Have a minimum width of 22 inches (56 cm) between vertical barriers (see Figure D-8 of this section). (5) Exception to paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) of this section. (d) Spiral stairs. (1) Have a minimum clear width of 26 inches (66 cm); (2) Have a maximum riser height of 9.5 inches (24 cm); (3) Have a minimum headroom above spiral stair treads of at least 6 feet, 6 inches (2 m), measured from the leading edge of the tread; (4) Have a minimum tread depth of 7.5 inches (19 cm), measured at a point 12 inches (30 cm) from the narrower edge; (5) Have a uniform tread size; (e) Ship stairs. (1) Are installed at a slope of 50 to 70 degrees from the horizontal; (2) Have open risers with a vertical rise between tread surfaces of 6.5 to 12 inches (17 to 30 cm); (3) Have minimum tread depth of 4 inches (10 cm); and (4) Have a minimum tread width of 18 inches (46 cm). (f) Alternating tread-type stairs. (1) Have a series of treads installed at a slope of 50 to 70 degrees from the horizontal; (2) Have a distance between handrails of 17 to 24 inches (51 to 61 cm); (3) Have a minimum tread depth of 8.5 inches (22 cm); and (4) Have open risers if the tread depth is less than 9.5 inches (24 cm); (5) Have a minimum tread width of 7 inches (18 cm), measured at the leading edge of the tread ( i.e., [81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 FR 68795, Dec. 17, 2019] § 1910.26 Dockboards. The employer must ensure that each dockboard used meets the requirements of this section. The employer must ensure: (a) Dockboards are capable of supporting the maximum intended load in accordance with § 1910.22(b); (b)(1) Dockboards put into initial service on or after January 17, 2017 are designed, constructed, and maintained to prevent transfer vehicles from running off the dockboard edge; (2) Exception to paragraph (b)(1) of this section. (c) Portable dockboards are secured by anchoring them in place or using equipment or devices that prevent the dockboard from moving out of a safe position. When the employer demonstrates that securing the dockboard is not feasible, the employer must ensure there is sufficient contact between the dockboard and the surface to prevent the dockboard from moving out of a safe position; (d) Measures, such as wheel chocks or sand shoes, are used to prevent the transport vehicle ( e.g. (e) Portable dockboards are equipped with handholds or other means to permit safe handling of dockboards. § 1910.27 Scaffolds and rope descent systems. (a) Scaffolds. (b) Rope descent systems Anchorages. (ii) The employer must ensure that no employee uses any anchorage before the employer has obtained written information from the building owner that each anchorage meets the requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section. The employer must keep the information for the duration of the job. (iii) The requirements in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section must be implemented no later than November 20, 2017. (2) Use of rope descent systems. (i) No rope descent system is used for heights greater than 300 feet (91 m) above grade unless the employer demonstrates that it is not feasible to access such heights by any other means or that those means pose a greater hazard than using a rope descent system; (ii) The rope descent system is used in accordance with instructions, warnings, and design limitations set by the manufacturer or under the direction of a qualified person; (iii) Each employee who uses the rope descent system is trained in accordance with § 1910.30; (iv) The rope descent system is inspected at the start of each workshift that it is to be used. The employer must ensure damaged or defective equipment is removed from service immediately and replaced; (v) The rope descent system has proper rigging, including anchorages and tiebacks, with particular emphasis on providing tiebacks when counterweights, cornice hooks, or similar non-permanent anchorages are used; (vi) Each employee uses a separate, independent personal fall arrest system that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part; (vii) All components of each rope descent system, except seat boards, are capable of sustaining a minimum rated load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). Seat boards must be capable of supporting a live load of 300 pounds (136 kg); (viii) Prompt rescue of each employee is provided in the event of a fall; (ix) The ropes of each rope descent system are effectively padded or otherwise protected, where they can contact edges of the building, anchorage, obstructions, or other surfaces, to prevent them from being cut or weakened; (x) Stabilization is provided at the specific work location when descents are greater than 130 feet (39.6 m); (xi) No employee uses a rope descent system when hazardous weather conditions, such as storms or gusty or excessive wind, are present; (xii) Equipment, such as tools, squeegees, or buckets, is secured by a tool lanyard or similar method to prevent it from falling; and (xiii) The ropes of each rope descent system are protected from exposure to open flames, hot work, corrosive chemicals, and other destructive conditions. [81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 FR 68796, Dec. 17, 2019] § 1910.28 Duty to have fall protection and falling object protection. (a) General. (2) This section does not apply: (i) To portable ladders; (ii) When employers are inspecting, investigating, or assessing workplace conditions or work to be performed prior to the start of work or after all work has been completed. This exemption does not apply when fall protection systems or equipment meeting the requirements of § 1910.29 have been installed and are available for workers to use for pre-work and post-work inspections, investigations, or assessments; (iii) To fall hazards presented by the exposed perimeters of entertainment stages and the exposed perimeters of rail-station platforms; (iv) To powered platforms covered by § 1910.66(j); (v) To aerial lifts covered by § 1910.67(c)(2)(v); (vi) To telecommunications work covered by § 1910.268(n)(7) and (8); and (vii) To electric power generation, transmission, and distribution work covered by § 1910.269(g)(2)(i). (b) Protection from fall hazards Unprotected sides and edges. (A) Guardrail systems; (B) Safety net systems; or (C) Personal fall protection systems, such as personal fall arrest, travel restraint, or positioning systems. (ii) When the employer can demonstrate that it is not feasible or creates a greater hazard to use guardrail, safety net, or personal fall protection systems on residential roofs, the employer must develop and implement a fall protection plan that meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.502(k) and training that meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.503(a) and (c). Note to paragraph ( b ii There is a presumption that it is feasible and will not create a greater hazard to use at least one of the above-listed fall protection systems specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section. Accordingly, the employer has the burden of establishing that it is not feasible or creates a greater hazard to provide the fall protection systems specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) and that it is necessary to implement a fall protection plan that complies with § 1926.502(k) in the particular work operation, in lieu of implementing any of those systems. (iii) When the employer can demonstrate that the use of fall protection systems is not feasible on the working side of a platform used at a loading rack, loading dock, or teeming platform, the work may be done without a fall protection system, provided: (A) The work operation for which fall protection is infeasible is in process; (B) Access to the platform is limited to authorized employees; and, (C) The authorized employees are trained in accordance with § 1910.30. (2) Hoist areas. (i) Each employee in a hoist area is protected from falling 4 feet (1.2 m) or more to a lower level by: (A) A guardrail system; (B) A personal fall arrest system; or (C) A travel restraint system. (ii) When any portion of a guardrail system, gate, or chains is removed, and an employee must lean through or over the edge of the access opening to facilitate hoisting, the employee is protected from falling by a personal fall arrest system. (iii) If grab handles are installed at hoist areas, they meet the requirements of § 1910.29(l). (3) Holes. (i) Each employee is protected from falling through any hole (including skylights) that is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level by one or more of the following: (A) Covers; (B) Guardrail systems; (C) Travel restraint systems; or (D) Personal fall arrest systems. (ii) Each employee is protected from tripping into or stepping into or through any hole that is less than 4 feet (1.2 m) above a lower level by covers or guardrail systems. (iii) Each employee is protected from falling into a stairway floor hole by a fixed guardrail system on all exposed sides, except at the stairway entrance. However, for any stairway used less than once per day where traffic across the stairway floor hole prevents the use of a fixed guardrail system ( e.g., (iv) Each employee is protected from falling into a ladderway floor hole or ladderway platform hole by a guardrail system and toeboards erected on all exposed sides, except at the entrance to the hole, where a self-closing gate or an offset must be used. (v) Each employee is protected from falling through a hatchway and chute-floor hole by: (A) A hinged floor-hole cover that meets the criteria in § 1910.29 and a fixed guardrail system that leaves only one exposed side. When the hole is not in use, the employer must ensure the cover is closed or a removable guardrail system is provided on the exposed sides; (B) A removable guardrail system and toeboards on not more than two sides of the hole and a fixed guardrail system on all other exposed sides. The employer must ensure the removable guardrail system is kept in place when the hole is not in use; or (C) A guardrail system or a travel restraint system when a work operation necessitates passing material through a hatchway or chute floor hole. (4) Dockboards. (ii) A guardrail system or handrails are not required when: (A) Dockboards are being used solely for materials-handling operations using motorized equipment; (B) Employees engaged in these operations are not exposed to fall hazards greater than 10 feet (3 m); and (C) Those employees have been trained in accordance with § 1910.30. (5) Runways and similar walkways. (ii) When the employer can demonstrate that it is not feasible to have guardrails on both sides of a runway used exclusively for a special purpose, the employer may omit the guardrail on one side of the runway, provided the employer ensures: (A) The runway is at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide; and (B) Each employee is provided with and uses a personal fall arrest system or travel restraint system. (6) Dangerous equipment. (i) Each employee less than 4 feet (1.2 m) above dangerous equipment is protected from falling into or onto the dangerous equipment by a guardrail system or a travel restraint system, unless the equipment is covered or guarded to eliminate the hazard. (ii) Each employee 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above dangerous equipment must be protected from falling by: (A) Guardrail systems; (B) Safety net systems; (C) Travel restraint systems; or (D) Personal fall arrest systems. (7) Openings. (i) Guardrail systems; (ii) Safety net systems; (iii) Travel restraint systems; or, (iv) Personal fall arrest systems. (8) Repair pits, service pits, and assembly pits less than 10 feet in depth. (i) Limits access within 6 feet (1.8 m) of the edge of the pit to authorized employees trained in accordance with § 1910.30; (ii) Applies floor markings at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the edge of the pit in colors that contrast with the surrounding area; or places a warning line at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the edge of the pit as well as stanchions that are capable of resisting, without tipping over, a force of at least 16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally against the stanchion at a height of 30 inches (76 cm); or places a combination of floor markings and warning lines at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the edge of the pit. When two or more pits in a common area are not more than 15 feet (4.5m) apart, the employer may comply by placing contrasting floor markings at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the pit edge around the entire area of the pits; and (iii) Posts readily visible caution signs that meet the requirements of § 1910.145 and state “Caution—Open Pit.” (9) Fixed ladders (that extend more than 24 feet (7.3 m) above a lower level). (A) Existing fixed ladders. (B) New fixed ladders. (C) Replacement. (D) Final deadline. (ii) When a one-section fixed ladder is equipped with a personal fall protection or a ladder safety system or a fixed ladder is equipped with a personal fall arrest or ladder safety system on more than one section, the employer must ensure: (A) The personal fall arrest system or ladder safety system provides protection throughout the entire vertical distance of the ladder, including all ladder sections; and (B) The ladder has rest platforms provided at maximum intervals of 150 feet (45.7 m). (iii) The employer must ensure ladder sections having a cage or well: (A) Are offset from adjacent sections; and (B) Have landing platforms provided at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15.2 m). (iv) The employer may use a cage or well in combination with a personal fall arrest system or ladder safety system provided that the cage or well does not interfere with the operation of the system. (10) Outdoor advertising (billboards). (ii) When an employee engaged in outdoor advertising climbs a fixed ladder before November 19, 2018 that is not equipped with a cage, well, personal fall arrest system, or a ladder safety system the employer must ensure the employee: (A) Receives training and demonstrates the physical capability to perform the necessary climbs in accordance with § 1910.29(h); (B) Wears a body harness equipped with an 18-inch (46 cm) rest lanyard; (C) Keeps both hands free of tools or material when climbing on the ladder; and (D) Is protected by a fall protection system upon reaching the work position. (11) Stairways. (i) Each employee exposed to an unprotected side or edge of a stairway landing that is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level is protected by a guardrail or stair rail system; (ii) Each flight of stairs having at least 3 treads and at least 4 risers is equipped with stair rail systems and handrails as follows: (iii) Each ship stairs and alternating tread type stairs is equipped with handrails on both sides. (12) Scaffolds and rope descent systems. (i) Each employee on a scaffold is protected from falling in accordance 29 CFR part 1926, subpart L; and (ii) Each employee using a rope descent system 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level is protected from falling by a personal fall arrest system. (13) Work on low-slope roofs. (ii) When work is performed at least 6 feet (1.6 m) but less than 15 feet (4.6 m) from the roof edge, the employer must ensure each employee is protected from falling by using a guardrail system, safety net system, travel restraint system, or personal fall arrest system. The employer may use a designated area when performing work that is both infrequent and temporary. (iii) When work is performed 15 feet (4.6 m) or more from the roof edge, the employer must: (A) Protect each employee from falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, travel restraint system, or personal fall arrest system or a designated area. The employer is not required to provide any fall protection, provided the work is both infrequent and temporary; and (B) Implement and enforce a work rule prohibiting employees from going within 15 feet (4.6 m) of the roof edge without using fall protection in accordance with paragraphs (b)(13)(i) and (ii) of this section. (14) Slaughtering facility platforms. (A) Guardrail systems; or (B) Travel restraint systems. (ii) When the employer can demonstrate the use of a guardrail or travel restraint system is not feasible, the work may be done without those systems provided: (A) The work operation for which fall protection is infeasible is in process; (B) Access to the platform is limited to authorized employees; and (C) The authorized employees are trained in accordance with § 1910.30. (15) Walking-working surfaces not otherwise addressed. (i) Guardrail systems; (ii) Safety net systems; or (iii) Personal fall protection systems, such as personal fall arrest, travel restraint, or positioning systems. (c) Protection from falling objects. (1) Erecting toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems to prevent objects from falling to a lower level; (2) Erecting canopy structures and keeping potential falling objects far enough from an edge, hole, or opening to prevent them from falling to a lower level; or (3) Barricading the area into which objects could fall, prohibiting employees from entering the barricaded area, and keeping objects far enough from an edge or opening to prevent them from falling to a lower level. § 1910.29 Fall protection systems and falling object protection—criteria and practices. (a) General requirements. (1) Ensure each fall protection system and falling object protection, other than personal fall protection systems, that this part requires meets the requirements in this section. The employer must ensure each personal fall protection system meets the requirements in subpart I of this part; and (2) Provide and install all fall protection systems and falling object protection this subpart requires, and comply with the other requirements in this subpart before any employee begins work that necessitates fall or falling object protection. (b) Guardrail systems. (1) The top edge height of top rails, or equivalent guardrail system members, are 42 inches (107 cm), plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm), above the walking-working surface. The top edge height may exceed 45 inches (114 cm), provided the guardrail system meets all other criteria of paragraph (b) of this section (see Figure D-11 of this section). (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, or equivalent intermediate members are installed between the walking-working surface and the top edge of the guardrail system as follows when there is not a wall or parapet that is at least 21 inches (53 cm) high: (i) Midrails are installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking-working surface; (ii) Screens and mesh extend from the walking-working surface to the top rail and along the entire opening between top rail supports; (iii) Intermediate vertical members (such as balusters) are installed no more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart; and (iv) Other equivalent intermediate members (such as additional midrails and architectural panels) are installed so that the openings are not more than 19 inches (48 cm) wide. (3) Guardrail systems are capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied in a downward or outward direction within 2 inches (5 cm) of the top edge, at any point along the top rail. (4) When the 200-pound (890-N) test load is applied in a downward direction, the top rail of the guardrail system must not deflect to a height of less than 39 inches (99 cm) above the walking-working surface. (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and other equivalent intermediate members are capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 150 pounds (667 N) applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the intermediate member. (6) Guardrail systems are smooth-surfaced to protect employees from injury, such as punctures or lacerations, and to prevent catching or snagging of clothing. (7) The ends of top rails and midrails do not overhang the terminal posts, except where the overhang does not pose a projection hazard for employees. (8) Steel banding and plastic banding are not used for top rails or midrails. (9) Top rails and midrails are at least 0.25-inches (0.6 cm) in diameter or in thickness. (10) When guardrail systems are used at hoist areas, a removable guardrail section, consisting of a top rail and midrail, are placed across the access opening between guardrail sections when employees are not performing hoisting operations. The employer may use chains or gates instead of a removable guardrail section at hoist areas if the employer demonstrates the chains or gates provide a level of safety equivalent to guardrails. (11) When guardrail systems are used around holes, they are installed on all unprotected sides or edges of the hole. (12) For guardrail systems used around holes through which materials may be passed: (i) When materials are being passed through the hole, not more than two sides of the guardrail system are removed; and (ii) When materials are not being passed through the hole, the hole must be guarded by a guardrail system along all unprotected sides or edges or closed over with a cover. (13) When guardrail systems are used around holes that serve as points of access (such as ladderways), the guardrail system opening: (i) Has a self-closing gate that slides or swings away from the hole, and is equipped with a top rail and midrail or equivalent intermediate member that meets the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section; or (ii) Is offset to prevent an employee from walking or falling into the hole; (14) Guardrail systems on ramps and runways are installed along each unprotected side or edge. (15) Manila or synthetic rope used for top rails or midrails are inspected as necessary to ensure that the rope continues to meet the strength requirements in paragraphs (b)(3) and (5) of this section. Note to paragraph ( b The criteria and practices requirements for guardrail systems on scaffolds are contained in 29 CFR part 1926, subpart L. (c) Safety net systems. (d) Designated areas. (i) Employees remain within the designated area while work operations are underway; and (ii) The perimeter of the designated area is delineated with a warning line consisting of a rope, wire, tape, or chain that meets the requirements of paragraphs (d)(2) and (3) of this section. (2) The employer must ensure each warning line: (i) Has a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds (0.89 kN); (ii) Is installed so its lowest point, including sag, is not less than 34 inches (86 cm) and not more than 39 inches (99 cm) above the walking-working surface; (iii) Is supported in such a manner that pulling on one section of the line will not result in slack being taken up in adjacent sections causing the line to fall below the limits specified in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section; (iv) Is clearly visible from a distance of 25 feet (7.6 m) away, and anywhere within the designated area; (v) Is erected as close to the work area as the task permits; and (vi) Is erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge for work that is both temporary and infrequent, or not less than 15 feet (4.6 m) for other work. (3) When mobile mechanical equipment is used to perform work that is both temporary and infrequent in a designated area, the employer must ensure the warning line is erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the unprotected side or edge that is parallel to the direction in which the mechanical equipment is operated, and not less than 10 feet (3 m) from the unprotected side or edge that is perpendicular to the direction in which the mechanical equipment is operated. (e) Covers. (1) Is capable of supporting without failure, at least twice the maximum intended load that may be imposed on the cover at any one time; and (2) Is secured to prevent accidental displacement. (f) Handrails and stair rail systems. (1) Height criteria. (ii) The height of stair rail systems meets the following: (A) The height of stair rail systems installed before January 17, 2017 is not less than 30 inches (76 cm) from the leading edge of the stair tread to the top surface of the top rail; and (B) The height of stair rail systems installed on or after January 17, 2017 is not less than 42 inches (107 cm) from the leading edge of the stair tread to the top surface of the top rail. (iii) The top rail of a stair rail system may serve as a handrail only when: (A) The height of the stair rail system is not less than 36 inches (91 cm) and not more than 38 inches (97 cm) as measured at the leading edge of the stair tread to the top surface of the top rail (see Figure D-13 of this section); and (B) The top rail of the stair rail system meets the other handrail requirements in paragraph (f) of this section. (2) Finger clearance. (3) Surfaces. (4) Openings in stair rails. (5) Handhold. (6) Projection hazards. (7) Strength criteria. Figure D-13—Combination Handrail and Stair Rail (g) Cages, wells, and platforms used with fixed ladders. (1) Cages and wells installed on fixed ladders are designed, constructed, and maintained to permit easy access to, and egress from, the ladder that they enclose (see Figures D-14 and D-15 of this section); (2) Cages and wells are continuous throughout the length of the fixed ladder, except for access, egress, and other transfer points; (3) Cages and wells are designed, constructed, and maintained to contain employees in the event of a fall, and to direct them to a lower landing; and (4) Platforms used with fixed ladders provide a horizontal surface of at least 24 inches by 30 inches (61 cm by 76 cm). Note to paragraph ( g Section 1910.28 establishes the requirements that employers must follow on the use of cages and wells as a means of fall protection. (h) Outdoor advertising. (1) Is physically capable, as demonstrated through observations of actual climbing activities or by a physical examination, to perform the duties that may be assigned, including climbing fixed ladders without fall protection; (2) Has successfully completed a training or apprenticeship program that includes hands-on training on the safe climbing of ladders and is retrained as necessary to maintain the necessary skills; (3) Has the skill to climb ladders safely, as demonstrated through formal classroom training or on-the-job training, and performance observation; and (4) Performs climbing duties as a part of routine work activity. (i) Ladder safety systems. (1) Each ladder safety system allows the employee to climb up and down using both hands and does not require that the employee continuously hold, push, or pull any part of the system while climbing; (2) The connection between the carrier or lifeline and the point of attachment to the body harness or belt does not exceed 9 inches (23 cm); (3) Mountings for rigid carriers are attached at each end of the carrier, with intermediate mountings spaced, as necessary, along the entire length of the carrier so the system has the strength to stop employee falls; (4) Mountings for flexible carriers are attached at each end of the carrier and cable guides for flexible carriers are installed at least 25 feet (7.6 m) apart but not more than 40 feet (12.2 m) apart along the entire length of the carrier; (5) The design and installation of mountings and cable guides does not reduce the design strength of the ladder; and (6) Ladder safety systems and their support systems are capable of withstanding, without failure, a drop test consisting of an 18-inch (41-cm) drop of a 500-pound (227-kg) weight. (j) Personal fall protection systems. (k) Protection from falling objects. (i) Are erected along the exposed edge of the overhead walking-working surface for a length that is sufficient to protect employees below. (ii) Have a minimum vertical height of 3.5 inches (9 cm) as measured from the top edge of the toeboard to the level of the walking-working surface. (iii) Do not have more than a 0.25-inch (0.5-cm) clearance or opening above the walking-working surface. (iv) Are solid or do not have any opening that exceeds 1 inch (3 cm) at its greatest dimension. (v) Have a minimum height of 2.5 inches (6 cm) when used around vehicle repair, service, or assembly pits. Toeboards may be omitted around vehicle repair, service, or assembly pits when the employer can demonstrate that a toeboard would prevent access to a vehicle that is over the pit. (vi) Are capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the toeboard. (2) The employer must ensure: (i) Where tools, equipment, or materials are piled higher than the top of the toeboard, paneling or screening is installed from the toeboard to the midrail of the guardrail system and for a length that is sufficient to protect employees below. If the items are piled higher than the midrail, the employer also must install paneling or screening to the top rail and for a length that is sufficient to protect employees below; and (ii) All openings in guardrail systems are small enough to prevent objects from falling through the opening. (3) The employer must ensure canopies used for falling object protection are strong enough to prevent collapse and to prevent penetration by falling objects. (l) Grab handles. (1) Is not less than 12 inches (30 cm) long; (2) Is mounted to provide at least 3 inches (8 cm) of clearance from the framing or opening; and (3) Is capable of withstanding a maximum horizontal pull-out force equal to two times the maximum intended load or 200 pounds (890 N), whichever is greater. [81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 FR 68796, Dec. 17, 2019] § 1910.30 Training requirements. (a) Fall hazards. (2) The employer must ensure that each employee is trained by a qualified person. (3) The employer must train each employee in at least the following topics: (i) The nature of the fall hazards in the work area and how to recognize them; (ii) The procedures to be followed to minimize those hazards; (iii) The correct procedures for installing, inspecting, operating, maintaining, and disassembling the personal fall protection systems that the employee uses; and (iv) The correct use of personal fall protection systems and equipment specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, including, but not limited to, proper hook-up, anchoring, and tie-off techniques, and methods of equipment inspection and storage, as specified by the manufacturer. (b) Equipment hazards. (2) The employer must train each employee who uses a dockboard to properly place and secure it to prevent unintentional movement. (3) The employer must train each employee who uses a rope descent system in proper rigging and use of the equipment in accordance with § 1910.27. (4) The employer must train each employee who uses a designated area in the proper set-up and use of the area. (c) Retraining. (1) When changes in the workplace render previous training obsolete or inadequate; (2) When changes in the types of fall protection systems or equipment to be used render previous training obsolete or inadequate; or (3) When inadequacies in an affected employee's knowledge or use of fall protection systems or equipment indicate that the employee no longer has the requisite understanding or skill necessary to use equipment or perform the job safely. (d) Training must be understandable. Subpart E—Exit Routes and Emergency Planning Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31160), or 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), as applicable; and 29 CFR 1911. § 1910.33 Table of contents. This section lists the sections and paragraph headings contained in §§ 1910.34 through 1910.39. § 1910.34 Coverage and definitions. (a) Every employer is covered. (b) Exit routes are covered. (c) Definitions. § 1910.35 Compliance with Alternate Exit Route Codes. § 1910.36 Design and construction requirements for exit routes. (a) Basic requirements. (b) The number of exit routes must be adequate. (c) Exit discharge. (d) An exit door must be unlocked. (e) A side-hinged exit door must be used. (f) The capacity of an exit route must be adequate. (g) An exit route must meet minimum height and width requirements. (h) An outdoor exit route is permitted. § 1910.37 Maintenance, safeguards, and operational features for exit routes. (a) The danger to employees must be minimized. (b) Lighting and marking must be adequate and appropriate. (c) The fire retardant properties of paints or solutions must be maintained. (d) Exit routes must be maintained during construction, repairs, or alterations. (e) An employee alarm system must be operable. § 1910.38 Emergency action plans. (a) Application. (b) Written and oral emergency action plans. (c) Minimum elements of an emergency action plan. (d) Employee alarm system. (e) Training. (f) Review of emergency action plan. § 1910.39 Fire prevention plans. (a) Application. (b) Written and oral fire prevention plans. (c) Minimum elements of a fire prevention plan. (d) Employee information. [67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002, as amended at 76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011] § 1910.34 Coverage and definitions. (a) Every employer is covered. (b) Exits routes are covered. (c) Definitions. Electroluminescent Exit Exit access Exit discharge Exit route High hazard area Occupant load Refuge area (1) A space along an exit route that is protected from the effects of fire by separation from other spaces within the building by a barrier with at least a one-hour fire resistance-rating; or (2) A floor with at least two spaces, separated from each other by smoke-resistant partitions, in a building protected throughout by an automatic sprinkler system that complies with § 1910.159 of this part. Self-luminous e.g., [67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002, as amended at 76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011] § 1910.35 Compliance with alternate exit-route codes. OSHA will deem an employer demonstrating compliance with the exit-route provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2009 edition, or the exit-route provisions of the International Fire Code, 2009 edition, to be in compliance with the corresponding requirements in §§ 1910.34, 1910.36, and 1910.37 (incorporated by reference, see section § 1910.6). [76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011] § 1910.36 Design and construction requirements for exit routes. (a) Basic requirements. (1) An exit route must be permanent. (2) An exit must be separated by fire resistant materials. (3) Openings into an exit must be limited. (b) The number of exit routes must be adequate Two exit routes. (2) More than two exit routes. (3) A single exit route. Note to paragraph ( b For assistance in determining the number of exit routes necessary for your workplace, consult NFPA 101-2009, Life Safety Code, or IFC-2009, International Fire Code (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6). (c) Exit discharge. (2) The street, walkway, refuge area, public way, or open space to which an exit discharge leads must be large enough to accommodate the building occupants likely to use the exit route. (3) Exit stairs that continue beyond the level on which the exit discharge is located must be interrupted at that level by doors, partitions, or other effective means that clearly indicate the direction of travel leading to the exit discharge. (d) An exit door must be unlocked. (2) Exit route doors must be free of any device or alarm that could restrict emergency use of the exit route if the device or alarm fails. (3) An exit route door may be locked from the inside only in mental, penal, or correctional facilities and then only if supervisory personnel are continuously on duty and the employer has a plan to remove occupants from the facility during an emergency. (e) A side-hinged exit door must be used. (2) The door that connects any room to an exit route must swing out in the direction of exit travel if the room is designed to be occupied by more than 50 people or if the room is a high hazard area ( i.e., (f) The capacity of an exit route must be adequate. (2) The capacity of an exit route may not decrease in the direction of exit route travel to the exit discharge. Note to paragraph ( f Information regarding the “Occupant load” is located in NFPA 101-2009, Life Safety Code, and in IFC-2009, International Fire Code (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6). (g) An exit route must meet minimum height and width requirements. (2) An exit access must be at least 28 inches (71.1 cm) wide at all points. Where there is only one exit access leading to an exit or exit discharge, the width of the exit and exit discharge must be at least equal to the width of the exit access. (3) The width of an exit route must be sufficient to accommodate the maximum permitted occupant load of each floor served by the exit route. (4) Objects that project into the exit route must not reduce the width of the exit route to less than the minimum width requirements for exit routes. (h) An outdoor exit route is permitted. (1) The outdoor exit route must have guardrails to protect unenclosed sides if a fall hazard exists; (2) The outdoor exit route must be covered if snow or ice is likely to accumulate along the route, unless the employer can demonstrate that any snow or ice accumulation will be removed before it presents a slipping hazard; (3) The outdoor exit route must be reasonably straight and have smooth, solid, substantially level walkways; and (4) The outdoor exit route must not have a dead-end that is longer than 20 feet (6.2 m). [67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002, as amended at 76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011] § 1910.37 Maintenance, safeguards, and operational features for exit routes. (a) The danger to employees must be minimized. (2) Exit routes must be arranged so that employees will not have to travel toward a high hazard area, unless the path of travel is effectively shielded from the high hazard area by suitable partitions or other physical barriers. (3) Exit routes must be free and unobstructed. No materials or equipment may be placed, either permanently or temporarily, within the exit route. The exit access must not go through a room that can be locked, such as a bathroom, to reach an exit or exit discharge, nor may it lead into a dead-end corridor. Stairs or a ramp must be provided where the exit route is not substantially level. (4) Safeguards designed to protect employees during an emergency ( e.g., (b) Lighting and marking must be adequate and appropriate. (2) Each exit must be clearly visible and marked by a sign reading “Exit.” (3) Each exit route door must be free of decorations or signs that obscure the visibility of the exit route door. (4) If the direction of travel to the exit or exit discharge is not immediately apparent, signs must be posted along the exit access indicating the direction of travel to the nearest exit and exit discharge. Additionally, the line-of-sight to an exit sign must clearly be visible at all times. (5) Each doorway or passage along an exit access that could be mistaken for an exit must be marked “Not an Exit” or similar designation, or be identified by a sign indicating its actual use ( e.g., (6) Each exit sign must be illuminated to a surface value of at least five foot-candles (54 lux) by a reliable light source and be distinctive in color. Self-luminous or electroluminescent signs that have a minimum luminance surface value of at least .06 footlamberts (0.21 cd/m 2 (7) Each exit sign must have the word “Exit” in plainly legible letters not less than six inches (15.2 cm) high, with the principal strokes of the letters in the word “Exit” not less than three-fourths of an inch (1.9 cm) wide. (c) The fire retardant properties of paints or solutions must be maintained. (d) Exit routes must be maintained during construction, repairs, or alterations. (2) During repairs or alterations, employees must not occupy a workplace unless the exit routes required by this subpart are available and existing fire protections are maintained, or until alternate fire protection is furnished that provides an equivalent level of safety. (3) Employees must not be exposed to hazards of flammable or explosive substances or equipment used during construction, repairs, or alterations, that are beyond the normal permissible conditions in the workplace, or that would impede exiting the workplace. (e) An employee alarm system must be operable. [67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002] § 1910.38 Emergency action plans. (a) Application. (b) Written and oral emergency action plans. (c) Minimum elements of an emergency action plan. (1) Procedures for reporting a fire or other emergency; (2) Procedures for emergency evacuation, including type of evacuation and exit route assignments; (3) Procedures to be followed by employees who remain to operate critical plant operations before they evacuate; (4) Procedures to account for all employees after evacuation; (5) Procedures to be followed by employees performing rescue or medical duties; and (6) The name or job title of every employee who may be contacted by employees who need more information about the plan or an explanation of their duties under the plan. (d) Employee alarm system. (e) Training. (f) Review of emergency action plan. (1) When the plan is developed or the employee is assigned initially to a job; (2) When the employee's responsibilities under the plan change; and (3) When the plan is changed. [67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002] § 1910.39 Fire prevention plans. (a) Application. (b) Written and oral fire prevention plans. (c) Minimum elements of a fire prevention plan. (1) A list of all major fire hazards, proper handling and storage procedures for hazardous materials, potential ignition sources and their control, and the type of fire protection equipment necessary to control each major hazard; (2) Procedures to control accumulations of flammable and combustible waste materials; (3) Procedures for regular maintenance of safeguards installed on heat-producing equipment to prevent the accidental ignition of combustible materials; (4) The name or job title of employees responsible for maintaining equipment to prevent or control sources of ignition or fires; and (5) The name or job title of employees responsible for the control of fuel source hazards. (d) Employee information. [67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002] Appendix to Subpart E of Part 1910—Exit Routes, Emergency Action Plans, and Fire Prevention Plans This appendix serves as a nonmandatory guideline to assist employers in complying with the appropriate requirements of subpart E. § 1910.38 Employee emergency plans. 1. Emergency action plan elements. The use of floor plans or workplace maps which clearly show the emergency escape routes should be included in the emergency action plan. Color coding will aid employees in determining their route assignments. The employer should also develop and explain in detail what rescue and medical first aid duties are to be performed and by whom. All employees are to be told what actions they are to take in these emergency situations that the employer anticipates may occur in the workplace. 2. Emergency evacuation. The designation of refuge or safe areas for evacuation should be determined and identified in the plan. In a building divided into fire zones by fire walls, the refuge area may still be within the same building but in a different zone from where the emergency occurs. Exterior refuge or safe areas may include parking lots, open fields or streets which are located away from the site of the emergency and which provide sufficient space to accommodate the employees. Employees should be instructed to move away from the exit discharge doors of the building, and to avoid congregating close to the building where they may hamper emergency operations. 3. Emergency action plan training. After the desired degree of evacuation is completed, the wardens should be able to account for or otherwise verify that all employees are in the safe areas. In buildings with several places of employment, employers are encouraged to coordinate their plans with the other employers in the building. A building-wide or standardized plan for the whole building is acceptable provided that the employers inform their respective employees of their duties and responsibilities under the plan. The standardized plan need not be kept by each employer in the multi-employer building, provided there is an accessible location within the building where the plan can be reviewed by affected employees. When multi-employer building-wide plans are not feasible, employers should coordinate their plans with the other employers within the building to assure that conflicts and confusion are avoided during times of emergencies. In multi-story buildings where more than one employer is on a single floor, it is essential that these employers coordinate their plans with each other to avoid conflicts and confusion. 4. Fire prevention housekeeping. It is the intent of this standard to assure that hazardous accumulations of combustible waste materials are controlled so that a fast developing fire, rapid spread of toxic smoke, or an explosion will not occur. This does not necessarily mean that each room has to be swept each day. Employers and employees should be aware of the hazardous properties of materials in their workplaces, and the degree of hazard each poses. Certainly oil soaked rags have to be treated differently than general paper trash in office areas. However, large accumulations of waste paper or corrugated boxes, etc., can pose a significant fire hazard. Accumulations of materials which can cause large fires or generate dense smoke that are easily ignited or may start from spontaneous combustion, are the types of materials with which this standard is concerned. Such combustible materials may be easily ignited by matches, welder's sparks, cigarettes and similar low level energy ignition sources. 5. Maintenance of equipment under the fire prevention plan. [45 FR 60714, Sept. 12, 1980] Subpart F—Powered Platforms, Manlifts, and Vehicle-Mounted Work Platforms Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. § 1910.66 Powered platforms for building maintenance. (a) Scope. (b) Application New installations. (2) Existing installations. (ii) In addition, permanent installations completed after August 27, 1971, and in existence and/or completed before July 23, 1990, shall comply with appendix D of this section. (c) Assurance. (2) Building owners shall base the information required in paragraph (c)(1) of this section on the results of a field test of the installation before being placed into service and following any major alteration to an existing installation, as required in paragraph (g)(1) of this section. The assurance shall also be based on all other relevant available information, including, but not limited to, test data, equipment specifications and verification by a registered professional engineer. (3) Building owners of all installations, new and existing, shall inform the employer in writing that the installation has been inspected, tested, and maintained in compliance with the requirements of paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section and that all anchorages meet the requirements of § 1910.140(c)(13). (4) The employer shall not permit employees to use the installation prior to receiving assurance from the building owner that the installation meets the requirements contained in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(3) of this section. (d) Definitions. Anemometer Angulated roping Building face roller Building maintenance Cable Carriage Certification Combination cable Competent person Continuous pressure Control Davit Equivalent Ground rigging Ground rigged davit Guide button Guide roller Guide shoe Hoisting machine Hoist rated load Installation Interlock Intermittent stabilization Lanyard Lifeline Live load Obstruction detector Operating control Operating device Outrigger Platform rated load Poured socket Primary brake Prime mover Rated load Rated strength Rated working load Registered professional engineer Roof powered platform Roof rigged davit Rope Safe surface Secondary brake Self powered platform Speed reducer Stability factor Stabilizer tie Supported equipment Suspended equipment Suspended scaffold (swinging scaffold) Tail line Tie-in guides Traction hoist Transportable outriggers Trolley carriage Verified Weatherproof Winding drum hoist Working platform Wrap (e) Powered platform installations—Affected parts of buildings General requirements. (i) Structural supports, tie-downs, tie-in guides, anchoring devices and any affected parts of the building included in the installation shall be designed by or under the direction of a registered professional engineer experienced in such design; (ii) Exterior installations shall be capable of withstanding prevailing climatic conditions; (iii) The building installation shall provide safe access to, and egress from, the equipment and sufficient space to conduct necessary maintenance of the equipment; (iv) The affected parts of the building shall have the capability of sustaining all the loads imposed by the equipment; and, (v) The affected parts of the building shall be designed so as to allow the equipment to be used without exposing employees to a hazardous condition. (2) Tie-in guides. Note: See figure 1 in appendix B of this section for a description of a typical continuous stabilization system utilizing tie-in guides. (ii) If angulated roping is employed, tie-in guides required in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section may be eliminated for not more than 75 feet (22.9 m) of the uppermost elevation of the building, if infeasible due to exterior building design, provided an angulation force of at least 10 pounds (44.4 n) is maintained under all conditions of loading. (iii) Tie-in guides required in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section may be eliminated if one of the guide systems in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A), (e)(2)(iii)(B) or (e)(2)(iii)(C) of this section is provided, or an equivalent. (A) Intermittent stabilization system. The system shall keep the equipment in continuous contact with the building facade, and shall prevent sudden horizontal movement of the platform. The system may be used together with continuous positive building guide systems using tie-in guides on the same building, provided the requirements for each system are met. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 Note: See figure 2 in appendix B of this section for a description of a typical intermittent stabilization system. (B) Button guide stabilization system. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 Note: See paragraph (f)(5)(vi) of this section for relevant equipment provisions. Note: See figure 3 in appendix B of this section for a description of a typical button guide stabilization system. (C) System utilizing angulated roping and building face rollers. The system shall keep the equipment in continuous contact with the building facade, and shall prevent sudden horizontal movement of the platform. This system is acceptable only where the suspended portion of the equipment in use does not exceed 130 feet (39.6 m) above a safe surface or ground level, and where the platform maintains no less than 10 pounds (44.4 n) angulation force on the building facade. (iv) Tie-in guides for building interiors (atriums) may be eliminated when a registered professional engineer determines that an alternative stabilization system, including systems in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii) (A), (B) and (C), or a platform tie-off at each work station will provide equivalent safety. (3) Roof guarding. (ii) The perimeter guard shall not be more than six inches (152 mm) inboard of the inside face of a barrier, i.e. the parapet wall, or roof edge curb of the building being serviced; however, the perimeter guard location shall not exceed an 18 inch (457 mm) setback from the exterior building face. (4) Equipment stops. (5) Maintenance access. (6) Elevated track. (ii) The working platform shall be capable of being lowered, as part of its normal operation, to the lower safe surface for access and egress of the personnel and shall be provided with a safe means of access and egress to the lower safe surface. (7) Tie-down anchors. (8) Cable stabilization. (ii) Hanging cables, other than suspended wire ropes, which are in constant tension shall be stabilized when the vertical travel exceeds an initial 600 foot (183 m) distance, and at further intervals of 600 feet (183 m) or less. (9) Emergency planning. (10) Building maintenance. (11) Electrical requirements. (i) General building electrical installations shall comply with §§ 1910.302 through 1910.308 of this part, unless otherwise specified in this section; (ii) Building electrical wiring shall be of such capacity that when full load is applied to the equipment power circuit not more than a five percent drop from building service-vault voltage shall occur at any power circuit outlet used by equipment regulated by this section; (iii) The equipment power circuit shall be an independent electrical circuit that shall remain separate from all other equipment within or on the building, other than power circuits used for hand tools that will be used in conjunction with the equipment. If the building is provided with an emergency power system, the equipment power circuit may also be connected to this system; (iv) The power circuit shall be provided with a disconnect switch that can be locked in the “OFF” and “ON” positions. The switch shall be conveniently located with respect to the primary operating area of the equipment to allow the operators of the equipment access to the switch; (v) The disconnect switch for the power circuit shall be locked in the “ON” position when the equipment is in use; and (vi) An effective two-way voice communication system shall be provided between the equipment operators and persons stationed within the building being serviced. The communications facility shall be operable and shall be manned at all times by persons stationed within the building whenever the platform is being used. (f) Powered platform installations—Equipment General requirements. (i) Equipment installations shall be designed by or under the direction of a registered professional engineer experienced in such design; (ii) The design shall provide for a minimum live load of 250 pounds (113.6 kg) for each occupant of a suspended or supported platform; (iii) Equipment that is exposed to wind when not in service shall be designed to withstand forces generated by winds of at least 100 miles per hour (44.7 m/s) at 30 feet (9.2 m) above grade; and (iv) Equipment that is exposed to wind when in service shall be designed to withstand forces generated by winds of at least 50 miles per hour (22.4 m/s) for all elevations. (2) Construction requirements. (3) Suspension methods. (i) Carriages. (A) The horizontal movement of a carriage shall be controlled so as to ensure its safe movement and allow accurate positioning of the platform for vertical travel or storage; (B) Powered carriages shall not exceed a traversing speed of 50 feet per minute (0.3 m/s); (C) The initiation of a traversing movement for a manually propelled carriage on a smooth level surface shall not require a person to exert a horizontal force greater than 40 pounds (444.8 n); (D) Structural stops and curbs shall be provided to prevent the traversing of the carriage beyond its designed limits of travel; (E) Traversing controls for a powered carriage shall be of a continuous pressure weatherproof type. Multiple controls when provided shall be arranged to permit operation from only one control station at a time. An emergency stop device shall be provided on each end of a powered carriage for interrupting power to the carriage drive motors; (F) The operating controls(s) shall be so connected that in the case of suspended equipment, traversing of a carriage is not possible until the suspended portion of the equipment is located at its uppermost designed position for traversing; and is free of contact with the face of the building or building guides. In addition, all protective devices and interlocks are to be in the proper position to allow traversing of the carriage; (G) Stability for underfoot supported carriages shall be obtained by gravity, by an attachment to a structural support, or by a combination of gravity and a structural support. The use of flowing counterweights to achieve stability is prohibited. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (H) An automatically applied braking or locking system, or equivalent, shall be provided that will prevent unintentional traversing of power traversed or power assisted carriages; (I) A manual or automatic braking or locking system or equivalent, shall be provided that will prevent unintentional traversing of manually propelled carriages; (J) A means to lock out the power supply for the carriage shall be provided; (K) Safe access to and egress from the carriage shall be provided from a safe surface. If the carriage traverses an elevated area, any operating area on the carriage shall be protected by a guardrail system in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (f)(5)(i)(F) of this section. Any access gate shall be self-closing and self-latching, or provided with an interlock; (L) Each carriage work station position shall be identified by location markings and/or position indicators; and (M) The motors shall stall if the load on the hoist motors is at any time in excess of three times that necessary for lifting the working platform with its rated load. (ii) Transportable outriggers. (B) Transportable outriggers shall be used only with self-powered, ground rigged working platforms. (C) Each transportable outrigger shall be secured with a tie-down to a verified anchorage on the building during the entire period of its use. The anchorage shall be designed to have a stability factor of not less than four against overturning or upsetting of the outrigger. (D) Access to and egress from the working platform shall be from and to a safe surface below the point of suspension. (E) Each transportable outrigger shall be designed for lateral stability to prevent roll-over in the event an accidental lateral load is applied to the outrigger. The accidental lateral load to be considered in this design shall be not less than 70 percent of the rated load of the hoist. (F) Each transportable outrigger shall be designed to support an ultimate load of not less than four times the rated load of the hoist. (G) Each transportable outrigger shall be so located that the suspension wire ropes for two point suspended working platforms are hung parallel. (H) A transportable outrigger shall be tied-back to a verified anchorage on the building with a rope equivalent in strength to the suspension rope. (I) The tie-back rope shall be installed parallel to the centerline of the outrigger. (iii) Davits. (B) The following requirements apply to roof rigged davit systems: ( 1 ( 2 (C) The following requirements apply to ground rigged davit systems: ( 1 ( 2 (D) A rotating davit shall not require a horizontal force in excess of 40 pounds (177.9 n) per person to initiate a rotating movement. (E) The following requirements shall apply to transportable davits: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (4) Hoisting machines. (ii) Each hoisting machine shall be capable of arresting any overspeed descent of the load. (iii) Each hoisting machine shall be powered only by air, electric or hydraulic sources. (iv) Flammable liquids shall not be carried on the working platform. (v) Each hoisting machine shall be capable of raising or lowering 125 percent of the rated load of the hoist. (vi) Moving parts of a hoisting machine shall be enclosed or guarded in compliance with paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of § 1910.212 of this part. (vii) Winding drums, traction drums and sheaves and directional sheaves used in conjunction with hoisting machines shall be compatible with, and sized for, the wire rope used. (viii) Each winding drum shall be provided with a positive means of attaching the wire rope to the drum. The attachment shall be capable of developing at least four times the rated load of the hoist. (ix) Each hoisting machine shall be provided with a primary brake and at least one independent secondary brake, each capable of stopping and holding not less than 125 percent of the lifting capacity of the hoist. (A) The primary brake shall be directly connected to the drive train of the hoisting machine, and shall not be connected through belts, chains, clutches, or set screw type devices. The brake shall automatically set when power to the prime mover is interrupted. (B)( 1 ( 2 (x) Any component of a hoisting machine which requires lubrication for its protection and proper functioning shall be provided with a means for that lubrication to be applied. (5) Suspended equipment General requirements. (B) Each suspended unit component shall be constructed of materials that will withstand anticipated weather conditions. (C) Each suspended unit shall be provided with a load rating plate, conspicuously located, stating the unit weight and rated load of the suspended unit. (D) When the suspension points on a suspended unit are not at the unit ends, the unit shall be capable of remaining continuously stable under all conditions of use and position of the live load, and shall maintain at least a 1.5 to 1 stability factor against unit upset. (E) Guide rollers, guide shoes or building face rollers shall be provided, and shall compensate for variations in building dimensions and for minor horizontal out-of-level variations of each suspended unit. (F) Each working platform of a suspended unit shall be secured to the building facade by one or more of the following methods, or by an equivalent method: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (G) Each working platform of a suspended unit shall be provided with a guardrail system on all sides which shall meet the following requirements: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 2 ( 5 ( 6 ( 7 ( 8 (ii) Two and four-point suspended working platforms. (B) The flooring shall be of a slip-resistant type and shall contain no opening that would allow the passage of life lines, cables and other potential falling objects. If a larger opening is provided, it shall be protected by placing a material under the opening which shall prevent the passage of life lines, cables and potential falling objects. (C) The working platfrom shall be provided with a means of suspension that will restrict the platform's inboard to outboard roll about its longitudinal axis to a maximum of 15 degrees from a horizontal plane when moving the live load from the inboard to the outboard side of the platform. (D) Any cable suspended from above the platform shall be provided with a means for storage to prevent accumulation of the cable on the floor of the platform. (E) All operating controls for the vertical travel of the platform shall be of the continuous-pressure type, and shall be located on the platform. (F) Each operating station of every working platform shall be provided with a means of interrupting the power supply to all hoist motors to stop any further powered ascent or descent of the platform. (G) The maximum rated speed of the platform shall not exceed 50 feet per minute (0.3 ms) with single speed hoists, nor 75 feet per minute (0.4 ms) with multi-speed hoists. (H) Provisions shall be made for securing all tools, water tanks, and other accessories to prevent their movement or accumulation on the floor of the platform. (I) Portable fire extinguishers conforming to the provisions of §§ 1910.155 and 1910.157 of this part shall be provided and securely attached on all working platforms. (J) Access to and egress from a working platfrom, except for those that land directly on a safe surface, shall be provided by stairs, ladders, platforms and runways conforming to the provisions of subpart D of this part. Access gates shall be self-closing and self-latching. (K) Means of access to or egress from a working platform which is 48 inches (1.2 m) or more above a safe surface shall be provided with a guardrail system or ladder handrails that conform to the provisions of subpart D of this part. (L) The platform shall be provided with a secondary wire rope suspension system if the platform contains overhead structures which restrict the emergency egress of employees. A horizontal lifeline or a direct connection anchorage shall be provided as part of a personal fall arrest system that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part for each employee on such a platform. (M) A vertical lifeline shall be provided as part of a personal fall arrest system that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part for each employee on a working platform suspended by two or more wire ropes, if the failure of one wire rope or suspension attachment will cause the platform to upset. If a secondary wire rope suspension is used, vertical lifelines are not required for the personal fall arrest system, provided that each employee is attached to a horizontal lifeline anchored to the platform. (N) An emergency electric operating device shall be provided on roof powered platforms near the hoisting machine for use in the event of failure of the normal operating device located on the working platform, or failure of the cable connected to the platform. The emergency electric operating device shall be mounted in a secured compartment, and the compartment shall be labeled with instructions for use. A means for opening the compartment shall be mounted in a break-glass receptable located near the emergency electric operating device or in an equivalent secure and accessible location. (iii) Single point suspended working platforms. (B) Each single point suspended working platform shall be provided with a secondary wire rope suspension system which will prevent the working platform from falling should there be a failure of the primary means of support, or if the platform contains overhead structures which restrict the egress of the employees. A horizontal life line or a direct connection anchorage shall be provided as part of a personal fall arrest system that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part for each employee on the platform. (iv) Ground-rigged working platforms. (B) After each day's use, the power supply within the building shall be disconnected from a ground-rigged working platform, and the platform shall be either disengaged from its suspension points or secured and stored at grade. (v) Intermittently stabilized platforms. (B) Each stabilizer tie shall be equipped with a “quick connect-quick disconnect” device which cannot be accidently disengaged, for attachment to the building anchor, and shall be resistant to adverse environmental conditions. (C) The platform shall be provided with a stopping device that will interrupt the hoist power supply in the event the platform contacts a stabilizer tie during its ascent. (D) Building face rollers shall not be placed at the anchor setting if exterior anchors are used on the building face. (E) Stabilizer ties used on intermittently stabilized platforms shall allow for the specific attachment length needed to effect the predetermined angulation of the suspended wire rope. The specific attachment length shall be maintained at all building anchor locations. (F) The platform shall be in continuous contact with the face of the building during ascent and descent. (G) The attachment and removal of stabilizer ties shall not require the horizontal movement of the platform. (H) The platform-mounted equipment and its suspension wire ropes shall not be physically damaged by the loads from the stabilizer tie or its building anchor. The platform, platform mounted equipment and wire ropes shall be able to withstand a load that is at least twice the ultimate strength of the stabilizer tie. Note: See figure II in appendix B of this section for a description of a typical intermittent stabilization system. (vi) Button-guide stabilized platforms. (B) Each guide track on the platform shall engage a minimum of two guide buttons during any vertical travel of the platform following the initial button engagement. (C) Each guide track on a platform that is part of a roof rigged system shall be provided with a storage position on the platform. (D) Each guide track on the platform shall be sufficiently maneuverable by platform occupants to permit easy engagement of the guide buttons, and easy movement into and out of its storage position on the platform. (E) Two guide tracks shall be mounted on the platform and shall provide continuous contact with the building face. (F) The load carrying components of the button guide stabilization system which transmit the load into the platform shall be capable of supporting the weight of the platform, or provision shall be made in the guide track connectors or platform attachments to prevent the weight of the platform from being transmitted to the platform attachments. Note: See figure III in appendix B of this section for a description of a typical button guide stabilization system. (6) Supported equipment. (ii) Cog wheels or equivalent means shall be incorporated to provide climbing traction between the supported equipment and the building guides. Additional guide wheels or shoes shall be incorporated as may be necessary to ensure that the drive wheels are continuously held in positive engagement with the building guides. (iii) Launch guide mullions indexed to the building guides and retained in alignment with the building guides shall be used to align drive wheels entering the building guides. (iv) Manned platforms used on supported equipment shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs (f)(5)(ii)(A), (f)(5)(ii)(B), and (f)(5)(ii) (D) through (K) of this section covering suspended equipment. (7) Suspension wire ropes and rope connections. (ii) Each suspension rope shall have a “Design Factor” of at least 10. The “Design Factor” is the ratio of the rated strength of the suspension wire rope to the rated working load, and shall be calculated using the following formula: Where: F = Design factor S = Manufacturer's rated strength of one suspension rope N = Number of suspension ropes under load W = Rated working load on all ropes at any point of travel (iii) Suspension wire rope grade shall be at least improved plow steel or equivalent. (iv) Suspension wire ropes shall be sized to conform with the required design factor, but shall not be less than 5/16 (v) No more than one reverse bend in six wire rope lays shall be permitted. (vi) A corrosion-resistant tag shall be securely attached to one of the wire rope fastenings when a suspension wire rope is to be used at a specific location and will remain in that location. This tag shall bear the following wire rope data: (A) The diameter (inches and/or mm); (B) Construction classification; (C) Whether non-preformed or preformed; (D) The grade of material; (E) The manufacturer's rated strength; (F) The manufacturer's name; (G) The month and year the ropes were installed; and (H) The name of the person or company which installed the ropes. (vii) A new tag shall be installed at each rope renewal. (viii) The original tag shall be stamped with the date of the resocketing, or the original tag shall be retained and a supplemental tag shall be provided when ropes are resocketed. The supplemental tag shall show the date of resocketing and the name of the person or company that resocketed the rope. (ix) Winding drum type hoists shall contain at least three wraps of the suspension wire rope on the drum when the suspended unit has reached the lowest possible point of its vertical travel. (x) Traction drum and sheave type hoists shall be provided with a wire rope of sufficient length to reach the lowest possible point of vertical travel of the suspended unit, and an additional length of the wire rope of at least four feet (1.2 m). (xi) The lengthening or repairing of suspension wire ropes is prohibited. (xii) Babbitted fastenings for suspension wire rope are prohibited. (8) Control circuits, power circuits and their components. (ii) Electrical runway conductor systems shall be of a type designed for use in exterior locations, and shall be located so that they do not come into contact with accumulated snow or water. (iii) Cables shall be protected against damage resulting from overtensioning or from other causes. (iv) Devices shall be included in the control system for the equipment which will provide protection against electrical overloads, three phase reversal and phase failure. The control system shall have a separate method, independent of the direction control circuit, for breaking the power circuit in case of an emergency or malfunction. (v) Suspended or supported equipment shall have a control system which will require the operator of the equipment to follow predetermined procedures. (vi) The following requirements shall apply to electrical protection devices: (A) On installations where the carriage does not have a stability factor of at least four against overturning, electrical contact(s) shall be provided and so connected that the operating devices for the suspended or supported equipment shall be operative only when the carriage is located and mechanically retained at an established operating point. (B) Overload protection shall be provided in the hoisting or suspension system to protect against the equipment operating in the “up” direction with a load in excess of 125 percent of the rated load of the platform; and (C) An automatic detector shall be provided for each suspension point that will interrupt power to all hoisting motors for travel in the “down” direction, and apply the primary brakes if any suspension wire rope becomes slack. A continuous-pressure rigging-bypass switch designed for use during rigging is permitted. This switch shall only be used during rigging. (vii) Upper and lower directional switches designed to prevent the travel of suspended units beyond safe upward and downward levels shall be provided. (viii) Emergency stop switches shall be provided on remote controlled, roof-powered manned platforms adjacent to each control station on the platform. (ix) Cables which are in constant tension shall have overload devices which will prevent the tension in the cable from interfering with the load limiting device required in paragraph (f)(8)(vi)(B) of this section, or with the platform roll limiting device required in paragraph (f)(5)(ii)(C) of this section. The setting of these devices shall be coordinated with other overload settings at the time of design of the system, and shall be clearly indicated on or near the device. The device shall interrupt the equipment travel in the “down” direction. (g) Inspection and tests Installations and alterations. (2) Periodic inspections and tests. (ii) All parts of the equipment including control systems shall be inspected, and, where necessary, tested by a competent person at intervals specified by the manufacturer/supplier, but not to exceed 12 months, to determine that they are in safe operating condition. Parts subject to wear, such as wire ropes, bearings, gears, and governors shall be inspected and/or tested to determine that they have not worn to such an extent as to affect the safe operation of the installation. (iii) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each inspection and test required under paragraphs (g)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section. The certification record shall include the date of the inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and the number, or other identifier, of the building support structure and equipment which was inspected. This certification record shall be kept readily available for review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant Secretary's representative and by the employer. (iv) Working platforms and their components shall be inspected by the employer for visible defects before every use and after each occurrence which could affect the platform's structural integrity. (3) Maintenance inspections and tests. (ii) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each inspection and test performed under paragraph (g)(3)(i) of this section. The certification record shall include the date of the inspection and test, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and/or test, and an identifier for the platform installation which was inspected. The certification record shall be kept readily available for review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant Secretary's representative and by the employer. (4) Special inspection of governors and secondary brakes. (ii) The results of the inspection and test shall confirm that the initiating device for the secondary braking system operates at the proper overspeed. (iii) The results of the inspection and test shall confirm that the secondary brake is functioning properly. (iv) If any hoisting machine or initiating device for the secondary brake system is removed from the equipment for testing, all reinstalled and directly related components shall be reinspected prior to returning the equipment installation to service. (v) Inspection of governors and secondary brakes shall be performed by a competent person. (vi) The secondary brake governor and actuation device shall be tested before each day's use. Where testing is not feasible, a visual inspection of the brake shall be made instead to ensure that it is free to operate. (5) Suspension wire rope maintenance, inspection and replacement. (ii) Suspension wire rope shall be inspected by a competent person for visible defects and gross damage to the rope before every use and after each occurrence which might affect the wire rope's integrity. (iii) A thorough inspection of suspension wire ropes in service shall be made once a month. Suspension wire ropes that have been inactive for 30 days or longer shall have a thorough inspection before they are placed into service. These thorough inspections of suspension wire ropes shall be performed by a competent person. (iv) The need for replacement of a suspension wire rope shall be determined by inspection and shall be based on the condition of the wire rope. Any of the following conditions or combination of conditions will be cause for removal of the wire rope: (A) Broken wires exceeding three wires in one strand or six wires in one rope lay; (B) Distortion of rope structure such as would result from crushing or kinking; (C) Evidence of heat damage; (D) Evidence of rope deterioration from corrosion; (E) A broken wire within 18 inches (460.8 mm) of the end attachments; (F) Noticeable rusting and pitting; (G) Evidence of core failure (a lengthening of rope lay, protrusion of the rope core and a reduction in rope diameter suggests core failure); or (H) More than one valley break (broken wire). (I) Outer wire wear exceeds one-third of the original outer wire diameter. (J) Any other condition which the competent person determines has significantly affected the integrity of the rope. (v) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each monthly inspection of a suspension wire rope as required in paragraph (g)(5)(iii) of this section. The record shall include the date of the inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and a number, or other identifier, of the wire rope which was inspected. This record of inspection shall be made available for review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant Secretary's representative and by the employer. (6) Hoist inspection. (h) Maintenance General maintenance. (2) Cleaning. (ii) All other parts shall be kept clean if their proper functioning would be affected by the presence of dirt or other contaminants. (3) Periodic resocketing of wire rope fastenings. (ii) Resocketed ropes shall conform to the requirements of paragraph (f)(7) of this section. (iii) Limit switches affected by the resocketed ropes shall be reset, if necessary. (4) Periodic reshackling of suspension wire ropes. (5) Roof systems. (6) Building face guiding members. (7) Inoperative safety devices. (i) Operations Training. (ii) All employees who operate working platforms shall be trained in the following: (A) Recognition of, and preventive measures for, the safety hazards associated with their individual work tasks. (B) General recognition and prevention of safety hazards associated with the use of working platforms, including the provisions in the section relating to the particular working platform to be operated. (C) Emergency action plan procedures required in paragraph (e)(9) of this section. (D) Work procedures required in paragraph (i)(1)(iv) of this section. (E) Personal fall arrest system inspection, care, use and system performance. (iii) Training of employees in the operation and inspection of working platforms shall be done by a competent person. (iv) Written work procedures for the operation, safe use and inspection of working platforms shall be provided for employee training. Pictorial methods of instruction, may be used, in lieu of written work procedures, if employee communication is improved using this method. The operating manuals supplied by manufacturers for platform system components can serve as the basis for these procedures. (v) The employer shall certify that employees have been trained in operating and inspecting a working platform by preparing a certification record which includes the identity of the person trained, the signature of the employer or the person who conducted the training and the date that training was completed. The certification record shall be prepared at the completion of the training required in paragraph (i)(1)(ii) of this section, and shall be maintained in a file for the duration of the employee's employment. The certification record shall be kept readily available for review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant Secretary's representative. (2) Use. (ii) Employees shall be prohibited from working on snow, ice, or other slippery material covering platforms, except for the removal of such materials. (iii) Adequate precautions shall be taken to protect the platform, wire ropes and life lines from damage due to acids or other corrosive substances, in accordance with the recommendations of the corrosive substance producer, supplier, platform manufacturer or other equivalent information sources. Platform members which have been exposed to acids or other corrosive substances shall be washed down with a neutralizing solution, at a frequency recommended by the corrosive substance producer or supplier. (iv) Platform members, wire ropes and life lines shall be protected when using a heat producing process. Wire ropes and life lines which have been contacted by the heat producing process shall be considered to be permanently damaged and shall not be used. (v) The platform shall not be operated in winds in excess of 25 miles per hour (40.2 km/hr) except to move it from an operating to a storage position. Wind speed shall be determined based on the best available information, which includes on-site anemometer readings and local weather forecasts which predict wind velocities for the area. (vi) On exterior installations, an anemometer shall be mounted on the platform to provide information of on-site wind velocities prior to and during the use of the platform. The anemometer may be a portable (hand held) unit which is temporarily mounted during platform use. (vii) Tools, materials and debris not related to the work in progress shall not be allowed to accumulate on platforms. Stabilizer ties shall be located so as to allow unencumbered passage along the full length of the platform and shall be of such length so as not to become entangled in rollers, hoists or other machinery. (j) Personal fall protection. Appendix A to § 1910.66, Guidelines (Advisory) 1. Use of the Appendix. 2. Assurance. 3. Design Requirements. AA—The Aluminum Association, 818 Connecticut Avenue, NW., Washington, DC, 20006 Aluminum Construction Manual Specifications For Aluminum Structures Aluminum Standards and Data AGMA—American Gear Manufacturers Association, 101 North Fort Meyer Dr., Suite 1000, Arlington, VA 22209 AISC—American Institute of Steel Construction, 400 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611 ANSI—American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018 ASCE—American Society of Civil Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017 ASME—American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017 ASTM—American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWS—American Welding Society, Inc., Box 351040, 550 NW. LeJeunne Road, Miami, FL 33126 JIC—Joint Industrial Council, 2139 Wisconsin Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20007 NEMA—National Electric Manufacturers Association, 2101 L Street, NW., Washington, DC 20037 4. Tie-in-guides. Employers should be aware of the hazards associated with tie-in guides in a continuous stabilization system which was not designed properly. For example, joints in these track systems may become extended or discontinuous due to installation or building settlement. If this alignment problem is not corrected, the system could jam when a guide roller or guide shoe strikes a joint and this would cause a hazardous situation for employees. In another instance, faulty design will result in guide rollers being mounted in a line so they will jam in the track at the slightest misalignment. 5. Building anchors (intermittent stabilization system). External or indented type building anchors are acceptable. Receptacles in the building facade used for the indented type should be kept clear of extraneous materials which will hinder their use. During the inspection of the platform installation, evidence of a failure or abuse of the anchors should be brought to the attention of the employer. 6. Stabilizer tie length. The attachment length may vary due to material elongation and this should be considered when selecting the material to be used. Consideration should also be given to the use of ties which are easily installed by employees, since this will encourage their use. 7. Intermittent stabilization system. In this method, as the suspended powered platform descends past the elevation of each anchor, the descent is halted and each of the platform occupants secures a stabilizer tie between a suspension wire rope and a building anchor. The procedure is repeated as each elevation of a building anchor is reached during the descent of the powered platform. As the platform ascends, the procedure is reversed; that is, the stabilizer ties are removed as each elevation of a building anchor is reached. The removal of each stabilizer tie is assured since the platform is provided with stopping devices which will interrupt power to its hoist(s) in the event either stopping device contacts a stabilizer during the ascent of the platform. Figure 2 of appendix B illustrates another type of acceptable intermittent stabilization system which utilizes retaining pins as the quick connect-quick disconnect device in the stabilizer tie. 8. Wire Rope Inspection. If there is any doubt concerning the condition of a wire rope or its ability to perform the required work, the rope should be replaced. The cost of wire rope replacement is quite small if compared to the cost in terms of human injuries, equipment down time and replacement. No listing of critical inspection factors, which serve as a basis for wire rope replacement in the standard, can be a substitute for an experienced inspector of wire rope. The listing serves as a user's guide to the accepted standards by which ropes must be judged. Rope life can be prolonged if preventive maintenance is performed regularly. Cutting off an appropriate length of rope at the end termination before the core degrades and valley breaks appear minimizes degradation at these sections. 9. General Maintenance. 10. Training. Employees who will operate powered platforms with intermittent stabilization systems should receive instruction in the specific ascent and descent procedures involving the assembly and disassembly of the stabilizer ties. An acceptable training program should also include employee instruction in basic inspection procedures for the purpose of determining the need for repair and replacement of platform equipment. In addition, the program should cover the inspection, care and use of the personal fall protection equipment required in paragraph (j)(1) of the standard. In addition, the training program should also include emergency action plan elements. OSHA brochure #1B3088 (Rev.) 1985, “How to Prepare for Workplace Emergencies,” details the basic steps needed to prepare to handle emergencies in the workplace. Following the completion of a training program, the employee should be required to demonstrate competency in operating the equipment safely. Supplemental training of the employee should be provided by the employer, as necessary, if the equipment used or other working conditions should change. An employee who is required to work with chemical products on a platform should receive training in proper cleaning procedures, and in the hazards, care and handling of these products. In addition, the employee should be supplied with the appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves and eye and face protection. 11. Suspension and Securing of Powered Platforms (Equivalency). Appendix B to § 1910.66—Exhibits (Advisory) The three drawings in appendix B illustrate typical platform stabilization systems which are addressed in the standard. The drawings are to be used for reference purposes only, and do not illustrate all the mandatory requirements for each system. Appendix C to § 1910.66 [Reserved] Appendix D to § 1910.66—Existing Installations (Mandatory) Use of the Appendix Appendix D sets out the mandatory building and equipment requirements for applicable permanent installations completed after August 27, 1971, and no later than July 23, 1990 which are exempt from the paragraphs (a), (b)(1), (b)(2), (c), (d), (e), and (f) of this standard. The requirements in appendix D are essentially the same as unrevised building and equipment provisions which previously were designated as 29 CFR 1910.66 (a), (b), (c) and (d) and which were effective on August 27, 1971. Note: All existing installations subject to this appendix shall also comply with paragraphs (g), (h), (i), (j) and appendix C of the standard 29 CFR 1910.66. (a) Definitions applicable to this appendix Angulated roping. (2) ANSI. (3) Babbitted fastenings. (4) Brake—disc type. (5) Brake—self-energizing band type. (6) Brake—shoe type. (7) Building face rollers. (8) Continuous pressure. (9) Control. (10) Controller. (11) Electrical ground. (12) Guide roller. (13) Guide shoe. (14) Interlock. (15) Operating device. (16) Powered platform. (17) Rated load. (18) Relay, direction. (19) Relay, potential for vertical travel. (20) Roof car. (21) Roof-powered platform. (22) Self-powered platform. (23) Traveling cable. (24) Weatherproof. (25) Working platform. (26) Yield point. (27) Zinced fastenings. (b) General requirements. (2) Limitation. (3) Types of powered platforms. (ii) Powered platforms designated as Type F shall meet all the requirements in part II of ANSI A 120.1-1970, American National Standard Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance. A basic requirement of Type F equipment is that the work platform is suspended by at least four wire ropes and designed so that failure of any one wire rope will not substantially alter the normal position of the working platform. Another basic requirement of Type F equipment is that only one layer of hoisting rope is permitted on winding drums. Type F powered platforms may be either roof-powered or self-powered. (iii) Powered platforms designated as Type T shall meet all the requirements in part III of ANSI A120.1-1970 American National Standard Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance, except for section 28, Safety Belts and Life Lines. A basic requirement of Type T equipment is that the working platform is suspended by at least two wire ropes. Failure of one wire rope would not permit the working platform to fall to the ground, but would upset its normal position. Type T powered platforms may be either roof-powered or self-powered. (iv) The requirements of this section apply to powered platforms with winding drum type hoisting machines. It is not the intent of this section to prohibit powered platforms using other types of hoisting machines such as, but not limited to, traction drum hoisting machines, air powered machines, hydraulic powered machines, and internal combustion machines. Installation of powered platforms with other types of hoisting machines is permitted, provided adequate protective devices are used, and provided reasonable safety of life and limb to users of the equipment and to others who may be exposed is assured. (v) Both Type F and Type T powered platforms shall comply with the requirements of appendix C of this standard. (c) Type F powered platforms Roof car, general. (ii) The maximum rated speed at which a power traversed roof car may be moved in a horizontal direction shall be 50 feet per minute. (2) Movement and positioning of roof car. (ii) The horizontal motion of the roof cars shall be positively controlled so as to insure proper movement and positioning of the roof car. (iii) Roof car positioning devices shall be provided to insure that the working platform is placed and retained in proper position for vertical travel and during storage. (iv) Mechanical stops shall be provided to prevent the traversing of the roof car beyond its normal limits of travel. Such stops shall be capable of withstanding a force equal to 100 percent of the inertial effect of the roof car in motion with traversing power applied. (v)(a) The operating device of a power-operated roof car for traversing shall be located on the roof car, the working platform, or both, and shall be of the continuous pressure weather-proof electric type. If more than one operating device is provided, they shall be so arranged that traversing is possible only from one operating device at a time. (b) The operating device shall be so connected that it is not operable until: ( 1 ( 2 (3) Roof car stability. (i) The roof car shall be continuously stable, considering overturning moment as determined by 125 percent rated load, plus maximum dead load and the prescribed wind loading. (ii) The roof car and its anchorages shall be capable of resisting accidental over-tensioning of the wire ropes suspending the working platform and this calculated value shall include the effect of one and one-half times the value. For this calculation, the simultaneous effect of one-half wind load shall be included, and the design stresses shall not exceed those referred to in paragraph (b)(1) of this appendix. (iii) If the load on the motors is at any time in excess of three times that required for lifting the working platform with its rated load the motor shall stall. (4) Access to the roof car. (5) Means for maintenance, repair, and storage. (6) General requirements for working platforms. (7) Load rating plate. (8) Minimum size. (9) Guardrails. (10) Toeboards. (11) Open spaces between guardrails and toeboards. (12) Flooring. 9/16 9/16 (13) Access gates. (14) Operating device for vertical movement of the working platform. (ii) The operating device shall be operable only when all electrical protective devices and interlocks on the working platform are in position for normal service and, the roof car, if provided, is at an established operating point. (15) Emergency electric operative device. (ii) A key for unlocking the compartment housing the emergency operating device shall be mounted in a break-glass receptacle located near the emergency operating device. (16) Manual cranking for emergency operation. (17) Arrangement and guarding of hoisting equipment. (ii) The hoisting equipment shall be power-operated in both up and down directions. (iii) Guard or other protective devices shall be installed wherever rotating shafts or other mechanisms or gears may expose personnel to a hazard. (iv) Friction devices or clutches shall not be used for connecting the main driving mechanism to the drum or drums. Belt or chain-driven machines are prohibited. (18) Hoisting motors. (ii) Hoisting motors shall be in conformance with applicable provisions of paragraph (c)(22) of this appendix, Electric Wiring and Equipment. (iii) Hoisting motors shall be directly connected to the hoisting machinery. Motor couplings, if used, shall be of steel construction. (19) Brakes. (20) Hoisting ropes and rope connections. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) The minimum factor of safety shall be 10, and shall be calculated by the following formula: F = S × N/W Where S = Manufacturer's rated breaking strength of one rope. N = Number of ropes under load. W = Maximum static load on all ropes with the platform and its rated load at any point of its travel. (iv) Hoisting ropes shall be sized to conform with the required factor of safety, but in no case shall the size be less than 5/16 (v) Winding drums shall have at least three turns of rope remaining when the platform has landed at the lowest possible point of its travel. (vi) The lengthening or repairing of wire rope by the joining of two or more lengths is prohibited. (vii) The nondrum ends of the hoisting ropes shall be provided with individual shackle rods which will permit individual adjustment of rope lengths, if required. (viii) More than two reverse bends in each rope is prohibited. (21) Rope tag data. (a) The diameter in inches. (b) Construction classification. (c) Whether nonpreformed or preformed. (d) The grade of material used. (e) The manufacturer's rated breaking strength. (f) Name of the manufacturer of the rope. (g) The month and year the ropes were installed. (22) Electrical wiring and equipment. (ii) All motors and operation and control equipment shall be supplied from a single power source. (iii) The power supply for the powered platform shall be an independent circuit supplied through a fused disconnect switch. (iv) Electrical conductor parts of the power supply system shall be protected against accidental contact. (v) Electrical grounding shall be provided. (a) Provisions for electrical grounding shall be included with the power-supply system. (b) Controller cabinets, motor frames, hoisting machines, the working platform, roof car and roof car track system, and noncurrent carrying parts of electrical equipment, where provided, shall be grounded. (c) The controller, where used, shall be so designed and installed that a single ground or short circuit will not prevent both the normal and final stopping device from stopping the working platform. (d) Means shall be provided on the roof car and working platform for grounding portable electric tools. (e) The working platform shall be grounded through a grounding connection in a traveling cable. Electrically powered tools utilized on the working platform shall be grounded. (vi) Electrical receptacles located on the roof or other exterior location shall be of a weatherproof type and shall be located so as not to be subject to contact with water or accumulated snow. The receptacles shall be grounded and the electric cable shall include a grounding conductor. The receptacle and plug shall be a type designed to avoid hazard to persons inserting or withdrawing the plug. Provision shall be made to prevent application of cable strain directly to the plug and receptacle. (vii) Electric runway conductor systems shall be of the type designed for use in exterior locations and shall be located so as not to be subject to contact with water or accumulated snow. The conductors, collectors, and disconnecting means shall conform to the same requirements as those for cranes and hoists in subpart S of this Part. A grounded conductor shall parallel the power conductors and be so connected that it cannot be opened by the disconnecting means. The system shall be designed to avoid hazard to persons in the area. (viii) Electrical protective devices and interlocks of the weatherproof type shall be provided. (ix) Where the installation includes a roof car, electric contact(s) shall be provided and so connected that the operating devices for the working platform shall be operative only when the roof car is located and mechanically retained at an established operating point. (x) Where the powered platform includes a powered-operated roof car, the operating device for the roof car shall be inoperative when the roof car is mechanically retained at an established operating point. (xi) An electric contact shall be provided and so connected that it will cause the down direction relay for vertical travel to open if the tension in the traveling cable exceeds safe limits. (xii) An automatic overload device shall be provided to cut off the electrical power to the circuit in all hoisting motors for travel in the up direction, should the load applied to the hoisting ropes at either end of the working platform exceed 125 percent of its normal tension with rated load, as shown on the manufacturer's data plate on the working platform. (xiii) An automatic device shall be provided for each hoisting rope which will cut off the electrical power to the hoisting motor or motors in the down direction and apply the brakes if any hoisting rope becomes slack. (xiv) Upper and lower directional limit devices shall be provided to prevent the travel of the working platform beyond the normal upper and lower limits of travel. (xv) Operation of a directional limit device shall prevent further motion in the appropriate direction, if the normal limit of travel has been reached. (xvi) Directional limit devices, if driven from the hoisting machine by chains, tapes, or cables, shall incorporate a device to disconnect the electric power from the hoisting machine and apply both the primary and secondary brakes in the event of failure of the driving means. (xvii) Final terminal stopping devices of the working platform: (a) Final terminal stopping devices for the working platform shall be provided as a secondary means of preventing the working platform from over-traveling at the terminals. (b) The device shall be set to function as close to each terminal landing as practical, but in such a way that under normal operating conditions it will not function when the working platform is stopped by the normal terminal stopping device. (c) Operation of the final terminal stopping device shall open the potential relay for vertical travel, thereby disconnecting the electric power from the hoisting machine, and applying both the primary and secondary brakes. (d) The final terminal stopping device for the upper limit of travel shall be mounted so that it is operated directly by the motion of the working platform itself. (xviii) Emergency stop switches shall be provided in or adjacent to each operating device. (xix) Emergency stop switches shall: (a) Have red operating buttons or handles. (b) Be conspicuously and permanently marked “Stop.” (c) Be the manually opened and manually closed type. (d) Be positively opened with the opening not solely dependent on springs. (xx) The manual operation of an emergency stop switch associated with an operating device for the working platform shall open the potential relay for vertical travel, thereby disconnecting the electric power from the hoisting machine and applying both the primary and secondary brakes. (xxi) The manual operation of the emergency stop switch associated with the operating device for a power-driven roof car shall cause the electrical power to the traverse machine to be interrupted, and the traverse machine brake to apply. (23) Requirements for emergency communications. (ii) Two-way communication shall be established between personnel on the roof and personnel on the stalled working platform before any emergency operation of the working platform is undertaken by personnel on the roof. (iii) The equipment shall permit two-way voice communication between the working platform and (a) Designated personnel continuously available while the powered platform is in use; and (b) Designated personnel on roof-powered platforms, undertaking emergency operation of the working platform by means of the emergency operating device located near the hoisting machine. (iv) The emergency communication equipment shall be one of the following types: (a) Telephone connected to the central telephone exchange system; or (b) Telephones on a limited system or an approved two-way radio system, provided designated personnel are available to receive a message during the time the powered platform is in use. (d) Type T powered platforms Roof car. (2) Working platform. (i) The working platform shall be suspended by at least two wire ropes. (ii) The maximum rated speed at which the working platform of self-powered platforms may be moved in a vertical direction shall not exceed 35 feet per minute. (3) Hoisting equipment. (4) Brakes. (5) Hoisting ropes and rope connections. (ii) Adjustable shackle rods in subparagraph (c)(20)(vii) of this appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms, if the working platform is suspended by more than two wire ropes. (6) Electrical wiring and equipment. (ii) For electrical protective devices the requirements of paragraphs (c)(22) (i) through (viii) of this appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms. Requirements for the “circuit potential limitation” shall be in accordance with specifications contained in part 2, section 26, of ANSI A120.1-1970. (7) Emergency communications. [54 FR 31456, July 28, 1989, as amended at 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 7190, Feb. 14, 2007; 81 FR 82998, Nov. 18, 2016] § 1910.67 Vehicle-mounted elevating and rotating work platforms. (a) Definitions applicable to this section Aerial device. (2) Aerial ladder. (3) Articulating boom platform. (4) Extensible boom platform. (5) Insulated aerial device. (6) Mobile unit. (7) Platform. (8) Vehicle. (9) Vertical tower. (b) General requirements. (2) Aerial lifts may be “field modified” for uses other than those intended by the manufacturer, provided the modification has been certified in writing by the manufacturer or by any other equivalent entity, such as a nationally recognized testing laboratory, to be in conformity with all applicable provisions of ANSI A92.2—1969 and this section, and to be at least as safe as the equipment was before modification. (3) The requirements of this section do not apply to firefighting equipment or to the vehicles upon which aerial devices are mounted, except with respect to the requirement that a vehicle be a stable support for the aerial device. (4) For operations near overhead electric lines, see § 1910.333(c)(3). (c) Specific requirements Ladder trucks and tower trucks. (2) Extensible and articulating boom platforms. (ii) Only trained persons shall operate an aerial lift. (iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working from an aerial lift shall not be permitted. (iv) Employees shall always stand firmly on the floor of the basket, and shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket or use planks, ladders, or other devices for a work position. (v) A personal fall arrest or travel restraint system that meets the requirements in subpart I of this part shall be worn and attached to the boom or basket when working from an aerial lift. (vi) Boom and basket load limits specified by the manufacturer shall not be exceeded. (vii) The brakes shall be set and outriggers, when used, shall be positioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel chocks shall be installed before using an aerial lift on an incline. (viii) An aerial lift truck may not be moved when the boom is elevated in a working position with men in the basket, except for equipment which is specifically designed for this type of operation in accordance with the provisions of paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section. (ix) Articulating boom and extensible boom platforms, primarily designed as personnel carriers, shall have both platform (upper) and lower controls. Upper controls shall be in or beside the platform within easy reach of the operator. Lower controls shall provide for overriding the upper controls. Controls shall be plainly marked as to their function. Lower level controls shall not be operated unless permission has been obtained from the employee in the lift, except in case of emergency. (x) Climbers shall not be worn while performing work from an aerial lift. (xi) The insulated portion of an aerial lift shall not be altered in any manner that might reduce its insulating value. (xii) Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected to see that it is properly cradled and outriggers are in stowed position, except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)(viii) of this section. (3) Electrical tests. (4) Bursting safety factor. (5) “ Welding standards.” (i) Standard Qualification Procedure, AWS B3.0—41. (ii) Recommended Practices for Automotive Welding Design, AWS D8.4-61. (iii) Standard Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, AWS D10.9-69. (iv) Specifications for Welding Highway and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.0-69. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 13439, Mar. 26, 1975; 55 FR 32014, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 79 FR 37190, July 1, 2014; 81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016] § 1910.68 Manlifts. (a) Definitions applicable to this section Handhold (Handgrip). (2) Open type. (3) Closed type. (4) Limit switch. (5) Manlift. (6) Rated speed. (7) Split-rail switch. (8) Step (platform). (9) Travel. (b) General requirements Application. (2) Purpose. (3) Design requirements. (4) Reference to other codes and subparts. (5) Floor openings Allowable size. (ii) Uniformity. (6) Landing Vertical clearance. (ii) Clear landing space. (iii) Lighting and landing. (iv) Landing surface. (v) Emergency landings. ( a ( b ( c (7) Guards on underside of floor openings Fixed type. ( a ( b ( c (ii) Floating type. (8) Protection of entrances and exits Guard rail requirement. (ii) Construction. (iii) Gates. (iv) Maze. (v) Except where building layout prevents, entrances at all landings shall be in the same relative position. (9) Guards for openings Construction. (ii) Height and location. (10) Bottom arrangement Bottom landing. (ii) Location of lower pulley. (iii) Mounting platform. (iv) Guardrails. (11) Top arrangements Clearance from floor. (ii) Pulley clearance. a ( b (iii) Emergency grab rail. (12) Emergency exit ladder. (13) Superstructure bracing. (14) Illumination General. (ii) Control of illumination. (15) Weather protection. (c) Mechanical requirements Machines, general Brakes. (ii) Belt. a ( b ( c (2) Speed Maximum speed. (ii) [Reserved] (3) Platforms or steps Minimum depth. (ii) Width. (iii) Distance between steps. (iv) Angle of step. (v) Surfaces. (vi) Strength of step supports. ( a ( b ( c (vii) Prohibition of steps without handholds. (4) Handholds Location. (ii) Size. 1/2 (iii) Strength. (iv) Prohibition of handhold without steps. (v) Type. (5) Up limit stops Requirements. ( a ( b ( c (ii) Manual reset location. (iii) Cut-off point. (iv) Electrical requirements. a ( b ( c ( d (6) Emergency stop General. (ii) Location. (iii) Operation. (iv) Rope. (7) Instruction and warning signs Instruction signs at landings or belts. ( a ( b Face the Belt. Use the Handholds. To Stop—Pull Rope. (ii) Top floor warning sign and light. a “TOP FLOOR—GET OFF” Signs shall be in block letters not less than 2 inches in height. This sign shall be located within easy view of an ascending passenger and not more than 2 feet above the top terminal landing. ( b a (iii) Visitor warning. (d) Operating rules Proper use of manlifts. (2) [Reserved] (e) Periodic inspection Frequency. (2) Items covered. Steps. Step Fastenings. Rails. Rail Supports and Fastenings. Rollers and Slides. Belt and Belt Tension. Handholds and Fastenings. Floor Landings. Guardrails. Lubrication. Limit Switches. Warning Signs and Lights. Illumination. Drive Pulley. Bottom (boot) Pulley and Clearance. Pulley Supports. Motor. Driving Mechanism. Brake. Electrical Switches. Vibration and Misalignment. “Skip” on up or down run when mounting step (indicating worn gears). (3) Inspection record. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 55 FR 32014, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71068, Dec. 14, 2007; 81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016] Subpart G—Occupational Health and Environmental Control Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 50017), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. § 1910.94 Ventilation. (a) Abrasive blasting Definitions applicable to this paragraph Abrasive. (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. (iii) Blast cleaning barrel. (iv) Blast cleaning room. (v) Blasting cabinet. (vi) Clean air. (vii) Dust collector. (viii) Exhaust ventilation system. a b c d e (ix) Particulate-filter respirator. (x) Respirable dust. (xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. (xii) Abrasive blasting. (2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting. (ii) The concentration of respirable dust or fume in the breathing zone of the abrasive-blasting operator or any other worker shall be kept below the levels specified in § 1910.1000. (iii) Organic abrasives which are combustible shall be used only in automatic systems. Where flammable or explosive dust mixtures may be present, the construction of the equipment, including the exhaust system and all electric wiring, shall conform to the requirements of American National Standard Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1-1961 (NFPA 91-1961), which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, and subpart S of this part. The blast nozzle shall be bonded and grounded to prevent the build up of static charges. Where flammable or explosive dust mixtures may be present, the abrasive blasting enclosure, the ducts, and the dust collector shall be constructed with loose panels or explosion venting areas, located on sides away from any occupied area, to provide for pressure relief in case of explosion, following the principles set forth in the National Fire Protection Association Explosion Venting Guide, NFPA 68-1954, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( 1 ( 2 (ii) [Reserved] (4) Exhaust ventilation systems. ( a ( b (ii) In installations where the abrasive is recirculated, the exhaust ventilation system for the blasting enclosure shall not be relied upon for the removal of fines from the spent abrasive instead of an abrasive separator. An abrasive separator shall be provided for the purpose. (iii) The air exhausted from blast-cleaning equipment shall be discharged through dust collecting equipment. Dust collectors shall be set up so that the accumulated dust can be emptied and removed without contaminating other working areas. (5) Personal protective equipment. (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting operators: ( a ( b ( c (iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter respirators, commonly referred to as dust-filter respirators, may be used for short, intermittent, or occasional dust exposures such as cleanup, dumping of dust collectors, or unloading shipments of sand at a receiving point when it is not feasible to control the dust by enclosure, exhaust ventilation, or other means. The respirators used must be approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for protection against the specific type of dust encountered. ( a ( b (iv) For employees who use respirators required by this section, the employer must implement a respiratory protection program in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134. (v) Operators shall be equipped with heavy canvas or leather gloves and aprons or equivalent protection to protect them from the impact of abrasives. Safety shoes shall be worn to protect against foot injury where heavy pieces of work are handled. ( a ( b (6) Air supply and air compressors. (7) Operational procedures and general safety. (8) Scope. (b) Grinding, polishing, and buffing operations Definitions applicable to this paragraph Abrasive cutting-off wheels. (ii) Belts. (iii) Branch pipe. (iv) Cradle. (v) Disc wheels. (vi) Entry loss. (vii) Exhaust system. (viii) Grinding wheels. (ix) Header pipe (main pipe). (x) Hoods and enclosures. (xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc grinder. (xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc grinder. (xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. (xiv) Portable grinder. (xv) Scratch brush wheels. (xvi) Swing-frame grinder. (xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). (xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. (2) Application. (3) Hood and branch pipe requirements. (ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands, pedestals, benches, and special-purpose grinding machines and abrasive cutting-off wheels shall have not less than the minimum exhaust volumes shown in Table G-4 with a recommended minimum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per minute in the main. The entry losses from all hoods except the vertical-spindle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65 velocity pressure for a straight takeoff and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical-spindle disc grinder hood is shown in figure G-1 (following § 1910.94(b)). Table G-4—Grinding and Abrasive Cutting-Off Wheels Wheel diameter (inches) Wheel width (inches) Minimum exhaust volume (feet 3 To 9 1 1 2 220 Over 9 to 16 2 390 Over 16 to 19 3 500 Over 19 to 24 4 610 Over 24 to 30 5 880 Over 30 to 36 6 1,200 For any wheel wider than wheel diameters shown in Table G-4, increase the exhaust volume by the ratio of the new width to the width shown. Example: If wheel width = 4 1/2 4.5 ÷ 4 × 610 = 686 (rounded to 690). (iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all buffing and polishing wheels mounted on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or special-purpose machines shall have not less than the minimum exhaust volume shown in Table G-5. Table G-5—Buffing and Polishing Wheels Wheel diameter (inches) Wheel width (inches) Minimum exhaust volume (feet 3 To 9 2 300 Over 9 to 16 3 500 Over 16 to 19 4 610 Over 19 to 24 5 740 Over 24 to 30 6 1,040 Over 30 to 36 6 1,200 (iv) Grinding wheels or discs for horizontal single-spindle disc grinders shall be hooded to collect the dust or dirt generated by the grinding operation and the hoods shall be connected to branch pipes having exhaust volumes as shown in Table G-6. Table G-6—Horizontal Single-Spindle Disc Grinder Disc diameter (inches) Exhaust volume (ft. 3 Up to 12 220 Over 12 to 19 390 Over 19 to 30 610 Over 30 to 36 880 (v) Grinding wheels or discs for horizontal double-spindle disc grinders shall have a hood enclosing the grinding chamber and the hood shall be connected to one or more branch pipes having exhaust volumes as shown in Table G-7. Table G-7—Horizontal Double-Spindle Disc Grinder Disc diameter (inches) Exhaust volume (ft. 3 Up to 19 610 Over 19 to 25 880 Over 25 to 30 1,200 Over 30 to 53 1,770 Over 53 to 72 6,280 (vi) Grinding wheels or discs for vertical single-spindle disc grinders shall be encircled with hoods to remove the dust generated in the operation. The hoods shall be connected to one or more branch pipes having exhaust volumes as shown in Table G-8. Table G-8—Vertical Spindle Disc Grinder Disc diameter (inches) One-half or more of disc covered Disc not covered Number 1 Exhaust foot 3 Number 1 Exhaust foot 3 Up to 20 1 500 2 780 Over 20 to 30 2 780 2 1,480 Over 30 to 53 2 1,770 4 3,530 Over 53 to 72 2 3,140 5 6,010 1 (vii) Grinding and polishing belts shall be provided with hoods to remove dust and dirt generated in the operations and the hoods shall be connected to branch pipes having exhaust volumes as shown in Table G-9. Table G-9—Grinding and Polishing Belts Belts width (inches) Exhaust volume (ft. 3 Up to 3 220 Over 3 to 5 300 Over 5 to 7 390 Over 7 to 9 500 Over 9 to 11 610 Over 11 to 13 740 (viii) Cradles and swing-frame grinders. Where cradles are used for handling the parts to be ground, polished, or buffed, requiring large partial enclosures to house the complete operation, a minimum average air velocity of 150 feet per minute shall be maintained over the entire opening of the enclosure. Swing-frame grinders shall also be exhausted in the same manner as provided for cradles. (See fig. G-3) (ix) Where the work is outside the hood, air volumes must be increased as shown in American Standard Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960 (section 4, exhaust hoods). (4) Exhaust systems. (ii) Exhaust systems for grinding, polishing, and buffing operations shall be tested in the manner described in American Standard Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960. (iii) All exhaust systems shall be provided with suitable dust collectors. (5) Hood and enclosure design. a ( b (ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands, pedestals, and bench grinders shall be designed in accordance with figure G-2. The adjustable tongue shown in the figure shall be kept in working order and shall be adjusted within one-fourth inch of the wheel periphery at all times. (iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be provided with exhaust booths as indicated in figure G-3. (iv) Portable grinding operations, whenever the nature of the work permits, shall be conducted within a partial enclosure. The opening in the enclosure shall be no larger than is actually required in the operation and an average face air velocity of not less than 200 feet per minute shall be maintained. (v) Hoods for polishing and buffing and scratch-brush wheels shall be constructed to conform as closely to figure G-4 as the nature of the work will permit. (vi) Cradle grinding and polishing operations shall be performed within a partial enclosure similar to figure G-5. The operator shall be positioned outside the working face of the opening of the enclosure. The face opening of the enclosure should not be any greater in area than that actually required for the performance of the operation and the average air velocity into the working face of the enclosure shall not be less than 150 feet per minute. (vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spindle disc grinders shall be constructed to conform as closely as possible to the hood shown in figure G-6. It is essential that there be a space between the back of the wheel and the hood, and a space around the periphery of the wheel of at least 1 inch in order to permit the suction to act around the wheel periphery. The opening on the side of the disc shall be no larger than is required for the grinding operation, but must never be less than twice the area of the branch outlet. (viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc grinders shall have a hood encircling the wheels and grinding chamber similar to that illustrated in figure G-7. The openings for passing the work into the grinding chamber should be kept as small as possible, but must never be less than twice the area of the branch outlets. (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders shall be encircled with a hood so constructed that the heavy dust is drawn off a surface of the disc and the lighter dust exhausted through a continuous slot at the top of the hood as shown in figure G-1. (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods shall be constructed as close to the operation as possible. The hood should extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch wide openings should be provided on either side. Figure G-8 shows a typical hood for a belt operation. Dia D. Exhaust E Volume Exhausted at 4,500 ft/min ft 3 Note Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. 20 1 4 1 4 500 When one-half or more of the disc can be hooded, use exhaust ducts as shown at the left. Over 20 30 2 4 780 Over 30 72 2 6 1,770 Over 53 72 2 8 3,140 20 2 4 780 When no hood can be used over disc, use exhaust ducts as shown at left. Over 20 20 2 4 780 Over 30 30 2 5 1 2 1,480 Over 53 53 4 6 3,530 72 5 7 6,010 Entry loss = 1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure. Minimum slot velocity = 2,000 ft/min— 1 2 Wheel dimension, inches Exhaust outlet, inches E Volume of air at 4,500 ft/min Diameter Width, Max Min= d Max= D 9 1 1 2 3 220 Over 9 16 2 4 390 Over 16 19 3 4 1 2 500 Over 19 24 4 5 610 Over 24 30 5 6 880 Over 30 36 6 7 1,200 Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. Standard Buffing and Polishing Hood Wheel dimension, inches Exhaust outlet, inches E Volume of air at 4,500 ft/min Diameter Width, Max Min= d Max= D 9 2 3 1 2 300 Over 9 16 3 4 500 Over 16 19 4 5 610 Over 19 24 5 5 1 2 740 Over 24 30 6 6 1 2 1.040 Over 30 36 6 7 1.200 Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. Dia D, Exhaust E, Volume exhausted at 4,500 ft/min ft 3 Min. Max. 12 3 220 Over 12 19 4 390 Over 19 30 5 610 Over 30 36 6 880 Note: Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff. Disc dia. inches Exhaust E Volume exhaust at 4,500 ft/min. ft 3 Note Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. 19 1 5 610 Over 19 25 1 6 880 When width “W” permits, exhaust ducts should be as near heaviest grinding as possible. Over 25 30 1 7 1,200 Over 30 53 2 6 1,770 Over 53 72 4 8 6,280 Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff. Belt width W. Inches Exhaust volume. ft. 1 Up to 3 220 3 to 5 300 5 to 7 390 7 to 9 500 9 to 11 610 11 to 13 740 Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min main. Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. (6) Scope. (c) Spray finishing operations Definitions applicable to this paragraph Spray-finishing operations. (ii) Spray booth. (iii) Spray room. (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. (2) Location and application. (3) Design and construction of spray booths. ( a ( b (ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not be less than 6 1/2 (iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and dry-type overspray collectors shall conform to the requirements of § 1910.107(b)(4) and (b)(5). ( a ( b (iv) ( a ( b (v) Collecting tanks shall be of welded steel construction or other suitable non-combustible material. If pits are used as collecting tanks, they shall be concrete, masonry, or other material having similar properties. ( a ( b (vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and headers shall be adequately sized to insure sufficient water flow to provide efficient operation of the water chamber. (4) Design and construction of spray rooms. (ii) Spray rooms shall have noncombustible fire doors and shutters. (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately ventilated so that the atmosphere in the breathing zone of the operator shall be maintained in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(6)(ii) of this section. (iv) Spray rooms used for production spray-finishing operations shall conform to the requirements for spray booths. (5) Ventilation. ( a ( b (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to transport makeup air to spray booths or surrounding areas shall be constructed of noncombustible materials. ( a ( b ( c (iii)( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g (6) Velocity and air flow requirements. Table G-10—Minimum Maintained Velocities Into Spray Booths Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth Crossdraft, f.p.m. Airflow velocities, f.p.m. Design Range Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth without operator Negligible 50 large booth 50-75 100 small booth 75-125 Air-operated guns, manual or automatic Up to 50 100 large booth 75-125 150 small booth 125-175 Air-operated guns, manual or automatic Up to 100 150 large booth 125-175 200 small booth 150-250 Notes: (1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of the booth to its height and width. (2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of 100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted. (3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas. (4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed “Design.” However, booths operating with velocities shown in the column headed “Range” are in compliance with this standard. (ii) In addition to the requirements in paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this section the total air volume exhausted through a spray booth shall be such as to dilute solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of the lower explosive limit of the solvent being sprayed. An example of the method of calculating this volume is given below. Example: To determine the lower explosive limits of the most common solvents used in spray finishing, see Table G-11. Column 1 gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by volume of air. Note that the quantity of solvent will be diminished by the quantity of solids and nonflammables contained in the finish. To determine the volume of air in cubic feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gallon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower explosive limit, apply the following formula: Dilution volume required per gallon of solvent = 4 (100−LEL) (cubic feet of vapor per gallon) ÷ LEL Using toluene as the solvent. (1) LEL of toluene from Table G-11, column 2, is 1.4 percent. (2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from Table G-11, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per gallon. (3) Dilution volume required= 4 (100−1.4) 30.4 ÷ 1.4 = 8,564 cubic feet. (4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of required ventilation, multiply the dilution volume required per gallon of solvent by the number of gallons of solvent evaporated per minute. Table G-11—Lower Explosive Limit of Some Commonly Used Solvents Solvent Cubic feet per gallon of vapor of liquid at 70 °F. Lower explosive limit in percent by volume of air at 70 °F Column 1 Column 2 Acetone 44.0 2.6 Amyl Acetate (iso) 21.6 1 Amyl Alcohol (n) 29.6 1.2 Amyl Alcohol (iso) 29.6 1.2 Benzene 36.8 1 Butyl Acetate (n) 24.8 1.7 Butyl Alcohol (n) 35.2 1.4 Butyl Cellosolve 24.8 1.1 Cellosolve 33.6 1.8 Cellosolve Acetate 23.2 1.7 Cyclohexanone 31.2 1 1,1 Dichloroethylene 42.4 5.9 1,2 Dichloroethylene 42.4 9.7 Ethyl Acetate 32.8 2.5 Ethyl Alcohol 55.2 4.3 Ethyl Lactate 28.0 1 Methyl Acetate 40.0 3.1 Methyl Alcohol 80.8 7.3 Methyl Cellosolve 40.8 2.5 Methyl Ethyl Ketone 36.0 1.8 Methyl n-Propyl Ketone 30.4 1.5 Naphtha (VM&P) (76° Naphtha) 22.4 0.9 Naphtha (100 °Flash) Safety Solvent—Stoddard Solvent 23.2 1.0 Propyl Acetate (n) 27.2 2.8 Propyl Acetate (iso) 28.0 1.1 Propyl Alcohol (n) 44.8 2.1 Propyl Alcohol (iso) 44.0 2.0 Toluene 30.4 1.4 Turpentine 20.8 0.8 Xylene (o) 26.4 1.0 1 (iii)( a ( b (7) Make-up air. (ii) Where a spray booth or room receives make-up air through self-closing doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall be fully open at all times when the booth or room is in use for spraying. The velocity of air through such doors, dampers, or louvers shall not exceed 200 feet per minute. If the fan characteristics are such that the required air flow through the booth will be provided, higher velocities through the doors, dampers, or louvers may be used. (iii)( a ( b (iv)( a ( b ( c ( d ( e f ( f ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (8) Scope. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 40 FR 24522, June 9, 1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009] § 1910.95 Occupational noise exposure. (a) Protection against the effects of noise exposure shall be provided when the sound levels exceed those shown in Table G-16 when measured on the A scale of a standard sound level meter at slow response. When noise levels are determined by octave band analysis, the equivalent A-weighted sound level may be determined as follows: Figure G-9 Equivalent sound level contours. Octave band sound pressure levels may be converted to the equivalent A-weighted sound level by plotting them on this graph and noting the A-weighted sound level corresponding to the point of highest penetration into the sound level contours. This equivalent A-weighted sound level, which may differ from the actual A-weighted sound level of the noise, is used to determine exposure limits from Table 1.G-16. (b)(1) When employees are subjected to sound exceeding those listed in Table G-16, feasible administrative or engineering controls shall be utilized. If such controls fail to reduce sound levels within the levels of Table G-16, personal protective equipment shall be provided and used to reduce sound levels within the levels of the table. (2) If the variations in noise level involve maxima at intervals of 1 second or less, it is to be considered continuous. Table G-16—Permissible Noise Exposures 1 Duration per day, hours Sound level dBA slow response 8 90 6 92 4 95 3 97 2 100 1 1 2 102 1 105 1 2 110 1 4 115 1 C 1 T 1 C 2 T 2 C n T n Cn Tn Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed 140 dB peak sound pressure level. (c) Hearing conservation program. (2) For purposes of paragraphs (c) through (n) of this section, an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels or a dose of fifty percent shall also be referred to as the action level. (d) Monitoring. (i) The sampling strategy shall be designed to identify employees for inclusion in the hearing conservation program and to enable the proper selection of hearing protectors. (ii) Where circumstances such as high worker mobility, significant variations in sound level, or a significant component of impulse noise make area monitoring generally inappropriate, the employer shall use representative personal sampling to comply with the monitoring requirements of this paragraph unless the employer can show that area sampling produces equivalent results. (2)(i) All continuous, intermittent and impulsive sound levels from 80 decibels to 130 decibels shall be integrated into the noise measurements. (ii) Instruments used to measure employee noise exposure shall be calibrated to ensure measurement accuracy. (3) Monitoring shall be repeated whenever a change in production, process, equipment or controls increases noise exposures to the extent that: (i) Additional employees may be exposed at or above the action level; or (ii) The attenuation provided by hearing protectors being used by employees may be rendered inadequate to meet the requirements of paragraph (j) of this section. (e) Employee notification. (f) Observation of monitoring. (g) Audiometric testing program. (2) The program shall be provided at no cost to employees. (3) Audiometric tests shall be performed by a licensed or certified audiologist, otolaryngologist, or other physician, or by a technician who is certified by the Council of Accreditation in Occupational Hearing Conservation, or who has satisfactorily demonstrated competence in administering audiometric examinations, obtaining valid audiograms, and properly using, maintaining and checking calibration and proper functioning of the audiometers being used. A technician who operates microprocessor audiometers does not need to be certified. A technician who performs audiometric tests must be responsible to an audiologist, otolaryngologist or physician. (4) All audiograms obtained pursuant to this section shall meet the requirements of appendix C: Audiometric Measuring Instruments. (5) Baseline audiogram. (ii) Mobile test van exception. (iii) Testing to establish a baseline audiogram shall be preceded by at least 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise. Hearing protectors may be used as a substitute for the requirement that baseline audiograms be preceded by 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise. (iv) The employer shall notify employees of the need to avoid high levels of non-occupational noise exposure during the 14-hour period immediately preceding the audiometric examination. (6) Annual audiogram. (7) Evaluation of audiogram. (ii) If the annual audiogram shows that an employee has suffered a standard threshold shift, the employer may obtain a retest within 30 days and consider the results of the retest as the annual audiogram. (iii) The audiologist, otolaryngologist, or physician shall review problem audiograms and shall determine whether there is a need for further evaluation. The employer shall provide to the person performing this evaluation the following information: (A) A copy of the requirements for hearing conservation as set forth in paragraphs (c) through (n) of this section; (B) The baseline audiogram and most recent audiogram of the employee to be evaluated; (C) Measurements of background sound pressure levels in the audiometric test room as required in appendix D: Audiometric Test Rooms. (D) Records of audiometer calibrations required by paragraph (h)(5) of this section. (8) Follow-up procedures. (ii) Unless a physician determines that the standard threshold shift is not work related or aggravated by occupational noise exposure, the employer shall ensure that the following steps are taken when a standard threshold shift occurs: (A) Employees not using hearing protectors shall be fitted with hearing protectors, trained in their use and care, and required to use them. (B) Employees already using hearing protectors shall be refitted and retrained in the use of hearing protectors and provided with hearing protectors offering greater attenuation if necessary. (C) The employee shall be referred for a clinical audiological evaluation or an otological examination, as appropriate, if additional testing is necessary or if the employer suspects that a medical pathology of the ear is caused or aggravated by the wearing of hearing protectors. (D) The employee is informed of the need for an otological examination if a medical pathology of the ear that is unrelated to the use of hearing protectors is suspected. (iii) If subsequent audiometric testing of an employee whose exposure to noise is less than an 8-hour TWA of 90 decibels indicates that a standard threshold shift is not persistent, the employer: (A) Shall inform the employee of the new audiometric interpretation; and (B) May discontinue the required use of hearing protectors for that employee. (9) Revised baseline. (i) The standard threshold shift revealed by the audiogram is persistent; or (ii) The hearing threshold shown in the annual audiogram indicates significant improvement over the baseline audiogram. (10) Standard threshold shift. (ii) In determining whether a standard threshold shift has occurred, allowance may be made for the contribution of aging (presbycusis) to the change in hearing level by correcting the annual audiogram according to the procedure described in appendix F: Calculation and Application of Age Correction to Audiograms. (h) Audiometric test requirements. (2) Audiometric tests shall be conducted with audiometers (including microprocessor audiometers) that meet the specifications of, and are maintained and used in accordance with, American National Standard Specification for Audiometers, S3.6-1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (3) Pulsed-tone and self-recording audiometers, if used, shall meet the requirements specified in appendix C: Audiometric Measuring Instruments. (4) Audiometric examinations shall be administered in a room meeting the requirements listed in appendix D: Audiometric Test Rooms. (5) Audiometer calibration. (ii) Audiometer calibration shall be checked acoustically at least annually in accordance with appendix E: Acoustic Calibration of Audiometers. (iii) An exhaustive calibration shall be performed at least every two years in accordance with sections 4.1.2; 4.1.3.; 4.1.4.3; 4.2; 4.4.1; 4.4.2; 4.4.3; and 4.5 of the American National Standard Specification for Audiometers, S3.6-1969. Test frequencies below 500 Hz and above 6000 Hz may be omitted from this calibration. (i) Hearing protectors. (2) Employers shall ensure that hearing protectors are worn: (i) By an employee who is required by paragraph (b)(1) of this section to wear personal protective equipment; and (ii) By any employee who is exposed to an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels or greater, and who: (A) Has not yet had a baseline audiogram established pursuant to paragraph (g)(5)(ii); or (B) Has experienced a standard threshold shift. (3) Employees shall be given the opportunity to select their hearing protectors from a variety of suitable hearing protectors provided by the employer. (4) The employer shall provide training in the use and care of all hearing protectors provided to employees. (5) The employer shall ensure proper initial fitting and supervise the correct use of all hearing protectors. (j) Hearing protector attenuation. Methods for Estimating the Adequacy of Hearing Protection Attenuation. (2) Hearing protectors must attenuate employee exposure at least to an 8-hour time-weighted average of 90 decibels as required by paragraph (b) of this section. (3) For employees who have experienced a standard threshold shift, hearing protectors must attenuate employee exposure to an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels or below. (4) The adequacy of hearing protector attenuation shall be re-evaluated whenever employee noise exposures increase to the extent that the hearing protectors provided may no longer provide adequate attenuation. The employer shall provide more effective hearing protectors where necessary. (k) Training program. (2) The training program shall be repeated annually for each employee included in the hearing conservation program. Information provided in the training program shall be updated to be consistent with changes in protective equipment and work processes. (3) The employer shall ensure that each employee is informed of the following: (i) The effects of noise on hearing; (ii) The purpose of hearing protectors, the advantages, disadvantages, and attenuation of various types, and instructions on selection, fitting, use, and care; and (iii) The purpose of audiometric testing, and an explanation of the test procedures. (l) Access to information and training materials. (2) The employer shall provide to affected employees any informational materials pertaining to the standard that are supplied to the employer by the Assistant Secretary. (3) The employer shall provide, upon request, all materials related to the employer's training and education program pertaining to this standard to the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (m) Recordkeeping Exposure measurements. (2) Audiometric tests. (ii) This record shall include: (A) Name and job classification of the employee; (B) Date of the audiogram; (C) The examiner's name; (D) Date of the last acoustic or exhaustive calibration of the audiometer; and (E) Employee's most recent noise exposure assessment. (F) The employer shall maintain accurate records of the measurements of the background sound pressure levels in audiometric test rooms. (3) Record retention. (i) Noise exposure measurement records shall be retained for two years. (ii) Audiometric test records shall be retained for the duration of the affected employee's employment. (4) Access to records. (5) Transfer of records. (n) Appendices. (2) Appendices F and G to this section are informational and are not intended to create any additional obligations not otherwise imposed or to detract from any existing obligations. (o) Exemptions. Appendix A to § 1910.95—Noise Exposure Computation This appendix is Mandatory I. Computation of Employee Noise Exposure (1) Noise dose is computed using Table G-16a as follows: (i) When the sound level, L, is constant over the entire work shift, the noise dose, D, in percent, is given by: D = 100 C/T where C is the total length of the work day, in hours, and T is the reference duration corresponding to the measured sound level, L, as given in Table G-16a or by the formula shown as a footnote to that table. (ii) When the workshift noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of noise at different levels, the total noise dose over the work day is given by: D = 100(C 1 1 2 2 n n where C n n (2) The eight-hour time-weighted average sound level (TWA), in decibels, may be computed from the dose, in percent, by means of the formula: TWA = 16.61 log 10 (3) A table relating dose and TWA is given in Section II. Table G-16a A-weighted sound level, L (decibel) Reference duration, T (hour) 80 32 81 27.9 82 24.3 83 21.1 84 18.4 85 16 86 13.9 87 12.1 88 10.6 89 9.2 90 8 91 7.0 92 6.1 93 5.3 94 4.6 95 4 96 3.5 97 3.0 98 2.6 99 2.3 100 2 101 1.7 102 1.5 103 1.3 104 1.1 105 1 106 0.87 107 0.76 108 0.66 109 0.57 110 0.5 111 0.44 112 0.38 113 0.33 114 0.29 115 0.25 116 0.22 117 0.19 118 0.16 119 0.14 120 0.125 121 0.11 122 0.095 123 0.082 124 0.072 125 0.063 126 0.054 127 0.047 128 0.041 129 0.036 130 0.031 In the above table the reference duration, T, is computed by where L is the measured A-weighted sound level. II. Conversion Between “Dose” and “8-Hour Time-Weighted Average” Sound Level Compliance with paragraphs (c)-(r) of this regulation is determined by the amount of exposure to noise in the workplace. The amount of such exposure is usually measured with an audiodosimeter which gives a readout in terms of “dose.” In order to better understand the requirements of the amendment, dosimeter readings can be converted to an “8-hour time-weighted average sound level.” (TWA). In order to convert the reading of a dosimeter into TWA, see Table A-1, below. This table applies to dosimeters that are set by the manufacturer to calculate dose or percent exposure according to the relationships in Table G-16a. So, for example, a dose of 91 percent over an eight hour day results in a TWA of 89.3 dB, and, a dose of 50 percent corresponds to a TWA of 85 dB. If the dose as read on the dosimeter is less than or greater than the values found in Table A-1, the TWA may be calculated by using the formula: TWA=16.61 log 10 Table A-1—Conversion From “Percent Noise Exposure” or “Dose” to “8-Hour Time-Weighted Average Sound Level” (TWA) Dose or percent noise exposure TWA 10 73.4 15 76.3 20 78.4 25 80.0 30 81.3 35 82.4 40 83.4 45 84.2 50 85.0 55 85.7 60 86.3 65 86.9 70 87.4 75 87.9 80 88.4 81 88.5 82 88.6 83 88.7 84 88.7 85 88.8 86 88.9 87 89.0 88 89.1 89 89.2 90 89.2 91 89.3 92 89.4 93 89.5 94 89.6 95 89.6 96 89.7 97 89.8 98 89.9 99 89.9 100 90.0 101 90.1 102 90.1 103 90.2 104 90.3 105 90.4 106 90.4 107 90.5 108 90.6 109 90.6 110 90.7 111 90.8 112 90.8 113 90.9 114 90.9 115 91.1 116 91.1 117 91.1 118 91.2 119 91.3 120 91.3 125 91.6 130 91.9 135 92.2 140 92.4 145 92.7 150 92.9 155 93.2 160 93.4 165 93.6 170 93.8 175 94.0 180 94.2 185 94.4 190 94.6 195 94.8 200 95.0 210 95.4 220 95.7 230 96.0 240 96.3 250 96.6 260 96.9 270 97.2 280 97.4 290 97.7 300 97.9 310 98.2 320 98.4 330 98.6 340 98.8 350 99.0 360 99.2 370 99.4 380 99.6 390 99.8 400 100.0 410 100.2 420 100.4 430 100.5 440 100.7 450 100.8 460 101.0 470 101.2 480 101.3 490 101.5 500 101.6 510 101.8 520 101.9 530 102.0 540 102.2 550 102.3 560 102.4 570 102.6 580 102.7 590 102.8 600 102.9 610 103.0 620 103.2 630 103.3 640 103.4 650 103.5 660 103.6 670 103.7 680 103.8 690 103.9 700 104.0 710 104.1 720 104.2 730 104.3 740 104.4 750 104.5 760 104.6 770 104.7 780 104.8 790 104.9 800 105.0 810 105.1 820 105.2 830 105.3 840 105.4 850 105.4 860 105.5 870 105.6 880 105.7 890 105.8 900 105.8 910 105.9 920 106.0 930 106.1 940 106.2 950 106.2 960 106.3 970 106.4 980 106.5 990 106.5 999 106.6 Appendix B to § 1910.95—Methods for Estimating the Adequacy of Hearing Protector Attenuation This appendix is Mandatory For employees who have experienced a significant threshold shift, hearing protector attenuation must be sufficient to reduce employee exposure to a TWA of 85 dB. Employers must select one of the following methods by which to estimate the adequacy of hearing protector attenuation. The most convenient method is the Noise Reduction Rating (NRR) developed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). According to EPA regulation, the NRR must be shown on the hearing protector package. The NRR is then related to an individual worker's noise environment in order to assess the adequacy of the attenuation of a given hearing protector. This appendix describes four methods of using the NRR to determine whether a particular hearing protector provides adequate protection within a given exposure environment. Selection among the four procedures is dependent upon the employer's noise measuring instruments. Instead of using the NRR, employers may evaluate the adequacy of hearing protector attenuation by using one of the three methods developed by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), which are described in the “List of Personal Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data,” HEW Publication No. 76-120, 1975, pages 21-37. These methods are known as NIOSH methods #1B1, #1B2 and #1B3. The NRR described below is a simplification of NIOSH method #1B2. The most complex method is NIOSH method #1B1, which is probably the most accurate method since it uses the largest amount of spectral information from the individual employee's noise environment. As in the case of the NRR method described below, if one of the NIOSH methods is used, the selected method must be applied to an individual's noise environment to assess the adequacy of the attenuation. Employers should be careful to take a sufficient number of measurements in order to achieve a representative sample for each time segment. Note: The employer must remember that calculated attenuation values reflect realistic values only to the extent that the protectors are properly fitted and worn. When using the NRR to assess hearing protector adequacy, one of the following methods must be used: (i) When using a dosimeter that is capable of C-weighted measurements: (A) Obtain the employee's C-weighted dose for the entire workshift, and convert to TWA (see appendix A, II). (B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted TWA under the ear protector. (ii) When using a dosimeter that is not capable of C-weighted measurements, the following method may be used: (A) Convert the A-weighted dose to TWA (see appendix A). (B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR. (C) Subtract the remainder from the A-weighted TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted TWA under the ear protector. (iii) When using a sound level meter set to the A-weighting network: (A) Obtain the employee's A-weighted TWA. (B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR, and subtract the remainder from the A-weighted TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted TWA under the ear protector. (iv) When using a sound level meter set on the C-weighting network: (A) Obtain a representative sample of the C-weighted sound levels in the employee's environment. (B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted average sound level to obtain the estimated A-weighted TWA under the ear protector. (v) When using area monitoring procedures and a sound level meter set to the A-weighing network. (A) Obtain a representative sound level for the area in question. (B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR and subtract the remainder from the A-weighted sound level for that area. (vi) When using area monitoring procedures and a sound level meter set to the C-weighting network: (A) Obtain a representative sound level for the area in question. (B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted sound level for that area. Appendix C to § 1910.95—Audiometric Measuring Instruments This appendix is Mandatory 1. In the event that pulsed-tone audiometers are used, they shall have a tone on-time of at least 200 milliseconds. 2. Self-recording audiometers shall comply with the following requirements: (A) The chart upon which the audiogram is traced shall have lines at positions corresponding to all multiples of 10 dB hearing level within the intensity range spanned by the audiometer. The lines shall be equally spaced and shall be separated by at least 1/4 (B) It shall be possible to set the stylus manually at the 10-dB increment lines for calibration purposes. (C) The slewing rate for the audiometer attenuator shall not be more than 6 dB/sec except that an initial slewing rate greater than 6 dB/sec is permitted at the beginning of each new test frequency, but only until the second subject response. (D) The audiometer shall remain at each required test frequency for 30 seconds (±3 seconds). The audiogram shall be clearly marked at each change of frequency and the actual frequency change of the audiometer shall not deviate from the frequency boundaries marked on the audiogram by more than ±3 seconds. (E) It must be possible at each test frequency to place a horizontal line segment parallel to the time axis on the audiogram, such that the audiometric tracing crosses the line segment at least six times at that test frequency. At each test frequency the threshold shall be the average of the midpoints of the tracing excursions. Appendix D to § 1910.95—Audiometric Test Rooms This appendix is Mandatory Rooms used for audiometric testing shall not have background sound pressure levels exceeding those in Table D-1 when measured by equipment conforming at least to the Type 2 requirements of American National Standard Specification for Sound Level Meters, S1.4-1971 (R1976), and to the Class II requirements of American National Standard Specification for Octave, Half-Octave, and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, S1.11-1971 (R1976). Table D-1—Maximum Allowable Octave-Band Sound Pressure Levels for Audiometric Test Rooms Octave-band center frequency (Hz) 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Sound pressure level (dB) 40 40 47 57 62 Appendix E to § 1910.95—Acoustic Calibration of Audiometers This appendix is Mandatory Audiometer calibration shall be checked acoustically, at least annually, according to the procedures described in this appendix. The equipment necessary to perform these measurements is a sound level meter, octave-band filter set, and a National Bureau of Standards 9A coupler. In making these measurements, the accuracy of the calibrating equipment shall be sufficient to determine that the audiometer is within the tolerances permitted by American Standard Specification for Audiometers, S3.6-1969. (1) Sound Pressure Output Check A. Place the earphone coupler over the microphone of the sound level meter and place the earphone on the coupler. B. Set the audiometer's hearing threshold level (HTL) dial to 70 dB. C. Measure the sound pressure level of the tones at each test frequency from 500 Hz through 6000 Hz for each earphone. D. At each frequency the readout on the sound level meter should correspond to the levels in Table E-1 or Table E-2, as appropriate, for the type of earphone, in the column entitled “sound level meter reading.” (2) Linearity Check A. With the earphone in place, set the frequency to 1000 Hz and the HTL dial on the audiometer to 70 dB. B. Measure the sound levels in the coupler at each 10-dB decrement from 70 dB to 10 dB, noting the sound level meter reading at each setting. C. For each 10-dB decrement on the audiometer the sound level meter should indicate a corresponding 10 dB decrease. D. This measurement may be made electrically with a voltmeter connected to the earphone terminals. (3) Tolerances When any of the measured sound levels deviate from the levels in Table E-1 or Table E-2 by ±3 dB at any test frequency between 500 and 3000 Hz, 4 dB at 4000 Hz, or 5 dB at 6000 Hz, an exhaustive calibration is advised. An exhaustive calibration is required if the deviations are greater than 15 dB or greater at any test frequency. Table E-1—Reference Threshold Levels for Telephonics—TDH-39 Earphones Frequency, Hz Reference threshold level for TDH-39 earphones, dB Sound level meter reading, dB 500 11.5 81.5 1000 7 77 2000 9 79 3000 10 80 4000 9.5 79.5 6000 15.5 85.5 Table E-2—Reference Threshold Levels for Telephonics—TDH-49 Earphones Frequency, Hz Reference threshold level for TDH-49 earphones, dB Sound level meter reading, dB 500 13.5 83.5 1000 7.5 77.5 2000 11 81.0 3000 9.5 79.5 4000 10.5 80.5 6000 13.5 83.5 Appendix F to § 1910.95—Calculations and Application of Age Corrections to Audiograms This appendix Is Non-Mandatory In determining whether a standard threshold shift has occurred, allowance may be made for the contribution of aging to the change in hearing level by adjusting the most recent audiogram. If the employer chooses to adjust the audiogram, the employer shall follow the procedure described below. This procedure and the age correction tables were developed by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health in the criteria document entitled “Criteria for a Recommended Standard . . . Occupational Exposure to Noise,” ((HSM)-11001). For each audiometric test frequency; (i) Determine from Tables F-1 or F-2 the age correction values for the employee by: (A) Finding the age at which the most recent audiogram was taken and recording the corresponding values of age corrections at 1000 Hz through 6000 Hz; (B) Finding the age at which the baseline audiogram was taken and recording the corresponding values of age corrections at 1000 Hz through 6000 Hz. (ii) Subtract the values found in step (i)(B) from the value found in step (i)(A). (iii) The differences calculated in step (ii) represented that portion of the change in hearing that may be due to aging. Example: Employee is a 32-year-old male. The audiometric history for his right ear is shown in decibels below. Employee's age Audiometric test frequency (Hz) 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 26 10 5 5 10 5 *27 0 0 0 5 5 28 0 0 0 10 5 29 5 0 5 15 5 30 0 5 10 20 10 31 5 10 20 15 15 *32 5 10 10 25 20 The audiogram at age 27 is considered the baseline since it shows the best hearing threshold levels. Asterisks have been used to identify the baseline and most recent audiogram. A threshold shift of 20 dB exists at 4000 Hz between the audiograms taken at ages 27 and 32. (The threshold shift is computed by subtracting the hearing threshold at age 27, which was 5, from the hearing threshold at age 32, which is 25). A retest audiogram has confirmed this shift. The contribution of aging to this change in hearing may be estimated in the following manner: Go to Table F-1 and find the age correction values (in dB) for 4000 Hz at age 27 and age 32. Frequency (Hz) 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 Age 32 6 5 7 10 14 Age 27 5 4 6 7 11 Difference 1 1 1 3 3 The difference represents the amount of hearing loss that may be attributed to aging in the time period between the baseline audiogram and the most recent audiogram. In this example, the difference at 4000 Hz is 3 dB. This value is subtracted from the hearing level at 4000 Hz, which in the most recent audiogram is 25, yielding 22 after adjustment. Then the hearing threshold in the baseline audiogram at 4000 Hz (5) is subtracted from the adjusted annual audiogram hearing threshold at 4000 Hz (22). Thus the age-corrected threshold shift would be 17 dB (as opposed to a threshold shift of 20 dB without age correction). Table F-1—Age Correction Values in Decibels for Males Years Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz) 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 20 or younger 5 3 4 5 8 21 5 3 4 5 8 22 5 3 4 5 8 23 5 3 4 6 9 24 5 3 5 6 9 25 5 3 5 7 10 26 5 4 5 7 10 27 5 4 6 7 11 28 6 4 6 8 11 29 6 4 6 8 12 30 6 4 6 9 12 31 6 4 7 9 13 32 6 5 7 10 14 33 6 5 7 10 14 34 6 5 8 11 15 35 7 5 8 11 15 36 7 5 9 12 16 37 7 6 9 12 17 38 7 6 9 13 17 39 7 6 10 14 18 40 7 6 10 14 19 41 7 6 10 14 20 42 8 7 11 16 20 43 8 7 12 16 21 44 8 7 12 17 22 45 8 7 13 18 23 46 8 8 13 19 24 47 8 8 14 19 24 48 9 8 14 20 25 49 9 9 15 21 26 50 9 9 16 22 27 51 9 9 16 23 28 52 9 10 17 24 29 53 9 10 18 25 30 54 10 10 18 26 31 55 10 11 19 27 32 56 10 11 20 28 34 57 10 11 21 29 35 58 10 12 22 31 36 59 11 12 22 32 37 60 or older 11 13 23 33 38 Table F-2—Age Correction Values in Decibels for Females Years Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz) 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 20 or younger 7 4 3 3 6 21 7 4 4 3 6 22 7 4 4 4 6 23 7 5 4 4 7 24 7 5 4 4 7 25 8 5 4 4 7 26 8 5 5 4 8 27 8 5 5 5 8 28 8 5 5 5 8 29 8 5 5 5 9 30 8 6 5 5 9 31 8 6 6 5 9 32 9 6 6 6 10 33 9 6 6 6 10 34 9 6 6 6 10 35 9 6 7 7 11 36 9 7 7 7 11 37 9 7 7 7 12 38 10 7 7 7 12 39 10 7 8 8 12 40 10 7 8 8 13 41 10 8 8 8 13 42 10 8 9 9 13 43 11 8 9 9 14 44 11 8 9 9 14 45 11 8 10 10 15 46 11 9 10 10 15 47 11 9 10 11 16 48 12 9 11 11 16 49 12 9 11 11 16 50 12 10 11 12 17 51 12 10 12 12 17 52 12 10 12 13 18 53 13 10 13 13 18 54 13 11 13 14 19 55 13 11 14 14 19 56 13 11 14 15 20 57 13 11 15 15 20 58 14 12 15 16 21 59 14 12 16 16 21 60 or older 14 12 16 17 22 Appendix G to § 1910.95—Monitoring Noise Levels Non-Mandatory Informational Appendix This appendix provides information to help employers comply with the noise monitoring obligations that are part of the hearing conservation amendment. What is the purpose of noise monitoring? This revised amendment requires that employees be placed in a hearing conservation program if they are exposed to average noise levels of 85 dB or greater during an 8 hour workday. In order to determine if exposures are at or above this level, it may be necessary to measure or monitor the actual noise levels in the workplace and to estimate the noise exposure or “dose” received by employees during the workday. When is it necessary to implement a noise monitoring program? It is not necessary for every employer to measure workplace noise. Noise monitoring or measuring must be conducted only when exposures are at or above 85 dB. Factors which suggest that noise exposures in the workplace may be at this level include employee complaints about the loudness of noise, indications that employees are losing their hearing, or noisy conditions which make normal conversation difficult. The employer should also consider any information available regarding noise emitted from specific machines. In addition, actual workplace noise measurements can suggest whether or not a monitoring program should be initiated. How is noise measured? Basically, there are two different instruments to measure noise exposures: the sound level meter and the dosimeter. A sound level meter is a device that measures the intensity of sound at a given moment. Since sound level meters provide a measure of sound intensity at only one point in time, it is generally necessary to take a number of measurements at different times during the day to estimate noise exposure over a workday. If noise levels fluctuate, the amount of time noise remains at each of the various measured levels must be determined. To estimate employee noise exposures with a sound level meter it is also generally necessary to take several measurements at different locations within the workplace. After appropriate sound level meter readings are obtained, people sometimes draw “maps” of the sound levels within different areas of the workplace. By using a sound level “map” and information on employee locations throughout the day, estimates of individual exposure levels can be developed. This measurement method is generally referred to as area A dosimeter is like a sound level meter except that it stores sound level measurements and integrates these measurements over time, providing an average noise exposure reading for a given period of time, such as an 8-hour workday. With a dosimeter, a microphone is attached to the employee's clothing and the exposure measurement is simply read at the end of the desired time period. A reader may be used to read-out the dosimeter's measurements. Since the dosimeter is worn by the employee, it measures noise levels in those locations in which the employee travels. A sound level meter can also be positioned within the immediate vicinity of the exposed worker to obtain an individual exposure estimate. Such procedures are generally referred to as personal Area monitoring can be used to estimate noise exposure when the noise levels are relatively constant and employees are not mobile. In workplaces where employees move about in different areas or where the noise intensity tends to fluctuate over time, noise exposure is generally more accurately estimated by the personal monitoring approach. In situations where personal monitoring is appropriate, proper positioning of the microphone is necessary to obtain accurate measurements. With a dosimeter, the microphone is generally located on the shoulder and remains in that position for the entire workday. With a sound level meter, the microphone is stationed near the employee's head, and the instrument is usually held by an individual who follows the employee as he or she moves about. Manufacturer's instructions, contained in dosimeter and sound level meter operating manuals, should be followed for calibration and maintenance. To ensure accurate results, it is considered good professional practice to calibrate instruments before and after each use. How often is it necessary to monitor noise levels? The amendment requires that when there are significant changes in machinery or production processes that may result in increased noise levels, remonitoring must be conducted to determine whether additional employees need to be included in the hearing conservation program. Many companies choose to remonitor periodically (once every year or two) to ensure that all exposed employees are included in their hearing conservation programs. Where can equipment and technical advice be obtained? Noise monitoring equipment may be either purchased or rented. Sound level meters cost about $500 to $1,000, while dosimeters range in price from about $750 to $1,500. Smaller companies may find it more economical to rent equipment rather than to purchase it. Names of equipment suppliers may be found in the telephone book (Yellow Pages) under headings such as: “Safety Equipment,” “Industrial Hygiene,” or “Engineers-Acoustical.” In addition to providing information on obtaining noise monitoring equipment, many companies and individuals included under such listings can provide professional advice on how to conduct a valid noise monitoring program. Some audiological testing firms and industrial hygiene firms also provide noise monitoring services. Universities with audiology, industrial hygiene, or acoustical engineering departments may also provide information or may be able to help employers meet their obligations under this amendment. Free, on-site assistance may be obtained from OSHA-supported state and private consultation organizations. These safety and health consultative entities generally give priority to the needs of small businesses. Appendix H to § 1910.95—Availability of Referenced Documents Paragraphs (c) through (o) of 29 CFR 1910.95 and the accompanying appendices contain provisions which incorporate publications by reference. Generally, the publications provide criteria for instruments to be used in monitoring and audiometric testing. These criteria are intended to be mandatory when so indicated in the applicable paragraphs of § 1910.95 and appendices. It should be noted that OSHA does not require that employers purchase a copy of the referenced publications. Employers, however, may desire to obtain a copy of the referenced publications for their own information. The designation of the paragraph of the standard in which the referenced publications appear, the titles of the publications, and the availability of the publications are as follows: Paragraph designation Referenced publication Available from— Appendix B “List of Personal Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data,” HEW Pub. No. 76-120, 1975. NTIS-PB267461 National Technical Information Service, Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161. Appendix D “Specification for Sound Level Meters,” S1.4-1971 (R1976) American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. § 1910.95(k)(2), appendix E “Specifications for Audiometers,” S3.6-1969 American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. Appendix D “Specification for Octave, Half-Octave and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets,” S1.11-1971 (R1976) Back Numbers Department, Dept. STD, American Institute of Physics, 333 E. 45th St., New York, NY 10017; American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. The referenced publications (or a microfiche of the publications) are available for review at many universities and public libraries throughout the country. These publications may also be examined at the OSHA Technical Data Center, Room N2439, United States Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210, (202) 219-7500 or at any OSHA Regional Office (see telephone directories under United States Government—Labor Department). Appendix I to § 1910.95—Definitions These definitions apply to the following terms as used in paragraphs (c) through (n) of 29 CFR 1910.95. Action level—An 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels measured on the A-scale, slow response, or equivalently, a dose of fifty percent. Audiogram—A chart, graph, or table resulting from an audiometric test showing an individual's hearing threshold levels as a function of frequency. Audiologist—A professional, specializing in the study and rehabilitation of hearing, who is certified by the American Speech-Language-Hearing Association or licensed by a state board of examiners. Baseline audiogram—The audiogram against which future audiograms are compared. Criterion sound level—A sound level of 90 decibels. Decibel (dB)—Unit of measurement of sound level. Hertz (Hz)—Unit of measurement of frequency, numerically equal to cycles per second. Medical pathology—A disorder or disease. For purposes of this regulation, a condition or disease affecting the ear, which should be treated by a physician specialist. Noise dose—The ratio, expressed as a percentage, of (1) the time integral, over a stated time or event, of the 0.6 power of the measured SLOW exponential time-averaged, squared A-weighted sound pressure and (2) the product of the criterion duration (8 hours) and the 0.6 power of the squared sound pressure corresponding to the criterion sound level (90 dB). Noise dosimeter—An instrument that integrates a function of sound pressure over a period of time in such a manner that it directly indicates a noise dose. Otolaryngologist—A physician specializing in diagnosis and treatment of disorders of the ear, nose and throat. Representative exposure—Measurements of an employee's noise dose or 8-hour time-weighted average sound level that the employers deem to be representative of the exposures of other employees in the workplace. Sound level—Ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the square of the measured A-weighted sound pressure to the square of the standard reference pressure of 20 micropascals. Unit: decibels (dB). For use with this regulation, SLOW time response, in accordance with ANSI S1.4-1971 (R1976), is required. Sound level meter—An instrument for the measurement of sound level. Time-weighted average sound level—That sound level, which if constant over an 8-hour exposure, would result in the same noise dose as is measured. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 46 FR 4161, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 62845, Dec. 29, 1981; 48 FR 9776, Mar. 8, 1983; 48 FR 29687, June 28, 1983; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008] § 1910.97 Nonionizing radiation. (a) Electromagnetic radiation Definitions applicable to this paragraph. electromagnetic radiation (ii) Partial body irradiation. (iii) Radiation protection guide. (iv) The word “symbol” as used in this specification refers to the overall design, shape, and coloring of the rf radiation sign shown in figure G-11. (v) Whole body irradiation. (2) Radiation protection guide. 2 Power density: 10 mW./cm. 2 Energy density: 1 mW.-hr./cm. 2 This guide applies whether the radiation is continuous or intermittent. (ii) These formulated recommendations pertain to both whole body irradiation and partial body irradiation. Partial body irradiation must be included since it has been shown that some parts of the human body (e.g., eyes, testicles) may be harmed if exposed to incident radiation levels significantly in excess of the recommended levels. (3) Warning symbol. (ii) ANSI Z53.1-1967 or ANSI Z535.1-2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in § 1910.6, is for use for color specification. All lettering and the border shall be of aluminum color. (iii) The inclusion and choice of warning information or precautionary instructions is at the discretion of the user. If such information is included it shall appear in the lower triangle of the warning symbol. Figure G-11—Radio-Frequency Radiation Hazard Warning Symbol (4) Scope. (b) [Reserved] [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996; 78 FR 35566, June 13, 2013] § 1910.98 Effective dates. (a) The provisions of this subpart G shall become effective on August 27, 1971, except as provided in the remaining paragraphs of this section. (b) The following provisions shall become effective on February 15, 1972: § 1910.94 (a)(2)(iii), (a)(3), (a)(4), (b), (c)(2), (c)(3), (c)(4), (c)(5), (c)(6)(i), (c)(6)(ii), (d)(1)(ii), (d)(3), (d)(4), (d)(5), and (d)(7). (c) Notwithstanding anything in paragraph (a), (b), or (d) of this section, any provision in any other section of this subpart which contains in itself a specific effective date or time limitation shall become effective on such date or shall apply in accordance with such limitation. (d) Notwithstanding anything in paragraph (a) of this section, if any standard in 41 CFR part 50-204, other than a national consensus standard incorporated by reference in § 50-204.2(a)(1), is or becomes applicable at any time to any employment and place of employment, by virtue of the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act, or the Service Contract Act of 1965, or the National Foundation on Arts and Humanities Act of 1965, any corresponding established Federal standard in this subpart G which is derived from 41 CFR part 50-204 shall also become effective, and shall be applicable to such employment and place of employment, on the same date. Subpart H—Hazardous Materials Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), or 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355) or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Sections 1910.103, 1910.106 through 1910.111, and 1910.119, 1910.120, and 1910.122 through 1910.126 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911. Section 1910.119 also issued under Section 304, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 (Pub. L. 101-549), reprinted at 29 U.S.C.A. 655 Note. Section 1910.120 also issued under Section 126, Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 as amended (29 U.S.C.A. 655 Note), and 5 U.S.C. 553. § 1910.101 Compressed gases (general requirements). (a) Inspection of compressed gas cylinders. (b) Compressed gases. (c) Safety relief devices for compressed gas containers. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.102 Acetylene. (a) Cylinders. (b) Piped systems. (2) When employers can demonstrate that the facilities, equipment, structures, or installations used to generate acetylene or to charge (fill) acetylene cylinders were installed prior to February 16, 2006, these employers may comply with the provisions of Chapter 7 (“Acetylene Piping”) of NFPA 51A-2001 (“Standard for Acetylene Charging Plants”) (National Fire Protection Association, 2001 ed., 2001). (3) The provisions of § 1910.102(b)(2) also apply when the facilities, equipment, structures, or installations used to generate acetylene or to charge (fill) acetylene cylinders were approved for construction or installation prior to February 16, 2006, but constructed and installed on or after that date. (4) For additional information on acetylene piping systems, see (c) Generators and filling cylinders. (2) When employers can demonstrate that the facilities, equipment, structures, or installations used to generate acetylene or to charge (fill) of acetylene cylinders were constructed or installed prior to February 16, 2006, these employers may comply with the provisions of NFPA 51A-2001 (“Standard for Acetylene Charging Plants”) (National Fire Protection Association, 2001 ed., 2001). (3) The provisions of § 1910.102(c)(2) also apply when the facilities, equipment, structures, or installations were approved for construction or installation prior to February 16, 2006, but constructed and installed on or after that date. [74 FR 40447, Aug. 11, 2009, as amended at 76 FR 75786, Dec. 5, 2011] § 1910.103 Hydrogen. (a) General Definitions. (i) Gaseous hydrogen system is one in which the hydrogen is delivered, stored and discharged in the gaseous form to consumer's piping. The system includes stationary or movable containers, pressure regulators, safety relief devices, manifolds, interconnecting piping and controls. The system terminates at the point where hydrogen at service pressure first enters the consumer's distribution piping. (ii) Approved—Means, unless otherwise indicated, listed or approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory. (iii) Listed—See “approved”. (iv) ASME—American Society of Mechanical Engineers. (v) DOT Specifications—Regulations of the Department of Transportation published in 49 CFR Chapter I. (vi) DOT regulations—See § 1910.103 (a)(1)(v). (2) Scope Gaseous hydrogen systems. a ( b (ii) Liquefied hydrogen systems. a ( b (b) Gaseous hydrogen systems Design Containers. a ( 1 ( 2 ( b ( c (ii) Safety relief devices. a ( b ( c (iii) Piping, tubing, and fittings. a ( b ( c (iv) Equipment assembly. a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (v) Marking. (vi) Testing. (2) Location General. a ( b ( c ( d ( e (ii) Specific requirements. a Table H-1 Nature of location Size of hydrogen system Less than 3,000 CF 3,000 CF to 15,000 CF In excess of 15,000 CF Outdoors I IDI. In a separate building II II II. In a special room III III Not permitted. Inside buildings not in a special room and exposed to other occupancies IV Not permitted Not permitted. ( b ( c Table H-2 Type of outdoor exposure Size of hydrogen system Less than 3,000 CF 3,000 CF to 15,000 CF In excess of 15,000 CF 1. Building or structure Wood frame construction 1 10 25 50 Heavy timber, noncombustible or ordinary construction 1 0 10 2 Fire-resistive construction 1 0 0 0 2. Wall openings Not above any part of a system 10 10 10 Above any part of a system 25 25 25 3. Flammable liquids above ground. 0 to 1,000 gallons 10 25 25 4. Flammable liquids below ground—0 to 1,000 gallons Tank 10 10 10 5. Flammable liquids below ground—in excess of 1,000 gallons. Tank 20 20 20 6. Flammable gas storage, either high pressure or low pressure. 0 to 15,000 CF capacity 10 25 25 7. Oxygen storage 12,000 CF or less 4 More than 12,000 CF 5 8. Fast burning solids such as ordinary lumber, excelsior or paper 50 50 50 9. Slow burning solids such as heavy timber or coal 25 25 25 10. Open flames and other sources of ignition 25 25 25 11. Air compressor intakes or inlets to ventilating or air-conditioning equipment 50 50 50 12. Concentration of people 3 25 50 50 1 2 3 4 5 ( d ( 1 b ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 ( 7 ( 8 (3) Design consideration at specific locations Outdoor locations. a ( b ( c (ii) Separate buildings. a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (iii) Special rooms. a ( b b ( c c ( d ( e ( f (4) Operating instructions. (5) Maintenance. (c) Liquefied hydrogen systems Design Containers. a ( b (ii) Supports. (iii) Marking. (iv) Safety relief devices. a 1 ( 2 ( b f ( c ( d (v) Piping, tubing, and fittings. a ( b ( c ( d ( e (vi) Equipment assembly. a ( b ( c ( d (vii) Testing. a ( b a (viii) Liquefied hydrogen vaporizers. a ( b ( c ( d (ix) Electrical systems. a ( b a ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (x) Bonding and grounding. (2) Location of liquefied hydrogen storage General requirements. a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f b (ii) Specific requirements. a Table H-3—Maximum Total Quantity of Liquefied Hydrogen Storage Permitted Nature of location Size of hydrogen storage (capacity in gallons) 39.63 (150 liters) to 50 51 to 300 301 to 600 In excess of 600 Outdoors I I I I. In a separate building II II II Not permitted. In a special room III III Not permitted Do. Inside buildings not in a special room and exposed to other occupancies IV Not permitted ......do Do. Note: ( b Table H-4—Minimum Distance (Feet) From Liquefied Hydrogen Systems to Exposure 1 2 Type of exposure Liquefied hydrogen storage (capacity in gallons) 39.63 (150 liters) to 3,500 3,501 to 15,000 15,001 to 30,000 1. Fire-resistive building and fire walls 3 5 5 5 2. Noncombustible building 3 25 50 75 3. Other buildings 3 50 75 100 4. Wall openings, air-compressor intakes, inlets for air-conditioning or ventilating equipment 75 75 75 5. Flammable liquids (above ground and vent or fill openings if below ground) (see 513 and 514) 50 75 100 6. Between stationary liquefied hydrogen containers 5 5 5 7. Flammable gas storage 50 75 100 8. Liquid oxygen storage and other oxidizers (see 513 and 514) 100 100 100 9. Combustible solids 50 75 100 10. Open flames, smoking and welding 50 50 50 11. Concentrations of people 75 75 75 1 2 3 In congested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time-clock areas. (iii) Handling of liquefied hydrogen inside buildings other than separate buildings and special rooms. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i (3) Design considerations at specific locations Outdoor locations. a ( b ( c a ( d a b ( e (ii) Separate buildings. a ( b ( c ( d a b b ( e (iii) Special rooms. a ( b b ( c ( d ( e a b b ( f (4) Operating instructions Written instructions. (ii) Attendant. (iii) Security. (iv) Grounding. (5) Maintenance. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 31881, June 8, 2004; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007] § 1910.104 Oxygen. (a) Scope. (b) Bulk oxygen systems Definition. (2) Location General. (ii) Accessibility. (iii) Leakage. (iv) Elevation. (v) Dikes. (3) Distance between systems and exposures General. (ii) Combustible structures. (iii) Fire resistive structures. (iv) Openings. (v) Flammable liquid storage above-ground. Distance (feet) Capacity (gallons) 50 0 to 1000. 90 1001 or more. (vi) Flammable liquid storage below-ground. Distance measured horizontally from oxygen storage container to flammable liquid tank (feet) Distance from oxygen storage container to filling and vent connections or openings to flammable liquid tank (feet) Capacity gallons 15 50 0 to 1000. 30 50 1001 or more. (vii) Combustible liquid storage above-ground. Distance (feet) Capacity (gallons) 25 0 to 1000. 50 1001 or more. (viii) Combustible liquid storage belowground. Distance measured horizontally from oxygen storage container to combustible liquid tank (feet) Distance from oxygen storage container to filling and vent connections or openings to combustible liquid tank (feet) 15 40. (ix) Flammable gas storage. Distance (feet) Capacity (cu. ft. NTP) 50 Less than 5000. 90 5000 or more. (x) Highly combustible materials. (xi) Slow-burning materials. (xii) Ventilation. (xiii) Congested areas. (xiv)-(xvii) [Reserved] (xviii) Exceptions. (4) Storage containers Foundations and supports. (ii) Construction—liquid. (iii) Construction—gaseous. ( a ( b (5) Piping, tubing, and fittings Selection. (ii) Specification. (iii) Fabrication. (6) Safety relief devices General. (ii) DOT containers. (iii) ASME containers. (iv) Insulation. (v) Reliability. (7) Liquid oxygen vaporizers Mounts and couplings. (ii) Relief devices. (iii) Heating. (iv) Grounding. (8) Equipment assembly and installation Cleaning. (ii) Joints. (iii) Accessories. (iv) Installation. (v) Testing. (vi) Security. (vii) Venting. (viii) Placarding. (ix) Electrical wiring. (9) Operating instructions. (10) Maintenance. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.105 Nitrous oxide. The piped systems for the in-plant transfer and distribution of nitrous oxide shall be designed, installed, maintained, and operated in accordance with Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet G-8.1-1964, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.106 Flammable liquids. (a) Definitions. (1) Aerosol shall mean a material which is dispensed from its container as a mist, spray, or foam by a propellant under pressure. (2) Atmospheric tank shall mean a storage tank which has been designed to operate at pressures from atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. (3) Automotive service station shall mean that portion of property where flammable liquids used as motor fuels are stored and dispensed from fixed equipment into the fuel tanks of motor vehicles and shall include any facilities available for the sale and service of tires, batteries, and accessories, and for minor automotive maintenance work. Major automotive repairs, painting, body and fender work are excluded. (4) Basement shall mean a story of a building or structure having one-half or more of its height below ground level and to which access for fire fighting purposes is unduly restricted. (5) Boiling point shall mean the boiling point of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 mm.). Where an accurate boiling point is unavailable for the material in question, or for mixtures which do not have a constant boiling point, for purposes of this section the 10 percent point of a distillation performed in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for Distillation of Petroleum Products, ASTM D-86-62, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, may be used as the boiling point of the liquid. (6) Boilover shall mean the expulsion of crude oil (or certain other liquids) from a burning tank. The light fractions of the crude oil burnoff producing a heat wave in the residue, which on reaching a water strata may result in the expulsion of a portion of the contents of the tank in the form of froth. (7) Bulk plant shall mean that portion of a property where flammable liquids are received by tank vessel, pipelines, tank car, or tank vehicle, and are stored or blended in bulk for the purpose of distributing such liquids by tank vessel, pipeline, tank car, tank vehicle, or container. (8) Chemical plant shall mean a large integrated plant or that portion of such a plant other than a refinery or distillery where flammable liquids are produced by chemical reactions or used in chemical reactions. (9) Closed container shall mean a container as herein defined, so sealed by means of a lid or other device that neither liquid nor vapor will escape from it at ordinary temperatures. (10) Crude petroleum shall mean hydrocarbon mixtures that have a flash point below 150 °F. and which have not been processed in a refinery. (11) Distillery shall mean a plant or that portion of a plant where flammable liquids produced by fermentation are concentrated, and where the concentrated products may also be mixed, stored, or packaged. (12) Fire area shall mean an area of a building separated from the remainder of the building by construction having a fire resistance of at least 1 hour and having all communicating openings properly protected by an assembly having a fire resistance rating of at least 1 hour. (13) Flammable aerosol shall mean a flammable aerosol as defined by Appendix B to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard Criteria. For the purposes of paragraph (d) of this section, such aerosols are considered Category 1 flammable liquids. (14) Flashpoint (i) For a liquid which has a viscosity of less than 45 SUS at 100 °F (37.8 °C), does not contain suspended solids, and does not have a tendency to form a surface film while under test, the procedure specified in the Standard Method of Test for Flashpoint by Tag Closed Tester (ASTM D-56-70), which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, or an equivalent test method as defined in Appendix B to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard Criteria, shall be used. (ii) For a liquid which has a viscosity of 45 SUS or more at 100 °F (37.8 °C), or contains suspended solids, or has a tendency to form a surface film while under test, the Standard Method of Test for Flashpoint by Pensky-Martens Closed Tester (ASTM D-93-71) or an equivalent method as defined by Appendix B to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard Criteria, shall be used except that the methods specified in Note 1 to section 1.1 of ASTM D-93-71 may be used for the respective materials specified in the Note. The preceding ASTM standard is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (iii) For a liquid that is a mixture of compounds that have different volatilities and flashpoints, its flashpoint shall be determined by using the procedure specified in paragraph (a)(14)(i) or (ii) of this section on the liquid in the form it is shipped. (iv) Organic peroxides, which undergo autoaccelerating thermal decomposition, are excluded from any of the flashpoint determination methods specified in this subparagraph. (15) Hotel shall mean buildings or groups of buildings under the same management in which there are sleeping accommodations for hire, primarily used by transients who are lodged with or without meals including but not limited to inns, clubs, motels, and apartment hotels. (16) Institutional occupancy shall mean the occupancy or use of a building or structure or any portion thereof by persons harbored or detained to receive medical, charitable or other care or treatment, or by persons involuntarily detained. (17) Liquid shall mean, for the purpose of this section, any material which has a fluidity greater than that of 300 penetration asphalt when tested in accordance with ASTM Test for Penetration for Bituminous Materials, D-5-65, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (18) [Reserved] (19) Flammable liquid (i) Category 1 shall include liquids having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C) and having a boiling point at or below 95 °F (35 °C). (ii) Category 2 shall include liquids having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C) and having a boiling point above 95 °F (35 °C). (iii) Category 3 shall include liquids having flashpoints at or above 73.4 °F (23 °C) and at or below 140 °F (60 °C). When a Category 3 liquid with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) is heated for use to within 30 °F (16.7 °C) of its flashpoint, it shall be handled in accordance with the requirements for a Category 3 liquid with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C). (iv) Category 4 shall include liquids having flashpoints above 140 °F (60 °C) and at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C). When a Category 4 flammable liquid is heated for use to within 30 °F (16.7 °C) of its flashpoint, it shall be handled in accordance with the requirements for a Category 3 liquid with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C). (v) When liquid with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) is heated for use to within 30 °F (16.7 °C) of its flashpoint, it shall be handled in accordance with the requirements for a Category 4 flammable liquid. (20) Unstable (reactive) liquid shall mean a liquid which in the pure state or as commercially produced or transported will vigorously polymerize, decompose, condense, or will become self-reactive under conditions of shocks, pressure, or temperature. (21) Low-pressure tank shall mean a storage tank which has been designed to operate at pressures above 0.5 p.s.i.g. but not more than 15 p.s.i.g. (22) Marine service station shall mean that portion of a property where flammable liquids used as fuels are stored and dispensed from fixed equipment on shore, piers, wharves, or floating docks into the fuel tanks of self-propelled craft, and shall include all facilities used in connection therewith. (23) Mercantile occupancy shall mean the occupancy or use of a building or structure or any portion thereof for the displaying, selling, or buying of goods, wares, or merchandise. (24) Office occupancy shall mean the occupancy or use of a building or structure or any portion thereof for the transaction of business, or the rendering or receiving of professional services. (25) Portable tank shall mean a closed container having a liquid capacity over 60 U.S. gallons and not intended for fixed installation. (26) Pressure vessel shall mean a storage tank or vessel which has been designed to operate at pressures above 15 p.s.i.g. (27) Protection for exposure shall mean adequate fire protection for structures on property adjacent to tanks, where there are employees of the establishment. (28) Refinery shall mean a plant in which flammable liquids are produced on a commercial scale from crude petroleum, natural gasoline, or other hydrocarbon sources. (29) Safety can shall mean an approved container, of not more than 5 gallons capacity, having a spring-closing lid and spout cover and so designed that it will safely relieve internal pressure when subjected to fire exposure. (30) Vapor pressure shall mean the pressure, measured in pounds per square inch (absolute) exerted by a volatile liquid as determined by the “Standard Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid Method),” American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM D323-68, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (31) Ventilation as specified in this section is for the prevention of fire and explosion. It is considered adequate if it is sufficient to prevent accumulation of significant quantities of vapor-air mixtures in concentration over one-fourth of the lower flammable limit. (32) Storage: Flammable liquids shall be stored in a tank or in a container that complies with paragraph (d)(2) of this section. (33) Barrel shall mean a volume of 42 U.S. gallons. (34) Container shall mean any can, barrel, or drum. (35) Approved unless otherwise indicated, approved, or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory. (36) Listed see “approved” in § 1910.106(a)(35). (37) SUS (38) Viscous (b) Tank storage Design and construction of tanks Materials. a b e ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (ii) Fabrication. a ( b (iii) Atmospheric tanks. a ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( b ( c ( d (iv) Low pressure tanks. a ( b ( 1 ( 2 ( c a This paragraph may be used for operating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g. ( d (v) Pressure vessels. a ( b (vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. (2) Installation of outside aboveground tanks. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between aboveground tanks. a ( b c ( c ( d ( e ( f a b (iii) [Reserved] (iv) Normal venting for aboveground tanks. a ( b 1 2 3 1/4 ( c ( d ( e ( f 1 ( 2 See b ( g f (v) Emergency relief venting for fire exposure for aboveground tanks. a ( b a ( c e f Table H-10—Wetted Area Versus Cubic Feet Free Air Per Hour [14.7 psia and 60 °F.] Square feet CFH Square feet CFH Square feet CFH 20 21,100 200 211,000 1,000 524,000 30 31,600 250 239,000 1,200 557,000 40 42,100 300 265,000 1,400 587,000 50 52,700 350 288,000 1,600 614,000 60 63,200 400 312,000 1,800 639,000 70 73,700 500 354,000 2,000 662,000 80 84,200 600 392,000 2,400 704,000 90 94,800 700 428,000 2,800 742,000 100 105,000 800 462,000 and 120 126,000 900 493,000 over 140 147,000 1,000 524,000 160 168,000 180 190,000 200 211,000 ( d CFH = 1,107A 0.82 Where; CFH A Note: The foregoing formula is based on Q = 21,000A 0.82 ( e V = 1337 ÷ L√M V L M ( f c e 0.5 for drainage in accordance with subdivision (vii)( b 0.3 for approved water spray. 0.3 for approved insulation. 0.15 for approved water spray with approved insulation. ( g ( h ( i (vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks. a ( b ( c (vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for aboveground tanks—(a) Drainage and diked areas. b c ( b) Drainage. ( 1 ( 2 ( c Diked areas. ( 1 2 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 (viii) Tank openings other than vents for aboveground tanks. ( a c ( d ( e ( f (3) Installation of underground tanks Location. (ii) Depth and cover. (iii) Corrosion protection. ( a ( b ( c (iv) Vents. a ( b 1/4 Table H-11—Vent Line Diameters Maximum flow GPM Pipe length 1 50 feet 100 feet 200 feet Inches Inches Inches 100 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 200 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 300 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 2 400 1 1 4 1 1 2 2 500 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 600 1 1 2 2 2 700 2 2 2 800 2 2 3 900 2 2 3 1,000 2 2 3 1 ( c ( d c ( e (v) Tank openings other than vents. a ( b ( c ( d ( e (4) Installation of tanks inside of buildings Location. (ii) Vents. b (iii) Vent piping. (iv) Tank openings other than vents. a ( b ( c b b ( d f ( e ( f ( g ( h (5) Supports, foundations, and anchorage for all tank locations General. (ii) Fire resistance. (iii) Spheres. (iv) Load distribution. (v) Foundations. (vi) Flood areas. ( a m n o ( b ( c Provided, however, ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i ( j ( k ( l ( m ( n ( o ( p ( q ( r ( s ( t ( u ( v ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (vii) Earthquake areas. (6) Sources of ignition. (7) Testing General. a b b (ii) Strength. (iii) Tightness. (iv) Repairs. (v) Derated operations. (c) Piping, valves, and fittings General Design. (ii) Exceptions. ( a ( b ( c (iii) Definitions. (2) Materials for piping, valves, and fittings Required materials. (ii) Exceptions. (iii) Linings. (iv) Low-melting materials. (3) Pipe joints. (4) Supports. (5) Protection against corrosion. (6) Valves. (7) Testing. (d) Container and portable tank storage Scope General. (ii) Exceptions. ( a ( b ( c ( d (2) Design, construction, and capacity of containers General. (ii) Emergency venting. c e (iii) Size. ( a 1 ( 2 ( b Table H-12—Maximum Allowable Size of Containers and Portable Tanks for Flammable Liquids Container type Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Category 4 Glass or approved plastic 1 pt 1 qt 1 gal 1 gal. Metal (other than DOT drums) 1 gal 5 gal 5 gal 5 gal. Safety cans 2 gal 5 gal 5 gal 5 gal. Metal drums (DOT specifications) 60 gal 60 gal 60 gal 60 gal. Approved portable tanks 660 gal 660 gal 660 gal 660 gal. Note: (3) Design, construction, and capacity of storage cabinets Maximum capacity. (ii) Fire resistance. ( a 1/2 ( b (4) Design and construction of inside storage rooms Construction. (ii) Rating and capacity. Table H-13—Storage in Inside Rooms Fire protection 1 Fire resistance Maximum size Total allowable quantities (gals./sq. ft./floor area) Yes 2 hours 500 sq. ft 10 No 2 hours 500 sq. ft 5 Yes 1 hour 150 sq. ft 4 No 1 hour 150 sq. ft 2 1 (iii) Wiring. (iv) Ventilation. (v) Storage in inside storage rooms. (5) Storage inside building Egress. (ii) Containers. (iii) Office occupancies. (iv) Mercantile occupancies and other retail stores. ( a d ( e (v) General purpose public warehouses. (vi) Flammable liquid warehouses or storage buildings. a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (6) Storage outside buildings General. (ii) Maximum storage. a b ( a ( b (iii) Spill containment. (iv) Security. (7) Fire control Extinguishers. ( a ( b (ii) Sprinklers. (iii) Open flames and smoking. (iv) Water reactive materials. (e) Industrial plants Scope Application. ( a ( b (ii) Exceptions. (2) Incidental storage or use of flammable liquids Application. (ii) Containers. ( a b c ( b ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( c (iii) Separation and protection. (iv) Handling liquids at point of final use. a ( b ( c ( d (3) Unit physical operations Application. (ii) Location. (iii) Chemical processes. (iv) Drainage. a b ( b (v) Ventilation a ( b (vi) Storage and handling. (4) Tank vehicle and tank car loading and unloading. (ii) [Reserved] (5) Fire control Portable and special equipment. (ii) Water supply. (iii) Special extinguishers. (iv) Special hazards. (v) Maintenance. (6) Sources of ignition General. (ii) Grounding. (7) Electrical Equipment. a ( b b ( c ( d a b c (8) Repairs to equipment. (9) Housekeeping General. (ii) Access. (iii) Waste and residue. (iv) Clear zone. (f) Bulk plants Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C). (ii) Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 flammable liquids. (iii) Piling containers. (2) Buildings Exits. (ii) Heating. (iii) Ventilation. a ( b ( c (3) Loading and unloading facilities Separation. (ii) Category restriction. (iii) Valves. (iv) Static protection. a ( 1 ( 2 ( b a ( c ( d a b c ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( e (v) Stray currents. (vi) Container filling facilities. (4) Wharves Definition, application. (ii)-(iii) [Reserved] (iv) Design and construction. (v) [Reserved] (vi) Pumps. (vii) Hoses and couplings. (viii) Piping and fittings. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e d ( f ( g ( h ( i (ix) Fire protection. ( a ( b ( c (x) Operations control. (5) Electrical equipment Application. (ii) Conformance. (iii) Classification. (6) Sources of ignition. (7) Drainage and waste disposal. (8) Fire control. (g) Service stations Storage and handling General provisions. a b c d ( b ( c ( d ( e a ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( f ( g Table H-18—Electrical Equipment Hazardous Areas—Bulk Plants Location Class I Group D division Extent of classified area Tank vehicle and tank car: 1 Loading through open dome 1 Within 3 feet of edge of dome, extending in all directions. 2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from edge of dome, extending in all directions. Loading through bottom connections with atmospheric venting 1 Within 3 feet of point of venting to atmosphere extending in all directions. 2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from point of venting to atmosphere, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above grade within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from point of loading connection. Loading through closed dome with atmospheric venting 1 Within 3 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions. Loading through closed dome with vapor recovery 2 Within 3 feet of point of connection of both fill and vapor lines, extending in all directions. Bottom loading with vapor recovery or any bottom unloading 2 Within 3 feet of point of connections extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above grade with in a horizontal radius of 10 feet from point of connection. Drum and container filling: Outdoors, or indoors with adequate ventilation 1 Within 3 feet of vent and fill opening, extending in all directions. 2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent or fill opening, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above floor or grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from vent or fill opening. Outdoors, or indoors with adequate ventilation 1 Within 3 feet of vent and fill opening, extending in all directions. 2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent or fill opening, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above floor or grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from vent or fill opening. Tank—Aboveground: Shell, ends, or roof and dike area 2 Within 10 feet from shell, ends, or roof of tank, Area inside dikes to level of top of dike. Vent 1 Within 5 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions. 2 Area between 5 feet and 10 feet from open end of vent, extending in all directions. Floating roof 1 Area above the roof and within the shell. Pits: Without mechanical ventilation 1 Entire area within pit if any part is within a Division 1 or 2 classified area. With mechanical ventilation 2 Entire area within pit if any part is within a Division 1 or 2 classified area. Containing valves, fittings or piping, and not within a Division 1 or 2 classified area 2 Entire pit. Pumps, bleeders, withdrawal fittings, meters and similar devices: Indoors 2 Within 5 feet of any edge of such devices, extending in all directions. Also up to 3 feet above floor or grade level within 25 feet horizontally from any edge of such devices. Outdoors 2 Within 3 feet of any edge of such devices, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above grade level within 10 feet horizontally from any edge of such devices. Storage and repair garage for tank vehicles 1 All pits or spaces below floor level. 2 Area up to 18 inches above floor or grade level for entire storage or repair garage. Drainage ditches, separators, impounding basins 2 Area up to 18 inches above ditch, separator or basin. Also up to 18 inches above grade within 15 feet horizontally from any edge. Garages for other than tank vehicles ( 2 If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an outdoor classified area, the entire room shall be classified the same as the area classification at the point of the opening. Outdoor drum storage ( 2 Indoor warehousing where there is no flammable liquid transfer ( 2 If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an indoor classified are, the room shall be classified the same as if the wall, curb or partition did not exist. Office and rest rooms ( 2 1 2 (ii) Special enclosures. a ( b (iii) Inside buildings. a ( b ( c (iv) [Reserved] (v) Dispensing into portable containers. (2) [Reserved] (3) Dispensing systems Location. (ii) Inside location. (iii) Emergency power cutoff. (iv) Dispensing units. a ( b 1 ( 2 ( c ( d (v) Remote pumping systems. a ( b c ( c ( d ( e ( f (vi) Delivery nozzles. a ( b (4) Marine service stations Dispensing. a ( b ( c (ii) Tanks and pumps. a b c ( b ( c ( d b (iii) Piping. a c ( b ( c ( d (5) Electrical equipment Application. (ii) All electrical equipment and wiring shall be of a type specified by and shall be installed in accordance with subpart S of this part. (iii) So far as it applies. Table H-19 shall be used to delineate and classify hazardous areas for the purpose of installation of electrical equipment under normal circumstances. A classified area shall not extend beyond an unpierced wall, roof, or other solid partition. (iv) The area classifications listed shall be based on the assumption that the installation meets the applicable requirements of this section in all respects. (6) Heating equipment Conformance. (ii) Application. (iii) Special room. (iv) Work areas. (v) Electric heat. (7) Drainage and waste disposal. (8) Sources of ignition. (9) Fire control. (h) Processing plants Scope. (2) Location Classification. (ii) [Reserved] (3) Processing building Construction. a ( b (ii) Drainage. a b ( b (iii) Ventilation. a ( b (iv) Explosion relief. ( a ( b ( c ( d (4) Liquid handling Storage. a ( b ( c ( d (ii) Piping, valves, and fittings. a ( b ( c (iii) Transfer. a ( b (iv) Equipment. a ( b (5) Tank vehicle and tank car loading and unloading. (6) Fire control Portable extinguishers. (ii) Other controls. ( a ( b ( c ( d (iii) Alarm systems. (iv) Maintenance. (7) Sources of ignition General. a ( b (ii) Maintenance and repair. a ( b (iii) Electrical. a ( b b ( c ( d a b c (8) Housekeeping General. (ii) Access. (iii) Waste and residues. (iv) Clear zone. (i) Refineries, chemical plants, and distilleries Storage tanks. (2) Wharves. (3) Fired and unfired pressure vessels Fired vessels. (ii) Unfired vessels shall be constructed in accordance with the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code—1968. (4) Location of process units. (5) Fire control Portable equipment. (ii) Water supply. (iii) Special equipment. (j) Scope. (1) Bulk transportation of flammable liquids; (2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel oil tanks and containers connected with oil burning equipment; (3) Storage of flammable liquids on farms; (4) Liquids without flashpoints that may be flammable under some conditions, such as certain halogenated hydrocarbons and mixtures containing halogenated hydrocarbons; (5) Mists, sprays, or foams, except flammable aerosols covered in paragraph (d) of this section; or (6) Installations made in accordance with requirements of the following standards that are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6: (i) National Fire Protection Association Standard for Drycleaning Plants, NFPA No. 32-1970; (ii) National Fire Protection Association Standard for the Manufacture of Organic Coatings, NFPA No. 35-1970; (iii) National Fire Protection Association Standard for Solvent Extraction Plants, NFPA No. 36-1967; or (iv) National Fire Protection Association Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines, NFPA No. 37-1970. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 3982, Jan. 27, 1975; 40 FR 23743, June 2, 1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, Nov. 7, 1978; 47 FR 39164, Sept. 7, 1982; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 77 FR 17765, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1910.107 Spray finishing using flammable and combustible materials. (a) Definitions applicable to this section Aerated solid powders. (2) Spraying area. (3) Spray booth. (4) Waterwash spray booth. (5) Dry spray booth. (6) Fluidized bed. (7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. (8) Approved. (9) Listed. (b) Spray booths Construction. (2) Interiors. (3) Floors. (4) Distribution or baffle plates. (5) Dry type overspray collectors—(exhaust air filters). (i) The spraying operations except electrostatic spraying operations shall be so designed, installed and maintained that the average air velocity over the open face of the booth (or booth cross section during spraying operations) shall be not less than 100 linear feet per minute. Electrostatic spraying operations may be conducted with an air velocity over the open face of the booth of not less than 60 linear feet per minute, or more, depending on the volume of the finishing material being applied and its flammability and explosion characteristics. Visible gauges or audible alarm or pressure activated devices shall be installed to indicate or insure that the required air velocity is maintained. Filter rolls shall be inspected to insure proper replacement of filter media. (ii) All discarded filter pads and filter rolls shall be immediately removed to a safe, well-detached location or placed in a water-filled metal container and disposed of at the close of the day's operation unless maintained completely in water. (iii) The location of filters in a spray booth shall be so as to not reduce the effective booth enclosure of the articles being sprayed. (iv) Space within the spray booth on the downstream and upstream sides of filters shall be protected with approved automatic sprinklers. (v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be used when applying a spray material known to be highly susceptible to spontaneous heating and ignition. (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall be noncombustible or of a type having a combustibility not in excess of class 2 filters as listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls shall not be alternately used for different types of coating materials, where the combination of materials may be conducive to spontaneous ignition. See also paragraph (g)(6) of this section. (6) Frontal area. 1/2 (7) Conveyors. (8) Separation of operations. (9) Cleaning. (10) Illumination. (c) Electrical and other sources of ignition Conformance. (i) Electrostatic apparatus shall conform to the requirements of paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section; (ii) Drying, curing, and fusion apparatus shall conform to the requirements of paragraph (j) of this section; (iii) Automobile undercoating spray operations in garages shall conform to the requirements of paragraph (k) of this section; (iv) Powder-coating equipment shall conform to the requirements of paragraph (l)(1) of this section. (2) Minimum separation. (3) Hot surfaces. (4) Wiring conformance. (5) Combustible residues, areas. (6) Wiring type approved. (7) Lamps. (8) Portable lamps. (9) Grounding. (ii) [Reserved] (d) Ventilation Conformance. (2) General. (3) Independent exhaust. (4) Fan-rotating element. (5) Electric motors. (6) Belts. (7) Exhaust ducts. (i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected against mechanical damage and have a clearance from unprotected combustible construction or other combustible material of not less than 18 inches. (ii) If combustible construction is provided with the following protection applied to all surfaces within 18 inches, clearances may be reduced to the distances indicated: ( a 1 4 12 inches. ( b 1 8 9 inches. ( c 3 inches. ( d (8) Discharge clearance. (9) Air exhaust. (10) Access doors. (11) Room intakes. (12) Drying spaces. (e) Flammable liquids and liquids with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) Conformance. (2) Quantity. (3) Containers. (4) Transferring liquids. (5) Spraying containers. (6) Pipes and hoses. (ii) When a pump is used to deliver products, automatic means shall be provided to prevent pressure in excess of the design working pressure of accessories, piping, and hose. (iii) All pressure hose and couplings shall be inspected at regular intervals appropriate to this service. The hose and couplings shall be tested with the hose extended, and using the “inservice maximum operating pressures.” Any hose showing material deteriorations, signs of leakage, or weakness in its carcass or at the couplings, shall be withdrawn from service and repaired or discarded. (iv) Piping systems conveying flammable liquids or liquids with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) shall be of steel or other material having comparable properties of resistance to heat and physical damage. Piping systems shall be properly bonded and grounded. (7) Spray liquid heaters. (8) Pump relief. (9) Grounding. (f) Protection Conformance. (2) Valve access. (3) Cleaning of heads. (4) Portable extinguishers. (g) Operations and maintenance Spraying. (2) Cleaning. (3) Residue disposal. (4) Clothing storage. (5) Cleaning solvents. (6) Hazardous materials combinations. (7) “No Smoking” signs. (h) Fixed electrostatic apparatus Conformance. (2) Type approval. (3) Location. (4) Support. (5) Insulators, grounding. (6) Safe distance. (7) Conveyors required. (8) Prohibition. (9) Fail-safe controls. (i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or failure of ventilating equipment from any cause. (ii) Stoppage of the conveyor carrying goods through the high voltage field. (iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an imminent ground at any point on the high voltage system. (iv) Reduction of clearance below that specified in paragraph (h)(6) of this section. (10) Guarding. (11) Ventilation. (12) Fire protection. (i) Electrostatic hand spraying equipment Application. (2) Conformance. (3) Equipment approval and specifications. (4) Electrical support equipment. (5) Spray gun ground. (6) Grounding—general. (7) Maintenance of grounds. (8) Interlocks. (9) Ventilation. (j) Drying, curing, or fusion apparatus Conformance. (2) Alternate use prohibited. (3) Adjacent system interlocked. (i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying space before the heating system can be started; (ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at any source of ignition; (iii) Automatically shut down the heating system in the event of failure of the ventilating system. (4) Alternate use permitted. (i) Interior (especially floors) of spray enclosures shall be kept free of overspray deposits. (ii) During spray operations, the drying apparatus and electrical connections and wiring thereto shall not be located within spray enclosure nor in any other location where spray residues may be deposited thereon. (iii) The spraying apparatus, the drying apparatus, and the ventilating system of the spray enclosure shall be equipped with suitable interlocks so arranged that: ( a ( b ( c (iv) All electrical wiring and equipment of the drying apparatus shall conform with the applicable sections of subpart S of this part. Only equipment of a type approved for Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations shall be located within 18 inches of floor level. All metallic parts of the drying apparatus shall be properly electrically bonded and grounded. (v) The drying apparatus shall contain a prominently located, permanently attached warning sign indicating that ventilation should be maintained during the drying period and that spraying should not be conducted in the vicinity that spray will deposit on apparatus. (k) Automobile undercoating in garages. (l) Powder coating Electrical and other sources of ignition. (2) Ventilation. (ii) Powders shall not be released to the outside atmosphere. (3) Drying, curing, or fusion equipment. (4) Operation and maintenance. (ii) Surfaces shall be cleaned in such manner as to avoid scattering dust to other places or creating dust clouds. (iii) “No Smoking” signs in large letters on contrasting color background shall be conspicuously posted at all powder coating areas and powder storage rooms. (5) Fixed electrostatic spraying equipment. (6) Electrostatic hand spraying equipment. (7) Electrostatic fluidized beds. (ii) Transformers, powerpacks, control apparatus, and all other electrical portions of the equipment, with the exception of the charging electrodes and their connections to the power supply shall be located outside of the powder coating area or shall otherwise conform to the requirements of paragraph (l)(1) of this section. (iii) All electrically conductive objects within the charging influence of the electrodes shall be adequately grounded. The powder coating equipment shall carry a prominent, permanently installed warning regarding the necessity for grounding these objects. (iv) Objects being coated shall be maintained in contact with the conveyor or other support in order to insure proper grounding. Hangers shall be regularly cleaned to insure effective contact and areas of contact shall be sharp points or knife edges where possible. (v) The electrical equipment shall be so interlocked with the ventilation system that the equipment cannot be operated unless the ventilation fans are in operation. (m) Organic peroxides and dual component coatings Conformance. (2) Smoking. (n) Scope. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007; 77 FR 17776, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1910.108 [Reserved] § 1910.109 Explosives and blasting agents. (a) Definitions applicable to this section Blasting agent. (2) Explosive-actuated power devices. (3) Explosive. Note 1: Classification of explosives is described by the U.S. Department of Transportation as follows (see 49 CFR chapter I): (i) Class A explosives. (ii) Class B explosives. (iii) Class C explosives. (iv) Forbidden or not acceptable explosives. (4) Highway. (5) [Reserved] (6) Magazine. (7) Motor vehicle. (8) Propellant-actuated power devices. (9) [Reserved] (10) Pyrotechnics. (11) [Reserved] (12) Semiconductive hose. (13) Small arms ammunition. (14) Small arms ammunition primers. (15) Smokeless propellants. (16) Special industrial explosives devices. (17) Special industrial explosives materials. (18) Water gels or slurry explosives. (19) DOT specifications. (b) Miscellaneous provisions General hazard. (2) [Reserved] (c) Storage of explosives General provisions. (ii) Blasting caps, electric blasting caps, detonating primers, and primed cartridges shall not be stored in the same magazine with other explosives. (iii) Ground around magazines shall slope away for drainage. The land surrounding magazines shall be kept clear of brush, dried grass, leaves, and other materials for a distance of at least 25 feet. (iv) Magazines as required by this paragraph shall be of two classes; namely, Class I magazines, and Class II magazines. (v) Class I magazines shall be required where the quantity of explosives stored is more than 50 pounds. Class II magazines may be used where the quantity of explosives stored is 50 pounds or less. (vi) Class I magazines shall be located away from other magazines in conformity with Table H-21. Table H-21—American Table of Distances for Storage of Explosives 1-5 [As revised and approved by the Institute of Makers of Explosives, June 5, 1964] Explosives Distances in feet when storage is barricaded: Separation of magazines Pounds over Pounds not over 2 5 6 5 10 8 10 20 10 20 30 11 30 40 12 40 50 14 50 75 15 75 100 16 100 125 18 125 150 19 150 200 21 200 250 23 250 300 24 300 400 27 400 500 29 500 600 31 600 700 32 700 800 33 800 900 35 900 1,000 36 1,000 1,200 39 1,200 1,400 41 1,400 1,600 43 1,600 1,800 44 1,800 2,000 45 2,000 2,500 49 2,500 3,000 52 3,000 4,000 58 4,000 5,000 61 5,000 6,000 65 6,000 7,000 68 7,000 8,000 72 8,000 9,000 75 9,000 10,000 78 10,000 12,000 82 12,000 14,000 87 14,000 16,000 90 16,000 18,000 94 18,000 20,000 98 20,000 25,000 105 25,000 30,000 112 30,000 35,000 119 35,000 40,000 124 40,000 45,000 129 45,000 50,000 135 50,000 55,000 140 55,000 60,000 145 60,000 65,000 150 65,000 70,000 155 70,000 75,000 160 75,000 80,000 165 80,000 85,000 170 85,000 90,000 175 90,000 95,000 180 95,000 100,000 185 100,000 110,000 195 110,000 120,000 205 120,000 130,000 215 130,000 140,000 225 140,000 150,000 235 150,000 160,000 245 160,000 170,000 255 170,000 180,000 265 180,000 190,000 275 190,000 200,000 285 200,000 210,000 295 210,000 230,000 315 230,000 250,000 335 250,000 275,000 360 275,000 300,000 385 1 2 3 4 5 (vii) Except as provided in subdivision (viii) of this subparagraph, class II magazines shall be located in conformity with Table H-21, but may be permitted in warehouses and in wholesale and retail establishments when located on a floor which has an entrance at outside grade level and the magazine is located not more than 10 feet from such an entrance. Two class II magazines may be located in the same building when one is used only for blasting caps in quantities not in excess of 5,000 caps and a distance of 10 feet is maintained between magazines. (viii) When used for temporary storage at a site for blasting operations, class II magazines shall be located away from other magazines. A distance of at least one hundred and fifty (150) feet shall be maintained between class II magazines and the work in progress when the quantity of explosives kept therein is in excess of 25 pounds, and at least 50 feet when the quantity of explosives is 25 pounds, or less. (ix) This paragraph (c) does not apply to: ( a ( b ( c ( d (2) Construction of magazines—general. (ii) Magazines for the storage of explosives, other than black powder, Class B and Class C explosives shall be bullet resistant, weather resistant, fire resistant, and ventilated sufficiently to protect the explosive in the specific locality. Magazines used only for storage of black powder, Class B and Class C explosives shall be weather resistant, fire-resistant, and have ventilation. Magazines for storage of blasting and electric blasting caps shall be weather resistant, fire-resistant, and ventilated. (iii) Property upon which Class I magazines are located and property where Class II magazines are located outside of buildings shall be posted with signs reading “Explosives—Keep Off.” (iv) Magazines requiring heat shall be heated by either hot-water radiant heating with the magazine building; or air directed into the magazine building over either hot water or low pressure steam (15 p.s.i.g.) coils located outside the magazine building. (v) The magazine heating systems shall meet the following requirements: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g (vi) When lights are necessary inside the magazine, electric safety flashlight, or electric safety lanterns shall be used. (3) Construction of Class I magazines. (ii) Floors and roofs of masonry magazines may be of wood construction. Wood floors shall be tongue and grooved lumber having a nominal thickness of 1 inch. (iii) Roofs required to be bullet resistant shall be protected by a sand tray located at the line of eaves and covering the entire area except that necessary for ventilation. Sand in the sand tray shall be maintained at a depth of not less than 4 inches. (iv) All wood at the exterior of magazines, including eaves, shall be protected by being covered with black or galvanized steel or aluminum metal of thickness of not less than No. 26 gage. All nails exposed to the interior of magazines shall be well countersunk. (v) Foundations for magazines shall be of substantial construction and arranged to provide good cross ventilation. (vi) Magazines shall be ventilated sufficiently to prevent dampness and heating of stored explosives. Ventilating openings shall be screened to prevent the entrance of sparks. (vii) Openings to magazines shall be restricted to that necessary for the placement and removal of stocks of explosives. Doors for openings in magazines for Class A explosives shall be bullet resistant. Doors for magazines not required to be bullet resistant shall be designed to prevent unauthorized entrance to the magazine. (viii) [Reserved] (ix) Provisions shall be made to prevent the piling of stocks of explosives directly against masonry walls, brick-lined or sand-filled metal walls and single-thickness metal walls; such protection, however, shall not interfere with proper ventilation at the interior of side and end walls. (4) Construction of Class II magazines. (ii) Wood magazines of this class shall have sides, bottom, and cover constructed of 2-inch hardwood boards well braced at corners and protected by being entirely covered with sheet metal of not less than No. 20 gage. All nails exposed to the interior of the magazine shall be well countersunk. All metal magazines of this class shall have sides, bottom, and cover constructed of sheet metal, and shall be lined with three-eighths-inch plywood or equivalent. Edges of metal covers shall overlap sides at least 1 inch. (iii) Covers for both wood- and metal-constructed magazines of this class shall be provided with substantial strap hinges and shall be provided with substantial means for locking. (iv) Magazines of this class shall be painted red and shall bear lettering in white, on all sides and top, at least 3 inches high, “Explosives—Keep Fire Away.” Class II magazines when located in warehouses, and in wholesale and retail establishments shall be provided with substantial wheels or casters to facilitate easy removal in the case of fire. Where necessary due to climatic conditions, Class II magazines shall be ventilated. (5) Storage within magazines. (ii) Packages of explosives shall not be unpacked or repacked in a magazine nor within 50 feet of a magazine or in close proximity to other explosives. Tools used for opening packages of explosives shall be constructed of nonsparking materials, except that metal slitters may be used for opening fiberboard boxes. A wood wedge and a fiber, rubber, or wood mallet shall be used for opening or closing wood packages of explosives. Opened packages of explosives shall be securely closed before being returned to a magazine. (iii) Magazines shall not be used for the storage of any metal tools nor any commodity except explosives, but this restriction shall not apply to the storage of blasting agents and blasting supplies. (iv) Magazine floors shall be regularly swept, kept clean, dry, free of grit, paper, empty used packages, and rubbish. Brooms and other cleaning utensils shall not have any spark-producing metal parts. Sweepings from floors of magazines shall be properly disposed of. Magazine floors stained with nitroglycerin shall be cleaned according to instructions by the manufacturer. (v) When any explosive has deteriorated to an extent that it is in an unstable or dangerous condition, or if nitroglycerin leaks from any explosives, then the person in possession of such explosive shall immediately proceed to destroy such explosive in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. Only experienced persons shall be allowed to do the work of destroying explosives. (vi) When magazines need inside repairs, all explosives shall be removed therefrom and the floors cleaned. In making outside repairs, if there is a possibility of causing sparks or fire the explosives shall be removed from the magazine. Explosives removed from a magazine under repair shall either be placed in another magazine or placed a safe distance from the magazine where they shall be properly guarded and protected until repairs have been completed, when they shall be returned to the magazine. (vii) Smoking, matches, open flames, spark-producing devices, and firearms (except firearms carried by guards) shall not be permitted inside of or within 50 feet of magazines. The land surrounding a magazine shall be kept clear of all combustible materials for a distance of at least 25 feet. Combustible materials shall not be stored within 50 feet of magazines. (viii) Magazines shall be in the charge of a competent person at all times and who shall be held responsible for the enforcement of all safety precautions. (ix) Explosives recovered from blasting misfires shall be placed in a separate magazine until competent personnel has determined from the manufacturer the method of disposal. Caps recovered from blasting misfires shall not be reused. Such explosives and caps shall then be disposed of in the manner recommended by the manufacturer. (d) Transportation of explosives General provisions. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) Explosives shall not be transferred from one vehicle to another within the confines of any jurisdiction (city, county, State, or other area) without informing the fire and police departments thereof. In the event of breakdown or collision the local fire and police departments shall be promptly notified to help safeguard such emergencies. Explosives shall be transferred from the disabled vehicle to another only, when proper and qualified supervision is provided. (iv) Blasting caps or electric blasting caps shall not be transported over the highways on the same vehicles with other explosives, unless packaged, segregated, and transported in accordance with the Department of Transportation's Hazardous Materials Regulations (49 CFR parts 177-180). (2) Transportation vehicles. (ii) Every vehicle used for transporting explosives and oxidizing materials listed in paragraph (d)(2)(ii)( a ( a Commodity Type of marking or placard Explosives, Class A, any quantity or a combination of Class A and Class B explosives Explosives A (Red letters on white background). Explosives, Class B, and quantity Explosives B (Red letters on white background). Oxidizing material (blasting agents, ammonium nitrate, etc.), 1,000 pounds or more gross weight Oxidizers (Yellow letters on black background). ( b ( c a ( d a ( e a c (iii) Each motor vehicle used for transporting explosives shall be equipped with a minimum of two extinguishers, each having a rating of at least 10-BC. ( a ( b (iv) A motor vehicle used for transporting explosives shall be given the following inspection to determine that it is in proper condition for safe transportation of explosives: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g (3) Operation of transportation vehicles. (ii) Except under emergency conditions, no vehicle transporting explosives shall be parked before reaching its destination, even though attended, on any public street adjacent to or in proximity to any place where people work. (iii) Every motor vehicle transporting any quantity of Class A or Class B explosives shall, at all times, be attended by a driver or other attendant of the motor carrier. This attendant shall have been made aware of the class of the explosive material in the vehicle and of its inherent dangers, and shall have been instructed in the measures and procedures to be followed in order to protect the public from those dangers. He shall have been made familiar with the vehicle he is assigned, and shall be trained, supplied with the necessary means, and authorized to move the vehicle when required. ( a ( b (iv) No spark-producing metal, spark-producing metal tools, oils, matches, firearms, electric storage batteries, flammable substances, acids, oxidizing materials, or corrosive compounds shall be carried in the body of any motor truck and/or vehicle transporting explosives, unless the loading of such dangerous articles and the explosives comply with U.S. Department of Transportation regulations. (v) Vehicles transporting explosives shall avoid congested areas and heavy traffic. Where routes through congested areas have been designated by local authorities such routes shall be followed. (vi) Delivery shall only be made to authorized persons and into authorized magazines or authorized temporary storage or handling areas. (e) Use of explosives and blasting agents General provisions. (ii) Original containers or Class II magazines shall be used for taking detonators and other explosives from storage magazines to the blasting area. (iii) When blasting is done in congested areas or in close proximity to a structure, or any other installation that may be damaged, the blast shall be covered before firing with a mat constructed so that it is capable of preventing fragments from being thrown. (iv) Persons authorized to prepare explosive charges or conduct blasting operations shall use every reasonable precaution, including but not limited to warning signals, flags, barricades, or woven wire mats to insure the safety of the general public and workmen. (v) Blasting operations shall be conducted during daylight hours. (vi) Whenever blasting is being conducted in the vicinity of gas, electric, water, fire alarm, telephone, telegraph, and steam utilities, the blaster shall notify the appropriate representatives of such utilities at least 24 hours in advance of blasting, specifying the location and intended time of such blasting. Verbal notice shall be confirmed with written notice. (vii) Due precautions shall be taken to prevent accidental discharge of electric blasting caps from current induced by radar, radio transmitters, lightning, adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or other sources of extraneous electricity. These precautions shall include: ( a ( b (2) Storage at use sites. (ii) Containers of explosives shall not be opened in any magazine or within 50 feet of any magazine. In opening kegs or wooden cases, no sparking metal tools shall be used; wooden wedges and either wood, fiber or rubber mallets shall be used. Nonsparking metallic slitters may be used for opening fiberboard cases. (iii) Explosives or blasting equipment that are obviously deteriorated or damaged shall not be used. (iv) No explosives shall be abandoned. (3) Loading of explosives in blast holes. (ii) Tamping shall be done only with wood rods without exposed metal parts, but nonsparking metal connectors may be used for jointed poles. Violent tamping shall be avoided. Primed cartridges shall not be tamped. (iii) When loading blasting agents pneumatically over electric blasting caps, semiconductive delivery hose shall be used and the equipment shall be bonded and grounded. (iv) No holes shall be loaded except those to be fired in the next round of blasting. After loading, all remaining explosives shall be immediately returned to an authorized magazine. (v) Drilling shall not be started until all remaining butts of old holes are examined with a wooden stick for unexploded charges, and if any are found, they shall be refired before work proceeds. (vi) No person shall be allowed to deepen drill holes which have contained explosives. (vii) After loading for a blast is completed, all excess blasting caps or electric blasting caps and other explosives shall immediately be returned to their separate storage magazines. (4) Initiation of explosive charges. (i) [Reserved] (ii) When fuse is used, the blasting cap shall be securely attached to the safety fuse with a standard-ring type cap crimper. All primers shall be assembled at least 50 feet from any magazine. (iii) Primers shall be made up only as required for each round of blasting. (iv) No blasting cap shall be inserted in the explosives without first making a hole in the cartridge for the cap with a wooden punch of proper size or standard cap crimper. (v) Explosives shall not be extracted from a hole that has once been charged or has misfired unless it is impossible to detonate the unexploded charge by insertion of a fresh additional primer. (vi) If there are any misfires while using cap and fuse, all persons shall be required to remain away from the charge for at least 1 hour. If electric blasting caps are used and a misfire occurs, this waiting period may be reduced to 30 minutes. Misfires shall be handled under the direction of the person in charge of the blasting and all wires shall be carefully traced and search made for unexploded charges. (vii) Blasters, when testing circuits to charged holes, shall use only blasting galvanometers designed for this purpose. (viii) Only the employee making leading wire connections in electrical firing shall be allowed to fire the shot. Leading wires shall remain shorted and not be connected to the blasting machine or other source of current until the charge is to be fired. (5) Warning required. (f) Explosives at piers, railway stations, and cars or vessels not otherwise specified in this standard Railway cars. (2) Packing and marking. (3) Marking cars. 1/2 (4) Storage. (5) Hours of transfer. (g) Blasting agents General. (2) Fixed location mixing. (ii) Buildings used for the mixing of blasting agents shall conform to the requirements of this section. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (iii) Equipment used for mixing blasting agents shall conform to the requirements of this subdivision. ( a ( b ( c (iv) The provisions of this subdivision shall be considered when determining blasting agent compositions. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (v) All electrical switches, controls, motors, and lights located in the mixing room shall conform to the requirements in subpart S of this part for Class II, Division 2 locations; otherwise they shall be located outside the mixing room. The frame of the mixer and all other equipment that may be used shall be electrically bonded and be provided with a continuous path to the ground. (vi) Safety precautions at mixing plants shall include the requirements of this subdivision. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i (3) Bulk delivery and mixing vehicles. (ii) A bulk vehicle body for delivering and mixing blasting agents shall conform with the requirements of this paragraph (ii). ( a ( b ( c ( d (iii) Operation of bulk delivery vehicles shall conform to the requirements of this subdivision. These include the placarding requirements as specified by Department of Transportation. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (iv) Pneumatic loading from bulk delivery vehicles into blastholes primed with electric blasting caps or other static-sensitive systems shall conform to the requirements of this subdivision. ( a ( b ( c (v) Repairs to bulk delivery vehicles shall conform to the requirements of this section. ( a ( b (4) Bulk storage bins. (ii) The bin discharge gate shall be designed to provide a closure tight enough to prevent leakage of the stored product. Provision shall also be made so that the gate can be locked. (iii) Bin loading manways or access hatches shall be hinged or otherwise attached to the bin and be designed to permit locking. (iv) Any electrically driven conveyors for loading or unloading bins shall conform to the requirements of subpart S of this part. They shall be designed to minimize damage from corrosion. (v) Bins containing blasting agent shall be located, with respect to inhabited buildings, passenger railroads, and public highways, in accordance with Table-21 and separation from other blasting agent storage and explosives storage shall be in conformity with Table H-22. (vi) Bins containing ammonium nitrate shall be separated from blasting agent storage and explosives storage in conformity with Table H-22. Table H-22—Table of Recommended Separation Distances of Ammonium Nitrate and Blasting Agents From Explosives or Blasting Agents 1-6 Donor weight Minimum separation distance of receptor when barricaded 2 Minimum thickness of artificial barricades 5 Pounds over Pounds not over Ammonium nitrate 3 Blasting agent 4 100 3 11 12 100 300 4 14 12 300 600 5 18 12 600 1,000 6 22 12 1,000 1,600 7 25 12 1,600 2,000 8 29 12 2,000 3,000 9 32 15 3,000 4,000 10 36 15 4,000 6,000 11 40 15 6,000 8,000 12 43 20 8,000 10,000 13 47 20 10,000 12,000 14 50 20 12,000 16,000 15 54 25 16,000 20,000 16 58 25 20,000 25,000 18 65 25 25,000 30,000 19 68 30 30,000 35,000 20 72 30 35,000 40,000 21 76 30 40,000 45,000 22 79 35 45,000 50,000 23 83 35 50,000 55,000 24 86 35 55,000 60,000 25 90 35 60,000 70,000 26 94 40 70,000 80,000 28 101 40 80,000 90,000 30 108 40 90,000 100,000 32 115 40 100,000 120,000 34 122 50 120,000 140,000 37 133 50 140,000 160,000 40 144 50 160,000 180,000 44 158 50 180,000 200,000 48 173 50 200,000 220,000 52 187 60 220,000 250,000 56 202 60 250,000 275,000 60 216 60 275,000 300,000 64 230 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 Note 7: (a) Sketch location of all potential donor and acceptor materials together with the maximum mass of material to be allowed in that vicinity. (Potential donors are high explosives, blasting agents, and combination of masses of detonating materials. Potential acceptors are high explosives, blasting agents, and ammonium nitrate.) (b) Consider separately each donor mass in combination with each acceptor mass. If the masses are closer than table allowance (distances measured between nearest edges), the combination of masses becomes a new potential donor of weight equal to the total mass. When individual masses are considered as donors, distances to potential acceptors shall be measured between edges. When combined masses within propagating distance of each other are considered as a donor, the appropriate distance to the edge of potential acceptors shall be computed as a weighted distance from the combined masses. Calculation of weighted distance from combined masses: Let M 2 M 3 M n M 1 D 1 2 1 2 D 1 3 1 3 To find weighted distance [ D 1 2 3 n M 1 D 1 2 3 n M 2 D 12 M 3 D 12 M n D 12 M 2 M 3 M n Propagation is possible if either an individual donor mass is less than the tabulated distance from an acceptor or a combined mass is less than the weighted distance from an acceptor. (c) In determining the distances separating highways, railroads, and inhabited buildings from potential explosions (as prescribed in Table H-21), the sum of all masses which may propagate (i.e., lie at distances less than prescribed in the Table) from either (d) When all or part of a potential acceptor comprises Explosives Class A as defined in DOT regulations, storage in bullet-resistant magazines is required. Safe distances to stores in bullet-resistant magazines may be obtained from the intermagazine distances prescribed in Table H-21. (e) Barricades must not have line-of-sight openings between potential donors and acceptors which permit blast or missiles to move directly between masses. (f) Good housekeeping practices shall be maintained around any bin containing ammonium nitrate or blasting agent. This includes keeping weeds and other combustible materials cleared within 25 feet of such bin. Accumulation of spilled product on the ground shall be prevented. (5) Storage of blasting agents and supplies. ( a ( b ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( c (ii) Warehouses used for the storage of blasting agents separate from explosives shall be located as set forth in this subdivision. ( a ( b (iii) Smoking, matches, open flames, spark producing devices, and firearms are prohibited inside of or within 50 feet of any warehouse used for the storage of blasting agents. Combustible materials shall not be stored within 50 feet of warehouses used for the storage of blasting agents. (iv) The interior of warehouses used for the storage of blasting agents shall be kept clean and free from debris and empty containers. Spilled materials shall be cleaned up promptly and safely removed. Combustible materials, flammable liquids, corrosive acids, chlorates, or nitrates shall not be stored in any warehouse used for blasting agents unless separated therefrom by a fire resistive separation of not less than 1 hour resistance. The provisions of this subdivision shall not prohibit the storage of blasting agents together with nonexplosive blasting supplies. (v) Piles of ammonium nitrate and warehouses containing ammonium nitrate shall be adequately separated from readily combustible fuels. (vi) Caked oxidizers, either in bags or in bulk, shall not be loosened by blasting. (vii) Every warehouse used for the storage of blasting agents shall be under the supervision of a competent person. (6) Transportation of packaged blasting agents. (ii) Vehicles transporting blasting agents shall only be driven by and be in charge of a driver in possession of a valid motor vehicle operator's license. Such a person shall also be familiar with the State's vehicle and traffic laws. (iii) No matches, firearms, acids, or other corrosive liquids shall be carried in the bed or body of any vehicle containing blasting agents. (iv) No person shall be permitted to ride upon, drive, load, or unload a vehicle containing blasting agents while smoking or under the influence of intoxicants, narcotics, or other dangerous drugs. (v) [Reserved] (vi) Vehicles transporting blasting agents shall be in safe operating condition at all times. (7) Use of blasting agents. (h) Water gel (Slurry) explosives and blasting agents General provisions. (2) Types and classifications. (ii) Water gels containing no substance in itself classified as an explosive and which are cap-sensitive as defined in paragraph (a) of this section under Blasting Agent shall be classified as an explosive and manufactured, transported, stored and used as specified for “explosives” in this section. (iii) Water gels containing no substance in itself classified as an explosive and which are not cap-sensitive as defined in paragraph (a) of this section under Blasting Agent shall be classified as blasting agents and manufactured, transported, stored, and used as specified for “blasting agents” in this section. (iv) When tests on specific formulations of water gels result in Department of Transportation classification as a Class B explosive, bullet-resistant magazines are not required, see paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section. (3) Fixed location mixing. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Buildings used for the mixing of water gels shall conform to the requirements of this subdivision. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (iii) Ingredients of water gels shall conform to the requirements of this subdivision. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (iv) Mixing equipment shall comply with the requirements of this subdivision. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (v) Mixing facilities shall comply with the fire prevention requirements of this subdivision. ( a ( b ( c (4) Bulk delivery and mixing vehicles. ( a ( b ( c ( d (ii) Operation of bulk delivery and mixing vehicles shall comply with the requirements of this subdivision. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g (i) Storage of ammonium nitrate Scope and definitions. a d ( b ( c ( d (ii)( a ( b (2) General provisions. (ii) Approval of large quantity storage shall be subject to due consideration of the fire and explosion hazards, including exposure to toxic vapors from burning or decomposing ammonium nitrate. (iii)( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (3) Storage of ammonium nitrate in bags, drums, or other containers. a ( b a (ii)( a ( b ( c ( d (4) Storage of bulk ammonium nitrate. a ( b (ii)( a ( b ( c (iii)( a ( b ( c ( d (5) Contaminants. a ( b a ( c a b ( d (ii)( a ( b ( c ( d (6) General precautions. (ii) In areas where lightning storms are prevalent, lightning protection shall be provided. (See the Lightning Protection Code, NFPA 78-1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.) (iii) Provisions shall be made to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering the ammonium nitrate storage area. (7) Fire protection. (ii)( a ( b (j) Small arms ammunition, small arms primers, and small arms propellants Scope. (2) Small arms ammunition. (ii) Small arms ammunition shall be separated from flammable liquids, flammable solids as classified in 49 CFR part 172, and from oxidizing materials, by a fire-resistive wall of 1-hour rating or by a distance of 25 feet. (iii) Small arms ammunition shall not be stored together with Class A or Class B explosives unless the storage facility is adequate for this latter storage. (3) Smokeless propellants. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) Commercial stocks of smokeless propellants over 20 pounds and not more than 100 pounds shall be stored in portable wooden boxes having walls of at least 1 inch nominal thickness. (iv) Commercial stocks in quantities not to exceed 750 pounds shall be stored in nonportable storage cabinets having wooden walls of at least 1 inch nominal thickness. Not more than 400 pounds shall be permitted in any one cabinet. (v) Quantities in excess of 750 pounds shall be stored in magazines in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section. (4) Small arms ammunition primers. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) Small arms ammunition primers shall be separated from flammable liquids, flammable solids as classified in 49 CFR part 172, and oxidizing materials by a fire-resistive wall of 1-hour rating or by a distance of 25 feet. (iv) Not more than 750,000 small arms ammunition primers shall be stored in any one building, except as provided in paragraph (j)(4)(v) of this paragraph. Not more than 100,000 shall be stored in any one pile. Piles shall be at least 15 feet apart. (v) Quantities of small arms ammunition primers in excess of 750,000 shall be stored in magazines in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section. (k) Scope. (2) The manufacture of explosives as defined in paragraph (a)(3) of this section shall also meet the requirements contained in § 1910.119. (3) The manufacture of pyrotechnics as defined in paragraph (a)(10) of this section shall also meet the requirements contained in § 1910.119. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978; 45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 57 FR 6403, Feb. 24, 1992; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998] § 1910.110 Storage and handling of liquefied petroleum gases. (a) Definitions applicable to this section. (1) API-ASME container—A container constructed in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section. (2) ASME container—A container constructed in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section. (3) Container assembly—An assembly consisting essentially of the container and fittings for all container openings, including shutoff valves, excess flow valves, liquid-level gaging devices, safety relief devices, and protective housing. (4) Containers—All vessels, such as tanks, cylinders, or drums, used for transportation or storing liquefied petroleum gases. (5) DOT—Department of Transportation. (6) DOT container—A container constructed in accordance with the applicable requirements of 49 CFR chapter 1. (7) “Liquified petroleum gases”—“LPG” and “LP-Gas”—Any material which is composed predominantly of any of the following hydrocarbons, or mixtures of them; propane, propylene, butanes (normal butane or iso-butane), and butylenes. (8) Movable fuel storage tenders or farm carts—Containers not in excess of 1,200 gallons water capacity, equipped with wheels to be towed from one location of usage to another. They are basically nonhighway vehicles, but may occasionally be moved over public roads or highways. They are used as a fuel supply for farm tractors, construction machinery and similar equipment. (9) P.S.I.G.—pounds per square inch gauge. (10) P.S.I.A.—pounds per square inch absolute. (11) Systems—an assembly of equipment consisting essentially of the container or containers, major devices such as vaporizers, safety relief valves, excess flow valves, regulators, and piping connecting such parts. (12) Vaporizer-burner—an integral vaporizer-burner unit, dependent upon the heat generated by the burner as the source of heat to vaporize the liquid used for dehydrators or dryers. (13) Ventilation, adequate—when specified for the prevention of fire during normal operation, ventilation shall be considered adequate when the concentration of the gas in a gas-air mixture does not exceed 25 percent of the lower flammable limit. (14) Approved—unless otherwise indicated, listing or approval by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory. (15) Listed—see “approved” in § 1910.110(14). (16) DOT Specifications—regulations of the Department of Transportation published in 49 CFR chapter I. (17)-(18) [Reserved] (19) DOT cylinders—cylinders meeting the requirements of 49 CFR chapter I. (b) Basic rules Odorizing gases. (ii) The odorization requirement of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section shall be considered to be met by the use of 1.0 pounds of ethyl mercaptan, 1.0 pounds of thiophane or 1.4 pounds of amyl mercaptan per 10,000 gallons of LP-Gas. However, this listing of odorants and quantities shall not exclude the use of other odorants that meet the odorization requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section. (2) Approval of equipment and systems. (ii) Each system for domestic or commercial use utilizing containers of 2,000 gallons or less water capacity, other than those constructed in accordance with 49 CFR part 178, shall consist of a container assembly and one or more regulators, and may include other parts. The system as a unit or the container assembly as a unit, and the regulator or regulators, shall be individually listed. (iii) In systems utilizing containers of over 2,000 gallons water capacity, each regulator, container valve, excess flow valve, gaging device, and relief valve installed on or at the container, shall have its correctness as to design, construction, and performance determined by listing by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory. (3) Requirements for construction and original test of containers. (ii) Containers constructed according to the 1949 and earlier editions of the ASME Code do not have to comply with paragraphs U-2 through U-10 and U-19 thereof. Containers constructed according to paragraph U-70 in the 1949 and earlier editions are not authorized. (iii) Containers designed, constructed, and tested prior to July 1, 1961, according to the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels for Petroleum Liquids and Gases, 1951 edition with 1954 Addenda, of the American Petroleum Institute and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, shall be considered in conformance. Containers constructed according to API-ASME Code do not have to comply with section I or with appendix to section I. Paragraphs W-601 to W-606 inclusive in the 1943 and earlier editions do not apply. (iv) The provisions of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section shall not be construed as prohibiting the continued use or reinstallation of containers constructed and maintained in accordance with the standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases NFPA No. 58 in effect at the time of fabrication. (v) Containers used with systems embodied in paragraph (b), (d)(3)(iii), and (f) of this section, shall be constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with DOT specifications effective at the date of their manufacture. (4) Welding of containers. (ii) Where repair or modification involving welding of DOT containers is required, the container shall be returned to a qualified manufacturer making containers of the same type, and the repair or modification made in compliance with DOT regulations. (5) Markings on containers. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i (ii) Markings specified shall be on a metal nameplate attached to the container and located in such a manner as to remain visible after the container is installed. (iii) When LP-Gas and one or more other gases are stored or used in the same area, the containers shall be marked to identify their content. Marking shall conform to the marking requirements set forth in § 1910.253(b)(1)(ii). (6) Location of containers and regulating equipment. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (ii) Each individual container shall be located with respect to the nearest important building or group of buildings in accordance with Table H-23. Table H-23 Water capacity per container Minimum distances Containers Between aboveground containers Underground Aboveground Less than 125 gals. 1 10 feet None None. 125 to 250 gals 10 feet 10 feet None. 251 to 500 gals 10 feet 10 feet 3 feet. 501 to 2,000 gals 25 feet 2 25 feet 2 3 feet. 2,001 to 30,000 gals 50 feet 50 feet 5 feet. 30,001 to 70,000 gals 50 feet 75 feet. 3 70,001 to 90,000 gals 50 feet 100 feet. 3 1 2 3 1 4 (iii) Containers installed for use shall not be stacked one above the other. (iv) [Reserved] (v) In the case of buildings devoted exclusively to gas manufacturing and distributing operations, the distances required by Table H-23 may be reduced provided that in no case shall containers of water capacity exceeding 500 gallons be located closer than 10 feet to such gas manufacturing and distributing buildings. (vi) Readily ignitible material such as weeds and long dry grass shall be removed within 10 feet of any container. (vii) The minimum separation between liquefied petroleum gas containers and flammable liquid tanks shall be 20 feet, and the minimum separation between a container and the centerline of the dike shall be 10 feet. The foregoing provision shall not apply when LP-Gas containers of 125 gallons or less capacity are installed adjacent to Class III flammable liquid tanks of 275 gallons or less capacity. (viii) Suitable means shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of flammable liquids under adjacent liquified petroleum gas containers, such as by diking, diversion curbs, or grading. (ix) When dikes are used with flammable liquid tanks, no liquefied petroleum gas containers shall be located within the diked area. (7) Container valves and container accessories. (ii) Connections to containers, except safety relief connections, liquid level gaging devices, and plugged openings, shall have shutoff valves located as close to the container as practicable. (iii) Excess flow valves, where required shall close automatically at the rated flows of vapor or liquid as specified by the manufacturer. The connections or line including valves, fittings, etc., being protected by an excess flow valve shall have a greater capacity than the rated flow of the excess flow valve. (iv) Liquid level gaging devices which are so constructed that outward flow of container contents shall not exceed that passed by a No. 54 drill size opening, need not be equipped with excess flow valves. (v) Openings from container or through fittings attached directly on container to which pressure gage connection is made, need not be equipped with shutoff or excess flow valves if such openings are restricted to not larger than No. 54 drill size opening. (vi) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(5)(i)( b (vii) Excess flow valves shall be designed with a bypass, not to exceed a No. 60 drill size opening to allow equalization of pressures. (viii) Containers of more than 30 gallons water capacity and less than 2,000 gallons water capacity, filled on a volumetric basis, and manufactured after December 1, 1963, shall be equipped for filling into the vapor space. (8) Piping—including pipe, tubing, and fittings. ( a ( b (ii) Tubing shall be seamless and of copper, brass, steel, or aluminum alloy. Copper tubing shall be of type K or L or equivalent as covered in the Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube, ANSI H23.1-1970 (ASTM B88-69), which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. Aluminum alloy tubing shall be of Type A or B or equivalent as covered in Specification ASTM B210-68 (which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6) and shall be suitably marked every 18 inches indicating compliance with ASTM Specifications. The minimum nominal wall thickness of copper tubing and aluminum alloy tubing shall be as specified in Table H-24 and Table H-25. Aluminum alloy tubing shall be protected against external corrosion when it is in contact with dissimilar metals other than galvanized steel, or its location is subject to repeated wetting by liquids such as water (except rainwater), detergents, sewage, or leakage from other piping, or it passes through flooring, plaster, masonry, or insulation. Galvanized sheet steel or pipe, galvanized inside and out, may be considered suitable protection. The maximum outside diameter for aluminum alloy tubing shall be three-fourths inch and shall not be used for pressures exceeding 20 p.s.i.g. Aluminum alloy tubing shall not be installed within 6 inches of the ground. Table H-24—Wall Thickness of Copper Tubing 1 Standard size (inches) Nominal outside diameter (inches) Nominal wall thickness (inches) Type K Type L 1 4 0.375 0.035 0.030 3 8 0.500 0.049 0.035 1 2 0.625 0.049 0.040 5 8 0.750 0.049 0.042 3 4 0.875 0.065 0.045 1 1.125 0.065 0.050 1 1 4 1.375 0.065 0.055 1 1 2 1.625 0.072 0.060 2 2.125 0.083 0.070 1 Note: 1 8 Table H-25—Wall Thickness of Aluminum Alloy Tubing 1 Outside diameter (inches) Nominal wall thickness (inches) Type A Type B 3 8 0.035 0.049 1 2 0.035 0.049 5 8 0.042 0.049 3 4 0.049 0.058 1 (iii) In systems where the gas in liquid form without pressure reduction enters the building, only heavy walled seamless brass or copper tubing with an internal diameter not greater than three thirty-seconds inch, and a wall thickness of not less than three sixty-fourths inch shall be used. This requirement shall not apply to research and experimental laboratories, buildings, or separate fire divisions of buildings used exclusively for housing internal combustion engines, and to commercial gas plants or bulk stations where containers are charged, nor to industrial vaporizer buildings, nor to buildings, structures, or equipment under construction or undergoing major renovation. (iv) Pipe joints may be screwed, flanged, welded, soldered, or brazed with a material having a melting point exceeding 1,000 °F. Joints on seamless copper, brass, steel, or aluminum alloy gas tubing shall be made by means of approved gas tubing fittings, or soldered or brazed with a material having a melting point exceeding 1,000 °F. (v) For operating pressures of 125 p.s.i.g. or less, fittings shall be designed for a pressure of at least 125 p.s.i.g. For operating pressures above 125 p.s.i.g., fittings shall be designed for a minimum of 250 p.s.i.g. (vi) The use of threaded cast iron pipe fittings such as ells, tees, crosses, couplings, and unions is prohibited. Aluminum alloy fittings shall be used with aluminum alloy pipe and tubing. Insulated fittings shall be used where aluminum alloy pipe or tubing connects with a dissimilar metal. (vii) Strainers, regulators, meters, compressors, pumps, etc., are not to be considered as pipe fittings. This does not prohibit the use of malleable, nodular, or higher strength gray iron for such equipment. (viii) All materials such as valve seats, packing, gaskets, diaphragms, etc., shall be of such quality as to be resistant to the action of liquefied petroleum gas under the service conditions to which they are subjected. (ix) All piping, tubing, or hose shall be tested after assembly and proved free from leaks at not less than normal operating pressures. After installation, piping and tubing of all domestic and commercial systems shall be tested and proved free of leaks using a manometer or equivalent device that will indicate a drop in pressure. Test shall not be made with a flame. (x) Provision shall be made to compensate for expansion, contraction, jarring, and vibration, and for settling. This may be accomplished by flexible connections. (xi) Piping outside buildings may be buried, above ground, or both, but shall be well supported and protected against physical damage. Where soil conditions warrant, all piping shall be protected against corrosion. Where condensation may occur, the piping shall be pitched back to the container, or suitable means shall be provided for revaporization of the condensate. (9) Hose specifications. (ii) Hose subject to container pressure shall be marked “LP-Gas” or “LPG” at not greater than 10-foot intervals. (iii) Hose subject to container pressure shall be designed for a bursting pressure of not less than 1,250 p.s.i.g. (iv) Hose subject to container pressure shall have its correctness as to design construction and performance determined by being listed (see § 1910.110(a)(15)). (v) Hose connections subject to container pressure shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage, a test pressure of not less than 500 p.s.i.g. (vi) Hose and hose connections on the low-pressure side of the regulator or reducing valve shall be designed for a bursting pressure of not less than 125 p.s.i.g. or five times the set pressure of the relief devices protecting that portion of the system, whichever is higher. (vii) Hose may be used on the low-pressure side of regulators to connect to other than domestic and commercial gas appliances under the following conditions: ( a ( b g ( c ( d ( e (10) Safety devices. c a (ii) Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to discharge pressure for safety relief valves to be used on containers other than those constructed in accordance with DOT specification shall be as follows: Surface area (sq. ft.) Flow rate CFM air 20 or less 626 25 751 30 872 35 990 40 1,100 45 1,220 50 1,330 55 1,430 60 1,540 65 1,640 70 1,750 75 1,850 80 1,950 85 2,050 90 2,150 95 2,240 100 2,340 105 2,440 110 2,530 115 2,630 120 2,720 125 2,810 130 2,900 135 2,990 140 3,080 145 3,170 150 3,260 155 3,350 160 3,440 165 3,530 170 3,620 175 3,700 180 3,790 185 3,880 190 3,960 195 4,050 200 4,130 210 4,300 220 4,470 230 4,630 240 4,800 250 4,960 260 5,130 270 5,290 280 5,450 290 5,610 300 5,760 310 5,920 320 6,080 330 6,230 340 6,390 350 6,540 360 6,690 370 6,840 380 7,000 390 7,150 400 7,300 450 8,040 500 8,760 550 9,470 600 10,170 650 10,860 700 11,550 750 12,220 800 12,880 850 13,540 900 14,190 950 14,830 1,000 15,470 1,050 16,100 1,100 16,720 1,150 17,350 1,200 17,960 1,250 18,570 1,300 19,180 1,350 19,780 1,400 20,380 1,450 20,980 1,500 21,570 1,550 22,160 1,600 22,740 1,650 23,320 1,700 23,900 1,750 24,470 1,800 25,050 1,850 25,620 1,900 26,180 1,950 26,750 2,000 27,310 Surface area = total outside surface area of container in square feet. When the surface area is not stamped on the nameplate or when the marking is not legible, the area can be calculated by using one of the following formulas: (1) Cylindrical container with hemispherical heads: Area = Overall length × outside diameter × 3.1416. (2) Cylindrical container with other than hemispherical heads: Area = (Overall length + 0.3 outside diameter) × outside diameter × 3.1416. Note: This formula is not exact, but will give results within the limits of practical accuracy for the sole purpose of sizing relief valves. (3) Spherical container: Area = Outside diameter squared × 3.1416. Flow Rate-CFM Air = Required flow capacity in cubic feet per minute of air at standard conditions, 60 F. and atmospheric pressure (14.7 p.s.i.a.). The rate of discharge may be interpolated for intermediate values of surface area. For containers with total outside surface area greater than 2,000 square feet, the required flow rate can be calculated using the formula, Flow Rate-CFM Air = 53.632 A0.82. A = total outside surface area of the container in square feet. Valves not marked “Air” have flow rate marking in cubic feet per minute of liquefied petroleum gas. These can be converted to ratings in cubic feet per minute of air by multiplying the liquefied petroleum gas ratings by factors listed below. Air flow ratings can be converted to ratings in cubic feet per minute of liquefied petroleum gas by dividing the air ratings by the factors listed below. Air Conversion Factors Container type 100 125 150 175 200 Air conversion factor 1.162 1.142 1.113 1.078 1.010 (iii) Minimum Required Rate of Discharge for Safety Relief Valves for Liquefied Petroleum Gas Vaporizers (Steam Heated, Water Heated, and Direct Fired). The minimum required rate of discharge for safety relief valves shall be determined as follows: ( a ( b (iv) Container and vaporizer safety relief valves shall be set to start-to-discharge, with relation to the design pressure of the container, in accordance with Table H-26. (v) Safety relief devices used with systems employing containers other than those constructed according to DOT specifications shall be so constructed as to discharge at not less than the rates shown in paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this section, before the pressure is in excess of 120 percent of the maximum (not including the 10 percent referred to in paragraph (b)(10)(iv) of this section) permitted start to discharge pressure setting of the device. Table H-26 Containers Minimum (percent) Maximum (percent) ASME Code; Par. U-68, U-69—1949 and earlier editions 110 1 ASME Code; Par. U-200, U-201—1949 edition 88 1 ASME Code—1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965 and 1968 (Division I) editions 88 1 API—ASME Code—all editions 88 1 DOT—As prescribed in 49 CFR Chapter I 1 (vi) In certain locations sufficiently sustained high temperatures prevail which require the use of a lower vapor pressure product to be stored or the use of a higher designed pressure vessel in order to prevent the safety valves opening as the result of these temperatures. As an alternative the tanks may be protected by cooling devices such as by spraying, by shading, or other effective means. (vii) Safety relief valves shall be arranged so that the possibility of tampering will be minimized. If pressure setting or adjustment is external, the relief valves shall be provided with approved means for sealing adjustment. (viii) Shutoff valves shall not be installed between the safety relief devices and the container, or the equipment or piping to which the safety relief device is connected except that a shutoff valve may be used where the arrangement of this valve is such that full required capacity flow through the safety relief device is always afforded. (ix) Safety relief valves shall have direct communication with the vapor space of the container at all times. (x) Each container safety relief valve used with systems covered by paragraphs (d), (e), (g), and (h) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of this section shall be plainly and permanently marked with the following: “Container Type” of the pressure vessel on which the valve is designed to be installed; the pressure in p.s.i.g. at which the valve is set to discharge; the actual rate of discharge of the valve in cubic feet per minute of air at 60 °F. and 14.7 p.s.i.a.; and the manufacturer's name and catalog number, for example: T200-250-4050 AIR—indicating that the valve is suitable for use on a Type 200 container, that it is set to start to discharge at 250 p.s.i.g.; and that its rate of discharge is 4,050 cubic feet per minute of air as determined in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph. (xi) Safety relief valve assemblies, including their connections, shall be of sufficient size so as to provide the rate of flow required for the container on which they are installed. (xii) A hydrostatic relief valve shall be installed between each pair of shut-off valves on liquefied petroleum gas liquid piping so as to relieve into a safe atmosphere. The start-to-discharge pressure setting of such relief valves shall not be in excess of 500 p.s.i.g. The minimum setting on relief valves installed in piping connected to other than DOT containers shall not be lower than 140 percent of the container relief valve setting and in piping connected to DOT containers not lower than 400 p.s.i.g. The start-to-discharge pressure setting of such a relief valve, if installed on the discharge side of a pump, shall be greater than the maximum pressure permitted by the recirculation device in the system. (xiii) The discharge from any safety relief device shall not terminate in or beneath any building, except relief devices covered by paragraphs (b)(6)(i) ( a e (xiv) Container safety relief devices and regulator relief vents shall be located not less than five (5) feet in any direction from air openings into sealed combustion system appliances or mechanical ventilation air intakes. (11) Vaporizer and housing. ( a ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( b ( c ( d When vaporizing and/or mixing equipment is located in a structure or building not used exclusively for gas manufacturing or distribution, either attached to or within such a building, such structure or room shall be separated from the remainder of the building by a wall designed to withstand a static pressure of at least 100 pounds per square foot. This wall shall have no openings or pipe or conduit passing through it. Such structure or room shall be provided with adequate ventilation and shall have a roof or at least one exterior wall of lightweight construction. ( e a ( f ( g ( h ( i ( j ( k (ii) Atmospheric vaporizers employing heat from the ground or surrounding air shall be installed as follows: ( a ( b ( c (iii) Direct gas-fired vaporizers shall be constructed, marked, and installed as follows: ( a 1 ( 2 ( b 1 ( 2 ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i c Ten feet for vaporizers having a capacity of 15 gallons per hour or less vaporizing capacity. Twenty-five feet for vaporizers having a vaporizing capacity of 16 to 100 gallons per hour. Fifty feet for vaporizers having a vaporizing capacity exceeding 100 gallons per hour. ( j ( k ( l (iv) Direct gas-fired tank heaters shall be constructed and installed as follows: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g Ten feet for storage containers of less than 500 gallons water capacity. Twenty-five feet for storage containers of 500 to 1,200 gallons water capacity. Fifty feet for storage containers of over 1,200 gallons water capacity. ( h (v) The vaporizer section of vaporizer-burners used for dehydrators or dryers shall be located outside of buildings; they shall be constructed and installed as follows: ( a ( b ( c Water capacity per container (gallons) Minimum distances (feet) Less than 501 10 501 to 2,000 25 Over 2,000 50 ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i ( j ( k (12) Filling densities. Table H-27—Maximum Permitted Filling Density Specific gravity at 60 °F. (15.6 °C.) Above ground containers Under ground containers, all capacities 0 to 1,200 U.S. gals. (1,000 imp. gal., 4,550 liters) total water cap. Over 1,200 U.S. gals. (1,000 imp. gal., 4,550 liters) total water cap. Percent Percent Percent 0 .496-0 .503 41 44 45 .504- .510 42 45 46 .511- .519 43 46 47 .520- .527 44 47 48 .528- .536 45 48 49 .537- .544 46 49 50 .545- .552 47 50 51 .553- .560 48 51 52 .561- .568 49 52 53 .569- .576 50 53 54 .577- .584 51 54 55 .585- .592 52 55 56 .593- .600 53 56 57 (ii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(12)(iii) of this section, any container including mobile cargo tanks and portable tank containers regardless of size or construction, shipped under DOT jurisdiction or constructed in accordance with 49 CFR chapter I Specifications shall be charged according to 49 CFR chapter I requirements. (iii) Portable containers not subject to DOT jurisdiction (such as, but not limited to, motor fuel containers on industrial and lift trucks, and farm tractors covered in paragraph (e) of this section, or containers recharged at the installation) may be filled either by weight, or by volume using a fixed length dip tube gaging device. (13) LP-Gas in buildings. a b c (ii) Liquid may be permitted in buildings as follows: ( a ( b ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 ( 7 ( i ( ii ( iii (14) Transfer of liquids. (ii) Containers shall be filled or used only upon authorization of the owner. (iii) Containers manufactured in accordance with specifications of 49 CFR part 178 and authorized by 49 CFR chapter 1 as a “single trip” or “nonrefillable container” shall not be refilled or reused in LP-Gas service. (iv) Gas or liquid shall not be vented to the atmosphere to assist in transferring contents of one container to another, except as provided in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this section and except that this shall not preclude the use of listed pump utilizing LP-Gas in the vapor phase as a source of energy and venting such gas to the atmosphere at a rate not to exceed that from a No. 31 drill size opening and provided that such venting and liquid transfer shall be located not less than 50 feet from the nearest important building. (v) Filling of fuel containers for industrial trucks or motor vehicles from industrial bulk storage containers shall be performed not less than 10 feet from the nearest important masonry-walled building or not less than 25 feet from the nearest important building or other construction and, in any event, not less than 25 feet from any building opening. (vi) Filling of portable containers, containers mounted on skids, fuel containers on farm tractors, or similar applications, from storage containers used in domestic or commercial service, shall be performed not less than 50 feet from the nearest important building. (vii) The filling connection and the vent from the liquid level gages in containers, filled at point of installation, shall not be less than 10 feet in any direction from air openings into sealed combustion system appliances or mechanical ventilation air intakes. (viii) Fuel supply containers shall be gaged and charged only in the open air or in buildings especially provided for that purpose. (ix) The maximum vapor pressure of the product at 100 °F. which may be transferred into a container shall be in accordance with paragraphs (d)(2) and (e)(3) of this section. (For DOT containers use DOT requirements.) (x) Marketers and users shall exercise precaution to assure that only those gases for which the system is designed, examined, and listed, are employed in its operation, particularly with regard to pressures. (xi) Pumps or compressors shall be designed for use with LP-Gas. When compressors are used they shall normally take suction from the vapor space of the container being filled and discharge to the vapor space of the container being emptied. (xii) Pumping systems, when equipped with a positive displacement pump, shall include a recirculating device which shall limit the differential pressure on the pump under normal operating conditions to the maximum differential pressure rating of the pump. The discharge of the pumping system shall be protected so that pressure does not exceed 350 p.s.i.g. If a recirculation system discharges into the supply tank and contains a manual shutoff valve, an adequate secondary safety recirculation system shall be incorporated which shall have no means of rendering it inoperative. Manual shutoff valves in recirculation systems shall be kept open except during an emergency or when repairs are being made to the system. (xiii) When necessary, unloading piping or hoses shall be provided with suitable bleeder valves for relieving pressure before disconnection. (xiv) Agricultural air moving equipment, including crop dryers, shall be shut down when supply containers are being filled unless the air intakes and sources of ignition on the equipment are located 50 feet or more from the container. (xv) Agricultural equipment employing open flames or equipment with integral containers, such as flame cultivators, weed burners, and, in addition, tractors, shall be shut down during refueling. (15) Tank car or transport truck loading or unloading points and operations. (ii) A “Tank Car Connected” sign, as covered by DOT rules, shall be installed at the active end or ends of the siding while the tank car is connected. (iii) While cars are on sidetrack for loading or unloading, the wheels at both ends shall be blocked on the rails. (iv) The employer shall insure that an employee is in attendance at all times while the tank car, cars, or trucks are being loaded or unloaded. (v) A backflow check valve, excess-flow valve, or a shutoff valve with means of remote closing, to protect against uncontrolled discharge of LP-Gas from storage tank piping shall be installed close to the point where the liquid piping and hose or swing joint pipe is connected. (vi) Where practical, the distance of the unloading or loading point shall conform to the distances in subparagraph (6)(ii) of this paragraph. (16) Instructions. (17) Electrical equipment and other sources of ignition. (ii) Open flames or other sources of ignition shall not be permitted in vaporizer rooms (except those housing direct-fired vaporizers), pumphouses, container charging rooms or other similar locations. Direct-fired vaporizers shall not be permitted in pumphouses or container charging rooms. (iii) Liquefied petroleum gas storage containers do not require lightning protection. (iv) Since liquefied petroleum gas is contained in a closed system of piping and equipment, the system need not be electrically conductive or electrically bonded for protection against static electricity. (v) Open flames (except as provided for in paragraph (b)(11) of this section), cutting or welding, portable electric tools, and extension lights capable of igniting LP-Gas, shall not be permitted within classified areas specified in Table H-28 unless the LP-Gas facilities have been freed of all liquid and vapor, or special precautions observed under carefully controlled conditions. Table H-28 Part Location Extent of classified area 1 Equipment shall be suitable for Class 1, Group D 2 A Storage containers other than DOT cylinders Within 15 feet in all directions from connections, except connections otherwise covered in Table H-28 Division 2. B Tank vehicle and tank car loading and unloading 3 Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made or disconnected for product transfer Division 1. Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from a point where connections are regularly made or disconnected and within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator of the sphere and grade. (See Figure H-1) Division 2. C Gage vent openings other than those on DOT cylinders Within 5 feet in all directions from point of discharge Division 1. Division 2. D Relief valve discharge other than those on DOT cylinders Within direct path of discharge Division 1. Within 5 feet in all directions from point of discharge Division 1. Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from point of discharge except within the direct path of discharge Division 2. E Pumps, compressors, gas-air mixers and vaporizers other than direct fired Indoors without ventilation Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gastight partition Division 1. Within 15 feet of the exterior side of any exterior wall or roof that is not vaportight or within 15 feet of any exterior opening Division 2. Indoors with adequate ventilation 4 Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gastight partition Division 2. Outdoors in open air at or abovegrade Within 15 feet in all directions from this equipment and within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator of the sphere and grade. See Figure H-1 Division 2. F Service Station Dispensing Units Entire space within dispenser enclosure, and 18 inches horizontally from enclosure exterior up to an elevation 4 ft. above dispenser base. Entire pit or open space beneath dispenser Division 1. Up to 18 inches abovegrade within 20 ft. horizontally from any edge of enclosure Division 2. Note: G Pits or trenches containing or located beneath LP-Gas valves, pumps, compressors, regulators, and similar equipment Without mechanical ventilation Entire pit or trench Division 1. Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gastight partition Division 1. Within 15 feet in all directions from pit or trench when located outdoors Division 2. With adequate mechanical ventilation Entire pit or trench Division 2. Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gastight partition Division 2. Within 15 feet in all directions from pit or trench when located outdoors Division 2. H Special buildings or rooms for storage of portable containers Entire room Division 2. Pipelines and connections containing operational bleeds, drips, vents or drains Within 5 ft. in all directions from point of discharge Division 1. J Container filling: Indoors without ventilation Entire room Division 1. Indoors with adequate ventilation 4 Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made or disconnected for product transfer Division 1. Beyond 5 feet and entire room Division 2. Outdoors in open air Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made or disconnected for product transfer Division 1. Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from a point where connections are regularly made or disconnected and within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator of the sphere and grade. (See Figure H-1) Division 2. 1 2 3 4 Figure H-1 (18) Fixed electrical equipment in classified areas. (19) Liquid-level gaging device. (ii) All variable gaging devices shall be arranged so that the maximum liquid level for butane, for a 50-50 mixture of butane and propane, and for propane, to which the container may be charged is readily determinable. The markings indicating the various liquid levels from empty to full shall be on the system nameplate or gaging device or part may be on the system nameplate and part on the gaging device. Dials of magnetic or rotary gages shall show whether they are for cylindrical or spherical containers and whether for aboveground or underground service. The dials of gages intended for use only on aboveground containers of over 1,200 gallons water capacity shall be so marked. (iii) Gaging devices that require bleeding of the product to the atmosphere, such as the rotary tube, fixed tube, and slip tube, shall be designed so that the bleed valve maximum opening is not larger than a No. 54 drill size, unless provided with excess flow valve. (iv) Gaging devices shall have a design working pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. (v) Length of tube or position of fixed liquid-level gage shall be designed to indicate the maximum level to which the container may be filled for the product contained. This level shall be based on the volume of the product at 40 °F. at its maximum permitted filling density for aboveground containers and at 50 °F. for underground containers. The employer shall calculate the filling point for which the fixed liquid level gage shall be designed according to the method in this subdivision. ( a [(Water capacity (gals.) of container* × filling density**) ÷ (Specific gravity of LP-Gas* × volume correction factor × 100)] = Maximum volume of LP-Gas *Measured at 60 °F. **From subparagraph (12) of this paragraph “Filling Densities.” For aboveground containers the liquid temperature is assumed to be 40 °F. and for underground containers the liquid temperature is assumed to be 50 °F. To correct the liquid volumes at these temperatures to 60 °F. the following factors shall be used. ( b Table H-29—Volume Correction Factors Specific gravity Aboveground Underground 0.500 1.033 1.017 .510 1.031 1.016 .520 1.029 1.015 .530 1.028 1.014 .540 1.026 1.013 .550 1.025 1.013 .560 1.024 1.012 .570 1.023 1.011 .580 1.021 1.011 .590 1.020 1.010 ( c ( d for determining the length of a fixed dip tube b Example: Assume a 100-gallon total water capacity tank for aboveground storage of propane having a specific gravity of 0.510 of 60 °F. [(100 (gals.) × 42 (filling density from subparagraph (12) of this paragraph)) ÷ (0.510 × 1.031 (correction factor from Table H-29) × 100)] = (4200 ÷ 52.6) (4200 ÷ 52.6) = 79.8 gallons propane, the maximum amount permitted to be placed in a 100-gallon total water capacity aboveground container equipped with a fixed dip tube. [(Maximum volume of LP-Gas (from formula in subdivision ( b Aboveground, pounds per gallon Underground, pounds per gallon Propane 4.37 4.31 N Butane 4.97 4.92 (vi) Fixed liquid-level gages used on containers other than DOT containers shall be stamped on the exterior of the gage with the letters “DT” followed by the vertical distance (expressed in inches and carried out to one decimal place) from the top of container to the end of the dip tube or to the centerline of the gage when it is located at the maximum permitted filling level. For portable containers that may be filled in the horizontal and/or vertical position the letters “DT” shall be followed by “V” with the vertical distance from the top of the container to the end of the dip tube for vertical filling and with “H” followed by the proper distance for horizontal filling. For DOT containers the stamping shall be placed both on the exterior of the gage and on the container. On above-ground or cargo containers where the gages are positioned at specific levels, the marking may be specified in percent of total tank contents and the marking shall be stamped on the container. (vii) Gage glasses of the columnar type shall be restricted to charging plants where the fuel is withdrawn in the liquid phase only. They shall be equipped with valves having metallic handwheels, with excess flow valves, and with extra-heavy glass adequately protected with a metal housing applied by the gage manufacturer. They shall be shielded against the direct rays of the sun. Gage glasses of the columnar type are prohibited on tank trucks, and on motor fuel tanks, and on containers used in domestic, commercial, and industrial installations. (viii) Gaging devices of the float, or equivalent type which do not require flow for their operation and having connections extending to a point outside the container do not have to be equipped with excess flow valves provided the piping and fittings are adequately designed to withstand the container pressure and are properly protected against physical damage and breakage. (20) Requirements for appliances. (ii) Any appliance that was originally manufactured for operation with a gaseous fuel other than LP-Gas and is in good condition may be used with LP-Gas only after it is properly converted, adapted, and tested for performance with LP-Gas before the appliance is placed in use. (iii) Unattended heaters used inside buildings for the purpose of animal or poultry production or care shall be equipped with an approved automatic device designed to shut off the flow of gas to the main burners, and pilot if used, in the event of flame extinguishment. (iv) All commercial, industrial, and agricultural appliances or equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of this section and in accordance with the following NFPA consensus standards, which are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6: ( a ( b ( c ( d (c) Cylinder systems Application. (2) Marking of containers. (3) Description of a system. (4) Containers and regulating equipment installed outside of buildings or structures. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(10)(xiii) of this section, the discharge from safety relief devices shall be located not less than 3 feet horizontally away from any building opening which is below the level of such discharge and shall not terminate beneath any building unless such space is well ventilated to the outside and is not enclosed on more than two sides. (ii) Containers shall be set upon firm foundation or otherwise firmly secured; the possible effect on the outlet piping of settling shall be guarded against by a flexible connection or special fitting. (5) Containers and equipment used inside of buildings or structures. a l ( a ( b 1/2 ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g 1 b ( 2 ( h ( 1 ( 2 The provisions of this paragraph ( h 1/2 ( i ( j ( k 1/2 ( l (ii) Containers having a maximum water capacity of 2 1/2 (iii) Containers having a maximum water capacity of 12 pounds (nominal 5 pounds LP-Gas capacity) are permitted to be used temporarily inside of buildings for public exhibition or demonstration purposes, including use for classroom demonstrations. (iv) [Reserved] (v) Containers are permitted to be used in buildings or structures under construction or undergoing major renovation when such buildings or structures are not occupied by the public, as follows: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e Provided: ( 1 ( 2 ( f (vi) Containers are permitted to be used in industrial occupancies for processing, research, or experimental purposes as follows: ( a ( b ( c (vii)( a ( b (viii) Containers are permitted to be used in buildings for temporary emergency heating purposes, if necessary to prevent damage to the buildings or contents, when the permanent heating system is temporarily out of service, as follows: ( a ( b (ix) Containers are permitted to be used temporarily in buildings for training purposes related in installation and use of LP-Gas systems, as follows: ( a ( b (6) Container valves and accessories. Note: This provision is not to be construed as requiring an automatic changeover device. (ii) Regulators and low-pressure relief devices shall be rigidly attached to the cylinder valves, cylinders, supporting standards, the building walls or otherwise rigidly secured and shall be so installed or protected that the elements (sleet, snow, or ice) will not affect their operation. (iii) Valves and connections to the containers shall be protected while in transit, in storage, and while being moved into final utilization, as follows: ( a ( b (iv) When containers are not connected to the system, the outlet valves shall be kept tightly closed or plugged, even though containers are considered empty. (v) Containers having a water capacity in excess of 50 pounds (approximately 21 pounds LP-Gas capacity), recharged at the installation, shall be provided with excess flow or backflow check valves to prevent the discharge of container contents in case of failure of the filling or equalizing connection. (7) Safety devices. (ii) A final stage regulator of an LP-Gas system (excluding any appliance regulator) shall be equipped on the low-pressure side with a relief valve which is set to start to discharge within the limits specified in Table H-30. Table H-30 Regulator delivery pressure Relief valve start-to-discharge pressure setting (percent of regulator delivery pressure) Minimum Maximum 1 p.s.i.g. or less 200 300 Above 1 p.s.i.g. but not over 3 p.s.i.g 140 200 Above 3 p.s.i.g 125 200 (iii) When a regulator or pressure relief valve is used inside a building for other than purposes specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(i) ( a g (8) Reinstallation of containers. (9) Permissible product. (d) Systems utilizing containers other than DOT containers Application. (2) Design pressure and classification of storage containers. Table H-31 Container type For gases with vapor press. Not to exceed lb. per sq. in. gage at 100 °F. (37.8 °C.) Minimum design pressure of container, lb. per sq. in. gage 1949 and earlier editions of ASME Code (Par. U-68, U-69) 1949 edition of ASME Code (Par. U-200, U-201); 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of ASME Code; All editions of API-ASME Code 3 1 1 1 1 100 100 100 125 125 125 125 156 150 150 150 187 175 175 175 219 2 215 200 250 1 2 3 (3) Container valves and accessories, filler pipes, and discharge pipes. (ii) The filling connection shall be fitted with one of the following: ( a ( b ( c ( 1 ( 2 (iii) All openings in a container shall be equipped with approved automatic excess flow valves except in the following: Filling connections as provided in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this section; safety relief connections, liquid-level gaging devices as provided in paragraphs (b)(7)(iv), (19)(iii), and (19)(viii) of this section; pressure gage connections as provided in paragraph (b)(7)(v) of this section, as provided in paragraphs (d) (iv), (vi), and (vii) of this section. (iv) An excess flow valve is not required in the withdrawal service line providing the following are complied with: ( a ( b ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( c ( d ( e (v) All inlet and outlet connections except safety relief valves, liquid level gaging devices and pressure gages on containers of 2,000 gallons water capacity, or more, and on any container used to supply fuel directly to an internal combustion engine, shall be labeled to designate whether they communicate with vapor or liquid space. Labels may be on valves. (vi) In lieu of an excess flow valve openings may be fitted with a quick-closing internal valve which, except during operating periods shall remain closed. The internal mechanism for such valves may be provided with a secondary control which shall be equipped with a fusible plug (not over 220 °F. melting point) which will cause the internal valve to close automatically in case of fire. (vii) Not more than two plugged openings shall be permitted on a container of 2,000 gallons or less water capacity. (viii) Containers of 125 gallons water capacity or more manufactured after July 1, 1961, shall be provided with an approved device for liquid evacuation, the size of which shall be three-fourths inch National Pipe Thread minimum. A plugged opening will not satisfy this requirement. (4) Safety devices. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g (ii) Safety devices for aboveground containers shall be provided as follows: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (iii) On all containers which are installed underground and which contain no liquid fuel until buried and covered, the rate of discharge of the spring-loaded relief valve installed thereon may be reduced to a minimum of 30 percent of the rate of discharge specified in paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this section. Containers so protected shall not be uncovered after installation until the liquid fuel has been removed therefrom. Containers which may contain liquid fuel before being installed under ground and before being completely covered with earth are to be considered aboveground containers when determining the rate of discharge requirement of the relief valves. (iv) On underground containers of more than 2,000 gallons water capacity, the discharge from safety relief devices shall be piped vertically and directly upward to a point at least 7 feet above the ground. Where there is a probability of the manhole or housing becoming flooded, the discharge from regulator vent lines shall be above the highest probable water level. All manholes or housings shall be provided with ventilated louvers or their equivalent, the area of such openings equaling or exceeding the combined discharge areas of the safety relief valves and other vent lines which discharge their content into the manhole housing. (v) Safety devices for vaporizers shall be provided as follows: ( a ( b ( c (5) Reinstallation of containers. (6) Capacity of containers. (7) Installation of storage containers. (ii) Aboveground containers shall be supported as follows: ( a ( b (iii) Any container may be installed with nonfireproofed ferrous metal supports if mounted on concrete pads or footings, and if the distance from the outside bottom of the container to the ground does not exceed 5 feet, provided the container is in an isolated location. (iv) Containers may be partially buried providing the following requirements are met: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (v) Containers buried underground shall be placed so that the top of the container is not less than 6 inches below grade. Where an underground container might be subject to abrasive action or physical damage due to vehicular traffic or other causes, then it shall be: ( a ( b It will not be necessary to cover the portion of the container to which manhole and other connections are affixed; however, where necessary, protection shall be provided against vehicular damage. When necessary to prevent floating, containers shall be securely anchored or weighted. (vi)( a ( b (vii) Containers with foundations attached (portable or semiportable containers with suitable steel “runners” or “skids” and popularly known in the industry as “skid tanks”) shall be designed, installed, and used in accordance with these rules subject to the following provisions: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (viii) Field welding where necessary shall be made only on saddle plates or brackets which were applied by the manufacturer of the tank. (ix) For aboveground containers, secure anchorage or adequate pier height shall be provided against possible container flotation wherever sufficiently high floodwater might occur. (x) When permanently installed containers are interconnected, provision shall be made to compensate for expansion, contraction, vibration, and settling of containers, and interconnecting piping. Where flexible connections are used, they shall be of an approved type and shall be designed for a bursting pressure of not less than five times the vapor pressure of the product at 100 °F. The use of nonmetallic hose is prohibited for permanently interconnecting such containers. (xi) Container assemblies listed for interchangeable installation above ground or under ground shall conform to the requirements for aboveground installations with respect to safety relief capacity and filling density. For installation above ground all other requirements for aboveground installations shall apply. For installation under ground all other requirements for underground installations shall apply. (8) Protection of container accessories. (ii) On underground or combination aboveground-underground containers, the service valve handwheel, the terminal for connecting the hose, and the opening through which there can be a flow from safety relief valves shall be at least 4 inches above the container and this opening shall be located in the dome or housing. Underground systems shall be so installed that all the above openings, including the regulator vent, are located above the normal maximum water table. (iii) All connections to underground containers shall be located within a substantial dome, housing, or manhole and with access thereto protected by a substantial cover. (9) Drips for condensed gas. (10) Damage from vehicles. (11) Drains. (12) General provisions applicable to systems in industrial plants (of 2,000 gallons water capacity and more) and to bulk filling plants. (ii) If loading and unloading are normally done during other than daylight hours, adequate lights shall be provided to illuminate storage containers, control valves, and other equipment. (iii) Suitable roadways or means of access for extinguishing equipment such as wheeled extinguishers or fire department apparatus shall be provided. (iv) To minimize trespassing or tampering, the area which includes container appurtenances, pumping equipment, loading and unloading facilities, and cylinder-filling facilities shall be enclosed with at least a 6-foot-high industrial type fence unless otherwise adequately protected. There shall be at least two means of emergency access. (13) Container-charging plants. ( a ( b (ii) Tank truck filling station outlets shall be located not less than: ( a ( b (iii) The pumps or compressors may be located in the container-charging room or building, in a separate building, or outside of buildings. When housed in a separate building, such building (a small noncombustible weather cover is not to be construed as a building) shall be located not less than: ( a ( b ( c (iv) When a part of the container-charging building is to be used for a boiler room or where open flames or similar sources of ignition exist or are employed, the space to be so occupied shall be separated from container charging room by a partition wall or walls of fire-resistant construction continuous from floor to roof or ceiling. Such separation walls shall be without openings and shall be joined to the floor, other walls, and ceiling or roof in a manner to effect a permanent gas-tight joint. (v) Electrical equipment and installations shall conform with paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this section. (14) Fire protection. (ii) In industrial installations involving containers of 150,000 gallons aggregate water capacity or more, provision shall be made for an adequate supply of water at the container site for fire protection in the container area, unless other adequate means for fire control are provided. Water hydrants shall be readily accessible and so spaced as to provide water protection for all containers. Sufficient lengths of firehose shall be provided at each hydrant location on a hose cart, or other means provided to facilitate easy movement of the hose in the container area. It is desirable to equip the outlet of each hose line with a combination fog nozzle. A shelter shall be provided to protect the hose and its conveyor from the weather. (15) [Reserved] (16) Lighting. (17) Vaporizers for internal combustion engines. (18) Gas regulating and mixing equipment for internal combustion engines. (e) Liquefied petroleum gas as a motor fuel Application. (ii) Fuel containers and pertinent equipment for internal combustion engines using liquefied petroleum gas where installation is of the stationary type are covered by paragraph (d) of this section. This paragraph does not apply to containers for transportation of liquefied petroleum gases nor to marine fuel use. All requirements of paragraph (b) of this section apply to this paragraph, unless otherwise noted in paragraph (b) of this section. (2) General. (ii) Passenger-carrying vehicles shall not be fueled while passengers are on board. (iii) Industrial trucks (including lift trucks) equipped with permanently mounted fuel containers shall be charged outdoors. Charging equipment shall comply with the provisions of paragraph (h) of this section. (iv) LP-Gas fueled industrial trucks shall comply with the Standard for Type Designations, Areas of Use, Maintenance and Operation of Powered Industrial Trucks, NFPA 505-1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (v) Engines on vehicles shall be shut down while fueling if the fueling operation involves venting to the atmosphere. (3) Design pressure and classification of fuel containers. (ii) Fuel containers for use in industrial trucks (including lift trucks) shall be either DOT containers authorized for LP-Gas service having a minimum service pressure of 240 p.s.i.g. or minimum Container Type 250. Under 1950 and later ASME codes, this means a 312.5-p.s.i.g. design pressure container. Table H-32 Container type For gases with vapor press. Not to exceed lb. per sq. in. gage at 100 °F. (37.8 °C.) Minimum design pressure of container, lb. per sq. in. gage 1949 and earlier editions of ASME Code (Par. U-68, U-69) 1949 edition of ASME Code (Par. U-200, U-201); 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of ASME Code; All editions of API-ASME Code 2 1 215Z 200 250 1 2 (iii) Containers manufactured and maintained under DOT specifications and regulations may be used as fuel containers. When so used they shall conform to all requirements of this paragraph. (iv) All container inlets and outlets except safety relief valves and gaging devices shall be labeled to designate whether they communicate with vapor or liquid space. Labels may be on valves. (4) Installation of fuel containers. (ii) Containers shall be installed with as much clearance as practicable but never less than the minimum road clearance of the vehicle under maximum spring deflection. This minimum clearance shall be to the bottom of the container or to the lowest fitting on the container or housing, whichever is lower. (iii) Permanent and removable fuel containers shall be securely mounted to prevent jarring loose, slipping, or rotating, and the fastenings shall be designed and constructed to withstand static loading in any direction equal to twice the weight of the tank and attachments when filled with fuel using a safety factor of not less than four based on the ultimate strength of the material to be used. Field welding, when necessary, shall be made only on saddle plates, lugs or brackets, originally attached to the container by the tank manufacturer. (iv) Fuel containers on buses shall be permanently installed. (v) Containers from which vapor only is to be withdrawn shall be installed and equipped with suitable connections to minimize the accidental withdrawal of liquid. (5) Valves and accessories. (ii) The filling connection shall be fitted with an approved double back-pressure check valve, or a positive shutoff in conjunction with an internal back-pressure check valve. On a removable container the filler valve may be a hand operated shutoff valve with an internal excess flow valve. Main shutoff valves on the container on liquid and vapor lines must be readily accessible. (iii) With the exceptions of paragraph (e)(5)(iv)( c (iv) Liquid-level gaging devices: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( 1 ( 2 (6) Piping—including pipe, tubing, and fittings. (ii) All piping shall be installed, braced, and supported so as to reduce to a minimum the possibility of vibration strains or wear. (7) Safety devices. (ii) The discharge outlet from safety relief valves shall be located on the outside of enclosed spaces and as far as practicable from possible sources of ignition, and vented upward within 45 degrees of the vertical in such a manner as to prevent impingement of escaping gas upon containers, or parts of vehicles, or on vehicles in adjacent lines of traffic. A rain cap or other protector shall be used to keep water and dirt from collecting in the valve. (iii) When a discharge line from the container safety relief valve is used, the line shall be metallic, other than aluminum, and shall be sized, located, and maintained so as not to restrict the required flow of gas from the safety relief valve. Such discharge line shall be able to withstand the pressure resulting from the discharge of vapor when the safety relief valve is in the full open position. When flexibility is necessary, flexible metal hose or tubing shall be used. (iv) Portable containers equipped for volumetric filling may be filled in either the vertical or horizontal position only when oriented to place the safety relief valve in communication with the vapor space. (v) Paragraph (b)(10)(xii) of this section for hydrostatic relief valves shall apply. (8) Vaporizers. (ii) Each vaporizer shall have a valve or suitable plug which will permit substantially complete draining of the vaporizer. It shall be located at or near the lowest portion of the section occupied by the water or other heating medium. (iii) Vaporizers shall be securely fastened so as to minimize the possibility of becoming loosened. (iv) Each vaporizer shall be permanently marked at a visible point as follows: ( a ( b (v) Devices to supply heat directly to a fuel container shall be equipped with an automatic device to cut off the supply of heat before the pressure inside the fuel container reaches 80 percent of the start to discharge pressure setting of the safety relief device on the fuel container. (vi) Engine exhaust gases may be used as a direct source of heat supply for the vaporization of fuel if the materials of construction of those parts of the vaporizer in contact with exhaust gases are resistant to the corrosive action of exhaust gases and the vaporizer system is designed to prevent excessive pressures. (vii) Vaporizers shall not be equipped with fusible plugs. (9) Gas regulating and mixing equipment. (ii) An approved automatic shutoff valve shall be provided in the fuel system at some point ahead of the inlet of the gas-air mixer, designed to prevent flow of fuel to the mixer when the ignition is off and the engine is not running. In the case of industrial trucks and engines operating in buildings other than those used exclusively to house engines, the automatic shutoff valve shall be designed to operate if the engine should stop. Atmospheric type regulators (zero governors) shall be considered adequate as an automatic shutoff valve only in cases of outdoor operation such as farm tractors, construction equipment, irrigation pump engines, and other outdoor stationary engine installations. (iii) The source of the air for combustion shall be completely isolated from the passenger compartment, ventilating system, or air-conditioning system. (10) [Reserved] (11) Stationary engines in buildings. (12) Portable engines in buildings. (ii) Exhaust gases shall be discharged to outside the building or to an area where they will not constitute a hazard. (iii) Provision shall be made to supply sufficient air for combustion and cooling. (iv) An approved automatic shutoff valve shall be provided in the fuel system ahead of the engine, designed to prevent flow of fuel to the engine when the ignition is off or if the engine should stop. (v) The capacity of LP-Gas containers used with such engines shall comply with the applicable occupancy provision of paragraph (c)(5) of this section. (13) Industrial trucks inside buildings. (ii) No more than two LP-Gas containers shall be used on an industrial truck for motor fuel purposes. (iii)-(iv) [Reserved] (v) Industrial trucks shall not be parked and left unattended in areas of possible excessive heat or sources of ignition. (14) Garaging LP-Gas-fueled vehicles. (ii) LP-Gas-fueled vehicles being repaired in garages shall have the container shutoff valve closed except when fuel is required for engine operation. (iii) Such vehicles shall not be parked near sources of heat, open flames, or similar sources of ignition or near open pits unless such pits are adequately ventilated. (f) Storage of containers awaiting use or resale Application. (2) General. (ii) Containers when stored inside shall not be located near exits, stairways, or in areas normally used or intended for the safe exit of people. (iii) Container valves shall be protected while in storage as follows: ( a ( b (iv) The outlet valves of containers in storage shall be closed. (v) Empty containers which have been in LP-Gas service when stored inside, shall be considered as full containers for the purpose of determining the maximum quantity of LP-Gas permitted by this paragraph. (3) [Reserved] (4) Storage within buildings not frequented by the public (such as industrial buildings). (ii) Containers carried as a part of service equipment on highway mobile vehicles are not to be considered in the total storage capacity in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph provided such vehicles are stored in private garages, and are limited to one container per vehicle with an LP-Gas capacity of not more than 100 pounds. All container valves shall be closed. (5) Storage within special buildings or rooms. (ii) The walls, floors, and ceilings of container storage rooms that are within or adjacent to other parts of the building shall be constructed of material having at least a 2-hour fire resistance rating. (iii) A portion of the exterior walls or roof having an area not less than 10 percent of that of the combined area of the enclosing walls and roof shall be of explosion relieving construction. (iv) Each opening from such storage rooms to other parts of the building shall be protected by a 1 1/2 (v) Such rooms shall have no open flames for heating or lighting. (vi) Such rooms shall be adequately ventilated both top and bottom to the outside only. The openings from such vents shall be at least 5 feet away from any other opening into any building. (vii) The floors of such rooms shall not be below ground level. Any space below the floor shall be of solid fill or properly ventilated to the open air. (viii) Such storage rooms shall not be located adjoining the line of property occupied by schools, churches, hospitals, athletic fields or other points of public gathering. (ix) Fixed electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (b)(18) of this section. (6) Storage outside of buildings. ( a ( b ( c Table H-33 Quantity of LP-Gas Stored Distance 500 pounds or less 0 501 to 2,500 pounds 1 2,501 to 6,000 pounds 10 feet 6,001 to 10,000 pounds 20 feet Over 10,000 pounds 25 feet 1 c d (ii) Containers shall be in a suitable enclosure or otherwise protected against tampering. (7) Fire protection. (g) [Reserved] (h) Liquefied petroleum gas service stations Application. (2) Design pressure and classification of storage containers. Table H-34 Container type For gases with vapor press. Not to exceed lb. per sq. in. gage at 100 °F. (37.8 °C.) Minimum design pressure of container, lb. per sq. in. gage 1949 and earlier editions of ASME Code (Par. U-68, U-69) 1949 edition of ASME Code (Par. U-200, U-201); 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of ASME Code; All editions of API-ASME Code 2 1 215 200 250 1 2 (3) Container valves and accessories. ( a ( b ( c ( 1 ( 2 In lieu of an excess flow valve, filling connections may be fitted with a quick-closing internal valve, which shall remain closed except during operating periods. The mechanism for such valves may be provided with a secondary control which will cause it to close automatically in case of fire. When a fusible plug is used its melting point shall not exceed 220 °F. (ii) A filling pipe inlet terminal not on the container shall be fitted with a positive shutoff valve in conjunction with either; ( a ( b (iii) All openings in the container except those listed below shall be equipped with approved excess flow check valves: ( a ( b ( c ( d (iv) All container inlets and outlets except those listed below shall be labeled to designate whether they connect with vapor or liquid (labels may be on valves): ( a ( b ( c (v) Each storage container shall be provided with a suitable pressure gage. (4) Safety-relief valves. ( a ( b ( c ( d (ii) Aboveground containers shall be provided with safety relief valves as follows: ( a ( b (iii) Underground containers shall be provided with safety relief valves as follows: ( a ( b ( c (5) Capacity of liquid containers. (6) Installation of storage containers. a Water capacity per container (gallons) Minimum distances Aboveground and underground (feet) Between aboveground containers (feet) Up to 2,000 25 3 Over 2,000 50 5 Note: ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h (ii) Aboveground containers shall be installed in accordance with this subdivision. ( a ( b ( c (iii) Underground containers shall be installed in accordance with this subdivision. ( a ( b ( c (7) Protection of container fittings. (8) Transport truck unloading point. (ii) The filling pipe inlet terminal shall not be located within a building nor within 10 feet of any building or driveway. It shall be protected against physical damage. (9) Piping, valves, and fittings. (ii) Piping laid beneath driveways shall be installed to prevent physical damage by vehicles. (iii) Piping shall be wrought iron or steel (black or galvanized), brass or copper pipe; or seamless copper, brass, or steel tubing and shall be suitable for a minimum pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Pipe joints may be screwed, flanged, brazed, or welded. The use of aluminum alloy piping or tubing is prohibited. (iv) All shutoff valves (liquid or gas) shall be suitable for liquefied petroleum gas service and designed for not less than the maximum pressure to which they may be subjected. Valves which may be subjected to container pressure shall have a rated working pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. (v) All materials used for valve seats, packing, gaskets, diaphragms, etc., shall be resistant to the action of LP-Gas. (vi) Fittings shall be steel, malleable iron, or brass having a minimum working pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Cast iron pipe fittings, such as ells, tees, and unions shall not be used. (vii) All piping shall be tested after assembly and proved free from leaks at not less than normal operating pressures. (viii) Provision shall be made for expansion, contraction, jarring, and vibration, and for settling. This may be accomplished by flexible connections. (10) Pumps and accessories. (11) Dispensing devices. (ii) Provisions shall be made for venting LP-Gas contained in a dispensing device to a safe location. (iii) Pumps used to transfer LP-Gas shall be equipped to allow control of the flow and to prevent leakage or accidental discharge. Means shall be provided outside the dispensing device to readily shut off the power in the event of fire or accident. (iv) A manual shutoff valve and an excess flow check valve shall be installed downstream of the pump and ahead of the dispenser inlet. (v)( a ( b (vi)( a ( b ( c (vii) The dispensing of LP-Gas into the fuel container of a vehicle shall be performed by a competent attendant who shall remain at the LP-Gas dispenser during the entire transfer operation. (12) Additional rules. (13) Electrical. (14) Fire protection. (i) Scope Application. (ii) Paragraphs (c) through (h) of this section apply as provided in each of those paragraphs. (2) Inapplicability. (i) Marine and pipeline terminals, natural gas processing plants, refineries, or tank farms other than those at industrial sites. (ii) LP-Gas refrigerated storage systems; (iii) LP-Gas when used with oxygen. The requirements of § 1910.253 shall apply to such use; (iv) LP-Gas when used in utility gas plants. The National Fire Protection Association Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants, NFPA No. 59-1968, shall apply to such use; (v) Low-pressure (not in excess of one-half pound per square inch or 14 inches water column) LP-Gas piping systems, and the installation and operation of residential and commercial appliances including their inlet connections, supplied through such systems. For such systems, the National Fire Protection Association Standard for the Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas Piping, NFPA 54-1969 shall apply. (3) Retroactivity. (i) Existing plants, appliances, equipment, buildings, structures, and installations for the storage, handling or use of LP-Gas, which were in compliance with the current provisions of the National Fire Protection Association Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases NFPA No. 58, at the time of manufacture or installation may be continued in use, if such continued use does not constitute a recognized hazard that is causing or is likely to cause death or serious physical harm to employees. (ii) Stocks of equipment and appliances on hand in such locations as manufacturers' storage, distribution warehouses, and dealers' storage and showrooms, which were in compliance with the current provisions of the National Fire Protection Association Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases, NFPA No. 58, at the time of manufacture, may be placed in service, if such use does not constitute a recognized hazard that is causing or is likely to cause death or serious physical harm to employees. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 25094, June 20, 1990; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9237, 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007] § 1910.111 Storage and handling of anhydrous ammonia. (a) General Scope. (ii) This standard does not apply to: ( a ( b (2) Definitions. (i) Appurtenances. (ii) Cylinder. (iii) Code. (iv) Container. (v) DOT. (vi) Design pressure Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (vii) Farm vehicle (viii) Filling density. (ix) Gas. (x) Gas masks. (xi) Capacity. (xii) DOT specifications—Regulations of the Department of Transportation published in 49 CFR chapter I. (b) Basic rules. (1) Approval of equipment and systems. (i) It was installed before February 8, 1973, and was approved, tested, and installed in accordance with either the provisions of the American National Standard for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, K61.1, or the Fertilizer Institute Standards for the Storage and Handling of Agricultural Anhydrous Ammonia, M-1, (both of which are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6) in effect at the time of installation; or (ii) It is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or otherwise determined to be safe by a nationally recognized testing laboratory; or (iii) It is a type which no nationally recognized testing laboratory does, or will undertake to, accept, certify, list, label, or determine to be safe; and such equipment is inspected or tested by any Federal, State, municipal, or other local authority responsible for enforcing occupational safety provisions of a Federal, State, municipal or other local law, code, or regulation pertaining to the storage, handling, transport, and use of anhydrous ammonia, and found to be in compliance with either the provisions of the American National Standard for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, K61.1, or the Fertilizer Institute Standards for the Storage and Handling of Agricultural Anhydrous Ammonia, M-1, in effect at the time of installation; or (iv) It is a custom-designed and custom-built unit, which no nationally recognized testing laboratory, or Federal, State, municipal or local authority responsible for the enforcement of a Federal, State, municipal, or local law, code or regulation pertaining to the storage, transportation and use of anhydrous ammonia is willing to undertake to accept, certify, list, label or determine to be safe, and the employer has on file a document attesting to its safe condition following the conduct of appropriate tests. The document shall be signed by a registered professional engineer or other person having special training or experience sufficient to permit him to form an opinion as to safety of the unit involved. The document shall set forth the test bases, test data and results, and also the qualifications of the certifying person. (v) For the purposes of this paragraph (b)(1), the word listed Labeled Certified (vi) For the purposes of this paragraph (b)(1), refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory. (2) Requirements for construction, original test and requalification of nonrefrigerated containers. (ii) Containers built according to the Code do not have to comply with Paragraphs UG125 to UG128 inclusive, and Paragraphs UG132 and UG133 of the Code. (iii) Containers exceeding 36 inches in diameter or 250 gallons water capacity shall be constructed to comply with one or more of the following: ( a ( b ( c (iv) Welding to the shell, head, or any other part of the container subject to internal pressure shall be done in compliance with the Code. Other welding is permitted only on saddle plates, lugs, or brackets attached to the container by the container manufacturer. (v) Containers used with systems covered in paragraph (e) of this section shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the DOT specifications. (vi) The provisions of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph shall not be construed as prohibiting the continued use or reinstallation of containers constructed and maintained in accordance with the 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, and 1962 editions of the Code or any revisions thereof in effect at the time of fabrication. (3) Marking nonrefrigerated containers. (ii) Each container or system covered in paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this section shall be marked as specified in the following: ( a ( b Under ground: Container and system nameplate. Above ground: Container. ( c ( d Under ground and above ground: System nameplate. ( e Under ground: Container and system nameplate. Above ground: Container. ( f Under ground: Container and system nameplate. Above ground: Container. ( g Under ground: Container and system nameplate. Above ground: Container. ( h Above ground and under ground: System nameplate or on liquid-level gaging device. ( i Under ground: System nameplate. Above ground: No requirement. ( j (4) Marking refrigerated containers. (i) With the notation, “Anhydrous Ammonia.” (ii) With the name and address of the builder and the date of fabrication. (iii) With the water capacity of the container in gallons, U.S. Standard. (iv) With the design pressure. (v) With the minimum temperature in degrees Fahrenheit for which the container was designed. (vi) The maximum allowable water level to which the container may be filled for test purposes. (vii) With the density of the product in pounds per cubic foot for which the container was designed. (viii) With the maximum level to which the container may be filled with liquid anhydrous ammonia. (5) Location of containers. (ii) Permanent storage containers shall be located at least 50 feet from a dug well or other sources of potable water supply, unless the container is a part of a water-treatment installation. (iii)-(iv) [Reserved] (v) Storage areas shall be kept free of readily ignitible materials such as waste, weeds, and long dry grass. (6) Container appurtenances. (ii) All connections to containers except safety relief devices, gaging devices, or those fitted with No. 54 drill-size orifice shall have shutoff valves located as close to the container as practicable. (iii) Excess flow valves where required by these standards shall close automatically at the rated flows of vapor or liquid as specified by the manufacturer. The connections and line including valves and fittings being protected by an excess flow valve shall have a greater capacity than the rated flow of the excess flow valve so that the valve will close in case of failure of the line or fittings. (iv) Liquid-level gaging devices that require bleeding of the product to the atmosphere and which are so constructed that outward flow will not exceed that passed by a No. 54 drill-size opening need not be equipped with excess flow valves. (v) Openings from the container or through fittings attached directly on the container to which pressure gage connections are made need not be equipped with excess flow valves if such openings are not larger than No. 54 drill size. (vi) Excess flow and back pressure check valves where required by the standards in this section shall be located inside of the container or at a point outside as close as practicable to where the line enters the container. In the latter case installation shall be made in such manner that any undue strain beyond the excess flow or back pressure check valve will not cause breakage between the container and the valve. (vii) Excess flow valves shall be designed with a bypass, not to exceed a No. 60 drill-size opening to allow equalization of pressures. (viii) All excess flow valves shall be plainly and permanently marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer, the catalog number, and the rated capacity. (7) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (ii) All piping, tubing, and fittings shall be designed for a pressure not less than the maximum pressure to which they may be subjected in service. (iii) All refrigerated piping shall conform to the Refrigeration Piping Code, American National Standards Institute, B31.5-1966 with addenda B31.1a-1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, as it applies to ammonia. (iv) Piping used on non-refrigerated systems shall be at least American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A-53-69 Grade B Electric Resistance Welded and Electric Flash Welded Pipe, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, or equal. Such pipe shall be at least schedule 40 when joints are welded, or welded and flanged. Such pipe shall be at least schedule 80 when joints are threaded. Threaded connections shall not be back-welded. Brass, copper, or galvanized steel pipe shall not be used. (v) Tubing made of brass, copper, or other material subject to attack by ammonia shall not be used. (vi) Cast iron fittings shall not be used but this shall not prohibit the use of fittings made specifically for ammonia service of malleable, nodular, or high strength gray iron meeting American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A47-68, ASTM 395-68, or ASTM A126-66 Class B or C all of which are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (vii) Joint compounds shall be resistant to ammonia. (8) Hose specifications. (ii) Hose subject to container pressure shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 350 p.s.i.g. and a minimum burst pressure of 1,750 p.s.i.g. Hose assemblies, when made up, shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 500 p.s.i.g. (iii) Hose and hose connections located on the low-pressure side of flow control of pressure-reducing valves shall be designed for a bursting pressure of not less than 5 times the pressure setting of the safety relief devices protecting that portion of the system but not less than 125 p.s.i.g. All connections shall be so designed and constructed that there will be no leakage when connected. (iv) Where hose is to be used for transferring liquid from one container to another, “wet” hose is recommended. Such hose shall be equipped with approved shutoff valves at the discharge end. Provision shall be made to prevent excessive pressure in the hose. (v) On all hose one-half inch outside diameter and larger, used for the transfer of anhydrous ammonia liquid or vapor, there shall be etched, cast, or impressed at 5-foot intervals the following information. “Anhydrous Ammonia” xxx p.s.i.g. (maximum working pressure), manufacturer's name or trademark, year of manufacture. In lieu of this requirement the same information may be contained on a nameplate permanently attached to the hose. Table H-36 [Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to discharge pressure of safety relief valves] Surface area (sq. ft.) Flow rate CFM air 20 258 25 310 30 360 35 408 40 455 45 501 50 547 55 591 60 635 65 678 70 720 75 762 80 804 85 845 90 885 95 925 100 965 105 1,010 110 1,050 115 1,090 120 1,120 125 1,160 130 1,200 135 1,240 140 1,280 145 1,310 150 1,350 155 1,390 160 1,420 165 1,460 170 1,500 175 1,530 180 1,570 185 1,600 190 1,640 195 1,670 200 1,710 210 1,780 220 1,850 230 1,920 240 1,980 250 2,050 260 2,120 270 2,180 280 2,250 290 2,320 300 2,380 310 2,450 320 2,510 330 2,570 340 2,640 350 2,700 360 2,760 370 2,830 380 2,890 390 2,950 400 3,010 450 3,320 500 3,620 550 3,910 600 4,200 650 4,480 700 4,760 750 5,040 800 5,300 850 5,590 900 5,850 950 6,120 1,000 6,380 1,050 6,640 1,100 6,900 1,150 7,160 1,200 7,410 1,250 7,660 1,300 7,910 1,350 8,160 1,400 8,410 1,450 8,650 1,500 8,900 1,550 9,140 1,600 9,380 1,650 9,620 1,700 9,860 1,750 10,090 1,800 10,330 1,850 10,560 1,900 10,800 1,950 11,030 2,000 11,260 2,050 11,490 2,100 11,720 2,150 11,950 2,200 12,180 2,250 12,400 2,300 12,630 2,350 12,850 2,400 13,080 2,450 13,300 2,500 13,520 Surface Area = total outside surface area of container in square feet. When the surface area is not stamped on the nameplate or when the marking is not legible the area can be calculated by using one of the following formulas: (1) Cylindrical container with hemispherical heads: Area = overall length in feet times outside diameter in feet times 3.1416. (2) Cylindrical container with other than hemispherical heads: Area = (overall length in feet plus 0.3 outside diameter in feet) times outside diameter in feet times 3.1416. (3) Spherical container: Area = outside diameter in feet squared times 3.1416. Flow Rate—CFM Air = cubic feet per minute of air required at standard conditions, 60 °F. and atmospheric pressure (14.7 p.s.i.a.). The rate of discharge may be interpolated for intermediate values of surface area. For containers with total outside surface area greater than 2,500 square feet, the required flow rate can be calculated using the formula: Flow Rate CFM Air = 22.11 A 0 82 (9) Safety relief devices. (ii) Container safety-relief valves shall be set to start-to-discharge as follows, with relation to the design pressure of the container: Containers Minimum (percent) Maximum (percent) ASME-U-68, U-69 110 125 ASME-U-200, U-201 95 100 ASME 1959, 1956, 1952, or 1962 95 100 API-ASME 95 100 U.S. Coast Guard 95 100 As required by DOT Regulations. (iii) Safety relief devices used in systems covered by paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this section shall be constructed to discharge at not less than the rates required in paragraph (b)(9)(i) of this section before the pressure is in excess of 120 percent (not including the 10 percent tolerance referred to in paragraph (b)(9)(ii) of this section) of the maximum permitted start-to-discharge pressure setting of the device. (iv) Safety-relief valves shall be so arranged that the possibility of tampering will be minimized. If the pressure setting adjustment is external, the relief valves shall be provided with means for sealing the adjustment. (v) Shutoff valves shall not be installed between the safety-relief valves and the container; except, that a shutoff valve may be used where the arrangement of this valve is such as always to afford full required capacity flow through the relief valves. (vi) Safety-relief valves shall have direct communication with the vapor space of the container. (vii) Each container safety-relief valve used with systems covered by paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this section shall be plainly and permanently marked with the symbol “NH 3 3 (viii) The flow capacity of the relief valve shall not be restricted by any connection to it on either the upstream or downstream side. (ix) A hydrostatic relief valve shall be installed between each pair of valves in the liquid ammonia piping or hose where liquid may be trapped so as to relieve into the atmosphere at a safe location. (10) General. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Stationary storage installations must have at least two suitable gas masks in readily-accessible locations. Full-face masks with ammonia canisters that have been approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 are suitable for emergency action involving most anhydrous ammonia leaks, particularly leaks that occur outdoors. For respiratory protection in concentrated ammonia atmospheres, a self-contained breathing apparatus is required. (iii) Stationary storage installations shall have an easily accessible shower or a 50-gallon drum of water. (iv) Each vehicle transporting ammonia in bulk except farm applicator vehicles shall carry a container of at least 5 gallons of water and shall be equipped with a full face mask. (11) Charging of containers. Type of container Percent by weight Percent by volume Aboveground-Uninsulated 56 82 Aboveground-Uninsulated 87.5 Aboveground-Insulated 57 83.5 Underground-Uninsulated 58 85 DOT—In accord with DOT regulations. (ii) Aboveground uninsulated containers may be charged 87.5 percent by volume provided the temperature of the anhydrous ammonia being charged is determined to be not lower than 30 °F. or provided the charging of the container is stopped at the first indication of frost or ice formation on its outside surface and is not resumed until such frost or ice has disappeared. (12) Transfer of liquids. (ii) The employer shall require the continuous presence of an attendant in the vicinity of the operation during such time as ammonia is being transferred. (iii) Containers shall be charged or used only upon authorization of the owner. (iv) Containers shall be gaged and charged only in the open atmosphere or in buildings or areas thereof provided for that purpose. (v) Pumps used for transferring ammonia shall be those manufactured for that purpose. ( a ( b ( c ( d (vi) Compressors used for transferring or refrigerating ammonia shall be recommended for ammonia service by the manufacturer. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (vii) Loading and unloading systems shall be protected by suitable devices to prevent emptying of the storage container or the container being loaded or unloaded in the event of severance of the hose. Backflow check valves or properly sized excess flow valves shall be installed where necessary to provide such protection. In the event that such valves are not practical, remotely operated shutoff valves may be installed. (13) Tank car unloading points and operations. (ii) The employer shall insure that unloading operations are performed by reliable persons properly instructed and given the authority to monitor careful compliance with all applicable procedures. (iii) Caution signs shall be so placed on the track or car as to give necessary warning to persons approaching the car from open end or ends of siding and shall be left up until after the car is unloaded and disconnected from discharge connections. Signs shall be of metal or other suitable material, at least 12 by 15 inches in size and bear the words “STOP—Tank Car Connected” or “STOP—Men at Work” the word, “STOP,” being in letters at least 4 inches high and the other words in letters at least 2 inches high. (iv) The track of a tank car siding shall be substantially level. (v) Brakes shall be set and wheels blocked on all cars being unloaded. (14) Liquid-level gaging device. (ii) All gaging devices shall be arranged so that the maximum liquid level to which the container is filled is readily determined. (iii) Gaging devices that require bleeding of the product to the atmosphere such as the rotary tube, fixed tube, and slip tube devices shall be designed so that the maximum opening of the bleed valve is not larger than No. 54 drill size unless provided with an excess flow valve. (This requirement does not apply to farm vehicles used for the application of ammonia as covered in paragraph (h) of this section.) (iv) Gaging devices shall have a design pressure equal to or greater than the design pressure of the container on which they are installed. (v) Fixed tube liquid-level gages shall be designed and installed to indicate that level at which the container is filled to 85 percent of its water capacity in gallons. (vi) Gage glasses of the columnar type shall be restricted to stationary storage installations. They shall be equipped with shutoff valves having metallic handwheels, with excess-flow valves, and with extra heavy glass adequately protected with a metal housing applied by the gage manufacturer. They shall be shielded against the direct rays of the sun. (15) [Reserved] (16) Electrical equipment and wiring. (ii) Electrical systems shall be installed and maintained in accordance with subpart S of this part. (c) Systems utilizing stationary, nonrefrigerated storage containers. (1) Design pressure and construction of containers. (2) Container valves and accessories, filling and discharge connections. (ii) All liquid and vapor connections to containers except filling pipes, safety relief connections, and liquid-level gaging and pressure gage connections provided with orifices not larger than No. 54 drill size as required in paragraphs (b)(6) (iv) and (v) of this section shall be equipped with excess-flow valves. (iii) Each storage container shall be provided with a pressure gage graduated from 0 to 400 p.s.i. Gages shall be designated for use in ammonia service. (iv) All containers shall be equipped with vapor return valves. (3) Safety-relief devices. (ii) The rate of discharge of spring-loaded safety relief valves installed on underground containers may be reduced to a minimum of 30 percent of the rate of discharge specified in Table H-36. Containers so protected shall not be uncovered after installation until the liquid ammonia has been removed. Containers which may contain liquid ammonia before being installed underground and before being completely covered with earth are to be considered aboveground containers when determining the rate of discharge requirements of the safety-relief valves. (iii) On underground installations where there is a probability of the manhole or housing becoming flooded, the discharge from vent lines shall be located above the high water level. All manholes or housings shall be provided with ventilated louvers or their equivalent, the area of such openings equalling or exceeding combined discharge areas of safety-relief valves and vent lines which discharge their content into the manhole housing. (iv) Vent pipes, when used, shall not be restricted or of smaller diameter than the relief-valve outlet connection. (v) If desired, vent pipes from two or more safety-relief devices located on the same unit, or similar lines from two or more different units may be run into a common discharge header, provided the capacity of such header is at least equal to the sum of the capacities of the individual discharge lines. (4) Reinstallation of containers. (ii) Where containers are reinstalled above ground, safety devices or gaging devices shall comply with paragraph (b)(9) of this section and this paragraph respectively for aboveground containers. (5) Installation of storage containers. (ii) Horizontal aboveground containers shall be so mounted on foundations as to permit expansion and contraction. Every container shall be supported to prevent the concentration of excessive loads on the supporting portion of the shell. That portion of the container in contact with foundations or saddles shall be protected against corrosion. (iii) Containers installed under ground shall be so placed that the top of the container is below the frost line and in no case less than 2 feet below the surface of the ground. Should ground conditions make compliance with these requirements impracticable, installation shall be made otherwise to prevent physical damage. It will not be necessary to cover the portion of the container to which manhole and other connections are affixed. When necessary to prevent floating, containers shall be securely anchored or weighted. (iv) Underground containers shall be set on a firm foundation (firm earth may be used) and surrounded with earth or sand well tamped in place. The container, prior to being placed under ground, shall be given a corrosion resisting protective coating. The container thus coated shall be so lowered into place as to prevent abrasion or other damage to the coating. (v) Containers with foundations attached (portable or semiportable tank containers with suitable steel “runners” or “skids” and commonly known in the industry as “skid tanks”) shall be designed and constructed in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section. (vi) Secure anchorage or adequate pier height shall be provided against container flotation wherever sufficiently high flood water might occur. (vii) The distance between underground containers of over 2,000 gallons capacity shall be at least 5 feet. (6) Protection of appurtenances. (ii) All connections to underground containers shall be located within a dome, housing, or manhole and with access thereto by means of a substantial cover. (7) Damage from vehicles. (d) Refrigerated storage systems. (1) Design of containers. (ii) Containers with a design pressure exceeding 15 p.s.i.g. shall be constructed in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and the materials shall be selected from those listed in API Standard 620, Recommended Rules for Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks, Fourth Edition, 1970, Tables 2.02, R2.2, R2.2(A), R2.2.1, or R2.3 which are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (iii) Containers with a design pressure of 15 p.s.i.g. and less shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable requirements of API Standard 620 including its appendix R. (iv) When austenitic steels or nonferrous materials are used, the Code shall be used as a guide in the selection of materials for use at the design temperature. (v) The filling density for refrigerated storage containers shall be such that the container will not be liquid full at a liquid temperature corresponding to the vapor pressure at the start-to-discharge pressure setting of the safety-relief valve. (2) Installation of refrigerated storage containers. (ii) Adequate protection against flotation or other water damage shall be provided wherever high flood water might occur. (iii) Containers for product storage at less than 32 °F. shall be supported in such a way, or heat shall be supplied, to prevent the effects of freezing and consequent frost heaving. (3) Shutoff valves. (4) Safety relief devices. (ii) The total relieving capacity shall be the larger of: ( a 1 2 3 4 5 ( b a a (iii) If vent lines are installed to conduct the vapors from the relief valve, the back pressure under full relieving conditions shall not exceed 50 percent of the start-to-discharge pressure for pressure balanced valves or 10 percent of the start-to-discharge pressure for conventional valves. The vent lines shall be installed to prevent accumulation of liquid in the lines. (iv) The valve or valve installation shall provide weather protection. (v) Atmospheric storage shall be provided with vacuum breakers. Ammonia gas, nitrogen, methane, or other inert gases can be used to provide a pad. (5) Protection of container appurtenances. (6) Reinstallation of refrigerated storage containers. (7) Damage from vehicles. (8) Refrigeration load and equipment. ( a ( b ( c (ii) More than one storage container may be handled by the same refrigeration system. (9) Compressors. a b (ii) Compressors shall be sized to operate with a suction pressure at least 10 percent below the minimum setting of the safety valve(s) on the storage container and shall withstand a suction pressure at least equal to 120 percent of the design pressure of the container. (10) Compressor drives. (ii) An emergency source of power of sufficient capacity to handle the loads listed in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) ( a b (11) Automatic control equipment. (ii) An emergency alarm system shall be installed to function in the event the pressure in the container(s) rises to the maximum allowable operating pressure. (iii) An emergency alarm and shutoff shall be located in the condenser system to respond to excess discharge pressure caused by failure of the cooling medium. (iv) All automatic controls shall be installed in a manner to preclude operation of alternate compressors unless the controls will function with the alternate compressors. (12) Separators for compressors. (ii) [Reserved] (13) Condensers. (14) Receiver and liquid drain. (15) Insulation. (e) Systems utilizing portable DOT containers Conformance. (2) Storage. (3) Heat protection. (4) Protection. (5) Valve cap. (f) Tank motor vehicles for the transportation of ammonia. Paragraph (b) of this section applies to this paragraph unless otherwise noted. Containers and pertinent equipment for tank motor vehicles for the transportation of anhydrous ammonia, in addition to complying with the requirements of this section, shall also comply with the requirements of DOT. (2) Design pressure and construction of containers. (ii) The shell or head thickness of any container shall not be less than three-sixteenth inch. (iii) All container openings, except safety relief valves, liquid-level gaging devices, and pressure gages, shall be labeled to designate whether they communicate with liquid or vapor space. (3) Container appurtenances. (ii) All connections to containers, except filling connections, safety relief devices, and liquid-level and pressure gage connections, shall be provided with suitable automatic excess flow valves, or in lieu thereof, may be fitted with quick-closing internal valves, which shall remain closed except during delivery operations. The control mechanism for such valves may be provided with a secondary control remote from the delivery connections and such control mechanism shall be provided with a fusible section (melting point 208 °F. to 220 °F.) which will permit the internal valve to close automatically in case of fire. (iii) Filling connections shall be provided with automatic back-pressure check valves, excess-flow valves, or quick-closing internal valves, to prevent back-flow in case the filling connection is broken. Where the filling and discharge connect to a common opening in the container shell and that opening is fitted with a quick-closing internal valve as specified in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section, the automatic valve shall not be required. (iv) All containers shall be equipped for spray loading (filling in the vapor space) or with an approved vapor return valve of adequate capacity. (4) Piping and fittings. (ii) Fittings shall comply with paragraph (b)(6) of this section. Pipe shall be Schedule 80. (5) Safety relief devices. (ii) Any portion of liquid ammonia piping which at any time may be closed at both ends shall be provided with a hydrostatic relief valve. (6) Transfer of liquids. (ii) Any pump, except a constant speed centrifugal pump, shall be equipped with a suitable pressure actuated bypass valve permitting flow from discharge to suction when the discharge pressure rises above a predetermined point. Pump discharge shall also be equipped with a spring-loaded safety relief valve set at a pressure not more than 135 percent of the setting of the bypass valve or more than 400 p.s.i.g., whichever is larger. (iii) Compressors shall be equipped with manually operated shutoff valves on both suction and discharge connections. Pressure gages of bourdon-tube type shall be installed on the suction and discharge of the compressor before the shutoff valves. The compressor shall not be operated if either pressure gage is removed or is inoperative. A spring-loaded, safety-relief valve capable of discharging to atmosphere the full flow of gas from the compressor at a pressure not exceeding 300 p.s.i.g. shall be connected between the compressor discharge and the discharge shutoff valve. (iv) Valve functions shall be clearly and legibly identified by metal tags or nameplates permanently affixed to each valve. (7)-(8) [Reserved] (9) Chock blocks. (10) Portable tank containers (skid tanks). (g) Systems mounted on farm vehicles other than for the application of ammonia Application. (2) Design pressure and classification of containers. (ii) The shell or head thickness of any container shall be not less than three-sixteenths of an inch. (3) Mounting containers. (ii) A suitable “hold down” device shall be provided which will anchor the container to the vehicle at one or more places on each side of the container. (iii) When containers are mounted on four-wheel trailers, care shall be taken to insure that the weight is distributed evenly over both axles. (iv) When the cradle and the tank are not welded together suitable material shall be used between them to eliminate metal-to-metal friction. (4) Container appurtenances. (ii) All containers with a capacity exceeding 250 gallons shall be equipped with a pressure gage having a dial graduated from 0-400 p.s.i. (iii) The filling connection shall be fitted with combination back-pressure check valve and excess-flow valve; one double or two single back-pressure check valves; or a positive shutoff valve in conjunction with either an internal back-pressure check valve or an internal excess flow valve. (iv) All containers with a capacity exceeding 250 gallons shall be equipped for spray loading or with an approved vapor return valve. (v) All vapor and liquid connections except safety-relief valves and those specifically exempted by paragraph (b)(6)(v) of this section shall be equipped with approved excess-flow valves or may be fitted with quick-closing internal valves which, except during operating periods, shall remain closed. (vi) Fittings shall be adequately protected from damage by a metal box or cylinder with open top securely fastened to the container or by rigid guards, well braced, welded to the container on both sides of the fittings or by a metal dome. If a metal dome is used, the relief valve shall be properly vented through the dome. (vii) If a liquid withdrawal line is installed in the bottom of a container, the connections thereto, including hose, shall not be lower than the lowest horizontal edge of the vehicle axle. (viii) Provision shall be made to secure both ends of the hose while in transit. (5) Marking the container. (6) Farm vehicles. (ii) All trailers shall be securely attached to the vehicle drawing them by means of drawbars supplemented by suitable safety chains. (iii) A trailer shall be constructed so that it will follow substantially in the path of the towing vehicle and will not whip or swerve dangerously from side to side. (iv) All vehicles shall carry a can containing 5 gallons or more of water. (h) Systems mounted on farm vehicles for the application of ammonia. (2) Design pressure and classification of containers. (ii) The shell or head thickness of any container shall not be less than three-sixteenths inch. (3) Mounting of containers. (4) Container valves and accessories. (ii) The filling connection shall be fitted with a combination back-pressure check valve and an excess-flow valve; one double or two single back-pressure check valves: or a positive shutoff valve in conjunction with an internal back-pressure check valve or an internal excess-flow valve. (iii) The applicator tank may be filled by venting to open air provided the bleeder valve orifice does not exceed seven-sixteenths inch in diameter. (iv) Regulation equipment may be connected directly to the tank coupling or flange, in which case a flexible connection shall be used between such regulating equipment and the remainder of the liquid withdrawal system. Regulating equipment not so installed shall be flexibly connected to the container shutoff valve. (v) No excess flow valve is required in the liquid withdrawal line provided the controlling orifice between the contents of the container and the outlet of the shutoff valve does not exceed seven-sixteenths inch in diameter. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007] §§ 1910.112-1910.113 [Reserved] § 1910.119 Process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals. Purpose. (a) Application. (i) A process which involves a chemical at or above the specified threshold quantities listed in appendix A to this section; (ii) A process which involves a Category 1 flammable gas (as defined in 1910.1200(c)) or a flammable liquid with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) on site in one location, in a quantity of 10,000 pounds (4535.9 kg) or more except for: (A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for workplace consumption as a fuel (e.g., propane used for comfort heating, gasoline for vehicle refueling), if such fuels are not a part of a process containing another highly hazardous chemical covered by this standard; (B) Flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) stored in atmospheric tanks or transferred which are kept below their normal boiling point without benefit of chilling or refrigeration. (2) This section does not apply to: (i) Retail facilities; (ii) Oil or gas well drilling or servicing operations; or, (iii) Normally unoccupied remote facilities. (b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank Boiling point Catastrophic release Facility Highly hazardous chemical Hot work Normally unoccupied remote facility Facilities meeting this definition are not contiguous with, and must be geographically remote from all other buildings, processes or persons. Process Replacement in kind Trade secret See (c) Employee participation. (2) Employers shall consult with employees and their representatives on the conduct and development of process hazards analyses and on the development of the other elements of process safety management in this standard. (3) Employers shall provide to employees and their representatives access to process hazard analyses and to all other information required to be developed under this standard. (d) Process safety information. (1) Information pertaining to the hazards of the highly hazardous chemicals in the process. (i) Toxicity information; (ii) Permissible exposure limits; (iii) Physical data; (iv) Reactivity data; (v) Corrosivity data; (vi) Thermal and chemical stability data; and (vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent mixing of different materials that could foreseeably occur. Note: Safety data sheets meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200(g) may be used to comply with this requirement to the extent they contain the information required by this subparagraph. (2) Information pertaining to the technology of the process. (A) A block flow diagram or simplified process flow diagram (see appendix B to this section); (B) Process chemistry; (C) Maximum intended inventory; (D) Safe upper and lower limits for such items as temperatures, pressures, flows or compositions; and, (E) An evaluation of the consequences of deviations, including those affecting the safety and health of employees. (ii) Where the original technical information no longer exists, such information may be developed in conjunction with the process hazard analysis in sufficient detail to support the analysis. (3) Information pertaining to the equipment in the process. (A) Materials of construction; (B) Piping and instrument diagrams (P&ID's); (C) Electrical classification; (D) Relief system design and design basis; (E) Ventilation system design; (F) Design codes and standards employed; (G) Material and energy balances for processes built after May 26, 1992; and, (H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks, detection or suppression systems). (ii) The employer shall document that equipment complies with recognized and generally accepted good engineering practices. (iii) For existing equipment designed and constructed in accordance with codes, standards, or practices that are no longer in general use, the employer shall determine and document that the equipment is designed, maintained, inspected, tested, and operating in a safe manner. (e) Process hazard analysis. (i) No less than 25 percent of the initial process hazards analyses shall be completed by May 26, 1994; (ii) No less than 50 percent of the initial process hazards analyses shall be completed by May 26, 1995; (iii) No less than 75 percent of the initial process hazards analyses shall be completed by May 26, 1996; (iv) All initial process hazards analyses shall be completed by May 26, 1997. (v) Process hazards analyses completed after May 26, 1987 which meet the requirements of this paragraph are acceptable as initial process hazards analyses. These process hazard analyses shall be updated and revalidated, based on their completion date, in accordance with paragraph (e)(6) of this section. (2) The employer shall use one or more of the following methodologies that are appropriate to determine and evaluate the hazards of the process being analyzed. (i) What-If; (ii) Checklist; (iii) What-If/Checklist; (iv) Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP): (v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA); (vi) Fault Tree Analysis; or (vii) An appropriate equivalent methodology. (3) The process hazard analysis shall address: (i) The hazards of the process; (ii) The identification of any previous incident which had a likely potential for catastrophic consequences in the workplace; (iii) Engineering and administrative controls applicable to the hazards and their interrelationships such as appropriate application of detection methodologies to provide early warning of releases. (Acceptable detection methods might include process monitoring and control instrumentation with alarms, and detection hardware such as hydrocarbon sensors.); (iv) Consequences of failure of engineering and administrative controls; (v) Facility siting; (vi) Human factors; and (vii) A qualitative evaluation of a range of the possible safety and health effects of failure of controls on employees in the workplace. (4) The process hazard analysis shall be performed by a team with expertise in engineering and process operations, and the team shall include at least one employee who has experience and knowledge specific to the process being evaluated. Also, one member of the team must be knowledgeable in the specific process hazard analysis methodology being used. (5) The employer shall establish a system to promptly address the team's findings and recommendations; assure that the recommendations are resolved in a timely manner and that the resolution is documented; document what actions are to be taken; complete actions as soon as possible; develop a written schedule of when these actions are to be completed; communicate the actions to operating, maintenance and other employees whose work assignments are in the process and who may be affected by the recommendations or actions. (6) At least every five (5) years after the completion of the initial process hazard analysis, the process hazard analysis shall be updated and revalidated by a team meeting the requirements in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, to assure that the process hazard analysis is consistent with the current process. (7) Employers shall retain process hazards analyses and updates or revalidations for each process covered by this section, as well as the documented resolution of recommendations described in paragraph (e)(5) of this section for the life of the process. (f) Operating procedures. (i) Steps for each operating phase: (A) Initial startup; (B) Normal operations; (C) Temporary operations; (D) Emergency shutdown including the conditions under which emergency shutdown is required, and the assignment of shutdown responsibility to qualified operators to ensure that emergency shutdown is executed in a safe and timely manner. (E) Emergency Operations; (F) Normal shutdown; and, (G) Startup following a turnaround, or after an emergency shutdown. (ii) Operating limits: (A) Consequences of deviation; and (B) Steps required to correct or avoid deviation. (iii) Safety and health considerations: (A) Properties of, and hazards presented by, the chemicals used in the process; (B) Precautions necessary to prevent exposure, including engineering controls, administrative controls, and personal protective equipment; (C) Control measures to be taken if physical contact or airborne exposure occurs; (D) Quality control for raw materials and control of hazardous chemical inventory levels; and, (E) Any special or unique hazards. (iv) Safety systems and their functions. (2) Operating procedures shall be readily accessible to employees who work in or maintain a process. (3) The operating procedures shall be reviewed as often as necessary to assure that they reflect current operating practice, including changes that result from changes in process chemicals, technology, and equipment, and changes to facilities. The employer shall certify annually that these operating procedures are current and accurate. (4) The employer shall develop and implement safe work practices to provide for the control of hazards during operations such as lockout/tagout; confined space entry; opening process equipment or piping; and control over entrance into a facility by maintenance, contractor, laboratory, or other support personnel. These safe work practices shall apply to employees and contractor employees. (g) Training Initial training. (ii) In lieu of initial training for those employees already involved in operating a process on May 26, 1992, an employer may certify in writing that the employee has the required knowledge, skills, and abilities to safely carry out the duties and responsibilities as specified in the operating procedures. (2) Refresher training. (3) Training documentation. (h) Contractors Application. (2) Employer responsibilities. (ii) The employer shall inform contract employers of the known potential fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards related to the contractor's work and the process. (iii) The employer shall explain to contract employers the applicable provisions of the emergency action plan required by paragraph (n) of this section. (iv) The employer shall develop and implement safe work practices consistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this section, to control the entrance, presence and exit of contract employers and contract employees in covered process areas. (v) The employer shall periodically evaluate the performance of contract employers in fulfilling their obligations as specified in paragraph (h)(3) of this section. (vi) The employer shall maintain a contract employee injury and illness log related to the contractor's work in process areas. (3) Contract employer responsibilities. (ii) The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee is instructed in the known potential fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards related to his/her job and the process, and the applicable provisions of the emergency action plan. (iii) The contract employer shall document that each contract employee has received and understood the training required by this paragraph. The contract employer shall prepare a record which contains the identity of the contract employee, the date of training, and the means used to verify that the employee understood the training. (iv) The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee follows the safety rules of the facility including the safe work practices required by paragraph (f)(4) of this section. (v) The contract employer shall advise the employer of any unique hazards presented by the contract employer's work, or of any hazards found by the contract employer's work. (i) Pre-startup safety review. (2) The pre-startup safety review shall confirm that prior to the introduction of highly hazardous chemicals to a process: (i) Construction and equipment is in accordance with design specifications; (ii) Safety, operating, maintenance, and emergency procedures are in place and are adequate; (iii) For new facilities, a process hazard analysis has been performed and recommendations have been resolved or implemented before startup; and modified facilities meet the requirements contained in management of change, paragraph (l). (iv) Training of each employee involved in operating a process has been completed. (j) Mechanical integrity Application. (i) Pressure vessels and storage tanks; (ii) Piping systems (including piping components such as valves); (iii) Relief and vent systems and devices; (iv) Emergency shutdown systems; (v) Controls (including monitoring devices and sensors, alarms, and interlocks) and, (vi) Pumps. (2) Written procedures. (3) Training for process maintenance activities. (4) Inspection and testing. (ii) Inspection and testing procedures shall follow recognized and generally accepted good engineering practices. (iii) The frequency of inspections and tests of process equipment shall be consistent with applicable manufacturers' recommendations and good engineering practices, and more frequently if determined to be necessary by prior operating experience. (iv) The employer shall document each inspection and test that has been performed on process equipment. The documentation shall identify the date of the inspection or test, the name of the person who performed the inspection or test, the serial number or other identifier of the equipment on which the inspection or test was performed, a description of the inspection or test performed, and the results of the inspection or test. (5) Equipment deficiencies. (6) Quality assurance. (ii) Appropriate checks and inspections shall be performed to assure that equipment is installed properly and consistent with design specifications and the manufacturer's instructions. (iii) The employer shall assure that maintenance materials, spare parts and equipment are suitable for the process application for which they will be used. (k) Hot work permit. (2) The permit shall document that the fire prevention and protection requirements in 29 CFR 1910.252(a) have been implemented prior to beginning the hot work operations; it shall indicate the date(s) authorized for hot work; and identify the object on which hot work is to be performed. The permit shall be kept on file until completion of the hot work operations. (l) Management of change. (2) The procedures shall assure that the following considerations are addressed prior to any change: (i) The technical basis for the proposed change; (ii) Impact of change on safety and health; (iii) Modifications to operating procedures; (iv) Necessary time period for the change; and, (v) Authorization requirements for the proposed change. (3) Employees involved in operating a process and maintenance and contract employees whose job tasks will be affected by a change in the process shall be informed of, and trained in, the change prior to start-up of the process or affected part of the process. (4) If a change covered by this paragraph results in a change in the process safety information required by paragraph (d) of this section, such information shall be updated accordingly. (5) If a change covered by this paragraph results in a change in the operating procedures or practices required by paragraph (f) of this section, such procedures or practices shall be updated accordingly. (m) Incident investigation. (2) An incident investigation shall be initiated as promptly as possible, but not later than 48 hours following the incident. (3) An incident investigation team shall be established and consist of at least one person knowledgeable in the process involved, including a contract employee if the incident involved work of the contractor, and other persons with appropriate knowledge and experience to thoroughly investigate and analyze the incident. (4) A report shall be prepared at the conclusion of the investigation which includes at a minimum: (i) Date of incident; (ii) Date investigation began; (iii) A description of the incident; (iv) The factors that contributed to the incident; and, (v) Any recommendations resulting from the investigation. (5) The employer shall establish a system to promptly address and resolve the incident report findings and recommendations. Resolutions and corrective actions shall be documented. (6) The report shall be reviewed with all affected personnel whose job tasks are relevant to the incident findings including contract employees where applicable. (7) Incident investigation reports shall be retained for five years. (n) Emergency planning and response. (o) Compliance Audits. (2) The compliance audit shall be conducted by at least one person knowledgeable in the process. (3) A report of the findings of the audit shall be developed. (4) The employer shall promptly determine and document an appropriate response to each of the findings of the compliance audit, and document that deficiencies have been corrected. (5) Employers shall retain the two (2) most recent compliance audit reports. (p) Trade secrets. (2) Nothing in this paragraph shall preclude the employer from requiring the persons to whom the information is made available under paragraph (p)(1) of this section to enter into confidentiality agreements not to disclose the information as set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1200. (3) Subject to the rules and procedures set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1200(i)(1) through 1910.1200(i)(12), employees and their designated representatives shall have access to trade secret information contained within the process hazard analysis and other documents required to be developed by this standard. Appendix A to § 1910.119—List of Highly Hazardous Chemicals, Toxics and Reactives (Mandatory) This appendix contains a listing of toxic and reactive highly hazardous chemicals which present a potential for a catastrophic event at or above the threshold quantity. Chemical name CAS * TQ ** Acetaldehyde 75-07-0 2500 Acrolein (2-Propenal) 107-02-8 150 Acrylyl Chloride 814-68-6 250 Allyl Chloride 107-05-1 1000 Allylamine 107-11-9 1000 Alkylaluminums Varies 5000 Ammonia, Anhydrous 7664-41-7 10000 Ammonia solutions (>44% ammonia by weight) 7664-41-7 15000 Ammonium Perchlorate 7790-98-9 7500 Ammonium Permanganate 7787-36-2 7500 Arsine (also called Arsenic Hydride) 7784-42-1 100 Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether 542-88-1 100 Boron Trichloride 10294-34-5 2500 Boron Trifluoride 7637-07-2 250 Bromine 7726-95-6 1500 Bromine Chloride 13863-41-7 1500 Bromine Pentafluoride 7789-30-2 2500 Bromine Trifluoride 7787-71-5 15000 3-Bromopropyne (also called Propargyl Bromide) 106-96-7 100 Butyl Hydroperoxide (Tertiary) 75-91-2 5000 Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) 614-45-9 7500 Carbonyl Chloride (see Phosgene) 75-44-5 100 Carbonyl Fluoride 353-50-4 2500 Cellulose Nitrate (concentration >12.6% nitrogen) 9004-70-0 2500 Chlorine 7782-50-5 1500 Chlorine Dioxide 10049-04-4 1000 Chlorine Pentrafluoride 13637-63-3 1000 Chlorine Trifluoride 7790-91-2 1000 Chlorodiethylaluminum (also called Diethylaluminum Chloride) 96-10-6 5000 1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene 97-00-7 5000 Chloromethyl Methyl Ether 107-30-2 500 Chloropicrin 76-06-2 500 Chloropicrin and Methyl Bromide mixture None 1500 Chloropicrin and Methyl Chloride mixture None 1500 Cumene Hydroperoxide 80-15-9 5000 Cyanogen 460-19-5 2500 Cyanogen Chloride 506-77-4 500 Cyanuric Fluoride 675-14-9 100 Diacetyl Peroxide (Concentration >70%) 110-22-5 5000 Diazomethane 334-88-3 500 Dibenzoyl Peroxide 94-36-0 7500 Diborane 19287-45-7 100 Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) 110-05-4 5000 Dichloro Acetylene 7572-29-4 250 Dichlorosilane 4109-96-0 2500 Diethylzinc 557-20-0 10000 Diisopropyl Peroxydicarbonate 105-64-6 7500 Dilaluroyl Peroxide 105-74-8 7500 Dimethyldichlorosilane 75-78-5 1000 Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1- 57-14-7 1000 Dimethylamine, Anhydrous 124-40-3 2500 2,4-Dinitroaniline 97-02-9 5000 Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide (also Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide; concentration >60%) 1338-23-4 5000 Ethyl Nitrite 109-95-5 5000 Ethylamine 75-04-7 7500 Ethylene Fluorohydrin 371-62-0 100 Ethylene Oxide 75-21-8 5000 Ethyleneimine 151-56-4 1000 Fluorine 7782-41-4 1000 Formaldehyde (Formalin) 50-00-0 1000 Furan 110-00-9 500 Hexafluoroacetone 684-16-2 5000 Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous 7647-01-0 5000 Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous 7664-39-3 1000 Hydrogen Bromide 10035-10-6 5000 Hydrogen Chloride 7647-01-0 5000 Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhydrous 74-90-8 1000 Hydrogen Fluoride 7664-39-3 1000 Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by weight or greater) 7722-84-1 7500 Hydrogen Selenide 7783-07-5 150 Hydrogen Sulfide 7783-06-4 1500 Hydroxylamine 7803-49-8 2500 Iron, Pentacarbonyl 13463-40-6 250 Isopropylamine 75-31-0 5000 Ketene 463-51-4 100 Methacrylaldehyde 78-85-3 1000 Methacryloyl Chloride 920-46-7 150 Methacryloyloxyethyl Isocyanate 30674-80-7 100 Methyl Acrylonitrile 126-98-7 250 Methylamine, Anhydrous 74-89-5 1000 Methyl Bromide 74-83-9 2500 Methyl Chloride 74-87-3 15000 Methyl Chloroformate 79-22-1 500 Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide (concentration >60%) 1338-23-4 5000 Methyl Fluoroacetate 453-18-9 100 Methyl Fluorosulfate 421-20-5 100 Methyl Hydrazine 60-34-4 100 Methyl Iodide 74-88-4 7500 Methyl Isocyanate 624-83-9 250 Methyl Mercaptan 74-93-1 5000 Methyl Vinyl Ketone 78-94-4 100 Methyltrichlorosilane 75-79-6 500 Nickel Carbonly (Nickel Tetracarbonyl) 13463-39-3 150 Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight or greater) 7697-37-2 500 Nitric Oxide 10102-43-9 250 Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline 100-01-6 5000 Nitromethane 75-52-5 2500 Nitrogen Dioxide 10102-44-0 250 Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO 2 10102-44-0 250 Nitrogen Tetroxide (also called Nitrogen Peroxide) 10544-72-6 250 Nitrogen Trifluoride 7783-54-2 5000 Nitrogen Trioxide 10544-73-7 250 Oleum (65% to 80% by weight; also called Fuming Sulfuric Acid) 8014-95-7 1,000 Osmium Tetroxide 20816-12-0 100 Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine Monoxide) 7783-41-7 100 Ozone 10028-15-6 100 Pentaborane 19624-22-7 100 Peracetic Acid (concentration >60% Acetic Acid; also called Peroxyacetic Acid) 79-21-0 1000 Perchloric Acid (concentration >60% by weight) 7601-90-3 5000 Perchloromethyl Mercaptan 594-42-3 150 Perchloryl Fluoride 7616-94-6 5000 Peroxyacetic Acid (concentration >60% Acetic Acid; also called Peracetic Acid) 79-21-0 1000 Phosgene (also called Carbonyl Chloride) 75-44-5 100 Phosphine (Hydrogen Phosphide) 7803-51-2 100 Phosphorus Oxychloride (also called Phosphoryl Chloride) 10025-87-3 1000 Phosphorus Trichloride 7719-12-2 1000 Phosphoryl Chloride (also called Phosphorus Oxychloride) 10025-87-3 1000 Propargyl Bromide 106-96-7 100 Propyl Nitrate 627-3-4 2500 Sarin 107-44-8 100 Selenium Hexafluoride 7783-79-1 1000 Stibine (Antimony Hydride) 7803-52-3 500 Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) 7446-09-5 1000 Sulfur Pentafluoride 5714-22-7 250 Sulfur Tetrafluoride 7783-60-0 250 Sulfur Trioxide (also called Sulfuric Anhydride) 7446-11-9 1000 Sulfuric Anhydride (also called Sulfur Trioxide) 7446-11-9 1000 Tellurium Hexafluoride 7783-80-4 250 Tetrafluoroethylene 116-14-3 5000 Tetrafluorohydrazine 10036-47-2 5000 Tetramethyl Lead 75-74-1 1000 Thionyl Chloride 7719-09-7 250 Trichloro (chloromethyl) Silane 1558-25-4 100 Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Silane 27137-85-5 2500 Trichlorosilane 10025-78-2 5000 Trifluorochloroethylene 79-38-9 10000 Trimethyoxysilane 2487-90-3 1500 * Chemical Abstract Service Number. ** Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount necessary to be covered by this standard). Appendix B to § 1910.119—Block Flow Diagram and Simplified Process Flow Diagram (Nonmandatory) Appendix C to § 1910.119—Compliance Guidelines and Recommendations for Process Safety Management (Nonmandatory) This appendix serves as a nonmandatory guideline to assist employers and employees in complying with the requirements of this section, as well as provides other helpful recommendations and information. Examples presented in this appendix are not the only means of achieving the performance goals in the standard. This appendix neither adds nor detracts from the requirements of the standard. 1. Introduction to Process Safety Management. The process safety management standard targets highly hazardous chemicals that have the potential to cause a catastrophic incident. This standard as a whole is to aid employers in their efforts to prevent or mitigate episodic chemical releases that could lead to a catastrophe in the workplace and possibly to the surrounding community. To control these types of hazards, employers need to develop the necessary expertise, experiences, judgement and proactive initiative within their workforce to properly implement and maintain an effective process safety management program as envisioned in the OSHA standard. This OSHA standard is required by the Clean Air Act Amendments as is the Environmental Protection Agency's Risk Management Plan. Employers, who merge the two sets of requirements into their process safety management program, will better assure full compliance with each as well as enhancing their relationship with the local community. While OSHA believes process safety management will have a positive effect on the safety of employees in workplaces and also offers other potential benefits to employers (increased productivity), smaller businesses which may have limited resources available to them at this time, might consider alternative avenues of decreasing the risks associated with highly hazardous chemicals at their workplaces. One method which might be considered is the reduction in the inventory of the highly hazardous chemical. This reduction in inventory will result in a reduction of the risk or potential for a catastrophic incident. Also, employers including small employers may be able to establish more efficient inventory control by reducing the quantities of highly hazardous chemicals on site below the established threshold quantities. This reduction can be accomplished by ordering smaller shipments and maintaining the minimum inventory necessary for efficient and safe operation. When reduced inventory is not feasible, then the employer might consider dispersing inventory to several locations on site. Dispersing storage into locations where a release in one location will not cause a release in another location is a practical method to also reduce the risk or portential for catastrophic incidents. 2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety Management. 3. Process Safety Information. The information to be compiled about the chemicals, including process intermediates, needs to be comprehensive enough for an accurate assessment of the fire and explosion characteristics, reactivity hazards, the safety and health hazards to workers, and the corrosion and erosion effects on the process equipment and monitoring tools. Current safety data sheet (SDS) information can be used to help meet this requirement which must be supplemented with process chemistry information including runaway reaction and over pressure hazards if applicable. Process technology information will be a part of the process safety information package and it is expected that it will include diagrams of the type shown in appendix B of this section as well as employer established criteria for maximum inventory levels for process chemicals; limits beyond which would be considered upset conditions; and a qualitative estimate of the consequences or results of deviation that could occur if operating beyond the established process limits. Employers are encouraged to use diagrams which will help users understand the process. A block flow diagram is used to show the major process equipment and interconnecting process flow lines and show flow rates, stream composition, temperatures, and pressures when necessary for clarity. The block flow diagram is a simplified diagram. Process flow diagrams are more complex and will show all main flow streams including valves to enhance the understanding of the process, as well as pressures and temperatures on all feed and product lines within all major vessels, in and out of headers and heat exchangers, and points of pressure and temperature control. Also, materials of construction information, pump capacities and pressure heads, compressor horsepower and vessel design pressures and temperatures are shown when necessary for clarity. In addition, major components of control loops are usually shown along with key utilities on process flow diagrams. Piping and instrument diagrams (P&IDs) may be the more appropriate type of diagrams to show some of the above details and to display the information for the piping designer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are to be used to describe the relationships between equipment and instrumentation as well as other relevant information that will enhance clarity. Computer software programs which do P&IDs or other diagrams useful to the information package, may be used to help meet this requirement. The information pertaining to process equipment design must be documented. In other words, what were the codes and standards relied on to establish good engineering practice. These codes and standards are published by such organizations as the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, American Petroleum Institute, American National Standards Institute, National Fire Protection Association, American Society for Testing and Materials, National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, National Association of Corrosion Engineers, American Society of Exchange Manufacturers Association, and model building code groups. In addition, various engineering societies issue technical reports which impact process design. For example, the American Institute of Chemical Engineers has published technical reports on topics such as two phase flow for venting devices. This type of technically recognized report would constitute good engineering practice. For existing equipment designed and constructed many years ago in accordance with the codes and standards available at that time and no longer in general use today, the employer must document which codes and standards were used and that the design and construction along with the testing, inspection and operation are still suitable for the intended use. Where the process technology requires a design which departs from the applicable codes and standards, the employer must document that the design and construction is suitable for the intended purpose. 4. Process Hazard Analysis. The selection of a PHA methodology or technique will be influenced by many factors including the amount of existing knowledge about the process. Is it a process that has been operated for a long period of time with little or no innovation and extensive experience has been generated with its use? Or, is it a new process or one which has been changed frequently by the inclusion of innovative features? Also, the size and complexity of the process will influence the decision as to the appropriate PHA methodology to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to certain limitations. For example, the checklist methodology works well when the process is very stable and no changes are made, but it is not as effective when the process has undergone extensive change. The checklist may miss the most recent changes and consequently the changes would not be evaluated. Another limitation to be considered concerns the assumptions made by the team or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good judgement and the assumptions made during the study need to be documented and understood by the team and reviewer and kept for a future PHA. The team conducting the PHA need to understand the methodology that is going to be used. A PHA team can vary in size from two people to a number of people with varied operational and technical backgrounds. Some team members may only be a part of the team for a limited time. The team leader needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper implementation of the PHA methodology that is to be used and should be impartial in the evaluation. The other full or part time team members need to provide the team with expertise in areas such as process technology, process design, operating procedures and practices, including how the work is actually performed, alarms, emergency procedures, instrumentation, maintenance procedures, both routine and nonroutine tasks, including how the tasks are authorized, procurement of parts and supplies, safety and health, and any other relevant subject as the need dictates. At least one team member must be familiar with the process. The ideal team will have an intimate knowledge of the standards, codes, specifications and regulations applicable to the process being studied. The selected team members need to be compatible and the team leader needs to be able to manage the team, and the PHA study. The team needs to be able to work together while benefiting from the expertise of others on the team or outside the team, to resolve issues, and to forge a consensus on the findings of the study and recommendations. The application of a PHA to a process may involve the use of different methodologies for various parts of the process. For example, a process involving a series of unit operation of varying sizes, complexities, and ages may use different methodologies and team members for each operation. Then the conclusions can be integrated into one final study and evaluation. A more specific example is the use of a checklist PHA for a standard boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall process. Also, for batch type processes like custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a representative batch may be used where there are only small changes of monomer or other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is documented for the full range and ratio of batch ingredients. Another process that might consider using a generic type of PHA is a gas plant. Often these plants are simply moved from site to site and therefore, a generic PHA may be used for these movable plants. Also, when an employer has several similar size gas plants and no sour gas is being processed at the site, then a generic PHA is feasible as long as the variations of the individual sites are accounted for in the PHA. Finally, when an employer has a large continuous process which has several control rooms for different portions of the process such as for a distillation tower and a blending operation, the employer may wish to do each segment separately and then integrate the final results. Additionally, small businesses which are covered by this rule, will often have processes that have less storage volume, less capacity, and less complicated than processes at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA would anticipate that the less complex methodologies would be used to meet the process hazard analysis criteria in the standard. These process hazard analyses can be done in less time and with a few people being involved. A less complex process generally means that less data, P&IDs, and process information is needed to perform a process hazard analysis. Many small businesses have processes that are not unique, such as cold storage lockers or water treatment facilities. Where employer associations have a number of members with such facilities, a generic PHA, evolved from a checklist or what-if questions, could be developed and used by each employer effectively to reflect his/her particular process; this would simplify compliance for them. When the employer has a number of processes which require a PHA, the employer must set up a priority system of which PHAs to conduct first. A preliminary or gross hazard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the processes that the employer has determined are subject to coverage by the process safety management standard. Consideration should first be given to those processes with the potential of adversely affecting the largest number of employees. This prioritizing should consider the potential severity of a chemical release, the number of potentially affected employees, the operating history of the process such as the frequency of chemical releases, the age of the process and any other relevant factors. These factors would suggest a ranking order and would suggest either using a weighing factor system or a systematic ranking method. The use of a preliminary hazard analysis would assist an employer in determining which process should be of the highest priority and thereby the employer would obtain the greatest improvement in safety at the facility. Detailed guidance on the content and application of process hazard analysis methodologies is available from the American Institute of Chemical Engineers' Center for Chemical Process Safety (see appendix D). 5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Operating procedures will include specific instructions or details on what steps are to be taken or followed in carrying out the stated procedures. These operating instructions for each procedure should include the applicable safety precautions and should contain appropriate information on safety implications. For example, the operating procedures addressing operating parameters will contain operating instructions about pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow rates, what to do when an upset condition occurs, what alarms and instruments are pertinent if an upset condition occurs, and other subjects. Another example of using operating instructions to properly implement operating procedures is in starting up or shutting down the process. In these cases, different parameters will be required from those of normal operation. These operating instructions need to clearly indicate the distinctions between startup and normal operations such as the appropriate allowances for heating up a unit to reach the normal operating parameters. Also the operating instructions need to describe the proper method for increasing the temperature of the unit until the normal operating temperature parameters are achieved. Computerized process control systems add complexity to operating instructions. These operating instructions need to describe the logic of the software as well as the relationship between the equipment and the control system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to the operator. Operating procedures and instructions are important for training operating personnel. The operating procedures are often viewed as the standard operating practices (SOPs) for operations. Control room personnel and operating staff, in general, need to have a full understanding of operating procedures. If workers are not fluent in English then procedures and instructions need to be prepared in a second language understood by the workers. In addition, operating procedures need to be changed when there is a change in the process as a result of the management of change procedures. The consequences of operating procedure changes need to be fully evaluated and the information conveyed to the personnel. For example, mechanical changes to the process made by the maintenance department (like changing a valve from steel to brass or other subtle changes) need to be evaluated to determine if operating procedures and practices also need to be changed. All management of change actions must be coordinated and integrated with current operating procedures and operating personnel must be oriented to the changes in procedures before the change is made. When the process is shut down in order to make a change, then the operating procedures must be updated before startup of the process. Training in how to handle upset conditions must be accomplished as well as what operating personnel are to do in emergencies such as when a pump seal fails or a pipeline ruptures. Communication between operating personnel and workers performing work within the process area, such as nonroutine tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards of the tasks are to be conveyed to operating personnel in accordance with established procedures and to those performing the actual tasks. When the work is completed, operating personnel should be informed to provide closure on the job. 6. Employee Training. In establishing their training programs, employers must clearly define the employees to be trained and what subjects are to be covered in their training. Employers in setting up their training program will need to clearly establish the goals and objectives they wish to achieve with the training that they provide to their employees. The learning goals or objectives should be written in clear measurable terms before the training begins. These goals and objectives need to be tailored to each of the specific training modules or segments. Employers should describe the important actions and conditions under which the employee will demonstrate competence or knowledge as well as what is acceptable performance. Hands-on-training where employees are able to use their senses beyond listening, will enhance learning. For example, operating personnel, who will work in a control room or at control panels, would benefit by being trained at a simulated control panel or panels. Upset conditions of various types could be displayed on the simulator, and then the employee could go through the proper operating procedures to bring the simulator panel back to the normal operating parameters. A training environment could be created to help the trainee feel the full reality of the situation but, of course, under controlled conditions. This realistic type of training can be very effective in teaching employees correct procedures while allowing them to also see the consequences of what might happen if they do not follow established operating procedures. Other training techniques using videos or on-the-job training can also be very effective for teaching other job tasks, duties, or other important information. An effective training program will allow the employee to fully participate in the training process and to practice their skill or knowledge. Employers need to periodically evaluate their training programs to see if the necessary skills, knowledge, and routines are being properly understood and implemented by their trained employees. The means or methods for evaluating the training should be developed along with the training program goals and objectives. Training program evaluation will help employers to determine the amount of training their employees understood, and whether the desired results were obtained. If, after the evaluation, it appears that the trained employees are not at the level of knowledge and skill that was expected, the employer will need to revise the training program, provide retraining, or provide more frequent refresher training sessions until the deficiency is resolved. Those who conducted the training and those who received the training should also be consulted as to how best to improve the training process. If there is a language barrier, the language known to the trainees should be used to reinforce the training messages and information. Careful consideration must be given to assure that employees including maintenance and contract employees receive current and updated training. For example, if changes are made to a process, impacted employees must be trained in the changes and understand the effects of the changes on their job tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as already discussed the evaluation of the employee's absorption of training will certainly influence the need for training. 7. Contractors. Maintaining a site injury and illness log for contractors is another method employers must use to track and maintain current knowledge of work activities involving contract employees working on or adjacent to covered processes. Injury and illness logs of both the employer's employees and contract employees allow an employer to have full knowledge of process injury and illness experience. This log will also contain information which will be of use to those auditing process safety management compliance and those involved in incident investigations. Contract employees must perform their work safely. Considering that contractors often perform very specialized and potentially hazardous tasks such as confined space entry activities and nonroutine repair activities it is quite important that their activities be controlled while they are working on or near a covered process. A permit system or work authorization system for these activities would also be helpful to all affected employers. The use of a work authorization system keeps an employer informed of contract employee activities, and as a benefit the employer will have better coordination and more management control over the work being performed in the process area. A well run and well maintained process where employee safety is fully recognized will benefit all of those who work in the facility whether they be contract employees or employees of the owner. 8. Pre-Startup Safety. For existing processes that have been shutdown for turnaround, or modification, etc., the employer must assure that any changes other than “replacement in kind” made to the process during shutdown go through the management of change procedures. P&IDs will need to be updated as necessary, as well as operating procedures and instructions. If the changes made to the process during shutdown are significant and impact the training program, then operating personnel as well as employees engaged in routine and nonroutine work in the process area may need some refresher or additional training in light of the changes. Any incident investigation recommendations, compliance audits or PHA recommendations need to be reviewed as well to see what impacts they may have on the process before beginning the startup. 9. Mechanical Integrity. The first line of defense an employer has available is to operate and maintain the process as designed, and to keep the chemicals contained. This line of defense is backed up by the next line of defense which is the controlled release of chemicals through venting to scrubbers or flares, or to surge or overflow tanks which are designed to receive such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense are the primary lines of defense or means to prevent unwanted releases. The secondary lines of defense would include fixed fire protection systems like sprinklers, water spray, or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes, designed drainage systems, and other systems which would control or mitigate hazardous chemicals once an unwanted release occurs. These primary and secondary lines of defense are what the mechanical integrity program needs to protect and strengthen these primary and secondary lines of defenses where appropriate. The first step of an effective mechanical integrity program is to compile and categorize a list of process equipment and instrumentation for inclusion in the program. This list would include pressure vessels, storage tanks, process piping, relief and vent systems, fire protection system components, emergency shutdown systems and alarms and interlocks and pumps. For the categorization of instrumentation and the listed equipment the employer would prioritize which pieces of equipment require closer scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of various instrumentation and equipment parts would be known from the manufacturers data or the employer's experience with the parts, which would then influence the inspection and testing frequency and associated procedures. Also, applicable codes and standards such as the National Board Inspection Code, or those from the American Society for Testing and Material, American Petroleum Institute, National Fire Protection Association, American National Standards Institute, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, and other groups, provide information to help establish an effective testing and inspection frequency, as well as appropriate methodologies. The applicable codes and standards provide criteria for external inspections for such items as foundation and supports, anchor bolts, concrete or steel supports, guy wires, nozzles and sprinklers, pipe hangers, grounding connections, protective coatings and insulation, and external metal surfaces of piping and vessels, etc. These codes and standards also provide information on methodologies for internal inspection, and a frequency formula based on the corrosion rate of the materials of construction. Also, erosion both internal and external needs to be considered along with corrosion effects for piping and valves. Where the corrosion rate is not known, a maximum inspection frequency is recommended, and methods of developing the corrosion rate are available in the codes. Internal inspections need to cover items such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metallic linings; nonmetallic linings; thickness measurements for vessels and piping; inspection for erosion, corrosion, cracking and bulges; internal equipment like trays, baffles, sensors and screens for erosion, corrosion or cracking and other deficiencies. Some of these inspections may be performed by state of local government inspectors under state and local statutes. However, each employer needs to develop procedures to ensure that tests and inspections are conducted properly and that consistency is maintained even where different employees may be involved. Appropriate training is to be provided to maintenance personnel to ensure that they understand the preventive maintenance program procedures, safe practices, and the proper use amd application of special equipment or unique tools that may be required. This training is part of the overall training program called for in the standard. A quality assurance system is needed to help ensure that the proper materials of construction are used, that fabrication and inspection procedures are proper, and that installation procedures recognize field installation concerns. The quality assurance program is an essential part of the mechanical integrity program and will help to maintain the primary and secondary lines of defense that have been designed into the process to prevent unwanted chemical releases or those which control or mitigate a release. “As built” drawings, together with certifications of coded vessels and other equipment, and materials of construction need to be verified and retained in the quality assurance documentation. Equipment installation jobs need to be properly inspected in the field for use of proper materials and procedures and to assure that qualified craftsmen are used to do the job. The use of appropriate gaskets, packing, bolts, valves, lubricants and welding rods need to be verified in the field. Also procedures for installation of safety devices need to be verified, such as the torque on the bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform torque on flange bolts, proper installation of pump seals, etc. If the quality of parts is a problem, it may be appropriate to conduct audits of the equipment supplier's facilities to better assure proper purchases of required equipment which is suitable for its intended service. Any changes in equipment that may become necessary will need to go through the management of change procedures. 10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. 11. Managing Change. Management of change covers such as changes in process technology and changes to equipment and instrumentation. Changes in process technology can result from changes in production rates, raw materials, experimentation, equipment unavailability, new equipment, new product development, change in catalyst and changes in operating conditions to improve yield or quality. Equipment changes include among others change in materials of construction, equipment specifications, piping pre-arrangements, experimental equipment, computer program revisions and changes in alarms and interlocks. Employers need to establish means and methods to detect both technical changes and mechanical changes. Temporary changes have caused a number of catastrophes over the years, and employers need to establish ways to detect temporary changes as well as those that are permanent. It is important that a time limit for temporary changes be established and monitored since, without control, these changes may tend to become permanent. Temporary changes are subject to the management of change provisions. In addition, the management of change procedures are used to insure that the equipment and procedures are returned to their original or designed conditions at the end of the temporary change. Proper documentation and review of these changes is invaluable in assuring that the safety and health considerations are being incorporated into the operating procedures and the process. Employers may wish to develop a form or clearance sheet to facilitate the processing of changes through the management of change procedures. A typical change form may include a description and the purpose of the change, the technical basis for the change, safety and health considerations, documentation of changes for the operating procedures, maintenance procedures, inspection and testing, P&IDs, electrical classification, training and communications, pre-startup inspection, duration if a temporary change, approvals and authorization. Where the impact of the change is minor and well understood, a check list reviewed by an authorized person with proper communication to others who are affected may be sufficient. However, for a more complex or significant design change, a hazard evaluation procedure with approvals by operations, maintenance, and safety departments may be appropriate. Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw materials, operating procedures, mechanical integrity programs, electrical classifications, etc., need to be noted so that these revisions can be made permanent when the drawings and procedure manuals are updated. Copies of process changes need to be kept in an accessible location to ensure that design changes are available to operating personnel as well as to PHA team members when a PHA is being done or one is being updated. 12. Investigation of Incidents. Employers need to develop in-house capability to investigate incidents that occur in their facilities. A team needs to be assembled by the employer and trained in the techniques of investigation including how to conduct interviews of witnesses, needed documentation and report writing. A multi-disciplinary team is better able to gather the facts of the event and to analyze them and develop plausible scenarios as to what happened, and why. Team members should be selected on the basis of their training, knowledge and ability to contribute to a team effort to fully investigate the incident. Employees in the process area where the incident occurred should be consulted, interviewed or made a member of the team. Their knowledge of the events form a significant set of facts about the incident which occurred. The report, its findings and recommendations are to be shared with those who can benefit from the information. The cooperation of employees is essential to an effective incident investigation. The focus of the investigation should be to obtain facts, and not to place blame. The team and the investigation process should clearly deal with all involved individuals in a fair, open and consistent manner. 13. Emergency Preparedness. Employers at a minimum must have an emergency action plan which will facilitate the prompt evacuation of employees due to an unwanted release of a highly hazardous chemical. This means that the employer will have a plan that will be activated by an alarm system to alert employees when to evacuate and, that employees who are physically impaired, will have the necessary support and assistance to get them to the safe zone as well. The intent of these requirements is to alert and move employees to a safe zone quickly. Delaying alarms or confusing alarms are to be avoided. The use of process control centers or similar process buildings in the process area as safe areas is discouraged. Recent catastrophes have shown that a large life loss has occurred in these structures because of where they have been sited and because they are not necessarily designed to withstand over-pressures from shockwaves resulting from explosions in the process area. Unwanted incidental releases of highly hazardous chemicals in the process area must be addressed by the employer as to what actions employees are to take. If the employer wants employees to evacuate the area, then the emergency action plan will be activated. For outdoor processes where wind direction is important for selecting the safe route to a refuge area, the employer should place a wind direction indicator such as a wind sock or pennant at the highest point that can be seen throughout the process area. Employees can move in the direction of cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to the refuge area by knowing the wind direction. If the employer wants specific employees in the release area to control or stop the minor emergency or incidental release, these actions must be planned for in advance and procedures developed and implemented. Preplanning for handling incidental releases for minor emergencies in the process area needs to be done, appropriate equipment for the hazards must be provided, and training conducted for those employees who will perform the emergency work before they respond to handle an actual release. The employer's training program, including the Hazard Communication standard training is to address the training needs for employees who are expected to handle incidental or minor releases. Preplanning for releases that are more serious than incidental releases is another important line of defense to be used by the employer. When a serious release of a highly hazardous chemical occurs, the employer through preplanning will have determined in advance what actions employees are to take. The evacuation of the immediate release area and other areas as necessary would be accomplished under the emergency action plan. If the employer wishes to use plant personnel such as a fire brigade, spill control team, a hazardous materials team, or use employees to render aid to those in the immediate release area and control or mitigate the incident, these actions are covered by § 1910.120, the Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) standard. If outside assistance is necessary, such as through mutual aid agreements between employers or local government emergency response organizations, these emergency responders are also covered by HAZWOPER. The safety and health protections required for emergency responders are the responsibility of their employers and of the on-scene incident commander. Responders may be working under very hazardous conditions and therefore the objective is to have them competently led by an on-scene incident commander and the commander's staff, properly equipped to do their assigned work safely, and fully trained to carry out their duties safely before they respond to an emergency. Drills, training exercises, or simulations with the local community emergency response planners and responder organizations is one means to obtain better preparedness. This close cooperation and coordination between plant and local community emergency preparedness managers will also aid the employer in complying with the Environmental Protection Agency's Risk Management Plan criteria. One effective way for medium to large facilities to enhance coordination and communication during emergencies for on plant operations and with local community organizations is for employers to establish and equip an emergency control center. The emergency control center would be sited in a safe zone area so that it could be occupied throughout the duration of an emergency. The center would serve as the major ccommunication link between the on-scene incident commander and plant or corporate management as well as with the local community officials. The communication equipment in the emergency control center should include a network to receive and transmit information by telephone, radio or other means. It is important to have a backup communication network in case of power failure or one communication means fails. The center should also be equipped with the plant layout and community maps, utility drawings including fire water, emergency lighting, appropriate reference materials such as a government agency notification list, company personnel phone list, SARA Title III reports and safety data sheets, emergency plans and procedures manual, a listing with the location of emergency response equipment, mutual aid information, and access to meteorological or weather condition data and any dispersion modeling data. 14. Compliance Audits. Planning in advance is essential to the success of the auditing process. Each employer needs to establish the format, staffing, scheduling and verification methods prior to conducting the audit. The format should be designed to provide the lead auditor with a procedure or checklist which details the requirements of each section of the standard. The names of the audit team members should be listed as part of the format as well. The checklist, if properly designed, could serve as the verification sheet which provides the auditor with the necessary information to expedite the review and assure that no requirements of the standard are omitted. This verification sheet format could also identify those elements that will require evaluation or a response to correct deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for developing the follow-up and documentation requirements. The selection of effective audit team members is critical to the success of the program. Team members should be chosen for their experience, knowledge, and training and should be familiar with the processes and with auditing techniques, practices and procedures. The size of the team will vary depending on the size and complexity of the process under consideration. For a large, complex, highly instrumented plant, it may be desirable to have team members with expertise in process engineering and design, process chemistry, instrumentation and computer controls, electrical hazards and classifications, safety and health disciplines, maintenance, emergency preparedness, warehousing or shipping, and process safety auditing. The team may use part-time members to provide for the depth of expertise required as well as for what is actually done or followed, compared to what is written. An effective audit includes a review of the relevant documentation and process safety information, inspection of the physical facilities, and interviews with all levels of plant personnel. Utilizing the audit procedure and checklist developed in the preplanning stage, the audit team can systematically analyze compliance with the provisions of the standard and any other corporate policies that are relevant. For example, the audit team will review all aspects of the training program as part of the overall audit. The team will review the written training program for adequacy of content, frequency of training, effectiveness of training in terms of its goals and objectives as well as to how it fits into meeting the standard's requirements, documentation, etc. Through interviews, the team can determine the employee's knowledge and awareness of the safety procedures, duties, rules, emergency response assignments, etc. During the inspection, the team can observe actual practices such as safety and health policies, procedures, and work authorization practices. This approach enables the team to identify deficiencies and determine where corrective actions or improvements are necessary. An audit is a technique used to gather sufficient facts and information, including statistical information, to verify compliance with standards. Auditors should select as part of their preplanning a sample size sufficient to give a degree of confidence that the audit reflects the level of compliance with the standard. The audit team, through this systematic analysis, should document areas which require corrective action as well as those areas where the process safety management system is effective and working in an effective manner. This provides a record of the audit procedures and findings, and serves as a baseline of operation data for future audits. It will assist future auditors in determining changes or trends from previous audits. Corrective action is one of the most important parts of the audit. It includes not only addressing the identified deficiencies, but also planning, followup, and documentation. The corrective action process normally begins with a management review of the audit findings. The purpose of this review is to determine what actions are appropriate, and to establish priorities, timetables, resource allocations and requirements and responsibilities. In some cases, corrective action may involve a simple change in procedure or minor maintenance effort to remedy the concern. Management of change procedures need to be used, as appropriate, even for what may seem to be a minor change. Many of the deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while some may require engineering studies or indepth review of actual procedures and practices. There may be instances where no action is necessary and this is a valid response to an audit finding. All actions taken, including an explanation where no action is taken on a finding, needs to be documented as to what was done and why. It is important to assure that each deficiency identified is addressed, the corrective action to be taken noted, and the audit person or team responsible be properly documented by the employer. To control the corrective action process, the employer should consider the use of a tracking system. This tracking system might include periodic status reports shared with affected levels of management, specific reports such as completion of an engineering study, and a final implementation report to provide closure for audit findings that have been through management of change, if appropriate, and then shared with affected employees and management. This type of tracking system provides the employer with the status of the corrective action. It also provides the documentation required to verify that appropriate corrective actions were taken on deficiencies identified in the audit. Appendix D to § 1910.119—Sources of Further Information (Nonmandatory) 1. Center for Chemical Process Safety, American Institute of Chemical Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017, (212) 705-7319. 2. “Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures,” American Institute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017. 3. “Guidelines for Technical Management of Chemical Process Safety,” Center for Chemical Process Safety of the American Institute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017. 4. “Evaluating Process Safety in the Chemical Industry,” Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC 20037. 5. “Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,” Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC 20037. 6. “Management of Process Hazards,” American Petroleum Institute (API Recommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005. 7. “Improving Owner and Contractor Safety Performance,” American Petroleum Institute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API, 1220 L Street N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005. 8. Chemical Manufacturers Association (CMA's Manager Guide), First Edition, September 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20037. 9. “Improving Construction Safety Performance,” Report A-3, The Business Roundtable; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10166. (Report includes criteria to evaluate contractor safety performance and criteria to enhance contractor safety performance). 10. “Recommended Guidelines for Contractor Safety and Health,” Texas Chemical Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402 Nueces Street, Austin, TX 78701-1534. 11. “Loss Prevention in the Process Industries,” Volumes I and II; Frank P. Lees, Butterworth; London 1983. 12. “Safety and Health Program Management Guidelines,” 1989; U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 13. “Safety and Health Guide for the Chemical Industry,” 1986, (OSHA 3091); U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration; 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210. 14. “Review of Emergency Systems,” June 1988; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, Washington, DC 20460. 15. “Technical Guidance for Hazards Analysis, Emergency Planning for Extremely Hazardous Substances,” December 1987; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Federal Emergency Management Administration (FEMA) and U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC 20460. 16. “Accident Investigation * * * A New Approach,” 1983, National Safety Council; 444 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611-3991. 17. “Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classification Guide,” 6th Edition, May 1987, Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674. 18. “Chemical Exposure Index,” May 1988, Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674. [57 FR 6403, Feb. 24, 1992; 57 FR 7847, Mar. 4, 1992, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002; 76 FR 80738, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 17776, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, Feb. 8, 2013; 84 FR 15102, Apr. 15, 2019] § 1910.120 Hazardous waste operations and emergency response. (a) Scope, application, and definitions Scope. (i) Clean-up operations required by a governmental body, whether Federal, state, local or other involving hazardous substances that are conducted at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites (including, but not limited to, the EPA's National Priority Site List (NPL), state priority site lists, sites recommended for the EPA NPL, and initial investigations of government identified sites which are conducted before the presence or absence of hazardous substances has been ascertained); (ii) Corrective actions involving clean-up operations at sites covered by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42 U.S.C. 6901 et seq. (iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at sites recognized by Federal, state, local or other governmental bodies as uncontrolled hazardous waste sites; (iv) Operations involving hazardous wastes that are conducted at treatment, storage, and disposal (TSD) facilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agencies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A. to implement RCRA regulations; and (v) Emergency response operations for releases of, or substantial threats of releases of, hazardous substances without regard to the location of the hazard. (2) Application. (ii) Hazardous substance clean-up operations within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this section must comply with all paragraphs of this section except paragraphs (p) and (q). (iii) Operations within the scope of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section must comply only with the requirements of paragraph (p) of this section. Notes and Exceptions: (A) All provisions of paragraph (p) of this section cover any treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) operation regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265 or by state law authorized under RCRA, and required to have a permit or interim status from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from a state agency pursuant to RCRA. (B) Employers who are not required to have a permit or interim status because they are conditionally exempt small quantity generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are generators who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for exemptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts 264, 265 and 270 (“excepted employers”) are not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through (p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers who are required by the EPA or state agency to have their employees engage in emergency response or who direct their employees to engage in emergency response are covered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this section. Excepted employers who are not required to have employees engage in emergency response, who direct their employees to evacuate in the case of such emergencies and who meet the requirements of paragraph (p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. (C) If an area is used primarily for treatment, storage or disposal, any emergency response operations in that area shall comply with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other areas not used primarily for treatment, storage, or disposal, any emergency response operations shall comply with paragraph (q) of this section. Compliance with the requirements of paragraph (q) of this section shall be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. (iv) Emergency response operations for releases of, or substantial threats of releases of, hazardous substances which are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must only comply with the requirements of paragraph (q) of this section. (3) Definitions—Buddy system Clean-up operation Decontamination Emergency response responding to emergencies Facility Hazardous materials response (HAZMAT) team Hazardous substance (A) Any substance defined under section 103(14) of the Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA) (42 U.S.C. 9601). (B) Any biological agent and other disease-causing agent which after release into the environment and upon exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or assimilation into any person, either directly from the environment or indirectly by ingestion through food chains, will or may reasonably be anticipated to cause death, disease, behavioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic mutation, physiological malfunctions (including malfunctions in reproduction) or physical deformations in such persons or their offspring; (C) Any substance listed by the U.S. Department of Transportation as hazardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 and appendices; and (D) Hazardous waste as herein defined. Hazardous waste (A) A waste or combination of wastes as defined in 40 CFR 261.3, or (B) Those substances defined as hazardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8. Hazardous waste operation Hazardous waste site Site Health hazard health hazard See IDLH Immediately dangerous to life or health Oxygen deficiency Permissible exposure limit Published exposure level Post emergency response Qualified person Site safety and health supervisor (or official) Small quantity qenerator Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, (b) Safety and health program. Note to ( b Safety and health programs developed and implemented to meet other Federal, state, or local regulations are considered acceptable in meeting this requirement if they cover or are modified to cover the topics required in this paragraph. An additional or separate safety and health program is not required by this paragraph. (1) General. (ii) The written safety and health program shall incorporate the following: (A) An organizational structure; (B) A comprehensive workplan; (C) A site-specific safety and health plan which need not repeat the employer's standard operating procedures required in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this section; (D) The safety and health training program; (E) The medical surveillance program; (F) The employer's standard operating procedures for safety and health; and (G) Any necessary interface between general program and site specific activities. (iii) Site excavation. (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors. (v) Program availability. (2) Organizational structure part of the site program. (A) A general supervisor who has the responsibility and authority to direct all hazardous waste operations. (B) A site safety and health supervisor who has the responsibility and authority to develop and implement the site safety and health plan and verify compliance. (C) All other personnel needed for hazardous waste site operations and emergency response and their general functions and responsibilities. (D) The lines of authority, responsibility, and communication. (ii) The organizational structure shall be reviewed and updated as necessary to reflect the current status of waste site operations. (3) Comprehensive workplan part of the site program. (i) The comprehensive workplan shall address anticipated clean-up activities as well as normal operating procedures which need not repeat the employer's procedures available elsewhere. (ii) The comprehensive workplan shall define work tasks and objectives and identify the methods for accomplishing those tasks and objectives. (iii) The comprehensive workplan shall establish personnel requirements for implementing the plan. (iv) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation of the training required in paragraph (e) of this section. (v) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation of the required informational programs required in paragraph (i) of this section. (vi) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation of the medical surveillance program described in paragraph (f) of this section. (4) Site-specific safety and health plan part of the program General. (ii) Elements. (A) A safety and health risk or hazard analysis for each site task and operation found in the workplan. (B) Employee training assignments to assure compliance with paragraph (e) of this section. (C) Personal protective equipment to be used by employees for each of the site tasks and operations being conducted as required by the personal protective equipment program in paragraph (g)(5) of this section. (D) Medical surveillance requirements in accordance with the program in paragraph (f) of this section. (E) Frequency and types of air monitoring, personnel monitoring, and environmental sampling techniques and instrumentation to be used, including methods of maintenance and calibration of monitoring and sampling equipment to be used. (F) Site control measures in accordance with the site control program required in paragraph (d) of this section. (G) Decontamination procedures in accordance with paragraph (k) of this section. (H) An emergency response plan meeting the requirements of paragraph (l) of this section for safe and effective responses to emergencies, including the necessary PPE and other equipment. (I) Confined space entry procedures. (J) A spill containment program meeting the requirements of paragraph (j) of this section. (iii) Pre-entry briefing. (iv) Effectiveness of site safety and health plan. (c) Site characterization and analysis General. (2) Preliminary evaluation. (3) Hazard identification. (4) Required information. (i) Location and approximate size of the site. (ii) Description of the response activity and/or the job task to be performed. (iii) Duration of the planned employee activity. (iv) Site topography and accessibility by air and roads. (v) Safety and health hazards expected at the site. (vi) Pathways for hazardous substance dispersion. (vii) Present status and capabilities of emergency response teams that would provide assistance to hazardous waste clean-up site employees at the time of an emergency. (viii) Hazardous substances and health hazards involved or expected at the site, and their chemical and physical properties. (5) Personal protective equipment. (i) Based upon the results of the preliminary site evaluation, an ensemble of PPE shall be selected and used during initial site entry which will provide protection to a level of exposure below permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels for known or suspected hazardous substances and health hazards, and which will provide protection against other known and suspected hazards identified during the preliminary site evaluation. If there is no permissible exposure limit or published exposure level, the employer may use other published studies and information as a guide to appropriate personal protective equipment. (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus is not used as part of the entry ensemble, and if respiratory protection is warranted by the potential hazards identified during the preliminary site evaluation, an escape self-contained breathing apparatus of at least five minute's duration shall be carried by employees during initial site entry. (iii) If the preliminary site evaluation does not produce sufficient information to identify the hazards or suspected hazards of the site, an ensemble providing protection equivalent to Level B PPE shall be provided as minimum protection, and direct reading instruments shall be used as appropriate for identifying IDLH conditions. (See appendix B for a description of Level B hazards and the recommendations for Level B protective equipment.) (iv) Once the hazards of the site have been identified, the appropriate PPE shall be selected and used in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section. (6) Monitoring. (i) Monitoring with direct reading instruments for hazardous levels of ionizing radiation. (ii) Monitoring the air with appropriate direct reading test equipment (i.e., combustible gas meters, detector tubes) for IDLH and other conditions that may cause death or serious harm (combustible or explosive atmospheres, oxygen deficiency, toxic substances). (iii) Visually observing for signs of actual or potential IDLH or other dangerous conditions. (iv) An ongoing air monitoring program in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section shall be implemented after site characterization has determined the site is safe for the start-up of operations. (7) Risk identification. Note to paragraph ( c Risks to consider include, but are not limited to: (a) Exposures exceeding the permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels. (b) IDLH concentrations. (c) Potential skin absorption and irritation sources. (d) Potential eye irritation sources. (e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability ranges. (f) Oxygen deficiency. (8) Employee notification. (d) Site control General. (2) Site control program. (3) Elements of the site control program. (e) Training General. (ii) Employees shall not be permitted to participate in or supervise field activities until they have been trained to a level required by their job function and responsibility. (2) Elements to be covered. (i) Names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety and health; (ii) Safety, health and other hazards present on the site; (iii) Use of personal protective equipment; (iv) Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from hazards; (v) Safe use of engineering controls and equipment on the site; (vi) Medical surveillance requirements, including recognition of symptoms and signs which might indicate overexposure to hazards; and (vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) through (J) of the site safety and health plan set forth in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section. (3) Initial training. (ii) Workers on site only occasionally for a specific limited task (such as, but not limited to, ground water monitoring, land surveying, or geo-physical surveying) and who are unlikely to be exposed over permissible exposure limits and published exposure limits shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the site, and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor. (iii) Workers regularly on site who work in areas which have been monitored and fully characterized indicating that exposures are under permissible exposure limits and published exposure limits where respirators are not necessary, and the characterization indicates that there are no health hazards or the possibility of an emergency developing, shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the site and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor. (iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who become general site workers or who are required to wear respirators, shall have the additional 16 hours and two days of training necessary to total the training specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). (4) Management and supervisor training. (5) Qualifications for trainers. (6) Training certification. (7) Emergency response. (8) Refresher training. (9) Equivalent training. (f) Medical surveillance General. (2) Employees covered. (i) All employees who are or may be exposed to hazardous substances or health hazards at or above the permissible exposure limits or, if there is no permissible exposure limit, above the published exposure levels for these substances, without regard to the use of respirators, for 30 days or more a year; (ii) All employees who wear a respirator for 30 days or more a year or as required by § 1910.134; (iii) All employees who are injured, become ill or develop signs or symptoms due to possible overexposure involving hazardous substances or health hazards from an emergency response or hazardous waste operation; and (iv) Members of HAZMAT teams. (3) Frequency of medical examinations and consultations. (i) For employees covered under paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and (f)(2)(iv): (A) Prior to assignment; (B) At least once every twelve months for each employee covered unless the attending physician believes a longer interval (not greater than biennially) is appropriate; (C) At termination of employment or reassignment to an area where the employee would not be covered if the employee has not had an examination within the last six months; (D) As soon as possible upon notification by an employee that the employee has developed signs or symptoms indicating possible overexposure to hazardous substances or health hazards, or that the employee has been injured or exposed above the permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels in an emergency situation; (E) At more frequent times, if the examining physician determines that an increased frequency of examination is medically necessary. (ii) For employees covered under paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employees including those of employers covered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may have been injured, received a health impairment, developed signs or symptoms which may have resulted from exposure to hazardous substances resulting from an emergency incident, or exposed during an emergency incident to hazardous substances at concentrations above the permissible exposure limits or the published exposure levels without the necessary personal protective equipment being used: (A) As soon as possible following the emergency incident or development of signs or symptoms; (B) At additional times, if the examining physician determines that follow-up examinations or consultations are medically necessary. (4) Content of medical examinations and consultations. (ii) The content of medical examinations or consultations made available to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) shall be determined by the attending physician. The guidelines in the Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities (5) Examination by a physician and costs. (6) Information provided to the physician. (i) A description of the employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposures. (ii) The employee's exposure levels or anticipated exposure levels. (iii) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used. (iv) Information from previous medical examinations of the employee which is not readily available to the examining physician. (v) Information required by § 1910.134. (7) Physician's written opinion. (A) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions which would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment of the employee's health from work in hazardous waste operations or emergency response, or from respirator use. (B) The physician's recommended limitations upon the employee's assigned work. (C) The results of the medical examination and tests if requested by the employee. (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions which require further examination or treatment. (ii) The written opinion obtained by the employer shall not reveal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposures. (8) Recordkeeping. (ii) The record required in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at least the following information: (A) The name of the employee; (B) Physician's written opinions, recommended limitations, and results of examinations and tests; (C) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to hazardous substances; (D) A copy of the information provided to the examining physician by the employer, with the exception of the standard and its appendices. (g) Engineering controls, work practices, and personal protective equipment for employee protection. (1) Engineering controls, work practices and PPE for substances regulated in subparts G and Z. Note to paragraph ( g i Engineering controls which may be feasible include the use of pressurized cabs or control booths on equipment, and/or the use of remotely operated material handling equipment. Work practices which may be feasible are removing all non-essential employees from potential exposure during opening of drums, wetting down dusty operations and locating employees upwind of possible hazards. (ii) Whenever engineering controls and work practices are not feasible or not required, any reasonable combination of engineering controls, work practices and PPE shall be used to reduce and maintain employee exposures to or below the permissible exposure limits or dose limits for substances regulated by 29 CFR part 1910, subpart Z. (iii) The employer shall not implement a schedule of employee rotation as a means of compliance with permissible exposure limits or dose limits except when there is no other feasible way of complying with the airborne or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation. (iv) The provisions of 29 CFR, subpart G, shall be followed. (2) Engineering controls, work practices, and PPE for substances not regulated in subparts G and Z. (3) Personal protective equipment selection. (ii) Personal protective equipment selection shall be based on an evaluation of the performance characteristics of the PPE relative to the requirements and limitations of the site, the task-specific conditions and duration, and the hazards and potential hazards identified at the site. (iii) Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or positive pressure air-line respirators equipped with an escape air supply, shall be used when chemical exposure levels present will create a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate serious illness or injury, or impair the ability to escape. (iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suits (protection equivalent to Level A protection as recommended in appendix B) shall be used in conditions where skin absorption of a hazardous substance may result in a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate serious illness or injury, or impair the ability to escape. (v) The level of protection provided by PPE selection shall be increased when additional information on site conditions indicates that increased protection is necessary to reduce employee exposures below permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels for hazardous substances and health hazards. (See appendix B for guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.) Note to paragraph ( g The level of employee protection provided may be decreased when additional information or site conditions show that decreased protection will not result in hazardous exposures to employees. (vi) Personal protective equipment shall be selected and used to meet the requirements of 29 CFR part 1910, subpart I, and additional requirements specified in this section. (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suits. (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall be capable of maintaining positive air pressure. (See appendix A for a test method which may be used to evaluate this requirement.) (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall be capable of preventing inward test gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent. (See appendix A for a test method which may be used to evaluate this requirement.) (5) Personal protective equipment (PPE) program. (i) PPE selection based upon site hazards, (ii) PPE use and limitations of the equipment, (iii) Work mission duration, (iv) PPE maintenance and storage, (v) PPE decontamination and disposal, (vi) PPE training and proper fitting, (vii) PPE donning and doffing procedures, (viii) PPE inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use, (ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of the PPE program, and (x) Limitations during temperature extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate medical considerations. (h) Monitoring General. (ii) Air monitoring shall be used to identify and quantify airborne levels of hazardous substances and safety and health hazards in order to determine the appropriate level of employee protection needed on site. (2) Initial entry. (3) Periodic monitoring. (i) When work begins on a different portion of the site. (ii) When contaminants other than those previously identified are being handled. (iii) When a different type of operation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as opposed to exploratory well drilling). (iv) When employees are handling leaking drums or containers or working in areas with obvious liquid contamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon). (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees. Note to paragraph ( h It is not required to monitor employees engaged in site characterization operations covered by paragraph (c) of this section. (i) Informational programs. (j) Handling drums and containers General. (ii) Drums and containers used during the clean-up shall meet the appropriate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regulations for the wastes that they contain. (iii) When practical, drums and containers shall be inspected and their integrity shall be assured prior to being moved. Drums or containers that cannot be inspected before being moved because of storage conditions (i.e., buried beneath the earth, stacked behind other drums, stacked several tiers high in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an accessible location and inspected prior to further handling. (iv) Unlabelled drums and containers shall be considered to contain hazardous substances and handled accordingly until the contents are positively identified and labeled. (v) Site operations shall be organized to minimize the amount of drum or container movement. (vi) Prior to movement of drums or containers, all employees exposed to the transfer operation shall be warned of the potential hazards associated with the contents of the drums or containers. (vii) U.S. Department of Transportation specified salvage drums or containers and suitable quantities of proper absorbent shall be kept available and used in areas where spills, leaks, or ruptures may occur. (viii) Where major spills may occur, a spill containment program, which is part of the employer's safety and health program required in paragraph (b) of this section, shall be implemented to contain and isolate the entire volume of the hazardous substance being transferred. (ix) Drums and containers that cannot be moved without rupture, leakage, or spillage shall be emptied into a sound container using a device classified for the material being transferred. (x) A ground-penetrating system or other type of detection system or device shall be used to estimate the location and depth of buried drums or containers. (xi) Soil or covering material shall be removed with caution to prevent drum or container rupture. (xii) Fire extinguishing equipment meeting the requirements of 29 CFR part 1910, subpart L, shall be on hand and ready for use to control incipient fires. (2) Opening drums and containers. (i) Where an airline respirator system is used, connections to the source of air supply shall be protected from contamination and the entire system shall be protected from physical damage. (ii) Employees not actually involved in opening drums or containers shall be kept a safe distance from the drums or containers being opened. (iii) If employees must work near or adjacent to drums or containers being opened, a suitable shield that does not interfere with the work operation shall be placed between the employee and the drums or containers being opened to protect the employee in case of accidental explosion. (iv) Controls for drum or container opening equipment, monitoring equipment, and fire suppression equipment shall be located behind the explosion-resistant barrier. (v) When there is a reasonable possibility of flammable atmospheres being present, material handling equipment and hand tools shall be of the type to prevent sources of ignition. (vi) Drums and containers shall be opened in such a manner that excess interior pressure will be safely relieved. If pressure can not be relieved from a remote location, appropriate shielding shall be placed between the employee and the drums or containers to reduce the risk of employee injury. (vii) Employees shall not stand upon or work from drums or containers. (3) Material handling equipment. (4) Radioactive wastes. (5) Shock sensitive wastes. (i) All non-essential employees shall be evacuated from the area of transfer. (ii) Material handling equipment shall be provided with explosive containment devices or protective shields to protect equipment operators from exploding containers. (iii) An employee alarm system capable of being perceived above surrounding light and noise conditions shall be used to signal the commencement and completion of explosive waste handling activities. (iv) Continuous communications (i.e., portable radios, hand signals, telephones, as appropriate) shall be maintained between the employee-in-charge of the immediate handling area and both the site safety and health supervisor and the command post until such time as the handling operation is completed. Communication equipment or methods that could cause shock sensitive materials to explode shall not be used. (v) Drums and containers under pressure, as evidenced by bulging or swelling, shall not be moved until such time as the cause for excess pressure is determined and appropriate containment procedures have been implemented to protect employees from explosive relief of the drum. (vi) Drums and containers containing packaged laboratory wastes shall be considered to contain shock-sensitive or explosive materials until they have been characterized. Caution: (6) Laboratory waste packs. (i) Lab packs shall be opened only when necessary and then only by an individual knowledgeable in the inspection, classification, and segregation of the containers within the pack according to the hazards of the wastes. (ii) If crystalline material is noted on any container, the contents shall be handled as a shock-sensitive waste until the contents are identified. (7) Sampling of drum and container contents. (8) Shipping and transport. (ii) Drum or container staging areas shall be kept to the minimum number necessary to identify and classify materials safely and prepare them for transport. (iii) Staging areas shall be provided with adequate access and egress routes. (iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes shall be permitted only after a thorough characterization of the materials has been completed. (9) Tank and vault procedures. (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry procedures as described in the employer's safety and health plan shall be followed whenever employees must enter a tank or vault. (k) Decontamination General. (2) Decontamination procedures. (ii) Standard operating procedures shall be developed to minimize employee contact with hazardous substances or with equipment that has contacted hazardous substances. (iii) All employees leaving a contaminated area shall be appropriately decontaminated; all contaminated clothing and equipment leaving a contaminated area shall be appropriately disposed of or decontaminated. (iv) Decontamination procedures shall be monitored by the site safety and health supervisor to determine their effectiveness. When such procedures are found to be ineffective, appropriate steps shall be taken to correct any deficiencies. (3) Location. (4) Equipment and solvents. (5) Personal protective clothing and equipment. (ii) Employees whose non-impermeable clothing becomes wetted with hazardous substances shall immediately remove that clothing and proceed to shower. The clothing shall be disposed of or decontaminated before it is removed from the work zone. (6) Unauthorized employees. (7) Commercial laundries or cleaning establishments. (8) Showers and change rooms. (l) Emergency response by employees at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites Emergency response plan. (ii) Employers who will evacuate their employees from the danger area when an emergency occurs, and who do not permit any of their employees to assist in handling the emergency, are exempt from the requirements of this paragraph if they provide an emergency action plan complying with 29 CFR 1910.38. (2) Elements of an emergency response plan. (i) Pre-emergency planning. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of authority, and communication. (iii) Emergency recognition and prevention. (iv) Safe distances and places of refuge. (v) Site security and control. (vi) Evacuation routes and procedures. (vii) Decontamination procedures which are not covered by the site safety and health plan. (viii) Emergency medical treatment and first aid. (ix) Emergency alerting and response procedures. (x) Critique of response and follow-up. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment. (3) Procedures for handling emergency incidents. (A) Site topography, layout, and prevailing weather conditions. (B) Procedures for reporting incidents to local, state, and federal governmental agencies. (ii) The emergency response plan shall be a separate section of the Site Safety and Health Plan. (iii) The emergency response plan shall be compatible and integrated with the disaster, fire and/or emergency response plans of local, state, and federal agencies. (iv) The emergency response plan shall be rehearsed regularly as part of the overall training program for site operations. (v) The site emergency response plan shall be reviewed periodically and, as necessary, be amended to keep it current with new or changing site conditions or information. (vi) An employee alarm system shall be installed in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.165 to notify employees of an emergency situation; to stop work activities if necessary; to lower background noise in order to speed communication; and to begin emergency procedures. (vii) Based upon the information available at time of the emergency, the employer shall evaluate the incident and the site response capabilities and proceed with the appropriate steps to implement the site emergency response plan. (m) Illumination. Table H-120.1—Minimum Illumination Intensities in Foot-Candles Foot-candles Area or operations 5 General site areas. 3 Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and field maintenance areas. 5 Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and exitways. 5 Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Administration approved cap lights shall be acceptable for use in the tunnel heading.) 10 General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.) 30 First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. (n) Sanitation at temporary workplaces Potable water. (ii) Portable containers used to dispense drinking water shall be capable of being tightly closed, and equipped with a tap. Water shall not be dipped from containers. (iii) Any container used to distribute drinking water shall be clearly marked as to the nature of its contents and not used for any other purpose. (iv) Where single service cups (to be used but once) are supplied, both a sanitary container for the unused cups and a receptacle for disposing of the used cups shall be provided. (2) Nonpotable water. (ii) There shall be no cross-connection, open or potential, between a system furnishing potable water and a system furnishing nonpotable water. (3) Toilet facilities. Table H-120.2—Toilet Facilities Number of employees Minimum number of facilities 20 or fewer One. More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one urinal per 40 employees. More than 200 One toilet seat and one urinal per 50 employees. (ii) Under temporary field conditions, provisions shall be made to assure that at least one toilet facility is available. (iii) Hazardous waste sites not provided with a sanitary sewer shall be provided with the following toilet facilities unless prohibited by local codes: (A) Chemical toilets; (B) Recirculating toilets; (C) Combustion toilets; or (D) Flush toilets. (iv) The requirements of this paragraph for sanitation facilities shall not apply to mobile crews having transportation readily available to nearby toilet facilities. (v) Doors entering toilet facilities shall be provided with entrance locks controlled from inside the facility. (4) Food handling. (5) Temporary sleeping quarters. (6) Washing facilities. (7) Showers and change rooms. (i) Showers shall be provided and shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3). (ii) Change rooms shall be provided and shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.141(e). Change rooms shall consist of two separate change areas separated by the shower area required in paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. One change area, with an exit leading off the worksite, shall provide employees with a clean area where they can remove, store, and put on street clothing. The second area, with an exit to the worksite, shall provide employees with an area where they can put on, remove and store work clothing and personal protective equipment. (iii) Showers and change rooms shall be located in areas where exposures are below the permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels. If this cannot be accomplished, then a ventilation system shall be provided that will supply air that is below the permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels. (iv) Employers shall assure that employees shower at the end of their work shift and when leaving the hazardous waste site. (o) New technology programs. (2) New technologies, equipment or control measures available to the industry, such as the use of foams, absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or other means to suppress the level of air contaminates while excavating the site or for spill control, shall be evaluated by employers or their representatives. Such an evaluation shall be done to determine the effectiveness of the new methods, materials, or equipment before implementing their use on a large scale for enhancing employee protection. Information and data from manufacturers or suppliers may be used as part of the employer's evaluation effort. Such evaluations shall be made available to OSHA upon request. (p) Certain Operations Conducted Under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA). (1) Safety and health program. (2) Hazard communication program. Note to § 1910.120: The exemption for hazardous waste provided in § 1910.1200 is applicable to this section. (3) Medical surveillance program. (4) Decontamination program. (5) New technology program. (6) Material handling program. (7) Training program New employees. (ii) Current employees. (iii) Trainers. (8) Emergency response program Emergency response plan. (ii) Elements of an emergency response plan. (A) Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties. (B) Personnel roles, lines of authority, and communication. (C) Emergency recognition and prevention. (D) Safe distances and places of refuge. (E) Site security and control. (F) Evacuation routes and procedures. (G) Decontamination procedures. (H) Emergency medical treatment and first aid. (I) Emergency alerting and response procedures. (J) Critique of response and follow-up. (K) PPE and emergency equipment. (iii) Training. Exception #1: Exception #2: (B) Employee members of TSD facility emergency response organizations shall be trained to a level of competence in the recognition of health and safety hazards to protect themselves and other employees. This would include training in the methods used to minimize the risk from safety and health hazards; in the safe use of control equipment; in the selection and use of appropriate personal protective equipment; in the safe operating procedures to be used at the incident scene; in the techniques of coordination with other employees to minimize risks; in the appropriate response to over exposure from health hazards or injury to themselves and other employees; and in the recognition of subsequent symptoms which may result from over exposures. (C) The employer shall certify that each covered employee has attended and successfully completed the training required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of this section, or shall certify the employee's competency at least yearly. The method used to demonstrate competency for certification of training shall be recorded and maintained by the employer. (iv) Procedures for handling emergency incidents. ( 1 ( 2 (B) The emergency response plan shall be compatible and integrated with the disaster, fire and/or emergency response plans of local, state, and federal agencies. (C) The emergency response plan shall be rehearsed regularly as part of the overall training program for site operations. (D) The site emergency response plan shall be reviewed periodically and, as necessary, be amended to keep it current with new or changing site conditions or information. (E) An employee alarm system shall be installed in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.165 to notify employees of an emergency situation; to stop work activities if necessary; to lower background noise in order to speed communication; and to begin emergency procedures. (F) Based upon the information available at time of the emergency, the employer shall evaluate the incident and the site response capabilities and proceed with the appropriate steps to implement the site emergency response plan. (q) Emergency response to hazardous substance releases. (1) Emergency response plan. (2) Elements of an emergency response plan. (i) Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of authority, training, and communication. (iii) Emergency recognition and prevention. (iv) Safe distances and places of refuge. (v) Site security and control. (vi) Evacuation routes and procedures. (vii) Decontamination. (viii) Emergency medical treatment and first aid. (ix) Emergency alerting and response procedures. (x) Critique of response and follow-up. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment. (xii) Emergency response organizations may use the local emergency response plan or the state emergency response plan or both, as part of their emergency response plan to avoid duplication. Those items of the emergency response plan that are being properly addressed by the SARA Title III plans may be substituted into their emergency plan or otherwise kept together for the employer and employee's use. (3) Procedures for handling emergency response. Note to paragraph ( q i The “senior official” at an emergency response is the most senior official on the site who has the responsibility for controlling the operations at the site. Initially it is the senior officer on the first-due piece of responding emergency apparatus to arrive on the incident scene. As more senior officers arrive (i.e., battalion chief, fire chief, state law enforcement official, site coordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the line of authority which has been previously established. (ii) The individual in charge of the ICS shall identify, to the extent possible, all hazardous substances or conditions present and shall address as appropriate site analysis, use of engineering controls, maximum exposure limits, hazardous substance handling procedures, and use of any new technologies. (iii) Based on the hazardous substances and/or conditions present, the individual in charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate emergency operations, and assure that the personal protective equipment worn is appropriate for the hazards to be encountered. However, personal protective equipment shall meet, at a minimum, the criteria contained in 29 CFR 1910.156(e) when worn while performing fire fighting operations beyond the incipient stage for any incident. (iv) Employees engaged in emergency response and exposed to hazardous substances presenting an inhalation hazard or potential inhalation hazard shall wear positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus while engaged in emergency response, until such time that the individual in charge of the ICS determines through the use of air monitoring that a decreased level of respiratory protection will not result in hazardous exposures to employees. (v) The individual in charge of the ICS shall limit the number of emergency response personnel at the emergency site, in those areas of potential or actual exposure to incident or site hazards, to those who are actively performing emergency operations. However, operations in hazardous areas shall be performed using the buddy system in groups of two or more. (vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by with equipment ready to provide assistance or rescue. Advance first aid support personnel, as a minimum, shall also stand by with medical equipment and transportation capability. (vii) The individual in charge of the ICS shall designate a safety official, who is knowledgable in the operations being implemented at the emergency response site, with specific responsibility to identify and evaluate hazards and to provide direction with respect to the safety of operations for the emergency at hand. (viii) When activities are judged by the safety official to be an IDLH condition and/or to involve an imminent danger condition, the safety official shall have the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate those activities. The safety official shall immediately inform the individual in charge of the ICS of any actions needed to be taken to correct these hazards at the emergency scene. (ix) After emergency operations have terminated, the individual in charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate decontamination procedures. (x) When deemed necessary for meeting the tasks at hand, approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus may be used with approved cylinders from other approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus provided that such cylinders are of the same capacity and pressure rating. All compressed air cylinders used with self-contained breathing apparatus shall meet U.S. Department of Transportation and National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health criteria. (4) Skilled support personnel. (5) Specialist employees. (6) Training. (i) First responder awareness level. (A) An understanding of what hazardous substances are, and the risks associated with them in an incident. (B) An understanding of the potential outcomes associated with an emergency created when hazardous substances are present. (C) The ability to recognize the presence of hazardous substances in an emergency. (D) The ability to identify the hazardous substances, if possible. (E) An understanding of the role of the first responder awareness individual in the employer's emergency response plan including site security and control and the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook. (F) The ability to realize the need for additional resources, and to make appropriate notifications to the communication center. (ii) First responder operations level. (A) Knowledge of the basic hazard and risk assessment techniques. (B) Know how to select and use proper personal protective equipment provided to the first responder operational level. (C) An understanding of basic hazardous materials terms. (D) Know how to perform basic control, containment and/or confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and personal protective equipment available with their unit. (E) Know how to implement basic decontamination procedures. (F) An understanding of the relevant standard operating procedures and termination procedures. (iii) Hazardous materials technician. (A) Know how to implement the employer's emergency response plan. (B) Know the classification, identification and verification of known and unknown materials by using field survey instruments and equipment. (C) Be able to function within an assigned role in the Incident Command System. (D) Know how to select and use proper specialized chemical personal protective equipment provided to the hazardous materials technician. (E) Understand hazard and risk assessment techniques. (F) Be able to perform advance control, containment, and/or confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and personal protective equipment available with the unit. (G) Understand and implement decontamination procedures. (H) Understand termination procedures. (I) Understand basic chemical and toxicological terminology and behavior. (iv) Hazardous materials specialist. (A) Know how to implement the local emergency response plan. (B) Understand classification, identification and verification of known and unknown materials by using advanced survey instruments and equipment. (C) Know of the state emergency response plan. (D) Be able to select and use proper specialized chemical personal protective equipment provided to the hazardous materials specialist. (E) Understand in-depth hazard and risk techniques. (F) Be able to perform specialized control, containment, and/or confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and personal protective equipment available. (G) Be able to determine and implement decontamination procedures. (H) Have the ability to develop a site safety and control plan. (I) Understand chemical, radiological and toxicological terminology and behavior. (v) On scene incident commander. (A) Know and be able to implement the employer's incident command system. (B) Know how to implement the employer's emergency response plan. (C) Know and understand the hazards and risks associated with employees working in chemical protective clothing. (D) Know how to implement the local emergency response plan. (E) Know of the state emergency response plan and of the Federal Regional Response Team. (F) Know and understand the importance of decontamination procedures. (7) Trainers. (8) Refresher training. (ii) A statement shall be made of the training or competency, and if a statement of competency is made, the employer shall keep a record of the methodology used to demonstrate competency. (9) Medical surveillance and consultation. (ii) Any emergency response employees who exhibits signs or symptoms which may have resulted from exposure to hazardous substances during the course of an emergency incident, either immediately or subsequently, shall be provided with medical consultation as required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section. (10) Chemical protective clothing. (11) Post-emergency response operations. (i) Meet all of the requirements of paragraphs (b) through (o) of this section; or (ii) Where the clean-up is done on plant property using plant or workplace employees, such employees shall have completed the training requirements of the following: 29 CFR 1910.38, 1910.134, 1910.1200, and other appropriate safety and health training made necessary by the tasks they are expected to perform such as personal protective equipment and decontamination procedures. All equipment to be used in the performance of the clean-up work shall be in serviceable condition and shall have been inspected prior to use. Appendices to § 1910.120—Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response Note: The following appendices serve as non-mandatory guidelines to assist employees and employers in complying with the appropriate requirements of this section. However paragraph 1910.120(g) makes mandatory in certain circumstances the use of Level A and Level B PPE protection. Appendix A to § 1910.120—Personal Protective Equipment Test Methods This appendix sets forth the non-mandatory examples of tests which may be used to evaluate compliance with § 1910.120 (g)(4) (ii) and (iii). Other tests and other challenge agents may be used to evaluate compliance. A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit pressure test 1.0—Scope 1.1 This practice measures the ability of a gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit material, seams, and closures to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The results of this practice allow the gas tight integrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit to be evaluated. 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to permeation, penetration, and degradation by specific hazardous substances is not determined by this test method. 2.0—Definition of terms 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) 2.2 Protective clothing material 2.3 Gas tight 3.0—Summary of test method 3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and modified for the test. The test apparatus is attached to the suit to permit inflation to the pre-test suit expansion pressure for removal of suit wrinkles and creases. The pressure is lowered to the test pressure and monitored for three minutes. If the pressure drop is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and is removed from service. The test is repeated after leak location and repair. 4.0—Required Supplies 4.1 Source of compressed air. 4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, including a pressure measurement device with a sensitivity of at least 1/4 4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing tape. 4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush. 4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing device. 5.0—Safety Precautions 5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the correct pressure safety devices required for the source of compressed air used. 6.0—Test Procedure 6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall perform a visual inspection of the suit. Check the suit for seam integrity by visually examining the seams and gently pulling on the seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fittings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure and show no signs of deterioration. 6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with any other normal inlet or exhaust points (such as umbilical air line fittings or face piece opening) with tape or other appropriate means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should be exercised in the sealing process not to damage any of the suit components. 6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. 6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by providing an improvised connection point on the suit for connecting an airline. Attach the pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit suit inflation from a compressed air source equipped with a pressure indicating regulator. The leak tightness of the pressure test apparatus should be tested before and after each test by closing off the end of the tubing attached to the suit and assuring a pressure of three inches water gauge for three minutes can be maintained. If a component is removed for the test, that component shall be replaced and a second test conducted with another component removed to permit a complete test of the ensemble. 6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A) and the suit test pressure (B) shall be supplied by the suit manufacturer, but in no case shall they be less than: (A) = three inches water gauge; and (B) = two inches water gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be no less than 80 percent of the test pressure (B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not exceed 20 percent of the test pressure (B). 6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure inside is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test expansion suit pressure. Allow at least one minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pressure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure. Begin timing. At the end of three minutes, record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the ending suit pressure. The difference between the suit test pressure and the ending suit test pressure (B − C) shall be defined as the suit pressure drop. 6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than 20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during the three-minute test period, the suit fails the test and shall be removed from service. 7.0—Retest Procedure 7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and brushing or wiping the entire suit (including seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solution. Observe the suit for the formation of soap bubbles, which is an indication of a leak. Repair all identified leaks. 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in Test procedure 6.0. 8.0—Report 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice shall have the following information recorded: 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identifying brand name, date of purchase, material of construction, and unique fit features, e.g., special breathing apparatus. 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with the specific observation times. If the ending pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as failing the test. When possible, the specific leak location shall be identified in the test records. Retest pressure data shall be recorded as an additional test. 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used shall be identified and the sensitivity of the pressure gauge shall be recorded. 8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pressure test even if repairs are being made at the test location. Caution Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be sure they are positioned correctly and secured tightly before putting the suit back into service. Special care should be taken to examine each exhaust valve to make sure it is not blocked. Care should also be exercised to assure that the inside and outside of the suit is completely dry before it is put into storage. B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit qualitative leak test 1.0—Scope 1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit integrity by detecting inward leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modifications are made to the suit to carry out this test, the results from this practice provide a realistic test for the integrity of the entire suit. 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to permeation, penetration, and degradation is not determined by this test method. ASTM test methods are available to test suit materials for these characteristics and the tests are usually conducted by the manufacturers of the suits. 2.0—Definition of terms 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) 2.2 Protective clothing material 2.3 Gas tight 2.4 Intrusion Coefficient 3.0—Summary of recommended practice 3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH 4 4.0—Required supplies 4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide (58% by weight). 4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indicating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5-10 ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6 (blue)] 4.3 A supply of high range (0.5-10 volume percent) and low range (5-700 ppm) detector tubes for ammonia and the corresponding sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia detectors can be substituted for the low range detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of this practice. 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least 12″:14″:1″ and a half pint plastic container (PVC) with tightly closing lid. 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volumetric measuring device of at least 50 milliliters in volume with an accuracy of at least ±1 milliliters. 5.0—Safety precautions 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide, NH 4 5.2 Since the established permissible exposure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15 minute STEL, only persons wearing a positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus or a positive pressure supplied air respirator shall be in the chamber. Normally only the person wearing the totally-encapsulating suit will be inside the chamber. A stand-by person shall have a positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a positive pressure supplied air respirator available to enter the test area should the suited individual need assistance. 5.3 A method to monitor the suited individual must be used during this test. Visual contact is the simplest but other methods using communication devices are acceptable. 5.4 The test room shall be large enough to allow the exercise protocol to be carried out and then to be ventilated to allow for easy exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere after the test(s) are completed. 5.5 Individuals shall be medically screened for the use of respiratory protection and checked for allergies to ammonia before participating in this test procedure. 6.0—Test procedure 6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milliliters of concentrated aqueous ammonia solution per cubic foot of test area volume to determine the approximate volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia required to generate 1000 ppm in the test area. 6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place it into a closed plastic container. 6.1.3 Place the container, several high range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump in the clean test pan and locate it near the test area entry door so that the suited individual has easy access to these supplies. 6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip and fasten one end of the strip to the inside of the suit face shield lens where it can be seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator strip with distilled water. Care shall be taken not to contaminate the detector part of the indicator paper by touching it. A small piece of masking tape or equivalent should be used to attach the indicator strip to the interior of the suit face shield. 6.2.2 If problems are encountered with this method of attachment, the indicator strip can be attached to the outside of the respirator face piece lens being used during the test. 6.3 Don the respiratory protective device normally used with the suit, and then don the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure all openings which are intended to be sealed (zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. DO NOT, however, plug off any venting valves. 6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should be exhausted from the chamber during the test because this will dilute the ammonia challenge concentrations. 6.5 Open the container with the pre-measured volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia within the enclosed test room, and pour the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. Wait two minutes to allow for adequate volatilization of the concentrated aqueous ammonia. A small mixing fan can be used near the evaporation pan to increase the evaporation rate of the ammonia solution. 6.6 After two minutes a determination of the ammonia concentration within the chamber should be made using the high range colorimetric detector tube. A concentration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater shall be generated before the exercises are started. 6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the following four minute exercise protocol should be followed: 6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head with at least 15 raising motions completed in one minute. 6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a one-minute period. 6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10 complete motions of the arms from above the head to touching of the toes in a one-minute period. 6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete standing and squatting motions in a one-minute period. 6.8 If at any time during the test the colorimetric indicating paper should change colors, the test should be stopped and section 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶ 4.2). 6.9 After completion of the test exercise, the test area concentration should be measured again using the high range colorimetric detector tube. 6.10 Exit the test area. 6.11 The opening created by the suit zipper or other appropriate suit penetration should be used to determine the ammonia concentration in the suit with the low range length of stain detector tube or other ammonia monitor. The internal TECP suit air should be sampled far enough from the enclosed test area to prevent a false ammonia reading. 6.12 After completion of the measurement of the suit interior ammonia concentration the test is concluded and the suit is doffed and the respirator removed. 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room should be turned on and allowed to run for enough time to remove the ammonia gas. The fan shall be vented to the outside of the building. 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit interior (five ppm ammonia (NH 3 6.15 By following this test method, an intrusion coefficient of approximately 200 or more can be measured with the suit in a completely operational condition. If the intrusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the suit is suitable for emergency response and field use. 7.0—Retest procedures 7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for leaks by following the pressure test in test A above. 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in the test procedure 6.0. 8.0—Report 8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit tested by this practice shall have the following information recorded. 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identifying brand name, date of purchase, material of construction, and unique suit features; e.g., special breathing apparatus. 8.1.2 General description of test room used for test. 8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of ammonia detector strips and color change data. 8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and expiration date of the length of stain ammonia detector tubes. The brand name and model of the sampling pump should also be recorded. If another type of ammonia detector is used, it should be identified along with its minimum detection limit for ammonia. 8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two test area concentrations, their average, the interior suit concentration, and the calculated intrusion coefficient. Retest data shall be recorded as an additional test. 8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be specified as “suit passed” or “suit failed,” and the date of the test. Any detectable ammonia (five ppm or greater for the length of stain detector tube) in the suit interior indicates the suit has failed this test. When other ammonia detectors are used, a lower level of detection is possible and it should be specified as the pass fail criteria. Caution Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be sure they are positioned correctly and secured tightly before putting the suit back into service. Special care should be taken to examine each exhaust valve to make sure it is not blocked. Care should also be exercised to assure that the inside and outside of the suit is completely dry before it is put into storage. Appendix B to § 1910.120—General Description and Discussion of the Levels of Protection and Protective Gear This appendix sets forth information about personal protective equipment (PPE) protection levels which may be used to assist employers in complying with the PPE requirements of this section. As required by the standard, PPE must be selected which will protect employees from the specific hazards which they are likely to encounter during their work on-site. Selection of the appropriate PPE is a complex process which should take into consideration a variety of factors. Key factors involved in this process are identification of the hazards, or suspected hazards; their routes of potential hazard to employees (inhalation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye or skin contact); and the performance of the PPE materials Other factors in this selection process to be considered are matching the PPE to the employee's work requirements and task-specific conditions. The durability of PPE materials, such as tear strength and seam strength, should be considered in relation to the employee's tasks. The effects of PPE in relation to heat stress and task duration are a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some cases layers of PPE may be necessary to provide sufficient protection, or to protect expensive PPE inner garments, suits or equipment. The more that is known about the hazards at the site, the easier the job of PPE selection becomes. As more information about the hazards and conditions at the site becomes available, the site supervisor can make decisions to up-grade or down-grade the level of PPE protection to match the tasks at hand. The following are guidelines which an employer can use to begin the selection of the appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site information may suggest the use of combinations of PPE selected from the different protection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being more suitable to the hazards of the work. It should be cautioned that the listing below does not fully address the performance of the specific PPE material in relation to the specific hazards at the job site, and that PPE selection, evaluation and re-selection is an ongoing process until sufficient information about the hazards and PPE performance is obtained. Part A. I. Level A The following constitute Level A equipment; it may be used as appropriate; 1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or positive pressure supplied air respirator with escape SCBA, approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). 2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protective suit. 3. Coveralls. 1 4. Long underwear. 1 5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank. 8. Hard hat (under suit). 1 9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and boots (depending on suit construction, may be worn over totally-encapsulating suit). II. Level B The following constitute Level B equipment; it may be used as appropriate. 1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or positive pressure supplied air respirator with escape SCBA (NIOSH approved). 2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; disposable chemical-resistant overalls). 3. Coveralls. 1 4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank. 7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable). 1 8. Hard hat. 1 9. [Reserved] 10. Face shield. 1 III. Level C The following constitute Level C equipment; it may be used as appropriate. 1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying respirators (NIOSH approved). 2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; disposable chemical-resistant overalls). 3. Coveralls. 1 1 4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel toe and shank. 1 7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable) 1 8. Hard hat. 1 9. Escape mask. 1 10. Face shield. 1 IV. Level D The following constitute Level D equipment; it may be used as appropriate: 1. Coveralls. 2. Gloves. 1 3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank. 4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable). 1 5. Safety glasses or chemical splash goggles*. 6. Hard hat. 1 7. Escape mask. 1 8. Face shield. 1 Part B. I. Level A 1. The hazardous substance has been identified and requires the highest level of protection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory system based on either the measured (or potential for) high concentration of atmospheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the site operations and work functions involve a high potential for splash, immersion, or exposure to unexpected vapors, gases, or particulates of materials that are harmful to skin or capable of being absorbed through the skin; 2. Substances with a high degree of hazard to the skin are known or suspected to be present, and skin contact is possible; or 3. Operations are being conducted in confined, poorly ventilated areas, and the absence of conditions requiring Level A have not yet been determined. II. Level B 1. The type and atmospheric concentration of substances have been identified and require a high level of respiratory protection, but less skin protection; 2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5 percent oxygen; or 3. The presence of incompletely identified vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-reading organic vapor detection instrument, but vapors and gases are not suspected of containing high levels of chemicals harmful to skin or capable of being absorbed through the skin. Note: This involves atmospheres with IDLH concentrations of specific substances that present severe inhalation hazards and that do not represent a severe skin hazard; or that do not meet the criteria for use of air-purifying respirators. III. Level C 1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid splashes, or other direct contact will not adversely affect or be absorbed through any exposed skin; 2. The types of air contaminants have been identified, concentrations measured, and an air-purifying respirator is available that can remove the contaminants; and 3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying respirators are met. IV. Level D 1. The atmosphere contains no known hazard; and 2. Work functions preclude splashes, immersion, or the potential for unexpected inhalation of or contact with hazardous levels of any chemicals. Note: As stated before, combinations of personal protective equipment other than those described for Levels A, B, C, and D protection may be more appropriate and may be used to provide the proper level of protection. As an aid in selecting suitable chemical protective clothing, it should be noted that the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) has developed standards on chemical protective clothing. The standards that have been adopted by include: NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies (EPA Level A Protective Clothing). NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Clothing). NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non-flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations (EPA Level B Protective Clothing). These standards apply documentation and performance requirements to the manufacture of chemical protective suits. Chemical protective suits meeting these requirements are labelled as compliant with the appropriate standard. It is recommended that chemical protective suits that meet these standards be used. Appendix C to § 1910.120—Compliance Guidelines 1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. Also those employers involved with treating, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as covered in paragraph (p) must have implemented a safety and health program for their employees. This program is to include the hazard communication program required in paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the employers comprehensive overall safety and health program. This program is to be in writing. Each site or workplace safety and health program will need to include the following: (1) Policy statements of the line of authority and accountability for implementing the program, the objectives of the program and the role of the site safety and health supervisor or manager and staff; (2) means or methods for the development of procedures for identifying and controlling workplace hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for the development and communication to employees of the various plans, work rules, standard operating procedures and practices that pertain to individual employees and supervisors; (4) means for the training of supervisors and employees to develop the needed skills and knowledge to perform their work in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to anticipate and prepare for emergency situations; and (6) means for obtaining information feedback to aid in evaluating the program and for improving the effectiveness of the program. The management and employees should be trying continually to improve the effectiveness of the program thereby enhancing the protection being afforded those working on the site. Accidents on the site or workplace should be investigated to provide information on how such occurrences can be avoided in the future. When injuries or illnesses occur on the site or workplace, they will need to be investigated to determine what needs to be done to prevent this incident from occurring again. Such information will need to be used as feedback on the effectiveness of the program and the information turned into positive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Receipt of employee suggestions or complaints relating to safety and health issues involved with site or workplace activities is also a feedback mechanism that can be used effectively to improve the program and may serve in part as an evaluative tool(s). For the development and implementation of the program to be the most effective, professional safety and health personnel should be used. Certified Safety Professionals, Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Registered Professional Safety Engineers are good examples of professional stature for safety and health managers who will administer the employer's program. 2. Training. The training programs for employees subject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of this standard should address: the employers safety and health program elements impacting employees; the hazard communication program; the medical surveillance program; the hazards and the controls for such hazards that employees need to know for their job duties and functions. All require annual refresher training. The training programs for employees covered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of this standard should address those competencies required for the various levels of response such as: the hazards associated with hazardous substances; hazard identification and awareness; notification of appropriate persons; the need for and use of personal protective equipment including respirators; the decontamination procedures to be used; preplanning activities for hazardous substance incidents including the emergency reponse plan; company standard operating procedures for hazardous substance emergency responses; the use of the incident command system and other subjects. Hands-on training should be stressed whenever possible. Critiques done after an incident which include an evaluation of what worked and what did not and how could the incident be better handled the next time may be counted as training time. For hazardous materials specialists (usually members of hazardous materials teams), the training should address the care, use and/or testing of chemical protective clothing including totally encapsulating suits, the medical surveillance program, the standard operating procedures for the hazardous materials team including the use of plugging and patching equipment and other subject areas. Officers and leaders who may be expected to be in charge at an incident should be fully knowledgeable of their company's incident command system. They should know where and how to obtain additional assistance and be familiar with the local district's emergency response plan and the state emergency response plan. Specialist employees such as technical experts, medical experts or environmental experts that work with hazardous materials in their regular jobs, who may be sent to the incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer or governmental agency to advise and assist the person in charge of the incident should have training on an annual basis. Their training should include the care and use of personal protective equipment including respirators; knowledge of the incident command system and how they are to relate to it; and those areas needed to keep them current in their respective field as it relates to safety and health involving specific hazardous substances. Those skilled support personnel, such as employees who work for public works departments or equipment operators who operate bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who may be called to the incident scene to provide emergency support assistance, should have at least a safety and health briefing before entering the area of potential or actual exposure. These skilled support personnel, who have not been a part of the emergency response plan and do not meet the training requirements, should be made aware of the hazards they face and should be provided all necessary protective clothing and equipment required for their tasks. There are two National Fire Protection Association standards, NFPA 472—“Standard for Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Material Incidents” and NFPA 471—“Recommended Practice for Responding to Hazardous Material Incidents”, which are excellent resource documents to aid fire departments and other emergency response organizations in developing their training program materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance on the skills and knowledge needed for first responder awareness level, first responder operations level, hazmat technicians, and hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for the officer corp who will be in charge of hazardous substance incidents. 3. Decontamination. 4. Emergency response plans. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning Guide, Employers involved with treatment, storage, and disposal facilities for hazardous waste, which have the required contingency plan called for by their permit, would not need to duplicate the same planning elements. Those items of the emergency response plan that are properly addressed in the contingency plan may be substituted into the emergency response plan required in 1910.120 or otherwise kept together for employer and employee use. 5. Personal protective equipment programs. As discussed in appendix B, no single combination of protective equipment and clothing is capable of protecting against all hazards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunction with other protective methods and its effectiveness evaluated periodically. The use of PPE can itself create significant worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical and psychological stress, and impaired vision, mobility, and communication. For any given situation, equipment and clothing should be selected that provide an adequate level of protection. However, over-protection, as well as under-protection, can be hazardous and should be avoided where possible. Two basic objectives of any PPE program should be to protect the wearer from safety and health hazards, and to prevent injury to the wearer from incorrect use and/or malfunction of the PPE. To accomplish these goals, a comprehensive PPE program should include hazard identification, medical monitoring, environmental surveillance, selection, use, maintenance, and decontamination of PPE and its associated training. The written PPE program should include policy statements, procedures, and guidelines. Copies should be made available to all employees, and a reference copy should be made available at the worksite. Technical data on equipment, maintenance manuals, relevant regulations, and other essential information should also be collected and maintained. 6. Incident command system (ICS). manage one The ICS is a very similar system, except it is implemented for emergency response to all incidents, both large and small, that involve hazardous substances. For a small incident, the individual in charge of the ICS may perform many tasks of the ICS. There may not be any, or little, delegation of tasks to subordinates. For example, in response to a small incident, the individual in charge of the ICS, in addition to normal command activities, may become the safety officer and may designate only one employee (with proper equipment) as a back-up to provide assistance if needed. OSHA does recommend, however, that at least two employees be designated as back-up personnel since the assistance needed may include rescue. To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the following scenario might develop during a small incident, such as an overturned tank truck with a small leak of flammable liquid. The first responding senior officer would implement and take command of the ICS. That person would size-up the incident and determine if additional personnel and apparatus were necessary; would determine what actions to take to control the leak; and, determine the proper level of personal protective equipment. If additional assistance is not needed, the individual in charge of the ICS would implement actions to stop and control the leak using the fewest number of personnel that can effectively accomplish the tasks. The individual in charge of the ICS then would designate himself as the safety officer and two other employees as a back-up in case rescue may become necessary. In this scenario, decontamination procedures would not be necessary. A large complex incident may require many employees and difficult, time-consuming efforts to control. In these situations, the individual in charge of the ICS will want to delegate different tasks to subordinates in order to maintain a span of control that will keep the number of subordinates, that are reporting, to a manageable level. Delegation of task at large incidents may be by location, where the incident scene is divided into sectors, and subordinate officers coordinate activities within the sector that they have been assigned. Delegation of tasks can also be by function. Some of the functions that the individual in charge of the ICS may want to delegate at a large incident are: medical services; evacuation; water supply; resources (equipment, apparatus); media relations; safety; and, site control (integrate activities with police for crowd and traffic control). Also for a large incident, the individual in charge of the ICS will designate several employees as back-up personnel; and a number of safety officers to monitor conditions and recommend safety precautions. Therefore, no matter what size or complexity an incident may be, by implementing an ICS there will be one individual in charge 7. Site Safety and Control Plans. A comprehensive site safety and control plan should include the following: summary analysis of hazards on the site and a risk analysis of those hazards; site map or sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transition or decontamination zone, work or hot zone); use of the buddy system; site communications; command post or command center; standard operating procedures and safe work practices; medical assistance and triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air contaminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination procedures and area; and other relevant areas. This plan should be a part of the employer's emergency response plan or an extension of it to the specific site. 8. Medical surveillance programs. The Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities 9. New Technology and Spill Containment Programs. These agents can be rapidly applied over a large area and can be uniformly applied or otherwise can be used to build a small dam, thus improving the workers' ability to control spilled material. These application techniques enhance the intimate contact between the agent and the spilled material allowing for the quickest effect by the agent or quickest control of the spilled material. Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled materials, to suppress vapor generation from spilled materials, and to do both. Some special agents, which when applied as recommended by the manufacturer, will react in a controlled manner with the spilled material to neutralize acids or caustics, or greatly reduce the level of hazard of the spilled material. There are several modern methods and devices for use by emergency response personnel or others involved with spill control efforts to safely apply spill control agents to control spilled material hazards. These include portable pressurized applicators similar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar to portable fire fighting foam systems which allow the operator to apply the agent without having to come into contact with the spilled material. The operator is able to apply the agent to the spilled material from a remote position. The solidification of liquids provides for rapid containment and isolation of hazardous substance spills. By directing the agent at run-off points or at the edges of the spill, the reactant solid will automatically create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of the material. Clean-up of hazardous substances is greatly improved when solidifying agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or activated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly applied, these agents can totally solidify liquid hazardous substances or neutralize or absorb them, which results in materials which are less hazardous and easier to handle, transport, and dispose of. The concept of spill treatment, to create less hazardous substances, will improve the safety and level of protection of employees working at spill clean-up operations or emergency response operations to spills of hazardous substances. The use of vapor suppression agents for volatile hazardous substances, such as flammable liquids and those substances which present an inhalation hazard, is important for protecting workers. The rapid and uniform distribution of the agent over the surface of the spilled material can provide quick vapor knockdown. There are temporary and long-term foam-type agents which are effective on vapors and dusts, and activated carbon adsorption agents which are effective for vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. The proper use of hose lines or hand-held portable pressurized applicators provides good mobility and permits the worker to deliver the agent from a safe distance without having to step into the untreated spilled material. Some of these systems can be recharged in the field to provide coverage of larger spill areas than the design limits of a single charged applicator unit. Some of the more effective agents can solidify the liquid flammable hazardous substances and at the same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 °F so the resulting substance may be handled as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's 40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particularly § 261.21). All workers performing hazardous substance spill control work are expected to wear the proper protective clothing and equipment for the materials present and to follow the employer's established standard operating procedures for spill control. All involved workers need to be trained in the established operating procedures; in the use and care of spill control equipment; and in the associated hazards and control of such hazards of spill containment work. These new tools and agents are the things that employers will want to evaluate as part of their new technology program. The treatment of spills of hazardous substances or wastes at an emergency incident as part of the immediate spill containment and control efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a permit exception is described in 40 CFR 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11). Appendix D to § 1910.120—References The following references may be consulted for further information on the subject of this standard: 1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—January 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Hazardous Waste Sites. 2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2-2.37A—January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous Waste Site Activities. 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—January 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form, OSHA 175. 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference Manual, 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, the United States Coast Guard, and the United States Environmental Protection Agency, Guidance for Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous Substance Emergencies. 6. National Priorities List, 7. The Decontamination of Response Personnel, 8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, 9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; 10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities, 11. Protecting Health and Safety at Hazardous Waste Sites: An Overview, 12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous Substance Emergencies, 13. Personal Protective Equipment for Hazardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; 14. Fire Service Emergency Management Handbook, 15. Emergency Response Guidebook, 16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Materials Training, Planning and Preparedness, 17. Workbook for Fire Command, 18. Fire Command, 19. Incident Command System, 20. Site Emergency Response Planning, 21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning Guide, 22. Community Teamwork: Working Together to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation Safety. 23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and Industry, (The Office of Management and Budget has approved the information collection requirements in this section under control number 1218-0139) Appendix E to § 1910.120—Training Curriculum Guidelines The following non-mandatory general criteria may be used for assistance in developing site-specific training curriculum used to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120(e); 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); and 29 CFR 1910.120(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These are generic guidelines and they are not presented as a complete training curriculum for any specific employer. Site-specific training programs must be developed on the basis of a needs assessment of the hazardous waste site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response operation in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.120. It is noted that the legal requirements are set forth in the regulatory text of § 1910.120. The guidance set forth here presents a highly effective program that in the areas covered would meet or exceed the regulatory requirements. In addition, other approaches could meet the regulatory requirements. Suggested General Criteria Definitions: “Competent” means possessing the skills, knowledge, experience, and judgment to perform assigned tasks or activities satisfactorily as determined by the employer. “Demonstration” means the showing by actual use of equipment or procedures. “Hands-on training” means training in a simulated work environment that permits each student to have experience performing tasks, making decisions, or using equipment appropriate to the job assignment for which the training is being conducted. “Initial training” means training required prior to beginning work. “Lecture” means an interactive discourse with a class lead by an instructor. “Proficient” means meeting a stated level of achievement. “Site-specific” means individual training directed to the operations of a specific job site. “Training hours” means the number of hours devoted to lecture, learning activities, small group work sessions, demonstration, evaluations, or hands-on experience. Suggested core criteria: 1. Training facility. 2. Training Director. 3. Instructors. Instructors should be required to maintain professional competency by participating in continuing education or professional development programs or by completing successfully an annual refresher course and having an annual review by the Training Director. The annual review by the Training Director should include observation of an instructor's delivery, a review of those observations with the trainer, and an analysis of any instructor or class evaluations completed by the students during the previous year. 4. Course materials. All written and audio-visual materials in training curricula should be peer reviewed by technically competent outside reviewers or by a standing advisory committee. Reviews should possess expertise in the following disciplines were applicable: occupational health, industrial hygiene and safety, chemical/environmental engineering, employee education, or emergency response. One or more of the peer reviewers should be an employee experienced in the work activities to which the training is directed. 5. Students. a. Assurance that the student is or will be involved in work where chemical exposures are likely and that the student possesses the skills necessary to perform the work. b. A policy on the necessary medical clearance. 6. Ratios. 7. Proficiency assessment. If a written test is used, there should be a minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is used in combination with a skills demonstration, a minimum of 25 questions should be used. If a skills demonstration is used, the tasks chosen and the means to rate successful completion should be fully documented by the Training Director. The content of the written test or of the skill demonstration shall be relevant to the objectives of the course. The written test and skill demonstration should be updated as necessary to reflect changes in the curriculum and any update should be approved by the Training Director. The proficiency assessment methods, regardless of the approach or combination of approaches used, should be justified, documented and approved by the Training Director. The proficiency of those taking the additional courses for supervisors should be evaluated and documented by using proficiency assessment methods acceptable to the Training Director. These proficiency assessment methods must reflect the additional responsibilities borne by supervisory personnel in hazardous waste operations or emergency response. 8. Course certificate. a. Student's name. b. Course title. c. Course date. d. Statement that the student has successfully completed the course. e. Name and address of the training provider. f. An individual identification number for the certificate. g. List of the levels of personal protective equipment used by the student to complete the course. This documentation may include a certificate and an appropriate wallet-sized laminated card with a photograph of the student and the above information. When such course certificate cards are used, the individual identification number for the training certificate should be shown on the card. 9. Recordkeeping. 10. Program quality control. Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria Factors listed here are suggested criteria for determining the quality and appropriateness of employee health and safety training for hazardous waste operations and emergency response. A. Training Plan. Adequacy and appropriateness of the training program's curriculum development, instructor training, distribution of course materials, and direct student training should be considered, including 1. The duration of training, course content, and course schedules/agendas; 2. The different training requirements of the various target populations, as specified in the appropriate generic training curriculum; 3. The process for the development of curriculum, which includes appropriate technical input, outside review, evaluation, program pretesting. 4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction methods; 5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, progress, and performance during the training. B. Program management, Training Director, staff, and consultants. Adequacy and appropriateness of staff performance and delivering an effective training program should be considered, including 1. Demonstration of the training director's leadership in assuring quality of health and safety training. 2. Demonstration of the competency of the staff to meet the demands of delivering high quality hazardous waste employee health and safety training. 3. Organization charts establishing clear lines of authority. 4. Clearly defined staff duties including the relationship of the training staff to the overall program. 5. Evidence that the training organizational structure suits the needs of the training program. 6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the training methods used by the instructors. 7. Sufficiency of the time committed by the training director and staff to the training program. 8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to students. 9. Availability and commitment of the training program of adequate human and equipment resources in the areas of a. Health effects, b. Safety, c. Personal protective equipment (PPE), d. Operational procedures, e. Employee protection practices/procedures. 10. Appropriateness of management controls. 11. Adequacy of the organization and appropriate resources assigned to assure appropriate training. 12. In the case of multiple-site training programs, adequacy of satellite centers management. C. Training facilities and resources. Adequacy and appropriateness of the facilities and resources for supporting the training program should be considered, including, 1. Space and equipment to conduct the training. 2. Facilities for representative hands-on training. 3. In the case of multiple-site programs, equipment and facilities at the satellite centers. 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluations program to account for instructor performance. 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluation program to ensure appropriate course evaluation, feedback, updating, and corrective action. 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of disciplines and expertise being used within the quality control and evaluation program. 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the role of student evaluations to provide feedback for training program improvement. D. Quality control and evaluation. Adequacy and appropriateness of quality control and evaluation plans for training programs should be considered, including: 1. A balanced advisory committee and/or competent outside reviewers to give overall policy guidance; 2. Clear and adequate definition of the composition and active programmatic role of the advisory committee or outside reviewers. 3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of the advisory committee or outside reviewers' meetings or written communication. 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluations program to account for instructor performance. 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluation program to ensure appropriate course evaluation, feedback, updating, and corrective action. 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of disciplines and expertise being used within the quality control and evaluation program. 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the role of student evaluations to provide feedback for training program improvement. E. Students Adequacy and appropriateness of the program for accepting students should be considered, including 1. Assurance that the student already possess the necessary skills for their job, including necessary documentation. 2. Appropriateness of methods the program uses to ensure that recruits are capable of satisfactorily completing training. 3. Review and compliance with any medical clearance policy. F. Institutional Environment and Administrative Support The adequacy and appropriateness of the institutional environment and administrative support system for the training program should be considered, including 1. Adequacy of the institutional commitment to the employee training program. 2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the administrative structure and administrative support. G. Summary of Evaluation Questions Key questions for evaluating the quality and appropriateness of an overall training program should include the following: 1. Are the program objectives clearly stated? 2. Is the program accomplishing its objectives? 3. Are appropriate facilities and staff available? 4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, demonstration, and hands-on training? 5. Is the program providing quality employee health and safety training that fully meets the intent of regulatory requirements? 6. What are the program's main strengths? 7. What are the program's main weaknesses? 8. What is recommended to improve the program? 9. Are instructors instructing according to their training outlines? 10. Is the evaluation tool current and appropriate for the program content? 11. Is the course material current and relevant to the target group? Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines The following training curriculum guidelines are for those operations specifically identified in 29 CFR 1910.120 as requiring training. Issues such as qualifications of instructors, training certification, and similar criteria appropriate to all categories of operations addressed in 1910.120 have been covered in the preceding section and are not re-addressed in each of the generic guidelines. Basic core requirements for training programs that are addressed include 1. General Hazardous Waste Operations 2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage, and disposal facilities. 3. Emergency Response. A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and Site-specific Training 1. Off-site training. a. Regulatory knowledge. (1) An review of 29 CFR 1910.120 and the core elements of an occupational safety and health program. (2) The content of a medical surveillance program as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.120(f). (3) The content of an effective site safety and health plan consistent with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120(b)(4)(ii). (4) Emergency response plan and procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.120(l). (5) Adequate illumination. (6) Sanitation recommendation and equipment. (7) Review and explanation of OSHA's hazard-communication standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29 CFR 1910.147). (8) Review of other applicable standards including but not limited to those in the construction standards (29 CFR part 1926). (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers and employees under applicable OSHA and EPA laws. b. Technical knowledge. (1) Type of potential exposures to chemical, biological, and radiological hazards; types of human responses to these hazards and recognition of those responses; principles of toxicology and information about acute and chronic hazards; health and safety considerations of new technology. (2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards including but not limited to vapor pressure, boiling points, flash points, ph, other physical and chemical properties. (3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemicals. (4) General safety hazards such as but not limited to electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walking-working surface hazards, excavation hazards, and hazards associated with working in hot and cold temperature extremes. (5) Review and knowledge of confined space entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146. (6) Work practices to minimize employee risk from site hazards. (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equipment, and any new relevant safety technology or safety procedures. (8) Review and demonstration of competency with air sampling and monitoring equipment that may be used in a site monitoring program. (9) Container sampling procedures and safeguarding; general drum and container handling procedures including special requirement for laboratory waste packs, shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive wastes. (10) The elements of a spill control program. (11) Proper use and limitations of material handling equipment. (12) Procedures for safe and healthful preparation of containers for shipping and transport. (13) Methods of communication including those used while wearing respiratory protection. c. Technical skills. (1) Selection, use maintenance, and limitations of personal protective equipment including the components and procedures for carrying out a respirator program to comply with 29 CFR 1910.134. (2) Instruction in decontamination programs including personnel, equipment, and hardware; hands-on training including level A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate decontamination lines; field activities including the donning and doffing of protective equipment to a level commensurate with the employee's anticipated job function and responsibility and to the degree required by potential hazards. (3) Sources for additional hazard information; exercises using relevant manuals and hazard coding systems. d. Additional suggested items. (1) A laminated, dated card or certificate with photo, denoting limitations and level of protection for which the employee is trained should be issued to those students successfully completing a course. (2) Attendance should be required at all training modules, with successful completion of exercises and a final written or oral examination with at least 50 questions. (3) A minimum of one-third of the program should be devoted to hands-on exercises. (4) A curriculum should be established for the 8-hour refresher training required by 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(8), with delivery of such courses directed toward those areas of previous training that need improvement or reemphasis. (5) A curriculum should be established for the required 8-hour training for supervisors. Demonstrated competency in the skills and knowledge provided in a 40-hour course should be a prerequisite for supervisor training. 2. Refresher training. The 8-hour annual refresher training required in 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(8) should be conducted by qualified training providers. Refresher training should include at a minimum the following topics and procedures: (a) Review of and retraining on relevant topics covered in the 40-hour program, as appropriate, using reports by the students on their work experiences. (b) Update on developments with respect to material covered in the 40-hour course. (c) Review of changes to pertinent provisions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws. (d) Introduction of additional subject areas as appropriate. (e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE or decontamination equipment or procedures. Review of new developments in personal protective equipment. (f) Review of newly developed air and contaminant monitoring equipment. 3. On-site training. a. The employer should provide employees engaged in hazardous waste site activities with information and training prior to initial assignment into their work area, as follows: (1) The requirements of the hazard communication program including the location and availability of the written program, required lists of hazardous chemicals, and safety data sheets. (2) Activities and locations in their work area where hazardous substance may be present. (3) Methods and observations that may be used to detect the present or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual appearances, or other evidence (sight, sound or smell) of hazardous chemicals being released, and applicable alarms from monitoring devices that record chemical releases. (4) The physical and health hazards of substances known or potentially present in the work area. (5) The measures employees can take to help protect themselves from work-site hazards, including specific procedures the employer has implemented. (6) An explanation of the labeling system and safety data sheets and how employees can obtain and use appropriate hazard information. (7) The elements of the confined space program including special PPE, permits, monitoring requirements, communication procedures, emergency response, and applicable lock-out procedures. b. The employer should provide hazardous waste employees information and training and should provide a review and access to the site safety and plan as follows: (1) Names of personnel and alternate responsible for site safety and health. (2) Safety and health hazards present on the site. (3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limitations of personal protective equipment specific to the site. (4) Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from hazards. (5) Safe use of engineering controls and equipment available on site. (6) Safe decontamination procedures established to minimize employee contact with hazardous substances, including: (A) Employee decontamination, (B) Clothing decontamination, and (C) Equipment decontamination. (7) Elements of the site emergency response plan, including: (A) Pre-emergency planning. (B) Personnel roles and lines of authority and communication. (C) Emergency recognition and prevention. (D) Safe distances and places of refuge. (E) Site security and control. (F) Evacuation routes and procedures. (G) Decontamination procedures not covered by the site safety and health plan. (H) Emergency medical treatment and first aid. (I) Emergency equipment and procedures for handling emergency incidents. c. The employer should provide hazardous waste employees information and training on personal protective equipment used at the site, such as the following: (1) PPE to be used based upon known or anticipated site hazards. (2) PPE limitations of materials and construction; limitations during temperature extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate medical considerations; use and limitations of respirator equipment as well as documentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.134. (3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use. (4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. (5) PPE decontamination and disposal procedures. (6) PPE maintenance and storage. (7) Task duration as related to PPE limitations. d. The employer should instruct the employee about the site medical surveillance program relative to the particular site, including (1) Specific medical surveillance programs that have been adapted for the site. (2) Specific signs and symptoms related to exposure to hazardous materials on the site. (3) The frequency and extent of periodic medical examinations that will be used on the site. (4) Maintenance and availability of records. (5) Personnel to be contacted and procedures to be followed when signs and symptoms of exposures are recognized. e. The employees will review and discuss the site safety plan as part of the training program. The location of the site safety plan and all written programs should be discussed with employees including a discussion of the mechanisms for access, review, and references described. B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facilities. 1. As a minimum, the training course required in 29 CFR 1910.120 (p) should include the following topics: (a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of 29 CFR 1910.120 and the elements of the employer's occupational safety and health plan. (b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but not limited to, chemical, biological, and radiological exposures; fire and explosion hazards; thermal extremes; and physical hazards. (c) General safety hazards including those associated with electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out procedures, motor vehicle hazards and walking-working surface hazards. (d) Confined-space hazards and procedures. (e) Work practices to minimize employee risk from workplace hazards. (f) Emergency response plan and procedures including first aid meeting the requirements of paragraph (p)(8). (g) A review of procedures to minimize exposure to hazardous waste and various type of waste streams, including the materials handling program and spill containment program. (h) A review of hazard communication programs meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200. (i) A review of medical surveillance programs meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(3) including the recognition of signs and symptoms of overexposure to hazardous substance including known synergistic interactions. (j) A review of decontamination programs and procedures meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(4). (k) A review of an employer's requirements to implement a training program and its elements. (l) A review of the criteria and programs for proper selection and use of personal protective equipment, including respirators. (m) A review of the applicable appendices to 29 CFR 1910.120. (n) Principles of toxicology and biological monitoring as they pertain to occupational health. (o) Rights and responsibilities of employees and employers under applicable OSHA and EPA laws. (p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations of competency with equipment to illustrate the basic equipment principles that may be used during the performance of work duties, including the donning and doffing of PPE. (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard coding systems to include information contained in hazardous waste manifests. (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training. (s) Training in the job skills required for an employee's job function and responsibility before they are permitted to participate in or supervise field activities. 2. The individual employer should provide hazardous waste employees with information and training prior to an employee's initial assignment into a work area. The training and information should cover the following topics: (a) The Emergency response plan and procedures including first aid. (b) A review of the employer's hazardous waste handling procedures including the materials handling program and elements of the spill containment program, location of spill response kits or equipment, and the names of those trained to respond to releases. (c) The hazardous communication program meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200. (d) A review of the employer's medical surveillance program including the recognition of signs and symptoms of exposure to relevant hazardous substance including known synergistic interactions. (e) A review of the employer's decontamination program and procedures. (f) An review of the employer's training program and the parties responsible for that program. (g) A review of the employer's personal protective equipment program including the proper selection and use of PPE based upon specific site hazards. (h) All relevant site-specific procedures addressing potential safety and health hazards. This may include, as appropriate, biological and radiological exposures, fire and explosion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical hazards such as electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards. (i) Safe use engineering controls and equipment on site. (j) Names of personnel and alternates responsible for safety and health. C. Emergency response training. Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR 1910.120(q) are directed toward private sector emergency responders. Therefore, the guidelines provided in this portion of the appendix are directed toward that employee population. However, they also impact indirectly through State OSHA or USEPA regulations some public sector emergency responders. Therefore, the guidelines provided in this portion of the appendix may be applied to both employee populations. States with OSHA state plans must cover their employees with regulations at least as effective as the Federal OSHA standards. Public employees in states without approved state OSHA programs covering hazardous waste operations and emergency response are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR 311, a regulation virtually identical to § 1910.120. Since this is a non-mandatory appendix and therefore not an enforceable standard, OSHA recommends that those employers, employees or volunteers in public sector emergency response organizations outside Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the following criteria in developing their own training programs. A unified approach to training at the community level between emergency response organizations covered by Federal OSHA and those not covered directly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an effective community response to the release or potential release of hazardous substances in the community. a. General considerations. Emergency response organizations are required to consider the topics listed in § 1910.120(q)(6). Emergency response organizations may use some or all of the following topics to supplement those mandatory topics when developing their response training programs. Many of the topics would require an interaction between the response provider and the individuals responsible for the site where the response would be expected. (1) Hazard recognition, including: (A) Nature of hazardous substances present, (B) Practical applications of hazard recognition, including presentations on biology, chemistry, and physics. (2) Principles of toxicology, biological monitoring, and risk assessment. (3) Safe work practices and general site safety. (4) Engineering controls and hazardous waste operations. (5) Site safety plans and standard operating procedures. (6) Decontamination procedures and practices. (7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and self-rescue. (8) Safe use of field equipment. (9) Storage, handling, use and transportation of hazardous substances. (10) Use, care, and limitations of personal protective equipment. (11) Safe sampling techniques. (12) Rights and responsibilities of employees under OSHA and other related laws concerning right-to-know, safety and health, compensations and liability. (13) Medical monitoring requirements. (14) Community relations. b. Suggested criteria for specific courses. (1) First responder awareness level. (A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the applicable skills of 29 CFR 1910.120(q). (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201. (C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident to determine both the hazardous substances present and the basic hazard and response information for each hazardous substance present. (D) Review of procedures for implementing actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the organization's standard operating procedures, and the current edition of DOT's ERG including emergency notification procedures and follow-up communications. (E) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards. (F) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the First Responder at the Awareness Level covered in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Materials Incidents. (2) First responder operations level. (A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the applicable skills of 29 CFR 1910.120(q). (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer contacts, and other relevant sources of information addressing hazardous substance releases. Familiarization with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201. (C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident to determine the hazardous substances present, the likely behavior of the hazardous substance and its container, the types of hazardous substance transportation containers and vehicles, the types and selection of the appropriate defensive strategy for containing the release. (D) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the organization's standard operating procedures, and the current edition of DOT's ERG including extended emergency notification procedures and follow-up communications. (E) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and use of personal protective equipment. (F) Review of the principles and practice of personnel and equipment decontamination. (G) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards. (H) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the First Responder at the Operations Level covered in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Materials Incidents. (3) Hazardous materials technician. (A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the applicable skills of 29 CFR 1910.120(q). (B) Hands-on experience with written and electronic information relative to response decision making including but not limited to the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident to determine the hazardous substances present, their physical and chemical properties, the likely behavior of the hazardous substance and its container, the types of hazardous substance transportation containers and vehicles involved in the release, the appropriate strategy for approaching release sites and containing the release. (D) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the organization's standard operating procedures, and the current edition of DOT's ERG including extended emergency notification procedures and follow-up communications. (E) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and use of personal protective equipment. (F) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure zones, proper decontamination and medical surveillance stations and procedures. (G) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards. (H) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the Hazardous Materials Technician covered in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Materials Incidents. (4) Hazardous materials specialist. (A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the applicable skills of 29 CFR 1910.120(q). (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and use of written and electronic information relative to response decision making including but not limited to the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident to determine the hazardous substances present, their physical and chemical properties, and the likely behavior of the hazardous substance and its container, vessel, or vehicle. (D) Review of the principles and practices for identification of the types of hazardous substance transportation containers, vessels and vehicles involved in the release; selecting and using the various types of equipment available for plugging or patching transportation containers, vessels or vehicles; organizing and directing the use of multiple teams of hazardous material technicians and selecting the appropriate strategy for approaching release sites and containing or stopping the release. (E) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the organization's standard operating procedures, including knowledge of the available public and private response resources, establishment of an incident command post, direction of hazardous material technician teams, and extended emergency notification procedures and follow-up communications. (F) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and use of personal protective equipment. (G) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure zones and proper decontamination, monitoring and medical surveillance stations and procedures. (H) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards. (I) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the Off-site Specialist Employee covered in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Materials Incidents. (5) Incident commander. The incident commander is the individual who, at any one time, is responsible for and in control of the response effort. This individual is the person responsible for the direction and coordination of the response effort. An incident commander's position should be occupied by the most senior, appropriately trained individual present at the response site. Yet, as necessary and appropriate by the level of response provided, the position may be occupied by many individuals during a particular response as the need for greater authority, responsibility, or training increases. It is possible for the first responder at the awareness level to assume the duties of incident commander until a more senior and appropriately trained individual arrives at the response site. Therefore, any emergency responder expected to perform as an incident commander should be trained to fulfill the obligations of the position at the level of response they will be providing including the following: (A) Ability to analyze a hazardous substance incident to determine the magnitude of the response problem. (B) Ability to plan and implement an appropriate response plan within the capabilities of available personnel and equipment. (C) Ability to implement a response to favorably change the outcome of the incident in a manner consistent with the local emergency response plan and the organization's standard operating procedures. (D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the emergency response to ensure that the response objectives are being met safely, effectively, and efficiently. (E) Ability to adjust the response plan to the conditions of the response and to notify higher levels of response when required by the changes to the response plan. [54 FR 9317, Mar. 6, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 14073, Apr. 13, 1990; 56 FR 15832, Apr. 18, 1991; 59 FR 43270, Aug. 22, 1994; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 76 FR 80738, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 17776, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, Feb. 8, 2013; 84 FR 21597, May 14, 2019] § 1910.121 [Reserved] Dipping and Coating Operations Source: 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, unless otherwise noted. § 1910.122 Table of contents. This section lists the paragraph headings contained in §§ 1910.123 through 1910.126. § 1910.123 Dipping and coating operations: Coverage and definitions. (a) Does this rule apply to me? (b) What operations are covered? (c) What operations are not covered? (d) How are terms used in §§ 1910.123 through 1910.126 defined? § 1910.124 General requirements for dipping and coating operations. (a) What construction requirements apply to dip tanks? (b) What ventilation requirements apply to vapor areas? (c) What requirements must I follow to recirculate exhaust air into the workplace? (d) What must I do when I use an exhaust hood? (e) What requirements must I follow when an employee enters a dip tank? (f) What first-aid procedures must my employees know? (g) What hygiene facilities must I provide? (h) What treatment and first aid must I provide? (i) What must I do before an employee cleans a dip tank? (j) What must I do to inspect and maintain my dipping or coating operation? § 1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping and coating operations that use flammable or combustible liquids. (a) What type of construction material must be used in making my dip tank? (b) When must I provide overflow piping? (c) When must I provide a bottom drain? (d) When must my conveyer system shut down automatically? (e) What ignition and fuel sources must be controlled? (f) What fire protection must I provide? (g) To what temperature may I heat a liquid in a dip tank? § 1910.126 Additional requirements for special dipping and coating operations. (a) What additional requirements apply to hardening or tempering tanks? (b) What additional requirements apply to flow coating? (c) What additional requirements apply to roll coating, roll spreading, or roll impregnating? (d) What additional requirements apply to vapor degreasing tanks? (e) What additional requirements apply to cyanide tanks? (f) What additional requirements apply to spray cleaning tanks and spray degreasing tanks? (g) What additional requirements apply to electrostatic paint detearing? § 1910.123 Dipping and coating operations: Coverage and definitions. (a) Does this rule apply to me? (1) This rule (§§ 1910.123 through 1910.126) applies when you use a dip tank containing a liquid other than water. It applies when you use the liquid in the tank or its vapor to: (i) Clean an object; (ii) Coat an object; (iii) Alter the surface of an object; or (iv) Change the character of an object. (2) This rule also applies to the draining or drying of an object you have dipped or coated. (b) What operations are covered? Examples of covered operations are paint dipping, electroplating, pickling, quenching, tanning, degreasing, stripping, cleaning, roll coating, flow coating, and curtain coating. (c) What operations are not covered? You are not covered by this rule if your dip-tank operation only uses a molten material (a molten metal, alloy, or salt, for example). (d) How are terms used in §§ 1910.123 through 1910.126 defined? Adjacent area Approved Autoignition temperature Dip tank Flammable liquid Flashpoint Lower flammable limit (LFL) Vapor area You et seq. [64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1910.124 General requirements for dipping and coating operations. (a) What construction requirements apply to dip tanks? Any container that you use as a dip tank must be strong enough to withstand any expected load. (b) What ventilation requirements apply to vapor areas? (1) The ventilation that you provide to a vapor area must keep the airborne concentration of any substance below 25% of its LFL. (2) When a liquid in a dip tank creates an exposure hazard covered by a standard listed in subpart Z of this part, you must control worker exposure as required by that standard. (3) You may use a tank cover or material that floats on the surface of the liquid in a dip tank to replace or supplement ventilation. The method or combination of methods you choose must maintain the airborne concentration of the hazardous material and the worker's exposure within the limits specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section. (4) When you use mechanical ventilation, it must conform to the following standards that are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6: (i) ANSI Z9.2-1979, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems; (ii) NFPA 34-1995, Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids; (iii) ACGIH's “Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice” (22nd ed., 1995); or (iv) ANSI Z9.1-1971, Practices for Ventilation and Operation of Open-Surface Tanks, and NFPA 34-1966, Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids. (5) When you use mechanical ventilation, it must draw the flow of air into a hood or exhaust duct. (6) When you use mechanical ventilation, each dip tank must have an independent exhaust system unless the combination of substances being removed will not cause a: (i) Fire; (ii) Explosion; or (iii) Chemical reaction. (c) What requirements must I follow to recirculate exhaust air into the workplace? (1) You may not recirculate exhaust air when any substance in that air poses a health hazard to employees or exceeds 25% of its LFL. (2) You must ensure that any exhaust air re-circulated from a dipping or coating operation using flammable liquids or liquids with flashpoints greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) is: (i) Free of any solid particulate that poses a health or safety hazard for employees; and (ii) Monitored by approved equipment. (3) You must have a system that sounds an alarm and automatically shuts down the operation when the vapor concentration for any substance in the exhaust airstream exceeds 25% of its LFL. (d) What must I do when I use an exhaust hood? You must: (1) Provide each room having exhaust hoods with a volume of outside air that is at least 90 percent of the volume of the exhaust air; and (2) Ensure that the outside air supply does not damage exhaust hoods. (e) What requirements must I follow when an employee enters a dip tank? When an employee enters a dip tank, you must meet the entry requirements of § 1910.146, OSHA's standard for Permit-Required Confined Spaces, as applicable. (f) What first-aid procedures must my employees know? Your employees must know the first-aid procedures that are appropriate to the dipping or coating hazards to which they are exposed. (g) What hygiene facilities must I provide? When your employees work with liquids that may burn, irritate, or otherwise harm their skin, you must provide: (1) Locker space or other storage space to prevent contamination of the employee's street clothes; (2) An emergency shower and eye-wash station close to the dipping or coating operation. In place of this equipment, you may use a water hose that is at least 4 feet (1.22 m) long and at least 3/4 2 (3) At least one basin with a hot-water faucet for every 10 employees who work with such liquids. (See paragraph (d) of § 1910.141.) (h) What treatment and first aid must I provide? When your employees work with liquids that may burn, irritate, or otherwise harm their skin, you must provide: (1) A physician's approval before an employee with a sore, burn, or other skin lesion that requires medical treatment works in a vapor area; (2) Treatment by a properly designated person of any small skin abrasion, cut, rash, or open sore; (3) Appropriate first-aid supplies that are located near the dipping or coating operation; and (4) For employees who work with chromic acid, periodic examinations of their exposed body parts, especially their nostrils. (i) What must I do before an employee cleans a dip tank? Before permitting an employee to clean the interior of a dip tank, you must: (1) Drain the contents of the tank and open the cleanout doors; and (2) Ventilate and clear any pockets where hazardous vapors may have accumulated. (j) What must I do to inspect and maintain my dipping or coating operation? You must: (1) Inspect the hoods and ductwork of the ventilation system for corrosion or damage: (i) At least quarterly during operation; and (ii) Prior to operation after a prolonged shutdown. (2) Ensure that the airflow is adequate: (i) At least quarterly during operation; and (ii) Prior to operation after a prolonged shutdown. (3) Periodically inspect all dipping and coating equipment, including covers, drains, overflow piping, and electrical and fire-extinguishing systems, and promptly correct any deficiencies; (4) Provide mechanical ventilation or respirators (selected and used as specified in § 1910.134, OSHA's Respiratory Protection standard) to protect employees in the vapor area from exposure to toxic substances released during welding, burning, or open-flame work; and (5) Have dip tanks thoroughly cleaned of solvents and vapors before permitting welding, burning, or open-flame work on them. [64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping and coating operations that use flammable liquids or liquids with flashpoints greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C). If you use flammable liquids, you must comply with the requirements of this section as well as the requirements of §§ 1910.123, 1910.124, and 1910.126, as applicable. You must also comply with this section if: And: • The flashpoint of the liquid is 199.4 °F (93 °C) or above • The liquid is heated as part of the operation; or (a) What type of construction material must be used in making my dip tank? Your dip tank must be made of noncombustible material. (b) When must I provide overflow piping? (1) You must provide properly trapped overflow piping that discharges to a safe location for any dip tank having: (i) A capacity greater than 150 gallons (568 L); or (ii) A liquid surface area greater than 10 feet 2 2 (2) You must also ensure that: (i) Any overflow piping is at least 3 inches (7.6 cm) in diameter and has sufficient capacity to prevent the dip tank from overflowing; (ii) Piping connections on drains and overflow pipes allow ready access to the interior of the pipe for inspection and cleaning; and (iii) The bottom of the overflow connection is at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) below the top of the dip tank. (c) When must I provide a bottom drain? (1) You must provide a bottom drain for dip tanks that contain more than 500 gallons (1893 L) of liquid, unless: (i) The dip tank is equipped with an automatic closing cover meeting the requirements of paragraph (f)(3) of this section; or (ii) The viscosity of the liquid at normal atmospheric temperature does not allow the liquid to flow or be pumped easily. (2) You must ensure that the bottom drain required by this section: (i) Will empty the dip tank during a fire; (ii) Is properly trapped; (iii) Has pipes that permit the dip tank's contents to be removed within five minutes after a fire begins; and (iv) Discharges to a safe location. (3) Any bottom drain you provide must be capable of manual and automatic operation, and manual operation must be from a safe and accessible location. (4) You must ensure that automatic pumps are used when gravity flow from the bottom drain is impractical. (d) When must my conveyor system shut down automatically? If your conveyor system is used with a dip tank, the system must shut down automatically: (1) If there is a fire; or (2) If the ventilation rate drops below what is required by paragraph (b) of § 1910.124. (e) What ignition and fuel sources must be controlled? (1) In each vapor area and any adjacent area, you must ensure that: (i) All electrical wiring and equipment conform to the applicable hazardous (classified)-area requirements of subpart S of this part (except as specifically permitted in paragraph (g) of § 1910.126); and (ii) There are no flames, spark-producing devices, or other surfaces that are hot enough to ignite vapors. (2) You must ensure that any portable container used to add liquid to the tank is electrically bonded to the dip tank and positively grounded to prevent static electrical sparks or arcs. (3) You must ensure that a heating system that is used in a drying operation and could cause ignition: (i) Is installed in accordance with NFPA 86A-1969, Standard for Ovens and Furnaces (which is incorporated by reference in § 1910.6 of this part); (ii) Has adequate mechanical ventilation that operates before and during the drying operation; and (iii) Shuts down automatically if any ventilating fan fails to maintain adequate ventilation. (4) You also must ensure that: (i) All vapor areas are free of combustible debris and as free as practicable of combustible stock; (ii) Rags and other material contaminated with liquids from dipping or coating operations are placed in approved waste cans immediately after use; and (iii) Waste can contents are properly disposed of at the end of each shift. (5) You must prohibit smoking in a vapor area and must post a readily visible “No Smoking” sign near each dip tank. (f) What fire protection must I provide? (1) You must provide the fire protection required by this paragraph (f) for: (i) Any dip tank having a capacity of at least 150 gallons (568 L) or a liquid surface area of at least 4 feet 2 1 (ii) Any hardening or tempering tank having a capacity of at least 500 gallons (1893 L) or a liquid surface area of at least 25 feet 2 2 (2) For every vapor area, you must provide: (i) Manual fire extinguishers that are suitable for flammable and combustible liquid fires and that conform to the requirements of § 1910.157; and (ii) An automatic fire-extinguishing system that conforms to the requirements of subpart L of this part. (3) You may substitute a cover that is closed by an approved automatic device for the automatic fire-extinguishing system if the cover: (i) Can also be activated manually; (ii) Is noncombustible or tin-clad, with the enclosing metal applied with locked joints; and (iii) Is kept closed when the dip tank is not in use. (g) To what temperature may I heat a liquid in a dip tank? You must maintain the temperature of the liquid in a dip tank: (1) Below the liquid's boiling point; and (2) At least 100 °F (37.8 °C) below the liquid's autoignition temperature. [64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1910.126 Additional requirements for special dipping and coating operations. In addition to the requirements in §§ 1910.123 through 1910.125, you must comply with any requirement in this section that applies to your operation. (a) What additional requirements apply to hardening or tempering tanks? (1) You must ensure that hardening or tempering tanks: (i) Are located as far as practicable from furnaces; (ii) Are on noncombustible flooring; and (iii) Have noncombustible hoods and vents (or equivalent devices) for venting to the outside. For this purpose, vent ducts must be treated as flues and kept away from combustible materials, particularly roofs. (2) You must equip each tank with an alarm that will sound if the temperature of the liquid comes within 50 °F (10 °C) of its flashpoint (the alarm set point). (3) When practicable, you must also provide each tank with a limit switch to shut down the conveyor supplying work to the tank. (4) If the temperature of the liquid can exceed the alarm set point, you must equip the tank with a circulating cooling system. (5) If the tank has a bottom drain, the bottom drain may be combined with the oil-circulating system. (6) You must not use air under pressure when you fill the dip tank or agitate the liquid in the dip tank. (b) What additional requirements apply to flow coating? (1) You must use a direct low-pressure pumping system or a 10-gallon (38 L) or smaller gravity tank to supply the paint for flow coating. In case of fire, an approved heat-actuated device must shut down the pumping system. (2) You must ensure that the piping is substantial and rigidly supported. (c) What additional requirements apply to roll coating, roll spreading, or roll impregnating? When these operations use a flammable liquid that has a flashpoint below 140 °F (60 °C), you must prevent sparking of static electricity by: (1) Bonding and grounding all metallic parts (including rotating parts) and installing static collectors; or (2) Maintaining a conductive atmosphere (for example, one with a high relative humidity) in the vapor area. (d) What additional requirements apply to vapor degreasing tanks? (1) You must ensure that the condenser or vapor-level thermostat keeps the vapor level at least 36 inches (91 cm) or one-half the tank width, whichever is less, below the top of the vapor degreasing tank. (2) When you use gas as a fuel to heat the tank liquid, you must prevent solvent vapors from entering the air-fuel mixture. To do this, you must make the combustion chamber airtight (except for the flue opening). (3) The flue must be made of corrosion-resistant material, and it must extend to the outside. You must install a draft diverter if mechanical exhaust is used on the flue. (4) You must not allow the temperature of the heating element to cause a solvent or mixture to decompose or to generate an excessive amount of vapor. (e) What additional requirements apply to cyanide tanks? You must ensure that cyanide tanks have a dike or other safeguard to prevent cyanide from mixing with an acid if a dip tank fails. (f) What additional requirements apply to spray cleaning tanks and spray degreasing tanks? If you spray a liquid in the air over an open-surface cleaning or degreasing tank, you must control the spraying to the extent feasible by: (1) Enclosing the spraying operation; and (2) Using mechanical ventilation to provide enough inward air velocity to prevent the spray from leaving the vapor area. (g) What additional requirements apply to electrostatic paint detearing? (1) You must use only approved electrostatic equipment in paint-detearing operations. Electrodes in such equipment must be substantial, rigidly supported, permanently located, and effectively insulated from ground by nonporous, noncombustible, clean, dry insulators. (2) You must use conveyors to support any goods being paint deteared. (3) You must ensure that goods being electrostatically deteared are not manually handled. (4) Between goods being electrostatically deteared and the electrodes or conductors of the electrostatic equipment, you must maintain a minimum distance of twice the sparking distance. This minimum distance must be displayed conspicuously on a sign located near the equipment. (5) You must ensure that the electrostatic equipment has automatic controls that immediately disconnect the power supply to the high-voltage transformer and signal the operator if: (i) Ventilation or the conveyors fail to operate; (ii) A ground (or imminent ground) occurs anywhere in the high-voltage system; or (iii) Goods being electrostatically deteared come within twice the sparking distance of the electrodes or conductors of the equipment. (6) You must use fences, rails, or guards, made of conducting material and adequately grounded, to separate paint-detearing operations from storage areas and from personnel. (7) To protect paint-detearing operations from fire, you must have in place: (i) Automatic sprinklers; or (ii) An automatic fire-extinguishing system conforming to the requirements of subpart L of this part. (8) To collect paint deposits, you must: (i) Provide drip plates and screens; and (ii) Clean these plates and screens in a safe location. [64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012] Subpart I—Personal Protective Equipment Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31160), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable, and 29 CFR part 1911. § 1910.132 General requirements. (a) Application. (b) Employee-owned equipment. (c) Design. (d) Hazard assessment and equipment selection. (i) Select, and have each affected employee use, the types of PPE that will protect the affected employee from the hazards identified in the hazard assessment; (ii) Communicate selection decisions to each affected employee; and, (iii) Select PPE that properly fits each affected employee. Note: Non-mandatory appendix B contains an example of procedures that would comply with the requirement for a hazard assessment. (2) The employer shall verify that the required workplace hazard assessment has been performed through a written certification that identifies the workplace evaluated; the person certifying that the evaluation has been performed; the date(s) of the hazard assessment; and, which identifies the document as a certification of hazard assessment. (e) Defective and damaged equipment. (f) Training. (i) When PPE is necessary; (ii) What PPE is necessary; (iii) How to properly don, doff, adjust, and wear PPE; (iv) The limitations of the PPE; and, (v) The proper care, maintenance, useful life and disposal of the PPE. (2) Each affected employee shall demonstrate an understanding of the training specified in paragraph (f)(1) of this section, and the ability to use PPE properly, before being allowed to perform work requiring the use of PPE. (3) When the employer has reason to believe that any affected employee who has already been trained does not have the understanding and skill required by paragraph (f)(2) of this section, the employer shall retrain each such employee. Circumstances where retraining is required include, but are not limited to, situations where: (i) Changes in the workplace render previous training obsolete; or (ii) Changes in the types of PPE to be used render previous training obsolete; or (iii) Inadequacies in an affected employee's knowledge or use of assigned PPE indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill. (g) Paragraphs (d) and (f) of this section apply only to §§ 1910.133, 1910.135, 1910.136, 1910.138, and 1910.140. Paragraphs (d) and (f) of this section do not apply to §§ 1910.134 and 1910.137. (h) Payment for protective equipment. (2) The employer is not required to pay for non-specialty safety-toe protective footwear (including steel-toe shoes or steel-toe boots) and non-specialty prescription safety eyewear, provided that the employer permits such items to be worn off the job-site. (3) When the employer provides metatarsal guards and allows the employee, at his or her request, to use shoes or boots with built-in metatarsal protection, the employer is not required to reimburse the employee for the shoes or boots. (4) The employer is not required to pay for: (i) The logging boots required by 29 CFR 1910.266(d)(1)(v); (ii) Everyday clothing, such as long-sleeve shirts, long pants, street shoes, and normal work boots; or (iii) Ordinary clothing, skin creams, or other items, used solely for protection from weather, such as winter coats, jackets, gloves, parkas, rubber boots, hats, raincoats, ordinary sunglasses, and sunscreen. (5) The employer must pay for replacement PPE, except when the employee has lost or intentionally damaged the PPE. (6) Where an employee provides adequate protective equipment he or she owns pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section, the employer may allow the employee to use it and is not required to reimburse the employee for that equipment. The employer shall not require an employee to provide or pay for his or her own PPE, unless the PPE is excepted by paragraphs (h)(2) through (h)(5) of this section. (7) This paragraph (h) shall become effective on February 13, 2008. Employers must implement the PPE payment requirements no later than May 15, 2008. Note to § 1910.132( h When the provisions of another OSHA standard specify whether or not the employer must pay for specific equipment, the payment provisions of that standard shall prevail. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 59 FR 16334, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33910, July 1, 1994; 72 FR 64428, Nov. 15, 2007; 76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011; 81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016] § 1910.133 Eye and face protection. (a) General requirements. (2) The employer shall ensure that each affected employee uses eye protection that provides side protection when there is a hazard from flying objects. Detachable side protectors (e.g. clip-on or slide-on side shields) meeting the pertinent requirements of this section are acceptable. (3) The employer shall ensure that each affected employee who wears prescription lenses while engaged in operations that involve eye hazards wears eye protection that incorporates the prescription in its design, or wears eye protection that can be worn over the prescription lenses without disturbing the proper position of the prescription lenses or the protective lenses. (4) Eye and face PPE shall be distinctly marked to facilitate identification of the manufacturer. (5) The employer shall ensure that each affected employee uses equipment with filter lenses that have a shade number appropriate for the work being performed for protection from injurious light radiation. The following is a listing of appropriate shade numbers for various operations. Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy Operations Electrode Size 1 32 Arc Current Minimum* Protective Shade Shielded metal arc welding Less than 3 Less than 60 7 3-5 60-160 8 5-8 160-250 10 More than 8 250-550 11 Gas metal arc welding and flux cored arc welding less than 60 7 60-160 10 160-250 10 250-500 10 Gas Tungsten arc welding less than 50 8 50-150 8 150-500 10 Air carbon (Light) less than 500 10 Arc cutting (Heavy) 500-1000 11 Plasma arc welding less than 20 6 20-100 8 100-400 10 400-800 11 Plasma arc cutting (light)** less than 300 8 (medium)** 300-400 9 (heavy)** 400-800 10 Torch brazing 3 Torch soldering 2 Carbon arc welding 14 Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy Operations Plate thickness—inches Plate thickness—mm Minimum* Protective Shade Gas Welding: Light Under 1/8 Under 3.2 4 Medium 1/8 to 1/2 3.2 to 12.7 5 Heavy Over 1/2 Over 12.7 6 Oxygen cutting: Light Under 1 Under 25 3 Medium 1 to 6 25 to 150 4 Heavy Over 6 Over 150 5 * As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation. ** These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that lighter filters may be used when the arc is hidden by the workpiece. (b) Criteria for protective eye and face protection. (i) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1-2010, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; (ii) ANSI Z87.1-2003, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; or (iii) ANSI Z87.1-1989 (R-1998), Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection, incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; (2) Protective eye and face protection devices that the employer demonstrates are at least as effective as protective eye and face protection devices that are constructed in accordance with one of the above consensus standards will be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of this section. [59 FR 16360, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, 1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009; 81 FR 16090, Mar. 25, 2016] § 1910.134 Respiratory protection. This section applies to General Industry (part 1910), Shipyards (part 1915), Marine Terminals (part 1917), Longshoring (part 1918), and Construction (part 1926). (a) Permissible practice. (2) A respirator shall be provided to each employee when such equipment is necessary to protect the health of such employee. The employer shall provide the respirators which are applicable and suitable for the purpose intended. The employer shall be responsible for the establishment and maintenance of a respiratory protection program, which shall include the requirements outlined in paragraph (c) of this section. The program shall cover each employee required by this section to use a respirator. (b) Definitions. Air-purifying respirator Assigned protection factor (APF) Atmosphere-supplying respirator Canister or cartridge Demand respirator Emergency situation Employee exposure End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) Escape-only respirator Filter or air purifying element Filtering facepiece Fit factor Fit test Helmet High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter Hood Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) Interior structural firefighting Loose-fitting facepiece Maximum use concentration (MUC) Negative pressure respirator (tight fitting) Oxygen deficient atmosphere Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) i.e., Positive pressure respirator Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) Pressure demand respirator Qualitative fit test (QLFT) Quantitative fit test (QNFT) Respiratory inlet covering Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) Service life Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline respirator This section Tight-fitting facepiece User seal check (c) Respiratory protection program. (1) In any workplace where respirators are necessary to protect the health of the employee or whenever respirators are required by the employer, the employer shall establish and implement a written respiratory protection program with worksite-specific procedures. The program shall be updated as necessary to reflect those changes in workplace conditions that affect respirator use. The employer shall include in the program the following provisions of this section, as applicable: (i) Procedures for selecting respirators for use in the workplace; (ii) Medical evaluations of employees required to use respirators; (iii) Fit testing procedures for tight-fitting respirators; (iv) Procedures for proper use of respirators in routine and reasonably foreseeable emergency situations; (v) Procedures and schedules for cleaning, disinfecting, storing, inspecting, repairing, discarding, and otherwise maintaining respirators; (vi) Procedures to ensure adequate air quality, quantity, and flow of breathing air for atmosphere-supplying respirators; (vii) Training of employees in the respiratory hazards to which they are potentially exposed during routine and emergency situations; (viii) Training of employees in the proper use of respirators, including putting on and removing them, any limitations on their use, and their maintenance; and (ix) Procedures for regularly evaluating the effectiveness of the program. (2) Where respirator use is not required: (i) An employer may provide respirators at the request of employees or permit employees to use their own respirators, if the employer determines that such respirator use will not in itself create a hazard. If the employer determines that any voluntary respirator use is permissible, the employer shall provide the respirator users with the information contained in appendix D to this section (“Information for Employees Using Respirators When Not Required Under the Standard”); and (ii) In addition, the employer must establish and implement those elements of a written respiratory protection program necessary to ensure that any employee using a respirator voluntarily is medically able to use that respirator, and that the respirator is cleaned, stored, and maintained so that its use does not present a health hazard to the user. Exception: Employers are not required to include in a written respiratory protection program those employees whose only use of respirators involves the voluntary use of filtering facepieces (dust masks). (3) The employer shall designate a program administrator who is qualified by appropriate training or experience that is commensurate with the complexity of the program to administer or oversee the respiratory protection program and conduct the required evaluations of program effectiveness. (4) The employer shall provide respirators, training, and medical evaluations at no cost to the employee. (d) Selection of respirators. (1) General requirements. (ii) The employer shall select a NIOSH-certified respirator. The respirator shall be used in compliance with the conditions of its certification. (iii) The employer shall identify and evaluate the respiratory hazard(s) in the workplace; this evaluation shall include a reasonable estimate of employee exposures to respiratory hazard(s) and an identification of the contaminant's chemical state and physical form. Where the employer cannot identify or reasonably estimate the employee exposure, the employer shall consider the atmosphere to be IDLH. (iv) The employer shall select respirators from a sufficient number of respirator models and sizes so that the respirator is acceptable to, and correctly fits, the user. (2) Respirators for IDLH atmospheres. (A) A full facepiece pressure demand SCBA certified by NIOSH for a minimum service life of thirty minutes, or (B) A combination full facepiece pressure demand supplied-air respirator (SAR) with auxiliary self-contained air supply. (ii) Respirators provided only for escape from IDLH atmospheres shall be NIOSH-certified for escape from the atmosphere in which they will be used. (iii) All oxygen-deficient atmospheres shall be considered IDLH. Exception: If the employer demonstrates that, under all foreseeable conditions, the oxygen concentration can be maintained within the ranges specified in Table II of this section (i.e., for the altitudes set out in the table), then any atmosphere-supplying respirator may be used. (3) Respirators for atmospheres that are not IDLH. (A) Assigned Protection Factors (APFs). Table 1—Assigned Protection Factors 5 Type of respirator 1 2 Quarter mask Half mask Full facepiece Helmet/hood Loose-fitting facepiece 1. Air-Purifying Respirator 5 3 50 2. Powered Air-Purifying Respirator (PAPR) 50 1,000 4 25 3. Supplied-Air Respirator (SAR) or Airline Respirator • Demand mode 10 50 • Continuous flow mode 50 1,000 4 25 • Pressure-demand or other positive-pressure mode 50 1,000 4. Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) • Demand mode 10 50 50 • Pressure-demand or other positive-pressure mode (e.g., open/closed circuit) 10,000 10,000 Notes: 1 2 3 4 5 (B) Maximum Use Concentration (MUC). 1 ( 2 ( 3 (ii) The respirator selected shall be appropriate for the chemical state and physical form of the contaminant. (iii) For protection against gases and vapors, the employer shall provide: (A) An atmosphere-supplying respirator, or (B) An air-purifying respirator, provided that: ( 1 ( 2 (iv) For protection against particulates, the employer shall provide: (A) An atmosphere-supplying respirator; or (B) An air-purifying respirator equipped with a filter certified by NIOSH under 30 CFR part 11 as a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter, or an air-purifying respirator equipped with a filter certified for particulates by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84; or (C) For contaminants consisting primarily of particles with mass median aerodynamic diameters (MMAD) of at least 2 micrometers, an air-purifying respirator equipped with any filter certified for particulates by NIOSH. Table I—Assigned Protection Factors [Reserved] Table II Altitude (ft.) Oxygen deficient Atmospheres (% 0 2 Less than 3,001 16.0-19.5 3,001-4,000 16.4-19.5 4,001-5,000 17.1-19.5 5,001-6,000 17.8-19.5 6,001-7,000 18.5-19.5 7,001-8,000 1 19.3-19.5. 1 (e) Medical evaluation. (1) General. (2) Medical evaluation procedures. (ii) The medical evaluation shall obtain the information requested by the questionnaire in Sections 1 and 2, part A of appendix C of this section. (3) Follow-up medical examination. (ii) The follow-up medical examination shall include any medical tests, consultations, or diagnostic procedures that the PLHCP deems necessary to make a final determination. (4) Administration of the medical questionnaire and examinations. (ii) The employer shall provide the employee with an opportunity to discuss the questionnaire and examination results with the PLHCP. (5) Supplemental information for the PLHCP. (A) The type and weight of the respirator to be used by the employee; (B) The duration and frequency of respirator use (including use for rescue and escape); (C) The expected physical work effort; (D) Additional protective clothing and equipment to be worn; and (E) Temperature and humidity extremes that may be encountered. (ii) Any supplemental information provided previously to the PLHCP regarding an employee need not be provided for a subsequent medical evaluation if the information and the PLHCP remain the same. (iii) The employer shall provide the PLHCP with a copy of the written respiratory protection program and a copy of this section. Note to paragraph ( e iii When the employer replaces a PLHCP, the employer must ensure that the new PLHCP obtains this information, either by providing the documents directly to the PLHCP or having the documents transferred from the former PLHCP to the new PLHCP. However, OSHA does not expect employers to have employees medically reevaluated solely because a new PLHCP has been selected. (6) Medical determination. (i) Obtain a written recommendation regarding the employee's ability to use the respirator from the PLHCP. The recommendation shall provide only the following information: (A) Any limitations on respirator use related to the medical condition of the employee, or relating to the workplace conditions in which the respirator will be used, including whether or not the employee is medically able to use the respirator; (B) The need, if any, for follow-up medical evaluations; and (C) A statement that the PLHCP has provided the employee with a copy of the PLHCP's written recommendation. (ii) If the respirator is a negative pressure respirator and the PLHCP finds a medical condition that may place the employee's health at increased risk if the respirator is used, the employer shall provide a PAPR if the PLHCP's medical evaluation finds that the employee can use such a respirator; if a subsequent medical evaluation finds that the employee is medically able to use a negative pressure respirator, then the employer is no longer required to provide a PAPR. (7) Additional medical evaluations. (i) An employee reports medical signs or symptoms that are related to ability to use a respirator; (ii) A PLHCP, supervisor, or the respirator program administrator informs the employer that an employee needs to be reevaluated; (iii) Information from the respiratory protection program, including observations made during fit testing and program evaluation, indicates a need for employee reevaluation; or (iv) A change occurs in workplace conditions (e.g., physical work effort, protective clothing, temperature) that may result in a substantial increase in the physiological burden placed on an employee. (f) Fit testing. (1) The employer shall ensure that employees using a tight-fitting facepiece respirator pass an appropriate qualitative fit test (QLFT) or quantitative fit test (QNFT) as stated in this paragraph. (2) The employer shall ensure that an employee using a tight-fitting facepiece respirator is fit tested prior to initial use of the respirator, whenever a different respirator facepiece (size, style, model or make) is used, and at least annually thereafter. (3) The employer shall conduct an additional fit test whenever the employee reports, or the employer, PLHCP, supervisor, or program administrator makes visual observations of, changes in the employee's physical condition that could affect respirator fit. Such conditions include, but are not limited to, facial scarring, dental changes, cosmetic surgery, or an obvious change in body weight. (4) If after passing a QLFT or QNFT, the employee subsequently notifies the employer, program administrator, supervisor, or PLHCP that the fit of the respirator is unacceptable, the employee shall be given a reasonable opportunity to select a different respirator facepiece and to be retested. (5) The fit test shall be administered using an OSHA-accepted QLFT or QNFT protocol. The OSHA-accepted QLFT and QNFT protocols and procedures are contained in appendix A of this section. (6) QLFT may only be used to fit test negative pressure air-purifying respirators that must achieve a fit factor of 100 or less. (7) If the fit factor, as determined through an OSHA-accepted QNFT protocol, is equal to or greater than 100 for tight-fitting half facepieces, or equal to or greater than 500 for tight-fitting full facepieces, the QNFT has been passed with that respirator. (8) Fit testing of tight-fitting atmosphere-supplying respirators and tight-fitting powered air-purifying respirators shall be accomplished by performing quantitative or qualitative fit testing in the negative pressure mode, regardless of the mode of operation (negative or positive pressure) that is used for respiratory protection. (i) Qualitative fit testing of these respirators shall be accomplished by temporarily converting the respirator user's actual facepiece into a negative pressure respirator with appropriate filters, or by using an identical negative pressure air-purifying respirator facepiece with the same sealing surfaces as a surrogate for the atmosphere-supplying or powered air-purifying respirator facepiece. (ii) Quantitative fit testing of these respirators shall be accomplished by modifying the facepiece to allow sampling inside the facepiece in the breathing zone of the user, midway between the nose and mouth. This requirement shall be accomplished by installing a permanent sampling probe onto a surrogate facepiece, or by using a sampling adapter designed to temporarily provide a means of sampling air from inside the facepiece. (iii) Any modifications to the respirator facepiece for fit testing shall be completely removed, and the facepiece restored to NIOSH-approved configuration, before that facepiece can be used in the workplace. (g) Use of respirators. (1) Facepiece seal protection. (A) Facial hair that comes between the sealing surface of the facepiece and the face or that interferes with valve function; or (B) Any condition that interferes with the face-to-facepiece seal or valve function. (ii) If an employee wears corrective glasses or goggles or other personal protective equipment, the employer shall ensure that such equipment is worn in a manner that does not interfere with the seal of the facepiece to the face of the user. (iii) For all tight-fitting respirators, the employer shall ensure that employees perform a user seal check each time they put on the respirator using the procedures in appendix B-1 or procedures recommended by the respirator manufacturer that the employer demonstrates are as effective as those in appendix B-1 of this section. (2) Continuing respirator effectiveness. (ii) The employer shall ensure that employees leave the respirator use area: (A) To wash their faces and respirator facepieces as necessary to prevent eye or skin irritation associated with respirator use; or (B) If they detect vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in breathing resistance, or leakage of the facepiece; or (C) To replace the respirator or the filter, cartridge, or canister elements. (iii) If the employee detects vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in breathing resistance, or leakage of the facepiece, the employer must replace or repair the respirator before allowing the employee to return to the work area. (3) Procedures for IDLH atmospheres. (i) One employee or, when needed, more than one employee is located outside the IDLH atmosphere; (ii) Visual, voice, or signal line communication is maintained between the employee(s) in the IDLH atmosphere and the employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere; (iii) The employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere are trained and equipped to provide effective emergency rescue; (iv) The employer or designee is notified before the employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere enter the IDLH atmosphere to provide emergency rescue; (v) The employer or designee authorized to do so by the employer, once notified, provides necessary assistance appropriate to the situation; (vi) Employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmospheres are equipped with: (A) Pressure demand or other positive pressure SCBAs, or a pressure demand or other positive pressure supplied-air respirator with auxiliary SCBA; and either (B) Appropriate retrieval equipment for removing the employee(s) who enter(s) these hazardous atmospheres where retrieval equipment would contribute to the rescue of the employee(s) and would not increase the overall risk resulting from entry; or (C) Equivalent means for rescue where retrieval equipment is not required under paragraph (g)(3)(vi)(B). (4) Procedures for interior structural firefighting. (i) At least two employees enter the IDLH atmosphere and remain in visual or voice contact with one another at all times; (ii) At least two employees are located outside the IDLH atmosphere; and (iii) All employees engaged in interior structural firefighting use SCBAs. Note 1 to paragraph ( g One of the two individuals located outside the IDLH atmosphere may be assigned to an additional role, such as incident commander in charge of the emergency or safety officer, so long as this individual is able to perform assistance or rescue activities without jeopardizing the safety or health of any firefighter working at the incident. Note 2 to paragraph ( g Nothing in this section is meant to preclude firefighters from performing emergency rescue activities before an entire team has assembled. (h) Maintenance and care of respirators. (1) Cleaning and disinfecting. (i) Respirators issued for the exclusive use of an employee shall be cleaned and disinfected as often as necessary to be maintained in a sanitary condition; (ii) Respirators issued to more than one employee shall be cleaned and disinfected before being worn by different individuals; (iii) Respirators maintained for emergency use shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use; and (iv) Respirators used in fit testing and training shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use. (2) Storage. (i) All respirators shall be stored to protect them from damage, contamination, dust, sunlight, extreme temperatures, excessive moisture, and damaging chemicals, and they shall be packed or stored to prevent deformation of the facepiece and exhalation valve. (ii) In addition to the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(i) of this section, emergency respirators shall be: (A) Kept accessible to the work area; (B) Stored in compartments or in covers that are clearly marked as containing emergency respirators; and (C) Stored in accordance with any applicable manufacturer instructions. (3) Inspection. (A) All respirators used in routine situations shall be inspected before each use and during cleaning; (B) All respirators maintained for use in emergency situations shall be inspected at least monthly and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be checked for proper function before and after each use; and (C) Emergency escape-only respirators shall be inspected before being carried into the workplace for use. (ii) The employer shall ensure that respirator inspections include the following: (A) A check of respirator function, tightness of connections, and the condition of the various parts including, but not limited to, the facepiece, head straps, valves, connecting tube, and cartridges, canisters or filters; and (B) A check of elastomeric parts for pliability and signs of deterioration. (iii) In addition to the requirements of paragraphs (h)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section, self-contained breathing apparatus shall be inspected monthly. Air and oxygen cylinders shall be maintained in a fully charged state and shall be recharged when the pressure falls to 90% of the manufacturer's recommended pressure level. The employer shall determine that the regulator and warning devices function properly. (iv) For respirators maintained for emergency use, the employer shall: (A) Certify the respirator by documenting the date the inspection was performed, the name (or signature) of the person who made the inspection, the findings, required remedial action, and a serial number or other means of identifying the inspected respirator; and (B) Provide this information on a tag or label that is attached to the storage compartment for the respirator, is kept with the respirator, or is included in inspection reports stored as paper or electronic files. This information shall be maintained until replaced following a subsequent certification. (4) Repairs. (i) Repairs or adjustments to respirators are to be made only by persons appropriately trained to perform such operations and shall use only the respirator manufacturer's NIOSH-approved parts designed for the respirator; (ii) Repairs shall be made according to the manufacturer's recommendations and specifications for the type and extent of repairs to be performed; and (iii) Reducing and admission valves, regulators, and alarms shall be adjusted or repaired only by the manufacturer or a technician trained by the manufacturer. (i) Breathing air quality and use. (1) The employer shall ensure that compressed air, compressed oxygen, liquid air, and liquid oxygen used for respiration accords with the following specifications: (i) Compressed and liquid oxygen shall meet the United States Pharmacopoeia requirements for medical or breathing oxygen; and (ii) Compressed breathing air shall meet at least the requirements for Grade D breathing air described in ANSI/Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification for Air, G-7.1-1989, to include: (A) Oxygen content (v/v) of 19.5-23.5%; (B) Hydrocarbon (condensed) content of 5 milligrams per cubic meter of air or less; (C) Carbon monoxide (CO) content of 10 ppm or less; (D) Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 ppm or less; and (E) Lack of noticeable odor. (2) The employer shall ensure that compressed oxygen is not used in atmosphere-supplying respirators that have previously used compressed air. (3) The employer shall ensure that oxygen concentrations greater than 23.5% are used only in equipment designed for oxygen service or distribution. (4) The employer shall ensure that cylinders used to supply breathing air to respirators meet the following requirements: (i) Cylinders are tested and maintained as prescribed in the Shipping Container Specification Regulations of the Department of Transportation (49 CFR part 180); (ii) Cylinders of purchased breathing air have a certificate of analysis from the supplier that the breathing air meets the requirements for Grade D breathing air; and (iii) The moisture content in the cylinder does not exceed a dew point of −50 °F (−45.6 °C) at 1 atmosphere pressure. (5) The employer shall ensure that compressors used to supply breathing air to respirators are constructed and situated so as to: (i) Prevent entry of contaminated air into the air-supply system; (ii) Minimize moisture content so that the dew point at 1 atmosphere pressure is 10 degrees F (5.56 °C) below the ambient temperature; (iii) Have suitable in-line air-purifying sorbent beds and filters to further ensure breathing air quality. Sorbent beds and filters shall be maintained and replaced or refurbished periodically following the manufacturer's instructions. (iv) Have a tag containing the most recent change date and the signature of the person authorized by the employer to perform the change. The tag shall be maintained at the compressor. (6) For compressors that are not oil-lubricated, the employer shall ensure that carbon monoxide levels in the breathing air do not exceed 10 ppm. (7) For oil-lubricated compressors, the employer shall use a high-temperature or carbon monoxide alarm, or both, to monitor carbon monoxide levels. If only high-temperature alarms are used, the air supply shall be monitored at intervals sufficient to prevent carbon monoxide in the breathing air from exceeding 10 ppm. (8) The employer shall ensure that breathing air couplings are incompatible with outlets for nonrespirable worksite air or other gas systems. No asphyxiating substance shall be introduced into breathing air lines. (9) The employer shall use only the respirator manufacturer's NIOSH-approved breathing-gas containers, marked and maintained in accordance with the Quality Assurance provisions of the NIOSH approval for the SCBA as issued in accordance with the NIOSH respirator-certification standard at 42 CFR part 84. (j) Identification of filters, cartridges, and canisters. (k) Training and information. (1) The employer shall ensure that each employee can demonstrate knowledge of at least the following: (i) Why the respirator is necessary and how improper fit, usage, or maintenance can compromise the protective effect of the respirator; (ii) What the limitations and capabilities of the respirator are; (iii) How to use the respirator effectively in emergency situations, including situations in which the respirator malfunctions; (iv) How to inspect, put on and remove, use, and check the seals of the respirator; (v) What the procedures are for maintenance and storage of the respirator; (vi) How to recognize medical signs and symptoms that may limit or prevent the effective use of respirators; and (vii) The general requirements of this section. (2) The training shall be conducted in a manner that is understandable to the employee. (3) The employer shall provide the training prior to requiring the employee to use a respirator in the workplace. (4) An employer who is able to demonstrate that a new employee has received training within the last 12 months that addresses the elements specified in paragraph (k)(1)(i) through (vii) is not required to repeat such training provided that, as required by paragraph (k)(1), the employee can demonstrate knowledge of those element(s). Previous training not repeated initially by the employer must be provided no later than 12 months from the date of the previous training. (5) Retraining shall be administered annually, and when the following situations occur: (i) Changes in the workplace or the type of respirator render previous training obsolete; (ii) Inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of the respirator indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill; or (iii) Any other situation arises in which retraining appears necessary to ensure safe respirator use. (6) The basic advisory information on respirators, as presented in appendix D of this section, shall be provided by the employer in any written or oral format, to employees who wear respirators when such use is not required by this section or by the employer. (l) Program evaluation. (1) The employer shall conduct evaluations of the workplace as necessary to ensure that the provisions of the current written program are being effectively implemented and that it continues to be effective. (2) The employer shall regularly consult employees required to use respirators to assess the employees' views on program effectiveness and to identify any problems. Any problems that are identified during this assessment shall be corrected. Factors to be assessed include, but are not limited to: (i) Respirator fit (including the ability to use the respirator without interfering with effective workplace performance); (ii) Appropriate respirator selection for the hazards to which the employee is exposed; (iii) Proper respirator use under the workplace conditions the employee encounters; and (iv) Proper respirator maintenance. (m) Recordkeeping. (1) Medical evaluation. (2) Fit testing. (A) The name or identification of the employee tested; (B) Type of fit test performed; (C) Specific make, model, style, and size of respirator tested; (D) Date of test; and (E) The pass/fail results for QLFTs or the fit factor and strip chart recording or other recording of the test results for QNFTs. (ii) Fit test records shall be retained for respirator users until the next fit test is administered. (3) A written copy of the current respirator program shall be retained by the employer. (4) Written materials required to be retained under this paragraph shall be made available upon request to affected employees and to the Assistant Secretary or designee for examination and copying. (n) Effective date. (o) Appendices. Compliance with appendix A, appendix B-1, appendix B-2, appendix C, and appendix D to this section are mandatory. Appendix A to § 1910.134—Fit Testing Procedures (Mandatory) Part I. OSHA-Accepted Fit Test Protocols A. Fit Testing Procedures—General Requirements The employer shall conduct fit testing using the following procedures. The requirements in this appendix apply to all OSHA-accepted fit test methods, both QLFT and QNFT. 1. The test subject shall be allowed to pick the most acceptable respirator from a sufficient number of respirator models and sizes so that the respirator is acceptable to, and correctly fits, the user. 2. Prior to the selection process, the test subject shall be shown how to put on a respirator, how it should be positioned on the face, how to set strap tension and how to determine an acceptable fit. A mirror shall be available to assist the subject in evaluating the fit and positioning of the respirator. This instruction may not constitute the subject's formal training on respirator use, because it is only a review. 3. The test subject shall be informed that he/she is being asked to select the respirator that provides the most acceptable fit. Each respirator represents a different size and shape, and if fitted and used properly, will provide adequate protection. 4. The test subject shall be instructed to hold each chosen facepiece up to the face and eliminate those that obviously do not give an acceptable fit. 5. The more acceptable facepieces are noted in case the one selected proves unacceptable; the most comfortable mask is donned and worn at least five minutes to assess comfort. Assistance in assessing comfort can be given by discussing the points in the following item A.6. If the test subject is not familiar with using a particular respirator, the test subject shall be directed to don the mask several times and to adjust the straps each time to become adept at setting proper tension on the straps. 6. Assessment of comfort shall include a review of the following points with the test subject and allowing the test subject adequate time to determine the comfort of the respirator: (a) Position of the mask on the nose (b) Room for eye protection (c) Room to talk (d) Position of mask on face and cheeks 7. The following criteria shall be used to help determine the adequacy of the respirator fit: (a) Chin properly placed; (b) Adequate strap tension, not overly tightened; (c) Fit across nose bridge; (d) Respirator of proper size to span distance from nose to chin; (e) Tendency of respirator to slip; (f) Self-observation in mirror to evaluate fit and respirator position. 8. The test subject shall conduct a user seal check, either the negative and positive pressure seal checks described in appendix B-1 of this section or those recommended by the respirator manufacturer which provide equivalent protection to the procedures in appendix B-1. Before conducting the negative and positive pressure checks, the subject shall be told to seat the mask on the face by moving the head from side-to-side and up and down slowly while taking in a few slow deep breaths. Another facepiece shall be selected and retested if the test subject fails the user seal check tests. 9. The test shall not be conducted if there is any hair growth between the skin and the facepiece sealing surface, such as stubble beard growth, beard, mustache or sideburns which cross the respirator sealing surface. Any type of apparel which interferes with a satisfactory fit shall be altered or removed. 10. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in breathing during the tests, she or he shall be referred to a physician or other licensed health care professional, as appropriate, to determine whether the test subject can wear a respirator while performing her or his duties. 11. If the employee finds the fit of the respirator unacceptable, the test subject shall be given the opportunity to select a different respirator and to be retested. 12. Exercise regimen. Prior to the commencement of the fit test, the test subject shall be given a description of the fit test and the test subject's responsibilities during the test procedure. The description of the process shall include a description of the test exercises that the subject will be performing. The respirator to be tested shall be worn for at least 5 minutes before the start of the fit test. 13. The fit test shall be performed while the test subject is wearing any applicable safety equipment that may be worn during actual respirator use which could interfere with respirator fit. 14. Test Exercises. (a) Employers must perform the following test exercises for all fit testing methods prescribed in this appendix, except for the two modified ambient aerosol CNC quantitative fit testing protocols, the CNP quantitative fit testing protocol, and the CNP REDON quantitative fit testing protocol. For the modified ambient aerosol CNC quantitative fit testing protocols, employers shall ensure that the test subjects ( i.e., i.e., (1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally. (2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing position, the subject shall breathe slowly and deeply, taking caution so as not to hyperventilate. (3) Turning head side to side. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly turn his/her head from side to side between the extreme positions on each side. The head shall be held at each extreme momentarily so the subject can inhale at each side. (4) Moving head up and down. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly move his/her head up and down. The subject shall be instructed to inhale in the up position (i.e., when looking toward the ceiling). (5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor. The subject can read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song. Rainbow Passage When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the air, they act like a prism and form a rainbow. The rainbow is a division of white light into many beautiful colors. These take the shape of a long round arch, with its path high above, and its two ends apparently beyond the horizon. There is, according to legend, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People look, but no one ever finds it. When a man looks for something beyond reach, his friends say he is looking for the pot of gold at the end of the rainbow. (6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning. (This applies only to QNFT testing; it is not performed for QLFT) (7) Bending over. The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he/she were to touch his/her toes. Jogging in place shall be substituted for this exercise in those test environments such as shroud type QNFT or QLFT units that do not permit bending over at the waist. (8) Normal breathing. Same as exercise (1). (b) Each test exercise shall be performed for one minute except for the grimace exercise which shall be performed for 15 seconds. The test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort of the respirator upon completion of the protocol. If it has become unacceptable, another model of respirator shall be tried. The respirator shall not be adjusted once the fit test exercises begin. Any adjustment voids the test, and the fit test must be repeated. B. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) Protocols 1. General (a) The employer shall ensure that persons administering QLFT are able to prepare test solutions, calibrate equipment and perform tests properly, recognize invalid tests, and ensure that test equipment is in proper working order. (b) The employer shall ensure that QLFT equipment is kept clean and well maintained so as to operate within the parameters for which it was designed. 2. Isoamyl Acetate Protocol Note: This protocol is not appropriate to use for the fit testing of particulate respirators. If used to fit test particulate respirators, the respirator must be equipped with an organic vapor filter. (a) Odor Threshold Screening Odor threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to determine if the individual tested can detect the odor of isoamyl acetate at low levels. (1) Three 1 liter glass jars with metal lids are required. (2) Odor-free water (e.g., distilled or spring water) at approximately 25 °C (77 °F) shall be used for the solutions. (3) The isoamyl acetate (IAA) (also known at isopentyl acetate) stock solution is prepared by adding 1 ml of pure IAA to 800 ml of odor-free water in a 1 liter jar, closing the lid and shaking for 30 seconds. A new solution shall be prepared at least weekly. (4) The screening test shall be conducted in a room separate from the room used for actual fit testing. The two rooms shall be well-ventilated to prevent the odor of IAA from becoming evident in the general room air where testing takes place. (5) The odor test solution is prepared in a second jar by placing 0.4 ml of the stock solution into 500 ml of odor-free water using a clean dropper or pipette. The solution shall be shaken for 30 seconds and allowed to stand for two to three minutes so that the IAA concentration above the liquid may reach equilibrium. This solution shall be used for only one day. (6) A test blank shall be prepared in a third jar by adding 500 cc of odor-free water. (7) The odor test and test blank jar lids shall be labeled (e.g., 1 and 2) for jar identification. Labels shall be placed on the lids so that they can be peeled off periodically and switched to maintain the integrity of the test. (8) The following instruction shall be typed on a card and placed on the table in front of the two test jars (i.e., 1 and 2): “The purpose of this test is to determine if you can smell banana oil at a low concentration. The two bottles in front of you contain water. One of these bottles also contains a small amount of banana oil. Be sure the covers are on tight, then shake each bottle for two seconds. Unscrew the lid of each bottle, one at a time, and sniff at the mouth of the bottle. Indicate to the test conductor which bottle contains banana oil.” (9) The mixtures used in the IAA odor detection test shall be prepared in an area separate from where the test is performed, in order to prevent olfactory fatigue in the subject. (10) If the test subject is unable to correctly identify the jar containing the odor test solution, the IAA qualitative fit test shall not be performed. (11) If the test subject correctly identifies the jar containing the odor test solution, the test subject may proceed to respirator selection and fit testing. (b) Isoamyl Acetate Fit Test (1) The fit test chamber shall be a clear 55-gallon drum liner suspended inverted over a 2-foot diameter frame so that the top of the chamber is about 6 inches above the test subject's head. If no drum liner is available, a similar chamber shall be constructed using plastic sheeting. The inside top center of the chamber shall have a small hook attached. (2) Each respirator used for the fitting and fit testing shall be equipped with organic vapor cartridges or offer protection against organic vapors. (3) After selecting, donning, and properly adjusting a respirator, the test subject shall wear it to the fit testing room. This room shall be separate from the room used for odor threshold screening and respirator selection, and shall be well-ventilated, as by an exhaust fan or lab hood, to prevent general room contamination. (4) A copy of the test exercises and any prepared text from which the subject is to read shall be taped to the inside of the test chamber. (5) Upon entering the test chamber, the test subject shall be given a 6-inch by 5-inch piece of paper towel, or other porous, absorbent, single-ply material, folded in half and wetted with 0.75 ml of pure IAA. The test subject shall hang the wet towel on the hook at the top of the chamber. An IAA test swab or ampule may be substituted for the IAA wetted paper towel provided it has been demonstrated that the alternative IAA source will generate an IAA test atmosphere with a concentration equivalent to that generated by the paper towel method. (6) Allow two minutes for the IAA test concentration to stabilize before starting the fit test exercises. This would be an appropriate time to talk with the test subject; to explain the fit test, the importance of his/her cooperation, and the purpose for the test exercises; or to demonstrate some of the exercises. (7) If at any time during the test, the subject detects the banana-like odor of IAA, the test is failed. The subject shall quickly exit from the test chamber and leave the test area to avoid olfactory fatigue. (8) If the test is failed, the subject shall return to the selection room and remove the respirator. The test subject shall repeat the odor sensitivity test, select and put on another respirator, return to the test area and again begin the fit test procedure described in (b) (1) through (7) above. The process continues until a respirator that fits well has been found. Should the odor sensitivity test be failed, the subject shall wait at least 5 minutes before retesting. Odor sensitivity will usually have returned by this time. (9) If the subject passes the test, the efficiency of the test procedure shall be demonstrated by having the subject break the respirator face seal and take a breath before exiting the chamber. (10) When the test subject leaves the chamber, the subject shall remove the saturated towel and return it to the person conducting the test, so that there is no significant IAA concentration buildup in the chamber during subsequent tests. The used towels shall be kept in a self-sealing plastic bag to keep the test area from being contaminated. 3. Saccharin Solution Aerosol Protocol The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test. (a) Taste threshold screening. The saccharin taste threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to determine whether the individual being tested can detect the taste of saccharin. (1) During threshold screening as well as during fit testing, subjects shall wear an enclosure about the head and shoulders that is approximately 12 inches in diameter by 14 inches tall with at least the front portion clear and that allows free movements of the head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure substantially similar to the 3M hood assembly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15 combined, is adequate. (2) The test enclosure shall have a 3/4 (3) The test subject shall don the test enclosure. Throughout the threshold screening test, the test subject shall breathe through his/her slightly open mouth with tongue extended. The subject is instructed to report when he/she detects a sweet taste. (4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test conductor shall spray the threshold check solution into the enclosure. The nozzle is directed away from the nose and mouth of the person. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it from the fit test solution nebulizer. (5) The threshold check solution is prepared by dissolving 0.83 gram of sodium saccharin USP in 100 ml of warm water. It can be prepared by putting 1 ml of the fit test solution (see (b)(5) below) in 100 ml of distilled water. (6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer bulb is firmly squeezed so that it collapses completely, then released and allowed to fully expand. (7) Ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and then the test subject is asked whether the saccharin can be tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the sweet taste during the ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as ten regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed. (8) If the first response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the saccharin is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the sweet taste during the second ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as twenty regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed. (9) If the second response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the saccharin is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the sweet taste during the third set of ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as thirty regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed. (10) The test conductor will take note of the number of squeezes required to solicit a taste response. (11) If the saccharin is not tasted after 30 squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable to taste saccharin and may not perform the saccharin fit test. Note to paragraph 3( a If the test subject eats or drinks something sweet before the screening test, he/she may be unable to taste the weak saccharin solution. (12) If a taste response is elicited, the test subject shall be asked to take note of the taste for reference in the fit test. (13) Correct use of the nebulizer means that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at a time in the nebulizer body. (14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly rinsed in water, shaken dry, and refilled at least each morning and afternoon or at least every four hours. (b) Saccharin solution aerosol fit test procedure. (1) The test subject may not eat, drink (except plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15 minutes before the test. (2) The fit test uses the same enclosure described in 3. (a) above. (3) The test subject shall don the enclosure while wearing the respirator selected in section I. A. of this appendix. The respirator shall be properly adjusted and equipped with a particulate filter(s). (4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used to spray the fit test solution into the enclosure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it from the screening test solution nebulizer. (5) The fit test solution is prepared by adding 83 grams of sodium saccharin to 100 ml of warm water. (6) As before, the test subject shall breathe through the slightly open mouth with tongue extended, and report if he/she tastes the sweet taste of saccharin. (7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole in the front of the enclosure and an initial concentration of saccharin fit test solution is sprayed into the enclosure using the same number of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeezes) based on the number of squeezes required to elicit a taste response as noted during the screening test. A minimum of 10 squeezes is required. (8) After generating the aerosol, the test subject shall be instructed to perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix. (9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentration shall be replenished using one half the original number of squeezes used initially (e.g., 5, 10 or 15). (10) The test subject shall indicate to the test conductor if at any time during the fit test the taste of saccharin is detected. If the test subject does not report tasting the saccharin, the test is passed. (11) If the taste of saccharin is detected, the fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test is failed. A different respirator shall be tried and the entire test procedure is repeated (taste threshold screening and fit testing). (12) Since the nebulizer has a tendency to clog during use, the test operator must make periodic checks of the nebulizer to ensure that it is not clogged. If clogging is found at the end of the test session, the test is invalid. 4. Bitrex TM The Bitrex TM (a) Taste Threshold Screening. The Bitrex taste threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to determine whether the individual being tested can detect the taste of Bitrex. (1) During threshold screening as well as during fit testing, subjects shall wear an enclosure about the head and shoulders that is approximately 12 inches (30.5 cm) in diameter by 14 inches (35.6 cm) tall. The front portion of the enclosure shall be clear from the respirator and allow free movement of the head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure substantially similar to the 3M hood assembly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15 combined, is adequate. (2) The test enclosure shall have a 3/4 (3) The test subject shall don the test enclosure. Throughout the threshold screening test, the test subject shall breathe through his or her slightly open mouth with tongue extended. The subject is instructed to report when he/she detects a bitter taste. (4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test conductor shall spray the Threshold Check Solution into the enclosure. This Nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it from the fit test solution nebulizer. (5) The Threshold Check Solution is prepared by adding 13.5 milligrams of Bitrex to 100 ml of 5% salt (NaCl) solution in distilled water. (6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer bulb is firmly squeezed so that the bulb collapses completely, and is then released and allowed to fully expand. (7) An initial ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and then the test subject is asked whether the Bitrex can be tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the bitter taste during the ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as ten regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed. (8) If the first response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the bitter taste during the second ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as twenty regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed. (9) If the second response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the bitter taste during the third set of ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as thirty regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed. (10) The test conductor will take note of the number of squeezes required to solicit a taste response. (11) If the Bitrex is not tasted after 30 squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable to taste Bitrex and may not perform the Bitrex fit test. (12) If a taste response is elicited, the test subject shall be asked to take note of the taste for reference in the fit test. (13) Correct use of the nebulizer means that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at a time in the nebulizer body. (14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly rinsed in water, shaken to dry, and refilled at least each morning and afternoon or at least every four hours. (b) Bitrex Solution Aerosol Fit Test Procedure. (1) The test subject may not eat, drink (except plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15 minutes before the test. (2) The fit test uses the same enclosure as that described in 4. (a) above. (3) The test subject shall don the enclosure while wearing the respirator selected according to section I. A. of this appendix. The respirator shall be properly adjusted and equipped with any type particulate filter(s). (4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used to spray the fit test solution into the enclosure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it from the screening test solution nebulizer. (5) The fit test solution is prepared by adding 337.5 mg of Bitrex to 200 ml of a 5% salt (NaCl) solution in warm water. (6) As before, the test subject shall breathe through his or her slightly open mouth with tongue extended, and be instructed to report if he/she tastes the bitter taste of Bitrex. (7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole in the front of the enclosure and an initial concentration of the fit test solution is sprayed into the enclosure using the same number of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeezes) based on the number of squeezes required to elicit a taste response as noted during the screening test. (8) After generating the aerosol, the test subject shall be instructed to perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix. (9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentration shall be replenished using one half the number of squeezes used initially (e.g., 5, 10 or 15). (10) The test subject shall indicate to the test conductor if at any time during the fit test the taste of Bitrex is detected. If the test subject does not report tasting the Bitrex, the test is passed. (11) If the taste of Bitrex is detected, the fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test is failed. A different respirator shall be tried and the entire test procedure is repeated (taste threshold screening and fit testing). 5. Irritant Smoke (Stannic Chloride) Protocol This qualitative fit test uses a person's response to the irritating chemicals released in the “smoke” produced by a stannic chloride ventilation smoke tube to detect leakage into the respirator. (a) General Requirements and Precautions (1) The respirator to be tested shall be equipped with high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) or P100 series filter(s). (2) Only stannic chloride smoke tubes shall be used for this protocol. (3) No form of test enclosure or hood for the test subject shall be used. (4) The smoke can be irritating to the eyes, lungs, and nasal passages. The test conductor shall take precautions to minimize the test subject's exposure to irritant smoke. Sensitivity varies, and certain individuals may respond to a greater degree to irritant smoke. Care shall be taken when performing the sensitivity screening checks that determine whether the test subject can detect irritant smoke to use only the minimum amount of smoke necessary to elicit a response from the test subject. (5) The fit test shall be performed in an area with adequate ventilation to prevent exposure of the person conducting the fit test or the build-up of irritant smoke in the general atmosphere. (b) Sensitivity Screening Check The person to be tested must demonstrate his or her ability to detect a weak concentration of the irritant smoke. (1) The test operator shall break both ends of a ventilation smoke tube containing stannic chloride, and attach one end of the smoke tube to a low flow air pump set to deliver 200 milliliters per minute, or an aspirator squeeze bulb. The test operator shall cover the other end of the smoke tube with a short piece of tubing to prevent potential injury from the jagged end of the smoke tube. (2) The test operator shall advise the test subject that the smoke can be irritating to the eyes, lungs, and nasal passages and instruct the subject to keep his/her eyes closed while the test is performed. (3) The test subject shall be allowed to smell a weak concentration of the irritant smoke before the respirator is donned to become familiar with its irritating properties and to determine if he/she can detect the irritating properties of the smoke. The test operator shall carefully direct a small amount of the irritant smoke in the test subject's direction to determine that he/she can detect it. (c) Irritant Smoke Fit Test Procedure (1) The person being fit tested shall don the respirator without assistance, and perform the required user seal check(s). (2) The test subject shall be instructed to keep his/her eyes closed. (3) The test operator shall direct the stream of irritant smoke from the smoke tube toward the faceseal area of the test subject, using the low flow pump or the squeeze bulb. The test operator shall begin at least 12 inches from the facepiece and move the smoke stream around the whole perimeter of the mask. The operator shall gradually make two more passes around the perimeter of the mask, moving to within six inches of the respirator. (4) If the person being tested has not had an involuntary response and/or detected the irritant smoke, proceed with the test exercises. (5) The exercises identified in section I.A. 14. of this appendix shall be performed by the test subject while the respirator seal is being continually challenged by the smoke, directed around the perimeter of the respirator at a distance of six inches. (6) If the person being fit tested reports detecting the irritant smoke at any time, the test is failed. The person being retested must repeat the entire sensitivity check and fit test procedure. (7) Each test subject passing the irritant smoke test without evidence of a response (involuntary cough, irritation) shall be given a second sensitivity screening check, with the smoke from the same smoke tube used during the fit test, once the respirator has been removed, to determine whether he/she still reacts to the smoke. Failure to evoke a response shall void the fit test. (8) If a response is produced during this second sensitivity check, then the fit test is passed. C. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) Protocols The following quantitative fit testing procedures have been demonstrated to be acceptable: Quantitative fit testing using a non-hazardous test aerosol (such as corn oil, polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate [DEHS], or sodium chloride) generated in a test chamber, and employing instrumentation to quantify the fit of the respirator; Quantitative fit testing using ambient aerosol as the test agent and appropriate instrumentation (condensation nuclei counter) to quantify the respirator fit; Quantitative fit testing using controlled negative pressure and appropriate instrumentation to measure the volumetric leak rate of a facepiece to quantify the respirator fit. 1. General (a) The employer shall ensure that persons administering QNFT are able to calibrate equipment and perform tests properly, recognize invalid tests, calculate fit factors properly and ensure that test equipment is in proper working order. (b) The employer shall ensure that QNFT equipment is kept clean, and is maintained and calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions so as to operate at the parameters for which it was designed. 2. Generated Aerosol Quantitative Fit Testing Protocol (a) Apparatus. (1) Instrumentation. Aerosol generation, dilution, and measurement systems using particulates (corn oil, polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate [DEHS] or sodium chloride) as test aerosols shall be used for quantitative fit testing. (2) Test chamber. The test chamber shall be large enough to permit all test subjects to perform freely all required exercises without disturbing the test agent concentration or the measurement apparatus. The test chamber shall be equipped and constructed so that the test agent is effectively isolated from the ambient air, yet uniform in concentration throughout the chamber. (3) When testing air-purifying respirators, the normal filter or cartridge element shall be replaced with a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) or P100 series filter supplied by the same manufacturer. (4) The sampling instrument shall be selected so that a computer record or strip chart record may be made of the test showing the rise and fall of the test agent concentration with each inspiration and expiration at fit factors of at least 2,000. Integrators or computers that integrate the amount of test agent penetration leakage into the respirator for each exercise may be used provided a record of the readings is made. (5) The combination of substitute air-purifying elements, test agent and test agent concentration shall be such that the test subject is not exposed in excess of an established exposure limit for the test agent at any time during the testing process, based upon the length of the exposure and the exposure limit duration. (6) The sampling port on the test specimen respirator shall be placed and constructed so that no leakage occurs around the port (e.g., where the respirator is probed), a free air flow is allowed into the sampling line at all times, and there is no interference with the fit or performance of the respirator. The in-mask sampling device (probe) shall be designed and used so that the air sample is drawn from the breathing zone of the test subject, midway between the nose and mouth and with the probe extending into the facepiece cavity at least 1/4 (7) The test setup shall permit the person administering the test to observe the test subject inside the chamber during the test. (8) The equipment generating the test atmosphere shall maintain the concentration of test agent constant to within a 10 percent variation for the duration of the test. (9) The time lag (interval between an event and the recording of the event on the strip chart or computer or integrator) shall be kept to a minimum. There shall be a clear association between the occurrence of an event and its being recorded. (10) The sampling line tubing for the test chamber atmosphere and for the respirator sampling port shall be of equal diameter and of the same material. The length of the two lines shall be equal. (11) The exhaust flow from the test chamber shall pass through an appropriate filter (i.e., high efficiency particulate filter) before release. (12) When sodium chloride aerosol is used, the relative humidity inside the test chamber shall not exceed 50 percent. (13) The limitations of instrument detection shall be taken into account when determining the fit factor. (14) Test respirators shall be maintained in proper working order and be inspected regularly for deficiencies such as cracks or missing valves and gaskets. (b) Procedural Requirements. (1) When performing the initial user seal check using a positive or negative pressure check, the sampling line shall be crimped closed in order to avoid air pressure leakage during either of these pressure checks. (2) The use of an abbreviated screening QLFT test is optional. Such a test may be utilized in order to quickly identify poor fitting respirators that passed the positive and/or negative pressure test and reduce the amount of QNFT time. The use of the CNC QNFT instrument in the count mode is another optional method to obtain a quick estimate of fit and eliminate poor fitting respirators before going on to perform a full QNFT. (3) A reasonably stable test agent concentration shall be measured in the test chamber prior to testing. For canopy or shower curtain types of test units, the determination of the test agent's stability may be established after the test subject has entered the test environment. (4) Immediately after the subject enters the test chamber, the test agent concentration inside the respirator shall be measured to ensure that the peak penetration does not exceed 5 percent for a half mask or 1 percent for a full facepiece respirator. (5) A stable test agent concentration shall be obtained prior to the actual start of testing. (6) Respirator restraining straps shall not be over-tightened for testing. The straps shall be adjusted by the wearer without assistance from other persons to give a reasonably comfortable fit typical of normal use. The respirator shall not be adjusted once the fit test exercises begin. (7) The test shall be terminated whenever any single peak penetration exceeds 5 percent for half masks and 1 percent for full facepiece respirators. The test subject shall be refitted and retested. (8) Calculation of fit factors. (i) The fit factor shall be determined for the quantitative fit test by taking the ratio of the average chamber concentration to the concentration measured inside the respirator for each test exercise except the grimace exercise. (ii) The average test chamber concentration shall be calculated as the arithmetic average of the concentration measured before and after each test (i.e., 7 exercises) or the arithmetic average of the concentration measured before and after each exercise or the true average measured continuously during the respirator sample. (iii) The concentration of the challenge agent inside the respirator shall be determined by one of the following methods: ( A ( B ( C ( D Where ff 1 2 3 (9) The test subject shall not be permitted to wear a half mask or quarter facepiece respirator unless a minimum fit factor of 100 is obtained, or a full facepiece respirator unless a minimum fit factor of 500 is obtained. (10) Filters used for quantitative fit testing shall be replaced whenever increased breathing resistance is encountered, or when the test agent has altered the integrity of the filter media. 3. Ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing protocol. The ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing (PortaCount®) protocol quantitatively fit tests respirators with the use of a probe. The probed respirator is only used for quantitative fit tests. A probed respirator has a special sampling device, installed on the respirator, that allows the probe to sample the air from inside the mask. A probed respirator is required for each make, style, model, and size that the employer uses and can be obtained from the respirator manufacturer or distributor. The primary CNC instrument manufacturer, TSI Incorporated, also provides probe attachments (TSI mask sampling adapters) that permit fit testing in an employee's own respirator. A minimum fit factor pass level of at least 100 is necessary for a half-mask respirator (elastomeric or filtering facepiece), and a minimum fit factor pass level of at least 500 is required for a full-facepiece elastomeric respirator. The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test. (a) PortaCount® Fit Test Requirements. (1) Check the respirator to make sure the sampling probe and line are properly attached to the facepiece and that the respirator is fitted with a particulate filter capable of preventing significant penetration by the ambient particles used for the fit test (e.g., NIOSH 42 CFR 84 series 100, series 99, or series 95 particulate filter) per manufacturer's instruction. (2) Instruct the person to be tested to don the respirator for five minutes before the fit test starts. This purges the ambient particles trapped inside the respirator and permits the wearer to make certain the respirator is comfortable. This individual shall already have been trained on how to wear the respirator properly. (3) Check the following conditions for the adequacy of the respirator fit: Chin properly placed; Adequate strap tension, not overly tightened; Fit across nose bridge; Respirator of proper size to span distance from nose to chin; Tendency of the respirator to slip; Self-observation in a mirror to evaluate fit and respirator position. (4) Have the person wearing the respirator do a user seal check. If leakage is detected, determine the cause. If leakage is from a poorly fitting facepiece, try another size of the same model respirator, or another model of respirator. (5) Follow the manufacturer's instructions for operating the Portacount® and proceed with the test. (6) The test subject shall be instructed to perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix. (7) After the test exercises, the test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort of the respirator upon completion of the protocol. If it has become unacceptable, another model of respirator shall be tried. (b) PortaCount® Test Instrument. (1) The PortaCount® will automatically stop and calculate the overall fit factor for the entire set of exercises. The overall fit factor is what counts. The Pass or Fail message will indicate whether or not the test was successful. If the test was a Pass, the fit test is over. (2) Since the pass or fail criterion of the PortaCount® is user programmable, the test operator shall ensure that the pass or fail criterion meet the requirements for minimum respirator performance in this Appendix. (3) A record of the test needs to be kept on file, assuming the fit test was successful. The record must contain the test subject's name; overall fit factor; make, model, style, and size of respirator used; and date tested. 4. Modified ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing protocol for full-facepiece and half-mask elastomeric respirators. (a) When administering this protocol to test subjects, employers shall comply with the requirements specified in Part I.C.3 of this appendix (ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing protocol), except they shall use the test exercises described below in paragraph (b) of this protocol instead of the test exercises specified in section I.C.3(a)(6) of this appendix. (b) Employers shall ensure that each test subject being fit tested using this protocol follows the exercise and duration procedures, including the order of administration, described in Table A-1 of this appendix. Table A-1— Modified Ambient Aerosal CNC Quantitative Fit Testing Protocol for Full Facepiece and Half-Mask Elastomeric Respirators Exercises 1 Exercise procedure Measurement procedure Bending Over The test subject shall bend at the waist, as if going to touch his/her toes for 50 seconds and inhale 2 times at the bottom 2 A 20 second ambient sample, followed by a 30 second mask sample. Jogging-in-Place The test subject shall jog in place comfortably for 30 seconds A 30 second mask sample. Head Side-to-Side The test subject shall stand in place, slowly turning his/her head from side to side for 30 seconds and inhale 2 times at each extreme 2 A 30 second mask sample. Head Up-and-Down The test subject shall stand in place, slowly moving his/her head up and down for 39 seconds and inhale 2 times at each extreme 2 A 30 second mask sample followed by a 9 second ambient sample. 1 2 5. Modified ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing protocol for filtering facepiece respirators. (a) When administering this protocol to test subjects, employers shall comply with the requirements specified in Part I.C.3 of this appendix (ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing protocol), except they shall use the test exercises described below in paragraph (b) of this protocol instead of the test exercises specified in section I.C.3(a)(6) of this appendix. (b) Employers shall ensure that each test subject being fit tested using this protocol follows the exercise and duration procedures, including the order of administration, described in Table A-2 of this appendix. Table A-2— Modified Ambient Aerosal CNC Quantitative Fit Testing Protocol for Filtering Facepiece Respirators Exercises 1 Exercise Measurement Bending Over The test subject shall bend at the waist, as if going to touch his/her toes for 50 seconds and inhale 2 times at the bottom 2 A 20 second ambient sample, followed by a 30 second mask sample. Talking The test subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor for 30 seconds. He/she will either read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song A 30 second mask sample. Head Side-to-Side The test subject shall stand in place, slowly turning his/her head from side to side for 30 seconds and inhale 2 times at each extreme 2 A 30 second mask sample. Head Up-and-Down The test subject shall stand in place, slowly moving his/her head up and down for 39 seconds and inhale 2 times at each extreme 2 A 30 second mask sample followed by a 9 second ambient sample. 1 2 6. Controlled negative pressure (CNP) quantitative fit testing protocol. The CNP protocol provides an alternative to aerosol fit test methods. The CNP fit test method technology is based on exhausting air from a temporarily sealed respirator facepiece to generate and then maintain a constant negative pressure inside the facepiece. The rate of air exhaust is controlled so that a constant negative pressure is maintained in the respirator during the fit test. The level of pressure is selected to replicate the mean inspiratory pressure that causes leakage into the respirator under normal use conditions. With pressure held constant, air flow out of the respirator is equal to air flow into the respirator. Therefore, measurement of the exhaust stream that is required to hold the pressure in the temporarily sealed respirator constant yields a direct measure of leakage air flow into the respirator. The CNP fit test method measures leak rates through the facepiece as a method for determining the facepiece fit for negative pressure respirators. The CNP instrument manufacturer Occupational Health Dynamics of Birmingham, Alabama also provides attachments (sampling manifolds) that replace the filter cartridges to permit fit testing in an employee's own respirator. To perform the test, the test subject closes his or her mouth and holds his/her breath, after which an air pump removes air from the respirator facepiece at a pre-selected constant pressure. The facepiece fit is expressed as the leak rate through the facepiece, expressed as milliliters per minute. The quality and validity of the CNP fit tests are determined by the degree to which the in-mask pressure tracks the test pressure during the system measurement time of approximately five seconds. Instantaneous feedback in the form of a real-time pressure trace of the in-mask pressure is provided and used to determine test validity and quality. A minimum fit factor pass level of 100 is necessary for a half-mask respirator and a minimum fit factor of at least 500 is required for a full facepiece respirator. The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test. (a) CNP Fit Test Requirements. (1) The instrument shall have a non-adjustable test pressure of 15.0 mm water pressure. (2) The CNP system defaults selected for test pressure shall be set at −15 mm of water (-0.58 inches of water) and the modeled inspiratory flow rate shall be 53.8 liters per minute for performing fit tests. Note: CNP systems have built-in capability to conduct fit testing that is specific to unique work rate, mask, and gender situations that might apply in a specific workplace. Use of system default values, which were selected to represent respirator wear with medium cartridge resistance at a low-moderate work rate, will allow inter-test comparison of the respirator fit.) (3) The individual who conducts the CNP fit testing shall be thoroughly trained to perform the test. (4) The respirator filter or cartridge needs to be replaced with the CNP test manifold. The inhalation valve downstream from the manifold either needs to be temporarily removed or propped open. (5) The employer must train the test subject to hold his or her breath for at least 10 seconds. (6) The test subject must don the test respirator without any assistance from the test administrator who is conducting the CNP fit test. The respirator must not be adjusted once the fit-test exercises begin. Any adjustment voids the test, and the test subject must repeat the fit test. (7) The QNFT protocol shall be followed according to section I. C. 1. of this appendix with an exception for the CNP test exercises. (b) CNP Test Exercises. (1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally for 1 minute. After the normal breathing exercise, the subject needs to hold head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement. (2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing position, the subject shall breathe slowly and deeply for 1 minute, being careful not to hyperventilate. After the deep breathing exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement. (3) Turning head side to side. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly turn his or her head from side to side between the extreme positions on each side for 1 minute. The head shall be held at each extreme momentarily so the subject can inhale at each side. After the turning head side to side exercise, the subject needs to hold head full left and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement. Next, the subject needs to hold head full right and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement. (4) Moving head up and down. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly move his or her head up and down for 1 minute. The subject shall be instructed to inhale in the up position (i.e., when looking toward the ceiling). After the moving head up and down exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head full up and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement. Next, the subject shall hold his or her head full down and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement. (5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor. The subject can read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song for 1 minute. After the talking exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement. (6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning for 15 seconds. (7) Bending Over. The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he or she were to touch his or her toes for 1 minute. Jogging in place shall be substituted for this exercise in those test environments such as shroud-type QNFT units that prohibit bending at the waist. After the bending over exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement. (8) Normal Breathing. The test subject shall remove and re-don the respirator within a one-minute period. Then, in a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally for 1 minute. After the normal breathing exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement. After the test exercises, the test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort of the respirator upon completion of the protocol. If it has become unacceptable, another model of a respirator shall be tried. (c) CNP Test Instrument. (1) The test instrument must have an effective audio-warning device, or a visual-warning device in the form of a screen tracing, that indicates when the test subject fails to hold his or her breath during the test. The test must be terminated and restarted from the beginning when the test subject fails to hold his or her breath during the test. The test subject then may be refitted and retested. (2) A record of the test shall be kept on file, assuming the fit test was successful. The record must contain the test subject's name; overall fit factor; make, model, style and size of respirator used; and date tested. 7. Controlled negative pressure (CNP) REDON quantitative fit testing protocol. (a) When administering this protocol to test subjects, employers must comply with the requirements specified in paragraphs (a) and (c) of part I.C.6 of this appendix (“Controlled negative pressure (CNP) quantitative fit testing protocol,”) as well as use the test exercises described below in paragraph (b) of this protocol instead of the test exercises specified in paragraph (b) of part I.C.6 of this appendix. (b) Employers must ensure that each test subject being fit tested using this protocol follows the exercise and measurement procedures, including the order of administration described in Table A-3 of this appendix. Table A-3—CNP REDON Quantitative Fit Testing Protocol Exercises 1 Exercise procedure Measurement procedure Facing Forward Stand and breathe normally, without talking, for 30 seconds Face forward, while holding breath for 10 seconds. Bending Over Bend at the waist, as if going to touch his or her toes, for 30 seconds Face parallel to the floor, while holding breath for 10 seconds Head Shaking For about three seconds, shake head back and forth vigorously several times while shouting Face forward, while holding breath for 10 seconds REDON 1 Remove the respirator mask, loosen all facepiece straps, and then redon the respirator mask Face forward, while holding breath for 10 seconds. REDON 2 Remove the respirator mask, loosen all facepiece straps, and then redon the respirator mask again Face forward, while holding breath for 10 seconds. 1 (c) After completing the test exercises, the test administrator must question each test subject regarding the comfort of the respirator. When a test subject states that the respirator is unacceptable, the employer must ensure that the test administrator repeats the protocol using another respirator model. (d) Employers must determine the overall fit factor for each test subject by calculating the harmonic mean of the fit testing exercises as follows: Where: N = The number of exercises; FF 1 FF 2 FF N Part II. New Fit Test Protocols A. Any person may submit to OSHA an application for approval of a new fit test protocol. If the application meets the following criteria, OSHA will initiate a rulemaking proceeding under section 6(b)(7) of the OSH Act to determine whether to list the new protocol as an approved protocol in this appendix A. B. The application must include a detailed description of the proposed new fit test protocol. This application must be supported by either: 1. A test report prepared by an independent government research laboratory (e.g., Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, Los Alamos National Laboratory, the National Institute for Standards and Technology) stating that the laboratory has tested the protocol and had found it to be accurate and reliable; or 2. An article that has been published in a peer-reviewed industrial hygiene journal describing the protocol and explaining how test data support the protocol's accuracy and reliability. C. If OSHA determines that additional information is required before the Agency commences a rulemaking proceeding under this section, OSHA will so notify the applicant and afford the applicant the opportunity to submit the supplemental information. Initiation of a rulemaking proceeding will be deferred until OSHA has received and evaluated the supplemental information. Appendix B-1 to § 1910.134: User Seal Check Procedures (Mandatory) The individual who uses a tight-fitting respirator is to perform a user seal check to ensure that an adequate seal is achieved each time the respirator is put on. Either the positive and negative pressure checks listed in this appendix, or the respirator manufacturer's recommended user seal check method shall be used. User seal checks are not substitutes for qualitative or quantitative fit tests. I. Facepiece Positive and/or Negative Pressure Checks A. Positive pressure check. B. Negative pressure check. II. Manufacturer's Recommended User Seal Check Procedures The respirator manufacturer's recommended procedures for performing a user seal check may be used instead of the positive and/or negative pressure check procedures provided that the employer demonstrates that the manufacturer's procedures are equally effective. Appendix B-2 to § 1910.134: Respirator Cleaning Procedures (Mandatory) These procedures are provided for employer use when cleaning respirators. They are general in nature, and the employer as an alternative may use the cleaning recommendations provided by the manufacturer of the respirators used by their employees, provided such procedures are as effective as those listed here in appendix B-2. Equivalent effectiveness simply means that the procedures used must accomplish the objectives set forth in appendix B-2, i.e., must ensure that the respirator is properly cleaned and disinfected in a manner that prevents damage to the respirator and does not cause harm to the user. I. Procedures for Cleaning Respirators A. Remove filters, cartridges, or canisters. Disassemble facepieces by removing speaking diaphragms, demand and pressure-demand valve assemblies, hoses, or any components recommended by the manufacturer. Discard or repair any defective parts. B. Wash components in warm (43 °C [110 °F] maximum) water with a mild detergent or with a cleaner recommended by the manufacturer. A stiff bristle (not wire) brush may be used to facilitate the removal of dirt. C. Rinse components thoroughly in clean, warm (43 °C [110 °F] maximum), preferably running water. Drain. D. When the cleaner used does not contain a disinfecting agent, respirator components should be immersed for two minutes in one of the following: 1. Hypochlorite solution (50 ppm of chlorine) made by adding approximately one milliliter of laundry bleach to one liter of water at 43 °C (110 °F); or, 2. Aqueous solution of iodine (50 ppm iodine) made by adding approximately 0.8 milliliters of tincture of iodine (6-8 grams ammonium and/or potassium iodide/100 cc of 45% alcohol) to one liter of water at 43 °C (110 °F); or, 3. Other commercially available cleansers of equivalent disinfectant quality when used as directed, if their use is recommended or approved by the respirator manufacturer. E. Rinse components thoroughly in clean, warm (43 °C [110 °F] maximum), preferably running water. Drain. The importance of thorough rinsing cannot be overemphasized. Detergents or disinfectants that dry on facepieces may result in dermatitis. In addition, some disinfectants may cause deterioration of rubber or corrosion of metal parts if not completely removed. F. Components should be hand-dried with a clean lint-free cloth or air-dried. G. Reassemble facepiece, replacing filters, cartridges, and canisters where necessary. H. Test the respirator to ensure that all components work properly. Appendix C to § 1910.134: OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire (Mandatory) To the employer: Answers to questions in Section 1, and to question 9 in Section 2 of part A, do not require a medical examination. To the employee: Your employer must allow you to answer this questionnaire during normal working hours, or at a time and place that is convenient to you. To maintain your confidentiality, your employer or supervisor must not look at or review your answers, and your employer must tell you how to deliver or send this questionnaire to the health care professional who will review it. Part A. Section 1. (Mandatory) The following information must be provided by every employee who has been selected to use any type of respirator (please print). 1. Today's date: 2. Your name: 3. Your age (to nearest year): 4. Sex (circle one): Male/Female 5. Your height: __ ft. __ in. 6. Your weight: __ lbs. 7. Your job title: 8. A phone number where you can be reached by the health care professional who reviews this questionnaire (include the Area Code): ___ 9. The best time to phone you at this number: __ 10. Has your employer told you how to contact the health care professional who will review this questionnaire (circle one): Yes/No 11. Check the type of respirator you will use (you can check more than one category): a. __ N, R, or P disposable respirator (filter-mask, non-cartridge type only). b. __ Other type (for example, half- or full-facepiece type, powered-air purifying, supplied-air, self-contained breathing apparatus). 12. Have you worn a respirator (circle one): Yes/No 7 If “yes,” what type(s): Part A. Section 2. (Mandatory) Questions 1 through 9 below must be answered by every employee who has been selected to use any type of respirator (please circle “yes” or “no”). 1. Do you currently 2. Have you ever had a. Seizures: Yes/No b. Diabetes (sugar disease): Yes/No c. Allergic reactions that interfere with your breathing: Yes/No d. Claustrophobia (fear of closed-in places): Yes/No e. Trouble smelling odors: Yes/No 3. Have you ever had a. Asbestosis: Yes/No b. Asthma: Yes/No c. Chronic bronchitis: Yes/No d. Emphysema: Yes/No e. Pneumonia: Yes/No f. Tuberculosis: Yes/No g. Silicosis: Yes/No h. Pneumothorax (collapsed lung): Yes/No i. Lung cancer: Yes/No j. Broken ribs: Yes/No k. Any chest injuries or surgeries: Yes/No l. Any other lung problem that you've been told about: Yes/No 4. Do you currently a. Shortness of breath: Yes/No b. Shortness of breath when walking fast on level ground or walking up a slight hill or incline: Yes/No c. Shortness of breath when walking with other people at an ordinary pace on level ground: Yes/No d. Have to stop for breath when walking at your own pace on level ground: Yes/No e. Shortness of breath when washing or dressing yourself: Yes/No f. Shortness of breath that interferes with your job: Yes/No g. Coughing that produces phlegm (thick sputum): Yes/No h. Coughing that wakes you early in the morning: Yes/No i. Coughing that occurs mostly when you are lying down: Yes/No j. Coughing up blood in the last month: Yes/No k. Wheezing: Yes/No l. Wheezing that interferes with your job: Yes/No m. Chest pain when you breathe deeply: Yes/No n. Any other symptoms that you think may be related to lung problems: Yes/No 5. Have you ever had a. Heart attack: Yes/No b. Stroke: Yes/No c. Angina: Yes/No d. Heart failure: Yes/No e. Swelling in your legs or feet (not caused by walking): Yes/No f. Heart arrhythmia (heart beating irregularly): Yes/No g. High blood pressure: Yes/No h. Any other heart problem that you've been told about: Yes/No 6. Have you ever had a. Frequent pain or tightness in your chest: Yes/No b. Pain or tightness in your chest during physical activity: Yes/No c. Pain or tightness in your chest that interferes with your job: Yes/No d. In the past two years, have you noticed your heart skipping or missing a beat: Yes/No e. Heartburn or indigestion that is not related to eating: Yes/No f. Any other symptoms that you think may be related to heart or circulation problems: Yes/No 7. Do you currently a. Breathing or lung problems: Yes/No b. Heart trouble: Yes/No c. Blood pressure: Yes/No d. Seizures: Yes/No 8. If you've used a respirator, have you ever had a. Eye irritation: Yes/No b. Skin allergies or rashes: Yes/No c. Anxiety: Yes/No d. General weakness or fatigue: Yes/No e. Any other problem that interferes with your use of a respirator: Yes/No 9. Would you like to talk to the health care professional who will review this questionnaire about your answers to this questionnaire: Yes/No Questions 10 to 15 below must be answered by every employee who has been selected to use either a full-facepiece respirator or a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). For employees who have been selected to use other types of respirators, answering these questions is voluntary. 10. Have you ever lost 11. Do you currently a. Wear contact lenses: Yes/No b. Wear glasses: Yes/No c. Color blind: Yes/No d. Any other eye or vision problem: Yes/No 12. Have you ever had 13. Do you currently a. Difficulty hearing: Yes/No b. Wear a hearing aid: Yes/No c. Any other hearing or ear problem: Yes/No 14. Have you ever had 15. Do you currently a. Weakness in any of your arms, hands, legs, or feet: Yes/No b. Back pain: Yes/No c. Difficulty fully moving your arms and legs: Yes/No d. Pain or stiffness when you lean forward or backward at the waist: Yes/No e. Difficulty fully moving your head up or down: Yes/No f. Difficulty fully moving your head side to side: Yes/No g. Difficulty bending at your knees: Yes/No h. Difficulty squatting to the ground: Yes/No i. Climbing a flight of stairs or a ladder carrying more than 25 lbs: Yes/No j. Any other muscle or skeletal problem that interferes with using a respirator: Yes/No Part B Any of the following questions, and other questions not listed, may be added to the questionnaire at the discretion of the health care professional who will review the questionnaire. 1. In your present job, are you working at high altitudes (over 5,000 feet) or in a place that has lower than normal amounts of oxygen: Yes/No If “yes,” do you have feelings of dizziness, shortness of breath, pounding in your chest, or other symptoms when you're working under these conditions: Yes/No 2. At work or at home, have you ever been exposed to hazardous solvents, hazardous airborne chemicals ( e.g., If “yes,” name the chemicals if you know them: 3. Have you ever worked with any of the materials, or under any of the conditions, listed below: a. Asbestos: Yes/No b. Silica ( e.g., c. Tungsten/cobalt ( e.g., d. Beryllium: Yes/No e. Aluminum: Yes/No f. Coal (for example, mining): Yes/No g. Iron: Yes/No h. Tin: Yes/No i. Dusty environments: Yes/No j. Any other hazardous exposures: Yes/No If “yes,” describe these exposures: 4. List any second jobs or side businesses you have: 5. List your previous occupations: 6. List your current and previous hobbies: 7. Have you been in the military services? Yes/No If “yes,” were you exposed to biological or chemical agents (either in training or combat): Yes/No 8. Have you ever worked on a HAZMAT team? Yes/No 9. Other than medications for breathing and lung problems, heart trouble, blood pressure, and seizures mentioned earlier in this questionnaire, are you taking any other medications for any reason (including over-the-counter medications): Yes/No If “yes,” name the medications if you know them: 10. Will you be using any of the following items with your respirator(s)? a. HEPA Filters: Yes/No b. Canisters (for example, gas masks): Yes/No c. Cartridges: Yes/No 11. How often are you expected to use the respirator(s) (circle “yes” or “no” for all answers that apply to you)?: a. Escape only (no rescue): Yes/No b. Emergency rescue only: Yes/No c. Less than 5 hours per week: d. Less than 2 hours per day: e. 2 to 4 hours per day: f. Over 4 hours per day: 12. During the period you are using the respirator(s), is your work effort: a. Light If “yes,” how long does this period last during the average shift:______hrs.______mins. Examples of a light work effort are sitting standing b. Moderate If “yes,” how long does this period last during the average shift:______hrs.______mins. Examples of moderate work effort are sitting driving standing walking pushing c. Heavy If “yes,” how long does this period last during the average shift:______hrs.______mins. Examples of heavy work are lifting working shoveling; standing walking climbing 13. Will you be wearing protective clothing and/or equipment (other than the respirator) when you're using your respirator: Yes/No If “yes,” describe this protective clothing and/or equipment: 14. Will you be working under hot conditions (temperature exceeding 77 °F): Yes/No 15. Will you be working under humid conditions: Yes/No 16. Describe the work you'll be doing while you're using your respirator(s): 17. Describe any special or hazardous conditions you might encounter when you're using your respirator(s) (for example, confined spaces, life-threatening gases): 18. Provide the following information, if you know it, for each toxic substance that you'll be exposed to when you're using your respirator(s): Name of the first toxic substance: Estimated maximum exposure level per shift: Duration of exposure per shift Name of the second toxic substance: Estimated maximum exposure level per shift: Duration of exposure per shift: Name of the third toxic substance: Estimated maximum exposure level per shift: Duration of exposure per shift: The name of any other toxic substances that you'll be exposed to while using your respirator: 19. Describe any special responsibilities you'll have while using your respirator(s) that may affect the safety and well-being of others (for example, rescue, security): Appendix D to § 1910.134 (Mandatory) Information for Employees Using Respirators When Not Required Under the Standard Respirators are an effective method of protection against designated hazards when properly selected and worn. Respirator use is encouraged, even when exposures are below the exposure limit, to provide an additional level of comfort and protection for workers. However, if a respirator is used improperly or not kept clean, the respirator itself can become a hazard to the worker. Sometimes, workers may wear respirators to avoid exposures to hazards, even if the amount of hazardous substance does not exceed the limits set by OSHA standards. If your employer provides respirators for your voluntary use, or if you provide your own respirator, you need to take certain precautions to be sure that the respirator itself does not present a hazard. You should do the following: 1. Read and heed all instructions provided by the manufacturer on use, maintenance, cleaning and care, and warnings regarding the respirators limitations. 2. Choose respirators certified for use to protect against the contaminant of concern. NIOSH, the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, certifies respirators. A label or statement of certification should appear on the respirator or respirator packaging. It will tell you what the respirator is designed for and how much it will protect you. 3. Do not wear your respirator into atmospheres containing contaminants for which your respirator is not designed to protect against. For example, a respirator designed to filter dust particles will not protect you against gases, vapors, or very small solid particles of fumes or smoke. 4. Keep track of your respirator so that you do not mistakenly use someone else's respirator. [63 FR 1270, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 20098, 20099, Apr. 23, 1998, as amended at 69 FR 46993, Aug. 4, 2004; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50187, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 46949, Aug. 7, 2012; 84 FR 50755, Sept. 26, 2019] § 1910.135 Head protection. (a) General requirements. (2) The employer shall ensure that a protective helmet designed to reduce electrical shock hazard is worn by each such affected employee when near exposed electrical conductors which could contact the head. (b) Criteria for head protection. (i) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2009, “American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection,” incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; (ii) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2003, “American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection,” incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; or (iii) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-1997, “American National Standard for Personnel Protection—Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers—Requirements,” incorporated by reference in § 1910.6. (2) Head protection devices that the employer demonstrates are at least as effective as head protection devices that are constructed in accordance with one of the above consensus standards will be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of this section. [59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009; 77 FR 37598, June 22, 2012] § 1910.136 Foot protection. (a) General requirements. (b) Criteria for protective footwear. (i) ASTM F-2412-2005, “Standard Test Methods for Foot Protection,” and ASTM F-2413-2005, “Standard Specification for Performance Requirements for Protective Footwear,” which are incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; (ii) ANSI Z41-1999, “American National Standard for Personal Protection—Protective Footwear,” which is incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; or (iii) ANSI Z41-1991, “American National Standard for Personal Protection—Protective Footwear,” which is incorporated by reference in § 1910.6. (2) Protective footwear that the employer demonstrates is at least as effective as protective footwear that is constructed in accordance with one of the above consensus standards will be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of this section. [59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, 1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 61 FR 21228, May 9, 1996; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009; 79 FR 20629, Apr. 11, 2014] § 1910.137 Electrical protective equipment. (a) Design requirements for specific types of electrical protective equipment. (1) Manufacture and marking of rubber insulating equipment. (ii) Each item shall be clearly marked as follows: (A) Class 00 equipment shall be marked Class 00. (B) Class 0 equipment shall be marked Class 0. (C) Class 1 equipment shall be marked Class 1. (D) Class 2 equipment shall be marked Class 2. (E) Class 3 equipment shall be marked Class 3. (F) Class 4 equipment shall be marked Class 4. (G) Nonozone-resistant equipment shall be marked Type I. (H) Ozone-resistant equipment shall be marked Type II. (I) Other relevant markings, such as the manufacturer's identification and the size of the equipment, may also be provided. (iii) Markings shall be nonconducting and shall be applied in such a manner as not to impair the insulating qualities of the equipment. (iv) Markings on gloves shall be confined to the cuff portion of the glove. (2) Electrical requirements. (A) The proof test shall reliably indicate that the equipment can withstand the voltage involved. (B) The test voltage shall be applied continuously for 3 minutes for equipment other than matting and shall be applied continuously for 1 minute for matting. (C) Gloves shall also be capable of separately withstanding the ac proof-test voltage specified in Table I-1 after a 16-hour water soak. (See the note following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) (ii) When the ac proof test is used on gloves, the 60-hertz proof-test current may not exceed the values specified in Table I-1 at any time during the test period. (A) If the ac proof test is made at a frequency other than 60 hertz, the permissible proof-test current shall be computed from the direct ratio of the frequencies. (B) For the test, gloves (right side out) shall be filled with tap water and immersed in water to a depth that is in accordance with Table I-3. Water shall be added to or removed from the glove, as necessary, so that the water level is the same inside and outside the glove. (C) After the 16-hour water soak specified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C) of this section, the 60-hertz proof-test current may not exceed the values given in Table I-1 by more than 2 milliamperes. (iii) Equipment that has been subjected to a minimum breakdown voltage test may not be used for electrical protection. (See the note following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) (iv) Material used for Type II insulating equipment shall be capable of withstanding an ozone test, with no visible effects. The ozone test shall reliably indicate that the material will resist ozone exposure in actual use. Any visible signs of ozone deterioration of the material, such as checking, cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evidence of failure to meet the requirements for ozone-resistant material. (See the note following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) (3) Workmanship and finish. (ii) Surface irregularities that may be present on all rubber goods (because of imperfections on forms or molds or because of inherent difficulties in the manufacturing process) and that may appear as indentations, protuberances, or imbedded foreign material are acceptable under the following conditions: (A) The indentation or protuberance blends into a smooth slope when the material is stretched. (B) Foreign material remains in place when the insulating material is folded and stretches with the insulating material surrounding it. Note to paragraph ( a Rubber insulating equipment meeting the following national consensus standards is deemed to be in compliance with the performance requirements of paragraph (a) of this section: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D120-09, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves. ASTM D178-01 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting. ASTM D1048-12, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets. ASTM D1049-98 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers. ASTM D1050-05 (2011), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. ASTM D1051-08, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves. The preceding standards also contain specifications for conducting the various tests required in paragraph (a) of this section. For example, the ac and dc proof tests, the breakdown test, the water-soak procedure, and the ozone test mentioned in this paragraph are described in detail in these ASTM standards. ASTM F1236-96 (2012), Standard Guide for Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rubber Products, ASTM F819-10, Standard Terminology Relating to Electrical Protective Equipment for Workers, (b) Design requirements for other types of electrical protective equipment. (1) Voltage withstand. Note to paragraph ( b These voltages include transient overvoltages, such as switching surges, as well as nominal line voltage. See appendix B to § 1910.269 for a discussion of transient overvoltages on electric power transmission and distribution systems. See IEEE Std 516-2009, IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines, (2) Equipment current. (ii) When insulating equipment is tested in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section, the equipment current may not exceed 1 microampere per kilovolt of phase-to-phase applied voltage. Note 1 to paragraph ( b This paragraph applies to equipment that provides primary insulation of employees from energized parts. It does not apply to equipment used for secondary insulation or equipment used for brush contact only. Note 2 to paragraph ( b For ac excitation, this current consists of three components: Capacitive current because of the dielectric properties of the insulating material itself; conduction current through the volume of the insulating equipment; and leakage current along the surface of the tool or equipment. The conduction current is normally negligible. For clean, dry insulating equipment, the leakage current is small, and the capacitive current predominates. Note to paragraph ( b Plastic guard equipment is deemed to conform to the performance requirements of paragraph (b) of this section if it meets, and is used in accordance with, ASTM F712-06 (2011), Standard Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment for Protection of Workers. (c) In-service care and use of electrical protective equipment General. (2) Specific requirements. (i) Maximum use voltages shall conform to those listed in Table I-4. (ii) Insulating equipment shall be inspected for damage before each day's use and immediately following any incident that can reasonably be suspected of causing damage. Insulating gloves shall be given an air test, along with the inspection. Note to paragraph ( c ii ASTM F1236-96 (2012), Standard Guide for Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rubber Products, (iii) Insulating equipment with any of the following defects may not be used: (A) A hole, tear, puncture, or cut; (B) Ozone cutting or ozone checking (that is, a series of interlacing cracks produced by ozone on rubber under mechanical stress); (C) An embedded foreign object; (D) Any of the following texture changes: swelling, softening, hardening, or becoming sticky or inelastic. (E) Any other defect that damages the insulating properties. (iv) Insulating equipment found to have other defects that might affect its insulating properties shall be removed from service and returned for testing under paragraphs (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(ix) of this section. (v) Insulating equipment shall be cleaned as needed to remove foreign substances. (vi) Insulating equipment shall be stored in such a location and in such a manner as to protect it from light, temperature extremes, excessive humidity, ozone, and other damaging substances and conditions. (vii) Protector gloves shall be worn over insulating gloves, except as follows: (A) Protector gloves need not be used with Class 0 gloves, under limited-use conditions, when small equipment and parts manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity. Note to paragraph ( c vii Persons inspecting rubber insulating gloves used under these conditions need to take extra care in visually examining them. Employees using rubber insulating gloves under these conditions need to take extra care to avoid handling sharp objects. (B) If the voltage does not exceed 250 volts, ac, or 375 volts, dc, protector gloves need not be used with Class 00 gloves, under limited-use conditions, when small equipment and parts manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity. Note to paragraph ( c vii Persons inspecting rubber insulating gloves used under these conditions need to take extra care in visually examining them. Employees using rubber insulating gloves under these conditions need to take extra care to avoid handling sharp objects. (C) Any other class of glove may be used without protector gloves, under limited-use conditions, when small equipment and parts manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity but only if the employer can demonstrate that the possibility of physical damage to the gloves is small and if the class of glove is one class higher than that required for the voltage involved. (D) Insulating gloves that have been used without protector gloves may not be reused until they have been tested under the provisions of paragraphs (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(ix) of this section. (viii) Electrical protective equipment shall be subjected to periodic electrical tests. Test voltages and the maximum intervals between tests shall be in accordance with Table I-4 and Table I-5. (ix) The test method used under paragraphs (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(xi) of this section shall reliably indicate whether the insulating equipment can withstand the voltages involved. Note to paragraph ( c ix Standard electrical test methods considered as meeting this paragraph are given in the following national consensus standards: ASTM D120-09, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves. ASTM D178-01 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting. ASTM D1048-12, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets. ASTM D1049-98 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers. ASTM D1050-05 (2011), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. ASTM D1051-08, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves. ASTM F478-09, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers. ASTM F479-06 (2011), Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets. ASTM F496-08, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves. (x) Insulating equipment failing to pass inspections or electrical tests may not be used by employees, except as follows: (A) Rubber insulating line hose may be used in shorter lengths with the defective portion cut off. (B) Rubber insulating blankets may be salvaged by severing the defective area from the undamaged portion of the blanket. The resulting undamaged area may not be smaller than 560 millimeters by 560 millimeters (22 inches by 22 inches) for Class 1, 2, 3, and 4 blankets. (C) Rubber insulating blankets may be repaired using a compatible patch that results in physical and electrical properties equal to those of the blanket. (D) Rubber insulating gloves and sleeves with minor physical defects, such as small cuts, tears, or punctures, may be repaired by the application of a compatible patch. Also, rubber insulating gloves and sleeves with minor surface blemishes may be repaired with a compatible liquid compound. The repaired area shall have electrical and physical properties equal to those of the surrounding material. Repairs to gloves are permitted only in the area between the wrist and the reinforced edge of the opening. (xi) Repaired insulating equipment shall be retested before it may be used by employees. (xii) The employer shall certify that equipment has been tested in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (c)(2)(iv), (c)(2)(vii)(D), (c)(2)(viii), (c)(2)(ix), and (c)(2)(xi) of this section. The certification shall identify the equipment that passed the test and the date it was tested and shall be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary for Occupational Safety and Health and to employees or their authorized representatives. Note to paragraph ( c xii Marking equipment with, and entering onto logs, the results of the tests and the dates of testing are two acceptable means of meeting the certification requirement. Table I-1—AC Proof-Test Requirements Class of Equipment Proof-test Maximum proof-test current, mA 280-mm 360-mm 410-mm 460-mm 00 2,500 8 12 0 5,000 8 12 14 16 1 10,000 14 16 18 2 20,000 16 18 20 3 30,000 18 20 22 4 40,000 22 24 Table I-2—DC Proof-Test Requirements Class of equipment Proof-test voltage 00 10,000 0 20,000 1 40,000 2 50,000 3 60,000 4 70,000 Note: Table I-3—Glove Tests—Water Level 1 2 Class of glove AC proof test DC proof test mm in mm in 00 38 1.5 38 1.5 0 38 1.5 38 1.5 1 38 1.5 51 2.0 2 64 2.5 76 3.0 3 89 3.5 102 4.0 4 127 5.0 153 6.0 1 2 Table I-4—Rubber Insulating Equipment, Voltage Requirements Class of equipment Maximum 1 Retest 2 Retest 2 00 500 2,500 10,000 0 1,000 5,000 20,000 1 7,500 10,000 40,000 2 17,000 20,000 50,000 3 26,500 30,000 60,000 4 36,000 40,000 70,000 1 (1) There is no multiphase exposure in a system area and the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potential, or (2) The electric equipment and devices are insulated or isolated or both so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded wye circuit is removed. 2 Table I-5—Rubber Insulating Equipment, Test Intervals Type of When to test Rubber insulating line hose Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair. Rubber insulating covers Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair. Rubber insulating blankets Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter; 1 Rubber insulating gloves Before first issue and every 6 months thereafter; 1 Rubber insulating sleeves Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter; 1 1 [79 FR 20629, Apr. 11, 2014] § 1910.138 Hand protection. (a) General requirements. (b) Selection. [59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, 1994] § 1910.139 [Reserved] § 1910.140 Personal fall protection systems. (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions. Anchorage Belt terminal Body belt Body harness Carabiner Competent person Connector D-ring (i) In a harness as an integral attachment element or fall arrest attachment; (ii) In a lanyard, energy absorber, lifeline, or anchorage connector as an integral connector; or (iii) In a positioning or travel restraint system as an attachment element. Deceleration device Deceleration distance Equivalent Free fall Free fall distance Lanyard Lifeline Personal fall arrest system Personal fall protection system Positioning system Qualified Rope grab Safety factor Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard Snaphook (i) Automatic-locking type (permitted) with a self-closing and self-locking gate that remains closed and locked until intentionally unlocked and opened for connection or disconnection; and (ii) Non-locking type (prohibited) with a self-closing gate that remains closed, but not locked, until intentionally opened for connection or disconnection. Travel restraint (tether) line Travel restraint system Window cleaner's belt Window cleaner's belt anchor (window anchor) Window cleaner's positioning system Work-positioning system Positioning system (c) General requirements. (1) Connectors must be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or made of equivalent materials. (2) Connectors must have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and edges must be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of the system. (3) When vertical lifelines are used, each employee must be attached to a separate lifeline. (4) Lanyards and vertical lifelines must have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). (5) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards that automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less must have components capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN) applied to the device with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position. (6) A competent person or qualified person must inspect each knot in a lanyard or vertical lifeline to ensure that it meets the requirements of paragraphs (c)(4) and (5) of this section before any employee uses the lanyard or lifeline. (7) D-rings, snaphooks, and carabiners must be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). (8) D-rings, snaphooks, and carabiners must be proof tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or incurring permanent deformation. The gate strength of snaphooks and carabiners must be capable of withstanding a minimum load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without the gate separating from the nose of the snaphook or carabiner body by more than 0.125 inches (3.175 mm). (9) Snaphooks and carabiners must be the automatic locking type that require at least two separate, consecutive movements to open. (10) Snaphooks and carabiners must not be connected to any of the following unless they are designed for such connections: (i) Directly to webbing, rope, or wire rope; (ii) To each other; (iii) To a D-ring to which another snaphook, carabiner, or connector is attached; (iv) To a horizontal life line; or (v) To any object that is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in relation to the snaphook or carabiner such that unintentional disengagement could occur when the connected object depresses the snaphook or carabiner gate, allowing the components to separate. (11) The employer must ensure that each horizontal lifeline: (i) Is designed, installed, and used under the supervision of a qualified person; and (ii) Is part of a complete personal fall arrest system that maintains a safety factor of at least two. (12) Anchorages used to attach to personal fall protection equipment must be independent of any anchorage used to suspend employees or platforms on which employees work. Anchorages used to attach to personal fall protection equipment on mobile work platforms on powered industrial trucks must be attached to an overhead member of the platform, at a point located above and near the center of the platform. (13) Anchorages, except window cleaners' belt anchors covered by paragraph (e) of this section, must be: (i) Capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) for each employee attached; or (ii) Designed, installed, and used, under the supervision of qualified person, as part of a complete personal fall protection system that maintains a safety factor of at least two. (14) Travel restraint lines must be capable of sustaining a tensile load of at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). (15) Lifelines must not be made of natural fiber rope. Polypropylene rope must contain an ultraviolet (UV) light inhibitor. (16) Personal fall protection systems and their components must be used exclusively for employee fall protection and not for any other purpose, such as hoisting equipment or materials. (17) A personal fall protection system or its components subjected to impact loading must be removed from service immediately and not used again until a competent person inspects the system or components and determines that it is not damaged and safe for use for employee personal fall protection. (18) Personal fall protection systems must be inspected before initial use during each workshift for mildew, wear, damage, and other deterioration, and defective components must be removed from service. (19) Ropes, belts, lanyards, and harnesses used for personal fall protection must be compatible with all connectors used. (20) Ropes, belts, lanyards, lifelines, and harnesses used for personal fall protection must be protected from being cut, abraded, melted, or otherwise damaged. (21) The employer must provide for prompt rescue of each employee in the event of a fall. (22) Personal fall protection systems must be worn with the attachment point of the body harness located in the center of the employee's back near shoulder level. The attachment point may be located in the pre-sternal position if the free fall distance is limited to 2 feet (0.6 m) or less. (d) Personal fall arrest systems System performance criteria. (i) Limit the maximum arresting force on the employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN); (ii) Bring the employee to a complete stop and limit the maximum deceleration distance the employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.1 m); (iii) Have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact energy of the employee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall distance permitted by the system; and (iv) Sustain the employee within the system/strap configuration without making contact with the employee's neck and chin area. (v) If the personal fall arrest system meets the criteria and protocols in appendix D of this subpart, and is being used by an employee having a combined body and tool weight of less than 310 pounds (140 kg), the system is considered to be in compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section. If the system is used by an employee having a combined body and tool weight of 310 pounds (140kg) or more and the employer has appropriately modified the criteria and protocols in appendix D, then the system will be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (iii). (2) System use criteria. (i) On any horizontal lifeline that may become a vertical lifeline, the device used to connect to the horizontal lifeline is capable of locking in both directions on the lifeline. (ii) Personal fall arrest systems are rigged in such a manner that the employee cannot free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m) or contact a lower level. A free fall may be more than 6 feet (1.8 m) provided the employer can demonstrate the manufacturer designed the system to allow a free fall of more than 6 feet and tested the system to ensure a maximum arresting force of 1,800 pounds (8 kN) is not exceeded. (3) Body belts. (e) Positioning systems System performance requirements. (i) General. (ii) Window cleaners' positioning systems. (A) Be capable of withstanding without failure a drop test consisting of a 6-foot (1.8-m) drop of a 250-pound (113-kg) weight; and (B) Limit the initial arresting force on the falling employee to not more than 2,000 pounds (8.9 kN), with a duration not exceeding 2 milliseconds and any subsequent arresting forces to not more than 1,000 pounds (4.5 kN). (iii) Positioning systems, including window cleaners' positioning systems, that meet the test methods and procedures in appendix D of this subpart are considered to be in compliance with paragraphs (e)(1)(i) and (ii). (iv) Lineman's body belt and pole strap systems. (A) A dielectric test of 819.7 volts, AC, per centimeter (25,000 volts per foot) for 3 minutes without visible deterioration; (B) A leakage test of 98.4 volts, AC, per centimeter (3,000 volts per foot) with a leakage current of no more than 1 mA; and (C) A flammability test in accordance with Table I-7 of this section. (2) System use criteria for window cleaners' positioning systems. (i) Window cleaners' belts are designed and constructed so that: (A) Belt terminals will not pass through their fastenings on the belt or harness if a terminal comes loose from the window anchor; and (B) The length of the runner from terminal tip to terminal tip is 8 feet (2.44 m) or less; (ii) Window anchors to which belts are fastened are installed in the side frames or mullions of the window at a point not less than 42 inches (106.7 cm) and not more than 51 inches (129.5 cm) above the window sill; (iii) Each window anchor is capable of supporting a minimum load of 6,000 pounds (26.5 kN); (iv) Use of installed window anchors for any purpose other than attaching the window cleaner's belt is prohibited; (v) A window anchor that has damaged or deteriorated fastenings or supports is removed, or the window anchor head is detached so the anchor cannot be used; (vi) Rope that has wear or deterioration that affects its strength is not used; (vii) Both terminals of the window cleaner's belt are attached to separate window anchors during any cleaning operation; (viii) No employee works on a window sill or ledge on which there is snow, ice, or any other slippery condition, or one that is weakened or rotted; (ix) No employee works on a window sill or ledge unless: (A) The window sill or ledge is a minimum of 4 inches (10 cm) wide and slopes no more than 15 degrees below horizontal; or (B) The 4-inch minimum width of the window sill or ledge is increased 0.4 inches (1 cm) for every degree the sill or ledge slopes beyond 15 degrees, up to a maximum of 30 degrees; (x) The employee attaches at least one belt terminal to a window anchor before climbing through the window opening, and keeps at least one terminal attached until completely back inside the window opening; (xi) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(xii) of this section, the employee travels from one window to another by returning inside the window opening and repeating the belt terminal attachment procedure at each window in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(x) of this section; (xii) An employee using a window cleaner's positioning system may travel from one window to another while outside of the building, provided: (A) At least one belt terminal is attached to a window anchor at all times; (B) The distance between window anchors does not exceed 4 feet (1.2 m) horizontally. The distance between windows may be increased up to 6 feet (1.8 m) horizontally if the window sill or ledge is at least 1 foot (0.31 m) wide and the slope is less than 5 degrees; (C) The sill or ledge between windows is continuous; and (D) The width of the window sill or ledge in front of the mullions is at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) wide. [81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 FR 68797, Dec. 17, 2019] Appendix A to Subpart I of Part 1910—References for Further Information (Non-mandatory) The documents in appendix A provide information which may be helpful in understanding and implementing the standards in Subpart I. 1. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). “Accidents Involving Eye Injuries.” Report 597, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980. 2. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). “Accidents Involving Face Injuries.” Report 604, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980. 3. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). “Accidents Involving Head Injuries.” Report 605, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980. 4. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). “Accidents Involving Foot Injuries.” Report 626, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1981. 5. National Safety Council. “Accident Facts”, Annual edition, Chicago, IL: 1981. 6. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). “Occupational Injuries and Illnesses in the United States by Industry,” Annual edition, Washington, D.C.: BLS. 7. National Society to Prevent Blindness. “A Guide for Controlling Eye Injuries in Industry,” Chicago, Il: 1982. [59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994] Appendix B to Subpart I of Part 1910—Nonmandatory Compliance Guidelines for Hazard Assessment and Personal Protective Equipment Selection This appendix is intended to provide compliance assistance for employers and employees in implementing requirements for a hazard assessment and the selection of personal protective equipment. 1. Controlling hazards. 2. Assessment and selection. 3. Assessment guidelines. a. Survey. (a) Impact (b) Penetration (c) Compression (roll-over) (d) Chemical (e) Heat (f) Harmful dust (g) Light (optical) radiation b. Sources. c. Organize data. d. Analyze data. 4. Selection guidelines. 5. Fitting the device. 6. Devices with adjustable features. 7. Reassessment of hazards. 8. Selection chart guidelines for eye and face protection. Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart Source Assessment of Hazard Protection IMPACT—Chipping, grinding machining, masonry work, woodworking, sawing, drilling, chiseling, powered fastening, riveting, and sanding Flying fragments, objects, large chips, particles sand, dirt, etc Spectacles with side protection, goggles, face shields. See notes (1), (3), (5), (6), (10). For severe exposure, use faceshield. HEAT—Furnace operations, pouring, casting, hot dipping, and welding Hot sparks Faceshields, goggles, spectacles with side protection. For severe exposure use faceshield. See notes (1), (2), (3). Splash from molten metals Faceshields worn over goggles. See notes (1), (2), (3). High temperature exposure Screen face shields, reflective face shields. See notes (1), (2), (3). CHEMICALS—Acid and chemicals handling, degreasing plating Splash Goggles, eyecup and cover types. For severe exposure, use face shield. See notes (3), (11). Irritating mists Special-purpose goggles. DUST—Woodworking, buffing, general dusty conditions Nuisance dust Goggles, eyecup and cover types. See note (8). LIGHT and/or RADIATION— Welding: Electric arc Optical radiation Welding helmets or welding shields. Typical shades: 10-14. See notes (9), (12) Welding: Gas Optical radiation Welding goggles or welding face shield. Typical shades: gas welding 4-8, cutting 3-6, brazing 3-4. See note (9) Cutting, Torch brazing, Torch soldering Optical radiation Spectacles or welding face-shield. Typical shades, 1.5-3. See notes (3), (9) Glare Poor vision Spectacles with shaded or special-purpose lenses, as suitable. See notes (9), (10). Notes to Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart: (1) Care should be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and simultaneous exposure to a variety of hazards. Adequate protection against the highest level of each of the hazards should be provided. Protective devices do not provide unlimited protection. (2) Operations involving heat may also involve light radiation. As required by the standard, protection from both hazards must be provided. (3) Faceshields should only be worn over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles). (4) As required by the standard, filter lenses must meet the requirements for shade designations in § 1910.133(a)(5). Tinted and shaded lenses are not (5) As required by the standard, persons whose vision requires the use of prescription (Rx) lenses must wear either protective devices fitted with prescription (Rx) lenses or protective devices designed to be worn over regular prescription (Rx) eyewear. (6) Wearers of contact lenses must also wear appropriate eye and face protection devices in a hazardous environment. It should be recognized that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an additional hazard to contact lens wearers. (7) Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protective devices in electrical hazard areas. (8) Atmospheric conditions and the restricted ventilation of the protector can cause lenses to fog. Frequent cleansing may be necessary. (9) Welding helmets or faceshields should be used only over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles). (10) Non-sideshield spectacles are available for frontal protection only, but are not acceptable eye protection for the sources and operations listed for “impact.” (11) Ventilation should be adequate, but well protected from splash entry. Eye and face protection should be designed and used so that it provides both adequate ventilation and protects the wearer from splash entry. (12) Protection from light radiation is directly related to filter lens density. See note (4) . Select the darkest shade that allows task performance. 9. Selection guidelines for head protection. Where falling object hazards are present, helmets must be worn. Some examples include: working below other workers who are using tools and materials which could fall; working around or under conveyor belts which are carrying parts or materials; working below machinery or processes which might cause material or objects to fall; and working on exposed energized conductors. Some examples of occupations for which head protection should be routinely considered are: carpenters, electricians, linemen, mechanics and repairers, plumbers and pipe fitters, assemblers, packers, wrappers, sawyers, welders, laborers, freight handlers, timber cutting and logging, stock handlers, and warehouse laborers. Beginning with the ANSI Z89.1-1997 standard, ANSI updated the classification system for protective helmets. Prior revisions used type classifications to distinguish between caps and full brimmed hats. Beginning in 1997, Type I designated helmets designed to reduce the force of impact resulting from a blow only to the top of the head, while Type II designated helmets designed to reduce the force of impact resulting from a blow to the top or sides of the head. Accordingly, if a hazard assessment indicates that lateral impact to the head is foreseeable, employers must select Type II helmets for their employees. To improve comprehension and usefulness, the 1997 revision also redesignated the electrical-protective classifications for helmets as follows: “Class G—General”; helmets designed to reduce the danger of contact with low-voltage conductors; “Class E—Electrical”; helmets designed to reduce the danger of contact with conductors at higher voltage levels; and “Class C—Conductive”; helmets that provide no protection against contact with electrical hazards. 10. Selection guidelines for foot protection. Safety shoes or boots with impact protection would be required for carrying or handling materials such as packages, objects, parts or heavy tools, which could be dropped; and, for other activities where objects might fall onto the feet. Safety shoes or boots with compression protection would be required for work activities involving skid trucks (manual material handling carts) around bulk rolls (such as paper rolls) and around heavy pipes, all of which could potentially roll over an employee's feet. Safety shoes or boots with puncture protection would be required where sharp objects such as nails, wire, tacks, screws, large staples, scrap metal etc., could be stepped on by employees causing a foot injury. Electrically conductive shoes would be required as a supplementary form of protection for work activities in which there is a danger of fire or explosion from the discharge of static electricity. Electrical-hazard or dielectric footwear would be required as a supplementary form of protection when an employee standing on the ground is exposed to hazardous step or touch potential (the difference in electrical potential between the feet or between the hands and feet) or when primary forms of electrical protective equipment, such as rubber insulating gloves and blankets, do not provide complete protection for an employee standing on the ground. Some occupations (not a complete list) for which foot protection should be routinely considered are: Shipping and receiving clerks, stock clerks, carpenters, electricians, machinists, mechanics and repairers, plumbers and pipe fitters, structural metal workers, assemblers, drywall installers and lathers, packers, wrappers, craters, punch and stamping press operators, sawyers, welders, laborers, freight handlers, gardeners and grounds-keepers, timber cutting and logging workers, stock handlers and warehouse laborers. 11. Selection guidelines for hand protection. all It is also important to know the performance characteristics of gloves relative to the specific hazard anticipated; e.g., chemical hazards, cut hazards, flame hazards, etc. These performance characteristics should be assessed by using standard test procedures. Before purchasing gloves, the employer should request documentation from the manufacturer that the gloves meet the appropriate test standard(s) for the hazard(s) anticipated. Other factors to be considered for glove selection in general include: (A) As long as the performance characteristics are acceptable, in certain circumstances, it may be more cost effective to regularly change cheaper gloves than to reuse more expensive types; and, (B) The work activities of the employee should be studied to determine the degree of dexterity required, the duration, frequency, and degree of exposure of the hazard, and the physical stresses that will be applied. With respect to selection of gloves for protection against chemical hazards: (A) The toxic properties of the chemical(s) must be determined; in particular, the ability of the chemical to cause local effects on the skin and /or to pass through the skin and cause systemic effects; (B) Generally, any “chemical resistant” glove can be used for dry powders; (C) For mixtures and formulated products (unless specific test data are available), a glove should be selected on the basis of the chemical component with the shortest breakthrough time, since it is possible for solvents to carry active ingredients through polymeric materials; and, (D) Employees must be able to remove the gloves in such a manner as to prevent skin contamination. 12. Cleaning and maintenance. For the purposes of compliance with § 1910.132 (a) and (b), PPE should be inspected, cleaned, and maintained at regular intervals so that the PPE provides the requisite protection. It is also important to ensure that contaminated PPE which cannot be decontaminated is disposed of in a manner that protects employees from exposure to hazards. [59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994, as amended at 74 FR 46357, Sept. 9, 2009; 79 FR 20633, Apr. 11, 2014] Appendix C to Subpart I of Part 1910—Personal Fall Protection Systems Non-Mandatory Guidelines The following information generally applies to all personal fall protection systems and is intended to assist employers and employees comply with the requirements of § 1910.140 for personal fall protection systems. (a) Planning considerations. It is important for employers to plan prior to using personal fall protection systems. Probably the most overlooked component of planning is locating suitable anchorage points. Such planning should ideally be done before the structure or building is constructed so that anchorage points can be used later for window cleaning or other building maintenance. (b) Selection and use considerations. (1) The kind of personal fall protection system selected should be appropriate for the employee's specific work situation. Free fall distances should always be kept to a minimum. Many systems are designed for particular work applications, such as climbing ladders and poles; maintaining and servicing equipment; and window cleaning. Consideration should be given to the environment in which the work will be performed. For example, the presence of acids, dirt, moisture, oil, grease, or other substances, and their potential effects on the system selected, should be evaluated. The employer should fully evaluate the work conditions and environment (including seasonal weather changes) before selecting the appropriate personal fall protection system. Hot or cold environments may also affect fall protection systems. Wire rope should not be used where electrical hazards are anticipated. As required by § 1910.140(c)(21), the employer must provide a means for promptly rescuing an employee should a fall occur. (2) Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines are subject to damage by work operations, such as welding, chemical cleaning, and sandblasting, the component should be protected, or other securing systems should be used. A program for cleaning and maintaining the system may be necessary. (c) Testing considerations. Before purchasing a personal fall protection system, an employer should insist that the supplier provide information about its test performance (using recognized test methods) so the employer will know that the system meets the criteria in § 1910.140. Otherwise, the employer should test the equipment to ensure that it is in compliance. Appendix D to this subpart contains test methods which are recommended for evaluating the performance of any system. There are some circumstances in which an employer can evaluate a system based on data and calculations derived from the testing of similar systems. Enough information must be available for the employer to demonstrate that its system and the tested system(s) are similar in both function and design. (d) Component compatibility considerations. Ideally, a personal fall protection system is designed, tested, and supplied as a complete system. However, it is common practice for lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration devices, body belts, and body harnesses to be interchanged since some components wear out before others. Employers and employees should realize that not all components are interchangeable. For instance, a lanyard should not be connected between a body harness and a deceleration device of the self-retracting type (unless specifically allowed by the manufacturer) since this can result in additional free fall for which the system was not designed. In addition, positioning components, such as pole straps, ladder hooks and rebar hooks, should not be used in personal fall arrest systems unless they meet the appropriate strength and performance requirements of part 1910 ( e.g., (e) Employee training considerations. As required by §§ 1910.30 and 1910.132, before an employee uses a fall protection system, the employer must ensure that he or she is trained in the proper use of the system. This may include the following: The limits of the system; proper anchoring and tie-off techniques; estimating free fall distance, including determining elongation and deceleration distance; methods of use; and inspection and storage. Careless or improper use of fall protection equipment can result in serious injury or death. Employers and employees should become familiar with the material in this standard and appendix, as well as manufacturers' recommendations, before a system is used. It is important for employees to be aware that certain tie-offs (such as using knots and tying around sharp edges) can reduce the overall strength of a system. Employees also need to know the maximum permitted free fall distance. Training should stress the importance of inspections prior to use, the limitations of the equipment to be used, and unique conditions at the worksite that may be important. (f) Instruction considerations. Employers should obtain comprehensive instructions from the supplier or a qualified person as to the system's proper use and application, including, where applicable: (1) The force measured during the sample force test; (2) The maximum elongation measured for lanyards during the force test; (3) The deceleration distance measured for deceleration devices during the force test; (4) Caution statements on critical use limitations; (5) Limits of the system; (6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off techniques, including the proper D-ring or other attachment point to use on the body harness; (7) Proper climbing techniques; (8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, and storage; and (9) Specific lifelines that may be used. (g) Inspection considerations. Personal fall protection systems must be inspected before initial use in each workshift. Any component with damage, such as a cut, tear, abrasion, mold, or evidence of undue stretching, an alteration or addition that might affect its effectiveness, damage due to deterioration, fire, acid, or other corrosive damage, distorted hooks or faulty hook springs, tongues that are unfitted to the shoulder of buckles, loose or damaged mountings, non-functioning parts, or wear, or internal deterioration must be removed from service immediately, and should be tagged or marked as unusable, or destroyed. Any personal fall protection system, including components, subjected to impact loading must be removed from service immediately and not used until a competent person inspects the system and determines that it is not damaged and is safe to use for personal fall protection. (h) Rescue considerations. As required by § 1910.140(c)(21), when personal fall arrest systems are used, special consideration must be given to rescuing an employee promptly should a fall occur. The availability of rescue personnel, ladders, or other rescue equipment needs to be evaluated since there may be instances in which employees cannot self-rescue ( e.g., (i) Tie-off considerations. Employers and employees should at all times be aware that the strength of a personal fall arrest system is based on its being attached to an anchoring system that can support the system. Therefore, if a means of attachment is used that will reduce the strength of the system (such as an eye-bolt/snaphook anchorage), that component should be replaced by a stronger one that will also maintain the appropriate maximum deceleration characteristics. The following is a listing of some situations in which employers and employees should be especially cautious: (1) Tie-off using a knot in the lanyard or lifeline (at any location). The strength of the line can be reduced by 50 percent or more if a knot is used. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or lifeline should be used to compensate for the knot, or the lanyard length should be reduced (or the tie-off location raised) to minimize free fall distance, or the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by one which has an appropriately incorporated connector to eliminate the need for a knot. (2) Tie-off around rough or sharp ( e.g., (3) Knots. Sliding hitch knots should not be used except in emergency situations. The one-and-one sliding hitch knot should never be used because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The two-and-two, or three-and-three knots (preferable) may be used in emergency situations; however, care should be taken to limit free fall distances because of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength. OSHA requires that a competent or qualified person inspect each knot in a lanyard or vertical lifeline to ensure it meets the strength requirements in § 1910.140. (j) Horizontal lifelines. Horizontal lifelines, depending on their geometry and angle of sag, may be subjected to greater loads than the impact load imposed by an attached component. When the angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 degrees, the impact force imparted to the lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly amplified. For example, with a sag angle of 15 degrees the force amplification is about 2:1, and at 5 degrees sag it is about 6:1. Depending on the angle of sag, and the line's elasticity, the strength of the horizontal lifeline, and the anchorages to which it is attached should be increased a number of times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care should be taken in considering a horizontal lifeline for multiple tie-offs. If there are multiple tie-offs to a horizontal lifeline, and one employee falls, the movement of the falling employee and the horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall may cause other employees to fall. Horizontal lifeline and anchorage strength should be increased for each additional employee to be tied-off. For these and other reasons, the systems using horizontal lifelines must be designed only by qualified persons. OSHA recommends testing installed lifelines and anchors prior to use. OSHA requires that horizontal lifelines are designed, installed and used under the supervision of a qualified person. (k) Eye-bolts. It must be recognized that the strength of an eye-bolt is rated along the axis of the bolt, and that its strength is greatly reduced if the force is applied at right angles to this axis (in the direction of its shear strength). Care should also be exercised in selecting the proper diameter of the eye to avoid creating a roll-out hazard (accidental disengagement of the snaphook from the eye-bolt). (l) Vertical lifeline considerations. As required by § 1910.140(c)(3), each employee must have a separate lifeline when the lifeline is vertical. If multiple tie-offs to a single lifeline are used, and one employee falls, the movement of the lifeline during the arrest of the fall may pull other employees' lanyards, causing them to fall as well. (m) Snaphook and carabiner considerations. As required by § 1910.140(c)(10), the following connections must be avoided unless the locking snaphook or carabiner has been designed for them because they are conditions that can result in rollout: (1) Direct connection to webbing, rope, or a horizontal lifeline; (2) Two (or more) snaphooks or carabiners connected to one D-ring; (3) Two snaphooks or carabiners connected to each other; (4) Snaphooks or carabiners connected directly to webbing, rope, or wire rope; and (5) Improper dimensions of the D-ring, rebar, or other connection point in relation to the snaphook or carabiner dimensions which would allow the gate to be depressed by a turning motion. (n) Free fall considerations. Employers and employees should always be aware that a system's maximum arresting force is evaluated under normal use conditions established by the manufacturer. OSHA requires that personal fall arrest systems be rigged so an employee cannot free fall in excess of 6 feet (1.8 m). Even a few additional feet of free fall can significantly increase the arresting force on the employee, possibly to the point of causing injury and possibly exceeding the strength of the system. Because of this, the free fall distance should be kept to a minimum, and, as required by § 1910.140(d)(2), must never be greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). To assure this, the tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or anchor should be located at or above the connection point of the fall arrest equipment to the harness. (Otherwise, additional free fall distance is added to the length of the connecting means ( i.e., (o) Elongation and deceleration distance considerations. During fall arrest, a lanyard will stretch or elongate, whereas activation of a deceleration device will result in a certain stopping distance. These distances should be available with the lanyard or device's instructions and must be added to the free fall distance to arrive at the total fall distance before an employee is fully stopped. The additional stopping distance may be significant if the lanyard or deceleration device is attached near or at the end of a long lifeline, which may itself add considerable distance due to its own elongation. As required by § 1910.140(d)(2), sufficient distance to allow for all of these factors must also be maintained between the employee and obstructions below, to prevent an injury due to impact before the system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should be allowed below the securing point of a rope-grab-type deceleration device, and the end terminated to prevent the device from sliding off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline should extend to the ground or the next working level below. These measures are suggested to prevent the employee from inadvertently moving past the end of the lifeline and having the rope grab become disengaged from the lifeline. (p) Obstruction considerations. In selecting a location for tie-off, employers and employees should consider obstructions in the potential fall path of the employee. Tie-offs that minimize the possibilities of exaggerated swinging should be considered. [81 FR 83002, Nov. 18, 2016] Appendix D to Subpart I of Part 1910—Test Methods and Procedures for Personal Fall Protection Systems Non-Mandatory Guidelines This appendix contains test methods for personal fall protection systems which may be used to determine if they meet the system performance criteria specified in paragraphs (d) and (e) of § 1910.140. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems (paragraph (d) of § 1910.140). (a) General. The following sets forth test procedures for personal fall arrest systems as defined in paragraph (d) of § 1910.140. (b) General test conditions. (1) Lifelines, lanyards and deceleration devices should be attached to an anchorage and connected to the body harness in the same manner as they would be when used to protect employees. (2) The fixed anchorage should be rigid, and should not have a deflection greater than 0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied. (3) The frequency response of the load measuring instrumentation should be 120 Hz. (4) The test weight used in the strength and force tests should be a rigid, metal cylindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm). (5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create the free fall distance should be supplied with the system, or in its absence, the least elastic lanyard or lifeline available should be used with the system. (6) The test weight for each test should be hoisted to the required level and should be quickly released without having any appreciable motion imparted to it. (7) The system's performance should be evaluated, taking into account the range of environmental conditions for which it is designed to be used. (8) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further operation. (c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (136.4 kg plus or minus 1.4 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix.) (2) The test consists of dropping the test weight once. A new unused system should be used for each test. (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body harness. (4) For rope-grab-type deceleration systems, the length of the lifeline above the centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the lifeline's anchorage point should not exceed 2 feet (0.61 m). (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which do not automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, and for systems with deceleration devices which have a connection distance in excess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body harness), the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is 1.5 feet (46 cm) above the anchorage point, to its hanging location (6 feet (1.83 m) below the anchorage). The test weight should fall without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test. In some cases a non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length may need to be added to the system (for test purposes) to create the necessary free fall distance. (6) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards that automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22 m). (7) Any weight that detaches from the harness should constitute failure for the strength test. (d) Force test. (1) General. The test consists of dropping the respective test weight specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) of this appendix once. A new, unused system should be used for each test. (2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus three pounds (100 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix.) (ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body harness. (iii) The test weight should fall free from the anchorage level to its hanging location (a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test. (3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus 2 pounds (100 kg plus or minus 1.0 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix.) (ii) The free fall distance to be used in the test should be the maximum fall distance physically permitted by the system during normal use conditions, up to a maximum free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet (1.83 m), except as follows: (A) For deceleration systems having a connection link or lanyard, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to the connection distance (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body harness). (B) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards that automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to that permitted by the system in normal use. (For example, to test a system with a self-retracting lifeline or lanyard, the test weight should be supported and the system allowed to retract the lifeline or lanyard as it would in normal use. The test weight would then be released and the force and deceleration distance measured). (4) Failure. A system fails the force test when the recorded maximum arresting force exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when using a body harness. (5) Distances. The maximum elongation and deceleration distance should be recorded during the force test. (e) Deceleration device tests. (1) General. The device should be evaluated or tested under the environmental conditions (such as rain, ice, grease, dirt, and type of lifeline) for which the device is designed. (2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 times over the same length of line a distance of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the mechanism should lock each time. (ii) Unless the device is permanently marked to indicate the type of lifelines that must be used, several types (different diameters and different materials), of lifelines should be used to test the device. (3) Other self-activating-type deceleration devices. The locking mechanisms of other self-activating-type deceleration devices designed for more than one arrest should lock each of 1,000 times as they would in normal service. Test methods for positioning systems (paragraph (e) of § 1910.140). (a) General. The following sets forth test procedures for positioning systems as defined in paragraph (e) of § 1910.140. The requirements in this appendix for personal fall arrest systems set forth procedures that may be used, along with the procedures listed below, to determine compliance with the requirements for positioning systems. (b) Test conditions. (1) The fixed anchorage should be rigid and should not have a deflection greater than 0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied. (2) For window cleaners' belts, the complete belt should withstand a drop test consisting of a 250 pound (113 kg) weight falling free for a distance of 6 feet (1.83 m). The weight should be a rigid object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm). The weight should be placed in the waistband with the belt buckle drawn firmly against the weight, as when the belt is worn by a window cleaner. One belt terminal should be attached to a rigid anchor and the other terminal should hang free. The terminals should be adjusted to their maximum span. The weight fastened in the freely suspended belt should then be lifted exactly 6 feet (1.83 m) above its “at rest” position and released so as to permit a free fall of 6 feet (1.83 m) vertically below the point of attachment of the terminal anchor. The belt system should be equipped with devices and instrumentation capable of measuring the duration and magnitude of the arrest forces. Failure of the test should consist of any breakage or slippage sufficient to permit the weight to fall free of the system. In addition, the initial and subsequent arresting forces should be measured and should not exceed 2,000 pounds (8.5 kN) for more than 2 milliseconds for the initial impact, or exceed 1,000 pounds (4.5 kN) for the remainder of the arrest time. (3) All other positioning systems (except for restraint line systems) should withstand a drop test consisting of a 250 pound (113 kg) weight free falling a distance of 4 feet (1.2 m). The weight must be a rigid object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm). The body belt or harness should be affixed to the test weight as it would be to an employee. The system should be connected to the rigid anchor in the manner that the system would be connected in normal use. The weight should be lifted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m) above its “at rest” position and released so as to permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m). Failure of the system should be indicated by any breakage or slippage sufficient to permit the weight to fall free to the ground. [81 FR 83002, Nov. 18, 2016] Subpart J—General Environmental Controls Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. Sections 1910.141, 1910.142, 1910.145, 1910.146, and 1910.147 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911. § 1910.141 Sanitation. (a) General Scope. (2) Definitions applicable to this section. Nonwater carriage toilet facility, Number of employees Personal service room, Potable water Toilet facility, Toilet room, Toxic material Urinal Water closet Wet process (3) Housekeeping. (ii) The floor of every workroom shall be maintained, so far as practicable, in a dry condition. Where wet processes are used, drainage shall be maintained and false floors, platforms, mats, or other dry standing places shall be provided, where practicable, or appropriate waterproof footgear shall be provided. (iii) To facilitate cleaning, every floor, working place, and passageway shall be kept free from protruding nails, splinters, loose boards, and unnecessary holes and openings. (4) Waste disposal. (ii) All sweepings, solid or liquid wastes, refuse, and garbage shall be removed in such a manner as to avoid creating a menace to health and as often as necessary or appropriate to maintain the place of employment in a sanitary condition. (5) Vermin control. (b) Water supply Potable water. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) Portable drinking water dispensers shall be designed, constructed, and serviced so that sanitary conditions are maintained, shall be capable of being closed, and shall be equipped with a tap. (iv) [Reserved] (v) Open containers such as barrels, pails, or tanks for drinking water from which the water must be dipped or poured, whether or not they are fitted with a cover, are prohibited. (vi) A common drinking cup and other common utensils are prohibited. (2) Nonpotable water. (ii) Construction of nonpotable water systems or systems carrying any other nonpotable substance shall be such as to prevent backflow or backsiphonage into a potable water system. (iii) Nonpotable water shall not be used for washing any portion of the person, cooking or eating utensils, or clothing. Nonpotable water may be used for cleaning work premises, other than food processing and preparation premises and personal service rooms: Provided, (c) Toilet facilities General. Table J-1 Number of employees Minimum number of water closets 1 1 to 15 1 16 to 35 2 36 to 55 3 56 to 80 4 81 to 110 5. 111 to 150 6 Over 150 ( 2 1 2 3 2 (ii) The requirements of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section do not apply to mobile crews or to normally unattended work locations so long as employees working at these locations have transportation immediately available to nearby toilet facilities which meet the other requirements of this subparagraph. (iii) The sewage disposal method shall not endanger the health of employees. (2) Construction of toilet rooms. (ii) [Reserved] (d) Washing facilities General. (2) Lavatories. (ii) Each lavatory shall be provided with hot and cold running water, or tepid running water. (iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing agents shall be provided. (iv) Individual hand towels or sections thereof, of cloth or paper, air blowers or clean individual sections of continuous cloth toweling, convenient to the lavatories, shall be provided. (3) Showers. (ii) One shower shall be provided for each 10 employees of each sex, or numerical fraction thereof, who are required to shower during the same shift. (iii) Body soap or other appropriate cleansing agents convenient to the showers shall be provided as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section. (iv) Showers shall be provided with hot and cold water feeding a common discharge line. (v) Employees who use showers shall be provided with individual clean towels. (e) Change rooms. (f) Clothes drying facilities. (g) Consumption of food and beverages on the premises Application. (2) Eating and drinking areas. (3) Waste disposal containers. (4) Sanitary storage. (h) Food handling. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 18446, Apr. 28, 1975; 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011] § 1910.142 Temporary labor camps. (a) Site. (2) All sites shall be adequate in size to prevent overcrowding of necessary structures. The principal camp area in which food is prepared and served and where sleeping quarters are located shall be at least 500 feet from any area in which livestock is kept. (3) The grounds and open areas surrounding the shelters shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition free from rubbish, debris, waste paper, garbage, or other refuse. (b) Shelter. (2) Each room used for sleeping purposes shall contain at least 50 square feet of floor space for each occupant. At least a 7-foot ceiling shall be provided. (3) Beds, cots, or bunks, and suitable storage facilities such as wall lockers for clothing and personal articles shall be provided in every room used for sleeping purposes. Such beds or similar facilities shall be spaced not closer than 36 inches both laterally and end to end, and shall be elevated at least 12 inches from the floor. If double-deck bunks are used, they shall be spaced not less than 48 inches both laterally and end to end. The minimum clear space between the lower and upper bunk shall be not less than 27 inches. Triple-deck bunks are prohibited. (4) The floors of each shelter shall be constructed of wood, asphalt, or concrete. Wooden floors shall be of smooth and tight construction. The floors shall be kept in good repair. (5) All wooden floors shall be elevated not less than 1 foot above the ground level at all points to prevent dampness and to permit free circulation of air beneath. (6) Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit “banking” with earth or other suitable material around the outside walls in areas subject to extreme low temperatures. (7) All living quarters shall be provided with windows the total of which shall be not less than one-tenth of the floor area. At least one-half of each window shall be so constructed that it can be opened for purposes of ventilation. (8) All exterior openings shall be effectively screened with 16-mesh material. All screen doors shall be equipped with self-closing devices. (9) In a room where workers cook, live, and sleep a minimum of 100 square feet per person shall be provided. Sanitary facilities shall be provided for storing and preparing food. (10) In camps where cooking facilities are used in common, stoves (in ratio of one stove to 10 persons or one stove to two families) shall be provided in an enclosed and screened shelter. Sanitary facilities shall be provided for storing and preparing food. (11) All heating, cooking, and water heating equipment shall be installed in accordance with State and local ordinances, codes, and regulations governing such installations. If a camp is used during cold weather, adequate heating equipment shall be provided. (c) Water supply. (2) A water supply shall be deemed adequate if it is capable of delivering 35 gallons per person per day to the campsite at a peak rate of 2 1/2 (3) The distribution lines shall be capable of supplying water at normal operating pressures to all fixtures for simultaneous operation. Water outlets shall be distributed throughout the camp in such a manner that no shelter is more than 100 feet from a yard hydrant if water is not piped to the shelters. (4) Where water under pressure is available, one or more drinking fountains shall be provided for each 100 occupants or fraction thereof. Common drinking cups are prohibited. (d) Toilet facilities. (2) Each toilet room shall be located so as to be accessible without any individual passing through any sleeping room. Toilet rooms shall have a window not less than 6 square feet in area opening directly to the outside area or otherwise be satisfactorily ventilated. All outside openings shall be screened with 16-mesh material. No fixture, water closet, chemical toilet, or urinal shall be located in a room used for other than toilet purposes. (3) A toilet room shall be located within 200 feet of the door of each sleeping room. No privy shall be closer than 100 feet to any sleeping room, dining room, lunch area, or kitchen. (4) Where the toilet rooms are shared, such as in multifamily shelters and in barracks type facilities, separate toilet rooms shall be provided for each sex. These rooms shall be distinctly marked “for men” and “for women” by signs printed in English and in the native language of the persons occupying the camp, or marked with easily understood pictures or symbols. If the facilities for each sex are in the same building, they shall be separated by solid walls or partitions extending from the floor to the roof or ceiling. (5) Where toilet facilities are shared, the number of water closets or privy seats provided for each sex shall be based on the maximum number of persons of that sex which the camp is designed to house at any one time, in the ratio of one such unit to each 15 persons, with a minimum of two units for any shared facility. (6) Urinals shall be provided on the basis of one unit or 2 linear feet of urinal trough for each 25 men. The floor from the wall and for a distance not less than 15 inches measured from the outward edge of the urinals shall be constructed of materials impervious to moisture. Where water under pressure is available, urinals shall be provided with an adequate water flush. Urinal troughs in privies shall drain freely into the pit or vault and the construction of this drain shall be such as to exclude flies and rodents from the pit. (7) Every water closet installed on or after August 31, 1971, shall be located in a toilet room. (8) Each toilet room shall be lighted naturally, or artificially by a safe type of lighting at all hours of the day and night. (9) An adequate supply of toilet paper shall be provided in each privy, water closet, or chemical toilet compartment. (10) Privies and toilet rooms shall be kept in a sanitary condition. They shall be cleaned at least daily. (e) Sewage disposal facilities. (f) Laundry, handwashing, and bathing facilities. (i) Handwash basin per family shelter or per six persons in shared facilities. (ii) Shower head for every 10 persons. (iii) Laundry tray or tub for every 30 persons. (iv) Slop sink in each building used for laundry, hand washing, and bathing. (2) Floors shall be of smooth finish but not slippery materials; they shall be impervious to moisture. Floor drains shall be provided in all shower baths, shower rooms, or laundry rooms to remove waste water and facilitate cleaning. All junctions of the curbing and the floor shall be coved. The walls and partitions of shower rooms shall be smooth and impervious to the height of splash. (3) An adequate supply of hot and cold running water shall be provided for bathing and laundry purposes. Facilities for heating water shall be provided. (4) Every service building shall be provided with equipment capable of maintaining a temperature of at least 70 °F. during cold weather. (5) Facilities for drying clothes shall be provided. (6) All service buildings shall be kept clean. (g) Lighting. (h) Refuse disposal. (2) Garbage containers shall be kept clean. (3) Garbage containers shall be emptied when full, but not less than twice a week. (i) Construction and operation of kitchens, dining hall, and feeding facilities. (2) A properly constructed kitchen and dining hall adequate in size, separate from the sleeping quarters of any of the workers or their families, shall be provided in connection with all food handling facilities. There shall be no direct opening from living or sleeping quarters into a kitchen or dining hall. (3) No person with any communicable disease shall be employed or permitted to work in the preparation, cooking, serving, or other handling of food, foodstuffs, or materials used therein, in any kitchen or dining room operated in connection with a camp or regularly used by persons living in a camp. (j) Insect and rodent control. (k) First aid. (2) Such facilities shall be in charge of a person trained to administer first aid and shall be readily accessible for use at all times. (l) Reporting communicable disease. (2) Whenever there shall occur in any camp a case of suspected food poisoning or an unusual prevalence of any illness in which fever, diarrhea, sore throat, vomiting, or jaundice is a prominent symptom, it shall be the duty of the camp superintendent to report immediately the existence of the outbreak to the health authority by telegram, telephone, electronic mail or any other method that is equally fast. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 47 FR 14696, Apr. 6, 1982; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005] § 1910.143 Nonwater carriage disposal systems. [Reserved] § 1910.144 Safety color code for marking physical hazards. (a) Color identification Red. (i) Fire protection equipment and apparatus. (ii) Danger. (iii) Stop. (2) [Reserved] (3) Yellow. (b) [Reserved] [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007] § 1910.145 Specifications for accident prevention signs and tags. (a) Scope. (2) All new signs and replacements of old signs shall be in accordance with these specifications. (b) Definitions. sign (c) Classification of signs according to use Danger signs. (ii) All employees shall be instructed that danger signs indicate immediate danger and that special precautions are necessary. (2) Caution signs. (ii) All employees shall be instructed that caution signs indicate a possible hazard against which proper precaution should be taken. (3) Safety instruction signs. (d) Sign design Design features. (2) Danger signs. (3) [Reserved] (4) Caution signs. (5) [Reserved] (6) Safety instruction signs. (7)-(9) [Reserved] (10) Slow-moving vehicle emblem. Figure J-7—Slow-Moving Vehicle Emblem Note: All dimensions are in inches. (e) Sign wordings. (2) Nature of wording. (3) [Reserved] (4) Biological hazard signs. (f) Accident prevention tags Scope and application. (ii) This paragraph (f) does not apply to construction or agriculture. (2) Definitions. Biological hazard BIOHAZARD Major message Pictograph Signal word Tag (3) Use. (4) General tag criteria. (i) Tags shall contain a signal word and a major message. (A) The signal word shall be either “Danger,” “Caution,” or “Biological Hazard,” “BIOHAZARD,” or the biological hazard symbol. (B) The major message shall indicate the specific hazardous condition or the instruction to be communicated to the employee. (ii) The signal word shall be readable at a minimum distance of five feet (1.52 m) or such greater distance as warranted by the hazard. (iii) The tag's major message shall be presented in either pictographs, written text or both. (iv) The signal word and the major message shall be understandable to all employees who may be exposed to the identified hazard. (v) All employees shall be informed as to the meaning of the various tags used throughout the workplace and what special precautions are necessary. (vi) Tags shall be affixed as close as safely possible to their respective hazards by a positive means such as string, wire, or adhesive that prevents their loss or unintentional removal. (5) Danger tags. (6) Caution tags. (7) Warning tags. (8) Biological hazard tags. (ii) The symbol design for biological hazard tags shall conform to the design shown below: Biological Hazard Symbol Configuration (9) Other tags. Appendixes to § 1910.145( f Appendix A to § 1910.145( f While the standard does not specifically mandate colors to be used on accident prevention tags, the following color scheme is recommended by OSHA for meeting the requirements of this section: “DANGER”—Red, or predominantly red, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color. “CAUTION”—Yellow, or predominantly yellow, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color. “WARNING”—Orange, or predominantly orange, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color. “BIOLOGICAL HAZARD”—Fluorescent orange or orange-red, or predominantly so, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color. Appendix B to § 1910.145( f The following references provide information which can be helpful in understanding the requirements contained in various sections of the standard: 1. Bresnahan, Thomas F., and Bryk, Joseph, “The Hazard Association Values of Accident Prevention Signs”, Journal of American Society of Safety Engineers; 2. Dreyfuss, H., Symbol Sourcebook, 3. Glass, R.A. and others, Some Criteria for Colors and Signs in Workplaces, 4. Graphic Symbols for Public Areas and Occupational Environments, 5. Howett, G.L., Size of Letters Required for Visibility as a Function of Viewing Distance and Observer Acuity, 6. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L., The Assessment of Safety Symbol Understandability by Different Testing Methods, 7. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L., Workplace Safety Symbols, 8. Modley, R. and Meyers, W.R., Handbook of Pictorial Symbols, 9. Product Safety Signs and Labels, 10. Safety Color Coding for Marking Physical Hazards, 11. Signs and Symbols for the Occupational Environment, Can. 3-Z-321-77, 12. Symbols for Industrial Safety, 13. Symbol Signs, [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, Nov. 7, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 33260, Sept. 19, 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR 44265, July 25, 2011; 78 FR 35566, June 13, 2013] § 1910.146 Permit-required confined spaces. (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions. Acceptable entry conditions Attendant Authorized entrant Blanking or blinding Confined space (1) Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned work; and (2) Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry.); and (3) Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy. Double block and bleed Emergency Engulfment Entry Entry permit Entry supervisor Note: An entry supervisor also may serve as an attendant or as an authorized entrant, as long as that person is trained and equipped as required by this section for each role he or she fills. Also, the duties of entry supervisor may be passed from one individual to another during the course of an entry operation. Hazardous atmosphere (1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its lower flammable limit (LFL); (2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its LFL; Note: This concentration may be approximated as a condition in which the dust obscures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) or less. (3) Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent; (4) Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a permissible exposure limit is published in subpart G, Occupational Health and Environmental Control, Toxic and Hazardous Substances, Note: An atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not capable of causing death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its health effects is not covered by this provision. (5) Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life or health. Note: For air contaminants for which OSHA has not determined a dose or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information, such as Material Safety Data Sheets that comply with the Hazard Communication Standard, § 1910.1200 of this part, published information, and internal documents can provide guidance in establishing acceptable atmospheric conditions. Hot work permit Immediately dangerous to life or health Note: Some materials—hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for example—may produce immediate transient effects that, even if severe, may pass without medical attention, but are followed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12-72 hours after exposure. The victim “feels normal” from recovery from transient effects until collapse. Such materials in hazardous quantities are considered to be “immediately” dangerous to life or health. Inerting Note: This procedure produces an IDLH oxygen-deficient atmosphere. Isolation Line breaking Non-permit confined space Oxygen deficient atmosphere Oxygen enriched atmosphere Permit-required confined space (1) Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere; (2) Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant; (3) Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross- section; or (4) Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard. Permit-required confined space program Permit system Prohibited condition Rescue service Retrieval system Testing Note: Testing enables employers both to devise and implement adequate control measures for the protection of authorized entrants and to determine if acceptable entry conditions are present immediately prior to, and during, entry. (c) General requirements. Note: Proper application of the decision flow chart in appendix A to § 1910.146 would facilitate compliance with this requirement. (2) If the workplace contains permit spaces, the employer shall inform exposed employees, by posting danger signs or by any other equally effective means, of the existence and location of and the danger posed by the permit spaces. Note: A sign reading “DANGER—PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT ENTER” or using other similar language would satisfy the requirement for a sign. (3) If the employer decides that its employees will not enter permit spaces, the employer shall take effective measures to prevent its employees from entering the permit spaces and shall comply with paragraphs (c)(1), (c)(2), (c)(6), and (c)(8) of this section. (4) If the employer decides that its employees will enter permit spaces, the employer shall develop and implement a written permit space program that complies with this section. The written program shall be available for inspection by employees and their authorized representatives. (5) An employer may use the alternate procedures specified in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section for entering a permit space under the conditions set forth in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section. (i) An employer whose employees enter a permit space need not comply with paragraphs (d) through (f) and (h) through (k) of this section, provided that: (A) The employer can demonstrate that the only hazard posed by the permit space is an actual or potential hazardous atmosphere; (B) The employer can demonstrate that continuous forced air ventilation alone is sufficient to maintain that permit space safe for entry; (C) The employer develops monitoring and inspection data that supports the demonstrations required by paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A) and (c)(5)(i)(B) of this section; (D) If an initial entry of the permit space is necessary to obtain the data required by paragraph (c)(5)(i)(C) of this section, the entry is performed in compliance with paragraphs (d) through (k) of this section; (E) The determinations and supporting data required by paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A), (c)(5)(i)(B), and (c)(5)(i)(C) of this section are documented by the employer and are made available to each employee who enters the permit space under the terms of paragraph (c)(5) of this section or to that employee's authorized representative; and (F) Entry into the permit space under the terms of paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section is performed in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section. Note: See paragraph (c)(7) of this section for reclassification of a permit space after all hazards within the space have been eliminated. (ii) The following requirements apply to entry into permit spaces that meet the conditions set forth in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section. (A) Any conditions making it unsafe to remove an entrance cover shall be eliminated before the cover is removed. (B) When entrance covers are removed, the opening shall be promptly guarded by a railing, temporary cover, or other temporary barrier that will prevent an accidental fall through the opening and that will protect each employee working in the space from foreign objects entering the space. (C) Before an employee enters the space, the internal atmosphere shall be tested, with a calibrated direct-reading instrument, for oxygen content, for flammable gases and vapors, and for potential toxic air contaminants, in that order. Any employee who enters the space, or that employee's authorized representative, shall be provided an opportunity to observe the pre-entry testing required by this paragraph. (D) There may be no hazardous atmosphere within the space whenever any employee is inside the space. (E) Continuous forced air ventilation shall be used, as follows: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (F) The atmosphere within the space shall be periodically tested as necessary to ensure that the continuous forced air ventilation is preventing the accumulation of a hazardous atmosphere. Any employee who enters the space, or that employee's authorized representative, shall be provided with an opportunity to observe the periodic testing required by this paragraph. (G) If a hazardous atmosphere is detected during entry: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (H) The employer shall verify that the space is safe for entry and that the pre-entry measures required by paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section have been taken, through a written certification that contains the date, the location of the space, and the signature of the person providing the certification. The certification shall be made before entry and shall be made available to each employee entering the space or to that employee's authorized representative . (6) When there are changes in the use or configuration of a non-permit confined space that might increase the hazards to entrants, the employer shall reevaluate that space and, if necessary, reclassify it as a permit-required confined space. (7) A space classified by the employer as a permit-required confined space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space under the following procedures: (i) If the permit space poses no actual or potential atmospheric hazards and if all hazards within the space are eliminated without entry into the space, the permit space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space for as long as the non-atmospheric hazards remain eliminated. (ii) If it is necessary to enter the permit space to eliminate hazards, such entry shall be performed under paragraphs (d) through (k) of this section. If testing and inspection during that entry demonstrate that the hazards within the permit space have been eliminated, the permit space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space for as long as the hazards remain eliminated. Note: Control of atmospheric hazards through forced air ventilation does not constitute elimination of the hazards. Paragraph (c)(5) covers permit space entry where the employer can demonstrate that forced air ventilation alone will control all hazards in the space. (iii) The employer shall document the basis for determining that all hazards in a permit space have been eliminated, through a certification that contains the date, the location of the space, and the signature of the person making the determination. The certification shall be made available to each employee entering the space or to that employee's authorized representative. (iv) If hazards arise within a permit space that has been declassified to a non-permit space under paragraph (c)(7) of this section, each employee in the space shall exit the space. The employer shall then reevaluate the space and determine whether it must be reclassified as a permit space, in accordance with other applicable provisions of this section. (8) When an employer (host employer) arranges to have employees of another employer (contractor) perform work that involves permit space entry, the host employer shall: (i) Inform the contractor that the workplace contains permit spaces and that permit space entry is allowed only through compliance with a permit space program meeting the requirements of this section; (ii) Apprise the contractor of the elements, including the hazards identified and the host employer's experience with the space, that make the space in question a permit space; (iii) Apprise the contractor of any precautions or procedures that the host employer has implemented for the protection of employees in or near permit spaces where contractor personnel will be working; (iv) Coordinate entry operations with the contractor, when both host employer personnel and contractor personnel will be working in or near permit spaces, as required by paragraph (d)(11) of this section; and (v) Debrief the contractor at the conclusion of the entry operations regarding the permit space program followed and regarding any hazards confronted or created in permit spaces during entry operations. (9) In addition to complying with the permit space requirements that apply to all employers, each contractor who is retained to perform permit space entry operations shall: (i) Obtain any available information regarding permit space hazards and entry operations from the host employer; (ii) Coordinate entry operations with the host employer, when both host employer personnel and contractor personnel will be working in or near permit spaces, as required by paragraph (d)(11) of this section; and (iii) Inform the host employer of the permit space program that the contractor will follow and of any hazards confronted or created in permit spaces, either through a debriefing or during the entry operation. (d) Permit-required confined space program (1) Implement the measures necessary to prevent unauthorized entry; (2) Identify and evaluate the hazards of permit spaces before employees enter them; (3) Develop and implement the means, procedures, and practices necessary for safe permit space entry operations, including, but not limited to, the following: (i) Specifying acceptable entry conditions; (ii) Providing each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative with the opportunity to observe any monitoring or testing of permit spaces; (iii) Isolating the permit space; (iv) Purging, inerting, flushing, or ventilating the permit space as necessary to eliminate or control atmospheric hazards; (v) Providing pedestrian, vehicle, or other barriers as necessary to protect entrants from external hazards; and (vi) Verifying that conditions in the permit space are acceptable for entry throughout the duration of an authorized entry. (4) Provide the following equipment (specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) through (d)(4)(ix) of this section) at no cost to employees, maintain that equipment properly, and ensure that employees use that equipment properly: (i) Testing and monitoring equipment needed to comply with paragraph (d)(5) of this section; (ii) Ventilating equipment needed to obtain acceptable entry conditions; (iii) Communications equipment necessary for compliance with paragraphs (h)(3) and (i)(5) of this section; (iv) Personal protective equipment insofar as feasible engineering and work practice controls do not adequately protect employees; (v) Lighting equipment needed to enable employees to see well enough to work safely and to exit the space quickly in an emergency; (vi) Barriers and shields as required by paragraph (d)(3)(v) of this section. (vii) Equipment, such as ladders, needed for safe ingress and egress by authorized entrants; (viii) Rescue and emergency equipment needed to comply with paragraph (d)(9) of this section, except to the extent that the equipment is provided by rescue services; and (ix) Any other equipment necessary for safe entry into and rescue from permit spaces. (5) Evaluate permit space conditions as follows when entry operations are conducted: (i) Test conditions in the permit space to determine if acceptable entry conditions exist before entry is authorized to begin, except that, if isolation of the space is infeasible because the space is large or is part of a continuous system (such as a sewer), pre-entry testing shall be performed to the extent feasible before entry is authorized and, if entry is authorized, entry conditions shall be continuously monitored in the areas where authorized entrants are working; (ii) Test or monitor the permit space as necessary to determine if acceptable entry conditions are being maintained during the course of entry operations; and (iii) When testing for atmospheric hazards, test first for oxygen, then for combustible gases and vapors, and then for toxic gases and vapors. (iv) Provide each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative an opportunity to observe the pre-entry and any subsequent testing or monitoring of permit spaces; (v) Reevaluate the permit space in the presence of any authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative who requests that the employer conduct such reevaluation because the entrant or representative has reason to believe that the evaluation of that space may not have been adequate; (vi) Immediately provide each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative with the results of any testing conducted in accord with paragraph (d) of this section. Note: Atmospheric testing conducted in accordance with appendix B to § 1910.146 would be considered as satisfying the requirements of this paragraph. For permit space operations in sewers, atmospheric testing conducted in accordance with appendix B, as supplemented by appendix E to § 1910.146, would be considered as satisfying the requirements of this paragraph. (6) Provide at least one attendant outside the permit space into which entry is authorized for the duration of entry operations; Note: Attendants may be assigned to monitor more than one permit space provided the duties described in paragraph (i) of this section can be effectively performed for each permit space that is monitored. Likewise, attendants may be stationed at any location outside the permit space to be monitored as long as the duties described in paragraph (i) of this section can be effectively performed for each permit space that is monitored. (7) If multiple spaces are to be monitored by a single attendant, include in the permit program the means and procedures to enable the attendant to respond to an emergency affecting one or more of the permit spaces being monitored without distraction from the attendant's responsibilities under paragraph (i) of this section; (8) Designate the persons who are to have active roles (as, for example, authorized entrants, attendants, entry supervisors, or persons who test or monitor the atmosphere in a permit space) in entry operations, identify the duties of each such employee, and provide each such employee with the training required by paragraph (g) of this section; (9) Develop and implement procedures for summoning rescue and emergency services, for rescuing entrants from permit spaces, for providing necessary emergency services to rescued employees, and for preventing unauthorized personnel from attempting a rescue; (10) Develop and implement a system for the preparation, issuance, use, and cancellation of entry permits as required by this section; (11) Develop and implement procedures to coordinate entry operations when employees of more than one employer are working simultaneously as authorized entrants in a permit space, so that employees of one employer do not endanger the employees of any other employer; (12) Develop and implement procedures (such as closing off a permit space and canceling the permit) necessary for concluding the entry after entry operations have been completed; (13) Review entry operations when the employer has reason to believe that the measures taken under the permit space program may not protect employees and revise the program to correct deficiencies found to exist before subsequent entries are authorized; and Note: Examples of circumstances requiring the review of the permit space program are: any unauthorized entry of a permit space, the detection of a permit space hazard not covered by the permit, the detection of a condition prohibited by the permit, the occurrence of an injury or near-miss during entry, a change in the use or configuration of a permit space, and employee complaints about the effectiveness of the program. (14) Review the permit space program, using the canceled permits retained under paragraph (e)(6) of this section within 1 year after each entry and revise the program as necessary, to ensure that employees participating in entry operations are protected from permit space hazards. Note: Employers may perform a single annual review covering all entries performed during a 12-month period. If no entry is performed during a 12-month period, no review is necessary. Appendix C to § 1910.146 presents examples of permit space programs that are considered to comply with the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section. (e) Permit system. Note: Appendix D to § 1910.146 presents examples of permits whose elements are considered to comply with the requirements of this section. (2) Before entry begins, the entry supervisor identified on the permit shall sign the entry permit to authorize entry. (3) The completed permit shall be made available at the time of entry to all authorized entrants or their authorized representatives, by posting it at the entry portal or by any other equally effective means, so that the entrants can confirm that pre-entry preparations have been completed. (4) The duration of the permit may not exceed the time required to complete the assigned task or job identified on the permit in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section. (5) The entry supervisor shall terminate entry and cancel the entry permit when: (i) The entry operations covered by the entry permit have been completed; or (ii) A condition that is not allowed under the entry permit arises in or near the permit space. (6) The employer shall retain each canceled entry permit for at least 1 year to facilitate the review of the permit-required confined space program required by paragraph (d)(14) of this section. Any problems encountered during an entry operation shall be noted on the pertinent permit so that appropriate revisions to the permit space program can be made. (f) Entry permit. (1) The permit space to be entered; (2) The purpose of the entry; (3) The date and the authorized duration of the entry permit; (4) The authorized entrants within the permit space, by name or by such other means (for example, through the use of rosters or tracking systems) as will enable the attendant to determine quickly and accurately, for the duration of the permit, which authorized entrants are inside the permit space; Note: This requirement may be met by inserting a reference on the entry permit as to the means used, such as a roster or tracking system, to keep track of the authorized entrants within the permit space. (5) The personnel, by name, currently serving as attendants; (6) The individual, by name, currently serving as entry supervisor, with a space for the signature or initials of the entry supervisor who originally authorized entry; (7) The hazards of the permit space to be entered; (8) The measures used to isolate the permit space and to eliminate or control permit space hazards before entry; Note: Those measures can include the lockout or tagging of equipment and procedures for purging, inerting, ventilating, and flushing permit spaces. (9) The acceptable entry conditions; (10) The results of initial and periodic tests performed under paragraph (d)(5) of this section, accompanied by the names or initials of the testers and by an indication of when the tests were performed; (11) The rescue and emergency services that can be summoned and the means (such as the equipment to use and the numbers to call) for summoning those services; (12) The communication procedures used by authorized entrants and attendants to maintain contact during the entry; (13) Equipment, such as personal protective equipment, testing equipment, communications equipment, alarm systems, and rescue equipment, to be provided for compliance with this section; (14) Any other information whose inclusion is necessary, given the circumstances of the particular confined space, in order to ensure employee safety; and (15) Any additional permits, such as for hot work, that have been issued to authorize work in the permit space. (g) Training. (2) Training shall be provided to each affected employee: (i) Before the employee is first assigned duties under this section; (ii) Before there is a change in assigned duties; (iii) Whenever there is a change in permit space operations that presents a hazard about which an employee has not previously been trained; (iv) Whenever the employer has reason to believe either that there are deviations from the permit space entry procedures required by paragraph (d)(3) of this section or that there are inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of these procedures. (3) The training shall establish employee proficiency in the duties required by this section and shall introduce new or revised procedures, as necessary, for compliance with this section. (4) The employer shall certify that the training required by paragraphs (g)(1) through (g)(3) of this section has been accomplished. The certification shall contain each employee's name, the signatures or initials of the trainers, and the dates of training. The certification shall be available for inspection by employees and their authorized representatives. (h) Duties of authorized entrants. (1) Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure; (2) Properly use equipment as required by paragraph (d)(4) of this section; (3) Communicate with the attendant as necessary to enable the attendant to monitor entrant status and to enable the attendant to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space as required by paragraph (i)(6) of this section; (4) Alert the attendant whenever: (i) The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation, or (ii) The entrant detects a prohibited condition; and (5) Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever: (i) An order to evacuate is given by the attendant or the entry supervisor, (ii) The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation, (iii) The entrant detects a prohibited condition, or (iv) An evacuation alarm is activated. (i) Duties of attendants. (1) Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure; (2) Is aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized entrants; (3) Continuously maintains an accurate count of authorized entrants in the permit space and ensures that the means used to identify authorized entrants under paragraph (f)(4) of this section accurately identifies who is in the permit space; (4) Remains outside the permit space during entry operations until relieved by another attendant; Note: When the employer's permit entry program allows attendant entry for rescue, attendants may enter a permit space to attempt a rescue if they have been trained and equipped for rescue operations as required by paragraph (k)(1) of this section and if they have been relieved as required by paragraph (i)(4) of this section. (5) Communicates with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor entrant status and to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space under paragraph (i)(6) of this section; (6) Monitors activities inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe for entrants to remain in the space and orders the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit space immediately under any of the following conditions; (i) If the attendant detects a prohibited condition; (ii) If the attendant detects the behavioral effects of hazard exposure in an authorized entrant; (iii) If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that could endanger the authorized entrants; or (iv) If the attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all the duties required under paragraph (i) of this section; (7) Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant determines that authorized entrants may need assistance to escape from permit space hazards; (8) Takes the following actions when unauthorized persons approach or enter a permit space while entry is underway: (i) Warn the unauthorized persons that they must stay away from the permit space; (ii) Advise the unauthorized persons that they must exit immediately if they have entered the permit space; and (iii) Inform the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if unauthorized persons have entered the permit space; (9) Performs non-entry rescues as specified by the employer's rescue procedure; and (10) Performs no duties that might interfere with the attendant's primary duty to monitor and protect the authorized entrants. (j) Duties of entry supervisors. (1) Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure; (2) Verifies, by checking that the appropriate entries have been made on the permit, that all tests specified by the permit have been conducted and that all procedures and equipment specified by the permit are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to begin; (3) Terminates the entry and cancels the permit as required by paragraph (e)(5) of this section; (4) Verifies that rescue services are available and that the means for summoning them are operable; (5) Removes unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the permit space during entry operations; and (6) Determines, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is transferred and at intervals dictated by the hazards and operations performed within the space, that entry operations remain consistent with terms of the entry permit and that acceptable entry conditions are maintained. (k) Rescue and emergency services. (i) Evaluate a prospective rescuer's ability to respond to a rescue summons in a timely manner, considering the hazard(s) identified; Note to paragraph ( k i What will be considered timely will vary according to the specific hazards involved in each entry. For example, § 1910.134, Respiratory Protection, requires that employers provide a standby person or persons capable of immediate action to rescue employee(s) wearing respiratory protection while in work areas defined as IDLH atmospheres. (ii) Evaluate a prospective rescue service's ability, in terms of proficiency with rescue-related tasks and equipment, to function appropriately while rescuing entrants from the particular permit space or types of permit spaces identified; (iii) Select a rescue team or service from those evaluated that: (A) Has the capability to reach the victim(s) within a time frame that is appropriate for the permit space hazard(s) identified; (B) Is equipped for and proficient in performing the needed rescue services; (iv) Inform each rescue team or service of the hazards they may confront when called on to perform rescue at the site; and (v) Provide the rescue team or service selected with access to all permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary so that the rescue service can develop appropriate rescue plans and practice rescue operations. Note to paragraph ( k Non-mandatory appendix F contains examples of criteria which employers can use in evaluating prospective rescuers as required by paragraph (k)(1) of this section. (2) An employer whose employees have been designated to provide permit space rescue and emergency services shall take the following measures: (i) Provide affected employees with the personal protective equipment (PPE) needed to conduct permit space rescues safely and train affected employees so they are proficient in the use of that PPE, at no cost to those employees; (ii) Train affected employees to perform assigned rescue duties. The employer must ensure that such employees successfully complete the training required to establish proficiency as an authorized entrant, as provided by paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section; (iii) Train affected employees in basic first-aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). The employer shall ensure that at least one member of the rescue team or service holding a current certification in first aid and CPR is available; and (iv) Ensure that affected employees practice making permit space rescues at least once every 12 months, by means of simulated rescue operations in which they remove dummies, manikins, or actual persons from the actual permit spaces or from representative permit spaces. Representative permit spaces shall, with respect to opening size, configuration, and accessibility, simulate the types of permit spaces from which rescue is to be performed. (3) To facilitate non-entry rescue, retrieval systems or methods shall be used whenever an authorized entrant enters a permit space, unless the retrieval equipment would increase the overall risk of entry or would not contribute to the rescue of the entrant. Retrieval systems shall meet the following requirements. (i) Each authorized entrant shall use a chest or full body harness, with a retrieval line attached at the center of the entrant's back near shoulder level, above the entrant's head, or at another point which the employer can establish presents a profile small enough for the successful removal of the entrant. Wristlets may be used in lieu of the chest or full body harness if the employer can demonstrate that the use of a chest or full body harness is infeasible or creates a greater hazard and that the use of wristlets is the safest and most effective alternative. (ii) The other end of the retrieval line shall be attached to a mechanical device or fixed point outside the permit space in such a manner that rescue can begin as soon as the rescuer becomes aware that rescue is necessary. A mechanical device shall be available to retrieve personnel from vertical type permit spaces more than 5 feet (1.52 m) deep. (4) If an injured entrant is exposed to a substance for which a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or other similar written information is required to be kept at the worksite, that MSDS or written information shall be made available to the medical facility treating the exposed entrant. (l) Employee participation. (2) Employers shall make available to affected employees and their authorized representatives all information required to be developed by this section. Appendixes to § 1910.146—Permit-required Confined Spaces Note: Appendixes A through F serve to provide information and non-mandatory guidelines to assist employers and employees in complying with the appropriate requirements of this section. Appendix A to § 1910.146—Permit-Required Confined Space Decision Flow Chart Appendix B to § 1910.146—Procedures for Atmospheric Testing Atmospheric testing is required for two distinct purposes: evaluation of the hazards of the permit space and verification that acceptable entry conditions for entry into that space exist. (1) Evaluation testing. (2) Verification testing. (3) Duration of testing. (4) Testing stratified atmospheres. (5) Order of testing. Appendix C to § 1910.146—Examples of Permit-required Confined Space Programs Example 1. Workplace. Potential hazards. Engulfment. Presence of toxic gases. Presence of explosive/flammable gases. Oxygen Deficiency. A. Entry Without Permit/Attendant Certification. A written copy of operating and rescue procedures as required by these procedures shall be at the work site for the duration of the job. Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards. Pumps and Lines. Surveillance. Testing. Entry Procedures. Rescue. B. Entry Permit Required Permits. A written copy of operating and rescue procedures as required by these procedures shall be at the work site for the duration of the job. Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards. Surveillance. Testing. Space Ventilation. Entry Procedures. All personnel must be trained. A self contained breathing apparatus shall be worn by any person entering the space. At least one worker shall stand by the outside of the space ready to give assistance in case of emergency. The standby worker shall have a self contained breathing apparatus available for immediate use. There shall be at least one additional worker within sight or call of the standby worker. Continuous powered communications shall be maintained between the worker within the confined space and standby personnel. If at any time there is any questionable action or non- movement by the worker inside, a verbal check will be made. If there is no response, the worker will be moved immediately. Exception: When practical, these spaces shall be entered through side openings—those within 3 1/2 In any situation where their use may endanger the worker, use of a hoisting device or safety belt and attached lifeline may be discontinued. When dangerous air contamination is attributable to flammable and/or explosive substances, lighting and electrical equipment shall be Class 1, Division 1 rated per National Electrical Code and no ignition sources shall be introduced into the area. Continuous gas monitoring shall be performed during all confined space operations. If alarm conditions change adversely, entry personnel shall exit the confined space and a new confined space permit issued. Rescue. Example 2. Workplace. Cookers and dryers are either batch or continuous in their operation. Multiple batch cookers are operated in parallel. When one unit of a multiple set is shut down for repairs, means are available to isolate that unit from the others which remain in operation. Cookers and dryers are horizontal, cylindrical vessels equipped with a center, rotating shaft and agitator paddles or discs. If the inner shell is jacketed, it is usually heated with steam at pressures up to 150 psig (1034.25 kPa). The rotating shaft assembly of the continuous cooker or dryer is also steam heated. Potential Hazards. 1. Struck or caught by rotating agitator; 2. Engulfed in raw material or hot, recycled fat; 3. Burned by steam from leaks into the cooker/dryer steam jacket or the condenser duct system if steam valves are not properly closed and locked out; 4. Burned by contact with hot metal surfaces, such as the agitator shaft assembly, or inner shell of the cooker/dryer; 5. Heat stress caused by warm atmosphere inside cooker/dryer; 6. Slipping and falling on grease in the cooker/dryer; 7. Electrically shocked by faulty equipment taken into the cooker/dryer; 8. Burned or overcome by fire or products of combustion; or 9. Overcome by fumes generated by welding or cutting done on grease covered surfaces. Permits. Control of hazards. Engulfment. Burns and heat stress. Fire and fume hazards. Electrical shock. Slips and falls. Attendant. Permit. Rescue. Example 3. Workplace. A. During fabrication. Sources of hazards. Control of hazards. Welding. Application of interior coatings/linings. Permits. Authorization. Attendant. Communications and observation. Rescue procedures. Retrieval line and harnesses. B. Repair or service of “used” tanks and bulk trailers. Sources of hazards. Control of atmospheric hazards. Welding. Permits. Authorization. Appendix D to § 1910.146—Sample Permits Appendix E to § 1910.146—Sewer System Entry Sewer entry differs in three vital respects from other permit entries; first, there rarely exists any way to completely isolate the space (a section of a continuous system) to be entered; second, because isolation is not complete, the atmosphere may suddenly and unpredictably become lethally hazardous (toxic, flammable or explosive) from causes beyond the control of the entrant or employer, and third, experienced sewer workers are especially knowledgeable in entry and work in their permit spaces because of their frequent entries. Unlike other employments where permit space entry is a rare and exceptional event, sewer workers' usual work environment is a permit space. (1) Adherence to procedure. (2) Atmospheric monitoring. Although OSHA considers the information and guidance provided above to be appropriate and useful in most sewer entry situations, the Agency emphasizes that each employer must consider the unique circumstances, including the predictability of the atmosphere, of the sewer permit spaces in the employer's workplace in preparing for entry. Only the employer can decide, based upon his or her knowledge of, and experience with permit spaces in sewer systems, what the best type of testing instrument may be for any specific entry operation. The selected testing instrument should be carried and used by the entrant in sewer line work to monitor the atmosphere in the entrant's environment, and in advance of the entrant's direction of movement, to warn the entrant of any deterioration in atmospheric conditions. Where several entrants are working together in the same immediate location, one instrument, used by the lead entrant, is acceptable. (3) Surge flow and flooding. (4) Special Equipment. Appendix F to § 1910.146—Rescue Team or Rescue Service Evaluation Criteria (Non-Mandatory) (1) This appendix provides guidance to employers in choosing an appropriate rescue service. It contains criteria that may be used to evaluate the capabilities both of prospective and current rescue teams. Before a rescue team can be trained or chosen, however, a satisfactory permit program, including an analysis of all permit-required confined spaces to identify all potential hazards in those spaces, must be completed. OSHA believes that compliance with all the provisions of § 1910.146 will enable employers to conduct permit space operations without recourse to rescue services in nearly all cases. However, experience indicates that circumstances will arise where entrants will need to be rescued from permit spaces. It is therefore important for employers to select rescue services or teams, either on-site or off-site, that are equipped and capable of minimizing harm to both entrants and rescuers if the need arises. (2) For all rescue teams or services, the employer's evaluation should consist of two components: an initial evaluation, in which employers decide whether a potential rescue service or team is adequately trained and equipped to perform permit space rescues of the kind needed at the facility and whether such rescuers can respond in a timely manner, and a performance evaluation, in which employers measure the performance of the team or service during an actual or practice rescue. For example, based on the initial evaluation, an employer may determine that maintaining an on-site rescue team will be more expensive than obtaining the services of an off-site team, without being significantly more effective, and decide to hire a rescue service. During a performance evaluation, the employer could decide, after observing the rescue service perform a practice rescue, that the service's training or preparedness was not adequate to effect a timely or effective rescue at his or her facility and decide to select another rescue service, or to form an internal rescue team. A. Initial Evaluation I. The employer should meet with the prospective rescue service to facilitate the evaluations required by § 1910.146(k)(1)(i) and § 1910.146(k)(1)(ii). At a minimum, if an off-site rescue service is being considered, the employer must contact the service to plan and coordinate the evaluations required by the standard. Merely posting the service's number or planning to rely on the 911 emergency phone number to obtain these services at the time of a permit space emergency would not comply with paragraph (k)(1) of the standard. II. The capabilities required of a rescue service vary with the type of permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary and the hazards likely to be encountered in those spaces. Answering the questions below will assist employers in determining whether the rescue service is capable of performing rescues in the permit spaces present at the employer's workplace. 1. What are the needs of the employer with regard to response time (time for the rescue service to receive notification, arrive at the scene, and set up and be ready for entry)? For example, if entry is to be made into an IDLH atmosphere, or into a space that can quickly develop an IDLH atmosphere (if ventilation fails or for other reasons), the rescue team or service would need to be standing by at the permit space. On the other hand, if the danger to entrants is restricted to mechanical hazards that would cause injuries (e.g., broken bones, abrasions) a response time of 10 or 15 minutes might be adequate. 2. How quickly can the rescue team or service get from its location to the permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary? Relevant factors to consider would include: the location of the rescue team or service relative to the employer's workplace, the quality of roads and highways to be traveled, potential bottlenecks or traffic congestion that might be encountered in transit, the reliability of the rescuer's vehicles, and the training and skill of its drivers. 3. What is the availability of the rescue service? Is it unavailable at certain times of the day or in certain situations? What is the likelihood that key personnel of the rescue service might be unavailable at times? If the rescue service becomes unavailable while an entry is underway, does it have the capability of notifying the employer so that the employer can instruct the attendant to abort the entry immediately? 4. Does the rescue service meet all the requirements of paragraph (k)(2) of the standard? If not, has it developed a plan that will enable it to meet those requirements in the future? If so, how soon can the plan be implemented? 5. For off-site services, is the service willing to perform rescues at the employer's workplace? (An employer may not rely on a rescuer who declines, for whatever reason, to provide rescue services.) 6. Is an adequate method for communications between the attendant, employer and prospective rescuer available so that a rescue request can be transmitted to the rescuer without delay? How soon after notification can a prospective rescuer dispatch a rescue team to the entry site? 7. For rescues into spaces that may pose significant atmospheric hazards and from which rescue entry, patient packaging and retrieval cannot be safely accomplished in a relatively short time (15-20 minutes), employers should consider using airline respirators (with escape bottles) for the rescuers and to supply rescue air to the patient. If the employer decides to use SCBA, does the prospective rescue service have an ample supply of replacement cylinders and procedures for rescuers to enter and exit (or be retrieved) well within the SCBA's air supply limits? 8. If the space has a vertical entry over 5 feet in depth, can the prospective rescue service properly perform entry rescues? Does the service have the technical knowledge and equipment to perform rope work or elevated rescue, if needed? 9. Does the rescue service have the necessary skills in medical evaluation, patient packaging and emergency response? 10. Does the rescue service have the necessary equipment to perform rescues, or must the equipment be provided by the employer or another source? B. Performance Evaluation Rescue services are required by paragraph (k)(2)(iv) of the standard to practice rescues at least once every 12 months, provided that the team or service has not successfully performed a permit space rescue within that time. As part of each practice session, the service should perform a critique of the practice rescue, or have another qualified party perform the critique, so that deficiencies in procedures, equipment, training, or number of personnel can be identified and corrected. The results of the critique, and the corrections made to respond to the deficiencies identified, should be given to the employer to enable it to determine whether the rescue service can quickly be upgraded to meet the employer's rescue needs or whether another service must be selected. The following questions will assist employers and rescue teams and services evaluate their performance. 1. Have all members of the service been trained as permit space entrants, at a minimum, including training in the potential hazards of all permit spaces, or of representative permit spaces, from which rescue may be needed? Can team members recognize the signs, symptoms, and consequences of exposure to any hazardous atmospheres that may be present in those permit spaces? 2. Is every team member provided with, and properly trained in, the use and need for PPE, such as SCBA or fall arrest equipment, which may be required to perform permit space rescues in the facility? Is every team member properly trained to perform his or her functions and make rescues, and to use any rescue equipment, such as ropes and backboards, that may be needed in a rescue attempt? 3. Are team members trained in the first aid and medical skills needed to treat victims overcome or injured by the types of hazards that may be encountered in the permit spaces at the facility? 4. Do all team members perform their functions safely and efficiently? Do rescue service personnel focus on their own safety before considering the safety of the victim? 5. If necessary, can the rescue service properly test the atmosphere to determine if it is IDLH? 6. Can the rescue personnel identify information pertinent to the rescue from entry permits, hot work permits, and MSDSs? 7. Has the rescue service been informed of any hazards to personnel that may arise from outside the space, such as those that may be caused by future work near the space? 8. If necessary, can the rescue service properly package and retrieve victims from a permit space that has a limited size opening (less than 24 inches (60.9 cm) in diameter), limited internal space, or internal obstacles or hazards? 9. If necessary, can the rescue service safely perform an elevated (high angle) rescue? 10. Does the rescue service have a plan for each of the kinds of permit space rescue operations at the facility? Is the plan adequate for all types of rescue operations that may be needed at the facility? Teams may practice in representative spaces, or in spaces that are “worst-case” or most restrictive with respect to internal configuration, elevation, and portal size. The following characteristics of a practice space should be considered when deciding whether a space is truly representative of an actual permit space: (1) Internal configuration. (a) Open—there are no obstacles, barriers, or obstructions within the space. One example is a water tank. (b) Obstructed—the permit space contains some type of obstruction that a rescuer would need to maneuver around. An example would be a baffle or mixing blade. Large equipment, such as a ladder or scaffold, brought into a space for work purposes would be considered an obstruction if the positioning or size of the equipment would make rescue more difficult. (2) Elevation. (a) Elevated—a permit space where the entrance portal or opening is above grade by 4 feet or more. This type of space usually requires knowledge of high angle rescue procedures because of the difficulty in packaging and transporting a patient to the ground from the portal. (b) Non-elevated—a permit space with the entrance portal located less than 4 feet above grade. This type of space will allow the rescue team to transport an injured employee normally. (3) Portal size. (a) Restricted—A portal of 24 inches or less in the least dimension. Portals of this size are too small to allow a rescuer to simply enter the space while using SCBA. The portal size is also too small to allow normal spinal immobilization of an injured employee. (b) Unrestricted—A portal of greater than 24 inches in the least dimension. These portals allow relatively free movement into and out of the permit space. (4) Space access. (a) Horizontal—The portal is located on the side of the permit space. Use of retrieval lines could be difficult. (b) Vertical—The portal is located on the top of the permit space, so that rescuers must climb down, or the bottom of the permit space, so that rescuers must climb up to enter the space. Vertical portals may require knowledge of rope techniques, or special patient packaging to safely retrieve a downed entrant. [58 FR 4549, Jan. 14, 1993; 58 FR 34845, 34846, June 29, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 26114, May 19, 1994; 63 FR 66038, 66039, Dec. 1, 1998; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011] § 1910.147 The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout). (a) Scope, application, and purpose Scope. unexpected (ii) This standard does not cover the following: (A) Construction and agriculture employment; (B) Employment covered by parts 1915, 1917, and 1918 of this title; (C) Installations under the exclusive control of electric utilities for the purpose of power generation, transmission and distribution, including related equipment for communication or metering; (D) Exposure to electrical hazards from work on, near, or with conductors or equipment in electric-utilization installations, which is covered by subpart S of this part; and (E) Oil and gas well drilling and servicing. (2) Application. (ii) Normal production operations are not covered by this standard (See subpart O of this part). Servicing and/or maintenance which takes place during normal production operations is covered by this standard only if;: (A) An employee is required to remove or bypass a guard or other safety device; or (B) An employee is required to place any part of his or her body into an area on a machine or piece of equipment where work is actually performed upon the material being processed (point of operation) or where an associated danger zone exists during a machine operating cycle. Note: Exception to paragraph (a)(2)(ii): (iii) This standard does not apply to the following. (A) Work on cord and plug connected electric equipment for which exposure to the hazards of unexpected energization or start up of the equipment is controlled by the unplugging of the equipment from the energy source and by the plug being under the exclusive control of the employee performing the servicing or maintenance. (B) Hot tap operations involving transmission and distribution systems for substances such as gas, steam, water or petroleum products when they are performed on pressurized pipelines, provided that the employer demonstrates that ( 1 2 3 (3) Purpose. (ii) When other standards in this part require the use of lockout or tagout, they shall be used and supplemented by the procedural and training requirements of this section. (b) Definitions applicable to this section. Affected employee. Authorized employee. Capable of being locked out. Energized. Energy isolating device. Energy source. Hot tap. Lockout. Lockout device. Normal production operations. Servicing and/or maintenance. unexpected Setting up. Tagout. Tagout device. (c) General Energy control program. (2) Lockout/tagout. (ii) If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out, the employer's energy control program under paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall utilize lockout, unless the employer can demonstrate that the utilization of a tagout system will provide full employee protection as set forth in paragraph (c)(3) of this section. (iii) After January 2, 1990, whenever replacement or major repair, renovation or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energy isolating devices for such machine or equipment shall be designed to accept a lockout device. (3) Full employee protection. (ii) In demonstrating that a level of safety is achieved in the tagout program which is equivalent to the level of safety obtained by using a lockout program, the employer shall demonstrate full compliance with all tagout-related provisions of this standard together with such additional elements as are necessary to provide the equivalent safety available from the use of a lockout device. Additional means to be considered as part of the demonstration of full employee protection shall include the implementation of additional safety measures such as the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a controlling switch, opening of an extra disconnecting device, or the removal of a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent energization. (4) Energy control procedure. Note: Exception: (ii) The procedures shall clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized for the control of hazardous energy, and the means to enforce compliance including, but not limited to, the following: (A) A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure; (B) Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy; (C) Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal and transfer of lockout devices or tagout devices and the responsibility for them; and (D) Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout devices, and other energy control measures. (5) Protective materials and hardware. (ii) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be singularly identified; shall be the only devices(s) used for controlling energy; shall not be used for other purposes; and shall meet the following requirements: (A) Durable. 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) Standardized. (C) Substantial 1 Lockout devices. ( 2 Tagout devices. (D) Identifiable. (iii) Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such as the following: Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Operate. (6) Periodic inspection. (A) The periodic inspection shall be perfomed by an authorized employee other than the ones(s) utilizing the energy control procedure being inspected. (B) The periodic inspection shall be conducted to correct any deviations or inadequacies identified. (C) Where lockout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected. (D) Where tagout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized and affected employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected, and the elements set forth in paragraph (c)(7)(ii) of this section. (ii) The employer shall certify that the periodic inspections have been performed. The certification shall identify the machine or equipment on which the energy control procedure was being utilized, the date of the inspection, the employees included in the inspection, and the person performing the inspection. (7) Training and communication. (A) Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of the energy available in the workplace, and the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and control. (B) Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use of the energy control procedure. (C) All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be instructed about the procedure, and about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment which are locked out or tagged out. (ii) When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained in the following limitations of tags: (A) Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating devices, and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock. (B) When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not to be removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated. (C) Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose work operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective. (D) Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the workplace. (E) Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning needs to be understood as part of the overall energy control program. (F) Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so that they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during use. (iii) Employee retraining. (A) Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, or when there is a change in the energy control procedures. (B) Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection under paragraph (c)(6) of this section reveals, or whenever the employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of the energy control procedures. (C) The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary. (iv) The employer shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of training. (8) Energy isolation. (9) Notification of employees. (d) Application of control. (1) Preparation for shutdown. (2) Machine or equipment shutdown. (3) Machine or equipment isolation. (4) Lockout or tagout device application. (ii) Lockout devices, where used, shall be affixed in a manner to that will hold the energy isolating devices in a “safe” or “off” position. (iii) Tagout devices, where used, shall be affixed in such a manner as will clearly indicate that the operation or movement of energy isolating devices from the “safe” or “off” position is prohibited. (A) Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices designed with the capability of being locked, the tag attachment shall be fastened at the same point at which the lock would have been attached. (B) Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating device, the tag shall be located as close as safely possible to the device, in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate the device. (5) Stored energy. (ii) If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to a hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until the servicing or maintenance is completed, or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists. (6) Verification of isolation. (e) Release from lockout or tagout. (1) The machine or equipment. (2) Employees. (ii) After lockout or tagout devices have been removed and before a machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be notified that the lockout or tagout device(s) have been removed. (3) Lockout or tagout devices removal. Exception to paragraph (e)(3): (i) Verfication by the employer that the authorized employee who applied the device is not at the facility; (ii) Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to inform him/her that his/her lockout or tagout device has been removed; and (iii) Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before he/she resumes work at that facility. (f) Additional requirements Testing or positioning of machines, equipment or components thereof. (i) Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials in accordance with paragraph (e)(1) of this section; (ii) Remove employees from the machine or equipment area in accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section; (iii) Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section; (iv) Energize and proceed with testing or positioning; (v) Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section to continue the servicing and/or maintenance. (2) Outside personnel (contractors, etc.). (ii) The on-site employer shall ensure that his/her employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the outside employer's energy control program. (3) Group lockout or tagout. (ii) Group lockout or tagout devices shall be used in accordance with the procedures required by paragraph (c)(4) of this section including, but not necessarily limited to, the following specific requirements: (A) Primary responsibility is vested in an authorized employee for a set number of employees working under the protection of a group lockout or tagout device (such as an operations lock); (B) Provision for the authorized employee to ascertain the exposure status of individual group members with regard to the lockout or tagout of the machine or equipment and (C) When more than one crew, craft, department, etc. is involved, assignment of overall job-associated lockout or tagout control responsibility to an authorized employee designated to coordinate affected work forces and ensure continuity of protection; and (D) Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or tagout device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable mechanism when he or she begins work, and shall remove those devices when he or she stops working on the machine or equipment being serviced or maintained. (4) Shift or personnel changes. Note: The following appendix to § 1910.147 services as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers and employees in complying with the requirements of this section, as well as to provide other helpful information. Nothing in the appendix adds to or detracts from any of the requirements of this section. Appendix A to § 1910.147—Typical Minimal Lockout Procedure General The following simple lockout procedure is provided to assist employers in developing their procedures so they meet the requirements of this standard. When the energy isolating devices are not lockable, tagout may be used, provided the employer complies with the provisions of the standard which require additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections. When tagout is used and the energy isolating devices are lockable, the employer must provide full employee protection ( see Lockout Procedure Lockout procedure for (Name of Company for single procedure or identification of equipment if multiple procedures are used) Purpose This procedure establishes the minimum requirements for the lockout of energy isolating devices whenever maintenance or servicing is done on machines or equipment. It shall be used to ensure that the machine or equipment is stopped, isolated from all potentially hazardous energy sources and locked out before employees perform any servicing or maintenance where the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment or release of stored energy could cause injury. Compliance With This Program All employees are required to comply with the restrictions and limitations imposed upon them during the use of lockout. The authorized employees are required to perform the lockout in accordance with this procedure. All employees, upon observing a machine or piece of equipment which is locked out to perform servicing or maintenance shall not attempt to start, energize or use that machine or equipment. Type of compliance enforcement to be taken for violation of the above. Sequence of Lockout (1) Notify all affected employees that servicing or maintenance is required on a machine or equipment and that the machine or equipment must be shut down and locked out to perform the servicing or maintenance. Name(s)/Job Title(s) of affected employees and how to notify. (2) The authorized employee shall refer to the company procedure to identify the type and magnitude of the energy that the machine or equipment utilizes, shall understand the hazards of the energy, and shall know the methods to control the energy. Type(s) and magnitude(s) of energy, its hazards and the methods to control the energy. (3) If the machine or equipment is operating, shut it down by the normal stopping procedure (depress stop button, open switch, close valve, etc.). Type(s) and location(s) of machine or equipment operating controls. (4) De-activate the energy isolating device(s) so that the machine or equipment is isolated from the energy source(s). Type(s) and location(s) of energy isolating devices. (5) Lock out the energy isolating device(s) with assigned individual lock(s). (6) Stored or residual energy (such as that in capacitors, springs, elevated machine members, rotating flywheels, hydraulic systems, and air, gas, steam, or water pressure, etc.) must be dissipated or restrained by methods such as grounding, repositioning, blocking, bleeding down, etc. Type(s) of stored energy—methods to dissipate or restrain. (7) Ensure that the equipment is disconnected from the energy source(s) by first checking that no personnel are exposed, then verify the isolation of the equipment by operating the push button or other normal operating control(s) or by testing to make certain the equipment will not operate. Caution: Method of verifying the isolation of the equipment. (8) The machine or equipment is now locked out. Restoring Equipment to Service. (1) Check the machine or equipment and the immediate area around the machine or equipment to ensure that nonessential items have been removed and that the machine or equipment components are operationally intact. (2) Check the work area to ensure that all employees have been safely positioned or removed from the area. (3) Verify that the controls are in neutral. (4) Remove the lockout devices and reenergize the machine or equipment. Note: The removal of some forms of blocking may require reenergization of the machine before safe removal. (5) Notify affected employees that the servicing or maintenance is completed and the machine or equipment is ready for use. [54 FR 36687, Sept. 1, 1989, as amended at 54 FR 42498, Oct. 17, 1989; 55 FR 38685, 38686, Sept. 20, 1990; 76 FR 24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR 44265, July 25, 2011] Subpart K—Medical and First Aid Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), or 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), as applicable, and 29 CFR part 1911. § 1910.151 Medical services and first aid. (a) The employer shall ensure the ready availability of medical personnel for advice and consultation on matters of plant health. (b) In the absence of an infirmary, clinic, or hospital in near proximity to the workplace which is used for the treatment of all injured employees, a person or persons shall be adequately trained to render first aid. Adequate first aid supplies shall be readily available. (c) Where the eyes or body of any person may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes and body shall be provided within the work area for immediate emergency use. Appendix A to § 1910.151—First aid kits (Non-Mandatory) First aid supplies are required to be readily available under paragraph § 1910.151(b). An example of the minimal contents of a generic first aid kit is described in American National Standard (ANSI) Z308.1-1998 “Minimum Requirements for Workplace First-aid Kits.” The contents of the kit listed in the ANSI standard should be adequate for small worksites. When larger operations or multiple operations are being conducted at the same location, employers should determine the need for additional first aid kits at the worksite, additional types of first aid equipment and supplies and additional quantities and types of supplies and equipment in the first aid kits. In a similar fashion, employers who have unique or changing first-aid needs in their workplace may need to enhance their first-aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 300 log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to identify these unique problems. Consultation from the local fire/rescue department, appropriate medical professional, or local emergency room may be helpful to employers in these circumstances. By assessing the specific needs of their workplace, employers can ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies are available. Employers should assess the specific needs of their worksite periodically and augment the first aid kit appropriately. If it is reasonably anticipated that employees will be exposed to blood or other potentially infectious materials while using first aid supplies, employers are required to provide appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) in compliance with the provisions of the Occupational Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens standard, § 1910.1030(d)(3) (56 FR 64175). This standard lists appropriate PPE for this type of exposure, such as gloves, gowns, face shields, masks, and eye protection. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011] § 1910.152 [Reserved] Subpart L—Fire Protection Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), or 5-2007 (72 FR 31160), as applicable, and 29 CFR part 1911. § 1910.155 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Scope. (b) Application. (c) Definitions applicable to this subpart After-flame (2) Aqueous film forming foam (AFFF) (3) Approved (i) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled or otherwise determined to be safe by a nationally recognized testing laboratory; or (ii) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by another Federal agency and found in compliance with the provisions of the applicable National Fire Protection Association Fire Code; or (iii) With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations which are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by its manufacturer on the basis of test data which the employer keeps and makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary. (iv) For the purposes of paragraph (c)(3) of this section: (A) Equipment is listed if it is of a kind mentioned in a list which is published by a nationally recognized testing laboratory which makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment and which states that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner; (B) Equipment is labeled if there is attached to it a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory which makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment, and whose labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner; (C) Equipment is accepted if it has been inspected and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to conform to specified plans or to procedures of applicable codes; and (D) Equipment is certified if it has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner or is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and if it bears a label, tag, or other record of certification. (E) Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory. (4) Assistant Secretary (5) Automatic fire detection device (6) Buddy-breathing device (7) Carbon dioxide 2 (8) Class A fire (9) Class B fire (10) Class C fire (11) Class D fire (12) Dry chemical (13) Dry powder (14) Education (15) Enclosed structure (16) Extinguisher classification (17) Extinguisher rating (18) Fire brigade (19) Fixed extinguishing system (20) Flame resistance (21) Foam (22) Gaseous agent (23) Halon 1211 2 (24) Halon 1301 3 (25) Helmet (26) Incipient stage fire (27) Inspection (28) Interior structural fire fighting (29) Lining (30) Local application system (31) Maintenance (32) Multipurpose dry chemical (33) Outer shell (34) Positive-pressure breathing apparatus (35) Pre-discharge employee alarm (36) Quick disconnect valve (37) Sprinkler alarm (38) Sprinkler system (39) Standpipe systems. Class I standpipe system 1/2 (ii) Class II standpipe system 1/2 (iii) Class III standpipe system 1/2 1/2 (iv) Small hose system 5/8 1/2 (40) Total flooding system (41) Training (42) Vapor barrier [45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988] § 1910.156 Fire brigades. (a) Scope and application Scope. (2) Application. (b) Organization Organizational statement. (2) Personnel. (c) Training and education. (2) The employer shall assure that training and education is conducted frequently enough to assure that each member of the fire brigade is able to perform the member's assigned duties and functions satisfactorily and in a safe manner so as not to endanger fire brigade members or other employees. All fire brigade members shall be provided with training at least annually. In addition, fire brigade members who are expected to perform interior structural fire fighting shall be provided with an education session or training at least quarterly. (3) The quality of the training and education program for fire brigade members shall be similar to those conducted by such fire training schools as the Maryland Fire and Rescue Institute; Iowa Fire Service Extension; West Virginia Fire Service Extension; Georgia Fire Academy, New York State Department, Fire Prevention and Control; Louisiana State University Firemen Training Program, or Washington State's Fire Service Training Commission for Vocational Education. (For example, for the oil refinery industry, with its unique hazards, the training and education program for those fire brigade members shall be similar to those conducted by Texas A & M University, Lamar University, Reno Fire School, or the Delaware State Fire School.) (4) The employer shall inform fire brigade members about special hazards such as storage and use of flammable liquids and gases, toxic chemicals, radioactive sources, and water reactive substances, to which they may be exposed during fire and other emergencies. The fire brigade members shall also be advised of any changes that occur in relation to the special hazards. The employer shall develop and make available for inspection by fire brigade members, written procedures that describe the actions to be taken in situations involving the special hazards and shall include these in the training and education program. (d) Fire fighting equipment. (e) Protective clothing. (1) General. (ii) The employer shall assure that protective clothing protects the head, body, and extremities, and consists of at least the following components: foot and leg protection; hand protection; body protection; eye, face and head protection. (2) Foot and leg protection. (A) Fully extended boots which provide protection for the legs; or (B) Protective shoes or boots worn in combination with protective trousers that meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(3) of this section. (ii) Protective footwear shall meet the requirements of § 1910.136 for Class 75 footwear. In addition, protective footwear shall be water-resistant for at least 5 inches (12.7 cm) above the bottom of the heel and shall be equipped with slip-resistant outer soles. (iii) Protective footwear shall be tested in accordance with paragraph (1) of appendix E, and shall provide protection against penetration of the midsole by a size 8D common nail when at least 300 pounds (1330 N) of static force is applied to the nail. (3) Body protection. (A) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat meeting the requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section in combination with fully extended boots meeting the requirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) and (e)(2)(iii) of this section; or (B) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat in combination with protective trousers both of which meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section. (ii) The performance, construction, and testing of fire-resistive coats and protective trousers shall be at least equivalent to the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standard NFPA No. 1971-1975, “Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting,” which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, (See appendix D to subpart L) with the following permissible variations from those requirements: (A) Tearing strength of the outer shell shall be a minimum of 8 pounds (35.6 N) in any direction when tested in accordance with paragraph (2) of appendix E; and (B) The outer shell may discolor but shall not separate or melt when placed in a forced air laboratory oven at a temperature of 500 °F (260 °C) for a period of five minutes. After cooling to ambient temperature and using the test method specified in paragraph (3) of appendix E, char length shall not exceed 4.0 inches (10.2 cm) and after-flame shall not exceed 2.0 seconds. (4) Hand protection. (A) Materials used for gloves shall resist surface cut by a blade with an edge having a 60° included angle and a .001 inch (.0025 cm.) radius, under an applied force of 16 lbf (72N), and at a slicing velocity of greater or equal to 60 in/min (2.5 cm./sec); (B) Materials used for the palm and palm side of the fingers shall resist puncture by a penetrometer (simulating a 4d lath nail), under an applied force of 13.2 lbf (60N), and at a velocity greater or equal to 20 in/min (.85 cm./sec); and (C) The temperature inside the palm and gripping surface of the fingers of gloves shall not exceed 135 °F (57 °C) when gloves or glove system are exposed to 932 °F (500 °C) for five seconds at 4 psi (28 kPa) pressure. (ii) Exterior materials of gloves shall be flame resistant and shall be tested in accordance with paragraph (3) of appendix E. Maximum allowable afterflame shall be 2.0 seconds, and the maximum char length shall be 4.0 inches (10.2 cm). (iii) When design of the fire-resistive coat does not otherwise provide protection for the wrists, protective gloves shall have wristlets of at least 4.0 inches (10.2 cm) in length to protect the wrist area when the arms are extended upward and outward from the body. (5) Head, eye and face protection. (ii) Protective eye and face devices which comply with § 1910.133 shall be used by fire brigade members when performing operations where the hazards of flying or falling materials which may cause eye and face injuries are present. Protective eye and face devices provided as accessories to protective head devices (face shields) are permitted when such devices meet the requirements of § 1910.133. (iii) Full facepieces, helmets, or hoods of breathing apparatus which meet the requirements of § 1910.134 and paragraph (f) of this section, shall be acceptable as meeting the eye and face protection requirements of paragraph (e)(5)(ii) of this section. (f) Respiratory protection devices General requirements. (ii) Approved self-contained breathing apparatus with full-facepiece, or with approved helmet or hood configuration, shall be provided to and worn by fire brigade members while working inside buildings or confined spaces where toxic products of combustion or an oxygen deficiency may be present. Such apparatus shall also be worn during emergency situations involving toxic substances. (iii) Approved self-contained breathing apparatus may be equipped with either a “buddy-breathing” device or a quick disconnect valve, even if these devices are not certified by NIOSH. If these accessories are used, they shall not cause damage to the apparatus, or restrict the air flow of the apparatus, or obstruct the normal operation of the apparatus. (iv) Approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus may be used with approved cylinders from other approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus provided that such cylinders are of the same capacity and pressure rating. All compressed air cylinders used with self-contained breathing apparatus shall meet DOT and NIOSH criteria. (v) Self-contained breathing apparatuses must have a minimum service-life rating of 30 minutes in accordance with the methods and requirements specified by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, except for escape self-contained breathing apparatus (ESCBAs) used only for emergency escape purposes. (vi) Self-contained breathing apparatus shall be provided with an indicator which automatically sounds an audible alarm when the remaining service life of the apparatus is reduced to within a range of 20 to 25 percent of its rated service time. (2) Positive-pressure breathing apparatus. (ii) This paragraph does not prohibit the use of a self-contained breathing apparatus where the apparatus can be switched from a demand to a positive-pressure mode. However, such apparatus shall be in the positive-pressure mode when fire brigade members are performing interior structural fire fighting operations. [45 FR 60706, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008] Portable Fire Suppression Equipment § 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers. (a) Scope and application. (b) Exemptions. (2) Where the employer has an emergency action plan meeting the requirements of § 1910.38 which designates certain employees to be the only employees authorized to use the available portable fire extinguishers, and which requires all other employees in the fire area to immediately evacuate the affected work area upon the sounding of the fire alarm, the employer is exempt from the distribution requirements in paragraph (d) of this section. (c) General requirements. (2) Only approved portable fire extinguishers shall be used to meet the requirements of this section. (3) The employer shall not provide or make available in the workplace portable fire extinguishers using carbon tetrachloride or chlorobromomethane extinguishing agents. (4) The employer shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are maintained in a fully charged and operable condition and kept in their designated places at all times except during use. (5) The employer shall remove from service all soldered or riveted shell self-generating soda acid or self-generating foam or gas cartridge water type portable fire extinguishers which are operated by inverting the extinguisher to rupture the cartridge or to initiate an uncontrollable pressure generating chemical reaction to expel the agent. (d) Selection and distribution. (2) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers for use by employees on Class A fires so that the travel distance for employees to any extinguisher is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less. (3) The employer may use uniformly spaced standpipe systems or hose stations connected to a sprinkler system installed for emergency use by employees instead of Class A portable fire extinguishers, provided that such systems meet the respective requirements of § 1910.158 or § 1910.159, that they provide total coverage of the area to be protected, and that employees are trained at least annually in their use. (4) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers for use by employees on Class B fires so that the travel distance from the Class B hazard area to any extinguisher is 50 feet (15.2 m) or less. (5) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers used for Class C hazards on the basis of the appropriate pattern for the existing Class A or Class B hazards. (6) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers or other containers of Class D extinguishing agent for use by employees so that the travel distance from the combustible metal working area to any extinguishing agent is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less. Portable fire extinguishers for Class D hazards are required in those combustible metal working areas where combustible metal powders, flakes, shavings, or similarly sized products are generated at least once every two weeks. (e) Inspection, maintenance and testing. (2) Portable extinguishers or hose used in lieu thereof under paragraph (d)(3) of this section shall be visually inspected monthly. (3) The employer shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are subjected to an annual maintenance check. Stored pressure extinguishers do not require an internal examination. The employer shall record the annual maintenance date and retain this record for one year after the last entry or the life of the shell, whichever is less. The record shall be available to the Assistant Secretary upon request. (4) The employer shall assure that stored pressure dry chemical extinguishers that require a 12-year hydrostatic test are emptied and subjected to applicable maintenance procedures every 6 years. Dry chemical extinguishers having non-refillable disposable containers are exempt from this requirement. When recharging or hydrostatic testing is performed, the 6-year requirement begins from that date. (5) The employer shall assure that alternate equivalent protection is provided when portable fire extinguishers are removed from service for maintenance and recharging. (f) Hydrostatic testing. (2) The employer shall assure that portable extinguishers are hydrostatically tested at the intervals listed in Table L-1 of this section, except under any of the following conditions: (i) When the unit has been repaired by soldering, welding, brazing, or use of patching compounds; (ii) When the cylinder or shell threads are damaged; (iii) When there is corrosion that has caused pitting, including corrosion under removable name plate assemblies; (iv) When the extinguisher has been burned in a fire; or (v) When a calcium chloride extinguishing agent has been used in a stainless steel shell. (3) In addition to an external visual examination, the employer shall assure that an internal examination of cylinders and shells to be tested is made prior to the hydrostatic tests. Table L-1 Type of extinguishers Test interval (years) Soda acid (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) ( 1 Soda acid (stainless steel shell) 5 Cartridge operated water and/or antifreeze 5 Stored pressure water and/or antifreeze 5 Wetting agent 5 Foam (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) ( 1 Foam (stainless steel shell) 5 Aqueous Film Forming foam (AFFF) 5 Loaded stream 5 Dry chemical with stainless steel 5 Carbon dioxide 5 Dry chemical, stored pressure, with mild steel, brazed brass or aluminum shells 12 Dry chemical, cartridge or cylinder operated, with mild steel shells 12 Halon 1211 12 Halon 1301 12 Dry powder, cartridge or cylinder operated with mild steel shells 12 1 (4) The employer shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are hydrostatically tested whenever they show new evidence of corrosion or mechanical injury, except under the conditions listed in paragraphs (f)(2)(i)-(v) of this section. (5) The employer shall assure that hydrostatic tests are performed on extinguisher hose assemblies which are equipped with a shut-off nozzle at the discharge end of the hose. The test interval shall be the same as specified for the extinguisher on which the hose is installed. (6) The employer shall assure that carbon dioxide hose assemblies with a shut-off nozzle are hydrostatically tested at 1,250 psi (8,620 kPa). (7) The employer shall assure that dry chemical and dry powder hose assemblies with a shut-off nozzle are hydrostatically tested at 300 psi (2,070 kPa). (8) Hose assemblies passing a hydrostatic test do not require any type of recording or stamping. (9) The employer shall assure that hose assemblies for carbon dioxide extinguishers that require a hydrostatic test are tested within a protective cage device. (10) The employer shall assure that carbon dioxide extinguishers and nitrogen or carbon dioxide cylinders used with wheeled extinguishers are tested every 5 years at 5/3 of the service pressure as stamped into the cylinder. Nitrogen cylinders which comply with 49 CFR 173.34(e)(15) may be hydrostatically tested every 10 years. (11) The employer shall assure that all stored pressure and Halon 1211 types of extinguishers are hydrostatically tested at the factory test pressure not to exceed two times the service pressure. (12) The employer shall assure that acceptable self-generating type soda acid and foam extinguishers are tested at 350 psi (2,410 kPa). (13) Air or gas pressure may not be used for hydrostatic testing. (14) Extinguisher shells, cylinders, or cartridges which fail a hydrostatic pressure test, or which are not fit for testing shall be removed from service and from the workplace. (15)(i) The equipment for testing compressed gas type cylinders shall be of the water jacket type. The equipment shall be provided with an expansion indicator which operates with an accuracy within one percent of the total expansion or .1cc (.1mL) of liquid. (ii) The equipment for testing non-compressed gas type cylinders shall consist of the following: (A) A hydrostatic test pump, hand or power operated, capable of producing not less than 150 percent of the test pressure, which shall include appropriate check valves and fittings; (B) A flexible connection for attachment to fittings to test through the extinguisher nozzle, test bonnet, or hose outlet, as is applicable; and (C) A protective cage or barrier for personal protection of the tester, designed to provide visual observation of the extinguisher under test. (16) The employer shall maintain and provide upon request to the Assistant Secretary evidence that the required hydrostatic testing of fire extinguishers has been performed at the time intervals shown in Table L-1. Such evidence shall be in the form of a certification record which includes the date of the test, the signature of the person who performed the test and the serial number, or other identifier, of the fire extinguisher that was tested. Such records shall be kept until the extinguisher is hydrostatically retested at the time interval specified in Table L-1 or until the extinguisher is taken out of service, whichever comes first. (g) Training and education. (2) The employer shall provide the education required in paragraph (g)(1) of this section upon initial employment and at least annually thereafter. (3) The employer shall provide employees who have been designated to use fire fighting equipment as part of an emergency action plan with training in the use of the appropriate equipment. (4) The employer shall provide the training required in paragraph (g)(3) of this section upon initial assignment to the designated group of employees and at least annually thereafter. [45 FR 60708, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981, as amended at 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002] § 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems. (a) Scope and application Scope. (2) Exception. (b) Protection of standpipes. (c) Equipment Reels and cabinets. (2) Hose outlets and connections. (ii) The employer shall standardize screw threads or provide appropriate adapters throughout the system and assure that the hose connections are compatible with those used on the supporting fire equipment. (3) Hose. 1/2 (ii) Standpipe systems installed after January 1, 1981, for use by employees, shall be equipped with lined hose. Unlined hose may remain in use on existing systems. However, after the effective date of this standard, unlined hose which becomes unserviceable shall be replaced with lined hose. (iii) The employer shall provide hose of such length that friction loss resulting from water flowing through the hose will not decrease the pressure at the nozzle below 30 psi (210 kPa). The dynamic pressure at the nozzle shall be within the range of 30 psi (210 kPa) to 125 psi (860 kPa). (4) Nozzles. (d) Water supply. (e) Tests and maintenance Acceptance tests. (ii) The employer shall assure that hose on all standpipe systems installed after January 1, 1981, is hydrostatically tested with couplings in place, at a pressure of not less than 200 psi (1380 kPa), before it is placed in service. This pressure shall be maintained for at least 15 seconds and not more than one minute during which time the hose shall not leak nor shall any jacket thread break during the test. (2) Maintenance. (ii) The employer shall assure that valves in the main piping connections to the automatic sources of water supply are kept fully open at all times except during repair. (iii) The employer shall assure that hose systems are inspected at least annually and after each use to assure that all of the equipment and hose are in place, available for use, and in serviceable condition. (iv) When the system or any portion thereof is found not to be serviceable, the employer shall remove it from service immediately and replace it with equivalent protection such as extinguishers and fire watches. (v) The employer shall assure that hemp or linen hose on existing systems is unracked, physically inspected for deterioration, and reracked using a different fold pattern at least annually. The employer shall assure that defective hose is replaced in accordance with paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section. (vi) The employer shall designate trained persons to conduct all inspections required under this section. [45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996] Fixed Fire Suppression Equipment § 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems. (a) Scope and application. (2) For automatic sprinkler systems used to meet OSHA requirements and installed prior to the effective date of this standard, compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) or the National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU) standard in effect at the time of the system's installation will be acceptable as compliance with this section. (b) Exemptions. (c) General requirements Design. (ii) The employer shall assure that only approved equipment and devices are used in the design and installation of automatic sprinkler systems used to comply with this standard. (2) Maintenance. (3) Acceptance tests. (i) Flushing of underground connections; (ii) Hydrostatic tests of piping in system; (iii) Air tests in dry-pipe systems; (iv) Dry-pipe valve operation; and (v) Test of drainage facilities. (4) Water supplies. (5) Hose connections for fire fighting use. (6) Protection of piping. (7) Drainage. (8) Sprinklers. (ii) The employer may not use older style sprinklers to replace standard sprinklers without a complete engineering review of the altered part of the system. (iii) The employer shall assure that sprinklers are protected from mechanical damage. (9) Sprinkler alarms. (10) Sprinkler spacing. (11) Hydraulically designed systems. [45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981] § 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, general. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section also applies to fixed systems not installed to meet a particular OSHA standard, but which, by means of their operation, may expose employees to possible injury, death, or adverse health consequences caused by the extinguishing agent. Such systems are only subject to the requirements of paragraphs (b)(4) through (b)(7) and (c) of this section. (3) Systems otherwise covered in paragraph (a)(2) of this section which are installed in areas with no employee exposure are exempted from the requirements of this section. (b) General requirements. (2) If for any reason a fixed extinguishing system becomes inoperable, the employer shall notify employees and take the necessary temporary precautions to assure their safety until the system is restored to operating order. Any defects or impairments shall be properly corrected by trained personnel. (3) The employer shall provide a distinctive alarm or signaling system which complies with § 1910.165 and is capable of being perceived above ambient noise or light levels, on all extinguishing systems in those portions of the workplace covered by the extinguishing system to indicate when the extinguishing system is discharging. Discharge alarms are not required on systems where discharge is immediately recognizable. (4) The employer shall provide effective safeguards to warn employees against entry into discharge areas where the atmosphere remains hazardous to employee safety or health. (5) The employer shall post hazard warning or caution signs at the entrance to, and inside of, areas protected by fixed extinguishing systems which use agents in concentrations known to be hazardous to employee safety and health. (6) The employer shall assure that fixed systems are inspected annually by a person knowledgeable in the design and function of the system to assure that the system is maintained in good operating condition. (7) The employer shall assure that the weight and pressure of refillable containers is checked at least semi-annually. If the container shows a loss in net content or weight of more than 5 percent, or a loss in pressure of more than 10 percent, it shall be subjected to maintenance. (8) The employer shall assure that factory charged nonrefillable containers which have no means of pressure indication are weighed at least semi-annually. If a container shows a loss in net weight or more than 5 percent it shall be replaced. (9) The employer shall assure that inspection and maintenance dates are recorded on the container, on a tag attached to the container, or in a central location. A record of the last semi-annual check shall be maintained until the container is checked again or for the life of the container, whichever is less. (10) The employer shall train employees designated to inspect, maintain, operate, or repair fixed extinguishing systems and annually review their training to keep them up-to-date in the functions they are to perform. (11) The employer shall not use chlorobromomethane or carbon tetrachloride as an extinguishing agent where employees may be exposed. (12) The employer shall assure that systems installed in the presence of corrosive atmospheres are constructed of non-corrosive material or otherwise protected against corrosion. (13) Automatic detection equipment shall be approved, installed and maintained in accordance with § 1910.164. (14) The employer shall assure that all systems designed for and installed in areas with climatic extremes shall operate effectively at the expected extreme temperatures. (15) The employer shall assure that at least one manual station is provided for discharge activation of each fixed extinguishing system. (16) The employer shall assure that manual operating devices are identified as to the hazard against which they will provide protection. (17) The employer shall provide and assure the use of the personal protective equipment needed for immediate rescue of employees trapped in hazardous atmospheres created by an agent discharge. (c) Total flooding systems with potential health and safety hazards to employees. (2) Systems installed in areas where employees cannot enter during or after the system's operation are exempt from the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section. (3) On all total flooding systems the employer shall provide a pre-discharge employee alarm which complies with § 1910.165, and is capable of being perceived above ambient light or noise levels before the system discharges, which will give employees time to safely exit from the discharge area prior to system discharge. (4) The employer shall provide automatic actuation of total flooding systems by means of an approved fire detection device installed and interconnected with a pre-discharge employee alarm system to give employees time to safely exit from the discharge area prior to system discharge. [45 FR 60711, Sept. 12, 1980] § 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry chemical. (a) Scope and application. (b) Specific requirements. (2) The employer may not mix together dry chemical extinguishing agents of different compositions. The employer shall assure that dry chemical systems are refilled with the chemical stated on the approval nameplate or an equivalent compatible material. (3) When dry chemical discharge may obscure vision, the employer shall provide a pre-discharge employee alarm which complies with § 1910.165 and which will give employees time to safely exit from the discharge area prior to system discharge. (4) The employer shall sample the dry chemical supply of all but stored pressure systems at least annually to assure that the dry chemical supply is free of moisture which may cause the supply to cake or form lumps. (5) The employer shall assure that the rate of application of dry chemicals is such that the designed concentration of the system will be reached within 30 seconds of initial discharge. [45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980] § 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gaseous agent. (a) Scope and application Scope. (2) Application. (b) Specific requirements. (2) Except during overhaul, the employer shall assure that the designed concentration of gaseous agents is maintained until the fire has been extinguished or is under control. (3) The employer shall assure that employees are not exposed to toxic levels of gaseous agent or its decomposition products. (4) The employer shall assure that the designed extinguishing concentration is reached within 30 seconds of initial discharge except for Halon systems which must achieve design concentration within 10 seconds. (5) The employer shall provide a distinctive pre-discharge employee alarm capable of being perceived above ambient light or noise levels when agent design concentrations exceed the maximum safe level for employee exposure. A pre-discharge employee alarm for alerting employees before system discharge shall be provided on Halon 1211 and carbon dioxide systems with a design concentration of 4 percent or greater and for Halon 1301 systems with a design concentration of 10 percent or greater. The pre-discharge employee alarm shall provide employees time to safely exit the discharge area prior to system discharge. (6)(i) Where egress from an area cannot be accomplished within one minute, the employer shall not use Halon 1301 in concentrations greater than 7 percent. (ii) Where egress takes greater than 30 seconds but less than one minute, the employer shall not use Halon 1301 in a concentration greater than 10 percent. (iii) Halon 1301 concentrations greater than 10 percent are only permitted in areas not normally occupied by employees provided that any employee in the area can escape within 30 seconds. The employer shall assure that no unprotected employees enter the area during agent discharge. [45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981] § 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water spray and foam. (a) Scope and application. (b) Specific requirements. (2) The employer shall assure that drainage of water spray systems is directed away from areas where employees are working and that no emergency egress is permitted through the drainage path. [45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980] Other Fire Protection Systems § 1910.164 Fire detection systems. (a) Scope and application. (b) Installation and restoration. (2) The employer shall restore all fire detection systems and components to normal operating condition as promptly as possible after each test or alarm. Spare detection devices and components which are normally destroyed in the process of detecting fires shall be available on the premises or from a local supplier in sufficient quantities and locations for prompt restoration of the system. (c) Maintenance and testing. (2) The employer shall assure that fire detectors and fire detection systems are tested and adjusted as often as needed to maintain proper reliability and operating condition except that factory calibrated detectors need not be adjusted after installation. (3) The employer shall assure that pneumatic and hydraulic operated detection systems installed after January 1, 1981, are equipped with supervised systems. (4) The employer shall assure that the servicing, maintenance and testing of fire detection systems, including cleaning and necessary sensitivity adjustments are performed by a trained person knowledgeable in the operations and functions of the system. (5) The employer shall also assure that fire detectors that need to be cleaned of dirt, dust, or other particulates in order to be fully operational are cleaned at regular periodic intervals. (d) Protection of fire detectors. (2) The employer shall locate or otherwise protect detection equipment so that it is protected from mechanical or physical impact which might render it inoperable. (3) The employer shall assure that detectors are supported independently of their attachment to wires or tubing. (e) Response time. (2) The employer shall assure that fire detection systems installed for the purpose of employee alarm and evacuation be designed and installed to provide a warning for emergency action and safe escape of employees. (3) The employer shall not delay alarms or devices initiated by fire detector actuation for more than 30 seconds unless such delay is necessary for the immediate safety of employees. When such delay is necessary, it shall be addressed in an emergency action plan meeting the requirements of § 1910.38. (f) Number, location and spacing of detecting devices. [45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980] § 1910.165 Employee alarm systems. (a) Scope and application. (2) The requirements in this section that pertain to maintenance, testing and inspection shall apply to all local fire alarm signaling systems used for alerting employees regardless of the other functions of the system. (3) All pre-discharge employee alarms installed to meet a particular OSHA standard shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) through (4), (c), and (d)(1) of this section. (b) General requirements. (2) The employee alarm shall be capable of being perceived above ambient noise or light levels by all employees in the affected portions of the workplace. Tactile devices may be used to alert those employees who would not otherwise be able to recognize the audible or visual alarm. (3) The employee alarm shall be distinctive and recognizable as a signal to evacuate the work area or to perform actions designated under the emergency action plan. (4) The employer shall explain to each employee the preferred means of reporting emergencies, such as manual pull box alarms, public address systems, radio or telephones. The employer shall post emergency telephone numbers near telephones, or employee notice boards, and other conspicuous locations when telephones serve as a means of reporting emergencies. Where a communication system also serves as the employee alarm system, all emergency messages shall have priority over all non-emergency messages. (5) The employer shall establish procedures for sounding emergency alarms in the workplace. For those employers with 10 or fewer employees in a particular workplace, direct voice communication is an acceptable procedure for sounding the alarm provided all employees can hear the alarm. Such workplaces need not have a back-up system. (c) Installation and restoration. (2) The employer shall assure that all employee alarm systems are restored to normal operating condition as promptly as possible after each test or alarm. Spare alarm devices and components subject to wear or destruction shall be available in sufficient quantities and locations for prompt restoration of the system. (d) Maintenance and testing. (2) The employer shall assure that a test of the reliability and adequacy of non-supervised employee alarm systems is made every two months. A different actuation device shall be used in each test of a multi-actuation device system so that no individual device is used for two consecutive tests. (3) The employer shall maintain or replace power supplies as often as is necessary to assure a fully operational condition. Back-up means of alarm, such as employee runners or telephones, shall be provided when systems are out of service. (4) The employer shall assure that employee alarm circuitry installed after January 1, 1981, which is capable of being supervised is supervised and that it will provide positive notification to assigned personnel whenever a deficiency exists in the system. The employer shall assure that all supervised employee alarm systems are tested at least annually for reliability and adequacy. (5) The employer shall assure that the servicing, maintenance and testing of employee alarms are done by persons trained in the designed operation and functions necessary for reliable and safe operation of the system. (e) Manual operation. [45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980] Appendixes to Subpart L of Part 1910—Note Note: The following appendices to subpart L, except appendix E, serve as nonmandatory guidelines to assist employers in complying with the appropriate requirements of subpart L. Appendix A to Subpart L of Part 1910—Fire Protection § 1910.156 Fire brigades. 1. Scope. 2. Pre-fire planning. 3. Organizational statement. 4. Physical capability. Physically capable can be defined as being able to perform those duties specified in the training requirements of section 1910.156(c). Physically capable can also be determined by physical performance tests or by a physical examination when the examining physician is aware of the duties that the fire brigade member is expected to perform. It is also recommended that fire brigade members participate in a physical fitness program. There are many benefits which can be attributed to being physically fit. It is believed that physical fitness may help to reduce the number of sprain and strain injuries as well as contributing to the improvement of the cardiovascular system. 5. Training and education. At a minimum, hands-on training is required to be conducted annually for all fire brigade members. However, for those fire brigade members who are expected to perform interior structural fire fighting, some type of training or education session must be provided at least quarterly. In addition to the required hands-on training, it is strongly recommended that fire brigade members receive other types of training and education such as: classroom instruction, review of emergency action procedures, pre-fire planning, review of special hazards in the workplace, and practice in the use of self-contained breathing apparatus. It is not necessary for the employer to duplicate the same training or education that a fire brigade member receives as a member of a community volunteer fire department, rescue squad, or similar organization. However, such training or education must have been provided to the fire brigade member within the past year and it must be documented that the fire brigade member has received the training or education. For example: there is no need for a fire brigade member to receive another training class in the use of positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus if the fire brigade member has recently completed such training as a member of a community fire department. Instead, the fire brigade member should receive training or education covering other important equipment or duties of the fire brigade as they relate to the workplace hazards, facilities and processes. It is generally recognized that the effectiveness of fire brigade training and education depends upon the expertise of those providing the training and education as well as the motivation of the fire brigade members. Fire brigade training instructors must receive a higher level of training and education than the fire brigade members they will be teaching. This includes being more knowledgeable about the functions to be performed by the fire brigade and the hazards involved. The instructors should be qualified to train fire brigade members and demonstrate skills in communication, methods of teaching, and motivation. It is important for instructors and fire brigade members alike to be motivated toward the goals of the fire brigade and be aware of the importance of the service that they are providing for the protection of other employees and the workplace. It is suggested that publications from the International Fire Service Training Association, the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-1041), the International Society of Fire Service Instructors and other fire training sources be consulted for recommended qualifications of fire brigade training instructors. In order to be effective, fire brigades must have competent leadership and supervision. It is important for those who supervise the fire brigade during emergency situations, e.g., fire brigade chiefs, leaders, etc., to receive the necessary training and education for supervising fire brigade activities during these hazardous and stressful situations. These fire brigade members with leadership responsibilities should demonstrate skills in strategy and tactics, fire suppression and prevention techniques, leadership principles, pre-fire planning, and safety practices. It is again suggested that fire service training sources be consulted for determining the kinds of training and education which are necessary for those with fire brigade leadership responsibilities. It is further suggested that fire brigade leaders and fire brigade instructors receive more formalized training and education on a continuing basis by attending classes provided by such training sources as universities and university fire extension services. The following recommendations should not be considered to be all of the necessary elements of a complete comprehensive training program, but the information may be helpful as a guide in developing a fire brigade training program. All fire brigade members should be familiar with exit facilities and their location, emergency escape routes for handicapped workers, and the workplace “emergency action plan.” In addition, fire brigade members who are expected to control and extinguish fires in the incipient stage should, at a minimum, be trained in the use of fire extinguishers, standpipes, and other fire equipment they are assigned to use. They should also be aware of first aid medical procedures and procedures for dealing with special hazards to which they may be exposed. Training and education should include both classroom instruction and actual operation of the equipment under simulated emergency conditions. Hands-on type training must be conducted at least annually but some functions should be reviewed more often. In addition to the above training, fire brigade members who are expected to perform emergency rescue and interior structural fire fighting should, at a minimum, be familiar with the proper techniques in rescue and fire suppression procedures. Training and education should include fire protection courses, classroom training, simulated fire situations including “wet drills” and, when feasible, extinguishment of actual mock fires. Frequency of training or education must be at least quarterly, but some drills or classroom training should be conducted as often as monthly or even weekly to maintain the proficiency of fire brigade members. There are many excellent sources of training and education that the employer may want to use in developing a training program for the workplace fire brigade. These sources include publications, seminars, and courses offered by universities. There are also excellent fire school courses by such facilities as Texas A and M University, Delaware State Fire School, Lamar University, and Reno Fire School, that deal with those unique hazards which may be encountered by fire brigades in the oil and chemical industry. These schools, and others, also offer excellent training courses which would be beneficial to fire brigades in other types of industries. These courses should be a continuing part of the training program, and employers are strongly encouraged to take advantage of these excellent resources. It is also important that fire brigade members be informed about special hazards to which they may be exposed during fire and other emergencies. Such hazards as storage and use areas of flammable liquids and gases, toxic chemicals, water-reactive substances, etc., can pose difficult problems. There must be written procedures developed that describe the actions to be taken in situations involving special hazards. Fire brigade members must be trained in handling these special hazards as well as keeping abreast of any changes that occur in relation to these special hazards. 6. Fire fighting equipment. Fire fighting equipment, except portable fire extinguishers and respirators, must be inspected at least annually. Portable fire extinguishers and respirators are required to be inspected at least monthly. 7. Protective clothing. General. Additionally, the protective clothing requirements do not apply to the protective clothing worn during outside fire fighting operations (brush and forest fires, crash crew operations) or other special fire fighting activities. It is important that the protective clothing to be worn during these types of fire fighting operations reflect the hazards which are expected to be encountered by fire brigade members. (B) Foot and leg protection. The section recognizes the interdependence of protective clothing to cover one or more parts of the body. Therefore, an option is given so that fire brigade members may meet the foot and leg requirements by either wearing long fire-resistive coats in combination with fully extended boots, or by wearing shorter fire-resistive costs in combination with protective trousers and protective shoes or shorter boots. (C) Body protection. Fire-resistive coats and protective trousers meeting all of the requirements contained in NFPA 1971-1975 “Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighters,” are acceptable as meeting the requirements of this standard. The lining is required to be permanently attached to the outer shell. However, it is permissible to attach the lining to the outer shell material by stitching in one area such as at the neck. Fastener tape or snap fasteners may be used to secure the rest of the lining to the outer shell to facilitate cleaning. Reference to permanent lining does not refer to a winter liner which is a detachable extra lining used to give added protection to the wearer against the effects of cold weather and wind. (D) Hand protection. It is suggested that protective gloves provide dexterity and a sense of feel for objects. Criteria and test methods for dexterity are contained in the NIOSH publications, “The Development of Criteria for Firefighters' Gloves; Vol. I: Glove Requirements” and “Vol. II: Glove Criteria and Test Methods.” These NIOSH publications also contain a permissible modified version of Federal Test Method 191, Method 5903, (paragraph (3) of appendix E) for flame resistance when gloves, rather than glove material, are tested for flame resistance. (E) Head, eye, and face protection. Head protective devices are required to be provided with ear flaps so that the ear flaps will be available if needed. It is recommended that ear protection always be used while fighting interior structural fires. Many head protective devices are equipped with face shields to protect the eyes and face. These face shields are permissible as meeting the eye and face protection requirements of this paragraph as long as such face shields meet the requirements of § 1910.133 of the General Industry Standards. Additionally, full facepieces, helmets or hoods of approved breathing apparatus which meet the requirements of § 1910.134 and paragraph (f) of § 1910.156 are also acceptable as meeting the eye and face protection requirements. It is recommended that a flame resistant protective head covering such as a hood or snood, which will not adversely affect the seal of a respirator facepiece, be worn during interior structural fire fighting operations to protect the sides of the face and hair. 8. Respiratory protective devices. Self-contained breathing apparatus are not required to be equipped with either a buddy-breathing device or a quick-disconnect valve. However, these accessories may be very useful and are acceptable as long as such accessories do not cause damage to the apparatus, restrict the air flow of the apparatus, or obstruct the normal operation of the apparatus. Buddy-breathing devices are useful for emergency situations where a victim or another fire brigade member can share the same air supply with the wearer of the apparatus for emergency escape purposes. The employer is encouraged to provide fire brigade members with an alternative means of respiratory protection to be used only for emergency escape purposes if the self-contained breathing apparatus becomes inoperative. Such alternative means of respiratory protection may be either a buddy-breathing device or an escape self-contained breathing apparatus (ESCBA). The ESCBA is a short-duration respiratory protective device which is approved for only emergency escape purposes. It is suggested that if ESCBA units are used, that they be of at least 5 minutes service life. Quick-disconnect valves are devices which start the flow of air by insertion of the hose (which leads to the facepiece) into the regulator of self-contained breathing apparatus, and stop the flow of air by disconnecting the hose from the regulator. These devices are particularly useful for those positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus which do not have the capability of being switched from the demand to the positive-pressure mode. The use of a self-contained breathing apparatus where the apparatus can be switched from a demand to a positive-pressure mode is acceptable as long as the apparatus is in the positive-pressure mode when performing interior structural fire fighting operations. Also acceptable are approved respiratory protective devices which have been converted to the positive-pressure type when such modification is accomplished by trained and experienced persons using kits or parts approved by NIOSH and provided by the manufacturer and by following the manufacturer's instructions. There are situations which require the use of respirators which have a duration of 2 hours or more. Presently, there are no approved positive-pressure apparatus with a rated service life of more than 2 hours. Consequently, negative-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus with a rated service life of more than 2 hours and which have a minimum protection factor of 5,000 as determined by an acceptable quantitative fit test performed on each individual, will be acceptable for use during situations which require long duration apparatus. Long duration apparatus may be needed in such instances as working in tunnels, subway systems, etc. Such negative-pressure breathing apparatus will continue to be acceptable for a maximum of 18 months after a positive-pressure apparatus with the same or longer rated service life of more than 2 hours is certified by NIOSH/MSHA. After this 18 month phase-in period, all self-contained breathing apparatus used for these long duration situations will have to be of the positive-pressure type. Protection factor (sometimes called fit factor) is defined as the ratio of the contaminant concentrations outside of the respirator to the contaminant concentrations inside the facepiece of the respirator. Protection factors are determined by quantitative fit tests. An acceptable quantitative fit test should include the following elements: 1. A fire brigade member who is physically and medically capable of wearing respirators, and who is trained in the use of respirators, dons a self-contained breathing apparatus equipped with a device that will monitor the concentration of a contaminant inside the facepiece. 2. The fire brigade member then performs a qualitative fit test to assure the best face to facepiece seal as possible. A qualitative fit test can consist of a negative-pressure test, positive-pressure test, isoamyl acetate vapor (banana oil) test, or an irritant smoke test. For more details on respirator fitting see the NIOSH booklet entitled “A Guide to Industrial Respiratory Protection” June, 1976, and HEW publication No. (NIOSH) 76-189. 3. The wearer should then perform physical activity which reflects the level of work activity which would be expected during fire fighting activities. The physical activity should include simulated fire-ground work activity or physical exercise such as running-in-place, a step test, etc. 4. Without readjusting the apparatus, the wearer is placed in a test atmosphere containing a non-toxic contaminant with a known, constant, concentration. The protection factor is then determined by dividing the known concentration of the contaminant in the test atmosphere by the concentration of the contaminant inside the facepiece when the following exercises are performed: (a) Normal breathing with head motionless for one minute; (b) Deep breathing with head motionless for 30 seconds; (c) Turning head slowly from side to side while breathing normally, pausing for at least two breaths before changing direction. Continue for at least one minute; (d) Moving head slowly up and down while breathing normally, pausing for at least two breaths before changing direction. Continue for at least two minutes; (e) Reading from a prepared text, slowly and clearly, and loudly enough to be heard and understood. Continue for one minute; and (f) Normal breathing with head motionless for at least one minute. The protection factor which is determined must be at least 5,000. The quantitative fit test should be conducted at least three times. It is acceptable to conduct all three tests on the same day. However, there should be at least one hour between tests to reflect the protection afforded by the apparatus during different times of the day. The above elements are not meant to be a comprehensive, technical description of a quantitative fit test protocol. However, quantitative fit test procedures which include these elements are acceptable for determining protection factors. Procedures for a quantitative fit test are required to be available for inspection by the Assistant Secretary or authorized representative. Organizations such as Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory, Lawrence Livermore Laboratory, NIOSH, and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) are excellent sources for additional information concerning qualitative and quantitative fit testing. § 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers. 1. Scope and application. The section also addresses two kinds of work areas. The entire workplace can be divided into outside (exterior) work areas and inside (interior) work areas. This division of the workplace into two areas is done in recognition of the different types of hazards employees may be exposed to during fire fighting operations. Fires in interior workplaces, pose a greater hazard to employees; they can produce greater exposure to quantities of smoke, toxic gases, and heat because of the capability of a building or structure to contain or entrap these products of combustion until the building can be ventilated. Exterior work areas, normally open to the environment, are somewhat less hazardous, because the products of combustion are generally carried away by the thermal column of the fire. Employees also have a greater selection of evacuation routes if it is necessary to abandon fire fighting efforts. In recognition of the degree of hazard present in the two types of work areas, the standards for exterior work areas are somewhat less restrictive in regards to extinguisher distribution. Paragraph (a) explains this by specifying which paragraphs in the section apply. 2. Portable fire extinguisher exemptions. Where the employer has chosen to totally evacuate the workplace at the time of a fire emergency and when fire extinguishers are not provided, the requirements of this section do not apply to that workplace. Where the employer has chosen to partially evacuate the workplace or the effected area at the time of a fire emergency and has permitted certain designated employees to remain behind to operate critical plant operations or to fight fires with extinguishers, then the employer is exempt from the distribution requirements of this section. Employees who will be remaining behind to perform incipient fire fighting or members of a fire brigade must be trained in their duties. The training must result in the employees becoming familiar with the locations of fire extinguishers. Therefore, the employer must locate the extinguishers in convenient locations where the employees know they can be found. For example, they could be mounted in the fire truck or cart that the fire brigade uses when it responds to a fire emergency. They can also be distributed as set forth in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 10, “Portable Fire Extinguishers.” Where the employer has decided to permit all employees in the workforce to use fire extinguishers, then the entire OSHA section applies. 3. Portable fire extinguisher mounting. It is the intent of OSHA to permit the mounting of extinguishers in any location that is accessible to employees without the use of portable devices such as a ladder. This limitation is necessary because portable devices can be moved or taken from the place where they are needed and, therefore, might not be available at the time of an emergency. Employers are given as much flexibility as possible to assure that employees can obtain extinguishers as fast as possible. For example, an acceptable method of mounting extinguishers in areas where fork lift trucks or tow-motors are used is to mount the units on retractable boards which, by means of counterweighting, can be raised above the level where they could be struck by vehicular traffic. When needed, they can be lowered quickly for use. This method of mounting can also reduce vandalism and unauthorized use of extinguishers. The extinguishers may also be mounted as outlined in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 10, “Portable Fire Extinguishers.” 4. Selection and distribution. Extinguishers for protecting Class A hazards may be selected from the following types: water, foam, loaded stream, or multipurpose dry chemical. Extinguishers for protecting Class B hazards may be selected from the following types: Halon 1301, Halon 1211, carbon dioxide, dry chemicals, foam, or loaded stream. Extinguishers for Class C hazards may be selected from the following types: Halon 1301, Halon 1211, carbon dioxide, or dry chemical. Combustible metal (Class D hazards) fires pose a different type of fire problem in the workplace. Extinguishers using water, gas, or certain dry chemicals cannot extinguish or control this type of fire. Therefore, certain metals have specific dry powder extinguishing agents which can extinguish or control this type of fire. Those agents which have been specifically approved for use on certain metal fires provide the best protection; however, there are also some “universal” type agents which can be used effectively on a variety of combustible metal fires if necessary. The “universal” type agents include: Foundry flux, Lith-X powder, TMB liquid, pyromet powder, TEC powder, dry talc, dry graphite powder, dry sand, dry sodium chloride, dry soda ash, lithium chloride, zirconium silicate, and dry dolomite. Water is not generally accepted as an effective extinguishing agent for metal fires. When applied to hot burning metal, water will break down into its basic atoms of oxygen and hydrogen. This chemical breakdown contributes to the combustion of the metal. However, water is also a good universal coolant and can be used on some combustible metals, but only under proper conditions and application, to reduce the temperature of the burning metal below the ignition point. For example, automatic deluge systems in magnesium plants can discharge such large quantities of water on burning magnesium that the fire will be extinguished. The National Fire Protection Association has specific standards for this type of automatic sprinkler system. Further information on the control of metal fires with water can be found in the National Fire Protection Association's Fire Protection Handbook. An excellent source of selection and distribution criteria is found in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 10. Other sources of information include the National Safety Council and the employer's fire insurance carrier. 5. Substitution of standpipe systems for portable fire extinguishers. 6. Inspection, maintenance and testing. If the employer should elect to perform the inspection, maintenance, and testing requirements of this section in-house, then the employer must make sure that those persons doing the work have been trained to do the work and to recognize problem areas which could cause an extinguisher to be inoperable. The National Fire Protection Association provides excellent guidelines in its standard for portable fire extinguishers. The employer may also check with the manufacturer of the unit that has been purchased and obtain guidelines on inspection, maintenance, and testing. Hydrostatic testing is a process that should be left to contractors or individuals using suitable facilities and having the training necessary to perform the work. Anytime the employer has removed an extinguisher from service to be checked or repaired, alternate equivalent protection must be provided. Alternate equivalent protection could include replacing the extinguisher with one or more units having equivalent or equal ratings, posting a fire watch, restricting the unprotected area from employee exposure, or providing a hose system ready to operate. 7. Hydrostatic testing. Employers are encouraged to use contractors who can perform adequate and reliable service. Firms which have been certified by the Materials Transportation Board (MTB) of the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) or State licensed extinguisher servicing firms or recognized by the National Association of Fire Equipment Distributors in Chicago, Illinois, are generally acceptable for performing this service. 8. Training and education. Training and education can be obtained through many channels. Often, local fire departments in larger cities have fire prevention bureaus or similar organizations which can provide basic fire prevention training programs. Fire insurance companies will have data and information available. The National Fire Protection Association and the National Safety Council will provide, at a small cost, publications that can be used in a fire prevention program. Actual fire fighting training can be obtained from various sources in the country. The Texas A & M University, the University of Maryland's Fire and Rescue Institute, West Virginia University's Fire Service Extension, Iowa State University's Fire Service Extension and other State training schools and land grant colleges have fire fighting programs directed to industrial applications. Some manufacturers of extinguishers, such as the Ansul Company and Safety First, conduct fire schools for customers in the proper use of extinguishers. Several large corporations have taken time to develop their own on-site training programs which expose employees to the actual “feeling” of fire fighting. Simulated fires for training of employees in the proper use of extinguishers are also an acceptable part of a training program. In meeting the requirements of this section, the employer may also provide educational materials, without classroom instruction, through the use of employee notice campaigns using instruction sheets or flyers or similar types of informal programs. The employer must make sure that employees are trained and educated to recognize not only what type of fire is being fought and how to fight it, but also when it is time to get away from it and leave fire suppression to more experienced fire fighters. § 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems. 1. Scope and application. The section specifically exempts Class I large hose systems. By large hose systems, OSHA means those 2 1/2 2. Protection of standpipes. 3. Hose covers and cabinets. 4. Hose outlets and connections. 5. Hose. There is approved lined hose available that can be used to replace unlined hose which is stored on racks in cabinets. The lined hose is constructed so that it can be folded and placed in cabinets in the same manner as unlined hose. Hose is considered to be unserviceable when it deteriorates to the extent that it can no longer carry water at the required pressure and flow rates. Dry rotted linen or hemp hose, cross threaded couplings, and punctured hose are examples of unserviceable hose. 6. Nozzles. 7. Design and installation. § 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems. 1. Scope and application. 2. Exemptions. 3. Design. The National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 13, “Automatic Sprinkler Systems,” contains the tables needed to design and install either type of system. Minimum water supplies, densities, and pipe sizes are given for all types of occupancies. The employer may check with a reputable fire protection engineering consultant or sprinkler design company when evaluating existing systems or designing a new installation. With the advent of new construction materials for the manufacuture of sprinkler pipe, materials, other than steel have been approved for use as sprinkler pipe. Selection of pipe material should be made on the basis of the type of installation and the acceptability of the material to local fire and building officials where such systems may serve more than one purpose. Before new sprinkler systems are placed into service, an acceptance test is to be conducted. The employer should invite the installer, designer, insurance representative, and a local fire official to witness the test. Problems found during the test are to be corrected before the system is placed into service. 4. Maintenance. The procedures for performing a flow test via a main drain test or by the use of an inspector's test valve can be obtained from the employer's fire insurance company or from the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 13A, “Sprinkler System, Maintenance.” 5. Water supplies. Anytime the employer must shut down the primary water supply for a sprinkler system, the standard requires that equivalent protection be provided. Equivalent protection may include a fire watch with extinguishers or hose lines in place and manned, or a secondary water supply such as a tank truck and pump, or a tank or fire pond with fire pumps, to protect the areas where the primary water supply is limited or shut down. The employer may also require evacuation of the workplace and have an emergency action plan which specifies such action. 6. Protection of piping. 7. Sprinklers. 8. Protection of sprinklers. 9. Sprinkler alarms. 10. Sprinkler spacing. § 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, general. 1. Scope and application. Based on the known toxicological effects of agents such as carbon tetrachloride and chlorobromomethane, OSHA is not permitting the use of these agents in areas where employees can be exposed to the agent or its side effects. However, chlorobromomethane has been accepted and may be used as an explosion suppression agent in unoccupied spaces. OSHA is permitting the use of this agent only in areas where employees will not be exposed. 2. Distinctive alarm signals. 3. Maintenance. 4. Manual discharge stations. 5. Personal protective equipment. § 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry chemical. 1. Scope and application. 2. Maintenance. § 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gaseous agent. 1. Scope and application. 2. Design concentrations. 3. Toxic decomposition. § 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water spray and foam. 1. Scope and application. 2. Characteristics of foams. a. Some foams are not acceptable for use on fires involving flammable gases and liquefied gases with boiling points below ambient workplace temperatures. Other foams are not effective when used on fires involving polar solvent liquids. b. Any agent using water as part of the mixture should not be used on fire involving combustible metals unless it is applied under proper conditions to reduce the temperature of burning metal below the ignition temperature. The employer should use only those foams that have been tested and accepted for this application by a recognized independent testing laboratory. c. Certain types of foams may be incompatible and break down when they are mixed together. d. For fires involving water miscible solvents, employers should use only those foams tested and approved for such use. Regular protein foams may not be effective on such solvents. Whenever employers provide a foam or water spray system, drainage facilities must be provided to carry contaminated water or foam overflow away from the employee work areas and egress routes. This drainage system should drain to a central impounding area where it can be collected and disposed of properly. Other government agencies may have regulations concerning environmental considerations. § 1910.164 Fire detection systems. 1. Installation and restoration. OSHA has a requirement that spare components used to replace those which may be destroyed during an alarm situation be available in sufficient quantities and locations for prompt restoration of the system. This does not mean that the parts or components have to be stored at the workplace. If the employer can assure that the supply of parts is available in the local community or the general metropolitan area of the workplace, then the requirements for storage and availability have been met. The intent is to make sure that the alarm system is fully operational when employees are occupying the workplace, and that when the system operates it can be returned to full service the next day or sooner. 2. Supervision. 3. Protection of fire detectors. 4. Number, location, and spacing of detectors. § 1910.165 Employee alarm systems. 1. Scope and application. In small workplaces with 10 or less employees the alarm system can be by direct voice communication (shouting) where any one individual can quickly alert all other employees. Radio may be used to transmit alarms from remote workplaces where telephone service is not available, provided that radio messages will be monitored by emergency services, such as fire, police or others, to insure alarms are transmitted and received. 2. Alarm signal alternatives. 3. Reporting alarms. Personal radio transmitters, worn by an individual, can be used where the individual may be working such as in a remote location. Such personal radio transmitters shall send a distinct signal and should clearly indicate who is having an emergency, the location, and the nature of the emergency. All radio transmitters need a feedback system to assure that the emergency alarm is sent to the people who can provide assistance. For multi-story buildings or single story buildings with interior walls for subdivisions, the more traditional alarm systems are recommended for these types of workplaces. Supervised telephone or manual fire alarm or pull box stations with paging systems to transmit messages throughout the building is the recommended alarm system. The alarm box stations should be available within a travel distance of 200 feet. Water flow detection on a sprinkler system, fire detection systems (guard's supervisory station) or tour signal (watchman's service), or other related systems may be part of the overall system. The paging system may be used for nonemergency operations provided the emergency messages and uses will have precedence over all other uses of the system. 4. Supervision. [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981] Appendix B to Subpart L of Part 1910—National Consensus Standards The following table contains a cross-reference listing of those current national consensus standards which contains information and guidelines that would be considered acceptable in complying with requirements in the specific sections of subpart L. Subpart L section National consensus standard 1910.156 ANSI/NFPA No. 1972; Structural Fire Fighter's Helmets. ANSI Z88.5 American National Standard, Practice for Respirator Protection for the Fire Service. ANSI/NFPA No. 1971, Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighters. NFPA No. 1041, Fire Service Instructor Professional Qualifications. 1910.157 ANSI/NFPA No. 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers. 1910.158 ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents. ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps. NFPA No. 21, Steam Fire Pumps. ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks. NFPA No. 24, Outside Protection. NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves. NFPA No. 13E, Fire Department Operations in Properties Protected by Sprinkler, Standpipe Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 194, Fire Hose Connections. NFPA No. 197, Initial Fire Attack, Training for. NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting. 1910.159 ANSI-NFPA No. 13, Sprinkler Systems. NFPA No. 13A, Sprinkler Systems, Maintenance. ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents. ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps. ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks. NFPA No. 24, Outside Protection. NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves. ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Signaling Systems. NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting. 1910.160 ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam Systems. ANSI/NFPA 11A, High Expansion Foam Extinguishing Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon Dioxide Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1301 Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1211 Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray Systems. ANSI/NFPA 16 Foam-Water Spray Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical Systems. ANSI/NFPA 69, Explosion Suppression Systems. 1910.161 ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical Systems. 1910.162 ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon Dioxide Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1211 Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1301 Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 69, Explosion Suppression Systems. 1910.163 ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam Extinguishing Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 11A, High Expansion Foam Extinguishing Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray Fixed Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 16, Foam-Water Spray Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents. NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves. 1910.164 ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central Station Signaling Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local Protective Signaling Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Signaling Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 72E, Automatic Fire Detectors. ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code. 1910.165 ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central Station Signaling Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local Protective Signaling Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 72C, Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems. ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code. Metric Conversion ANSI/ASTM No. E380, American National Standard for Metric Practice. NFPA standards are available from the National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. ANSI Standards are available from the American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993] Appendix C to Subpart L of Part 1910—Fire Protection References For Further Information I. Appendix general references. A. Fire Protection Handbook, B. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, C. Various associations also publish information which may be useful in understanding these standards. Examples of these associations are: Fire Equipment Manufacturers Association (FEMA) of Arlington, VA 22204 and the National Association of Fire Equipment Distributors (NAFED) of Chicago, IL 60601. II. Appendix references applicable to individual sections. A. § 1910.156. Fire brigades: 1. Private Fire Brigades, 2. Initial Fire Attack, Training Standard On, 3. Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications, 4. Organization for Fire Services, 5. Organization of a Fire Department, 6. Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting, 7. American National Standard for Men's Safety-Toe Footwear, 8. American National Standard for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection, 9. American National Standard, Safety Requirements for Industrial Head Protection, 10. Specifications for Protective Headgear for Vehicular Users, 11. Testing Physical Fitness; Fire Command. 12. Development of a Job-Related Physical Performance Examination for Fire Fighters; 13. Proposed Sample Standards for Fire Fighters' Protective Clothing and Equipment; 14. A Study of Facepiece Leakage of Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus by DOP Man Tests; 15. The Development of Criteria for Fire Fighters' Gloves; Vol. II: Glove Criteria and Test Methods; 16. Model Performance Criteria for Structural Fire Fighters' Helmets; 17. Firefighters; 18. Eating Smoke—The Dispensable Diet; 19. Project Monoxide—A Medical Study of an Occupational Hazard of Fire Fighters; 20. Occupational Exposures to Carbon Monoxide in Baltimore Firefighters; 21. Fire Brigades; 22. American National Standard, Practice for Respiratory Protection for the Fire Service; 23. Respirator Studies for the Nuclear Regulatory Commission; October 1, 1977—September 30, 1978. Evaluation and Performance of Open Circuit Breathing Apparatus. B. § 1910.157. Portable fire extinguishers: 1. Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, 2. Methods for Hydrostatic Testing of Compressed Gas Cylinders, 3. Recommendations for the Disposition of Unserviceable Compressed Gas Cylinders, 4. Standard for Visual Inspection of Compressed Gas Cylinders, 5. Portable Fire Extinguisher Selection Guide, C. § 1910.158. Standpipe and hose systems: 1. Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2. Standard of the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, 3. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps, 4. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection, 5. Standard for Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections, 6. Standard for Fire Hose, 7. Standard for the Care of Fire Hose, D. § 1910.159. Automatic sprinkler systems: 1. Standard of the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2. Standard for the Care and Maintenance of Sprinkler Systems, 3. Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, 4. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps, 5. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection, 6. Standard for Indoor General Storage, 7. Standard for Rack Storage of Materials, E. § 1910.160. Fixed extinguishing systems—general information: 1. Standard for Foam Extinguishing Systems, 2. Standard for Hi-Expansion Foam Systems, 3. Standard on Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems, 4. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems, 5. Standard on Halon 1301, 6. Standard on Halon 1211, 7. Standard for Water Spray Systems, 8. Standard for Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems and Foam-Water Spray Systems, 9. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems, F. § 1910.161. Fixed extinguishing systems—dry chemical: 1. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems, 2. National Electrical Code, 3. Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapor from Commercial Cooking Equipment, G. § 1910.162. Fixed extinguishing systems—gaseous agents: 1. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems, 2. Standard on Halon 1301, 3. Standard on Halon 1211, 4. Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems, 5. National Electrical Code, 6. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, 7. Determination of Halon 1301/1211 Threshold Extinguishing Concentrations Using the Cup Burner Method; H. § 1910.163. Fixed extinguishing systems—water spray and foam agents: 1. Standard for Foam Extinguisher Systems, 2. Standard for High Expansion Foam Systems, 3. Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection, 4. Standard for the Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems and Foam-Water Spray Systems, I. § 1910.164. Fire Detection systems: 1. National Electrical Code, 2. Standard for Central Station Signaling Systems, 3. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, J. § 1910.165. Employee alarm systems: 1. National Electrical Code, 2. Standard for Central Station Signaling systems, 3. Standard for Local Protective Signaling Systems, 4. Standard for Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems, 5. Standard for Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems, 6. Standard for Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems, 7. Vocal Emergency Alarms in Hospitals and Nursing Facilities: Practice and Potential. 8. Fire Alarm and Communication Systems. [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993] Appendix D to Subpart L of Part 1910—Availability of Publications Incorporated by Reference in Section 1910.156 Fire Brigades The final standard for fire brigades, section 1910.156, contains provisions which incorporate certain publications by reference. The publications provide criteria and test methods for protective clothing worn by those fire brigade members who are expected to perform interior structural fire fighting. The standard references the publications as the chief sources of information for determining if the protective clothing affords the required level of protection. It is appropriate to note that the final standard does not require employers to purchase a copy of the referenced publications. Instead, employers can specify (in purchase orders to the manufacturers) that the protective clothing meet the criteria and test methods contained in the referenced publications and can rely on the manufacturers' assurances of compliance. Employers, however, may desire to obtain a copy of the referenced publications for their own information. The paragraph designation of the standard where the referenced publications appear, the title of the publications, and the availablity of the publications are as follows: Paragraph designation Referenced publication Available from 1910.156(e)(3)(ii) “Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting,” NFPA No. 1971 (1975) National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. 1910.156(e)(4)(i) “Development of Criteria for Fire Fighter's Gloves; Vol. II, Part II: Test Methods” (1976) U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Stock No. for Vol. II is: 071-033-0201-1. 1910.156(e)(5)(i) “Model Performance Criteria for Structural Firefighter's Helmets” (1977) U.S. Fire Administration, National Fire Safety and Research Office, Washington, D.C. 20230. The referenced publications (or a microfiche of the publications) are available for review at many universities and public libraries throughout the country. These publications may also be examined at the OSHA Technical Data Center, Room N2439-Rear, United States Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Ave., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210 (202-219-7500), or at any OSHA Regional Office (see telephone directories under United States Government-Labor Department). [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 33509, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996] Appendix E to Subpart L of Part 1910—Test Methods for Protective Clothing This appendix contains test methods which must be used to determine if protective clothing affords the required level of protection as specified in § 1910.156, fire brigades. (1) Puncture resistance test method for foot protection. A. Apparatus. 1/4 1/2 B. Procedure. C. Source. (2) Test method for determining the strength of cloth by tearing: Trapezoid Method. A. Test specimen. 1/10 3/8 B. Apparatus. (ii) The machine shall consist of three main parts: Straining mechanism, clamps for holding specimen, and load and elongation recording mechanisms. (iii) A machine wherein the specimen is held between two clamps and strained by a uniform movement of the pulling clamp shall be used. (iv) The machine shall be adjusted so that the pulling clamp shall have a uniform speed of 12 ±10.5 inches per minute (0.5 ±.02 cm/sec). (v) The machine shall have two clamps with two jaws on each clamp. The design of the two clamps shall be such that one gripping surface or jaw may be an integral part of the rigid frame of the clamp or be fastened to allow a slight vertical movement, while the other gripping surface or jaw shall be completely moveable. The dimension of the immovable jaw of each clamp parallel to the application of the load shall measure one-inch, and the dimension of the jaw perpendicular to this direction shall measure three inches or more. The face of the movable jaw of each clamp shall measure one-inch by three inches. Each jaw face shall have a flat smooth, gripping surface. All edges which might cause a cutting action shall be rounded to a radius of not over 1/64 (vi) Calibrated dial; scale or chart shall be used to indicate applied load and elongation. The machine shall be adjusted or set, so that the maximum load required to break the specimen will remain indicated on the calibrated dial or scale after the test specimen has ruptured. (vii) The machine shall be of such capacity that the maximum load required to break the specimen shall be not greater than 85 percent or less than 15 percent of the rated capacity. (viii) The error of the machine shall not exceed 2 percent up to and including a 50-pound load (22.6 kg) and 1 percent over a 50-pound load (22.6 kg) at any reading within its loading range. (ix) All machine attachments for determining maximum loads shall be disengaged during this test. C. Procedure. (ii) The machine shall be started and the force necessary to tear the cloth shall be observed by means of an autographic recording device. The speed of the pulling clamp shall be 12 inches ±0.5 inch per minute (0.5 ±.02 cm/sec). (iii) If a specimen slips between the jaws, breaks in or at the edges of the jaws, or if for any reason attributable to faulty technique, an individual measurement falls markedly below the average test results for the sample unit, such result shall be discarded and another specimen shall be tested. (iv) The tearing strength of the specimen shall be the average of the five highest peak loads of resistance registered for 3 inches (7.6 cm) of separation of the tear. D. Report. (ii) The tearing strength of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested in each of the warp and filling directions and shall be reported separately to the nearest 0.1-pound (.05 kg). E. Source. (3) Test method for determining flame resistance of cloth; vertical. A. Test specimen. 3/4 B. Number of determinations. C. Apparatus. (ii) Burner. The burner shall be equipped with a variable orifice to adjust the flame height, a barrel having a 3/8 (a) The burner may be constructed by combining a 3/8 1/4 (b) The pilot light tube shall have a diameter of approximately 1/16 1/8 1/8 (c) The necessary gas connections and the applicable plumbing shall be as specified in Figure L-4 except that a solenoid valve may be used in lieu of the stopcock valve to which the burner is attached. The stopcock valve or solenoid valve, whichever is used, shall be capable of being fully opened or fully closed in 0.1-second. (d) On the side of the barrel of the burner, opposite the pilot light there shall be a metal rod of approximately 1/8 1/2 5/16 3/4 1/2 (e) The burner shall be fixed in a position so that the center of the barrel of the burner is directly below the center of the specimen. (iii) There shall be a control valve system with a delivery rate designed to furnish gas to the burner under a pressure of 2 1/2 1/4 (iv) A synthetic gas mixture shall be of the following composition within the following limits (analyzed at standard conditions): 55 ±3 percent hydrogen, 24 ±1 percent methane, 3 ±1 percent ethane, and 18 ±1 percent carbon monoxide which will give a specific gravity of 0.365 ±0.018 (air = 1) and a B.T.U. content of 540 ±20 per cubic foot (20.1 ±3.7 kJ/L)(dry basis) at 69.8 °F (21 °C). (v) There shall be metal hooks and weights to produce a series of total loads to determine length of char. The metal hooks shall consist of No. 19 gage steel wire or equivalent and shall be made from 3-inch (7.6 cm) lengths of wire and bent 1/2 (vi) There shall be a stop watch or other device to measure the burning time to 0.2-second. (vii) There shall be a scale, graduated in 0.1 inch (.3 cm) to measure the length of char. D. Procedure. (ii) All specimens to be tested shall be at moisture equilibrium under standard atmospheric conditions in accordance with paragraph (3)C of this appendix. Each specimen to be tested shall be exposed to the test flame within 20 seconds after removal from the standard atmosphere. In case of dispute, all testing will be conducted under Standard Atmospheric Conditions in accordance with paragraph (3)C of this appendix. (iii) The specimen in its holder shall be suspended vertically in the cabinet in such a manner that the entire length of the specimen is exposed and the lower end is 3/4 (iv) Prior to inserting the specimen, the pilot flame shall be adjusted to approximately 1/8 The burner flame shall be adjusted by means of the needle valve in the base of the burner to give a flame height of 1 1/2 1/2 (v) The after-flame shall be the time the specimen continues to flame after the burner flame is shut off. (vi) After each specimen is removed, the test cabinet shall be cleared of fumes and smoke prior to testing the next specimen. (vii) After both flaming and glowing have ceased, the char length shall be measured. The char length shall be the distance from the end of the specimen, which was exposed to the flame, to the end of a tear (made lengthwise) of the specimen through the center of the charred area as follows: The specimen shall be folded lengthwise and creased by hand along a line through the highest peak of the charred area. The hook shall be inserted in the specimen (or a hole, 1/4 1/4 1/4 (viii) A tearing force shall be applied gently to the specimen by grasping the corner of the cloth at the opposite edge of the char from the load and raising the specimen and weight clear of the supporting surface. The end of the tear shall be marked off on the edge and the char length measurement made along the undamaged edge. Loads for determining char length applicable to the weight of the test cloth shall be as shown in Table L-2. Table L-2 1 Specified weight per square yard of cloth before any fire retardant treatment or coating—ounces Total tearing weight for determining the charred length—pound 2.0 to 6.0 0.25 Over 6.0 to 15.0 0.50 Over 15.0 to 23.0 0.75 Over 23.0 1.0 1 (ix) The after-flame time of the specimen shall be recorded to the nearest 0.2-second and the char length to the nearest 0.1-inch (.3 cm). E. Report. (ii) The after-flame time shall be reported to the nearest 0.2-second and the char length to the nearest 0.1-inch (.3 cm). F. Source. [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981] Subpart M—Compressed Gas and Compressed Air Equipment Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 1-90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable. §§ 1910.166-1910.168 [Reserved] § 1910.169 Air receivers. (a) General requirements Application. (2) New and existing equipment. (ii) All safety valves used shall be constructed, installed, and maintained in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII Edition 1968. (b) Installation and equipment requirements Installation. (2) Drains and traps. (3) Gages and valves. (ii) No valve of any type shall be placed between the air receiver and its safety valve or valves. (iii) Safety appliances, such as safety valves, indicating devices and controlling devices, shall be constructed, located, and installed so that they cannot be readily rendered inoperative by any means, including the elements. (iv) All safety valves shall be tested frequently and at regular intervals to determine whether they are in good operating condition. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996] Subpart N—Materials Handling and Storage Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. § 1910.176 Handling materials—general. (a) Use of mechanical equipment. (b) Secure storage. (c) Housekeeping. (d) [Reserved] (e) Clearance limits. (f) Rolling railroad cars. (g) Guarding. [39 FR 23052, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978] § 1910.177 Servicing multi-piece and single piece rim wheels. (a) Scope. (2) This section does not apply to employers and places of employment regulated under the Longshoring Standards, 29 CFR part 1918; Construction Safety Standards, 29 CFR part 1926; or Agriculture Standards, 29 CFR part 1928. (3) All provisions of this section apply to the servicing of both single piece rim wheels and multi-piece rim wheels unless designated otherwise. (b) Definitions. Barrier Charts Installing a rim wheel Removing Mounting a tire Demounting Multi-piece rim wheel Multi-piece wheel Restraining device Rim manual Rim wheel Service servicing Service area Single piece rim wheel Single piece wheel Trajectory Wheel (c) Employee training. (i) The employer shall assure that no employee services any rim wheel unless the employee has been trained and instructed in correct procedures of servicing the type of wheel being serviced, and in the safe operating procedures described in paragraphs (f) and (g) of this section. (ii) Information to be used in the training program shall include, at a minimum, the applicable data contained in the charts (rim manuals) and the contents of this standard. (iii) Where an employer knows or has reason to believe that any of his employees is unable to read and understand the charts or rim manual, the employer shall assure that the employee is instructed concerning the contents of the charts and rim manual in a manner which the employee is able to understand. (2) The employer shall assure that each employee demonstrates and maintains the ability to service rim wheels safely, including performance of the following tasks: (i) Demounting of tires (including deflation); (ii) Inspection and identification of the rim wheel components; (iii) Mounting of tires (including inflation with a restraining device or other safeguard required by this section); (iv) Use of the restraining device or barrier, and other equipment required by this section; (v) Handling of rim wheels; (vi) Inflation of the tire when a single piece rim wheel is mounted on a vehicle; (vii) An understanding of the necessity of standing outside the trajectory both during inflation of the tire and during inspection of the rim wheel following inflation; and (viii) Installation and removal of rim wheels. (3) The employer shall evaluate each employee's ability to perform these tasks and to service rim wheels safely, and shall provide additional training as necessary to assure that each employee maintains his or her proficiency. (d) Tire servicing equipment. (2) The employer shall provide a restraining device or barrier for inflating tires on single piece wheels unless the rim wheel will be bolted onto a vehicle during inflation. (3) Restraining devices and barriers shall comply with the following requirements: (i) Each restraining device or barrier shall have the capacity to withstand the maximum force that would be transferred to it during a rim wheel separation occurring at 150 percent of the maximum tire specification pressure for the type of rim wheel being serviced. (ii) Restraining devices and barriers shall be capable of preventing the rim wheel components from being thrown outside or beyond the device or barrier for any rim wheel positioned within or behind the device; (iii) Restraining devices and barriers shall be visually inspected prior to each day's use and after any separation of the rim wheel components or sudden release of contained air. Any restraining device or barrier exhibiting damage such as the following defects shall be immediately removed from service: (A) Cracks at welds; (B) Cracked or broken components; (C) Bent or sprung components caused by mishandling, abuse, tire explosion or rim wheel separation; (D) Pitting of components due to corrosion; or (E) Other structural damage which would decrease its effectiveness. (iv) Restraining devices or barriers removed from service shall not be returned to service until they are repaired and reinspected. Restraining devices or barriers requiring structural repair such as component replacement or rewelding shall not be returned to service until they are certified by either the manufacturer or a Registered Professional Engineer as meeting the strength requirements of paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this section. (4) The employer shall furnish and assure that an air line assembly consisting of the following components be used for inflating tires: (i) A clip-on chuck; (ii) An in-line valve with a pressure gauge or a presettable regulator; and (iii) A sufficient length of hose between the clip-on chuck and the in-line valve (if one is used) to allow the employee to stand outside the trajectory. (5) Current charts or rim manuals containing instructions for the type of wheels being serviced shall be available in the service area. (6) The employer shall furnish and assure that only tools recommended in the rim manual for the type of wheel being serviced are used to service rim wheels. (e) Wheel component acceptability. (2) Multi-piece wheel components and single piece wheels shall be inspected prior to assembly. Any wheel or wheel component which is bent out of shape, pitted from corrosion, broken, or cracked shall not be used and shall be marked or tagged unserviceable and removed from the service area. Damaged or leaky valves shall be replaced. (3) Rim flanges, rim gutters, rings, bead seating surfaces and the bead areas of tires shall be free of any dirt, surface rust, scale or loose or flaked rubber build-up prior to mounting and inflation. (4) The size (bead diameter and tire/wheel widths) and type of both the tire and the wheel shall be checked for compatibility prior to assembly of the rim wheel. (f) Safe operating procedure—multi-piece rim wheels. (1) Tires shall be completely deflated before demounting by removal of the valve core. (2) Tires shall be completely deflated by removing the valve core before a rim wheel is removed from the axle in either of the following situations: (i) When the tire has been driven underinflated at 80% or less of its recommended pressure, or (ii) When there is obvious or suspected damage to the tire or wheel components. (3) Rubber lubricant shall be applied to bead and rim mating surfaces during assembly of the wheel and inflation of the tire, unless the tire or wheel manufacturer recommends against it. (4) If a tire on a vehicle is underinflated but has more than 80% of the recommended pressure, the tire may be inflated while the rim wheel is on the vehicle provided remote control inflation equipment is used, and no employees remain in the trajectory during inflation. (5) Tires shall be inflated outside a restraining device only to a pressure sufficient to force the tire bead onto the rim ledge and create an airtight seal with the tire and bead. (6) Whenever a rim wheel is in a restraining device the employee shall not rest or lean any part of his body or equipment on or against the restraining device. (7) After tire inflation, the tire and wheel components shall be inspected while still within the restraining device to make sure that they are properly seated and locked. If further adjustment to the tire or wheel components is necessary, the tire shall be deflated by removal of the valve core before the adjustment is made. (8) No attempt shall be made to correct the seating of side and lock rings by hammering, striking or forcing the components while the tire is pressurized. (9) Cracked, broken, bent or otherwise damaged rim components shall not be reworked, welded, brazed, or otherwise heated. (10) Whenever multi-piece rim wheels are being handled, employees shall stay out of the trajectory unless the employer can demonstrate that performance of the servicing makes the employee's presence in the trajectory necessary. (11) No heat shall be applied to a multi-piece wheel or wheel component. (g) Safe operating procedure—single piece rim wheels. (1) Tires shall be completely deflated by removal of the valve core before demounting. (2) Mounting and demounting of the tire shall be done only from the narrow ledge side of the wheel. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the tire beads while mounting tires on wheels. Tires shall be mounted only on compatible wheels of matching bead diameter and width. (3) Nonflammable rubber lubricant shall be applied to bead and wheel mating surfaces before assembly of the rim wheel, unless the tire or wheel manufacturer recommends against the use of any rubber lubricant. (4) If a tire changing machine is used, the tire shall be inflated only to the minimum pressure necessary to force the tire bead onto the rim ledge while on the tire changing machine. (5) If a bead expander is used, it shall be removed before the valve core is installed and as soon as the rim wheel becomes airtight (the tire bead slips onto the bead seat). (6) Tires may be inflated only when contained within a restraining device, positioned behind a barrier or bolted on the vehicle with the lug nuts fully tightened. (7) Tires shall not be inflated when any flat, solid surface is in the trajectory and within one foot of the sidewall. (8) Employees shall stay out of the trajectory when inflating a tire. (9) Tires shall not be inflated to more than the inflation pressure stamped in the sidewall unless a higher pressure is recommended by the manufacturer. (10) Tires shall not be inflated above the maximum pressure recommended by the manufacturer to seat the tire bead firmly against the rim flange. (11) No heat shall be applied to a single piece wheel. (12) Cracked, broken, bent, or otherwise damaged wheels shall not be reworked, welded, brazed, or otherwise heated. Appendix B to § 1910.177—Ordering Information for the OSHA Charts The information on the OSHA charts is available on three posters, or in a manual containing the three charts, entitled “Demounting and Mounting Procedures for Tubeless Truck and Bus Tires,” “Demounting and Mounting Procedures for Tube-Type Truck and Bus Tires,” and “Multi-piece Rim Matching Chart.” Interested parties can download and print both the manuals and posters from OSHA's Web site at http://www.osha.gov/publications [49 FR 4350, Feb. 3, 1984, as amended at 52 FR 36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 53 FR 34737, Sept. 8, 1988; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011] § 1910.178 Powered industrial trucks. (a) General requirements. (2) All new powered industrial trucks acquired and used by an employer shall meet the design and construction requirements for powered industrial trucks established in the “American National Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1-1969”, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, except for vehicles intended primarily for earth moving or over-the-road hauling. (3) Approved trucks shall bear a label or some other identifying mark indicating approval by the testing laboratory. See paragraph (a)(7) of this section and paragraph 405 of “American National Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1-1969”, which is incorporated by reference in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and which provides that if the powered industrial truck is accepted by a nationally recognized testing laboratory it should be so marked. (4) Modifications and additions which affect capacity and safe operation shall not be performed by the customer or user without manufacturers prior written approval. Capacity, operation, and maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals shall be changed accordingly. (5) If the truck is equipped with front-end attachments other than factory installed attachments, the user shall request that the truck be marked to identify the attachments and show the approximate weight of the truck and attachment combination at maximum elevation with load laterally centered. (6) The user shall see that all nameplates and markings are in place and are maintained in a legible condition. (7) As used in this section, the term, approved truck approved industrial truck (b) Designations. (1) The D designated units are units similar to the G units except that they are diesel engine powered instead of gasoline engine powered. (2) The DS designated units are diesel powered units that are provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel and electrical systems. They may be used in some locations where a D unit may not be considered suitable. (3) The DY designated units are diesel powered units that have all the safeguards of the DS units and in addition do not have any electrical equipment including the ignition and are equipped with temperature limitation features. (4) The E designated units are electrically powered units that have minimum acceptable safeguards against inherent fire hazards. (5) The ES designated units are electrically powered units that, in addition to all of the requirements for the E units, are provided with additional safeguards to the electrical system to prevent emission of hazardous sparks and to limit surface temperatures. They may be used in some locations where the use of an E unit may not be considered suitable. (6) The EE designated units are electrically powered units that have, in addition to all of the requirements for the E and ES units, the electric motors and all other electrical equipment completely enclosed. In certain locations the EE unit may be used where the use of an E and ES unit may not be considered suitable. (7) The EX designated units are electrically powered units that differ from the E, ES, or EE units in that the electrical fittings and equipment are so designed, constructed and assembled that the units may be used in certain atmospheres containing flammable vapors or dusts. (8) The G designated units are gasoline powered units having minimum acceptable safeguards against inherent fire hazards. (9) The GS designated units are gasoline powered units that are provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel, and electrical systems. They may be used in some locations where the use of a G unit may not be considered suitable. (10) The LP designated unit is similar to the G unit except that liquefied petroleum gas is used for fuel instead of gasoline. (11) The LPS designated units are liquefied petroleum gas powered units that are provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel, and electrical systems. They may be used in some locations where the use of an LP unit may not be considered suitable. (12) The atmosphere or location shall have been classified as to whether it is hazardous or nonhazardous prior to the consideration of industrial trucks being used therein and the type of industrial truck required shall be as provided in paragraph (d) of this section for such location. (c) Designated locations. (2) For specific areas of use, see Table N-1 which tabulates the information contained in this section. References are to the corresponding classification as used in subpart S of this part. (i) Power-operated industrial trucks shall not be used in atmospheres containing hazardous concentration of acetylene, butadiene, ethylene oxide, hydrogen (or gases or vapors equivalent in hazard to hydrogen, such as manufactured gas), propylene oxide, acetaldehyde, cyclopropane, diethyl ether, ethylene, isoprene, or unsymmetrical dimethyl hydrazine (UDMH). (ii)( a ( b (iii) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as EX may be used in atmospheres containing acetone, acrylonitrile, alcohol, ammonia, benzine, benzol, butane, ethylene dichloride, gasoline, hexane, lacquer solvent vapors, naphtha, natural gas, propane, propylene, styrene, vinyl acetate, vinyl chloride, or xylenes in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures and where such concentrations of these gases or vapors exist continuously, intermittently or periodically under normal operating conditions or may exist frequently because of repair, maintenance operations, leakage, breakdown or faulty operation of equipment. (iv) Power-operated industrial trucks designated as DY, EE, or EX may be used in locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed or used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or in the case of abnormal operation of equipment; also in locations in which hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation but which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operation of the ventilating equipment; or in locations which are adjacent to Class I, Division 1 locations, and to which hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clear air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided. Table N-1—Summary Table on Use of Industrial Trucks in Various Locations Classes Unclassified Class I locations Class II locations Class III locations Description of classes Locations not possessing atmospheres as described in other columns Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are, or may be, present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures Locations which are hazardous because of the presence of combustible dust Locations where easily ignitible fibers or flyings are present but not likely to be in suspension in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible mixtures. Groups in classes None A B C D E F G None Examples of locations or atmospheres in classes and groups Piers and wharves inside and outside general storage, general industrial or commercial properties Acetylene Hydrogen Ethyl ether Gasoline Metal dust Carbon black coal dust, coke dust Grain dust, flour dust, starch dust, organic dust Baled waste, cocoa fiber, cotton, excelsior, hemp, istle, jute, kapok, oakum, sisal, Spanish moss, synthetic fibers, tow. Table N-1—Summary Table on Use of Industrial Trucks in Various Locations—Continued 1 2 1 2 1 2 Divisions (nature of hazardous conditions) None Above condition exists continuously, intermittently, or periodically under normal operating conditions Above condition may occur accidentally as due to a puncture of a storage drum Explosive mixture may be present under normal operating conditions, or where failure of equipment may cause the condition to exist simultaneously with arcing or sparking of electrical equipment, or where dusts of an electrically conducting nature may be present Explosive mixture not normally present, but where deposits of dust may cause heat rise in electrical equipment, or where such deposits may be ignited by arcs or sparks from electrical equipment Locations in which easily ignitible fibers or materials producing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured, or used Locations in which easily ignitible fibers are stored or handled (except in the process of manufacture). Authorized uses of trucks by types in groups of classes and divisions Groups in classes None A B C D A B C D E F G E F G None None Type of truck authorized: Diesel: Type D D** Type DS DS DS DS Type DY DY DY DY DY Electric: Type E E** E Type ES ES ES ES Type EE EE EE EE EE Type EX EX EX EX EX EX EX EX Gasoline: Type G G** Type GS GS GS GS LP-Gas: Type LP LP** Type LPS LPS LPS LPS Paragraph Ref. in No. 505 210.211 201 203 209 204 202 205 209 206 207(a) 208 (a) **Trucks conforming to these types may also be used—see subdivision (c)(2)(x) and (c)(2)(xii) of this section. (v) In locations used for the storage of hazardous liquids in sealed containers or liquefied or compressed gases in containers, approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as DS, ES, GS, or LPS may be used. This classification includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which, would become hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual operating condition. The quantity of hazardous material that might escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total area involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all factors that should receive consideration in determining whether or not the DS or DY, ES, EE, GS, LPS designated truck possesses sufficient safeguards for the location. Piping without valves, checks, meters and similar devices would not ordinarily be deemed to introduce a hazardous condition even though used for hazardous liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of hazardous liquids or of liquified or compressed gases in sealed containers would not normally be considered hazardous unless subject to other hazardous conditions also. (vi)( a ( b (vii) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as DY, EE, or EX shall be used in atmospheres in which combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in the air or will not be likely to be thrown into suspension by the normal operation of equipment or apparatus in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures but where deposits or accumulations of such dust may be ignited by arcs or sparks originating in the truck. (viii) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as DY, EE, or EX shall be used in locations which are hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings but in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitable mixtures. (ix) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as DS, DY, ES, EE, EX, GS, or LPS shall be used in locations where easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled, including outside storage, but are not being processed or manufactured. Industrial trucks designated as E, which have been previously used in these locations may be continued in use. (x) On piers and wharves handling general cargo, any approved power-operated industrial truck designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or trucks which conform to the requirements for these types may be used. (xi) If storage warehouses and outside storage locations are hazardous only the approved power-operated industrial truck specified for such locations in this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If not classified as hazardous, any approved power-operated industrial truck designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or trucks which conform to the requirements for these types may be used. (xii) If general industrial or commercial properties are hazardous, only approved power-operated industrial trucks specified for such locations in this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If not classified as hazardous, any approved power-operated industrial truck designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or trucks which conform to the requirements of these types may be used. (d) Converted industrial trucks. (e) Safety guards. (2) If the type of load presents a hazard, the user shall equip fork trucks with a vertical load backrest extension manufactured in accordance with paragraph (a)(2) of this section. (f) Fuel handling and storage. (2) The storage and handling of liquefied petroleum gas fuel shall be in accordance with NFPA Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (NFPA No. 58-1969), which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (g) Changing and charging storage batteries. (2) Facilities shall be provided for flushing and neutralizing spilled electrolyte, for fire protection, for protecting charging apparatus from damage by trucks, and for adequate ventilation for dispersal of fumes from gassing batteries. (3) [Reserved] (4) A conveyor, overhead hoist, or equivalent material handling equipment shall be provided for handling batteries. (5) Reinstalled batteries shall be properly positioned and secured in the truck. (6) A carboy tilter or siphon shall be provided for handling electrolyte. (7) When charging batteries, acid shall be poured into water; water shall not be poured into acid. (8) Trucks shall be properly positioned and brake applied before attempting to change or charge batteries. (9) Care shall be taken to assure that vent caps are functioning. The battery (or compartment) cover(s) shall be open to dissipate heat. (10) Smoking shall be prohibited in the charging area. (11) Precautions shall be taken to prevent open flames, sparks, or electric arcs in battery charging areas. (12) Tools and other metallic objects shall be kept away from the top of uncovered batteries. (h) Lighting for operating areas. (2) Where general lighting is less than 2 lumens per square foot, auxiliary directional lighting shall be provided on the truck. (i) Control of noxious gases and fumes. (j) Dockboards (bridge plates). (k) Trucks and railroad cars. (2) Wheel stops or other recognized positive protection shall be provided to prevent railroad cars from moving during loading or unloading operations. (3) Fixed jacks may be necessary to support a semitrailer and prevent upending during the loading or unloading when the trailer is not coupled to a tractor. (4) Positive protection shall be provided to prevent railroad cars from being moved while dockboards or bridge plates are in position. (l) Operator training. (1) Safe operation. (ii) Prior to permitting an employee to operate a powered industrial truck (except for training purposes), the employer shall ensure that each operator has successfully completed the training required by this paragraph (l), except as permitted by paragraph (l)(5). (2) Training program implementation. (A) Under the direct supervision of persons who have the knowledge, training, and experience to train operators and evaluate their competence; and (B) Where such operation does not endanger the trainee or other employees. (ii) Training shall consist of a combination of formal instruction (e.g., lecture, discussion, interactive computer learning, video tape, written material), practical training (demonstrations performed by the trainer and practical exercises performed by the trainee), and evaluation of the operator's performance in the workplace. (iii) All operator training and evaluation shall be conducted by persons who have the knowledge, training, and experience to train powered industrial truck operators and evaluate their competence. (3) Training program content. (i) Truck-related topics: (A) Operating instructions, warnings, and precautions for the types of truck the operator will be authorized to operate; (B) Differences between the truck and the automobile; (C) Truck controls and instrumentation: where they are located, what they do, and how they work; (D) Engine or motor operation; (E) Steering and maneuvering; (F) Visibility (including restrictions due to loading); (G) Fork and attachment adaptation, operation, and use limitations; (H) Vehicle capacity; (I) Vehicle stability; (J) Any vehicle inspection and maintenance that the operator will be required to perform; (K) Refueling and/or charging and recharging of batteries; (L) Operating limitations; (M) Any other operating instructions, warnings, or precautions listed in the operator's manual for the types of vehicle that the employee is being trained to operate. (ii) Workplace-related topics: (A) Surface conditions where the vehicle will be operated; (B) Composition of loads to be carried and load stability; (C) Load manipulation, stacking, and unstacking; (D) Pedestrian traffic in areas where the vehicle will be operated; (E) Narrow aisles and other restricted places where the vehicle will be operated; (F) Hazardous (classified) locations where the vehicle will be operated; (G) Ramps and other sloped surfaces that could affect the vehicle's stability; (H) Closed environments and other areas where insufficient ventilation or poor vehicle maintenance could cause a buildup of carbon monoxide or diesel exhaust; (I) Other unique or potentially hazardous environmental conditions in the workplace that could affect safe operation. (iii) The requirements of this section. (4) Refresher training and evaluation. (ii) Refresher training in relevant topics shall be provided to the operator when: (A) The operator has been observed to operate the vehicle in an unsafe manner; (B) The operator has been involved in an accident or near-miss incident; (C) The operator has received an evaluation that reveals that the operator is not operating the truck safely; (D) The operator is assigned to drive a different type of truck; or (E) A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could affect safe operation of the truck. (iii) An evaluation of each powered industrial truck operator's performance shall be conducted at least once every three years. (5) Avoidance of duplicative training. (6) Certification. (7) Dates. If the employee was hired: The initial training and evaluation of that employee must be completed: Before December 1, 1999 By December 1, 1999. After December 1, 1999 Before the employee is assigned to operate a powered industrial truck. (8) Appendix A to this section provides non-mandatory guidance to assist employers in implementing this paragraph (l). This appendix does not add to, alter, or reduce the requirements of this section. (m) Truck operations. (2) No person shall be allowed to stand or pass under the elevated portion of any truck, whether loaded or empty. (3) Unauthorized personnel shall not be permitted to ride on powered industrial trucks. A safe place to ride shall be provided where riding of trucks is authorized. (4) The employer shall prohibit arms or legs from being placed between the uprights of the mast or outside the running lines of the truck. (5)(i) When a powered industrial truck is left unattended, load engaging means shall be fully lowered, controls shall be neutralized, power shall be shut off, and brakes set. Wheels shall be blocked if the truck is parked on an incline. (ii) A powered industrial truck is unattended when the operator is 25 ft. or more away from the vehicle which remains in his view, or whenever the operator leaves the vehicle and it is not in his view. (iii) When the operator of an industrial truck is dismounted and within 25 ft. of the truck still in his view, the load engaging means shall be fully lowered, controls neutralized, and the brakes set to prevent movement. (6) A safe distance shall be maintained from the edge of ramps or platforms while on any elevated dock, or platform or freight car. Trucks shall not be used for opening or closing freight doors. (7) Brakes shall be set and wheel blocks shall be in place to prevent movement of trucks, trailers, or railroad cars while loading or unloading. Fixed jacks may be necessary to support a semitrailer during loading or unloading when the trailer is not coupled to a tractor. The flooring of trucks, trailers, and railroad cars shall be checked for breaks and weakness before they are driven onto. (8) There shall be sufficient headroom under overhead installations, lights, pipes, sprinkler system, etc. (9) An overhead guard shall be used as protection against falling objects. It should be noted that an overhead guard is intended to offer protection from the impact of small packages, boxes, bagged material, etc., representative of the job application, but not to withstand the impact of a falling capacity load. (10) A load backrest extension shall be used whenever necessary to minimize the possibility of the load or part of it from falling rearward. (11) Only approved industrial trucks shall be used in hazardous locations. (12)-(13) [Reserved] (14) Fire aisles, access to stairways, and fire equipment shall be kept clear. (n) Traveling. (2) The right of way shall be yielded to ambulances, fire trucks, or other vehicles in emergency situations. (3) Other trucks traveling in the same direction at intersections, blind spots, or other dangerous locations shall not be passed. (4) The driver shall be required to slow down and sound the horn at cross aisles and other locations where vision is obstructed. If the load being carried obstructs forward view, the driver shall be required to travel with the load trailing. (5) Railroad tracks shall be crossed diagonally wherever possible. Parking closer than 8 feet from the center of railroad tracks is prohibited. (6) The driver shall be required to look in the direction of, and keep a clear view of the path of travel. (7) Grades shall be ascended or descended slowly. (i) When ascending or descending grades in excess of 10 percent, loaded trucks shall be driven with the load upgrade. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) On all grades the load and load engaging means shall be tilted back if applicable, and raised only as far as necessary to clear the road surface. (8) Under all travel conditions the truck shall be operated at a speed that will permit it to be brought to a stop in a safe manner. (9) Stunt driving and horseplay shall not be permitted. (10) The driver shall be required to slow down for wet and slippery floors. (11) Dockboard or bridgeplates, shall be properly secured before they are driven over. Dockboard or bridgeplates shall be driven over carefully and slowly and their rated capacity never exceeded. (12) Elevators shall be approached slowly, and then entered squarely after the elevator car is properly leveled. Once on the elevator, the controls shall be neutralized, power shut off, and the brakes set. (13) Motorized hand trucks must enter elevator or other confined areas with load end forward. (14) Running over loose objects on the roadway surface shall be avoided. (15) While negotiating turns, speed shall be reduced to a safe level by means of turning the hand steering wheel in a smooth, sweeping motion. Except when maneuvering at a very low speed, the hand steering wheel shall be turned at a moderate, even rate. (o) Loading. (2) Only loads within the rated capacity of the truck shall be handled. (3) The long or high (including multiple-tiered) loads which may affect capacity shall be adjusted. (4) Trucks equipped with attachments shall be operated as partially loaded trucks when not handling a load. (5) A load engaging means shall be placed under the load as far as possible; the mast shall be carefully tilted backward to stabilize the load. (6) Extreme care shall be used when tilting the load forward or backward, particularly when high tiering. Tilting forward with load engaging means elevated shall be prohibited except to pick up a load. An elevated load shall not be tilted forward except when the load is in a deposit position over a rack or stack. When stacking or tiering, only enough backward tilt to stabilize the load shall be used. (p) Operation of the truck. (2) Fuel tanks shall not be filled while the engine is running. Spillage shall be avoided. (3) Spillage of oil or fuel shall be carefully washed away or completely evaporated and the fuel tank cap replaced before restarting engine. (4) No truck shall be operated with a leak in the fuel system until the leak has been corrected. (5) Open flames shall not be used for checking electrolyte level in storage batteries or gasoline level in fuel tanks. (q) Maintenance of industrial trucks. (2) No repairs shall be made in Class I, II, and III locations. (3) Those repairs to the fuel and ignition systems of industrial trucks which involve fire hazards shall be conducted only in locations designated for such repairs. (4) Trucks in need of repairs to the electrical system shall have the battery disconnected prior to such repairs. (5) All parts of any such industrial truck requiring replacement shall be replaced only by parts equivalent as to safety with those used in the original design. (6) Industrial trucks shall not be altered so that the relative positions of the various parts are different from what they were when originally received from the manufacturer, nor shall they be altered either by the addition of extra parts not provided by the manufacturer or by the elimination of any parts, except as provided in paragraph (q)(12) of this section. Additional counterweighting of fork trucks shall not be done unless approved by the truck manufacturer. (7) Industrial trucks shall be examined before being placed in service, and shall not be placed in service if the examination shows any condition adversely affecting the safety of the vehicle. Such examination shall be made at least daily. Where industrial trucks are used on a round-the-clock basis, they shall be examined after each shift. Defects when found shall be immediately reported and corrected. (8) Water mufflers shall be filled daily or as frequently as is necessary to prevent depletion of the supply of water below 75 percent of the filled capacity. Vehicles with mufflers having screens or other parts that may become clogged shall not be operated while such screens or parts are clogged. Any vehicle that emits hazardous sparks or flames from the exhaust system shall immediately be removed from service, and not returned to service until the cause for the emission of such sparks and flames has been eliminated. (9) When the temperature of any part of any truck is found to be in excess of its normal operating temperature, thus creating a hazardous condition, the vehicle shall be removed from service and not returned to service until the cause for such overheating has been eliminated. (10) Industrial trucks shall be kept in a clean condition, free of lint, excess oil, and grease. Noncombustible agents should be used for cleaning trucks. Low flash point (below 100 °F.) solvents shall not be used. High flash point (at or above 100 °F.) solvents may be used. Precautions regarding toxicity, ventilation, and fire hazard shall be consonant with the agent or solvent used. (11) [Reserved] (12) Industrial trucks originally approved for the use of gasoline for fuel may be converted to liquefied petroleum gas fuel provided the complete conversion results in a truck which embodies the features specified for LP or LPS designated trucks. Such conversion equipment shall be approved. The description of the component parts of this conversion system and the recommended method of installation on specific trucks are contained in the “Listed by Report.” Appendix A to § 1910.178—Stability of Powered Industrial Trucks (Non-mandatory Appendix to Paragraph ( l A-1. Definitions. Center of gravity Counterweight Fulcrum Grade Lateral stability Line of action Load center Longitudinal stability Moment Track Wheelbase A-2. General. A-2.1. Determining the stability of a powered industrial truck is simple once a few basic principles are understood. There are many factors that contribute to a vehicle's stability: the vehicle's wheelbase, track, and height; the load's weight distribution; and the vehicle's counterweight location (if the vehicle is so equipped). A-2.2. The “stability triangle,” used in most stability discussions, demonstrates stability simply. A-3. Basic Principles. A-3.1. Whether an object is stable depends on the object's moment at one end of a system being greater than, equal to, or smaller than the object's moment at the system's other end. This principle can be seen in the way a see-saw or teeter-totter works: that is, if the product of the load and distance from the fulcrum (moment) is equal to the moment at the device's other end, the device is balanced and it will not move. However, if there is a greater moment at one end of the device, the device will try to move downward at the end with the greater moment. A-3.2. The longitudinal stability of a counterbalanced powered industrial truck depends on the vehicle's moment and the load's moment. In other words, if the mathematic product of the load moment (the distance from the front wheels, the approximate point at which the vehicle would tip forward) to the load's center of gravity times the load's weight is less than the vehicle's moment, the system is balanced and will not tip forward. However, if the load's moment is greater than the vehicle's moment, the greater load-moment will force the truck to tip forward. A-4. The Stability Triangle. A-4.1. Almost all counterbalanced powered industrial trucks have a three-point suspension system, that is, the vehicle is supported at three points. This is true even if the vehicle has four wheels. The truck's steer axle is attached to the truck by a pivot pin in the axle's center. When the points are connected with imaginary lines, this three-point support forms a triangle called the stability triangle. Figure 1 depicts the stability triangle. A-4.2. When the vehicle's line of action, or load center, falls within the stability triangle, the vehicle is stable and will not tip over. However, when the vehicle's line of action or the vehicle/load combination falls outside the stability triangle, the vehicle is unstable and may tip over. (See Figure 2.) A-5. Longitudinal Stability. A-5.1. The axis of rotation when a truck tips forward is the front wheels' points of contact with the pavement. When a powered industrial truck tips forward, the truck will rotate about this line. When a truck is stable, the vehicle-moment must exceed the load-moment. As long as the vehicle-moment is equal to or exceeds the load-moment, the vehicle will not tip over. On the other hand, if the load moment slightly exceeds the vehicle-moment, the truck will begin to tip forward, thereby causing the rear to lose contact with the floor or ground and resulting in loss of steering control. If the load-moment greatly exceeds the vehicle moment, the truck will tip forward. A-5.2. To determine the maximum safe load-moment, the truck manufacturer normally rates the truck at a maximum load at a given distance from the front face of the forks. The specified distance from the front face of the forks to the line of action of the load is commonly called the load center. Because larger trucks normally handle loads that are physically larger, these vehicles have greater load centers. Trucks with a capacity of 30,000 pounds or less are normally rated at a given load weight at a 24-inch load center. Trucks with a capacity greater than 30,000 pounds are normally rated at a given load weight at a 36- or 48-inch load center. To safely operate the vehicle, the operator should always check the data plate to determine the maximum allowable weight at the rated load center. A-5.3. Although the true load-moment distance is measured from the front wheels, this distance is greater than the distance from the front face of the forks. Calculating the maximum allowable load-moment using the load-center distance always provides a lower load-moment than the truck was designed to handle. When handling unusual loads, such as those that are larger than 48 inches long (the center of gravity is greater than 24 inches) or that have an offset center of gravity, etc., a maximum allowable load-moment should be calculated and used to determine whether a load can be safely handled. For example, if an operator is operating a 3000 pound capacity truck (with a 24-inch load center), the maximum allowable load-moment is 72,000 inch-pounds (3,000 times 24). If a load is 60 inches long (30-inch load center), then the maximum that this load can weigh is 2,400 pounds (72,000 divided by 30). A-6. Lateral Stability. A-6.1. The vehicle's lateral stability is determined by the line of action's position (a vertical line that passes through the combined vehicle's and load's center of gravity) relative to the stability triangle. When the vehicle is not loaded, the truck's center of gravity location is the only factor to be considered in determining the truck's stability. As long as the line of action of the combined vehicle's and load's center of gravity falls within the stability triangle, the truck is stable and will not tip over. However, if the line of action falls outside the stability triangle, the truck is not stable and may tip over. Refer to Figure 2. A-6.2. Factors that affect the vehicle's lateral stability include the load's placement on the truck, the height of the load above the surface on which the vehicle is operating, and the vehicle's degree of lean. A-7. Dynamic Stability. A-7.1. Up to this point, the stability of a powered industrial truck has been discussed without considering the dynamic forces that result when the vehicle and load are put into motion. The weight's transfer and the resultant shift in the center of gravity due to the dynamic forces created when the machine is moving, braking, cornering, lifting, tilting, and lowering loads, etc., are important stability considerations. A-7.2. When determining whether a load can be safely handled, the operator should exercise extra caution when handling loads that cause the vehicle to approach its maximum design characteristics. For example, if an operator must handle a maximum load, the load should be carried at the lowest position possible, the truck should be accelerated slowly and evenly, and the forks should be tilted forward cautiously. However, no precise rules can be formulated to cover all of these eventualities. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 66270, Dec. 1, 1998; 68 FR 32638, June 2, 2003; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 81 FR 83005, Nov. 18, 2016] § 1910.179 Overhead and gantry cranes. (a) Definitions applicable to this section. crane (2) An automatic crane (3) A cab-operated crane (4) Cantilever gantry crane (5) Floor-operated crane (6) Gantry crane (7) Hot metal handling crane (8) Overhead crane (9) Power-operated crane (10) A pulpit-operated crane (11) A remote-operated crane (12) A semigantry crane (13) Storage bridge crane (14) Wall crane (15) Appointed (16) ANSI (17) An auxiliary hoist (18) A brake (19) A drag brake (20) A holding brake (21) Bridge (22) Bridge travel (23) A bumper (24) The cab (25) Clearance (26) Collectors current (27) Conductors, bridge (28) Conductors, runway (29) The control braking means (30) Countertorque (31) Dynamic (32) Regenerative (33) Mechanical (34) Controller, spring return (35) Designated (36) A drift point (37) The drum (38) An equalizer (39) Exposed (40) Fail-safe (41) Footwalk (42) A hoist (43) Hoist chain Note: Chain properties do not conform to those shown in ANSI B30.9-1971, Safety Code for Slings. (44) Hoist motion (45) Load (46) The load block (47) Magnet (48) Main hoist (49) A man trolley (50) Rated load (51) Rope (52) Running sheave (53) Runway (54) Side pull (55) Span (56) Standby crane (57) A stop (58) A switch (59) An emergency stop switch (60) A limit switch (61) A main switch (62) A master switch (63) The trolley (64) Trolley travel (65) Truck (b) General requirements Application. (2) New and existing equipment. (3) Modifications. (4) Wind indicators and rail clamps. (5) Rated load marking. (6) Clearance from obstruction. (ii) Where passageways or walkways are provided obstructions shall not be placed so that safety of personnel will be jeopardized by movements of the crane. (7) Clearance between parallel cranes. (8) Designated personnel (c) Cabs Cab location. (ii) The cab shall be located to afford a minimum of 3 inches clearance from all fixed structures within its area of possible movement. (2) Access to crane. (3) Fire extinguisher. (4) Lighting. (d) Footwalks and ladders Location of footwalks. (ii) Where footwalks are located in no case shall less than 48 inches of headroom be provided. (2) Construction of footwalks. (ii) Footwalks shall have a walking surface of antislip type. Note: Wood will meet this requirement. (iii) [Reserved] (iv) The inner edge shall extend at least to the line of the outside edge of the lower cover plate or flange of the girder. (3) Toeboards and handrails for footwalks. (4) Ladders and stairways. (ii) Stairways shall be equipped with rigid and substantial metal handrails. Walking surfaces shall be of an antislip type. (iii) Ladders shall be permanently and securely fastened in place and constructed in compliance with subpart D of this part. (e) Stops, bumpers, rail sweeps, and guards Trolley stops. (ii) Stops shall be fastened to resist forces applied when contacted. (iii) A stop engaging the tread of the wheel shall be of a height at least equal to the radius of the wheel. (2) Bridge bumpers ( a ( b (ii) Bumpers shall be so designed and installed as to minimize parts falling from the crane in case of breakage. (3) Trolley bumpers (ii) When more than one trolley is operated on the same bridge, each shall be equipped with bumpers or equivalent on their adjacent ends. (iii) Bumpers or equivalent shall be designed and installed to minimize parts falling from the trolley in case of age. (4) Rail sweeps. (5) Guards for hoisting ropes. (ii) A guard shall be provided to prevent contact between bridge conductors and hoisting ropes if they could come into contact. (6) Guards for moving parts. (ii) Guards shall be securely fastened. (iii) Each guard shall be capable of supporting without permanent distortion the weight of a 200-pound person unless the guard is located where it is impossible for a person to step on it. (f) Brakes Brakes for hoists. (ii) Each independent hoisting unit of a crane, except worm-geared hoists, the angle of whose worm is such as to prevent the load from accelerating in the lowering direction shall, in addition to a holding brake, be equipped with control braking means to prevent overspeeding. (2) Holding brakes. ( a ( b ( c (ii) Holding brakes on hoists shall have ample thermal capacity for the frequency of operation required by the service. (iii) Holding brakes on hoists shall be applied automatically when power is removed. (iv) Where necessary holding brakes shall be provided with adjustment means to compensate for wear. (v) The wearing surface of all holding-brake drums or discs shall be smooth. (vi) Each independent hoisting unit of a crane handling hot metal and having power control braking means shall be equipped with at least two holding brakes. (3) Control braking means. (ii) The control braking means shall have ample thermal capacity for the frequency of operation required by service. (4) Brakes for trolleys and bridges. (ii) Brakes may be applied by mechanical, electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic, or gravity means. (iii) Where necessary brakes shall be provided with adjustment means to compensate for wear. (iv) The wearing surface of all brakedrums or discs shall be smooth. (v) All foot-brake pedals shall be constructed so that the operator's foot will not easily slip off the pedal. (vi) Foot-operated brakes shall be equipped with automatic means for positive release when pressure is released from the pedal. (vii) Brakes for stopping the motion of the trolley or bridge shall be of sufficient size to stop the trolley or bridge within a distance in feet equal to 10 percent of full load speed in feet per minute when traveling at full speed with full load. (viii) If holding brakes are provided on the bridge or trolleys, they shall not prohibit the use of a drift point in the control circuit. (ix) Brakes on trolleys and bridges shall have ample thermal capacity for the frequency of operation required by the service to prevent impairment of functions from overheating. (5) Application of trolley brakes. (ii) A drag brake may be applied to hold the trolley in a desired position on the bridge and to eliminate creep with the power off. (6) Application of bridge brakes. (ii) On cab-operated cranes with cab on trolley, a bridge brake of the holding type shall be required. (iii) On all floor, remote and pulpit-operated crane bridge drives, a brake of noncoasting mechanical drive shall be provided. (g) Electric equipment General. (ii) The control circuit voltage shall not exceed 600 volts for a.c. or d.c. current. (iii) The voltage at pendant push-buttons shall not exceed 150 volts for a.c. and 300 volts for d.c. (iv) Where multiple conductor cable is used with a suspended pushbutton station, the station must be supported in some satisfactory manner that will protect the electrical conductors against strain. (v) Pendant control boxes shall be constructed to prevent electrical shock and shall be clearly marked for identification of functions. (2) Equipment. (ii) Electric equipment shall be protected from dirt, grease, oil, and moisture. (iii) Guards for live parts shall be substantial and so located that they cannot be accidently deformed so as to make contact with the live parts. (3) Controllers. (ii) Lever operated controllers shall be provided with a notch or latch which in the “off” position prevents the handle from being inadvertently moved to the “on” position. An “off” detent or spring return arrangement is acceptable. (iii) The controller operating handle shall be located within convenient reach of the operator. (iv) As far as practicable, the movement of each controller handle shall be in the same general directions as the resultant movements of the load. (v) The control for the bridge and trolley travel shall be so located that the operator can readily face the direction of travel. (vi) For floor-operated cranes, the controller or controllers if rope operated, shall automatically return to the “off” position when released by the operator. (vii) Pushbuttons in pendant stations shall return to the “off” position when pressure is released by the crane operator. (viii) Automatic cranes shall be so designed that all motions shall fail-safe if any malfunction of operation occurs. (ix) Remote-operated cranes shall function so that if the control signal for any crane motion becomes ineffective the crane motion shall stop. (4) Resistors. (ii) Resistor units shall be supported so as to be as free as possible from vibration. (iii) Provision shall be made to prevent broken parts or molten metal falling upon the operator or from the crane. (5) Switches. (ii) On cab-operated cranes a switch or circuit breaker of the enclosed type, with provision for locking in the open position, shall be provided in the leads from the runway conductors. A means of opening this switch or circuit breaker shall be located within easy reach of the operator. (iii) On floor-operated cranes, a switch or circuit breaker of the enclosed type, with provision for locking in the open position, shall be provided in the leads from the runway conductors. This disconnect shall be mounted on the bridge or footwalk near the runway collectors. One of the following types of floor-operated disconnects shall be provided: ( a ( b ( c (iv) The hoisting motion of all electric traveling cranes shall be provided with an overtravel limit switch in the hoisting direction. (v) All cranes using a lifting magnet shall have a magnet circuit switch of the enclosed type with provision for locking in the open position. Means for discharging the inductive load of the magnet shall be provided. (6) Runway conductors. (7) Extension lamps. (h) Hoisting equipment Sheaves. (ii) Sheaves carrying ropes which can be momentarily unloaded shall be provided with close-fitting guards or other suitable devices to guide the rope back into the groove when the load is applied again. (iii) The sheaves in the bottom block shall be equipped with close-fitting guards that will prevent ropes from becoming fouled when the block is lying on the ground with ropes loose. (iv) Pockets and flanges of sheaves used with hoist chains shall be of such dimensions that the chain does not catch or bind during operation. (v) All running sheaves shall be equipped with means for lubrication. Permanently lubricated, sealed and/or shielded bearings meet this requirement. (2) Ropes. (ii) Socketing shall be done in the manner specified by the manufacturer of the assembly. (iii) Rope shall be secured to the drum as follows: ( a ( b (iv) Eye splices. [Reserved] (v) Rope clips attached with U-bolts shall have the U-bolts on the dead or short end of the rope. Spacing and number of all types of clips shall be in accordance with the clip manufacturer's recommendation. Clips shall be drop-forged steel in all sizes manufactured commercially. When a newly installed rope has been in operation for an hour, all nuts on the clip bolts shall be retightened. (vi) Swaged or compressed fittings shall be applied as recommended by the rope or crane manufacturer. (vii) Wherever exposed to temperatures, at which fiber cores would be damaged, rope having an independent wirerope or wire-strand core, or other temperature-damage resistant core shall be used. (viii) Replacement rope shall be the same size, grade, and construction as the original rope furnished by the crane manufacturer, unless otherwise recommended by a wire rope manufacturer due to actual working condition requirements. (3) Equalizers. (4) Hooks. (i) Warning device. (j) Inspection Inspection classification Initial inspection. (ii) Inspection procedure for cranes in regular service is divided into two general classifications based upon the intervals at which inspection should be performed. The intervals in turn are dependent upon the nature of the critical components of the crane and the degree of their exposure to wear, deterioration, or malfunction. The two general classifications are herein designated as “frequent” and “periodic” with respective intervals between inspections as defined below: ( a ( b (2) Frequent inspection. (i) All functional operating mechanisms for maladjustment interfering with proper operation. Daily. (ii) Deterioration or leakage in lines, tanks, valves, drain pumps, and other parts of air or hydraulic systems. Daily. (iii) Hooks with deformation or cracks. Visual inspection daily; monthly inspection with a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, of the hook inspected. For hooks with cracks or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal throat opening or more than 10° twist from the plane of the unbent hook refer to paragraph (l)(3)(iii)( a (iv) Hoist chains, including end connections, for excessive wear, twist, distorted links interfering with proper function, or stretch beyond manufacturer's recommendations. Visual inspection daily; monthly inspection with a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and an identifier of the chain which was inspected. (v) [Reserved] (vi) All functional operating mechanisms for excessive wear of components. (vii) Rope reeving for noncompliance with manufacturer's recommendations. (3) Periodic inspection. b (i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded members. (ii) Loose bolts or rivets. (iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and drums. (iv) Worn, cracked or distorted parts such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, rollers, locking and clamping devices. (v) Excessive wear on brake system parts, linings, pawls, and ratchets. (vi) Load, wind, and other indicators over their full range, for any significant inaccuracies. (vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or other powerplants for improper performance or noncompliance with applicable safety requirements. (viii) Excessive wear of chain drive sprockets and excessive chain stretch. (ix) [Reserved] (x) Electrical apparatus, for signs of pitting or any deterioration of controller contactors, limit switches and pushbutton stations. (4) Cranes not in regular use. (ii) A crane which has been idle for a period of over 6 months shall be given a complete inspection conforming with requirements of paragraphs (j) (2) and (3) of this section and paragraph (m)(2) of this section before placing in service. (iii) Standby cranes shall be inspected at least semi-annually in accordance with requirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this section and paragraph (m)(2) of this section. (k) Testing Operational tests. ( a ( b ( c ( d (ii) The trip setting of hoist limit switches shall be determined by tests with an empty hook traveling in increasing speeds up to the maximum speed. The actuating mechanism of the limit switch shall be located so that it will trip the switch, under all conditions, in sufficient time to prevent contact of the hook or hook block with any part of the trolley. (2) Rated load test. (l) Maintenance Preventive maintenance. (2) Maintenance procedure. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (ii) After adjustments and repairs have been made the crane shall not be operated until all guards have been reinstalled, safety devices reactivated and maintenance equipment removed. (3) Adjustments and repairs. (ii) Adjustments shall be maintained to assure correct functioning of components. The following are examples: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (iii) Repairs or replacements shall be provided promptly as needed for safe operation. The following are examples: ( a ( b ( c ( d (m) Rope inspection Running ropes. (i) Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter due to loss of core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires. (ii) A number of broken outside wires and the degree of distribution or concentration of such broken wires. (iii) Worn outside wires. (iv) Corroded or broken wires at end connections. (v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections. (vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cutting, or unstranding. (2) Other ropes. (n) Handling the load Size of load. (2) Attaching the load. (ii) The load shall be attached to the load block hook by means of slings or other approved devices. (iii) Care shall be taken to make certain that the sling clears all obstacles. (3) Moving the load. (ii) Before starting to hoist the following conditions shall be noted: ( a ( b ( c (iii) During hoisting care shall be taken that: ( a ( b (iv) Cranes shall not be used for side pulls except when specifically authorized by a responsible person who has determined that the stability of the crane is not thereby endangered and that various parts of the crane will not be overstressed. (v) While any employee is on the load or hook, there shall be no hoisting, lowering, or traveling. (vi) The employer shall require that the operator avoid carrying loads over people. (vii) The operator shall test the brakes each time a load approaching the rated load is handled. The brakes shall be tested by raising the load a few inches and applying the brakes. (viii) The load shall not be lowered below the point where less than two full wraps of rope remain on the hoisting drum. (ix) When two or more cranes are used to lift a load one qualified responsible person shall be in charge of the operation. He shall analyze the operation and instruct all personnel involved in the proper positioning, rigging of the load, and the movements to be made. (x) The employer shall insure that the operator does not leave his position at the controls while the load is suspended. (xi) When starting the bridge and when the load or hook approaches near or over personnel, the warning signal shall be sounded. (4) Hoist limit switch. (ii) The hoist limit switch which controls the upper limit of travel of the load block shall never be used as an operating control. (o) Other requirements, general Ladders. (ii) Articles which are too large to be carried in pockets or belts shall be lifted and lowered by hand line. (2) Cabs. (ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses, and other necessary articles shall be stored in the tool box, and shall not be permitted to lie loose in or about the cab. (3) Fire extinguishers. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 27400, June 27, 1975; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 81 FR 83005, Nov. 18, 2016] § 1910.180 Crawler locomotive and truck cranes. (a) Definitions applicable to this section. crawler crane (2) A locomotive crane (3) A truck crane (4) A wheel mounted crane (5) An accessory (6) Appointed (7) ANSI (8) An angle indicator (9) The axis of rotation (10) Axle (11) Axle (12) The base (13) The boom (14) The boom angle (15) The boom hoist (16) The boom stop (17) A brake (18) A cab (19) The clutch (20) The counterweight (21) Designated (22) The drum (23) Dynamic (24) The gantry (25) A jib (26) Load (27) Load block (28) Load block (29) A load hoist (30) Load ratings (31) Outriggers (32) Rail clamp (33) Reeving (34) Rope (35) Side loading (36) A standby crane (37) A standing (guy) rope (38) Structural competence (39) Superstructure (40) Swing (41) Swing mechanism (42) Tackle (43) Transit (44) Travel (45) The travel mechanism (46) Wheelbase (47) The whipline (48) A winch head (b) General requirements Application. (2) New and existing equipment. (3) Designated personnel. (c) Load ratings Load ratings where stability governs lifting performance. Type of crane mounting Maximum load ratings (percent of tipping loads) Locomotive, without outriggers: Booms 60 feet or less 1 Booms over 60 feet 1 Locomotive, using outriggers fully extended 80 Crawler, without outriggers 75 Crawler, using outriggers fully extended 85 Truck and wheel mounted without outriggers or using outriggers fully extended 85 1 (ii) The following stipulations shall govern the application of the values in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section for locomotive cranes: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (iii) Stipulations governing the application of the values in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section for crawler, truck, and wheel-mounted cranes shall be in accordance with Crane Load-Stability Test Code, Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J765, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (iv) The effectiveness of these preceding stability factors will be influenced by such additional factors as freely suspended loads, track, wind, or ground conditions, condition and inflation of rubber tires, boom lengths, proper operating speeds for existing conditions, and, in general, careful and competent operation. All of these shall be taken into account by the user. (2) Load rating chart. (d) Inspection classification Initial inspection. (2) Regular inspection. (i) Frequent inspection: Daily to monthly intervals. (ii) Periodic inspection: 1- to 12-month intervals, or as specifically recommended by the manufacturer. (3) Frequent inspection. (i) All control mechanisms for maladjustment interfering with proper operation: Daily. (ii) All control mechanisms for excessive wear of components and contamination by lubricants or other foreign matter. (iii) All safety devices for malfunction. (iv) Deterioration or leakage in air or hydraulic systems: Daily. (v) Crane hooks with deformations or cracks. For hooks with cracks or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal throat opening or more than 10° twist from the plane of the unbent hook. (vi) Rope reeving for noncompliance with manufacturer's recommendations. (vii) Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation. (4) Periodic inspection. (i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded members in the crane structure and boom. (ii) Loose bolts or rivets. (iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and drums. (iv) Worn, cracked, or distorted parts such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, rollers and locking devices. (v) Excessive wear on brake and clutch system parts, linings, pawls, and ratchets. (vi) Load, boom angle, and other indicators over their full range, for any significant inaccuracies. (vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or other power plants for improper performance or noncompliance with safety requirements. (viii) Excessive wear of chain-drive sprockets and excessive chain stretch. (ix) Travel steering, braking, and locking devices, for malfunction. (x) Excessively worn or damaged tires. (5) Cranes not in regular use. (ii) A crane which has been idle for a period of six months shall be given a complete inspection conforming with requirements of paragraphs (d) (3) and (4) of this section and paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section before placing in service. (iii) Standby cranes shall be inspected at least semiannually in accordance with requirements of paragraph (d)(3) of this section and paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section. Such cranes which are exposed to adverse environment should be inspected more frequently. (6) Inspection records. (e) Testing Operational tests. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (ii) Where the complete production crane is not supplied by one manufacturer such tests shall be conducted at final assembly. (iii) Certified production-crane test results shall be made available. (2) Rated load test. (ii) Test loads shall not exceed 110 percent of the rated load at any selected working radius. (iii) Where rerating is necessary: ( a ( b ( c (iv) No cranes shall be rerated in excess of the original load ratings unless such rating changes are approved by the crane manufacturer or final assembler. (f) Maintenance procedure—General. (g) Rope inspection Running ropes. (i) Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter due to loss of core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires. (ii) A number of broken outside wires and the degree of distribution of concentration of such broken wires. (iii) Worn outside wires. (iv) Corroded or broken wires at end connections. (v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections. (vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cutting, or unstranding. (2) Other ropes. (ii) All rope which has been idle for a period of a month or more due to shutdown or storage of a crane on which it is installed shall be given a thorough inspection before it is used. This inspection shall be for all types of deterioration and shall be performed by an appointed or authorized person whose approval shall be required for further use of the rope. A certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and an identifier for the rope which was inspected shall be prepared and kept readily available. (iii) Particular care shall be taken in the inspection of nonrotating rope. (h) Handling the load Size of load. (ii) When loads which are limited by structural competence rather than by stability are to be handled, it shall be ascertained that the weight of the load has been determined within plus or minus 10 percent before it is lifted. (2) Attaching the load. (ii) The load shall be attached to the hook by means of slings or other approved devices. (3) Moving the load. ( a ( b (ii) Before starting to hoist, the following conditions shall be noted: ( a ( b ( c (iii) During hoisting care shall be taken that: ( a ( b (iv) Side loading of booms shall be limited to freely suspended loads. Cranes shall not be used for dragging loads sideways. (v) No hoisting, lowering, swinging, or traveling shall be done while anyone is on the load or hook. (vi) The operator should avoid carrying loads over people. (vii) On truck-mounted cranes, no loads shall be lifted over the front area except as approved by the crane manufacturer. (viii) The operator shall test the brakes each time a load approaching the rated load is handled by raising it a few inches and applying the brakes. (ix) Outriggers shall be used when the load to be handled at that particular radius exceeds the rated load without outriggers as given by the manufacturer for that crane. Where floats are used they shall be securely attached to the outriggers. Wood blocks used to support outriggers shall: ( a ( b ( c (x) Neither the load nor the boom shall be lowered below the point where less than two full wraps of rope remain on their respective drums. (xi) Before lifting loads with locomotive cranes without using outriggers, means shall be applied to prevent the load from being carried by the truck springs. (xii) When two or more cranes are used to lift one load, one designated person shall be responsible for the operation. He shall be required to analyze the operation and instruct all personnel involved in the proper positioning, rigging of the load, and the movements to be made. (xiii) In transit the following additional precautions shall be exercised: ( a ( b ( c (xiv) Before traveling a crane with load, a designated person shall be responsible for determining and controlling safety. Decisions such as position of load, boom location, ground support, travel route, and speed of movement shall be in accord with his determinations. (xv) A crane with or without load shall not be traveled with the boom so high that it may bounce back over the cab. (xvi) When rotating the crane, sudden starts and stops shall be avoided. Rotational speed shall be such that the load does not swing out beyond the radii at which it can be controlled. A tag or restraint line shall be used when rotation of the load is hazardous. (xvii) When a crane is to be operated at a fixed radius, the boom-hoist pawl or other positive locking device shall be engaged. (xviii) Ropes shall not be handled on a winch head without the knowledge of the operator. (xix) While a winch head is being used, the operator shall be within convenient reach of the power unit control lever. (4) Holding the load. (ii) No person should be permitted to stand or pass under a load on the hook. (iii) If the load must remain suspended for any considerable length of time, the operator shall hold the drum from rotating in the lowering direction by activating the positive controllable means of the operator's station. (i) Other requirements Rail clamps. (2) Ballast or counterweight. (3) Cabs. (ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses, and other necessary articles shall be stored in the tool box, and shall not be permitted to lie loose in or about the cab. (4) Refueling. (ii) Machines shall not be refueled with the engine running. (5) Fire extinguishers. (ii) Operating and maintenance personnel shall be made familiar with the use and care of the fire extinguishers provided. (6) Swinging locomotive cranes. (j) Operations near overhead lines. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.181 Derricks. (a) Definitions applicable to this section. derrick (2) A-frame derrick (3) A basket derrick (4) Breast derrick (5) Chicago boom derrick (6) A gin pole derrick (7) Guy derrick (8) Shearleg derrick (9) A stiffleg derrick (10) Appointed (11) ANSI (12) A boom is a timber or metal section or strut, pivoted or hinged at the heel (lower end) at a location fixed in height on a frame or mast or vertical member, and with its point (upper end) supported by chains, ropes, or rods to the upper end of the frame, mast, or vertical member. A rope for raising and lowering the load is reeved through sheaves or a block at the boom point. The length of the boom shall be taken as the straight line distance between the axis of the foot pin and the axis of the boom point sheave pin, or where used, the axis of the upper load block attachment pin. (13) Boom harness (14) The boom point (15) Derrick bullwheel (16) Designated (17) Eye (18) A fiddle block (19) The foot bearing foot block (20) A gudgeon pin (21) A guy (22) Load, working (23) Load block, lower (24) Load block, upper (25) Mast (26) Mast cap (spider) (27) Reeving (28) Rope (29) Safety Hook (30) Side loading (31) The sill (32) A standby derrick (33) Stiffleg (34) Swing (b) General requirements Application. (2) New and existing equipment. (3) Designated personnel. (c) Load ratings Rated load marking. (i) Manufacturer's approved load ratings at corresponding ranges of boom angle or operating radii. (ii) Specific lengths of components on which the load ratings are based. (iii) Required parts for hoist reeving. Size and construction of rope may be shown either on the rating chart or in the operating manual. (2) Nonpermanent installations. (d) Inspection Inspection classification. (ii) Inspection procedure for derricks in regular service is divided into two general classifications based upon the intervals at which inspection should be performed. The intervals in turn are dependent upon the nature of the critical components of the derrick and the degree of their exposure to wear, deterioration, or malfunction. The two general classifications are herein designated as frequent and periodic with respective intervals between inspections as defined below: ( a ( b (2) Frequent inspection. a (i) All control mechanisms: Inspect daily for adjustment, wear, and lubrication. (ii) All chords and lacing: Inspect daily, visually. (iii) Tension in guys: Daily. (iv) Plumb of the mast. (v) Deterioration or leakage in air or hydraulic systems: Daily. (vi) Derrick hooks for deformations or cracks; for hooks with cracks or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal throat opening or more than 10° twist from the plane of the unbent hook, refer to paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of this section. (vii) Rope reeving; visual inspection for noncompliance with derrick manufacturer's recommendations. (viii) Hoist brakes, clutches, and operating levers: check daily for proper functioning before beginning operations. (ix) Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation. (3) Periodic inspection. b ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (ii) Foundation or supports shall be inspected for continued ability to sustain the imposed loads. (4) Derricks not in regular use. (ii) A derrick which has been idle for a period of over 6 months shall be given a complete inspection conforming with requirements of paragraphs (d) (2) and (3) of this section and paragraph (g)(3) of this section before placing in service. (iii) Standby derricks shall be inspected at least semiannually in accordance with requirements of paragraph (d)(2) of this section and paragraph (g)(3) of this section. (e) Testing Operational tests. (i) Load hoisting and lowering. (ii) Boom up and down. (iii) Swing. (iv) Operation of clutches and brakes of hoist. (2) Anchorages. (f) Maintenance Preventive maintenance. (2) Maintenance procedure. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (ii) After adjustments and repairs have been made the derrick shall not be operated until all guards have been reinstalled, safety devices reactivated, and maintenance equipment removed. (3) Adjustments and repairs. (ii) Adjustments shall be maintained to assure correct functioning of components. (iii) Repairs or replacements shall be provided promptly as needed for safe operation. The following are examples of conditions requiring prompt repair or replacement: ( a ( b ( c ( d (g) Rope inspection Running ropes. (i) Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter due to loss of core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires. (ii) A number of broken outside wires and the degree of distribution or concentration of such broken wires. (iii) Worn outside wires. (iv) Corroded or broken wires at end connections. (v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections. (vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cutting, or unstranding. (2) Limited travel ropes. (3) Idle ropes. (4) Nonrotating ropes. (h) Operations of derricks. (i) Handling the load Size of load. (ii) When loads approach the maximum rating of the derrick, it shall be ascertained that the weight of the load has been determined within plus or minus 10 percent before it is lifted. (2) Attaching the load. (ii) The load shall be attached to the hook by means of slings or other suitable devices. (3) Moving the load. (ii) Before starting to hoist, the following conditions shall be noted: ( a ( b ( c (iii) During hoisting, care shall be taken that: ( a ( b (iv) A derrick shall not be used for side loading except when specifically authorized by a responsible person who has determined that the various structural components will not be overstressed. (v) No hoisting, lowering, or swinging shall be done while anyone is on the load or hook. (vi) The operator should avoid carrying loads over people. (vii) The operator shall test the brakes each time a load approaching the rated load is handled by raising it a few inches and applying the brakes. (viii) Neither the load nor boom shall be lowered below the point where less than two full wraps of rope remain on their respective drums. (ix) When rotating a derrick, sudden starts and stops shall be avoided. Rotational speed shall be such that the load does not swing out beyond the radius at which it can be controlled. (x) Boom and hoisting rope systems shall not be twisted. (4) Holding the load. (ii) People should not be permitted to stand or pass under a load on the hook. (iii) If the load must remain suspended for any considerable length of time, a dog, or pawl and ratchet, or other equivalent means, rather than the brake alone, shall be used to hold the load. (5) Use of winch heads. (ii) While a winch head is being used, the operator shall be within convenient reach of the power unit control lever. (6) Securing boom. (i) Be laid down; (ii) Be secured to a stationary member, as nearly under the head as possible, by attachment of a sling to the load block; or (iii) Be hoisted to a vertical position and secured to the mast. (j) Other requirements Guards. (ii) Guards shall be securely fastened. (iii) Each guard shall be capable of supporting without permanent distortion, the weight of a 200-pound person unless the guard is located where it is impossible for a person to step on it. (2) Hooks. (ii) Safety latch type hooks shall be used wherever possible. (3) Fire extinguishers. (ii) Operating and maintenance personnel shall be familiar with the use and care of the fire extinguishers provided. (4) Refueling. (ii) Machines shall not be refueled with the engine running. (5) Operations near overhead lines. (6) Cab or operating enclosure. (ii) Tools, oilcans, waste, extra fuses, and other necessary articles shall be stored in the toolbox, and shall not be permitted to lie loose in or about the cab or operating enclosure. [37 FR 22102, Oct. 18, 1972, as amended at 38 FR 14373, June 1, 1973; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.183 Helicopters. (a) [Reserved] (b) Briefing. (c) Slings and tag lines. (d) Cargo hooks. (e) Personal protective equipment. (2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to flap in rotor downwash, and thus be snagged on the hoist line, may not be worn. (f) Loose gear and objects. (g) Housekeeping. (h) Load safety. (i) Hooking and unhooking loads. (j) Static charge. (k) Weight limitation. (l) Ground lines. (m) Visibility. (n) Signal systems. (o) Approach distance. (p) Approaching helicopter. (q) Personnel. (r) Communications. (s) Fires. [40 FR 13440, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998] § 1910.184 Slings. (a) Scope. (b) Definitions. Angle of loading Basket hitch Braided wire rope Bridle wire rope sling Cable laid endless sling-mechanical joint Cable laid grommet-hand tucked Cable laid rope Cable laid rope sling-mechanical joint Choker hitch Coating Cross rod Designated Equivalent entity Fabric (metal mesh) Female handle (choker) Handle Handle eye Hitch Link Male handle (triangle) Master coupling link Master link gathering ring Mechanical coupling link Proof load Proof test Rated capacity working load limit Reach Selvage edge Sling Sling manufacturer Spiral Strand laid endless sling-mechanical joint Strand laid grommet-hand tucked Strand laid rope Vertical hitch (c) Safe operating practices. (1) Slings that are damaged or defective shall not be used. (2) Slings shall not be shortened with knots or bolts or other makeshift devices. (3) Sling legs shall not be kinked. (4) Slings shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacities. (5) Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the loads balanced to prevent slippage. (6) Slings shall be securely attached to their loads. (7) Slings shall be padded or protected from the sharp edges of their loads. (8) Suspended loads shall be kept clear of all obstructions. (9) All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads. (10) Hands or fingers shall not be placed between the sling and its load while the sling is being tightened around the load. (11) Shock loading is prohibited. (12) A sling shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the sling. (13) Employers must not load a sling in excess of its recommended safe working load as prescribed by the sling manufacturer on the identification markings permanently affixed to the sling. (14) Employers must not use slings without affixed and legible identification markings. (d) Inspections. (e) Alloy steel chain slings Sling identification. (2) Attachments. (ii) Makeshift links or fasteners formed from bolts or rods, or other such attachments, shall not be used. (3) Inspections. (ii) The employer shall make and maintain a record of the most recent month in which each alloy steel chain sling was thoroughly inspected, and shall make such record available for examination. (iii) The thorough inspection of alloy steel chain slings shall be performed by a competent person designated by the employer, and shall include a thorough inspection for wear, defective welds, deformation and increase in length. Where such defects or deterioration are present, the sling shall be immediately removed from service. (4) Proof testing. (5) [Reserved] (6) Safe operating temperatures. (7) Repairing and reconditioning alloy steel chain slings. (ii) Mechanical coupling links or low carbon steel repair links shall not be used to repair broken lengths of chain. (8) Effect of wear. If the chain size at any point of the link is less than that stated in Table N-184-1, the employer must remove the chain from service. (9) Deformed attachments. Table N-184-1—Minimum Allowable Chain Size At Any Point of Link Chain size, inches Minimum allowable chain size, inches 1 4 13 64 3 8 19 64 1 2 25 64 5 8 31 64 3 4 19 32 7 8 4 5 64 1 13 16 1 1 8 29 32 1 1 4 1 1 3 8 1 3 32 1 1 2 1 3 16 1 3 4 1 13 32 (ii) Slings shall be removed from service if hooks are cracked, have been opened more than 15 percent of the normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook. (f) Wire-rope slings Sling use. (2) Minimum sling lengths. (ii) Braided slings shall have a minimum clear length of wire rope 40 times the component rope diameter between the loops or end fittings. (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid grommets and endless slings shall have a minimum circumferential length of 96 times their body diameter. (3) Safe operating temperatures. (4) End attachments. (ii) All welded end attachments shall not be used unless proof tested by the manufacturer or equivalent entity at twice their rated capacity prior to initial use. The employer shall retain a certificate of the proof test, and make it available for examination. (5) Removal from service. (i) Ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or five broken wires in one strand in one rope lay. (ii) Wear or scraping of one-third the original diameter of outside individual wires. (iii) Kinking, crushing, bird caging or any other damage resulting in distortion of the wire rope structure. (iv) Evidence of heat damage. (v) End attachments that are cracked, deformed or worn. (vi) Hooks that have been opened more than 15 percent of the normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook. (vii) Corrosion of the rope or end attachments. (g) Metal mesh slings Sling marking. (2) Handles. (3) Attachments of handles to fabric. (i) The rated capacity of the sling is not reduced. (ii) The load is evenly distributed across the width of the fabric. (iii) Sharp edges will not damage the fabric. (4) Sling coatings. (5) Sling testing. 1/2 (6) [Reserved] (7) Safe operating temperatures. (8) Repairs. (ii) Once repaired, each sling shall be permanently marked or tagged, or a written record maintained, to indicate the date and nature of the repairs and the person or organization that performed the repairs. Records of repairs shall be made available for examination. (9) Removal from service. (i) A broken weld or broken brazed joint along the sling edge. (ii) Reduction in wire diameter of 25 per cent due to abrasion or 15 per cent due to corrosion. (iii) Lack of flexibility due to distortion of the fabric. (iv) Distortion of the female handle so that the depth of the slot is increased more than 10 per cent. (v) Distortion of either handle so that the width of the eye is decreased more than 10 per cent. (vi) A 15 percent reduction of the original cross sectional area of metal at any point around the handle eye. (vii) Distortion of either handle out of its plane. (h) Natural and synthetic fiber-rope slings Sling use. (2) Safe operating temperatures. (3) Splicing. (i) In manila rope, eye splices shall consist of at least three full tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least six full tucks, three on each side of the splice center line. (ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye splices shall consist of at least four full tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least eight full tucks, four on each side of the center line. (iii) Strand end tails shall not be trimmed flush with the surface of the rope immediately adjacent to the full tucks. This applies to all types of fiber rope and both eye and short splices. For fiber rope under one inch in diameter, the tail shall project at least six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck. For fiber rope one inch in diameter and larger, the tail shall project at least six inches beyond the last full tuck. Where a projecting tail interferes with the use of the sling, the tail shall be tapered and spliced into the body of the rope using at least two additional tucks (which will require a tail length of approximately six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck). (iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a minimum clear length of rope between eye splices equal to 10 times the rope diameter. (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of splices. (vi) Clamps not designed specifically for fiber ropes shall not be used for splicing. (vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall be of such size to provide an included angle of not greater than 60 degrees at the splice when the eye is placed over the load or support. (4) End attachments. (5) Removal from service. (i) Abnormal wear. (ii) Powdered fiber between strands. (iii) Broken or cut fibers. (iv) Variations in the size or roundness of strands. (v) Discoloration or rotting. (vi) Distortion of hardware in the sling. (6) Repairs. (i) Synthetic web slings Sling identification. (2) Webbing. (3) Fittings. (i) Of a minimum breaking strength equal to that of the sling; and (ii) Free of all sharp edges that could in any way damage the webbing. (4) Attachment of end fittings to webbing and formation of eyes. (5) [Reserved] (6) Environmental conditions. (i) Nylon web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of acids or phenolics are present. (ii) Polyester and polypropylene web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present. (iii) Web slings with aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present. (7) Safe operating temperatures. (8) Repairs. (ii) Each repaired sling shall be proof tested by the manufacturer or equivalent entity to twice the rated capacity prior to its return to service. The employer shall retain a certificate of the proof test and make it available for examination. (iii) Slings, including webbing and fittings, which have been repaired in a temporary manner shall not be used. (9) Removal from service. (i) Acid or caustic burns; (ii) Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface; (iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts; (iv) Broken or worn stitches; or (v) Distortion of fittings. [40 FR 27369, June 27, 1975, as amended at 40 FR 31598, July 28, 1975; 41 FR 13353, Mar. 30, 1976; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011; 84 FR 15105, Apr. 15, 2019] Subpart O—Machinery and Machine Guarding Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; 20 CFR part 1911. Sections 1910.217 and 1910.219 also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553. § 1910.211 Definitions. (a) As used in §§ 1910.213 and 1910.214 unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following woodworking machinery terms shall have the meaning prescribed in this paragraph. (1) Point of operations (2) Push stick (3) Block (b) As used in § 1910.215 unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following abrasive wheel machinery terms shall have the meanings prescribed in this paragraph. (1) Type 1 straight wheels Limitation: Figure No. 0-1—Type 1 Straight Wheels Type 1—Straight Wheel Peripheral grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole. (2) Type 2 cylinder wheels Limitation: Figure No. 0-2—Type 2 Cylinder Wheels Type 2—Cylinder Wheel Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and wall—wheel is mounted on the diameter. (3) Type 6 straight cup wheels Limitation: Figure No. 0-3—Type 6 Straight Cup Wheels Type 6—Straight-cup Wheel Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole with one side straight or flat and the opposite side recessed. This type, however, differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the wall of the abrasive created by the difference between the diameter of the recess and the outside diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension “W” takes precedence over the diameter of the recess as an essential intermediate dimension to describe this shape type. (4) Type 11 flaring cup wheels Limitation: Figure No. 0-4—Type 11 Flaring Cup Wheels Type 11—Flaring-cup Wheel Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered outward from the back. Wall thickness at the back is normally greater than at the grinding face (W). (5) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo) Limitation: Figure No. 0-5 Typical examples of modified types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo) showing tapered K dimensions. (6) Types 27 and 28 depressed center wheels (i) Limitations: Special supporting, back adapter and inside flange nuts are required for the proper mounting of these types of wheels subject to limitations of § 1910.215(c)(4) (i) and (ii). (ii) Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the manufacturer may not require an inside nut and shall not be reused. (7) Type 27A depressed center, cutting-off wheels Limitations: (8) Surface feet per minute Surface Feet Per Minute = 3.1416 × diameter in inches × r.p.m. ÷ 12 or .262 × diameter in inches × r.p.m. Examples: (a) 24-inch diameter wheel, 1,000 revolutions per minute. Surface Feet per minute .262 × 24 × 1,000 = 6,288 s.f.p.m. (b) 12-inch diameter wheel, 1,000 revolutions per minute. Surface Feet per minute .262 × 12 × 1,000 = 3,144 s.f.p.m. (9) Flanges (10) Snagging (11) Off-hand grinding (12) Safety guard (13) Cutting off wheels (i) Limitation: Cutting off wheels are recommended only for use on specially designed and fully guarded machines and are subject to the following maximum thickness and hole size limitations. Wheel diameter Max. thickness (inch) 6 inch and smaller 3 18 Larger than 6 inches to 12 inches 1 4 Larger than 12 inches to 23 inches 3 8 Larger than 23 inches 1 2 (ii) Maximum hole size for cutting-off wheels should not be larger than 1/4 (14) Abrasive wheel (15) Organic wheels (16) Inorganic wheels vitrified bonded wheels. (c) As used in § 1910.216, unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following mills and calenders in the rubber and plastic industries terms shall have the meanings prescribed in this paragraph. (1) Bite (2) Calender (3) Mill (d) As used in § 1910.217, unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following power press terms shall have the meaning prescribed in this paragraph. (1) Antirepeat Antirepeat (2) Brake (3) Bolster plate (4) Clutch (5) Full revolution clutch (6) Part revolution clutch (7) Direct drive (8) Concurrent (9) Continuous (10) Counterbalance (11) Device (i) Restrains the operator from inadvertently reaching into the point of operation, or (ii) Prevents normal press operation if the operator's hands are inadvertently within the point of operation, or (iii) Automatically withdraws the operator's hands if the operator's hands are inadvertently within the point of operation as the dies close, or (iv) Prevents the initiation of a stroke, or stops of stroke in progress, when there is an intrusion through the sensing field by any part of the operator's body or by any other object. (12) Presence sensing device (13) Gate or movable barrier device (14) Holdout or restraint device (15) Pull-out device (16) Sweep device (17) Two hand control device (18) Die (19) Die builder (20) Die set (21) Die setter (22) Die setting (23) Die shoe (24) Ejector (25) Face of slide (26) Feeding (27) Automatic feeding (28) Semiautomatic feeding (29) Manual feeding (30) Foot control (31) Foot pedal (32) Guard (33) Die enclosure guard (34) Fixed barrier guard (35) Interlocked press barrier guard (36) Adjustable barrier guard (37) Guide post (38) Hand feeding tool (39) Inch Inch Inch Inch Inch (40) Jog (41) Knockout (42) Liftout (43) Operator's station (44) Pinch point (45) Point of operation (46) Press (47) Repeat (48) Safety block (49) Single stroke (50) Single stroke mechanism (51) Slide (52) Stop control (53) Stripper (54) Stroking selector (55) Trip or (tripping) (56) Turnover bar (57) Two-hand trip (58) Unitized tooling (59) Control system (60) Brake monitor (61) Presence sensing device initiation (62) Safety system (63) Authorized person (64) Certification certify (65) Validation validate (i) For design certification/validation has reviewed the manufacturer's certification that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of § 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A and the underlying tests and analyses performed by the manufacturer, has performed additional tests and analyses which may be required by § 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A, and concludes that the requirements of § 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A have been met; and (ii) For installation certification/validation and annual recertification/revalidation has reviewed the employer's certification that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of § 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A and the underlying tests performed by the employer, has performed additional tests and analyses which may be required by § 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A, and concludes that the requirements of § 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A have been met. (66) Certification/validation certify/validate (e) As used in § 1910.218, unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following forging and hot metal terms shall have the meaning prescribed in this paragraph. (1) Forging (2) Open framehammers (or blacksmith hammers) (3) Steam hammers (4) Gravity hammers (5) Forging presses (6) Trimming presses (7) High-energy-rate forging machines (8) Forging rolls (9) Ring rolls (10) Bolt-headers (11) Rivet making machines mean the same as upsetters and boltheaders when producing rivets with stock diameter of 1-inch or more. Rivet making with less than 1-inch diameter is usually a cold forging operation, and therefore not included in this subpart. (12) Upsetters (or forging machines, or headers) type of forging equipment, related to the mechanical press, in which the main forming energy is applied horizontally to the workpiece which is gripped and held by prior action of the dies. (f) As used in § 1910.219, unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following mechanical power-transmission guarding terms shall have the meaning prescribed in this paragraph. (1) Belts (2) Belt shifter (3) Belt pole belt shipper shipper pole, (4) Exposed to contact (5) Flywheels (6) Maintenance runway (7) Nip-point belt and pulley guard (8) Point of operation (9) Prime movers (10) Sheaves [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39 FR 41846, Dec. 3, 1974; 53 FR 8353, Mar. 14, 1988] § 1910.212 General requirements for all machines. (a) Machine guarding Types of guarding. (2) General requirements for machine guards. (3) Point of operation guarding. (ii) The point of operation of machines whose operation exposes an employee to injury, shall be guarded. The guarding device shall be in conformity with any appropriate standards therefor, or, in the absence of applicable specific standards, shall be so designed and constructed as to prevent the operator from having any part of his body in the danger zone during the operating cycle. (iii) Special handtools for placing and removing material shall be such as to permit easy handling of material without the operator placing a hand in the danger zone. Such tools shall not be in lieu of other guarding required by this section, but can only be used to supplement protection provided. (iv) The following are some of the machines which usually require point of operation guarding: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i (4) Barrels, containers, and drums. (5) Exposure of blades. 1/2 (b) Anchoring fixed machinery. § 1910.213 Woodworking machinery requirements. (a) Machine construction general. (2) Arbors and mandrels shall be constructed so as to have firm and secure bearing and be free from play. (3) [Reserved] (4) Any automatic cutoff saw that strokes continuously without the operator being able to control each stroke shall not be used. (5) Saw frames or tables shall be constructed with lugs cast on the frame or with an equivalent means to limit the size of the saw blade that can be mounted, so as to avoid overspeed caused by mounting a saw larger than intended. (6) Circular saw fences shall be so constructed that they can be firmly secured to the table or table assembly without changing their alignment with the saw. For saws with tilting tables or tilting arbors the fence shall be so constructed that it will remain in a line parallel with the saw, regardless of the angle of the saw with the table. (7) Circular saw gages shall be so constructed as to slide in grooves or tracks that are accurately machined, to insure exact alignment with the saw for all positions of the guide. (8) Hinged saw tables shall be so constructed that the table can be firmly secured in any position and in true alignment with the saw. (9) All belts, pulleys, gears, shafts, and moving parts shall be guarded in accordance with the specific requirements of § 1910.219. (10) It is recommended that each power-driven woodworking machine be provided with a disconnect switch that can be locked in the off position. (11) The frames and all exposed, noncurrent-carrying metal parts of portable electric woodworking machinery operated at more than 90 volts to ground shall be grounded and other portable motors driving electric tools which are held in the hand while being operated shall be grounded if they operate at more than 90 volts to ground. The ground shall be provided through use of a separate ground wire and polarized plug and receptacle. (12) For all circular saws where conditions are such that there is a possibility of contact with the portion of the saw either beneath or behind the table, that portion of the saw shall be covered with an exhaust hood, or, if no exhaust system is required, with a guard that shall be so arranged as to prevent accidental contact with the saw. (13) Revolving double arbor saws shall be fully guarded in accordance with all the requirements for circular crosscut saws or with all the requirements for circular ripsaws, according to the kind of saws mounted on the arbors. (14) No saw, cutter head, or tool collar shall be placed or mounted on a machine arbor unless the tool has been accurately machined to size and shape to fit the arbor. (15) Combs (featherboards) or suitable jigs shall be provided at the workplace for use when a standard guard cannot be used, as in dadoing, grooving, jointing, moulding, and rabbeting. (b) Machine controls and equipment. (2) On machines driven by belts and shafting, a locking-type belt shifter or an equivalent positive device shall be used. (3) On applications where injury to the operator might result if motors were to restart after power failures, provision shall be made to prevent machines from automatically restarting upon restoration of power. (4) Power controls and operating controls should be located within easy reach of the operator while he is at his regular work location, making it unnecessary for him to reach over the cutter to make adjustments. This does not apply to constant pressure controls used only for setup purposes. (5) On each machine operated by electric motors, positive means shall be provided for rendering such controls or devices inoperative while repairs or adjustments are being made to the machines they control. (6) Each operating treadle shall be protected against unexpected or accidental tripping. (7) Feeder attachments shall have the feed rolls or other moving parts so covered or guarded as to protect the operator from hazardous points. (c) Hand-fed ripsaws. (2) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw shall be furnished with a spreader to prevent material from squeezing the saw or being thrown back on the operator. The spreader shall be made of hard tempered steel, or its equivalent, and shall be thinner than the saw kerf. It shall be of sufficient width to provide adequate stiffness or rigidity to resist any reasonable side thrust or blow tending to bend or throw it out of position. The spreader shall be attached so that it will remain in true alignment with the saw even when either the saw or table is tilted. The provision of a spreader in connection with grooving, dadoing, or rabbeting is not required. On the completion of such operations, the spreader shall be immediately replaced. (3) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw shall be provided with nonkickback fingers or dogs so located as to oppose the thrust or tendency of the saw to pick up the material or to throw it back toward the operator. They shall be designed to provide adequate holding power for all the thicknesses of materials being cut. (d) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (2) [Reserved] (e) Circular resaws. (2) Each circular resaw (other than self-feed saws with a roller or wheel at back of the saw) shall be provided with a spreader fastened securely behind the saw. The spreader shall be slightly thinner than the saw kerf and slightly thicker than the saw disk. (f) Self-feed circular saws. 1/2 (2) Each self-feed circular ripsaw shall be provided with sectional non-kickback fingers for the full width of the feed rolls. They shall be located in front of the saw and so arranged as to be in continual contact with the wood being fed. (g) Swing cutoff saws. (1) Each swing cutoff saw shall be provided with a hood that will completely enclose the upper half of the saw, the arbor end, and the point of operation at all positions of the saw. The hood shall be constructed in such a manner and of such material that it will protect the operator from flying splinters and broken saw teeth. Its hood shall be so designed that it will automatically cover the lower portion of the blade, so that when the saw is returned to the back of the table the hood will rise on top of the fence, and when the saw is moved forward the hood will drop on top of and remain in contact with the table or material being cut. (2) Each swing cutoff saw shall be provided with an effective device to return the saw automatically to the back of the table when released at any point of its travel. Such a device shall not depend for its proper functioning upon any rope, cord, or spring. If there is a counterweight, the bolts supporting the bar and counterweight shall be provided with cotter pins; and the counterweight shall be prevented from dropping by either a bolt passing through both the bar and counterweight, or a bolt put through the extreme end of the bar, or, where the counterweight does not encircle the bar, a safety chain attached to it. (3) Limit chains or other equally effective devices shall be provided to prevent the saw from swinging beyond the front or back edges of the table, or beyond a forward position where the gullets of the lowest saw teeth will rise above the table top. (4) Inverted swing cutoff saws shall be provided with a hood that will cover the part of the saw that protrudes above the top of the table or above the material being cut. It shall automatically adjust itself to the thickness of and remain in contact with the material being cut. (h) Radial saws. (2) Each radial saw used for ripping shall be provided with nonkickback fingers or dogs located on both sides of the saw so as to oppose the thrust or tendency of the saw to pick up the material or to throw it back toward the operator. They shall be designed to provide adequate holding power for all the thicknesses of material being cut. (3) An adjustable stop shall be provided to prevent the forward travel of the blade beyond the position necessary to complete the cut in repetitive operations. (4) Installation shall be in such a manner that the front end of the unit will be slightly higher than the rear, so as to cause the cutting head to return gently to the starting position when released by the operator. (5) Ripping and ploughing shall be against the direction in which the saw turns. The direction of the saw rotation shall be conspicuously marked on the hood. In addition, a permanent label not less than 1 1/2 3/4 (i) Bandsaws and band resaws. (2) Each bandsaw machine shall be provided with a tension control device to indicate a proper tension for the standard saws used on the machine, in order to assist in the elimination of saw breakage due to improper tension. (3) Feed rolls of band resaws shall be protected with a suitable guard to prevent the hands of the operator from coming in contact with the in-running rolls at any point. The guard shall be constructed of heavy material, preferably metal, and the edge of the guard shall come to within three-eighths inch of the plane formed by the inside face of the feed roll in contact with the stock being cut. (j) Jointers. (2) The opening in the table shall be kept as small as possible. The clearance between the edge of the rear table and the cutter head shall be not more than one-eighth inch. The table throat opening shall be not more than 2 1/2 (3) Each hand-fed jointer with a horizontal cutting head shall have an automatic guard which will cover all the section of the head on the working side of the fence or gage. The guard shall effectively keep the operator's hand from coming in contact with the revolving knives. The guard shall automatically adjust itself to cover the unused portion of the head and shall remain in contact with the material at all times. (4) Each hand-fed jointer with horizontal cutting head shall have a guard which will cover the section of the head back of the gage or fence. (5) Each wood jointer with vertical head shall have either an exhaust hood or other guard so arranged as to enclose completely the revolving head, except for a slot of such width as may be necessary and convenient for the application of the material to be jointed. (k) Tenoning machines. (2) At the rear ends of frames over which feed conveyors run, sprockets and chains shall be guarded at the sides by plates projecting beyond the periphery of sprockets and the ends of lugs. (3) Each tenoning machine shall have all cutting heads, and saws if used, covered by metal guards. These guards shall cover at least the unused part of the periphery of the cutting head. If such a guard is constructed of sheet metal, the material used shall be not less than one-sixteenth inch in thickness, and if cast iron is used, it shall be not less than three-sixteenths inch in thickness. (4) Where an exhaust system is used, the guard shall form part or all of the exhaust hood and shall be constructed of metal of a thickness not less than that specified in subparagraph (3) of this paragraph. (l) Boring and mortising machines. (2) Boring bits should be provided with a guard that will enclose all portions of the bit and chuck above the material being worked. (3) The top of the cutting chain and driving mechanism shall be enclosed. (4) If there is a counterweight, one of the following or equivalent means shall be used to prevent its dropping: (i) It shall be bolted to the bar by means of a bolt passing through both bar and counterweight; (ii) A bolt shall be put through the extreme end of the bar; (iii) Where the counterweight does not encircle the bar, a safety chain shall be attached to it; (iv) Other types of counterweights shall be suspended by chain or wire rope and shall travel in a pipe or other suitable enclosure wherever they might fall and cause injury. (5) Universal joints on spindles of boring machines shall be completely enclosed in such a way as to prevent accidental contact by the operator. (6) Each operating treadle shall be covered by an inverted U-shaped metal guard, fastened to the floor, and of adequate size to prevent accidental tripping. (m) Wood shapers and similar equipment. (2) [Reserved] (3) All double-spindle shapers shall be provided with a spindle starting and stopping device for each spindle. (n) Planing, molding, sticking, and matching machines. 1/16 (2) Where an exhaust system is used, the guards shall form part or all of the exhaust hood and shall be constructed of metal of a thickness not less than that specified in paragraph (h)(1) of this section. (3) Feed rolls shall be guarded by a hood or suitable guard to prevent the hands of the operator from coming in contact with the in-running rolls at any point. The guard shall be fastened to the frame carrying the rolls so as to remain in adjustment for any thickness of stock. (4) Surfacers or planers used in thicknessing multiple pieces of material simultaneously shall be provided with sectional infeed rolls having sufficient yield in the construction of the sections to provide feeding contact pressure on the stock, over the permissible range of variation in stock thickness specified or for which the machine is designed. In lieu of such yielding sectional rolls, suitable section kickback finger devices shall be provided at the infeed end. (o) Profile and swing-head lathes and wood heel turning machine. (2) Cutting heads on wood-turning lathes, whether rotating or not, shall be covered as completely as possible by hoods or shields. (3) Shoe last and spoke lathes, doweling machines, wood heel turning machines, and other automatic wood-turning lathes of the rotating knife type shall be equipped with hoods enclosing the cutter blades completely except at the contact points while the stock is being cut. (4) Lathes used for turning long pieces of wood stock held only between the two centers shall be equipped with long curved guards extending over the tops of the lathes in order to prevent the work pieces from being thrown out of the machines if they should become loose. (5) Where an exhaust system is used, the guard shall form part or all of the exhaust hood and shall be constructed of metal of a thickness not less than that specified in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph. (p) Sanding machines. (2) Each drum sanding machine shall have an exhaust hood, or other guard if no exhaust system is required, so arranged as to enclose the revolving drum, except for that portion of the drum above the table, if a table is used, which may be necessary and convenient for the application of the material to be finished. (3) Each disk sanding machine shall have the exhaust hood, or other guard if no exhaust system is required, so arranged as to enclose the revolving disk, except for that portion of the disk above the table, if a table is used, which may be necessary for the application of the material to be finished. (4) Belt sanding machines shall be provided with guards at each nip point where the sanding belt runs on to a pulley. These guards shall effectively prevent the hands or fingers of the operator from coming in contact with the nip points. The unused run of the sanding belt shall be guarded against accidental contact. (q) Veneer cutters and wringers. (2) Veneer clippers shall have automatic feed or shall be provided with a guard which will make it impossible to place a finger or fingers under the knife while feeding or removing the stock. (3) Sprockets on chain or slat-belt conveyors shall be enclosed. (4) Where practicable, hand and footpower guillotine veneer cutters shall be provided with rods or plates or other satisfactory means, so arranged on the feeding side that the hands cannot reach the cutting edge of the knife while feeding or holding the stock in place. (5) Power-driven guillotine veneer cutters, except continuous feed trimmers, shall be equipped with: (i) Starting devices which require the simultaneous action of both hands to start the cutting motion and of at least one hand on a control during the complete stroke of the knife; or (ii) An automatic guard which will remove the hands of the operator from the danger zone at every descent of the blade, used in conjunction with one-hand starting devices which require two distinct movements of the device to start the cutting motion, and so designed as to return positively to the nonstarting position after each complete cycle of the knife. (6) Where two or more workers are employed at the same time on the same power-driven guillotine veneer cutter equipped with two-hand control, the device shall be so arranged that each worker shall be required to use both hands simultaneously on the controls to start the cutting motion, and at least one hand on a control to complete the cut. (7) Power-driven guillotine veneer cutters, other than continuous trimmers, shall be provided, in addition to the brake or other stopping mechanism, with an emergency device which will prevent the machine from operating in the event of failure of the brake when the starting mechanism is in the nonstarting position. (r) Miscellaneous woodworking machines. (2) Drag saws shall be so located as to give at least a 4-foot clearance for passage when the saw is at the extreme end of the stroke; or if such clearance is not obtainable, the saw and its driving mechanism shall be provided with a standard enclosure. (3) For combination or universal woodworking machines each point of operation of any tool shall be guarded as required for such a tool in a separate machine. (4) The mention of specific machines in paragraphs (a) thru (q) and this paragraph (r) of this section, inclusive, is not intended to exclude other woodworking machines from the requirement that suitable guards and exhaust hoods be provided to reduce to a minimum the hazard due to the point of operation of such machines. (s) Inspection and maintenance of woodworking machinery. (2) All knives and cutting heads of woodworking machines shall be kept sharp, properly adjusted, and firmly secured. Where two or more knives are used in one head, they shall be properly balanced. (3) Bearings shall be kept free from lost motion and shall be well lubricated. (4) Arbors of all circular saws shall be free from play. (5) Sharpening or tensioning of saw blades or cutters shall be done only by persons of demonstrated skill in this kind of work. (6) Emphasis is placed upon the importance of maintaining cleanliness around woodworking machinery, particularly as regards the effective functioning of guards and the prevention of fire hazards in switch enclosures, bearings, and motors. (7) All cracked saws shall be removed from service. (8) The practice of inserting wedges between the saw disk and the collar to form what is commonly known as a “wobble saw” shall not be permitted. (9) Push sticks or push blocks shall be provided at the work place in the several sizes and types suitable for the work to be done. (10)-(11) [Reserved] (12) The knife blade of jointers shall be so installed and adjusted that it does not protrude more than one-eighth inch beyond the cylindrical body of the head. Push sticks or push blocks shall be provided at the work place in the several sizes and types suitable for the work to be done. (13) Whenever veneer slicers or rotary veneer-cutting machines have been shutdown for the purpose of inserting logs or to make adjustments, operators shall make sure that machine is clear and other workmen are not in a hazardous position before starting the machine. (14) Operators shall not ride the carriage of a veneer slicer. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984] § 1910.214 Cooperage machinery. [Reserved] § 1910.215 Abrasive wheel machinery. (a) General requirements Machine guarding. (i) Wheels used for internal work while within the work being ground; (ii) Mounted wheels, used in portable operations, 2 inches and smaller in diameter; and (iii) Types 16, 17, 18, 18R, and 19 cones, plugs, and threaded hole pot balls where the work offers protection. (2) Guard design. (i) Safety guards on all operations where the work provides a suitable measure of protection to the operator, may be so constructed that the spindle end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; and where the nature of the work is such as to entirely cover the side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be omitted; and (ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on machines designed as portable saws. (3) Flanges. (4) Work rests. (5) Excluded machinery. (b) Guarding of abrasive wheel machinery Cup wheels. (i) Safety guards as specified in paragraphs (b) (1) through (10) of this section; (ii) Band type guards as specified in paragraph (b)(11) of this section; and (iii) Special “Revolving Cup Guards” which mount behind the wheel and turn with it. They shall be made of steel or other material with adequate strength and shall enclose the wheel sides upward from the back for one-third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features shall conform with all requirements of this section. It is necessary to maintain clearance between the wheel side and the guard. This clearance shall not exceed one-sixteenth inch. (2) Guard exposure angles. (3) Bench and floor stands. Figure No. O-6 Figure No. O-7 Wherever the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle, the exposure shall not exceed 125°. (See Figures O-8 and O-9.) Figure No. O-8 Figure No. O-9 (4) Cylindrical grinders. Figure No. O-10 Figure No. O-11 (5) Surface grinders and cutting-off machines. Figure No. O-12 Figure No. O-13 (6) Swing frame grinders. Figure No. O-14 Figure No. O-15 (7) Automatic snagging machines. (8) Top grinding. Figure No. O-16 Figure No. O-17 (9) Exposure adjustment. (10) Material requirements and minimum dimensions. (ii) If operating speed does not exceed 8,000 surface feet per minute cast iron safety guards, malleable iron guards or other guards as described in paragraph (b)(10)(iii) of this section shall be used. (iii) Cast steel, or structural steel, safety guards as specified in Figures O-36 and O-37 and Table O-9 shall be used where operating speeds of wheels are faster than 8,000 surface feet per minute up to a maximum of 16,000 surface feet per minute. (iv) For cutting-off wheels 16 inches diameter and smaller and where speed does not exceed 16,000 surface feet per minute, cast iron or malleable iron safety guards as specified in Figures O-36 and O-37, and in Table O-9 shall be used. Figure No. O-18 Figure No. O-19 correct Showing adjustable tongue giving required angular protection for all sizes of wheel used. Figure No. O-20 Figure No. O-21 correct Showing movable guard with opening small enough to give required protection for smallest size wheel used. Figure No. O-22 Figure No. O-23 incorrect Showing movable guard with size of opening correct for full size wheel but too large for smaller wheels. (v) For cutting-off wheels larger than 16 inches diameter and where speed does not exceed 14,200 surface feet per minute, safety guards as specified in Figures O-27 and O-28, and in Table O-1 shall be used. (vi) For thread grinding wheels not exceeding 1 inch in thickness cast iron or malleable iron safety guards as specified in Figures O-36 and O-37, and in Table O-9 shall be used. (11) Band type guards—general specifications. (i) The bands shall be of steel plate or other material of equal or greater strength. They shall be continuous, the ends being either riveted, bolted, or welded together in such a manner as to leave the inside free from projections. (ii) The inside diameter of the band shall not be more than 1 inch larger than the outside diameter of the wheel, and shall be mounted as nearly concentric with the wheel as practicable. (iii) The band shall be of sufficient width and its position kept so adjusted that at no time will the wheel protrude beyond the edge of the band a distance greater than that indicated in Figure O-29 and in Table O-2 or the wall thickness (W), whichever is smaller. (12) Guard design specifications. (c) Flanges General requirements. (i) Exceptions: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i (ii) Type 1 cutting-off wheels are to be mounted between properly relieved flanges which have matching bearing surfaces. Such flanges shall be at least one-fourth the wheel diameter. (iii) Type 27A cutting-off wheels are designed to be mounted by means of flat, not relieved, flanges having matching bearing surfaces and which may be less than one-third but shall not be less than one-fourth the wheel diameter. (See Figure O-24 for one such type of mounting.) (iv) There are three general types of flanges: ( a ( b ( c (v) Regardless of flange type used, the wheel shall always be guarded. Blotters shall be used in accordance with paragraph (c)(6) of this section. Figure No. O-24 The Type 27 A Wheel is mounted between flat non-relieved flanges of equal bearing surfaces. (2) [Reserved] (3) Finish and balance. (4) Uniformity of diameter. (ii) Type 27 and Type 28 wheels, because of their shape and usage, require specially designed adaptors. The back flange shall extend beyond the central hub or raised portion and contact the wheel to counteract the side pressure on the wheel in use. The adaptor nut which is less than the minimum one-third diameter of wheel fits in the depressed side of wheel to prevent interference in side grinding and serves to drive the wheel by its clamping force against the depressed portion of the back flange. The variance in flange diameters, the adaptor nut being less than one-third wheel diameter, and the use of side pressure in wheel operation limits the use to reinforced organic bonded wheels. Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the manufacturer shall not be reused. Type 27 and Type 28 wheels shall be used only with a safety guard located between wheel and operator during use. (See Figure O-24-A.) Figure No. O-24-A Types 27 and 28 wheels, because of their shape, require specially designed adaptors. (iii) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo) with tapered K dimension. (5) Recess and undercut. (ii) Straight flanges of the adaptor or sleeve type (Table O-7 and Figures O-33 and O-34) shall be undercut so that there will be no bearing on the sides of the wheel within one-eighth inch of the arbor hole. (6) Blotters. (ii) Exception: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i ( j (7) Driving flange. (8) Dimensions. (ii) Table O-5, and Table O-7 and Figures O-31, O-33, O-34 show minimum dimensions for straight adaptor flanges for use with wheels having holes larger than the spindle. Dimensions of such adaptor flanges shall never be less than indicated. (iii) Table O-8 and Figure O-35 show minimum dimensions for straight flanges that are an integral part of wheel sleeves which are frequently used on precision grinding machines. Dimensions of such flanges shall never be less than indicated. (9) Repairs and maintenance. (d) Mounting Inspection. (i) Wheels must be dry and free from sawdust when applying the ring test, otherwise the sound will be deadened. It should also be noted that organic bonded wheels do not emit the same clear metallic ring as do vitrified and silicate wheels. Figure No. O-25 Figure No. O-26 (ii) “Tap” wheels about 45° each side of the vertical centerline and about 1 or 2 inches from the periphery as indicated by the spots in Figure O-25 and Figure O-26. Then rotate the wheel 45° and repeat the test. A sound and undamaged wheel will give a clear metallic tone. If cracked, there will be a dead sound and not a clear “ring.” (2) Arbor size. (3) Surface condition. (4) Bushing. (5) Blotters. (i) Mounted wheels. (ii) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer, and projecting-stud type). (iii) Plate mounted wheels. (iv) Cylinders, cups, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks. (v) Types 27 and 28 wheels. (vi) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cutting-off wheels. (vii) Certain internal wheels. (viii) Type 4 tapered wheels. (ix) Diamond wheels, except certain vitrified diamond wheels. (6) Multiple wheel mounting. Table O-1—Minimum Basic Thickness for Peripheral and Side Members for Safety Guards Used With Cutting-Off Wheels Material used in construction of guard Maximum thickness of cutting off wheel Speed not to exceed Cutting off wheel diameters 6 to 11 inches Over 11 to 20 inches Over 20 to 30 inches Over 30 to 48 inches Over 48 to 72 inches A B A B A B A B A B Structural steel (min. tensile strength 60,000 p.s.i.) 1 2 14,200 SFPM 1 16 1 16 3 32 3 32 1 8 1 8 3 16 3 16 1 4 1 4 1 2 16,000 SFPM 3 32 1 8 1 8 1 8 3 16 1 8 1 4 3 16 5 16 1 4 Table O-3—Guide for Construction of Band Type Guards [Maximum Wheel Speed 7,000 SFPM] Minimum material specifications Diameter of wheel Minimum thickness of band A Minimum diameter of rivets Maximum distance between centers of rivets Inches Hot rolled steel SAE 1008 Under 8 1 16 3 16 3 4 8 to 24 1 8 1 4 1 Over 24 to 30 1 4 3 8 1 1 4 Table O-5—Minimum Dimensions for Straight Adaptor Flange—for Organic Bonded Wheels Over 1 1 4 1 [In inches] Wheel diameter Wheel hole diameter B—Minimum flange diameter D—Minimun thickness of flange at bore E—Minimum thickness of flange at edge of undercut F 1 12 to 14 4 6 7 8 3 8 1 2 5 7 7 8 3 8 1 2 6 8 7 8 3 8 1 2 Larger than 14 to 18 4 6 7 8 3 8 1 2 5 7 7 8 3 8 1 2 6 8 7 8 3 8 1 2 7 9 7 8 3 8 1 2 8 10 7 8 3 8 1 2 Larger than 18 to 24 6 8 1 1 2 1 2 7 9 1 1 2 1 2 8 10 1 1 2 1 2 10 12 1 1 2 1 2 12 14 1 1 2 1 2 Larger than 24 to 30 12 15 1 1 2 1 2 Larger than 30 to 36 12 15 1 3 8 7 8 1 2 1 1 4 Table O-6—Minimum Dimensions for Straight Relieved Flanges 1 [In inches] A—Diameter of wheel B—Minimum outside diameter of flanges C—Radial width of bearing surface D—Minimum thickness of flange at bore E—Minimum thickness of flange at edge of recess Minimum Maximum 1 3 8 1 16 1 8 1 16 1 16 2 3 4 1 8 3 16 1 8 3 32 3 1 1 8 3 16 3 16 3 32 4 1 3 8 1 8 3 16 3 16 1 8 5 1 3 4 3 16 1 4 1 4 1 8 6 2 1 4 1 2 3 8 3 16 7 2 1 2 1 4 1 2 3 8 3 16 8 3 1 4 1 2 3 8 3 16 10 3 1 2 5 16 5 8 3 8 1 4 12 4 5 16 5 8 1 2 5 16 14 4 1 2 3 8 3 4 1 2 5 16 16 5 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 5 16 18 6 1 2 1 5 8 3 8 20 7 5 8 1 1 4 5 8 3 8 22 7 1 2 5 8 1 1 4 5 8 7 16 24 8 3 4 1 1 4 5 8 7 16 26 8 1 2 3 4 1 1 4 5 8 1 2 28 10 7 8 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 30 10 7 8 1 1 2 3 4 5 8 36 12 1 2 7 8 3 4 42 14 1 2 7 8 3 4 48 16 1 1 4 2 1 1 8 1 60 20 1 1 4 2 1 1 4 1 1 8 72 24 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 3 8 1 1 4 1 Table O-7—Minimum Dimensions for Straight Flanges—for Mechanical Grinders 12,500 S.F.P.M. to 16,5 S.F.P.M. 1 Wheel diameter Wheel hole diameter B—Minimum flange diameter D—Minimum thickness of flange at bore E—Minimum thickness of flange at edge of undercut F 2 20 6 8 1 1 2 1 2 20 8 10 1 1 2 3 4 3 4 24 12 15 2 1 1 30 12 15 2 1 1 36 12 15 2 1 1 2 1 4 Table O-8—Minimum Dimensions for Straight Flanges Used as Wheel Sleeves for Precision Grinding Only [In inches] Wheel diameter Wheel hole diameter B—Minimum outside diameter of flange D—Minimum thickness of flange at bore E—Minimum thickness of flange at edge of undercut 12 to 14 5 7 1 2 7 16 Larger than 14 to 20 5 7 5 8 7 16 6 8 5 8 7 16 8 10 5 8 7 16 10 11 1 2 5 8 7 16 12 13 1 2 5 8 7 16 Larger than 20 to 30 8 10 3 4 1 2 10 11 1 2 3 4 1 2 12 13 1 2 3 4 1 2 16 17 1 2 3 4 1 2 Larger than 30 to 42 12 13 1 2 3 4 1 2 16 17 1 2 3 4 1 2 18 19 1 2 3 4 1 2 20 21 1 2 3 4 1 2 Larger than 42 to 60 16 20 1 3 4 20 24 1 3 4 24 29 1 1 8 7 8 Note: Table O-9—Minimum Basic Thicknesses of Peripheral and Side Members for Safety Guards [In inches] Material used in construction of guard Maximum thickness of grinding wheel Grinding wheel diameters 3 to 6 inches Over 6 to 12 inches Over 12 to 16 inches Over 16 to 20 inches Over 20 to 24 inches Over 24 to 30 inches Over 30 to 48 inches A B A B A B A B A B A B A B Material 2 1 4 1 4 3 8 5 16 1 2 3 8 5 8 1 2 7 8 5 8 1 3 4 1 1 4 1 satis- 4 5 16 5 16 3 8 5 16 1 2 3 8 3 4 5 8 1 5 8 1 1 8 3 4 1 3 8 1 factory 1 6 3 8 5 16 1 2 7 16 5 8 1 2 1 5 8 1 1 8 3 4 1 1 4 7 8 1 1 2 1 1 8 for 8 5 8 9 16 7 8 3 4 1 3 4 1 1 8 3 4 1 1 4 7 8 1 1 2 1 1 8 speeds 10 3 4 11 16 7 8 3 4 1 3 4 1 1 8 3 4 1 1 4 7 8 1 1 2 1 1 8 up to 16 1 1 8 1 1 1 4 1 1 5 16 1 1 7 16 1 1 16 1 3 4 1 3 8 8,000 20 1 3 8 1 1 8 1 3 8 1 1 8 1 1 2 1 3 8 2 1 5 8 SFPM. Cast iron (min. tensile strength 20,000 p.s.i.) Class 20. Material 2 1 4 1 4 3 8 5 16 1 2 3 8 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 3 4 1 7 8 satis- 4 5 16 5 16 3 8 5 16 1 2 3 8 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 3 4 1 1 8 7 8 factory 1 6 3 8 5 16 1 2 7 16 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 5 8 1 3 4 1 1 4 7 8 for 8 1 2 7 16 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 5 8 1 3 4 1 1 4 7 8 speeds 10 1 2 7 16 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 5 8 1 3 4 1 1 4 7 8 up to 16 13 16 11 16 13 16 11 16 1 3 4 1 1 8 7 8 1 3 8 1 9,000 20 7 8 3 4 1 3 4 1 1 8 7 8 1 1 2 1 1 8 SFPM. Malleable iron (min. tensile strength 50,000 p.s.i.) Grade 32510. Materials 2 1 4 1 4 5 16 5 16 3 8 3 8 1 2 7 16 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 3 4 satis- 4 1 4 1 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 9 16 1 2 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 8 1 3 4 factory 1 6 3 8 1 4 3 4 5 8 3 4 5 8 3 4 5 8 13 16 11 16 13 16 11 16 1 1 8 3 4 for 8 7 8 3 4 7 8 3 4 7 8 3 4 7 8 3 4 15 16 13 16 1 3 8 1 speeds 10 1 7 8 1 7 8 1 7 8 1 1 8 15 16 1 1 8 1 1 7 16 1 1 16 up to 16 1 1 4 1 1 8 1 1 4 1 1 8 1 1 4 1 1 8 1 1 4 1 1 8 1 13 16 1 7 16 16,000 20 1 3 8 1 1 4 1 3 8 1 1 4 1 7 16 1 5 16 2 1 16 1 11 16 SFPM. Steel castings (min. tensile strength 60,000 p.s.i.) Grade V60-30. Structural 2 1 8 1 16 5 16 1 4 5 16 1 4 5 16 1 4 5 16 1 4 3 8 5 16 1 2 3 8 steel 4 1 8 1 16 3 8 5 16 3 8 5 16 3 8 5 16 3 8 5 16 3 8 5 16 1 2 3 8 (min. 6 3 16 1 16 1 2 3 8 7 16 3 8 7 16 3 8 7 16 3 8 7 16 3 8 3 4 1 2 tensile 8 1 2 3 8 9 16 7 16 9 16 7 16 9 strength 10 9 16 7 16 5 8 1 2 5 8 1 2 5 8 1 2 5 8 1 2 7 8 5 8 60,000 16 5 8 9 16 3 4 5 8 3 4 5 8 13 16 11 16 1 1 16 13 16 p.s.i.) 20 13 16 11 16 13 16 11 16 7 8 3 4 1 3 16 15 16 1 Table O-2—Exposure Versus Wheel Thickness [In inches] Overall thickness of wheel (T) Maximum exposure of wheel (C) 1 2 1 4 1 1 2 2 3 4 3 1 4 1 1 2 5 and over 2 Table O-4—Minimum Dimensions for Straight Unrelieved Flanges for Wheels with Threaded Inserts or Projecting Studs A—Diameter of wheel B 1 T—Minimum thickness of flange 1 5 8 1 8 2 1 1 8 3 1 3 16 4 1 3 8 3 16 5 1 3 4 1 4 6 2 3 8 1 Note: [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.216 Mills and calenders in the rubber and plastics industries. (a) General requirements (1)-(2) [Reserved] (3) Auxiliary equipment. (4) Mill roll heights. (b) Mill safety controls Safety trip control. (i) Pressure-sensitive body bars. (ii) Safety triprod. (iii) Safety tripwire cable or wire center cord. (2) [Reserved] (3) Auxiliary equipment. (c) Calender safety controls Safety trip, face. (2) Safety trip, side. (d) Protection by location Mills. (2) Calenders. (e) Trip and emergency switches. (f) Stopping limits Determination of distance of travel. (2) Stopping limits for mills. 1/2 (3) Stopping limits for calenders. 3/4 (ii) Where speeds above 250 feet per minute as measured on the surface of the drive roll are used, stopping distances of more than 1 3/4 [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.217 Mechanical power presses. (a) General requirements. (1)-(3) [Reserved] (4) Reconstruction and modification. (5) Excluded machines. (b) Mechanical power press guarding and construction, general Hazards to personnel associated with broken or falling machine components. (2) Brakes. (3) Machines using full revolution positive clutches. (ii) If the single-stroke mechanism is dependent upon spring action, the spring(s) shall be of the compression type, operating on a rod or guided within a hole or tube, and designed to prevent interleaving of the spring coils in event of breakage. (4) Foot pedals (treadle). (ii) A pad with a nonslip contact area shall be firmly attached to the pedal. (iii) The pedal return spring(s) shall be of the compression type, operating on a rod or guided within a hole or tube, or designed to prevent interleaving of spring coils in event of breakage. (iv) If pedal counterweights are provided, the path of the travel of the weight shall be enclosed. (5) Hand operated levers. (ii) The operating levers on hand-tripped presses having more than one operating station shall be interlocked to prevent the tripping of the press except by the “concurrent” use of all levers. (6) Two-hand trip. (ii) Two-hand trip systems on full revolution clutch machines shall incorporate an antirepeat feature. (iii) If two-hand trip systems are used on multiple operator presses, each operator shall have a separate set of controls. (7) Machines using part revolution clutches. (ii) A red color stop control shall be provided with the clutch/brake control system. Momentary operation of the stop control shall immediately deactivate the clutch and apply the brake. The stop control shall override any other control, and reactuation of the clutch shall require use of the operating (tripping) means which has been selected. (iii) A means of selecting Off, “Inch,” Single Stroke, and Continuous (when the continuous function is furnished) shall be supplied with the clutch/brake control to select type of operation of the press. Fixing of selection shall be by means capable of supervision by the employer. (iv) The “Inch” operating means shall be designed to prevent exposure of the workers hands within the point of operation by: ( a ( b (v) Two-hand controls for single stroke shall conform to the following requirements: ( a ( b ( c ( d (vi) [Reserved] (vii) Controls for more than one operating station shall be designed to be activated and deactivated in complete sets of two operator's hand controls per operating station by means capable of being supervised by the employer. The clutch/brake control system shall be designed and constructed to prevent actuation of the clutch if all operating stations are bypassed. (viii) Those clutch/brake control systems which contain both single and continuous functions shall be designed so that completion of continuous circuits may be supervised by the employer. The initiation of continuous run shall require a prior action or decision by the operator in addition to the selection of Continuous on the stroking selector, before actuation of the operating means will result in continuous stroking. (ix) If foot control is provided, the selection method between hand and foot control shall be separate from the stroking selector and shall be designed so that the selection may be supervised by the employer. (x) Foot operated tripping controls, if used, shall be protected so as to prevent operation from falling or moving objects, or from unintended operation by accidental stepping onto the foot control. (xi) The control of air-clutch machines shall be designed to prevent a significant increase in the normal stopping time due to a failure within the operating value mechanism, and to inhibit further operation if such failure does occur. This requirement shall apply only to those clutch/brake air-valve controls manufactured and installed on or after August 31, 1971, but shall not apply to machines intended only for continuous, automatic feeding applications. (xii) The clutch/brake control shall incorporate an automatic means to prevent initiation or continued activation of the Single Stroke or Continuous functions unless the press drive motor is energized and in the forward direction. (xiii) The clutch/brake control shall automatically deactivate in event of failure of the power or pressure supply for the clutch engaging means. Reactivation of the clutch shall require restoration of normal supply and the use of the tripping mechanism(s). (xiv) The clutch/brake control shall automatically deactivate in event of failure of the counterbalance(s) air supply. Reactivation of the clutch shall require restoration of normal air supply and use of the tripping mechanism(s). (xv) Selection of bar operation shall be by means capable of being supervised by the employer. A separate pushbutton shall be employed to activate the clutch, and the clutch shall be activated only if the driver motor is deenergized. (8) Electrical. (ii) The motor start button shall be protected against accidental operation. (iii) All mechanical power press controls shall incorporate a type of drive motor starter that will disconnect the drive motor from the power source in event of control voltage or power source failure, and require operation of the motor start button to restart the motor when voltage conditions are restored to normal. (iv) All a.c. control circuits and solenoid value coils shall be powered by not more than a nominal 120-volt a.c. supply obtained from a transformer with an isolated secondary. Higher voltages that may be necessary for operation of machine or control mechanisms shall be isolated from any control mechanism handled by the operator, but motor starters with integral Start-Stop buttons may utilize line voltage control. All d.c. control circuits shall be powered by not more than a nominal 240-volt d.c. supply isolated from any higher voltages. (v) All clutch/brake control electrical circuits shall be protected against the possibility of an accidental ground in the control circuit causing false operation of the press. (vi) Electrical clutch/brake control circuits shall incorporate features to minimize the possibility of an unintended stroke in the event of the failure of a control component to function properly, including relays, limit switches, and static output circuits. (9) Slide counterbalance systems. (ii) Spring counterbalances when used shall have the capability to hold the slide and its attachments at midstroke, without brake applied. (iii) Air counterbalance cylinders shall incorporate means to retain the piston and rod in case of breakage or loosening. (iv) Air counterbalance cylinders shall have adequate capability to hold the slide and its attachments at any point in stroke, without brake applied. (v) Air counterbalance cylinders shall incorporate means to prevent failure of capability (sudden loss of pressure) in event of air supply failure. (10) Air controlling equipment. (11) Hydraulic equipment. (12) Pressure vessels. (13) Control reliability. (14) Brake system monitoring. (i) Be so constructed as to automatically prevent the activation of a successive stroke if the stopping time or braking distance deteriorates to a point where the safety distance being utilized does not meet the requirements set forth in paragraph (c)(3)(iii)( e c (ii) Be installed on a press such that it indicates when the performance of the braking system has deteriorated to the extent described in paragraph (b)(14)(i) of this section; and (iii) Be constructed and installed in a manner to monitor brake system performance on each stroke. (c) Safeguarding the point of operation General requirements. (ii) The requirement of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section shall not apply when the point of operation opening is one-fourth inch or less. See Table O-10. (2) Point of operation guards. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (ii) A die enclosure guard shall be attached to the die shoe or stripper in a fixed position. (iii) A fixed barrier guard shall be attached securely to the frame of the press or to the bolster plate. (iv) An interlocked press barrier guard shall be attached to the press frame or bolster and shall be interlocked with the press clutch control so that the clutch cannot be activated unless the guard itself, or the hinged or movable sections of the guard are in position to conform to the requirements of Table O-10. (v) The hinged or movable sections of an interlocked press barrier guard shall not be used for manual feeding. The guard shall prevent opening of the interlocked section and reaching into the point of operation prior to die closure or prior to the cessation of slide motion. See paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section regarding manual feeding through interlocked press barrier devices. (vi) The adjustable barrier guard shall be securely attached to the press bed, bolster plate, or die shoe, and shall be adjusted and operated in conformity with Table O-10 and the requirements of this subparagraph. Adjustments shall be made only by authorized personnel whose qualifications include a knowledge of the provisions of Table O-10 and this subparagraph. (vii) A point of operation enclosure which does not meet the requirements of this subparagraph and Table O-10 shall be used only in conjunction with point of operation devices. (3) Point of operation devices. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g (ii) A gate or movable barrier device shall protect the operator as follows: ( a f ( b g (iii) A presence sensing point of operation device shall protect the operator as provided in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( a ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e s D s s where: D s and T s ( f (iv) The pull-out device shall protect the operator as specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( b ( a ( b ( c ( d (v) The sweep device may not be used for point of operation safeguarding. (vi) A holdout or a restraint device shall protect the operator as specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( c (vii) The two hand control device shall protect the operator as specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( e ( a ( b ( c s D s s where: D s and T s ( d (viii) The two hand trip device shall protect the operator as specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( e ( a ( b ( c m D m m where: D m and T m m m T m 1/2 ( d (4) Hand feeding tools. (5) Additional requirements for safe-guarding. (i) The employer shall use a control system and a brake monitor which comply with paragraphs (b) (13) and (14) of this section; (ii) The exception in paragraph (b)(7)(v)( d (iii) The control of air clutch machines shall be designed to prevent a significant increase in the normal stopping time due to a failure within the operating valve mechanism, and to inhibit further operation if such failure does occur, where a part revolution clutch is employed. The exception in paragraph (b)(7)(xi) of this section for controls manufactured and installed before August 31, 1971, is not applicable under this paragraph (c)(5). (d) Design, construction, setting and feeding of dies General requirements. (2) [Reserved] (3) Scrap handling. (4) Guide post hazard. (5) Unitized tooling. (6) Tonnage, stroke, and weight designation. (i) Stamped with the tonnage and stroke requirements, or have these characteristics recorded if these records are readily available to the die setter; (ii) Stamped to indicate upper die weight when necessary for air counterbalance pressure adjustment; and (iii) Stamped to indicate complete die weight when handling equipment may become overloaded. (7) Die fastening. (8) Die handling. (9) Diesetting. (ii) The employer shall provide spring loaded turnover bars, for presses designed to accept such turnover bars. (iii) The employer shall provide die stops or other means to prevent losing control of the die while setting or removing dies in presses which are inclined. (iv) The employer shall provide and enforce the use of safety blocks for use whenever dies are being adjusted or repaired in the press. (v) The employer shall provide brushes, swabs, lubricating rolls, and automatic or manual pressure guns so that operators and diesetters shall not be required to reach into the point of operation or other hazard areas to lubricate material, punches or dies. (e) Inspection, maintenance, and modification of presses Inspection and maintenance records. (i) Under the general component of the inspection program, the employer shall: (A) Conduct periodic and regular inspections of each power press to ensure that all of its parts, auxiliary equipment, and safeguards, including the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature, and single-stroke mechanism, are in a safe operating condition and adjustment; (B) Perform and complete necessary maintenance or repair, or both, before operating the press; and (C) Maintain a certification record of each inspection, and each maintenance and repair task performed, under the general component of the inspection program that includes the date of the inspection, maintenance, or repair work, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, maintenance, or repair work, and the serial number, or other identifier, of the power press inspected, maintained, and repaired. (ii) Under the directed component of the inspection program, the employer shall: (A) Inspect and test each press on a regular basis at least once a week to determine the condition of the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature, and single-stroke mechanism; (B) Perform and complete necessary maintenance or repair, or both, on the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature, and single-stroke mechanism before operating the press; and (C) Maintain a certification record of each maintenance task performed under the directed component of the inspection program that includes the date of the maintenance task, the signature of the person who performed the maintenance task, and the serial number, or other identifier, of the power press maintained. Note to paragraph ( e ii Inspections of the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature, and single-stroke mechanism conducted under the directed component of the inspection program are exempt from the requirement to maintain certification records specified by paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C) of this section, but inspections of the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature, and single-stroke mechanism conducted under the general component of the inspection program are not exempt from this requirement. (iii) Paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section does not apply to presses that comply with paragraphs (b)(13) and (14) of this section. (2) Modification. (3) Training of maintenance personnel. (f) Operation of power presses (2) Instruction to operators. (3) Work area. (4) Overloading. Explanation of above diagram: This diagram shows the accepted safe openings between the bottom edge of a guard and feed table at various distances from the danger line (point of operation). The clearance line The minimum guarding line The various openings are such that for average size hands an operator's fingers won't reach the point of operation. After installation of point of operation guards and before a job is released for operation a check should be made to verify that the guard will prevent the operator's hands from reaching the point of operation. Table O-10 [In inches] Distance of opening from point of operation hazard Maximum width of opening 1 2 1 2 1 4 1 1 2 1 2 3 8 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 5 8 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 6 1 2 1 2 7 8 7 1 2 1 2 1 1 4 12 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 15 1 2 1 2 1 7 8 17 1 2 1 2 2 1 8 This table shows the distances that guards shall be positioned from the danger line in accordance with the required openings. (g) Reports of injuries to employees operating mechanical power presses. http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/mechanical.html; (2) The report shall include the following information: (i) Employer's name, address and location of the workplace (establishment). (ii) Employee's name, injury sustained, and the task being performed (operation, set-up, maintenance, or other). (iii) Type of clutch used on the press (full revolution, part revolution, or direct drive). (iv) Type of safeguard(s) being used (two hand control, two hand trip, pullouts, sweeps, or other). If the safeguard is not described in this section, give a complete description. (v) Cause of the accident (repeat of press, safeguard failure, removing stuck part or scrap, no safeguard provided, no safeguard in use, or other). (vi) Type of feeding (manual with hands in dies or with hands out of dies, semiautomatic, automatic, or other). (vii) Means used to actuate press stroke (foot trip, foot control, hand trip, hand control, or other). (viii) Number of operators required for the operation and the number of operators provided with controls and safeguards. (h) Presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) General. (ii) The relevant requirements of paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section also shall apply to all presses used in the PSDI mode of operation, whether or not cross referenced in this paragraph (h). Such cross-referencing of specific requirements from paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section is intended only to enhance convenience and understanding in relating to the new provisions to the existing standard, and is not to be construed as limiting the applicability of other provisions in paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section. (iii) Full revolution mechanical power presses shall not be used in the PSDI mode of operation. (iv) Mechanical power presses with a configuration which would allow a person to enter, pass through, and become clear of the sensing field into the hazardous portion of the press shall not be used in the PSDI mode of operation. (v) The PSDI mode of operation shall be used only for normal production operations. Die-setting and maintenance procedures shall comply with paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section, and shall not be done in the PSDI mode. (2) Brake and clutch requirements. (ii) Brake systems on presses used in the PSDI mode shall have sufficient torque so that each average value of stopping times (Ts) for stops initiated at approximately 45 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees, respectively, of crankshaft angular position, shall not be more than 125 percent of the average value of the stopping time at the top crankshaft position. Compliance with this requirement shall be determined by using the heaviest upper die to be used on the press, and operating at the fastest press speed if there is speed selection. (iii) Where brake engagement and clutch release is effected by spring action, such spring(s) shall operate in compression on a rod or within a hole or tube, and shall be of non-interleaving design. (3) Pneumatic systems. (A) The requirements of paragraphs (b)(7)(xiii), (b)(7)(xiv), (b)(10), (b)(12) and (c)(5)(iii) of this section apply to the pneumatic systems of machines used in the PSDI mode. (B) The air supply for pneumatic clutch/brake control valves shall incorporate a filter, an air regulator, and, when necessary for proper operation, a lubricator. (C) The air pressure supply for clutch/brake valves on machines used in the PSDI mode shall be regulated to pressures less than or equal to the air pressure used when making the stop time measurements required by paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section. (ii) Air counterbalance systems. (A) Where presses that have slide counterbalance systems are used in the PSDI mode, the counterbalance system shall also meet the requirements of paragraph (b)(9) of this section. (B) Counterbalances shall be adjusted in accordance with the press manufacturer's recommendations to assure correct counterbalancing of the slide attachment (upper die) weight for all operations performed on presses used in the PSDI mode. The adjustments shall be made before performing the stopping time measurements required by paragraphs (h)(2)(ii), (h)(5)(iii), and (h)(9)(v) of this section. (4) Flywheels and bearings. (5) Brake monitoring. (ii) Once the PSDI safety system has been certified/validated, adjustment of the brake monitor shall not be done without prior approval of the validation organization for both the brake monitor adjustment and the corresponding adjustment of the safety distance. The validation organization shall in its installation validation, state that in what circumstances, if any, the employer has advance approval for adjustment, when prior oral approval is appropriate and when prior approval must be in writing. The adjustment shall be done under the supervision of an authorized person whose qualifications include knowledge of safety distance requirements and experience with the brake system and its adjustment. When brake wear or other factors extend press stopping time beyond the limit permitted by the brake monitor, adjustment, repair, or maintenance shall be performed on the brake or other press system element that extends the stopping time. (iii) The brake monitor setting shall allow an increase of no more than 10 percent of the longest stopping time for the press, or 10 milliseconds, whichever is longer, measured at the top of the stroke. (6) Cycle control and control systems. (ii) The control system shall incorporate a means of dynamically monitoring for decoupling of the rotary position indicating mechanism drive from the crankshaft. This monitor shall stop slide motion and prevent successive press strokes if decoupling occurs, or if the monitor itself fails. (iii) The mode selection means of paragraph (b)(7)(iii) of this section shall have at least one position for selection of the PSDI mode. Where more than one interruption of the light sensing field is used in the initiation of a stroke, either the mode selection means must have one position for each function, or a separate selection means shall be provided which becomes operable when the PSDI mode is selected. Selection of PSDI mode and the number of interruptions/withdrawals of the light sensing field required to initiate a press cycle shall be by means capable of supervision by the employer. (iv) A PSDI set-up/reset means shall be provided which requires an overt action by the operator, in addition to PSDI mode selection, before operation of the press by means of PSDI can be started. (v) An indicator visible to the operator and readily seen by the employer shall be provided which shall clearly indicate that the system is set-up for cycling in the PSDI mode. (vi) The control system shall incorporate a timer to deactivate PSDI when the press does not stroke within the period of time set by the timer. The timer shall be manually adjustable, to a maximum time of 30 seconds. For any timer setting greater than 15 seconds, the adjustment shall be made by the use of a special tool available only to authorized persons. Following a deactivation of PSDI by the timer, the system shall make it necessary to reset the set-up/reset means in order to reactivate the PSDI mode. (vii) Reactivation of PSDI operation following deactivation of the PSDI mode from any other cause, such as activation of the red color stop control required by paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section, interruption of the presence sensing field, opening of an interlock, or reselection of the number of sensing field interruptions/withdrawals required to cycle the press, shall require resetting of the set-up/reset means. (viii) The control system shall incorporate an automatic means to prevent initiation or continued operation in the PSDI mode unless the press drive motor is energized in the forward direction of crankshaft rotation. (ix) The control design shall preclude any movement of the slide caused by operation of power on, power off, or selector switches, or from checks for proper operations as required by paragraph (h)(6)(xiv) of this section. (x) All components and subsystems of the control system shall be designed to operate together to provide total control system compliance with the requirements of this section. (xi) Where there is more than one operator of a press used for PSDI, each operator shall be protected by a separate, independently functioning, presence sensing device. The control system shall require that each sensing field be interrupted the selected number of times prior to initiating a stroke. Further, each operator shall be provided with a set-up/reset means that meets the requirements of paragraph (h)(6) of this section, and which must be actuated to initiate operation of the press in the PSDI mode. (xii) [Reserved] (xiii) The Control system shall incorporate interlocks for supplemental guards, if used, which will prevent stroke initiation or will stop a stroke in progress if any supplemental guard fails or is deactivated. (xiv) The control system shall perform checks for proper operation of all cycle control logic element switches and contacts at least once each cycle. Control elements shall be checked for correct status after power “on” and before the initial PSDI stroke. (xv) The control system shall have provisions for an “inch” operating means meeting the requirements of paragraph (b)(7)(iv) of this section. Die-setting shall not be done in the PSDI mode. Production shall not be done in the “inch” mode. (xvi) The control system shall permit only a single stroke per initiation command. (xvii) Controls with internally stored programs (e.g., mechanical, electro-mechanical, or electronic) shall meet the requirements of paragraph (b)(13) of this section, and shall default to a predetermined safe condition in the event of any single failure within the system. Programmable controllers which meet the requirements for controls with internally stored programs stated above shall be permitted only if all logic elements affecting the safety system and point of operation safety are internally stored and protected in such a manner that they cannot be altered or manipulated by the user to an unsafe condition. (7) Environmental requirements. (8) Safety system. (ii) The safety system shall be designed, constructed, and arranged as an integral total system, including all elements of the press, the controls, the safeguarding and any required supplemental safeguarding, and their interfaces with the operator and that part of the environment which has effect on the protection against point of operation hazards. (9) Safeguarding the point of operation. (ii)(A) PSDI shall be implemented only by use of light curtain (photo-electric) presence sensing devices which meet the requirements of paragraph (c)(3)(iii)( c (B) Alternatives to photo-electric light curtains may be used for PSDI when the employer can demonstrate, through tests and analysis by the employer or the manufacturer, that the alternative is as safe as the photo-electric light curtain, that the alternative meets the conditions of this section, has the same long term reliability as light curtains and can be integrated into the entire safety system as provided for in this section. Prior to use, both the employer and manufacturer must certify that these requirements and all the other applicable requirements of this section are met and these certifications must be validated by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization to meet these additional requirements and all the other applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this section. Three months prior to the operation of any alternative system, the employer must notify the OSHA Directorate of Safety Standards Programs of the name of the system to be installed, the manufacturer and the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization immediately. Upon request, the employer must make available to that office all tests and analyses for OSHA review. (iii) Individual sensing fields of presence sensing devices used to initiate strokes in the PSDI mode shall cover only one side of the press. (iv) Light curtains used for PSDI operation shall have minimum object sensitivity not to exceed one and one-fourth inches (31.75 mm). Where light curtain object sensitivity is user-adjustable, either discretely or continuously, design features shall limit the minimum object sensitivity adjustment not to exceed one and one-fourth inches (31.75 mm). Blanking of the sensing field is not permitted. (v) The safety distance (Ds) from the sensing field of the presence sensing device to the point of operation shall be greater than or equal to the distance determined by the formula: Ds = Hs × (Ts + Tp + Tr + 2Tm) + Dp Where: Ds = Minimum safety distance. Hs = Hand speed constant of 63 inches per second (1.6 m/s). Ts = Longest press stopping time, in seconds, computed by taking averages of multiple measurements at each of three positions (45 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees) of crankshaft angular position; the longest of the three averages is the stopping time to use. (Ts is defined as the sum of the kinetic energy dissipation time plus the pneumatic/magnetic/hydraulic reaction time of the clutch/brake operating mechanism(s).) Tp = Longest presence sensing device response time, in seconds. Tr = Longest response time, in seconds, of all interposing control elements between the presence sensing device and the clutch/brake operating mechanism(s). Tm = Increase in the press stopping time at the top of the stroke, in seconds, allowed by the brake monitor for brake wear. The time increase allowed shall be limited to no more than 10 percent of the longest press stopping time measured at the top of the stroke, or 10 milliseconds, whichever is longer. Dp = Penetration depth factor, required to provide for possible penetration through the presence sensing field by fingers or hand before detection occurs. The penetration depth factor shall be determined from Graph h-1 using the minimum object sensitivity size. (vi) The presence sensing device location shall either be set at each tool change and set-up to provide at least the minimum safety distance, or fixed in location to provide a safety distance greater than or equal to the minimum safety distance for all tooling set-ups which are to be used on that press. (vii) Where presence sensing device location is adjustable, adjustment shall require the use of a special tool available only to authorized persons. (viii) Supplemental safeguarding shall be used to protect all areas of access to the point of operation which are unprotected by the PSDI presence sensing device. Such supplemental safeguarding shall consist of either additional light curtain (photo-electric) presence sensing devices or other types of guards which meet the requirements of paragraphs (c) and (h) of this section. (A) Presence sensing devices used as supplemental safeguarding shall not initiate a press stroke, and shall conform to the requirements of paragraph (c)(3)(iii) and other applicable provisions of this section, except that the safety distance shall comply with paragraph (h)(9)(v) of this section. (B) Guards used as supplemental safeguarding shall conform to the design, construction and application requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section, and shall be interlocked with the press control to prevent press PSDI operation if the guard fails, is removed, or is out of position. (ix) Barriers shall be fixed to the press frame or bolster to prevent personnel from passing completely through the sensing field, where safety distance or press configuration is such that personnel could pass through the PSDI presence sensing field and assume a position where the point of operation could be accessed without detection by the PSDI presence sensing device. As an alternative, supplemental presence sensing devices used only in the safeguard mode may be provided. If used, these devices shall be located so as to detect all operator locations and positions not detected by the PSDI sensing field, and shall prevent stroking or stop a stroke in process when any supplemental sensing field(s) are interrupted. (x) Hand tools. Where tools are used for feeding, removal of scrap, lubrication of parts, or removal of parts that stick on the die in PSDI operations: (A) The minimum diameter of the tool handle extension shall be greater than the minimum object sensitivity of the presence sensing device(s) used to initiate press strokes; or (B) The length of the hand tool shall be such as to ensure that the operator's hand will be detected for any safety distance required by the press set-ups. (10) Inspection and maintenance. (ii) The following checks shall be made at the beginning of each shift and whenever a die change is made. (A) A check shall be performed using the test rod according to the presence sensing device manufacturer's instructions to determine that the presence sensing device used for PSDI is operational. (B) The safety distance shall be checked for compliance with (h)(9)(v) of this section. (C) A check shall be made to determine that all supplemental safeguarding is in place. Where presence sensing devices are used for supplemental safeguarding, a check for proper operation shall be performed using the test rod according to the presence sensing device manufacturer's instructions. (D) A check shall be made to assure that the barriers and/or supplemental presence sensing devices required by paragraph (h)(9)(ix) of this section are operating properly. (E) A system or visual check shall be made to verify correct counterbalance adjustment for die weight according to the press manufacturer's instructions, when a press is equipped with a slide counterbalance system. (iii) When presses used in the PSDI mode have flywheel or bullgear running on crankshaft mounted journals and bearings, or a flywheel mounted on back shaft journals and bearings, periodic inspections following the press manufacturer's recommendations shall be made to ascertain that bearings are in good working order, and that automatic lubrication systems for these bearings (if automatic lubrication is provided) are supplying proper lubrication. On presses with provision for manual lubrication of flywheel or bullgear bearings, lubrication shall be provided according to the press manufacturer's recommendations. (iv) Periodic inspections of clutch and brake mechanisms shall be performed to assure they are in proper operating condition. The press manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. (v) When any check of the press, including those performed in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (h)(10)(ii), (iii) or (iv) of this section, reveals a condition of noncompliance, improper adjustment, or failure, the press shall not be operated until the condition has been corrected by adjustment, replacement, or repair. (vi) It shall be the responsibility of the employer to ensure the competence of personnel caring for, inspecting, and maintaining power presses equipped for PSDI operation, through initial and periodic training. (11) Safety system certification/validation. (A) The design of the safety system required for the use of a press in the PSDI mode shall be certified and validated prior to installation. The manufacturer's certification shall be validated by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization to meet all applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this section. (B) After a press has been equipped with a safety system whose design has been certified and validated in accordance with paragraph (h)(11)(i) of this section, the safety system installation shall be certified by the employer, and then shall be validated by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization to meet all applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this section. (ii) At least annually thereafter, the safety system on a mechanical power press used in the PSDI mode shall be recertified by the employer and revalidated by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization to meet all applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this section. Any press whose safety system has not been recertified and revalidated within the preceding 12 months shall be removed from service in the PSDI mode until the safety system is recertified and revalidated. (iii) A label shall be affixed to the press as part of each installation certification/validation and the most recent recertification/revalidation. The label shall indicate the press serial number, the minimum safety distance (Ds) required by paragraph (h)(9)(v) of this section, the fulfillment of design certification/validation, the employer's signed certification, the identification of the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization, its signed validation, and the date the certification/validation and recertification/revalidation are issued. (iv) Records of the installation certification and validation and the most recent recertification and revalidation shall be maintained for each safety system equipped press by the employer as long as the press is in use. The records shall include the manufacture and model number of each component and subsystem, the calculations of the safety distance as required by paragraph (h)(9)(v) of this section, and the stopping time measurements required by paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section. The most recent records shall be made available to OSHA upon request. (v) The employer shall notify the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization within five days whenever a component or a subsystem of the safety system fails or modifications are made which may affect the safety of the system. The failure of a critical component shall necessitate the removal of the safety system from service until it is recertified and revalidated, except recertification by the employer without revalidation is permitted when a non-critical component or subsystem is replaced by one of the same manufacture and design as the original, or determined by the third-party validation organization to be equivalent by similarity analysis, as set forth in appendix A. (vi) The employer shall notify the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization within five days of the occurrence of any point of operation injury while a press is used in the PSDI mode. This is in addition to the report of injury required by paragraph (g) of this section; however, a copy of that report may be used for this purpose. (12) Die setting and work set-up. (ii) The PSDI mode shall not be used for die setting or set-up. An alternative manual cycle initiation and control means shall be supplied for use in die setting which meets the requirements of paragraph (b)(7) of this section. (iii) Following a die change, the safety distance, the proper application of supplemental safeguarding, and the slide counterbalance adjustment (if the press is equipped with a counterbalance) shall be checked and maintained by authorized persons whose qualifications include knowledge of the safety distance, supplemental safeguarding requirements, and the manufacturer's specifications for counterbalance adjustment. Adjustment of the location of the PSDI presence sensing device shall require use of a special tool available only to the authorized persons. (13) Operator training. (A) The manufacturer's recommended test procedures for checking operation of the presence sensing device. This shall include the use of the test rod required by paragraph (h)(10)(i) of this section. (B) The safety distance required. (C) The operation, function and performance of the PSDI mode. (D) The requirements for hand tools that may be used in the PSDI mode. (E) The severe consequences that can result if he or she attempts to circumvent or by-pass any of the safeguard or operating functions of the PSDI system. (ii) The employer shall certify that employees have been trained by preparing a certification record which includes the identity of the person trained, the signature of the employer or the person who conducted the training, and the date the training was completed. The certification record shall be prepared at the completion of training and shall be maintained on file for the duration of the employee's employment. The certification record shall be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary for Occupational Safety and Health. Appendix A to § 1910.217—Mandatory Requirements for Certification/Validation of Safety Systems for Presence Sensing Device Initiation of Mechanical Power Presses Purpose The purpose of the certification/validation of safety systems for presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power presses is to ensure that the safety systems are designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with all applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. General The certification/validation process shall utilize an independent third-party validation organization recognized by OSHA in accordance with the requirements specified in appendix C of this section. While the employer is responsible for assuring that the certification/validation requirements in § 1910.217(h)(11) are fulfilled, the design certification of PSDI safety systems may be initiated by manufacturers, employers, and/or their representatives. The term manufacturers The certification/validation process includes two stages. For design certification, in the first stage, the manufacturer (which can be an employer) certifies that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A, based on appropriate design criteria and tests. In the second stage, the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization validates that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A and the manufacturer's certification by reviewing the manufacturer's design and test data and performing any additional reviews required by this standard or which it believes appropriate. For installation certification/validation and annual recertification/revalidation, in the first stage the employer certifies or recertifies that the employer is installing or utilizing a PSDI safety system validated as meeting the design requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization and that the installation, operation and maintenance meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. In the second stage, the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization validates or revalidates that the PSDI safety system installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A and the employer's certification, by reviewing that the PSDI safety system has been certified; the employer's certification, designs and tests, if any; the installation, operation, maintenance and training; and by performing any additional tests and reviews which the validation organization believes is necessary. Summary The certification/validation of safety systems for PSDI shall consider the press, controls, safeguards, operator, and environment as an integrated system which shall comply with all of the requirements in 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. The certification/validation process shall verify that the safety system complies with the OSHA safety requirements as follows: A. Design Certification/Validation 1. The major parts, components and subsystems used shall be defined by part number or serial number, as appropriate, and by manufacturer to establish the configuration of the system. 2. The identified parts, components and subsystems shall be certified by the manufacturer to be able to withstand the functional and operational environments of the PSDI safety system. 3. The total system design shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with all requirements in 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. 4. The third-party validation organization shall validate the manufacturer's certification under paragraphs 2 and 3. B. Installation Certification/Validation 1. The employer shall certify that the PSDI safety system has been design certified and validated, that the installation meets the operational and environmental requirements specified by the manufacturer, that the installation drawings are accurate, and that the installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. (The operational and installation requirements of the PSDI safety system may vary for different applications.) 2. The third-party validation organization shall validate the employer's certifications that the PSDI safety system is design certified and validated, that the installation meets the installation and environmental requirements specified by the manufacturer, and that the installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. C. Recertification/Revalidation 1. The PSDI safety system shall remain under certification/validation for the shorter of one year or until the system hardware is changed, modified or refurbished, or operating conditions are changed (including environmental, application or facility changes), or a failure of a critical component has occurred. 2. Annually, or after a change specified in paragraph 1., the employer shall inspect and recertify the installation as meeting the requirements set forth under B., Installation Certification/Validation. 3. The third-party validation organization, annually or after a change specified in paragraph 1., shall validate the employer's certification that the requirements of paragraph B., Installation Certification/Validation have been met. (Note: Such changes in operational conditions as die changes or press relocations not involving disassembly or revision to the safety system would not require recertification/revalidation.) Certification/Validation Requirements A. General Design Certification/Validation Requirements 1. Certification/Validation Program Requirements. (a) The design of components, subsystems, software and assemblies meets OSHA performance requirements and are ready for the intended use; and (b) The performance of combined subsystems meets OSHA's operational requirements. 2. Certification/Validation Program Level of Risk Evaluation Requirements. a. The safety system shall have the ability to sustain a single failure or a single operating error and not cause injury to personnel from point of operation hazards. Acceptable design features shall demonstrate, in the following order or precedence, that: (1) No single failure points may cause injury; or (2) Redundancy, and comparison and/or diagnostic checking, exist for the critical items that may cause injury, and the electrical, electronic, electromechanical and mechanical parts and components are selected so that they can withstand operational and external environments. The safety factor and/or derated percentage shall be specifically noted and complied with. b. The manufacturer shall design, evaluate, test and certify, and the third-party validation organization shall evaluate and validate, that the PSDI safety system meets appropriate requirements in the following areas. (1) Environmental Limits (a) Temperature (b) Relative humidity (c) Vibration (d) Fluid compatability with other materials (2) Design Limits (a) Power requirements (b) Power transient tolerances (c) Compatability of materials used (d) Material stress tolerances and limits (e) Stability to long term power fluctuations (f) Sensitivity to signal acquisition (g) Repeatability of measured parameter without inadvertent initiation of a press stroke (h) Operational life of components in cycles, hours, or both (i) Electromagnetic tolerance to: ( 1 ( 2 (3) New Design Certification/Validation. Substantial modifications would require testing as a new safety system, as deemed necessary by the validation organization. B. Additional Detailed Design Certification/Validation Requirements 1. General. 2. Reaction Times. a. Reaction time b. Full stop No movement of the slide or ram c. Function completion d. When the change of state is motion, the measurement shall be made at the completion of the motion. e. The generation of the test signal introduced into the system for measuring reaction time shall be such that the initiation time can be established with an error of less than 0.5 percent of the reaction time measured. f. The instrument used to measure reaction time shall be calibrated to be accurate to within 0.001 second. 3. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(2)(ii). The test specification and procedure shall be submitted to the validation organization for review and validation prior to the test. The validation organization representative shall witness at least one set of tests. 4. Compliance with §§ 1910.217(h)(5)(iii) and (h)(9)(v). a. Integrated test of the press fully equipped to operate in the PSDI mode shall be conducted to establish the total system reaction time. b. Brakes which are the adjustable type shall be adjusted properly before the test. 5. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(2)(iii). b. Any detected broken or unserviceable springs shall be replaced before the test is conducted. The test shall be considered successful if the stopping time remains within that which is determined by paragraph (h)(9)(v) for the safety distance setting. If the increase in press stopping time exceeds the brake monitor setting limit defined in paragraph (h)(5)(iii), the test shall be considered unsuccessful, and the cause of the excessive stopping time shall be investigated. It shall be ascertained that the springs have not been broken and that they are functioning properly. 6. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(7). b. Electrical and/or electronic cards or boards assembled with discreet components shall be considered a subsystem and shall require separate testing that the subsystems do not degrade in any of the following conditions: (1) Ambient temperature variation from −20 °C to + 50 °C. (2) Ambient relative humidity of 99 percent. (3) Vibration of 45G for one millisecond per stroke when the item is to be mounted on the press frame. (4) Electromagnetic interference at the same wavelengths used for the radiation sensing field, at the power line frequency fundamental and harmonics, and also from outogenous radiation due to system switching. (5) Electrical power supply variations of ±15 percent. c. The manufacturer shall specify the test requirements and procedures from existing consensus tests in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code. d. Tests designed by the manufacturer shall be made available upon request to the validation organization. The validation organization representative shall witness at least one set of each of these tests. 7. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(9)(iv). b. The test specifications and procedures shall be made available upon request to the validation organization. 8. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(9)(x). b. The test(s) shall document the range of object diameter sizes which will produce both single and double break conditions. c. The test(s) specifications and procedures shall be made available upon request to the validation organization. 9. Integrated Tests Certification/Validation. Sections 1910.217(h)(6) (ii); (iii); (iv); (v); (vi); (vii); (viii); (ix); (xi); (xii); (xiii); (xiv); (xv); and (xvii). b. The integrated test specifications and procedures shall be made available to the validation organization. 10. Analysis. Sections 1910.217(h)(8) (i) and (ii); (h)(2) (ii) and (iii); (h)(3)(i) (A) and (C), and (ii); (h)(5) (i), (ii) and (iii); (h)(6) (i), (iii), (iv), (vi), (vii), (viii), (ix), (x), (xi), (xiii), (xiv), (xv), (xvi), and (xvii); (h)(7) (i) and (ii); (h)(9) (iv), (v), (viii), (ix) and (x); (h)(10) (i) and (ii). 11. Types of Tests Acceptable for Certification/Validation. b. The test results shall provide the engineering data necessary to establish confidence that the hardware and software will meet specifications, the manufacturing process has adequate quality control and the data acquired was used to establish processes, procedures, and test levels supporting subsequent hardware design, production, installation and maintenance. 12. Validation for Design Certification/Validation. C. Installation Certification/Validation Requirements 1. The employer shall evaluate and test the PSDI system installation, shall submit to the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the necessary supporting documentation, and shall certify that the requirements of § 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A have been met and that the installation is proper. 2. The OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall conduct tests, and/or review and evaluate the employer's installation tests, documentation and representations. If it so determines, it shall validate the employer's certification that the PSDI safety system is in full conformance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A. D. Recertification/Revalidation Requirements 1. A PSDI safety system which has received installation certification/validation shall undergo recertification/revalidation the earlier of: a. Each time the systems hardware is significantly changed, modified, or refurbished; b. Each time the operational conditions are significantly changed (including environmental, application or facility changes, but excluding such changes as die changes or press relocations not involving revision to the safety system); c. When a failure of a significant component has occurred or a change has been made which may affect safety; or d. When one year has elapsed since the installation certification/validation or the last recertification/revalidation. 2. Conduct or recertification/revalidation. a. Demonstration of a thorough inspection of the entire press and PSDI safety system to ascertain that the installation, components and safeguarding have not been changed, modified or tampered with since the installation certification/validation or last recertification/revalidation was made. b. Demonstrations that such adjustments as may be needed (such as to the brake monitor setting) have been accomplished with proper changes made in the records and on such notices as are located on the press and safety system. c. Demonstration that review has been made of the reports covering the design certification/validation, the installation certification/validation, and all recertification/revalidations, in order to detect any degradation to an unsafe condition, and that necessary changes have been made to restore the safety system to previous certification/validation levels. 3. The OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall conduct tests, and/or review and evaluate the employer's installation, tests, documentation and representations. If it so determines, it shall revalidate the employer's recertification that the PSDI system is in full conformance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A. Appendix B to § 1910.217—Nonmandatory Guidelines for Certification/Validation of Safety Systems for Presence Sensing Device Initiation of Mechanical Power Presses Objectives This appendix provides employers, manufacturers, and their representatives, with nonmandatory guidelines for use in developing certification documents. Employers and manufacturers are encouraged to recommend other approaches if there is a potential for improving safety and reducing cost. The guidelines apply to certification/validation activity from design evaluation through the completion of the installation test and the annual recertification/revalidation tests. General Guidelines A. The certification/validation process should confirm that hazards identified by hazard analysis, (HA), failure mode effect analysis (FMEA), and other system analyses have been eliminated by design or reduced to an acceptable level through the use of appropriate design features, safety devices, warning devices, or special procedures. The certification/validation process should also confirm that residual hazards identified by operational analysis are addressed by warning, labeling safety instructions or other appropriate means. B. The objective of the certification/validation program is to demonstrate and document that the system satisfies specification and operational requirements for safe operations. Quality Control The safety attributes of a certified/validated PSDI safety system are more likely to be maintained if the quality of the system and its parts, components and subsystem is consistently controlled. Each manufacturer supplying parts, components, subsystems, and assemblies needs to maintain the quality of the product, and each employer needs to maintain the system in a non-degraded condition. Analysis Guidelines A. Certification/validation of hardware design below the system level should be accomplished by test and/or analysis. B. Analytical methods may be used in lieu of, in combination with, or in support of tests to satisfy specification requirements. C. Analyses may be used for certification/validation when existing data are available or when test is not feasible. D. Similarity analysis may be used in lieu of tests where it can be shown that the article is similar in design, manufacturing process, and quality control to another article that was previously certified/validated in accordance with equivalent or more stringent criteria. If previous design, history and application are considered to be similar, but not equal to or more exacting than earlier experiences, the additional or partial certification/validation tests should concentrate on the areas of changed or increased requirements. Analysis Reports The analysis reports should identify: (1) The basis for the analysis; (2) the hardware or software items analyzed; (3) conclusions; (4) safety factors; and (5) limit of the analysis. The assumptions made during the analysis should be clearly stated and a description of the effects of these assumptions on the conclusions and limits should be included. Certification/validation by similarity analysis reports should identify, in addition to the above, application of the part, component or subsystem for which certification/validation is being sought as well as data from previous usage establishing adequacy of the item. Similarity analysis should not be accepted when the internal and external stresses on the item being certified/validated are not defined. Usage experience should also include failure data supporting adequacy of the design. Appendix C to § 1910.217—Mandatory Requirements for OSHA Recognition of Third-Party Validation Organizations for the PSDI Standard This appendix prescribes mandatory requirements and procedures for OSHA recognition of third-party validation organizations to validate employer and manufacturer certifications that their equipment and practices meet the requirements of the PSDI standard. The scope of the appendix includes the three categories of certification/validation required by the PSDI standard: Design Certification/Validation, Installation Certification/Validation, and Annual Recertification/Revalidation. If further detailing of these provisions will assist the validation organization or OSHA in this activity, this detailing will be done through appropriate OSHA Program Directives. I. Procedure for OSHA Recognition of Validation Organizations A. Applications 1. Eligibility. b. However, in determining eligibility for a foreign-based third-party validation organization, OSHA shall take into consideration whether there is reciprocity of treatment by the foreign government after consultation with relevant U.S. government agencies. 2. Content of application. (1) Design Certification/Validation, Installation Certification/Validation, and Annual Recertification/Revalidation; (2) Design Certification/Validation only; or (3) Installation/Certification/Validation and Annual Recertification/Revalidation. b. The application shall provide information demonstrating that it and any validating laboratory utilized meet the qualifications set forth in section II of this appendix. c. The applicant shall provide information demonstrating that it and any validating laboratory utilized meet the program requirements set forth in section III of this appendix. d. The applicant shall identify the test methods it or the validating laboratory will use to test or judge the components and operations of the PSDI safety system required to be tested by the PSDI standard and appendix A, and shall specify the reasons the test methods are appropriate. e. The applicant may include whatever enclosures, attachments, or exhibits the applicant deems appropriate. The application need not be submitted on a Federal form. f. The applicant shall certify that the information submitted is accurate. 3. Filing office location. 4. Amendments and withdrawals. b. An application may be withdrawn by an applicant, without prejudice, at any time prior to the final decision by the Assistant Secretary in paragraph I.B.8.b.(4) of this appendix. B. Review and Decision Process 1. Acceptance and field inspection. 2. Requirements for recognition. 3. Preliminary approval. 4. Preliminary disapproval. 5. Revision of application. 6. Preliminary decision by Assistant Secretary. b. This preliminary decision will be sent to the applicant and subsequently published in the Federal Register. 7. Public review and comment period. Federal Register b. If the preliminary decision is in favor of recognition, a member of the public, or if the preliminary decision is against recognition, the applicant may request a public hearing by the close of the comment period, if it supplies detailed reasons and evidence challenging the basis of the Assistant Secretary's preliminary decision and justifying the need for a public hearing to bring out evidence which could not be effectively supplied through written submissions. 8. Final decision by Assistant Secretary Without hearing. b. After hearing. (1) The Assistant Secretary will issue a notice of hearing before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C. (2) After the hearing, pursuant to subpart C, the administrative law judge shall issue a decision (including reasons) based on the application, the supporting documentation, the staff recommendation, the public comments and the evidence submitted during the hearing (the record), stating whether it has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of evidence, that the applicant meets the requirements for recognition. If no exceptions are filed, this is the final decision of the Department of Labor. (3) Upon issuance of the decision, any party to the hearing may file exceptions within 20 days pursuant to subpart C. If exceptions are filed, the administrative law judge shall forward the decision, exceptions and record to the Assistant Secretary for the final decision on the application. (4) The Assistant Secretary shall review the record, the decision by the administrative law judge, and the exceptions. Based on this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision (including reasons) of the Department of Labor stating whether the applicant has demonstrated by a preponderance of evidence that it meets the requirements for recognition. b. Publication. Federal Register. C. Terms and Conditions of Recognition, Renewal and Revocation 1. The following terms and conditions shall be part of every recognition: a. The recognition of any validation organization will be evidenced by a letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter will provide the specific details of the scope of the OSHA recognition as well as any conditions imposed by OSHA, including any Federal monitoring requirements. b. The recognition of each validation organization will be valid for five years, unless terminated before or renewed after the expiration of the period. The dates of the period of recognition will be stated in the recognition letter. c. The recognized validation organization shall continue to satisfy all the requirements of this appendix and the letter of recognition during the period of recognition. 2. A recognized validation organization may change a test method of the PSDI safety system certification/validation program by notifying the Assistant Secretary of the change, certifying that the revised method will be at least as effective as the prior method, and providing the supporting data upon which its conclusions are based. 3. A recognized validation organization may renew its recognition by filing a renewal request at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of this appendix, above, not less than 180 calendar days, nor more than one year, before the expiration date of its current recognition. When a recognized validation organization has filed such a renewal request, its current recognition will not expire until a final decision has been made on the request. The renewal request will be processed in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, above, except that a reinspection is not required but may be performed by OSHA. A hearing will be granted to an objecting member of the public if evidence of failure to meet the requirements of this appendix is supplied to OSHA. 4. A recognized validation organization may apply to OSHA for an expansion of its current recognition to cover other categories of PSDI certification/validation in addition to those included in the current recognition. The application for expansion will be acted upon and processed by OSHA in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, subject to the possible reinspection exception. If the validation organization has been recognized for more than one year, meets the requirements for expansion of recognition, and there is no evidence that the recognized validation organization has not been following the requirements of this appendix and the letter of recognition, an expansion will normally be granted. A hearing will be granted to an objecting member of the public only if evidence of failure to meet the requirements of this appendix is supplied to OSHA. 5. A recognized validation organization may voluntarily terminate its recognition, either in its entirety or with respect to any area covered in its recognition, by giving written notice to OSHA at any time. The written notice shall indicate the termination date. A validation organization may not terminate its installation certification and recertification validation functions earlier than either one year from the date of the written notice, or the date on which another recognized validation organization is able to perform the validation of installation certification and recertification. 6.a. OSHA may revoke its recognition of a validation organization if its program either has failed to continue to satisfy the requirements of this appendix or its letter of recognition, has not been performing the validation functions required by the PSDI standard and appendix A, or has misrepresented itself in its applications. Before proposing to revoke recognition, the Agency will notify the recognized validation organization of the basis of the proposed revocation and will allow rebuttal or correction of the alleged deficiencies. If the deficiencies are not corrected, OSHA may revoke recognition, effective in 60 days, unless the validation organization requests a hearing within that time. b. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C. c. The parties shall be OSHA and the recognized validation organization. The decision shall be made pursuant to the procedures specified in paragraphs I.B.8.b.(2) through (4) of this appendix except that the burden of proof shall be on OSHA to demonstrate by a preponderance of the evidence that the recognition should be revoked because the validation organization either is not meeting the requirements for recognition, has not been performing the validation functions required by the PSDI standard and appendix A, or has misrepresented itself in its applications. D. Provisions of OSHA Recognition Each recognized third-party validation organization and its validating laboratories shall: 1. Allow OSHA to conduct unscheduled reviews or on-site audits of it or the validating laboratories on matters relevant to PSDI, and cooperate in the conduct of these reviews and audits; 2. Agree to terms and conditions established by OSHA in the grant of recognition on matters such as exchange of data, submission of accident reports, and assistance in studies for improving PSDI or the certification/validation process. II. Qualifications The third-party validation organization, the validating laboratory, and the employees of each shall meet the requirements set forth in this section of this appendix. A. Experience of Validation Organization 1. The third-party validation organization shall have legal authority to perform certification/validation activities. 2. The validation organization shall demonstrate competence and experience in either power press design, manufacture or use, or testing, quality control or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses and associated control systems. 3. The validation organization shall demonstrate a capability for selecting, reviewing, and/or validating appropriate standards and test methods to be used for validating the certification of PSDI safety systems, as well as for reviewing judgements on the safety of PSDI safety systems and their conformance with the requirements of this section. 4. The validating organization may utilize the competence, experience, and capability of its employees to demonstrate this competence, experience and capability. B. Independence of Validation Organization 1. The validation organization shall demonstrate that: a. It is financially capable to conduct the work; b. It is free of direct influence or control by manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, representatives of employers and employees, and employer or employee organizations; and c. Its employees are secure from discharge resulting from pressures from manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, employers or employee representatives. 2. A validation organization may be considered independent even if it has ties with manufacturers, employers or employee representatives if these ties are with at least two of these three groups; it has a board of directors (or equivalent leadership responsible for the certification/validation activities) which includes representatives of the three groups; and it has a binding commitment of funding for a period of three years or more. C. Validating Laboratory The validation organization's laboratory (which organizationally may be a part of the third-party validation organization): 1. Shall have legal authority to perform the validation of certification; 2. Shall be free of operational control and influence of manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, employers, or employee representatives that would impair its integrity of performance; and 3. Shall not engage in the design, manufacture, sale, promotion, or use of the certified equipment. D. Facilities and Equipment The validation organization's validating laboratory shall have available all testing facilities and necessary test and inspection equipment relevant to the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems, installations and operations. E. Personnel The validation organization and the validating laboratory shall be adequately staffed by personnel who are qualified by technical training and/or experience to conduct the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems. 1. The validation organization shall assign overall responsibility for the validation of PSDI certification to an Administrative Director. Minimum requirements for this position are a Bachelor's degree and five years professional experience, at least one of which shall have been in responsible charge of a function in the areas of power press design or manufacture or a broad range of power press use, or in the areas of testing, quality control, or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses or their associated control systems. 2. The validating laboratory, if a separate organization from the validation organization, shall assign technical responsibility for the validation of PSDI certification to a Technical Director. Minimum requirements for this position are a Bachelor's degree in a technical field and five years of professional experience, at least one of which shall have been in responsible charge of a function in the area of testing, quality control or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses or their associated control systems. 3. If the validation organization and the validating laboratory are the same organization, the administrative and technical responsibilities may be combined in a single position, with minimum requirements as described in E.1. and 2. for the combined position. 4. The validation organization and validating laboratory shall have adequate administrative and technical staffs to conduct the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems. F. Certification/Validation Mark or Logo 1. The validation organization or the validating laboratory shall own a registered certification/validation mark or logo. 2. The mark or logo shall be suitable for incorporation into the label required by paragraph (h)(11)(iii) of this section. III. Program Requirements A. Test and Certification/Validation Procedures 1. The validation organization and/or validating laboratory shall have established written procedures for test and certification/validation of PSDI safety systems. The procedures shall be based on pertinent OSHA standards and test methods, or other publicly available standards and test methods generally recognized as appropriate in the field, such as national consensus standards or published standards of professional societies or trade associations. 2. The written procedures for test and certification/validation of PSDI systems, and the standards and test methods on which they are based, shall be reproducible and be available to OSHA and to the public upon request. B. Test Reports 1. A test report shall be prepared for each PSDI safety system that is tested. The test report shall be signed by a technical staff representative and the Technical Director. 2. The test report shall include the following: a. Name of manufacturer and catalog or model number of each subsystem or major component. b. Identification and description of test methods or procedures used. (This may be through reference to published sources which describe the test methods or procedures used.) c. Results of all tests performed. d. All safety distance calculations. 3. A copy of the test report shall be maintained on file at the validation organization and/or validating laboratory, and shall be available to OSHA upon request. C. Certification/Validation Reports 1. A certification/validation report shall be prepared for each PSDI safety system for which the certification is validated. The certification/validation report shall be signed by the Administrative Director and the Technical Director. 2. The certification/validation report shall include the following: a. Name of manufacturer and catalog or model number of each subsystem or major component. b. Results of all tests which serve as the basis for the certification. c. All safety distance calculations. d. Statement that the safety system conforms with all requirements of the PSDI standard and appendix A. 3. A copy of the certification/validation report shall be maintained on file at the validation organization and/or validating laboratory, and shall be available to the public upon request. 4. A copy of the certification/validation report shall be submitted to OSHA within 30 days of its completion. D. Publications System The validation organization shall make available upon request a list of PSDI safety systems which have been certified/validated by the program. E. Follow-up Activities 1. The validation organization or validating laboratory shall have a follow-up system for inspecting or testing manufacturer's production of design certified/validated PSDI safety system components and subassemblies where deemed appropriate by the validation organization. 2. The validation organization shall notify the appropriate product manufacturer(s) of any reports from employers of point of operation injuries which occur while a press is operated in a PSDI mode. F. Records The validation organization or validating laboratory shall maintain a record of each certification/validation of a PSDI safety system, including manufacturer and/or employer certification documentation, test and working data, test report, certification/validation report, any follow-up inspections or testing, and reports of equipment failures, any reports of accidents involving the equipment, and any other pertinent information. These records shall be available for inspection by OSHA and OSHA State Plan offices. G. Dispute Resolution Procedures 1. The validation organization shall have a reasonable written procedure for acknowledging and processing appeals or complaints from program participants (manufacturers, producers, suppliers, vendors and employers) as well as other interested parties (employees or their representatives, safety personnel, government agencies, etc.), concerning certification or validation. 2. The validation organization may charge any complainant the reasonable charge for repeating tests needed for the resolution of disputes. Appendix D to § 1910.217—Nonmandatory Supplementary Information This appendix provides nonmandatory supplementary information and guidelines to assist in the understanding and use of 29 CFR 1910.217(h) to allow presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power presses. Although this appendix as such is not mandatory, it references sections and requirements which are made mandatory by other parts of the PSDI standard and appendices. 1. General OSHA intends that PSDI continue to be prohibited where present state-of-the-art technology will not allow it to be done safely. Only part revolution 2. Brake and Clutch Flexible steel band brakes do not possess a long-term reliability against structural failure as compared to other types of brakes, and therefore are not acceptable on presses used in the PSDI mode of operation. Fast and consistent stopping times are important to safety for the PSDI mode of operation. Consistency of braking action is enhanced by high brake torque. The requirement in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) defines a high torque capability which should ensure fast and consistent stopping times. Brake design parameters important to PSDI are high torque, low moment of inertia, low air volume (if pneumatic) mechanisms, non-interleaving engagement springs, and structural integrity which is enhanced by over-design. The requirement in paragrpah (h)(2)(iii) reduces the possibility of significantly increased stopping time if a spring breaks. As an added precaution to the requirements in paragraph (h)(2)(iii), brake adjustment locking means should be secured. Where brake springs are externally accessible, lock nuts or other means may be provided to reduce the possibility of backing off of the compression nut which holds the springs in place. 3. Pneumatic Systems Elevated clutch/brake air pressure results in longer stopping time. The requirement in paragraph (h)(3)(i)( C 4. Flywheels and Bearings Lubrication of bearings is considered the single greatest deterrent to their failure. The manufacturer's recommended procedures for maintenance and inspection should be closely followed. 5. Brake Monitoring The approval of brake monitor adjustments, as required in paragraph (h)(5)(ii), is not considered a recertification, Use of a brake monitor does not eliminate the need for periodic brake inspection and maintenance to reduce the possibility of catastrophic failures. 6. Cycle Control and Control Systems The PSDI set-up/reset means required by paragraph (h)(6)(iv) may be initiated by the actuation of a special momentary pushbutton or by the actuation of a special momentary pushbutton and the initiation of a first stroke with two hand controls. It would normally be preferable to limit the adjustment of the time required in paragraph (h)(6)(vi) to a maximum of 15 seconds. However, where an operator must do many operations outside the press, such as lubricating, trimming, deburring, etc., a longer interval up to 30 seconds is permitted. When a press is equipped for PSDI operation, it is recommended that the presence sensing device be active as a guarding device in other production modes. This should enhance the reliability of the device and ensure that it remains operable. An acceptable method for interlocking supplemental guards as required by paragraph (h)(6)(xiii) would be to incorporate the supplemental guard and the PSDI presence sensing device into a hinged arrangement in which the alignment of the presence sensing device serves, in effect, as the interlock. If the supplemental guards are moved, the presence sensing device would become misaligned and the press control would be deactivated. No extra microswitches or interlocking sensors would be required. Paragraph (h)(6)(xv) of the standard requires that the control system have provisions for an “inch” operating means; that die-setting not be done in the PSDI mode; and that production not be done in the “inch” mode. It should be noted that the sensing device would be by-passed in the “inch” mode. For that reason, the prohibitions against die-setting in the PSDI mode, and against production in the “inch” mode are cited to emphasize that “inch” operation is of reduced safety and is not compatible with PSDI or other production modes. 7. Environmental Requirements It is the intent of paragraph (h)(7) that control components be provided with inherent design protection against operating stresses and environmental factors affecting safety and reliability. 8. Safety system The safety system provision continues the concept of paragraph (b)(13) that the probability of two independent failures in the length of time required to make one press cycle is so remote as to be a negligible risk factor in the total array of equipment and human factors. The emphasis is on an integrated total system including all elements affecting point of operation safety. It should be noted that this does not require redundancy for press components such as structural elements, clutch/brake mechanisms, plates, etc., for which adequate reliability may be achieved by proper design, maintenance, and inspection. 9. Safeguarding the Point of Operation The intent of paragraph (h)(9)(iii) is to prohibit use of mirrors to “bend” a single light curtain sensing field around corners to cover more than one side of a press. This prohibition is needed to increase the reliability of the presence sensing device in initiating a stroke only when the desired work motion has been completed. Object sensitivity In deriving the safety distance required in paragraph (h)(9)(v), all stopping time measurements should be made with clutch/brake air pressure regulated to the press manufacturer's recommended value for full clutch torque capability. The stopping time measurements should be made with the heaviest upper die that is planned for use in the press. If the press has a slide counterbalance system, it is important that the counterbalance be adjusted correctly for upper die weight according to the manufacturer's instructions. While the brake monitor setting is based on the stopping time it actually measures, i.e., the normal stopping time at the top of the stroke, it is important that the safety distance be computed from the longest stopping time measured at any of the indicated three downstroke stopping positions listed in the explanation of Ts. The use in the formula of twice the stopping time increase, Tm, allowed by the brake monitor for brake wear allows for greater increases in the downstroke stopping time than occur in normal stopping time at the top of the stroke. 10. Inspection and Maintenance. [Reserved] 11. Safety System Certification/Validation Mandatory requirements for certification/validation of the PSDI safety system are provided in appendix A and appendix C to this standard. Nonmandatory supplementary information and guidelines relating to certification/validation of the PSDI safety system are provided to appendix B to this standard. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39 FR 41846, Dec. 3, 1974; 40 FR 3982, Jan. 27, 1975; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 45 FR 8594, Feb. 8, 1980; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 8353, 8358 Mar. 14, 1988; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 46949, Aug. 7, 2012; 78 FR 69550, Nov. 20, 2013] § 1910.218 Forging machines. (a) General requirements Use of lead. (i) Thermostatic control of heating elements shall be provided to maintain proper melting temperature and prevent overheating. (ii) Fixed or permanent lead pot installations shall be exhausted. (iii) Portable units shall be used only in areas where good, general room ventilation is provided. (iv) Personal protective equipment (gloves, goggles, aprons, and other items) shall be worn. (v) A covered container shall be provided to store dross skimmings. (vi) Equipment shall be kept clean, particularly from accumulations of yellow lead oxide. (2) Inspection and maintenance. (i) Establishing periodic and regular maintenance safety checks and keeping certification records of these inspections which include the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, for the forging machine which was inspected. (ii) Scheduling and recording the inspection of guards and point of operation protection devices at frequent and regular intervals. Recording of inspections shall be in the form of a certification record which includes the date the inspection was performed, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, of the equipment inspected. (iii) Training personnel for the proper inspection and maintenance of forging machinery and equipment. (iv) All overhead parts shall be fastened or protected in such a manner that they will not fly off or fall in event of failure. (3) Hammers and presses. (ii) All presses shall be installed in such a manner that they remain where they are positioned or they are anchored to foundations sufficient to support them according to applicable engineering standards. Table O-11—Strength and Dimensions for Wood Ram Props Size of timber, inches 1 Square inches in cross section Minimum allowable crushing strength parallel to grain, p.s.i. 2 Maximum static load within short column range 3 Safety factor Maximum recommended weight of forging hammer for timber used Maximum allowable length of timber, inches 4 × 4 16 5,000 80,000 10 8,000 44 6 × 6 36 5,000 180,000 10 18,000 66 8 × 8 64 5,000 320,000 10 32,000 88 10 × 10 100 5,000 500,000 10 50,000 100 12 × 12 144 5,000 720,000 10 72,000 132 1 2 3 L/d L d (iii) Means shall be provided for disconnecting the power to the machine and for locking out or rendering cycling controls inoperable. (iv) The ram shall be blocked when dies are being changed or other work is being done on the hammer. Blocks or wedges shall be made of material the strength and construction of which should meet or exceed the specifications and dimensions shown in Table O-11. (v) Tongs shall be of sufficient length to clear the body of the worker in case of kickback, and shall not have sharp handle ends. (vi) Oil swabs, or scale removers, or other devices to remove scale shall be provided. These devices shall be long enough to enable a man to reach the full length of the die without placing his hand or arm between the dies. (vii) Material handling equipment shall be of adequate strength, size, and dimension to handle diesetting operations safely. (viii) A scale guard of substantial construction shall be provided at the back of every hammer, so arranged as to stop flying scale. (ix) A scale guard of substantial construction shall be provided at the back of every press, so arranged as to stop flying scale. (b) Hammers, general Keys. (2) Foot operated devices. (c) Presses. (d) Power-driven hammers Safety cylinder head. (2) Shutoff valve. (3) Cylinder draining. (4) Pressure pipes. (e) Gravity hammers Air-lift hammers. (ii) Air-lift hammers shall have an air shutoff valve as required in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. (iii) Air-lift hammers shall be provided with two drain cocks: one on main head cylinder, and one on clamp cylinder. (iv) Air piping shall conform to the specifications of the ANSI B31.1.0-1967, Power Piping with Addenda issued before April 28, 1971, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (2) Board drophammers. (ii) All major assemblies and fittings which can loosen and fall shall be properly secured in place. (f) Forging presses Mechanical forging presses. (i) The power to the press shall be locked out. (ii) The flywheel shall be at rest. (iii) The ram shall be blocked with a material the strength of which shall meet or exceed the specifications or dimensions shown in Table O-11. (2) Hydraulic forging presses. (i) The hydraulic pumps and power apparatus shall be locked out. (ii) The ram shall be blocked with a material the strength of which shall meet or exceed the specifications or dimensions shown in Table O-11. (g) Trimming presses Hot trimming presses. (2) Cold trimming presses. (h) Upsetters General requirements. (2) Lockouts. (3) Manually operated controls. (4) Tongs. (5) Changing dies. (i) Other forging equipment Boltheading. (2) Rivet making. (j) Other forge facility equipment Billet shears. (2) Saws. (3) Conveyors. (4) Shot blast. (5) Grinding. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.219 Mechanical power-transmission apparatus. (a) General requirements. 1/2 13/32 (2) Vertical and inclined belts (paragraphs (e) (3) and (4) of this section) if not more than two and one-half (2 1/2 (3) For the Textile Industry, because of the presence of excessive deposits of lint, which constitute a serious fire hazard, the sides and face sections only of nip-point belt and pulley guards are required, provided the guard shall extend at least six (6) inches beyond the rim of the pulley on the in-running and off-running sides of the belt and at least two (2) inches away from the rim and face of the pulley in all other directions. (4) This section covers the principal features with which power transmission safeguards shall comply. (b) Prime-mover guards Flywheels. (i) With an enclosure of sheet, perforated, or expanded metal, or woven wire; (ii) With guard rails placed not less than fifteen (15) inches nor more than twenty (20) inches from rim. When flywheel extends into pit or is within 12 inches of floor, a standard toeboard shall also be provided; (iii) When the upper rim of flywheel protrudes through a working floor, it shall be entirely enclosed or surrounded by a guardrail and toeboard. (iv) For flywheels with smooth rims five (5) feet or less in diameter, where the preceding methods cannot be applied, the following may be used: A disk attached to the flywheel in such manner as to cover the spokes of the wheel on the exposed side and present a smooth surface and edge, at the same time providing means for periodic inspection. An open space, not exceeding four (4) inches in width, may be left between the outside edge of the disk and the rim of the wheel if desired, to facilitate turning the wheel over. Where a disk is used, the keys or other dangerous projections not covered by disk shall be cut off or covered. This subdivision does not apply to flywheels with solid web centers. (v) Adjustable guard to be used for starting engine or for running adjustment may be provided at the flywheel of gas or oil engines. A slot opening for jack bar will be permitted. (vi) Wherever flywheels are above working areas, guards shall be installed having sufficient strength to hold the weight of the flywheel in the event of a shaft or wheel mounting failure. (2) Cranks and connecting rods. (3) Tail rods or extension piston rods. (c) Shafting Installation. (ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, particularly inclined idler shafts, shall be securely held in position against endwise thrust. (2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (ii) Shafting under bench machines shall be enclosed by a stationary casing, or by a trough at sides and top or sides and bottom, as location requires. The sides of the trough shall come within at least six (6) inches of the underside of table, or if shafting is located near floor within six (6) inches of floor. In every case the sides of trough shall extend at least two (2) inches beyond the shafting or protuberance. (3) Guarding vertical and inclined shafting. (4) Projecting shaft ends. (ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up or covered. (5) Power-transmission apparatus located in basements. (i) The basement, tower, or room occupied by transmission equipment is locked against unauthorized entrance. (ii) The vertical clearance in passageways between the floor and power transmission beams, ceiling, or any other objects, is not less than five feet six inches (5 ft. 6 in.). (iii) The intensity of illumination conforms to the requirements of ANSI A11.1-1965 (R-1970), which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (iv) [Reserved] (v) The route followed by the oiler is protected in such manner as to prevent accident. (d) Pulleys Guarding. (2) Location of pulleys. (ii) [Reserved] (3) Broken pulleys. (4) Pulley speeds. (e) Belt, rope, and chain drives Horizontal belts and ropes. (ii) In powerplants or power-development rooms, a guardrail may be used in lieu of the guard required by subdivision (i) of this subparagraph. (2) Overhead horizontal belts. (ii) Horizontal overhead belts more than seven (7) feet above floor or platform shall be guarded for their entire length under the following conditions: ( a ( b ( c (iii) Where the upper and lower runs of horizontal belts are so located that passage of persons between them would be possible, the passage shall be either: ( a ( b (iv) Overhead chain and link belt drives are governed by the same rules as overhead horizontal belts and shall be guarded in the same manner as belts. (3) Vertical and inclined belts. (ii) All guards for inclined belts shall be arranged in such a manner that a minimum clearance of seven (7) feet is maintained between belt and floor at any point outside of guard. (4) Vertical belts. a c (5) Cone-pulley belts. (ii) If the belt is of the endless type or laced with rawhide laces, and a belt shifter is not desired, the belt will be considered guarded if the nip point of the belt and pulley is protected by a nip point guard located in front of the cone extending at least to the top of the largest step of the cone, and formed to show the contour of the cone in order to give the nip point of the belt and pulley the maximum protection. (iii) If the cone is located less than 3 feet from the floor or working platform, the cone pulley and belt shall be guarded to a height of 3 feet regardless of whether the belt is endless or laced with rawhide. (6) Belt tighteners. (ii) Where suspended counterweights are used and not guarded by location, they shall be so encased as to prevent accident. (f) Gears, sprockets, and chains Gears. (i) By a complete enclosure; or (ii) By a standard guard as described in paragraph (o) of this section, at least seven (7) feet high extending six (6) inches above the mesh point of the gears; or (iii) By a band guard covering the face of gear and having flanges extended inward beyond the root of the teeth on the exposed side or sides. Where any portion of the train of gears guarded by a band guard is less than six (6) feet from the floor a disk guard or a complete enclosure to the height of six (6) feet shall be required. (2) Hand-operated gears. (3) Sprockets and chains. (4) Openings for oiling. (g) Guarding friction drives. (h) Keys, setscrews, and other projections. (2) It is recommended, however, that no projecting setscrews or oilcups be used in any revolving pulley or part of machinery. (i) Collars and couplings Collars. (2) Couplings. (j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. (k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff couplings, and clutch pulleys Guards. (2) Engine rooms. (l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers, poles, perches, and fasteners Belt shifters. (ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles shall be rounded and be located as far as possible from danger of accidental contact, but within easy reach of the operator. Where belt shifters are not directly located over a machine or bench, the handles shall be cut off six feet six inches (6 ft. 6 in.) above floor level. (2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. (3) Belt perches. (4) Belt fasteners. (m) Standard guards—general requirements Materials. (ii) All metal should be free from burrs and sharp edges. (2) Methods of manufacture. (ii) [Reserved] (n) [Reserved] (o) Approved materials Minimum requirements. (i) [Reserved] ( a ( b (ii) [Reserved] (2) Wood guards. (ii) [Reserved] (3) Guards for horizontal overhead belts. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be provided for the ceiling rafters or overhead floor beams, where such is necessary, to sustain safely the weight and stress likely to be imposed by the guard. The interior surface of all guards, by which is meant the surface of the guard with which a belt will come in contact, shall be smooth and free from all projections of any character, except where construction demands it; protruding shallow roundhead rivets may be used. Overhead belt guards shall be at least one-quarter wider than belt which they protect, except that this clearance need not in any case exceed six (6) inches on each side. Overhead rope drive and block and roller-chain-drive guards shall be not less than six (6) inches wider than the drive on each side. In overhead silent chain-drive guards where the chain is held from lateral displacement on the sprockets, the side clearances required on drives of twenty (20) inch centers or under shall be not less than one-fourth inch from the nearest moving chain part, and on drives of over twenty (20) inch centers a minimum of one-half inch from the nearest moving chain part. (4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope and chain drives. (5) Guardrails and toeboards. (ii) Posts shall be not more than eight (8) feet apart; they are to be permanent and substantial, smooth, and free from protruding nails, bolts, and splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall be one and one-fourth (1 1/4 1/2 1/2 3/16 (iii) Toeboards shall be four (4) inches or more in height, of wood, metal, or of metal grill not exceeding one (1) inch mesh. (p) Care of equipment General. (2) Shafting. (ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts, flammable vapors or flammable liquids exist, the hazard of static sparks from shafting shall be carefully considered. (3) Bearings. (4) Hangers. (5) Pulleys. (ii) [Reserved] (6) Care of belts. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Inspection shall be made of belts, lacings, and fasteners and such equipment kept in good repair. (7) Lubrication. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760; Nov. 7, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004] Subpart P—Hand and Portable Powered Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), or 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911. Section 1910.243 also issued under 29 CFR part 1910. § 1910.241 Definitions. As used in this subpart: (a) Explosive-actuated fastening tool terms Hammer-operated piston tool low-velocity type. (2) High-velocity tool. (3) Low-velocity piston tool. (4) Stud, pin, or fastener. (5) To chamber. (6) Explosive powerload, also known as load. (7) Tool. (8) Protective shield or guard. (b) Abrasive wheel terms Mounted wheels. (2) Tuck pointing. (3) Tuck pointing wheels. Limitation: c. (4) Portable grinding. (5) Organic bonded wheels. (6) Safety guard. (7) Reinforced wheels. reinforced reinforced (8) Type 11 flaring cup wheels. Type 11 Flaring Cup Wheels Figure P-1 Type 11—Flaring-cup Wheel Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered outward from the back. Wall thickness at the back is normally greater than at the grinding face (W). Limitation: (9) Type 6 straight cup wheels. Limitation: Type 6 Straight Cup Wheels Figure P-2 Type 6—Straight Cup Wheel Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole with one side straight or flat and the opposite side recessed. This type, however, differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the wall of the abrasive created by the difference between the diameter of the recess and the outside diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension “W” takes precedence over the diameter of the recess as an essential intermediate dimension to describe this shape type. (10) Type 1 straight wheels. Limitation: Type 1 Straight Wheels Figure P-3 Type 1—Straight Wheel Peripheral grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole. (c) [Reserved] (d) Jack terms Jack. Note: Jacks may be of the following types: Lever and ratchet, screw and hydraulic. (2) Rating. Note: To raise the rated load of a jack, the point of application of the load, the applied force, and the length of lever arm should be those designated by the manufacturer for the particular jack considered. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978] § 1910.242 Hand and portable powered tools and equipment, general. (a) General requirements. (b) Compressed air used for cleaning. § 1910.243 Guarding of portable powered tools. (a) Portable powered tool Portable circular saws. (ii) Paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section does not apply to circular saws used in the meat industry for meat cutting purposes. (2) Switches and controls. (ii) All hand-held powered drills, tappers, fastener drivers, horizontal, vertical, and angle grinders with wheels greater than 2 inches in diameter, disc sanders with discs greater than 2 inches in diameter, belt sanders, reciprocating saws, saber, scroll, and jig saws with blade shanks greater than a nominal one-fourth inch, and other similarly operating powered tools shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch or control, and may have a lock-on control provided that turnoff can be accomplished by a single motion of the same finger or fingers that turn it on. (iii)( a ( b ( c ( d Nominal (iv) The operating control on hand-held power tools shall be so located as to minimize the possibility of its accidental operation, if such accidental operation would constitute a hazard to employees. (v) This subparagraph does not apply to concrete vibrators, concrete breakers, powered tampers, jack hammers, rock drills, garden appliances, household and kitchen appliances, personal care appliances, medical or dental equipment, or to fixed machinery. (3) Portable belt sanding machines. (4) Cracked saws. (5) Grounding. (b) Pneumatic powered tools and hose Tool retainer. (2) Airhose. (c) Portable abrasive wheels General requirements. (i) Exceptions. ( a ( b ( c (ii)( a ( b Exception. ( c Exception. (2) Cup wheels. (i) Safety guards as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section; or, (ii) Special “revolving cup guards” which mount behind the wheel and turn with it. They shall be made of steel or other material with adequate strength and shall enclose the wheel sides upward from the back for one-third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features shall conform with all regulations. (See paragraph (c)(5) of this section.) It is necessary to maintain clearance between the wheel side and the guard. The clearance shall not exceed one-sixteenth inch; or, (iii) Some other form of guard that will insure as good protection as that which would be provided by the guards specified in paragraph (c)(1) (i) or (ii) of this subparagraph. (3) Vertical portable grinders. Figure No. P-4 (4) Other portable grinders. Figure No. P-5 Figure No. P-6 (5) Mounting and inspection of abrasive wheels. (ii) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and remain free under all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance between the wheel hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or adaptors) is essential to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and spindle expansion. To accomplish this, the machine spindle shall be made to nominal (standard) size plus zero minus .002 inch, and the wheel hole shall be made suitably oversize to assure safety clearance under the conditions of operating heat and pressure. (iii) All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters, and flangers shall be flat and free of foreign matter. (iv) When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it shall not exceed the width of the wheel and shall not contact the flanges. (v) Requirements for the use of flanges and blotters, see subpart O, § 1910.215(c). (6) Excluded machinery. (d) Explosive actuated fastening tools General requirements. (ii) Operators and assistants using tools shall be safeguarded by means of eye protection. Head and face protection shall be used, as required by working conditions, as set forth in subpart I. (2) Inspection, maintenance, and tool handling High-velocity tools. a h ( a 1/2 ( b ( c ( d 1 ( 2 ( e ( f ( g ( h (ii) Tools of the low-velocity-piston type shall have the characteristics outlined in paragraphs (d)(2)(ii) ( a e ( a ( b 1 ( 2 ( c ( d ( e (iii) Tools of the hammer-operated piston tools—low-velocity type shall have the characteristics outlined in paragraphs (d)(2)(iii) ( a e ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (3) Requirements for loads and fasteners. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) No load (cased or caseless) shall be used if it will accurately chamber in any existing approved commercially available low-velocity piston tool or hammer operated piston tool—low-velocity type and will cause a fastener to have a mean velocity in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel. No individual test firing of a series shall exceed 300 feet per second by more than 8 percent. (iv) Fasteners used in tools shall be only those specifically manufactured for use in such tools. (4) Operating requirements. (ii) When a tool develops a defect during use, the operator shall immediately cease to use it, until it is properly repaired. (iii) Tools shall not be loaded until just prior to the intended firing time. Neither loaded nor empty tools are to be pointed at any workmen. (iv) No tools shall be loaded unless being prepared for immediate use, nor shall an unattended tool be left loaded. (v) In case of a misfire, the operator shall hold the tool in the operating position for at least 30 seconds. He shall then try to operate the tool a second time. He shall wait another 30 seconds, holding the tool in the operating position; then he shall proceed to remove the explosive load in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. (vi) A tool shall never be left unattended in a place where it would be available to unauthorized persons. (vii) Fasteners shall not be driven into very hard or brittle materials including, but not limited to, cast iron, glazed tile, surface-hardened steel, glass block, live rock, face brick, or hollow tile. (viii) Driving into materials easily penetrated shall be avoided unless such materials are backed by a substance that will prevent the pin or fastener from passing completely through and creating a flying-missile hazard on the other side. (ix)( a ( b 7/32 (x) Fasteners shall not be driven through existing holes unless a positive guide is used to secure accurate alignment. (xi) No fastener shall be driven into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory fastening. (xii) Tools shall not be used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere. (xiii) All tools shall be used with the correct shield, guard, or attachment recommended by the manufacturer. (xiv) Any tool found not in proper working order shall be immediately removed from service. The tool shall be inspected at regular intervals and shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. (e) Power lawnmowers General requirements. (ii) All power-driven chains, belts, and gears shall be so positioned or otherwise guarded to prevent the operator's accidental contact therewith, during normal starting, mounting, and operation of the machine. (iii) A shutoff device shall be provided to stop operation of the motor or engine. This device shall require manual and intentional reactivation to restart the motor or engine. (iv) All positions of the operating controls shall be clearly identified. (v) The words, “Caution. Be sure the operating control(s) is in neutral before starting the engine,” or similar wording shall be clearly visible at an engine starting control point on self-propelled mowers. (2) Walk-behind and riding rotary mowers. (ii) Guards which must be removed to install a catcher assembly shall comply with the following: ( a ( b ( c ( d (iii) Openings in the blade enclosure, intended for the discharge of grass, shall be limited to a maximum vertical angle of the opening of 30°. Measurements shall be taken from the lowest blade position. (iv) The total effective opening area of the grass discharge opening(s) shall not exceed 1,000 square degrees on units having a width of cut less than 27 1/2 1/2 (v) The word “Caution.” or stronger wording, shall be placed on the mower at or near each discharge opening. (vi) [Reserved] (vii) Blade(s) shall stop rotating from the manufacturer's specified maximum speed within 15 seconds after declutching, or shutting off power. (viii) In a multipiece blade, the means of fastening the cutting members to the body of the blade or disc shall be so designed that they will not become worn to a hazardous condition before the cutting members themselves are worn beyond use. (ix) The maximum tip speed of any blade shall be 19,000 feet per minute. (3) Walk-behind rotary mowers. (ii) There shall be one of the following at all openings in the blade enclosure intended for the discharge of grass: ( a ( b (iii) The highest point(s) of the front of the blade enclosure, except discharge openings, shall be such that any line extending a maximum of 15° downward from the horizontal toward the blade shaft axis (axes) shall not intersect the horizontal plane within the blade tip circle. The highest point(s) on the blade enclosure front, except discharge-openings, shall not exceed 1 1/4 (iv) The mower handle shall be fastened to the mower so as to prevent loss of control by unintentional uncoupling while in operation. (v) A positive upstop or latch shall be provided for the mower handle in the normal operating position(s). The upstop shall not be subject to unintentional disengagement during normal operation of the mower. The upstop or latch shall not allow the center or the handle grips to come closer than 17 inches horizontally behind the closest path of the mower blade(s) unless manually disengaged. (vi) A swing-over handle, which complies with the above requirements, will be permitted. (vii) Wheel drive disengaging controls, except deadman controls, shall move opposite to the direction of the vehicle motion in order to disengage the drive. Deadman controls shall automatically interrupt power to a drive when the operator's actuating force is removed, and may operate in any direction to disengage the drive. (4) Riding rotary mowers. 1/4 (ii) Opening(s) shall be placed so that grass or debris will not discharge directly toward any part of an operator seated in a normal operator position. (iii) There shall be one of the following at all openings in the blade enclosure intended for the discharge of grass: ( a ( b (iv) Mowers shall be provided with stops to prevent jackknifing or locking of the steering mechanism. (v) Vehicle stopping means shall be provided. (vi) Hand-operated wheel drive disengaging controls shall move opposite to the direction of vehicle motion in order to disengage the drive. Foot-operated wheel drive disengaging controls shall be depressed to disengage the drive. Deadman controls, both hand and foot operated, shall automatically interrupt power to a drive when the operator's actuating force is removed, and may operate in any direction to disengage the drive. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 50 FR 4649, Feb. 1, 1985; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007] § 1910.244 Other portable tools and equipment. (a) Jacks Loading and marking. (ii) The rated load shall be legibly and permanently marked in a prominent location on the jack by casting, stamping, or other suitable means. (2) Operation and maintenance. (ii) The operator shall watch the stop indicator, which shall be kept clean, in order to determine the limit of travel. The indicated limit shall not be overrun. (iii) After the load has been raised, it shall be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise secured at once. (iv) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freezing temperatures shall be supplied with an adequate antifreeze liquid. (v) All jacks shall be properly lubricated at regular intervals. (vi) Each jack shall be thoroughly inspected at times which depend upon the service conditions. Inspections shall be not less frequent than the following: ( a ( b ( c (vii) Repair or replacement parts shall be examined for possible defects. (viii) Jacks which are out of order shall be tagged accordingly, and shall not be used until repairs are made. (b) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984] Subpart Q—Welding, Cutting and Brazing Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labor's Orders Nos. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), or 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Source: 55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, unless otherwise noted. § 1910.251 Definitions. As used in this subpart: (a) Welder welding operator (b) Approved [55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007] § 1910.252 General requirements. (a) Fire prevention and protection Basic precautions. (i) Fire hazards. (ii) Guards. (iii) Restrictions. (2) Special precautions. (i) Combustible material. (ii) Fire extinquishers. (iii) Fire watch. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (B) Fire watchers shall have fire extinguishing equipment readily available and be trained in its use. They shall be familiar with facilities for sounding an alarm in the event of a fire. They shall watch for fires in all exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when obviously within the capacity of the equipment available, or otherwise sound the alarm. A fire watch shall be maintained for at least a half hour after completion of welding or cutting operations to detect and extinguish possible smoldering fires. (iv) Authorization. (v) Floors. (vi) Prohibited areas. (A) In areas not authorized by management. (B) In sprinklered buildings while such protection is impaired. (C) In the presence of explosive atmospheres (mixtures of flammable gases, vapors, liquids, or dusts with air), or explosive atmospheres that may develop inside uncleaned or improperly prepared tanks or equipment which have previously contained such materials, or that may develop in areas with an accumulation of combustible dusts. (D) In areas near the storage of large quantities of exposed, readily ignitible materials such as bulk sulfur, baled paper, or cotton. (vii) Relocation of combustibles. (viii) Ducts. (ix) Combustible walls. (x) Noncombustible walls. (xi) Combustible cover. (xii) Pipes. (xiii) Management. (A) Based on fire potentials of plant facilities, establish areas for cutting and welding, and establish procedures for cutting and welding, in other areas. (B) Designate an individual responsible for authorizing cutting and welding operations in areas not specifically designed for such processes. (C) Insist that cutters or welders and their supervisors are suitably trained in the safe operation of their equipment and the safe use of the process. (D) Advise all contractors about flammable materials or hazardous conditions of which they may not be aware. (xiv) Supervisor. (A) Shall be responsible for the safe handling of the cutting or welding equipment and the safe use of the cutting or welding process. (B) Shall determine the combustible materials and hazardous areas present or likely to be present in the work location. (C) Shall protect combustibles from ignition by the following: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (D) Shall secure authorization for the cutting or welding operations from the designated management representative. (E) Shall determine that the cutter or welder secures his approval that conditions are safe before going ahead. (F) Shall determine that fire protection and extinguishing equipment are properly located at the site. (G) Where fire watches are required, he shall see that they are available at the site. (xv) Fire prevention precautions. (3) Welding or cutting containers Used containers. (ii) Venting and purging. (4) Confined spaces Accidental contact. (ii) Torch valve. (b) Protection of personnel General Railing. (ii) Welding cable. (2) Eye protection Selection. (B) Goggles or other suitable eye protection shall be used during all gas welding or oxygen cutting operations. Spectacles without side shields, with suitable filter lenses are permitted for use during gas welding operations on light work, for torch brazing or for inspection. (C) All operators and attendants of resistance welding or resistance brazing equipment shall use transparent face shields or goggles, depending on the particular job, to protect their faces or eyes, as required. (D) Eye protection in the form of suitable goggles shall be provided where needed for brazing operations not covered in paragraphs (b)(2)(i)(A) through (b)(2)(i)(C) of this section. (ii) Specifications for protectors. (B) Helmets and hand shields shall be arranged to protect the face, neck and ears from direct radiant energy from the arc. (C) Helmets shall be provided with filter plates and cover plates designed for easy removal. (D) All parts shall be constructed of a material which will not readily corrode or discolor the skin. (E) Goggles shall be ventilated to prevent fogging of the lenses as much as practicable. (F) All glass for lenses shall be tempered, substantially free from striae, air bubbles, waves and other flaws. Except when a lens is ground to provide proper optical correction for defective vision, the front and rear surfaces of lenses and windows shall be smooth and parallel. (G) Lenses shall bear some permanent distinctive marking by which the source and shade may be readily identified. (H) The following is a guide for the selection of the proper shade numbers. These recommendations may be varied to suit the individual's needs. Welding operation Shade No. Shielded metal-arc welding— 1 16 3 32 1 8 5 32 10 Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous)— 1 16 3 32 1 8 5 32 11 Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous)— 1 16 3 32 1 8 5 32 12 Shielded metal-arc welding: 3 16 7 32 1 4 12 5 16 3 8 14 Atomic hydrogen welding 10-14 Carbon arc welding 14 Soldering 2 Torch brazing 3 or 4 Light cutting, up to 1 inch 3 or 4 Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches 4 or 5 Heavy cutting, 6 inches and over 5 or 6 Gas welding (light) up to 1 8 4 or 5 Gas welding (medium) 1 8 1 2 5 or 6 Gas welding (heavy) 1 2 6 or 8 Note: In gas welding or oxygen cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter or lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the operation. (I) Filter lenses must meet the test for transmission of radiant energy prescribed by any of the consensus standards listed in 29 CFR 1910.133(b)(1). (iii) Protection from arc welding rays. (3) Protective clothing—General requirements. (4) Work in confined spaces General. (ii) Ventilation. (iii) Securing cylinders and machinery. (iv) Lifelines. (v) Electrode removal. (vi) Gas cylinder shutoff. (vii) Warning sign. (c) Health protection and ventilation General Contamination. (A) Dimensions of space in which welding is to be done (with special regard to height of ceiling). (B) Number of welders. (C) Possible evolution of hazardous fumes, gases, or dust according to the metals involved. (ii) Screens. (iii) Maximum allowable concentration. (iv) Hazard communication. (v) Additional considerations for hazard communication in welding, cutting, and brazing. (B) In addition to any requirements imposed by § 1910.1200, all filler metals and fusible granular materials shall carry the following notice, as a minimum, on tags, boxes, or other containers: Do not use in areas without adequate ventilation. See (C) Where brazing (welding) filler metals contain cadmium in significant amounts, the labels shall indicate the hazards associated with cadmium including cancer, lung and kidney effects, and acute toxicity effects. (D) Where brazing and gas welding fluxes contain fluorine compounds, the labels shall indicate the hazards associated with fluorine compounds including eye and respiratory tract effects. (vi) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on labels in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraph (c)(1)(v) of this section: (A) All filler metals and fusible granular materials shall carry the following notice, as a minimum, on tags, boxes, or other containers: CAUTION Welding may produce fumes and gases hazardous to health. Avoid breathing these fumes and gases. Use adequate ventilation. See (B) Brazing (welding) filler metals containing cadmium in significant amounts shall carry the following notice on tags, boxes, or other containers: WARNING CONTAINS CADMIUM—POISONOUS FUMES MAY BE FORMED ON HEATING Do not breathe fumes. Use only with adequate ventilation such as fume collectors, exhaust ventilators, or air-supplied respirators. See (C) Brazing and gas welding fluxes containing fluorine compounds shall have a cautionary wording to indicate that they contain fluorine compounds. One such cautionary wording recommended by the American Welding Society for brazing and gas welding fluxes reads as follows: CAUTION CONTAINS FLUORIDES This flux when heated gives off fumes that may irritate eyes, nose and throat. 1. Avoid fumes—use only in well-ventilated spaces. 2. Avoid contact of flux with eyes or skin. 3. Do not take internally. (2) Ventilation for general welding and cutting General. (A) In a space of less than 10,000 cubic feet (284 m 3 (B) In a room having a ceiling height of less than 16 feet (5 m). (C) In confined spaces or where the welding space contains partitions, balconies, or other structural barriers to the extent that they significantly obstruct cross ventilation. (ii) Minimum rate. 3 (3) Local exhaust hoods and booths. (i) Hoods. Welding zone Minimum air flow 1 Duct diameter, inches 2 4 to 6 inches from arc or torch 150 3 6 to 8 inches from arc or torch 275 3 1 2 8 to 10 inches from arc or torch 425 4 1 2 10 to 12 inches from arc or torch 600 5 1 2 1 2 (ii) Fixed enclosure. (4) Ventilation in confined spaces Air replacement. (ii) Airline respirators. (iii) Self-contained units. (iv) Outside helper. (v) Oxygen for ventilation. (5) Fluorine compounds General. (ii) Maximum allowable concentration. (6) Zinc Confined spaces. (ii) Indoors. (7) Lead Confined spaces. (ii) Indoors. (iii) Local ventilation. (8) Beryllium. (9) Cadmium General. (ii) Confined space. (10) Mercury. (11) Cleaning compounds Manufacturer's instructions. (ii) Degreasing. (12) Cutting of stainless steels. (13) First-aid equipment. (d) Industrial applications Transmission pipeline General. (ii) Field shop operations. (iii) Electric shock. (iv) Pressure testing. (v) Construction standards. (vi) Flammable substance lines. (vii) X-ray inspection. (2) Mechanical piping systems General. (ii) X-ray inspection. [55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998; 74 FR 46357, Sept. 9, 2009; 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1910.253 Oxygen-fuel gas welding and cutting. (a) General requirements Flammable mixture. (2) Maximum pressure. (3) Apparatus. (4) Personnel. (b) Cylinders and containers Approval and marking. (ii) Compressed gas cylinders shall be legibly marked, for the purpose of identifying the gas content, with either the chemical or the trade name of the gas. Such marking shall be by means of stenciling, stamping, or labeling, and shall not be readily removable. Whenever practical, the marking shall be located on the shoulder of the cylinder. (iii) Compressed gas cylinders shall be equipped with connections complying with the American National Standard Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, ANSI B57.1—1965, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (iv) All cylinders with a water weight capacity of over 30 pounds (13.6 kg) shall be equipped with means of connecting a valve protection cap or with a collar or recess to protect the valve. (2) Storage of cylinders—general. (ii) Inside of buildings, cylinders shall be stored in a well-protected, well-ventilated, dry location, at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from highly combustible materials such as oil or excelsior. Cylinders should be stored in definitely assigned places away from elevators, stairs, or gangways. Assigned storage spaces shall be located where cylinders will not be knocked over or damaged by passing or falling objects, or subject to tampering by unauthorized persons. Cylinders shall not be kept in unventilated enclosures such as lockers and cupboards. (iii) Empty cylinders shall have their valves closed. (iv) Valve protection caps, where cylinder is designed to accept a cap, shall always be in place, hand-tight, except when cylinders are in use or connected for use. (3) Fuel-gas cylinder storage. 3 (i) For storage in excess of 2,000 cubic feet (56 m 3 (ii) Acetylene cylinders shall be stored valve end up. (4) Oxygen storage. (ii) Oxygen cylinders stored in outside generator houses shall be separated from the generator or carbide storage rooms by a noncombustible partition having a fire-resistance rating of at least 1 hour. This partition shall be without openings and shall be gastight. (iii) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or combustible materials (especially oil or grease), a minimum distance of 20 feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour. (iv) Where a liquid oxygen system is to be used to supply gaseous oxygen for welding or cutting and the system has a storage capacity of more than 13,000 cubic feet (364 m 3 3 (5) Operating procedures. (ii)(A) When transporting cylinders by a crane or derrick, a cradle, boat, or suitable platform shall be used. Slings or electric magnets shall not be used for this purpose. Valve-protection caps, where cylinder is designed to accept a cap, shall always be in place. (B) Cylinders shall not be dropped or struck or permitted to strike each other violently. (C) Valve-protection caps shall not be used for lifting cylinders from one vertical position to another. Bars shall not be used under valves or valve-protection caps to pry cylinders loose when frozen to the ground or otherwise fixed; the use of warm (not boiling) water is recommended. Valve-protection caps are designed to protect cylinder valves from damage. (D) Unless cylinders are secured on a special truck, regulators shall be removed and valve-protection caps, when provided for, shall be put in place before cylinders are moved. (E) Cylinders not having fixed hand wheels shall have keys, handles, or nonadjustable wrenches on valve stems while these cylinders are in service. In multiple cylinder installations only one key or handle is required for each manifold. (F) Cylinder valves shall be closed before moving cylinders. (G) Cylinder valves shall be closed when work is finished. (H) Valves of empty cylinders shall be closed. (I) Cylinders shall be kept far enough away from the actual welding or cutting operation so that sparks, hot slag, or flame will not reach them, or fire-resistant shields shall be provided. (J) Cylinders shall not be placed where they might become part of an electric circuit. Contacts with third rails, trolley wires, etc., shall be avoided. Cylinders shall be kept away from radiators, piping systems, layout tables, etc., that may be used for grounding electric circuits such as for arc welding machines. Any practice such as the tapping of an electrode against a cylinder to strike an arc shall be prohibited. (K) Cylinders shall never be used as rollers or supports, whether full or empty. (L) The numbers and markings stamped into cylinders shall not be tampered with. (M) No person, other than the gas supplier, shall attempt to mix gases in a cylinder. No one, except the owner of the cylinder or person authorized by him, shall refill a cylinder. (N) No one shall tamper with safety devices in cylinders or valves. (O) Cylinders shall not be dropped or otherwise roughly handled. (P) Unless connected to a manifold, oxygen from a cylinder shall not be used without first attaching an oxygen regulator to the cylinder valve. Before connecting the regulator to the cylinder valve, the valve shall be opened slightly for an instant and then closed. Always stand to one side of the outlet when opening the cylinder valve. (Q) A hammer or wrench shall not be used to open cylinder valves. If valves cannot be opened by hand, the supplier shall be notified. (R)( 1 ( 2 (iii)(A) Fuel-gas cylinders shall be placed with valve end up whenever they are in use. Liquefied gases shall be stored and shipped with the valve end up. (B) Cylinders shall be handled carefully. Rough handling, knocks, or falls are liable to damage the cylinder, valve or safety devices and cause leakage. (C) Before connecting a regulator to a cylinder valve, the valve shall be opened slightly and closed immediately. The valve shall be opened while standing to one side of the outlet; never in front of it. Never crack a fuel-gas cylinder valve near other welding work or near sparks, flame, or other possible sources of ignition. (D) Before a regulator is removed from a cylinder valve, the cylinder valve shall be closed and the gas released from the regulator. (E) Nothing shall be placed on top of an acetylene cylinder when in use which may damage the safety device or interfere with the quick closing of the valve. (F) If cylinders are found to have leaky valves or fittings which cannot be stopped by closing of the valve, the cylinders shall be taken outdoors away from sources of ignition and slowly emptied. (G) A warning should be placed near cylinders having leaking fuse plugs or other leaking safety devices not to approach them with a lighted cigarette or other source of ignition. Such cylinders should be plainly tagged; the supplier should be promptly notified and his instructions followed as to their return. (H) Safety devices shall not be tampered with. (I) Fuel-gas shall never be used from cylinders through torches or other devices equipped with shutoff valves without reducing the pressure through a suitable regulator attached to the cylinder valve or manifold. (J) The cylinder valve shall always be opened slowly. (K) An acetylene cylinder valve shall not be opened more than one and one-half turns of the spindle, and preferably no more than three-fourths of a turn. (L) Where a special wrench is required it shall be left in position on the stem of the valve while the cylinder is in use so that the fuel-gas flow can be quickly turned off in case of emergency. In the case of manifolded or coupled cylinders at least one such wrench shall always be available for immediate use. (c) Manifolding of cylinders Fuel-gas manifolds. (ii) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section fuel-gas cylinders connected to one manifold inside a building shall be limited to a total capacity not exceeding 300 pounds (135.9 kg) of liquefied petroleum gas or 3,000 cubic feet (84 m 3 (iii) Fuel-gas cylinders connected to one manifold having an aggregate capacity exceeding 300 pounds (135.9 kg) of liquefied petroleum gas or 3,000 cubic feet (84 m 3 (iv) Separate manifold buildings or rooms may also be used for the storage of drums of calcium carbide and cylinders containing fuel gases as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. Such buildings or rooms shall have no open flames for heating or lighting and shall be well-ventilated. (v) High-pressure fuel-gas manifolds shall be provided with approved pressure regulating devices. (2) High-pressure oxygen manifolds (for use with cylinders having a Department of Transportation service pressure above 200 psig (1.36 MPa)). (ii) Oxygen manifolds shall not be located in an acetylene generator room. Oxygen manifolds shall be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or combustible materials (especially oil or grease), a minimum distance of 20 feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour. (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)(iv) of this section, oxygen cylinders connected to one manifold shall be limited to a total gas capacity of 6,000 cubic feet (168 m 3 (iv) An oxygen manifold, to which cylinders having an aggregate capacity of more than 6,000 cubic feet (168 m 3 (v) An oxygen manifold or oxygen bulk supply system which has storage capacity of more than 13,000 cubic feet (364 m 3 3 (vi) High-pressure oxygen manifolds shall be provided with approved pressure-regulating devices. (3) Low-pressure oxygen manifolds (for use with cylinders having a Department of Transportation service pressure not exceeding 200 psig (1.36 MPa)). (ii) Hose and hose connections subject to cylinder pressure shall comply with paragraph (e)(5) of this section. Hose shall have a minimum bursting pressure of 1,000 psig (6.8 MPa). (iii) The assembled manifold including leads shall be tested and proven gas-tight at a pressure of 300 psig (2.04 MPa). The fluid used for testing oxygen manifolds shall be oil-free and not combustible. (iv) The location of manifolds shall comply with paragraphs (c)(2)(ii), (c)(2)(iii), (c)(2)(iv), and (c)(2)(v) of this section. (v) The following sign shall be conspicuously posted at each manifold: Low-Pressure Manifold Do Not Connect High-Pressure Cylinders Maximum Pressure—250 psig (1.7 MPa) (4) Portable outlet headers. (ii) Each outlet on the service piping from which oxygen or fuel-gas is withdrawn to supply a portable outlet header shall be equipped with a readily accessible shutoff valve. (iii) Hose and hose connections used for connecting the portable outlet header to the service piping shall comply with paragraph (e)(5) of this section. (iv) Master shutoff valves for both oxygen and fuel-gas shall be provided at the entry end of the portable outlet header. (v) Portable outlet headers for fuel-gas service shall be provided with an approved hydraulic back-pressure valve installed at the inlet and preceding the service outlets, unless an approved pressure-reducing regulator, an approved back-flow check valve, or an approved hydraulic back-pressure valve is installed at each outlet. Outlets provided on headers for oxygen service may be fitted for use with pressure-reducing regulators or for direct hose connection. (vi) Each service outlet on portable outlet headers shall be provided with a valve assembly that includes a detachable outlet seal cap, chained or otherwise attached to the body of the valve. (vii) Materials and fabrication procedures for portable outlet headers shall comply with paragraphs (d)(1), (d)(2), and (d)(5) of this section. (viii) Portable outlet headers shall be provided with frames which will support the equipment securely in the correct operating position and protect them from damage during handling and operation. (5) Manifold operation procedures. (ii) All manifolds and parts used in methods of manifolding shall be used only for the gas or gases for which they are approved. (iii) When acetylene cylinders are coupled, approved flash arresters shall be installed between each cylinder and the coupler block. For outdoor use only, and when the number of cylinders coupled does not exceed three, one flash arrester installed between the coupler block and regulator is acceptable. (iv) The aggregate capacity of fuel-gas cylinders connected to a portable manifold inside a building shall not exceed 3,000 cubic feet (84 m 3 (v) Acetylene and liquefied fuel-gas cylinders shall be manifolded in a vertical position. (vi) The pressure in the gas cylinders connected to and discharged simultaneously through a common manifold shall be approximately equal. (d) Service piping systems Materials and design. 1 2 ( 1 ( 2 (B) Piping shall be steel, wrought iron, brass or copper pipe, or seamless copper, brass or stainless steel tubing, except as provided in paragraphs (d)(1)(ii) and (d)(1)(iii) of this section. (ii)(A) Oxygen piping and fittings at pressures in excess of 700 psi (4.8 MPa), shall be stainless steel or copper alloys. (B) Hose connections and hose complying with paragraph (e)(5) of this section may be used to connect the outlet of a manifold pressure regulator to piping providing the working pressure of the piping is 250 psi (1.7 MPa) or less and the length of the hose does not exceed 5 feet (1.5 m). Hose shall have a minimum bursting pressure of 1,000 psig (6.8 MPa). (C) When oxygen is supplied to a service piping system from a low-pressure oxygen manifold without an intervening pressure regulating device, the piping system shall have a minimum design pressure of 250 psig (1.7 MPa). A pressure regulating device shall be used at each station outlet when the connected equipment is for use at pressures less than 250 psig (1.7 MPa). (iii)(A) Piping for acetylene or acetylenic compounds shall be steel or wrought iron. (B) Unalloyed copper shall not be used for acetylene or acetylenic compounds except in listed equipment. (2) Piping joints. (ii) Joints in brass or copper pipe shall be welded, brazed, threaded, or flanged. If of the socket type, they shall be brazed with silver-brazing alloy or similar high melting point (not less than 800 °F (427 °C)) filler metal. (iii) Joints in seamless copper, brass, or stainless steel tubing shall be approved gas tubing fittings or the joints shall be brazed. If of the socket type, they shall be brazed with silver-brazing alloy or similar high melting point (not less than 800 °F (427 °C)) filler metal. (3) Installation. (ii) All piping shall be run as directly as practicable, protected against physical damage, proper allowance being made for expansion and contraction, jarring and vibration. Pipe laid underground in earth shall be located below the frost line and protected against corrosion. After assembly, piping shall be thoroughly blown out with air, nitrogen, or carbon dioxide to remove foreign materials. For oxygen piping, only oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen, or oil-free carbon dioxide shall be used. (iii) Only piping which has been welded or brazed shall be installed in tunnels, trenches or ducts. Shutoff valves shall be located outside such conduits. Oxygen piping may be placed in the same tunnel, trench or duct with fuel-gas pipelines, provided there is good natural or forced ventilation. (iv) Low points in piping carrying moist gas shall be drained into drip pots constructed so as to permit pumping or draining out the condensate at necessary intervals. Drain valves shall be installed for this purpose having outlets normally closed with screw caps or plugs. No open end valves or petcocks shall be used, except that in drips located out of doors, underground, and not readily accessible, valves may be used at such points if they are equipped with means to secure them in the closed position. Pipes leading to the surface of the ground shall be cased or jacketed where necessary to prevent loosening or breaking. (v) Gas cocks or valves shall be provided for all buildings at points where they will be readily accessible for shutting off the gas supply to these buildings in any emergency. There shall also be provided a shutoff valve in the discharge line from the generator, gas holder, manifold or other source of supply. (vi) Shutoff valves shall not be installed in safety relief lines in such a manner that the safety relief device can be rendered ineffective. (vii) Fittings and lengths of pipe shall be examined internally before assembly and, if necessary freed from scale or dirt. Oxygen piping and fittings shall be washed out with a suitable solution which will effectively remove grease and dirt but will not react with oxygen. Hot water solutions of caustic soda or trisodium phosphate are effective cleaning agents for this purpose. (viii) Piping shall be thoroughly blown out after assembly to remove foreign materials. For oxygen piping, oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen, or oil-free carbon dioxide shall be used. For other piping, air or inert gas may be used. (ix) When flammable gas lines or other parts of equipment are being purged of air or gas, open lights or other sources of ignition shall not be permitted near uncapped openings. (x) No welding or cutting shall be performed on an acetylene or oxygen pipeline, including the attachment of hangers or supports, until the line has been purged. Only oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen, or oil-free carbon dioxide shall be used to purge oxygen lines. (4) Painting and signs. (ii) Aboveground piping systems shall be marked in accordance with the American National Standard Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems, ANSI A13.1−1956, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (iii) Station outlets shall be marked to indicate the name of the gas. (5) Testing. 1/2 (ii) When flammable gas lines or other parts of equipment are being purged of air or gas, sources of ignition shall not be permitted near uncapped openings. (e) Protective equipment, hose, and regulators General. (2) Pressure relief devices. (3) Piping protective equipment. (ii) Approved protective equipment (designated P F (A) Backflow of oxygen into the fuel-gas supply system; (B) Passage of a flash back into the fuel-gas supply system; and (C) Excessive back pressure of oxygen in the fuel-gas supply system. The three functions of the protective equipment may be combined in one device or may be provided by separate devices. ( 1 F ( 2 F ( 3 ( 4 (iii) If pipeline protective equipment incorporates a liquid, the liquid level shall be maintained, and a suitable antifreeze may be used to prevent freezing. (iv) Fuel gas for use with equipment not requiring oxygen shall be withdrawn upstream of the piping protective devices. (4) Station outlet protective equipment. F O (ii) When approved pipeline protective equipment (designated P F (iii) A shutoff valve (designated V F O (iv) If the station outlet is equipped with a detachable regulator, the outlet shall terminate in a union connection that complies with the Regulator Connection Standards, 1958, Compressed Gas Association, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (v) If the station outlet is connected directly to a hose, the outlet shall terminate in a union connection complying with the Standard Hose Connection Specifications, 1957, Compressed Gas Association, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (vi) Station outlets may terminate in pipe threads to which permanent connections are to be made, such as to a machine. (vii) Station outlets shall be equipped with a detachable outlet seal cap secured in place. This cap shall be used to seal the outlet except when a hose, a regulator, or piping is attached. (viii) Where station outlets are equipped with approved backflow and flashback protective devices, as many as four torches may be supplied from one station outlet through rigid piping, provided each outlet from such piping is equipped with a shutoff valve and provided the fuel-gas capacity of any one torch does not exceed 15 cubic feet (0.42 m 3 (5) Hose and hose connections. (ii) When parallel lengths of oxygen and acetylene hose are taped together for convenience and to prevent tangling, not more than 4 inches (10.2 cm) out of 12 inches (30.5 cm) shall be covered by tape. (iii) Hose connections shall comply with the Standard Hose Connection Specifications, 1957, Compressed Gas Association. (iv) Hose connections shall be clamped or otherwise securely fastened in a manner that will withstand, without leakage, twice the pressure to which they are normally subjected in service, but in no case less than a pressure of 300 psi (2.04 MPa). Oil-free air or an oil-free inert gas shall be used for the test. (v) Hose showing leaks, burns, worn places, or other defects rendering it unfit for service shall be repaired or replaced. (6) Pressure-reducing regulators. (ii) When regulators or parts of regulators, including gages, need repair, the work shall be performed by skilled mechanics who have been properly instructed. (iii) Gages on oxygen regulators shall be marked “USE NO OIL.” (iv) Union nuts and connections on regulators shall be inspected before use to detect faulty seats which may cause leakage of gas when the regulators are attached to the cylinder valves. (f) Acetylene generators Approval and marking. (ii) Carbide shall be of the size marked on the generator nameplate. (2) Rating and pressure limitations. 3 (ii) Relief valves shall be regularly operated to insure proper functioning. Relief valves for generating chambers shall be set to open at a pressure not in excess of 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pressure). Relief valves for hydraulic back pressure valves shall be set to open at a pressure not in excess of 20 psig (137 kPa gauge pressure). (iii) Nonautomatic generators shall not be used for generating acetylene at pressures exceeding l psig (7 kPa gauge pressure), and all water overflows shall be visible. (3) Location. (4) Stationary acetylene generators (automatic and nonautomatic). (B) Generators shall be placed where water will not freeze. The use of common salt (sodium chloride) or other corrosive chemicals for protection against freezing is not permitted. (For heating systems see paragraph (f)(6)(iii) of this section.) (C) Except when generators are prepared in accordance with paragraph (f)(7)(v) of this section, sources of ignition shall be prohibited in outside generator houses or inside generator rooms. (D) Water shall not be supplied through a continuous connection to the generator except when the generator is provided with an adequate open overflow or automatic water shutoff which will effectively prevent overfilling of the generator. Where a noncontinuous connection is used, the supply line shall terminate at a point not less than 2 inches (5 cm) above the regularly provided opening for filling so that the water can be observed as it enters the generator. (E) Unless otherwise specifically approved, generators shall not be fitted with continuous drain connections leading to sewers, but shall discharge through an open connection into a suitably vented outdoor receptacle or residue pit which may have such connections. An open connection for the sludge drawoff is desirable to enable the generator operator to observe leakage of generating water from the drain valve or sludge cock. (ii)(A) Each generator shall be provided with a vent pipe. (B) The escape or relief pipe shall be rigidly installed without traps and so that any condensation will drain back to the generator. (C) The escape or relief pipe shall be carried full size to a suitable point outside the building. It shall terminate in a hood or bend located at least 12 feet (3.7 m) above the ground, preferably above the roof, and as far away as practicable from windows or other openings into buildings and as far away as practicable from sources of ignition such as flues or chimneys and tracks used by locomotives. Generating chamber relief pipes shall not be inter-connected but shall be separately led to the outside air. The hood or bend shall be so constructed that it will not be obstructed by rain, snow, ice, insects, or birds. The outlet shall be at least 3 feet (0.9 m) from combustible construction. (iii)(A) Gas holders shall be constructed on the gasometer principle, the bell being suitably guided. The gas bell shall move freely without tendency to bind and shall have a clearance of at least 2 inches (5 cm) from the shell. (B) The gas holder may be located in the generator room, in a separate room or out of doors. In order to prevent collapse of the gas bell or infiltration of air due to a vacuum caused by the compressor or booster pump or cooling of the gas, a compressor or booster cutoff shall be provided at a point 12 inches (0.3 m) or more above the landing point of the bell. When the gas holder is located indoors, the room shall be ventilated in accordance with paragraph (f)(6)(ii) of this section and heated and lighted in accordance with paragraphs (f)(6)(iii) and (f)(6)(iv) of this section. (C) When the gas holder is not located within a heated building, gas holder seals shall be protected against freezing. (D) Means shall be provided to stop the generator-feeding mechanism before the gas holder reaches the upper limit of its travel. (E) When the gas holder is connected to only one generator, the gas capacity of the holder shall be not less than one-third of the hourly rating of the generator. (F) If acetylene is used from the gas holder without increase in pressure at some points but with increase in pressure by a compressor or booster pump at other points, approved piping protective devices shall be installed in each supply line. The low-pressure protective device shall be located between the gas holder and the shop piping, and the medium-pressure protective device shall be located between the compressor or booster pump and the shop piping (see Figure Q-4). Approved protective equipment (designated P F (iv)(A) The compressor or booster system shall be of an approved type. (B) Wiring and electric equipment in compressor or booster pump rooms or enclosures shall conform to the provisions of subpart S of this part for Class I, Division 2 locations. (C) Compressors and booster pump equipment shall be located in well-ventilated areas away from open flames, electrical or mechanical sparks, or other ignition sources. (D) Compressor or booster pumps shall be provided with pressure relief valves which will relieve pressure exceeding 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pressure) to a safe outdoor location as provided in paragraph (f)(4)(ii) of this section, or by returning the gas to the inlet side or to the gas supply source. (E) Compressor or booster pump discharge outlets shall be provided with approved protective equipment. (See paragraph (e) of this section.) (5) Portable acetylene generators. (B) Portable generators shall not be used within 10 feet (3 m) of combustible material other than the floor. (C) Portable generators shall not be used in rooms of total volume less than 35 times the total gas-generating capacity per charge of all generators in the room. Generators shall not be used in rooms having a ceiling height of less than 10 feet (3 m). (To obtain the gas-generating capacity in cubic feet per charge, multiply the pounds of carbide per charge by 4.5.) (D) Portable generators shall be protected against freezing. The use of salt or other corrosive chemical to prevent freezing is prohibited. (ii)(A) Portable generators shall be cleaned and recharged and the air mixture blown off outside buildings. (B) When charged with carbide, portable generators shall not be moved by crane or derrick. (C) When not in use, portable generators shall not be stored in rooms in which open flames are used unless the generators contain no carbide and have been thoroughly purged of acetylene. Storage rooms shall be well ventilated. (D) When portable acetylene generators are to be transported and operated on vehicles, they shall be securely anchored to the vehicles. If transported by truck, the motor shall be turned off during charging, cleaning, and generating periods. (E) Portable generators shall be located at a safe distance from the welding position so that they will not be exposed to sparks, slag, or misdirection of the torch flame or overheating from hot materials or processes. (6) Outside generator houses and inside generator rooms for stationary acetylene generators. (B) Walls, floors, and roofs of outside generator houses shall be of noncombustible construction. (C) When a part of the generator house is to be used for the storage or manifolding of oxygen cylinders, the space to be so occupied shall be separated from the generator or carbide storage section by partition walls continuous from floor to roof or ceiling, of the type of construction stated in paragraph (f)(6)(i)(H) of this section. Such separation walls shall be without openings and shall be joined to the floor, other walls and ceiling or roof in a manner to effect a permanent gas-tight joint. (D) Exit doors shall be located so as to be readily accessible in case of emergency. (E) Explosion venting for outside generator houses and inside generator rooms shall be provided in exterior walls or roofs. The venting areas shall be equal to not less than 1 square foot (0.09 m 2 3 (F) The installation of acetylene generators within buildings shall be restricted to buildings not exceeding one story in height; provided, however, (G) Generators installed inside buildings shall be enclosed in a separate room. (H) The walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings of inside generator rooms shall be of noncombustible construction having a fire-resistance rating of at least 1 hour. The walls or partitions shall be continuous from floor to ceiling and shall be securely anchored. At least one wall of the room shall be an exterior wall. (I) Openings from an inside generator room to other parts of the building shall be protected by a swinging type, self-closing fire door for a Class B opening and having a rating of at least 1 hour. Windows in partitions shall be wired glass and approved metal frames with fixed sash. Installation shall be in accordance with the Standard for the Installation of Fire Doors and Windows, NFPA 80-1970, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (ii) Inside generator rooms or outside generator houses shall be well ventilated with vents located at floor and ceiling levels. (iii) Heating shall be by steam, hot water, enclosed electrically heated elements or other indirect means. Heating by flames or fires shall be prohibited in outside generator houses or inside generator rooms, or in any enclosure communicating with them. (iv)(A) Generator houses or rooms shall have natural light during daylight hours. Where artificial lighting is necessary it shall be restricted to electric lamps installed in a fixed position. Unless specifically approved for use in atmospheres containing acetylene, such lamps shall be provided with enclosures of glass or other noncombustible material so designed and constructed as to prevent gas vapors from reaching the lamp or socket and to resist breakage. Rigid conduit with threaded connections shall be used. (B) Lamps installed outside of wired-glass panels set in gas-tight frames in the exterior walls or roof of the generator house or room are acceptable. (v) Electric switches, telephones, and all other electrical apparatus which may cause a spark, unless specifically approved for use inside acetylene generator rooms, shall be located outside the generator house or in a room or space separated from the generator room by a gas-tight partition, except that where the generator system is designed so that no carbide fill opening or other part of the generator is open to the generator house or room during the operation of the generator, and so that residue is carried in closed piping from the residue discharge valve to a point outside the generator house or room, electrical equipment in the generator house or room shall conform to the provisions of subpart S of this part for Class I, Division 2 locations. (7) Maintenance and operation. (A) Operating instructions shall be posted in a conspicuous place near the generator or kept in a suitable place available for ready reference. (B) When recharging generators the order of operations specified in the instructions supplied by the manufacturer shall be followed. (C) In the case of batch-type generators, when the charge of carbide is exhausted and before additional carbide is added, the generating chamber shall always be flushed out with water, renewing the water supply in accordance with the instruction card furnished by the manufacturer. (D) The water-carbide residue mixture drained from the generator shall not be discharged into sewer pipes or stored in areas near open flames. Clear water from residue settling pits may be discharged into sewer pipes. (ii) The carbide added each time the generator is recharged shall be sufficient to refill the space provided for carbide without ramming the charge. Steel or other ferrous tools shall not be used in distributing the charge. (iii) Generator water chambers shall be kept filled to proper level at all times except while draining during the recharging operation. (iv) Whenever repairs are to be made or the generator is to be charged or carbide is to be removed, the water chamber shall be filled to the proper level. (v) Previous to making repairs involving welding, soldering, or other hot work or other operations which produce a source of ignition, the carbide charge and feed mechanism shall be completely removed. All acetylene shall be expelled by completely flooding the generator shell with water and the generator shall be disconnected from the piping system. The generator shall be kept filled with water, if possible, or positioned to hold as much water as possible. (vi) Hot repairs shall not be made in a room where there are other generators unless all the generators and piping have been purged of acetylene. (g) Calcium carbide storage Packaging. (ii) Packages containing calcium carbide shall be conspicuously marked “Calcium Carbide—Dangerous If Not Kept Dry” or with equivalent warning. (iii) Caution: Metal tools, even the so-called spark resistant type may cause ignition of an acetylene and air mixture when opening carbide containers. (iv) Sprinkler systems shall not be installed in carbide storage rooms. (2) Storage indoors. (A) Calcium carbide not exceeding 600 pounds (272.2 kg) may be stored indoors in the same room with fuel-gas cylinders. (B) Packages of calcium carbide, except for one of each size, shall be kept sealed. The seals shall not be broken when there is carbide in excess of 1 pound (0.5 kg) in any other unsealed package of the same size of carbide in the room. (ii) Calcium carbide exceeding 600 pounds (272.2 kg) but not exceeding 5,000 pounds (2,268 kg) shall be stored: (A) In accordance with paragraph (g)(2)(iii) of this section; (B) In an inside generator room or outside generator house; or (C) In a separate room in a one-story building which may contain other occupancies, but without cellar or basement beneath the carbide storage section. Such rooms shall be constructed in accordance with paragraphs (f)(6)(i)(H) and (f)(6)(i)(I) of this section and ventilated in accordance with paragraph (f)(6)(ii) of this section. These rooms shall be used for no other purpose. (iii) Calcium carbide in excess of 5,000 pounds (2,268 kg) shall be stored in one-story buildings without cellar or basement and used for no other purpose, or in outside generator houses. If the storage building is of noncombustible construction, it may adjoin other one-story buildings if separated therefrom by unpierced firewalls; if it is detached less than 10 feet (3 m) from such building or buildings, there shall be no opening in any of the mutually exposing sides of such buildings within 10 feet (3 m). If the storage building is of combustible construction, it shall be at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from any other one- or two-story building, and at least 30 feet (9.1 m) from any other building exceeding two stories. (3) Storage outdoors. (ii) Carbide containers to be stored outdoors shall be examined to make sure that they are in good condition. Periodic reexaminations shall be made for rusting or other damage to a container that might affect its water or air tightness. (iii) The bottom tier of each row shall be placed on wooden planking or equivalent, so that the containers will not come in contact with the ground or ground water. (iv) Containers of carbide which have been in storage the longest shall be used first. [55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 46053, Nov. 1, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007] § 1910.254 Arc welding and cutting. (a) General Equipment selection. (2) Installation. (3) Instruction. (b) Application of arc welding equipment General. (2) Environmental conditions. (ii) Unusual service conditions may exist, and in such circumstances machines shall be especially designed to safely meet the requirements of the service. Chief among these conditions are: (A) Exposure to unusually corrosive fumes. (B) Exposure to steam or excessive humidity. (C) Exposure to excessive oil vapor. (D) Exposure to flammable gases. (E) Exposure to abnormal vibration or shock. (F) Exposure to excessive dust. (G) Exposure to weather. (H) Exposure to unusual seacoast or shipboard conditions. (3) Voltage. (i) Alternating-current machines (A) Manual arc welding and cutting—80 volts. (B) Automatic (machine or mechanized) arc welding and cutting—100 volts. (ii) Direct-current machines (A) Manual arc welding and cutting—100 volts. (B) Automatic (machine or mechanized) arc welding and cutting-100 volts. (iii) When special welding and cutting processes require values of open circuit voltages higher than the above, means shall be provided to prevent the operator from making accidental contact with the high voltage by adequate insulation or other means. (iv) For a.c. welding under wet conditions or warm surroundings where perspiration is a factor, the use of reliable automatic controls for reducing no load voltage is recommended to reduce the shock hazard. (4) Design. (ii) On all types of arc welding machines, control apparatus shall be enclosed except for the operating wheels, levers, or handles. (iii) Input power terminals, tap change devices and live metal parts connected to input circuits shall be completely enclosed and accessible only by means of tools. (iv) Terminals for welding leads should be protected from accidental electrical contact by personnel or by metal objects, i.e., vehicles, crane hooks, etc. Protection may be obtained by use of: Dead-front receptacles for plug connections; recessed openings with nonremovable hinged covers; heavy insulating sleeving or taping or other equivalent electrical and mechanical protection. If a welding lead terminal which is intended to be used exclusively for connection to the work is connected to the grounded enclosure, it must be done by a conductor at least two AWG sizes smaller than the grounding conductor and the terminal shall be marked to indicate that it is grounded. (v) No connections for portable control devices such as push buttons to be carried by the operator shall be connected to an a.c. circuit of higher than 120 volts. Exposed metal parts of portable control devices operating on circuits above 50 volts shall be grounded by a grounding conductor in the control cable. (vi) Auto transformers or a.c. reactors shall not be used to draw welding current directly from any a.c. power source having a voltage exceeding 80 volts. (c) Installation of arc welding equipment General. (2) Grounding. (ii) Conduits containing electrical conductors shall not be used for completing a work-lead circuit. Pipelines shall not be used as a permanent part of a work-lead circuit, but may be used during construction, extension or repair providing current is not carried through threaded joints, flanged bolted joints, or caulked joints and that special precautions are used to avoid sparking at connection of the work-lead cable. (iii) Chains, wire ropes, cranes, hoists, and elevators shall not be used to carry welding current. (iv) Where a structure, conveyor, or fixture is regularly employed as a welding current return circuit, joints shall be bonded or provided with adequate current collecting devices. (v) All ground connections shall be checked to determine that they are mechanically strong and electrically adequate for the required current. (3) Supply connections and conductors. (ii) For individual welding machines, the rated current-carrying capacity of the supply conductors shall be not less than the rated primary current of the welding machines. (iii) For groups of welding machines, the rated current-carrying capacity of conductors may be less than the sum of the rated primary currents of the welding machines supplied. The conductor rating shall be determined in each case according to the machine loading based on the use to be made of each welding machine and the allowance permissible in the event that all the welding machines supplied by the conductors will not be in use at the same time. (iv) In operations involving several welders on one structure, d.c. welding process requirements may require the use of both polarities; or supply circuit limitations for a.c. welding may require distribution of machines among the phases of the supply circuit. In such cases no load voltages between electrode holders will be 2 times normal in d.c. or 1, 1.41, 1.73, or 2 times normal on a.c. machines. Similar voltage differences will exist if both a.c. and d.c. welding are done on the same structure. (A) All d.c. machines shall be connected with the same polarity. (B) All a.c. machines shall be connected to the same phase of the supply circuit and with the same instantaneous polarity. (d) Operation and maintenance General. (2) Machine hook up. (3) Grounding. (4) Leaks. (5) Switches. (6) Manufacturers' instructions. (7) Electrode holders. (8) Electric shock. (9) Maintenance. (ii) Machines which have become wet shall be thoroughly dried and tested before being used. (iii) Cables with damaged insulation or exposed bare conductors shall be replaced. Joining lengths of work and electrode cables shall be done by the use of connecting means specifically intended for the purpose. The connecting means shall have insulation adequate for the service conditions. [55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005] § 1910.255 Resistance welding. (a) General Installation. (2) Thermal protection. (3) Personnel. (4) Guarding. (b) Spot and seam welding machines (nonportable) Voltage. (2) Capacitor welding. (3) Interlocks. (4) Guarding. (5) Shields. (6) Foot switches. (7) Stop buttons. (8) Safety pins. (9) Grounding. (c) Portable welding machines Counterbalance. (2) Safety chains. (3) Clevis. (4) Switch guards. (5) Moving holder. (6) Grounding. (d) Flash welding equipment Ventilation and flash guard. (2) Fire curtains. (e) Maintenance. Subpart R—Special Industries Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. § 1910.261 Pulp, paper, and paperboard mills. (a) General requirements Application. (2) Standards incorporated by reference. (3) General incorporation of standards. (i) Practice for Industrial Lighting, A11.1—1965 (R-1970). (ii) Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems, A13.1—1956. (iii) Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, and Moving Walks, A17.1—1965, including Supplements A17.1a—1967, A17.1b—1968, A17.1c—1969, and A17.1d—1970. (iv) Practice for the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector's Manual), A17.2—1960, including Suppelements A17.2a—1965 and A17.2b—1967. (v) Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related Equipment, B20.1—1957. (vi) Power Piping, B31.1.0—1967 and addenda B31.10a—1969. Fuel Gas Piping, B31.2—1968. (vii) Identification of Gas-Mask Canisters, K13.1—1967. (viii) Prevention of Sulfur Fires and Explosions, Z12.12—1968. (ix) Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1—1961. (4) Other standards. (i) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, including addenda 1969. (ii) Building Exits Code for Life Safety from Fire, NFPA 101—1970. (iii) Safety in the Handling and Use of Explosives, IME Pamphlet No. 17, July 1960, Institute of Makers of Explosives. (b) Safe practices Lockouts. (2) Emergency lighting. (c) Handling and storage of pulpwood and pulp chips Handling pulpwood with forklift trucks. (2) Handling pulpwood with cranes or stackers. (ii) The minimum distance of the pulpwood pile from the centerline of a standard-gage track shall be maintained at not less than 8 1/2 (iii) Logs shall be piled in an orderly and stable manner, with no projection into walkways or roadways. (iv) Railroad cars shall not be spotted on tracks adjacent to the locomotive cranes unless a 24-inch clearance is maintained, as required in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section. (v) The handling and storage of other materials shall conform to paragraphs (c)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section with respect to clearance. (vi) No person shall be permitted to walk beneath a suspended load, bucket, or hook. (3) Handling pulpwood from ships. (i) [Reserved] (ii) The hatch tender shall be required to signal the hoisting engineer to move the load only after the men working in the hold are in the clear. (iii) The air in the ship's hold, tanks, or closed vessels shall be tested for oxygen deficiency and for both toxic and explosive gases and vapors. (4) Handling pulpwood from flatcars and all other railway cars. (ii) Where pulpwood is loaded crosswise on a flatcar sufficient stakes of sizes not smaller than 4 by 4 inches shall be used to prevent the load from shifting. (iii) When it is necessary to cut stakes, those on the unloading side should be partially cut through first, and then the binder wires cut on the opposite side. Wire cutters equipped with long extension handles shall be used. No person shall be permitted along the dumping side of the car after the stakes have been cut. (iv) When steel straps without stakes are used, the steel straps shall be cut from a safe area to prevent employees from being struck by the falling logs. (v) Flatcars and all other cars shall be chocked during unloading. Where equipment is not provided with hand brakes, rail clamping chocks shall be used. (vi) A derail shall be used to prevent movement of other rail equipment into cars where persons are working. (5) Handling pulpwood from trucks. (ii) Where binder chain and steel stakes are used, the binder chains shall be released and the stakes tripped from the opposite side of the load spillage. (iii) Where binder chains and crane slings are used, the crane slings shall be attached and taut before the binder chains are released. The hooker shall see that the helper is clear before signaling for the movement of the load. (6) Handling pulp chips from railway cars. (7) Handling pulp chips from trucks and trailers. (8) Cranes. (i) [Reserved] (ii) A safety device such as a heavy chain or cable at least equal in strength to the lifting cables shall be fastened to the boom and to the frame of the boom crane (if it is other than locomotive) at the base. Alternatively, a telescoping safety device shall be fastened to the boom and to the cab frame, so as to prevent the boom from snapping back over the cab in the event of lifting cable breakage. (iii) A crane shall not be operated where any part thereof may come within 10 feet of overhead powerlines (or other overhead obstructions) unless the powerlines have been deenergized. The boom shall be painted bright yellow from and including the head sheave to a point 6 feet down the boom towards the cab. (iv) Standard signals for the operation of cranes shall be established for all movements of the crane, in accordance with American National Standards B30.2—1943 (reaffirmed 1968) and B30.2.0—1967. (v) Only one member of the crew shall be authorized to give signals to the crane operator. (vi) All cranes shall be equipped with a suitable warning device such as a horn or whistle. (vii) A sheave guard shall be provided beneath the head sheave of the boom. (9) Traffic warning signs or signals. (ii) After cars are spotted for loading or unloading, warning flags or signs shall be placed in the center of the track at least 50 feet away from the cars and a derail set to protect workmen in the car. (10) Illumination. (11) [Reserved] (12) Barking devices. (13) Hand tools. (14) Removal of pulpwood. (ii) If dynamite is used to loosen the pile, only authorized personnel shall be permitted to handle and discharge the explosive. An electric detonator is preferable for firing; if a fuse is used, it shall be an approved safety fuse with a burning rate of not less than 120 seconds per yard and a minimum length of 3 feet, in accordance with Safety in the Handling and Use of Explosives, IME Pamphlet No. 17, July 1960. (15) Belt conveyors. (ii) Where conveyors cross passageways or roadways, a horizontal platform shall be provided under the conveyor, extended out from the sides of the conveyor a distance equal to 1 1/2 (iii) All conveyors for pulpwood shall have the inrunning nips between chain and sprockets guarded; also, turning drums shall be guarded. (iv) Every belt conveyor shall have an emergency stop cable extending the length of the conveyor so that it may be stopped from any location along the line, or conveniently located stop buttons within 10 feet of each work station, in accordance with American National Standard B20.1—1957. (16) Signs. (d) Handling and storage of raw materials other than pulpwood or pulp chips Personal protective equipment. (2) Clearance. (ii) Baled paper and rags stored inside a building shall not be piled closer than 18 inches to walls, partitions, or sprinkler heads. (3) Piling and unpiling pulp. (ii) Piles of pulp shall not be undermined when being unpiled. (iii) Floor capacities shall be clearly marked on all floors. (4)(i) [Reserved] (ii) Where rolls are pyramided two or more high, chocks shall be installed between each roll on the floor and at every row. Where pulp and paper rolls are stored on smooth floors in processing areas, rubber chocks with wooden core shall be used. (iii) When rolls are decked two or more high, the bottom rolls shall be chocked on each side to prevent shifting in either direction. (e) Preparing pulpwood Gang and slasher saws. (2) Slasher tables. (3) [Reserved] (4) Runway to the jack ladder. (5) Guards below table. (6) Conveyors. (7) [Reserved] (8) Barker feed. (9) [Reserved] (10) Stops. (11) Speed governor. (12) Continuous barking drums. (ii) Sprockets and chains, gears, and trunnions shall have standard guards, in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.219, Mechanical power-transmission apparatus. (iii) Whenever it becomes necessary for a workman to go within a drum, the driving mechanism shall be locked and tagged, at the main disconnect switch, in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section. (13) Intermittent barking drums. (14) Hydraulic barkers. (15) Splitter block. (16) Power control. (17) Knot cleaners. (18) Chipper spout. (19) Carriers for knives. (f) Rag and old paper preparation Ripping and trimming tools. (ii) Hand knives and sharpening steels shall be provided with guards at the junction of the handle and the blade. (2) Shredders, cutters, and dusters. (ii) A smooth-pivoted idler roll resting on the stock or feed table shall be provided in front of feed rolls except when arrangements prevent the operator from standing closer than 36 inches to any part of the feed rolls. (iii) Any manually fed cutter, shredder, or duster shall be provided with an idler roll as per subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph or the operator shall use special hand-feeding tools. (iv) Hoods of cutters, shredders, and dusters shall have exhaust ventilation, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.2—1960. (3) Blowers. (ii) The arrangement of the blower discharge outlets and work areas shall be such as to prevent material from falling on workers. (4) Conveyors. (5) Dust. (6) Rag cookers. (ii) When cleaning, inspection, or other work requires that persons must enter the cooker, one person shall be stationed outside in a position to observe and assist in case of emergency, in accordance with paragraph (b)(5) of this section. (iii) [Reserved] (iv) Rag cookers shall be provided with safety valves in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels—1968, with Addenda. (g) Chemical processes of making pulp Sulfur burners. (ii) Nonsparking tools and equipment shall be used in handling dry sulfur. (iii) Sulfur storage bins shall be kept free of sulfur dust accumulation, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.2—1960. (iv) Sulfur-melting equipment shall not be located in the burner room. (2) Protection for employees (acid plants). (ii) The worker shall be provided with eye protection, a supplied air respirator and a personal fall protection system that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part, during inspection, repairs or maintenance of acid towers. The line shall be extended to an attendant stationed outside the tower opening. (3) Acid tower structure. (4) Tanks (acid). (ii) A man shall be stationed outside to summon assistance if necessary. All intake valves to a tank shall be blanked off or disconnected. (5) Clothing. (6) Lead burning. (7) Hoops for acid storage tanks. (8) Chip and sawdust bins. (9) Exits (digester building). (10) Gas masks (digester building). (11) Elevators. (ii) Elevators shall be equipped with gas masks for the maximum number of passengers. (iii) Elevators shall be equipped with an alarm system to advise of failure. (12) Blowoff valves and piping. (ii) Through bolts instead of cap bolts shall be used on all digester pipings. (iii) Heavy duty pipe, valves, and fittings shall be used between the digester and blow pit. These valves, fittings, and pipes shall be inspected at least semiannually to determine the degree of deterioration. (iv) Digester blow valves shall be pinned or locked in closed position throughout the entire cooking period. (13) Blow pits and blow tanks. (ii) A specially constructed ladder shall be used for access to blow pits, to be constructed so that the door of the blow pit cannot be closed when the ladder is in place; other means shall be provided to prevent the closing of the pit door when anyone is in the pit. (iii) A signaling device shall be installed in the digester and blow-pit rooms and chip bins to be operated as a warning before and while digesters are being blown. (iv) Blow-pit hoops shall be maintained in a safe condition. (14) Blowing digester. (ii) After the digester has started to be blown, the blowoff valve shall be left open, and the hand plate shall not be removed until the digester cook signals the blow-pit man that the blow is completed. Whenever it becomes necessary to remove the hand plate to clear stock, operators shall wear eye protection equipment and protective clothing to guard against burns from hot stock. (iii) Means shall be provided whereby the digester cook shall signal the man in the chip bin before starting to load the digester. (15) Inspecting and repairing digester. (ii) Fresh air shall be blown into the digester constantly while workmen are inside. Supplied air respirators shall be available in the event the fresh air supply fails or is inadequate. (iii) No inspector shall enter a digester unless a lifeline is securely fastened to his body by means of a safety belt and at least one other experienced employee is stationed outside the digester to handle the line and to summon assistance. All ladders and lifelines shall be inspected before each use. (iv) All employees entering digesters for inspection or repair work shall be provided with protective headgear. Eye protection and dust masks shall be provided to workmen while the old brick lining is being removed, in accordance with American National Standards, Z87.1—1968, Z88.2—1969, and Z99.1—1969. (16) Pressure tanks-accumulators (acid). (ii) The pressure tanks-accumulators shall be inspected twice annually. (See the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels—1968, with Addenda.) (17) Pressure vessels (safety devices). (ii) All safety devices shall conform to Paragraph U-2 in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels—1968, with Addenda. (18) Miscellaneous. (i) Quick operating showers, bubblers, etc., shall be available for emergency use in case of caustic soda burns. (ii) Rotary tenders, smelter operators, and those cleaning smelt spouts shall be provided with eye protection equipment (fitted with lenses that filter out the harmful rays emanating from the light source) when actively engaged in their duties, in accordance with American National Standard Z87.1—1968. (iii) Heavy-duty pipe, valves, and fittings shall be used between digester and blow pit. These shall be inspected at least semiannually to determine the degree of deterioration and repaired or replaced when necessary, in accordance with American National Standards B31.1—1955, B31.1a—1963, B31.1.0—1967, and B31.2—1968. (iv) Smelt-dissolving tanks shall be covered and the cover kept closed, except when samples are being taken. (v) Smelt tanks shall be provided with vent stacks and explosion doors, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.1—1951. (19) Blow lines. (i)-(ii) [Reserved] (iii) When blow lines from more than one digester lead into one pipe, the cock or valve of the blow line from the tank being inspected or repaired shall be locked or tagged out, or the line shall be disconnected and blocked off. (20) Furnace room. (21) Inspection and repair of tanks. (22) Welding. (23) Turpentine systems and storage tanks. (h) Bleaching Bleaching engines. (2) Bleach mixing rooms. (ii) Chlorine gas shall be carried away from the work place and breathing area by an exhaust system. The gas shall be rendered neutral or harmless before being discharged into the atmosphere. The requirements of American National Standard Z9.2—1960 shall apply to this subdivision. (iii) For emergency and rescue operations, the employer must provide employees with self-contained breathing apparatuses or supplied-air respirators, and ensure that employees use these respirators, in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134. (3) Liquid chlorine. (ii) Gas masks capable of absorbing chlorine shall be supplied, conveniently placed, and regularly inspected, and workers who may be exposed to chlorine gas shall be instructed in their use. (iii) For emergency and rescue work, independent self-contained oxygen-type masks or supplied air equipment shall be provided. (iv) At least two exits, remote from each other, shall be provided for all rooms in which chlorine is stored. (v) Spur tracks upon which tank cars containing chlorine and caustic are spotted and connected to pipelines shall be protected by means of a derail in front of the cars. (vi) All chlorine, caustic, and acid lines shall be marked for positive identification, in accordance with American National Standard A13.1—1967. (4) Bagged or drummed chemicals. (i) Mechanical pulp process Pulp grinders. (ii) Doors of pocket grinders shall be arranged so as to keep them from closing accidentally. (2) Butting saws. (3) Floors and platforms. (4) Personal protection. (j) Stock preparation Pulp shredders. (ii) Either a slanting feed table with its outer edge not less than 36 inches from the cutting head or an automatic feeding device shall be provided. (iii) Repairs for cleaning of blockage shall be done only when the shredder is shutdown and control devices locked. (2) Pulp conveyors. (3) [Reserved] (4) Beaters. (ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons enter the beaters, all control devices shall be locked or tagged out, in accordance with paragraph (b)(4) of this section. (iii) When beaters are fed from the floor above, the chute opening, if less than 42 inches (1.06 m) from the floor, shall be provided with a guardrail system that meets the requirements in subpart D of this part, or other equivalent enclosures. Openings for manual feeding shall be sufficient only for entry of stock, and shall be provided with at least two permanently secured crossrails or other fall protection system that meet the requirements in subpart D. (iv) [Reserved] (v) Floors around beaters shall be provided with sufficient drainage to remove wastes. (5) Pulpers. (ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons enter the pulpers, they shall be equipped with safety belt and lifeline, and one person shall be stationed outside at a position to observe and assist in case of emergency. (iii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons enter pulpers, all steam, water, or other control devices shall be locked or tagged out. Blank flanging and tagging of pipe lines is acceptable in place of closed and locked or tagged valves. Blank flanging of steam and water lines shall be acceptable in place of valve locks. (6) Stock chests. (ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons enter stock chests, they shall be provided with a low-voltage extension light. (k) Machine room Emergency stops. (2) Drives. (ii) All ends of rotating shafts including dryer drum shafts shall be completely guarded. (iii) All accessible disengaged doctor blades should be covered. (iv) All exposed shafts shall be guarded. Crossovers shall be provided. (v) Oil cups and grease fittings shall be placed in a safe area remote from nip and heat hazards. (3) Protective equipment. (4)-(5) [Reserved] (6) Steps. (7) Plank walkways. (8) Dryer lubrication. (9) Levers. (10) First dryer. (11) Steam and hot-water pipes. (12) Dryer gears. (i) A guardrail shall be provided at broke holes in accordance with § 1910.23. (13) Broke hole. (ii) Where pulpers are located directly below the broke hole on a paper machine and where the broke hole opening is large enough to permit a worker to fall through, any employee pushing broke down the hole shall wear a safety belt attached to a safety belt line. The safety belt line shall be fastened in such a manner that it is impossible for the person to fall into the pulper. (iii) An alarm bell or a flashing light shall be actuated before dropping material through the broke hole. (14) Feeder belt. (15) Steps. (16) [Reserved] (17) Sole plates. (18) Nip points. (19) Platforms. (20) Scrapers. (21) Illumination. (22) Control panels. (23) [Reserved] (24) Lifting reels. (ii) All lifting equipment (clamps, cables, and slings) shall be maintained in a safe condition and inspected regularly. (iii) Reel shafts with square block ends shall be guarded. (25) Feeder belts. (26) Inrunning nip. (ii) [Reserved] (27) Core collars. (28) Slitter knives. (29) Winder shaft. (30) Core shaft. (31) Winder area. (32) Radiation. (l) Finishing room Cleaning rolls. (2) Emergency stops. (3) Core collars. (4) Elevators. (5) Control panels. (6) Guillotine-type cutters. (ii) Each guillotine-type cutter shall be equipped with a nonrepeat device. (iii) Carriers shall be provided and used for transportation of guillotine-type cutter knives. (7) Rotary cutter. (ii) On duplex cutters the protection required for single-knife machines shall be provided for the first knife, and a hood shall be provided for the second knife. (iii) Safe access shall be provided to the knives of a rotary cutter by means of catwalks with nonslip surfaces, railings, and toeboards in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section. (iv) A guard shall be provided for the spreader or squeeze roll at the nip side on sheet cutters. (v) Electrically or manually operated quick power disconnecting devices with adequate braking action shall be provided on all operating sides of the machine within easy reach of all operators. (vi) The outside slitters shall be guarded. (8) Platers. (ii) A quick power disconnecting device shall be installed on each machine within easy reach of the operator. (9) Finishing room rewinders. A zero speed switch should be installed to prevent the guard from being raised while the roll is turning. (ii) A nonskid surface shall be provided in front of the rewinder to prevent an employee from slipping in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section. (iii) Mechanical lifting devices shall be provided for placing and removing rolls from the machine. (10) Control panels. (11) Roll-type embosser. (12) Sorting and counting tables. (ii) Paddles shall be smooth and free from splinters. (13) Roll splitters. (m) Materials handling Hand trucks. (2) [Reserved] (3) Cartons. (4) [Reserved] (5) Unloading cars. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1285, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011; 78 FR 35566, June 13, 2013; 81 FR 83005, Nov. 18, 2016] § 1910.262 Textiles. (a) Application requirements Application. (2) Standards incorporated by reference. (b) Definitions applicable to this section Belt shifter. belt shifter (2) Belt shifter lock. belt shifter lock (3) Calender. calender (4) Embossing calender. embossing calender (5) Cans (drying). cans (6) Carbonizing. Carbonizing (7) Card. card (8) Card clothing. Card clothing (9) Comber. comber (10) Combing machinery. Combing machinery (11) Cutter (rotary staple). cutter (12) Exposed to contact. Exposed to contact (13) Garnett machine. Garnett machine (14) Gill box. gill box (15) Interlock. interlock (16) Jig (dye). jig (17) Kier. kier (18) Lapper (ribbon). lapper (19) Lapper (sliver). lapper (20) Loom. loom (21) Mangle (starch). starch mangle (22) Mangle (water). water mangle (23) Mule. mule (24) Nip. Nip (25) Openers and pickers. Openers and pickers (26) Paddler. paddler (27) Point of operation. Point of operation (28) Printing machine (roller type). roller printing machine (29) Ranges (bleaching continuous). Continuous bleaching ranges (30) Range (mercerizing). mercerizing range (31) Sanforizing machine. sanforizing machine (32) Shearing machine. shearing machine (33) Singeing machine. singeing machine (34) Slasher. slasher (35) Solvent (industrial organic). Industrial organic solvent (36) Tenter frame. tenter frame (37) Warper. warper (c) General safety requirements Means of stopping machines. (2) Handles. (3)-(4) [Reserved] (5) Inspection and maintenance. (6) Lighting. (7) Identification of piping systems. (8) Identification of physical hazards. (9) Steam pipes. (d) Openers and pickers Beater guards. (2) Cleanout holes. (3) Feed rolls. (4) Removal of foreign ferrous material. (e) Cotton cards Enclosures. (2) Enclosure fastenings. (3) Stripping rolls. (f) Garnett machines Lickerin. (2) Fancy rolls. (3) Underside of machine. (g) Spinning mules (h) Slashers Cylinder dryers Reducing valves, safety valves, and pressure gages. (ii) Vacuum relief valves. (iii) Lever control. (iv) Pushbutton control. (v) Nip guards. (vi) Cylinder enclosure. (vii) Expansion chambers. (2) Enclosed hot air dryer Lever control. (ii) Push-button control. (iii) Dryer enclosure. (iv) Nip guards. Table R-1—Guard Openings [Openings in the guard or between the guard and working surface shall not be greater than the following] Distance of opening from nip point Maximum width of opening 0 to 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 2 1 2 3 8 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 5 8 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 6 1 2 1 2 7 8 7 1 2 1 2 1 1 4 The measurements in Table R-1 are all in inches. (v) Expansion chambers. (i) Warpers Swiveled double-bar gates. (2) Closed position. Closed position (j) Drawing frames, slubbers, roving parts, cotton combers, ring spinning frames, twisters. (k) Gill boxes Pin guard. (2) Nip guards. (l) Heavy draw boxes, finishers, and speeders used in worsted drawing Band pulley covers. (2) Benches or working platforms. (m) Sliver and ribbon lappers (cotton). (n) Looms Shuttle guard. (2) Protection for loom fixer. (o) Shearing machines. (p) Continuous bleach range (cotton and rayon) J-box protection. (2) Open-width bleaching. (q) Kiers Reducing valves, safety valves, and pressure gages. (2) Kier valve protection. (r) Gray and white bins. (s) Mercerizing range (piece goods) Stopping devices. (2) Frame ends. (3) Mangle and washers. (t) Tenter frames Stopping devices. (2) Frame ends. (3) Oil cups. (u) Dyeing jigs Stopping devices. (2) Roll arms. (v) Padders Nip guards. (w) Drying cans Pressure reducing valves and pressure gages. (2) Vacuum collapse. (x) Flat-work ironer Feed rolls. (2) Pressure rolls. (y) Extractors Centrifugal extractor Cover. (ii) Interlocking device. (iii) Brakes. (iv) Maximum allowable speed. (2) Engine drum extractor Over-speed governor. (3) Squeezer or wringer extractor Nip guards. (z) Nip guards. (aa) Sanforizing and palmer machine. (bb) Rope washers Splash guard. (2) Safety stop bar. (cc) Laundry washer tumbler or shaker Interlocking device. (2) Means of holding covers or doors in open position. (dd) Printing machine (roller type) Nip guards. (2) Crown wheel and roller gear nip protection. (ee) Calenders. (ff) Rotary staple cutters. (gg) [Reserved] (hh) Hand bailing machine. (ii) Roll bench. (jj) Cuttle or swing folder (overhead type). (kk) Color-mixing room. (ll) Open tanks and vats for mixing and storage of hot or corrosive liquids Shutoff valves. (mm) Dye kettles and vats (nn) Acid carboys. (oo) Handling caustic soda and caustic potash. (pp) First aid. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 49 FR 5324, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016] § 1910.263 Bakery equipment. (a) General requirements Application. (2) [Reserved] (b) [Reserved] (c) General machine guarding. (2) Gears. (3) Sprockets and V-belt drives. (4) [Reserved] (5) Lubrication. (6)-(7) [Reserved] (8) Hot pipes. (d) Flour-handling equipment General requirements for flour handling. ( a ( b ( c ( d (ii) [Reserved] (2) Bag chutes and bag lifts (bag-arm elevators). (ii) Bag-arm elevators with manual takeoff shall be designed to operate at a capacity not exceeding seven bags per minute. The arms on the conveyor chain shall be so spaced as to obtain the full capacity of the elevator with the lowest possible chain speed. There shall be an electric limit switch at the unloading end of the bag-arm elevator so installed as to automatically stop the conveyor chain if any bag fails to clear the conveyor arms. (iii) [Reserved] (iv) Man lifts shall be prohibited in bakeries. Bag or barrel lifts shall not be used as man lifts. (3) Dumpbin and blender. (i)-(iv) [Reserved] (v) All dumpbin and blender hoods shall be of sufficient capacity to prevent circulation of flour dust outside the hoods. (vi) All dumpbins shall be of a suitable height from floor to enable the operator to dump flour from bags, without causing undue strain or fatigue. Where the edge of any bin is more than 24 inches above the flour, a bag rest step shall be provided. (vii) A control device for stopping the dumpbin and blender shall be provided close to the normal location of the operator. (4)-(5) [Reserved] (6) Storage bins. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Storage bins shall be provided with gaskets and locks or latches to keep the cover closed, or other equivalent devices in order to insure the dust tightness of the cover. Covers at openings where an employee may enter the bin shall also be provided with a hasp and a lock, so located that the employee may lock the cover in the open position whenever it is necessary to enter the bin. (iii) Storage bins where the side is more than 5 feet in depth shall be provided with standard stationary safety ladders, both inside and outside, to reach from floor level to top of bin and from top of bin to inside bottom, keeping the ladder end away from the moving screw conveyor. (iv)-(v) [Reserved] (vi) The main entrance cover of large storage bins located at the interior exit ladder shall be provided with an electric interlock for motors operating both feed and unloading screw, so that these motors cannot operate while the cover is open. (7) Screw conveyors. (i)-(ii) [Reserved] (iii) The covers of all screw conveyors shall be made removable in convenient sections, held on with stationary clamps located at proper intervals keeping all covers dust-tight. Where drop or hinged bottom sections are provided this provision shall not apply. (8) Sifters. (ii) [Reserved] (9) Flour scales. (i)-(ii) [Reserved] (iii) Traveling or track-type flour scales shall be equipped with bar handles for moving same. The bar should be at least 1 inch in diameter and well away from trolley track wheels. (e) Mixers Horizontal dough mixers. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) Each mixer shall be equipped with an individual motor and control, and with a conveniently located manual switch to prevent the mixer from being started in the usual manner while the machine is being serviced and cleaned. (iv) All electrical control stations shall be so located that the operator must be in full view of the bowl in its open position. No duplication of such controls other than a stop switch shall be permitted. (v) All mixers with power and manual dumping arrangements shall be equipped with safety devices which shall: ( a ( b (vi)-(vii) [Reserved] (viii) Every mixer shall be equipped with a full enclosure over the bowl which is closed at all times while the agitator is in motion. Only minor openings in this enclosure, such as ingredient doors, flour inlets, etc., each representing less than 1 1/2 (ix) [Reserved] (x) Overhead covers or doors which are subject to accidental closure shall be counterbalanced to remain in an open position or provided with means to hold them open until positively released by the operator. (xi)-(xvii) [Reserved] (xviii) Valves and controls to regulate the coolant in mixer jackets shall be located so as to permit access by the operator without jeopardizing his safety. (2) Vertical mixers. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) Bowl locking devices shall be of a positive type which require the attention of the operator for unlocking. (iv) Devices shall be made available for moving bowls weighing more than 80 pounds, with contents, into and out of the mixing position on the machine. (f) Dividers. (3) Rear of divider. (g) Moulders Hoppers. (2) Hand-fed moulders. (3) Stopping devices. (h) Manually fed dough brakes Top-roll protection. (2) Emergency stop bar (i) Miscellaneous equipment Proof boxes. (2) Fermentation room. (3) Troughs. (4) Hand trucks. (ii) A lock or other device shall be provided to hold the handle in vertical position when the truck is not in use. (5) Lift trucks. (6) Racks. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Racks shall be equipped with handles so located with reference to the frame of the rack that no part of the operator's hands extends beyond the outer edge of the frame when holding onto the handles. (iii) Antifriction bearing casters shall be used to give the operator better control of the rack. (7) Conveyors. (ii) Stop bumpers shall be installed on all delivery ends of conveyors, wherever manual removal of the product carried is practiced. (iii) Where hazard of getting caught exists a sufficient number of stop buttons shall be provided to enable quick stopping of the conveyor. (8)-(10) [Reserved] (11) Ingredient premixers, emulsifiers, etc. (ii) [Reserved] (12) Chain tackle. (ii) All chain tackle shall be marked permanently and legibly with minimum support specification. (iii) Safety hooks shall be used. (13) Trough hoists, etc. (ii) All hoists shall be marked permanently and legibly with minimum support specifications. (iii) Safety catches shall be provided for the chain so that the chain will hold the load in any position. (iv) Safety hooks shall be used. (14) Air-conditioning units. (i) [Reserved] (ii) On large units with doors to chambers large enough to be entered, all door locks shall be operable from both inside and outside. (15) Pan washing tanks. (i) [Reserved] (ii) The surface of the floor of the working platform shall be maintained in nonslip condition. (iii)-(iv) [Reserved] (v) Power ventilated exhaust hoods shall be provided over the tanks. (16)-(19) [Reserved] (20) Bread coolers, rack type. (i) [Reserved] (ii) All door locks shall be operable from both within and outside the cooler. (21) [Reserved] (22) Doughnut machines. (23) Open fat kettles. (ii)-(iii) [Reserved] (iv) The top of the kettle shall be not less than 36 inches above floor or working level. (24) Steam kettles. (ii) Kettles with steam jackets shall be provided with safety valves in accordance with the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (j) Slicers and wrappers Slicers. (i)-(ii) [Reserved] (iii) The cover over the knife head of reciprocating-blade slicers shall be provided with an interlocking arrangement so that the machine cannot operate unless the cover is in place. (iv) On slicers with endless band knives, each motor shall be equipped with a magnet brake which operates whenever the motor is not energized. Each door, panel, or other point of access to the cutting blades shall be arranged by means of mechanical or electric interlocks so that the motor will be deenergized if all such access doors, panels, or access points are not closed. (v) When it is necessary to sharpen slicer blades on the machine, a barrier shall be provided leaving only sufficient opening for the sharpening stone to reach the knife blades. (vi) [Reserved] (vii) Slicer wrapper conditions. ( a b ( c (2) Wrappers. (i)-(ii) [Reserved] (iii) Electrical heaters on wrappers shall be protected by a cover plate properly separated or insulated from the heaters in order that accidental contact with this cover plate will not cause a burn to the operator. (k) Biscuit and cracker equipment Meal, peanut, and fig grinders. (ii) Where grid guards cannot be used, feed conveyors to hoppers, or baffle-type hoppers, shall be provided. Hoppers in such cases shall be enclosed and provided with hinged covers, and equipped with electric interlock to prevent operation of the machine with the cover open. (2) Sugar and spice pulverizers. (ii) Magnetic separators shall be provided to reduce fire and explosion hazards. (3) Cheese, fruit, and food cutters. (4) [Reserved] (5) Reversible dough brakes. (6) Cross-roll brakes. (7) Box- and roll-type dough sheeters. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Hoppers for sheeters shall have an automatic stop bar or automatic stopping device along the back edge of the hopper. If construction does not permit location at the back edge, the automatic stop bar or automatic stopping device shall be located where it will be most effective to accomplish the desired protection. (8) [Reserved] (9) Rotary, die machines, pretzel rolling, and pretzel-stick extruding machines. (10)-(11) [Reserved] (12) Pan cooling towers. (ii) [Reserved] (13) Chocolate melting, refining, and mixing kettles. (14)-(16) [Reserved] (17) Peanut cooling trucks. (l) Ovens General location. (i)-(vi) [Reserved] (vii) Ovens shall be located so that possible fire or explosion will not expose groups of persons to possible injury. For this reason ovens shall not adjoin lockers, lunch or sales rooms, main passageways, or exits. (2) [Reserved] (3) Safeguards of mechanical parts. (ii) All piping at ovens shall be tested to be gastight. (iii) Main shutoff valves, operable separately from any automatic valve, shall be provided to permit turning off the fuel or steam in case of an emergency. ( a ( b (4)-(7) [Reserved] (8) Electrical heating equipment. (i)-(ii) [Reserved] (iii) A main disconnect switch or circuit breaker shall be provided. This switch or circuit breaker shall be so located that it can be reached quickly and safely. The main switch or circuit breaker shall have provisions for locking it in the open position if any work on the electrical equipment or inside the oven must be performed. (9) General requirements. (ii) All safety devices on ovens shall be inspected at intervals of not less than twice a month by an especially appointed, properly instructed bakery employee, and not less than once a year by representatives of the oven manufacturers. (iii)( a ( b (iv) Burners of a capacity exceeding 150,000 B.t.u. per hour equipped with electric ignition shall be protected in addition by quick-acting combustion safeguards. ( a ( b ( c (v) When fuel is supplied and used at line pressure, safety shutoff valves shall be provided in the fuel line leading to the burner. ( a ( b ( c d ( e ( f ( g ( h (vi) One main, manually operated, fuel shutoff valve shall be provided on each oven, and shall be located ahead of all other valves in the system. (vii) All individual gas or oil burners with a heating capacity over 150,000 B.t.u. per hour shall be protected by a safeguard which is actuated by the flame and which will react to flame failure in a time interval not to exceed 2 seconds. All safeguards, once having shut down a gas or oil burner, shall require manual resetting and starting of the burner or burners. (viii) Any space in an oven (except direct fired ovens) which could be filled with an explosive mixture shall be protected by explosion vents. Explosion vents shall be made of minimum weight consistent with adequate insulation. ( a ( b ( c a b (ix)-(x) [Reserved] (xi) Where the gas supply pressure is substantially higher than that at which the burners of an oven are designed to operate, a gas pressure regulator shall be employed. ( a c ( d (10) Direct-fired ovens. (ii) To prevent the possible accumulation of explosive gases from being ignited after a shutdown, all direct-fired ovens with a heating capacity over 150,000 B.t.u. per hour shall be ventilated before the ignition system, combustion air blower, and the fuel can be turned on. The preventilation shall insure at least four complete changes of atmosphere in the baking chamber by discharging the oven atmosphere to the outside of the building and entraining fresh air into it. The preventilation shall be repeated whenever the heating equipment is shut down by a safety device. (11) Direct recirculating ovens. (ii) The flame of the burner or burners in direct recirculating ovens shall be protected by a quick-acting flame-sensitive safeguard which will automatically shut off the fuel supply in case of burner failure. (12)-(14) [Reserved] (15) Indirect recirculating ovens. (i)-(ii) [Reserved] (iii) Duct systems (in ovens) operating under pressure shall be tested for tightness in the initial starting of the oven and also at intervals not farther apart than 6 months. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49765, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.264 Laundry machinery and operations. (a) [Reserved] (b) General requirements. (c) Point-of-operation guards Washroom machines. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Washing machine. ( a ( b (2) Starching and drying machines. (i)-(ii) [Reserved] (iii) Drying tumbler. ( a ( b (iv) Shaker (clothes tumbler). ( a b 1 ( 2 (v) Exception. a 1 b (3) [Reserved] (4) Miscellaneous machines and equipment. (i)-(ii) [Reserved] (iii) Steam pipes. a ( b (d) Operating rules General. (i)-(ii) [Reserved] (iii) Markers. (iv) [Reserved] (v) Instruction of employees. (2) Mechanical Safety guards. a (b) [Reserved] [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49767, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978] § 1910.265 Sawmills. (a) General requirements—Application. (b) Definitions applicable to this section A-frame. A-frame (2) Annealing. annealing (3) Binder. binder (4) Boom. boom (5) Brow log. brow log (6) Bunk. bunk (7) Cant. cant (8) Carriage (log carriage). carriage (9) Carrier. carrier (10) Chipper. chipper (11) Chock (bunk block) (cheese block). chock, bunk block, cheese block (12) Cold deck. cold deck (13) Crotch lines. crotch lines (14) Dog (carriage dog). dog (15) Drag saw. drag saw (16) Head block. head block (17) Head rig. head rig (18) Hog. hog (19) Husk. husk (20) Industrial truck. industrial truck (21) Kiln tender. kiln tender (22) Lift truck. lift truck (23) Live rolls. live rolls (24) Loading boom. loading boom (25) Log deck. Log deck (26) Lumber hauling truck. lumber hauling truck (27) Log haul. log haul (28) Package. package (29) Peavy. peavy (30) Pike pole. pike pole (31) Pitman rod. pitman rod (32) Resaw. resaw (33) Running line. running line (34) Safety factor. safety factor (35) Saw guide. saw guide (36) Setwork. setwork (37) Sorting gaps. sorting gaps (38) Spreader wheel. spreader wheel (39) Splitter. splitter (40) Sticker. sticker (41) Stiff boom. stiff boom (42) Swifter. swifter (43) Telltale. telltale (44) Top saw. top saw (45) Tramway. tramway (46) Trestle. trestle (c) Building facilities, and isolated equipment Safety factor. (2) Work areas. (3) Floors. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Areas beneath floor openings. (iii) Floor maintenance. (iv) Nonslip floors. (4) Walkways, docks, and platforms Width. (ii) Maintenance. (iii) Docks. (iv) Elevated walks. (v) Elevated platforms. (vi) Hazardous locations. (5) Stairways Construction. (ii) Handrails. (iii) Lighting. (6) Emergency exits including doors and fire escapes Opening. (ii) Identification. (iii) Swinging doors. (iv) Sliding doors. (v) Barriers and warning signs. (7) Air requirements. (8) Vats and tanks. (9) Lighting Adequacy. (ii) Effectiveness. ( a ( b ( c (10) [Reserved] (11) Hazard marking. (12) [Reserved] (13) Hydraulic systems. (14) [Reserved] (15) Gas piping and appliances. (16)-(17) [Reserved] (18) Conveyors Standards. (ii) Guarding. (19) Stationary tramways and trestles Foundations and walkways. (ii) Clearance. (20) Blower, collecting, and exhaust systems Design, construction, and maintenance. (ii) Collecting systems. (iii) Exhaust or conveyor systems. (iv) [Reserved] (v) Dust chambers. (vi) Hand removal of refuse. (21) Chippers Whole-log chippers. (ii) Hogs. a ( b ( c (22) [Reserved] (23) Bins, bunkers, hoppers, and fuel houses Guarding. (ii) Use of wheeled equipment to load bins. (iii) Exits, lighting, and safety devices. (iv) Walkways. (24) Ropes, cables, slings, and chains Safe usage. (ii) Hooks. (iii) Work by qualified persons. (iv) Slings. (v) Ropes or cables. a ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 ( b ( c (vi) Drums, sheaves, and pulleys. (vii) Connections. (viii) Socketing, splicing, and seizing. a ( b ( c ( d ( e Fittings. ( f Running lines. ( g Number of wraps on drum. ( h Drum flanges. ( i Sheave guards. ( j Preventing abrasion. (ix) Chains. a ( b ( c ( d ( e (x) Fiber rope. a ( b ( c (25) [Reserved] (26) Mechanical stackers and unstackers. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Lumber lifting devices. (iii) Blocking hoisting platform. (iv) Identifying controls. (v) Locking main control switches. (vi) Guarding side openings. (vii) Guarding hoistway openings. (viii) Guarding lower landing area. (ix) Inspection. (x) Cleaning pits. (xi) Preventing entry to hazardous area. (27) Lumber piling and storage Pile foundations. (ii) Stacking dissimilar unit packages. (iii) Unstable piles. (iv) Stickers. (v) Sticker alignment. (vi) Pile height. (28) Lumber loading. (29) Burners Guying. (ii) Runway. (30) Vehicles Scope. (ii) Warning signals and spark arrestors. (iii) Lights. (iv) Overhead guard. (v) Platform guard. (vi) [Reserved] (vii) Operation in buildings. (viii) Load limits. (ix) Brakes. (x) [Reserved] (xi) Carriers. a ( b (xii) Lumber hauling trucks. a ( b ( c (31) Traffic control and flow Hazardous crossings. (ii) Restricted overhead clearance. (iii) Pickup and unloading points. (iv) Aisles, passageways, and roadways. (d) Log handling, sorting, and storage Log unloading methods, equipment, and facilities Unloading methods. a ( b ( c ( d (ii) Unloading equipment and facilities. a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i ( j (2) Log unloading and storage areas General. a ( b ( c ( d (ii) Water log dumps. a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h (iii) Log booms and ponds. a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i ( j ( k (iv) Pond boats and rafts. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (v) Dry deck storage. a ( b ( c (vi) Log hauls and slips. a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h (3) Log decks Access. (ii) Stops. (iii) Barricade. (iv) Loose chains. (v) Swing saws. (vi) Drag saws. (vii) Circular cutoff saws. (viii) Entrance doorway. (4) Mechanical barkers Rotary barkers. (ii) Elevating ramp. (iii) Area around barkers. (iv) Enclosing hydraulic barkers. (v) Holddown rolls. (e) Log breakdown and related machinery and facilities Log carriages and carriage runways Bumpers. (ii) Footing. (iii) Sheave housing. (iv) Carriage control. (v) Barriers and warning signs. (vi) Overhead clearance. (vii) Sweeping devices. (viii) Dogs. (2) Head saws Band head saws. a ( b ( c (ii) Bandsaw wheels. a ( b ( c (iii) Single circular head saws. a ( b ( c ( d (iv) Twin circular head saws. (v) Whole-log sash gang saws (Swedish gangs). a ( b ( c (3) Resaws Band resaws. (ii) Circular gang resaws. a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (iii) Sash gang resaws. (4) Trimmer saws Maximum speed. (ii) Guards. a ( b ( c (iii) Safety stops. (5) Edgers Location. a ( b (ii) Guards. a ( b ( c (iii) Antikickback devices. a ( b (iv) Operating speed of live rolls. (6) Planers Guards. a ( b ( c ( d (f) Dry kilns and facilities Kiln foundations. (2) Passageways. (3) Doors Main kiln doors. a ( b ( c (ii) Escape doors. a ( b (4) Pits. (5) Steam mains. (6) Ladders. (7) Chocks. (8) Kiln tender room. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978; 53 FR 12123, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016] § 1910.266 Logging operations. (a) Table of contents. a. Table of contents b. Scope and application c. Definitions d. General requirements 1. Personal protective equipment 2. First-aid kits 3. Seat belts 4. Fire extinguishers 5. Environmental conditions 6. Work areas 7. Signaling and signal equipment 8. Overhead electric lines 9. Flammable and combustible liquids 10. Explosives and blasting agents e. Hand and portable powered tools 1. General requirements 2. Chain saws f. Machines 1. General requirements 2. Machine operation 3. Protective structures 4. Overhead guards 5. Machine access 6. Exhaust systems 7. Brakes 8. Guarding g. Vehicles h. Tree harvesting 1. General requirements 2. Manual felling 3. Bucking and limbing 4. Chipping 5. Yarding 6. Loading and unloading 7. Transport 8. Storage i. Training j. Appendices Appendix A—Minimum First-aid Supplies Appendix B—Minimum First-aid Training Appendix C—Corresponding ISO Agreements (b) Scope and application. (2) This standard applies to all logging operations as defined by this section. (3) Hazards and working conditions not specifically addressed by this section are covered by other applicable sections of part 1910. (c) Definitions applicable to this section. Arch. Backcut (felling cut). Ballistic nylon. Buck. Butt. Cable yarding. Chock. Choker. Danger tree. Debark. Deck. Designated person. Domino felling. Fell (fall). Feller (faller). Grounded. Guarded. Health care provider. Landing. Limbing. Lodged tree (hung tree). Log. Logging operations. Machine. Rated capacity. Root wad. Serviceable condition. Skidding. Slope (grade). Snag. Spring pole. Tie down. Undercut. Vehicle. Winching. Yarding. (d) General requirements Personal protective equipment. (ii) The employer shall assure that personal protective equipment, including any personal protective equipment provided by an employee, is inspected before initial use during each workshift. Defects or damage shall be repaired or the unserviceable personal protective equipment shall be replaced before work is commenced. (iii) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and assure that each employee handling wire rope wears, hand protection which provides adequate protection from puncture wounds, cuts and lacerations. (iv) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and assure that each employee who operates a chain saw wears leg protection constructed with cut-resistant material, such as ballistic nylon. The leg protection shall cover the full length of the thigh to the top of the boot on each leg to protect against contact with a moving chain saw. Exception: (v) The employer shall assure that each employee wears foot protection, such as heavy-duty logging boots that are waterproof or water repellant, cover and provide support to the ankle. The employer shall assure that each employee who operates a chain saw wears foot protection that is constructed with cut-resistant material which will protect the employee against contact with a running chain saw. Sharp, calk-soled boots or other slip-resistant type boots may be worn where the employer demonstrates that they are necessary for the employee's job, the terrain, the timber type, and the weather conditions, provided that foot protection otherwise required by this paragraph is met. (vi) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and assure that each employee who works in an area where there is potential for head injury from falling or flying objects wears head protection meeting the requirements of subpart I of part 1910. (vii) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and assure that each employee wears the following: (A) Eye protection meeting the requirements of subpart I of part 1910 where there is potential for eye injury due to falling or flying objects; and (B) Face protection meeting the requirements of subpart I of part 1910 where there is potential for facial injury such as, but not limited to, operating a chipper. Logger-type mesh screens may be worn by employees performing chain-saw operations and yarding. Note to paragraph ( d vii The employee does not have to wear a separate eye protection device where face protection covering both the eyes and face is worn. (2) First-aid kits. (ii) At a minimum, each first-aid kit shall contain the items listed in appendix A at all times. (iii) The employer also may have the number and content of first-aid kits reviewed and approved annually by a health care provider. (iv) The employer shall maintain the contents of each first-aid kit in a serviceable condition. (3) Seat belts. (i) That a seat belt is provided for each vehicle or machine operator; (ii) That each employee uses the available seat belt while the vehicle or machine is being operated; (iii) That each employee securely and tightly fastens the seat belt to restrain the employee within the vehicle or machine cab; (iv) That each machine seat belt meets the requirements of the Society of Automotive Engineers Standard SAE J386, June 1985, “Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines”, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (v) That seat belts are not removed from any vehicle or machine. The employer shall replace each seat belt which has been removed from any vehicle or machine that was equipped with seat belts at the time of manufacture; and (vi) That each seat belt is maintained in a serviceable condition. (4) Fire extinguishers. (5) Environmental conditions. (6) Work areas. (ii) Work areas shall be assigned so that trees cannot fall into an adjacent occupied work area. The distance between adjacent occupied work areas shall be at least two tree lengths of the trees being felled. The distance between adjacent occupied work areas shall reflect the degree of slope, the density of the growth, the height of the trees, the soil structure and other hazards reasonably anticipated at that work site. A distance of greater than two tree lengths shall be maintained between adjacent occupied work areas on any slope where rolling or sliding of trees or logs is reasonably foreseeable. (iii) Each employee performing a logging operation at a logging work site shall work in a position or location that is within visual or audible contact with another employee. (iv) The employer shall account for each employee at the end of each workshift. (7) Signaling and signal equipment. (ii) Engine noise, such as from a chain saw, is not an acceptable means of signaling. Other locally and regionally recognized signals may be used. (iii) Only a designated person shall give signals, except in an emergency. (8) Overhead electric lines. (ii) The employer shall notify the power company immediately if a felled tree makes contact with any power line. Each employee shall remain clear of the area until the power company advises that there are no electrical hazards. (9) Flammable and combustible liquids. (ii) Flammable and combustible liquids shall not be transported in the driver compartment or in any passenger-occupied area of a machine or vehicle. (iii) Each machine, vehicle, and portable powered tool shall be shut off during fueling. Diesel-powered machines and vehicles may be fueled while they are at idle, provided that continued operation is intended and that the employer follows safe fueling and operating procedures. (iv) Flammable and combustible liquids, including chain-saw and diesel fuel, may be used to start a fire, provided the employer assures that in the particular situation its use does not create a hazard for an employee. (10) Explosives and blasting agents. (ii) Only a designated person shall handle or use explosives and blasting agents. (iii) Explosives and blasting agents shall not be transported in the driver compartment or in any passenger-occupied area of a machine or vehicle. (e) Hand and portable powered tools General requirements. (ii) The employer shall assure that each tool, including any tool provided by an employee, is inspected before initial use during each workshift. At a minimum, the inspection shall include the following: (A) Handles and guards, to assure that they are sound, tight-fitting, properly shaped, free of splinters and sharp edges, and in place; (B) Controls, to assure proper function; (C) Chain-saw chains, to assure proper adjustment; (D) Chain-saw mufflers, to assure that they are operational and in place; (E) Chain brakes and nose shielding devices, to assure that they are in place and function properly; (F) Heads of shock, impact-driven and driving tools, to assure that there is no mushrooming; (G) Cutting edges, to assure that they are sharp and properly shaped; and (H) All other safety devices, to assure that they are in place and function properly. (iii) The employer shall assure that each tool is used only for purposes for which it has been designed. (iv) When the head of any shock, impact-driven or driving tool begins to chip, it shall be repaired or removed from service. (v) The cutting edge of each tool shall be sharpened in accordance with manufacturer's specifications whenever it becomes dull during the workshift. (vi) Each tool shall be stored in the provided location when not being used at a work site. (vii) Racks, boxes, holsters or other means shall be provided, arranged and used for the transportation of tools so that a hazard is not created for any vehicle operator or passenger. (2) Chain saws. (ii) Each gasoline-powered chain saw shall be equipped with a continuous pressure throttle control system which will stop the chain when pressure on the throttle is released. (iii) The chain saw shall be operated and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. (iv) The chain saw shall be fueled at least 10 feet (3 m) from any open flame or other source of ignition. (v) The chain saw shall be started at least 10 feet (3 m) from the fueling area. (vi) The chain saw shall be started on the ground or where otherwise firmly supported. Drop starting a chain saw is prohibited. (vii) The chain saw shall be started with the chain brake engaged. (viii) The chain saw shall be held with the thumbs and fingers of both hands encircling the handles during operation unless the employer demonstrates that a greater hazard is posed by keeping both hands on the chain saw in that particular situation. (ix) The chain-saw operator shall be certain of footing before starting to cut. The chain saw shall not be used in a position or at a distance that could cause the operator to become off-balance, to have insecure footing, or to relinquish a firm grip on the saw. (x) Prior to felling any tree, the chain-saw operator shall clear away brush or other potential obstacles which might interfere with cutting the tree or using the retreat path. (xi) The chain saw shall not be used to cut directly overhead. (xii) The chain saw shall be carried in a manner that will prevent operator contact with the cutting chain and muffler. (xiii) The chain saw shall be shut off or the throttle released before the feller starts his retreat. (xiv) The chain saw shall be shut down or the chain brake shall be engaged whenever a saw is carried further than 50 feet (15.2 m). The chain saw shall be shut down or the chain brake shall be engaged when a saw is carried less than 50 feet if conditions such as, but not limited to, the terrain, underbrush and slippery surfaces, may create a hazard for an employee. (f) Machines General requirements. (ii) The employer shall assure that each machine, including any machine provided by an employee, is inspected before initial use during each workshift. Defects or damage shall be repaired or the unserviceable machine shall be replaced before work is commenced. (iii) The employer shall assure that operating and maintenance instructions are available on the machine or in the area where the machine is being operated. Each machine operator and maintenance employee shall comply with the operating and maintenance instructions. (2) Machine operation. (ii) Stationary logging machines and their components shall be anchored or otherwise stabilized to prevent movement during operation. (iii) The rated capacity of any machine shall not be exceeded. (iv) To maintain stability, the machine must be operated within the limitations imposed by the manufacturer as described in the operating and maintenance instructions for that machine. (v) Before starting or moving any machine, the operator shall determine that no employee is in the path of the machine. (vi) The machine shall be operated only from the operator's station or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. (vii) The machine shall be operated at such a distance from employees and other machines such that operation will not create a hazard for an employee. (viii) No employee other than the operator shall ride on any mobile machine unless seating, seat belts and other protection equivalent to that provided for the operator are provided. (ix) No employee shall ride on any load. (x) Before the operator leaves the operator's station of a machine, it shall be secured as follows: (A) The parking brake or brake locks shall be applied; (B) The transmission shall be placed in the manufacturer's specified park position; and (C) Each moving element such as, but not limited to blades, buckets, saws and shears, shall be lowered to the ground or otherwise secured. (xi) If a hydraulic or pneumatic storage device can move the moving elements such as, but not limited to, blades, buckets, saws and shears, after the machine is shut down, the pressure or stored energy from the element shall be discharged as specified by the manufacturer. (xii) The rated capacity of any vehicle transporting a machine shall not be exceeded. (xiii) The machine shall be loaded, secured and unloaded so that it will not create a hazard for any employee. (3) Protective structures. Exception: (ii)(A) ROPS shall be tested, installed, and maintained in serviceable condition. (B) Each machine manufactured after August 1, 1996, shall have ROPS tested, installed, and maintained in accordance with the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J1040, April 1988, “Performance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry, and Mining Machines”, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (C) This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from the Society of Automotive Engineers, 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096. Copies may be inspected at the Docket Office, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW., room N2625, Washington, DC 20210, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (iii) FOPS shall be installed, tested and maintained in accordance with the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J231, January 1981, “Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structures (FOPS)”, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (iv) ROPS and FOPS shall meet the requirements of the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J397, April 1988, “Deflection Limiting Volume-ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation”, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (v) Each protective structure shall be of a size that does not impede the operator's normal movements. (vi) The overhead covering of each cab shall be of solid material and shall extend over the entire canopy. (vii) Each machine manufactured after August 1, 1996, shall have a cab that is fully enclosed with mesh material with openings no greater than 2 inches (5.08 cm) at its least dimension. The cab may be enclosed with other material(s) where the employer demonstrates such material(s) provides equivalent protection and visibility. Exception: Equivalent visibility is not required for the lower portion of the cab where there are control panels or similar obstructions in the cab, or where visibility is not necessary for safe operation of the machine. (viii) Each machine manufactured on or before August 1, 1996 shall have a cab which meets the requirements specified in paragraph (f)(3)(vii) or a protective canopy for the operator which meets the following requirements: (A) The protective canopy shall be constructed to protect the operator from injury due to falling trees, limbs, saplings or branches which might enter the compartment side areas and from snapping winch lines or other objects; (B) The lower portion of the cab shall be fully enclosed with solid material, except at entrances, to prevent the operator from being injured from obstacles entering the cab; (C) The upper rear portion of the cab shall be fully enclosed with open mesh material with openings of such size as to reject the entrance of an object larger than 2 inches in diameter. It shall provide maximum rearward visibility; and (D) Open mesh shall be extended forward as far as possible from the rear corners of the cab sides so as to give the maximum protection against obstacles, branches, etc., entering the cab area. (ix) The enclosure of the upper portion of each cab shall allow maximum visibility. (x) When transparent material is used to enclose the upper portion of the cab, it shall be made of safety glass or other material that the employer demonstrates provides equivalent protection and visibility. (xi) Transparent material shall be kept clean to assure operator visibility. (xii) Transparent material that may create a hazard for the operator, such as but not limited to, cracked, broken or scratched safety glass, shall be replaced. (xiii) Deflectors shall be installed in front of each cab to deflect whipping saplings and branches. Deflectors shall be located so as not to impede visibility and access to the cab. (xiv) The height of each cab entrance shall be at least 52 inches (1.3 meters) from the floor of the cab. (xv) Each machine operated near cable yarding operations shall be equipped with sheds or roofs of sufficient strength to provide protection from breaking lines. (4) Overhead guards. (5) Machine access. (ii) Each machine cab shall have a second means of egress. (iii) Walking and working surfaces of each machine and machine work station shall have a slip resistant surface to assure safe footing. (iv) The walking and working surface of each machine shall be kept free of waste, debris and any other material which might result in fire, slipping, or falling. (6) Exhaust systems. (ii) The exhaust pipes on each machine shall be mounted or guarded to protect each employee from accidental contact. (iii) The exhaust pipes shall be equipped with spark arresters. Engines equipped with turbochargers do not require spark arresters. (iv) Each machine muffler provided by the manufacturer, or their equivalent, shall be in place at all times the machine is in operation. (7) Brakes. (ii) Each machine placed into initial service on or after September 8, 1995 shall also be equipped with: back-up or secondary brakes that are capable of stopping the machine regardless of the direction of travel or whether the engine is running; and parking brakes that are capable of continuously holding a stopped machine stationary. (8) Guarding. (ii) Each machine used for debarking, limbing and chipping shall be equipped with guarding to protect employees from flying wood chunks, logs, chips, bark, limbs and other material in accordance with the requirements of subpart O of part 1910. (iii) The guarding on each machine shall be in place at all times the machine is in operation. (g) Vehicles. (2) The employer shall assure that each vehicle used to perform any logging operation is inspected before initial use during each workshift. Defects or damage shall be repaired or the unserviceable vehicle shall be replaced before work is commenced. (3) The employer shall assure that operating and maintenance instructions are available in each vehicle. Each vehicle operator and maintenance employee shall comply with the operating and maintenance instructions. (4) The employer shall assure that each vehicle operator has a valid operator's license for the class of vehicle being operated. (5) Mounting steps and handholds shall be provided for each vehicle wherever it is necessary to prevent an employee from being injured when entering or leaving the vehicle. (6) The seats of each vehicle shall be securely fastened. (7) The requirements of paragraphs (f)(2)(iii), (f)(2)(v), (f)(2)(vii), (f)(2)(x), (f)(2)(xiii), and (f)(7) of this section shall also apply to each vehicle used to transport any employee off public roads or to perform any logging operation, including any vehicle provided by an employee. (h) Tree harvesting General requirements. (ii) The immediate supervisor shall be consulted when unfamiliar or unusually hazardous conditions necessitate the supervisor's approval before cutting is commenced. (iii) While manual felling is in progress, no yarding machine shall be operated within two tree lengths of trees being manually felled. Exception: This provision does not apply to yarding machines performing tree pulling operations. (iv) No employee shall approach a feller closer than two tree lengths of trees being felled until the feller has acknowledged that it is safe to do so, unless the employer demonstrates that a team of employees is necessary to manually fell a particular tree. (v) No employee shall approach a mechanical felling operation closer than two tree lengths of the trees being felled until the machine operator has acknowledged that it is safe to do so. (vi) Each danger tree shall be felled, removed or avoided. Each danger tree, including lodged trees and snags, shall be felled or removed using mechanical or other techniques that minimize employee exposure before work is commenced in the area of the danger tree. If the danger tree is not felled or removed, it shall be marked and no work shall be conducted within two tree lengths of the danger tree unless the employer demonstrates that a shorter distance will not create a hazard for an employee. (vii) Each danger tree shall be carefully checked for signs of loose bark, broken branches and limbs or other damage before they are felled or removed. Accessible loose bark and other damage that may create a hazard for an employee shall be removed or held in place before felling or removing the tree. (viii) Felling on any slope where rolling or sliding of trees or logs is reasonably foreseeable shall be done uphill from, or on the same level as, previously felled trees. (ix) Domino felling of trees is prohibited. Note to paragraph ( h ix The definition of domino felling does not include the felling of a single danger tree by felling another single tree into it. (2) Manual felling. (ii) Before each tree is felled, conditions such as, but not limited to, snow and ice accumulation, the wind, the lean of tree, dead limbs, and the location of other trees, shall be evaluated by the feller and precautions taken so a hazard is not created for an employee. (iii) Each tree shall be checked for accumulations of snow and ice. Accumulations of snow and ice that may create a hazard for an employee shall be removed before felling is commenced in the area or the area shall be avoided. (iv) When a spring pole or other tree under stress is cut, no employee other than the feller shall be closer than two trees lengths when the stress is released. (v) An undercut shall be made in each tree being felled unless the employer demonstrates that felling the particular tree without an undercut will not create a hazard for an employee. The undercut shall be of a size so the tree will not split and will fall in the intended direction. (vi) A backcut shall be made in each tree being felled. The backcut shall leave sufficient hinge wood to hold the tree to the stump during most of its fall so that the hinge is able to guide the tree's fall in the intended direction. (vii) The backcut shall be above the level of the horizontal facecut in order to provide an adequate platform to prevent kickback. Exception: The backcut may be at or below the horizontal facecut in tree pulling operations. Note to paragraph ( h vii This requirement does not apply to open face felling where two angled facecuts rather than a horizontal facecut are used. (3) Limbing and bucking. (ii) Before bucking or limbing wind-thrown trees, precautions shall be taken to prevent the root wad, butt or logs from striking an employee. These precautions include, but are not limited to, chocking or moving the tree to a stable position. (4) Chipping (in-woods locations). (ii) Infeed and discharge ports shall be guarded to prevent contact with the disc, knives, or blower blades. (iii) The chipper shall be shut down and locked out in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.147 when an employee performs any servicing or maintenance. (iv) Detached trailer chippers shall be chocked during usage on any slope where rolling or sliding of the chipper is reasonably foreseeable. (5) Yarding. (ii) Each choker shall be hooked and unhooked from the uphill side or end of the log, unless the employer demonstrates that is it not feasible in the particular situation to hook or unhook the choker from the uphill side. Where the choker is hooked or unhooked from the downhill side or end of the log, the log shall be securely chocked to prevent rolling, sliding or swinging. (iii) Each choker shall be positioned near the end of the log or tree length. (iv) Each machine shall be positioned during winching so the machine and winch are operated within their design limits. (v) No yarding line shall be moved unless the yarding machine operator has clearly received and understood the signal to do so. When in doubt, the yarding machine operator shall repeat the signal and wait for a confirming signal before moving any line. (vi) No load shall exceed the rated capacity of the pallet, trailer, or other carrier. (vii) Towed equipment, such as but not limited to, skid pans, pallets, arches, and trailers, shall be attached to each machine or vehicle in such a manner as to allow a full 90 degree turn; to prevent overrunning of the towing machine or vehicle; and to assure that the operator is always in control of the towed equipment. (viii) The yarding machine or vehicle, including its load, shall be operated with safe clearance from all obstructions that may create a hazard for an employee. (ix) Each yarded tree shall be placed in a location that does not create a hazard for an employee and an orderly manner so that the trees are stable before bucking or limbing is commenced. (6) Loading and unloading. (ii) Only the loading or unloading machine operator and other personnel the employer demonstrates are essential shall be in the loading or unloading work area during this operation. (iii) No transport vehicle operator shall remain in the cab during loading and unloading if the logs are carried or moved over the truck cab, unless the employer demonstrates that it is necessary for the operator to do so. Where the transport vehicle operator remains in the cab, the employer shall provide operator protection, such as but not limited to, reinforcement of the cab. (iv) Each log shall be placed on a transport vehicle in an orderly manner and tightly secured. (v) The load shall be positioned to prevent slippage or loss during handling and transport. (vi) Each stake and chock which is used to trip loads shall be so constructed that the tripping mechanism is activated on the side opposite the release of the load. (vii) Each tie down shall be left in place over the peak log to secure all logs until the unloading lines or other protection the employer demonstrates is equivalent has been put in place. A stake of sufficient strength to withstand the forces of shifting or moving logs, shall be considered equivalent protection provided that the logs are not loaded higher than the stake. (viii) Each tie down shall be released only from the side on which the unloading machine operates, except as follows: (A) When the tie down is released by a remote control device; and (B) When the employee making the release is protected by racks, stanchions or other protection the employer demonstrates is capable of withstanding the force of the logs. (7) Transport. (8) Storage. (i) Training. (2) Frequency. (i) As soon as possible but not later than the effective date of this section for initial training for each current and new employee; (ii) Prior to initial assignment for each new employee; (iii) Whenever the employee is assigned new work tasks, tools, equipment, machines or vehicles; and (iv) Whenever an employee demonstrates unsafe job performance. (3) Content. (i) Safe performance of assigned work tasks; (ii) Safe use, operation and maintenance of tools, machines and vehicles the employee uses or operates, including emphasis on understanding and following the manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions, warnings and precautions; (iii) Recognition of safety and health hazards associated with the employee's specific work tasks, including the use of measures and work practices to prevent or control those hazards; (iv) Recognition, prevention and control of other safety and health hazards in the logging industry; (v) Procedures, practices and requirements of the employer's work site; and (vi) The requirements of this standard. (4) Training of an employee due to unsafe job performance, or assignment of new work tasks, tools, equipment, machines, or vehicles; may be limited to those elements in paragraph (i)(3) of this section which are relevant to the circumstances giving rise to the need for training. (5) Portability of training. (ii) Each new employee who has received training in the particular elements specified in paragraph (i)(3) of this section shall not be required to be retrained in those elements prior to initial assignment. (iii) The employer shall train each current and new employee in those elements for which the employee has not received training. (iv) The employer is responsible for ensuring that each current and new employee can properly and safely perform the work tasks and operate the tools, equipment, machines, and vehicles used in their job. (6) Each new employee and each employee who is required to be trained as specified in paragraph (i)(2) of this section, shall work under the close supervision of a designated person until the employee demonstrates to the employer the ability to safely perform their new duties independently. (7) First-aid training. (ii) The employer shall assure that each employee's first-aid and CPR training and/or certificate of training remain current. (8) All training shall be conducted by a designated person. (9) The employer shall assure that all training required by this section is presented in a manner that the employee is able to understand. The employer shall assure that all training materials used are appropriate in content and vocabulary to the educational level, literacy, and language skills of the employees being trained. (10) Certification of training. (ii) The most recent training certification shall be maintained. (11) Safety and health meetings. (j) Appendices. Note: In the Federal Register 1. (d)(1)(v)—insofar as it requires foot protection to be chain-saw resistant. 2. (d)(1)(vii)—insofar as it required face protection. 3. (d)(2)(iii). 4. (f)(2)(iv). 5. (f)(2)(xi). 6. (f)(3)(ii). 7. (f)(3)(vii). 8. (f)(3)(viii). 9. (f)(7)(ii)—insofar as it requires parking brakes to be able to stop a moving machine. 10. (g)(1) and (g)(2) insofar as they require inspection and maintenance of employee-owned vehicles. 11. (h)(2)(vii)—insofar as it precludes backcuts at the level of the horizontal cut of the undercut when the Humboldt cutting method is used. Appendix A to § 1910.266—First-Aid Kits (Mandatory) The following list sets forth the minimally acceptable number and type of first-aid supplies for first-aid kits required under paragraph (d)(2) of the logging standard. The contents of the first-aid kit listed should be adequate for small work sites, consisting of approximately two to three employees. When larger operations or multiple operations are being conducted at the same location, additional first-aid kits should be provided at the work site or additional quantities of supplies should be included in the first-aid kits: 1. Gauze pads (at least 4 × 4 inches). 2. Two large gauze pads (at least 8 × 10 inches). 3. Box adhesive bandages (band-aids). 4. One package gauze roller bandage at least 2 inches wide. 5. Two triangular bandages. 6. Wound cleaning agent such as sealed moistened towelettes. 7. Scissors. 8. At least one blanket. 9. Tweezers. 10. Adhesive tape. 11. Latex gloves. 12. Resuscitation equipment such as resuscitation bag, airway, or pocket mask. 13. Two elastic wraps. 14. Splint. 15. Directions for requesting emergency assistance. Appendix B to § 1910.266—First-aid and CPR Training (Mandatory) The following is deemed to be the minimal acceptable first-aid and CPR training program for employees engaged in logging activities. First-aid and CPR training shall be conducted using the conventional methods of training such as lecture, demonstration, practical exercise and examination (both written and practical). The length of training must be sufficient to assure that trainees understand the concepts of first aid and can demonstrate their ability to perform the various procedures contained in the outline below. At a minimum, first-aid and CPR training shall consist of the following: 1. The definition of first aid. 2. Legal issues of applying first aid (Good Samaritan Laws). 3. Basic anatomy. 4. Patient assessment and first aid for the following: a. Respiratory arrest. b. Cardiac arrest. c. Hemorrhage. d. Lacerations/abrasions. e. Amputations. f. Musculoskeletal injuries. g. Shock. h. Eye injuries. i. Burns. j. Loss of consciousness. k. Extreme temperature exposure (hypothermia/hyperthermia) l. Paralysis m. Poisoning. n. Loss of mental functioning (psychosis/hallucinations, etc.). Artificial ventilation. o. Drug overdose. 5. CPR. 6. Application of dressings and slings. 7. Treatment of strains, sprains, and fractures. 8. Immobilization of injured persons. 9. Handling and transporting injured persons. 10. Treatment of bites, stings, or contact with poisonous plants or animals. Appendix C to § 1910.266—Comparable ISO Standards (Non-mandatory) The following International Labor Organization (ISO) standards are comparable to the corresponding Society of Automotive Engineers (Standards that are referenced in this standard.) Utilization of the ISO standards in lieu of the corresponding SAE standards should result in a machine that meets the OSHA standard. SAE standard ISO standard Subject SAE J1040 ISO 3471-1 Performance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry and Mining Machines. SAE J397 ISO 3164 Deflection Limiting Volume—ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation. SAE J231 ISO 3449 Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structures (FOPS). SAE J386 ISO 6683 Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines. SAE J185 ISO 2897 Access Systems for Off-Road Machines. [59 FR 51741, Oct. 12, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 7449, Feb. 8, 1995; 60 FR 40458, Aug. 9, 1996; 60 FR 47035, Sept. 8, 1995; 61 FR 9241, 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004; 71 FR 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 79 FR 37190, July 1, 2014] § 1910.268 Telecommunications. (a) Application. Center Field (2) These standards do not apply: (i) To construction work, as defined in § 1910.12, nor (ii) to installations under the exclusive control of electric utilities used for the purpose of communications or metering, or for generation, control, transformation, transmission, and distribution of electric energy, which are located in buildings used exclusively by the electric utilities for such purposes, or located outdoors on property owned or leased by the electric utilities or on public highways, streets, roads, etc., or outdoors by established rights on private property. (3) Operations or conditions not specifically covered by this section are subject to all the applicable standards contained in this part 1910. See § 1910.5(c). Operations which involve construction work, as defined in § 1910.12 are subject to all the applicable standards contained in part 1926 of this chapter. (b) General Buildings containing telecommunications centers Illumination. (ii) Working surfaces. (iii) Working spaces. (iv) Special doors. (v) Equipment, machinery and machine guarding. (2) Battery handling. (ii) Electrolyte (acid or base, and distilled water) for battery cells shall be mixed in a well ventilated room. Acid or base shall be poured gradually, while stirring, into the water. Water shall never be poured into concentrated (greater than 75 percent) acid solutions. Electrolyte shall never be placed in metal containers nor stirred with metal objects. (iii) When taking specific gravity readings, the open end of the hydrometer shall be covered with an acid resistant material while moving it from cell to cell to avoid splashing or throwing the electrolyte. (3) Employers must provide employees with readily accessible, adequate, and appropriate first aid supplies. A non-mandatory example of appropriate supplies is listed in appendix A to 29 CFR 1910.151. (4) Hazardous materials. (5) Compressed gas. (6) Support structures. (7) Approach distances to exposed energized overhead power lines and parts. (i) The employee is insulated or guarded from the energized parts (insulating gloves rated for the voltage involved shall be considered adequate insulation), or (ii) The energized parts are insulated or guarded from the employee and any other conductive object at a different potential, or (iii) The power conductors and equipment are deenergized and grounded. Table R-2—Approach Distances to Exposed Energized Overhead Power Lines and Parts Voltage range (phase to phase, RMS) Approach distance (inches) 300 V and less ( 1 Over 300V, not over 750V 12 Over 750V not over 2 kV 18 Over 2 kV, not over 15 kV 24 Over 15 kV, not over 37 kV 36 Over 37 kV, not over 87.5 kV 42 Over 87.5 kV, not over 121 kV 48 Over 121 kV, not over 140 kV 54 1 (8) Illumination of field work. (c) Training. (1) Recognition and avoidance of dangers relating to encounters with harmful substances and animal, insect, or plant life; (2) Procedures to be followed in emergency situations; and, (3) First aid training, including instruction in artificial respiration. (d) Employee protection in public work areas. (2) If work exposes energized or moving parts that are normally protected, danger signs shall be displayed and barricades erected, as necessary, to warn other personnel in the area. (3) The employer shall insure that an employee finding any crossed or fallen wires which create or may create a hazardous situation at the work area: (i) Remains on guard or adopts other adequate means to warn other employees of the danger and (ii) has the proper authority notified at the earliest practical moment. (e) Tools and personal protective equipment—Generally. (f) Rubber insulating equipment. (2) The employer is responsible for the periodic retesting of all insulating gloves, blankets, and other rubber insulating equipment. This retesting shall be electrical, visual and mechanical. The following maximum retesting intervals shall apply: Gloves, blankets, and other insulating equipment Natural rubber Synthetic rubber Months New 12 18 Re-issued 9 15 (3) Gloves and blankets shall be marked to indicate compliance with the retest schedule, and shall be marked with the date the next test is due. Gloves found to be defective in the field or by the tests set forth in paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be destroyed by cutting them open from the finger to the gauntlet. (g) Personal climbing equipment General. (2) Pole climbers. 1/4 (ii) The employer shall ensure that pole climbers are inspected by a competent person for the following conditions: Fractured or cracked gaffs or leg irons, loose or dull gaffs, broken straps or buckles. If any of these conditions exist, the defect shall be corrected before the climbers are used. (iii) Pole climbers shall be inspected as required in this paragraph (g)(3) before each day's use and a gaff cut-out test performed at least weekly when in use. (iv) Pole climbers may not be worn when: (A) Working in trees (specifically designed tree climbers shall be used for tree climbing), (B) Working on ladders, (C) Working in an aerial lift, (D) Driving a vehicle, nor (E) Walking on rocky, hard, frozen, brushy or hilly terrain. (h) Ladders. (i) Other tools and personal protective equipment Head protection. (2) Eye protection. (i) Drilling or chipping stone, brick or masonry, breaking concrete or pavement, etc. by hand tools (sledgehammer, etc.) or power tools such as pneumatic drills or hammers; (ii) Working on or around high speed emery or other grinding wheels unprotected by guards; (iii) Cutting or chipping terra cotta ducts, tile, etc.; (iv) Working under motor vehicles requiring hammering; (v) Cleaning operations using compressed air, steam, or sand blast; (vi) Acetylene welding or similar operations where sparks are thrown off; (vii) Using powder actuated stud drivers; (viii) Tree pruning or cutting underbrush; (ix) Handling battery cells and solutions, such as taking battery readings with a hydrometer and thermometer; (x) Removing or rearranging strand or open wire; and (xi) Performing lead sleeve wiping and while soldering. (3) Tent heaters. (i) The tent covers are constructed of fire resistant materials, and (ii) Adequate ventilation is provided to maintain safe oxygen levels and avoid harmful buildup of combustion products and combustible gases. (4) Torches. (5) Portable power equipment. (6) Vehicle-mounted utility generators. (i) One side of the voltage source is solidly strapped to the metallic structure of the vehicle; (ii) Grounding-type outlets are used, with a “grounding” conductor between the outlet grounding terminal and the side of the voltage source that is strapped to the vehicle; (iii) All metallic encased tools and equipment that are powered from this system are equipped with three-wire cords and grounding-type attachment plugs, except as designated in paragraph (i)(7) of this section. (7) Portable lights, tools, and appliances. (8) Soldering devices. (9) Lead work. (j) Vehicle-mounted material handling devices and other mechanical equipment General. (ii) The employer shall ensure that tests shall be made at the beginning of each shift by a competent person to insure the vehicle brakes and operating systems are in proper working condition. (2) Scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders and tractors. (ii) Eye protection shall be provided and the employer shall ensure that it is used by employees when working in areas where flying material is generated. (3) Vehicle-mounted elevating and rotating work platforms. (4) Derrick trucks and similar equipment. (ii) When derricks are used to handle poles near energized power conductors, these operations shall comply with the requirements contained in paragraphs (b)(7) and (n)(11) of this section. (iii) Moving parts of equipment and machinery carried on or mounted on telecommunications line trucks shall be guarded. This may be done with barricades as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. (iv) Derricks and the operation of derricks shall comply with the following requirements: (A) Manufacturer's specifications, load ratings and instructions for derrick operation shall be strictly observed. (B) Rated load capacities and instructions related to derrick operation shall be conspicuously posted on a permanent weather-resistant plate or decal in a location on the derrick that is plainly visible to the derrick operator. (C) Prior to derrick operation the parking brake must be set and the stabilizers extended if the vehicle is so equipped. When the vehicle is situated on a grade, at least two wheels must be chocked on the downgrade side. (D) Only persons trained in the operation of the derrick shall be permitted to operate the derrick. (E) Hand signals to derrick operators shall be those prescribed by ANSI B30.6-1969, “Safety Code for Derricks”, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (F) The employer shall ensure that the derrick and its associated equipment are inspected by a competent person at intervals set by the manufacturer but in no case less than once per year. Records shall be maintained including the dates of inspections, and necessary repairs made, if corrective action was required. (G) Modifications or additions to the derrick and its associated equipment that alter its capacity or affect its safe operation shall be made only with written certification from the manufacturer, or other equivalent entity, such as a nationally recognized testing laboratory, that the modification results in the equipment being safe for its intended use. Such changes shall require the changing and posting of revised capacity and instruction decals or plates. These new ratings or limitations shall be as provided by the manufacturer or other equivalent entity. (H) Wire rope used with derricks shall be of improved plow steel or equivalent. Wire rope safety factors shall be in accordance with American National Standards Institute B30.6-1969. (I) Wire rope shall be taken out of service, or the defective portion removed, when any of the following conditions exist: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (k) Materials handling and storage Poles. (2) Cable reels. (l) Cable fault locating and testing. (2) Before the voltage is applied, cable conductors shall be isolated to the extent practicable. Employees shall be warned, by such techniques as briefing and tagging at all affected locations, to stay clear while the voltage is applied. (m) Grounding for employee protection—pole lines Power conductors. (2) Nonworking open wire. (3) Vertical power conduit, power ground wires and street light fixtures. (ii) If no hazardous voltage is shown by the voltage test, a temporary bond shall be placed between such street light fixture, exposed vertical power grounding conductor, or metallic power conduit and the communications cable strand. Temporary bonds used for this purpose shall have sufficient conductivity to carry at least 500 amperes for a period of one second without fusing. (4) Suitable protective grounding. (i) A vertical ground wire which has been tested, found safe, and is connected to a power system multigrounded neutral or the grounded neutral of a power secondary system where there are at least three services connected; (ii) Communications cable sheath or shield and its supporting strand where the sheath or shield is: (A) Bonded to an underground or buried cable which is connected to a central office ground, or (B) Bonded to an underground metallic piping system, or (C) Bonded to a power system multigrounded neutral or grounded neutral of a power secondary system which has at least three services connected; (iii) Guys which are bonded to the grounds specified in paragraphs (m)(4) (i) and (ii) of this section and which have continuity uninterrupted by an insulator; and (iv) If all of the preceding grounds are not available, arrays of driven ground rods where the resultant resistance to ground will be low enough to eliminate danger to personnel or permit prompt operation of protective devices. (5) Attaching and removing temporary bonds. (6) Temporary grounding of suspension strand. (ii) Where power crossings are encountered on nonjoint lines, the strand shall be bonded to an existing ground listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this section as close as possible to the crossing. This bonding is not required where crossings are made on a common crossing pole unless there is an upward change in grade at the pole. (iii) Where roller-type bonds are used, they shall be restrained so as to avoid stressing the electrical connections. (iv) Bonds between the suspension strand and the existing ground shall be at least No. 6AWG copper. (v) Temporary bonds shall be left in place until the strand has been tensioned, dead-ended, and permanently grounded. (vi) The requirements of paragraphs (m)(6)(i) through (m)(6)(v) of this section do not apply to the installation of insulated strand. (7) Antenna work-radio transmitting stations 3-30 MHZ. (A) Prepares a danger tag signed with his signature, (B) Requests the transmitting technician to shutdown the transmitter and to ground the antenna with its grounding switch, (C) Is notified by the transmitting technician that the transmitter has been shutdown, and (D) Tags the antenna ground switch personally in the presence of the transmitting technician after the antenna has been grounded by the transmitting technician. (ii) Power shall not be applied to the antenna, nor shall the grounding switch be opened under any circumstances while the tag is affixed. (iii)(A) Where no grounding switches are provided, grounding sticks shall be used, one on each side of line, and tags shall be placed on the grounding sticks, antenna switch, or plate power switch in a conspicuous place. (B) When necessary to further reduce excessive radio frequency pickup, ground sticks or short circuits shall be placed directly on the transmission lines near the transmitter in addition to the regular grounding switches. (C) In other cases, the antenna lines may be disconnected from ground and the transmitter to reduce pickup at the point in the field. (iv) All radio frequency line wires shall be tested for pickup with an insulated probe before they are handled either with bare hands or with metal tools. (v) The employer shall insure that the transmitting technician warn the riggers about adjacent lines which are, or may become energized. (vi) The employer shall insure that when antenna work has been completed, the rigger in charge of the job returns to the transmitter, notifies the transmitting technician in charge that work has been completed, and personally removes the tag from the antenna ground switch. (n) Overhead lines Handling suspension strand. (ii) The strand shall be restrained against upward movement during installation: (A) On joint-use poles, where there is an upward change in grade at the pole, and (B) On non-joint-use poles, where the line croses under energized power conductors. (2) Need for testing wood poles. (i) Dead-end poles, except properly braced or guyed “Y” or “T” cable junction poles, (ii) Straight line poles which are not storm guyed and where adjacent span lengths exceed 165 feet, (iii) Poles at which there is a downward change in grade and which are not guyed or braced corner poles or cable junction poles, (iv) Poles which support only telephone drop wire, and (v) Poles which carry less than ten communication line wires. On joint use poles, one power line wire shall be considered as two communication wires for purposes of this paragraph (n)(2)(v). (3) Methods for testing wood poles. (i) Rap the pole sharply with a hammer weighing about 3 pounds, starting near the ground line and continuing upwards circumferentially around the pole to a height of approximately 6 feet. The hammer will produce a clear sound and rebound sharply when striking sound wood. Decay pockets will be indicated by a dull sound and/or a less pronounced hammer rebound. When decay pockets are indicated, the pole shall be considered unsafe. Also, prod the pole as near the ground line as possible using a pole prod or a screwdriver with a blade at least 5 inches long. If substantial decay is encountered, the pole shall be considered unsafe. (ii) Apply a horizontal force to the pole and attempt to rock it back and forth in a direction perpendicular to the line. Caution shall be exercised to avoid causing power wires to swing together. The force may be applied either by pushing with a pike pole or pulling with a rope. If the pole cracks during the test, it shall be considered unsafe. (4) Unsafe poles or structures. (5) Test requirements for cable suspension strand. (ii) The following method or an equivalent method shall be used for testing the strength of the strand: A rope, at least three-eighths inch in diameter, shall be thrown over the strand. On joint lines, the rope shall be passed over the strand using tree pruner handles or a wire raising tool. If two employees are present, both shall grip the double rope and slowly transfer their entire weight to the rope and attempt to raise themselves off the ground. If only one employee is present, one end of the rope which has been passed over the strand shall be tied to the bumper of the truck, or other equally secure anchorage. The employee then shall grasp the other end of the rope and attempt to raise himself off the ground. (6) Inspection of strand. (i) Corrosion so that no galvanizing can be detected, (ii) One or more wires of the strand are broken, (iii) Worn spots, or (iv) Burn marks such as those caused by contact with electric power wires. (7) Outside work platforms. (8) Other elevated locations. (9) Installing and removing wire and cable. (10) Avoiding contact with energized power conductors or equipment. (11) Handling poles near energized power conductors. (ii) Poles that are to be placed, moved or removed during heavy rains, sleet or wet snow in joint lines carrying more than 8.7kV phase to phase voltage (5kV to ground) shall be guarded or otherwise prevented from direct contact with overhead energized power conductors. (iii)(A) In joint lines where the power voltage is greater than 750 volts but less than 34.5kV phase to phase (20 kV to ground), wet poles being placed, moved or removed shall be insulated with either a rubber insulating blanket, a fiberglass box guide, or equivalent protective equipment. (B) In joint lines where the power voltage is greater than 8.7 kV phase to phase (5kV to ground) but less than 34.5kV phase to phase (20 kV to ground), dry poles being placed, moved, or removed shall be insulated with either a rubber insulating blanket, a fiberglass box guide, or equivalent protective equipment. (C) Where wet or dry poles are being removed, insulation of the pole is not required if the pole is cut off 2 feet or more below the lowest power wire and also cut off near the ground line. (iv) Insulating gloves shall be worn when handling the pole with either hands or tools, when there exists a possibility that the pole may contact a power conductor. Where the voltage to ground of the power conductor exceeds 15kV to ground, Class II gloves (as defined in ANSI J6.6-1971) shall be used. For voltages not exceeding 15kV to ground, insulating gloves shall have a breakdown voltage of at least 17kV. (v) The guard or insulating material used to protect the pole shall meet the appropriate 3 minute proof test voltage requirements contained in the ANSI J6.4-1971. (vi) When there exists a possibility of contact between the pole or the vehicle-mounted equipment used to handle the pole, and an energized power conductor, the following precautions shall be observed: (A) When on the vehicle which carries the derrick, avoid all contact with the ground, with persons standing on the ground, and with all grounded objects such as guys, tree limbs, or metal sign posts. To the extent feasible, remain on the vehicle as long as the possibility of contact exists. (B) When it is necessary to leave the vehicle, step onto an insulating blanket and break all contact with the vehicle before stepping off the blanket and onto the ground. As a last resort, if a blanket is not available, the employee may jump cleanly from the vehicle. (C) When it is necessary to enter the vehicle, first step onto an insulating blanket and break all contact with the ground, grounded objects and other persons before touching the truck or derrick. (12) Working position on poles. (i) Where communications facilities are attached above the electric power conductors, and a rigid fixed barrier is installed between the electric power facility and the communications facility, or (ii) Where the electric power conductors are cabled secondary service drops carrying less than 300 volts to ground and are attached 40 inches or more below the communications conductors or cables. (13) Metal tapes and ropes. (ii) Where it is necessary to measure clearances from energized parts, only nonconductive devices shall be used. (o) Underground lines. (1) Guarding manholes and street openings. (ii) While work is being performed in the manhole, a person with basic first aid training shall be immediately available to render assistance if there is cause for believing that a safety hazard exists, and if the requirements contained in paragraphs (d)(1) and (o)(1)(i) of this section do not adequately protect the employee(s). Examples of manhole worksite hazards which shall be considered to constitute a safety hazard include, but are not limited to: (A) Manhole worksites where safety hazards are created by traffic patterns that cannot be corrected by provisions of paragraph (d)(1) of this section. (B) Manhole worksites that are subject to unusual water hazards that cannot be abated by conventional means. (C) Manhole worksites that are occupied jointly with power utilities as described in paragraph (o)(3) of this section. (2) Requirements prior to entering manholes and unvented vaults. (A) The internal atmosphere shall be tested for combustible gas and, except when continuous forced ventilation is provided, the atmosphere shall also be tested for oxygen deficiency. (B) When unsafe conditions are detected by testing or other means, the work area shall be ventilated and otherwise made safe before entry. (ii) An adequate continuous supply of air shall be provided while work is performed in manholes under any of the following conditions: (A) Where combustible or explosive gas vapors have been initially detected and subsequently reduced to a safe level by ventilation, (B) Where organic solvents are used in the work procedure, (C) Where open flame torches are used in the work procedure, (D) Where the manhole is located in that portion of a public right of way open to vehicular traffic and/or exposed to a seepage of gas or gases, or (E) Where a toxic gas or oxygen deficiency is found. (iii)(A) The requirements of paragraphs (o)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section do not apply to work in central office cable vaults that are adequately ventilated. (B) The requirements of paragraphs (o)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section apply to work in unvented vaults. (3) Joint power and telecommunication manholes. (4) Ladders. (5) Flames. (i) A test for combustible gas shall be made immediately before using the open flame device, and at least once per hour while using the device; and (ii) a fuel tank (e.g., acetylene) may not be in the manhole unless in actual use. (p) Microwave transmission Eye protection. (2) Hazardous area. Radiation in this area may exceed hazard limitations and special precautions are required. Obtain specific instruction before entering. (3) Protective measures. (q) Tree trimming electrical hazards General. (ii) Employees engaged in line-clearing operations shall be instructed that: (A) A direct contact is made when any part of the body touches or contacts an energized conductor, or other energized electrical fixture or apparatus. (B) An indirect contact is made when any part of the body touches any object in contact with an energized electrical conductor, or other energized fixture or apparatus. (C) An indirect contact can be made through conductive tools, tree branches, trucks, equipment, or other objects, or as a result of communications wires, cables, fences, or guy wires being accidentally energized. (D) Electric shock will occur when an employee, by either direct or indirect contact with an energized conductor, energized tree limb, tool, equipment, or other object, provides a path for the flow of electricity to a grounded object or to the ground itself. Simultaneous contact with two energized conductors will also cause electric shock which may result in serious or fatal injury. (iii) Before any work is performed in proximity to energized conductors, the system operator/owner of the energized conductors shall be contacted to ascertain if he knows of any hazards associated with the conductors which may not be readily apparent. This rule does not apply when operations are performed by or on behalf of, the system operator/owner. (2) Working in proximity to electrical hazards. (ii) Only qualified employees or trainees, familiar with the special techniques and hazards involved in line clearance, shall be permitted to perform the work if it is found that an electrical hazard exists. (iii) During all tree working operations aloft where an electrical hazard of more than 750V exists, there shall be a second employee or trainee qualified in line clearance tree trimming within normal voice communication. (iv) Where tree work is performed by employees qualified in line-clearance tree trimming and trainees qualified in line-clearance tree trimming, the clearances from energized conductors given in Table R-3 shall apply. Table R-3—Minimum Working Distances From Energized Conductors for Line-Clearance Tree Trimmers and Line-Clearance Tree-Trimmer Trainees Voltage range (phase to phase) (kilovolts) Minimum working distance 2.1 to 15.0 2 ft. 0 in. 15.1 to 35.0 2 ft. 4 in. 35.1 to 46.0 2 ft. 6 in. 46.1 to 72.5 3 ft. 0 in. 72.6 to 121.0 3 ft. 4 in. 138.0 to 145.0 3 ft. 6 in. 161.0 to 169.0 3 ft. 8 in. 230.0 to 242.0 5 ft. 0 in. 345.0 to 362.0 7 ft. 0 in. 500.0 to 552.0 11 ft. 0 in. 700.0 to 765.0 15 ft. 0 in. (v) Branches hanging on an energized conductor may only be removed using appropriately insulated equipment. (vi) Rubber footwear, including lineman's overshoes, shall not be considered as providing any measure of safety from electrical hazards. (vii) Ladders, platforms, and aerial devices, including insulated aerial devices, may not be brought in contact with an electrical conductor. Reliance shall not be placed on their dielectric capabilities. (viii) When an aerial lift device contacts an electrical conductor, the truck supporting the aerial lift device shall be considered as energized. (3) Storm work and emergency conditions. (ii) When an emergency condition develops due to tree operations, work shall be suspended and the system operator/owner shall be notified immediately. (r) Buried facilities—Communications lines and power lines in the same trench. (s) Definitions Aerial lifts. (i) Extensible boom platforms, (ii) Aerial ladders, (iii) Articulating boom platforms, (iv) Vertical towers, (v) A combination of any of the above defined in ANSI A92.2-1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. These devices are made of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), or other material; are powered or manually operated; and are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or not they are capable of rotating about a substantially vertical axis. (2) Aerial splicing platform. (3) Aerial tent. (4) Alive or live (energized). live current-carrying, (5) Barricade. (6) Barrier. (7) Bond. (8) Cable. (9) Cable sheath. Note: A cable sheath may consist of multiple layers of which one or more is conductive. (10) Circuit. (11) Communication lines. (12) Conductor. (13) Effectively grounded. (14) Equipment. (15) Ground (reference). (16) Ground (as a noun). (17) Ground (as a verb). (18) Ground tent. (19) Grounded conductor. (20) Grounded systems. (21) Grounding electrode conductor. (Grounding conductor). (22) Insulated. Note: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be insulated in suitable manner for the conditions to which it is subjected. Otherwise, it is, within the purpose of these rules, uninsulated. Insulating coverings of conductors in one means of making the conductor insulated. (23) Insulation (as applied to cable). (24) Joint use. (25) Ladder platform. (26) Ladder seat. (27) Manhole. (28) Manhole platform. (29) Microwave transmission. z z (30) Nominal voltage. (31) Pole balcony or seat. (32) Pole platform. (33) Qualified employee. (34) Qualified line-clearance tree trimmer. (35) Qualified line-clearance tree-trimmer trainee. (36) System operator/owner. (37) Telecommunications center. Note: Telecommunication centers are facilities established, equipped and arranged in accordance with engineered plans for the purpose of providing telecommunications service. They may be located on premises owned or leased by the organization providing telecommunication service, or on the premises owned or leased by others. This definition includes switch rooms (whether electromechanical, electronic, or computer controlled), terminal rooms, power rooms, repeater rooms, transmitter and receiver rooms, switchboard operating rooms, cable vaults, and miscellaneous communications equipment rooms. Simulation rooms of telecommunication centers for training or developmental purposes are also included. (38) Telecommunications derricks. (39) Telecommunication line truck. (40) Telecommunication service. (41) Unvented vault. (42) Vault. (43) Vented vault. (44) Voltage of an effectively grounded circuit. (45) Voltage of a circuit not effectively grounded. [40 FR 13441, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 47 FR 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 52 FR 36387, Sept. 28, 1987; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 67 FR 67965, Nov. 7, 2002; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016] § 1910.269 Electric power generation, transmission, and distribution. (a) General Application. (A) Power generation, transmission, and distribution installations, including related equipment for the purpose of communication or metering that are accessible only to qualified employees; Note to paragraph ( a i The types of installations covered by this paragraph include the generation, transmission, and distribution installations of electric utilities, as well as equivalent installations of industrial establishments. Subpart S of this part covers supplementary electric generating equipment that is used to supply a workplace for emergency, standby, or similar purposes only. (See paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this section.) (B) Other installations at an electric power generating station, as follows: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (C) Test sites where employees perform electrical testing involving temporary measurements associated with electric power generation, transmission, and distribution in laboratories, in the field, in substations, and on lines, as opposed to metering, relaying, and routine line work; (D) Work on, or directly associated with, the installations covered in paragraphs (a)(1)(i)(A) through (a)(1)(i)(C) of this section; and (E) Line-clearance tree trimming performed for the purpose of clearing space around electric power generation, transmission, or distribution lines or equipment and on behalf of an organization that operates, or that controls the operating procedures for, those lines or equipment, as follows: ( 1 ( 2 (ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, § 1910.269 of this part does not apply: (A) To construction work, as defined in § 1910.12 of this part, except for line-clearance tree trimming and work involving electric power generation installations as specified in § 1926.950(a)(3) of this chapter; or (B) To electrical installations, electrical safety-related work practices, or electrical maintenance considerations covered by subpart S of this part. Note 1 to paragraph ( a ii The Occupational Safety and Health Administration considers work practices conforming to §§ 1910.332 through 1910.335 as complying with the electrical safety-related work-practice requirements of § 1910.269 identified in Table 1 of appendix A-2 to this section, provided that employers are performing the work on a generation or distribution installation meeting §§ 1910.303 through 1910.308. This table also identifies provisions in § 1910.269 that apply to work by qualified persons directly on, or associated with, installations of electric power generation, transmission, and distribution lines or equipment, regardless of compliance with §§ 1910.332 through 1910.335. Note 2 to paragraph ( a ii The Occupational Safety and Health Administration considers work practices performed by qualified persons and conforming to § 1910.269 as complying with §§ 1910.333(c) and 1910.335. (iii) This section applies in addition to all other applicable standards contained in this part 1910. Employers covered under this section are not exempt from complying with other applicable provisions in part 1910 by the operation of § 1910.5(c). Specific references in this section to other sections of part 1910 are for emphasis only. (2) Training. (A) Each employee shall be trained in, and familiar with, the safety-related work practices, safety procedures, and other safety requirements in this section that pertain to his or her job assignments. (B) Each employee shall also be trained in and familiar with any other safety practices, including applicable emergency procedures (such as pole-top and manhole rescue), that are not specifically addressed by this section but that are related to his or her work and are necessary for his or her safety. (C) The degree of training shall be determined by the risk to the employee for the hazard involved. (ii) Each qualified employee shall also be trained and competent in: (A) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other parts of electric equipment, (B) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed live parts, (C) The minimum approach distances specified in this section corresponding to the voltages to which the qualified employee will be exposed and the skills and techniques necessary to maintain those distances, (D) The proper use of the special precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools for working on or near exposed energized parts of electric equipment, and (E) The recognition of electrical hazards to which the employee may be exposed and the skills and techniques necessary to control or avoid these hazards. Note to paragraph ( a ii For the purposes of this section, a person must have the training required by paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section to be considered a qualified person. (iii) Each line-clearance tree trimmer who is not a qualified employee shall also be trained and competent in: (A) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other parts of electric equipment, (B) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed live parts, and (C) The minimum approach distances specified in this section corresponding to the voltages to which the employee will be exposed and the skills and techniques necessary to maintain those distances. (iv) The employer shall determine, through regular supervision and through inspections conducted on at least an annual basis, that each employee is complying with the safety-related work practices required by this section. (v) An employee shall receive additional training (or retraining) under any of the following conditions: (A) If the supervision or annual inspections required by paragraph (a)(2)(iv) of this section indicate that the employee is not complying with the safety-related work practices required by this section, or (B) If new technology, new types of equipment, or changes in procedures necessitate the use of safety-related work practices that are different from those which the employee would normally use, or (C) If he or she must employ safety-related work practices that are not normally used during his or her regular job duties. Note to paragraph ( a v The Occupational Safety and Health Administration considers tasks that are performed less often than once per year to necessitate retraining before the performance of the work practices involved. (vi) The training required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section shall be of the classroom or on-the-job type. (vii) The training shall establish employee proficiency in the work practices required by this section and shall introduce the procedures necessary for compliance with this section. (viii) The employer shall ensure that each employee has demonstrated proficiency in the work practices involved before that employee is considered as having completed the training required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section. Note 1 to paragraph ( a viii Though they are not required by this paragraph, employment records that indicate that an employee has successfully completed the required training are one way of keeping track of when an employee has demonstrated proficiency. Note 2 to paragraph ( a viii For an employee with previous training, an employer may determine that that employee has demonstrated the proficiency required by this paragraph using the following process: (1) Confirm that the employee has the training required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section, (2) Use an examination or interview to make an initial determination that the employee understands the relevant safety-related work practices before he or she performs any work covered by this section, and (3) Supervise the employee closely until that employee has demonstrated proficiency as required by this paragraph. (3) Information transfer. (A) The characteristics of the host employer's installation that are related to the safety of the work to be performed and are listed in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(v) of this section; Note to paragraph ( a i This paragraph requires the host employer to obtain information listed in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(v) of this section if it does not have this information in existing records. (B) Conditions that are related to the safety of the work to be performed, that are listed in paragraphs (a)(4)(vi) through (a)(4)(viii) of this section, and that are known to the host employer; Note to paragraph ( a i For the purposes of this paragraph, the host employer need only provide information to contract employers that the host employer can obtain from its existing records through the exercise of reasonable diligence. This paragraph does not require the host employer to make inspections of worksite conditions to obtain this information. (C) Information about the design and operation of the host employer's installation that the contract employer needs to make the assessments required by this section; and Note to paragraph ( a i This paragraph requires the host employer to obtain information about the design and operation of its installation that contract employers need to make required assessments if it does not have this information in existing records. (D) Any other information about the design and operation of the host employer's installation that is known by the host employer, that the contract employer requests, and that is related to the protection of the contract employer's employees. Note to paragraph ( a i For the purposes of this paragraph, the host employer need only provide information to contract employers that the host employer can obtain from its existing records through the exercise of reasonable diligence. This paragraph does not require the host employer to make inspections of worksite conditions to obtain this information. (ii) Contract employers shall comply with the following requirements: (A) The contract employer shall ensure that each of its employees is instructed in the hazardous conditions relevant to the employee's work that the contract employer is aware of as a result of information communicated to the contract employer by the host employer under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section. (B) Before work begins, the contract employer shall advise the host employer of any unique hazardous conditions presented by the contract employer's work. (C) The contract employer shall advise the host employer of any unanticipated hazardous conditions found during the contract employer's work that the host employer did not mention under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section. The contract employer shall provide this information to the host employer within 2 working days after discovering the hazardous condition. (iii) The contract employer and the host employer shall coordinate their work rules and procedures so that each employee of the contract employer and the host employer is protected as required by this section. (4) Existing characteristics and conditions. (i) The nominal voltages of lines and equipment, (ii) The maximum switching-transient voltages, (iii) The presence of hazardous induced voltages, (iv) The presence of protective grounds and equipment grounding conductors, (v) The locations of circuits and equipment, including electric supply lines, communication lines, and fire-protective signaling circuits, (vi) The condition of protective grounds and equipment grounding conductors, (vii) The condition of poles, and (viii) Environmental conditions relating to safety. (b) Medical services and first aid. (1) First-aid training. (i) For field work involving two or more employees at a work location, at least two trained persons shall be available. However, for line-clearance tree trimming performed by line-clearance tree trimmers who are not qualified employees, only one trained person need be available if all new employees are trained in first aid within 3 months of their hiring dates. (ii) For fixed work locations such as substations, the number of trained persons available shall be sufficient to ensure that each employee exposed to electric shock can be reached within 4 minutes by a trained person. However, where the existing number of employees is insufficient to meet this requirement (at a remote substation, for example), each employee at the work location shall be a trained employee. (2) First-aid supplies. (3) First-aid kits. (c) Job briefing Before each job. (ii) The employer shall ensure that the employee in charge conducts a job briefing that meets paragraphs (c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(4) of this section with the employees involved before they start each job. (2) Subjects to be covered. (3) Number of briefings. (ii) Additional job briefings shall be held if significant changes, which might affect the safety of the employees, occur during the course of the work. (4) Extent of briefing. (ii) A more extensive discussion shall be conducted: (A) If the work is complicated or particularly hazardous, or (B) If the employee cannot be expected to recognize and avoid the hazards involved in the job. Note to paragraph ( c The briefing must address all the subjects listed in paragraph (c)(2) of this section. (5) Working alone. (d) Hazardous energy control (lockout/tagout) procedures Application. Note to paragraph ( d Installations in electric power generation facilities that are not an integral part of, or inextricably commingled with, power generation processes or equipment are covered under § 1910.147 and Subpart S of this part. (2) General. (ii) The employer's energy control program under paragraph (d)(2) of this section shall meet the following requirements: (A) If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked out, the employer's program shall use a tagout system. (B) If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out, the employer's program shall use lockout, unless the employer can demonstrate that the use of a tagout system will provide full employee protection as follows: ( 1 ( 2 (C) After November 1, 1994, whenever replacement or major repair, renovation, or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energy isolating devices for such machines or equipment shall be designed to accept a lockout device. (iii) Procedures shall be developed, documented, and used for the control of potentially hazardous energy covered by paragraph (d) of this section. (iv) The procedure shall clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose, responsibility, authorization, rules, and techniques to be applied to the control of hazardous energy, and the measures to enforce compliance including, but not limited to, the following: (A) A specific statement of the intended use of this procedure; (B) Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy; (C) Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal, and transfer of lockout devices or tagout devices and the responsibility for them; and (D) Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout devices, and other energy control measures. (v) The employer shall conduct a periodic inspection of the energy control procedure at least annually to ensure that the procedure and the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section are being followed. (A) The periodic inspection shall be performed by an authorized employee who is not using the energy control procedure being inspected. (B) The periodic inspection shall be designed to identify and correct any deviations or inadequacies. (C) If lockout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected. (D) Where tagout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized and affected employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected, and the elements set forth in paragraph (d)(2)(vii) of this section. (E) The employer shall certify that the inspections required by paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section have been accomplished. The certification shall identify the machine or equipment on which the energy control procedure was being used, the date of the inspection, the employees included in the inspection, and the person performing the inspection. Note to paragraph ( d v If normal work schedule and operation records demonstrate adequate inspection activity and contain the required information, no additional certification is required. (vi) The employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose and function of the energy control program are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage, and removal of energy controls are acquired by employees. The training shall include the following: (A) Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of energy available in the workplace, and in the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and control. (B) Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use of the energy control procedure. (C) All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where energy control procedures may be used shall be instructed about the procedures and about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment that are locked out or tagged out. (vii) When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained in the following limitations of tags: (A) Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating devices and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock. (B) When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not to be removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated. (C) Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose work operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective. (D) Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the workplace. (E) Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning needs to be understood as part of the overall energy control program. (F) Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so that they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during use. (viii) Retraining shall be provided by the employer as follows: (A) Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment, or processes that present a new hazard or whenever there is a change in the energy control procedures. (B) Retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection under paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section reveals, or whenever the employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in an employee's knowledge or use of the energy control procedures. (C) The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and shall introduce new or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary. (ix) The employer shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of training. (3) Protective materials and hardware. (ii) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be singularly identified; shall be the only devices used for controlling energy; may not be used for other purposes; and shall meet the following requirements: (A) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected. ( 1 ( 2 (B) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be standardized within the facility in at least one of the following criteria: color, shape, size. Additionally, in the case of tagout devices, print and format shall be standardized. (C) Lockout devices shall be substantial enough to prevent removal without the use of excessive force or unusual techniques, such as with the use of bolt cutters or metal cutting tools. (D) Tagout devices, including their means of attachment, shall be substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal. Tagout device attachment means shall be of a non-reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and nonreleasable with a minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds and shall have the general design and basic characteristics of being at least equivalent to a one-piece, all-environment-tolerant nylon cable tie. (E) Each lockout device or tagout device shall include provisions for the identification of the employee applying the device. (F) Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such as the following: Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Operate. Note to paragraph ( d ii For specific provisions covering accident prevention tags, see § 1910.145. (4) Energy isolation. (5) Notification. Note to paragraph ( d See also paragraph (d)(7) of this section, which requires that the second notification take place before the machine or equipment is reenergized. (6) Lockout/tagout application. (i) Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine or equipment, the authorized employee shall have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the energy. (ii) The machine or equipment shall be turned off or shut down using the procedures established for the machine or equipment. An orderly shutdown shall be used to avoid any additional or increased hazards to employees as a result of the equipment stoppage. (iii) All energy isolating devices that are needed to control the energy to the machine or equipment shall be physically located and operated in such a manner as to isolate the machine or equipment from energy sources. (iv) Lockout or tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy isolating device by authorized employees. (A) Lockout devices shall be attached in a manner that will hold the energy isolating devices in a “safe” or “off” position. (B) Tagout devices shall be affixed in such a manner as will clearly indicate that the operation or movement of energy isolating devices from the “safe” or “off” position is prohibited. ( 1 ( 2 (v) Following the application of lockout or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained, or otherwise rendered safe. (vi) If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to a hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until the servicing or maintenance is completed or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists. (vii) Before starting work on machines or equipment that have been locked out or tagged out, the authorized employee shall verify that isolation and deenergizing of the machine or equipment have been accomplished. If normally energized parts will be exposed to contact by an employee while the machine or equipment is deenergized, a test shall be performed to ensure that these parts are deenergized. (7) Release from lockout/tagout. (i) The work area shall be inspected to ensure that nonessential items have been removed and that machine or equipment components are operationally intact. (ii) The work area shall be checked to ensure that all employees have been safely positioned or removed. (iii) After lockout or tagout devices have been removed and before a machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be notified that the lockout or tagout devices have been removed. (iv) Each lockout or tagout device shall be removed from each energy isolating device by the authorized employee who applied the lockout or tagout device. However, if that employee is not available to remove it, the device may be removed under the direction of the employer, provided that specific procedures and training for such removal have been developed, documented, and incorporated into the employer's energy control program. The employer shall demonstrate that the specific procedure provides a degree of safety equivalent to that provided by the removal of the device by the authorized employee who applied it. The specific procedure shall include at least the following elements: (A) Verification by the employer that the authorized employee who applied the device is not at the facility; (B) Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to inform him or her that his or her lockout or tagout device has been removed; and (C) Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before he or she resumes work at that facility. (8) Additional requirements. (A) Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials in accordance with paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this section; (B) Remove employees from the machine or equipment area in accordance with paragraphs (d)(7)(ii) and (d)(7)(iii) of this section; (C) Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified in paragraph (d)(7)(iv) of this section; (D) Energize and proceed with the testing or positioning; and (E) Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures in accordance with paragraph (d)(6) of this section to continue the servicing or maintenance. (ii) When servicing or maintenance is performed by a crew, craft, department, or other group, they shall use a procedure which affords the employees a level of protection equivalent to that provided by the implementation of a personal lockout or tagout device. Group lockout or tagout devices shall be used in accordance with the procedures required by paragraphs (d)(2)(iii) and (d)(2)(iv) of this section including, but not limited to, the following specific requirements: (A) Primary responsibility shall be vested in an authorized employee for a set number of employees working under the protection of a group lockout or tagout device (such as an operations lock); (B) Provision shall be made for the authorized employee to ascertain the exposure status of all individual group members with regard to the lockout or tagout of the machine or equipment; (C) When more than one crew, craft, department, or other group is involved, assignment of overall job-associated lockout or tagout control responsibility shall be given to an authorized employee designated to coordinate affected work forces and ensure continuity of protection; and (D) Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or tagout device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable mechanism when he or she begins work and shall remove those devices when he or she stops working on the machine or equipment being serviced or maintained. (iii) Procedures shall be used during shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of lockout or tagout protection, including provision for the orderly transfer of lockout or tagout device protection between off-going and on-coming employees, to minimize their exposure to hazards from the unexpected energizing or start-up of the machine or equipment or from the release of stored energy. (iv) Whenever outside servicing personnel are to be engaged in activities covered by paragraph (d) of this section, the on-site employer and the outside employer shall inform each other of their respective lockout or tagout procedures, and each employer shall ensure that his or her personnel understand and comply with restrictions and prohibitions of the energy control procedures being used. (v) If energy isolating devices are installed in a central location and are under the exclusive control of a system operator, the following requirements apply: (A) The employer shall use a procedure that affords employees a level of protection equivalent to that provided by the implementation of a personal lockout or tagout device. (B) The system operator shall place and remove lockout and tagout devices in place of the authorized employee under paragraphs (d)(4), (d)(6)(iv), and (d)(7)(iv) of this section. (C) Provisions shall be made to identify the authorized employee who is responsible for (that is, being protected by) the lockout or tagout device, to transfer responsibility for lockout and tagout devices, and to ensure that an authorized employee requesting removal or transfer of a lockout or tagout device is the one responsible for it before the device is removed or transferred. Note to paragraph ( d Lockout and tagging procedures that comply with paragraphs (c) through (f) of § 1910.147 will also be deemed to comply with paragraph (d) of this section if the procedures address the hazards covered by paragraph (d) of this section. (e) Enclosed spaces. (1) Safe work practices. (2) Training. (3) Rescue equipment. (4) Evaluating potential hazards. Note to paragraph ( e The determination called for in this paragraph may consist of a check of the conditions that might foreseeably be in the enclosed space. For example, the cover could be checked to see if it is hot and, if it is fastened in place, could be loosened gradually to release any residual pressure. An evaluation also needs to be made of whether conditions at the site could cause a hazardous atmosphere, such as an oxygen-deficient or flammable atmosphere, to develop within the space. (5) Removing covers. (6) Hazardous atmosphere. (7) Attendants. Note to paragraph ( e See paragraph (t) of this section for additional requirements on attendants for work in manholes and vaults. (8) Calibration of test instruments. (9) Testing for oxygen deficiency. (10) Testing for flammable gases and vapors. (11) Ventilation, and monitoring for flammable gases or vapors. Note to paragraph ( e See the definition of “hazardous atmosphere” for guidance in determining whether a specific concentration of a substance is hazardous. (12) Specific ventilation requirements. (13) Air supply. (14) Open flames. Note to paragraph ( e See the definition of “hazardous atmosphere” for guidance in determining whether a specific concentration of a substance is hazardous. Note to paragraph ( e Entries into enclosed spaces conducted in accordance with the permit-space entry requirements of paragraphs (d) through (k) of § 1910.146 are considered as complying with paragraph (e) of this section. (f) Excavations. (g) Personal protective equipment General. Note to paragraph ( g Paragraph (h) of § 1910.132 sets employer payment obligations for the personal protective equipment required by this section, including, but not limited to, the fall protection equipment required by paragraph (g)(2) of this section, the electrical protective equipment required by paragraph (l)(3) of this section, and the flame-resistant and arc-rated clothing and other protective equipment required by paragraph (l)(8) of this section. (2) Fall protection. (ii) Personal fall arrest equipment used by employees who are exposed to hazards from flames or electric arcs, as determined by the employer under paragraph (l)(8)(i) of this section, shall be capable of passing a drop test equivalent to that required by paragraph (g)(2)(iii)(L) of this section after exposure to an electric arc with a heat energy of 40±5 cal/cm 2 (iii) Body belts and positioning straps for work-positioning equipment shall meet the following requirements: (A) Hardware for body belts and positioning straps shall meet the following requirements: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) Buckles shall be capable of withstanding an 8.9-kilonewton (2,000-pound-force) tension test with a maximum permanent deformation no greater than 0.4 millimeters (0.0156 inches). (C) D rings shall be capable of withstanding a 22-kilonewton (5,000-pound-force) tensile test without cracking or breaking. (D) Snaphooks shall be capable of withstanding a 22-kilonewton (5,000-pound-force) tension test without failure. Note to paragraph ( g iii Distortion of the snaphook sufficient to release the keeper is considered to be tensile failure of a snaphook. (E) Top grain leather or leather substitute may be used in the manufacture of body belts and positioning straps; however, leather and leather substitutes may not be used alone as a load-bearing component of the assembly. (F) Plied fabric used in positioning straps and in load-bearing parts of body belts shall be constructed in such a way that no raw edges are exposed and the plies do not separate. (G) Positioning straps shall be capable of withstanding the following tests: ( 1 ( 2 Note to paragraphs ( g iii 1 g iii 2 Positioning straps that pass direct-current tests at equivalent voltages are considered as meeting this requirement. ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 Table R-2—Flammability Test Test method Criteria for passing the test Vertically suspend a 500-mm (19.7-inch) length of strapping supporting a 100-kg (220.5-lb) weight Any flames on the positioning strap shall self extinguish. Direct the flame to an edge of the strapping at a distance of 25 mm (1 inch) Remove the flame after 5 seconds Wait for any flames on the positioning strap to stop burning (H) The cushion part of the body belt shall contain no exposed rivets on the inside and shall be at least 76 millimeters (3 inches) in width. (I) Tool loops shall be situated on the body of a body belt so that the 100 millimeters (4 inches) of the body belt that is in the center of the back, measuring from D ring to D ring, is free of tool loops and any other attachments. (J) Copper, steel, or equivalent liners shall be used around the bars of D rings to prevent wear between these members and the leather or fabric enclosing them. (K) Snaphooks shall be of the locking type meeting the following requirements: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (L) Body belts and positioning straps shall be capable of withstanding a drop test as follows: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 Note to paragraph ( g iii When used by employees weighing no more than 140 kg (310 lbm) fully equipped, body belts and positioning straps that conform to American Society of Testing and Materials Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment, e1 (iv) The following requirements apply to the care and use of personal fall protection equipment. (A) Work-positioning equipment shall be inspected before use each day to determine that the equipment is in safe working condition. Work-positioning equipment that is not in safe working condition may not be used. Note to paragraph ( g iv Appendix F to this section contains guidelines for inspecting work-positioning equipment. (B) Personal fall arrest systems shall be used in accordance with subpart I of this part. Note to paragraph ( g iv Fall protection equipment rigged to arrest falls is considered a fall arrest system and must meet the applicable requirements for the design and use of those systems. Fall protection equipment rigged for work positioning is considered work-positioning equipment and must meet the applicable requirements for the design and use of that equipment. (C) The employer shall ensure that employees use fall protection systems as follows: (1) Each employee working from an aerial lift shall use a travel restraint system or a personal fall arrest system. (2) Except as provided in paragraph (g)(2)(iv)(C)(3) of this section, each employee in elevated locations more than 1.2 meters (4 feet) above the ground on poles, towers, or similar structures shall use a personal fall arrest system, work-positioning equipment, or fall restraint system, as appropriate, if the employer has not provided other fall protection meeting Subpart D of this part. (3) Until March 31, 2015, a qualified employee climbing or changing location on poles, towers, or similar structures need not use fall protection equipment, unless conditions, such as, but not limited to, ice, high winds, the design of the structure (for example, no provision for holding on with hands), or the presence of contaminants on the structure, could cause the employee to lose his or her grip or footing. On and after April 1, 2015, each qualified employee climbing or changing location on poles, towers, or similar structures must use fall protection equipment unless the employer can demonstrate that climbing or changing location with fall protection is infeasible or creates a greater hazard than climbing or changing location without it. Note 1 to paragraphs ( g iv 2 g)(2)(iv)(C)( 3 These paragraphs apply to structures that support overhead electric power transmission and distribution lines and equipment. They do not apply to portions of buildings, such as loading docks, or to electric equipment, such as transformers and capacitors. Subpart D of this part contains the duty to provide fall protection associated with walking and working surfaces. Note 2 to paragraphs ( g iv 2 g)(2)(iv)(C)( 3 Until the employer ensures that employees are proficient in climbing and the use of fall protection under paragraph (a)(2)(viii) of this section, the employees are not considered “qualified employees” for the purposes of paragraphs (g)(2)(iv)(C)( 2 3 (D) On and after April 1, 2015, work-positioning systems shall be rigged so that an employee can free fall no more than 0.6 meters (2 feet). (E) Anchorages for work-positioning equipment shall be capable of supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee's fall, or 13.3 kilonewtons (3,000 pounds-force), whichever is greater. Note to paragraph ( g iv Wood-pole fall-restriction devices meeting American Society of Testing and Materials Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment, e1 (F) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed specifically for the following connections, snaphooks on work-positioning equipment may not be engaged: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 (h) Portable ladders and platforms General. (2) Special ladders and platforms. (i) In the configurations in which they are used, portable ladders and platforms shall be capable of supporting without failure at least 2.5 times the maximum intended load. (ii) Portable ladders and platforms may not be loaded in excess of the working loads for which they are designed. (iii) Portable ladders and platforms shall be secured to prevent them from becoming dislodged. (iv) Portable ladders and platforms may be used only in applications for which they are designed. (3) Conductive ladders. (i) Hand and portable power equipment General. (2) Cord- and plug-connected equipment. (i) The equipment shall be equipped with a cord containing an equipment grounding conductor connected to the equipment frame and to a means for grounding the other end of the conductor (however, this option may not be used where the introduction of the ground into the work environment increases the hazard to an employee); or (ii) The equipment shall be of the double-insulated type conforming to subpart S of this part; or (iii) The equipment shall be connected to the power supply through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary of not more than 50 volts. (3) Portable and vehicle-mounted generators. (i) The generator may only supply equipment located on the generator or the vehicle and cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on the generator or the vehicle. (ii) The non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment and the equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles shall be bonded to the generator frame. (iii) For vehicle-mounted generators, the frame of the generator shall be bonded to the vehicle frame. (iv) Any neutral conductor shall be bonded to the generator frame. (4) Hydraulic and pneumatic tools. Note to paragraph ( i i If any hazardous defects are present, no operating pressure is safe, and the hydraulic or pneumatic equipment involved may not be used. In the absence of defects, the maximum rated operating pressure is the maximum safe pressure. (ii) A hydraulic or pneumatic tool used where it may contact exposed energized parts shall be designed and maintained for such use. (iii) The hydraulic system supplying a hydraulic tool used where it may contact exposed live parts shall provide protection against loss of insulating value, for the voltage involved, due to the formation of a partial vacuum in the hydraulic line. Note to paragraph ( i iii Use of hydraulic lines that do not have check valves and that have a separation of more than 10.7 meters (35 feet) between the oil reservoir and the upper end of the hydraulic system promotes the formation of a partial vacuum. (iv) A pneumatic tool used on energized electric lines or equipment, or used where it may contact exposed live parts, shall provide protection against the accumulation of moisture in the air supply. (v) Pressure shall be released before connections are broken, unless quick-acting, self-closing connectors are used. (vi) Employers must ensure that employees do not use any part of their bodies to locate, or attempt to stop, a hydraulic leak. (vii) Hoses may not be kinked. (j) Live-line tools Design of tools. (i) If the tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP), it shall withstand 328,100 volts per meter (100,000 volts per foot) of length for 5 minutes, or Note to paragraph ( j i Live-line tools using rod and tube that meet ASTM F711-02 (2007), Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live Line Tools, (ii) If the tool is made of wood, it shall withstand 246,100 volts per meter (75,000 volts per foot) of length for 3 minutes, or (iii) The tool shall withstand other tests that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent. (2) Condition of tools. (ii) If any defect or contamination that could adversely affect the insulating qualities or mechanical integrity of the live-line tool is present after wiping, the tool shall be removed from service and examined and tested according to paragraph (j)(2)(iii) of this section before being returned to service. (iii) Live-line tools used for primary employee protection shall be removed from service every 2 years, and whenever required under paragraph (j)(2)(ii) of this section, for examination, cleaning, repair, and testing as follows: (A) Each tool shall be thoroughly examined for defects. (B) If a defect or contamination that could adversely affect the insulating qualities or mechanical integrity of the live-line tool is found, the tool shall be repaired and refinished or shall be permanently removed from service. If no such defect or contamination is found, the tool shall be cleaned and waxed. (C) The tool shall be tested in accordance with paragraphs (j)(2)(iii)(D) and (j)(2)(iii)(E) of this section under the following conditions: ( 1 ( 2 (D) The test method used shall be designed to verify the tool's integrity along its entire working length and, if the tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic, its integrity under wet conditions. (E) The voltage applied during the tests shall be as follows: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 Note to paragraph ( j Guidelines for the examination, cleaning, repairing, and in-service testing of live-line tools are specified in the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers' IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines, (k) Materials handling and storage General. (2) Materials storage near energized lines or equipment. (A) For lines and equipment energized at 50 kilovolts or less, the distance is 3.05 meters (10 feet). (B) For lines and equipment energized at more than 50 kilovolts, the distance is 3.05 meters (10 feet) plus 0.10 meter (4 inches) for every 10 kilovolts over 50 kilovolts. (ii) In areas restricted to qualified employees, materials may not be stored within the working space about energized lines or equipment. Note to paragraph ( k ii Paragraphs (u)(1) and (v)(3) of this section specify the size of the working space. (l) Working on or near exposed energized parts. (1) General. (ii) Only qualified employees may work in areas containing unguarded, uninsulated energized lines or parts of equipment operating at 50 volts or more. (iii) Electric lines and equipment shall be considered and treated as energized unless they have been deenergized in accordance with paragraph (d) or (m) of this section. (2) At least two employees. (A) Installation, removal, or repair of lines energized at more than 600 volts, (B) Installation, removal, or repair of deenergized lines if an employee is exposed to contact with other parts energized at more than 600 volts, (C) Installation, removal, or repair of equipment, such as transformers, capacitors, and regulators, if an employee is exposed to contact with parts energized at more than 600 volts, (D) Work involving the use of mechanical equipment, other than insulated aerial lifts, near parts energized at more than 600 volts, and (E) Other work that exposes an employee to electrical hazards greater than, or equal to, the electrical hazards posed by operations listed specifically in paragraphs (l)(2)(i)(A) through (l)(2)(i)(D) of this section. (ii) Paragraph (l)(2)(i) of this section does not apply to the following operations: (A) Routine circuit switching, when the employer can demonstrate that conditions at the site allow safe performance of this work, (B) Work performed with live-line tools when the position of the employee is such that he or she is neither within reach of, nor otherwise exposed to contact with, energized parts, and (C) Emergency repairs to the extent necessary to safeguard the general public. (3) Minimum approach distances. (ii) No later than April 1, 2015, for voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the employer shall determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9. When the employer uses portable protective gaps to control the maximum transient overvoltage, the value of the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, must provide for five standard deviations between the statistical sparkover voltage of the gap and the statistical withstand voltage corresponding to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. The employer shall make any engineering analysis conducted to determine maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage available upon request to employees and to the Assistant Secretary or designee for examination and copying. Note to paragraph ( l ii See appendix B to this section for information on how to calculate the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, when the employer uses portable protective gaps to reduce maximum transient overvoltages. (iii) The employer shall ensure that no employee approaches or takes any conductive object closer to exposed energized parts than the employer's established minimum approach distance, unless: (A) The employee is insulated from the energized part (rubber insulating gloves or rubber insulating gloves and sleeves worn in accordance with paragraph (l)(4) of this section constitutes insulation of the employee from the energized part upon which the employee is working provided that the employee has control of the part in a manner sufficient to prevent exposure to uninsulated portions of the employee's body), or (B) The energized part is insulated from the employee and from any other conductive object at a different potential, or (C) The employee is insulated from any other exposed conductive object in accordance with the requirements for live-line barehand work in paragraph (q)(3) of this section. (4) Type of insulation. (A) Exposed energized parts on which the employee is not working are insulated from the employee; and (B) When installing insulation for purposes of paragraph (l)(4)(i)(A) of this section, the employee installs the insulation from a position that does not expose his or her upper arm to contact with other energized parts. (ii) When an employee uses rubber insulating gloves or rubber insulating gloves and sleeves as insulation from energized parts (under paragraph (l)(3)(iii)(A) of this section), the employer shall ensure that the employee: (A) Puts on the rubber insulating gloves and sleeves in a position where he or she cannot reach into the minimum approach distance, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section; and (B) Does not remove the rubber insulating gloves and sleeves until he or she is in a position where he or she cannot reach into the minimum approach distance, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section. (5) Working position. (ii) When an employee performs work near exposed parts energized at more than 600 volts, but not more than 72.5 kilovolts, and is not wearing rubber insulating gloves, being protected by insulating equipment covering the energized parts, performing work using live-line tools, or performing live-line barehand work under paragraph (q)(3) of this section, the employee shall work from a position where he or she cannot reach into the minimum approach distance, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section. (6) Making connections. (i) In connecting deenergized equipment or lines to an energized circuit by means of a conducting wire or device, an employee shall first attach the wire to the deenergized part; (ii) When disconnecting equipment or lines from an energized circuit by means of a conducting wire or device, an employee shall remove the source end first; and (iii) When lines or equipment are connected to or disconnected from energized circuits, an employee shall keep loose conductors away from exposed energized parts. (7) Conductive articles. (8) Protection from flames and electric arcs. (ii) For each employee exposed to hazards from electric arcs, the employer shall make a reasonable estimate of the incident heat energy to which the employee would be exposed. Note 1 to paragraph ( l ii Appendix E to this section provides guidance on estimating available heat energy. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will deem employers following the guidance in appendix E to this section to be in compliance with paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of this section. An employer may choose a method of calculating incident heat energy not included in appendix E to this section if the chosen method reasonably predicts the incident energy to which the employee would be exposed. Note 2 to paragraph ( l ii This paragraph does not require the employer to estimate the incident heat energy exposure for every job task performed by each employee. The employer may make broad estimates that cover multiple system areas provided the employer uses reasonable assumptions about the energy-exposure distribution throughout the system and provided the estimates represent the maximum employee exposure for those areas. For example, the employer could estimate the heat energy just outside a substation feeding a radial distribution system and use that estimate for all jobs performed on that radial system. (iii) The employer shall ensure that each employee who is exposed to hazards from flames or electric arcs does not wear clothing that could melt onto his or her skin or that could ignite and continue to burn when exposed to flames or the heat energy estimated under paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of this section. Note to paragraph ( l iii This paragraph prohibits clothing made from acetate, nylon, polyester, rayon and polypropylene, either alone or in blends, unless the employer demonstrates that the fabric has been treated to withstand the conditions that may be encountered by the employee or that the employee wears the clothing in such a manner as to eliminate the hazard involved. (iv) The employer shall ensure that the outer layer of clothing worn by an employee, except for clothing not required to be arc rated under paragraphs (l)(8)(v)(A) through (l)(8)(v)(E) of this section, is flame resistant under any of the following conditions: (A) The employee is exposed to contact with energized circuit parts operating at more than 600 volts, (B) An electric arc could ignite flammable material in the work area that, in turn, could ignite the employee's clothing, (C) Molten metal or electric arcs from faulted conductors in the work area could ignite the employee's clothing, or Note to paragraph ( l iv This paragraph does not apply to conductors that are capable of carrying, without failure, the maximum available fault current for the time the circuit protective devices take to interrupt the fault. (D) The incident heat energy estimated under paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of this section exceeds 2.0 cal/cm 2 (v) The employer shall ensure that each employee exposed to hazards from electric arcs wears protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating greater than or equal to the heat energy estimated under paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of this section whenever that estimate exceeds 2.0 cal/cm 2 (A) Arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's hands when the employee is wearing rubber insulating gloves with protectors or, if the estimated incident energy is no more than 14 cal/cm 2 2 2 (B) Arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's feet when the employee is wearing heavy-duty work shoes or boots, (C) Arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's head when the employee is wearing head protection meeting § 1910.135 if the estimated incident energy is less than 9 cal/cm 2 2 (D) The protection for the employee's head may consist of head protection meeting § 1910.135 and a faceshield with a minimum arc rating of 8 cal/cm 2 2 2 (E) For exposures involving single-phase arcs in open air, the arc rating for the employee's head and face protection may be 4 cal/cm 2 Note to paragraph ( l See appendix E to this section for further information on the selection of appropriate protection. (vi) Dates. (A) The obligation in paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of this section for the employer to make reasonable estimates of incident energy commences January 1, 2015. (B) The obligation in paragraph (l)(8)(iv)(D) of this section for the employer to ensure that the outer layer of clothing worn by an employee is flame-resistant when the estimated incident heat energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm 2 (C) The obligation in paragraph (l)(8)(v) of this section for the employer to ensure that each employee exposed to hazards from electric arcs wears the required arc-rated protective equipment commences April 1, 2015. (9) Fuse handling. (10) Covered (noninsulated) conductors. (11) Non-current-carrying metal parts. (12) Opening and closing circuits under load. (ii) The employer shall ensure that devices used by employees to close circuits under load conditions are designed to safely carry the current involved. Table R-3—AC Live-Line Work Minimum Approach Distance [The minimum approach distance (MAD; in meters) shall conform to the following equations.] For phase-to-phase system voltages of 50 V to 300 V: 1 MAD = avoid contact For phase-to-phase system voltages of 301 V to 5 kV: 1 MAD M D, D the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. M the inadvertent movement factor. For phase-to-phase system voltages of 5.1 kV to 72.5 kV: 1 4 MAD M AD, M the inadvertent movement factor. A the altitude correction factor. D the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. For phase-to-phase system voltages of more than 72.5 kV, nominal: 2 4 MAD = 0.3048( C a V L-G TA M C 0.01 for phase-to-phase exposures if the employer can demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap, or 0.011 otherwise V L-G T T T L-G T T L-G A M a Phase-to-Ground Exposures V Peak T L-G V L-G 635 kV or less 635.1 to 915 kV 915.1 to 1,050 kV More than 1,050 kV a 0 ( V Peak ( V Peak ( V Peak Phase-to-Phase Exposures 3 V Peak T L-G V L-G 630 kV or less 630.1 to 848 kV 848.1 to 1,131 kV 1,131.1 to 1,485 kV More than 1,485 kV a 0 ( V Peak ( V Peak ( V Peak ( V Peak 1 2 T, 3 V Peak 4 Table R-4—Electrical Component of the Minimum Approach Distance at 5.1 to 72.5 kV [D; In meters] Nominal voltage (kV) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure D (m) D (m) 5.1 to 15.0 0.04 0.07 15.1 to 36.0 0.16 0.28 36.1 to 46.0 0.23 0.37 46.1 to 72.5 0.39 0.59 Table R-5—Altitude Correction Factor Altitude above sea level A 0 to 900 1.00 901 to 1,200 1.02 1,201 to 1,500 1.05 1,501 to 1,800 1.08 1,801 to 2,100 1.11 2,101 to 2,400 1.14 2,401 to 2,700 1.17 2,701 to 3,000 1.20 3,001 to 3,600 1.25 3,601 to 4,200 1.30 4,201 to 4,800 1.35 4,801 to 5,400 1.39 5,401 to 6,000 1.44 Table R-6—Alternative Minimum Approach Distances for Voltages of 72.5 kV and Less 1 Nominal voltage (kV) Distance Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 0.050 to 0.300 2 Avoid Contact Avoid Contact 0.301 to 0.750 2 0.33 1.09 0.33 1.09 0.751 to 5.0 0.63 2.07 0.63 2.07 5.1 to 15.0 0.65 2.14 0.68 2.24 15.1 to 36.0 0.77 2.53 0.89 2.92 36.1 to 46.0 0.84 2.76 0.98 3.22 46.1 to 72.5 1.00 3.29 1.20 3.94 1 2 Table R-7—Alternative Minimum Approach Distances for Voltages of More Than 72.5 kV 1 2 3 Voltage range phase to phase (kV) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 72.6 to 121.0 1.13 3.71 1.42 4.66 121.1 to 145.0 1.30 4.27 1.64 5.38 145.1 to 169.0 1.46 4.79 1.94 6.36 169.1 to 242.0 2.01 6.59 3.08 10.10 242.1 to 362.0 3.41 11.19 5.52 18.11 362.1 to 420.0 4.25 13.94 6.81 22.34 420.1 to 550.0 5.07 16.63 8.24 27.03 550.1 to 800.0 6.88 22.57 11.38 37.34 1 2 3 Table R-8—DC Live-Line Minimum Approach Distance with Overvoltage Factor 1 [In meters] Maximum anticipated per-unit Distance (m) 250 400 500 600 750 1.5 or less 1.12 1.60 2.06 2.62 3.61 1.6 1.17 1.69 2.24 2.86 3.98 1.7 1.23 1.82 2.42 3.12 4.37 1.8 1.28 1.95 2.62 3.39 4.79 1 Table R-9—Assumed Maximum Per-Unit Transient Overvoltage Voltage range Type of current Assumed 72.6 to 420.0 ac 3.5 420.1 to 550.0 ac 3.0 550.1 to 800.0 ac 2.5 250 to 750 dc 1.8 (m) Deenergizing lines and equipment for employee protection Application. (2) General. (ii) If no system operator is in charge of the lines or equipment and their means of disconnection, the employer shall designate one employee in the crew to be in charge of the clearance and to perform the functions that the system operator would otherwise perform under paragraph (m) of this section. All of the requirements of paragraph (m)(3) of this section apply, in the order specified, except as provided in paragraph (m)(2)(iii) of this section. (iii) If only one crew will be working on the lines or equipment and if the means of disconnection is accessible and visible to, and under the sole control of, the employee in charge of the clearance, paragraphs (m)(3)(i), (m)(3)(iii), and (m)(3)(v) of this section do not apply. Additionally, the employer does not need to use the tags required by the remaining provisions of paragraph (m)(3) of this section. (iv) If two or more crews will be working on the same lines or equipment, then: (A) The crews shall coordinate their activities under paragraph (m) of this section with a single employee in charge of the clearance for all of the crews and follow the requirements of paragraph (m) of this section as if all of the employees formed a single crew, or (B) Each crew shall independently comply with paragraph (m) of this section and, if there is no system operator in charge of the lines or equipment, shall have separate tags and coordinate deenergizing and reenergizing the lines and equipment with the other crews. (v) The employer shall render any disconnecting means that are accessible to individuals outside the employer's control (for example, the general public) inoperable while the disconnecting means are open for the purpose of protecting employees. (3) Deenergizing lines and equipment. (ii) The employer shall ensure that all switches, disconnectors, jumpers, taps, and other means through which known sources of electric energy may be supplied to the particular lines and equipment to be deenergized are open. The employer shall render such means inoperable, unless its design does not so permit, and then ensure that such means are tagged to indicate that employees are at work. (iii) The employer shall ensure that automatically and remotely controlled switches that could cause the opened disconnecting means to close are also tagged at the points of control. The employer shall render the automatic or remote control feature inoperable, unless its design does not so permit. (iv) The employer need not use the tags mentioned in paragraphs (m)(3)(ii) and (m)(3)(iii) of this section on a network protector for work on the primary feeder for the network protector's associated network transformer when the employer can demonstrate all of the following conditions: (A) Every network protector is maintained so that it will immediately trip open if closed when a primary conductor is deenergized; (B) Employees cannot manually place any network protector in a closed position without the use of tools, and any manual override position is blocked, locked, or otherwise disabled; and (C) The employer has procedures for manually overriding any network protector that incorporate provisions for determining, before anyone places a network protector in a closed position, that: The line connected to the network protector is not deenergized for the protection of any employee working on the line; and (if the line connected to the network protector is not deenergized for the protection of any employee working on the line) the primary conductors for the network protector are energized. (v) Tags shall prohibit operation of the disconnecting means and shall indicate that employees are at work. (vi) After the applicable requirements in paragraphs (m)(3)(i) through (m)(3)(v) of this section have been followed and the system operator gives a clearance to the employee in charge, the employer shall ensure that the lines and equipment are deenergized by testing the lines and equipment to be worked with a device designed to detect voltage. (vii) The employer shall ensure the installation of protective grounds as required by paragraph (n) of this section. (viii) After the applicable requirements of paragraphs (m)(3)(i) through (m)(3)(vii) of this section have been followed, the lines and equipment involved may be considered deenergized. (ix) To transfer the clearance, the employee in charge (or the employee's supervisor if the employee in charge must leave the worksite due to illness or other emergency) shall inform the system operator and employees in the crew; and the new employee in charge shall be responsible for the clearance. (x) To release a clearance, the employee in charge shall: (A) Notify each employee under that clearance of the pending release of the clearance; (B) Ensure that all employees under that clearance are clear of the lines and equipment; (C) Ensure that all protective grounds protecting employees under that clearance have been removed; and (D) Report this information to the system operator and then release the clearance. (xi) Only the employee in charge who requested the clearance may release the clearance, unless the employer transfers responsibility under paragraph (m)(3)(ix) of this section. (xii) No one may remove tags without the release of the associated clearance as specified under paragraphs (m)(3)(x) and (m)(3)(xi) of this section. (xiii) The employer shall ensure that no one initiates action to reenergize the lines or equipment at a point of disconnection until all protective grounds have been removed, all crews working on the lines or equipment release their clearances, all employees are clear of the lines and equipment, and all protective tags are removed from that point of disconnection. (n) Grounding for the protection of employees Application. Note to paragraph ( n This paragraph covers grounding of generation, transmission, and distribution lines and equipment when this section requires protective grounding and whenever the employer chooses to ground such lines and equipment for the protection of employees. (2) General. (i) The employer ensures that the lines and equipment are deenergized under the provisions of paragraph (m) of this section. (ii) There is no possibility of contact with another energized source. (iii) The hazard of induced voltage is not present. (3) Equipotential zone. Note to paragraph ( n Appendix C to this section contains guidelines for establishing the equipotential zone required by this paragraph. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will deem grounding practices meeting these guidelines as complying with paragraph (n)(3) of this section. (4) Protective grounding equipment. (ii) Protective grounding equipment shall have an ampacity greater than or equal to that of No. 2 AWG copper. (iii) Protective grounds shall have an impedance low enough so that they do not delay the operation of protective devices in case of accidental energizing of the lines or equipment. Note to paragraph ( n American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment, Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines, (5) Testing. (6) Connecting and removing grounds. (ii) The employer shall ensure that, when an employee removes a ground, the employee removes the grounding device from the line or equipment using a live-line tool before he or she removes the ground-end connection. For lines or equipment operating at 600 volts or less, the employer may permit the employee to use insulating equipment other than a live-line tool if the employer ensures that the line or equipment is not energized at the time the ground is disconnected or if the employer can demonstrate that each employee is protected from hazards that may develop if the line or equipment is energized. (7) Additional precautions. (8) Removal of grounds for test. (o) Testing and test facilities Application. Note to paragraph ( o OSHA considers routine inspection and maintenance measurements made by qualified employees to be routine line work not included in the scope of paragraph (o) of this section, provided that the hazards related to the use of intrinsic high-voltage or high-power sources require only the normal precautions associated with routine work specified in the other paragraphs of this section. Two typical examples of such excluded test work procedures are “phasing-out” testing and testing for a “no-voltage” condition. (2) General requirements. (ii) The employer shall ensure that each employee, upon initial assignment to the test area, receives training in safe work practices, with retraining provided as required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section. (3) Safeguarding of test areas. (ii) The employer shall guard permanent test areas with walls, fences, or other barriers designed to keep employees out of the test areas. (iii) In field testing, or at a temporary test site not guarded by permanent fences and gates, the employer shall ensure the use of one of the following means to prevent employees without authorization from entering: (A) Distinctively colored safety tape supported approximately waist high with safety signs attached to it, (B) A barrier or barricade that limits access to the test area to a degree equivalent, physically and visually, to the barricade specified in paragraph (o)(3)(iii)(A) of this section, or (C) One or more test observers stationed so that they can monitor the entire area. (iv) The employer shall ensure the removal of the safeguards required by paragraph (o)(3)(iii) of this section when employees no longer need the protection afforded by the safeguards. (4) Grounding practices. (A) The employer shall maintain at ground potential all conductive parts accessible to the test operator while the equipment is operating at high voltage. (B) Wherever ungrounded terminals of test equipment or apparatus under test may be present, they shall be treated as energized until tests demonstrate that they are deenergized. (ii) The employer shall ensure either that visible grounds are applied automatically, or that employees using properly insulated tools manually apply visible grounds, to the high-voltage circuits after they are deenergized and before any employee performs work on the circuit or on the item or apparatus under test. Common ground connections shall be solidly connected to the test equipment and the apparatus under test. (iii) In high-power testing, the employer shall provide an isolated ground-return conductor system designed to prevent the intentional passage of current, with its attendant voltage rise, from occurring in the ground grid or in the earth. However, the employer need not provide an isolated ground-return conductor if the employer can demonstrate that both of the following conditions exist: (A) The employer cannot provide an isolated ground-return conductor due to the distance of the test site from the electric energy source, and (B) The employer protects employees from any hazardous step and touch potentials that may develop during the test. Note to paragraph ( o iii See appendix C to this section for information on measures that employers can take to protect employees from hazardous step and touch potentials. (iv) For tests in which using the equipment grounding conductor in the equipment power cord to ground the test equipment would result in greater hazards to test personnel or prevent the taking of satisfactory measurements, the employer may use a ground clearly indicated in the test set-up if the employer can demonstrate that this ground affords protection for employees equivalent to the protection afforded by an equipment grounding conductor in the power supply cord. (v) The employer shall ensure that, when any employee enters the test area after equipment is deenergized, a ground is placed on the high-voltage terminal and any other exposed terminals. (A) Before any employee applies a direct ground, the employer shall discharge high capacitance equipment through a resistor rated for the available energy. (B) A direct ground shall be applied to the exposed terminals after the stored energy drops to a level at which it is safe to do so. (vi) If the employer uses a test trailer or test vehicle in field testing, its chassis shall be grounded. The employer shall protect each employee against hazardous touch potentials with respect to the vehicle, instrument panels, and other conductive parts accessible to employees with bonding, insulation, or isolation. (5) Control and measuring circuits. (ii) The employer shall isolate meters and other instruments with accessible terminals or parts from test personnel to protect against hazards that could arise should such terminals and parts become energized during testing. If the employer provides this isolation by locating test equipment in metal compartments with viewing windows, the employer shall provide interlocks to interrupt the power supply when someone opens the compartment cover. (iii) The employer shall protect temporary wiring and its connections against damage, accidental interruptions, and other hazards. To the maximum extent possible, the employer shall keep signal, control, ground, and power cables separate from each other. (iv) If any employee will be present in the test area during testing, a test observer shall be present. The test observer shall be capable of implementing the immediate deenergizing of test circuits for safety purposes. (6) Safety check. (ii) The test operator in charge shall conduct these routine safety checks before each series of tests and shall verify at least the following conditions: (A) Barriers and safeguards are in workable condition and placed properly to isolate hazardous areas; (B) System test status signals, if used, are in operable condition; (C) Clearly marked test-power disconnects are readily available in an emergency; (D) Ground connections are clearly identifiable; (E) Personal protective equipment is provided and used as required by Subpart I of this part and by this section; and (F) Proper separation between signal, ground, and power cables. (p) Mechanical equipment General requirements. Note to paragraph ( p i Critical safety components of mechanical elevating and rotating equipment are components for which failure would result in free fall or free rotation of the boom. (ii) No motor vehicle or earthmoving or compacting equipment having an obstructed view to the rear may be operated on off-highway jobsites where any employee is exposed to the hazards created by the moving vehicle, unless: (A) The vehicle has a reverse signal alarm audible above the surrounding noise level, or (B) The vehicle is backed up only when a designated employee signals that it is safe to do so. (iii) Rubber-tired self-propelled scrapers, rubber-tired front-end loaders, rubber-tired dozers, wheel-type agricultural and industrial tractors, crawler-type tractors, crawler-type loaders, and motor graders, with or without attachments, shall have rollover protective structures that meet the requirements of Subpart W of Part 1926 of this chapter. (iv) The operator of an electric line truck may not leave his or her position at the controls while a load is suspended, unless the employer can demonstrate that no employee (including the operator) is endangered. (2) Outriggers. (ii) Outriggers may not be extended or retracted outside of the clear view of the operator unless all employees are outside the range of possible equipment motion. (iii) If the work area or the terrain precludes the use of outriggers, the equipment may be operated only within its maximum load ratings specified by the equipment manufacturer for the particular configuration of the equipment without outriggers. (3) Applied loads. (4) Operations near energized lines or equipment. (ii) A designated employee other than the equipment operator shall observe the approach distance to exposed lines and equipment and provide timely warnings before the minimum approach distance required by paragraph (p)(4)(i) of this section is reached, unless the employer can demonstrate that the operator can accurately determine that the minimum approach distance is being maintained. (iii) If, during operation of the mechanical equipment, that equipment could become energized, the operation also shall comply with at least one of paragraphs (p)(4)(iii)(A) through (p)(4)(iii)(C) of this section. (A) The energized lines or equipment exposed to contact shall be covered with insulating protective material that will withstand the type of contact that could be made during the operation. (B) The mechanical equipment shall be insulated for the voltage involved. The mechanical equipment shall be positioned so that its uninsulated portions cannot approach the energized lines or equipment any closer than the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section. (C) Each employee shall be protected from hazards that could arise from mechanical equipment contact with energized lines or equipment. The measures used shall ensure that employees will not be exposed to hazardous differences in electric potential. Unless the employer can demonstrate that the methods in use protect each employee from the hazards that could arise if the mechanical equipment contacts the energized line or equipment, the measures used shall include all of the following techniques: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 Note to paragraph ( p iii Appendix C to this section contains information on hazardous step and touch potentials and on methods of protecting employees from hazards resulting from such potentials. (q) Overhead lines and live-line barehand work. (1) General. Note to paragraph ( q i Appendix D to this section contains test methods that employers can use in ascertaining whether a wood pole is capable of sustaining the forces imposed by an employee climbing the pole. This paragraph also requires the employer to ascertain that the pole can sustain all other forces imposed by the work employees will perform. (ii) When a pole is set, moved, or removed near an exposed energized overhead conductor, the pole may not contact the conductor. (iii) When a pole is set, moved, or removed near an exposed energized overhead conductor, the employer shall ensure that each employee wears electrical protective equipment or uses insulated devices when handling the pole and that no employee contacts the pole with uninsulated parts of his or her body. (iv) To protect employees from falling into holes used for placing poles, the employer shall physically guard the holes, or ensure that employees attend the holes, whenever anyone is working nearby. (2) Installing and removing overhead lines. (i) When lines that employees are installing or removing can contact energized parts, the employer shall use the tension-stringing method, barriers, or other equivalent measures to minimize the possibility that conductors and cables the employees are installing or removing will contact energized power lines or equipment. (ii) For conductors, cables, and pulling and tensioning equipment, the employer shall provide the protective measures required by paragraph (p)(4)(iii) of this section when employees are installing or removing a conductor or cable close enough to energized conductors that any of the following failures could energize the pulling or tensioning equipment or the conductor or cable being installed or removed: (A) Failure of the pulling or tensioning equipment, (B) Failure of the conductor or cable being pulled, or (C) Failure of the previously installed lines or equipment. (iii) If the conductors that employees are installing or removing cross over energized conductors in excess of 600 volts and if the design of the circuit-interrupting devices protecting the lines so permits, the employer shall render inoperable the automatic-reclosing feature of these devices. (iv) Before employees install lines parallel to existing energized lines, the employer shall make a determination of the approximate voltage to be induced in the new lines, or work shall proceed on the assumption that the induced voltage is hazardous. Unless the employer can demonstrate that the lines that employees are installing are not subject to the induction of a hazardous voltage or unless the lines are treated as energized, temporary protective grounds shall be placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential. Note 1 to paragraph ( q iv If the employer takes no precautions to protect employees from hazards associated with involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the induced voltage is sufficient to pass a current of 1 milliampere through a 500-ohm resistor. If the employer protects employees from injury due to involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the resultant current would be more than 6 milliamperes. Note 2 to paragraph ( q iv Appendix C to this section contains guidelines for protecting employees from hazardous differences in electric potential as required by this paragraph. (v) Reel-handling equipment, including pulling and tensioning devices, shall be in safe operating condition and shall be leveled and aligned. (vi) The employer shall ensure that employees do not exceed load ratings of stringing lines, pulling lines, conductor grips, load-bearing hardware and accessories, rigging, and hoists. (vii) The employer shall repair or replace defective pulling lines and accessories. (viii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not use conductor grips on wire rope unless the manufacturer specifically designed the grip for this application. (ix) The employer shall ensure that employees maintain reliable communications, through two-way radios or other equivalent means, between the reel tender and the pulling-rig operator. (x) Employees may operate the pulling rig only when it is safe to do so. Note to paragraph ( q x Examples of unsafe conditions include: employees in locations prohibited by paragraph (q)(2)(xi) of this section, conductor and pulling line hang-ups, and slipping of the conductor grip. (xi) While a power-driven device is pulling the conductor or pulling line and the conductor or pulling line is in motion, the employer shall ensure that employees are not directly under overhead operations or on the crossarm, except as necessary for the employees to guide the stringing sock or board over or through the stringing sheave. (3) Live-line barehand work. (i) Before an employee uses or supervises the use of the live-line barehand technique on energized circuits, the employer shall ensure that the employee completes training conforming to paragraph (a)(2) of this section in the technique and in the safety requirements of paragraph (q)(3) of this section. (ii) Before any employee uses the live-line barehand technique on energized high-voltage conductors or parts, the employer shall ascertain the following information in addition to information about other existing conditions required by paragraph (a)(4) of this section: (A) The nominal voltage rating of the circuit on which employees will perform the work, (B) The clearances to ground of lines and other energized parts on which employees will perform the work, and (C) The voltage limitations of equipment employees will use. (iii) The employer shall ensure that the insulated equipment, insulated tools, and aerial devices and platforms used by employees are designed, tested, and made for live-line barehand work. (iv) The employer shall ensure that employees keep tools and equipment clean and dry while they are in use. (v) The employer shall render inoperable the automatic-reclosing feature of circuit-interrupting devices protecting the lines if the design of the devices permits. (vi) The employer shall ensure that employees do not perform work when adverse weather conditions would make the work hazardous even after the employer implements the work practices required by this section. Additionally, employees may not perform work when winds reduce the phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground clearances at the work location below the minimum approach distances specified in paragraph (q)(3)(xiv) of this section, unless insulating guards cover the grounded objects and other lines and equipment. Note to paragraph ( q vi Thunderstorms in the vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that make live-line barehand work too hazardous to perform safely even after the employer implements the work practices required by this section. (vii) The employer shall provide and ensure that employees use a conductive bucket liner or other conductive device for bonding the insulated aerial device to the energized line or equipment. (A) The employee shall be connected to the bucket liner or other conductive device by the use of conductive shoes, leg clips, or other means. (B) Where differences in potentials at the worksite pose a hazard to employees, the employer shall provide electrostatic shielding designed for the voltage being worked. (viii) The employer shall ensure that, before the employee contacts the energized part, the employee bonds the conductive bucket liner or other conductive device to the energized conductor by means of a positive connection. This connection shall remain attached to the energized conductor until the employee completes the work on the energized circuit. (ix) Aerial lifts used for live-line barehand work shall have dual controls (lower and upper) as follows: (A) The upper controls shall be within easy reach of the employee in the bucket. On a two-bucket-type lift, access to the controls shall be within easy reach of both buckets. (B) The lower set of controls shall be near the base of the boom and shall be designed so that they can override operation of the equipment at any time. (x) Lower (ground-level) lift controls may not be operated with an employee in the lift except in case of emergency. (xi) The employer shall ensure that, before employees elevate an aerial lift into the work position, the employees check all controls (ground level and bucket) to determine that they are in proper working condition. (xii) The employer shall ensure that, before employees elevate the boom of an aerial lift, the employees ground the body of the truck or barricade the body of the truck and treat it as energized. (xiii) The employer shall ensure that employees perform a boom-current test before starting work each day, each time during the day when they encounter a higher voltage, and when changed conditions indicate a need for an additional test. (A) This test shall consist of placing the bucket in contact with an energized source equal to the voltage to be encountered for a minimum of 3 minutes. (B) The leakage current may not exceed 1 microampere per kilovolt of nominal phase-to-ground voltage. (C) The employer shall immediately suspend work from the aerial lift when there is any indication of a malfunction in the equipment. (xiv) The employer shall ensure that employees maintain the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, from all grounded objects and from lines and equipment at a potential different from that to which the live-line barehand equipment is bonded, unless insulating guards cover such grounded objects and other lines and equipment. (xv) The employer shall ensure that, while an employee is approaching, leaving, or bonding to an energized circuit, the employee maintains the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, between the employee and any grounded parts, including the lower boom and portions of the truck and between the employee and conductive objects energized at different potentials. (xvi) While the bucket is alongside an energized bushing or insulator string, the employer shall ensure that employees maintain the phase-to-ground minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, between all parts of the bucket and the grounded end of the bushing or insulator string or any other grounded surface. (xvii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not use handlines between the bucket and the boom or between the bucket and the ground. However, employees may use nonconductive-type handlines from conductor to ground if not supported from the bucket. The employer shall ensure that no one uses ropes used for live-line barehand work for other purposes. (xviii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not pass uninsulated equipment or material between a pole or structure and an aerial lift while an employee working from the bucket is bonded to an energized part. (xix) A nonconductive measuring device shall be readily accessible to employees performing live-line barehand work to assist them in maintaining the required minimum approach distance. (4) Towers and structures. (i) The employer shall ensure that no employee is under a tower or structure while work is in progress, except when the employer can demonstrate that such a working position is necessary to assist employees working above. (ii) The employer shall ensure that employees use tag lines or other similar devices to maintain control of tower sections being raised or positioned, unless the employer can demonstrate that the use of such devices would create a greater hazard to employees. (iii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not detach the loadline from a member or section until they safely secure the load. (iv) The employer shall ensure that, except during emergency restoration procedures, employees discontinue work when adverse weather conditions would make the work hazardous in spite of the work practices required by this section. Note to paragraph ( q iv Thunderstorms in the vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that make this work too hazardous to perform even after the employer implements the work practices required by this section. (r) Line-clearance tree trimming. (1) Electrical hazards. (i) Before an employee climbs, enters, or works around any tree, a determination shall be made of the nominal voltage of electric power lines posing a hazard to employees. However, a determination of the maximum nominal voltage to which an employee will be exposed may be made instead, if all lines are considered as energized at this maximum voltage. (ii) There shall be a second line-clearance tree trimmer within normal (that is, unassisted) voice communication under any of the following conditions: (A) If a line-clearance tree trimmer is to approach more closely than 3.05 meters (10 feet) to any conductor or electric apparatus energized at more than 750 volts or (B) If branches or limbs being removed are closer to lines energized at more than 750 volts than the distances listed in Table R-5, Table R-6, Table R-7, and Table R-8 or (C) If roping is necessary to remove branches or limbs from such conductors or apparatus. (iii) Line-clearance tree trimmers shall maintain the minimum approach distances from energized conductors given in Table R-5, Table R-6, Table R-7, and Table R-8. (iv) Branches that are contacting exposed energized conductors or equipment or that are within the distances specified in Table R-5, Table R-6, Table R-7, and Table R-8 may be removed only through the use of insulating equipment. Note to paragraph ( r iv A tool constructed of a material that the employer can demonstrate has insulating qualities meeting paragraph (j)(1) of this section is considered as insulated under paragraph (r)(1)(iv) of this section if the tool is clean and dry. (v) Ladders, platforms, and aerial devices may not be brought closer to an energized part than the distances listed in Table R-5, Table R-6, Table R-7, and Table R-8. (vi) Line-clearance tree trimming may not be performed when adverse weather conditions make the work hazardous in spite of the work practices required by this section. Each employee performing line-clearance tree trimming in the aftermath of a storm or under similar emergency conditions shall be trained in the special hazards related to this type of work. Note to paragraph ( r vi Thunderstorms in the immediate vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that are presumed to make line-clearance tree trimming too hazardous to perform safely. (2) Brush chippers. (ii) Access panels for maintenance and adjustment of the chipper blades and associated drive train shall be in place and secure during operation of the equipment. (iii) Brush chippers not equipped with a mechanical infeed system shall be equipped with an infeed hopper of length sufficient to prevent employees from contacting the blades or knives of the machine during operation. (iv) Trailer chippers detached from trucks shall be chocked or otherwise secured. (v) Each employee in the immediate area of an operating chipper feed table shall wear personal protective equipment as required by Subpart I of this part. (3) Sprayers and related equipment. (ii) Equipment on which employees stand to spray while the vehicle is in motion shall be equipped with guardrails around the working area. The guardrail shall be constructed in accordance with subpart D of this part. (4) Stump cutters. (ii) Each employee in the immediate area of stump grinding operations (including the stump cutter operator) shall wear personal protective equipment as required by subpart I of this part. (5) Gasoline-engine power saws. (i) Each power saw weighing more than 6.8 kilograms (15 pounds, service weight) that is used in trees shall be supported by a separate line, except when work is performed from an aerial lift and except during topping or removing operations where no supporting limb will be available. (ii) Each power saw shall be equipped with a control that will return the saw to idling speed when released. (iii) Each power saw shall be equipped with a clutch and shall be so adjusted that the clutch will not engage the chain drive at idling speed. (iv) A power saw shall be started on the ground or where it is otherwise firmly supported. Drop starting of saws over 6.8 kilograms (15 pounds), other than chain saws, is permitted outside of the bucket of an aerial lift only if the area below the lift is clear of personnel. Note to paragraph ( r iv Paragraph (e)(2)(vi) of § 1910.266 prohibits drop starting of chain saws. (v) A power saw engine may be started and operated only when all employees other than the operator are clear of the saw. (vi) A power saw may not be running when the saw is being carried up into a tree by an employee. (vii) Power saw engines shall be stopped for all cleaning, refueling, adjustments, and repairs to the saw or motor, except as the manufacturer's servicing procedures require otherwise. (6) Backpack power units for use in pruning and clearing. (ii) A backpack power unit shall be equipped with a quick shutoff switch readily accessible to the operator. (iii) Backpack power unit engines shall be stopped for all cleaning, refueling, adjustments, and repairs to the saw or motor, except as the manufacturer's servicing procedures require otherwise. (7) Rope. (ii) Rope shall be inspected before each use and, if unsafe (for example, because of damage or defect), may not be used. (iii) Rope shall be stored away from cutting edges and sharp tools. Rope contact with corrosive chemicals, gas, and oil shall be avoided. (iv) When stored, rope shall be coiled and piled, or shall be suspended, so that air can circulate through the coils. (v) Rope ends shall be secured to prevent their unraveling. (vi) Climbing rope may not be spliced to effect repair. (vii) A rope that is wet, that is contaminated to the extent that its insulating capacity is impaired, or that is otherwise not considered to be insulated for the voltage involved may not be used near exposed energized lines. (8) Fall protection. (s) Communication facilities Microwave transmission. (ii) If the electromagnetic-radiation level within an accessible area associated with microwave communications systems exceeds the radiation-protection guide specified by § 1910.97(a)(2), the employer shall post the area with warning signs containing the warning symbol described in § 1910.97(a)(3). The lower half of the warning symbol shall include the following statements, or ones that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent: “Radiation in this area may exceed hazard limitations and special precautions are required. Obtain specific instruction before entering.” (iii) When an employee works in an area where the electromagnetic radiation could exceed the radiation-protection guide, the employer shall institute measures that ensure that the employee's exposure is not greater than that permitted by that guide. Such measures may include administrative and engineering controls and personal protective equipment. (2) Power-line carrier. (t) Underground electrical installations. (1) Access. (2) Lowering equipment into manholes. (ii) Before anyone lowers tools or material into the opening for a manhole or vault, each employee working in the manhole or vault shall be clear of the area directly under the opening. (3) Attendants for manholes and vaults. (ii) Occasionally, the employee on the surface may briefly enter a manhole or vault to provide nonemergency assistance. Note 1 to paragraph ( t ii Paragraph (e)(7) of this section may also require an attendant and does not permit this attendant to enter the manhole or vault. Note 2 to paragraph ( t ii Paragraph (l)(1)(ii) of this section requires employees entering manholes or vaults containing unguarded, uninsulated energized lines or parts of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more to be qualified. (iii) For the purpose of inspection, housekeeping, taking readings, or similar work, an employee working alone may enter, for brief periods of time, a manhole or vault where energized cables or equipment are in service if the employer can demonstrate that the employee will be protected from all electrical hazards. (iv) The employer shall ensure that employees maintain reliable communications, through two-way radios or other equivalent means, among all employees involved in the job. (4) Duct rods. (5) Multiple cables. (6) Moving cables. (7) Protection against faults. (ii) If the work employees will perform in a manhole or vault could cause a fault in a cable, the employer shall deenergize that cable before any employee works in the manhole or vault, except when service-load conditions and a lack of feasible alternatives require that the cable remain energized. In that case, employees may enter the manhole or vault provided the employer protects them from the possible effects of a failure using shields or other devices that are capable of containing the adverse effects of a fault. (8) Sheath continuity. (u) Substations. (1) Access and working space. Note to paragraph ( u American National Standard National Electrical Safety Code, (1) Whether the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made, (2) Whether the configuration of the installation enables employees to maintain the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, while the employees are working on exposed, energized parts, and (3) Whether the precautions taken when employees perform work on the installation provide protection equivalent to the protection provided by access and working space meeting ANSI/IEEE C2-2012. (2) Draw-out-type circuit breakers. (3) Substation fences. Note to paragraph ( u IEEE Std 80-2000, IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding, (4) Guarding of rooms and other spaces containing electric supply equipment. (A) If exposed live parts operating at 50 to 150 volts to ground are within 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or other working surface inside the room or other space, (B) If live parts operating at 151 to 600 volts to ground and located within 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or other working surface inside the room or other space are guarded only by location, as permitted under paragraph (u)(5)(i) of this section, or (C) If live parts operating at more than 600 volts to ground are within the room or other space, unless: ( 1 ( 2 (ii) Fences, screens, partitions, or walls shall enclose the rooms and other spaces so as to minimize the possibility that unqualified persons will enter. (iii) Unqualified persons may not enter the rooms or other spaces while the electric supply lines or equipment are energized. (iv) The employer shall display signs at entrances to the rooms and other spaces warning unqualified persons to keep out. (v) The employer shall keep each entrance to a room or other space locked, unless the entrance is under the observation of a person who is attending the room or other space for the purpose of preventing unqualified employees from entering. (5) Guarding of energized parts. Note to paragraph ( u i American National Standard National Electrical Safety Code, (1) Whether the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made, (2) Whether each employee is isolated from energized parts at the point of closest approach; and (3) Whether the precautions taken when employees perform work on the installation provide protection equivalent to the protection provided by horizontal and vertical clearances meeting ANSI/IEEE C2-2002. (ii) Except for fuse replacement and other necessary access by qualified persons, the employer shall maintain guarding of energized parts within a compartment during operation and maintenance functions to prevent accidental contact with energized parts and to prevent dropped tools or other equipment from contacting energized parts. (iii) Before guards are removed from energized equipment, the employer shall install barriers around the work area to prevent employees who are not working on the equipment, but who are in the area, from contacting the exposed live parts. (6) Substation entry. (ii) The job briefing required by paragraph (c) of this section shall cover information on special system conditions affecting employee safety, including the location of energized equipment in or adjacent to the work area and the limits of any deenergized work area. (v) Power generation. (1) Interlocks and other safety devices. (ii) No interlock or other safety device may be modified to defeat its function, except for test, repair, or adjustment of the device. (2) Changing brushes. (3) Access and working space. Note to paragraph ( v American National Standard National Electrical Safety Code, (1) Whether the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made; (2) Whether the configuration of the installation enables employees to maintain the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, while the employees are working on exposed, energized parts, and; (3) Whether the precautions taken when employees perform work on the installation provide protection equivalent to the protection provided by access and working space meeting ANSI/IEEE C2-2012. (4) Guarding of rooms and other spaces containing electric supply equipment. (A) If exposed live parts operating at 50 to 150 volts to ground are within 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or other working surface inside the room or other space, (B) If live parts operating at 151 to 600 volts to ground and located within 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or other working surface inside the room or other space are guarded only by location, as permitted under paragraph (v)(5)(i) of this section, or (C) If live parts operating at more than 600 volts to ground are within the room or other space, unless: ( 1 ( 2 (ii) Fences, screens, partitions, or walls shall enclose the rooms and other spaces so as to minimize the possibility that unqualified persons will enter. (iii) Unqualified persons may not enter the rooms or other spaces while the electric supply lines or equipment are energized. (iv) The employer shall display signs at entrances to the rooms and other spaces warning unqualified persons to keep out. (v) The employer shall keep each entrance to a room or other space locked, unless the entrance is under the observation of a person who is attending the room or other space for the purpose of preventing unqualified employees from entering. (5) Guarding of energized parts. Note to paragraph ( v i American National Standard National Electrical Safety Code, (1) Whether the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made; (2) Whether each employee is isolated from energized parts at the point of closest approach; and (3) Whether the precautions taken when employees perform work on the installation provide protection equivalent to the protection provided by horizontal and vertical clearances meeting ANSI/IEEE C2-2002. (ii) Except for fuse replacement and other necessary access by qualified persons, the employer shall maintain guarding of energized parts within a compartment during operation and maintenance functions to prevent accidental contact with energized parts and to prevent dropped tools or other equipment from contacting energized parts. (iii) Before guards are removed from energized equipment, the employer shall install barriers around the work area to prevent employees who are not working on the equipment, but who are in the area, from contacting the exposed live parts. (6) Water or steam spaces. (i) A designated employee shall inspect conditions before work is permitted and after its completion. Eye protection, or full face protection if necessary, shall be worn at all times when condenser, heater, or boiler tubes are being cleaned. (ii) Where it is necessary for employees to work near tube ends during cleaning, shielding shall be installed at the tube ends. (7) Chemical cleaning of boilers and pressure vessels. (i) Areas where chemical cleaning is in progress shall be cordoned off to restrict access during cleaning. If flammable liquids, gases, or vapors or combustible materials will be used or might be produced during the cleaning process, the following requirements also apply: (A) The area shall be posted with signs restricting entry and warning of the hazards of fire and explosion; and (B) Smoking, welding, and other possible ignition sources are prohibited in these restricted areas. (ii) The number of personnel in the restricted area shall be limited to those necessary to accomplish the task safely. (iii) There shall be ready access to water or showers for emergency use. Note to paragraph ( v iii See § 1910.141 for requirements that apply to the water supply and to washing facilities. (iv) Employees in restricted areas shall wear protective equipment meeting the requirements of Subpart I of this part and including, but not limited to, protective clothing, boots, goggles, and gloves. (8) Chlorine systems. Note to paragraph ( v i See subpart Z of this part for requirements necessary to protect the health of employees from the effects of chlorine. (ii) Only designated employees may enter the restricted area. Additionally, the number of personnel shall be limited to those necessary to accomplish the task safely. (iii) Emergency repair kits shall be available near the shelter or enclosure to allow for the prompt repair of leaks in chlorine lines, equipment, or containers. (iv) Before repair procedures are started, chlorine tanks, pipes, and equipment shall be purged with dry air and isolated from other sources of chlorine. (v) The employer shall ensure that chlorine is not mixed with materials that would react with the chlorine in a dangerously exothermic or other hazardous manner. (9) Boilers. (ii) When opening an operating boiler door, employees shall stand clear of the opening of the door to avoid the heat blast and gases which may escape from the boiler. (10) Turbine generators. (ii) Excessive hydrogen makeup or abnormal loss of pressure shall be considered as an emergency and shall be corrected immediately. (iii) A sufficient quantity of inert gas shall be available to purge the hydrogen from the largest generator. (11) Coal and ash handling. (ii) Before a locomotive or locomotive crane is moved, a warning shall be given to employees in the area. (iii) Employees engaged in switching or dumping cars may not use their feet to line up drawheads. (iv) Drawheads and knuckles may not be shifted while locomotives or cars are in motion. (v) When a railroad car is stopped for unloading, the car shall be secured from displacement that could endanger employees. (vi) An emergency means of stopping dump operations shall be provided at railcar dumps. (vii) The employer shall ensure that employees who work in coal- or ash-handling conveyor areas are trained and knowledgeable in conveyor operation and in the requirements of paragraphs (v)(11)(viii) through (v)(11)(xii) of this section. (viii) Employees may not ride a coal- or ash-handling conveyor belt at any time. Employees may not cross over the conveyor belt, except at walkways, unless the conveyor's energy source has been deenergized and has been locked out or tagged in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section. (ix) A conveyor that could cause injury when started may not be started until personnel in the area are alerted by a signal or by a designated person that the conveyor is about to start. (x) If a conveyor that could cause injury when started is automatically controlled or is controlled from a remote location, an audible device shall be provided that sounds an alarm that will be recognized by each employee as a warning that the conveyor will start and that can be clearly heard at all points along the conveyor where personnel may be present. The warning device shall be actuated by the device starting the conveyor and shall continue for a period of time before the conveyor starts that is long enough to allow employees to move clear of the conveyor system. A visual warning may be used in place of the audible device if the employer can demonstrate that it will provide an equally effective warning in the particular circumstances involved. However if the employer can demonstrate that the system's function would be seriously hindered by the required time delay, warning signs may be provided in place of the audible warning device. If the system was installed before January 31, 1995, warning signs may be provided in place of the audible warning device until such time as the conveyor or its control system is rebuilt or rewired. These warning signs shall be clear, concise, and legible and shall indicate that conveyors and allied equipment may be started at any time, that danger exists, and that personnel must keep clear. These warning signs shall be provided along the conveyor at areas not guarded by position or location. (xi) Remotely and automatically controlled conveyors, and conveyors that have operating stations which are not manned or which are beyond voice and visual contact from drive areas, loading areas, transfer points, and other locations on the conveyor path not guarded by location, position, or guards shall be furnished with emergency stop buttons, pull cords, limit switches, or similar emergency stop devices. However, if the employer can demonstrate that the design, function, and operation of the conveyor do not expose an employee to hazards, an emergency stop device is not required. (A) Emergency stop devices shall be easily identifiable in the immediate vicinity of such locations. (B) An emergency stop device shall act directly on the control of the conveyor involved and may not depend on the stopping of any other equipment. (C) Emergency stop devices shall be installed so that they cannot be overridden from other locations. (xii) Where coal-handling operations may produce a combustible atmosphere from fuel sources or from flammable gases or dust, sources of ignition shall be eliminated or safely controlled to prevent ignition of the combustible atmosphere. Note to paragraph ( v xii Locations that are hazardous because of the presence of combustible dust are classified as Class II hazardous locations. See § 1910.307. (xiii) An employee may not work on or beneath overhanging coal in coal bunkers, coal silos, or coal storage areas, unless the employee is protected from all hazards posed by shifting coal. (xiv) An employee entering a bunker or silo to dislodge the contents shall wear a body harness with lifeline attached. The lifeline shall be secured to a fixed support outside the bunker and shall be attended at all times by an employee located outside the bunker or facility. (12) Hydroplants and equipment. (w) Special conditions Capacitors. Note to paragraph ( w See paragraphs (m) and (n) of this section for requirements pertaining to the deenergizing and grounding of capacitor installations. (i) Before employees work on capacitors, the employer shall disconnect the capacitors from energized sources and short circuit the capacitors. The employer shall ensure that the employee short circuiting the capacitors waits at least 5 minutes from the time of disconnection before applying the short circuit, (ii) Before employees handle the units, the employer shall short circuit each unit in series-parallel capacitor banks between all terminals and the capacitor case or its rack. If the cases of capacitors are on ungrounded substation racks, the employer shall bond the racks to ground. (iii) The employer shall short circuit any line connected to capacitors before the line is treated as deenergized. (2) Current transformer secondaries. (3) Series streetlighting. (ii) Before any employee opens a series loop, the employer shall deenergize the streetlighting transformer and isolate it from the source of supply or shall bridge the loop to avoid an open-circuit condition. (4) Illumination. (5) Protection against drowning. (ii) The employer shall maintain each personal flotation device in safe condition and shall inspect each personal flotation device frequently enough to ensure that it does not have rot, mildew, water saturation, or any other condition that could render the device unsuitable for use. (iii) An employee may cross streams or other bodies of water only if a safe means of passage, such as a bridge, is available. (6) Employee protection in public work areas. (ii) Before employees begin work in the vicinity of vehicular or pedestrian traffic that may endanger them, the employer shall place warning signs or flags and other traffic-control devices in conspicuous locations to alert and channel approaching traffic. (iii) The employer shall use barricades where additional employee protection is necessary. (iv) The employer shall protect excavated areas with barricades. (v) The employer shall display warning lights prominently at night. (7) Backfeed. (8) Lasers. (9) Hydraulic fluids. (x) Definitions. Affected employee. Attendant. Authorized employee. Automatic circuit recloser. Barricade. Barrier. Bond. Bus. Bushing. Cable. Cable sheath. Note to the definition of “cable sheath”: A cable sheath may consist of multiple layers one or more of which is conductive. Circuit. Clearance (between objects). Clearance (for work). Communication lines. Lines; Communication lines. Conductor. Contract employer. Covered conductor. Current-carrying part. Deenergized. Note to the definition of “deenergized”: The term applies only to current-carrying parts, which are sometimes energized (alive). Designated employee (designated person). Electric line truck. Electric supply equipment. Electric supply lines. Lines; Electric supply lines. Electric utility. Enclosed space. Note to the definition of “enclosed space”: The Occupational Safety and Health Administration does not consider spaces that are enclosed but not designed for employee entry under normal operating conditions to be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this section. Similarly, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration does not consider spaces that are enclosed and that are expected to contain a hazardous atmosphere to be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this section. Such spaces meet the definition of permit spaces in § 1910.146, and entry into them must conform to that standard. Energized (alive, live). Energy isolating device. Energy source. Entry (as used in paragraph (e) of this section). Equipment (electric). Exposed, Exposed to contact (as applied to energized parts). Fall restraint system. First-aid training. Ground. Grounded. Guarded. Note to the definition of “guarded”: Wires that are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are not guarded. Hazardous atmosphere. (1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its lower flammable limit (LFL); (2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its LFL; Note to the definition of “hazardous atmosphere” (2): This concentration may be approximated as a condition in which the dust obscures vision at a distance of 1.52 meters (5 feet) or less. (3) Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent; (4) Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a permissible exposure limit is published in subpart G, Occupational Health and Environmental Control, Toxic and Hazardous Substances, Note to the definition of “hazardous atmosphere” (4): An atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not capable of causing death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its health effects is not covered by this provision. (5) Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life or health. Note to the definition of “hazardous atmosphere” (5): For air contaminants for which the Occupational Safety and Health Administration has not determined a dose or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information, such as Safety Data Sheets (SDS) that comply with the Hazard Communication Standard, § 1910.1200, published information, and internal documents can provide guidance in establishing acceptable atmospheric conditions. High-power tests. High-voltage tests. High wind. (1) The wind could blow an employee from an elevated location, (2) The wind could cause an employee or equipment handling material to lose control of the material, or (3) The wind would expose an employee to other hazards not controlled by the standard involved. Note to the definition of “high wind”: The Occupational Safety and Health Administration normally considers winds exceeding 64.4 kilometers per hour (40 miles per hour), or 48.3 kilometers per hour (30 miles per hour) if the work involves material handling, as meeting this criteria, unless the employer takes precautions to protect employees from the hazardous effects of the wind. Host employer. Note to the definition of “host employer”: The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will treat the electric utility or the owner of the installation as the host employer if it operates or controls operating procedures for the installation. If the electric utility or installation owner neither operates nor controls operating procedures for the installation, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will treat the employer that the utility or owner has contracted with to operate or control the operating procedures for the installation as the host employer. In no case will there be more than one host employer. Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH). Note to the definition of “immediately dangerous to life or health”: Some materials—hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for example—may produce immediate transient effects that, even if severe, may pass without medical attention, but are followed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12-72 hours after exposure. The victim “feels normal” from recovery from transient effects until collapse. Such materials in hazardous quantities are considered to be “immediately” dangerous to life or health. Insulated. Note to the definition of “insulated”: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be insulated for the conditions to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise, it is, for the purpose of this section, uninsulated. Insulation (cable). Isolated. Line-clearance tree trimmer. Note 1 to the definition of “line-clearance tree trimmer”: An employee who is regularly assigned to a line-clearance tree-trimming crew and who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of a line-clearance tree trimmer is considered to be a line-clearance tree trimmer for the performance of those duties. Note 2 to the definition of “line-clearance tree trimmer”: A line-clearance tree trimmer is not considered to be a “qualified employee” under this section unless he or she has the training required for a qualified employee under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section. However, under the electrical safety-related work practices standard in subpart S of this part, a line-clearance tree trimmer is considered to be a “qualified employee.” Tree trimming performed by such “qualified employees” is not subject to the electrical safety-related work practice requirements contained in §§ 1910.331 through 1910.335 when it is directly associated with electric power generation, transmission, or distribution lines or equipment. (See § 1910.331 for requirements on the applicability of the electrical safety-related work practice requirements contained in §§ 1910.331 through 1910.335 to line-clearance tree trimming performed by such “qualified employees,” and see the note following § 1910.332(b)(3) for information regarding the training an employee must have to be considered a qualified employee under §§ 1910.331 through 1910.335.) Line-clearance tree trimming. (1) For voltages to ground of 50 kilovolts or less—3.05 meters (10 feet); (2) For voltages to ground of more than 50 kilovolts—3.05 meters (10 feet) plus 0.10 meters (4 inches) for every 10 kilovolts over 50 kilovolts. Note to the definition of “line-clearance tree trimming”: This section applies only to line-clearance tree trimming performed for the purpose of clearing space around electric power generation, transmission, or distribution lines or equipment and on behalf of an organization that operates, or that controls the operating procedures for, those lines or equipment. See paragraph (a)(1) of this section. Tree trimming performed on behalf of a homeowner or commercial entity other than an organization that operates, or that controls the operating procedures for, electric power generation, transmission, or distribution lines or equipment is not directly associated with an electric power generation, transmission, or distribution installation and is outside the scope of this section. In addition, tree trimming that is not for the purpose of clearing space around electric power generation, transmission, or distribution lines or equipment is not directly associated with an electric power generation, transmission, or distribution installation and is outside the scope of this section. Such tree trimming may be covered by other applicable standards. See, for example, §§ 1910.268 and 1910.331 through 1910.335. Lines Communication lines. Note to the definition of “communication lines”: Telephone, telegraph, railroad signal, data, clock, fire, police alarm, cable television, and other systems conforming to this definition are included. Lines used for signaling purposes, but not included under this definition, are considered as electric supply lines of the same voltage. (2) Electric supply lines. Manhole. Minimum approach distance. Note to the definition of “minimum approach distance”: Paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section requires employers to establish minimum approach distances. Personal fall arrest system. Qualified employee (qualified person). Note 1 to the definition of “qualified employee (qualified person)”: An employee must have the training required by (a)(2)(ii) of this section to be a qualified employee. Note 2 to the definition of “qualified employee (qualified person)”: Except under (g)(2)(iv)(C)(2) and (g)(2)(iv)(C)(3) of this section, an employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who has demonstrated, in the course of such training, an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of a qualified person is a qualified person for the performance of those duties. Statistical sparkover voltage. Statistical withstand voltage. Switch. System operator. Vault. Vented vault. Voltage. Work-positioning equipment. Appendix A to § 1910.269—Flow Charts This appendix presents information, in the form of flow charts, that illustrates the scope and application of § 1910.269. This appendix addresses the interface between § 1910.269 and Subpart S of this Part (Electrical), between § 1910.269 and § 1910.146 (Permit-required confined spaces), and between § 1910.269 and § 1910.147 (The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout)). These flow charts provide guidance for employers trying to implement the requirements of § 1910.269 in combination with other General Industry Standards contained in Part 1910. Employers should always consult the relevant standards, in conjunction with this appendix, to ensure compliance with all applicable requirements. Appendix A-2 to § 1910.269—Application of § 1910.269 and Subpart S of this Part to Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices 1 Table 1—Electrical Safety Requirements in § 1910.269 Compliance with Subpart S will comply with these paragraphs of § 1910.269 1 Paragraphs that apply regardless of compliance with Subpart S 2 (d), electric-shock hazards only (a)(2), (a)(3) and (a)(4). (h)(3) (b) (i)(2) and (i)(3) (c) (k) (d), for other than electric-shock hazards. (l)(1) through (l)(5), (l)(7), and (l)(10) through (l)(12) (e) (m) (f) (p)(4) (g) (s)(2) (h)(1) and (h)(2). (u)(1) and (u)(3) through (u)(5) (i)(4) (v)(3) through (v)(5) (j) (w)(1) and (w)(7) (l)(6), (l)(8) and (l)(9). (n) (o) (p)(1) through (p)(3). (q) (r) (s)(1) (t) (u)(2) and (u)(6) (v)(1), (v)(2), and (v)(6) through (v)(12). (w)(2) through (w)(6), (w)(8), and (w)(9). 1 2 Appendix B to § 1910.269—Working on Exposed Energized Parts I. Introduction Electric utilities design electric power generation, transmission, and distribution installations to meet National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), ANSI C2, requirements. Electric utilities also design transmission and distribution lines to limit line outages as required by system reliability criteria 1 1 The information in this appendix will assist employers in complying with the minimum approach-distance requirements contained in § 1910.269(l)(3) and (q)(3). Employers must use the technical criteria and methodology presented in this appendix in establishing minimum approach distances in accordance with § 1910.269(l)(3)(i) and Table R-3 and Table R-8. This appendix provides essential background information and technical criteria for the calculation of the required minimum approach distances for live-line work on electric power generation, transmission, and distribution installations. Unless an employer is using the maximum transient overvoltages specified in Table R-9 for voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the employer must use persons knowledgeable in the techniques discussed in this appendix, and competent in the field of electric transmission and distribution system design, to determine the maximum transient overvoltage. II. General A. Definitions. Exposed. Guarded. Note to the definition of “guarded”: Wires that are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are not guarded. Insulated. Note to the definition of “insulated”: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be insulated for the conditions to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise, it is, for the purpose of this section, uninsulated. Isolated. Statistical sparkover voltage. Statistical withstand voltage. B. Installations energized at 50 to 300 volts. C. Exposed energized parts over 300 volts AC. 2 2 Unless the employee is using electrical protective equipment, air is the insulating medium between the employee and energized parts. The distance between the employee and an energized part must be sufficient for the air to withstand the maximum transient overvoltage that can reach the worksite under the working conditions and practices the employee is using. This distance is the minimum air insulation distance, and it is equal to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. Normal system design may provide or include a means (such as lightning arrestors) to control maximum anticipated transient overvoltages, or the employer may use temporary devices (portable protective gaps) or measures (such as preventing automatic circuit breaker reclosing) to achieve the same result. Paragraph (l)(3)(ii) of § 1910.269 requires the employer to determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9, which specifies the following maximums for ac systems: 72.6 to 420.0 kilovolts—3.5 per unit 420.1 to 550.0 kilovolts—3.0 per unit 550.1 to 800.0 kilovolts—2.5 per unit See paragraph IV.A.2, later in this appendix, for additional discussion of maximum transient overvoltages. D. Types of exposures. III. Determination of Minimum Approach Distances for AC Voltages Greater Than 300 Volts A. Voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts. B. Voltages of 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts. Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing. IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines. Table 1—Sparkover Distance for Rod-to-Rod Gap 60 Hz Rod-to-Rod sparkover Gap spacing from IEEE Std 4-1995 25 2 36 3 46 4 53 5 60 6 70 8 79 10 86 12 95 14 104 16 112 18 120 20 143 25 167 30 192 35 218 40 243 45 270 50 322 60 Source: IEEE Std 516-2009. To use this table to determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance, the employer must determine the peak phase-to-ground transient overvoltage and select a gap from the table that corresponds to that voltage as a withstand voltage rather than a critical sparkover voltage. To calculate the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for voltages between 5 and 72.5 kilovolts, use the following procedure: 1. Divide the phase-to-phase voltage by the square root of 3 to convert it to a phase-to-ground voltage. 2. Multiply the phase-to-ground voltage by the square root of 2 to convert the rms value of the voltage to the peak phase-to-ground voltage. 3. Multiply the peak phase-to-ground voltage by the maximum per-unit transient overvoltage, which, for this voltage range, is 3.0, as discussed later in this appendix. This is the maximum phase-to-ground transient overvoltage, which corresponds to the withstand voltage for the relevant exposure. 3 3 4. Divide the maximum phase-to-ground transient overvoltage by 0.85 to determine the corresponding critical sparkover voltage. (The critical sparkover voltage is 3 standard deviations (or 15 percent) greater than the withstand voltage.) 5. Determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance from Table 1 through interpolation. Table 2 illustrates how to derive the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts, before the application of any altitude correction factor, as explained later. Table 2—Calculating the Electrical Component of MAD 751 V to 72.5 kV Step Maximum system phase-to-phase voltage (kV) 15 36 46 72.5 1. Divide by √3 8.7 20.8 26.6 41.9 2. Multiply by √2 12.2 29.4 37.6 59.2 3. Multiply by 3.0 36.7 88.2 112.7 177.6 4. Divide by 0.85 43.2 103.7 132.6 208.9 5. Interpolate from Table 1 3 + (7.2/10)*1 14 + (8.7/9)*2 20 + (12.6/23)*5 35 + (16.9/26)*5 Electrical component of MAD (cm) 3.72 15.93 22.74 38.25 C. Voltages of 72.6 to 800 kilovolts. Equation 1—For Voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV D C a V L G T Where: D C a 4 4 a V L-G T In Equation 1, C C In Equation 1, the term a a. a, Peak Table 3—Equations for Calculating the Surge Factor, a Phase-to-ground exposures V Peak T L-G V L-G 635 kV or less 635.1 to 915 kV 915.1 to 1,050 kV a 0 ( V Peak ( V Peak V Peak T L-G V L-G More than 1,050 kV a ( V Peak Phase-to-phase exposures 1 V Peak T L-G V L-G 630 kV or less 630.1 to 848 kV 848.1 to 1,131 kV a 0 ( V Peak ( V Peak V Peak T L-G V L-G 1,131.1 to 1,485 kV More than 1,485 kV a ( V Peak ( V Peak 1 V Peak In Equation 1, T T L-G T T L-L T L-G T L-L T L-G For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer uses this value as T D. Provisions for inadvertent movement. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration based the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance on response time-distance analysis. This technique uses an estimate of the total response time to a hazardous incident and converts that time to the distance traveled. For example, the driver of a car takes a given amount of time to respond to a “stimulus” and stop the vehicle. The elapsed time involved results in the car's traveling some distance before coming to a complete stop. This distance depends on the speed of the car at the time the stimulus appears and the reaction time of the driver. In the case of live-line work, the employee must first perceive that he or she is approaching the danger zone. Then, the worker responds to the danger and must decelerate and stop all motion toward the energized part. During the time it takes to stop, the employee will travel some distance. This is the distance the employer must add to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the total safe minimum approach distance. At voltages from 751 volts to 72.5 kilovolts, 5 5 For voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts, employees must use different work practices during energized line work. Generally, employees use live-line tools (hot sticks) to perform work on energized equipment. These tools, by design, keep the energized part at a constant distance from the employee and, thus, maintain the appropriate minimum approach distance automatically. The location of the worker and the type of work methods the worker is using also influence the length of the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance. In this higher voltage range, the employees use work methods that more tightly control their movements than when the workers perform work using rubber insulating gloves. The worker, therefore, is farther from the energized line or equipment and must be more precise in his or her movements just to perform the work. For these reasons, this section adopts an ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance of 0.31 m (1 foot) for voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts. Table 4 summarizes the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance for various voltage ranges. Table 4—Ergonomic Component of Minimum Approach Distance Voltage range (kV) Distance m ft 0.301 to 0.750 0.31 1.0 0.751 to 72.5 0.61 2.0 72.6 to 800 0.31 1.0 Note: The ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance accounts for errors in maintaining the minimum approach distance (which might occur, for example, if an employee misjudges the length of a conductive object he or she is holding), and for errors in judging the minimum approach distance. The ergonomic component also accounts for inadvertent movements by the employee, such as slipping. In contrast, the working position selected to properly maintain the minimum approach distance must account for all of an employee's reasonably likely movements and still permit the employee to adhere to the applicable minimum approach distance. (See Figure 1.) Reasonably likely movements include an employee's adjustments to tools, equipment, and working positions and all movements needed to perform the work. For example, the employee should be able to perform all of the following actions without straying into the minimum approach distance: • Adjust his or her hardhat, • maneuver a tool onto an energized part with a reasonable amount of overreaching or underreaching, • reach for and handle tools, material, and equipment passed to him or her, and • adjust tools, and replace components on them, when necessary during the work procedure. The training of qualified employees required under § 1910.269(a)(2), and the job planning and briefing required under § 1910.269(c), must address selection of a proper working position. E. Miscellaneous correction factors. 1. Dielectric strength of air. 6 6 2. Atmospheric effect. 3. Altitude. IV. Determining Minimum Approach Distances A. Factors Affecting Voltage Stress at the Worksite 1. System voltage (nominal). 2. Transient overvoltages. In developing requirements for minimum approach distances, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration considered the most common wave shapes and the magnitude of transient overvoltages found on electric power generation, transmission, and distribution systems. The equations in Table R-3 for minimum approach distances use per-unit maximum transient overvoltages, which are relative to the nominal maximum voltage of the system. For example, a maximum transient overvoltage value of 3.0 per unit indicates that the highest transient overvoltage is 3.0 times the nominal maximum system voltage. 3. Typical magnitude of overvoltages. Table 5—Magnitude of Typical Transient Overvoltages Cause Magnitude Energized 200-mile line without closing resistors 3.5 Energized 200-mile line with one-step closing resistor 2.1 Energized 200-mile line with multistep resistor 2.5 Reclosing with trapped charge one-step resistor 2.2 Opening surge with single restrike 3.0 Fault initiation unfaulted phase 2.1 Fault initiation adjacent circuit 2.5 Fault clearing 1.7 to 1.9 4. Standard deviation—air-gap withstand. 5. Broken Insulators. B. Minimum Approach Distances Based on Known, Maximum-Anticipated Per-Unit Transient Overvoltages 1. Determining the minimum approach distance for AC systems. 2. Calculation of reduced approach distance values. Step 1. Step 2. Step 3. Step 4. C. Methods of Controlling Possible Transient Overvoltage Stress Found on a System 1. Introduction. 2. Operation of circuit breakers. 7 7 Transient surges on an adjacent line, particularly for double circuit construction, may cause a significant overvoltage on the line on which employees are working. The employer's engineering analysis must account for coupling to adjacent lines. 3. Surge arresters. The employer may use properly designed arresters to control transient overvoltages along a transmission line and thereby reduce the requisite length of the insulator string and possibly the maximum transient overvoltage on the line. 8 8 4. Switching Restrictions. D. Minimum Approach Distance Based on Control of Maximum Transient Overvoltage at the Worksite When the employer institutes control of maximum transient overvoltage at the worksite by installing portable protective gaps, the employer may calculate the minimum approach distance as follows: Step 1. 9 9 Step 2. 10 11 10 11 Step 3. V PPG Peak Step 4. Step 5. T 12 T 12 T Note: All rounding must be to the next higher value (that is, always round up). Sample protective gap calculations. Problem: Step 1. 13 13 This value equals the withstand voltage of the protective gap. Step 2. 561 kV kV For example, if a protective gap with a 1.22-m (4.0-foot) spacing tested to a critical sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts (crest), select this gap spacing. Step 3. V PPG Peak 665 kV kV This value corresponds to the withstand voltage of the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. Step 4. T: Step 5. T MAD E. Location of Protective Gaps 1. Adjacent structures. 2. Terminal stations. T T 3. Worksite. F. Disabling automatic reclosing. • To prevent reenergization of a circuit faulted during the work, which could create a hazard or result in more serious injuries or damage than the injuries or damage produced by the original fault; • To prevent any transient overvoltage caused by the switching surge that would result if the circuit were reenergized. However, due to system stability considerations, it may not always be feasible to disable the automatic-reclosing feature. V. Minimum Approach-Distance Tables A. Legacy tables. Table 6—Minimum Approach Distances Until December 31, 2014 Voltage range phase to phase (kV) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 0.05 to 1.0 Avoid Contact Avoid Contact 1.1 to 15.0 0.64 2.10 0.66 2.20 15.1 to 36.0 0.72 2.30 0.77 2.60 36.1 to 46.0 0.77 2.60 0.85 2.80 46.1 to 72.5 0.90 3.00 1.05 3.50 72.6 to 121 0.95 3.20 1.29 4.30 138 to 145 1.09 3.60 1.50 4.90 161 to 169 1.22 4.00 1.71 5.70 230 to 242 1.59 5.30 2.27 7.50 345 to 362 2.59 8.50 3.80 12.50 500 to 550 3.42 11.30 5.50 18.10 765 to 800 4.53 14.90 7.91 26.00 Note: Table 7—Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015—72.6 to 121.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 2.0 0.74 2.42 1.09 3.58 2.1 0.76 2.50 1.09 3.58 2.2 0.79 2.58 1.12 3.67 2.3 0.81 2.67 1.14 3.75 2.4 0.84 2.75 1.17 3.83 2.5 0.84 2.75 1.19 3.92 2.6 0.86 2.83 1.22 4.00 2.7 0.89 2.92 1.24 4.08 2.8 0.91 3.00 1.24 4.08 2.9 0.94 3.08 1.27 4.17 3.0 0.97 3.17 1.30 4.25 Note 1: Note 2: Table 8—Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015—121.1 to 145.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 2.0 0.84 2.75 1.24 4.08 2.1 0.86 2.83 1.27 4.17 2.2 0.89 2.92 1.30 4.25 2.3 0.91 3.00 1.32 4.33 2.4 0.94 3.08 1.35 4.42 2.5 0.97 3.17 1.37 4.50 2.6 0.99 3.25 1.40 4.58 2.7 1.02 3.33 1.42 4.67 2.8 1.04 3.42 1.45 4.75 2.9 1.07 3.50 1.47 4.83 3.0 1.09 3.58 1.50 4.92 Note 1: Note 2: Table 9—Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015—145.1 to 169.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 2.0 0.91 3.00 1.42 4.67 2.1 0.97 3.17 1.45 4.75 2.2 0.99 3.25 1.47 4.83 2.3 1.02 3.33 1.50 4.92 2.4 1.04 3.42 1.52 5.00 2.5 1.07 3.50 1.57 5.17 2.6 1.12 3.67 1.60 5.25 2.7 1.14 3.75 1.63 5.33 2.8 1.17 3.83 1.65 5.42 2.9 1.19 3.92 1.68 5.50 3.0 1.22 4.00 1.73 5.67 Note 1: Note 2: Table 10—Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015—169.1 to 242.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 2.0 1.17 3.83 1.85 6.08 2.1 1.22 4.00 1.91 6.25 2.2 1.24 4.08 1.93 6.33 2.3 1.30 4.25 1.98 6.50 2.4 1.35 4.42 2.01 6.58 2.5 1.37 4.50 2.06 6.75 2.6 1.42 4.67 2.11 6.92 2.7 1.47 4.83 2.13 7.00 2.8 1.50 4.92 2.18 7.17 2.9 1.55 5.08 2.24 7.33 3.0 1.60 5.25 2.29 7.50 Note 1: Note 2: Table 11—Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015—242.1 to 362.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 2.0 1.60 5.25 2.62 8.58 2.1 1.65 5.42 2.69 8.83 2.2 1.75 5.75 2.79 9.17 2.3 1.85 6.08 2.90 9.50 2.4 1.93 6.33 3.02 9.92 2.5 2.03 6.67 3.15 10.33 2.6 2.16 7.08 3.28 10.75 2.7 2.26 7.42 3.40 11.17 2.8 2.36 7.75 3.53 11.58 2.9 2.49 8.17 3.68 12.08 3.0 2.59 8.50 3.81 12.50 Note 1: Note 2: Table 12—Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015—362.1 to 552.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 1.83 6.00 2.24 7.33 1.6 1.98 6.50 2.67 8.75 1.7 2.13 7.00 3.10 10.17 1.8 2.31 7.58 3.53 11.58 1.9 2.46 8.08 4.01 13.17 2.0 2.67 8.75 4.52 14.83 2.1 2.84 9.33 4.75 15.58 2.2 3.02 9.92 4.98 16.33 2.3 3.20 10.50 5.23 17.17 2.4 3.43 11.25 5.51 18.08 Note 1: Note 2: Table 13—Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015—552.1 to 800.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 2.95 9.67 3.68 12.08 1.6 3.25 10.67 4.42 14.50 1.7 3.56 11.67 5.23 17.17 1.8 3.86 12.67 6.07 19.92 1.9 4.19 13.75 6.99 22.92 2.0 4.55 14.92 7.92 26.00 Note 1: Note 2: B. Alternative minimum approach distances. Table 14—AC Minimum Approach Distances—72.6 to 121.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 0.67 2.2 0.84 2.8 1.6 0.69 2.3 0.87 2.9 1.7 0.71 2.3 0.90 3.0 1.8 0.74 2.4 0.93 3.1 1.9 0.76 2.5 0.96 3.1 2.0 0.78 2.6 0.99 3.2 2.1 0.81 2.7 1.01 3.3 2.2 0.83 2.7 1.04 3.4 2.3 0.85 2.8 1.07 3.5 2.4 0.88 2.9 1.10 3.6 2.5 0.90 3.0 1.13 3.7 2.6 0.92 3.0 1.16 3.8 2.7 0.95 3.1 1.19 3.9 2.8 0.97 3.2 1.22 4.0 2.9 0.99 3.2 1.24 4.1 3.0 1.02 3.3 1.27 4.2 3.1 1.04 3.4 1.30 4.3 3.2 1.06 3.5 1.33 4.4 3.3 1.09 3.6 1.36 4.5 3.4 1.11 3.6 1.39 4.6 3.5 1.13 3.7 1.42 4.7 Table 15—AC Minimum Approach Distances—121.1 to 145.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 0.74 2.4 0.95 3.1 1.6 0.76 2.5 0.98 3.2 1.7 0.79 2.6 1.02 3.3 1.8 0.82 2.7 1.05 3.4 1.9 0.85 2.8 1.08 3.5 2.0 0.88 2.9 1.12 3.7 2.1 0.90 3.0 1.15 3.8 2.2 0.93 3.1 1.19 3.9 2.3 0.96 3.1 1.22 4.0 2.4 0.99 3.2 1.26 4.1 2.5 1.02 3.3 1.29 4.2 2.6 1.04 3.4 1.33 4.4 2.7 1.07 3.5 1.36 4.5 2.8 1.10 3.6 1.39 4.6 2.9 1.13 3.7 1.43 4.7 3.0 1.16 3.8 1.46 4.8 3.1 1.19 3.9 1.50 4.9 3.2 1.21 4.0 1.53 5.0 3.3 1.24 4.1 1.57 5.2 3.4 1.27 4.2 1.60 5.2 3.5 1.30 4.3 1.64 5.4 Table 16—AC Minimum Approach Distances—145.1 to 169.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 0.81 2.7 1.05 3.4 1.6 0.84 2.8 1.09 3.6 1.7 0.87 2.9 1.13 3.7 1.8 0.90 3.0 1.17 3.8 1.9 0.94 3.1 1.21 4.0 2.0 0.97 3.2 1.25 4.1 2.1 1.00 3.3 1.29 4.2 2.2 1.03 3.4 1.33 4.4 2.3 1.07 3.5 1.37 4.5 2.4 1.10 3.6 1.41 4.6 2.5 1.13 3.7 1.45 4.8 2.6 1.17 3.8 1.49 4.9 2.7 1.20 3.9 1.53 5.0 2.8 1.23 4.0 1.57 5.2 2.9 1.26 4.1 1.61 5.3 3.0 1.30 4.3 1.65 5.4 3.1 1.33 4.4 1.70 5.6 3.2 1.36 4.5 1.76 5.8 3.3 1.39 4.6 1.82 6.0 3.4 1.43 4.7 1.88 6.2 3.5 1.46 4.8 1.94 6.4 Table 17—AC Minimum Approach Distances—169.1 to 242.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 1.02 3.3 1.37 4.5 1.6 1.06 3.5 1.43 4.7 1.7 1.11 3.6 1.48 4.9 1.8 1.16 3.8 1.54 5.1 1.9 1.21 4.0 1.60 5.2 2.0 1.25 4.1 1.66 5.4 2.1 1.30 4.3 1.73 5.7 2.2 1.35 4.4 1.81 5.9 2.3 1.39 4.6 1.90 6.2 2.4 1.44 4.7 1.99 6.5 2.5 1.49 4.9 2.08 6.8 2.6 1.53 5.0 2.17 7.1 2.7 1.58 5.2 2.26 7.4 2.8 1.63 5.3 2.36 7.7 2.9 1.67 5.5 2.45 8.0 3.0 1.72 5.6 2.55 8.4 3.1 1.77 5.8 2.65 8.7 3.2 1.81 5.9 2.76 9.1 3.3 1.88 6.2 2.86 9.4 3.4 1.95 6.4 2.97 9.7 3.5 2.01 6.6 3.08 10.1 Table 18—AC Minimum Approach Distances—242.1 to 362.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 1.37 4.5 1.99 6.5 1.6 1.44 4.7 2.13 7.0 1.7 1.51 5.0 2.27 7.4 1.8 1.58 5.2 2.41 7.9 1.9 1.65 5.4 2.56 8.4 2.0 1.72 5.6 2.71 8.9 2.1 1.79 5.9 2.87 9.4 2.2 1.87 6.1 3.03 9.9 2.3 1.97 6.5 3.20 10.5 2.4 2.08 6.8 3.37 11.1 2.5 2.19 7.2 3.55 11.6 2.6 2.29 7.5 3.73 12.2 2.7 2.41 7.9 3.91 12.8 2.8 2.52 8.3 4.10 13.5 2.9 2.64 8.7 4.29 14.1 3.0 2.76 9.1 4.49 14.7 3.1 2.88 9.4 4.69 15.4 3.2 3.01 9.9 4.90 16.1 3.3 3.14 10.3 5.11 16.8 3.4 3.27 10.7 5.32 17.5 3.5 3.41 11.2 5.52 18.1 Table 19—AC Minimum Approach Distances—362.1 to 420.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 1.53 5.0 2.40 7.9 1.6 1.62 5.3 2.58 8.5 1.7 1.70 5.6 2.75 9.0 1.8 1.78 5.8 2.94 9.6 1.9 1.88 6.2 3.13 10.3 2.0 1.99 6.5 3.33 10.9 2.1 2.12 7.0 3.53 11.6 2.2 2.24 7.3 3.74 12.3 2.3 2.37 7.8 3.95 13.0 2.4 2.50 8.2 4.17 13.7 2.5 2.64 8.7 4.40 14.4 2.6 2.78 9.1 4.63 15.2 2.7 2.93 9.6 4.87 16.0 2.8 3.07 10.1 5.11 16.8 2.9 3.23 10.6 5.36 17.6 3.0 3.38 11.1 5.59 18.3 3.1 3.55 11.6 5.82 19.1 3.2 3.72 12.2 6.07 19.9 3.3 3.89 12.8 6.31 20.7 3.4 4.07 13.4 6.56 21.5 3.5 4.25 13.9 6.81 22.3 Table 20—AC Minimum Approach Distances—420.1 to 550.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 1.95 6.4 3.46 11.4 1.6 2.11 6.9 3.73 12.2 1.7 2.28 7.5 4.02 13.2 1.8 2.45 8.0 4.31 14.1 1.9 2.62 8.6 4.61 15.1 2.0 2.81 9.2 4.92 16.1 2.1 3.00 9.8 5.25 17.2 2.2 3.20 10.5 5.55 18.2 2.3 3.40 11.2 5.86 19.2 2.4 3.62 11.9 6.18 20.3 2.5 3.84 12.6 6.50 21.3 2.6 4.07 13.4 6.83 22.4 2.7 4.31 14.1 7.18 23.6 2.8 4.56 15.0 7.52 24.7 2.9 4.81 15.8 7.88 25.9 3.0 5.07 16.6 8.24 27.0 Table 21—AC Minimum Approach Distances—550.1 to 800.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 3.16 10.4 5.97 19.6 1.6 3.46 11.4 6.43 21.1 1.7 3.78 12.4 6.92 22.7 1.8 4.12 13.5 7.42 24.3 1.9 4.47 14.7 7.93 26.0 2.0 4.83 15.8 8.47 27.8 2.1 5.21 17.1 9.02 29.6 2.2 5.61 18.4 9.58 31.4 2.3 6.02 19.8 10.16 33.3 2.4 6.44 21.1 10.76 35.3 2.5 6.88 22.6 11.38 37.3 Notes to Table 14 through Table 21: 1. The employer must determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis, as required by § 1910.269(l)(3)(ii), or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9. 2. For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer must demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap. 3. The worksite must be at an elevation of 900 meters (3,000 feet) or less above sea level. Appendix C to § 1910.269—Protection From Hazardous Differences in Electric Potential I. Introduction Current passing through an impedance impresses voltage across that impedance. Even conductors have some, albeit low, value of impedance. Therefore, if a “grounded” 1 2 1 2 II. Voltage-Gradient Distribution A. Voltage-gradient distribution curve. B. Step and touch potentials. Touch potential is the voltage between the energized grounded object (again, the electrode) and the feet of a person in contact with the object. In Figure 1, the touch potential is equal to the difference in voltage between the electrode (which is at a distance of 0 meters) and a point some distance away from the electrode (where the point represents the location of the feet of the person in contact with the object). The touch potential could be nearly the full voltage across the grounded object if that object is grounded at a point remote from the place where the person is in contact with it. For example, a crane grounded to the system neutral and that contacts an energized line would expose any person in contact with the crane or its uninsulated load line to a touch potential nearly equal to the full fault voltage. Figure 2 illustrates step and touch potentials. III. Protecting Workers From Hazardous Differences in Electrical Potential A. Definitions. Bond. Bonding cable (bonding jumper). Cluster bar. Ground. Grounding cable (grounding jumper). Ground mat (grounding grid). B. Analyzing the hazard. C. Protecting workers on the ground. 1. An equipotential zone will protect workers within it from hazardous step and touch potentials. (See Figure 3.) Equipotential zones will not, however, protect employees located either wholly or partially outside the protected area. The employer can establish an equipotential zone for workers on the ground, with respect to a grounded object, through the use of a metal mat connected to the grounded object. The employer can use a grounding grid to equalize the voltage within the grid or bond conductive objects in the immediate work area to minimize the potential between the objects and between each object and ground. (Bonding an object outside the work area can increase the touch potential to that object, however.) Section III.D of this appendix discusses equipotential zones for employees working on deenergized and grounded power lines. 2. Insulating equipment, such as rubber gloves, can protect employees handling grounded equipment and conductors from hazardous touch potentials. The insulating equipment must be rated for the highest voltage that can be impressed on the grounded objects under fault conditions (rather than for the full system voltage). 3. Restricting employees from areas where hazardous step or touch potentials could arise can protect employees not directly involved in performing the operation. The employer must ensure that employees on the ground in the vicinity of transmission structures are at a distance where step voltages would be insufficient to cause injury. Employees must not handle grounded conductors or equipment likely to become energized to hazardous voltages unless the employees are within an equipotential zone or protected by insulating equipment. D. Protecting employees working on deenergized and grounded power lines. 3 3 Finally, Section III.D.3 of this appendix discusses other safety considerations that will help the employer comply with other requirements in § 1910.269(n). Following these guidelines will protect workers from hazards that can occur when a deenergized and grounded line becomes energized. 1. Determining safe body current limits. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 1048-2003, IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines, where I t To use this equation to set safe voltage limits in an equipotential zone around the worker, the employer will need to assume a value for the resistance of the worker's body. IEEE Std 1048-2003 states that “total body resistance is usually taken as 1000 Ω for determining . . . body current limits.” However, employers should be aware that the impedance of a worker's body can be substantially less than that value. For instance, IEEE Std 1048-2003 reports a minimum hand-to-hand resistance of 610 ohms and an internal body resistance of 500 ohms. The internal resistance of the body better represents the minimum resistance of a worker's body when the skin resistance drops near zero, which occurs, for example, when there are breaks in the worker's skin, for instance, from cuts or from blisters formed as a result of the current from an electric shock, or when the worker is wet at the points of contact. Employers may use the IEEE Std 1048-2003 equation to determine safe body current limits only if the employer protects workers from hazards associated with involuntary muscle reactions from electric shock (for example, the hazard to a worker from falling as a result of an electric shock). Moreover, the equation applies only when the duration of the electric shock is limited. If the precautions the employer takes, including those required by applicable standards, do not adequately protect employees from hazards associated with involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the induced voltage is sufficient to pass a current of 1 milliampere through a 500-ohm resistor. (The 500-ohm resistor represents the resistance of an employee. The 1-milliampere current is the threshold of perception.) Finally, if the employer protects employees from injury due to involuntary reactions from electric shock, but the duration of the electric shock is unlimited (that is, when the fault current at the work location will be insufficient to trip the devices protecting the circuit), a hazard exists if the resultant current would be more than 6 milliamperes (the recognized let-go threshold for workers 4 4 2. Acceptable methods of grounding for employers that do not perform an engineering determination. Paragraph (n)(3) of § 1910.269 does not require grounding methods to meet the criteria embodied in these principles. Instead, the paragraph requires that protective grounds be “placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential.” However, when the employer's grounding practices do not follow these two principles, the employer will need to perform an engineering analysis to make the demonstration required by § 1910.269(n)(3). i. Ensuring that the circuit opens in the fastest available clearing time. In addition, if employees are working on a three-phase system, the grounding method must short circuit all three phases. Short circuiting all phases will ensure faster clearing and lower the current through the grounding cable connecting the deenergized line to ground, thereby lowering the voltage across that cable. The short circuit need not be at the worksite; however, the employer must treat any conductor that is not grounded at the worksite as energized because the ungrounded conductors will be energized at fault voltage during a fault. ii. Ensuring that the potential differences between conductive objects in the employee's work area are as low as possible. The employer must use bonding cables to bond conductive objects, except for metallic objects bonded through metal-to-metal contact. The employer must ensure that metal-to-metal contacts are tight and free of contamination, such as oxidation, that can increase the impedance across the connection. For example, a bolted connection between metal lattice tower members is acceptable if the connection is tight and free of corrosion and other contamination. Figure 4 shows how to create an equipotential zone for metal lattice towers. Wood poles are conductive objects. The poles can absorb moisture and conduct electricity, particularly at distribution and transmission voltages. Consequently, the employer must either: (1) Provide a conductive platform, bonded to a grounding cable, on which the worker stands or (2) use cluster bars to bond wood poles to the grounding cable. The employer must ensure that employees install the cluster bar below, and close to, the worker's feet. The inner portion of the wood pole is more conductive than the outer shell, so it is important that the cluster bar be in conductive contact with a metal spike or nail that penetrates the wood to a depth greater than or equal to the depth the worker's climbing gaffs will penetrate the wood. For example, the employer could mount the cluster bar on a bare pole ground wire fastened to the pole with nails or staples that penetrate to the required depth. Alternatively, the employer may temporarily nail a conductive strap to the pole and connect the strap to the cluster bar. Figure 5 shows how to create an equipotential zone for wood poles. For underground systems, employers commonly install grounds at the points of disconnection of the underground cables. These grounding points are typically remote from the manhole or underground vault where employees will be working on the cable. Workers in contact with a cable grounded at a remote location can experience hazardous potential differences if the cable becomes energized or if a fault occurs on a different, but nearby, energized cable. The fault current causes potential gradients in the earth, and a potential difference will exist between the earth where the worker is standing and the earth where the cable is grounded. Consequently, to create an equipotential zone for the worker, the employer must provide a means of connecting the deenergized cable to ground at the worksite by having the worker stand on a conductive mat bonded to the deenergized cable. If the cable is cut, the employer must install a bond across the opening in the cable or install one bond on each side of the opening to ensure that the separate cable ends are at the same potential. The employer must protect the worker from any hazardous differences in potential any time there is no bond between the mat and the cable (for example, before the worker installs the bonds). 3. Other safety-related considerations. 5 5 i. Maintenance of grounding equipment. ii. Grounding cable length and movement. Appendix D to § 1910.269—Methods of Inspecting and Testing Wood Poles I. Introduction When employees are to perform work on a wood pole, it is important to determine the condition of the pole before employees climb it. The weight of the employee, the weight of equipment to be installed, and other working stresses (such as the removal or retensioning of conductors) can lead to the failure of a defective pole or a pole that is not designed to handle the additional stresses. 1 1 If the employer finds the pole to be unsafe to climb or to work from, the employer must secure the pole so that it does not fail while an employee is on it. The employer can secure the pole by a line truck boom, by ropes or guys, or by lashing a new pole alongside it. If a new one is lashed alongside the defective pole, employees should work from the new one. II. Inspecting Wood Poles A qualified employee should inspect wood poles for the following conditions: 2 2 A. General condition. B. Cracks. C. Holes. D. Shell rot and decay. E. Knots. F. Depth of setting. G. Soil conditions. H. Burn marks. III. Testing Wood Poles The following tests, which are from § 1910.268(n)(3), are acceptable methods of testing wood poles: A. Hammer test. B. Rocking test. Appendix E to § 1910.269—Protection From Flames and Electric Arcs I. Introduction Paragraph (l)(8) of § 1910.269 addresses protecting employees from flames and electric arcs. This paragraph requires employers to: (1) Assess the workplace for flame and electric-arc hazards (paragraph (l)(8)(i)); (2) estimate the available heat energy from electric arcs to which employees would be exposed (paragraph (l)(8)(ii)); (3) ensure that employees wear clothing that will not melt, or ignite and continue to burn, when exposed to flames or the estimated heat energy (paragraph (l)(8)(iii)); and (4) ensure that employees wear flame-resistant clothing 1 1 Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards, Standard Specification for Arc and Flame Resistant Rainwear. II. Assessing the Workplace for Flame and Electric-Arc Hazards Paragraph (l)(8)(i) of § 1910.269 requires the employer to assess the workplace to identify employees exposed to hazards from flames or from electric arcs. This provision ensures that the employer evaluates employee exposure to flames and electric arcs so that employees who face such exposures receive the required protection. The employer must conduct an assessment for each employee who performs work on or near exposed, energized parts of electric circuits. A. Assessment Guidelines Sources electric arcs. • Energized circuit parts not guarded or insulated, • Switching devices that produce electric arcs in normal operation, • Sliding parts that could fault during operation (for example, rack-mounted circuit breakers), and • Energized electric equipment that could fail (for example, electric equipment with damaged insulation or with evidence of arcing or overheating). Exposure to flames. • The proximity of employees to open flames, and • For flammable material in the work area, whether there is a reasonable likelihood that an electric arc or an open flame can ignite the material. Probability that an electric arc will occur. • For energized circuit parts not guarded or insulated, whether conductive objects can come too close to or fall onto the energized parts, • For exposed, energized circuit parts, whether the employee is closer to the part than the minimum approach distance established by the employer (as permitted by § 1910.269(l)(3)(iii)). • Whether the operation of electric equipment with sliding parts that could fault during operation is part of the normal operation of the equipment or occurs during servicing or maintenance, and • For energized electric equipment, whether there is evidence of impending failure, such as evidence of arcing or overheating. B. Examples Table 1 provides task-based examples of exposure assessments. Table 1—Example Assessments for Various Tasks Task Is employee exposed to flame or electric-arc hazard? Normal operation of enclosed equipment, such as closing or opening a switch The employer properly installs and maintains enclosed equipment, and there is no evidence of impending failure No. There is evidence of arcing or overheating Yes. Parts of the equipment are loose or sticking, or the equipment otherwise exhibits signs of lack of maintenance Yes. Servicing electric equipment, such as racking in a circuit breaker or replacing a switch Yes. Inspection of electric equipment with exposed energized parts. The employee is not holding conductive objects and remains outside the minimum approach distance established by the employer No. The employee is holding a conductive object, such as a flashlight, that could fall or otherwise contact energized parts (irrespective of whether the employee maintains the minimum approach distance) Yes. The employee is closer than the minimum approach distance established by the employer (for example, when wearing rubber insulating gloves or rubber insulating gloves and sleeves) Yes. Using open flames, for example, in wiping cable splice sleeves Yes. III. Protection Against Burn Injury A. Estimating Available Heat Energy Calculation methods. Table 2—Methods of Calculating Incident Heat Energy From an Electric Arc 1. Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, 2. Doughty, T.E., Neal, T.E., and Floyd II, H.L., “Predicting Incident Energy to Better Manage the Electric Arc Hazard on 600 V Power Distribution Systems,” Record of Conference Papers IEEE IAS 45th Annual Petroleum and Chemical Industry Conference, 3. Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations, 4. ARCPRO, a commercially available software program developed by Kinectrics, Toronto, ON, CA. * This appendix refers to IEEE Std 1584-2002 with both amendments as IEEE Std 1584b-2011. The amount of heat energy calculated by any of the methods is approximately inversely proportional to the square of the distance between the employee and the arc. In other words, if the employee is very close to the arc, the heat energy is very high; but if the employee is just a few more centimeters away, the heat energy drops substantially. Thus, estimating the distance from the arc to the employee is key to protecting employees. The employer must select a method of estimating incident heat energy that provides a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy for the exposure involved. Table 3 shows which methods provide reasonable estimates for various exposures. Table 3—Selecting a Reasonable Incident-Energy Calculation Method 1 Incident-energy calculation method 600 V and Less 2 601 V to 15 kV 2 More than 15 kV 1Φ 3Φa 3Φb 1Φ 3Φa 3Φb 1Φ 3Φa 3Φb NFPA 70E-2012 Annex D (Lee equation) Y-C Y N Y-C Y-C N N 3 N 3 N 3 Doughty, Neal, and Floyd Y-C Y Y N N N N N N IEEE Std 1584b-2011 Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N ARCPRO Y N N Y N N Y Y 4 Y 4 Key: 1Φ: Single-phase arc in open air. 3Φa: Three-phase arc in open air. 3Φb: Three-phase arc in an enclosure (box). Y: Acceptable; produces a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc. N: Not acceptable; does not produce a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc. Y-C: Acceptable; produces a reasonable, but conservative, estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc. Notes: 1 2 3 2 4 Selecting a reasonable distance from the employee to the arc. National Electrical Safety Code, IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations, Table 4—Selecting a Reasonable Distance From the Employee to the Electric Arc Class of equipment Single-phase arc mm Three-phase arc mm Cable * NA 455 (18) Low voltage MCCs and panelboards NA 455 (18) Low-voltage switchgear NA 610 (24) 5-kV switchgear NA 910 (36) 15-kV switchgear NA 910 (36) Single conductors in air (up to 46 kilovolts), work with rubber insulating gloves 380 (15) NA Single conductors in air, work with live-line tools and live-line barehand work MAD kV MAD kV NA * NA = not applicable. † The terms in this equation are: MAD kV Selecting a reasonable arc gap. For three-phase arcs in open air and in enclosures, the arc gap will generally be dependent on the spacing between parts energized at different electrical potentials. Documents such as IEEE Std 1584b-2011 provide information on these distances. Employers may select a reasonable arc gap from Table 5, or they may select any other reasonable arc gap based on sparkover distance or on the spacing between (1) live parts at different potentials or (2) live parts and grounded parts (for example, bus or conductor spacings in equipment). In any event, the employer must use an estimate that reasonably resembles the actual exposures faced by the employee. Table 5—Selecting a Reasonable Arc Gap Class of equipment Single-phase arc mm Three-phase arc mm 1 Cable NA 2 13 (0.5). Low voltage MCCs and panelboards NA 25 (1.0). Low-voltage switchgear NA 32 (1.25). 5-kV switchgear NA 104 (4.0). 15-kV switchgear NA 152 (6.0). Single conductors in air, 15 kV and less. 51 (2.0) Phase conductor spacing. Single conductor in air, more than 15 kV Voltage in kV kV Phase conductor spacing. 1 2 Making estimates over multiple system areas. Incident heat energy for single-phase-to-ground exposures. 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 Table 7 presents similar estimates for employees using live-line tools to perform work on overhead systems operating at voltages of 4 to 800 kilovolts. The table assumes that the arc length will be equal to the sparkover distance 4 4 The employer will need to use other methods for estimating available heat energy in situations not addressed by Table 6 or Table 7. The calculation methods listed in Table 2 and the guidance provided in Table 3 will help employers do this. For example, employers can use IEEE Std 1584b-2011 to estimate the available heat energy (and to select appropriate protective equipment) for many specific conditions, including lower-voltage, phase-to-phase arc, and enclosed arc exposures. Table 6—Incident Heat Energy for Various Fault Currents, Clearing Times, and Voltages of 4.0 to 46.0 kV: Rubber Insulating Glove Exposures Involving Phase-to-Ground Arcs in Open Air Only * † ‡ Voltage range Fault current Maximum clearing time (cycles) 4 cal/cm 2 5 cal/cm 2 8 cal/cm 2 12 cal/cm 2 4.0 to 15.0 5 46 58 92 138 10 18 22 36 54 15 10 12 20 30 20 6 8 13 19 15.1 to 25.0 5 28 34 55 83 10 11 14 23 34 15 7 8 13 20 20 4 5 9 13 25.1 to 36.0 5 21 26 42 62 10 9 11 18 26 15 5 6 10 16 20 4 4 7 11 36.1 to 46.0 5 16 20 32 48 10 7 9 14 21 15 4 5 8 13 20 3 4 6 9 Notes: † The table assumes that the employee will be 380 mm (15 in.) from the electric arc. The table also assumes the arc length to be the sparkover distance for the maximum transient overvoltage of each voltage range (see Appendix B to § 1910.269), as follows: 4.0 to 15.0 kV 51 mm (2 in.) 15.1 to 25.0 kV 102 mm (4 in.) 25.1 to 36.0 kV 152 mm (6 in.) 36.1 to 46.0 kV 229 mm (9 in.) ‡The Occupational Safety and Health Administration calculated the values in this table using the ARCPRO method listed in Table 2. ** The voltage range is the phase-to-phase system voltage. Table 7—Incident Heat Energy for Various Fault Currents, Clearing Times, and Voltages: Live-Line Tool Exposures Involving Phase-to-Ground Arcs in Open Air Only * † ‡ # Voltage range Fault current Maximum clearing time (cycles) 4 cal/cm 2 5 cal/cm 2 8 cal/cm 2 12 cal/cm 2 4.0 to 15.0 5 197 246 394 591 10 73 92 147 220 15 39 49 78 117 20 24 31 49 73 15.1 to 25.0 5 197 246 394 591 10 75 94 150 225 15 41 51 82 122 20 26 33 52 78 25.1 to 36.0 5 138 172 275 413 10 53 66 106 159 15 30 37 59 89 20 19 24 38 58 36.1 to 46.0 5 129 161 257 386 10 51 64 102 154 15 29 36 58 87 20 19 24 38 57 46.1 to 72.5 20 18 23 36 55 30 10 13 20 30 40 6 8 13 19 50 4 6 9 13 72.6 to 121.0 20 10 12 20 30 30 6 7 11 17 40 4 5 7 11 50 3 3 5 8 121.1 to 145.0 20 12 15 24 35 30 7 9 15 22 40 5 6 10 15 50 4 5 8 11 145.1 to 169.0 20 12 15 24 36 30 7 9 15 22 40 5 7 10 16 50 4 5 8 12 169.1 to 242.0 20 13 17 27 40 30 8 10 17 25 40 6 7 12 17 50 4 5 9 13 242.1 to 362.0 20 25 32 51 76 30 16 19 31 47 40 11 14 22 33 50 8 10 16 25 362.1 to 420.0 20 12 15 25 37 30 8 10 15 23 40 5 7 11 16 50 4 5 8 12 420.1 to 550.0 20 23 29 47 70 30 14 18 29 43 40 10 13 20 30 50 8 9 15 23 550.1 to 800.0 20 25 31 50 75 30 15 19 31 46 40 11 13 21 32 50 8 10 16 24 Notes: * This table is for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures. It is not for phase-to-phase arcs or enclosed arcs (arc in a box). † The table assumes the arc length to be the sparkover distance for the maximum phase-to-ground voltage of each voltage range (see Appendix B to this section). The table also assumes that the employee will be the minimum approach distance minus twice the arc length from the electric arc. ‡ The Occupational Safety and Health Administration calculated the values in this table using the ARCPRO method listed in Table 2. # For voltages of more than 72.6 kV, employers may use this table only when the minimum approach distance established under § 1910.269(l)(3)(i) is greater than or equal to the following values: 72.6 to 121.0 kV 1.02 m. 121.1 to 145.0 kV 1.16 m. 145.1 to 169.0 kV 1.30 m. 169.1 to 242.0 kV 1.72 m. 242.1 to 362.0 kV 2.76 m. 362.1 to 420.0 kV 2.50 m. 420.1 to 550.0 kV 3.62 m. 550.1 to 800.0 kV 4.83 m. ** The voltage range is the phase-to-phase system voltage. B. Selecting Protective Clothing and Other Protective Equipment Paragraph (l)(8)(v) of § 1910.269 requires employers, in certain situations, to select protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating that is greater than or equal to the incident heat energy estimated under § 1910.269(l)(8)(ii). Based on laboratory testing required by ASTM F1506-10a, the expectation is that protective clothing with an arc rating equal to the estimated incident heat energy will be capable of preventing second-degree burn injury to an employee exposed to that incident heat energy from an electric arc. Note that actual electric-arc exposures may be more or less severe than the estimated value because of factors such as arc movement, arc length, arcing from reclosing of the system, secondary fires or explosions, and weather conditions. Additionally, for arc rating based on the fabric's arc thermal performance value 5 5 2 Paragraph (l)(8)(v) of § 1910.269 does not require arc-rated protection for exposures of 2 cal/cm 2 2 2 2 2 Paragraph (l)(8)(v) of § 1910.269 requires that arc-rated protection cover the employee's entire body, with limited exceptions for the employee's hands, feet, face, and head. Paragraph (l)(8)(v)(A) of § 1910.269 provides that arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's hands under the following conditions: For any estimated incident heat energy When the employee is wearing rubber insulating gloves with protectors. If the estimated incident heat energy does not exceed 14 cal/cm 2 When the employee is wearing heavy-duty leather work gloves with a weight of at least 407 gm/m 2 2 Paragraph (l)(8)(v)(B) of § 1910.269 provides that arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's feet when the employee is wearing heavy-duty work shoes or boots. Finally, § 1910.269(l)(8)(v)(C), (l)(8)(v)(D), and (l)(8)(v)(E) require arc-rated head and face protection as follows: Exposure Minimum head and face protection None * Arc-rated faceshield with a minimum 2 Arc-rated hood or faceshield with balaclava Single-phase, open air 2-8 cal/cm 2 9-12 cal/cm 2 13 cal/cm 2 Three-phase 2-4 cal/cm 2 5-8 cal/cm 2 9 cal/cm 2 * These ranges assume that employees are wearing hardhats meeting the specifications in § 1910.135 or § 1926.100(b)(2), as applicable. † The arc rating must be a minimum of 4 cal/cm 2 2 ‡ Note that § 1910.269(l)(8)(v) permits this type of head and face protection at any incident energy level. IV. Protection Against Ignition Paragraph (l)(8)(iii) of § 1910.269 prohibits clothing that could melt onto an employee's skin or that could ignite and continue to burn when exposed to flames or to the available heat energy estimated by the employer under § 1910.269(l)(8)(ii). Meltable fabrics, such as acetate, nylon, polyester, and polypropylene, even in blends, must be avoided. When these fibers melt, they can adhere to the skin, thereby transferring heat rapidly, exacerbating burns, and complicating treatment. These outcomes can result even if the meltable fabric is not directly next to the skin. The remainder of this section focuses on the prevention of ignition. Paragraph (l)(8)(v) of § 1910.269 generally requires protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating greater than or equal to the employer's estimate of available heat energy. As explained earlier in this appendix, untreated cotton is usually acceptable for exposures of 2 cal/cm 2 6 6 2 Under § 1910.269(l)(8)(iii), employees may not wear flammable clothing in conjunction with flame-resistant clothing if the flammable clothing poses an ignition hazard. 7 8 7 8 Non-flame-resistant clothing can ignite even when the heat energy from an electric arc is insufficient to ignite the clothing. For example, nearby flames can ignite an employee's clothing; and, even in the absence of flames, electric arcs pose ignition hazards beyond the hazard of ignition from incident energy under certain conditions. In addition to requiring flame-resistant clothing when the estimated incident energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm 2 9 9 Appendix F to § 1910.269—Work-Positioning Equipment Inspection Guidelines I. Body Belts Inspect body belts to ensure that: A. The hardware has no cracks, nicks, distortion, or corrosion; B. No loose or worn rivets are present; C. The waist strap has no loose grommets; D. The fastening straps are not 100-percent leather; and E. No worn materials that could affect the safety of the user are present. II. Positioning Straps Inspect positioning straps to ensure that: A. The warning center of the strap material is not exposed; B. No cuts, burns, extra holes, or fraying of strap material is present; C. Rivets are properly secured; D. Straps are not 100-percent leather; and E. Snaphooks do not have cracks, burns, or corrosion. III. Climbers Inspect pole and tree climbers to ensure that: A. Gaffs are at least as long as the manufacturer's recommended minimums (generally 32 and 51 millimeters (1.25 and 2.0 inches) for pole and tree climbers, respectively, measured on the underside of the gaff); Note: Gauges are available to assist in determining whether gaffs are long enough and shaped to easily penetrate poles or trees. B. Gaffs and leg irons are not fractured or cracked; C. Stirrups and leg irons are free of excessive wear; D. Gaffs are not loose; E. Gaffs are free of deformation that could adversely affect use; F. Gaffs are properly sharpened; and G. There are no broken straps or buckles. Appendix G to § 1910.269—Reference Documents The references contained in this appendix provide information that can be helpful in understanding and complying with the requirements contained in § 1910.269. The national consensus standards referenced in this appendix contain detailed specifications that employers may follow in complying with the more performance-based requirements of § 1910.269. Except as specifically noted in § 1910.269, however, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will not necessarily deem compliance with the national consensus standards to be compliance with the provisions of § 1910.269. ANSI/SIA A92.2-2009, American National Standard for Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices. ANSI Z133-2012, American National Standard Safety Requirements for Arboricultural Operations—Pruning, Trimming, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and Cutting Brush. ANSI/IEEE Std 935-1989, IEEE Guide on Terminology for Tools and Equipment to Be Used in Live Line Working. ASME B20.1-2012, Safety Standard for Conveyors and Related Equipment. ASTM D120-09, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves. ASTM D149-09 (2013), Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies. ASTM D178-01 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting. ASTM D1048-12, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets. ASTM D1049-98 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers. ASTM D1050-05 (2011), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. ASTM D1051-08, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves. ASTM F478-09, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers. ASTM F479-06 (2011), Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets. ASTM F496-08, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves. ASTM F711-02 (2007), Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live Line Tools. ASTM F712-06 (2011), Standard Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment for Protection of Workers. ASTM F819-10, Standard Terminology Relating to Electrical Protective Equipment for Workers. ASTM F855-09, Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment. ASTM F887-12 e1 Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment. ASTM F914/F914M-10, Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission for Aerial Personnel Devices Without Supplemental Load Handling Attachments. ASTM F1116-03 (2008), Standard Test Method for Determining Dielectric Strength of Dielectric Footwear. ASTM F1117-03 (2008), Standard Specification for Dielectric Footwear. ASTM F1236-96 (2012), Standard Guide for Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rubber Products. ASTM F1430/F1430M-10, Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission Testing of Insulated and Non-Insulated Aerial Personnel Devices with Supplemental Load Handling Attachments. ASTM F1505-10, Standard Specification for Insulated and Insulating Hand Tools. ASTM F1506-10a, Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant and Arc Rated Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards. ASTM F1564-13, Standard Specification for Structure-Mounted Insulating Work Platforms for Electrical Workers. ASTM F1701-12, Standard Specification for Unused Polypropylene Rope with Special Electrical Properties. ASTM F1742-03 (2011), Standard Specification for PVC Insulating Sheeting. ASTM F1796-09, Standard Specification for High Voltage Detectors—Part 1 Capacitive Type to be Used for Voltages Exceeding 600 Volts AC. ASTM F1797-09 ε 1 Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission Testing of Insulated and Non-Insulated Digger Derricks. ASTM F1825-03 (2007), Standard Specification for Clampstick Type Live Line Tools. ASTM F1826-00 (2011), Standard Specification for Live Line and Measuring Telescoping Tools. ASTM F1891-12, Standard Specification for Arc and Flame Resistant Rainwear. ASTM F1958/F1958M-12, Standard Test Method for Determining the Ignitability of Non-flame-Resistant Materials for Clothing by Electric Arc Exposure Method Using Mannequins. ASTM F1959/F1959M-12, Standard Test Method for Determining the Arc Rating of Materials for Clothing. IEEE Stds 4-1995, 4a-2001 (Amendment to IEEE Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing IEEE Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing. IEEE Std 62-1995, IEEE Guide for Diagnostic Field Testing of Electric Power Apparatus—Part 1: Oil Filled Power Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors. IEEE Std 80-2000, Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding. IEEE Std 100-2000, The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms Seventh Edition. IEEE Std 516-2009, IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines. IEEE Std 524-2003, IEEE Guide to the Installation of Overhead Transmission Line Conductors IEEE Std 957-2005, IEEE Guide for Cleaning Insulators. IEEE Std 1048-2003, IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines. IEEE Std 1067-2005, IEEE Guide for In-Service Use, Care, Maintenance, and Testing of Conductive Clothing for Use on Voltages up to 765 kV AC and ±750 kV DC. IEEE Std 1307-2004, IEEE Standard for Fall Protection for Utility Work. IEEE Stds 1584-2002, 1584a-2004 (Amendment 1 to IEEE Std 1584-2002), and 1584b-2011 (Amendment 2: Changes to Clause 4 of IEEE Std 1584-2002), IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations. IEEE C2-2012, National Electrical Safety Code. NFPA 70E-2012, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. [79 FR 20633, Apr. 11, 2014, as amended at 79 FR 56960, Sept. 24, 2014; 80 FR 60036, Oct. 5, 2015; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016; 84 FR 68797, Dec. 17, 2019; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1910.272 Grain handling facilities. (a) Scope. Note to paragraph ( a For grain-handling facilities in the marine-terminal industry only, 29 CFR 1910.272 is to be enforced consistent with the interpretations in OSHA Compliance Directive 02-00-066, which is available on OSHA's Web page at www.osha.gov. (b) Application. (2) Paragraphs (o), (p), and (q) of this section apply only to grain elevators. (c) Definitions. Choked leg Flat storage structure Fugitive grain dust Grain elevator Hot work Inside bucket elevator Jogging Lagging Permit (d) Emergency action plan. (e) Training. (i) General safety precautions associated with the facility, including recognition and preventive measures for the hazards related to dust accumulations and common ignition sources such as smoking; and, (ii) Specific procedures and safety practices applicable to their job tasks including but not limited to, cleaning procedures for grinding equipment, clearing procedures for choked legs, housekeeping procedures, hot work procedures, preventive maintenance procedures and lock-out/tag-out procedures. (2) Employees assigned special tasks, such as bin entry and handling of flammable or toxic substances, shall be provided training to perform these tasks safely. Note to paragraph ( e Training for an employee who enters grain storage structures includes training about engulfment and mechanical hazards and how to avoid them. (f) Hot work permit. (i) Where the employer or the employer's representative (who would otherwise authorize the permit) is present while the hot work is being performed; (ii) In welding shops authorized by the employer; (iii) In hot work areas authorized by the employer which are located outside of the grain handling structure. (2) The permit shall certify that the requirements contained in § 1910.252(a) have been implemented prior to beginning the hot work operations. The permit shall be kept on file until completion of the hot work operations. (g) Entry into grain storage structures. Exception: (1) The following actions shall be taken before employees enter bins, silos, or tanks: (i) The employer shall issue a permit for entering bins, silos, or tanks unless the employer or the employer's representative (who would otherwise authorize the permit) is present during the entire operation. The permit shall certify that the precautions contained in this paragraph (§ 1910.272(g)) have been implemented prior to employees entering bins, silos or tanks. The permit shall be kept on file until completion of the entry operations. (ii) All mechanical, electrical, hydraulic, and pneumatic equipment which presents a danger to employees inside grain storage structures shall be deenergized and shall be disconnected, locked-out and tagged, blocked-off, or otherwise prevented from operating by other equally effective means or methods. (iii) The atmosphere within a bin, silo, or tank shall be tested for the presence of combustible gases, vapors, and toxic agents when the employer has reason to believe they may be present. Additionally, the atmosphere within a bin, silo, or tank shall be tested for oxygen content unless there is continuous natural air movement or continuous forced-air ventilation before and during the period employees are inside. If the oxygen level is less than 19.5%, or if combustible gas or vapor is detected in excess of 10% of the lower flammable limit, or if toxic agents are present in excess of the ceiling values listed in subpart Z of 29 CFR part 1910, or if toxic agents are present in concentrations that will cause health effects which prevent employees from effecting self-rescue or communication to obtain assistance, the following provisions apply. (A) Ventilation shall be provided until the unsafe condition or conditions are eliminated, and the ventilation shall be continued as long as there is a possibility of recurrence of the unsafe condition while the bin, silo, or tank is occupied by employees. (B) If toxicity or oxygen deficiency cannot be eliminated by ventilation, employees entering the bin, silo, or tank shall wear an appropriate respirator. Respirator use shall be in accordance with the requirements of § 1910.134. (iv) “Walking down grain” and similar practices where an employee walks on grain to make it flow within or out from a grain storage structure, or where an employee is on moving grain, are prohibited. (2) Whenever an employee enters a grain storage structure from a level at or above the level of the stored grain or grain products, or whenever an employee walks or stands on or in stored grain of a depth which poses an engulfment hazard, the employer shall equip the employee with a body harness with lifeline, or a boatswain's chair that meets the requirements of subpart D of this part. The lifeline shall be so positioned, and of sufficient length, to prevent the employee from sinking further than waist-deep in the grain. Exception: Note to paragraph ( g When the employee is standing or walking on a surface which the employer demonstrates is free from engulfment hazards, the lifeline or alternative means may be disconnected or removed. (3) An observer, equipped to provide assistance, shall be stationed outside the bin, silo, or tank being entered by an employee. Communications (visual, voice, or signal line) shall be maintained between the observer and employee entering the bin, silo, or tank. (4) The employer shall provide equipment for rescue operations which is specifically suited for the bin, silo, or tank being entered. (5) The employee acting as observer shall be trained in rescue procedures, including notification methods for obtaining additional assistance. (6) Employees shall not enter bins, silos, or tanks underneath a bridging condition, or where a buildup of grain products on the sides could fall and bury them. (h) Entry into flat storage structures. (1) Each employee who walks or stands on or in stored grain, where the depth of the grain poses an engulfment hazard, shall be equipped with a lifeline or alternative means which the employer demonstrates will prevent the employee from sinking further than waist-deep into the grain. Note to paragraph ( h When the employee is standing or walking on a surface which the employer demonstrates is free from engulfment hazards, the lifeline or alternative means may be disconnected or removed. (2)(i) Whenever an employee walks or stands on or in stored grain or grain products of a depth which poses an engulfment hazard, all equipment which presents a danger to that employee (such as an auger or other grain transport equipment) shall be deenergized, and shall be disconnected, locked-out and tagged, blocked-off, or otherwise prevented from operating by other equally effective means or methods. (ii) “Walking down grain” and similar practices where an employee walks on grain to make it flow within or out from a grain storage structure, or where an employee is on moving grain, are prohibited. (3) No employee shall be permitted to be either underneath a bridging condition, or in any other location where an accumulation of grain on the sides or elsewhere could fall and engulf that employee. (i) Contractors. (2) The employer shall explain the applicable provisions of the emergency action plan to contractors. (j) Housekeeping. (2) In addition, the housekeeping program for grain elevators (i) Priority housekeeping areas shall include at least (A) Floor areas within 35 feet (10.7 m) of inside bucket elevators; (B) Floors of enclosed areas containing grinding equipment; (C) Floors of enclosed areas containing grain dryers located inside the facility. (ii) The employer shall immediately remove any fugitive grain dust accumulations whenever they exceed 1/8 (3) The use of compressed air to blow dust from ledges, walls, and other areas shall only be permitted when all machinery that presents an ignition source in the area is shut-down, and all other known potential ignition sources in the area are removed or controlled. (4) Grain and product spills shall not be considered fugitive grain dust accumulations. However, the housekeeping program shall address the procedures for removing such spills from the work area. (k) Grate openings. 1/2 (l) Filter collectors. (2) Filter collectors installed after March 30, 1988 shall be: (i) Located outside the facility; or (ii) Located in an area inside the facility protected by an explosion suppression system; or (iii) Located in an area inside the facility that is separated from other areas of the facility by construction having at least a one hour fire-resistance rating, and which is adjacent to an exterior wall and vented to the outside. The vent and ductwork shall be designed to resist rupture due to deflagration. (m) Preventive maintenance. (i) Regularly scheduled inspections of at least the mechanical and safety control equipment associated with dryers, grain stream processing equipment, dust collection equipment including filter collectors, and bucket elevators; (ii) Lubrication and other appropriate maintenance in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, or as determined necessary by prior operating records. (2) The employer shall promptly correct dust collection systems which are malfunctioning or which are operating below designed efficiency. Additionally, the employer shall promptly correct, or remove from service, overheated bearings and slipping or misaligned belts associated with inside bucket elevators. (3) A certification record shall be maintained of each inspection, performed in accordance with this paragraph (m), containing the date of the inspection, the name of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, of the equipment specified in paragraph (m)(1)(i) of this section that was inspected. (4) The employer shall implement procedures for the use of tags and locks which will prevent the inadvertent application of energy or motion to equipment being repaired, serviced, or adjusted, which could result in employee injury. Such locks and tags shall be removed in accordance with established procedures only by the employee installing them or, if unavailable, by his or her supervisor. (n) Grain stream processing equipment. (o) Emergency escape. (2) The employer shall provide at least one means of emergency escape in tunnels of existing grain elevators. Tunnels in grain elevators constructed after the effective date of this standard shall be provided with at least two means of emergency escape. (p) Continuous-flow bulk raw grain dryers. (i) Will shut-off the fuel supply in case of power or flame failure or interruption of air movement through the exhaust fan; and, (ii) Will stop the grain from being fed into the dryer if excessive temperature occurs in the exhaust of the drying section. (2) Direct-heat grain dryers installed after March 30, 1988 shall be: (i) Located outside the grain elevator; or (ii) Located in an area inside the grain elevator protected by a fire or explosion suppression system; or (iii) Located in an area inside the grain elevator which is separated from other areas of the facility by construction having at least a one hour fire-resistance rating. (q) Inside bucket elevators. (2) All belts and lagging purchased after March 30, 1988 shall be conductive. Such belts shall have a surface electrical resistance not to exceed 300 megohms. (3) All bucket elevators shall be equipped with a means of access to the head pulley section to allow inspection of the head pulley, lagging, belt, and discharge throat of the elevator head. The boot section shall also be provided with a means of access for clean-out of the boot and for inspection of the boot, pulley, and belt. (4) All the employer shall: (i) Mount bearings externally to the leg casing; or, (ii) Provide vibration monitoring, temperature monitoring, or other means to monitor the condition of those bearings mounted inside or partially-inside the leg casing. (5) All the employer shall equip bucket elevators with a motion detection device which will shut-down the bucket elevator when the belt speed is reduced by no more than 20% of the normal operating speed. (6) All the employer shall: (i) Equip bucket elevators with a belt alignment monitoring device which will initiate an alarm to employees when the belt is not tracking properly; or, (ii) Provide a means to keep the belt tracking properly, such as a system that provides constant alignment adjustment of belts. (7) Paragraphs (q)(5) and (q)(6) of this section do not apply to grain elevators having a permanent storage capacity of less than one million bushels, provided that daily visual inspection is made of bucket movement and tracking of the belt. (8) Paragraphs (q)(4), (q)(5), and (q)(6) of this section do not apply to the following: (i) Bucket elevators which are equipped with an operational fire and explosion suppression system capable of protecting at least the head and boot section of the bucket elevator; or, (ii) Bucket elevators which are equipped with pneumatic or other dust control systems or methods that keep the dust concentration inside the bucket elevator at least 25% below the lower explosive limit at all times during operations. Note: The following appendices to § 1910.272 serve as nonmandatory guidelines to assist employers and employees in complying with the requirements of this section, as well as to provide other helpful information. No additional burdens are imposed through these appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.272 Grain Handling Facilities Examples presented in this appendix may not be the only means of achieving the performance goals in the standard. 1. Scope and Application The provisions of this standard apply in addition to any other applicable requirements of this part 1910 (or part 1917 at marine terminals). The standard contains requirements for new and existing grain handling facilities. The standard does not apply to seed plants which handle and prepare seeds for planting of future crops, nor to on-farm storage or feed lots. 2. Emergency Action Plan The standard requires the employer to develop and implement an emergency action plan. The emergency action plan (§ 1910.38) covers those designated actions employers and employees are to take to ensure employee safety from fire and other emergencies. The plan specifies certain minimum elements which are to be addressed. These elements include the establishment of an employee alarm system, the development of evacuation procedures, and training employees in those actions they are to take during an emergency. The standard does not specify a particular method for notifying employees of an emergency. Public announcement systems, air horns, steam whistles, a standard fire alarm system, or other types of employee alarm may be used. However, employers should be aware that employees in a grain facility may have difficulty hearing an emergency alarm, or distinguishing an emergency alarm from other audible signals at the facility, or both. Therefore, it is important that the type of employee alarm used be distinguishable and distinct. The use of floor plans or workplace maps which clearly show the emergency escape routes should be included in the emergency action plan; color coding will aid employees in determining their route assignments. The employer should designate a safe area, outside the facility, where employees can congregate after evacuation, and implement procedures to account for all employees after emergency evacuation has been completed. It is also recommended that employers seek the assistance of the local fire department for the purpose of preplanning for emergencies. Preplanning is encouraged to facilitate coordination and cooperation between facility personnel and those who may be called upon for assistance during an emergency. It is important for emergency service units to be aware of the usual work locations of employees at the facility. 3. Training It is important that employees be trained in the recognition and prevention of hazards associated with grain facilities, especially those hazards associated with their own work tasks. Employees should understand the factors which are necessary to produce a fire or explosion, i.e., fuel (such as grain dust), oxygen, ignition source, and (in the case of explosions) confinement. Employees should be made aware that any efforts they make to keep these factors from occurring simultaneously will be an important step in reducing the potential for fires and explosions. The standard provides flexibility for the employer to design a training program which fulfills the needs of a facility. The type, amount, and frequency of training will need to reflect the tasks that employees are expected to perform. Although training is to be provided to employees at least annually, it is recommended that safety meetings or discussions and drills be conducted at more frequent intervals. The training program should include those topics applicable to the particular facility, as well as topics such as: Hot work procedures; lock-out/tag-out procedures; bin entry procedures; bin cleaning procedures; grain dust explosions; fire prevention; procedures for handling “hot grain”; housekeeping procedures, including methods and frequency of dust removal; pesticide and fumigant usage; proper use and maintenance of personal protective equipment; and, preventive maintenance. The types of work clothing should also be considered in the program at least to caution against using polyester clothing that easily melts and increases the severity of burns, as compared to wool or fire retardant cotton. In implementing the training program, it is recommended that the employer utilize films, slide-tape presentations, pamphlets, and other information which can be obtained from such sources as the Grain Elevator and Processing Society, the Cooperative Extension Service of the U.S. Department of Agriculture, Kansas State University's Extension Grain Science and Industry, and other state agriculture schools, industry associations, union organizations, and insurance groups. 4. Hot Work Permit The implementation of a permit system for hot work is intended to assure that employers maintain control over operations involving hot work and to assure that employees are aware of and utilize appropriate safeguards when conducting these activities. Precautions for hot work operations are specified in 29 CFR 1910.252(a), and include such safeguards as relocating the hot work operation to a safe location if possible, relocating or covering combustible material in the vicinity, providing fire extinguishers, and provisions for establishing a fire watch. Permits are not required for hot work operations conducted in the presence of the employer or the employer's authorized representative who would otherwise issue the permit, or in an employer authorized welding shop or when work is conducted outside and away from the facility. It should be noted that the permit is not a record, but is an authorization of the employer certifying that certain safety precautions have been implemented prior to the beginning of work operations. 5. Entry Into Bins, Silos, And Tanks In order to assure that employers maintain control over employee entry into bins, silos, and tanks, OSHA is requiring that the employer issue a permit for entry into bins, silos, and tanks unless the employer (or the employer's representative who would otherwise authorize the permit) is present at the entry and during the entire operation. Employees should have a thorough understanding of the hazards associated with entry into bins, silos, and tanks. Employees are not to be permitted to enter these spaces from the bottom when grain or other agricultural products are hung up or sticking to the sides which might fall and injure or kill an employee. Employees should be made aware that the atmosphere in bins, silos, and tanks can be oxygen deficient or toxic. Employees should be trained in the proper methods of testing the atmosphere, as well as in the appropriate procedures to be taken if the atmosphere is found to be oxygen deficient or toxic. When a fumigant has been recently applied in these areas and entry must be made, aeration fans should be running continuously to assure a safe atmosphere for those inside. Periodic monitoring of toxic levels shuld be done by direct reading instruments to measure the levels, and, if there is an increase in these readings, appropriate actions should be promptly taken. Employees have been buried and suffocated in grain or other agricultural products because they sank into the material. Therefore, it is suggested that employees not be permitted to walk or stand on the grain or other grain product where the depth is greater than waist high. In this regard, employees must use a full body harness or boatswain's chair with a lifeline when entering from the top. A winch system with mechanical advantage (either powered or manual) would allow better control of the employee than just using a hand held hoist line, and such a system would allow the observer to remove the employee easily without having to enter the space. It is important that employees be trained in the proper selection and use of any personal protective equipment which is to be worn. Equally important is the training of employees in the planned emergency rescue procedures. Employers should carefully read § 1910.134(e)(3) and assure that their procedures follow these requirements. The employee acting as observer is to be equipped to provide assistance and is to know procedures for obtaining additional assistance. The observer should not enter a space until adequate assistance is available. It is recommended that an employee trained in CPR be readily available to provide assistance to those employees entering bins, silos, or tanks. 6. Contractors These provisions of the standard are intended to ensure that outside contractors are cognizant of the hazards associated with grain handling facilities, particularly in relation to the work they are to perform for the employer. Also, in the event of an emergency, contractors should be able to take appropriate action as a part of the overall facility emergency action plan. Contractors should also be aware of the employer's permit systems. Contractors should develop specified procedures for performing hot work and for entry into bins, silos, and tanks and these activities should be coordinated with the employer. Contractors are responsible for informing their own employees. This coordination will help to ensure that employers know what work is being performed at the facility by contractors; where it is being performed; and, that it is being performed in a manner that will not endanger employees. 7. Housekeeping. The housekeeping program is to be designed to keep dust accumulations and emissions under control inside grain facilities. The housekeeping program, which is to be written, is to specify the frequency and method(s) used to best reduce dust accumulations. Ship, barge, and rail loadout and receiving areas which are located outside the facility need not be addressed in the housekeeping program. Additionally, truck dumps which are open on two or more sides need not be addressed by the housekeeping program. Other truck dumps should be addressed in the housekeeping program to provide for regular cleaning during periods of receiving grain or agricultural products. The housekeeping program should provide coverage for all workspaces in the facility and include walls, beams, etc., especially in relation to the extent that dust could accumulate. Dust Accumulations Almost all facilities will require some level of manual housekeeping. Manual housekeeping methods, such as vacuuming or sweeping with soft bristle brooms, should be used which will minimize the possibility of layered dust being suspended in the air when it is being removed. The housekeeping program should include a contingency plan to respond to situations where dust accumulates rapidly due to a failure of a dust enclosure hood, an unexpected breakdown of the dust control system, a dust-tight connection inadvertently knocked open, etc. The housekeeping program should also specify the manner of handling spills. Grain spills are not considered to be dust accumulations. A fully enclosed horizontal belt conveying system where the return belt is inside the enclosure should have inspection access such as sliding panels or doors to permit checking of equipment, checking for dust accumulations and facilitate cleaning if needed. Dust Emissions Employers should analyze the entire stock handling system to determine the location of dust emissions and effective methods to control or to eliminate them. The employer should make sure that holes in spouting, casings of bucket elevators, pneumatic conveying pipes, screw augers, or drag conveyor casings, are patched or otherwise properly repaired to prevent leakage. Minimizing free falls of grain or grain products by using choke feeding techniques, and utilization of dust-tight enclosures at transfer points, can be effective in reducing dust emissions. Each housekeeping program should specify the schedules and control measures which will be used to control dust emitted from the stock handling system. The housekeeping program should address the schedules to be used for cleaning dust accumulations from motors, critical bearings and other potential ignition sources in the working areas. Also, the areas around bucket elevator legs, milling machinery and similar equipment should be given priority in the cleaning schedule. The method of disposal of the dust which is swept or vacuumed should also be planned. Dust may accumulate in somewhat inaccessible areas, such as those areas where ladders or scaffolds might be necessary to reach them. The employer may want to consider the use of compressed air and long lances to blow down these areas frequently. The employer may also want to consider the periodic use of water and hoselines to wash down these areas. If these methods are used, they are to be specified in the housekeeping program along with the appropriate safety precautions, including the use of personal protective equipment such as eyewear and dust respirators. Several methods have been effective in controlling dust emissions. A frequently used method of controlling dust emissions is a pneumatic dust collection system. However, the installation of a poorly designed pneumatic dust collection system has fostered a false sense of security and has often led to an inappropriate reduction in manual housekeeping. Therefore, it is imperative that the system be designed properly and installed by a competent contractor. Those employers who have a pneumatic dust control system that is not working according to expectations should request the engineering design firm, or the manufacturer of the filter and related equipment, to conduct an evaluation of the system to determine the corrections necessary for proper operation of the system. If the design firm or manufacturer of the equipment is not known, employers should contact their trade association for recommendations of competent designers of pneumatic dust control systems who could provide assistance. When installing a new or upgraded pneumatic control system, the employer should insist on an acceptance test period of 30 to 45 days of operation to ensure that the system is operating as intended and designed. The employer should also obtain maintenance, testing, and inspection information from the manufacturer to ensure that the system will continue to operate as designed. Aspiration of the leg, as part of a pneumatic dust collection system, is another effective method of controlling dust emissions. Aspiration of the leg consists of a flow of air across the entire boot, which entrains the liberated dust and carries it up the up-leg to take-off points. With proper aspiration, dust concentrations in the leg can be lowered below the lower explosive limit. Where a prototype leg installation has been instrumented and shown to be effective in keeping the dust level 25% below the lower explosive limit during normal operations for the various products handled, then other legs of similar size, capacity and products being handled which have the same design criteria for the air aspiration would be acceptable to OSHA, provided the prototype test report is available on site. Another method of controlling dust emissions is enclosing the conveying system, pressurizing the general work area, and providing a lower pressure inside the enclosed conveying system. Although this method is effective in controlling dust emissions from the conveying system, adequate access to the inside of the enclosure is necessary to facilitate frequent removal of dust accumulations. This is also necessary for those systems called “self-cleaning.” The use of edible oil sprayed on or into a moving stream of grain is another method which has been used to control dust emissions. Tests performed using this method have shown that the oil treatment can reduce dust emissions. Repeated handling of the grain may necessitate additional oil treatment to prevent liberation of dust. However, before using this method, operators of grain handling facilities should be aware that the Food and Drug Administration must approve the specific oil treatment used on products for food or feed. As a part of the housekeeping program, grain elevators are required to address accumulations of dust at priority areas using the action level. The standard specifies a maximum accumulation of 1/8 1/8 8. Filter Collectors Proper sizing of filter collectors for the pneumatic dust control system they serve is very important for the overall effectiveness of the system. The air to cloth ratio of the system should be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If higher ratios are used, they can result in more maintenance on the filter, shorter bag or sock life, increased differential pressure resulting in higher energy costs, and an increase in operational problems. A photohelic gauge, magnehelic gauge, or manometer, may be used to indicate the pressure rise across the inlet and outlet of the filter. When the pressure exceeds the design value for the filter, the air volume will start to drop, and maintenance will be required. Any of these three monitoring devices is acceptable as meeting paragraph (l)(1) of the standard. The employer should establish a level or target reading on the instrument which is consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations that will indicate when the filter should be serviced. This target reading on the instrument and the accompanying procedures should be in the preventive maintenance program. These efforts would minimize the blinding of the filter and the subsequent failure of the pneumatic dust control system. There are other instruments that the employer may want to consider using to monitor the operation of the filter. One instrument is a zero motion switch for detecting a failure of motion by the rotary discharge valve on the hopper. If the rotary discharge valve stops turning, the dust released by the bag or sock will accumulate in the filter hopper until the filter becomes clogged. Another instrument is a level indicator which is installed in the hopper of the filter to detect the buildup of dust that would otherwise cause the filter hopper to be plugged. The installation of these instruments should be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All of these monitoring devices and instruments are to be capable of being read at an accessible location and checked as frequently as specified in the preventive maintenance program. Filter collectors on portable vacuum cleaners, and those used where fans are not part of the system, are not covered by requirements of paragraph (l) of the standard. 9. Preventive Maintenance The control of dust and the control of ignition sources are the most effective means for reducing explosion hazards. Preventive maintenance is related to ignition sources in the same manner as housekeeping is related to dust control and should be treated as a major function in a facility. Equipment such as critical bearings, belts, buckets, pulleys, and milling machinery are potential ignition sources, and periodic inspection and lubrication of such equipment through a scheduled preventive maintenance program is an effective method for keeping equipment functioning properly and safely. The use of vibration detection methods, heat sensitive tape or other heat detection methods that can be seen by the inspector or maintenance person will allow for a quick, accurate, and consistent evaluation of bearings and will help in the implementation of the program. The standard does not require a specific frequency for preventive maintenance. The employer is permitted flexibility in determining the appropriate interval for maintenance provided that the effectiveness of the maintenance program can be demonstrated. Scheduling of preventive maintenance should be based on manufacturer's recommendations for effective operation, as well as from the employer's previous experience with the equipment. However, the employer's schedule for preventive maintenance should be frequent enough to allow for both prompt identification and correction of any problems concerning the failure or malfunction of the mechanical and safety control equipment associated with bucket elevators, dryers, filter collectors and magnets. The pressure-drop monitoring device for a filter collector, and the condition of the lagging on the head pulley, are examples of items that require regularly scheduled inspections. A system of identifying the date, the equipment inspected and the maintenance performed, if any, will assist employers in continually refining their preventive maintenance schedules and identifying equipment problem areas. Open work orders where repair work or replacement is to be done at a designated future date as scheduled, would be an indication of an effective preventive maintenance program. It is imperative that the prearranged schedule of maintenance be adhered to regardless of other facility constraints. The employer should give priority to the maintenance or repair work associated with safety control equipment, such as that on dryers, magnets, alarm and shut-down systems on bucket elevators, bearings on bucket elevators, and the filter collectors in the dust control system. Benefits of a strict preventive maintenance program can be a reduction of unplanned downtime, improved equipment performance, planned use of resources, more efficient operations, and, most importantly, safer operations. The standard also requires the employer to develop and implement procedures consisting of locking out and tagging equipment to prevent the inadvertent application of energy or motion to equipment being repaired, serviced, or adjusted, which could result in employee injury. All employees who have responsibility for repairing or servicing equipment, as well as those who operate the equipment, are to be familiar with the employer's lock and tag procedures. A lock is to be used as the positive means to prevent operation of the disconnected equipment. Tags are to be used to inform employees why equipment is locked out. Tags are to meet requirements in § 1910.145(f). Locks and tags may only be removed by employees that placed them, or by their supervisor, to ensure the safety of the operation. 10. Grain Stream Processing Equipment The standard requires an effective means of removing ferrous material from grain streams so that such material does not enter equipment such as hammer mills, grinders and pulverizers. Large foreign objects, such as stones, should have been removed at the receiving pit. Introduction of foreign objects and ferrous material into such equipment can produce sparks which can create an explosion hazard. Acceptable means for removal of ferrous materials include the use of permanent or electromagnets. Means used to separate foreign objects and ferrous material should be cleaned regularly and kept in good repair as part of the preventive maintenance program in order to maximize their effectiveness. 11. Emergency Escape The standard specifies that at least two means of escape must be provided from galleries (bin decks). Means of emergency escape may include any available means of egress (consisting of three components, exit access, exit, and exit discharge as defined in § 1910.35), the use of controlled descent devices with landing velocities not to exceed 15 ft/sec., or emergency escape ladders from galleries. Importantly, the means of emergency escape are to be addressed in the facility emergency action plan. Employees are to know the location of the nearest means of emergency escape and the action they must take during an emergency. 12. Dryers Liquefied petroleum gas fired dryers should have the vaporizers installed at least ten feet from the dryer. The gas piping system should be protected from mechanical damage. The employer should establish procedures for locating and repairing leaks when there is a strong odor of gas or other signs of a leak. 13. Inside Bucket Elevators Hazards associated with inside bucket elevator legs are the source of many grain elevator fires and explosions. Therefore, to mitigate these hazards, the standard requires the implementation of special safety precautions and procedures, as well as the installation of safety control devices. The standard provides for a phase-in period for many of the requirements to provide the employer time for planning the implementation of the requirements. Additionally, for elevators with a permanent storage capacity of less than one million bushels, daily visual inspection of belt alignment and bucket movement can be substituted for alignment monitoring devices and motion detection devices. The standard requires that belts (purchased after the effective date of the standard) have surface electrical resistance not to exceed 300 megohms. Test methods available regarding electrical resistance of belts are: The American Society for Testing and Materials D257-76, “Standard Test Methods for D-C Resistance or Conductance of Insulating Materials”; and, the International Standards Organization's #284, “Conveyor Belts-Electrical Conductivity-Specification and Method of Test.” When an employer has a written certification from the manufacturer that a belt has been tested using one of the above test methods, and meets the 300 megohm criteria, the belt is acceptable as meeting this standard. When using conductive belts, the employer should make certain that the head pulley and shaft are grounded through the drive motor ground or by some other equally effective means. When V-type belts are used to transmit power to the head pulley assembly from the motor drive shaft, it will be necessary to provide electrical continuity from the head pulley assembly to ground, e.g., motor grounds. Employers should also consider purchasing new belts that are flame retardant or fire resistive. A flame resistance test for belts is contained in 30 CFR 18.65. Appendix B to § 1910.272 Grain Handling Facilities National Consensus Standards The following table contains a cross-reference listing of current national consensus standards which provide information that may be of assistance to grain handling operations. Employers who comply with provisions in these national consensus standards that provide equal or greater protection than those in § 1910.272 will be considered in compliance with the corresponding requirements in § 1910.272. Subject National consensus standards Grain elevators and facilities handling bulk raw agricultural commodities ANSI/NFPA 61B Feed mills ANSI/NFPA 61C Facilities handling agricultural commodities for human consumption ANSI/NFPA 61D Pneumatic conveying systems for agricultural commodities ANSI/NFPA 66 Guide for explosion venting ANSI/NFPA 68 Explosion prevention systems ANSI/NFPA 69 Dust removal and exhaust systems ANSI/NFPA 91 Appendix C to § 1910.272 Grain handling facilities References for Further Information The following references provide information which can be helpful in understanding the requirements contained in various provisions of the standard, as well as provide other helpful information. 1. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations; 2. Practical Guide to Elevator Design; 3. Dust Control for Grain Elevators; 4. Prevention of Grain Elevator and Mill Explosions; 5. Standard for the Prevention of Fires and Explosions in Grain Elevators and Facilities Handling Bulk Raw Agricultural Commodities, 6. Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in Feed Mills, 7. Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in the Milling of Agricultural Commodities for Human Consumption, 8. Standard for Pneumatic Conveying Systems for Handling Feed, Flour, Grain and Other Agricultural Dusts, 9. Guide for Explosion Venting, 10. Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems, 11. Safety-Operations Plans; 12. Inplant Fire Prevention Control Programs; 13. Guidelines for Terminal Elevators; 14. Standards for Preventing the Horizontal and Vertical Spread of Fires in Grain Handling Properties; 15. Belt Conveyors for Bulk Materials, 16. Suggestions for Precautions and Safety Practices in Welding and Cutting; 17. Food Bins and Tanks, 18. Pneumatic Dust Control in Grain Elevators; 19. Dust Control Analysis and Layout Procedures for Grain Storage and Processing Plants 20. Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and Vapor Removal, 21. Standards for the Installation of Direct Heat Grain Driers in Grain and Milling Properties; 22. Guidelines for Lubrication and Bearing Maintenance; 23. Organized Maintenance in Grain and Milling Properties; 24. Safe and Efficient Elevator Legs for Grain and Milling Properties; 25. Explosion Venting and Supression of Bucket Elevators; 26. Lightning Protection Code, 27. Occupational Safety in Grain Elevators, 28. Retrofitting and Constructing Grain Elevators; 29. Grain Industry Safety and Health Center—Training Series 30. Suggestions for Organized Maintenance; 31. Safety—The First Step to Success; 32. Emergency Plan Notebook; [52 FR 49625, Dec. 31, 1987, as amended at 53 FR 17696, May 18, 1988; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 55 FR 25094, June 20, 1990; 61 FR 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 9584, Mar. 8, 1996; 67 FR 67965, Nov. 7, 2002; 76 FR 80740, Dec. 27, 2011] Subpart S—Electrical Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31160), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR Part 1911. General § 1910.301 Introduction. This subpart addresses electrical safety requirements that are necessary for the practical safeguarding of employees in their workplaces and is divided into four major divisions as follows: (a) Design safety standards for electrical systems. (b) Safety-related work practices. (c) Safety-related maintenance requirements. (d) Safety requirements for special equipment. (e) Definitions. [46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981] Design Safety Standards for Electrical Systems Source: Sections 1910.302 through 1910.308 appear at 72 FR 7190, Feb. 14, 2007, unless otherwise noted. § 1910.302 Electric utilization systems. Sections 1910.302 through 1910.308 contain design safety standards for electric utilization systems. (a) Scope Covered. (i) Yards; (ii) Carnivals; (iii) Parking and other lots; (iv) Mobile homes; (v) Recreational vehicles; (vi) Industrial substations; (vii) Conductors that connect the installations to a supply of electricity; and (viii) Other outside conductors on the premises. (2) Not covered. (i) Installations in ships, watercraft, railway rolling stock, aircraft, or automotive vehicles other than mobile homes and recreational vehicles; (ii) Installations underground in mines; (iii) Installations of railways for generation, transformation, transmission, or distribution of power used exclusively for operation of rolling stock or installations used exclusively for signaling and communication purposes; (iv) Installations of communication equipment under the exclusive control of communication utilities, located outdoors or in building spaces used exclusively for such installations; or (v) Installations under the exclusive control of electric utilities for the purpose of communication or metering; or for the generation, control, transformation, transmission, and distribution of electric energy located in buildings used exclusively by utilities for such purposes or located outdoors on property owned or leased by the utility or on public highways, streets, roads, etc., or outdoors by established rights on private property. (b) Extent of application Requirements applicable to all installations. § 1910.303(b)—Examination, installation, and use of equipment § 1910.303(c)(3)—Electrical connections—Splices § 1910.303(d)—Arcing parts § 1910.303(e)—Marking § 1910.303(f), except (f)(4) and (f)(5)—Disconnecting means and circuits § 1910.303(g)(2)—600 volts or less—Guarding of live parts § 1910.304(a)(3)—Use of grounding terminals and devices § 1910.304(f)(1)(i), (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v)—Overcurrent protection—600 volts, nominal, or less § 1910.304(g)(1)(ii), (g)(1)(iii), (g)(1)(iv), and (g)(1)(v)—Grounding—Systems to be grounded § 1910.304(g)(4)—Grounding—Grounding connections § 1910.304(g)(5)—Grounding—Grounding path § 1910.304(g)(6)(iv)(A) through (g)(6)(iv)(D), and (g)(6)(vi)—Grounding—Supports, enclosures, and equipment to be grounded § 1910.304(g)(7)—Grounding—Nonelectrical equipment § 1910.304(g)(8)(i)—Grounding—Methods of grounding fixed equipment § 1910.305(g)(1)—Flexible cords and cables—Use of flexible cords and cables § 1910.305(g)(2)(ii) and (g)(2)(iii)—Flexible cords and cables—Identification, splices, and terminations § 1910.307, except as specified in § 1910.307(b)—Hazardous (classified) locations (2) Requirements applicable to installations made after March 15, 1972. (3) Requirements applicable only to installations made after April 16, 1981. § 1910.303(h)(4)—Over 600 volts, nominal—Entrance and access to work space § 1910.304(f)(1)(vii) and (f)(1)(viii)—Overcurrent protection—600 volts, nominal, or less § 1910.304(g)(9)(i)—Grounding—Grounding of systems and circuits of 1000 volts and over (high voltage) § 1910.305(j)(6)(ii)(D)—Equipment for general use—Capacitors § 1910.306(c)(9)—Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts—Interconnection between multicar controllers § 1910.306(i)—Electrically driven or controlled irrigation machines § 1910.306(j)(5)—Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations—Fountains § 1910.308(a)(1)(ii)—Systems over 600 volts, nominal—Aboveground wiring methods § 1910.308(c)(2)—Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and power-limited circuits—Marking § 1910.308(d)—Fire alarm systems (4) Requirements applicable only to installations made after August 13, 2007. § 1910.303(f)(4)—Disconnecting means and circuits—Capable of accepting a lock § 1910.303(f)(5)—Disconnecting means and circuits—Marking for series combination ratings § 1910.303(g)(1)(iv) and (g)(1)(vii)—600 Volts, nominal, or less—Space about electric equipment § 1910.303(h)(5)(vi)—Over 600 volts, nominal—Working space and guarding § 1910.304(b)(1)—Branch circuits—Identification of multiwire branch circuits § 1910.304(b)(3)(i)—Branch circuits—Ground-fault circuit interrupter protection for personnel § 1910.304(f)(2)(i)(A), (f)(2)(i)(B) (but not the introductory text to § 1910.304(f)(2)(i)), and (f)(2)(iv)(A)—Overcurrent protection—Feeders and branch circuits over 600 volts, nominal § 1910.305(c)(3)(ii)—Switches—Connection of switches § 1910.305(c)(5)—Switches—Grounding § 1910.306(a)(1)(ii)—Electric signs and outline lighting—Disconnecting means § 1910.306(c)(4)—Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts—Operation § 1910.306(c)(5)—Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts—Location § 1910.306(c)(6)—Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts—Identification and signs § 1910.306(c)(7)—Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts—Single-car and multicar installations § 1910.306(j)(1)(iii)—Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations—Receptacles § 1910.306(k)—Carnivals, circuses, fairs, and similar events § 1910.308(a)(5)(v) and (a)(5)(vi)(B)—Systems over 600 volts, nominal—Interrupting and isolating devices § 1910.308(a)(7)(vi)—Systems over 600 volts, nominal—Tunnel installations § 1910.308(b)(3)—Emergency power systems—Signs § 1910.308(c)(3)—Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and power-limited circuits—Separation from conductors of other circuits § 1910.308(f)—Solar photovoltaic systems (c) Applicability of requirements for disconnecting means. § 1910.303 General. (a) Approval. (b) Examination, installation, and use of equipment Examination. (i) Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the provisions of this subpart; Note to paragraph ( b i Suitability of equipment for an identified purpose may be evidenced by listing or labeling for that identified purpose. (ii) Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts designed to enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the protection thus provided; (iii) Wire-bending and connection space; (iv) Electrical insulation; (v) Heating effects under all conditions of use; (vi) Arcing effects; (vii) Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity, and specific use; and (viii) Other factors that contribute to the practical safeguarding of persons using or likely to come in contact with the equipment. (2) Installation and use. (3) Insulation integrity. (4) Interrupting rating. (5) Circuit impedance and other characteristics. (6) Deteriorating agents. (7) Mechanical execution of work. (i) Unused openings in boxes, raceways, auxiliary gutters, cabinets, equipment cases, or housings shall be effectively closed to afford protection substantially equivalent to the wall of the equipment. (ii) Conductors shall be racked to provide ready and safe access in underground and subsurface enclosures that persons enter for installation and maintenance. (iii) Internal parts of electrical equipment, including busbars, wiring terminals, insulators, and other surfaces, may not be damaged or contaminated by foreign materials such as paint, plaster, cleaners, abrasives, or corrosive residues. (iv) There shall be no damaged parts that may adversely affect safe operation or mechanical strength of the equipment, such as parts that are broken, bent, cut, or deteriorated by corrosion, chemical action, or overheating. (8) Mounting and cooling of equipment. Note to paragraph ( b i Wooden plugs driven into holes in masonry, concrete, plaster, or similar materials are not considered secure means of fastening electric equipment. (ii) Electric equipment that depends on the natural circulation of air and convection principles for cooling of exposed surfaces shall be installed so that room airflow over such surfaces is not prevented by walls or by adjacent installed equipment. For equipment designed for floor mounting, clearance between top surfaces and adjacent surfaces shall be provided to dissipate rising warm air. (iii) Electric equipment provided with ventilating openings shall be installed so that walls or other obstructions do not prevent the free circulation of air through the equipment. (c) Electrical connections General. (i) Devices such as pressure terminal or pressure splicing connectors and soldering lugs shall be identified for the material of the conductor and shall be properly installed and used; (ii) Conductors of dissimilar metals may not be intermixed in a terminal or splicing connector where physical contact occurs between dissimilar conductors (such as copper and aluminum, copper and copper-clad aluminum, or aluminum and copper-clad aluminum) unless the device is identified for the purpose and conditions of use; and (iii) Materials such as solder, fluxes, inhibitors, and compounds, where employed, shall be suitable for the use and shall be of a type that will not adversely affect the conductors, installation, or equipment. (2) Terminals. (ii) Terminals for more than one conductor and terminals used to connect aluminum shall be so identified. (3) Splices. (ii) Wire connectors or splicing means installed on conductors for direct burial shall be listed for such use. (d) Arcing parts. (e) Marking Identification of manufacturer and ratings. (i) The manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which the organization responsible for the product may be identified; and (ii) Other markings giving voltage, current, wattage, or other ratings as necessary. (2) Durability. (f) Disconnecting means and circuits Motors and appliances. (2) Services, feeders, and branch circuits. (3) Durability of markings. (4) Capable of accepting a lock. (5) Marking for series combination ratings. (ii) The marking required by paragraph (f)(5)(i) of this section shall be readily visible and shall state “Caution—Series Combination System Rated __ Amperes. Identified Replacement Component Required.” (g) 600 Volts, nominal, or less. (1) Space about electric equipment. (i) Working space for equipment likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized shall comply with the following dimensions, except as required or permitted elsewhere in this subpart: (A) The depth of the working space in the direction of access to live parts may not be less than indicated in Table S-1. Distances shall be measured from the live parts if they are exposed or from the enclosure front or opening if they are enclosed; (B) The width of working space in front of the electric equipment shall be the width of the equipment or 762 mm (30 in.), whichever is greater. In all cases, the working space shall permit at least a 90-degree opening of equipment doors or hinged panels; and (C) The work space shall be clear and extend from the grade, floor, or platform to the height required by paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section. However, other equipment associated with the electrical installation and located above or below the electric equipment may extend not more than 153 mm (6 in.) beyond the front of the electric equipment. (ii) Working space required by this standard may not be used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for inspection or servicing, the working space, if in a passageway or general open space, shall be suitably guarded. (iii) At least one entrance of sufficient area shall be provided to give access to the working space about electric equipment. (iv) For equipment rated 1200 amperes or more and over 1.83 m (6.0 ft) wide, containing overcurrent devices, switching devices, or control devices, there shall be one entrance not less than 610 mm (24 in.) wide and 1.98 m (6.5 ft) high at each end of the working space, except that: (A) Where the location permits a continuous and unobstructed way of exit travel, one means of exit is permitted; or (B) Where the working space required by paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section is doubled, only one entrance to the working space is required; however, the entrance shall be located so that the edge of the entrance nearest the equipment is the minimum clear distance given in Table S-1 away from such equipment. (v) Illumination shall be provided for all working spaces about service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers installed indoors. Additional lighting fixtures are not required where the working space is illuminated by an adjacent light source. In electric equipment rooms, the illumination may not be controlled by automatic means only. (vi) The minimum headroom of working spaces about service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, or motor control centers shall be as follows: (A) For installations built before August 13, 2007, 1.91 m (6.25 ft); and (B) For installations built on or after August 13, 2007, 1.98 m (6.5 ft), except that where the electrical equipment exceeds 1.98 m (6.5 ft) in height, the minimum headroom may not be less than the height of the equipment. Table S-1—Minimum Depth of Clear Working Space at Electric Equipment, 600 V or Less Nominal voltage to ground Minimum clear distance for condition 2 3 Condition A Condition B Condition C m ft m ft m ft 0-150 1 1 1 1 0.9 3.0 151-600 1 1 1.0 3.5 1.2 4.0 Notes to Table S-1: 1. Minimum clear distances may be 0.7 m (2.5 ft) for installations built before April 16, 1981. 2. Conditions A, B, and C are as follows: Condition A—Exposed live parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded by suitable wood or other insulating material. Insulated wire or insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts. Condition B—Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. Condition C—Exposed live parts on both sides of the work space (not guarded as provided in Condition A) with the operator between. 3. Working space is not required in back of assemblies such as dead-front switchboards or motor control centers where there are no renewable or adjustable parts (such as fuses or switches) on the back and where all connections are accessible from locations other than the back. Where rear access is required to work on deenergized parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a minimum working space of 762 mm (30 in.) horizontally shall be provided. (vii) Switchboards, panelboards, and distribution boards installed for the control of light and power circuits, and motor control centers shall be located in dedicated spaces and protected from damage. (A) For indoor installation, the dedicated space shall comply with the following: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 Note to paragraph ( g vii A dropped, suspended, or similar ceiling that does not add strength to the building structure is not considered a structural ceiling. (B) Outdoor electric equipment shall be installed in suitable enclosures and shall be protected from accidental contact by unauthorized personnel, or by vehicular traffic, or by accidental spillage or leakage from piping systems. No architectural appurtenance or other equipment may be located in the working space required by paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section. (2) Guarding of live parts. (A) By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is accessible only to qualified persons; (B) By suitable permanent, substantial partitions or screens so arranged so that only qualified persons will have access to the space within reach of the live parts. Any openings in such partitions or screens shall be so sized and located that persons are not likely to come into accidental contact with the live parts or to bring conducting objects into contact with them; (C) By placement on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform so elevated and otherwise located as to prevent access by unqualified persons; or (D) By elevation of 2.44 m (8.0 ft) or more above the floor or other working surface. (ii) In locations where electric equipment is likely to be exposed to physical damage, enclosures or guards shall be so arranged and of such strength as to prevent such damage. (iii) Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing exposed live parts shall be marked with conspicuous warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to enter. (h) Over 600 volts, nominal General. (2) Enclosure for electrical installations. (ii) For installations other than equipment described in paragraph (h)(2)(v) of this section, a wall, screen, or fence shall be used to enclose an outdoor electrical installation to deter access by persons who are not qualified. A fence may not be less than 2.13 m (7.0 ft) in height or a combination of 1.80 m (6.0 ft) or more of fence fabric and a 305-mm (1-ft) or more extension utilizing three or more strands of barbed wire or equivalent. (iii) The following requirements apply to indoor installations that are accessible to other than qualified persons: (A) The installations shall be made with metal-enclosed equipment or shall be enclosed in a vault or in an area to which access is controlled by a lock; (B) Metal-enclosed switchgear, unit substations, transformers, pull boxes, connection boxes, and other similar associated equipment shall be marked with appropriate caution signs; and (C) Openings in ventilated dry-type transformers and similar openings in other equipment shall be designed so that foreign objects inserted through these openings will be deflected from energized parts. (iv) Outdoor electrical installations having exposed live parts shall be accessible to qualified persons only. (v) The following requirements apply to outdoor enclosed equipment accessible to unqualified employees: (A) Ventilating or similar openings in equipment shall be so designed that foreign objects inserted through these openings will be deflected from energized parts; (B) Where exposed to physical damage from vehicular traffic, suitable guards shall be provided; (C) Nonmetallic or metal-enclosed equipment located outdoors and accessible to the general public shall be designed so that exposed nuts or bolts cannot be readily removed, permitting access to live parts; (D) Where nonmetallic or metal-enclosed equipment is accessible to the general public and the bottom of the enclosure is less than 2.44 m (8.0 ft) above the floor or grade level, the enclosure door or hinged cover shall be kept locked; and (E) Except for underground box covers that weigh over 45.4 kg (100 lb), doors and covers of enclosures used solely as pull boxes, splice boxes, or junction boxes shall be locked, bolted, or screwed on. (3) Work space about equipment. (4) Entrance and access to work space. (A) On switchboard and control panels exceeding 1.83 m (6.0 ft) in width, there shall be one entrance at each end of such boards unless the location of the switchboards and control panels permits a continuous and unobstructed way of exit travel, or unless the work space required in paragraph (h)(5)(i) of this section is doubled. (B) Where one entrance to the working space is permitted under the conditions described in paragraph (h)(4)(i)(A) of this section, the entrance shall be located so that the edge of the entrance nearest the switchboards and control panels is at least the minimum clear distance given in Table S-2 away from such equipment. (C) Where bare energized parts at any voltage or insulated energized parts above 600 volts, nominal, to ground are located adjacent to such entrance, they shall be suitably guarded. (ii) Permanent ladders or stairways shall be provided to give safe access to the working space around electric equipment installed on platforms, balconies, mezzanine floors, or in attic or roof rooms or spaces. (5) Working space and guarding. (ii) If switches, cutouts, or other equipment operating at 600 volts, nominal, or less, are installed in a room or enclosure where there are exposed live parts or exposed wiring operating at over 600 volts, nominal, the high-voltage equipment shall be effectively separated from the space occupied by the low-voltage equipment by a suitable partition, fence, or screen. However, switches or other equipment operating at 600 volts, nominal, or less, and serving only equipment within the high-voltage vault, room, or enclosure may be installed in the high-voltage enclosure, room, or vault if accessible to qualified persons only. (iii) The following requirements apply to the entrances to all buildings, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 volts, nominal: (A) The entrances shall be kept locked unless they are under the observation of a qualified person at all times; and (B) Permanent and conspicuous warning signs shall be provided, reading substantially as follows: “DANGER—HIGH VOLTAGE—KEEP OUT.” (iv) Illumination shall be provided for all working spaces about electric equipment. (A) The lighting outlets shall be arranged so that persons changing lamps or making repairs on the lighting system will not be endangered by live parts or other equipment. (B) The points of control shall be located so that persons are prevented from contacting any live part or moving part of the equipment while turning on the lights. (v) Unguarded live parts above working space shall be maintained at elevations not less than specified in Table S-3. (vi) Pipes or ducts that are foreign to the electrical installation and that require periodic maintenance or whose malfunction would endanger the operation of the electrical system may not be located in the vicinity of service equipment, metal-enclosed power switchgear, or industrial control assemblies. Protection shall be provided where necessary to avoid damage from condensation leaks and breaks in such foreign systems. Note to paragraph ( h vi Piping and other facilities are not considered foreign if provided for fire protection of the electrical installation. Table S-2—Minimum Depth of Clear Working Space at Electric Equipment, Over 600 V Nominal voltage to ground Minimum clear distance for condition 2 3 Condition A Condition B Condition C m ft m ft m ft 601-2500 V 0.9 3.0 1.2 4.0 1.5 5.0 2501-9000 V 1.2 4.0 1.5 5.0 1.8 6.0 9001 V-25 kV 1.5 5.0 1.8 6.0 2.8 9.0 Over 25-75 kV 1 1.8 6.0 2.5 8.0 3.0 10.0 Above 75 kV 1 2.5 8.0 3.0 10.0 3.7 12.0 Notes to Table S-2: 1 2 Condition A—Exposed live parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded by suitable wood or other insulating material. Insulated wire or insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts. Condition B—Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. Concrete, brick, and tile walls are considered as grounded surfaces. Condition C—Exposed live parts on both sides of the work space (not guarded as provided in Condition A) with the operator between. 3 Table S-3—Elevation of Unguarded Live Parts Above Working Space Nominal voltage between phases Elevation m ft 601-7500 V 1 1 7501 V-35 kV 2.8 9.0. Over 35 kV 2.8 + 9.5 mm/kV over 35 kV 9.0 + 0.37 in./kV over 35 kV. 1 [46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981, as amended at 73 FR 64205, Oct. 29, 2008] § 1910.304 Wiring design and protection. (a) Use and identification of grounded and grounding conductors Identification of conductors. (ii) A conductor used as an equipment grounding conductor shall be identifiable and distinguishable from all other conductors. (2) Polarity of connections. (3) Use of grounding terminals and devices. (b) Branch circuits Identification of multiwire branch circuits. (2) Receptacles and cord connectors. (ii) Receptacles and cord connectors having grounding contacts shall have those contacts effectively grounded except for receptacles mounted on portable and vehicle-mounted generators in accordance with paragraph (g)(3) of this section and replacement receptacles installed in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(iv) of this section. (iii) The grounding contacts of receptacles and cord connectors shall be grounded by connection to the equipment grounding conductor of the circuit supplying the receptacle or cord connector. The branch circuit wiring method shall include or provide an equipment grounding conductor to which the grounding contacts of the receptacle or cord connector shall be connected. (iv) Replacement of receptacles shall comply with the following requirements: (A) Where a grounding means exists in the receptacle enclosure or a grounding conductor is installed, grounding-type receptacles shall be used and shall be connected to the grounding means or conductor; (B) Ground-fault circuit-interrupter protected receptacles shall be provided where replacements are made at receptacle outlets that are required to be so protected elsewhere in this subpart; and (C) Where a grounding means does not exist in the receptacle enclosure, the installation shall comply with one of the following provisions: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (v) Receptacles connected to circuits having different voltages, frequencies, or types of current (ac or dc) on the same premises shall be of such design that the attachment plugs used on these circuits are not interchangeable. (3) Ground-fault circuit interrupter protection for personnel. (ii) The following requirements apply to temporary wiring installations that are used during construction-like activities, including certain maintenance, remodeling, or repair activities, involving buildings, structures or equipment. (A) All 125-volt, single-phase,15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacle outlets that are not part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure and that are in use by personnel shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel. Note 1 to paragraph ( b ii A cord connector on an extension cord set is considered to be a receptacle outlet if the cord set is used for temporary electric power. Note 2 to paragraph ( b ii Cord sets and devices incorporating the required ground-fault circuit-interrupter that are connected to the receptacle closest to the source of power are acceptable forms of protection. (B) Receptacles other than 125 volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacles that are not part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure and that are in use by personnel shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel. (C) Where the ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection required by paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(B) of this section is not available for receptacles other than 125-volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere, the employer shall establish and implement an assured equipment grounding conductor program covering cord sets, receptacles that are not a part of the building or structure, and equipment connected by cord and plug that are available for use or used by employees on those receptacles. This program shall comply with the following requirements: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( i ( ii ( iii ( 5 ( 6 (4) Outlet devices. (i) Where connected to a branch circuit having a rating in excess of 20 amperes, lampholders shall be of the heavy-duty type. A heavy-duty lampholder shall have a rating of not less than 660 watts if of the admedium type and not less than 750 watts if of any other type; and (ii) Receptacle outlets shall comply with the following provisions: (A) A single receptacle installed on an individual branch circuit shall have an ampere rating of not less than that of the branch circuit; (B) Where connected to a branch circuit supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, a receptacle may not supply a total cord- and plug-connected load in excess of the maximum specified in Table S-4; and (C) Where connected to a branch circuit supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, receptacle ratings shall conform to the values listed in Table S-5; or, where larger than 50 amperes, the receptacle rating may not be less than the branch-circuit rating. However, receptacles of cord- and plug-connected arc welders may have ampere ratings not less than the minimum branch-circuit conductor ampacity. (5) Cord connections. Table S-4—Maximum Cord- and Plug-Connected Load to Receptacle Circuit rating Receptacle Maximum 15 or 20 15 12 20 20 16 30 30 24 Table S-5—Receptacle Ratings for Various Size Circuits Circuit rating Receptacle rating 15 Not over 15. 20 15 or 20. 30 30. 40 40 or 50. 50 50. (c) Outside conductors, 600 volts, nominal, or less. (1) Conductors on poles. (i) Power conductors below communication conductors—762 mm (30 in.); (ii) Power conductors alone or above communication conductors: (A) 300 volts or less—610 mm (24 in.), (B) Over 300 volts—762 mm (30 in.); (iii) Communication conductors below power conductors—same as power conductors; and (iv) Communications conductors alone—no requirement. (2) Clearance from ground. Table S-6—Clearances From Ground Distance Installations built before August 13, 2007 Installations built on or after August 13, 2007 Maximum voltage Conditions Voltage Conditions 3.05 m (10.0 ft) <600 V Above finished grade or sidewalks, or from any platform or projection from which they might be reached. (If these areas are accessible to other than pedestrian traffic, then one of the other conditions applies) <150 V Above finished grade or sidewalks, or from any platform or projection from which they might be reached. (If these areas are accessible to other than pedestrian traffic, then one of the other conditions applies.) 3.66 m (12.0 ft) <600 V Over areas, other than public streets, alleys, roads, and driveways, subject to vehicular traffic other than truck traffic <300 V Over residential property and driveways. Over commercial areas subject to pedestrian traffic or to vehicular traffic other than truck traffic. (This category includes conditions covered under the 3.05-m (10.0-ft) category where the voltage exceeds 150 V.) 4.57 m (15.0 ft) <600 V Over areas, other than public streets, alleys, roads, and driveways, subject to truck traffic 301 to 600 V Over residential property and driveways. Over commercial areas subject to pedestrian traffic or to vehicular traffic other than truck traffic. (This category includes conditions covered under the 3.05-m (10.0-ft) category where the voltage exceeds 300 V.) 5.49 m (18.0 ft) <600 V Over public streets, alleys, roads, and driveways <600 V Over public streets, alleys, roads, and driveways. Over commercial areas subject to truck traffic. Other land traversed by vehicles, including land used for cultivating or grazing and forests and orchards. (3) Clearance from building openings. (ii) Overhead service conductors may not be installed beneath openings through which materials may be moved, such as openings in farm and commercial buildings, and may not be installed where they will obstruct entrance to these building openings. (4) Above roofs. (i) The area above a roof surface subject to pedestrian or vehicular traffic shall have a vertical clearance from the roof surface in accordance with the clearance requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section. (ii) A reduction in clearance to 914 mm (3.0 ft) is permitted where the voltage between conductors does not exceed 300 and the roof has a slope of 102 mm (4 in.) in 305 mm (12 in.) or greater. (iii) A reduction in clearance above only the overhanging portion of the roof to not less than 457 mm (18 in.) is permitted where the voltage between conductors does not exceed 300 if: (A) The conductors do not pass above the roof overhang for a distance of more than 1.83 m (6.0 ft), 1.22 m (4.0 ft) horizontally, and (B) The conductors are terminated at a through-the-roof raceway or approved support. (iv) The requirement for maintaining a vertical clearance of 914 mm (3.0 ft) from the edge of the roof does not apply to the final conductor span, where the conductors are attached to the side of a building. (d) Location of outdoor lamps. (e) Services Disconnecting means. (ii) Each service disconnecting means shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors. (iii) Each service disconnecting means shall be suitable for the prevailing conditions. (2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. (i) Service-entrance conductors installed as open wires shall be guarded to make them accessible only to qualified persons. (ii) Signs warning of high voltage shall be posted where unqualified employees might come in contact with live parts. (f) Overcurrent protection 600 volts, nominal, or less. (i) Conductors and equipment shall be protected from overcurrent in accordance with their ability to safely conduct current. (ii) Except for motor running overload protection, overcurrent devices may not interrupt the continuity of the grounded conductor unless all conductors of the circuit are opened simultaneously. (iii) A disconnecting means shall be provided on the supply side of all fuses in circuits over 150 volts to ground and cartridge fuses in circuits of any voltage where accessible to other than qualified persons so that each individual circuit containing fuses can be independently disconnected from the source of power. However, a current-limiting device without a disconnecting means is permitted on the supply side of the service disconnecting means. In addition, a single disconnecting means is permitted on the supply side of more than one set of fuses as permitted by the exception in § 1910.305(j)(4)(vi) for group operation of motors, and a single disconnecting means is permitted for fixed electric space-heating equipment. (iv) Overcurrent devices shall be readily accessible to each employee or authorized building management personnel. These overcurrent devices may not be located where they will be exposed to physical damage or in the vicinity of easily ignitable material. (v) Fuses and circuit breakers shall be so located or shielded that employees will not be burned or otherwise injured by their operation. Handles or levers of circuit breakers, and similar parts that may move suddenly in such a way that persons in the vicinity are likely to be injured by being struck by them, shall be guarded or isolated. (vi) Circuit breakers shall clearly indicate whether they are in the open (off) or closed (on) position. (vii) Where circuit breaker handles on switchboards are operated vertically rather than horizontally or rotationally, the up position of the handle shall be the closed (on) position. (viii) Circuit breakers used as switches in 120-volt and 277-volt, fluorescent lighting circuits shall be listed and marked “SWD.” (ix) A circuit breaker with a straight voltage rating, such as 240 V or 480 V, may only be installed in a circuit in which the nominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed the circuit breaker's voltage rating. A two-pole circuit breaker may not be used for protecting a 3-phase, corner-grounded delta circuit unless the circuit breaker is marked 1Φ—3Φ to indicate such suitability. A circuit breaker with a slash rating, such as 120/240 V or 480Y/277 V, may only be installed in a circuit where the nominal voltage of any conductor to ground does not exceed the lower of the two values of the circuit breaker's voltage rating and the nominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed the higher value of the circuit breaker's voltage rating. (2) Feeders and branch circuits over 600 volts, nominal. (i) Feeder and branch-circuit conductors shall have overcurrent protection in each ungrounded conductor located at the point where the conductor receives its supply or at a location in the circuit determined under engineering supervision; (A) Circuit breakers used for overcurrent protection of three-phase circuits shall have a minimum of three overcurrent relays operated from three current transformers. On three-phase, three-wire circuits, an overcurrent relay in the residual circuit of the current transformers may replace one of the phase relays. An overcurrent relay, operated from a current transformer that links all phases of a three-phase, three-wire circuit, may replace the residual relay and one other phase-conductor current transformer. Where the neutral is not grounded on the load side of the circuit, the current transformer may link all three phase conductors and the grounded circuit conductor (neutral); and (B) If fuses are used for overcurrent protection, a fuse shall be connected in series with each ungrounded conductor; (ii) Each protective device shall be capable of detecting and interrupting all values of current that can occur at its location in excess of its trip setting or melting point; (iii) The operating time of the protective device, the available short-circuit current, and the conductor used shall be coordinated to prevent damaging or dangerous temperatures in conductors or conductor insulation under short-circuit conditions; and (iv) The following additional requirements apply to feeders only: (A) The continuous ampere rating of a fuse may not exceed three times the ampacity of the conductors. The long-time trip element setting of a breaker or the minimum trip setting of an electronically actuated fuse may not exceed six times the ampacity of the conductor. For fire pumps, conductors may be protected for short circuit only; and (B) Conductors tapped to a feeder may be protected by the feeder overcurrent device where that overcurrent device also protects the tap conductor. (g) Grounding. (1) Systems to be grounded. (i) All 3-wire dc systems shall have their neutral conductor grounded; (ii) Two-wire dc systems operating at over 50 volts through 300 volts between conductors shall be grounded unless: (A) They supply only industrial equipment in limited areas and are equipped with a ground detector; (B) They are rectifier-derived from an ac system complying with paragraphs (g)(1)(iii), (g)(1)(iv), and (g)(1)(v) of this section; or (C) They are fire-alarm circuits having a maximum current of 0.030 amperes; (iii) AC circuits of less than 50 volts shall be grounded if they are installed as overhead conductors outside of buildings or if they are supplied by transformers and the transformer primary supply system is ungrounded or exceeds 150 volts to ground; (iv) AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts shall be grounded under any of the following conditions, unless exempted by paragraph (g)(1)(v) of this section: (A) If the system can be so grounded that the maximum voltage to ground on the ungrounded conductors does not exceed 150 volts; (B) If the system is nominally rated three-phase, four-wire wye connected in which the neutral is used as a circuit conductor; (C) If the system is nominally rated three-phase, four-wire delta connected in which the midpoint of one phase is used as a circuit conductor; or (D) If a service conductor is uninsulated; (v) AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts are not required to be grounded under any of the following conditions: (A) If the system is used exclusively to supply industrial electric furnaces for melting, refining, tempering, and the like; (B) If the system is separately derived and is used exclusively for rectifiers supplying only adjustable speed industrial drives; (C) If the system is separately derived and is supplied by a transformer that has a primary voltage rating less than 1000 volts, provided all of the following conditions are met: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (D) If the system is an isolated power system that supplies circuits in health care facilities; or (E) If the system is a high-impedance grounded neutral system in which a grounding impedance, usually a resistor, limits the ground-fault current to a low value for 3-phase ac systems of 480 volts to 1000 volts provided all of the following conditions are met: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (2) Conductor to be grounded. (i) One conductor of a single-phase, two-wire system shall be grounded; (ii) The neutral conductor of a single-phase, three-wire system shall be grounded; (iii) The common conductor of a multiphase system having one wire common to all phases shall be grounded; (iv) One phase conductor of a multiphase system where one phase is grounded shall be grounded; and (v) The neutral conductor of a multiphase system in which one phase is used as a neutral conductor shall be grounded. (3) Portable and vehicle-mounted generators. (A) The generator supplies only equipment mounted on the generator or cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on the generator, or both; and (B) The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment and the equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are bonded to the generator frame. (ii) The frame of a vehicle need not be grounded and may serve as the grounding electrode for a system supplied by a generator located on the vehicle under the following conditions: (A) The frame of the generator is bonded to the vehicle frame; (B) The generator supplies only equipment located on the vehicle and cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on the vehicle; (C) The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment and the equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are bonded to the generator frame; and (D) The system complies with all other provisions of paragraph (g) of this section. (iii) A system conductor that is required to be grounded by the provisions of paragraph (g)(2) of this section shall be bonded to the generator frame where the generator is a component of a separately derived system. (4) Grounding connections. (ii) For an ungrounded service-supplied system, the equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode conductor at the service equipment. For an ungrounded separately derived system, the equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode conductor at, or ahead of, the system disconnecting means or overcurrent devices. (iii) On extensions of existing branch circuits that do not have an equipment grounding conductor, grounding-type receptacles may be grounded to a grounded cold water pipe near the equipment if the extension was installed before August 13, 2007. When any element of this branch circuit is replaced, the entire branch circuit shall use an equipment grounding conductor that complies with all other provisions of paragraph (g) of this section. (5) Grounding path. (6) Supports, enclosures, and equipment to be grounded. (A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves that are used to protect cable assemblies from physical damage need not be grounded; and (B) Metal enclosures for conductors added to existing installations of open wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable need not be grounded if all of the following conditions are met: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (ii) Metal enclosures for service equipment shall be grounded. (iii) Frames of electric ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, clothes dryers, and metal outlet or junction boxes that are part of the circuit for these appliances shall be grounded. (iv) Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment that may become energized shall be grounded under any of the following conditions: (A) If within 2.44 m (8 ft) vertically or 1.52 m (5 ft) horizontally of ground or grounded metal objects and subject to employee contact; (B) If located in a wet or damp location and not isolated; (C) If in electrical contact with metal; (D) If in a hazardous (classified) location; (E) If supplied by a metal-clad, metal-sheathed, or grounded metal raceway wiring method; or (F) If equipment operates with any terminal at over 150 volts to ground. (v) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (g)(6)(iv) of this section, exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of the following types of fixed equipment need not be grounded: (A) Enclosures for switches or circuit breakers used for other than service equipment and accessible to qualified persons only; (B) Electrically heated appliances that are permanently and effectively insulated from ground; (C) Distribution apparatus, such as transformer and capacitor cases, mounted on wooden poles, at a height exceeding 2.44 m (8.0 ft) above ground or grade level; and (D) Listed equipment protected by a system of double insulation, or its equivalent, and distinctively marked as such. (vi) Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of cord- and plug-connected equipment that may become energized shall be grounded under any of the following conditions: (A) If in hazardous (classified) locations (see § 1910.307); (B) If operated at over 150 volts to ground, except for guarded motors and metal frames of electrically heated appliances if the appliance frames are permanently and effectively insulated from ground; (C) If the equipment is of the following types: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 ( 7 ( 8 (vii) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (g)(6)(vi) of this section, the following equipment need not be grounded: (A) Tools likely to be used in wet and conductive locations if supplied through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary of not over 50 volts; and (B) Listed or labeled portable tools and appliances if protected by an approved system of double insulation, or its equivalent, and distinctively marked. (7) Nonelectrical equipment. (8) Methods of grounding fixed equipment. (ii) Electric equipment is considered to be effectively grounded if it is secured to, and in electrical contact with, a metal rack or structure that is provided for its support and the metal rack or structure is grounded by the method specified for the noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment in paragraph (g)(8)(i) of this section. Metal car frames supported by metal hoisting cables attached to or running over metal sheaves or drums of grounded elevator machines are also considered to be effectively grounded. (iii) For installations made before April 16, 1981, electric equipment is also considered to be effectively grounded if it is secured to, and in metallic contact with, the grounded structural metal frame of a building. When any element of this branch circuit is replaced, the entire branch circuit shall use an equipment grounding conductor that complies with all other provisions of paragraph (g) of this section. (9) Grounding of systems and circuits of 1000 volts and over (high voltage). (i) Systems supplying portable or mobile high voltage equipment, other than substations installed on a temporary basis, shall comply with the following: (A) The system shall have its neutral grounded through an impedance. If a delta-connected high voltage system is used to supply the equipment, a system neutral shall be derived. (B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of portable and mobile equipment shall be connected by an equipment grounding conductor to the point at which the system neutral impedance is grounded. (C) Ground-fault detection and relaying shall be provided to automatically deenergize any high voltage system component that has developed a ground fault. The continuity of the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuously monitored so as to deenergize automatically the high voltage feeder to the portable equipment upon loss of continuity of the equipment grounding conductor. (D) The grounding electrode to which the portable equipment system neutral impedance is connected shall be isolated from and separated in the ground by at least 6.1 m (20.0 ft) from any other system or equipment grounding electrode, and there shall be no direct connection between the grounding electrodes, such as buried pipe, fence, and so forth. (ii) All noncurrent-carrying metal parts of portable equipment and fixed equipment, including their associated fences, housings, enclosures, and supporting structures, shall be grounded. However, equipment that is guarded by location and isolated from ground need not be grounded. Additionally, pole-mounted distribution apparatus at a height exceeding 2.44 m (8.0 ft) above ground or grade level need not be grounded. [46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981, as amended at 73 FR 64205, Oct. 29, 2008] § 1910.305 Wiring methods, components, and equipment for general use. (a) Wiring methods. (1) General requirements. (ii) Where necessary for the reduction of electrical noise (electromagnetic interference) of the grounding circuit, an equipment enclosure supplied by a branch circuit may be isolated from a raceway containing circuits supplying only that equipment by one or more listed nonmetallic raceway fittings located at the point of attachment of the raceway to the equipment enclosure. The metal raceway shall be supplemented by an internal insulated equipment grounding conductor installed to ground the equipment enclosure. (iii) No wiring systems of any type may be installed in ducts used to transport dust, loose stock, or flammable vapors. No wiring system of any type may be installed in any duct used for vapor removal or for ventilation of commercial-type cooking equipment, or in any shaft containing only such ducts. (2) Temporary wiring. (i) Temporary electrical power and lighting installations of 600 volts, nominal, or less may be used only as follows: (A) During and for remodeling, maintenance, or repair of buildings, structures, or equipment, and similar activities; (B) For a period not to exceed 90 days for Christmas decorative lighting, carnivals, and similar purposes; or (C) For experimental or development work, and during emergencies. (ii) Temporary wiring shall be removed immediately upon completion of the project or purpose for which the wiring was installed. (iii) Temporary electrical installations of more than 600 volts may be used only during periods of tests, experiments, emergencies, or construction-like activities. (iv) The following requirements apply to feeders: (A) Feeders shall originate in an approved distribution center. (B) Conductors shall be run as multiconductor cord or cable assemblies. However, if installed as permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C) of this section, and if accessible only to qualified persons, feeders may be run as single insulated conductors. (v) The following requirements apply to branch circuits: (A) Branch circuits shall originate in an approved power outlet or panelboard. (B) Conductors shall be multiconductor cord or cable assemblies or open conductors. If run as open conductors, they shall be fastened at ceiling height every 3.05 m (10.0 ft). (C) No branch-circuit conductor may be laid on the floor. (D) Each branch circuit that supplies receptacles or fixed equipment shall contain a separate equipment grounding conductor if run as open conductors. (vi) Receptacles shall be of the grounding type. Unless installed in a continuous grounded metallic raceway or metallic covered cable, each branch circuit shall contain a separate equipment grounding conductor and all receptacles shall be electrically connected to the grounding conductor. (vii) No bare conductors nor earth returns may be used for the wiring of any temporary circuit. (viii) Suitable disconnecting switches or plug connectors shall be installed to permit the disconnection of all ungrounded conductors of each temporary circuit. Multiwire branch circuits shall be provided with a means to disconnect simultaneously all ungrounded conductors at the power outlet or panelboard where the branch circuit originated. Note to paragraph ( a viii Circuit breakers with their handles connected by approved handle ties are considered a single disconnecting means for the purpose of this requirement. (ix) All lamps for general illumination shall be protected from accidental contact or breakage by a suitable fixture or lampholder with a guard. Brass shell, paper-lined sockets, or other metal-cased sockets may not be used unless the shell is grounded. (x) Flexible cords and cables shall be protected from accidental damage, as might be caused, for example, by sharp corners, projections, and doorways or other pinch points. (xi) Cable assemblies and flexible cords and cables shall be supported in place at intervals that ensure that they will be protected from physical damage. Support shall be in the form of staples, cables ties, straps, or similar type fittings installed so as not to cause damage. (3) Cable trays. (ii) In industrial establishments where conditions of maintenance and supervision assure that only qualified persons will service the installed cable tray system, the following cables may also be installed in ladder, ventilated-trough, or ventilated-channel cable trays: (A) Single conductor cable; the cable shall be No. 1/0 or larger and shall be of a type listed and marked on the surface for use in cable trays; where Nos. 1/0 through 4/0 single conductor cables are installed in ladder cable tray, the maximum allowable rung spacing for the ladder cable tray shall be 229 mm (9 in.); where exposed to direct rays of the sun, cables shall be identified as being sunlight resistant; (B) Welding cables installed in dedicated cable trays; (C) Single conductors used as equipment grounding conductors; these conductors, which may be insulated, covered, or bare, shall be No. 4 or larger; and (D) Multiconductor cable, Type MV; where exposed to direct rays of the sun, the cable shall be identified as being sunlight resistant. (iii) Metallic cable trays may be used as equipment grounding conductors only where continuous maintenance and supervision ensure that qualified persons will service the installed cable tray system. (iv) Cable trays in hazardous (classified) locations may contain only the cable types permitted in such locations. (See § 1910.307.) (v) Cable tray systems may not be used in hoistways or where subjected to severe physical damage. (4) Open wiring on insulators. (ii) Conductors smaller than No. 8 shall be rigidly supported on noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating materials and may not contact any other objects. Supports shall be installed as follows: (A) Within 152 mm (6 in.) from a tap or splice; (B) Within 305 mm (12 in.) of a dead-end connection to a lampholder or receptacle; and (C) At intervals not exceeding 1.37 m (4.5 ft), and at closer intervals sufficient to provide adequate support where likely to be disturbed. (iii) In dry locations, where not exposed to severe physical damage, conductors may be separately enclosed in flexible nonmetallic tubing. The tubing shall be in continuous lengths not exceeding 4.57 m (15.0 ft) and secured to the surface by straps at intervals not exceeding 1.37 m (4.5 ft). (iv) Open conductors shall be separated from contact with walls, floors, wood cross members, or partitions through which they pass by tubes or bushings of noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating material. If the bushing is shorter than the hole, a waterproof sleeve of nonconductive material shall be inserted in the hole and an insulating bushing slipped into the sleeve at each end in such a manner as to keep the conductors absolutely out of contact with the sleeve. Each conductor shall be carried through a separate tube or sleeve. (v) Where open conductors cross ceiling joints and wall studs and are exposed to physical damage (for example, located within 2.13 m (7.0 ft) of the floor), they shall be protected. (b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or fittings. (ii) Unused openings in cabinets, boxes, and fittings shall be effectively closed. (iii) Where cable is used, each cable shall be secured to the cabinet, cutout box, or meter socket enclosure. However, where cable with an entirely nonmetallic sheath enters the top of a surface-mounted enclosure through one or more nonflexible raceways not less than 457 mm (18 in.) or more than 3.05 m (10.0 ft) in length, the cable need not be secured to the cabinet, box, or enclosure provided all of the following conditions are met: (A) Each cable is fastened within 305 mm (12 in.) of the outer end of the raceway, measured along the sheath; (B) The raceway extends directly above the enclosure and does not penetrate a structural ceiling; (C) A fitting is provided on each end of the raceway to protect the cable from abrasion, and the fittings remain accessible after installation; (D) The raceway is sealed or plugged at the outer end using approved means so as to prevent access to the enclosure through the raceway; (E) The cable sheath is continuous through the raceway and extends into the enclosure not less than 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) beyond the fitting; (F) The raceway is fastened at its outer end and at other points as necessary; and (G) Where installed as conduit or tubing, the allowable cable fill does not exceed that permitted for complete conduit or tubing systems. (2) Covers and canopies. (ii) Where a fixture canopy or pan is used, any combustible wall or ceiling finish exposed between the edge of the canopy or pan and the outlet box shall be covered with noncombustible material. (3) Pull and junction boxes for systems over 600 volts, nominal. (i) Boxes shall provide a complete enclosure for the contained conductors or cables. (ii) Boxes shall be closed by suitable covers securely fastened in place. Note to paragraph ( b ii Underground box covers that weigh over 45.4 kg (100 lbs) meet this requirement. (iii) Covers for boxes shall be permanently marked “HIGH VOLTAGE.” The marking shall be on the outside of the box cover and shall be readily visible and legible. (c) Switches Single-throw knife switches. (2) Double-throw knife switches. (3) Connection of switches. (ii) Single-throw knife switches, molded-case switches, switches with butt contacts, and circuit breakers used as switches shall be connected so that the terminals supplying the load are deenergized when the switch is in the open position. However, blades and terminals supplying the load of a switch may be energized when the switch is in the open position where the switch is connected to circuits or equipment inherently capable of providing a backfeed source of power. For such installations, a permanent sign shall be installed on the switch enclosure or immediately adjacent to open switches that read, “WARNING—LOAD SIDE TERMINALS MAY BE ENERGIZED BY BACKFEED.” (4) Faceplates for flush-mounted snap switches. (5) Grounding. (d) Switchboards and panelboards Switchboards with exposed live parts. (2) Panelboard enclosures. (3) Knife switches mounted in switchboards or panelboards. (e) Enclosures for damp or wet locations Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes, and panelboard enclosures. (2) Switches, circuit breakers, and switchboards. (f) Conductors for general wiring Insulation. (2) Type. (3) Distinguishable. (g) Flexible cords and cables Use of flexible cords and cables. (ii) Flexible cords and cables may be used only for: (A) Pendants; (B) Wiring of fixtures; (C) Connection of portable lamps or appliances; (D) Portable and mobile signs; (E) Elevator cables; (F) Wiring of cranes and hoists; (G) Connection of stationary equipment to facilitate their frequent interchange; (H) Prevention of the transmission of noise or vibration; (I) Appliances where the fastening means and mechanical connections are designed to permit removal for maintenance and repair; (J) Data processing cables approved as a part of the data processing system; (K) Connection of moving parts; and (L) Temporary wiring as permitted in paragraph (a)(2) of this section. (iii) If used as permitted in paragraphs (g)(1)(ii)(C), (g)(1)(ii)(G), or (g)(1)(ii)(I) of this section, the flexible cord shall be equipped with an attachment plug and shall be energized from an approved receptacle outlet. (iv) Unless specifically permitted otherwise in paragraph (g)(1)(ii) of this section, flexible cords and cables may not be used: (A) As a substitute for the fixed wiring of a structure; (B) Where run through holes in walls, ceilings, or floors; (C) Where run through doorways, windows, or similar openings; (D) Where attached to building surfaces; (E) Where concealed behind building walls, ceilings, or floors; or (F) Where installed in raceways, except as otherwise permitted in this subpart. (v) Flexible cords used in show windows and showcases shall be Type S, SE, SEO, SEOO, SJ, SJE, SJEO, SJEOO, SJO, SJOO, SJT, SJTO, SJTOO, SO, SOO, ST, STO, or STOO, except for the wiring of chain-supported lighting fixtures and supply cords for portable lamps and other merchandise being displayed or exhibited. (2) Identification, splices, and terminations. (ii) Flexible cords may be used only in continuous lengths without splice or tap. Hard-service cord and junior hard-service cord No. 14 and larger may be repaired if spliced so that the splice retains the insulation, outer sheath properties, and usage characteristics of the cord being spliced. (iii) Flexible cords and cables shall be connected to devices and fittings so that strain relief is provided that will prevent pull from being directly transmitted to joints or terminal screws. (h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nominal. (1) Conductor construction. (2) Shielding. (3) Equipment grounding conductors. (4) Grounding shields. (5) Minimum bending radii. (6) Fittings. (7) Splices. (8) Terminations. (i) Fixture wires General. (2) Uses permitted. (i) For installation in lighting fixtures and in similar equipment where enclosed or protected and not subject to bending or twisting in use; or (ii) For connecting lighting fixtures to the branch-circuit conductors supplying the fixtures. (3) Uses not permitted. (j) Equipment for general use Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps, and receptacles. (ii) Handlamps of the portable type supplied through flexible cords shall be equipped with a handle of molded composition or other material identified for the purpose, and a substantial guard shall be attached to the lampholder or the handle. Metal shell, paper-lined lampholders may not be used. (iii) Lampholders of the screw-shell type shall be installed for use as lampholders only. Where supplied by a circuit having a grounded conductor, the grounded conductor shall be connected to the screw shell. Lampholders installed in wet or damp locations shall be of the weatherproof type. (iv) Fixtures installed in wet or damp locations shall be identified for the purpose and shall be so constructed or installed that water cannot enter or accumulate in wireways, lampholders, or other electrical parts. (2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs (caps). (ii) Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs shall be constructed so that no receptacle or cord connector will accept an attachment plug with a different voltage or current rating than that for which the device is intended. However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle or cord connector may accept a 15-ampere attachment plug of the same voltage rating. (iii) Nongrounding-type receptacles and connectors may not be used for grounding-type attachment plugs. (iv) A receptacle installed in a wet or damp location shall be suitable for the location. (v) A receptacle installed outdoors in a location protected from the weather or in other damp locations shall have an enclosure for the receptacle that is weatherproof when the receptacle is covered (attachment plug cap not inserted and receptacle covers closed). Note to paragraph ( j v A receptacle is considered to be in a location protected from the weather when it is located under roofed open porches, canopies, marquees, or the like and where it will not be subjected to a beating rain or water runoff. (vi) A receptacle installed in a wet location where the product intended to be plugged into it is not attended while in use (for example, sprinkler system controllers, landscape lighting, and holiday lights) shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof with the attachment plug cap inserted or removed. (vii) A receptacle installed in a wet location where the product intended to be plugged into it will be attended while in use (for example, portable tools) shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof when the attachment plug cap is removed. (3) Appliances. (ii) Each appliance shall have a means to disconnect it from all ungrounded conductors. If an appliance is supplied by more than one source, the disconnecting means shall be grouped and identified. (iii) Each electric appliance shall be provided with a nameplate giving the identifying name and the rating in volts and amperes, or in volts and watts. If the appliance is to be used on a specific frequency or frequencies, it shall be so marked. Where motor overload protection external to the appliance is required, the appliance shall be so marked. (iv) Marking shall be located so as to be visible or easily accessible after installation. (4) Motors. (i) If specified in paragraph (j)(4) of this section that one piece of equipment shall be “within sight of” another piece of equipment, the piece of equipment shall be visible and not more than 15.24 m (50.0 ft) from the other. (ii) An individual disconnecting means shall be provided for each controller. A disconnecting means shall be located within sight of the controller location. However, a single disconnecting means may be located adjacent to a group of coordinated controllers mounted adjacent to each other on a multi-motor continuous process machine. The controller disconnecting means for motor branch circuits over 600 volts, nominal, may be out of sight of the controller, if the controller is marked with a warning label giving the location and identification of the disconnecting means that is to be locked in the open position. (iii) The disconnecting means shall disconnect the motor and the controller from all ungrounded supply conductors and shall be so designed that no pole can be operated independently. (iv) The disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the open (off) or closed (on) position. (v) The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible. If more than one disconnect is provided for the same equipment, only one need be readily accessible. (vi) An individual disconnecting means shall be provided for each motor, but a single disconnecting means may be used for a group of motors under any one of the following conditions: (A) If a number of motors drive several parts of a single machine or piece of apparatus, such as a metal or woodworking machine, crane, or hoist; (B) If a group of motors is under the protection of one set of branch-circuit protective devices; or (C) If a group of motors is in a single room within sight of the location of the disconnecting means. (vii) Motors, motor-control apparatus, and motor branch-circuit conductors shall be protected against overheating due to motor overloads or failure to start, and against short-circuits or ground faults. These provisions do not require overload protection that will stop a motor where a shutdown is likely to introduce additional or increased hazards, as in the case of fire pumps, or where continued operation of a motor is necessary for a safe shutdown of equipment or process and motor overload sensing devices are connected to a supervised alarm. (viii) Where live parts of motors or controllers operating at over 150 volts to ground are guarded against accidental contact only by location, and where adjustment or other attendance may be necessary during the operation of the apparatus, suitable insulating mats or platforms shall be provided so that the attendant cannot readily touch live parts unless standing on the mats or platforms. (5) Transformers. (A) Current transformers; (B) Dry-type transformers installed as a component part of other apparatus; (C) Transformers that are an integral part of an X-ray, high frequency, or electrostatic-coating apparatus; (D) Transformers used with Class 2 and Class 3 circuits, sign and outline lighting, electric discharge lighting, and power-limited fire-alarm circuits; and (E) Liquid-filled or dry-type transformers used for research, development, or testing, where effective safeguard arrangements are provided. (ii) The operating voltage of exposed live parts of transformer installations shall be indicated by signs or visible markings on the equipment or structure. (iii) Dry-type, high fire point liquid-insulated, and askarel-insulated transformers installed indoors and rated over 35kV shall be in a vault. (iv) Oil-insulated transformers installed indoors shall be installed in a vault. (v) Combustible material, combustible buildings and parts of buildings, fire escapes, and door and window openings shall be safeguarded from fires that may originate in oil-insulated transformers attached to or adjacent to a building or combustible material. (vi) Transformer vaults shall be constructed so as to contain fire and combustible liquids within the vault and to prevent unauthorized access. Locks and latches shall be so arranged that a vault door can be readily opened from the inside. (vii) Any pipe or duct system foreign to the electrical installation may not enter or pass through a transformer vault. Note to paragraph ( j vii Piping or other facilities provided for vault fire protection, or for transformer cooling, are not considered foreign to the electrical installation. (viii) Material may not be stored in transformer vaults. (6) Capacitors. (ii) The following requirements apply to capacitors installed on circuits operating at more than 600 volts, nominal: (A) Group-operated switches shall be used for capacitor switching and shall be capable of the following: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (B) A means shall be installed to isolate from all sources of voltage each capacitor, capacitor bank, or capacitor installation that will be removed from service as a unit. The isolating means shall provide a visible gap in the electric circuit adequate for the operating voltage; (C) Isolating or disconnecting switches (with no interrupting rating) shall be interlocked with the load interrupting device or shall be provided with prominently displayed caution signs to prevent switching load current; and (D) For series capacitors, the proper switching shall be assured by use of at least one of the following: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (7) Storage Batteries. § 1910.306 Specific purpose equipment and installations. (a) Electric signs and outline lighting Disconnecting means. (ii) Signs and outline lighting systems located within fountains shall have the disconnect located at least 1.52 m (5.0 ft) from the inside walls of the fountain. (2) Location. (ii) Signs or outline lighting systems operated by electronic or electromechanical controllers located external to the sign or outline lighting system may have a disconnecting means located within sight of the controller or in the same enclosure with the controller. The disconnecting means shall disconnect the sign or outline lighting system and the controller from all ungrounded supply conductors. It shall be designed so no pole can be operated independently and shall be capable of being locked in the open position. (iii) Doors or covers giving access to uninsulated parts of indoor signs or outline lighting exceeding 600 volts and accessible to other than qualified persons shall either be provided with interlock switches to disconnect the primary circuit or shall be so fastened that the use of other than ordinary tools will be necessary to open them. (b) Cranes and hoists. (1) Disconnecting means for runway conductors. (i) Readily accessible and operable from the ground or floor level; (ii) Arranged to be locked in the open position; and (iii) Placed within view of the runway contact conductors. (2) Disconnecting means for cranes and monorail hoists. (ii) The disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the open position. (iii) Means shall be provided at the operating station to open the power circuit to all motors of the crane or monorail hoist where the disconnecting means is not readily accessible from the crane or monorail hoist operating station. (iv) The disconnecting means may be omitted where a monorail hoist or hand-propelled crane bridge installation meets all of the following conditions: (A) The unit is controlled from the ground or floor level; (B) The unit is within view of the power supply disconnecting means; and (C) No fixed work platform has been provided for servicing the unit. (3) Limit switch. (4) Clearance. (c) Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts. (1) Disconnecting means. (2) Control panels. (3) Type. (4) Operation. (5) Location. (i) On elevators without generator field control, the disconnecting means shall be located within sight of the motor controller. Driving machines or motion and operation controllers not within sight of the disconnecting means shall be provided with a manually operated switch installed in the control circuit adjacent to the equipment in order to prevent starting. Where the driving machine is located in a remote machinery space, a single disconnecting means for disconnecting all ungrounded main power supply conductors shall be provided and be capable of being locked in the open position. (ii) On elevators with generator field control, the disconnecting means shall be located within sight of the motor controller for the driving motor of the motor-generator set. Driving machines, motor-generator sets, or motion and operation controllers not within sight of the disconnecting means shall be provided with a manually operated switch installed in the control circuit to prevent starting. The manually operated switch shall be installed adjacent to this equipment. Where the driving machine or the motor-generator set is located in a remote machinery space, a single means for disconnecting all ungrounded main power supply conductors shall be provided and be capable of being locked in the open position. (iii) On escalators and moving walks, the disconnecting means shall be installed in the space where the controller is located. (iv) On wheelchair lifts and stairway chair lifts, the disconnecting means shall be located within sight of the motor controller. (6) Identification and signs. (ii) The disconnecting means shall be provided with a sign to identify the location of the supply-side overcurrent protective device. (7) Single-car and multicar installations. (8) Warning sign for multiple disconnecting means. (9) Interconnection between multicar controllers. (10) Motor controllers. (d) Electric welders—disconnecting means Arc welders. (2) Resistance welders. (e) Information technology equipment Disconnecting means. (2) Grouping. (3) Exception. (f) X-Ray equipment. (1) Disconnecting means. (ii) If more than one piece of equipment is operated from the same high-voltage circuit, each piece or each group of equipment as a unit shall be provided with a high-voltage switch or equivalent disconnecting means. The disconnecting means shall be constructed, enclosed, or located so as to avoid contact by employees with its live parts. (2) Control. (i) Radiographic and fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be effectively enclosed or shall have interlocks that deenergize the equipment automatically to prevent ready access to live current-carrying parts. (ii) Diffraction- and irradiation-type equipment shall have a pilot light, readable meter deflection, or equivalent means to indicate when the equipment is energized, unless the equipment or installation is effectively enclosed or is provided with interlocks to prevent access to live current-carrying parts during operation. (g) Induction and dielectric heating equipment. (1) Guarding and grounding. (ii) All panel controls shall be of dead-front construction. (iii) Doors or detachable panels shall be employed for internal access. Where doors are used giving access to voltages from 500 to 1000 volts ac or dc, either door locks shall be provided or interlocks shall be installed. Where doors are used giving access to voltages of over 1000 volts ac or dc, either mechanical lockouts with a disconnecting means to prevent access until circuit parts within the cubicle are deenergized, or both door interlocking and mechanical door locks, shall be provided. Detachable panels not normally used for access to such parts shall be fastened in a manner that will make them difficult to remove (for example, by requiring the use of tools). (iv) Warning labels or signs that read “DANGER—HIGH VOLTAGE—KEEP OUT” shall be attached to the equipment and shall be plainly visible where persons might contact energized parts when doors are opened or closed or when panels are removed from compartments containing over 250 volts ac or dc. (v) Induction and dielectric heating equipment shall be protected as follows: (A) Protective cages or adequate shielding shall be used to guard work applicators other than induction heating coils. (B) Induction heating coils shall be protected by insulation or refractory materials or both. (C) Interlock switches shall be used on all hinged access doors, sliding panels, or other such means of access to the applicator, unless the applicator is an induction heating coil at dc ground potential or operating at less than 150 volts ac. (D) Interlock switches shall be connected in such a manner as to remove all power from the applicator when any one of the access doors or panels is open. (vi) A readily accessible disconnecting means shall be provided by which each heating equipment can be isolated from its supply circuit. The ampere rating of this disconnecting means may not be less than the nameplate current rating of the equipment. The supply circuit disconnecting means is permitted as a heating equipment disconnecting means where the circuit supplies only one piece of equipment. (2) Remote control. (ii) Switches operated by foot pressure shall be provided with a shield over the contact button to avoid accidental closing of the switch. (h) Electrolytic cells. (1) Application. (i) Overcurrent protection of electrolytic cell dc process power circuits need not comply with the requirements of § 1910.304(f); (ii) Equipment located or used within the cell line working zone or associated with the cell line dc power circuits need not comply with the provisions of § 1910.304(g); and (iii) Electrolytic cells, cell line conductors, cell line attachments, and the wiring of auxiliary equipment and devices within the cell line working zone need not comply with the provisions of § 1910.303 or § 1910.304(b) and (c). (2) Disconnecting means. (3) Portable electric equipment. (ii) Ungrounded portable electric equipment shall be distinctively marked and shall employ plugs and receptacles of a configuration that prevents connection of this equipment to grounding receptacles and that prevents inadvertent interchange of ungrounded and grounded portable electric equipment. (4) Power supply circuits and receptacles for portable electric equipment. (A) The circuits shall be electrically isolated from any distribution system supplying areas other than the cell line working zone and shall be ungrounded; (B) The circuits shall be supplied through isolating transformers with primaries operating at not more than 600 volts between conductors and protected with proper overcurrent protection; (C) The secondary voltage of the isolating transformers may not exceed 300 volts between conductors; and (D) All circuits supplied from the secondaries shall be ungrounded and shall have an approved overcurrent device of proper rating in each conductor. (ii) Receptacles and their mating plugs for ungrounded equipment may not have provision for a grounding conductor and shall be of a configuration that prevents their use for equipment required to be grounded. (iii) Receptacles on circuits supplied by an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary: (A) Shall have a distinctive configuration; (B) Shall be distinctively marked; and (C) May not be used in any other location in the facility. (5) Fixed and portable electric equipment. (A) AC systems supplying fixed and portable electric equipment within the cell line working zone; and (B) Exposed conductive surfaces, such as electric equipment housings, cabinets, boxes, motors, raceways and the like that are within the cell line working zone. (ii) Auxiliary electric equipment, such as motors, transducers, sensors, control devices, and alarms, mounted on an electrolytic cell or other energized surface shall be connected to the premises wiring systems by any of the following means: (A) Multiconductor hard usage or extra hard usage flexible cord; (B) Wire or cable in suitable nonmetallic raceways or cable trays; or (C) Wire or cable in suitable metal raceways or metal cable trays installed with insulating breaks such that they will not cause a potentially hazardous electrical condition. (iii) Fixed electric equipment may be bonded to the energized conductive surfaces of the cell line, its attachments, or auxiliaries. If fixed electric equipment is mounted on an energized conductive surface, it shall be bonded to that surface. (6) Auxiliary nonelectrical connections. (7) Cranes and hoists. (ii) Remote crane or hoist controls that may introduce hazardous electrical conditions into the cell line working zone shall employ one or more of the following systems: (A) Isolated and ungrounded control circuit; (B) Nonconductive rope operator; (C) Pendant pushbutton with nonconductive supporting means and with nonconductive surfaces or ungrounded exposed conductive surfaces; or (D) Radio. (i) Electrically driven or controlled irrigation machines Lightning protection. (2) Disconnecting means. (ii) The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible and capable of being locked in the open position. (iii) A disconnecting means shall be provided for each motor and controller. (j) Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations. (1) Receptacles. (ii) Receptacles that are located within 4.57 m (15 ft), or 6.08 m (20 ft) if the installation was built after August 13, 2007, of the inside walls of the pool shall be protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters. (iii) Where a pool is installed permanently at a dwelling unit, at least one 125-volt, 15- or 20-ampere receptacle on a general-purpose branch circuit shall be located a minimum of 3.05 m (10 ft) and not more than 6.08 m (20 ft) from the inside wall of the pool. This receptacle shall be located not more than 1.98 m (6.5 ft) above the floor, platform, or grade level serving the pool. Note to paragraph ( j In determining these dimensions, the distance to be measured is the shortest path the supply cord of an appliance connected to the receptacle would follow without piercing a floor, wall, or ceiling of a building or other effective permanent barrier. (2) Lighting fixtures, lighting outlets, and ceiling suspended (paddle) fans. (ii) Lighting fixtures and lighting outlets installed in the area extending between 1.52 m (5 ft) and 3.05 m (10 ft) horizontally from the inside walls of a pool shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter unless installed 1.52 m (5 ft) above the maximum water level and rigidly attached to the structure adjacent to or enclosing the pool. (3) Cord- and plug-connected equipment. (i) Cord- and plug-connected lighting fixtures installed within 4.88 m (16 ft) of the water surface of permanently installed pools; and (ii) Other cord- and plug-connected, fixed or stationary equipment used with permanently installed pools. (4) Underwater equipment. (ii) No underwater lighting fixtures may be installed for operation at over 150 volts between conductors. (iii) A lighting fixture facing upward shall have the lens adequately guarded to prevent contact by any person. (5) Fountains. (k) Carnivals, circuses, fairs, and similar events. (1) Protection of electric equipment. (2) Installation. (A) Service equipment may not be installed in a location that is accessible to unqualified persons, unless the equipment is lockable; and (B) Service equipment shall be mounted on solid backing and installed so as to be protected from the weather, unless the equipment is of weatherproof construction. (ii) Amusement rides and amusement attractions shall be maintained not less than 4.57 m (15 ft) in any direction from overhead conductors operating at 600 volts or less, except for the conductors supplying the amusement ride or attraction. Amusement rides or attractions may not be located under or within 4.57 m (15 ft) horizontally of conductors operating in excess of 600 volts. (iii) Flexible cords and cables shall be listed for extra-hard usage. When used outdoors, flexible cords and cables shall also be listed for wet locations and shall be sunlight resistant. (iv) Single conductor cable shall be size No. 2 or larger. (v) Open conductors are prohibited except as part of a listed assembly or festoon lighting installed in accordance with § 1910.304(c). (vi) Flexible cords and cables shall be continuous without splice or tap between boxes or fittings. Cord connectors may not be laid on the ground unless listed for wet locations. Connectors and cable connections may not be placed in audience traffic paths or within areas accessible to the public unless guarded. (vii) Wiring for an amusement ride, attraction, tent, or similar structure may not be supported by another ride or structure unless specifically identified for the purpose. (viii) Flexible cords and cables run on the ground, where accessible to the public, shall be covered with approved nonconductive mats. Cables and mats shall be arranged so as not to present a tripping hazard. (ix) A box or fitting shall be installed at each connection point, outlet, switch point, or junction point. (3) Inside tents and concessions. (4) Portable distribution and termination boxes. (i) Boxes shall be designed so that no live parts are exposed to accidental contact. Where installed outdoors, the box shall be of weatherproof construction and mounted so that the bottom of the enclosure is not less than 152 mm (6 in.) above the ground; (ii) Busbars shall have an ampere rating not less than the overcurrent device supplying the feeder supplying the box. Busbar connectors shall be provided where conductors terminate directly on busbars; (iii) Receptacles shall have overcurrent protection installed within the box. The overcurrent protection may not exceed the ampere rating of the receptacle, except as permitted in § 1910.305(j)(4) for motor loads; (iv) Where single-pole connectors are used, they shall comply with the following: (A) Where ac single-pole portable cable connectors are used, they shall be listed and of the locking type. Where paralleled sets of current-carrying single-pole separable connectors are provided as input devices, they shall be prominently labeled with a warning indicating the presence of internal parallel connections. The use of single-pole separable connectors shall comply with at least one of the following conditions: ( 1 ( 2 ( i ( ii ( iii ( 3 ( i ( ii ( iii (B) Single-pole separable connectors used in portable professional motion picture and television equipment may be interchangeable for ac or dc use or for different current ratings on the same premises only if they are listed for ac/dc use and marked to identify the system to which they are connected; (v) Overcurrent protection of equipment and conductors shall be provided; and (vi) The following equipment connected to the same source shall be bonded: (A) Metal raceways and metal sheathed cable; (B) Metal enclosures of electrical equipment; and (C) Metal frames and metal parts of rides, concessions, trailers, trucks, or other equipment that contain or support electrical equipment. (5) Disconnecting means. (ii) The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible to the operator, including when the ride is in operation. (iii) Where accessible to unqualified persons, the enclosure for the switch or circuit breaker shall be of the lockable type. (iv) A shunt trip device that opens the fused disconnect or circuit breaker when a switch located in the ride operator's console is closed is a permissible method of opening the circuit. § 1910.307 Hazardous (classified) locations. (a) Scope Applicability. (2) Classifications. (A) Class I, Division 1 (B) Class I, Division 2 (C) Class I, Zone 0 (D) Class I, Zone 1 (E) Class I, Zone 2 (F) Class II, Division 1 (G) Class II, Division 2 (H) Class III, Division 1 (I) Class III, Division 2 (ii) For definitions of these locations, see § 1910.399. (3) Other sections of this subpart. (4) Division and zone classification. (b) Documentation. (c) Electrical installations. (1) Intrinsically safe. (2) Approved for the hazardous (classified) location. Note to paragraph ( c i NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code, lists or defines hazardous gases, vapors, and dusts by “Groups” characterized by their ignitable or combustible properties. (ii) Equipment shall be marked to show the class, group, and operating temperature or temperature range, based on operation in a 40-degree C ambient, for which it is approved. The temperature marking may not exceed the ignition temperature of the specific gas or vapor to be encountered. However, the following provisions modify this marking requirement for specific equipment: (A) Equipment of the nonheat-producing type, such as junction boxes, conduit, and fittings, and equipment of the heat-producing type having a maximum temperature not more than 100 °C (212 °F) need not have a marked operating temperature or temperature range; (B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked for use in Class I, Division 2 or Class II, Division 2 locations only need not be marked to indicate the group; (C) Fixed general-purpose equipment in Class I locations, other than lighting fixtures, that is acceptable for use in Class I, Division 2 locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating temperature; (D) Fixed dust-tight equipment, other than lighting fixtures, that is acceptable for use in Class II, Division 2 and Class III locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating temperature; and (E) Electric equipment suitable for ambient temperatures exceeding 40 °C (104 °F) shall be marked with both the maximum ambient temperature and the operating temperature or temperature range at that ambient temperature; and (3) Safe for the hazardous (classified) location. Note to paragraph ( c The National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, contains guidelines for determining the type and design of equipment and installations that will meet this requirement. Those guidelines address electric wiring, equipment, and systems installed in hazardous (classified) locations and contain specific provisions for the following: wiring methods, wiring connections; conductor insulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage, transformers, capacitors, switches, circuit breakers, fuses, motor controllers, receptacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, instruments, resistors, generators, motors, lighting fixtures, storage battery charging equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists and similar equipment, utilization equipment, signaling systems, alarm systems, remote control systems, local loud speaker and communication systems, ventilation piping, live parts, lightning surge protection, and grounding. (d) Conduits. (e) Equipment in Division 2 locations. (f) Protection techniques. (1) Explosionproof apparatus. (2) Dust ignitionproof. (3) Dust-tight. (4) Purged and pressurized. (5) Nonincendive circuit. (6) Nonincendive equipment. (7) Nonincendive component. (8) Oil immersion. (9) Hermetically sealed. (10) Other protection techniques. (g) Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 locations Scope. (2) Location and general requirements. (ii) Each room, section, or area shall be considered individually in determining its classification. (iii) All threaded conduit shall be threaded with an NPT (National (American) Standard Pipe Taper) standard conduit cutting die that provides 3/4 (iv) Equipment provided with threaded entries for field wiring connection shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (g)(2)(iv)(A) or (g)(2)(iv)(B) of this section. (A) For equipment provided with threaded entries for NPT threaded conduit or fittings, listed conduit, conduit fittings, or cable fittings shall be used. (B) For equipment with metric threaded entries, such entries shall be identified as being metric, or listed adaptors to permit connection to conduit of NPT-threaded fittings shall be provided with the equipment. Adapters shall be used for connection to conduit or NPT-threaded fittings. (3) Protection techniques. (i) Flameproof “d”—This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 locations for which it is approved. (ii) Purged and pressurized—This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 or Zone 2 locations for which it is approved. (iii) Intrinsic safety—This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 0 or Zone 1 locations for which it is approved. (iv) Type of protection “n”—This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 2 locations for which it is approved. Type of protection “n” is further subdivided into nA, nC, and nR. (v) Oil Immersion “o”—This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 locations for which it is approved. (vi) Increased safety “e”—This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 locations for which it is approved. (vii) Encapsulation “m”—This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 locations for which it is approved. (viii) Powder Filling “q”—This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 locations for which it is approved. (4) Special precaution. (i) Classification of areas and selection of equipment and wiring methods shall be under the supervision of a qualified registered professional engineer. (ii) In instances of areas within the same facility classified separately, Class I, Zone 2 locations may abut, but not overlap, Class I, Division 2 locations. Class I, Zone 0 or Zone 1 locations may not abut Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 locations. (iii) A Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 location may be reclassified as a Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, or Zone 2 location only if all of the space that is classified because of a single flammable gas or vapor source is reclassified. Note to paragraph ( g Low ambient conditions require special consideration. Electric equipment depending on the protection techniques described by paragraph (g)(3)(i) of this section may not be suitable for use at temperatures lower than −20 °C (−4 °F) unless they are approved for use at lower temperatures. However, at low ambient temperatures, flammable concentrations of vapors may not exist in a location classified Class I, Zone 0, 1, or 2 at normal ambient temperature. (5) Listing and marking. (ii) Equipment shall be marked in accordance with paragraph (g)(5)(ii)(A) and (g)(5)(ii)(B) of this section, except as provided in (g)(5)(ii)(C). (A) Equipment approved for Class I, Division 1 or Class 1, Division 2 shall, in addition to being marked in accordance with (c)(2)(ii), be marked with the following: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) Equipment meeting one or more of the protection techniques described in paragraph (g)(3) of this section shall be marked with the following in the order shown: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 Note to paragraph ( g ii An example of such a required marking is “Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T6.” See Figure S-1 for an explanation of this marking. (C) Equipment that the employer demonstrates will provide protection from the hazards arising from the flammability of the gas or vapor and the zone of location involved and will be recognized as providing such protection by employees need not be marked. Note to paragraph ( g ii The National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, contains guidelines for determining the type and design of equipment and installations that will meet this provision. § 1910.308 Special systems. (a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal. (1) Aboveground wiring methods. (ii) Conductors emerging from the ground shall be enclosed in approved raceways. (2) Braid-covered insulated conductors—open installations. (3) Insulation shielding. (ii) Metallic shielding components such as tapes, wires, or braids, or combinations thereof, and their associated conducting and semiconducting components shall be grounded. (4) Moisture or mechanical protection for metal-sheathed cables. (5) Interrupting and isolating devices. (ii) Where fuses are used to protect conductors and equipment, a fuse shall be placed in each ungrounded conductor. Two power fuses may be used in parallel to protect the same load, if both fuses have identical ratings, and if both fuses are installed in an identified common mounting with electrical connections that will divide the current equally. Power fuses of the vented type may not be used indoors, underground, or in metal enclosures unless identified for the use. (iii) Fused cutouts installed in buildings or transformer vaults shall be of a type identified for the purpose. Distribution cutouts may not be used indoors, underground, or in metal enclosures. They shall be readily accessible for fuse replacement. (iv) Where fused cutouts are not suitable to interrupt the circuit manually while carrying full load, an approved means shall be installed to interrupt the entire load. Unless the fused cutouts are interlocked with the switch to prevent opening of the cutouts under load, a conspicuous sign shall be placed at such cutouts reading: “WARNING—DO NOT OPERATE UNDER LOAD.” (v) Suitable barriers or enclosures shall be provided to prevent contact with nonshielded cables or energized parts of oil-filled cutouts. (vi) Load interrupter switches may be used only if suitable fuses or circuits are used in conjunction with these devices to interrupt fault currents. (A) Where these devices are used in combination, they shall be coordinated electrically so that they will safely withstand the effects of closing, carrying, or interrupting all possible currents up to the assigned maximum short-circuit rating. (B) Where more than one switch is installed with interconnected load terminals to provide for alternate connection to different supply conductors, each switch shall be provided with a conspicuous sign reading: “WARNING—SWITCH MAY BE ENERGIZED BY BACKFEED.” (vii) A means (for example, a fuseholder and fuse designed for the purpose) shall be provided to completely isolate equipment for inspection and repairs. Isolating means that are not designed to interrupt the load current of the circuit shall be either interlocked with an approved circuit interrupter or provided with a sign warning against opening them under load. (6) Mobile and portable equipment. (ii) All energized switching and control parts shall be enclosed in effectively grounded metal cabinets or enclosures. Circuit breakers and protective equipment shall have the operating means projecting through the metal cabinet or enclosure so these units can be reset without locked doors being opened. Enclosures and metal cabinets shall be locked so that only authorized qualified persons have access and shall be marked with a sign warning of the presence of energized parts. Collector ring assemblies on revolving-type machines (shovels, draglines, etc.) shall be guarded. (7) Tunnel installations. (i) Conductors in tunnels shall be installed in one or more of the following: (A) Metal conduit or other metal raceway; (B) Type MC cable; or (C) Other approved multiconductor cable. (ii) Multiconductor portable cable may supply mobile equipment. (iii) Conductors and cables shall also be so located or guarded as to protect them from physical damage. An equipment grounding conductor shall be run with circuit conductors inside the metal raceway or inside the multiconductor cable jacket. The equipment grounding conductor may be insulated or bare. (iv) Bare terminals of transformers, switches, motor controllers, and other equipment shall be enclosed to prevent accidental contact with energized parts. (v) Enclosures for use in tunnels shall be drip-proof, weatherproof, or submersible as required by the environmental conditions. (vi) Switch or contactor enclosures may not be used as junction boxes or raceways for conductors feeding through or tapping off to other switches, unless special designs are used to provide adequate space for this purpose. (vii) A disconnecting means that simultaneously opens all ungrounded conductors shall be installed at each transformer or motor location. (viii) All nonenergized metal parts of electric equipment and metal raceways and cable sheaths shall be effectively grounded and bonded to all metal pipes and rails at the portal and at intervals not exceeding 305 m (1000 ft) throughout the tunnel. (b) Emergency power systems. (1) Wiring methods. (2) Emergency illumination. (3) Signs. (ii) Where the grounded circuit conductor connected to the emergency source is connected to a grounding electrode conductor at a location remote from the emergency source, there shall be a sign at the grounding location that shall identify all emergency and normal sources connected at that location. (c) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and power-limited circuits Classification. (i) A Class 1 power-limited circuit shall be supplied from a source having a rated output of not more than 30 volts and 1000 volt-amperes. (ii) A Class 1 remote control circuit or a Class 1 signaling circuit shall have a voltage not exceeding 600 volts; however, the power output of the source need not be limited. (iii) The power source for a Class 2 or Class 3 circuit shall be listed equipment marked as a Class 2 or Class 3 power source, except as follows: (A) Thermocouples do not require listing as a Class 2 power source; and (B) A dry cell battery is considered an inherently limited Class 2 power source, provided the voltage is 30 volts or less and the capacity is less than or equal to that available from series-connected No. 6 carbon zinc cells. (2) Marking. (3) Separation from conductors of other circuits. (d) Fire alarm systems Classifications. (2) Power sources. (i) The power source of nonpower-limited fire alarm (NPLFA) circuits shall have an output voltage of not more than 600 volts, nominal; and (ii) The power source for a power-limited fire alarm (PLFA) circuit shall be listed equipment marked as a PLFA power source. (3) Separation from conductors of other circuits. (ii) Power-limited circuit cables and conductors may not be placed in any cable, cable tray, compartment, enclosure, outlet box, raceway, or similar fitting with conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm circuit conductors, or medium power network-powered broadband communications circuits. (iii) Power-limited fire alarm circuit conductors shall be separated at least 50.8 mm (2 in.) from conductors of any electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, or medium power network-powered broadband communications circuits unless a special and equally protective method of conductor separation is employed. (iv) Conductors of one or more Class 2 circuits are permitted within the same cable, enclosure, or raceway with conductors of power-limited fire alarm circuits provided that the insulation of Class 2 circuit conductors in the cable, enclosure, or raceway is at least that needed for the power-limited fire alarm circuits. (4) Identification. (e) Communications systems. (1) Protective devices. (ii) A listed primary protector shall be also provided on each aerial or underground circuit when the location of the circuit within the block containing the building served allows the circuit to be exposed to accidental contact with electric light or power conductors operating at over 300 volts to ground. (iii) In addition, where there exists a lightning exposure, each interbuilding circuit on premises shall be protected by a listed primary protector at each end of the interbuilding circuit. (2) Conductor location. (ii) A separation of at least 1.83 m (6 ft) shall be maintained between communications wires and cables on buildings and lightning conductors. (iii) Where communications wires and cables and electric light or power conductors are supported by the same pole or run parallel to each other in-span, the following conditions shall be met: (A) Where practicable, communication wires and cables on poles shall be located below the electric light or power conductors; and (B) Communications wires and cables may not be attached to a crossarm that carries electric light or power conductors. (iv) Indoor communications wires and cables shall be separated at least 50.8 mm (2 in.) from conductors of any electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, or medium power network-powered broadband communications circuits, unless a special and equally protective method of conductor separation, identified for the purpose, is employed. (3) Equipment location. (4) Grounding. (ii) Masts and metal structures supporting antennas shall be permanently and effectively grounded without splice or connection in the grounding conductor. (iii) Transmitters shall be enclosed in a metal frame or grill or separated from the operating space by a barrier, all metallic parts of which are effectively connected to ground. All external metal handles and controls accessible to the operating personnel shall be effectively grounded. Unpowered equipment and enclosures are considered to be grounded where connected to an attached coaxial cable with an effectively grounded metallic shield. (f) Solar photovoltaic systems. (1) Conductors of different systems. (2) Disconnecting means. (g) Integrated electrical systems Scope. (i) An orderly shutdown process minimizes employee hazard and equipment damage; (ii) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons will service the system; and (iii) Effective safeguards are established and maintained. (2) Location of overcurrent devices in or on premises. §§ 1910.309-1910.330 [Reserved] Safety-Related Work Practices § 1910.331 Scope. (a) Covered work by both qualified and unqualified persons. (1) Premises wiring. (2) Wiring for connection to supply. (3) Other wiring. (4) Optical fiber cable. Note: See § 1910.399 for the definition of “qualified person.” See § 1910.332 for training requirements that apply to qualified and unqualified persons. (b) Other covered work. (1) Work performed by unqualified persons on, near, or with the installations listed in paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section; and (2) Work performed by qualified persons near the installations listed in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(4) of this section when that work is not on or directly associated with those installations. (c) Excluded work by qualified persons. (1) Generation, transmission, and distribution installations. Note 1 to paragraph ( c Work on or directly associated with installations of utilization equipment used for purposes other than generating, transmitting, or distributing electric energy (such as installations which are in office buildings, warehouses, garages, machine shops, or recreational buildings, or other utilization installations which are not an integral part of a generating installation, substation, or control center) is covered under paragraph (a)(1) of this section. Note 2 to paragraph ( c For work on or directly associated with utilization installations, an employer who complies with the work practices of § 1910.269 (electric power generation, transmission, and distribution) will be deemed to be in compliance with §§ 1910.333(c) and 1910.335. However, the requirements of §§ 1910.332, 1910.333(a), 1910.333(b), and 1910.334 apply to all Note 3 to paragraph ( c Work on or directly associated with generation, transmission, or distribution installations includes: (1) Work performed directly on such installations, such as repairing overhead or underground distribution lines or repairing a feed-water pump for the boiler in a generating plant. (2) Work directly associated with such installations, such as line-clearance tree trimming and replacing utility poles, when that work is covered by § 1910.269 (see § 1910.269(a)(1)(i)(D) and (E) and the definition of “line-clearance tree trimming” in § 1910.269(x)). (3) Work on electric utilization circuits in a generating plant provided that: (A) Such circuits are commingled with installations of power generation equipment or circuits, and (B) The generation equipment or circuits present greater electrical hazards than those posed by the utilization equipment or circuits (such as exposure to higher voltages or lack of overcurrent protection). This work is covered by § 1910.269. (2) Communications installations. (3) Installations in vehicles. (4) Railway installations. [55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 4476, Jan. 31, 1994; 79 FR 20692, Apr. 11, 2014; 80 FR 60039, Oct. 5, 2015] § 1910.332 Training. (a) Scope. Note: Employees in occupations listed in Table S-4 face such a risk and are required to be trained. Other employees who also may reasonably be expected to face a comparable risk of injury due to electric shock or other electrical hazards must also be trained. (b) Content of training Practices addressed in this standard. (2) Additional requirements for unqualified persons. (3) Additional requirements for qualified persons. (i) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other parts of electric equipment, (ii) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed live parts, and (iii) The clearance distances specified in § 1910.333(c) and the corresponding voltages to which the qualified person will be exposed. Note 1: For the purposes of §§ 1910.331 through 1910.335, a person must have the training required by paragraph (b)(3) of this section in order to be considered a qualified person. Note 2: Qualified persons whose work on energized equipment involves either direct contact or contact by means of tools or materials must also have the training needed to meet § 1910.333(c)(2). (c) Type of training. Table S-4—Typical Occupational Categories of Employees Facing a Higher Than Normal Risk of Electrical Accident Occupation Blue collar supervisors. 1 Electrical and electronic engineers. 1 Electrical and electronic equipment assemblers. 1 Electrical and electronic technicians. 1 Electricians. Industrial machine operators. 1 Material handling equipment operators. 1 Mechanics and repairers. 1 Painters. 1 Riggers and roustabouts. 1 Stationary engineers. 1 Welders. 1 [55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990] § 1910.333 Selection and use of work practices. (a) General. (1) Deenergized parts. Note 1: Examples of increased or additional hazards include interruption of life support equipment, deactivation of emergency alarm systems, shutdown of hazardous location ventilation equipment, or removal of illumination for an area. Note 2: Examples of work that may be performed on or near energized circuit parts because of infeasibility due to equipment design or operational limitations include testing of electric circuits that can only be performed with the circuit energized and work on circuits that form an integral part of a continuous industrial process in a chemical plant that would otherwise need to be completely shut down in order to permit work on one circuit or piece of equipment. Note 3: Work on or near deenergized parts is covered by paragraph (b) of this section. (2) Energized parts. (b) Working on or near exposed deenergized parts Application. (2) Lockout and tagging. Note 1: As used in this section, fixed equipment refers to equipment fastened in place or connected by permanent wiring methods. Note 2: Lockout and tagging procedures that comply with paragraphs (c) through (f) of § 1910.147 will also be deemed to comply with paragraph (b)(2) of this section provided that: (1) The procedures address the electrical safety hazards covered by this Subpart; and (2) The procedures also incorporate the requirements of paragraphs (b)(2)(iii)(D) and (b)(2)(iv)(B) of this section. (i) Procedures. Note: The written procedures may be in the form of a copy of paragraph (b) of this section. (ii) Deenergizing equipment. (B) The circuits and equipment to be worked on shall be disconnected from all electric energy sources. Control circuit devices, such as push buttons, selector switches, and interlocks, may not be used as the sole means for deenergizing circuits or equipment. Interlocks for electric equipment may not be used as a substitute for lockout and tagging procedures. (C) Stored electric energy which might endanger personnel shall be released. Capacitors shall be discharged and high capacitance elements shall be short-circuited and grounded, if the stored electric energy might endanger personnel. Note: If the capacitors or associated equipment are handled in meeting this requirement, they shall be treated as energized. (D) Stored non-electrical energy in devices that could reenergize electric circuit parts shall be blocked or relieved to the extent that the circuit parts could not be accidentally energized by the device. (iii) Application of locks and tags. (B) Each tag shall contain a statement prohibiting unauthorized operation of the disconnecting means and removal of the tag. (C) If a lock cannot be applied, or if the employer can demonstrate that tagging procedures will provide a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by the use of a lock, a tag may be used without a lock. (D) A tag used without a lock, as permitted by paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(C) of this section, shall be supplemented by at least one additional safety measure that provides a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by the use of a lock. Examples of additional safety measures include the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a controlling switch, or opening of an extra disconnecting device. (E) A lock may be placed without a tag only under the following conditions: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (iv) Verification of deenergized condition. The requirements of this paragraph shall be met before any circuits or equipment can be considered and worked as deenergized. (A) A qualified person shall operate the equipment operating controls or otherwise verify that the equipment cannot be restarted. (B) A qualified person shall use test equipment to test the circuit elements and electrical parts of equipment to which employees will be exposed and shall verify that the circuit elements and equipment parts are deenergized. The test shall also determine if any energized condition exists as a result of inadvertently induced voltage or unrelated voltage backfeed even though specific parts of the circuit have been deenergized and presumed to be safe. If the circuit to be tested is over 600 volts, nominal, the test equipment shall be checked for proper operation immediately before and immediately after this test. (v) Reenergizing equipment. (A) A qualified person shall conduct tests and visual inspections, as necessary, to verify that all tools, electrical jumpers, shorts, grounds, and other such devices have been removed, so that the circuits and equipment can be safely energized. (B) Employees exposed to the hazards associated with reenergizing the circuit or equipment shall be warned to stay clear of circuits and equipment. (C) Each lock and tag shall be removed by the employee who applied it or under his or her direct supervision. However, if this employee is absent from the workplace, then the lock or tag may be removed by a qualified person designated to perform this task provided that: ( 1 ( 2 (D) There shall be a visual determination that all employees are clear of the circuits and equipment. (c) Working on or near exposed energized parts Application. (2) Work on energized equipment. (3) Overhead lines. Note: The work practices used by qualified persons installing insulating devices on overhead power transmission or distribution lines are covered by § 1910.269 of this part, not by §§ 1910.332 through 1910.335 of this part. Under paragraph (c)(2) of this section, unqualified persons are prohibited from performing this type of work. (i) Unqualified persons. ( 1 ( 2 (B) When an unqualified person is working on the ground in the vicinity of overhead lines, the person may not bring any conductive object closer to unguarded, energized overhead lines than the distances given in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(A) of this section. Note: For voltages normally encountered with overhead power lines, objects which do not have an insulating rating for the voltage involved are considered to be conductive. (ii) Qualified persons. (A) The person is insulated from the energized part (gloves, with sleeves if necessary, rated for the voltage involved are considered to be insulation of the person from the energized part on which work is performed), or (B) The energized part is insulated both from all other conductive objects at a different potential and from the person, or (C) The person is insulated from all conductive objects at a potential different from that of the energized part. Table S-5—Approach Distances for Qualified Employees—Alternating Current Voltage range (phase to phase) Minimum approach distance 300V and less Avoid contact. Over 300V, not over 750V 1 ft. 0 in. (30.5 cm). Over 750V, not over 2kV l ft. 6 in. (46 cm). Over 2kV, not over 15kV 2 ft. 0 in. (61 cm). Over 15kV, not over 37kV 3 ft. 0 in. (91 cm). Over 37kV, not over 87.5kV 3 ft. 6 in. (107 cm). Over 87.5kV, not over 121kV 4 ft. 0 in. (122 cm). Over 121kV, not over 140kV 4 ft. 6 in. (137 cm). (iii) Vehicular and mechanical equipment. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) Employees standing on the ground may not contact the vehicle or mechanical equipment or any of its attachments, unless: ( 1 ( 2 (C) If any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure elevated near energized overhead lines is intentionally grounded, employees working on the ground near the point of grounding may not stand at the grounding location whenever there is a possibility of overhead line contact. Additional precautions, such as the use of barricades or insulation, shall be taken to protect employees from hazardous ground potentials, depending on earth resistivity and fault currents, which can develop within the first few feet or more outward from the grounding point. (4) Illumination. (ii) Where lack of illumination or an obstruction precludes observation of the work to be performed, employees may not perform tasks near exposed energized parts. Employees may not reach blindly into areas which may contain energized parts. (5) Confined or enclosed work spaces. (6) Conductive materials and equipment. (7) Portable ladders. (8) Conductive apparel. (9) Housekeeping duties. (10) Interlocks. [55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 46053, Nov. 1, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 4476, Jan. 31, 1994] § 1910.334 Use of equipment. (a) Portable electric equipment. (1) Handling. (2) Visual inspection. (ii) If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests necessary to render the equipment safe have been made. (iii) When an attachment plug is to be connected to a receptacle (including any on a cord set), the relationship of the plug and receptacle contacts shall first be checked to ensure that they are of proper mating configurations. (3) Grounding-type equipment. (ii) Attachment plugs and receptacles may not be connected or altered in a manner which would prevent proper continuity of the equipment grounding conductor at the point where plugs are attached to receptacles. Additionally, these devices may not be altered to allow the grounding pole of a plug to be inserted into slots intended for connection to the current-carrying conductors. (iii) Adapters which interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding connection may not be used. (4) Conductive work locations. (5) Connecting attachment plugs. (ii) Energized plug and receptacle connections may be handled only with insulating protective equipment if the condition of the connection could provide a conducting path to the employee's hand (if, for example, a cord connector is wet from being immersed in water). (iii) Locking-type connectors shall be properly secured after connection. (b) Electric power and lighting circuits Routine opening and closing of circuits. (2) Reclosing circuits after protective device operation. Note: When it can be determined from the design of the circuit and the overcurrent devices involved that the automatic operation of a device was caused by an overload rather than a fault condition, no examination of the circuit or connected equipment is needed before the circuit is reenergized. (3) Overcurrent protection modification. (c) Test instruments and equipment Use. (2) Visual inspection. (3) Rating of equipment. (d) Occasional use of flammable or ignitible materials. Note: Electrical installation requirements for locations where flammable materials are present on a regular basis are contained in § 1910.307. [55 FR 32019, Aug. 6, 1990] § 1910.335 Safeguards for personnel protection. (a) Use of protective equipment Personal protective equipment. Note: Personal protective equipment requirements are contained in subpart I of this part. (ii) Protective equipment shall be maintained in a safe, reliable condition and shall be periodically inspected or tested, as required by § 1910.137. (iii) If the insulating capability of protective equipment may be subject to damage during use, the insulating material shall be protected. (For example, an outer covering of leather is sometimes used for the protection of rubber insulating material.) (iv) Employees shall wear nonconductive head protection wherever there is a danger of head injury from electric shock or burns due to contact with exposed energized parts. (v) Employees shall wear protective equipment for the eyes or face wherever there is danger of injury to the eyes or face from electric arcs or flashes or from flying objects resulting from electrical explosion. (2) General protective equipment and tools. (A) Fuse handling equipment, insulated for the circuit voltage, shall be used to remove or install fuses when the fuse terminals are energized. (B) Ropes and handlines used near exposed energized parts shall be nonconductive. (ii) Protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials shall be used to protect each employee from shock, burns, or other electrically related injuries while that employee is working near exposed energized parts which might be accidentally contacted or where dangerous electric heating or arcing might occur. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for maintenance or repair, they shall be guarded to protect unqualified persons from contact with the live parts. (b) Alerting techniques. (1) Safety signs and tags. (2) Barricades. (3) Attendants. [55 FR 32020, Aug. 6, 1990] §§ 1910.336-1910.360 [Reserved] Safety-Related Maintenance Requirements §§ 1910.361-1910.380 [Reserved] Safety Requirements for Special Equipment §§ 1910.381-1910.398 [Reserved] Definitions § 1910.399 Definitions applicable to this subpart. Acceptable. (1) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or otherwise determined to be safe by a nationally recognized testing laboratory recognized pursuant to § 1910.7; or (2) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind that no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by another Federal agency, or by a State, municipal, or other local authority responsible for enforcing occupational safety provisions of the National Electrical Code, and found in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code as applied in this subpart; or (3) With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations that are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by a particular customer, if it is determined to be safe for its intended use by its manufacturer on the basis of test data which the employer keeps and makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary and his authorized representatives. Accepted. Accessible. Accessible. Ampacity. Appliances. Approved. Armored cable (Type AC). Askarel. Attachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap). Automatic. Bare conductor. Barrier. Bathroom. Bonding (Bonded). Bonding jumper. Branch circuit. Building. Cabinet. Cable tray system. Cablebus. Cell line. Cell line attachments and auxiliary equipment. Center pivot irrigation machine. Certified. (1) Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner; or (2) Is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and is accepted by the laboratory as safe for its intended use. Circuit breaker. Class I locations. (1) Class I, Division 1. (i) In which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may exist under normal operating conditions; or (ii) In which ignitable concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or (iii) In which breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or processes might release ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, and might also cause simultaneous failure of electric equipment. Note to the definition of “Class I, Division 1:” This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred from one container to another; interiors of spray booths and areas in the vicinity of spraying and painting operations where volatile flammable solvents are used; locations containing open tanks or vats of volatile flammable liquids; drying rooms or compartments for the evaporation of flammable solvents; locations containing fat and oil extraction equipment using volatile flammable solvents; portions of cleaning and dyeing plants where flammable liquids are used; gas generator rooms and other portions of gas manufacturing plants where flammable gas may escape; inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas or for volatile flammable liquids; the interiors of refrigerators and freezers in which volatile flammable materials are stored in open, lightly stoppered, or easily ruptured containers; and all other locations where ignitable concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to occur in the course of normal operations. (2) Class I, Division 2. (i) In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed, or used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only in the event of accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or as a result of abnormal operation of equipment; or (ii) In which ignitable concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, and which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operations of the ventilating equipment; or (iii) That is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, and to which ignitable concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided. Note to the definition of “Class I, Division 2:” This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which would become hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual operating condition. The quantity of flammable material that might escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total area involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all factors that merit consideration in determining the classification and extent of each location. Piping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would not ordinarily introduce a hazardous condition even though used for flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of flammable liquids or liquefied or compressed gases in sealed containers would not normally be considered hazardous unless also subject to other hazardous conditions. Electrical conduits and their associated enclosures separated from process fluids by a single seal or barrier are classed as a Division 2 location if the outside of the conduit and enclosures is a nonhazardous location. (3) Class I, Zone 0. (i) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are present continuously; or (ii) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are present for long periods of time. Note to the definition of “Class I, Zone 0:” As a guide in determining when flammable gases or vapors are present continuously or for long periods of time, refer to Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations of Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1 or Zone 2, Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres, Classifications of Hazardous Areas, Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations, Model Code—Part 15, Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres, Classifications of Hazardous (Classified) Locations, (4) Class I, Zone 1. (i) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are likely to exist under normal operating conditions; or (ii) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or (iii) Equipment is operated or processes are carried on of such a nature that equipment breakdown or faulty operations could result in the release of ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors and also cause simultaneous failure of electric equipment in a manner that would cause the electric equipment to become a source of ignition; or (iv) A location that is adjacent to a Class I, Zone 0 location from which ignitable concentrations of vapors could be communicated, unless communication is prevented by adequate positive pressure ventilation from a source of clean air and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided. (5) Class I, Zone 2. (i) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are not likely to occur in normal operation and if they do occur will exist only for a short period; or (ii) Volatile flammable liquids, flammable gases, or flammable vapors are handled, processed, or used, but in which the liquids, gases, or vapors are normally confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only as a result of accidental rupture or breakdown of the containers or system or as the result of the abnormal operation of the equipment with which the liquids or gases are handled, processed, or used; or (iii) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors normally are prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, but which may become hazardous as the result of failure or abnormal operation of the ventilation equipment; or (iv) A location that is adjacent to a Class I, Zone 1 location, from which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors could be communicated, unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided. Class II locations. (1) Class II, Division 1. (i) In which combustible dust is or may be in suspension in the air under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures; or (ii) Where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of machinery or equipment might cause such explosive or ignitable mixtures to be produced, and might also provide a source of ignition through simultaneous failure of electric equipment, through operation of protection devices, or from other causes; or (iii) In which combustible dusts of an electrically conductive nature may be present. Note to the definition of “Class II, Division 1:” This classification may include areas of grain handling and processing plants, starch plants, sugar-pulverizing plants, malting plants, hay-grinding plants, coal pulverizing plants, areas where metal dusts and powders are produced or processed, and other similar locations that contain dust producing machinery and equipment (except where the equipment is dust-tight or vented to the outside). These areas would have combustible dust in the air, under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Combustible dusts that are electrically nonconductive include dusts produced in the handling and processing of grain and grain products, pulverized sugar and cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulverized spices, starch and pastes, potato and wood flour, oil meal from beans and seed, dried hay, and other organic materials which may produce combustible dusts when processed or handled. Dusts containing magnesium or aluminum are particularly hazardous, and the use of extreme caution is necessary to avoid ignition and explosion. (2) Class II, Division 2. (i) Combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures, and dust accumulations will normally be insufficient to interfere with the normal operation of electric equipment or other apparatus, but combustible dust may be in suspension in the air as a result of infrequent malfunctioning of handling or processing equipment; and (ii) Resulting combustible dust accumulations on, in, or in the vicinity of the electric equipment may be sufficient to interfere with the safe dissipation of heat from electric equipment or may be ignitable by abnormal operation or failure of electric equipment. Note to the definition of “Class II, Division 2:” This classification includes locations where dangerous concentrations of suspended dust would not be likely, but where dust accumulations might form on or in the vicinity of electric equipment. These areas may contain equipment from which appreciable quantities of dust would escape under abnormal operating conditions or be adjacent to a Class II Division 1 location, as described above, into which an explosive or ignitable concentration of dust may be put into suspension under abnormal operating conditions. Class III locations. (1) Class III, Division 1. Note to the definition of “Class III, Division 1:” Such locations usually include some parts of rayon, cotton, and other textile mills; combustible fiber manufacturing and processing plants; cotton gins and cotton-seed mills; flax-processing plants; clothing manufacturing plants; woodworking plants, and establishments; and industries involving similar hazardous processes or conditions. Easily ignitable fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton (including cotton linters and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, and other materials of similar nature. (2) Class III, Division 2. Collector ring. Competent Person. Concealed. Conductor Bare. (2) Covered. (3) Insulated. Conduit body. Controller. Covered conductor. Cutout. Cutout box. Damp location. Dead front. Deenergized. Device. Dielectric heating. Disconnecting means. Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Electrolytic cell line working zone. Electrolytic cells. Enclosed. Enclosure. Energized. Equipment. Equipment grounding conductor. Explosion-proof apparatus. Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) Exposed. (As applied to wiring methods.) Exposed. (For the purposes of § 1910.308(e).) Externally operable. Feeder. Fitting. Fountain. Note to the definition of “fountain:” This definition does not include drinking fountains. Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Ground. Grounded. Grounded, effectively. Grounded conductor. Grounding conductor. Grounding conductor, equipment. Grounding electrode conductor. Ground-fault circuit-interrupter. Guarded. Health care facilities. Note to the definition of “health care facilities:” Health care facilities include, but are not limited to, hospitals, nursing homes, limited care facilities, clinics, medical and dental offices, and ambulatory care centers, whether permanent or movable. Heating equipment. Hoistway. Identified (as applied to equipment). Note to the definition of “identified:” Some examples of ways to determine suitability of equipment for a specific purpose, environment, or application include investigations by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (through listing and labeling), inspection agency, or other organization recognized under the definition of “acceptable.” Induction heating. 2 Insulated. Insulated conductor. Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Irrigation Machine. Isolated. (As applied to location.) Isolated power system. Labeled. (1) That makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment, and (2) Whose labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner. Lighting outlet. Listed. (1) Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory that makes periodic inspection of the production of such equipment, and (2) States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner. Live parts. Location Damp location. (2) Dry location. (3) Wet location. Medium voltage cable (Type MV). Metal-clad cable (Type MC). Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable (Type MI). Mobile X-ray. Motor control center. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable (Types NM, NMC, and NMS). Oil (filled) cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Open wiring on insulators. Outlet. Outline lighting. Overcurrent. Overhaul Overload. Panelboard. Permanently installed decorative fountains and reflection pools. Permanently installed swimming, wading, and therapeutic pools. Portable X-ray. Power and control tray cable (Type TC). Power fuse. Power-limited tray cable (Type PLTC). Power outlet. Premises wiring. (Premises wiring system.) Qualified person. Note 1 to the definition of “qualified person:” Whether an employee is considered to be a “qualified person” will depend upon various circumstances in the workplace. For example, it is possible and, in fact, likely for an individual to be considered “qualified” with regard to certain equipment in the workplace, but “unqualified” as to other equipment. (See 1910.332(b)(3) for training requirements that specifically apply to qualified persons.) Note 2 to the definition of “qualified person:” An employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of a qualified person is considered to be a qualified person for the performance of those duties. Raceway. Readily accessible. Receptacle. Receptacle outlet. Remote-control circuit. Sealable equipment. Separately derived system. Service. Service cable. Service conductors. Service drop. Service-entrance cable. (1) Type SE. (2) Type USE. Service-entrance conductors, overhead system. Service entrance conductors, underground system. Service equipment. Service point. Shielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable (Type SNM). Show window. Signaling circuit. Storable swimming or wading pool. Switchboard. Switch General-use switch. (2) General-use snap switch. (3) Isolating switch. (4) Motor-circuit switch. Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Transportable X-ray. Utilization equipment. Ventilated. Volatile flammable liquid. Voltage (of a circuit). Voltage, nominal. Voltage to ground. Watertight. Weatherproof. Wireways. [72 FR 7215, Feb. 14, 2007, as amended at 79 FR 20692, Apr. 11, 2014] Appendix A to Subpart S of Part 1910— References for Further Information The references contained in this appendix provide nonmandatory information that can be helpful in understanding and complying with subpart S of this Part. However, compliance with these standards is not a substitute for compliance with subpart S of this Part. ANSI/API RP 500-1998 (2002) Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class I Division 1 and Division 2. ANSI/API RP 505-1997 (2002) Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1 and Zone 2. ANSI/ASME A17.1-2004 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. ANSI/ASME B30.2-2005 Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running Trolley Hoist). ANSI/ASME B30.3-2004 Construction Tower Cranes. ANSI/ASME B30.4-2003 Portal, Tower, and Pedestal Cranes. ANSI/ASME B30.5-2004 Mobile And Locomotive Cranes. ANSI/ASME B30.6-2003 Derricks. ANSI/ASME B30.7-2001 Base Mounted Drum Hoists. ANSI/ASME B30.8-2004 Floating Cranes And Floating Derricks. ANSI/ASME B30.11-2004 Monorails And Underhung Cranes. ANSI/ASME B30.12-2001 Handling Loads Suspended from Rotorcraft. ANSI/ASME B30.13-2003 Storage/Retrieval (S/R) Machines and Associated Equipment. ANSI/ASME B30.16-2003 Overhead Hoists (Underhung). ANSI/ASME B30.22-2005 Articulating Boom Cranes. ANSI/ASSE Z244.1-2003 Control of Hazardous Energy Lockout/Tagout and Alternative Methods. ANSI/ASSE Z490.1-2001 Criteria for Accepted Practices in Safety, Health, and Environmental Training. ANSI/IEEE C2-2002 National Electrical Safety Code. ANSI K61.1-1999 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia. ANSI/UL 913-2003 Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations. ASTM D3176-1989 (2002) Standard Practice for Ultimate Analysis of Coal and Coke. ASTM D3180-1989 (2002) Standard Practice for Calculating Coal and Coke Analyses from As-Determined to Different Bases. NFPA 20-2003 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection. NFPA 30-2003 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. NFPA 32-2004 Standard for Drycleaning Plants. NFPA 33-2003 Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable or Combustible Materials. NFPA 34-2003 Standard for Dipping and Coating Processes Using Flammable or Combustible Liquids. NFPA 35-2005 Standard for the Manufacture of Organic Coatings. NFPA 36-2004 Standard for Solvent Extraction Plants. NFPA 40-2001 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Cellulose Nitrate Film. NFPA 58-2004 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code. NFPA 59-2004 Utility LP-Gas Plant Code. NFPA 70-2002 National Electrical Code. (See also NFPA 70-2005.) NFPA 70E-2000 Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces. (See also NFPA 70E-2004.) NFPA 77-2000 Recommended Practice on Static Electricity. NFPA 80-1999 Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows. NFPA 88A-2002 Standard for Parking Structures. NFPA 91-2004 Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists, and Noncombustible Particulate Solids. NFPA 101-2006 Life Safety Code. NFPA 496-2003 Standard for Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. NFPA 497-2004 Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable Liquids, Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas. NFPA 505-2006 Fire Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks Including Type Designations, Areas of Use, Conversions, Maintenance, and Operation. NFPA 820-2003 Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities. NMAB 353-1-1979 Matrix of Combustion-Relevant Properties and Classification of Gases, Vapors, and Selected Solids. NMAB 353-2-1979 Test Equipment for Use in Determining Classifications of Combustible Dusts. NMAB 353-3-1980 Classification of Combustible Dust in Accordance with the National Electrical Code. [72 FR 7221, Feb. 14, 2007] Subpart T—Commercial Diving Operations Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; 40 U.S.C. 333; 33 U.S.C. 941; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31160), or 4-2010 (75 FR 55355) as applicable, and 29 CFR 1911. Source: 42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, unless otherwise noted. General § 1910.401 Scope and application. (a) Scope. (2) This standard applies to diving and related support operations conducted in connection with all types of work and employments, including general industry, construction, ship repairing, shipbuilding, shipbreaking and longshoring. However, this standard does not apply to any diving operation: (i) Performed solely for instructional purposes, using open-circuit, compressed-air SCUBA and conducted within the no-decompression limits; (ii) Performed solely for search, rescue, or related public safety purposes by or under the control of a governmental agency; or (iii) Governed by 45 CFR part 46 (Protection of Human Subjects, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services) or equivalent rules or regulations established by another federal agency, which regulate research, development, or related purposes involving human subjects. (iv) Defined as scientific diving and which is under the direction and control of a diving program containing at least the following elements: (A) Diving safety manual which includes at a minimum: Procedures covering all diving operations specific to the program; procedures for emergency care, including recompression and evacuation; and criteria for diver training and certification. (B) Diving control (safety) board, with the majority of its members being active divers, which shall at a minimum have the authority to: Approve and monitor diving projects; review and revise the diving safety manual; assure compliance with the manual; certify the depths to which a diver has been trained; take disciplinary action for unsafe practices; and, assure adherence to the buddy system (a diver is accompanied by and is in continuous contact with another diver in the water) for SCUBA diving. (3) Alternative requirements for recreational diving instructors and diving guides. (i) The instructor or guide is engaging solely in recreational diving instruction or dive-guiding operations; (ii) The instructor or guide is diving within the no-decompression limits in these operations; (iii) The instructor or guide is using a nitrox breathing-gas mixture consisting of a high percentage of oxygen (more than 22% by volume) mixed with nitrogen; (iv) The instructor or guide is using an open-circuit, semi-closed-circuit, or closed-circuit self-contained underwater breathing apparatus (SCUBA); and (v) The employer of the instructor or guide is complying with all requirements of appendix C of this subpart. (b) Application in emergencies. (1) Notifies the Area Director, Occupational Safety and Health Administration within 48 hours of the onset of the emergency situation indicating the nature of the emergency and extent of the deviation from the prescribed regulations; and (2) Upon request from the Area Director, submits such information in writing. (c) Employer obligation. (1) All provisions of this standard of general applicability; and (2) All requirements pertaining to specific diving modes to the extent diving operations in such modes are conducted. [42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 53365, Nov. 26, 1982; 58 FR 35310, June 30, 1993; 69 FR 7363, Feb. 17, 2004] § 1910.402 Definitions. As used in this standard, the listed terms are defined as follows: Acfm: ASME Code or equivalent: ATA: Bell: Bottom time: Bursting pressure: Cylinder: Decompression chamber: Decompression sickness: Decompression table: Dive-guiding operations Dive location: Dive-location reserve breathing gas: Dive team: Diver: Diver-carried reserve breathing gas: Diving mode: Fsw: Heavy gear: Hyperbaric conditions: Inwater stage: Liveboating: Mixed-gas diving: No-decompression limits: Psi(g): Recreational diving instruction Scientific diving SCUBA diving: Standby diver: Surface-supplied air diving: Treatment table: Umbilical: Volume tank: Working pressure: [42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 53365, Nov. 26, 1982; 69 FR 7363, Feb. 17, 2004] Personnel Requirements § 1910.410 Qualifications of dive team. (a) General. (2) Each dive team member shall have experience or training in the following: (i) The use of tools, equipment and systems relevant to assigned tasks; (ii) Techniques of the assigned diving mode: and (iii) Diving operations and emergency procedures. (3) All dive team members shall be trained in cardiopulmonary resuscitation and first aid (American Red Cross standard course or equivalent). (4) Dive team members who are exposed to or control the exposure of others to hyperbaric conditions shall be trained in diving-related physics and physiology. (b) Assignments. (2) The employer shall not require a dive team member to be exposed to hyperbaric conditions against the employee's will, except when necessary to complete decompression or treatment procedures. (3) The employer shall not permit a dive team member to dive or be otherwise exposed to hyperbaric conditions for the duration of any temporary physical impairment or condition which is known to the employer and is likely to affect adversely the safety or health of a dive team member. (c) Designated person-in-charge. (2) The designated person-in-charge shall have experience and training in the conduct of the assigned diving operation. General Operations Procedures § 1910.420 Safe practices manual. (a) General. (b) Contents. (2) For each diving mode engaged in, the safe practices manual shall include: (i) Safety procedures and checklists for diving operations; (ii) Assignments and responsibilities of the dive team members; (iii) Equipment procedures and checklists; and (iv) Emergency procedures for fire, equipment failure, adverse environmental conditions, and medical illness and injury. [42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984] § 1910.421 Pre-dive procedures. (a) General. (b) Emergency aid. (1) An operational decompression chamber (if not at the dive location); (2) Accessible hospitals; (3) Available physicians; (4) Available means of transportation; and (5) The nearest U.S. Coast Guard Rescue Coordination Center. (c) First aid supplies. (2) When used in a decompression chamber or bell, the first aid kit shall be suitable for use under hyperbaric conditions. (3) In addition to any other first aid supplies, an American Red Cross standard first aid handbook or equivalent, and a bag-type manual resuscitator with transparent mask and tubing shall be available at the dive location. (d) Planning and assessment. (1) Diving mode; (2) Surface and underwater conditions and hazards; (3) Breathing gas supply (including reserves); (4) Thermal protection; (5) Diving equipment and systems; (6) Dive team assignments and physical fitness of dive team members (including any impairment known to the employer); (7) Repetitive dive designation or residual inert gas status of dive team members; (8) Decompression and treatment procedures (including altitude corrections); and (9) Emergency procedures. (e) Hazardous activities. (f) Employee briefing. (i) The tasks to be undertaken; (ii) Safety procedures for the diving mode; (iii) Any unusual hazards or environmental conditions likely to affect the safety of the diving operation; and (iv) Any modifications to operating procedures necessitated by the specific diving operation. (2) Prior to making individual dive team member assignments, the employer shall inquire into the dive team member's current state of physical fitness, and indicate to the dive team member the procedure for reporting physical problems or adverse physiological effects during and after the dive. (g) Equipment inspection. (h) Warning signal. [42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989] § 1910.422 Procedures during dive. (a) General. (b) Water entry and exit. (2) The means provided for exiting the water shall extend below the water surface. (3) A means shall be provided to assist an injured diver from the water or into a bell. (c) Communications. (i) Each surface-supplied air or mixed-gas diver and a dive team member at the dive location or bell (when provided or required); and (ii) The bell and the dive location. (2) An operational, two-way communication system shall be available at the dive location to obtain emergency assistance. (d) Decompression tables. (e) Dive profiles. (f) Hand-held power tools and equipment. (2) Hand-held power tools shall not be supplied with power from the dive location until requested by the diver. (g) Welding and burning. (i) Tended by a dive team member in voice communication with the diver performing the welding or burning; and (ii) Kept in the open position except when the diver is welding or burning. (2) The welding machine frame shall be grounded. (3) Welding and burning cables, electrode holders, and connections shall be capable of carrying the maximum current required by the work, and shall be properly insulated. (4) Insulated gloves shall be provided to divers performing welding and burning operations. (5) Prior to welding or burning on closed compartments, structures or pipes, which contain a flammable vapor or in which a flammable vapor may be generated by the work, they shall be vented, flooded, or purged with a mixture of gases which will not support combustion. (h) Explosives. (2) Electrical continuity of explosive circuits shall not be tested until the diver is out of the water. (3) Explosives shall not be detonated while the diver is in the water. (i) Termination of dive. (1) A diver requests termination; (2) A diver fails to respond correctly to communications or signals from a dive team member; (3) Communications are lost and can not be quickly re-established between the diver and a dive team member at the dive location, and between the designated person-in-charge and the person controlling the vessel in liveboating operations; or (4) A diver begins to use diver-carried reserve breathing gas or the dive-location reserve breathing gas. § 1910.423 Post-dive procedures. (a) General. (b) Precautions. (i) Check the physical condition of the diver; (ii) Instruct the diver to report any physical problems or adverse physiological effects including symptoms of decompression sickness; (iii) Advise the diver of the location of a decompression chamber which is ready for use; and (iv) Alert the diver to the potential hazards of flying after diving. (2) For any dive outside the no-decompression limits, deeper than 100 fsw or using mixed gas as a breathing mixture, the employer shall instruct the diver to remain awake and in the vicinity of the decompression chamber which is at the dive location for at least one hour after the dive (including decompression or treatment as appropriate). (c) Recompression capability. (i) Surface-supplied air diving to depths deeper than 100 fsw and shallower than 220 fsw; (ii) Mixed gas diving shallower than 300 fsw; or (iii) Diving outside the no-decompression limits shallower than 300 fsw. (2) A decompression chamber capable of recompressing the diver at the surface to the maximum depth of the dive shall be available at the dive location for dives deeper than 300 fsw. (3) The decompression chamber shall be: (i) Dual-lock; (ii) Multiplace; and (iii) Located within 5 minutes of the dive location. (4) The decompression chamber shall be equipped with: (i) A pressure gauge for each pressurized compartment designed for human occupancy; (ii) A built-in-breathing-system with a minimum of one mask per occupant; (iii) A two-way voice communication system between occupants and a dive team member at the dive location; (iv) A viewport; and (v) Illumination capability to light the interior. (5) Treatment tables, treatment gas appropriate to the diving mode, and sufficient gas to conduct treatment shall be available at the dive location. (6) A dive team member shall be available at the dive location during and for at least one hour after the dive to operate the decompression chamber (when required or provided). (d) Record of dive. (i) Names of dive team members including designated person-in-charge; (ii) Date, time, and location; (iii) Diving modes used; (iv) General nature of work performed; (v) Approximate underwater and surface conditions (visibility, water temperature and current); and (vi) Maximum depth and bottom time for each diver. (2) For each dive outside the no-decompression limits, deeper than 100 fsw or using mixed gas, the following additional information shall be recorded and maintained: (i) Depth-time and breathing gas profiles; (ii) Decompression table designation (including modification); and (iii) Elapsed time since last pressure exposure if less than 24 hours or repetitive dive designation for each diver. (3) For each dive in which decompression sickness is suspected or symptoms are evident, the following additional information shall be recorded and maintained: (i) Description of decompression sickness symptoms (including depth and time of onset); and (ii) Description and results of treatment. (e) Decompression procedure assessment. (1) Investigate and evaluate each incident of decompression sickness based on the recorded information, consideration of the past performance of decompression table used, and individual susceptibility; (2) Take appropriate corrective action to reduce the probability of recurrence of decompression sickness; and (3) Prepare a written evaluation of the decompression procedure assessment, including any corrective action taken, within 45 days of the incident of decompression sickness. [42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984] Specific Operations Procedures § 1910.424 SCUBA diving. (a) General. (b) Limits. (1) At depths deeper than 130 fsw; (2) At depths deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression limits unless a decompression chamber is ready for use; (3) Against currents exceeding one (1) knot unless line-tended; or (4) In enclosed or physically confining spaces unless line-tended. (c) Procedures. (2) A diver shall be line-tended from the surface, or accompanied by another diver in the water in continuous visual contact during the diving operations. (3) A diver shall be stationed at the underwater point of entry when diving is conducted in enclosed or physically confining spaces. (4) A diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided for each diver consisting of: (i) A manual reserve (J valve); or (ii) An independent reserve cylinder with a separate regulator or connected to the underwater breathing apparatus. (5) The valve of the reserve breathing gas supply shall be in the closed position prior to the dive. § 1910.425 Surface-supplied air diving. (a) General. (b) Limits. (2) A decompression chamber shall be ready for use at the dive location for any dive outside the no-decompression limits or deeper than 100 fsw. (3) A bell shall be used for dives with an inwater decompression time greater than 120 minutes, except when heavy gear is worn or diving is conducted in physically confining spaces. (c) Procedures. (2) A diver shall be stationed at the underwater point of entry when diving is conducted in enclosed or physically confining spaces. (3) Each diving operation shall have a primary breathing gas supply sufficient to support divers for the duration of the planned dive including decompression. (4) For dives deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression limits: (i) A separate dive team member shall tend each diver in the water; (ii) A standby diver shall be available while a diver is in the water; (iii) A diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided for each diver except when heavy gear is worn; and (iv) A dive-location reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided. (5) For heavy-gear diving deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression limits: (i) An extra breathing gas hose capable of supplying breathing gas to the diver in the water shall be available to the standby diver. (ii) An inwater stage shall be provided to divers in the water. (6) Except when heavy gear is worn or where physical space does not permit, a diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided whenever the diver is prevented by the configuration of the dive area from ascending directly to the surface. § 1910.426 Mixed-gas diving. (a) General. (b) Limits. (1) A decompression chamber is ready for use at the dive location; and (i) A bell is used at depths greater than 220 fsw or when the dive involves inwater decompression time of greater than 120 minutes, except when heavy gear is worn or when diving in physically confining spaces; or (ii) A closed bell is used at depths greater than 300 fsw, except when diving is conducted in physically confining spaces. (c) Procedures. (2) A standby diver shall be available while a diver is in the water. (3) A diver shall be stationed at the underwater point of entry when diving is conducted in enclosed or physically confining spaces. (4) Each diving operation shall have a primary breathing gas supply sufficient to support divers for the duration of the planned dive including decompression. (5) Each diving operation shall have a dive-location reserve breathing gas supply. (6) When heavy gear is worn: (i) An extra breathing gas hose capable of supplying breathing gas to the diver in the water shall be available to the standby diver; and (ii) An inwater stage shall be provided to divers in the water. (7) An inwater stage shall be provided for divers without access to a bell for dives deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression limits. (8) When a closed bell is used, one dive team member in the bell shall be available and tend the diver in the water. (9) Except when heavy gear is worn or where physical space does not permit, a diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided for each diver: (i) Diving deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression limits; or (ii) Prevented by the configuration of the dive area from directly ascending to the surface. § 1910.427 Liveboating. (a) General. (b) Limits. (1) With an inwater decompression time of greater than 120 minutes; (2) Using surface-supplied air at depths deeper than 190 fsw, except that dives with bottom times of 30 minutes or less may be conducted to depths of 220 fsw; (3) Using mixed gas at depths greater than 220 fsw; (4) In rough seas which significantly inpede diver mobility or work function; or (5) In other than daylight hours. (c) Procedures. (2) A device shall be used which minimizes the possibility of entanglement of the diver's hose in the propeller of the vessel. (3) Two-way voice communication between the designated person-in-charge and the person controlling the vessel shall be available while the diver is in the water. (4) A standby diver shall be available while a diver is in the water. (5) A diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be carried by each diver engaged in liveboating operations. Equipment Procedures and Requirements § 1910.430 Equipment. (a) General. (2) Each equipment modification, repair, test, calibration or maintenance service shall be recorded by means of a tagging or logging system, and include the date and nature of work performed, and the name or initials of the person performing the work. (b) Air compressor system. (2) Air compressor intakes shall be located away from areas containing exhaust or other contaminants. (3) Respirable air supplied to a diver shall not contain: (i) A level of carbon monoxide (CO) greater than 20 p/m; (ii) A level of carbon dioxide (CO 2 (iii) A level of oil mist greater than 5 milligrams per cubic meter; or (iv) A noxious or pronounced odor. (4) The output of air compressor systems shall be tested for air purity every 6 months by means of samples taken at the connection to the distribution system, except that non-oil lubricated compressors need not be tested for oil mist. (c) Breathing gas supply hoses. (i) Have a working pressure at least equal to the working pressure of the total breathing gas system; (ii) Have a rated bursting pressure at least equal to 4 times the working pressure; (iii) Be tested at least annually to 1.5 times their working pressure; and (iv) Have their open ends taped, capped or plugged when not in use. (2) Breathing gas supply hose connectors shall: (i) Be made of corrosion-resistant materials; (ii) Have a working pressure at least equal to the working pressure of the hose to which they are attached; and (iii) Be resistant to accidental disengagement. (3) Umbilicals shall: (i) Be marked in 10-ft. increments to 100 feet beginning at the diver's end, and in 50 ft. increments thereafter; (ii) Be made of kink-resistant materials; and (iii) Have a working pressure greater than the pressure equivalent to the maximum depth of the dive (relative to the supply source) plus 100 psi. (d) Buoyancy control. (2) A dry suit or other buoyancy-changing equipment not directly connected to the helmet or mask shall be equipped with an exhaust valve. (3) When used for SCUBA diving, a buoyancy compensator shall have an inflation source separate from the breathing gas supply. (4) An inflatable flotation device capable of maintaining the diver at the surface in a face-up position, having a manually activated inflation source independent of the breathing supply, an oral inflation device, and an exhaust valve shall be used for SCUBA diving. (e) Compressed gas cylinders. (1) Be designed, constructed and maintained in accordance with the applicable provisions of 29 CFR 1910.101 and 1910.169 through 1910.171. (2) Be stored in a ventilated area and protected from excessive heat; (3) Be secured from falling; and (4) Have shut-off valves recessed into the cylinder or protected by a cap, except when in use or manifolded, or when used for SCUBA diving. (f) Decompression chambers. (2) Each decompression chamber manufactured prior to the effective date of this standard shall be maintained in conformity with the code requirements to which it was built, or equivalent. (3) Each decompression chamber shall be equipped with: (i) Means to maintain the atmosphere below a level of 25 percent oxygen by volume; (ii) Mufflers on intake and exhaust lines, which shall be regularly inspected and maintained; (iii) Suction guards on exhaust line openings; and (iv) A means for extinguishing fire, and shall be maintained to minimize sources of ignition and combustible material. (g) Gauges and timekeeping devices. (2) Each depth gauge shall be deadweight tested or calibrated against a master reference gauge every 6 months, and when there is a discrepancy greater than two percent (2 percent) of full scale between any two equivalent gauges. (3) A cylinder pressure gauge capable of being monitored by the diver during the dive shall be worn by each SCUBA diver. (4) A timekeeping device shall be available at each dive location. (h) Masks and helmets. (i) A non-return valve at the attachment point between helmet or mask and hose which shall close readily and positively; and (ii) An exhaust valve. (2) Surface-supplied air masks and helmets shall have a minimum ventilation rate capability of 4.5 acfm at any depth at which they are operated or the capability of maintaining the diver's inspired carbon dioxide partial pressure below 0.02 ATA when the diver is producing carbon dioxide at the rate of 1.6 standard liters per minute. (i) Oxygen safety. (2) Components (except umbilicals) exposed to oxygen or mixtures containing over forty percent (40%) by volume oxygen shall be cleaned of flammable materials before use. (3) Oxygen systems over 125 psig and compressed air systems over 500 psig shall have slow-opening shut-off valves. (j) Weights and harnesses. (2) Except when heavy gear is worn or in SCUBA diving, each diver shall wear a safety harness with: (i) A positive buckling device; (ii) An attachment point for the umbilical to prevent strain on the mask or helmet; and (iii) A lifting point to distribute the pull force of the line over the diver's body. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 51 FR 33033, Sept. 18, 1986] Recordkeeping § 1910.440 Recordkeeping requirements. (a)(1) [Reserved] (2) The employer shall record the occurrence of any diving-related injury or illness which requires any dive team member to be hospitalized for 24 hours or more, specifying the circumstances of the incident and the extent of any injuries or illnesses. (b) Availability of records. (2) Records and documents required by this standard shall be provided upon request to employees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a)-(e) and (g)-(i). Safe practices manuals (§ 1910.420), depth-time profiles (§ 1910.422), recordings of dives (§ 1910.423), decompression procedure assessment evaluations (§ 1910.423), and records of hospitalizations (§ 1910.440) shall be provided in the same manner as employee exposure records or analyses using exposure or medical records. Equipment inspections and testing records which pertain to employees (§ 1910.430) shall also be provided upon request to employees and their designated representatives. (3) Records and documents required by this standard shall be retained by the employer for the following period: (i) [Reserved] (ii) Safe practices manual (§ 1910.420)—current document only; (iii) Depth-time profile (§ 1910.422)—until completion of the recording of dive, or until completion of decompression procedure assessment where there has been an incident of decompression sickness; (iv) Recording of dive (§ 1910.423)—1 year, except 5 years where there has been an incident of decompression sickness; (v) Decompression procedure assessment evaluations (§ 1910.423)—5 years; (vi) Equipment inspections and testing records (§ 1910.430)—current entry or tag, or until equipment is withdrawn from service; (vii) Records of hospitalizations (§ 1910.440)—5 years. (4) The employer shall comply with any additional requirements set forth at 29 CFR 1910.1020, (5) [Reserved] [42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 45 FR 35281, May 23, 1980; 47 FR 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 51 FR 34562, Sept. 29, 1986; 61 FR 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011; 76 FR 80740, Dec. 27, 2011] Appendix A to Subpart T of Part 1910—Examples of Conditions Which May Restrict or Limit Exposure to Hyperbaric Conditions The following disorders may restrict or limit occupational exposure to hyperbaric conditions depending on severity, presence of residual effects, response to therapy, number of occurrences, diving mode, or degree and duration of isolation. History of seizure disorder other than early febrile convulsions. Malignancies (active) unless treated and without recurrence for 5 yrs. Chronic inability to equalize sinus and/or middle ear pressure. Cystic or cavitary disease of the lungs. Impaired organ function caused by alcohol or drug use. Conditions requiring continuous medication for control (e.g., antihistamines, steroids, barbiturates, moodaltering drugs, or insulin). Meniere's disease. Hemoglobinopathies. Obstructive or restrictive lung disease. Vestibular end organ destruction. Pneumothorax. Cardiac abnormalities (e.g., pathological heart block, valvular disease, intraventricular conduction defects other than isolated right bundle branch block, angina pectoris, arrhythmia, coronary artery disease). Juxta-articular osteonecrosis. Appendix B to Subpart T of Part 1910—Guidelines for Scientific Diving This appendix contains guidelines that will be used in conjunction with § 1910.401(a)(2)(iv) to determine those scientific diving programs which are exempt from the requirements for commercial diving. The guidelines are as follows: 1. The Diving Control Board consists of a majority of active scientific divers and has autonomous and absolute authority over the scientific diving program's operations. 2. The purpose of the project using scientific diving is the advancement of science; therefore, information and data resulting from the project are non-proprietary. 3. The tasks of a scientific diver are those of an observer and data gatherer. Construction and trouble-shooting tasks traditionally associated with commercial diving are not included within scientific diving. 4. Scientific divers, based on the nature of their activities, must use scientific expertise in studying the underwater environment and, therefore, are scientists or scientists in training. [50 FR 1050, Jan. 9, 1985] Appendix C to Subpart T of Part 1910—Alternative Conditions Under § 1910.401( a Paragraph (a)(3) of § 1910.401 specifies that an employer of recreational diving instructors and diving guides (hereafter, “divers” or “employees”) who complies with all of the conditions of this appendix need not provide a decompression chamber for these divers as required under §§ 1910.423(b)(2) or (c)(3) or 1910.426(b)(1). 1. Equipment Requirements for Rebreathers (a) The employer must ensure that each employee operates the rebreather ( i.e., (b) The employer must ensure that each rebreather has a counterlung that supplies a sufficient volume of breathing gas to their divers to sustain the divers' respiration rates, and contains a baffle system and/or other moisture separating system that keeps moisture from entering the scrubber. (c) The employer must place a moisture trap in the breathing loop of the rebreather, and ensure that: (i) The rebreather manufacturer approves both the moisture trap and its location in the breathing loop; and (ii) Each employee uses the moisture trap according to the rebreather manufacturer's instructions. (d) The employer must ensure that each rebreather has a continuously functioning moisture sensor, and that: (i) The moisture sensor connects to a visual ( e.g., e.g., (ii) Each diver uses the moisture sensor according to the rebreather manufacturer's instructions. (e) The employer must ensure that each rebreather contains a continuously functioning CO 2 (i) The rebreather manufacturer approves the location of the CO 2 (ii) The CO 2 e.g., e.g., (iii) The CO 2 2 (f) Before each day's diving operations, and more often when necessary, the employer must calibrate the CO 2 (i) The equipment and procedures used to perform this calibration are accurate to within 10% of a CO 2 (ii) The equipment and procedures maintain this accuracy as required by the sensor manufacturer's instructions; and (iii) The calibration of the CO 2 2 (g) The employer must replace the CO 2 2 (h) As an alternative to using a continuously functioning CO 2 2 (i) When using CO 2 i.e., 2 (i) Is approved by the rebreather manufacturer; (ii) Removes CO 2 (iii) Maintains the CO 2 i.e., (j) As an alternative to manufactured, disposable scrubber cartridges, the employer may fill CO 2 2 (i) The rebreather manufacturer permits manual filling of scrubber cartridges; (ii) The employer fills the scrubber cartridges according to the rebreather manufacturer's instructions; (iii) The employer replaces the CO 2 (iv) The employer demonstrates that manual filling meets the requirements specified in paragraph 1(i) of this appendix. (k) The employer must ensure that each rebreather has an information module that provides: (i) A visual ( e.g., e.g., e.g., (ii) For a semi-closed circuit rebreather, a visual display for the partial pressure of CO 2 2 (iii) For a closed-circuit rebreather, a visual display for: partial pressures of O 2 2 2 2 (l) Before each day's diving operations, and more often when necessary, the employer must ensure that the electrical power supply and electrical and electronic circuits in each rebreather are operating as required by the rebreather manufacturer's instructions. 2. Special Requirements for Closed-Circuit Rebreathers (a) The employer must ensure that each closed-circuit rebreather uses supply-pressure sensors for the O 2 i.e., (b) The employer must ensure that: (i) At least two O 2 (ii) The O 2 (c) Before each day's diving operations, and more often when necessary, the employer must calibrate O 2 (i) Ensure that the equipment and procedures used to perform the calibration are accurate to within 1% of the O 2 (ii) Maintain this accuracy as required by the manufacturer of the calibration equipment; (iii) Ensure that the sensors are accurate to within 1% of the O 2 (iv) Replace O 2 (v) Ensure that the replacement O 2 (d) The employer must ensure that each closed-circuit rebreather has: (i) A gas-controller package with electrically operated solenoid O 2 (ii) A pressure-activated regulator with a second-stage diluent-gas addition valve; (iii) A manually operated gas-supply bypass valve to add O 2 (iv) Separate O 2 3. O 2 The employer must ensure that the fraction of O 2 (a) Is greater than the fraction of O 2 i.e., (b) For open-circuit SCUBA, never exceeds a maximum fraction of breathable O 2 2 2 (c) For a rebreather, never exceeds a maximum O 2 4. Regulating O 2 (a) Regarding O 2 (i) Ensure that the exposure of each diver to partial pressures of O 2 (ii) Determine a diver's O 2 2 2 i.e., (b) Regardless of the diving equipment used, the employer must ensure that no diver exceeds a depth of 130 feet of sea water (“fsw”) or a maximum O 2 2 5. Use of No-Decompression Limits (a) For diving conducted while using nitrox breathing-gas mixtures, the employer must ensure that each diver remains within the no-decompression limits specified for single and repetitive air diving and published in the 2001 NOAA Diving Manual or the report entitled “Development and Validation of No-Stop Decompression Procedures for Recreational Diving: The DSAT Recreational Dive Planner,” published in 1994 by Hamilton Research Ltd. (known commonly as the “1994 DSAT No-Decompression Tables”). (b) An employer may permit a diver to use a dive-decompression computer designed to regulate decompression when the dive-decompression computer uses the no-decompression limits specified in paragraph 5(a) of this appendix, and provides output that reliably represents those limits. 6. Mixing and Analyzing the Breathing Gas (a) The employer must ensure that: (i) Properly trained personnel mix nitrox-breathing gases, and that nitrogen is the only inert gas used in the breathing-gas mixture; and (ii) When mixing nitrox-breathing gases, they mix the appropriate breathing gas before delivering the mixture to the breathing-gas cylinders, using the continuous-flow or partial-pressure mixing techniques specified in the 2001 NOAA Diving Manual, or using a filter-membrane system. (b) Before the start of each day's diving operations, the employer must determine the O 2 2 (i) Ensure that the O 2 2 (ii) Maintain this accuracy as required by the manufacturer of the analyzer. (c) When the breathing gas is a commercially supplied nitrox breathing-gas mixture, the employer must ensure that the O 2 (i) Determine the O 2 2 (ii) Make this determination when the mixture is in the charged tank and after disconnecting the charged tank from the charging apparatus; (iii) Include documentation of the O 2 2 (d) Before producing nitrox breathing-gas mixtures using a compressor in which the gas pressure in any system component exceeds 125 pounds per square inch (psi), the: (i) Compressor manufacturer must provide the employer with documentation that the compressor is suitable for mixing high-pressure air with the highest O 2 (ii) Employer must comply with paragraph 6(e) of this appendix, unless the compressor is rated for O 2 (iii) Employer must ensure that the compressor meets the requirements specified in paragraphs (i)(1) and (i)(2) of § 1910.430 whenever the highest O 2 (e) Before producing nitrox breathing-gas mixtures using an oil-lubricated compressor to mix high-pressure air with O 2 (i) Employer must use only uncontaminated air ( i.e., (ii) Compressor manufacturer must provide the employer with documentation that the compressor is suitable for mixing the high-pressure air with the highest O 2 (iii) Employer must filter the high-pressure air to produce O 2 (iv) The filter-system manufacturer must provide the employer with documentation that the filter system used for this purpose is suitable for producing O 2 (v) Employer must continuously monitor the air downstream from the filter for hydrocarbon contamination. (f) The employer must ensure that diving equipment using nitrox breathing-gas mixtures or pure O 2 i.e., 2 7. Emergency Egress (a) Regardless of the type of diving equipment used by a diver ( i.e., (b) As an alternative to the “bail-out” system specified in paragraph 7(a) of this appendix, the employer may use: (i) For open-circuit SCUBA, an emergency-egress system as specified in § 1910.424(c)(4); or (ii) For a semi-closed-circuit and closed-circuit rebreather, a system configured so that the second stage of the regulator connects to a reserve supply of emergency breathing gas. (c) The employer must obtain from the rebreather manufacturer sufficient information to ensure that the bail-out system performs reliably and has sufficient capacity to enable the diver to terminate the dive and return safely to the surface. 8. Treating Diving-Related Medical Emergencies (a) Before each day's diving operations, the employer must: (i) Verify that a hospital, qualified health-care professionals, and the nearest Coast Guard Coordination Center (or an equivalent rescue service operated by a state, county, or municipal agency) are available to treat diving-related medical emergencies; (ii) Ensure that each dive site has a means to alert these treatment resources in a timely manner when a diving-related medical emergency occurs; and (iii) Ensure that transportation to a suitable decompression chamber is readily available when no decompression chamber is at the dive site, and that this transportation can deliver the injured diver to the decompression chamber within four (4) hours travel time from the dive site. (b) The employer must ensure that portable O 2 (i) The equipment delivers medical-grade O 2 (ii) The equipment delivers this O 2 (iii) Sufficient O 2 (c) Before each day's diving operations, the employer must: (i) Ensure that at least two attendants, either employees or non-employees, qualified in first-aid and administering O 2 (ii) Verify their qualifications for this task. 9. Diving Logs and No-Decompression Tables (a) Before starting each day's diving operations, the employer must: (i) Designate an employee or a non-employee to make entries in a diving log; and (ii) Verify that this designee understands the diving and medical terminology, and proper procedures, for making correct entries in the diving log. (b) The employer must: (i) Ensure that the diving log conforms to the requirements specified by paragraph (d) (“Record of dive”) of § 1910.423; and (ii) Maintain a record of the dive according to § 1910.440 (“Recordkeeping requirements”). (c) The employer must ensure that a hard-copy of the no-decompression tables used for the dives (as specified in paragraph 6(a) of this appendix) is readily available at the dive site, whether or not the divers use dive-decompression computers. 10. Diver Training The employer must ensure that each diver receives training that enables the diver to perform work safely and effectively while using open-circuit SCUBAs or rebreathers supplied with nitrox breathing-gas mixtures. Accordingly, each diver must be able to demonstrate the ability to perform critical tasks safely and effectively, including, but not limited to: recognizing the effects of breathing excessive CO 2 2 2 2 11. Testing Protocol for Determining the CO 2 (a) The employer must ensure that the rebreather manufacturer has used the following procedures for determining that the CO 2 (i) The North Atlantic Treating Organization CO 2 (ii) The RoTap shaker and nested-sieves test; (iii) The Navy Experimental Diving Unit (“NEDU”)-derived Schlegel test; and (iv) The NEDU MeshFit software. (b) The employer must ensure that the rebreather manufacturer has applied the following canister-testing materials, methods, procedures, and statistical analyses: (i) Use of a nitrox breathing-gas mixture that has an O 2 2 2 (ii) While operating the rebreather at a maximum depth of 130 fsw, use of a breathing machine to continuously ventilate the rebreather with breathing gas that is at 100% humidity and warmed to a temperature of 98.6 degrees F (37 degrees C) in the heating-humidification chamber; (iii) Measurement of the O 2 (iv) Testing of the canisters using the three ventilation rates listed in Table I below (with the required breathing-machine tidal volumes and frequencies, and CO 2 Table I—Canister Testing Parameters Ventilation rates (Lpm, ATPS 1 Breathing machine Breathing machine CO 2 2 22.5 1.5 15 0.90 40.0 2.0 20 1.35 62.5 2.5 25 2.25 1 2 (v) When using a work rate ( i.e., 2 (vi) Performance of the CO 2 (vii) Determination of canister duration using a minimum of four (4) water temperatures, including 40, 50, 70, and 90 degrees F (4.4, 10.0, 21.1, and 32.2 degrees C, respectively); (viii) Monitoring of the breathing-gas temperature at the rebreather mouthpiece (at the “chrome T” connector), and ensuring that this temperature conforms to the temperature of a diver's exhaled breath at the water temperature and ventilation rate used during the testing trial; 1 1 (ix) Implementation of at least eight (8) testing trials for each combination of temperature and ventilation-CO 2 2 (x) Allowing the water temperature to vary no more than ±2.0 degrees F (±1.0 degree C) between within (xi) Use of the average temperature for each set of eight testing trials in the statistical analysis of the testing-trial results, with the testing-trial results being the time taken for the inhaled breathing gas to reach 0.005 ATA of CO 2 i.e., (xii) Analysis of the canister-duration results using the repeated-measures statistics described in NEDU Report 2-99; (xiii) Specification of the replacement schedule for the CO 2 (xiv) Derivation of replacement schedules only by interpolating among, but not by extrapolating beyond, the depth, water temperatures, and exercise levels used during canister testing. [69 FR 7363, Feb. 17, 2004] Subpart U—COVID-19 Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 8-2020 (85 FR 58393); 29 CFR part 1911; and 5 U.S.C. 553. Source: 86 FR 32620, June 21, 2021, unless otherwise noted. § 1910.501 [Reserved] § 1910.502 Healthcare. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section does not apply to the following: (i) The provision of first aid by an employee who is not a licensed healthcare provider; (ii) The dispensing of prescriptions by pharmacists in retail settings; (iii) Non-hospital ambulatory care settings where all non-employees are screened prior to entry and people with suspected or confirmed COVID-19 are not permitted to enter those settings; (iv) Well-defined hospital ambulatory care settings where all employees are fully vaccinated and all non-employees are screened prior to entry and people with suspected or confirmed COVID-19 are not permitted to enter those settings; (v) Home healthcare settings where all employees are fully vaccinated and all non-employees are screened prior to entry and people with suspected or confirmed COVID-19 are not present; (vi) Healthcare support services not performed in a healthcare setting ( e.g., (vii) Telehealth services performed outside of a setting where direct patient care occurs. Note to paragraph ( a OSHA does not intend to preclude the employers of employees who are unable to be vaccinated from the scope exemption in paragraphs (a)(2)(iv) and (v) of this section. Under various anti-discrimination laws, workers who cannot be vaccinated because of medical conditions, such as allergies to vaccine ingredients, or certain religious beliefs may ask for a reasonable accommodation from their employer. Accordingly, where an employer reasonably accommodates an employee who is unable to be vaccinated in a manner that does not expose the employee to COVID-19 hazards ( e.g., (3)(i) Where a healthcare setting is embedded within a non-healthcare setting ( e.g., (ii) Where emergency responders or other licensed healthcare providers enter a non-healthcare setting to provide healthcare services, this section applies only to the provision of the healthcare services by that employee. (4) In well-defined areas where there is no reasonable expectation that any person with suspected or confirmed COVID-19 will be present, paragraphs (f), (h), and (i) of this section do not apply to employees who are fully vaccinated. Note 1 to paragraph ( a Nothing in this section is intended to limit state or local government mandates or guidance ( e.g., Note 2 to paragraph ( a Employers are encouraged to follow public health guidance from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) even when not required by this section. (b) Definitions. Aerosol-generating procedure e.g., Airborne infection isolation room (AIIR) e.g., Ambulatory care e.g., Assistant Secretary Clean/cleaning Close contact Common areas e.g., COVID-19 (Coronavirus Disease 2019) COVID-19 positive confirmed COVID-19 COVID-19 symptoms COVID-19 test (i) Cleared or approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) or is authorized by an Emergency Use Authorization (EUA) from the FDA to diagnose current infection with the SARS-CoV-2 virus; and (ii) Administered in accordance with the FDA clearance or approval or the FDA EUA as applicable. Direct patient care Disinfect/disinfection Elastomeric respirator Facemask Face shield (i) Is certified to ANSI/ISEA Z87.1 (incorporated by reference, § 1910.509); or (ii) Covers the wearer's eyes, nose, and mouth to protect from splashes, sprays, and spatter of body fluids, wraps around the sides of the wearer's face ( i.e., Filtering facepiece respirator Fully vaccinated Hand hygiene Healthcare services e.g., Healthcare support services High-touch surfaces and equipment e.g., Physical location e.g., e.g., Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) Respirator Screen Surgical mask Vaccine Workplace e.g., (c) COVID-19 plan. Note to paragraph ( c For those employers who do not already have a COVID-19 plan in place, OSHA's website contains significant compliance assistance materials, including a model plan. (2) If the employer has more than 10 employees, the COVID-19 plan must be written. (3) The employer must designate one or more workplace COVID-19 safety coordinators to implement and monitor the COVID-19 plan developed under this section. The COVID-19 safety coordinator(s) must be knowledgeable in infection control principles and practices as they apply to the workplace and employee job operations. The identity of the safety coordinator(s) must be documented in any written COVID-19 plan. The safety coordinator(s) must have the authority to ensure compliance with all aspects of the COVID-19 plan. (4)(i) The employer must conduct a workplace-specific hazard assessment to identify potential workplace hazards related to COVID-19. (ii) In order for an employer to be exempt from providing controls in a well-defined area under paragraph (a)(4) of this section based on employees' fully vaccinated status, the COVID-19 plan must include policies and procedures to determine employees' vaccination status. (5) The employer must seek the input and involvement of non-managerial employees and their representatives, if any, in the hazard assessment and the development and implementation of the COVID-19 plan. (6) The employer must monitor each workplace to ensure the ongoing effectiveness of the COVID-19 plan and update it as needed. (7) The COVID-19 plan must address the hazards identified by the assessment required by paragraph (c)(4) of this section, and include policies and procedures to: (i) Minimize the risk of transmission of COVID-19 for each employee, as required by paragraphs (d) through (n) of this section; Note to paragraph ( c i Although the employer's COVID-19 plan must account for the potential COVID-19 exposures to each employee, the plan can do so generally and need not address each employee individually. (ii) Effectively communicate and coordinate with other employers: (A) When employees of different employers share the same physical location, each employer must effectively communicate its COVID-19 plan to all other employers, coordinate to ensure that each of its employees is protected as required by this section, and adjust its COVID-19 plan to address any particular COVID-19 hazards presented by the other employees. This requirement does not apply to delivery people, messengers, and other employees who only enter a workplace briefly to drop off or pick up items. (B) An employer with one or more employees working in a physical location controlled by another employer must notify the controlling employer when those employees are exposed to conditions at that location that do not meet the requirements of this section; and (iii) Protect employees who in the course of their employment enter into private residences or other physical locations controlled by a person not covered by the OSH Act ( e.g., Note to paragraph ( c The employer may include other policies, procedures, or information necessary to comply with any applicable federal, state, or local public health laws, standards, and guidelines in their COVID-19 plan. (d) Patient screening and management. (1) Limit and monitor points of entry to the setting. This provision does not apply where emergency responders or other licensed healthcare providers enter a non-healthcare setting to provide healthcare services. (2) Screen and triage all clients, patients, residents, delivery people and other visitors, and other non-employees entering the setting. (3) Implement other applicable patient management strategies in accordance with CDC's “COVID-19 Infection Prevention and Control Recommendations” (incorporated by reference, § 1910.509). Note to paragraph ( d The employer is encouraged to use telehealth services where available and appropriate in order to limit the number of people entering the workplace. (e) Standard and Transmission-Based Precautions. (f) Personal protective equipment (PPE) Facemasks. (ii) The employer must ensure a facemask is worn by each employee over the nose and mouth when indoors and when occupying a vehicle with other people for work purposes. The employer must provide a sufficient number of facemasks to each employee to comply with this paragraph and must ensure that each employee changes them at least once per day, whenever they are soiled or damaged, and more frequently as necessary ( e.g., (iii) The following are exceptions to the requirements for facemasks in paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section: (A) When an employee is alone in a room. (B) While an employee is eating and drinking at the workplace, provided each employee is at least 6 feet away from any other person, or separated from other people by a physical barrier. (C) When employees are wearing respiratory protection in accordance with § 1910.134 or paragraph (f) of this section. (D) When it is important to see a person's mouth ( e.g., (E) When employees cannot wear facemasks due to a medical necessity, medical condition, or disability as defined in the Americans with Disabilities Act (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq. et seq. (F) When the employer can demonstrate that the use of a facemask presents a hazard to an employee of serious injury or death ( e.g., Note to paragraph ( f iii F With respect to paragraphs (f)(1)(iii)(D) through (F) of this section, the employer may determine that the use of face shields, without facemasks, in certain settings is not appropriate due to other infection control concerns. (iv) Where a face shield is required to comply with this paragraph or is otherwise required by the employer, the employer must ensure that face shields are cleaned at least daily and are not damaged. When an employee provides a face shield that meets the definition in paragraph (b) of this section, the employer may allow the employee to use it and is not required to reimburse the employee for that face shield. (2) Respirators and other PPE for exposure to people with suspected or confirmed COVID-19. (i) A respirator to each employee and ensure that it is provided and used in accordance with § 1910.134 and (ii) Gloves, an isolation gown or protective clothing, and eye protection to each employee and ensure that the PPE is used in accordance with subpart I of this part. Note to paragraph ( f When there is a limited supply of filtering facepiece respirators, employers may follow the CDC's “Strategies for Optimizing the Supply of N95 Respirators” (available at: https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/hcp/respirators-strategy/index.html (3) Respirators and other PPE during aerosol-generating procedures. (i) A respirator to each employee and ensure that it is provided and used in accordance with § 1910.134; and (ii) Gloves, an isolation gown or protective clothing, and eye protection to each employee and ensure that the PPE is used in accordance with subpart I of this part. Note 1 to paragraph ( f For aerosol-generating procedures on a person suspected or confirmed with COVID-19, employers are encouraged to select elastomeric respirators or PAPRs instead of filtering facepiece respirators. Note 2 to paragraph ( f Additional requirements specific to aerosol-generating procedures on people with suspected or confirmed COVID-19 are contained in paragraph (g) of this section. (4) Use of respirators when not required. (ii) Where the employer provides the employee with a facemask as required by paragraph (f)(1) of this section, the employer must permit the employee to wear their own respirator instead of a facemask. In such circumstances, the employer must also comply with § 1910.504. (5) Respirators and other PPE based on Standard and Transmission-Based Precautions. e.g., (g) Aerosol-generating procedures on a person with suspected or confirmed COVID-19. (1) The employer must limit the number of employees present during the procedure to only those essential for patient care and procedure support. (2) The employer must ensure that the procedure is performed in an existing AIIR, if available. (3) After the procedure is completed, the employer must clean and disinfect the surfaces and equipment in the room or area where the procedure was performed. Note to paragraph ( g Respirators and other PPE requirements during aerosol-generating procedures are contained in paragraph (f)(3) of this section. (h) Physical distancing. e.g., e.g., (2) When the employer establishes it is not feasible for an employee to maintain a distance of at least 6 feet from all other people, the employer must ensure that the employee is as far apart from all other people as feasible. Note to paragraph ( h Physical distancing can include methods such as: Telehealth; telework or other remote work arrangements; reducing the number of people, including non-employees, in an area at one time; visual cues such as signs and floor markings to indicate where employees and others should be located or their direction and path of travel; staggered arrival, departure, work, and break times; and adjusted work processes or procedures to allow greater distance between employees. (i) Physical barriers. e.g., e.g., Note to paragraph ( i Physical barriers are not required in direct patient care areas or resident rooms. (j) Cleaning and disinfection. (2) In all other areas, the employer must: (i) Clean high-touch surfaces and equipment at least once a day, following manufacturers' instructions for application of cleaners; and (ii) When the employer is aware that a person who is COVID-19 positive has been in the workplace within the last 24 hours, clean and disinfect, in accordance with CDC's “Cleaning and Disinfecting Guidance” (incorporated by reference, § 1910.509), any areas, materials, and equipment under the employer's control that have likely been contaminated by the person who is COVID-19 positive ( e.g., (3) The employer must provide alcohol-based hand rub that is at least 60% alcohol or provide readily accessible hand washing facilities. (k) Ventilation. (i) The HVAC system(s) is used in accordance with the HVAC manufacturer's instructions and the design specifications of the HVAC system(s); (ii) The amount of outside air circulated through its HVAC system(s) and the number of air changes per hour are maximized to the extent appropriate; (iii) All air filters are rated Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) 13 or higher, if compatible with the HVAC system(s). If MERV-13 or higher filters are not compatible with the HVAC system(s), employers must use filters with the highest compatible filtering efficiency for the HVAC system(s); (iv) All air filters are maintained and replaced as necessary to ensure the proper function and performance of the HVAC system(s); and (v) All intake ports that provide outside air to the HVAC system(s) are cleaned, maintained, and cleared of any debris that may affect the function and performance of the HVAC system(s). (2) Where the employer has an existing AIIR, the employer must maintain and operate it in accordance with its design and construction criteria. Note 1 to paragraph ( k This section does not require installation of new HVAC systems or AIIRs to replace or augment functioning systems. Note 2 to paragraph ( k In addition to the requirements for existing HVAC systems and AIIRs, all employers should also consider other measures to improve ventilation in accordance with “CDC's Ventilation Guidance,” (available at www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/community/ventilation.html e.g., (l) Health screening and medical management Screening. (ii) If a COVID-19 test is required by the employer for screening purposes, the employer must provide the test to each employee at no cost to the employee. (2) Employee notification to employer of COVID-19 illness or symptoms. (i) Is COVID-19 positive ( i.e., (ii) Has been told by a licensed healthcare provider that they are suspected to have COVID-19; or (iii) Is experiencing recent loss of taste and/or smell with no other explanation; or (iv) Is experiencing both fever (≥100.4 °F) and new unexplained cough associated with shortness of breath. (3) Employer notification to employees of COVID-19 exposure in the workplace. (A) Notify each employee who was not wearing a respirator and any other required PPE and has been in close contact with that person in the workplace. The notification must state the fact that the employee was in close contact with someone with COVID-19 along with the date(s) that contact occurred. (B) Notify all other employees who were not wearing a respirator and any other required PPE and worked in a well-defined portion of a workplace ( e.g., (C) Notify other employers whose employees were not wearing respirators and any other required PPE and have been in close contact with that person, or worked in a well-defined portion of a workplace ( e.g., (ii) The notifications required by paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section must not include any employee's name, contact information ( e.g., (iii) The notification provisions are not triggered by the presence of a patient with confirmed COVID-19 in a workplace where services are normally provided to suspected or confirmed COVID-19 patients ( e.g., (4) Medical removal from the workplace. (ii) If the employer knows an employee meets the criteria listed in paragraphs (l)(2)(ii) through (iv) of this section, then the employer must immediately remove that employee and either: (A) Keep the employee removed until they meet the return to work criteria in paragraph (l)(6) of this section; or (B) Keep the employee removed and provide a COVID-19 polymerase chain reaction (PCR) test at no cost to the employee. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 Note to paragraph ( l ii This partial symptom list in paragraphs (l)(2)(iii) and (l)(2)(iv) of this section informs the employer of the minimum requirements for compliance. The full list of COVID-19 symptoms provided by CDC includes additional symptoms not listed in paragraphs (l)(2)(iii) through (iv) of this section. Employers may choose to remove or test employees with additional symptoms from the CDC list, or refer the employees to a healthcare provider. (iii)(A) If the employer is required to notify the employee of close contact in the workplace to a person who is COVID-19 positive in accordance with paragraph (l)(3)(i)(A) of this section, then the employer must immediately remove that employee and either: ( 1 ( 2 ( i ( ii ( iii 1 (B) Employers are not required to remove any employee who would otherwise be required to be removed under paragraph (i)(4)(iii)(A) of this section if the employee does not experience the symptoms in paragraph (l)(2)(iii) or (iv) of this section and has: ( 1 i.e., ( 2 (iv) Any time an employee is required to be removed from the workplace for any reason under paragraph (l)(4) of this section, the employer may require the employee to work remotely or in isolation if suitable work is available. (5) Medical removal protection benefits. (ii) When an employer allows an employee to work remotely or in isolation in accordance with paragraph (l)(4)(iv) of this section, the employer must continue to pay the employee the same regular pay and benefits the employee would have received had the employee not been absent from work, until the employee meets the return to work criteria specified in paragraph (l)(4)(iii) or (l)(6) of this section. (iii) When an employer removes an employee in accordance with paragraph (l)(4) of this section: (A) The employer must continue to provide the benefits to which the employee is normally entitled and must also pay the employee the same regular pay the employee would have received had the employee not been absent from work, up to $1,400 per week, until the employee meets the return to work criteria specified in paragraph (l)(4)(iii) or (l)(6) of this section. (B) For employers with fewer than 500 employees, the employer must pay the employee up to the $1,400 per week cap but, beginning in the third week of an employee's removal, the amount is reduced to only two-thirds of the same regular pay the employee would have received had the employee not been absent from work, up to $200 per day ($1,000 per week in most cases). (iv) The employer's payment obligation under paragraph (l)(5)(iii) of this section is reduced by the amount of compensation that the employee receives from any other source, such as a publicly or employer-funded compensation program ( e.g., (v) Whenever an employee returns to the workplace after a COVID-19-related workplace removal, that employee must not suffer any adverse action as a result of that removal from the workplace and must maintain all employee rights and benefits, including the employee's right to their former job status, as if the employee had not been removed. (6) Return to work. Note to paragraph ( l OSHA recognizes that CDC's “Strategies to Mitigate Healthcare Personnel Staffing Shortages” (available at www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/hcp/mitigating-staff-shortages.html (m) Vaccination. e.g., (n) Training. (i) COVID-19, including how the disease is transmitted (including pre-symptomatic and asymptomatic transmission), the importance of hand hygiene to reduce the risk of spreading COVID-19 infections, ways to reduce the risk of spreading COVID-19 through the proper covering of the nose and mouth, the signs and symptoms of the disease, risk factors for severe illness, and when to seek medical attention; (ii) Employer-specific policies and procedures on patient screening and management; (iii) Tasks and situations in the workplace that could result in COVID-19 infection; (iv) Workplace-specific policies and procedures to prevent the spread of COVID-19 that are applicable to the employee's duties ( e.g., (v) Employer-specific multi-employer workplace agreements related to infection control policies and procedures, the use of common areas, and the use of shared equipment that affect employees at the workplace; (vi) Employer-specific policies and procedures for PPE worn to comply with this section, including: (A) When PPE is required for protection against COVID-19; (B) Limitations of PPE for protection against COVID-19; (C) How to properly put on, wear, and take off PPE; (D) How to properly care for, store, clean, maintain, and dispose of PPE; and (E) Any modifications to donning, doffing, cleaning, storage, maintenance, and disposal procedures needed to address COVID-19 when PPE is worn to address workplace hazards other than COVID-19; (vii) Workplace-specific policies and procedures for cleaning and disinfection; (viii) Employer-specific policies and procedures on health screening and medical management; (ix) Available sick leave policies, any COVID-19-related benefits to which the employee may be entitled under applicable federal, state, or local laws, and other supportive policies and practices ( e.g., (x) The identity of the safety coordinator(s) specified in the COVID-19 plan; (xi) The requirements of this section; and (xii) How the employee can obtain copies of this section and any employer-specific policies and procedures developed under this section, including the employer's written COVID-19 plan, if required. Note to paragraph ( n Employers may rely on training completed prior to the effective date of this section to the extent that it meets the relevant training requirements under this paragraph. (2) The employer must ensure that each employee receives additional training whenever: (i) Changes occur that affect the employee's risk of contracting COVID-19 at work ( e.g., (ii) Policies or procedures are changed; or (iii) There is an indication that the employee has not retained the necessary understanding or skill. (3) The employer must ensure that the training is overseen or conducted by a person knowledgeable in the covered subject matter as it relates to the employee's job duties. (4) The employer must ensure that the training provides an opportunity for interactive questions and answers with a person knowledgeable in the covered subject matter as it relates to the employee's job duties. (o) Anti-Retaliation. (i) Employees have a right to the protections required by this section; and (ii) Employers are prohibited from discharging or in any manner discriminating against any employee for exercising their right to the protections required by this section, or for engaging in actions that are required by this section. (2) The employer must not discharge or in any manner discriminate against any employee for exercising their right to the protections required by this section, or for engaging in actions that are required by this section. Note to paragraph ( o In addition, section 11(c) of the OSH Act also prohibits the employer from discriminating against an employee for exercising rights under, or as a result of actions that are required by, this section. That provision of the Act also protects the employee who files a safety and health complaint, or otherwise exercises any rights afforded by the OSH Act. (p) Requirements implemented at no cost to employees. (q) Recordkeeping Small employer exclusion. (2) Required records. (i) Retain all versions of the COVID-19 plan implemented to comply with this section while this section remains in effect. (ii) Establish and maintain a COVID-19 log to record each instance identified by the employer in which an employee is COVID-19 positive, regardless of whether the instance is connected to exposure to COVID-19 at work. (A) The COVID-19 log must contain, for each instance, the employee's name, one form of contact information, occupation, location where the employee worked, the date of the employee's last day at the workplace, the date of the positive test for, or diagnosis of, COVID-19, and the date the employee first had one or more COVID-19 symptoms, if any were experienced. (B) The information in the COVID-19 log must be recorded within 24 hours of the employer learning that the employee is COVID-19 positive and must be maintained as though it is a confidential medical record and must not be disclosed except as required by this ETS or other federal law. (C) The COVID-19 log must be maintained and preserved while this section remains in effect. Note to paragraph ( q ii The COVID-19 log is intended to assist employers with tracking and evaluating instances of employees who are COVID-19 positive without regard to whether those employees were infected at work. The tracking will help evaluate potential workplace exposure to other employees. (3) Availability of records. (i) All versions of the written COVID-19 plan to all of the following: Any employees, their personal representatives, and their authorized representatives. (ii) The individual COVID-19 log entry for a particular employee to that employee and to anyone having written authorized consent of that employee. (iii) A version of the COVID-19 log that removes the names of employees, contact information, and occupation, and only includes, for each employee in the COVID-19 log, the location where the employee worked, the last day that the employee was at the workplace before removal, the date of that employee's positive test for, or diagnosis of, COVID-19, and the date the employee first had one or more COVID-19 symptoms, if any were experienced, to all of the following: Any employees, their personal representatives, and their authorized representatives. (iv) All records required to be maintained by this section to the Assistant Secretary. Note to paragraph ( q Employers must continue to record all work-related confirmed cases of COVID-19 on their OSHA Forms 300, 300A, and 301, or the equivalent forms, if required to do so under 29 CFR part 1904. (r) Reporting COVID-19 fatalities and hospitalizations to OSHA. (i) Each work-related COVID-19 fatality within 8 hours of the employer learning about the fatality. (ii) Each work-related COVID-19 in-patient hospitalization within 24 hours of the employer learning about the in-patient hospitalization. (2) When reporting COVID-19 fatalities and in-patient hospitalizations to OSHA in accordance with paragraph (r)(1) of this section, the employer must follow the requirements in 29 CFR 1904.39, except for 29 CFR 1904.39(a)(1) and (2) and (b)(6). (s) Dates Effective date. (2) Compliance dates. (ii) Employers must comply with the requirements of this section in paragraphs (i), (k), and (n) of this section by July 21, 2021. § 1910.504 Mini Respiratory Protection Program. (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions. COVID-19 (Coronavirus Disease 2019) Elastomeric respirator Filtering facepiece respirator Hand hygiene Respirator Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) Tight-fitting respirator e.g., User seal check (c) Respirators provided by employees. (1) Read and follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer on use, maintenance, cleaning and care, and warnings regarding the respirator's limitations. (2) Keep track of your respirator so that you do not mistakenly use someone else's respirator. (3) Do not wear your respirator where other workplace hazards ( e.g., https://www.osha.gov/respiratory-protection (d) Respirators provided by employers. (1) Training. (i) How to inspect, put on and remove, and use a respirator; (ii) The limitations and capabilities of the respirator, particularly when the respirator has not been fit tested; (iii) Procedures and schedules for storing, maintaining, and inspecting respirators; (iv) How to perform a user seal check as described in paragraph (d)(2) of this section; and (v) How to recognize medical signs and symptoms that may limit or prevent the effective use of respirators and what to do if the employee experiences signs and symptoms. (2) User seal check. (A) Positive pressure user seal check ( i.e., (B) Negative pressure user seal check ( i.e., (ii) The employer must ensure that each employee corrects any problems discovered during the user seal check. In the case of either type of user seal check (positive or negative), if air leaks around the nose, use both hands to readjust how the respirator sits on your face or adjust the nosepiece, if applicable. Readjust the straps along the sides of your head until a proper seal is achieved. Note to paragraph ( d When employees are required to wear a respirator and a problem with the seal check arises due to interference with the seal by an employee's facial hair, employers may provide a different type of respirator to accommodate employees who cannot trim or cut facial hair due to religious belief. (3) Reuse of respirators. (A) The respirator is not visibly soiled or damaged; (B) The respirator has been stored in a breathable storage container ( e.g., (C) The employee does a visual check in adequate lighting for damage to the respirator's fabric or seal; (D) The employee successfully completes a user seal check as described in paragraph (d)(2) of this section; (E) The employee uses proper hand hygiene before putting the respirator on and conducting the user seal check; and (F) The respirator has not been worn more than five days total. Note to paragraph ( d i The reuse of single-use respirators ( e.g., (ii) The employer must ensure that an elastomeric respirator or PAPR is only reused when: (A) The respirator is not damaged; (B) The respirator is cleaned and disinfected as often as necessary to be maintained in a sanitary condition in accordance with § 1910.134, Appendix B-2; and (C) A change schedule is implemented for cartridges, canisters, or filters. (4) Discontinuing use of respirators. e.g., (e) Effective date. [86 FR 32620, June 21, 2021, as amended at 87 FR 3929, Jan. 26, 2022] § 1910.505 Severability. Each section of this subpart U, and each provision within those sections, is separate and severable from the other sections and provisions. If any provision of this subpart is held to be invalid or unenforceable on its face, or as applied to any person, entity, or circumstance, or is stayed or enjoined, that provision shall be construed so as to continue to give the maximum effect to the provision permitted by law, unless such holding shall be one of utter invalidity or unenforceability, in which event the provision shall be severable from this subpart and shall not affect the remainder of the subpart. § 1910.509 Incorporation by reference. (a)(1) The material listed in this section is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, OSHA must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected] www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html (2) The material is available from the sources listed in this section and as follows: (i) The material listed in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section (CDC and EPA) is available at this permanent weblink hosted by OSHA: www.osha.gov/coronavirus/ets/ibr (ii) The material listed in paragraph (d) of this section (ISEA) is available from the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: 212-642-4900; fax: 212-398-0023; website: http://www.ansi.org (b) Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC): 1600 Clifton Road, Atlanta, GA 30329; websites: https://www.cdc.gov/, https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/communication/guidance.html https://www.cdc.gov/infectioncontrol/guidelines/ (1) Cleaning and Disinfecting Guidance. (2) COVID-19 Infection Prevention and Control Recommendations. (3) Guidelines for Isolation Precautions. (4) Guidelines for Environmental Infection Control. (5) Isolation Guidance. (6) Return to Work Healthcare Guidance. (c) U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue NW, Washington, DC 20460; website: https://www.epa.gov/ (1) List N. Pesticide Registration List N: Disinfectants for Coronavirus (COVID-19), updated April 9, 2021, IBR approved for § 1910.502(b). (2) [Reserved] (d) International Safety Equipment Association (ISEA): 1901 North Moore Street, Suite 808, Arlington, VA 22209; website: www.safetyequipment.org (1) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1-2010, American National Standard for Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, ANSI-approved April 13, 2010, IBR approved for § 1910.502(b). (2) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1-2015, American National Standard for Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, ANSI-approved May 28, 2015, IBR approved for § 1910.502(b). (3) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1-2020, American National Standard for Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, ANSI-approved March 11, 2020, IBR approved for § 1910.502(b). [86 FR 32620, June 21, 2021, as amended at 87 FR 3929, Jan. 26, 2022] Subparts V-Y [Reserved] §§ 1910.901-1910.999 [Reserved] Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous Substances Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), or 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355) or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), 08-2020 (85 FR 58393), or 07-2025 (90 FR 27878); 29 CFR part 1911; and 5 U.S.C. 553, as applicable. § 1910.1000 Air contaminants. An employee's exposure to any substance listed in Tables Z-1, Z-2, or Z-3 of this section shall be limited in accordance with the requirements of the following paragraphs of this section. (a) Table Z-1 Substances with limits preceded by “C”—Ceiling Values. (2) Other substances—8-hour Time Weighted Averages. (b) Table Z-2. (1) 8-hour time weighted averages. (2) Acceptable ceiling concentrations. (3) Example. (c) Table Z-3. (d) Computation formulae. (1)(i) The cumulative exposure for an 8-hour work shift shall be computed as follows: E = (C a a b b n n Where: E is the equivalent exposure for the working shift. C is the concentration during any period of time T where the concentration remains constant. T is the duration in hours of the exposure at the concentration C. The value of E shall not exceed the 8-hour time weighted average specified in subpart Z of 29 CFR part 1910 for the substance involved. (ii) To illustrate the formula prescribed in paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section, assume that Substance A has an 8-hour time weighted average limit of 100 ppm noted in Table Z-1. Assume that an employee is subject to the following exposure: Two hours exposure at 150 ppm Two hours exposure at 75 ppm Four hours exposure at 50 ppm Substituting this information in the formula, we have (2 × 150 + 2 × 75 + 4 × 50) ÷ 8 = 81.25 ppm Since 81.25 ppm is less than 100 ppm, the 8-hour time weighted average limit, the exposure is acceptable. (2)(i) In case of a mixture of air contaminants an employer shall compute the equivalent exposure as follows: E m 1 1 2 2 n n Where: E m C is the concentration of a particular contaminant. L is the exposure limit for that substance specified in subpart Z of 29 CFR part 1910. The value of E m (ii) To illustrate the formula prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section, consider the following exposures: Substance Actual concentration of 8-hour exposure (ppm) 8-hour TWA PEL (ppm) B 500 1,000 C 45 200 D 40 200 Substituting in the formula, we have: E m E m E m Since E m (e) To achieve compliance with paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section, administrative or engineering controls must first be determined and implemented whenever feasible. When such controls are not feasible to achieve full compliance, protective equipment or any other protective measures shall be used to keep the exposure of employees to air contaminants within the limits prescribed in this section. Any equipment and/or technical measures used for this purpose must be approved for each particular use by a competent industrial hygienist or other technically qualified person. Whenever respirators are used, their use shall comply with 1910.134. Table Z-1—Limits for Air Contaminants Substance CAS No. (c) ppm (a) 1 mg/m 3 1 Skin designation Acetaldehyde 75-07-0 200 360 Acetic acid 64-19-7 10 25 Acetic anhydride 108-24-7 5 20 Acetone 67-64-1 1000 2400 Acetonitrile 75-05-8 40 70 2-Acetylaminofluorine; see 1910.1014 53-96-3 Acetylene dichloride; see 1,2-Dichloroethylene. Acetylene tetrabromide 79-27-6 1 14 Acrolein 107-02-8 0.1 0.25 Acrylamide 79-06-1 0.3 X Acrylonitrile; see 1910.1045 107-13-1 Aldrin 309-00-2 0.25 X Allyl alcohol 107-18-6 2 5 X Allyl chloride 107-05-1 1 3 Allyl glycidyl ether (AGE) 106-92-3 (C)10 (C)45 Allyl propyl disulfide 2179-59-1 2 12 alpha-Alumina 1344-28-1 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Aluminum, metal (as Al) 7429-90-5 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 4-Aminodiphenyl; see 1910.1011 92-67-1 2-Aminoethanol; see Ethanolamine. 2-Aminopyridine 504-29-0 0.5 2 Ammonia 7664-41-7 50 35 Ammonium sulfamate 7773-06-0 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 n-Amyl acetate 628-63-7 100 525 sec-Amyl acetate 626-38-0 125 650 Aniline and homologs 62-53-3 5 19 X Anisidine (o-, p-isomers) 29191-52-4 0.5 X Antimony and compounds (as Sb) 7440-36-0 0.5 ANTU (alpha Naphthylthiourea) 86-88-4 0.3 Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As); see 1910.1018 7440-38-2 Arsenic, organic compounds (as As) 7440-38-2 0.5 Arsine 7784-42-1 0.05 0.2 Asbestos; see 1910.1001 ( 4 Azinphos-methyl 86-50-0 0.2 X Barium, soluble compounds (as Ba) 7440-39-3 0.5 Barium sulfate 7727-43-7 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Benomyl 17804-35-2 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Benzene; see 1910.1028 71-43-2 See Table Z-2 for the limits applicable in the operations or sectors excluded in 1910.1028 d Benzidine; see 1910.1010 92-87-5 p-Benzoquinone; see Quinone. Benzo(a)pyrene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles. Benzoyl peroxide 94-36-0 5 Benzyl chloride 100-44-7 1 5 Beryllium and beryllium compounds (as Be); see 1926.1124 8 7440-41-7 Biphenyl; see Diphenyl. Bismuth telluride, Undoped 1304-82-1 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Boron oxide 1303-86-2 Total dust 15 Boron trifluoride 7637-07-2 (C)1 (C)3 Bromine 7726-95-6 0.1 0.7 Bromoform 75-25-2 0.5 5 X Butadiene (1,3-Butadiene); See 29 CFR 1910.1051; 29 CFR 1910.19(l) 106-99-0 1 ppm/5 ppm STEL Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan. 2-Butanone (Methyl ethyl ketone) 78-93-3 200 590 2-Butoxyethanol 111-76-2 50 240 X n-Butyl-acetate 123-86-4 150 710 sec-Butyl acetate 105-46-4 200 950 tert-Butyl acetate 540-88-5 200 950 n-Butyl alcohol 71-36-3 100 300 sec-Butyl alcohol 78-92-2 150 450 tert-Butyl alcohol 75-65-0 100 300 Butylamine 109-73-9 (C)5 (C)15 X tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO 3 6 1189-85-1 n-Butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) 2426-08-6 50 270 Butyl mercaptan 109-79-5 10 35 p-tert-Butyltoluene 98-51-1 10 60 Cadmium (as Cd); see 1910.1027 7440-43-9 Calcium carbonate 1317-65-3 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Calcium hydroxide 1305-62-0 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Calcium oxide 1305-78-8 5 Calcium silicate 1344-95-2 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Calcium sulfate 7778-18-9 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Camphor, synthetic 76-22-2 2 Carbaryl (Sevin) 63-25-2 5 Carbon black 1333-86-4 3.5 Carbon dioxide 124-38-9 5000 9000 Carbon disulfide 75-15-0 ( 2 Carbon monoxide 630-08-0 50 55 Carbon tetrachloride 56-23-5 ( 2 Cellulose 9004-34-6 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Chlordane 57-74-9 0.5 X Chlorinated camphene 8001-35-2 0.5 X Chlorinated diphenyl oxide 55720-99-5 0.5 Chlorine 7782-50-5 (C)1 (C)3 Chlorine dioxide 10049-04-4 0.1 0.3 Chlorine trifluoride 7790-91-2 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 Chloroacetaldehyde 107-20-0 (C)1 (C)3 a-Chloroacetophenone (Phenacyl chloride) 532-27-4 0.05 0.3 Chlorobenzene 108-90-7 75 350 o-Chlorobenzylidene malononitrile 2698-41-1 0.05 0.4 Chlorobromomethane 74-97-5 200 1050 2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene; see beta-Chloroprene. Chlorodiphenyl (42% Chlorine) (PCB) 53469-21-9 1 X Chlorodiphenyl (54% Chlorine) (PCB) 11097-69-1 0.5 X 1-Chloro-2,3-epoxypropane; see Epichlorohydrin. 2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene chlorohydrin. Chloroethylene; see Vinyl chloride. Chloroform (Trichloromethane) 67-66-3 (C)50 (C)240 bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see 1910.1008 542-88-1 Chloromethyl methyl ether; see 1910.1006 107-30-2 1-Chloro-1-nitropropane 600-25-9 20 100 Chloropicrin 76-06-2 0.1 0.7 beta-Chloroprene 126-99-8 25 90 X 2-Chloro-6-(trichloromethyl) pyridine 1929-82-4 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Chromium (II) compounds. (as Cr) 7440-47-3 0.5 Chromium (III) compounds. (as Cr) 7440-47-3 0.5 Chromium (VI) compounds; See 1910.1026 5 Chromium metal and insol. salts (as Cr) 7440-47-3 1 Chrysene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles. Clopidol 2971-90-6 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Coal dust (less than 5% SiO 2 ( 3 Coal dust (greater than or equal to 5% SiO 2 ( 3 Coal tar pitch volatiles (benzene soluble fraction), anthracene, BaP, phenanthrene, acridine, chrysene, pyrene 65966-93-2 0.2 Cobalt metal, dust, and fume (as Co) 7440-48-4 0.1 Coke oven emissions; see 1910.1029. Copper 7440-50-8 Fume (as Cu) 0.1 Dusts and mists (as Cu) 1 Cotton dust e 1 Crag herbicide (Sesone) 136-78-7 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Cresol, all isomers 1319-77-3 5 22 X Crotonaldehyde 123-73-9; 2 6 Cumene 98-82-8 50 245 X Cyanides (as CN) ( 4 5 X Cyclohexane 110-82-7 300 1050 Cyclohexanol 108-93-0 50 200 Cyclohexanone 108-94-1 50 200 Cyclohexene 110-83-8 300 1015 Cyclopentadiene 542-92-7 75 200 2,4-D (Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) 94-75-7 10 Decaborane 17702-41-9 0.05 0.3 X Demeton (Systox) 8065-48-3 0.1 X Diacetone alcohol (4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone) 123-42-2 50 240 1,2-Diaminoethane; see Ethylenediamine. Diazomethane 334-88-3 0.2 0.4 Diborane 19287-45-7 0.1 0.1 1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (DBCP); see 1910.1044 96-12-8 1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene dibromide. Dibutyl phosphate 107-66-4 1 5 Dibutyl phthalate 84-74-2 5 o-Dichlorobenzene 95-50-1 (C)50 (C)300 p-Dichlorobenzene 106-46-7 75 450 3,′-Dichlorobenzidine; see 1910.1007 91-94-1 Dichlorodifluoromethane 75-71-8 1000 4950 1,3-Dichloro-5,5-dimethyl hydantoin 118-52-5 0.2 Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT) 50-29-3 1 X 1,1-Dichloroethane 75-34-3 100 400 1,2-Dichloroethane; see Ethylene dichloride. 1,2-Dichloroethylene 540-59-0 200 790 Dichloroethyl ether 111-44-4 (C)15 (C)90 X Dichloromethane; see Methylene chloride. Dichloromonofluoromethane 75-43-4 1000 4200 1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroethane 594-72-9 (C)10 (C)60 1,2-Dichloropropane; see Propylene dichloride. Dichlorotetrafluoroethane 76-14-2 1000 7000 Dichlorvos (DDVP) 62-73-7 1 X Dicyclopentadienyl iron 102-54-5 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Dieldrin 60-57-1 0.25 X Diethylamine 109-89-7 25 75 2-Diethylaminoethanol 100-37-8 10 50 X Diethyl ether; see Ethyl ether. Difluorodibromomethane 75-61-6 100 860 Diglycidyl ether (DGE) 2238-07-5 (C)0.5 (C)2.8 Dihydroxybenzene; see Hydroquinone. Diisobutyl ketone 108-83-8 50 290 Diisopropylamine 108-18-9 5 20 X 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene; see 1910.1015 60-11-7 Dimethoxymethane; see Methylal. Dimethyl acetamide 127-19-5 10 35 X Dimethylamine 124-40-3 10 18 Dimethylaminobenzene; see Xylidine Dimethylaniline (N,N-Dimethylaniline) 121-69-7 5 25 X Dimethylbenzene; see Xylene. Dimethyl-1,2-dibromo-2,2-dichloroethyl phosphate 300-76-5 3 Dimethylformamide 68-12-2 10 30 X 2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone; see Diisobutyl ketone. 1,1-Dimethylhydrazine 57-14-7 0.5 1 X Dimethylphthalate 131-11-3 5 Dimethyl sulfate 77-78-1 1 5 X Dinitrobenzene (all isomers) 1 X (ortho) 528-29-0 (meta) 99-65-0 (para) 100-25-4 Dinitro-o-cresol 534-52-1 0.2 X Dinitrotoluene 25321-14-6 1.5 X Dioxane (Diethylene dioxide) 123-91-1 100 360 X Diphenyl (Biphenyl) 92-52-4 0.2 1 Diphenylmethane diisocyanate; see Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate. Dipropylene glycol methyl ether 34590-94-8 100 600 X Di-sec octyl phthalate (Di-(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate) 117-81-7 5 Emery 12415-34-8 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Endrin 72-20-8 0.1 X Epichlorohydrin 106-89-8 5 19 X EPN 2104-64-5 0.5 X 1,2-Epoxypropane; see Propylene oxide. 2,3-Epoxy-1-propanol; see Glycidol. Ethanethiol; see Ethyl mercaptan. Ethanolamine 141-43-5 3 6 2-Ethoxyethanol (Cellosolve) 110-80-5 200 740 X 2-Ethoxyethyl acetate (Cellosolve acetate) 111-15-9 100 540 X Ethyl acetate 141-78-6 400 1400 Ethyl acrylate 140-88-5 25 100 X Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol) 64-17-5 1000 1900 Ethylamine 75-04-7 10 18 Ethyl amyl ketone (5-Methyl-3-heptanone) 541-85-5 25 130 Ethyl benzene 100-41-4 100 435 Ethyl bromide 74-96-4 200 890 Ethyl butyl ketone (3-Heptanone) 106-35-4 50 230 Ethyl chloride 75-00-3 1000 2600 Ethyl ether 60-29-7 400 1200 Ethyl formate 109-94-4 100 300 Ethyl mercaptan 75-08-1 (C)10 (C)25 Ethyl silicate 78-10-4 100 850 Ethylene chlorohydrin 107-07-3 5 16 X Ethylenediamine 107-15-3 10 25 Ethylene dibromide 106-93-4 ( 2 Ethylene dichloride (1,2-Dichloroethane) 107-06-2 ( 2 Ethylene glycol dinitrate 628-96-6 (C)0.2 (C)1 X Ethylene glycol methyl acetate; see Methyl cellosolve acetate. Ethyleneimine; see 1910.1012 151-56-4 Ethylene oxide; see 1910.1047 75-21-8 Ethylidene chloride; see 1,1-Dichloroethane. N-Ethylmorpholine 100-74-3 20 94 X Ferbam 14484-64-1 Total dust 15 Ferrovanadium dust 12604-58-9 1 Fluorides (as F) ( 4 2.5 Fluorine 7782-41-4 0.1 0.2 Fluorotrichloromethane (Trichlorofluoromethane) 75-69-4 1000 5600 Formaldehyde; see 1910.1048 50-00-0 Formic acid 64-18-6 5 9 Furfural 98-01-1 5 20 X Furfuryl alcohol 98-00-0 50 200 Grain dust (oat, wheat, barley) 10 Glycerin (mist) 56-81-5 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Glycidol 556-52-5 50 150 Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2-Ethoxyethanol. Graphite, natural, respirable dust 7782-42-5 ( 3 Graphite, synthetic Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Guthion; see Azinphos methyl. Gypsum 13397-24-5 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Hafnium 7440-58-6 0.5 Heptachlor 76-44-8 0.5 X Heptane (n-Heptane) 142-82-5 500 2000 Hexachloroethane 67-72-1 1 10 X Hexachloronaphthalene 1335-87-1 0.2 X n-Hexane 110-54-3 500 1800 2-Hexanone (Methyl n-butyl ketone) 591-78-6 100 410 Hexone (Methyl isobutyl ketone) 108-10-1 100 410 sec-Hexyl acetate 108-84-9 50 300 Hydrazine 302-01-2 1 1.3 X Hydrogen bromide 10035-10-6 3 10 Hydrogen chloride 7647-01-0 (C)5 (C)7 Hydrogen cyanide 74-90-8 10 11 X Hydrogen fluoride (as F) 7664-39-3 ( 2 Hydrogen peroxide 7722-84-1 1 1.4 Hydrogen selenide (as Se) 7783-07-5 0.05 0.2 Hydrogen sulfide 7783-06-4 ( 2 Hydroquinone 123-31-9 2 Iodine 7553-56-2 (C)0.1 (C)1 Iron oxide fume 1309-37-1 10 Isoamyl acetate 123-92-2 100 525 Isoamyl alcohol (primary and secondary) 123-51-3 100 360 Isobutyl acetate 110-19-0 150 700 Isobutyl alcohol 78-83-1 100 300 Isophorone 78-59-1 25 140 Isopropyl acetate 108-21-4 250 950 Isopropyl alcohol 67-63-0 400 980 Isopropylamine 75-31-0 5 12 Isopropyl ether 108-20-3 500 2100 Isopropyl glycidyl ether (IGE) 4016-14-2 50 240 Kaolin 1332-58-7 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Ketene 463-51-4 0.5 0.9 Lead, inorganic (as Pb); see 1910.1025 7439-92-1 Limestone 1317-65-3 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Lindane 58-89-9 0.5 X Lithium hydride 7580-67-8 0.025 L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas) 68476-85-7 1000 1800 Magnesite 546-93-0 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Magnesium oxide fume 1309-48-4 Total particulate 15 Malathion 121-75-5 Total dust 15 X Maleic anhydride 108-31-6 0.25 1 Manganese compounds (as Mn) 7439-96-5 (C)5 Manganese fume (as Mn) 7439-96-5 (C)5 Marble 1317-65-3 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Mercury (aryl and inorganic) (as Hg) 7439-97-6 ( 2 Mercury (organo) alkyl compounds (as Hg) 7439-97-6 ( 2 Mercury (vapor) (as Hg) 7439-97-6 ( 2 Mesityl oxide 141-79-7 25 100 Methanethiol; see Methyl mercaptan. Methoxychlor 72-43-5 Total dust 15 2-Methoxyethanol (Methyl cellosolve) 109-86-4 25 80 X 2-Methoxyethyl acetate (Methyl cellosolve acetate) 110-49-6 25 120 X Methyl acetate 79-20-9 200 610 Methyl acetylene (Propyne) 74-99-7 1000 1650 Methyl acetylene-propadiene mixture (MAPP) 1000 1800 Methyl acrylate 96-33-3 10 35 X Methylal (Dimethoxy-methane) 109-87-5 1000 3100 Methyl alcohol 67-56-1 200 260 Methylamine 74-89-5 10 12 Methyl amyl alcohol; see Methyl isobutyl carbinol. Methyl n-amyl ketone 110-43-0 100 465 Methyl bromide 74-83-9 (C)20 (C)80 X Methyl butyl ketone; see 2-Hexanone. Methyl cellosolve; see 2-Methoxyethanol. Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2-Methoxyethyl acetate. Methyl chloride 74-87-3 ( 2 Methyl chloroform (1,1,1-Trichloroethane) 71-55-6 350 1900 Methylcyclohexane 108-87-2 500 2000 Methylcyclohexanol 25639-42-3 100 470 o-Methylcyclohexanone 583-60-8 100 460 X Methylene chloride 75-09-2 ( 2 Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK); see 2-Butanone. Methyl formate 107-31-3 100 250 Methyl hydrazine (Monomethyl hydrazine) 60-34-4 (C)0.2 (C)0.35 X Methyl iodide 74-88-4 5 28 X Methyl isoamyl ketone 110-12-3 100 475 Methyl isobutyl carbinol 108-11-2 25 100 X Methyl isobutyl ketone; see Hexone. Methyl isocyanate 624-83-9 0.02 0.05 X Methyl mercaptan 74-93-1 (C)10 (C)20 Methyl methacrylate 80-62-6 100 410 Methyl propyl ketone; see 2-Pentanone. alpha-Methyl styrene 98-83-9 (C)100 (C)480 Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate (MDI) 101-68-8 (C)0.02 (C)0.2 Mica; see Silicates. Molybdenum (as Mo) 7439-98-7 Soluble compounds 5 Insoluble compounds. Total dust 15 Monomethyl aniline 100-61-8 2 9 X Monomethyl hydrazine; see Methyl hydrazine. Morpholine 110-91-8 20 70 X Naphtha (Coal tar) 8030-30-6 100 400 Naphthalene 91-20-3 10 50 alpha-Naphthylamine; see 1910.1004 134-32-7 beta-Naphthylamine; see 1910.1009 91-59-8 Nickel carbonyl (as Ni) 13463-39-3 0.001 0.007 Nickel, metal and insoluble compounds (as Ni) 7440-02-0 1 Nickel, soluble compounds (as Ni) 7440-02-0 1 Nicotine 54-11-5 0.5 X Nitric acid 7697-37-2 2 5 Nitric oxide 10102-43-9 25 30 p-Nitroaniline 100-01-6 1 6 X Nitrobenzene 98-95-3 1 5 X p-Nitrochlorobenzene 100-00-5 1 X 4-Nitrodiphenyl; see 1910.1003 92-93-3 Nitroethane 79-24-3 100 310 Nitrogen dioxide 10102-44-0 (C)5 (C)9 Nitrogen trifluoride 7783-54-2 10 29 Nitroglycerin 55-63-0 (C)0.2 (C)2 X Nitromethane 75-52-5 100 250 1-Nitropropane 108-03-2 25 90 2-Nitropropane 79-46-9 25 90 N-Nitrosodimethylamine; see 1910.1016. Nitrotoluene (all isomers) 5 30 X o-isomer 88-72-2 m-isomer 99-08-1 p-isomer 99-99-0 Nitrotrichloromethane; see Chloropicrin. Octachloronaphthalene 2234-13-1 0.1 X Octane 111-65-9 500 2350 Oil mist, mineral 8012-95-1 5 Osmium tetroxide (as Os) 20816-12-0 0.002 Oxalic acid 144-62-7 1 Oxygen difluoride 7783-41-7 0.05 0.1 Ozone 10028-15-6 0.1 0.2 Paraquat, respirable dust 4685-14-7; 0.5 X Parathion 56-38-2 0.1 X Particulates not otherwise regulated (PNOR) f Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 PCB; see Chlorodiphenyl (42% and 54% chlorine). Pentaborane 19624-22-7 0.005 0.01 Pentachloronaphthalene 1321-64-8 0.5 X Pentachlorophenol 87-86-5 0.5 X Pentaerythritol 115-77-5 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Pentane 109-66-0 1000 2950 2-Pentanone (Methyl propyl ketone) 107-87-9 200 700 Perchloroethylene (Tetrachloroethylene) 127-18-4 ( 2 Perchloromethyl mercaptan 594-42-3 0.1 0.8 Perchloryl fluoride 7616-94-6 3 13.5 Petroleum distillates (Naphtha) (Rubber Solvent) 500 2000 Phenol 108-95-2 5 19 X p-Phenylene diamine 106-50-3 0.1 X Phenyl ether, vapor 101-84-8 1 7 Phenyl ether-biphenyl mixture, vapor 1 7 Phenylethylene; see Styrene. Phenyl glycidyl ether (PGE) 122-60-1 10 60 Phenylhydrazine 100-63-0 5 22 X Phosdrin (Mevinphos) 7786-34-7 0.1 X Phosgene (Carbonyl chloride) 75-44-5 0.1 0.4 Phosphine 7803-51-2 0.3 0.4 Phosphoric acid 7664-38-2 1 Phosphorus (yellow) 7723-14-0 0.1 Phosphorus pentachloride 10026-13-8 1 Phosphorus pentasulfide 1314-80-3 1 Phosphorus trichloride 7719-12-2 0.5 3 Phthalic anhydride 85-44-9 2 12 Picloram 1918-02-1 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Picric acid 88-89-1 0.1 X Pindone (2-Pivalyl-1,3-indandione) 83-26-1 0.1 Plaster of Paris 26499-65-0 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Platinum (as Pt) 7440-06-4 Metal Soluble salts 0.002 Portland cement 65997-15-1 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Propane 74-98-6 1000 1800 beta-Propriolactone; see 1910.1013 57-57-8 n-Propyl acetate 109-60-4 200 840 n-Propyl alcohol 71-23-8 200 500 n-Propyl nitrate 627-13-4 25 110 Propylene dichloride 78-87-5 75 350 Propylene imine 75-55-8 2 5 X Propylene oxide 75-56-9 100 240 Propyne; see Methyl acetylene. Pyrethrum 8003-34-7 5 Pyridine 110-86-1 5 15 Quinone 106-51-4 0.1 0.4 RDX; see Cyclonite. Rhodium (as Rh), metal fume and insoluble compounds 7440-16-6 0.1 Rhodium (as Rh), soluble compounds 7440-16-6 0.001 Ronnel 299-84-3 15 Rotenone 83-79-4 5 Rouge Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Selenium compounds (as Se) 7782-49-2 0.2 Selenium hexafluoride (as Se) 7783-79-1 0.05 0.4 Silica, amorphous, precipitated and gel 112926-00-8 ( 3 Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth, containing less than 1% crystalline silica 61790-53-2 ( 3 Silica, crystalline, respirable dust Cristobalite; see 1910.1053 7 14464-46-1 Quartz; see 1910.1053 7 14808-60-7 Tripoli (as quartz); see 1910.1053 7 1317-95-9 Tridymite; see 1910.1053 7 15468-32-3 Silica, fused, respirable dust 60676-86-0 ( 3 Silicates (less than 1% crystalline silica) Mica (respirable dust) 12001-26-2 ( 3 Soapstone, total dust ( 3 Soapstone, respirable dust ( 3 Talc (containing asbestos); use asbestos limit; see 29 CFR 1910.1001 ( 3 Talc (containing no asbestos), respirable dust 14807-96-6 ( 3 Tremolite, asbestiform; see 1910.1001. Silicon 7440-21-3 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Silicon carbide 409-21-2 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Silver, metal and soluble compounds (as Ag) 7440-22-4 0.01 Soapstone; see Silicates. Sodium fluoroacetate 62-74-8 0.05 X Sodium hydroxide 1310-73-2 2 Starch 9005-25-8 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Stibine 7803-52-3 0.1 0.5 Stoddard solvent 8052-41-3 500 2900 Strychnine 57-24-9 0.15 Styrene 100-42-5 ( 2 Sucrose 57-50-1 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Sulfur dioxide 7446-09-5 5 13 Sulfur hexafluoride 2551-62-4 1000 6000 Sulfuric acid 7664-93-9 1 Sulfur monochloride 10025-67-9 1 6 Sulfur pentafluoride 5714-22-7 0.025 0.25 Sulfuryl fluoride 2699-79-8 5 20 Systox; see Demeton. 2,4,5-T (2,4,5-trichlorophenoxyacetic acid) 93-76-5 10 Talc; see Silicates. Tantalum, metal and oxide dust 7440-25-7 5 TEDP (Sulfotep) 3689-24-5 0.2 X Tellurium and compounds (as Te) 13494-80-9 0.1 Tellurium hexafluoride (as Te) 7783-80-4 0.02 0.2 Temephos 3383-96-8 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 TEPP (Tetraethyl pyrophosphate) 107-49-3 0.05 X Terphenyls 26140-60-3 (C)1 (C)9 1,1,1,2-Tetrachloro-2,2-difluoroethane 76-11-9 500 4170 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloro-1,2-difluoroethane 76-12-0 500 4170 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane 79-34-5 5 35 X Tetrachloroethylene; see Perchloroethylene. Tetrachloromethane; see Carbon tetrachloride. Tetrachloronaphthalene 1335-88-2 2 X Tetraethyl lead (as Pb) 78-00-2 0.075 X Tetrahydrofuran 109-99-9 200 590 Tetramethyl lead (as Pb) 75-74-1 0.075 X Tetramethyl succinonitrile 3333-52-6 0.5 3 X Tetranitromethane 509-14-8 1 8 Tetryl (2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine) 479-45-8 1.5 X Thallium, soluble compounds (as Tl) 7440-28-0 0.1 X 4,4′-Thiobis (6-tert, Butyl-m-cresol) 96-69-5 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Thiram 137-26-8 5 Tin, inorganic compounds (except oxides) (as Sn) 7440-31-5 2 Tin, organic compounds (as Sn) 7440-31-5 0.1 Titanium dioxide 13463-67-7 Total dust 15 Toluene 108-88-3 ( 2 Toluene-2,4-diisocyanate (TDI) 584-84-9 (C)0.02 (C)0.14 o-Toluidine 95-53-4 5 22 X Toxaphene; see Chlorinated camphene. Tremolite; see Silicates. Tributyl phosphate 126-73-8 5 1,1,1-Trichloroethane; see Methyl chloroform. 1,1,2-Trichloroethane 79-00-5 10 45 X Trichloroethylene 79-01-6 ( 2 Trichloromethane; see Chloroform. Trichloronaphthalene 1321-65-9 5 X 1,2,3-Trichloropropane 96-18-4 50 300 1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane 76-13-1 1000 7600 Triethylamine 121-44-8 25 100 Trifluorobromomethane 75-63-8 1000 6100 2,4,6-Trinitrophenol; see Picric acid. 2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine; see Tetryl. 2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT) 118-96-7 1.5 X Triorthocresyl phosphate 78-30-8 0.1 Triphenyl phosphate 115-86-6 3 Turpentine 8006-64-2 100 560 Uranium (as U) 7440-61-1 Soluble compounds 0.05 Insoluble compounds 0.25 Vanadium 1314-62-1 Respirable dust (as V 2 5 (C)0.5 Fume (as V 2 5 (C)0.1 Vegetable oil mist Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Vinyl benzene; see Styrene. Vinyl chloride; see 1910.1017 75-01-4 Vinyl cyanide; see Acrylonitrile. Vinyl toluene 25013-15-4 100 480 Warfarin 81-81-2 0.1 Xylenes (o-, m-, p-isomers) 1330-20-7 100 435 Xylidine 1300-73-8 5 25 X Yttrium 7440-65-5 1 Zinc chloride fume 7646-85-7 1 Zinc oxide fume 1314-13-2 5 Zinc oxide 1314-13-2 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Zinc stearate 557-05-1 Total dust 15 Respirable fraction 5 Zirconium compounds (as Zr) 7440-67-7 5 1 (a) Parts of vapor or gas per million parts of contaminated air by volume at 25 °C and 760 torr. (b) Milligrams of substance per cubic meter of air. When entry is in this column only, the value is exact; when listed with a ppm entry, it is approximate. (c) The CAS number is for information only. Enforcement is based on the substance name. For an entry covering more than one metal compound, measured as the metal, the CAS number for the metal is given—not CAS numbers for the individual compounds. (d) The final benzene standard in 1910.1028 applies to all occupational exposures to benzene except in some circumstances the distribution and sale of fuels, sealed containers and pipelines, coke production, oil and gas drilling and production, natural gas processing, and the percentage exclusion for liquid mixtures; for the excepted subsegments, the benzene limits in Table Z-2 apply. See 1910.1028 for specific circumstances. (e) This 8-hour TWA applies to respirable dust as measured by a vertical elutriator cotton dust sampler or equivalent instrument. The time-weighted average applies to the cottom waste processing operations of waste recycling (sorting, blending, cleaning and willowing) and garnetting. See also 1910.1043 for cotton dust limits applicable to other sectors. (f) All inert or nuisance dusts, whether mineral, inorganic, or organic, not listed specifically by substance name are covered by the Particulates Not Otherwise Regulated (PNOR) limit which is the same as the inert or nuisance dust limit of Table Z-3. 2 3 4 5 6 3 7 8 See Table Z-2 Substance 8-hour time weighted average Acceptable ceiling concentration Acceptable maximum peak above the acceptable ceiling concentration for an 8-hr shift Concentration Maximum duration Benzene a 10 ppm 25 ppm 50 ppm 10 minutes. Beryllium and beryllium compounds (Z37.29-1970) d 2 µg/m 3 5 µg/m 3 25 µg/m 3 30 minutes. Cadmium fume b 0.1 mg/m 3 0.3 mg/m 3 Cadmium dust b 0.2 mg/m 3 0.6 mg/m 3 Carbon disulfide (Z37.3-1968) 20 ppm 30 ppm 100 ppm 30 minutes. Carbon tetrachloride (Z37.17-1967) 10 ppm 25 ppm 200 ppm 5 min. in any 4 hrs. Chromic acid and chromates (Z37.7-1971) (as CrO 3 c 1 mg/10m 3 Ethylene dibromide (Z37.31-1970) 20 ppm 30 ppm 50 ppm 5 minutes. Ethylene dichloride (Z37.21-1969) 50 ppm 100 ppm 200 ppm 5 min. in any 3 hrs. Fluoride as dust (Z37.28-1969) 2.5 mg/m 3 Formaldehyde; see 1910.1048 Hydrogen fluoride (Z37.28-1969) 3 ppm Hydrogen sulfide (Z37.2-1966) 20 ppm 50 ppm 10 mins. once, only if no other meas. exp. occurs. Mercury (Z37.8-1971) 1 mg/10m 3 Methyl chloride (Z37.18-1969) 100 ppm 200 ppm 300 ppm 5 mins. in any 3 hrs. Methylene Chloride: See § 1919.52. Organo (alkyl) mercury (Z37.30-1969) 0.01 mg/m 3 0.04 mg/m 3 Styrene (Z37.15-1969) 100 ppm 200 ppm 600 ppm 5 mins. in any 3 hrs. Tetrachloroethylene (Z37.22-1967) 100 ppm 200 ppm 300 ppm 5 mins. in any 3 hrs. Toluene (Z37.12-1967) 200 ppm 300 ppm 500 ppm 10 minutes. Trichloroethylene (Z37.19-1967) 100 ppm 200 ppm 300 ppm 5 mins. in any 2 hrs. a b c d Table Z-3—Mineral Dusts Substance mppcf a mg/m 3 Silica: Crystalline Quartz (Respirable) f 250 b 10 mg/m 3 e % SiO 2 % SiO 2 Cristobalite: Use 1 2 f Tridymite: Use 1 2 f Amorphous, including natural diatomaceous earth 20 80 mg/m 3 %SiO 2 Silicates (less than 1% crystalline silica): Mica 20 Soapstone 20 Talc (not containing asbestos) 20 c Talc (containing asbestos) Use asbestos limit Tremolite, asbestiform (see 29 CFR 1910.1001) Portland cement 50 Graphite (Natural) 15 Coal Dust: Respirable fraction less than 5% SiO 2 2.4 mg/m 3 e 10 mg/m 3 e Respirable fraction greater than 5% SiO 2 _____ 2 Inert or Nuisance Dust: d Respirable fraction 15 5 mg/m 3 Total dust 50 15 mg/m 3 Note—Conversion factors - mppcf × 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles per c.c. a b c d e Aerodynamic diameter (unit density sphere) Percent passing selector 2 90 2.5 75 3.5 50 5.0 25 10 0 The measurements under this note refer to the use of an AEC (now NRC) instrument. The respirable fraction of coal dust is determined with an MRE; the figure corresponding to that of 2.4 mg/m 3 3K f [58 FR 35340, June 30, 1993; 58 FR 40191, July 27, 1993, as amended at 61 FR 56831, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1600, Jan. 10, 1997; 62 FR 42018, Aug. 4, 1997; 71 FR 10373, Feb. 28, 2006; 71 FR 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 36008, June 23, 2006; 81 FR 16861, Mar. 25, 2016; 81 FR 31167, May 18, 2016; 81 FR 60272, Sept. 1, 2016; 82 FR 2735, Jan. 9, 2017] § 1910.1001 Asbestos. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section does not apply to construction work as defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b). (Exposure to asbestos in construction work is covered by 29 CFR 1926.1101). (3) This section does not apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding and shipbreaking employments and related employments as defined in 29 CFR 1915.4. (Exposure to asbestos in these employments is covered by 29 CFR 1915.1001). (b) Definitions. Asbestos Asbestos-containing material Assistant Secretary Authorized person Building/facility owner Certified industrial hygienist (CIH) Director Employee exposure Fiber High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter Homogeneous area Industrial hygienist PACM Presumed asbestos containing material Regulated area Surfacing ACM Surfacing material Thermal System Insulation (TSI) Thermal System Insulation ACM (c) Permissible exposure limit (PELS) Time-weighted average limit (TWA). (2) Excursion limit. (d) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) Representative 8-hour TWA employee exposures shall be determined on the basis of one or more samples representing full-shift exposures for each shift for each employee in each job classification in each work area. Representative 30-minute short-term employee exposures shall be determined on the basis of one or more samples representing 30 minute exposures associated with operations that are most likely to produce exposures above the excursion limit for each shift for each job classification in each work area. (2) Initial monitoring. (ii) Where the employer has monitored after March 31, 1992, for the TWA permissible exposure limit and/or the excursion limit, and the monitoring satisfies all other requirements of this section, the employer may rely on such earlier monitoring results to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section. (iii) Where the employer has relied upon objective data that demonstrate that asbestos is not capable of being released in airborne concentrations at or above the TWA permissible exposure limit and/or excursion limit under the expected conditions of processing, use, or handling, then no initial monitoring is required. (3) Monitoring frequency (periodic monitoring) and patterns. (4) Changes in monitoring frequency. (5) Additional monitoring. (6) Method of monitoring. (ii) All samples taken to satisfy the monitoring requirements of paragraph (d) of this section shall be evaluated using the OSHA Reference Method (ORM) specified in appendix A of this section, or an equivalent counting method. (iii) If an equivalent method to the ORM is used, the employer shall ensure that the method meets the following criteria: (A) Replicate exposure data used to establish equivalency are collected in side-by-side field and laboratory comparisons; and (B) The comparison indicates that 90% of the samples collected in the range 0.5 to 2.0 times the permissible limit have an accuracy range of plus or minus 25 percent of the ORM results at a 95% confidence level as demonstrated by a statistically valid protocol; and (C) The equivalent method is documented and the results of the comparison testing are maintained. (iv) To satisfy the monitoring requirements of paragraph (d) of this section, employers must use the results of monitoring analysis performed by laboratories which have instituted quality assurance programs that include the elements as prescribed in appendix A of this section. (7) Employee notification of monitoring results. (ii) The written notification required by paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this section shall contain the corrective action being taken by the employer to reduce employee exposure to or below the TWA and/or excursion limit, wherever monitoring results indicated that the TWA and/or excursion limit had been exceeded. (e) Regulated Areas Establishment. (2) Demarcation. (3) Access. (4) Provision of respirators. (5) Prohibited activities. (f) Methods of compliance Engineering controls and work practices. (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering controls and work practices that can be instituted are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the TWA and/or excursion limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section, the employer shall use them to reduce employee exposure to the lowest levels achievable by these controls and shall supplement them by the use of respiratory protection that complies with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section. (iii) For the following operations, wherever feasible engineering controls and work practices that can be instituted are not sufficient to reduce the employee exposure to or below the TWA and/or excursion limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section, the employer shall use them to reduce employee exposure to or below 0.5 fiber per cubic centimeter of air (as an eight-hour time-weighted average) or 2.5 fibers/cc for 30 minutes (short-term exposure) and shall supplement them by the use of any combination of respiratory protection that complies with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section, work practices and feasible engineering controls that will reduce employee exposure to or below the TWA and to or below the excursion limit permissible prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section: Coupling cutoff in primary asbestos cement pipe manufacturing; sanding in primary and secondary asbestos cement sheet manufacturing; grinding in primary and secondary friction product manufacturing; carding and spinning in dry textile processes; and grinding and sanding in primary plastics manufacturing. (iv) Local exhaust ventilation. (v) Particular tools. (vi) Wet methods. (vii) [Reserved] (viii) Particular products and operations. (ix) Compressed air. (x) Flooring. (2) Compliance program. (ii) Such programs shall be reviewed and updated as necessary to reflect significant changes in the status of the employer's compliance program. (iii) Written programs shall be submitted upon request for examination and copying to the Assistant Secretary, the Director, affected employees and designated employee representatives. (iv) The employer shall not use employee rotation as a means of compliance with the TWA and/or excursion limit. (3) Specific compliance methods for brake and clutch repair: (i) Engineering controls and work practices for brake and clutch repair and service. During automotive brake and clutch inspection, disassembly, repair and assembly operations, the employer shall institute engineering controls and work practices to reduce employee exposure to materials containing asbestos using a negative pressure enclosure/HEPA vacuum system method or low pressure/wet cleaning method, which meets the detailed requirements set out in appendix F to this section. The employer may also comply using an equivalent method which follows written procedures which the employer demonstrates can achieve results equivalent to Method A in appendix F to this section. For facilities in which no more than 5 pair of brakes or 5 clutches are inspected, disassembled, repaired, or assembled per week, the method set forth in paragraph [D] of appendix F to this section may be used. (ii) The employer may also comply by using an equivalent method which follows written procedures, which the employer demonstrates can achieve equivalent exposure reductions as do the two “preferred methods.” Such demonstration must include monitoring data conducted under workplace conditions closely resembling the process, type of asbestos containing materials, control method, work practices and environmental conditions which the equivalent method will be used, or objective data, which document that under all reasonably foreseeable conditions of brake and clutch repair applications, the method results in exposures which are equivalent to the methods set out in appendix F to this section. (g) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activities, for which engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the TWA and/or excursion limit. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (ii) Employers must provide an employee with a tight-fitting, powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) instead of a negative pressure respirator selected according to paragraph (g)(3) of this standard when the employee chooses to use a PAPR and it provides adequate protection to the employee. (iii) No employee must be assigned to tasks requiring the use of respirators if, based on their most recent medical examination, the examining physician determines that the employee will be unable to function normally using a respirator, or that the safety or health of the employee or other employees will be impaired by the use of a respirator. Such employees must be assigned to another job or given the opportunity to transfer to a different position, the duties of which they can perform. If such a transfer position is available, the position must be with the same employer, in the same geographical area, and with the same seniority, status, and rate of pay the employee had just prior to such transfer. (3) Respirator selection. (i) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134; however, employers must not select or use filtering facepiece respirators for protection against asbestos fibers. (ii) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators. (h) Protective work clothing and equipment Provision and use. (i) Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing; (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and foot coverings; and (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or other appropriate protective equipment which complies with 1910.133 of this part. (2) Removal and storage. (ii) The employer shall ensure that no employee takes contaminated work clothing out of the change room, except those employees authorized to do so for the purpose of laundering, maintenance, or disposal. (iii) Contaminated work clothing shall be placed and stored in closed containers which prevent dispersion of the asbestos outside the container. (iv) The employer shall ensure that containers of contaminated protective devices or work clothing, which are to be taken out of change rooms or the workplace for cleaning, maintenance or disposal, bear labels in accordance with paragraph (j) of this section. (3) Cleaning and replacement. (ii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of asbestos from protective clothing and equipment by blowing or shaking. (iii) Laundering of contaminated clothing shall be done so as to prevent the release of airborne fibers of asbestos in excess of the permissible exposure limits prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section. (iv) Any employer who gives contaminated clothing to another person for laundering shall inform such person of the requirement in paragraph (h)(3)(iii) of this section to effectively prevent the release of airborne fibers of asbestos in excess of the permissible exposure limits. (v) The employer shall inform any person who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment contaminated with asbestos of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to asbestos. (vi) The employer shall ensure that contaminated clothing is transported in sealed impermeable bags, or other closed, impermeable containers, and labeled in accordance with paragraph (j) of this section. (i) Hygiene facilities and practices Change rooms. (ii) The employer shall ensure that change rooms are in accordance with 1910.141(e) of this part, and are equipped with two separate lockers or storage facilities, so separated as to prevent contamination of the employee's street clothes from his protective work clothing and equipment. (2) Showers. (ii) The employer shall provide shower facilities which comply with 1910.141(d)(3) of this part. (iii) The employer shall ensure that employees who are required to shower pursuant to paragraph (i)(2)(i) of this section do not leave the workplace wearing any clothing or equipment worn during the work shift. (3) Lunchrooms. (ii) The employer shall ensure that lunchroom facilities have a positive pressure, filtered air supply, and are readily accessible to employees. (iii) The employer shall ensure that employees who work in areas where their airborne exposure is above the PEL and/or excursion limit wash their hands and faces prior to eating, drinking or smoking. (iv) The employer shall ensure that employees do not enter lunchroom facilities with protective work clothing or equipment unless surface asbestos fibers have been removed from the clothing or equipment by vacuuming or other method that removes dust without causing the asbestos to become airborne. (4) Smoking in work areas. (j) Communication of hazards to employees—Introduction. (1) Hazard communication—general. (ii) In classifying the hazards of asbestos at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer and lung effects. (iii) Employers shall include asbestos in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of asbestos and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (j)(7) of this section. (2) Installed Asbestos Containing Material. (3) Duties of employers and building and facility owners. (ii) Building and facility owners shall maintain records of all information required to be provided pursuant to this section and/or otherwise known to the building owner concerning the presence, location and quantity of ACM and PACM in the building/facility. Such records shall be kept for the duration of ownership and shall be transferred to successive owners. (iii) Building and facility owners shall inform employers of employees, and employers shall inform employees who will perform housekeeping activities in areas which contain ACM and/or PACM of the presence and location of ACM and/or PACM in such areas which may be contacted during such activities. (4) Warning signs Posting. (ii) Sign specifications: (A) The warning signs required by paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section shall bear the following legend: DANGER ASBESTOS MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (B) In addition, where the use of respirators and protective clothing is required in the regulated area under this section, the warning signs shall include the following: WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING IN THIS AREA (C) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (j)(4)(ii)(A) of this section: DANGER ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (D) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (j)(4)(ii)(B) of this section: RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA (iii) The employer shall ensure that employees working in and contiguous to regulated areas comprehend the warning signs required to be posted by paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section. Means to ensure employee comprehension may include the use of foreign languages, pictographs and graphics. (iv) At the entrance to mechanical rooms/areas in which employees reasonably can be expected to enter and which contain ACM and/or PACM, the building owner shall post signs which identify the material which is present, its location, and appropriate work practices which, if followed, will ensure that ACM and/or PACM will not be disturbed. The employer shall ensure, to the extent feasible, that employees who come in contact with these signs can comprehend them. Means to ensure employee comprehension may include the use of foreign languages, pictographs, graphics, and awareness training. (5) Warning labels Labeling. (ii) Label specifications. DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS DO NOT BREATHE DUST AVOID CREATING DUST (iii) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on raw materials, mixtures or labels of bags or containers of protective clothing and equipment, scrap, waste, and debris containing asbestos fibers in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraphs (j)(1)(i) and (j)(5)(ii) of this section: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD (6) The provisions for labels and for safety data sheets required by paragraph (j) of this section do not apply where: (i) Asbestos fibers have been modified by a bonding agent, coating, binder, or other material provided that the manufacturer can demonstrate that during any reasonably foreseeable use, handling, storage, disposal, processing, or transportation, no airborne concentrations of fibers of asbestos in excess of the TWA permissible exposure level and/or excursion limit will be released or (ii) Asbestos is present in a product in concentrations less than 1.0%. (7) Employee information and training. (ii) Training shall be provided prior to or at the time of initial assignment and at least annually thereafter. (iii) The training program shall be conducted in a manner which the employee is able to understand. The employer shall ensure that each employee is informed of the following: (A) The health effects associated with asbestos exposure; (B) The relationship between smoking and exposure to asbestos producing lung cancer: (C) The quantity, location, manner of use, release, and storage of asbestos, and the specific nature of operations which could result in exposure to asbestos; (D) The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job assignment; (E) The specific procedures implemented to protect employees from exposure to asbestos, such as appropriate work practices, emergency and clean-up procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used; (F) The purpose, proper use, and limitations of respirators and protective clothing, if appropriate; (G) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program required by paragraph (l) of this section; (H) The content of this standard, including appendices. (I) The names, addresses and phone numbers of public health organizations which provide information, materials, and/or conduct programs concerning smoking cessation. The employer may distribute the list of such organizations contained in appendix I to this section, to comply with this requirement. (J) The requirements for posting signs and affixing labels and the meaning of the required legends for such signs and labels. (iv) The employer shall also provide, at no cost to employees who perform housekeeping operations in an area which contains ACM or PACM, an asbestos awareness training course, which shall at a minimum contain the following elements: health effects of asbestos, locations of ACM and PACM in the building/facility, recognition of ACM and PACM damage and deterioration, requirements in this standard relating to housekeeping, and proper response to fiber release episodes, to all employees who perform housekeeping work in areas where ACM and/or PACM is present. Each such employee shall be so trained at least once a year. (v) Access to information and training materials. (A) The employer shall make a copy of this standard and its appendices readily available without cost to all affected employees. (B) The employer shall provide, upon request, all materials relating to the employee information and training program to the Assistant Secretary and the training program to the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (C) The employer shall inform all employees concerning the availability of self-help smoking cessation program material. Upon employee request, the employer shall distribute such material, consisting of NIH Publication No. 89-1647, or equivalent self-help material, which is approved or published by a public health organization listed in appendix I to this section. (8) Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM. (ii) An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain asbestos by the following: (A) Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 CFR 763, subpart E) which demonstrates that no ACM is present in the material; or (B) Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. (iii) The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. (k) Housekeeping. (2) All spills and sudden releases of material containing asbestos shall be cleaned up as soon as possible. (3) Surfaces contaminated with asbestos may not be cleaned by the use of compressed air. (4) Vacuuming. (5) Shoveling, dry sweeping and dry clean-up of asbestos may be used only where vacuuming and/or wet cleaning are not feasible. (6) Waste disposal. (7) Care of asbestos-containing flooring material. (i) Sanding of asbestos-containing floor material is prohibited. (ii) Stripping of finishes shall be conducted using low abrasion pads at speeds lower than 300 rpm and wet methods. (iii) Burnishing or dry buffing may be performed only on asbestos-containing flooring which has sufficient finish so that the pad cannot contact the asbestos-containing material. (8) Waste and debris and accompanying dust in an area containing accessible ACM and/or PACM or visibly deteriorated ACM, shall not be dusted or swept dry, or vacuumed without using a HEPA filter. (l) Medical surveillance General Employees covered. (ii) Examination by a physician. (B) Persons other than licensed physicians, who administer the pulmonary function testing required by this section, shall complete a training course in spirometry sponsored by an appropriate academic or professional institution. (2) Pre-placement examinations. (ii) Such examination shall include, as a minimum, a medical and work history; a complete physical examination of all systems with emphasis on the respiratory system, the cardiovascular system and digestive tract; completion of the respiratory disease standardized questionnaire in appendix D to this section, part 1; a 14- by 17-inch or other reasonably-sized standard film or digital posterior-anterior chest X-ray; pulmonary function tests to include forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume at 1 second (FEV 1 (3) Periodic examinations. (ii) The scope of the medical examination shall be in conformance with the protocol established in paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this section, except that the frequency of chest X-rays shall be conducted in accordance with Table 1 to this section, and the abbreviated standardized questionnaire contained in part 2 of appendix D to this section shall be administered to the employee. Table 1 to § 1910.1001—Frequency of Chest X-ray Years since first exposure Age of employee 15 to 35 35 + to 45 45 + 0 to 10 Every 5 years Every 5 years Every 5 years. 10 + Every 5 years Every 2 years Every 1 year. (4) Termination of employment examinations. (ii) The medical examination shall be in accordance with the requirements of the periodic examinations stipulated in paragraph (l)(3) of this section, and shall be given within 30 calendar days before or after the date of termination of employment. (5) Recent examinations. (6) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this standard and Appendices D and E. (ii) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposure. (iii) The employee's representative exposure level or anticipated exposure level. (iv) A description of any personal protective and respiratory equipment used or to be used. (v) Information from previous medical examinations of the affected employee that is not otherwise available to the examining physician. (7) Physician's written opinion. (A) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions that would place the employee at an increased risk of material health impairment from exposure to asbestos; (B) Any recommended limitations on the employee or upon the use of personal protective equipment such as clothing or respirators; (C) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and of any medical conditions resulting from asbestos exposure that require further explanation or treatment; and (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the increased risk of lung cancer attributable to the combined effect of smoking and asbestos exposure. (ii) The employer shall instruct the physician not to reveal in the written opinion given to the employer specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure to asbestos. (iii) The employer shall provide a copy of the physician's written opinion to the affected employee within 30 days from its receipt. (m) Recordkeeping Exposure measurements. Note: The employer may utilize the services of competent organizations such as industry trade associations and employee associations to maintain the records required by this section. (i) The employer shall keep an accurate record of all measurements taken to monitor employee exposure to asbestos as prescribed in paragraph (d) of this section. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement; (B) The operation involving exposure to asbestos which is being monitored; (C) Sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) Number, duration, and results of samples taken; (E) Type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any; and (F) Name and exposure of the employees whose exposure are represented. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20. (2) Objective data for exempted operations. (ii) The record shall include at least the following: (A) The product qualifying for exemption; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol, results of testing, and/or analysis of the material for the release of asbestos; (D) A description of the operation exempted and how the data support the exemption; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exemption. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of the employer's reliance upon such objective data. (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information: (A) The name of the employee; (B) Physician's written opinions; (C) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to asbestos; and (D) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by paragraph (l)(6) of this section. (iii) The employer shall ensure that this record is maintained for the duration of employment plus thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (4) Training. (5) Availability. (ii) The employer, upon request shall make any exposure records required by paragraph (m)(1) of this section available for examination and copying to affected employees, former employees, designated representatives and the Assistant Secretary, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a) through (e) and (g) through (i). (iii) The employer, upon request, shall make employee medical records required by paragraph (m)(3) of this section available for examination and copying to the subject employee, to anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee, and the Assistant Secretary, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (6) Transfer of records. (n) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (o) Appendices. (2) Appendices B, G, H, I, and J to this section are informational and are not intended to create any additional obligations not otherwise imposed or to detract from any existing obligations. Appendix A to § 1910.1001—OSHA Reference Method—Mandatory This mandatory appendix specifies the procedure for analyzing air samples for asbestos and specifies quality control procedures that must be implemented by laboratories performing the analysis. The sampling and analytical methods described below represent the elements of the available monitoring methods (such as appendix B of their regulation, the most current version of the OSHA method ID-160, or the most current version of the NIOSH Method 7400). All employers who are required to conduct air monitoring under paragraph (d) of the standard are required to utilize analytical laboratories that use this procedure, or an equivalent method, for collecting and analyzing samples. Sampling and Analytical Procedure 1. The sampling medium for air samples shall be mixed cellulose ester filter membranes. These shall be designated by the manufacturer as suitable for asbestos counting. See below for rejection of blanks. 2. The preferred collection device shall be the 25-mm diameter cassette with an open-faced 50-mm electrically conductive extension cowl. The 37-mm cassette may be used if necessary but only if written justification for the need to use the 37-mm filter cassette accompanies the sample results in the employee's exposure monitoring record. Do not reuse or reload cassettes for asbestos sample collection. 3. An air flow rate between 0.5 liter/min and 2.5 liters/min shall be selected for the 25-mm cassette. If the 37-mm cassette is used, an air flow rate between 1 liter/min and 2.5 liters/min shall be selected. 4. Where possible, a sufficient air volume for each air sample shall be collected to yield between 100 and 1,300 fibers per square millimeter on the membrane filter. If a filter darkens in appearance or if loose dust is seen on the filter, a second sample shall be started. 5. Ship the samples in a rigid container with sufficient packing material to prevent dislodging the collected fibers. Packing material that has a high electrostatic charge on its surface (e.g., expanded polystyrene) cannot be used because such material can cause loss of fibers to the sides of the cassette. 6. Calibrate each personal sampling pump before and after use with a representative filter cassette installed between the pump and the calibration devices. 7. Personal samples shall be taken in the “breathing zone” of the employee ( i.e. 8. Fiber counts shall be made by positive phase contrast using a microscope with an 8 to 10× eyepiece and a 40 to 45× objective for a total magnification of approximately 400× and a numerical aperture of 0.65 to 0.75. The microscope shall also be fitted with a green or blue filter. 9. The microscope shall be fitted with a Walton-Beckett eyepiece graticule calibrated for a field diameter of 100 micrometers (±2 micrometers). 10. The phase-shift detection limit of the microscope shall be about 3 degrees measured using the HSE phase shift test slide as outlined below. a. Place the test slide on the microscope stage and center it under the phase objective. b. Bring the blocks of grooved lines into focus. Note: The slide consists of seven sets of grooved lines (ca. 20 grooves to each block) in descending order of visibility from sets 1 to 7, seven being the least visible. The requirements for asbestos counting are that the microscope optics must resolve the grooved lines in set 3 completely, although they may appear somewhat faint, and that the grooved lines in sets 6 and 7 must be invisible. Sets 4 and 5 must be at least partially visible but may vary slightly in visibility between microscopes. A microscope that fails to meet these requirements has either too low or too high a resolution to be used for asbestos counting. c. If the image deteriorates, clean and adjust the microscope optics. If the problem persists, consult the microscope manufacturer. 11. Each set of samples taken will include 10% field blanks or a minimum of 2 field blanks. These blanks must come from the same lot as the filters used for sample collection. The field blank results shall be averaged and subtracted from the analytical results before reporting. A set consists of any sample or group of samples for which an evaluation for this standard must be made. Any samples represented by a field blank having a fiber count in excess of the detection limit of the method being used shall be rejected. 12. The samples shall be mounted by the acetone/triacetin method or a method with an equivalent index of refraction and similar clarity. 13. Observe the following counting rules. a. Count only fibers equal to or longer than 5 micrometers. Measure the length of curved fibers along the curve. b. In the absence of other information, count all particles as asbesto that have a length-to-width ratio (aspect ratio) of 3:1 or greater. c. Fibers lying entirely within the boundary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the boundary once, having one end within the circle, shall receive the count of one half ( 1/2 d. Count bundles of fibers as one fiber unless individual fibers can be identified by observing both ends of an individual fiber. e. Count enough graticule fields to yield 100 fibers. Count a minimum of 20 fields; stop counting at 100 fields regardless of fiber count. 14. Blind recounts shall be conducted at the rate of 10 percent. Quality Control Procedures 1. Intralaboratory program. Each laboratory and/or each company with more than one microscopist counting slides shall establish a statistically designed quality assurance program involving blind recounts and comparisons between microscopists to monitor the variability of counting by each microscopist and between microscopists. In a company with more than one laboratory, the program shall include all laboratories and shall also evaluate the laboratory-to-laboratory variability. 2.a. Interlaboratory program. Each laboratory analyzing asbestos samples for compliance determination shall implement an interlaboratory quality assurance program that as a minimum includes participation of at least two other independent laboratories. Each laboratory shall participate in round robin testing at least once every 6 months with at least all the other laboratories in its interlaboratory quality assurance group. Each laboratory shall submit slides typical of its own work load for use in this program. The round robin shall be designed and results analyzed using appropriate statistical methodology. 2.b. All laboratories should also participate in a national sample testing scheme such as the Proficiency Analytical Testing Program (PAT), or the Asbestos Registry sponsored by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA). 3. All individuals performing asbestos analysis must have taken the NIOSH course for sampling and evaluating airborne asbestos dust or an equalivalent course. 4. When the use of different microscopes contributes to differences between counters and laboratories, the effect of the different microscope shall be evaluated and the microscope shall be replaced, as necessary. 5. Current results of these quality assurance programs shall be posted in each laboratory to keep the microscopists informed. Appendix B to § 1910.1001—Detailed Procedures for Asbestos Sampling and Analysis—Non-mandatory Matrix Air: OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits: Time Weighted Average 0.1 fiber/cc Excursion Level (30 minutes) 1.0 fiber/cc Collection Procedure: A known volume of air is drawn through a 25-mm diameter cassette containing a mixed-cellulose ester filter. The cassette must be equipped with an electrically conductive 50-mm extension cowl. The sampling time and rate are chosen to give a fiber density of between 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm 2 Recommended Sampling Rate 0.5 to 5.0 liters/minute (L/min) Recommended Air Volumes: Minimum 25 L Maximum 2,400 L Analytical Procedure: A portion of the sample filter is cleared and prepared for asbestos fiber counting by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) at 400X. Commercial manufacturers and products mentioned in this method are for descriptive use only and do not constitute endorsements by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from other sources can be substituted. 1. Introduction This method describes the collection of airborne asbestos fibers using calibrated sampling pumps with mixed-cellulose ester (MCE) filters and analysis by phase contrast microscopy (PCM). Some terms used are unique to this method and are defined below: Asbestos: Chrysotile Mg 3 2 5 4 Crocidolite Na 2 3 2 8 22 2 Amosite (Mg,Fe) 7 8 22 2 Tremolite-actinolite Ca 2 5 8 22 2 Anthophyllite (Mg,Fe) 7 8 22 2 Asbestos Fiber: Aspect Ratio: Cleavage Fragments: Detection Limit: Differential Counting: Fiber: Field: Set: Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite: Walton-Beckett Graticule: 2 1.1. History Early surveys to determine asbestos exposures were conducted using impinger counts of total dust with the counts expressed as million particles per cubic foot. The British Asbestos Research Council recommended filter membrane counting in 1969. In July 1969, the Bureau of Occupational Safety and Health published a filter membrane method for counting asbestos fibers in the United States. This method was refined by NIOSH and published as P CAM 239. On May 29, 1971, OSHA specified filter membrane sampling with phase contrast counting for evaluation of asbestos exposures at work sites in the United States. The use of this technique was again required by OSHA in 1986. Phase contrast microscopy has continued to be the method of choice for the measurement of occupational exposure to asbestos. 1.2. Principle Air is drawn through a MCE filter to capture airborne asbestos fibers. A wedge shaped portion of the filter is removed, placed on a glass microscope slide and made transparent. A measured area (field) is viewed by PCM. All the fibers meeting defined criteria for asbestos are counted and considered a measure of the airborne asbestos concentration. 1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages There are four main advantages of PCM over other methods: (1) The technique is specific for fibers. Phase contrast is a fiber counting technique which excludes non-fibrous particles from the analysis. (2) The technique is inexpensive and does not require specialized knowledge to carry out the analysis for total fiber counts. (3) The analysis is quick and can be performed on-site for rapid determination of air concentrations of asbestos fibers. (4) The technique has continuity with historical epidemiological studies so that estimates of expected disease can be inferred from long-term determinations of asbestos exposures. The main disadvantage of PCM is that it does not positively identify asbestos fibers. Other fibers which are not asbestos may be included in the count unless differential counting is performed. This requires a great deal of experience to adequately differentiate asbestos from non-asbestos fibers. Positive identification of asbestos must be performed by polarized light or electron microscopy techniques. A further disadvantage of PCM is that the smallest visible fibers are about 0.2 µm in diameter while the finest asbestos fibers may be as small as 0.02 µm in diameter. For some exposures, substantially more fibers may be present than are actually counted. 1.4. Workplace Exposure Asbestos is used by the construction industry in such products as shingles, floor tiles, asbestos cement, roofing felts, insulation and acoustical products. Non-construction uses include brakes, clutch facings, paper, paints, plastics, and fabrics. One of the most significant exposures in the workplace is the removal and encapsulation of asbestos in schools, public buildings, and homes. Many workers have the potential to be exposed to asbestos during these operations. About 95% of the asbestos in commercial use in the United States is chrysotile. Crocidolite and amosite make up most of the remainder. Anthophyllite and tremolite or actinolite are likely to be encountered as contaminants in various industrial products. 1.5. Physical Properties Asbestos fiber possesses a high tensile strength along its axis, is chemically inert, non-combustible, and heat resistant. It has a high electrical resistance and good sound absorbing properties. It can be weaved into cables, fabrics or other textiles, and also matted into asbestos papers, felts, or mats. 2. Range and Detection Limit 2.1. The ideal counting range on the filter is 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm 2 2.2. The detection limit for this method is 4.0 fibers per 100 fields or 5.5 fibers/mm 2 Lower Control Limit (95% Confidence) = AC − 1.645(CV)(AC) Where: AC = Estimate of the airborne fiber concentration (fibers/cc) Setting the Lower Control Limit = 0 and solving for CV: 0 = AC − 1.645(CV)(AC) CV = 0.61 This value was compared with CV vs. count curves. The count at which CV = 0.61 for Leidel-Busch counting statistics or for an OSHA Salt Lake Technical Center (OSHA-SLTC) CV curve (see appendix A for further information) was 4.4 fibers or 3.9 fibers per 100 fields, respectively. Although a lower detection limit of 4 fibers per 100 fields is supported by the OSHA-SLTC data, both data sets support the 4.5 fibers per 100 fields value. 3. Method Performance—Precision and Accuracy Precision is dependent upon the total number of fibers counted and the uniformity of the fiber distribution on the filter. A general rule is to count at least 20 and not more than 100 fields. The count is discontinued when 100 fibers are counted, provided that 20 fields have already been counted. Counting more than 100 fibers results in only a small gain in precision. As the total count drops below 10 fibers, an accelerated loss of precision is noted. At this time, there is no known method to determine the absolute accuracy of the asbestos analysis. Results of samples prepared through the Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) Program and analyzed by the OSHA-SLTC showed no significant bias when compared to PAT reference values. The PAT samples were analyzed from 1987 to 1989 (N = 36) and the concentration range was from 120 to 1,300 fibers/mm 2 4. Interferences Fibrous substances, if present, may interfere with asbestos analysis. Some common fibers are: fiberglass anhydrite plant fibers perlite veins gypsum some synthetic fibers membrane structures sponge spicules diatoms microorganisms wollastonite The use of electron microscopy or optical tests such as polarized light, and dispersion staining may be used to differentiate these materials from asbestos when necessary. 5. Sampling 5.1. Equipment 5.1.1. Notes: (a) Do not re-use cassettes. (b) Fully conductive cassettes are required to reduce fiber loss to the sides of the cassette due to electrostatic attraction. (c) Purchase filters which have been selected by the manufacturer for asbestos counting or analyze representative filters for fiber background before use. Discard the filter lot if more than 4 fibers/100 fields are found. (d) To decrease the possibility of contamination, the sampling system (filter-backup pad-cassette) for asbestos is usually preassembled by the manufacturer. (e) Other cassettes, such as the Bell-mouth, may be used within the limits of their validation. 5.1.2. 5.1.3. Each pump must be a battery operated, self-contained unit small enough to be placed on the monitored employee and not interfere with the work being performed. The pump must be capable of sampling at the collection rate for the required sampling time. 5.1.4. 5.1.5. Stopwatch and bubble tube/burette or electronic meter. 5.2. Sampling Procedure 5.2.1. 5.2.2. 5.2.3. 5.2.4. 5.2.5. Note: If sampling site calibration is not possible, environmental influences may affect the flow rate. The extent is dependent on the type of pump used. Consult with the pump manufacturer to determine dependence on environmental influences. If the pump is affected by temperature and pressure changes, correct the flow rate using the formula shown in the section “Sampling Pump Flow Rate Corrections” at the end of this appendix. 5.2.6. 5.2.7. 5.2.8. Environment Air vol. (L) Asbestos removal operations (visible dust) 100 Asbestos removal operations (little dust) 240 Office environments 400 Caution: While sampling, observe the filter with a small flashlight. If there is a visible layer of dust on the filter, stop sampling, remove and seal the cassette, and replace with a new sampling assembly. The total dust loading should not exceed 1 mg. 5.2.9. 5.2.10. 5.2.11 5.3. Sample Shipment 5.3.1. 5.3.2. 5.3.3. 6. Analysis 6.1. Safety Precautions 6.1.1. 6.1.2. Caution: 6.2. Equipment 6.2.1. 6.2.2. Note: 6.2.3. 6.2.4. 6.2.5. A rotating mechanical stage is convenient for use with polarized light. 6.2.6. 6.2.7. 6.2.8. Phase-shift test slide, mark II (Available from PTR optics Ltd., and also McCrone). 6.2.9. 6.2.10. 1/2 6.2.11. 6.2.12. 6.2.13. 6.2.14. 6.2.15. 6.3. Reagents 6.3.1. 6.3.2. 6.3.3. 6.4. Standard Preparation A way to prepare standard asbestos samples of known concentration has not been developed. It is possible to prepare replicate samples of nearly equal concentration. This has been performed through the PAT program. These asbestos samples are distributed by the AIHA to participating laboratories. Since only about one-fourth of a 25-mm sample membrane is required for an asbestos count, any PAT sample can serve as a “standard” for replicate counting. 6.5. Sample Mounting Note: See Safety Precautions in Section 6.1. before proceeding. The objective is to produce samples with a smooth (non-grainy) background in a medium with a refractive index of approximately 1.46. The technique below collapses the filter for easier focusing and produces permanent mounts which are useful for quality control and interlaboratory comparison. An aluminum block or similar device is required for sample preparation. 6.5.1. 6.5.2. 6.5.3. 6.5.4. 6.5.5. 6.5.6. 6.5.7. 6.5.8. 6.5.9. 6.6. Sample Analysis Completely align the microscope according to the manufacturer's instructions. Then, align the microscope using the following general alignment routine at the beginning of every counting session and more often if necessary. 6.6.1. (1) Clean all optical surfaces. Even a small amount of dirt can significantly degrade the image. (2) Rough focus the objective on a sample. (3) Close down the field iris so that it is visible in the field of view. Focus the image of the iris with the condenser focus. Center the image of the iris in the field of view. (4) Install the phase telescope and focus on the phase rings. Critically center the rings. Misalignment of the rings results in astigmatism which will degrade the image. (5) Place the phase-shift test slide on the microscope stage and focus on the lines. The analyst must see line set 3 and should see at least parts of 4 and 5 but, not see line set 6 or 6. A microscope/microscopist combination which does not pass this test may not be used. 6.6.2. (1) Place the prepared sample slide on the mechanical stage of the microscope. Position the center of the wedge under the objective lens and focus upon the sample. (2) Start counting from one end of the wedge and progress along a radial line to the other end (count in either direction from perimeter to wedge tip). Select fields randomly, without looking into the eyepieces, by slightly advancing the slide in one direction with the mechanical stage control. (3) Continually scan over a range of focal planes (generally the upper 10 to 15 µm of the filter surface) with the fine focus control during each field count. Spend at least 5 to 15 seconds per field. (4) Most samples will contain asbestos fibers with fiber diameters less than 1 µm. Look carefully for faint fiber images. The small diameter fibers will be very hard to see. However, they are an important contribution to the total count. (5) Count only fibers equal to or longer than 5 µm. Measure the length of curved fibers along the curve. (6) Count fibers which have a length to width ratio of 3:1 or greater. (7) Count all the fibers in at least 20 fields. Continue counting until either 100 fibers are counted or 100 fields have been viewed; whichever occurs first. Count all the fibers in the final field. (8) Fibers lying entirely within the boundary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the boundary once, having one end within the circle shall receive a count of 1/2 (9) Count bundles of fibers as one fiber unless individual fibers can be clearly identified and each individual fiber is clearly not connected to another counted fiber. See Figure 1 for counting conventions. (10) Record the number of fibers in each field in a consistent way such that filter non-uniformity can be assessed. (11) Regularly check phase ring alignment. (12) When an agglomerate (mass of material) covers more than 25% of the field of view, reject the field and select another. Do not include it in the number of fields counted. (13) Perform a “blind recount” of 1 in every 10 filter wedges (slides). Re-label the slides using a person other than the original counter. 6.7. Fiber Identification As previously mentioned in Section 1.3., PCM does not provide positive confirmation of asbestos fibers. Alternate differential counting techniques should be used if discrimination is desirable. Differential counting may include primary discrimination based on morphology, polarized light analysis of fibers, or modification of PCM data by Scanning Electron or Transmission Electron Microscopy. A great deal of experience is required to routinely and correctly perform differential counting. It is discouraged unless it is legally necessary. Then, only if a fiber is obviously not asbestos should it be excluded from the count. Further discussion of this technique can be found in reference 8.10. If there is a question whether a fiber is asbestos or not, follow the rule: “WHEN IN DOUBT, COUNT.” 6.8. Analytical Recommendations—Quality Control System 6.8.1. 6.8.2. 6.8.3. 6.8.4. The analyses done by the counters to establish the slide bank may be used for an interim quality control program if the data are treated in a proper statistical fashion. 7. Calculations 7.1. Calculate the estimated airborne asbestos fiber concentration on the filter sample using the following formula: where: AC = Airborne fiber concentration FB = Total number of fibers greater than 5 µm counted FL = Total number of fields counted on the filter BFB = Total number of fibers greater than 5 µm counted in the blank BFL = Total number of fields counted on the blank ECA = Effective collecting area of filter (385 mm 2 FR = Pump flow rate (L/min) MFA = Microscope count field area (mm 2 2 T = Sample collection time (min) 1,000 = Conversion of L to cc Note: The collection area of a filter is seldom equal to 385 mm 2 Area = π(d/2) 2 7.2. Short-cut Calculation Since a given analyst always has the same interpupillary distance, the number of fields per filter for a particular analyst will remain constant for a given size filter. The field size for that analyst is constant ( i.e. For example, if the exposed area of the filter is always 385 mm 2 2 7.3. Recount Calculations As mentioned in step 13 of Section 6.6.2., a “blind recount” of 10% of the slides is performed. In all cases, differences will be observed between the first and second counts of the same filter wedge. Most of these differences will be due to chance alone, that is, due to the random variability (precision) of the count method. Statistical recount criteria enables one to decide whether observed differences can be explained due to chance alone or are probably due to systematic differences between analysts, microscopes, or other biasing factors. The following recount criterion is for a pair of counts that estimate AC in fibers/cc. The criterion is given at the type-I error level. That is, there is 5% maximum risk that we will reject a pair of counts for the reason that one might be biased, when the large observed difference is really due to chance. Reject a pair of counts if: Where: AC1 = lower estimated airborne fiber concentration AC2 = higher estimated airborne fiber concentration ACavg = average of the two concentration estimates CV FB If a pair of counts are rejected by this criterion then, recount the rest of the filters in the submitted set. Apply the test and reject any other pairs failing the test. Rejection shall include a memo to the industrial hygienist stating that the sample failed a statistical test for homogeneity and the true air concentration may be significantly different than the reported value. 7.4. Reporting Results Report results to the industrial hygienist as fibers/cc. Use two significant figures. If multiple analyses are performed on a sample, an average of the results is to be reported unless any of the results can be rejected for cause. 8. References 8.1. Dreesen, W.C., et al, U.S. Public Health Service: A Study of Asbestosis in the Asbestos Textile Industry, 8.2. Asbestos Research Council: The Measurement of Airborne Asbestos Dust by the Membrane Filter Method 8.3. Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, R.D., Brown, T.A., Equipment and Procedure for Mounting Millipore Filters and Counting Asbestos Fibers by Phase Contrast Microscopy, 8.4. NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, 8.5. Asbestos, 8.6. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite. Final Rule, Federal Register 8.7. Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite, 8.8. Criteria for a Recommended Standard—Occupational Exposure to Asbestos 8.9. Leidel, N.A., Bayer,S.G., Zumwalde, R.D.,Busch, K.A., USPHS/NIOSH Membrane Filter Method for Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Fibers 8.10. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Microscopy in Analysis of Asbestos and Quartz, Quality Control The OSHA asbestos regulations require each laboratory to establish a quality control program. The following is presented as an example of how the OSHA-SLTC constructed its internal CV curve as part of meeting this requirement. Data is from 395 samples collected during OSHA compliance inspections and analyzed from October 1980 through April 1986. Each sample was counted by 2 to 5 different counters independently of one another. The standard deviation and the CV statistic was calculated for each sample. This data was then plotted on a graph of CV vs. fibers/mm 2 CV = antilog1 10 10 2 10 where: x = the number of fibers/mm 2 Application of least squares gave: A = 0.182205 B = −0.973343 C = 0.327499 Using these values, the equation becomes: CV = antilog 10 10 2 10 Sampling Pump Flow Rate Corrections This correction is used if a difference greater than 5% in ambient temperature and/or pressure is noted between calibration and sampling sites and the pump does not compensate for the differences. Where: Q act Q cal P cal P act T act T cal Walton-Beckett Graticule When ordering the Graticule for asbestos counting, specify the exact disc diameter needed to fit the ocular of the microscope and the diameter (mm) of the circular counting area. Instructions for measuring the dimensions necessary are listed: (1) Insert any available graticule into the focusing eyepiece and focus so that the graticule lines are sharp and clear. (2) Align the microscope. (3) Place a stage micrometer on the microscope object stage and focus the microscope on the graduated lines. (4) Measure the magnified grid length, PL (µm), using the stage micrometer. (5) Remove the graticule from the microscope and measure its actual grid length, AL (mm). This can be accomplished by using a mechanical stage fitted with verniers, or a jeweler's loupe with a direct reading scale. (6) Let D = 100 µm. Calculate the circle diameter, d c Example: If PL = 108 µm, AL = 2.93 mm and D = 100 µm, then, (7) Each eyepiece-objective-reticle combination on the microscope must be calibrated. Should any of the three be changed (by zoom adjustment, disassembly, replacement, etc.), the combination must be recalibrated. Calibration may change if interpupillary distance is changed. Measure the field diameter, D (acceptable range: 100±2 µm) with a stage micrometer upon receipt of the graticule from the manufacturer. Determine the field area (mm 2 Field Area = Δ(D/2) 2 If D = 100 µm = 0.1 mm, then Field Area = Δ(0.1 mm/2) 2 2 The Graticule is available from: Graticules Ltd., Morley Road, Tonbridge TN9 IRN, Kent, England (Telephone 011-44-732-359061). Also available from PTR Optics Ltd., 145 Newton Street, Waltham, MA 02154 [telephone (617) 891-6000] or McCrone Accessories and Components, 2506 S. Michigan Ave., Chicago, IL 60616 [phone (312)-842-7100]. The graticule is custom made for each microscope. Counts for the Fibers in the Figure Structure No. Count Explanation 1 to 6 1 Single fibers all contained within the circle. 7 1 2 Fiber crosses circle once. 8 0 Fiber too short. 9 2 Two crossing fibers. 10 0 Fiber outside graticule. 11 0 Fiber crosses graticule twice. 12 1 2 Although split, fiber only crosses once. Appendix C to § 1910.1001 [Reserved] Appendix D to § 1910.1001—Medical Questionnaires; Mandatory Appendix E to § 1910.1001—Classification of Chest X-Rays—Mandatory (a) Chest X-rays shall be classified in accordance with the Guidelines for the use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses (revised edition 2011) (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6), and recorded on a classification form following the format of the CDC/NIOSH (M) 2.8 form. As a minimum, the content within the bold lines of this form (items 1 through 4) shall be included. This form is not to be submitted to NIOSH. (b) All X-rays shall be classified only by a B-Reader, a board eligible/certified radiologist, or an experienced physician with known expertise in pneumoconioses. (c) Whenever classifying chest X-ray film, the physician shall have immediately available for reference a complete set of the ILO standard format radiographs provided for use with the Guidelines for the use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses (revised edition 2011). (d) Whenever classifying digitally-acquired chest X-rays, the physician shall have immediately available for reference a complete set of ILO standard digital chest radiographic images provided for use with the Guidelines for the Use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses (revised edition 2011). Classification of digitally-acquired chest X-rays shall be based on the viewing of images displayed as electronic copies and shall not be based on the viewing of hard copy printed transparencies of images. Appendix F to § 1910.1001—Work Practices and Engineering Controls for Automotive Brake and Clutch Inspection, Disassembly, Repair and Assembly—Mandatory This mandatory appendix specifies engineering controls and work practices that must be implemented by the employer during automotive brake and clutch inspection, disassembly, repair, and assembly operations. Proper use of these engineering controls and work practices by trained employees will reduce employees' asbestos exposure below the permissible exposure level during clutch and brake inspection, disassembly, repair, and assembly operations. The employer shall institute engineering controls and work practices using either the method set forth in paragraph [A] or paragraph [B] of this appendix, or any other method which the employer can demonstrate to be equivalent in terms of reducing employee exposure to asbestos as defined and which meets the requirements described in paragraph [C] of this appendix, for those facilities in which no more than 5 pairs of brakes or 5 clutches are inspected, disassembled, reassembled and/or repaired per week, the method set forth in paragraph [D] of this appendix may be used: [A] Negative Pressure Enclosure/HEPA Vacuum System Method (1) The brake and clutch inspection, disassembly, repair, and assembly operations shall be enclosed to cover and contain the clutch or brake assembly and to prevent the release of asbestos fibers into the worker's breathing zone. (2) The enclosure shall be sealed tightly and thoroughly inspected for leaks before work begins on brake and clutch inspection, disassembly, repair, and assembly. (3) The enclosure shall be such that the worker can clearly see the operation and shall provide impermeable sleeves through which the worker can handle the brake and clutch inspection, disassembly, repair and assembly. The integrity of the sleeves and ports shall be examined before work begins. (4) A HEPA-filtered vacuum shall be employed to maintain the enclosure under negative pressure throughout the operation. Compressed-air may be used to remove asbestos fibers or particles from the enclosure. (5) The HEPA vacuum shall be used first to loosen the asbestos containing residue from the brake and clutch parts and then to evacuate the loosened asbestos containing material from the enclosure and capture the material in the vacuum filter. (6) The vacuum's filter, when full, shall be first wetted with a fine mist of water, then removed and placed immediately in an impermeable container, labeled according to paragraph (j)(5) of this section and disposed of according to paragraph (k) of this section. (7) Any spills or releases of asbestos containing waste material from inside of the enclosure or vacuum hose or vacuum filter shall be immediately cleaned up and disposed of according to paragraph (k) of this section. [B] Low Pressure/Wet Cleaning Method (1) A catch basin shall be placed under the brake assembly, positioned to avoid splashes and spills. (2) The reservoir shall contain water containing an organic solvent or wetting agent. The flow of liquid shall be controlled such that the brake assembly is gently flooded to prevent the asbestos-containing brake dust from becoming airborne. (3) The aqueous solution shall be allowed to flow between the brake drum and brake support before the drum is removed. (4) After removing the brake drum, the wheel hub and back of the brake assembly shall be thoroughly wetted to suppress dust. (5) The brake support plate, brake shoes and brake components used to attach the brake shoes shall be thoroughly washed before removing the old shoes. (6) In systems using filters, the filters, when full, shall be first wetted with a fine mist of water, then removed and placed immediately in an impermeable container, labeled according to paragraph (j)(4) of this section and disposed of according to paragraph (k) of this section. (7) Any spills of asbestos-containing aqueous solution or any asbestos-containing waste material shall be cleaned up immediately and disposed of according to paragraph (k) of this section. (8) The use of dry brushing during low pressure/wet cleaning operations is prohibited. [C] Equivalent Methods An equivalent method is one which has sufficient written detail so that it can be reproduced and has been demonstrated that the exposures resulting from the equivalent method are equal to or less than the exposures which would result from the use of the method described in paragraph [A] of this appendix. For purposes of making this comparison, the employer shall assume that exposures resulting from the use of the method described in paragraph [A] of this appendix shall not exceed 0.016 f/cc, as measured by the OSHA reference method and as averaged over at least 18 personal samples. [D] Wet Method. (1) A spray bottle, hose nozzle, or other implement capable of delivering a fine mist of water or amended water or other delivery system capable of delivering water at low pressure, shall be used to first thoroughly wet the brake and clutch parts. Brake and clutch components shall then be wiped clean with a cloth. (2) The cloth shall be placed in an impermeable container, labelled according to paragraph (j)(4) of this section and then disposed of according to paragraph (k) of this section, or the cloth shall be laundered in a way to prevent the release of asbestos fibers in excess of 0.1 fiber per cubic centimeter of air. (3) Any spills of solvent or any asbestos containing waste material shall be cleaned up immediately according to paragraph (k) of this section. (4) The use of dry brushing during the wet method operations is prohibited. Appendix G to § 1910.1001—Substance Technical Information for Asbestos—Non-Mandatory I. Substance Identification A. Substance: “Asbestos” is the name of a class of magnesium-silicate minerals that occur in fibrous form. Minerals that are included in this group are chrysotile, crocidolite, amosite, tremolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, and actinolite asbestos. B. Asbestos is used in the manufacture of heat-resistant clothing, automative brake and clutch linings, and a variety of building materials including floor tiles, roofing felts, ceiling tiles, asbestos-cement pipe and sheet, and fire-resistant drywall. Asbestos is also present in pipe and boiler insulation materials, and in sprayed-on materials located on beams, in crawlspaces, and between walls. C. The potential for a product containing asbestos to release breatheable fibers depends on its degree of friability. Friable means that the material can be crumbled with hand pressure and is therefore likely to emit fibers. The fibrous or fluffy sprayed-on materials used for fireproofing, insulation, or sound proofing are considered to be friable, and they readily release airborne fibers if disturbed. Materials such as vinyl-asbestos floor tile or roofing felts are considered nonfriable and generally do not emit airborne fibers unless subjected to sanding or sawing operations. Asbestos-cement pipe or sheet can emit airborne fibers if the materials are cut or sawed, or if they are broken during demolition operations. D. Permissible exposure: Exposure to airborne asbestos fibers may not exceed 0.2 fibers per cubic centimeter of air (0.1 f/cc) averaged over the 8-hour workday. II. Health Hazard Data A. Asbestos can cause disabling respiratory disease and various types of cancers if the fibers are inhaled. Inhaling or ingesting fibers from contaminated clothing or skin can also result in these diseases. The symptoms of these diseases generally do not appear for 20 or more years after initial exposure. B. Exposure to asbestos has been shown to cause lung cancer, mesothelioma, and cancer of the stomach and colon. Mesothelioma is a rare cancer of the thin membrane lining of the chest and abdomen. Symptoms of mesothelioma include shortness of breath, pain in the walls of the chest, and/or abdominal pain. III. Respirators and Protective Clothing A. Respirators: You are required to wear a respirator when performing tasks that result in asbestos exposure that exceeds the permissible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc. These conditions can occur while your employer is in the process of installing engineering controls to reduce asbestos exposure, or where engineering controls are not feasible to reduce asbestos exposure. Air-purifying respirators equipped with a high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter can be used where airborne asbestos fiber concentrations do not exceed 2 f/cc; otherwise, air-supplied, positive-pressure, full facepiece respirators must be used. Disposable respirators or dust masks are not permitted to be used for asbestos work. For effective protection, respirators must fit your face and head snugly. Your employer is required to conduct fit tests when you are first assigned a respirator and every 6 months thereafter. Respirators should not be loosened or removed in work situations where their use is required. B. Protective clothing: You are required to wear protective clothing in work areas where asbestos fiber concentrations exceed the permissible exposure limit. IV. Disposal Procedures and Cleanup A. Wastes that are generated by processes where asbestos is present include: 1. Empty asbestos shipping containers. 2. Process wastes such as cuttings, trimmings, or reject material. 3. Housekeeping waste from sweeping or vacuuming. 4. Asbestos fireproofing or insulating material that is removed from buildings. 5. Building products that contain asbestos removed during building renovation or demolition. 6. Contaminated disposable protective clothing. B. Empty shipping bags can be flattened under exhaust hoods and packed into airtight containers for disposal. Empty shipping drums are difficult to clean and should be sealed. C. Vacuum bags or disposable paper filters should not be cleaned, but should be sprayed with a fine water mist and placed into a labeled waste container. D. Process waste and housekeeping waste should be wetted with water or a mixture of water and surfactant prior to packaging in disposable containers. E. Material containing asbestos that is removed from buildings must be disposed of in leak-tight 6-mil thick plastic bags, plastic-lined cardboard containers, or plastic-lined metal containers. These wastes, which are removed while wet, should be sealed in containers before they dry out to minimize the release of asbestos fibers during handling. V. Access to Information A. Each year, your employer is required to inform you of the information contained in this standard and appendices for asbestos. In addition, your employer must instruct you in the proper work practices for handling materials containing asbestos, and the correct use of protective equipment. B. Your employer is required to determine whether you are being exposed to asbestos. You or your representative has the right to observe employee measurements and to record the results obtained. Your employer is required to inform you of your exposure, and, if you are exposed above the permissible limit, he or she is required to inform you of the actions that are being taken to reduce your exposure to within the permissible limit. C. Your employer is required to keep records of your exposures and medical examinations. These exposure records must be kept for at least thirty (30) years. Medical records must be kept for the period of your employment plus thirty (30) years. D. Your employer is required to release your exposure and medical records to your physician or designated representative upon your written request. Appendix H to § 1910.1001—Medical Surveillance Guidelines for Asbestos Non-Mandatory I. Route of Entry Inhalation, Ingestion II. Toxicology Clinical evidence of the adverse effects associated with exposure to asbestos is present in the form of several well-conducted epidemiological studies of occupationally exposed workers, family contacts of workers, and persons living near asbestos mines. These studies have shown a definite association between exposure to asbestos and an increased incidence of lung cancer, pleural and peritoneal mesothelioma, gastrointestinal cancer, and asbestosis. The latter is a disabling fibrotic lung disease that is caused only by exposure to asbestos. Exposure to asbestos has also been associated with an increased incidence of esophageal, kidney, laryngeal, pharyngeal, and buccal cavity cancers. As with other known chronic occupational diseases, disease associated with asbestos generally appears about 20 years following the first occurrence of exposure: There are no known acute effects associated with exposure to asbestos. Epidemiological studies indicate that the risk of lung cancer among exposed workers who smoke cigarettes is greatly increased over the risk of lung cancer among non-exposed smokers or exposed nonsmokers. These studies suggest that cessation of smoking will reduce the risk of lung cancer for a person exposed to asbestos but will not reduce it to the same level of risk as that existing for an exposed worker who has never smoked. III. Signs and Symptoms of Exposure-Related Disease The signs and symptoms of lung cancer or gastrointestinal cancer induced by exposure to asbestos are not unique, except that a chest X-ray of an exposed patient with lung cancer may show pleural plaques, pleural calcification, or pleural fibrosis, and may also show asbestosis ( i.e., Asbestosis is pulmonary fibrosis caused by the accumulation of asbestos fibers in the lungs. Symptoms include shortness of breath, coughing, fatigue, and vague feelings of sickness. When the fibrosis worsens, shortness of breath occurs even at rest. The diagnosis of asbestosis is most commonly based on a history of exposure to asbestos, the presence of characteristic radiologic abnormalities, end-inspiratory crackles (rales), and other clinical features of fibrosing lung disease. Pleural plaques and thickening may be observed on chest X-rays. Asbestosis is often a progressive disease even in the absence of continued exposure, although this appears to be a highly individualized characteristic. In severe cases, death may be caused by respiratory or cardiac failure. IV. Surveillance and Preventive Considerations As noted in section III of this appendix, exposure to asbestos has been linked to an increased risk of lung cancer, mesothelioma, gastrointestinal cancer, and asbestosis among occupationally exposed workers. Adequate screening tests to determine an employee's potential for developing serious chronic diseases, such as cancer, from exposure to asbestos do not presently exist. However, some tests, particularly chest X-rays and pulmonary function tests, may indicate that an employee has been overexposed to asbestos increasing his or her risk of developing exposure-related chronic diseases. It is important for the physician to become familiar with the operating conditions in which occupational exposure to asbestos is likely to occur. This is particularly important in evaluating medical and work histories and in conducting physical examinations. When an active employee has been identified as having been overexposed to asbestos, measures taken by the employer to eliminate or mitigate further exposure should also lower the risk of serious long-term consequences. The employer is required to institute a medical surveillance program for all employees who are or will be exposed to asbestos at or above the permissible exposure limit (0.1 fiber per cubic centimeter of air). All examinations and procedures must be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician, at a reasonable time and place, and at no cost to the employee. Although broad latitude is given to the physician in prescribing specific tests to be included in the medical surveillance program, OSHA requires inclusion of the following elements in the routine examination: (i) Medical and work histories with special emphasis directed to symptoms of the respiratory system, cardiovascular system, and digestive tract. (ii) Completion of the respiratory disease questionnaire contained in appendix D of this section. (iii) A physical examination including a chest X-ray and pulmonary function test that includes measurement of the employee's forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume at one second (FEV 1 (iv) Any laboratory or other test that the examining physician deems by sound medical practice to be necessary. The employer is required to make the prescribed tests available at least annually to those employees covered; more often than specified if recommended by the examining physician; and upon termination of employment. The employer is required to provide the physician with the following information: A copy of the standard in this section (including all appendices to this section); a description of the employee's duties as they relate to asbestos exposure; the employee's representative level of exposure to asbestos; a description of any personal protective and respiratory equipment used; and information from previous medical examinations of the affected employee that is not otherwise available to the physician. Making this information available to the physician will aid in the evaluation of the employee's health in relation to assigned duties and fitness to wear personal protective equipment, if required. The employer is required to obtain a written opinion from the examining physician containing the results of the medical examination; the physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions that would place the employee at an increased risk of exposure-related disease; any recommended limitations on the employee or on the use of personal protective equipment; and a statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and of any medical conditions related to asbestos exposure that require further explanation or treatment. This written opinion must not reveal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to exposure to asbestos, and a copy of the opinion must be provided to the affected employee. Appendix I to § 1910.1001—Smoking Cessation Program Information For Asbestos—Non-Mandatory The following organizations provide smoking cessation information and program material. 1. The National Cancer Institute operates a toll-free Cancer Information Service (CIS) with trained personnel to help you. Call 1-800-4-CANCER* to reach the CIS office serving your area, or write: Office of Cancer Communications, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Building 31, Room 10A24, Bethesda, Maryland 20892. 2. American Cancer Society, 3340 Peachtree Road, NE., Atlanta, Georgia 30062, (404) 320-3333. The American Cancer Society (ACS) is a voluntary organization composed of 58 divisions and 3,100 local units. Through “The Great American Smokeout” in November, the annual Cancer Crusade in April, and numerous educational materials, ACS helps people learn about the health hazards of smoking and become successful ex-smokers. 3. American Heart Association, 7320 Greenville Avenue, Dallas, Texas 75231, (214) 750-5300. The American Heart Association (AHA) is a voluntary organization with 130,000 members (physicians, scientists, and laypersons) in 55 state and regional groups. AHA produces a variety of publications and audiovisual materials about the effects of smoking on the heart. AHA also has developed a guidebook for incorporating a weight-control component into smoking cessation programs. 4. American Lung Association, 1740 Broadway, New York, New York 10019, (212) 245-8000. A voluntary organization of 7,500 members (physicians, nurses, and laypersons), the American Lung Association (ALA) conducts numerous public information programs about the health effect of smoking. ALA has 59 state and 85 local units. The organization actively supports legislation and information campaigns for non-smokers' rights and provides help for smokers who want to quit, for example, through “Freedom From Smoking,” a self-help smoking cessation program. 5. Office on Smoking and Health, U.S. Department of Health and, Human Services, 5600 Fishers Lane, Park Building, Room 110, Rockville, Maryland 20857. The Office on Smoking and Health (OSH) is the Department of Health and Human Services' lead agency in smoking control. OSH has sponsored distribution of publications on smoking-realted topics, such as free flyers on relapse after initial quitting, helping a friend or family member quit smoking, the health hazards of smoking, and the effects of parental smoking on teenagers. *In Hawaii, on Oahu call 524-1234 (call collect from neighboring islands), Spanish-speaking staff members are available during daytime hours to callers from the following areas: California, Florida, Georgia, Illinois, New Jersey (area code 210), New York, and Texas. Consult your local telephone directory for listings of local chapters. Appendix J to § 1910.1001—Polarized Light Microscopy of Asbestos—Non-Mandatory Method number: ID-191 Matrix: Bulk Collection Procedure Collect approximately 1 to 2 grams of each type of material and place into separate 20 mL scintillation vials. Analytical Procedure A portion of each separate phase is analyzed by gross examination, phase-polar examination, and central stop dispersion microscopy. Commercial manufacturers and products mentioned in this method are for descriptive use only and do not constitute endorsements by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from other sources may be substituted. 1. Introduction This method describes the collection and analysis of asbestos bulk materials by light microscopy techniques including phase- polar illumination and central-stop dispersion microscopy. Some terms unique to asbestos analysis are defined below: Amphibole: Asbestos: Chrysotile Mg 3 2 5 4 Crocidolite (Riebeckite asbestos) Na 2 3 2 + 2 3 + 8 22 2 Cummingtonite-Grunerite asbestos (Amosite) (Mg,Fe) 7 8 22 2 Tremolite-Actinolite asbestos Ca 2 5 8 22 2 Anthophyllite asbestos (Mg,Fe) 7 8 22 2 Asbestos Fiber: Aspect Ratio: Brucite: 2 Central Stop Dispersion Staining (microscope): Cleavage Fragments: Differential Counting: Fiber: Phase Contrast: Phase Contrast Microscope: Phase-Polar Analysis: Phase-Polar Microscope: Sealing Encapsulant: Serpentine: 3 5 4 1.1. History Light microscopy has been used for well over 100 years for the determination of mineral species. This analysis is carried out using specialized polarizing microscopes as well as bright field microscopes. The identification of minerals is an on-going process with many new minerals described each year. The first recorded use of asbestos was in Finland about 2500 B.C. where the material was used in the mud wattle for the wooden huts the people lived in as well as strengthening for pottery. Adverse health aspects of the mineral were noted nearly 2000 years ago when Pliny the Younger wrote about the poor health of slaves in the asbestos mines. Although known to be injurious for centuries, the first modern references to its toxicity were by the British Labor Inspectorate when it banned asbestos dust from the workplace in 1898. Asbestosis cases were described in the literature after the turn of the century. Cancer was first suspected in the mid 1930's and a causal link to mesothelioma was made in 1965. Because of the public concern for worker and public safety with the use of this material, several different types of analysis were applied to the determination of asbestos content. Light microscopy requires a great deal of experience and craft. Attempts were made to apply less subjective methods to the analysis. X-ray diffraction was partially successful in determining the mineral types but was unable to separate out the fibrous portions from the non-fibrous portions. Also, the minimum detection limit for asbestos analysis by X-ray diffraction (XRD) is about 1%. Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA) was no more successful. These provide useful corroborating information when the presence of asbestos has been shown by microscopy; however, neither can determine the difference between fibrous and non-fibrous minerals when both habits are present. The same is true of Infrared Absorption (IR). When electron microscopy was applied to asbestos analysis, hundreds of fibers were discovered present too small to be visible in any light microscope. There are two different types of electron microscope used for asbestos analysis: Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) and Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM). Scanning Electron Microscopy is useful in identifying minerals. The SEM can provide two of the three pieces of information required to identify fibers by electron microscopy: morphology and chemistry. The third is structure as determined by Selected Area Electron Diffraction—SAED which is performed in the TEM. Although the resolution of the SEM is sufficient for very fine fibers to be seen, accuracy of chemical analysis that can be performed on the fibers varies with fiber diameter in fibers of less than 0.2 µm diameter. The TEM is a powerful tool to identify fibers too small to be resolved by light microscopy and should be used in conjunction with this method when necessary. The TEM can provide all three pieces of information required for fiber identification. Most fibers thicker than 1 µm can adequately be defined in the light microscope. The light microscope remains as the best instrument for the determination of mineral type. This is because the minerals under investigation were first described analytically with the light microscope. It is inexpensive and gives positive identification for most samples analyzed. Further, when optical techniques are inadequate, there is ample indication that alternative techniques should be used for complete identification of the sample. 1.2. Principle Minerals consist of atoms that may be arranged in random order or in a regular arrangement. Amorphous materials have atoms in random order while crystalline materials have long range order. Many materials are transparent to light, at least for small particles or for thin sections. The properties of these materials can be investigated by the effect that the material has on light passing through it. The six asbestos minerals are all crystalline with particular properties that have been identified and cataloged. These six minerals are anisotropic. They have a regular array of atoms, but the arrangement is not the same in all directions. Each major direction of the crystal presents a different regularity. Light photons travelling in each of these main directions will encounter different electrical neighborhoods, affecting the path and time of travel. The techniques outlined in this method use the fact that light traveling through fibers or crystals in different directions will behave differently, but predictably. The behavior of the light as it travels through a crystal can be measured and compared with known or determined values to identify the mineral species. Usually, Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) is performed with strain-free objectives on a bright-field microscope platform. This would limit the resolution of the microscope to about 0.4 µm. Because OSHA requires the counting and identification of fibers visible in phase contrast, the phase contrast platform is used to visualize the fibers with the polarizing elements added into the light path. Polarized light methods cannot identify fibers finer than about 1 µm in diameter even though they are visible. The finest fibers are usually identified by inference from the presence of larger, identifiable fiber bundles. When fibers are present, but not identifiable by light microscopy, use either SEM or TEM to determine the fiber identity. 1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages The advantages of light microcopy are: (a) Basic identification of the materials was first performed by light microscopy and gross analysis. This provides a large base of published information against which to check analysis and analytical technique. (b) The analysis is specific to fibers. The minerals present can exist in asbestiform, fibrous, prismatic, or massive varieties all at the same time. Therefore, bulk methods of analysis such as X-ray diffraction, IR analysis, DTA, etc. are inappropriate where the material is not known to be fibrous. (c) The analysis is quick, requires little preparation time, and can be performed on-site if a suitably equipped microscope is available. The disadvantages are: (a) Even using phase-polar illumination, not all the fibers present may be seen. This is a problem for very low asbestos concentrations where agglomerations or large bundles of fibers may not be present to allow identification by inference. (b) The method requires a great degree of sophistication on the part of the microscopist. An analyst is only as useful as his mental catalog of images. Therefore, a microscopist's accuracy is enhanced by experience. The mineralogical training of the analyst is very important. It is the basis on which subjective decisions are made. (c) The method uses only a tiny amount of material for analysis. This may lead to sampling bias and false results (high or low). This is especially true if the sample is severely inhomogeneous. (d) Fibers may be bound in a matrix and not distinguishable as fibers so identification cannot be made. 1.4. Method Performance 1.4.1. 1.4.2. 1.4.3. 1.5. Interferences Any material which is long, thin, and small enough to be viewed under the microscope can be considered an interference for asbestos. There are literally hundreds of interferences in workplaces. The techniques described in this method are normally sufficient to eliminate the interferences. An analyst's success in eliminating the interferences depends on proper training. Asbestos minerals belong to two mineral families: the serpentines and the amphiboles. In the serpentine family, the only common fibrous mineral is chrysotile. Occasionally, the mineral antigorite occurs in a fibril habit with morphology similar to the amphiboles. The amphibole minerals consist of a score of different minerals of which only five are regulated by federal standard: amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos and actinolite asbestos. These are the only amphibole minerals that have been commercially exploited for their fibrous properties; however, the rest can and do occur occasionally in asbestiform habit. In addition to the related mineral interferences, other minerals common in building material may present a problem for some microscopists: gypsum, anhydrite, brucite, quartz fibers, talc fibers or ribbons, wollastonite, perlite, attapulgite, etc. Other fibrous materials commonly present in workplaces are: fiberglass, mineral wool, ceramic wool, refractory ceramic fibers, kevlar, nomex, synthetic fibers, graphite or carbon fibers, cellulose (paper or wood) fibers, metal fibers, etc. Matrix embedding material can sometimes be a negative interference. The analyst may not be able to easily extract the fibers from the matrix in order to use the method. Where possible, remove the matrix before the analysis, taking careful note of the loss of weight. Some common matrix materials are: vinyl, rubber, tar, paint, plant fiber, cement, and epoxy. A further negative interference is that the asbestos fibers themselves may be either too small to be seen in Phase contrast Microscopy (PCM) or of a very low fibrous quality, having the appearance of plant fibers. The analyst's ability to deal with these materials increases with experience. 1.6. Uses and Occupational Exposure Asbestos is ubiquitous in the environment. More than 40% of the land area of the United States is composed of minerals which may contain asbestos. Fortunately, the actual formation of great amounts of asbestos is relatively rare. Nonetheless, there are locations in which environmental exposure can be severe such as in the Serpentine Hills of California. There are thousands of uses for asbestos in industry and the home. Asbestos abatement workers are the most current segment of the population to have occupational exposure to great amounts of asbestos. If the material is undisturbed, there is no exposure. Exposure occurs when the asbestos-containing material is abraded or otherwise disturbed during maintenance operations or some other activity. Approximately 95% of the asbestos in place in the United States is chrysotile. Amosite and crocidolite make up nearly all the difference. Tremolite and anthophyllite make up a very small percentage. Tremolite is found in extremely small amounts in certain chrysotile deposits. Actinolite exposure is probably greatest from environmental sources, but has been identified in vermiculite containing, sprayed-on insulating materials which may have been certified as asbestos-free. 1.7. Physical and Chemical Properties The nominal chemical compositions for the asbestos minerals were given in Section 1. Compared to cleavage fragments of the same minerals, asbestiform fibers possess a high tensile strength along the fiber axis. They are chemically inert, non- combustible, and heat resistant. Except for chrysotile, they are insoluble in Hydrochloric acid (HCl). Chrysotile is slightly soluble in HCl. Asbestos has high electrical resistance and good sound absorbing characteristics. It can be woven into cables, fabrics or other textiles, or matted into papers, felts, and mats. 1.8. Toxicology (This section is for Information Only and Should Not Be Taken as OSHA Policy) Possible physiologic results of respiratory exposure to asbestos are mesothelioma of the pleura or peritoneum, interstitial fibrosis, asbestosis, pneumoconiosis, or respiratory cancer. The possible consequences of asbestos exposure are detailed in the NIOSH Criteria Document or in the OSHA Asbestos Standards 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1915.1001. 2. Sampling Procedure 2.1. Equipment for Sampling (a) Tube or cork borer sampling device (b) Knife (c) 20 mL scintillation vial or similar vial (d) Sealing encapsulant 2.2. Safety Precautions Asbestos is a known carcinogen. Take care when sampling. While in an asbestos-containing atmosphere, a properly selected and fit-tested respirator should be worn. Take samples in a manner to cause the least amount of dust. Follow these general guidelines: (a) Do not make unnecessary dust. (b) Take only a small amount (1 to 2 g). (c) Tightly close the sample container. (d) Use encapsulant to seal the spot where the sample was taken, if necessary. 2.3. Sampling Procedure Samples of any suspect material should be taken from an inconspicuous place. Where the material is to remain, seal the sampling wound with an encapsulant to eliminate the potential for exposure from the sample site. Microscopy requires only a few milligrams of material. The amount that will fill a 20 mL scintillation vial is more than adequate. Be sure to collect samples from all layers and phases of material. If possible, make separate samples of each different phase of the material. This will aid in determining the actual hazard. DO NOT USE ENVELOPES, PLASTIC OR PAPER BAGS OF ANY KIND TO COLLECT SAMPLES. If a cork-borer type sampler is available, push the tube through the material all the way, so that all layers of material are sampled. Some samplers are intended to be disposable. These should be capped and sent to the laboratory. If a non-disposable cork borer is used, empty the contents into a scintillation vial and send to the laboratory. Vigorously and completely clean the cork borer between samples. 2.4 Shipment Samples packed in glass vials must not touch or they might break in shipment. (a) Seal the samples with a sample seal over the end to guard against tampering and to identify the sample. (b) Package the bulk samples in separate packages from the air samples. They may cross-contaminate each other and will invalidate the results of the air samples. (c) Include identifying paperwork with (d) To maintain sample accountability, ship the samples by certified mail, overnight express, or hand carry them to the laboratory. 3. Analysis The analysis of asbestos samples can be divided into two major parts: sample preparation and microscopy. Because of the different asbestos uses that may be encountered by the analyst, each sample may need different preparation steps. The choices are outlined below. There are several different tests that are performed to identify the asbestos species and determine the percentage. They will be explained below. 3.1. Safety (a) Do not create unnecessary dust. Handle the samples in HEPA-filter equipped hoods. If samples are received in bags, envelopes or other inappropriate container, open them only in a hood having a face velocity at or greater than 100 fpm. Transfer a small amount to a scintillation vial and only handle the smaller amount. (b) Open samples in a hood, never in the open lab area. (c) Index of refraction oils can be toxic. Take care not to get this material on the skin. Wash immediately with soap and water if this happens. (d) Samples that have been heated in the muffle furnace or the drying oven may be hot. Handle them with tongs until they are cool enough to handle. (e) Some of the solvents used, such as THF (tetrahydrofuran), are toxic and should only be handled in an appropriate fume hood and according to instructions given in the Safety data sheet (SDS). 3.2. Equipment (a) Phase contrast microscope with 10x, 16x and 40x objectives, 10x wide-field eyepieces, G-22 Walton-Beckett graticule, Whipple disk, polarizer, analyzer and first order red or gypsum plate, 100 Watt illuminator, rotating position condenser with oversize phase rings, central stop dispersion objective, Kohler illumination and a rotating mechanical stage. (b) Stereo microscope with reflected light illumination, transmitted light illumination, polarizer, analyzer and first order red or gypsum plate, and rotating stage. (c) Negative pressure hood for the stereo microscope (d) Muffle furnace capable of 600 °C (e) Drying oven capable of 50-150 °C (f) Aluminum specimen pans (g) Tongs for handling samples in the furnace (h) High dispersion index of refraction oils (Special for dispersion staining.) n = 1.550 n = 1.585 n = 1.590 n = 1.605 n = 1.620 n = 1.670 n = 1.680 n = 1.690 (i) A set of index of refraction oils from about n = 1.350 to n = 2.000 in n = 0.005 increments. (Standard for Becke line analysis.) (j) Glass slides with painted or frosted ends 1 × 3 inches 1mm thick, precleaned. (k) Cover Slips 22 × 22 mm, #1 1/2 (l) Paper clips or dissection needles (m) Hand grinder (n) Scalpel with both #10 and #11 blades (o) 0.1 molar HCl (p) Decalcifying solution (Baxter Scientific Products) Ethylenediaminetetraacetic Acid, Tetrasodium 0.7 g/l Sodium Potassium Tartrate 8.0 mg/liter Hydrochloric Acid 99.2 g/liter Sodium Tartrate 0.14 g/liter (q) Tetrahydrofuran (THF) (r) Hotplate capable of 60 °C (s) Balance (t) Hacksaw blade (u) Ruby mortar and pestle 3.3. Sample Pre-Preparation Sample preparation begins with pre-preparation which may include chemical reduction of the matrix, heating the sample to dryness or heating in the muffle furnace. The end result is a sample which has been reduced to a powder that is sufficiently fine to fit under the cover slip. Analyze different phases of samples separately, e.g., tile and the tile mastic should be analyzed separately as the mastic may contain asbestos while the tile may not. (a) Wet samples Samples with a high water content will not give the proper dispersion colors and must be dried prior to sample mounting. Remove the lid of the scintillation vial, place the bottle in the drying oven and heat at 100 °C to dryness (usually about 2 h). Samples which are not submitted to the lab in glass must be removed and placed in glass vials or aluminum weighing pans before placing them in the drying oven. (b) Samples With Organic Interference—Muffle Furnace These may include samples with tar as a matrix, vinyl asbestos tile, or any other organic that can be reduced by heating. Remove the sample from the vial and weigh in a balance to determine the weight of the submitted portion. Place the sample in a muffle furnace at 500 °C for 1 to 2 h or until all obvious organic material has been removed. Retrieve, cool and weigh again to determine the weight loss on ignition. This is necessary to determine the asbestos content of the submitted sample, because the analyst will be looking at a reduced sample. Note: Heating above 600 °C will cause the sample to undergo a structural change which, given sufficient time, will convert the chrysotile to forsterite. Heating even at lower temperatures for 1 to 2 h may have a measurable effect on the optical properties of the minerals. If the analyst is unsure of what to expect, a sample of standard asbestos should be heated to the same temperature for the same length of time so that it can be examined for the proper interpretation. (c) Samples With Organic Interference—THF Vinyl asbestos tile is the most common material treated with this solvent, although, substances containing tar will sometimes yield to this treatment. Select a portion of the material and then grind it up if possible. Weigh the sample and place it in a test tube. Add sufficient THF to dissolve the organic matrix. This is usually about 4 to 5 mL. Remember, THF is highly flammable. (d) Samples With Carbonate Interference Carbonate material is often found on fibers and sometimes must be removed in order to perform dispersion microscopy. Weigh out a portion of the material and place it in a test tube. Add a sufficient amount of 0.1 M HCl or decalcifying solution in the tube to react all the carbonate as evidenced by gas formation; i.e., when the gas bubbles stop, add a little more solution. If no more gas forms, the reaction is complete. Filter the material out through a tared silver membrane, dry and weigh to determine the weight lost. 3.4. Sample Preparation Samples must be prepared so that accurate determination can be made of the asbestos type and amount present. The following steps are carried out in the low-flow hood (a low-flow hood has less than 50 fpm flow): (1) If the sample has large lumps, is hard, or cannot be made to lie under a cover slip, the grain size must be reduced. Place a small amount between two slides and grind the material between them or grind a small amount in a clean mortar and pestle. The choice of whether to use an alumina, ruby, or diamond mortar depends on the hardness of the material. Impact damage can alter the asbestos mineral if too much mechanical shock occurs. (Freezer mills can completely destroy the observable crystallinity of asbestos and should not be used). For some samples, a portion of material can be shaved off with a scalpel, ground off with a hand grinder or hack saw blade. The preparation tools should either be disposable or cleaned thoroughly. Use vigorous scrubbing to loosen the fibers during the washing. Rinse the implements with copious amounts of water and air-dry in a dust-free environment. (2) If the sample is powder or has been reduced as in (1) above, it is ready to mount. Place a glass slide on a piece of optical tissue and write the identification on the painted or frosted end. Place two drops of index of refraction medium n = 1.550 on the slide. (The medium n = 1.550 is chosen because it is the matching index for chrysotile. Dip the end of a clean paper-clip or dissecting needle into the droplet of refraction medium on the slide Treat at least two different areas of each phase in this fashion. Choose representative areas of the sample. It may be useful to select particular areas or fibers for analysis. This is useful to identify asbestos in severely inhomogeneous samples. When it is determined that amphiboles may be present, repeat the above process using the appropriate high-dispersion oils until an identification is made or all six asbestos minerals have been ruled out. Note that percent determination must be done in the index medium 1.550 because amphiboles tend to disappear in their matching mediums. 3.5. Analytical Procedure Note: This method presumes some knowledge of mineralogy and optical petrography. The analysis consists of three parts: The determination of whether there is asbestos present, what type is present and the determination of how much is present. The general flow of the analysis is: (1) Gross examination. (2) Examination under polarized light on the stereo microscope. (3) Examination by phase-polar illumination on the compound phase microscope. (4) Determination of species by dispersion stain. Examination by Becke line analysis may also be used; however, this is usually more cumbersome for asbestos determination. (5) Difficult samples may need to be analyzed by SEM or TEM, or the results from those techniques combined with light microscopy for a definitive identification. Identification of a particle as asbestos requires that it be asbestiform. Description of particles should follow the suggestion of Campbell. (Figure 1) For the purpose of regulation, the mineral must be one of the six minerals covered and must be in the asbestos growth habit. Large specimen samples of asbestos generally have the gross appearance of wood. Fibers are easily parted from it. Asbestos fibers are very long compared with their widths. The fibers have a very high tensile strength as demonstrated by bending without breaking. Asbestos fibers exist in bundles that are easily parted, show longitudinal fine structure and may be tufted at the ends showing “bundle of sticks” morphology. In the microscope some of these properties may not be observable. Amphiboles do not always show striations along their length even when they are asbestos. Neither will they always show tufting. They generally do not show a curved nature except for very long fibers. Asbestos and asbestiform minerals are usually characterized in groups by extremely high aspect ratios (greater than 100:1). While aspect ratio analysis is useful for characterizing populations of fibers, it cannot be used to identify individual fibers of intermediate to short aspect ratio. Observation of many fibers is often necessary to determine whether a sample consists of “cleavage fragments” or of asbestos fibers. Most cleavage fragments of the asbestos minerals are easily distinguishable from true asbestos fibers. This is because true cleavage fragments usually have larger diameters than 1 µm. Internal structure of particles larger than this usually shows them to have no internal fibrillar structure. In addition, cleavage fragments of the monoclinic amphiboles show inclined extinction under crossed polars with no compensator. Asbestos fibers usually show extinction at zero degrees or ambiguous extinction if any at all. Morphologically, the larger cleavage fragments are obvious by their blunt or stepped ends showing prismatic habit. Also, they tend to be acicular rather than filiform. Where the particles are less than 1 µm in diameter and have an aspect ratio greater than or equal to 3:1, it is recommended that the sample be analyzed by SEM or TEM if there is any question whether the fibers are cleavage fragments or asbestiform particles. Care must be taken when analyzing by electron microscopy because the interferences are different from those in light microscopy and may structurally be very similar to asbestos. The classic interference is between anthophyllite and biopyribole or intermediate fiber. Use the same morphological clues for electron microscopy as are used for light microscopy, e.g. fibril splitting, internal longitudinal striation, fraying, curvature, etc. (1) Gross examination: Examine the sample, preferably in the glass vial. Determine the presence of any obvious fibrous component. Estimate a percentage based on previous experience and current observation. Determine whether any pre- preparation is necessary. Determine the number of phases present. This step may be carried out or augmented by observation at 6 to 40 × under a stereo microscope. (2) After performing any necessary pre-preparation, prepare slides of each phase as described above. Two preparations of the same phase in the same index medium can be made side-by-side on the same glass for convenience. Examine with the polarizing stereo microscope. Estimate the percentage of asbestos based on the amount of birefringent fiber present. (3) Examine the slides on the phase-polar microscopes at magnifications of 160 and 400 × . Note the morphology of the fibers. Long, thin, very straight fibers with little curvature are indicative of fibers from the amphibole family. Curved, wavy fibers are usually indicative of chrysotile. Estimate the percentage of asbestos on the phase-polar microscope under conditions of crossed polars and a gypsum plate. Fibers smaller than 1.0 µm in thickness must be identified by inference to the presence of larger, identifiable fibers and morphology. If no larger fibers are visible, electron microscopy should be performed. At this point, only a tentative identification can be made. Full identification must be made with dispersion microscopy. Details of the tests are included in the appendices. (4) Once fibers have been determined to be present, they must be identified. Adjust the microscope for dispersion mode and observe the fibers. The microscope has a rotating stage, one polarizing element, and a system for generating dark-field dispersion microscopy (see Section 4.6. of this appendix). Align a fiber with its length parallel to the polarizer and note the color of the Becke lines. Rotate the stage to bring the fiber length perpendicular to the polarizer and note the color. Repeat this process for every fiber or fiber bundle examined. The colors must be consistent with the colors generated by standard asbestos reference materials for a positive identification. In n = 1.550, amphiboles will generally show a yellow to straw-yellow color indicating that the fiber indices of refraction are higher than the liquid. If long, thin fibers are noted and the colors are yellow, prepare further slides as above in the suggested matching liquids listed below: Type of asbestos Index of refraction Chrysotile n = 1.550. Amosite n = 1.670 or 1.680. Crocidolite n = 1.690. Anthophyllite n = 1.605 and 1.620. Tremolite n = 1.605 and 1.620. Actinolite n = 1.620. Where more than one liquid is suggested, the first is preferred; however, in some cases this liquid will not give good dispersion color. Take care to avoid interferences in the other liquid; e.g., wollastonite in n = 1.620 will give the same colors as tremolite. In n = 1.605 wollastonite will appear yellow in all directions. Wollastonite may be determined under crossed polars as it will change from blue to yellow as it is rotated along its fiber axis by tapping on the cover slip. Asbestos minerals will not change in this way. Determination of the angle of extinction may, when present, aid in the determination of anthophyllite from tremolite. True asbestos fibers usually have 0° extinction or ambiguous extinction, while cleavage fragments have more definite extinction. Continue analysis until both preparations have been examined and all present species of asbestos are identified. If there are no fibers present, or there is less than 0.1% present, end the analysis with the minimum number of slides (2). (5) Some fibers have a coating on them which makes dispersion microscopy very difficult or impossible. Becke line analysis or electron microscopy may be performed in those cases. Determine the percentage by light microscopy. TEM analysis tends to overestimate the actual percentage present. (6) Percentage determination is an estimate of occluded area, tempered by gross observation. Gross observation information is used to make sure that the high magnification microscopy does not greatly over- or under- estimate the amount of fiber present. This part of the analysis requires a great deal of experience. Satisfactory models for asbestos content analysis have not yet been developed, although some models based on metallurgical grain-size determination have found some utility. Estimation is more easily handled in situations where the grain sizes visible at about 160 × are about the same and the sample is relatively homogeneous. View all of the area under the cover slip to make the percentage determination. View the fields while moving the stage, paying attention to the clumps of material. These are not usually the best areas to perform dispersion microscopy because of the interference from other materials. But, they are the areas most likely to represent the accurate percentage in the sample. Small amounts of asbestos require slower scanning and more frequent analysis of individual fields. Report the area occluded by asbestos as the concentration. This estimate does not generally take into consideration the difference in density of the different species present in the sample. For most samples this is adequate. Simulation studies with similar materials must be carried out to apply microvisual estimation for that purpose and is beyond the scope of this procedure. (7) Where successive concentrations have been made by chemical or physical means, the amount reported is the percentage of the material in the “as submitted” or original state. The percentage determined by microscopy is multiplied by the fractions remaining after pre-preparation steps to give the percentage in the original sample. For example: Step 1. 60% remains after heating at 550 °C for 1 h. Step 2. 30% of the residue of step 1 remains after dissolution of carbonate in 0.1 m HCl. Step 3. Microvisual estimation determines that 5% of the sample is chrysotile asbestos. The reported result is: R = (Microvisual result in percent) × (Fraction remaining after step 2) × (Fraction remaining of original sample after step 1) R = (5) × (.30) × (.60) = 0.9% (8) Report the percent and type of asbestos present. For samples where asbestos was identified, but is less than 1.0%, report “Asbestos present, less than 1.0%.” There must have been at least two observed fibers or fiber bundles in the two preparations to be reported as present. For samples where asbestos was not seen, report as “None Detected.” 4. Auxiliary Information Because of the subjective nature of asbestos analysis, certain concepts and procedures need to be discussed in more depth. This information will help the analyst understand why some of the procedures are carried out the way they are. 4.1. Light Light is electromagnetic energy. It travels from its source in packets called quanta. It is instructive to consider light as a plane wave. The light has a direction of travel. Perpendicular to this and mutually perpendicular to each other, are two vector components. One is the magnetic vector and the other is the electric vector. We shall only be concerned with the electric vector. In this description, the interaction of the vector and the mineral will describe all the observable phenomena. From a light source such a microscope illuminator, light travels in all different direction from the filament. In any given direction away from the filament, the electric vector is perpendicular to the direction of travel of a light ray. While perpendicular, its orientation is random about the travel axis. If the electric vectors from all the light rays were lined up by passing the light through a filter that would only let light rays with electric vectors oriented in one direction pass, the light would then be POLARIZED. Polarized light interacts with matter in the direction of the electric vector. This is the polarization direction. Using this property it is possible to use polarized light to probe different materials and identify them by how they interact with light. The speed of light in a vacuum is a constant at about 2.99 × 10 8 4.2. Material Properties Materials are either amorphous or crystalline. The difference between these two descriptions depends on the positions of the atoms in them. The atoms in amorphous materials are randomly arranged with no long range order. An example of an amorphous material is glass. The atoms in crystalline materials, on the other hand, are in regular arrays and have long range order. Most of the atoms can be found in highly predictable locations. Examples of crystalline material are salt, gold, and the asbestos minerals. It is beyond the scope of this method to describe the different types of crystalline materials that can be found, or the full description of the classes into which they can fall. However, some general crystallography is provided below to give a foundation to the procedures described. With the exception of anthophyllite, all the asbestos minerals belong to the monoclinic crystal type. The unit cell is the basic repeating unit of the crystal and for monoclinic crystals can be described as having three unequal sides, two 90° angles and one angle not equal to 90°. The orthorhombic group, of which anthophyllite is a member has three unequal sides and three 90° angles. The unequal sides are a consequence of the complexity of fitting the different atoms into the unit cell. Although the atoms are in a regular array, that array is not symmetrical in all directions. There is long range order in the three major directions of the crystal. However, the order is different in each of the three directions. This has the effect that the index of refraction is different in each of the three directions. Using polarized light, we can investigate the index of refraction in each of the directions and identify the mineral or material under investigation. The indices α, β, and γ are used to identify the lowest, middle, and highest index of refraction respectively. The x direction, associated with α is called the fast axis. Conversely, the z direction is associated with γ and is the slow direction. Crocidolite has α along the fiber length making it “length-fast”. The remainder of the asbestos minerals have the γ axis along the fiber length. They are called “length-slow”. This orientation to fiber length is used to aid in the identification of asbestos. 4.3. Polarized Light Technique Polarized light microscopy as described in this section uses the phase-polar microscope described in Section 3.2. A phase contrast microscope is fitted with two polarizing elements, one below and one above the sample. The polarizers have their polarization directions at right angles to each other. Depending on the tests performed, there may be a compensator between these two polarizing elements. Light emerging from a polarizing element has its electric vector pointing in the polarization direction of the element. The light will not be subsequently transmitted through a second element set at a right angle to the first element. Unless the light is altered as it passes from one element to the other, there is no transmission of light. 4.4. Angle of Extinction Crystals which have different crystal regularity in two or three main directions are said to be anisotropic. They have a different index of refraction in each of the main directions. When such a crystal is inserted between the crossed polars, the field of view is no longer dark but shows the crystal in color. The color depends on the properties of the crystal. The light acts as if it travels through the crystal along the optical axes. If a crystal optical axis were lined up along one of the polarizing directions (either the polarizer or the analyzer) the light would appear to travel only in that direction, and it would blink out or go dark. The difference in degrees between the fiber direction and the angle at which it blinks out is called the angle of extinction. When this angle can be measured, it is useful in identifying the mineral. The procedure for measuring the angle of extinction is to first identify the polarization direction in the microscope. A commercial alignment slide can be used to establish the polarization directions or use anthophyllite or another suitable mineral. This mineral has a zero degree angle of extinction and will go dark to extinction as it aligns with the polarization directions. When a fiber of anthophyllite has gone to extinction, align the eyepiece reticle or graticule with the fiber so that there is a visual cue as to the direction of polarization in the field of view. Tape or otherwise secure the eyepiece in this position so it will not shift. After the polarization direction has been identified in the field of view, move the particle of interest to the center of the field of view and align it with the polarization direction. For fibers, align the fiber along this direction. Note the angular reading of the rotating stage. Looking at the particle, rotate the stage until the fiber goes dark or “blinks out”. Again note the reading of the stage. The difference in the first reading and the second is an angle of extinction. The angle measured may vary as the orientation of the fiber changes about its long axis. Tables of mineralogical data usually report the maximum angle of extinction. Asbestos forming minerals, when they exhibit an angle of extinction, usually do show an angle of extinction close to the reported maximum, or as appropriate depending on the substitution chemistry. 4.5. Crossed Polars with Compensator When the optical axes of a crystal are not lined up along one of the polarizing directions (either the polarizer or the analyzer) part of the light travels along one axis and part travels along the other visible axis. This is characteristic of birefringent materials. The color depends on the difference of the two visible indices of refraction and the thickness of the crystal. The maximum difference available is the difference between the α and the γ axes. This maximum difference is usually tabulated as the birefringence of the crystal. For this test, align the fiber at 45° to the polarization directions in order to maximize the contribution to each of the optical axes. The colors seen are called retardation colors. They arise from the recombination of light which has traveled through the two separate directions of the crystal. One of the rays is retarded behind the other since the light in that direction travels slower. On recombination, some of the colors which make up white light are enhanced by constructive interference and some are suppressed by destructive interference. The result is a color dependent on the difference between the indices and the thickness of the crystal. The proper colors, thicknesses, and retardations are shown on a Michel-Levy chart. The three items, retardation, thickness and birefringence are related by the following relationship: R = t(n γ α R = retardation, t = crystal thickness in µm, and n α,γ Examination of the equation for asbestos minerals reveals that the visible colors for almost all common asbestos minerals and fiber sizes are shades of gray and black. The eye is relatively poor at discriminating different shades of gray. It is very good at discriminating different colors. In order to compensate for the low retardation, a compensator is added to the light train between the polarization elements. The compensator used for this test is a gypsum plate of known thickness and birefringence. Such a compensator when oriented at 45° to the polarizer direction, provides a retardation of 530 nm of the 530 nm wavelength color. This enhances the red color and gives the background a characteristic red to red-magenta color. If this “full-wave” compensator is in place when the asbestos preparation is inserted into the light train, the colors seen on the fibers are quite different. Gypsum, like asbestos has a fast axis and a slow axis. When a fiber is aligned with its fast axis in the same direction as the fast axis of the gypsum plate, the ray vibrating in the slow direction is retarded by both the asbestos and the gypsum. This results in a higher retardation than would be present for either of the two minerals. The color seen is a second order blue. When the fiber is rotated 90° using the rotating stage, the slow direction of the fiber is now aligned with the fast direction of the gypsum and the fast direction of the fiber is aligned with the slow direction of the gypsum. Thus, one ray vibrates faster in the fast direction of the gypsum, and slower in the slow direction of the fiber; the other ray will vibrate slower in the slow direction of the gypsum and faster in the fast direction of the fiber. In this case, the effect is subtractive and the color seen is a first order yellow. As long as the fiber thickness does not add appreciably to the color, the same basic colors will be seen for all asbestos types except crocidolite. In crocidolite the colors will be weaker, may be in the opposite directions, and will be altered by the blue absorption color natural to crocidolite. Hundreds of other materials will give the same colors as asbestos, and therefore, this test is not definitive for asbestos. The test is useful in discriminating against fiberglass or other amorphous fibers such as some synthetic fibers. Certain synthetic fibers will show retardation colors different than asbestos; however, there are some forms of polyethylene and aramid which will show morphology and retardation colors similar to asbestos minerals. This test must be supplemented with a positive identification test when birefringent fibers are present which can not be excluded by morphology. This test is relatively ineffective for use on fibers less than 1 µm in diameter. For positive confirmation TEM or SEM should be used if no larger bundles or fibers are visible. 4.6. Dispersion Staining Dispersion microscopy or dispersion staining is the method of choice for the identification of asbestos in bulk materials. Becke line analysis is used by some laboratories and yields the same results as does dispersion staining for asbestos and can be used in lieu of dispersion staining. Dispersion staining is performed on the same platform as the phase-polar analysis with the analyzer and compensator removed. One polarizing element remains to define the direction of the light so that the different indices of refraction of the fibers may be separately determined. Dispersion microscopy is a dark-field technique when used for asbestos. Particles are imaged with scattered light. Light which is unscattered is blocked from reaching the eye either by the back field image mask in a McCrone objective or a back field image mask in the phase condenser. The most convenient method is to use the rotating phase condenser to move an oversized phase ring into place. The ideal size for this ring is for the central disk to be just larger than the objective entry aperture as viewed in the back focal plane. The larger the disk, the less scattered light reaches the eye. This will have the effect of diminishing the intensity of dispersion color and will shift the actual color seen. The colors seen vary even on microscopes from the same manufacturer. This is due to the different bands of wavelength exclusion by different mask sizes. The mask may either reside in the condenser or in the objective back focal plane. It is imperative that the analyst determine by experimentation with asbestos standards what the appropriate colors should be for each asbestos type. The colors depend also on the temperature of the preparation and the exact chemistry of the asbestos. Therefore, some slight differences from the standards should be allowed. This is not a serious problem for commercial asbestos uses. This technique is used for identification of the indices of refraction for fibers by recognition of color. There is no direct numerical readout of the index of refraction. Correlation of color to actual index of refraction is possible by referral to published conversion tables. This is not necessary for the analysis of asbestos. Recognition of appropriate colors along with the proper morphology are deemed sufficient to identify the commercial asbestos minerals. Other techniques including SEM, TEM, and XRD may be required to provide additional information in order to identify other types of asbestos. Make a preparation in the suspected matching high dispersion oil, e.g., n = 1.550 for chrysotile. Perform the preliminary tests to determine whether the fibers are birefringent or not. Take note of the morphological character. Wavy fibers are indicative of chrysotile while long, straight, thin, frayed fibers are indicative of amphibole asbestos. This can aid in the selection of the appropriate matching oil. The microscope is set up and the polarization direction is noted as in Section 4.4. Align a fiber with the polarization direction. Note the color. This is the color parallel to the polarizer. Then rotate the fiber rotating the stage 90° so that the polarization direction is across the fiber. This is the perpendicular position. Again note the color. Both colors must be consistent with standard asbestos minerals in the correct direction for a positive identification of asbestos. If only one of the colors is correct while the other is not, the identification is not positive. If the colors in both directions are bluish-white, the analyst has chosen a matching index oil which is higher than the correct matching oil, e.g. the analyst has used n = 1.620 where chrysotile is present. The next lower oil (Section 3.5.) should be used to prepare another specimen. If the color in both directions is yellow-white to straw-yellow-white, this indicates that the index of the oil is lower than the index of the fiber, e.g. the preparation is in n = 1.550 while anthophyllite is present. Select the next higher oil (Section 3.5.) and prepare another slide. Continue in this fashion until a positive identification of all asbestos species present has been made or all possible asbestos species have been ruled out by negative results in this test. Certain plant fibers can have similar dispersion colors as asbestos. Take care to note and evaluate the morphology of the fibers or remove the plant fibers in pre- preparation. Coating material on the fibers such as carbonate or vinyl may destroy the dispersion color. Usually, there will be some outcropping of fiber which will show the colors sufficient for identification. When this is not the case, treat the sample as described in Section 3.3. and then perform dispersion staining. Some samples will yield to Becke line analysis if they are coated or electron microscopy can be used for identification. 5. References 5.1. Crane, D.T., Asbestos in Air, 5.2. Ford, W.E., Dana's Textbook of Mineralogy; 5.3. Selikoff,.I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and Disease, 5.4. Women Inspectors of Factories. 5.5. Selikoff, I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and Disease, 5.6. Campbell, W.J., et al, Selected Silicate Minerals and Their Asbestiform Varieties, 5.7. Asbestos, 5.8. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants; Asbestos NESHAP Revision, Federal Register, 5.9. Ross, M. The Asbestos Minerals: Definitions, Description, Modes of Formation, Physical and Chemical Properties and Health Risk to the Mining Community, 5.10. Lilis, R., Fibrous Zeolites and Endemic Mesothelioma in Cappadocia, Turkey, J. Occ Medicine, 5.11. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos—1972, 5.12. Campbell, W.J., et al, Relationship of Mineral Habit to Size Characteristics for Tremolite Fragments and Fibers, 5.13. Mefford, D., DCM Laboratory, Denver, private communication, July 1987. 5.14. Deer, W.A., Howie, R.A., Zussman, J., Rock Forming Minerals, 5.15. Kerr, P.F., Optical Mineralogy; 5.16. Veblen, D.R. (Ed.), Amphiboles and Other Hydrous Pyriboles—Mineralogy, Reviews in Mineralogy, 5.17. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Microscopy in the Analysis of Asbestos 5.18. Polarized Light Microscopy, McCrone Research Institute, Chicago, 1976. 5.19. Asbestos Identification, McCrone Research Institute, G & G printers, Chicago, 1987. 5.20. McCrone, W.C., Calculation of Refractive Indices from Dispersion Staining Data, The Microscope, No 37, Chicago, 1989. 5.21. Levadie, B. (Ed.), Asbestos and Other Health Related Silicates, 5.22. Steel, E. and Wylie, A., Riordan, P.H. (Ed.), Mineralogical Characteristics of Asbestos, Geology of Asbestos Deposits, 5.23. Zussman, J., The Mineralogy of Asbestos, Asbestos: Properties, Applications and Hazards, [51 FR 22733, June 20, 1986] Editorial Note: For Federal Register www.govinfo.gov. § 1910.1002 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpretation of term. As used in § 1910.1000 (Table Z-1), coal tar pitch volatiles include the fused polycyclic hydrocarbons which volatilize from the distillation residues of coal, petroleum (excluding asphalt), wood, and other organic matter. Asphalt (CAS 8052-42-4, and CAS 64742-93-4) is not covered under the “coal tar pitch volatiles” standard. [48 FR 2768, Jan. 21, 1983] § 1910.1003 13 Carcinogens (4-Nitrobiphenyl, etc.). (a) Scope and application. 4-Nitrobiphenyl, Chemical Abstracts Service Register Number (CAS No.) 92933; alpha-Naphthylamine, CAS No. 134327; methyl chloromethyl ether, CAS No. 107302; 3,′-Dichlorobenzidine (and its salts) CAS No. 91941; bis-Chloromethyl ether, CAS No. 542881; beta-Naphthylamine, CAS No. 91598; Benzidine, CAS No. 92875; 4-Aminodiphenyl, CAS No. 92671; Ethyleneimine, CAS No. 151564; beta-Propiolactone, CAS No. 57578; 2-Acetylaminofluorene, CAS No. 53963; 4-Dimethylaminoazo-benezene, CAS No. 60117; and N-Nitrosodimethylamine, CAS No. 62759. (2) This section shall not apply to the following: (i) Solid or liquid mixtures containing less than 0.1 percent by weight or volume of 4-Nitrobiphenyl; methyl chloromethyl ether; bis-chloromethyl ether; beta-Naphthylamine; benzidine or 4-Aminodiphenyl; and (ii) Solid or liquid mixtures containing less than 1.0 percent by weight or volume of alpha-Naphthylamine; 3,′-Dichlorobenzidine (and its salts); Ethyleneimine; beta-Propiolactone; 2-Acetylaminofluorene; 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene, or N-Nitrosodimethylamine. (b) Definitions. Absolute filter Authorized employee Clean change room Closed system Decontamination Director Disposal Emergency External environment Isolated system Laboratory-type hood Nonregulated area Open-vessel system Protective clothing Regulated area (c) Requirements for areas containing a carcinogen addressed by this section. (1) Isolated systems. (2) Closed system operation. (ii) Employees exposed to 4-Nitrobiphenyl; alpha-Naphthylamine; 3,′-Dichlorobenzidine (and its salts); beta-Naphthylamine; benzidine; 4-Aminodiphenyl; 2-Acetylaminofluorene; 4-Dimethylaminoazo-benzene; and N-Nitrosodimethylamine shall be required to wash hands, forearms, face, and neck upon each exit from the regulated areas, close to the point of exit, and before engaging in other activities. (3) Open-vessel system operations. (4) Transfer from a closed system, charging or discharging point operations, or otherwise opening a closed system. (i) Access shall be restricted to authorized employees only. (ii) Each operation shall be provided with continuous local exhaust ventilation so that air movement is always from ordinary work areas to the operation. Exhaust air shall not be discharged to regulated areas, nonregulated areas or the external environment unless decontaminated. Clean makeup air shall be introduced in sufficient volume to maintain the correct operation of the local exhaust system. (iii) Employees shall be provided with, and required to wear, clean, full body protective clothing (smocks, coveralls, or long-sleeved shirt and pants), shoe covers and gloves prior to entering the regulated area. (iv) Employers must provide each employee engaged in handling operations involving the carcinogens 4-Nitrobiphenyl, alpha-Naphthylamine, 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidine (and its salts), beta-Naphthylamine, Benzidine, 4-Aminodiphenyl, 2-Acetylaminofluorene, 4-Dimethylaminoazo-benzene, and N-Nitrosodimethylamine, addressed by this section, with, and ensure that each of these employees wears and uses, a NIOSH-certified air-purifying, half-mask respirator with particulate filters. Employers also must provide each employee engaged in handling operations involving the carcinogens methyl chloromethyl ether, bis-Chloromethyl ether, Ethyleneimine, and beta-Propiolactone, addressed by this section, with, and ensure that each of these employees wears and uses any self-contained breathing apparatus that has a full facepiece and is operated in a pressure-demand or other positive-pressure mode, or any supplied-air respirator that has a full facepiece and is operated in a pressure-demand or other positive-pressure mode in combination with an auxiliary self-contained positive-pressure breathing apparatus. Employers may substitute a respirator affording employees higher levels of protection than these respirators. (v) Prior to each exit from a regulated area, employees shall be required to remove and leave protective clothing and equipment at the point of exit and at the last exit of the day, to place used clothing and equipment in impervious containers at the point of exit for purposes of decontamination or disposal. The contents of such impervious containers shall be identified, as required under paragraph (e) of this section. (vi) Drinking fountains are prohibited in the regulated area. (vii) Employees shall be required to wash hands, forearms, face, and neck on each exit from the regulated area, close to the point of exit, and before engaging in other activities and employees exposed to 4-Nitrobiphenyl; alpha-Naphthylamine; 3,′-Dichlorobenzidine (and its salts); beta-Naphthylamine; Benzidine; 4-Aminodiphenyl; 2-Acetylaminofluorene; 4-Dimethylaminoazo-benzene; and N-Nitrosodimethylamine shall be required to shower after the last exit of the day. (5) Maintenance and decontamination activities. (i) Be provided with and required to wear clean, impervious garments, including gloves, boots, and continuous-air supplied hood in accordance with § 1910.134; (ii) Be decontaminated before removing the protective garments and hood; (iii) Be required to shower upon removing the protective garments and hood. (d) General regulated area requirements Respiratory program. (2) Emergencies. (i) The potentially affected area shall be evacuated as soon as the emergency has been determined. (ii) Hazardous conditions created by the emergency shall be eliminated and the potentially affected area shall be decontaminated prior to the resumption of normal operations. (iii) Special medical surveillance by a physician shall be instituted within 24 hours for employees present in the potentially affected area at the time of the emergency. (iv) Where an employee has a known contact with a carcinogen addressed by this section, such employee shall be required to shower as soon as possible, unless contraindicated by physical injuries. (v) Emergency deluge showers and eyewash fountains supplied with running potable water shall be located near, within sight of, and on the same level with locations where a direct exposure to Ethyleneimine or beta-Propiolactone only would be most likely as a result of equipment failure or improper work practice. (3) Hygiene facilities and practices. (ii) Where employees are required by this section to wash, washing facilities shall be provided in accordance with § 1910.141(d) (1) and (2) (ii) through (vii). (iii) Where employees are required by this section to shower, shower facilities shall be provided in accordance with § 1910.141(d)(3). (iv) Where employees wear protective clothing and equipment, clean change rooms shall be provided for the number of such employees required to change clothes, in accordance with § 1910.141(e). (v) Where toilets are in regulated areas, such toilets shall be in a separate room. (4) Contamination control. (ii) Any equipment, material, or other item taken into or removed from a regulated area shall be done so in a manner that does not cause contamination in nonregulated areas or the external environment. (iii) Decontamination procedures shall be established and implemented to remove carcinogens addressed by this section from the surfaces of materials, equipment, and the decontamination facility. (iv) Dry sweeping and dry mopping are prohibited for 4-Nitrobiphenyl; alpha-Naphthylamine; 3,′-Dichlorobenzidine (and its salts); beta-Naphthylamine; Benzidine; 4-Aminodiphenyl; 2-Acetylaminofluorene; 4-Dimethylaminoazo-benzene and N-Nitrosodimethylamine. (e) Communication of hazards Hazard communication. (ii) In classifying the hazards of carcinogens listed in paragraph (e)(1)(iv) of this section, at least the hazards listed in paragraph (e)(1)(iv) are to be addressed. (iii) Employers shall include the carcinogens listed in paragraph (e)(1)(iv) of this section in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of the carcinogens listed in paragraph (e)(1)(iv) and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (e)(4) of this section. (iv) List of Carcinogens: (A) 4-Nitrobiphenyl: Cancer. (B) alpha-Naphthylamine: Cancer; skin irritation; and acute toxicity effects. (C) Methyl chloromethyl ether: Cancer; skin, eye and respiratory effects; acute toxicity effects; and flammability. (D) 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidine (and its salts): Cancer and skin sensitization. (E) bis-Chloromethyl ether: Cancer; skin, eye, and respiratory tract effects; acute toxicity effects; and flammability. (F) beta-Naphthylamine: Cancer and acute toxicity effects. (G) Benzidine: Cancer and acute toxicity effects. (H) 4-Aminodiphenyl: Cancer. (I) Ethyleneimine: Cancer; mutagenicity; skin and eye effects; liver effects; kidney effects; acute toxicity effects; and flammability. (J) beta-Propiolactone: Cancer; skin irritation; eye effects; and acute toxicity effects. (K) 2-Acetylaminofluorene: Cancer. (L) 4-Dimethylaminoazo-benzene: Cancer; skin effects; and respiratory tract irritation. (M) N-Nitrosodimethylamine: Cancer; liver effects; and acute toxicity effects. (2) Signs. DANGER (CHEMICAL IDENTIFICATION) MAY CAUSE CANCER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (ii) The employer shall post signs at entrances to regulated areas containing operations covered in paragraph (c)(5) of this section. The signs shall bear the legend: DANGER (CHEMICAL IDENTIFICATION) MAY CAUSE CANCER WEAR AIR-SUPPLIED HOODS, IMPERVIOUS SUITS, AND PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (iii) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section: CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (iv) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section: CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT EXPOSED IN THIS AREA IMPERVIOUS SUIT INCLUDING GLOVES, BOOTS, AND AIR-SUPPLIED HOOD REQUIRED AT ALL TIMES AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (v) Appropriate signs and instructions shall be posted at the entrance to, and exit from, regulated areas, informing employees of the procedures that must be followed in entering and leaving a regulated area. (3) Prohibited statements. (4) Training and indoctrination. (A) The nature of the carcinogenic hazards of a carcinogen addressed by this section, including local and systemic toxicity; (B) The specific nature of the operation involving a carcinogen addressed by this section that could result in exposure; (C) The purpose for and application of the medical surveillance program, including, as appropriate, methods of self-examination; (D) The purpose for and application of decontamination practices and purposes; (E) The purpose for and significance of emergency practices and procedures; (F) The employee's specific role in emergency procedures; (G) Specific information to aid the employee in recognition and evaluation of conditions and situations which may result in the release of a carcinogen addressed by this section; (H) The purpose for and application of specific first aid procedures and practices; (I) A review of this section at the employee's first training and indoctrination program and annually thereafter. (ii) Specific emergency procedures shall be prescribed, and posted, and employees shall be familiarized with their terms, and rehearsed in their application. (iii) All materials relating to the program shall be provided upon request to authorized representatives of the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (f) [Reserved] (g) Medical surveillance. (1) Examinations. (ii) Authorized employees shall be provided periodic physical examinations, not less often than annually, following the preassignment examination. (iii) In all physical examinations, the examining physician shall consider whether there exist conditions of increased risk, including reduced immunological competence, those undergoing treatment with steroids or cytotoxic agents, pregnancy, and cigarette smoking. (2) Records. (ii) Records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request to employees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a) through (e) and (g) through (i). These records shall also be provided upon request to the Director. (iii) Any physician who conducts a medical examination required by this paragraph shall furnish to the employer a statement of the employee's suitability for employment in the specific exposure. [61 FR 9242, Mar. 7, 1996, as amended at 63 FR 1286, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 20099, Apr. 23, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 2, 2008; 76 FR 33608, June 8, 2011; 76 FR 80740, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 17779, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1910.1004 alpha-Naphthylamine. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1005 [Reserved] § 1910.1006 Methyl chloromethyl ether. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1007 3,′-Dichlorobenzidine (and its salts). See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1008 bis-Chloromethyl ether. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1009 beta-Naphthylamine. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1010 Benzidine. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1011 4-Aminodiphenyl. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1012 Ethyleneimine. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1013 beta-Propiolactone. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1014 2-Acetylaminofluorene. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1015 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1016 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. See § 1910.1003, 13 carcinogens. [61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1910.1017 Vinyl chloride. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section applies to the manufacture, reaction, packaging, repackaging, storage, handling or use of vinyl chloride or polyvinyl chloride, but does not apply to the handling or use of fabricated products made of polyvinyl chloride. (3) This section applies to the transportation of vinyl chloride or polyvinyl chloride except to the extent that the Department of Transportation may regulate the hazards covered by this section. (b) Definitions Action level (2) Assistant Secretary (3) Authorized person (4) Director (5) Emergency (6) Fabricated product (7) Hazardous operation (8) OSHA Area Director (9) Polyvinyl chloride (10) Vinyl chloride (c) Permissible exposure limit. (2) No employee may be exposed to vinyl chloride at concentrations greater than 5 ppm averaged over any period not exceeding 15 minutes. (3) No employee may be exposed to vinyl chloride by direct contact with liquid vinyl chloride. (d) Monitoring. (2) Where a determination conducted under paragraph (d)(1) of this section shows any employee exposures, without regard to the use of respirators, in excess of the action level, a program for determining exposures for each such employee shall be established. Such a program: (i) Must be repeated at least quarterly for any employee exposed, without regard to the use of respirators, in excess of the permissible exposure limit. (ii) Must be repeated not less than every 6 months for any employee exposed without regard to the use of respirators, at or above the action level. (iii) May be discontinued for any employee only when at least two consecutive monitoring determinations, made not less than 5 working days apart, show exposures for that employee at or below the action level. (3) Whenever there has been a production, process or control change which may result in an increase in the release of vinyl chloride, or the employer has any other reason to suspect that any employee may be exposed in excess of the action level, a determination of employee exposure under paragraph (d)(1) of this section shall be performed. (4) The method of monitoring and measurement shall have an accuracy (with a confidence level of 95 percent) of not less than plus or minus 50 percent from 0.25 through 0.5 ppm, plus or minus 35 percent from over 0.5 ppm through 1.0 ppm, and plus or minus 25 percent over 1.0 ppm. (Methods meeting these accuracy requirements are available in the “NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods”). (5) Employees or their designated representatives shall be afforded reasonable opportunity to observe the monitoring and measuring required by this paragraph. (e) Regulated area. (i) Vinyl chloride or polyvinyl chloride is manufactured, reacted, repackaged, stored, handled or used; and (ii) Vinyl chloride concentrations are in excess of the permissible exposure limit. (2) Access to regulated areas shall be limited to authorized persons. (f) Methods of compliance. (1) Feasible engineering and work practice controls shall immediately be used to reduce exposures to at or below the permissible exposure limit. (2) Wherever feasible engineering and work practice controls which can be instituted immediately are not sufficient to reduce exposures to at or below the permissible exposure limit, they shall nonetheless be used to reduce exposures to the lowest practicable level, and shall be supplemented by respiratory protection in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section. A program shall be established and implemented to reduce exposures to at or below the permissible exposure limit, or to the greatest extent feasible, solely by means of engineering and work practice controls, as soon as feasible. (3) Written plans for such a program shall be developed and furnished upon request for examination and copying to authorized representatives of the Assistant Secretary and the Director. Such plans must be updated at least annually. (g) Respiratory protection General. (2) Respirator program. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (B) Provide an organic vapor cartridge that has a service life of at least one hour when using a chemical cartridge respirator at vinyl chloride concentrations up to 10 ppm. (C) Select a canister that has a service life of at least four hours when using a powered air-purifying respirator having a hood, helmet, or full or half facepiece, or a gas mask with a front-or back-mounted canister, at vinyl chloride concentrations up to 25 ppm. (ii) When air-purifying respirators are used: (A) Air-purifying canisters or cartridges must be replaced prior to the expiration of their service life or the end of the shift in which they are first used, whichever occurs first. (B) A continuous-monitoring and alarm system must be provided when concentrations of vinyl chloride could reasonably exceed the allowable concentrations for the devices in use. Such a system must be used to alert employees when vinyl chloride concentrations exceed the allowable concentrations for the devices in use. (h) Hazardous operations. (i) Respiratory protection in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (g) of this section; and (ii) Protective garments to prevent skin contact with liquid vinyl chloride or with polyvinyl chloride residue from vessel walls. The protective garments shall be selected for the operation and its possible exposure conditions. (2) Protective garments shall be provided clean and dry for each use. (i) Emergency situations. (1) Employees engaged in hazardous operations or correcting situations of existing hazardous releases shall be equipped as required in paragraph (h) of this section; (2) Other employees not so equipped shall evacuate the area and not return until conditions are controlled by the methods required in paragraph (f) of this section and the emergency is abated. (j) Training. (1) The program shall include: (i) The nature of the health hazard from chronic exposure to vinyl chloride including specifically the carcinogenic hazard; (ii) The specific nature of operations which could result in exposure to vinyl chloride in excess of the permissible limit and necessary protective steps; (iii) The purpose for, proper use, and limitations of respiratory protective devices; (iv) The fire hazard and acute toxicity of vinyl chloride, and the necessary protective steps; (v) The purpose for and a description of the monitoring program; (vi) The purpose for, and a description of, the medical surveillance program; (vii) Emergency procedures; (viii) Specific information to aid the employee in recognition of conditions which may result in the release of vinyl chloride; and (ix) A review of this standard at the employee's first training and indoctrination program, and annually thereafter. (2) All materials relating to the program shall be provided upon request to the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (k) Medical surveillance. (1) At the time of initial assignment, or upon institution of medical surveillance; (i) A general physical examination shall be performed, with specific attention to detecting enlargement of liver, spleen or kidneys, or dysfunction in these organs, and for abnormalities in skin, connective tissues and the pulmonary system (See appendix A). (ii) A medical history shall be taken, including the following topics: (A) Alcohol intake; (B) Past history of hepatitis; (C) Work history and past exposure to potential hepatotoxic agents, including drugs and chemicals; (D) Past history of blood transfusions; and (E) Past history of hospitalizations. (iii) A serum specimen shall be obtained and determinations made of: (A) Total bilirubin; (B) Alkaline phosphatase; (C) Serum glutamic oxalacetic transaminase (SGOT); (D) Serum glutamic pyruvic transaminase (SGPT); and (E) Gamma glustamyl transpeptidase. (2) Examinations must be provided in accordance with this paragraph at least annually. (3) Each employee exposed to an emergency shall be afforded appropriate medical surveillance. (4) A statement of each employee's suitability for continued exposure to vinyl chloride including use of protective equipment and respirators, shall be obtained from the examining physician promptly after any examination. A copy of the physician's statement shall be provided each employee. (5) If any employee's health would be materially impaired by continued exposure, such employee shall be withdrawn from possible contact with vinyl chloride. (6) Laboratory analyses for all biological specimens included in medical examination shall be performed by accredited laboratories. (7) If the examining physician determines that alternative medical examinations to those required by paragraph (k)(1) of this section will provide at least equal assurance of detecting medical conditions pertinent to the exposure to vinyl chloride, the employer may accept such alternative examinations as meeting the requirements of paragraph (k)(1) of this section, if the employer obtains a statement from the examining physician setting forth the alternative examinations and the rationale for substitution. This statement shall be available upon request for examination and copying to authorized representatives of the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (l) Communication of hazards Hazard communication—general. (ii) In classifying the hazards of vinyl chloride at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer; central nervous system effects; liver effects; blood effects; and flammability. (iii) Employers shall include vinyl chloride in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of vinyl chloride and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (j) of this section. (2) Signs. DANGER VINYL CHLORIDE MAY CAUSE CANCER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (ii) The employer shall post signs at areas containing hazardous operations or where emergencies currently exist. The signs shall be legible and bear the legend: DANGER VINYL CHLORIDE MAY CAUSE CANCER WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (iii) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (l)(2)(i) of this section: CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (iv) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this section: CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT IN THIS AREA PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (3) Labels. CONTAMINATED WITH VINYL CHLORIDE MAY CAUSE CANCER (ii) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on labels of containers of polyvinyl chloride resin waste from reactors or other waste contaminated with vinyl chloride in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraphs (l)(3)(i) of this section: CONTAMINATED WITH VINYL CHLORIDE CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT (4) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information for containers of polyvinyl chloride in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraphs (l)(1)(i) of this section: POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (OR TRADE NAME) Contains VINYL CHLORIDE VINYL CHLORIDE IS A CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT (5)(i) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include either the following information in either paragraph (l)(5)(i) or (l)(5)(ii) of this section on containers of vinyl chloride in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section: VINYL CHLORIDE EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE GAS UNDER PRESSURE CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT (ii) In accordance with 49 CFR Parts 170-189, with the additional legend applied near the label or placard: CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT (6) No statement shall appear on or near any required sign, label, or instruction which contradicts or detracts from the effect of any required warning, information, or instruction. (m) Records. (2) Records of required monitoring and measuring and medical records shall be provided upon request to employees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a) through (e) and (g) through (i). These records shall be provided upon request to the Director. Authorized personnel rosters shall also be provided upon request to the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (i) Monitoring and measuring records shall: (A) State the date of such monitoring and measuring and the concentrations determined and identify the instruments and methods used; (B) Include any additional information necessary to determine individual employee exposures where such exposures are determined by means other than individual monitoring of employees; and (C) Be maintained for not less than 30 years. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) Medical records shall be maintained for the duration of the employment of each employee plus 20 years, or 30 years, whichever is longer. (n) The employer must, within 15 working days after the receipt of the results of any monitoring performed under this section, notify each affected employee of these results and the steps being taken to reduce exposures within the permissible exposure limit either individually in writing or by posting the results in an appropriate location that is accessible to affected employees. Appendix A to § 1910.1017—Supplementary Medical Information When required tests under paragraph (k)(1) of this section show abnormalities, the tests should be repeated as soon as practicable, preferably within 3 to 4 weeks. If tests remain abnormal, consideration should be given to withdrawal of the employee from contact with vinyl chloride, while a more comprehensive examination is made. Additional tests which may be useful: A. For kidney dysfunction: urine examination for albumin, red blood cells, and exfoliative abnormal cells. B. Pulmonary system: Forced vital capacity, Forced expiratory volume at 1 second, and chest roentgenogram (posterior-anterior, 14 × 17 inches). C. Additional serum tests: Lactic acid dehydrogenase, lactic acid dehydrogenase isoenzyme, protein determination, and protein electrophoresis. D. For a more comprehensive examination on repeated abnormal serum tests: Hepatitis B antigen, and liver scanning. [39 FR 35896, Oct. 4, 1974. Redesignated at 40 FR 23072, May 28, 1975] Editorial Note: For Federal Register www.govinfo.gov. § 1910.1018 Inorganic arsenic. (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Assistant Secretary Authorized person Director Inorganic arsenic (c) Permissible exposure limit. 3 (d) [Reserved] (e) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) For the purposes of this section, employee exposure is that exposure which would occur if the employee were not using a respirator. (iii) The employer shall collect full shift (for at least 7 continuous hours) personal samples including at least one sample for each shift for each job classification in each work area. (2) Initial monitoring. (3) Frequency. (ii) If the initial monitoring, required by this section, or subsequent monitoring reveals employee exposure to be above the permissible exposure limit, the employer shall repeat monitoring at least quarterly. (iii) If the initial monitoring, required by this section, or subsequent monitoring reveals employee exposure to be above the action level and below the permissible exposure limit the employer shall repeat monitoring at least every six months. (iv) The employer shall continue monitoring at the required frequency until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least seven (7) days apart, are below the action level at which time the employer may discontinue monitoring for that employee until such time as any of the events in paragraph (e)(4) of this section occur. (4) Additional monitoring. (5) Employee notification. (ii) Whenever the results indicate that the representative employee exposure exceeds the permissible exposure limit, the employer shall include in the written notice a statement that the permissible exposure limit was exceeded and a description of the corrective action taken to reduce exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit. (6) Accuracy of measurement. 3 (ii) The employer shall use a method of monitoring and measurement which has an accuracy (with confidence level of 95 percent) of not less than plus or minus 35 percent for concentrations of inorganic arsenic greater than 5 µg/m 3 3 (f) Regulated area Establishment. (2) Demarcation. (3) Access. (4) Provision of respirators. (5) Prohibited activities. (g) Methods of compliance Controls. (ii) Where engineering and work practice controls are not sufficient to reduce exposures to or below the permissible exposure limit, they shall nonetheless be used to reduce exposures to the lowest levels achievable by these controls and shall be supplemented by the use of respirators in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section and other necessary personal protective equipment. Employee rotation is not required as a control strategy before respiratory protection is instituted. (2) Compliance Program. (ii) Written plans for these compliance programs shall include at least the following: (A) A description of each operation in which inorganic arsenic is emitted; e.g. machinery used, material processed, controls in place, crew size, operating procedures and maintenance practices; (B) Engineering plans and studies used to determine methods selected for controlling exposure to inorganic arsenic; (C) A report of the technology considered in meeting the permissible exposure limit; (D) Monitoring data; (E) A detailed schedule for implementation of the engineering controls and work practices that cannot be implemented immediately and for the adaption and implementation of any additional engineering and work practices necessary to meet the permissible exposure limit; (F) Whenever the employer will not achieve the permissible exposure limit with engineering controls and work practices by December 31, 1979, the employer shall include in the compliance plan an analysis of the effectiveness of the various controls, shall install engineering controls and institute work practices on the quickest schedule feasible, and shall include in the compliance plan and implement a program to minimize the discomfort and maximize the effectiveness of respirator use; and (G) Other relevant information. (iii) Written plans for such a program shall be submitted upon request to the Assistant Secretary and the Director, and shall be available at the worksite for examination and copying by the Assistant Secretary, Director, any affected employee or authorized employee representatives. (iv) The plans required by this paragraph must be revised and updated at least annually to reflect the current status of the program. (h) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering or work-practice controls. (ii) Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activities, for which the employer establishes that engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the permissible exposure limit. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (ii) If an employee exhibits breathing difficulty during fit testing or respirator use, they must be examined by a physician trained in pulmonary medicine to determine whether they can use a respirator while performing the required duty. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (B) Ensure that employees do not use half mask respirators for protection against arsenic trichloride because it is absorbed rapidly through the skin. (C) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators. (D) Select for employee use: ( 1 ( 2 3 3 (ii) Employees required to use respirators may choose, and the employer must provide, a powered air-purifying respirator if it will provide proper protection. In addition, the employer must provide a combination dust and acid-gas respirator to employees who are exposed to gases over the relevant exposure limits. (i) [Reserved] (j) Protective work clothing and equipment Provision and use. (i) Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing; (ii) Gloves, and shoes or coverlets; (iii) Face shields or vented goggles when necessary to prevent eye irritation, which comply with the requirements of § 1910.133(a) (2)-(6); and (iv) Impervious clothing for employees subject to exposure to arsenic trichloride. (2) Cleaning and replacement. 3 (ii) The employer shall clean, launder, or dispose of protective clothing required by paragraph (j) (1) of this section. (iii) The employer shall repair or replace the protective clothing and equipment as needed to maintain their effectiveness. (iv) The employer shall assure that all protective clothing is removed at the completion of a work shift only in change rooms prescribed in paragraph (m) (1) of this section. (v) The employer shall assure that contaminated protective clothing which is to be cleaned, laundered, or disposed of, is placed in a closed container in the change-room which prevents dispersion of inorganic arsenic outside the container. (vi) The employer shall inform in writing any person who cleans or launders clothing required by this section, of the potentially harmful effects including the carcinogenic effects of exposure to inorganic arsenic. (vii) Labels on contaminated protective clothing and equipment. (A) The employer shall ensure that the containers of contaminated protective clothing and equipment in the workplace or which are to be removed from the workplace are labeled and that the labels include the following information: DANGER: CONTAMINATED WITH INORGANIC ARSENIC. MAY CAUSE CANCER. DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR SHAKING. DISPOSE OF INORGANIC ARSENIC CONTAMINATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL REGULATIONS. (B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on containers of protective clothing and equipment in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraphs (j)(2)(vii) of this section: CAUTION: Clothing contaminated with inorganic arsenic; do not remove dust by blowing or shaking. Dispose of inorganic arsenic contaminated wash water in accordance with applicable local, State or Federal regulations. (viii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of inorganic arsenic from protective clothing or equipment by blowing or shaking. (k) Housekeeping Surfaces. (2) Cleaning floors. (3) Vacuuming. (4) Housekeeping plan. (5) Maintenance of equipment. (l) [Reserved] (m) Hygiene facilities and practices Change rooms. (2) Showers. (ii) The employer shall provide shower facilities in accordance with § 1910.141(d)(3). (3) Lunchrooms. (ii) The employer shall assure that employees working in the regulated area or subject to the possibility of skin or eye irritation from exposure to inorganic arsenic wash their hands and face prior to eating. (4) Lavatories. (5) Vacuuming clothes. 3 (6) Avoidance of skin irritation. (n) Medical surveillance General Employees covered. (A) All employees who are or will be exposed above the action level, without regard to the use of respirators, at least 30 days per year; and (B) All employees who have been exposed above the action level, without regard to respirator use, for 30 days or more per year for a total of 10 years or more of combined employment with the employer or predecessor employers prior to or after the effective date of this standard. The determination of exposures prior to the effective date of this standard shall be based upon prior exposure records, comparison with the first measurements taken after the effective date of this standard, or comparison with records of exposures in areas with similar processes, extent of engineering controls utilized and materials used by that employer. (ii) Examination by physician. (2) Initial examinations. (i) A work history and a medical history which shall include a smoking history and the presence and degree of respiratory symptoms such as breathlessness, cough, sputum production and wheezing. (ii) A medical examination which shall include at least the following: (A) A standard film or digital posterior-anterior chest x-ray; (B) A nasal and skin examination; and (C) Other examinations which the physician believes appropriate because of the employees exposure to inorganic arsenic or because of required respirator use. (3) Periodic examinations. (ii) Whenever a covered employee has not taken the examinations specified in paragraphs (n)(2)(i) and (n)(2)(ii)(B) and (C) of this section within six (6) months preceding the termination of employment, the employer shall provide such examinations to the employee upon termination of employment. (4) Additional examinations. (5) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this standard and its appendices; (ii) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposure; (iii) The employee's representative exposure level or anticipated exposure level; (iv) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used; and (v) Information from previous medical examinations of the affected employee which is not readily available to the examining physician. (6) Physician's written opinion. (A) The results of the medical examination and tests performed; (B) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions which would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment of the employee's health from exposure to inorganic arsenic; (C) Any recommended limitations upon the employee's exposure to inorganic arsenic or upon the use of protective clothing or equipment such as respirators; and (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions which require further explanation or treatment. (ii) The employer shall instruct the physician not to reveal in the written opinion specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure. (iii) The employer shall provide a copy of the written opinion to the affected employee. (o) Employee information and training Training program. (ii) The training program shall be provided by October 1, 1978, for employees covered by this provision, at the time of initial assignment for those subsequently covered by this provision, and at least annually for other covered employees thereafter; and the employer shall assure that each employee is informed of the following: (A) The information contained in appendix A; (B) The quantity, location, manner of use, storage, sources of exposure, and the specific nature of operations which could result in exposure to inorganic arsenic as well as any necessary protective steps; (C) The purpose, proper use, and limitation of respirators; (D) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program as required by paragraph (n) of this section; (E) The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job assignment; and (F) A review of this standard. (2) Access to training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide; upon request, all materials relating to the employee information and training program to the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (p) Communication of hazards Hazard communication—General. (ii) In classifying the hazards of inorganic arsenic at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer; liver effects; skin effects; respiratory irritation; nervous system effects; and acute toxicity effects. (iii) Employers shall include inorganic arsenic in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of inorganic arsenic and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (o) of this section. (iv) The employer shall ensure that no statement appears on or near any sign or label required by this paragraph (p) which contradicts or detracts from the meaning of the required sign or label. (2) Signs. DANGER INORGANIC ARSENIC MAY CAUSE CANCER DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (ii) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (p)(2)(i) of this section: DANGER INORGANIC ARSENIC CANCER HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY NO SMOKING OR EATING RESPIRATOR REQUIRED (iii) The employer shall ensure that signs required by this paragraph (p) are illuminated and cleaned as necessary so that the legend is readily visible. (3)(i) Prior to June 1, 2015, in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraphs (p)(1)(i) of this section, employers may apply precautionary labels to all shipping and storage containers of inorganic arsenic, and to all products containing inorganic arsenic, bearing the following legend: DANGER CONTAINS INORGANIC ARSENIC CANCER HAZARD HARMFUL IF INHALED OR SWALLOWED USE ONLY WITH ADEQUATE VENTILATION OR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION (ii) Labels are not required when the inorganic arsenic in the product is bound in such a manner so as to make unlikely the possibility of airborne exposure to inorganic arsenic. (Possible examples of products not requiring labels are semiconductors, light emitting diodes and glass.) (q) Recordkeeping Exposure monitoring. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The date(s), number, duration location, and results of each of the samples taken, including a description of the sampling procedure used to determine representative employee exposure where applicable; (B) A description of the sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (C) The type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any; (D) Name and job classification of the employees monitored and of all other employees whose exposure the measurement is intended to represent; and (E) The environmental variables that could affect the measurement of the employee's exposure. (iii) The employer shall maintain these monitoring records for at least 40 years or for the duration of employment plus 20 years, whichever, is longer. (2) Medical surveillance. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The name and description of duties of the employee; (B) A copy of the physician's written opinions; (C) Results of any exposure monitoring done for that employee and the representative exposure levels supplied to the physician; and (D) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to inorganic arsenic. (iii) The employer shall in addition keep, or assure that the examining physician keeps, the following medical records; (A) A copy of the medical examination results including medical and work history required under paragraph (n) of this section; (B) A description of the laboratory procedures and a copy of any standards or guidelines used to interpret the test results or references to that information; (C) The initial X-ray; (D) The X-rays for the most recent 5 years; and (E) Any X-rays with a demonstrated abnormality and all subsequent X-rays; (iv) The employer shall maintain or assure that the physician maintains those medical records for at least 40 years, or for the duration of employment plus 20 years whichever is longer. (3) Availability. (ii) Records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request to employees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a) through (e) and (g) through (i). (4) Transfer of records. (ii) The employer shall also comply with any additional requirements involving the transfer of records set in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). (r) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (ii) Without interfering with the monitoring, observers shall be entitled to; (A) Receive an explanation of the measurement procedures; (B) Observe all steps related to the monitoring of inorganic arsenic performed at the place of exposure; and (C) Record the results obtained or receive copies of the results when returned by the laboratory. (s) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.1018—Inorganic Arsenic Substance Information Sheet i. substance identification A. Substance. B. Definition. C. Permissible Exposure Limit. D. Regulated Areas. ii. health hazard data A. Comments. B. Ways in which the chemical affects your body. iii. protective clothing and equipment A. Respirators. B. Protective clothing. iv. hygiene facilities and practices You must not eat, drink, smoke, chew gum or tobacco, or apply cosmetics in the regulated area, except that drinking water is permitted. If you work in a regulated area your employer is required to provide lunchrooms and other areas for these purposes. If you work in a regulated area, your employer is required to provide showers, washing facilities, and change rooms. You must wash your face, and hands before eating and must shower at the end of the work shift. Do not take used protective clothing out of change rooms without your employer's permission. Your employer is required to provide for laundering or cleaning of your protective clothing. v. signs and labels Your employer is required to post warning signs and labels for your protection. Signs must be posted in regulated areas. The signs must warn that a cancer hazard is present, that only authorized employees may enter the area, and that no smoking or eating is allowed, and that respirators must be worn. vi. medical examinations If your exposure to arsenic is over the Action Level (5 µg/m3)—(including all persons working in regulated areas) at least 30 days per year, or you have been exposed to arsenic for more than 10 years over the Action Level, your employer is required to provide you with a medical examination. The examination shall be every 6 months for employees over 45 years old or with more than 10 years exposure over the Action Level and annually for other covered employees. The medical examination must include a medical history; a chest X-ray (during initial examination only); skin examination and a nasal examination. The examining physician will provide a written opinion to your employer containing the results of the medical exams. You should also receive a copy of this opinion. The physician must not tell your employer any conditions he detects unrelated to occupational exposure to arsenic but must tell you those conditions. vii. observation of monitoring Your employer is required to monitor your exposure to arsenic and you or your representatives are entitled to observe the monitoring procedure. You are entitled to receive an explanation of the measurement procedure, and to record the results obtained. When the monitoring procedure is taking place in an area where respirators or personal protective clothing and equipment are required to be worn, you must also be provided with and must wear the protective clothing and equipment. viii. access to records You or your representative are entitled to records of your exposure to inorganic arsenic and your medical examination records if you request your employer to provide them. ix. training and notification Additional information on all of these items plus training as to hazards of exposure to inorganic arsenic and the engineering and work practice controls associated with your job will also be provided by your employer. If you are exposed over the permissible exposure limit, your employer must inform you of that fact and the actions he is taking to reduce your exposures. Appendix B to § 1910.1018—Substance Technical Guidelines arsenic, arsenic trioxide, arsenic trichloride (three examples) I. Physical and chemical properties A. Arsenic (metal). 1. Formula: As. 2. Appearance: Gray metal. 3. Melting point: Sublimes without melting at 613C. 4. Specific Gravity: (H20 = 1):5.73. 5. Solubility in water: Insoluble. B. Arsenic Trioxide. 1. Formula: As203, (As406). 2. Appearance: White powder. 3. Melting point: 315C. 4. Specific Gravity (H20 = 1):3.74. 5. Solubility in water: 3.7 grams in 100cc of water at 20c. C. Arsenic Trichloride (liquid). 1. Formula: AsC13. 2. Appearance: Colorless or pale yellow liquid. 3. Melting point: −8.5C. 4. Boiling point: 130.2C. 5. Specific Gravity (H20 = 1):2.16 at 20C. 6. Vapor Pressure: 10mm Hg at 23.5C. 7. Solubility in Water: Decomposes in water. II. Fire, explosion and reactivity data. A. Fire: Arsenic, arsenic Trioxide and Arsenic Trichloride are nonflammable. B. Reactivity: 1. Conditions Contributing to instability: Heat. 2. Incompatibility: Hydrogen gas can react with inorganic arsenic to form the highly toxic gas arsine. III. Monitoring and Measurement Procedures Samples collected should be full shift (at least 7-hour) samples. Sampling should be done using a personal sampling pump at a flow rate of 2 liters per minute. Samples should be collected on 0.8 micrometer pore size membrane filter (37mm diameter). Volatile arsenicals such as arsenic trichloride can be most easily collected in a midget bubbler filled with 15 ml. of 0.1 N NaOH. The method of sampling and analysis should have an accuracy of not less than ±25 percent (with a confidence limit of 95 percent) for 10 micrograms per cubic meter of air (10 µg/m 3 3 Appendix C to § 1910.1018—Medical Surveillance Guidelines I. General Medical examinations are to be provided for all employees exposed to levels of inorganic arsenic above the action level (5 µg/m3) for at least 30 days per year (which would include among others, all employees, who work in regulated areas). Examinations are also to be provided to all employees who have had 10 years or more exposure above the action level for more than 30 days per year while working for the present or predecessor employer though they may no longer be exposed above the level. An initial medical examination is to be provided to all such employees by December 1, 1978. In addition, an initial medical examination is to be provided to all employees who are first assigned to areas in which worker exposure will probably exceed 5 µg/m3 (after August 1, 1978) at the time of initial assignment. In addition to its immediate diagnostic usefulness, the initial examination will provide a baseline for comparing future test results. The initial examination must include as a minimum the following elements: (1) A work and medical history, including a smoking history, and presence and degree of respiratory symptoms such as breathlessness, cough, sputum production, and wheezing; (2) A 14″ by 17″ or other reasonably-sized standard film or digital posterior-anterior chest X-ray; (3) A nasal and skin examination; and (4) Other examinations which the physician believes appropriate because of the employee's exposure to inorganic arsenic or because of required respirator use. Periodic examinations are also to be provided to the employees listed in the first paragraph of this section. The periodic examinations shall be given annually for those covered employees 45 years of age or less with fewer than 10 years employment in areas where employee exposure exceeds the action level (5 µg/m 3 Periodic examinations for other covered employees shall be provided every six (6) months. These examinations shall include all tests required in the initial examination, except the chest X-ray, and the medical history need only be updated. The examination contents are minimum requirements. Additional tests such as lateral and oblique X-rays or pulmonary function tests may be useful. For workers exposed to three arsenicals which are associated with lymphatic cancer, copper acetoarsenite, potassium arsenite, or sodium arsenite the examination should also include palpation of superficial lymph nodes and complete blood count. ii. noncarcinogenic effects The OSHA standard is based on minimizing risk of exposed workers dying of lung cancer from exposure to inorganic arsenic. It will also minimize skin cancer from such exposures. The following three sections quoted from “Occupational Diseases: A Guide to Their Recognition”, Revised Edition, June 1977, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health is included to provide information on the nonneoplastic effects of exposure to inorganic arsenic. Such effects should not occur if the OSHA standards are followed. A. Local B. Systemic 1/2 Cases of acute arsenical poisoning due to inhalation are exceedingly rare in industry. When it does occur, respiratory tract symptoms—cough, chest pain, dyspnea—giddiness, headache, and extreme general weakness precede gastrointestinal symptoms. The acute toxic symptoms of trivalent arsenical poisoning are due to severe inflammation of the mucous membranes and greatly increased permeability of the blood capillaries. Chronic arsenical poisoning due to ingestion is rare and generally confined to patients taking prescribed medications. However, it can be a concomitant of inhaled inorganic arsenic from swallowed sputum and improper eating habits. Symptoms are weight loss, nausea and diarrhea alternating with constipation, pigmentation and eruption of the skin, loss of hair, and peripheral neuritis. Chronic hepatitis and cirrhosis have been described. Polyneuritis may be the salient feature, but more frequently there are numbness and parasthenias of “glove and stocking” distribution. The skin lesions are usually melanotic and keratotic and may occasionally take the form of an intradermal cancer of the squamous cell type, but without infiltrative properties. Horizontal white lines (striations) on the fingernails and toenails are commonly seen in chronic arsenical poisoning and are considered to be a diagnostic accompaniment of arsenical polyneuritis. Inhalation of inorganic arsenic compounds is the most common cause of chronic poisoning in the industrial situation. This condition is divided into three phases based on signs and symptoms. First Phase: The worker complains of weakness, loss of appetite, some nausea, occasional vomiting, a sense of heaviness in the stomach, and some diarrhea. Second Phase: The worker complains of conjunctivitis, a catarrhal state of the mucous membranes of the nose, larynx, and respiratory passage. Coryza, hoarseness, and mild tracheobronchitis may occur. Perforation of the nasal septum is common, and is probably the most typical lesion of the upper respiratory tract in occupational exposure to arsenical dust. Skin lesions, eczematoid and allergic in type, are common. Third Phase: The worker complains of symptoms of peripheral neuritis, initially of hands and feet, which is essentially sensory. In more severe cases, motor paralyses occur; the first muscles affected are usually the toe extensors and the peronei. In only the most severe cases will paralysis of flexor muscles of the feet or of the extensor muscles of hands occur. Liver damage from chronic arsenical poisoning is still debated, and as yet the question is unanswered. In cases of chronic and acute arsenical poisoning, toxic effects to the myocardium have been reported based on EKG changes. These findings, however, are now largely discounted and the EKG changes are ascribed to electrolyte disturbances concomitant with arsenicalism. Inhalation of arsenic trioxide and other inorganic arsenical dusts does not give rise to radiological evidence or pneumoconiosis. Arsenic does have a depressant effect upon the bone marrow, with disturbances of both erythropoiesis and myelopoiesis. Bibliography Dinman, B. D. 1960. Arsenic; chronic human intoxication. J. Occup. Med. 2:137. Elkins, H. B. 1959. The Chemistry of Industrial Toxicology, 2nd ed. John Wiley and Sons, New York. Holmquist, L. 1951. Occupational arsenical dermatitis; a study among employees at a copper-ore smelting works including investigations of skin reactions to contact with arsenic compounds. Acta. Derm. Venereol. (Supp. 26) 31:1. Pinto, S. S., and C. M. McGill. 1953. Arsenic trioxide exposure in industry. Ind. Med. Surg. 22:281. Pinto, S. S., and K. W. Nelson. 1976. Arsenic toxicology and industrial exposure. Annu. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 16:95. Vallee, B. L., D. D. Ulmer, and W. E. C. Wacker. 1960. Arsenic toxicology and biochemistry. AMA Arch. Indust. Health 21:132. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 19624, May 5, 1978; 43 FR 28472, June 30, 1978; 45 FR 35282, May 23, 1980; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35310, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1286, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33468, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16672, 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50189, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75585, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33608, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17780, Mar. 26, 2012; 84 FR 21470, May 14, 2019] § 1910.1020 Access to employee exposure and medical records. (a) Purpose. (b) Scope and application. (2) This section applies to all employee exposure and medical records, and analyses thereof, of such employees, whether or not the records are mandated by specific occupational safety and health standards. (3) This section applies to all employee exposure and medical records, and analyses thereof, made or maintained in any manner, including on an in-house of contractual (e.g., fee-for-service) basis. Each employer shall assure that the preservation and access requirements of this section are complied with regardless of the manner in which the records are made or maintained. (c) Definitions Access (2) Analysis using exposure or medical records (3) Designated representative (4) Employee (5) Employee exposure record (i) Environmental (workplace) monitoring or measuring of a toxic substance or harmful physical agent, including personal, area, grab, wipe, or other form of sampling, as well as related collection and analytical methodologies, calculations, and other background data relevant to interpretation of the results obtained; (ii) Biological monitoring results which directly assess the absorption of a toxic substance or harmful physical agent by body systems (e.g., the level of a chemical in the blood, urine, breath, hair, fingernails, etc) but not including results which assess the biological effect of a substance or agent or which assess an employee's use of alcohol or drugs; (iii) Material safety data sheets indicating that the material may pose a hazard to human health; or (iv) In the absence of the above, a chemcial inventory or any other record which reveals where and when used and the identity (e.g., chemical, common, or trade name) of a toxic substance or harmful physical agent. (6)(i) Employee medical record (A) Medical and employment questionnaires or histories (including job description and occupational exposures), (B) The results of medical examinations (pre-employment, pre-assignment, periodic, or episodic) and laboratory tests (including chest and other X-ray examinations taken for the purposes of establishing a base-line or detecting occupational illness, and all biological monitoring not defined as an “employee exposure record”), (C) Medical opinions, diagnoses, progress notes, and recommendations, (D) First aid records, (E) Descriptions of treatments and prescriptions, and (F) Employee medical complaints. (ii) “Employee medical record” does not include medical information in the form of: (A) Physical specimens (e.g., blood or urine samples) which are routinely discarded as a part of normal medical practice; or (B) Records concerning health insurance claims if maintained separately from the employer's medical program and its records, and not accessible to the employer by employee name or other direct personal identifier (e.g., social security number, payroll number, etc.); or (C) Records created solely in preparation for litigation which are privileged from discovery under the applicable rules of procedure or evidence; or (D) Records concerning voluntary employee assistance programs (alcohol, drug abuse, or personal counseling programs) if maintained separately from the employer's medical program and its records. (7) Employer (8) Exposure exposed (9) Health Professional (10) Record (11) Specific chemical identity (12)(i) Specific written consent (A) The name and signature of the employee authorizing the release of medical information, (B) The date of the written authorization, (C) The name of the individual or organization that is authorized to release the medical information, (D) The name of the designated representative (individual or organization) that is authorized to receive the released information, (E) A general description of the medical information that is authorized to be released, (F) A general description of the purpose for the release of the medical information, and (G) A date or condition upon which the written authorization will expire (if less than one year). (ii) A written authorization does not operate to authorize the release of medical information not in existence on the date of written authorization, unless the release of future information is expressly authorized, and does not operate for more than one year from the date of written authorization. (iii) A written authorization may be revoked in writing prospectively at any time. (13) Toxic substance or harmful physical agent (i) Is listed in the latest printed edition of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances (RTECS), which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6; or (ii) Has yielded positive evidence of an acute or chronic health hazard in testing conducted by, or known to, the employer; or (iii) Is the subject of a material safety data sheet kept by or known to the employer indicating that the material may pose a hazard to human health. (14) Trade secret (d) Preservation of records. (i) Employee medical records. (A) Health insurance claims records maintained separately from the employer's medical program and its records, (B) First aid records (not including medical histories) of one-time treatment and subsequent observation of minor scratches, cuts, burns, splinters, and the like which do not involve medical treatment, loss of consciousness, restriction of work or motion, or transfer to another job, if made on-site by a non-physician and if maintained separately from the employer's medical program and its records, and (C) The medical records of employees who have worked for less than (1) year for the employer need not be retained beyond the term of employment if they are provided to the employee upon the termination of employment. (ii) Employee exposure records. (A) Background data to environmental (workplace) monitoring or measuring, such as laboratory reports and worksheets, need only be retained for one (1) year as long as the sampling results, the collection methodology (sampling plan), a description of the analytical and mathematical methods used, and a summary of other background data relevant to interpretation of the results obtained, are retained for at least thirty (30) years; and (B) Material safety data sheets and paragraph (c)(5)(iv) records concerning the identity of a substance or agent need not be retained for any specified period as long as some record of the identity (chemical name if known) of the substance or agent, where it was used, and when it was used is retained for at least thirty (30) years; 1 1 (C) Biological monitoring results designated as exposure records by specific occupational safety and health standards shall be preserved and maintained as required by the specific standard. (iii) Analyses using exposure or medical records. (2) Nothing in this section is intended to mandate the form, manner, or process by which an employer preserves a record as long as the information contained in the record is preserved and retrievable, except that chest X-ray films shall be preserved in their original state. (e) Access to records General. (ii) The employer may require of the requester only such information as should be readily known to the requester and which may be necessary to locate or identify the records being requested (e.g. dates and locations where the employee worked during the time period in question). (iii) Whenever an employee or designated representative requests a copy of a record, the employer shall assure that either: (A) A copy of the record is provided without cost to the employee or representative, (B) The necessary mechanical copying facilities (e.g., photocopying) are made available without cost to the employee or representative for copying the record, or (C) The record is loaned to the employee or representative for a reasonable time to enable a copy to be made. (iv) In the case of an original X-ray, the employer may restrict access to on-site examination or make other suitable arrangements for the temporary loan of the X-ray. (v) Whenever a record has been previously provided without cost to an employee or designated representative, the employer may charge reasonable, non-discriminatory administrative costs ( i.e. (A) An employer shall not charge for an initial request for a copy of new information that has been added to a record which was previously provided; and (B) An employer shall not charge for an initial request by a recognized or certified collective bargaining agent for a copy of an employee exposure record or an analysis using exposure or medical records. (vi) Nothing in this section is intended to preclude employees and collective bargaining agents from collectively bargaining to obtain access to information in addition to that available under this section. (2) Employee and designated representative access Employee exposure records. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) Requests by designated representatives for unconsented access to employee exposure records shall be in writing and shall specify with reasonable particularity: ( 1 ( 2 (ii) Employee medical records. (B) Each employer shall, upon request, assure the access of each designated representative to the employee medical records of any employee who has given the designated representative specific written consent. appendix A to this section contains a sample form which may be used to establish specific written consent for access to employee medical records. (C) Whenever access to employee medical records is requested, a physician representing the employer may recommend that the employee or designated representative: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (D) Whenever an employee requests access to his or her employee medical records, and a physician representing the employer believes that direct employee access to information contained in the records regarding a specific diagnosis of a terminal illness or a psychiatric condition could be detrimental to the employee's health, the employer may inform the employee that access will only be provided to a designated representative of the employee having specific written consent, and deny the employee's request for direct access to this information only. Where a designated representative with specific written consent requests access to information so withheld, the employer shall assure the access of the designated representative to this information, even when it is known that the designated representative will give the information to the employee. (E) A physician, nurse, or other responsible health care personnel maintaining medical records may delete from requested medical records the identity of a family member, personal friend, or fellow employee who has provided confidential information concerning an employee's health status. (iii) Analyses using exposure or medical records. (B) Whenever access is requested to an analysis which reports the contents of employee medical records by either direct identifier (name, address, social security number, payroll number, etc.) or by information which could reasonably be used under the circumstances indirectly to identify specific employees (exact age, height, weight, race, sex, date of initial employment, job title, etc.), the employer shall assure that personal identifiers are removed before access is provided. If the employer can demonstrate that removal of personal identifiers from an analysis is not feasible, access to the personally identifiable portions of the analysis need not be provided. (3) OSHA access. et seq., (ii) Whenever OSHA seeks access to personally identifiable employee medical information by presenting to the employer a written access order pursuant to 29 CFR 1913.10(d), the employer shall prominently post a copy of the written access order and its accompanying cover letter for at least fifteen (15) working days. (f) Trade secrets. (2) The employer may withhold the specific chemical identity, including the chemical name and other specific identification of a toxic substance from a disclosable record provided that: (i) The claim that the information withheld is a trade secret can be supported; (ii) All other available information on the properties and effects of the toxic substance is disclosed; (iii) The employer informs the requesting party that the specific chemical identity is being withheld as a trade secret; and (iv) The specific chemical identity is made available to health professionals, employees and designated representatives in accordance with the specific applicable provisions of this paragraph. (3) Where a treating physician or nurse determines that a medical emergency exists and the specific chemical identity of a toxic substance is necessary for emergency or first-aid treatment, the employer shall immediately disclose the specific chemical identity of a trade secret chemical to the treating physician or nurse, regardless of the existence of a written statement of need or a confidentiality agreement. The employer may require a written statement of need and confidentiality agreement, in accordance with the provisions of paragraphs (f)(4) and (f)(5), as soon as circumstances permit. (4) In non-emergency situations, an employer shall, upon request, disclose a specific chemical identity, otherwise permitted to be withheld under paragraph (f)(2) of this section, to a health professional, employee, or designated representative if: (i) The request is in writing; (ii) The request describes with reasonable detail one or more of the following occupational health needs for the information: (A) To assess the hazards of the chemicals to which employees will be exposed; (B) To conduct or assess sampling of the workplace atmosphere to determine employee exposure levels; (C) To conduct pre-assignment or periodic medical surveillance of exposed employees; (D) To provide medical treatment to exposed employees; (E) To select or assess appropriate personal protective equipment for exposed employees; (F) To design or assess engineering controls or other protective measures for exposed employees; and (G) To conduct studies to determine the health effects of exposure. (iii) The request explains in detail why the disclosure of the specific chemical identity is essential and that, in lieu thereof, the disclosure of the following information would not enable the health professional, employee or designated representative to provide the occupational health services described in paragraph (f)(4)(ii) of this section: (A) The properties and effects of the chemical; (B) Measures for controlling workers' exposure to the chemical; (C) Methods of monitoring and analyzing worker exposure to the chemical; and, (D) Methods of diagnosing and treating harmful exposures to the chemical; (iv) The request includes a description of the procedures to be used to maintain the confidentiality of the disclosed information; and, (v) The health professional, employee, or designated representative and the employer or contractor of the services of the health professional or designated representative agree in a written confidentiality agreement that the health professional, employee or designated representative will not use the trade secret information for any purpose other than the health need(s) asserted and agree not to release the information under any circumstances other than to OSHA, as provided in paragraph (f)(7) of this section, except as authorized by the terms of the agreement or by the employer. (5) The confidentiality agreement authorized by paragraph (f)(4)(iv) of this section: (i) May restrict the use of the information to the health purposes indicated in the written statement of need; (ii) May provide for appropriate legal remedies in the event of a breach of the agreement, including stipulation of a reasonable pre-estimate of likely damages; and, (iii) May not include requirements for the posting of a penalty bond. (6) Nothing in this section is meant to preclude the parties from pursuing non-contractual remedies to the extent permitted by law. (7) If the health professional, employee or designated representative receiving the trade secret information decides that there is a need to disclose it to OSHA, the employer who provided the information shall be informed by the health professional prior to, or at the same time as, such disclosure. (8) If the employer denies a written request for disclosure of a specific chemical identity, the denial must: (i) Be provided to the health professional, employee or designated representative within thirty days of the request; (ii) Be in writing; (iii) Include evidence to support the claim that the specific chemical identity is a trade secret; (iv) State the specific reasons why the request is being denied; and, (v) Explain in detail how alternative information may satisfy the specific medical or occupational health need without revealing the specific chemical identity. (9) The health professional, employee, or designated representative whose request for information is denied under paragraph (f)(4) of this section may refer the request and the written denial of the request to OSHA for consideration. (10) When a heath professional employee, or designated representative refers a denial to OSHA under paragraph (f)(9) of this section, OSHA shall consider the evidence to determine if: (i) The employer has supported the claim that the specific chemical identity is a trade secret; (ii) The health professional employee, or designated representative has supported the claim that there is a medical or occupational health need for the information; and (iii) The health professional, employee or designated representative has demonstrated adequate means to protect the confidentiality. (11)(i) If OSHA determines that the specific chemical identity requested under paragraph (f)(4) of this section is not a bona fide (ii) If an employer demonstrates to OSHA that the execution of a confidentiality agreement would not provide sufficient protection against the potential harm from the unauthorized disclosure of a trade secret specific chemical identity, the Assistant Secretary may issue such orders or impose such additional limitations or conditions upon the disclosure of the requested chemical information as may be appropriate to assure that the occupational health needs are met without an undue risk of harm to the employer. (12) Notwithstanding the existence of a trade secret claim, an employer shall, upon request, disclose to the Assistant Secretary any information which this section requires the employer to make available. Where there is a trade secret claim, such claim shall be made no later than at the time the information is provided to the Assistant Secretary so that suitable determinations of trade secret status can be made and the necessary protections can be implemented. (13) Nothing in this paragraph shall be construed as requiring the disclosure under any circumstances of process or percentage of mixture information which is trade secret. (g) Employee information. (i) The existence, location, and availability of any records covered by this section; (ii) The person responsible for maintaining and providing access to records; and (iii) Each employee's rights of access to these records. (2) Each employer shall keep a copy of this section and its appendices, and make copies readily available, upon request, to employees. The employer shall also distribute to current employees any informational materials concerning this section which are made available to the employer by the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health. (h) Transfer of records. (2) Whenever an employer is ceasing to do business and there is no successor employer to receive and maintain the records subject to this standard, the employer shall notify affected current employees of their rights of access to records at least three (3) months prior to the cessation of the employer's business. (i) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.1020—Sample Authorization Letter for the Release of Employee Medical Record Information to a Designated Representative (Non-Mandatory) I, _____ (full name of worker/patient), hereby authorize ______ (individual or organization holding the medical records) to release to ______ (individual or organization authorized to receive the medical information), the following medical information from my personal medical records: (Describe generally the information desired to be released) I give my permission for this medical information to be used for the following purpose: but I do not give permission for any other use or re-disclosure of this information. Note: Several extra lines are provided below so that you can place additional restrictions on this authorization letter if you want to. You may, however, leave these lines blank. On the other hand, you may want to (1) specify a particular expiration date for this letter (if less than one year); (2) describe medical information to be created in the future that you intend to be covered by this authorization letter; or (3) describe portions of the medical information in your records which you do not intend to be released as a result of this letter.) Full name of Employee or Legal Representative Signature of Employee or Legal Representative Date of Signature Appendix B to § 1910.1020—Availability of NIOSH Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances (RTECS) (Non-Mandatory) The final regulation, 29 CFR 1910.20, applies to all employee exposure and medical records, and analyses thereof, of employees exposed to toxic substances or harmful physical agents (paragraph (b)(2)). The term toxic substance or harmful physical agent It is appropriate to note that the final regulation does not require that employers purchase a copy of RTECS, and many employers need not consult RTECS to ascertain whether their employee exposure or medical records are subject to the rule. Employers who do not currently have the latest printed edition of the NIOSH RTECS, however, may desire to obtain a copy. The RTECS is issued in an annual printed edition as mandated by section 20(a)(6) of the Occupational Safety and Health Act (29 U.S.C. 669(a)(6)). The Introduction to the 1980 printed edition describes the RTECS as follows: “The 1980 edition of the Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances, formerly known as the Toxic Substances list, is the ninth revision prepared in compliance with the requirements of Section 20(a)(6) of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (Public Law 91-596). The original list was completed on June 28, 1971, and has been updated annually in book format. Beginning in October 1977, quarterly revisions have been provided in microfiche. This edition of the Registry contains 168,096 listings of chemical substances: 45,156 are names of different chemicals with their associated toxicity data and 122,940 are synonyms. This edition includes approximately 5,900 new chemical compounds that did not appear in the 1979 Registry. (p. xi) “The Registry's purposes are many, and it serves a variety of users. It is a single source document for basic toxicity information and for other data, such as chemical identifiers ad information necessary for the preparation of safety directives and hazard evaluations for chemical substances. The various types of toxic effects linked to literature citations provide researchers and occupational health scientists with an introduction to the toxicological literature, making their own review of the toxic hazards of a given substance easier. By presenting data on the lowest reported doses that produce effects by several routes of entry in various species, the Registry furnishes valuable information to those responsible for preparing safety data sheets for chemical substances in the workplace. Chemical and production engineers can use the Registry to identify the hazards which may be associated with chemical intermediates in the development of final products, and thus can more readily select substitutes or alternative processes which may be less hazardous. Some organizations, including health agencies and chemical companies, have included the NIOSH Registry accession numbers with the listing of chemicals in their files to reference toxicity information associated with those chemicals. By including foreign language chemical names, a start has been made toward providing rapid identification of substances produced in other countries. (p. xi) “In this edition of the Registry, the editors intend to identify “all known toxic substances” which may exist in the environment and to provide pertinent data on the toxic effects from known doses entering an organism by any route described. (p xi) “It must be reemphasized that the entry of a substance in the Registry does not automatically mean that it must be avoided. A listing does mean, however, that the substance has the documented potential of being harmful if misused, and care must be exercised to prevent tragic consequences. Thus, the Registry lists many substances that are common in everyday life and are in nearly every household in the United States. One can name a variety of such dangerous substances: prescription and non-prescription drugs; food additives; pesticide concentrates, sprays, and dusts; fungicides; herbicides; paints; glazes, dyes; bleaches and other household cleaning agents; alkalies; and various solvents and diluents. The list is extensive because chemicals have become an integral part of our existence.” The RTECS printed edition may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO), Washington, DC 20402 (202-783-3238). Some employers may desire to subscribe to the quarterly update to the RTECS which is published in a microfiche edition. An annual subscription to the quarterly microfiche may be purchased from the GPO (Order the “Microfiche Edition, Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances”). Both the printed edition and the microfiche edition of RTECS are available for review at many university and public libraries throughout the country. The latest RTECS editions may also be examined at the OSHA Technical Data Center, Room N2439—Rear, United States Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210 (202-523-9700), or at any OSHA Regional or Area Office ( See, [53 FR 38163, Sept. 29, 1988; 53 FR 49981, Dec. 13, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 55 FR 26431, June 28, 1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996. Redesignated at 61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996, as amended at 71 FR 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 76 FR 33608, June 8, 2011] § 1910.1024 Beryllium. (a) Scope and application. (2) This standard does not apply to articles, as defined in the Hazard Communication standard (HCS) (§ 1910.1200(c)), that contain beryllium and that the employer does not process. (3) This standard does not apply to materials containing less than 0.1% beryllium by weight where the employer has objective data demonstrating that employee exposure to beryllium will remain below the action level as an 8-hour TWA under any foreseeable conditions. (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Airborne exposure airborne exposure to beryllium Assistant Secretary Beryllium lymphocyte proliferation test (BeLPT) Beryllium sensitization Beryllium work area (1) During any of the operations listed in Appendix A of this standard; or (2) Where employees are, or can reasonably be expected to be, exposed to airborne beryllium at or above the action level. CBD diagnostic center Chronic beryllium disease (CBD) Confirmed positive Contaminated with beryllium beryllium-contaminated Dermal contact with beryllium (1) Soluble beryllium compounds containing beryllium in concentrations greater than or equal to 0.1 percent by weight; (2) Solutions containing beryllium in concentrations greater than or equal to 0.1 percent by weight; or (3) Visible dust, fumes, or mists containing beryllium in concentrations greater than or equal to 0.1 percent by weight. The handling of beryllium materials in non-particulate solid form that are free from visible dust containing beryllium in concentrations greater than or equal to 0.1 percent by weight is not considered dermal contact under the standard. Director Emergency High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter Objective data Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) i.e., Regulated area This standard (c) Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs) Time-weighted average (TWA) PEL. 3 (2) Short-term exposure limit (STEL). 3 (d) Exposure assessment General. (2) Performance option. (3) Scheduled monitoring option. (ii) The employer must perform initial monitoring to assess the short-term exposure from 15-minute personal breathing zone air samples measured in operations that are likely to produce airborne exposure above the STEL for each work shift, for each job classification, and in each work area. (iii) Where several employees perform the same tasks on the same shift and in the same work area, the employer may sample a representative fraction of these employees in order to meet the requirements of this paragraph (d)(3). In representative sampling, the employer must sample the employee(s) expected to have the highest airborne exposure to beryllium. (iv) If initial monitoring indicates that airborne exposure is below the action level and at or below the STEL, the employer may discontinue monitoring for those employees whose airborne exposure is represented by such monitoring. (v) Where the most recent exposure monitoring indicates that airborne exposure is at or above the action level but at or below the TWA PEL, the employer must repeat such monitoring within six months of the most recent monitoring. (vi) Where the most recent exposure monitoring indicates that airborne exposure is above the TWA PEL, the employer must repeat such monitoring within three months of the most recent 8-hour TWA exposure monitoring. (vii) Where the most recent (non-initial) exposure monitoring indicates that airborne exposure is below the action level, the employer must repeat such monitoring within six months of the most recent monitoring until two consecutive measurements, taken 7 or more days apart, are below the action level, at which time the employer may discontinue 8-hour TWA exposure monitoring for those employees whose exposure is represented by such monitoring, except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(4) of this standard. (viii) Where the most recent exposure monitoring indicates that airborne exposure is above the STEL, the employer must repeat such monitoring within three months of the most recent short-term exposure monitoring until two consecutive measurements, taken 7 or more days apart, are below the STEL, at which time the employer may discontinue short-term exposure monitoring for those employees whose exposure is represented by such monitoring, except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(4) of this standard. (4) Reassessment of exposure. (5) Methods of sample analysis. (6) Employee notification of assessment results. (ii) Whenever an exposure assessment indicates that airborne exposure is above the TWA PEL or STEL, the employer must describe in the written notification the corrective action being taken to reduce airborne exposure to or below the exposure limit(s) exceeded where feasible corrective action exists but had not been implemented when the monitoring was conducted. (7) Observation of monitoring. (ii) When observation of monitoring requires entry into an area where the use of personal protective clothing or equipment (which may include respirators) is required, the employer must provide each observer with appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment at no cost to the observer and must ensure that each observer uses such clothing and equipment. (iii) The employer must ensure that each observer follows all other applicable safety and health procedures. (e) Beryllium work areas and regulated areas Establishment. (ii) The employer must establish and maintain a regulated area wherever employees are, or can reasonably be expected to be, exposed to airborne beryllium at levels above the TWA PEL or STEL. (2) Demarcation. (ii) The employer must identify each regulated area in accordance with paragraph (m)(2) of this standard. (3) Access. (i) Persons the employer authorizes or requires to be in a regulated area to perform work duties; (ii) Persons entering a regulated area as designated representatives of employees for the purpose of exercising the right to observe exposure monitoring procedures under paragraph (d)(7) of this standard; and (iii) Persons authorized by law to be in a regulated area. (4) Provision of personal protective clothing and equipment, including respirators. (i) Respiratory protection in accordance with paragraph (g) of this standard; and (ii) Personal protective clothing and equipment in accordance with paragraph (h) of this standard. (f) Methods of compliance Written exposure control plan. (A) A list of operations and job titles reasonably expected to involve airborne exposure to or dermal contact with beryllium; (B) A list of operations and job titles reasonably expected to involve airborne exposure at or above the action level; (C) A list of operations and job titles reasonably expected to involve airborne exposure above the TWA PEL or STEL; (D) Procedures for minimizing cross-contamination, including the transfer of beryllium between surfaces, equipment, clothing, materials, and articles within beryllium work areas; (E) Procedures for keeping surfaces as free as practicable of beryllium; (F) Procedures for minimizing the migration of beryllium from beryllium work areas to other locations within or outside the workplace; (G) A list of engineering controls, work practices, and respiratory protection required by paragraph (f)(2) of this standard; (H) A list of personal protective clothing and equipment required by paragraph (h) of this standard; and (I) Procedures for removing, laundering, storing, cleaning, repairing, and disposing of beryllium-contaminated personal protective clothing and equipment, including respirators. (ii) The employer must review and evaluate the effectiveness of each written exposure control plan at least annually and update it, as necessary, when: (A) Any change in production processes, materials, equipment, personnel, work practices, or control methods results, or can reasonably be expected to result, in new or additional airborne exposure to beryllium; (B) The employer is notified that an employee is eligible for medical removal in accordance with paragraph (l)(1) of this standard, referred for evaluation at a CBD diagnostic center, or shows signs or symptoms associated with exposure to beryllium; or (C) The employer has any reason to believe that new or additional airborne exposure is occurring or will occur. (iii) The employer must make a copy of the written exposure control plan accessible to each employee who is, or can reasonably be expected to be, exposed to airborne beryllium in accordance with OSHA's Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records (Records Access) standard (§ 1910.1020(e)). (2) Engineering and work practice controls. (ii) For each operation in a beryllium work area that releases airborne beryllium, the employer must ensure that at least one of the following is in place to reduce airborne exposure: (A) Material and/or process substitution; (B) Isolation, such as ventilated partial or full enclosures; (C) Local exhaust ventilation, such as at the points of operation, material handling, and transfer; or (D) Process control, such as wet methods and automation. (iii) An employer is exempt from using the controls listed in paragraph (f)(2)(ii) of this standard to the extent that: (A) The employer can establish that such controls are not feasible; or (B) The employer can demonstrate that airborne exposure is below the action level, using no fewer than two representative personal breathing zone samples taken at least 7 days apart, for each affected operation. (3) Prohibition of rotation. (g) Respiratory protection General. (i) During periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work practice controls where airborne exposure exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed, the TWA PEL or STEL; (ii) During operations, including maintenance and repair activities and non-routine tasks, when engineering and work practice controls are not feasible and airborne exposure exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed, the TWA PEL or STEL; (iii) During operations for which an employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work practice controls when such controls are not sufficient to reduce airborne exposure to or below the TWA PEL or STEL; (iv) During emergencies; and (v) When an employee who is eligible for medical removal under paragraph (l)(1) chooses to remain in a job with airborne exposure at or above the action level, as permitted by paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this standard. (2) Respiratory protection program. (3) The employer must provide at no cost to the employee a powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) instead of a negative pressure respirator when: (i) Respiratory protection is required by this standard; (ii) An employee entitled to such respiratory protection requests a PAPR; and (iii) The PAPR provides adequate protection to the employee in accordance with paragraph (g)(2) of this standard. (h) Personal protective clothing and equipment Provision and use. (i) Where airborne exposure exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed, the TWA PEL or STEL; or (ii) Where there is a reasonable expectation of dermal contact with beryllium. (2) Removal and storage. (ii) The employer must ensure that each employee removes beryllium-contaminated personal protective clothing and equipment as specified in the written exposure control plan required by paragraph (f)(1) of this standard. (iii) The employer must ensure that each employee stores and keeps beryllium-contaminated personal protective clothing and equipment separate from street clothing and that storage facilities prevent cross-contamination as specified in the written exposure control plan required by paragraph (f)(1) of this standard. (iv) The employer must ensure that no employee removes beryllium-contaminated personal protective clothing or equipment from the workplace, except for employees authorized to do so for the purposes of laundering, cleaning, maintaining or disposing of beryllium-contaminated personal protective clothing and equipment at an appropriate location or facility away from the workplace. (v) When personal protective clothing or equipment required by this standard is removed from the workplace for laundering, cleaning, maintenance or disposal, the employer must ensure that personal protective clothing and equipment are stored and transported in sealed bags or other closed containers that are impermeable and are labeled in accordance with paragraph (m)(3) of this standard and the HCS (§ 1910.1200). (3) Cleaning and replacement. (ii) The employer must ensure that beryllium is not removed from beryllium-contaminated personal protective clothing and equipment by blowing, shaking, or any other means that disperses beryllium into the air. (iii) The employer must inform in writing the persons or the business entities who launder, clean, or repair the personal protective clothing or equipment required by this standard of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to beryllium and that the personal protective clothing and equipment must be handled in accordance with this standard. (i) Hygiene areas and practices General. (i) Provide readily accessible washing facilities in accordance with this standard and the Sanitation standard (§ 1910.141) to remove beryllium from the hands, face, and neck; and (ii) Ensure that employees who have dermal contact with beryllium wash any exposed skin at the end of the activity, process, or work shift and prior to eating, drinking, smoking, chewing tobacco or gum, applying cosmetics, or using the toilet. (2) Change rooms. (3) Showers. (A) Airborne exposure exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed, the TWA PEL or STEL; and (B) Employee's hair or body parts other than hands, face, and neck can reasonably be expected to become contaminated with beryllium. (ii) Employers required to provide showers under paragraph (i)(3)(i) of this standard must ensure that each employee showers at the end of the work shift or work activity if: (A) The employee reasonably could have had airborne exposure above the TWA PEL or STEL; and (B) The employee's hair or body parts other than hands, face, and neck could reasonably have become contaminated with beryllium. (4) Eating and drinking areas. (i) Beryllium-contaminated surfaces in eating and drinking areas are as free as practicable of beryllium; (ii) No employees enter any eating or drinking area with beryllium-contaminated personal protective clothing or equipment unless, prior to entry, it is cleaned, as necessary, to be as free as practicable of beryllium by methods that do not disperse beryllium into the air or onto an employee's body; and (iii) Eating and drinking facilities provided by the employer are in accordance with the Sanitation standard (§ 1910.141). (5) Prohibited activities. (j) Housekeeping General. (ii) The employer must ensure that all spills and emergency releases of beryllium are cleaned up promptly and in accordance with the written exposure control plan required under paragraph (f)(1) and the cleaning methods required under paragraph (j)(2) of this standard. (2) Cleaning methods. (i) The employer must ensure that surfaces in beryllium work areas and regulated areas are cleaned by HEPA-filtered vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood and level of airborne exposure. (ii) The employer must not allow dry sweeping or brushing for cleaning surfaces in beryllium work areas or regulated areas unless HEPA-filtered vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood and level of airborne exposure are not safe or effective. (iii) The employer must not allow the use of compressed air for cleaning beryllium-contaminated surfaces unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with a ventilation system designed to capture the particulates made airborne by the use of compressed air. (iv) Where employees use dry sweeping, brushing, or compressed air to clean beryllium-contaminated surfaces, the employer must provide, and ensure that each employee uses, respiratory protection and personal protective clothing and equipment in accordance with paragraphs (g) and (h) of this standard. (v) The employer must ensure that cleaning equipment is handled and maintained in a manner that minimizes the likelihood and level of airborne exposure and the re-entrainment of airborne beryllium in the workplace. (3) Disposal, recycling, and reuse. (ii) Except for intra-plant transfers, materials designated for disposal that contain at least 0.1 percent beryllium by weight or are contaminated with beryllium must be cleaned to be as free as practicable of beryllium or placed in enclosures that prevent the release of beryllium-containing particulate or solutions under normal conditions of use, storage, or transport, such as bags or containers; and (iii) Except for intra-plant transfers, materials designated for recycling or reuse that contain at least 0.1 percent beryllium by weight or are contaminated with beryllium must be cleaned to be as free as practicable of beryllium or placed in enclosures that prevent the release of beryllium-containing particulate or solutions under normal conditions of use, storage, or transport, such as bags or containers. (k) Medical surveillance General. (A) Who is or is reasonably expected to be exposed at or above the action level for more than 30 days per year; (B) Who shows signs or symptoms of CBD or other beryllium-related health effects; (C) Who is exposed to beryllium during an emergency; or (D) Whose most recent written medical opinion required by paragraph (k)(6) or (k)(7) of this standard recommends periodic medical surveillance. (ii) The employer must ensure that all medical examinations and procedures required by this standard are performed by, or under the direction of, a licensed physician. (2) Frequency. (i) Within 30 days after determining that: (A) An employee meets the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(A), unless the employee has received a medical examination, provided in accordance with this standard, within the last two years; or (B) An employee meets the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(B) of this standard. (ii) At least every two years thereafter for each employee who continues to meet the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(A), (B), or (D) of this standard. (iii) At the termination of employment for each employee who meets any of the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this standard at the time the employee's employment terminates, unless an examination has been provided in accordance with this standard during the six months prior to the date of termination. Each employee who meets the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(C) of this standard and who has not received an examination since exposure to beryllium during the emergency must be provided an examination at the time the employee's employment terminates. (iv) For an employee who meets the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(C) of this standard: (A) If that employee has not received a medical examination within the previous two years pursuant to paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this standard, then within 30 days after the employee meets the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(C) of this standard; or (B) If that employee has received a medical examination within the previous two years pursuant to paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this standard, then at least one year but no more than two years after the employee meets the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(C) of this standard. (3) Contents of examination. (ii) The employer must ensure that the employee is offered a medical examination that includes: (A) A medical and work history, with emphasis on past and present airborne exposure to or dermal contact with beryllium, smoking history, and any history of respiratory system dysfunction; (B) A physical examination with emphasis on the respiratory system; (C) A physical examination for skin rashes; (D) Pulmonary function tests, performed in accordance with the guidelines established by the American Thoracic Society including forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume in one second (FEV 1 (E) A standardized BeLPT or equivalent test, upon the first examination and at least every two years thereafter, unless the employee is confirmed positive. If the results of the BeLPT are other than normal, a follow-up BeLPT must be offered within 30 days, unless the employee has been confirmed positive. Samples must be analyzed in a laboratory certified under the College of American Pathologists/Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendments (CLIA) guidelines to perform the BeLPT. (F) A low dose computed tomography (LDCT) scan, when recommended by the PLHCP after considering the employee's history of exposure to beryllium along with other risk factors, such as smoking history, family medical history, sex, age, and presence of existing lung disease; and (G) Any other test deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. (4) Information provided to the PLHCP. (i) A description of the employee's former and current duties that relate to the employee's airborne exposure to and dermal contact with beryllium; (ii) The employee's former and current levels of airborne exposure; (iii) A description of any personal protective clothing and equipment, including respirators, used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used that personal protective clothing and equipment; and (iv) Information from records of employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the employee, currently within the control of the employer, after obtaining written consent from the employee. (5) Licensed physician's written medical report for the employee. (i) A statement indicating the results of the medical examination, including the licensed physician's opinion as to whether the employee has: (A) Any detected medical condition, such as CBD or beryllium sensitization ( i.e., (B) Any medical conditions related to airborne exposure that require further evaluation or treatment. (ii) Any recommendations on: (A) The employee's use of respirators, protective clothing, or equipment; or (B) Limitations on the employee's airborne exposure to beryllium. (iii) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD or if the licensed physician otherwise deems it appropriate, the written report must also contain a referral for an evaluation at a CBD diagnostic center. (iv) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD the written report must also contain a recommendation for continued periodic medical surveillance. (v) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD the written report must also contain a recommendation for medical removal from airborne exposure to beryllium, as described in paragraph (l) of this standard. (6) Licensed physician's written medical opinion for the employer. (A) The date of the examination; (B) A statement that the examination has met the requirements of this standard; (C) Any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators, protective clothing, or equipment; and (D) A statement that the PLHCP has explained the results of the medical examination to the employee, including any tests conducted, any medical conditions related to airborne exposure that require further evaluation or treatment, and any special provisions for use of personal protective clothing or equipment; (ii) If the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion must also contain any recommended limitations on the employee's airborne exposure to beryllium. (iii) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD or if the licensed physician otherwise deems it appropriate, and the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion must also contain a referral for an evaluation at a CBD diagnostic center. (iv) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD and the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion must also contain a recommendation for continued periodic medical surveillance. (v) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD and the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion must also contain a recommendation for medical removal from airborne exposure to beryllium, as described in paragraph (l) of this standard. (vi) The employer must ensure that each employee receives a copy of the written medical opinion described in paragraph (k)(6) of this standard within 45 days of any medical examination (including any follow-up BeLPT required under paragraph (k)(3)(ii)(E) of this standard) performed for that employee. (7) CBD diagnostic center. (A) The employer's receipt of a physician's written medical opinion to the employer that recommends referral to a CBD diagnostic center; or (B) The employee presenting to the employer a physician's written medical report indicating that the employee has been confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD, or recommending referral to a CBD diagnostic center. (ii) The employer must ensure that, as part of the evaluation, the employee is offered any tests deemed appropriate by the examining physician at the CBD diagnostic center, such as pulmonary function testing (as outlined by the American Thoracic Society criteria), bronchoalveolar lavage (BAL), and transbronchial biopsy. If any of the tests deemed appropriate by the examining physician are not available at the CBD diagnostic center, they may be performed at another location that is mutually agreed upon by the employer and the employee. (iii) The employer must ensure that the employee receives a written medical report from the CBD diagnostic center that contains all the information required in paragraph (k)(5)(i), (ii), (iv), and (v) of this standard and that the PLHCP explains the results of the examination to the employee within 30 days of the examination. (iv) The employer must obtain a written medical opinion from the CBD diagnostic center within 30 days of the medical examination. The written medical opinion must contain only the information in paragraph (k)(6)(i), as applicable, unless the employee provides written authorization to release additional information. If the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion must also contain the information from paragraphs (k)(6)(ii), (iv), and (v), if applicable. (v) The employer must ensure that each employee receives a copy of the written medical opinion from the CBD diagnostic center described in paragraph (k)(7) of this standard within 30 days of any medical examination performed for that employee. (vi) After an employee has received the initial clinical evaluation at a CBD diagnostic center described in paragraphs (k)(7)(i) and (ii) of this standard, the employee may choose to have any subsequent medical examinations for which the employee is eligible under paragraph (k) of this standard performed at a CBD diagnostic center mutually agreed upon by the employer and the employee, and the employer must provide such examinations at no cost to the employee. (l) Medical removal. (i) The employee provides the employer with: (A) A written medical report indicating a confirmed positive finding or CBD diagnosis; or (B) A written medical report recommending removal from airborne exposure to beryllium in accordance with paragraph (k)(5)(v) or (k)(7)(iii) of this standard; or (ii) The employer receives a written medical opinion recommending removal from airborne exposure to beryllium in accordance with paragraph (k)(6)(v) or (k)(7)(iv) of this standard. (2) If an employee is eligible for medical removal, the employer must provide the employee with the employee's choice of: (i) Removal as described in paragraph (l)(3) of this standard; or (ii) Remaining in a job with airborne exposure at or above the action level, provided that the employer provides, and ensures that the employee uses, respiratory protection that complies with paragraph (g) of this standard whenever airborne exposures are at or above the action level. (3) If the employee chooses removal: (i) If a comparable job is available where airborne exposures to beryllium are below the action level, and the employee is qualified for that job or can be trained within one month, the employer must remove the employee to that job. The employer must maintain for six months from the time of removal the employee's base earnings, seniority, and other rights and benefits that existed at the time of removal. (ii) If comparable work is not available, the employer must maintain the employee's base earnings, seniority, and other rights and benefits that existed at the time of removal for six months or until such time that comparable work described in paragraph (l)(3)(i) becomes available, whichever comes first. (4) The employer's obligation to provide medical removal protection benefits to a removed employee shall be reduced to the extent that the employee receives compensation for earnings lost during the period of removal from a publicly or employer-funded compensation program, or receives income from another employer made possible by virtue of the employee's removal. (m) Communication of hazards General. (ii) In classifying the hazards of beryllium, at least the following hazards must be addressed: Cancer; lung effects (CBD and acute beryllium disease); beryllium sensitization; skin sensitization; and skin, eye, and respiratory tract irritation. (iii) Employers must include beryllium in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS. Employers must ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of beryllium and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of the HCS (§ 1910.1200) and paragraph (m)(4) of this standard. (2) Warning signs. Posting. (ii) Sign specification. (B) The employer must ensure each warning sign required by paragraph (m)(2)(i) of this standard bears the following legend: DANGER REGULATED AREA BERYLLIUM MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT IN THIS AREA (3) Warning labels. DANGER CONTAINS BERYLLIUM MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AVOID CREATING DUST DO NOT GET ON SKIN (4) Employee information and training. (A) The employer must provide information and training in accordance with the HCS (§ 1910.1200(h)); (B) The employer must provide initial training to each employee by the time of initial assignment; and (C) The employer must repeat the training required under this standard annually for each employee. (ii) The employer must ensure that each employee who is, or can reasonably be expected to be, exposed to airborne beryllium can demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the following: (A) The health hazards associated with airborne exposure to and dermal contact with beryllium, including the signs and symptoms of CBD; (B) The written exposure control plan, with emphasis on the location(s) of beryllium work areas, including any regulated areas, and the specific nature of operations that could result in airborne exposure, especially airborne exposure above the TWA PEL or STEL; (C) The purpose, proper selection, fitting, proper use, and limitations of personal protective clothing and equipment, including respirators; (D) Applicable emergency procedures; (E) Measures employees can take to protect themselves from airborne exposure to and dermal contact with beryllium, including personal hygiene practices; (F) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program required by paragraph (k) of this standard including risks and benefits of each test to be offered; (G) The purpose and a description of the medical removal protection provided under paragraph (l) of this standard; (H) The contents of the standard; and (I) The employee's right of access to records under the Records Access standard (§ 1910.1020). (iii) When a workplace change (such as modification of equipment, tasks, or procedures) results in new or increased airborne exposure that exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed, either the TWA PEL or the STEL, the employer must provide additional training to those employees affected by the change in airborne exposure. (iv) Employee information. (n) Recordkeeping Air monitoring data. (ii) This record must include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement for each sample taken; (B) The task that is being monitored; (C) The sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) The number, duration, and results of samples taken; (E) The type of personal protective clothing and equipment, including respirators, worn by monitored employees at the time of monitoring; and (F) The name and job classification of each employee represented by the monitoring, indicating which employees were actually monitored. (iii) The employer must ensure that exposure records are maintained and made available in accordance with the Records Access standard (§ 1910.1020). (2) Objective data. (ii) This record must include at least the following information: (A) The data relied upon; (B) The beryllium-containing material in question; (C) The source of the objective data; (D) A description of the process, task, or activity on which the objective data were based; and (E) Other data relevant to the process, task, activity, material, or airborne exposure on which the objective data were based. (iii) The employer must ensure that objective data are maintained and made available in accordance with the Records Access standard (§ 1910.1020). (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record must include the following information about each employee: (A) Name and job classification; (B) A copy of all licensed physicians' written medical opinions for each employee; and (C) A copy of the information provided to the PLHCP as required by paragraph (k)(4) of this standard. (iii) The employer must ensure that medical records are maintained and made available in accordance with the Records Access standard (§ 1910.1020). (4) Training. (ii) This record must be maintained for three years after the completion of training. (5) Access to records. (6) Transfer of records. (o) Dates Effective date. (2) Compliance dates. (ii) Change rooms and showers required by paragraph (i) of this standard: March 11, 2019; (iii) Engineering controls required by paragraph (f) of this standard: March 10, 2020; and (iv) All other obligations of this standard: December 12, 2018. (p) Appendix. Appendix A to § 1910.1024—Operations for Establishing Beryllium Work Areas Paragraph (b) of this standard defines a beryllium work area Table A.1—Operations for Establishing Beryllium Work Areas Where Processing Materials Containing at Least 0.1 Percent Beryllium by Weight Beryllium metal alloy operations Beryllium composite operations Beryllium oxide operations Abrasive Blasting. Abrasive Blasting. Abrasive Blasting. Abrasive Processing. Abrasive Processing. Abrasive Processing. Abrasive Sawing. Abrasive Sawing. Abrasive Sawing. Annealing. Annealing. Boring. Bright Cleaning. Atomizing. Brazing (>1,100 °C). Brushing. Attritioning. Broaching with green ceramic. Buffing. Blanking. Brushing. Burnishing. Bonding. Buffing. Casting. Boring. Centerless grinding. Centerless Grinding. Breaking. Chemical Cleaning. Chemical Cleaning. Bright Cleaning. Chemical Etching. Chemical Etching. Broaching. CNC Machining. Chemical Milling. Brushing. Cold Isostatic Pressing (CIP). Dross Handling. Buffing. Crushing. Deburring (grinding). Burnishing. Cutting. Electrical Chemical Machining (ECM). Casting. Deburring (grinding). Electrical Discharge Machining (EDM). Centerless Grinding. Deburring (non-grinding). Extrusion. Chemical Cleaning. Destructive Testing. Forging. Chemical Etching Dicing. Grinding. Chemical Milling. Drilling. Heat Treating (in air). CNC Machining Dry/wet Tumbling. High Speed Machining (>10,000 rpm). Cold Isostatic Pressing. Extrusion. Hot Rolling. Cold Pilger. Filing by Hand. Lapping. Crushing. Firing of Green Ceramic. Laser Cutting. Cutting. Firing of Refractory Metallization (>1,100 °C). Laser Machining. Deburring. Grinding. Laser Scribing. Dicing. Honing. Laser Marking. Drawing. Hot Isostatic Pressing (HIP). Melting. Drilling. Lapping. Photo-Etching. Dross Handling. Laser Cutting. Pickling. Electrical Chemical Machining (ECM). Laser Machining. Point and Chamfer. Electrical Discharge Machining (EDM). Laser Scribing. Polishing. Extrusion. Laser Marking. Torch Cutting ( i.e. Filing by Hand. Machining. Tumbling. Forging. Milling. Water-jet Cutting. Grinding. Piercing. Welding. Heading. Mixing. Sanding. Heat Treating. Plasma Spray. Slab Milling. Honing. Polishing. Hot Isostatic Pressing (HIP). Powder Handling. Lapping. Powder Pressing. Laser Cutting. Reaming. Laser Machining. Sanding. Laser Scribing. Sectioning. Laser Marking. Shearing. Machining. Sintering of Green Ceramic. Melting. Sintering of Refractory Metallization (>1,100 °C). Milling. Snapping. Mixing. Spray Drying. Photo-Etching. Tape Casting. Pickling. Turning. Piercing. Water Jet Cutting. Pilger. Plasma Spray. Point and Chamfer. Polishing. Powder Handling. Powder Pressing. Pressing. Reaming. Roll Bonding. Rolling. Sanding. Sawing (tooth blade). Shearing. Sizing. Skiving. Slitting. Snapping. Sputtering. Stamping. Spray Drying. Tapping. Tensile Testing. Torch Cutting ( i.e. Trepanning. Tumbling Turning. Vapor Deposition. Water-Jet Cutting. Welding. [82 FR 2736, Jan. 9, 2017, as amended at 83 FR 19948, May 7, 2018; 83 FR 39360, Aug. 9, 2018; 85 FR 42625, July 14, 2020] § 1910.1025 Lead. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section does not apply to the construction industry or to agricultural operations covered by 29 CFR part 1928. (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Assistant Secretary Director Lead (c) Permissible exposure limit (PEL). 3 (2) If an employee is exposed to lead for more than 8 hours in any work day, the permissible exposure limit, as a time weighted average (TWA) for that day, shall be reduced according to the following formula: Maximum permissible limit (in µg/m 3 (3) When respirators are used to supplement engineering and work practice controls to comply with the PEL and all the requirements of paragraph (f) have been met, employee exposure, for the purpose of determining whether the employer has complied with the PEL, may be considered to be at the level provided by the protection factor of the respirator for those periods the respirator is worn. Those periods may be averaged with exposure levels during periods when respirators are not worn to determine the employee's daily TWA exposure. (d) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) With the exception of monitoring under paragraph (d)(3), the employer shall collect full shift (for at least 7 continuous hours) personal samples including at least one sample for each shift for each job classification in each work area. (iii) Full shift personal samples shall be representative of the monitored employee's regular, daily exposure to lead. (2) Initial determination. (3) Basis of initial determination. (A) Any information, observations, or calculations which would indicate employee exposure to lead; (B) Any previous measurements of airborne lead; and (C) Any employee complaints of symptoms which may be attributable to exposure to lead. (ii) Monitoring for the initial determination may be limited to a representative sample of the exposed employees who the employer reasonably believes are exposed to the greatest airborne concentrations of lead in the workplace. (iii) Measurements of airborne lead made in the preceding 12 months may be used to satisfy the requirement to monitor under paragraph (d)(3)(i) if the sampling and analytical methods used meet the accuracy and confidence levels of paragraph (d)(9) of this section. (4) Positive initial determination and initial monitoring. (ii) Measurements of airborne lead made in the preceding 12 months may be used to satisfy this requirement if the sampling and analytical methods used meet the accuracy and confidence levels of paragraph (d)(9) of this section. (5) Negative initial determination. (6) Frequency. (ii) If the initial determination or subsequent monitoring reveals employee exposure to be at or above the action level but below the permissible exposure limit the employer shall repeat monitoring in accordance with this paragraph at least every 6 months. The employer shall continue monitoring at the required frequency until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level at which time the employer may discontinue monitoring for that employee except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of this section. (iii) If the initial monitoring reveals that employee exposure is above the permissible exposure limit the employer shall repeat monitoring quarterly. The employer shall continue monitoring at the required frequency until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the PEL but at or above the action level at which time the employer shall repeat monitoring for that employee at the frequency specified in paragraph (d)(6)(ii), except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of this section. (7) Additional monitoring. (8) Employee notification. (ii) Whenever the results indicate that the representative employee exposure, without regard to respirators, exceeds the permissible exposure limit, the employer shall incude in the written notice a statement that the permissible exposure limit was exceeded and a description of the corrective action taken or to be taken to reduce exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit. (9) Accuracy of measurement. 3 (e) Methods of compliance Engineering and work practice controls. (ii) Where any employee is exposed to lead above the permissible exposure limit, but for 30 days or less per year, the employer shall implement engineering controls to reduce exposures to 200 µg/m 3 3 Table I Industry Compliance dates: 1 3 Lead chemicals, secondary copper smelting July 19, 1996. Nonferrous foundries July 19, 1996. 2 Brass and bronze ingot manufacture 6 years. 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 (2) Respiratory protection. 3 (3) Compliance program. (ii) Written plans for these compliance programs shall include at least the following: (A) A description of each operation in which lead is emitted; e.g. machinery used, material processed, controls in place, crew size, employee job responsibilities, operating procedures and maintenance practices; (B) A description of the specific means that will be employed to achieve compliance, including engineering plans and studies used to determine methods selected for controlling exposure to lead; (C) A report of the technology considered in meeting the permissible exposure limit; (D) Air monitoring data which documents the source of lead emissions; (E) A detailed schedule for implementation of the program, including documentation such as copies of purchase orders for equipment, construction contracts, etc.; (F) A work practice program which includes items required under paragraphs (g), (h) and (i) of this regulation; (G) An administrative control schedule required by paragraph (e)(5) of this section, if applicable; (H) Other relevant information. (iii) Written programs shall be submitted upon request to the Assistant Secretary and the Director, and shall be available at the worksite for examination and copying by the Assistant Secretary, Director, any affected employee or authorized employee representatives. (iv) Written programs must be revised and updated at least annually to reflect the current status of the program. (4) Mechanical ventilation. (ii) Recirculation of air. (5) Administrative controls. (i) Name or identification number of each affected employee; (ii) Duration and exposure levels at each job or work station where each affected employee is located; and (iii) Any other information which may be useful in assessing the reliability of administrative controls to reduce exposure to lead. (f) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement engineering or work-practice controls. (ii) Work operations for which engineering and work-practice controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the permissible exposure limit. (iii) Periods when an employee requests a respirator. (2) Respirator program. (ii) If an employee has breathing difficulty during fit testing or respirator use, the employer must provide the employee with a medical examination in accordance with paragraph (j)(3)(i)(C) of this section to determine whether or not the employee can use a respirator while performing the required duty. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (B) Provide employees with full facepiece respirators instead of half mask respirators for protection against lead aerosols that cause eye or skin irritation at the use concentrations. (C) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators. (ii) Employers must provide employees with a powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) instead of a negative pressure respirator selected according to paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this standard when an employee chooses to use a PAPR and it provides adequate protection to the employee as specified by paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this standard. (g) Protective work clothing and equipment Provision and use. (i) Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing; (ii) Gloves, hats, and shoes or disposable shoe coverlets; and (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or other appropriate protective equipment which complies with § 1910.133 of this Part. (2) Cleaning and replacement. 3 (ii) The employer shall provide for the cleaning, laundering, or disposal of protective clothing and equipment required by paragraph (g)(1) of this section. (iii) The employer shall repair or replace required protective clothing and equipment as needed to maintain their effectiveness. (iv) The employer shall assure that all protective clothing is removed at the completion of a work shift only in change rooms provided for that purpose as prescribed in paragraph (i)(2) of this section. (v) The employer shall assure that contaminated protective clothing which is to be cleaned, laundered, or disposed of, is placed in a closed container in the change-room which prevents dispersion of lead outside the container. (vi) The employer shall inform in writing any person who cleans or launders protective clothing or equipment of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to lead. (vii) Labeling of contaminated protective clothing and equipment. (A) The employer shall ensure that labels of bags or containers of contaminated protective clothing and equipment include the following information: DANGER: CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD. MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD. CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM. DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE WHEN HANDLING. DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR SHAKING. DISPOSE OF LEAD CONTAMINATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR FEDERAL REGULATIONS. (B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on bags or containers of contaminated protective clothing and equipment in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraphs (g)(2)(vii)(A) of this section: CAUTION: CLOTHING CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD. DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR SHAKING. DISPOSE OF LEAD CONTAMINATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR FEDERAL REGULATIONS. (viii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of lead from protective clothing or equipment by blowing, shaking, or any other means which disperses lead into the air. (h) Housekeeping Surfaces. (2) Cleaning floors. (ii) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only where vacuuming or other equally effective methods have been tried and found not to be effective. (3) Vacuuming. (i) Hygiene facilities and practices. (2) Change rooms. (ii) The employer shall assure that change rooms are equipped with separate storage facilities for protective work clothing and equipment and for street clothes which prevent cross-contamination. (3) Showers. (ii) The employer shall provide shower facilities in accordance with § 1910.141 (d)(3) of this part. (iii) The employer shall assure that employees who are required to shower pursuant to paragraph (i)(3)(i) do not leave the workplace wearing any clothing or equipment worn during the work shift. (4) Lunchrooms. (ii) The employer shall assure that lunchroom facilities have a temperature controlled, positive pressure, filtered air supply, and are readily accessible to employees. (iii) The employer shall assure that employees who work in areas where their airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL without regard to the use of a respirator wash their hands and face prior to eating, drinking, smoking or applying cosmetics. (iv) The employer shall assure that employees do not enter lunchroom facilities with protective work clothing or equipment unless surface lead dust has been removed by vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other cleaning method. (5) Lavatories. (j) Medical surveillance General. (ii) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician. (iii) The employer shall provide the required medical surveillance including multiple physician review under paragraph (j)(3)(iii) without cost to employees and at a reasonable time and place. (2) Biological monitoring Blood lead and ZPP level sampling and analysis. (A) At least every 6 months to each employee covered under paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this section; (B) At least every two months for each employee whose last blood sampling and analysis indicated a blood lead level at or above 40 µg/100 g of whole blood. This frequency shall continue until two consecutive blood samples and analyses indicate a blood lead level below 40 µg/100 g of whole blood; and (C) At least monthly during the removal period of each employee removed from exposure to lead due to an elevated blood lead level. (ii) Follow-up blood sampling tests. (iii) Accuracy of blood lead level sampling and analysis. (iv) Employee notification. (A) Of that employee's blood lead level; and (B) That the standard requires temporary medical removal with Medical Removal Protection benefits when an employee's blood lead level is at or above the numerical criterion for medical removal under paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section. (3) Medical examinations and consultations Frequency. (A) At least annually for each employee for whom a blood sampling test conducted at any time during the preceding 12 months indicated a blood lead level at or above 40 µg/100 g; (B) Prior to assignment for each employee being assigned for the first time to an area in which airborne concentrations of lead are at or above the action level; (C) As soon as possible, upon notification by an employee either that the employee has developed signs or symptoms commonly associated with lead intoxication, that the employee desires medical advice concerning the effects of current or past exposure to lead on the employee's ability to procreate a healthy child, or that the employee has demonstrated difficulty in breathing during a respirator fitting test or during use; and (D) As medically appropriate for each employee either removed from exposure to lead due to a risk of sustaining material impairment to health, or otherwise limited pursuant to a final medical determination. (ii) Content. (A) A detailed work history and a medical history, with particular attention to past lead exposure (occupational and non-occupational), personal habits (smoking, hygiene), and past gastrointestinal, hematologic, renal, cardiovascular, reproductive and neurological problems; (B) A thorough physical examination, with particular attention to teeth, gums, hematologic, gastrointestinal, renal, cardiovascular, and neurological systems. Pulmonary status should be evaluated if respiratory protection will be used; (C) A blood pressure measurement; (D) A blood sample and analysis which determines: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 (E) A routine urinalysis with microscopic examination; and (F) Any laboratory or other test which the examining physician deems necessary by sound medical practice. The content of medical examinations made available pursuant to paragraph (j)(3)(i) (C) through (D) of this section shall be determined by an examining physician and, if requested by an employee, shall include pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation of male fertility. (iii) Multiple physician review mechanism. ( 1 ( 2 (B) The employer shall promptly notify an employee of the right to seek a second medical opinion after each occasion that an initial physician conducts a medical examination or consultation pursuant to this section. The employer may condition its participation in, and payment for, the multiple physician review mechanism upon the employee doing the following within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the foregoing notification, or receipt of the initial physician's written opinion, whichever is later: ( 1 ( 2 (C) If the findings, determinations or recommendations of the second physician differ from those of the initial physician, then the employer and the employee shall assure that efforts are made for the two physicians to resolve any disagreement. (D) If the two physicians have been unable to quickly resolve their disagreement, then the employer and the employee through their respective physicians shall designate a third physician: ( 1 ( 2 (E) The employer shall act consistent with the findings, determinations and recommendations of the third physician, unless the employer and the employee reach an agreement which is otherwise consistent with the recommendations of at least one of the three physicians. (iv) Information provided to examining and consulting physicians. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 (B) The employer shall provide the foregoing information to a second or third physician conducting a medical examination or consultation under this section upon request either by the second or third physician, or by the employee. (v) Written medical opinions. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (B) The employer shall instruct each examining and consulting physician to: ( 1 ( 2 (vi) Alternate Physician Determination Mechanisms. (4) Chelation. (ii) If therapeutic or diagnostic chelation is to be performed by any person in paragraph (j)(4)(i), the employer shall assure that it be done under the supervision of a licensed physician in a clinical setting with thorough and appropriate medical monitoring and that the employee is notified in writing prior to its occurrence. (k) Medical Removal Protection Temporary medical removal and return of an employee Temporary removal due to elevated blood lead levels. (B) The employer shall remove an employee from work having an exposure to lead at or above the action level on each occasion that the average of the last three blood sampling tests conducted pursuant to this section (or the average of all blood sampling tests conducted over the previous six (6) months, whichever is longer) indicates that the employee's blood lead level is at or above 50 µg/100 g of whole blood; provided, however, that an employee need not be removed if the last blood sampling test indicates a blood lead level below 40 µg/100 g of whole blood. (ii) Temporary removal due to a final medical determination. (B) For the purposes of this section, the phrase “final medical determination” shall mean the outcome of the multiple physician review mechanism or alternate medical determination mechanism used pursuant to the medical surveillance provisions of this section. (C) Where a final medical determination results in any recommended special protective measures for an employee, or limitations on an employee's exposure to lead, the employer shall implement and act consistent with the recommendation. (iii) Return of the employee to former job status. ( 1 ( 2 (B) For the purposes of this section, the requirement that an employer return an employee to his or her former job status is not intended to expand upon or restrict any rights an employee has or would have had, absent temporary medical removal, to a specific job classification or position under the terms of a collective bargaining agreement. (iv) Removal of other employee special protective measure or limitations. (v) Employer options pending a final medical determination. (A) Removal. (B) Return. ( 1 ( 2 (2) Medical removal protection benefits Provision of medical removal protection benefits. (ii) Definition of medical removal protection benefits. (iii) Follow-up medical surveillance during the period of employee removal or limitation. (iv) Workers' compensation claims. (v) Other credits. (vi) Employees whose blood lead levels do not adequately decline within 18 months of removal. (A) The employer shall make available to the employee a medical examination pursuant to this section to obtain a final medical determination with respect to the employee; (B) The employer shall assure that the final medical determination obtained indicates whether or not the employee may be returned to his or her former job status, and if not, what steps should be taken to protect the employee's health; (C) Where the final medical determination has not yet been obtained, or once obtained indicates that the employee may not yet be returned to his or her former job status, the employer shall continue to provide medical removal protection benefits to the employee until either the employee is returned to former job status, or a final medical determination is made that the employee is incapable of ever safely returning to his or her former job status. (D) Where the employer acts pursuant to a final medical determination which permits the return of the employee to his or her former job status despite what would otherwise be an unacceptable blood lead level, later questions concerning removing the employee again shall be decided by a final medical determination. The employer need not automatically remove such an employee pursuant to the blood lead level removal criteria provided by this section. (vii) Voluntary Removal or Restriction of An Employee. (l) Employee information and training Training program. (ii) The employer shall train each employee who is subject to exposure to lead at or above the action level, or for whom the possibility of skin or eye irritation exists, in accordance with the requirements of this section. The employer shall institute a training program and ensure employee participation in the program. (iii) The employer shall provide initial training by 180 days from the effective date for those employees covered by paragraph (l)(1) (ii) on the standard's effective date and prior to the time of initial job assignment for those employees subsequently covered by this paragraph. (iv) The training program shall be repeated at least annually for each employee. (v) The employer shall assure that each employee is informed of the following: (A) The content of this standard and its appendices; (B) The specific nature of the operations which could result in exposure to lead above the action level; (C) The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use, and limitations of respirators; (D) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program, and the medical removal protection program including information concerning the adverse health effects associated with excessive exposure to lead (with particular attention to the adverse reproductive effects on both males and females); (E) The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job assignment; (F) The contents of any compliance plan in effect; and (G) Instructions to employees that chelating agents should not routinely be used to remove lead from their bodies and should not be used at all except under the direction of a licensed physician; (2) Access to information and training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide, upon request, all materials relating to the employee information and training program to the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (iii) In addition to the information required by paragraph (l)(1)(v), the employer shall include as part of the training program, and shall distribute to employees, any materials pertaining to the Occupational Safety and Health Act, the regulations issued pursuant to that Act, and this lead standard, which are made available to the employer by the Assistant Secretary. (m) Communication of hazards Hazard communication—general. (ii) In classifying the hazards of lead at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Reproductive/developmental toxicity; central nervous system effects; kidney effects; blood effects; and acute toxicity effects. (iii) Employers shall include lead in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of lead and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (l) of this section. (2) Signs. DANGER LEAD MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS AREA (ii) The employer shall ensure that no statement appears on or near any sign required by this paragraph (m)(2) which contradicts or detracts from the meaning of the required sign. (iii) The employer shall ensure that signs required by this paragraph (m)(2) are illuminated and cleaned as necessary so that the legend is readily visible. (iv) The employer may use signs required by other statutes, regulations, or ordinances in addition to, or in combination with, signs required by this paragraph (m)(2). (v) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (m)(2)(ii) of this section: WARNING LEAD WORK AREA POISON NO SMOKING OR EATING (n) Recordkeeping Exposure monitoring. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The date(s), number, duration, location and results of each of the samples taken, including a description of the sampling procedure used to determine representative employee exposure where applicable; (B) A description of the sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (C) The type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any; (D) Name and job classification of the employee monitored and of all other employees whose exposure the measurement is intended to represent; and (E) The environmental variables that could affect the measurement of employee exposure. (iii) The employer shall maintain these monitoring records for at least 40 years or for the duration of employment plus 20 years, whichever is longer. (2) Medical surveillance. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The name and description of the duties of the employee; (B) A copy of the physician's written opinions; (C) Results of any airborne exposure monitoring done for that employee and the representative exposure levels supplied to the physician; and (D) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to lead. (iii) The employer shall keep, or assure that the examining physician keeps, the following medical records: (A) A copy of the medical examination results including medical and work history required under paragraph (j) of this section; (B) A description of the laboratory procedures and a copy of any standards or guidelines used to interpret the test results or references to that information; (C) A copy of the results of biological monitoring. (iv) The employer shall maintain or assure that the physician maintains those medical records for at least 40 years, or for the duration of employment plus 20 years, whichever is longer. (3) Medical removals. (ii) Each record shall include: (A) The name of the employee; (B) The date on each occasion that the employee was removed from current exposure to lead as well as the corresponding date on which the employee was returned to his or her former job status; (C) A brief explanation of how each removal was or is being accomplished; and (D) A statement with respect to each removal indicating whether or not the reason for the removal was an elevated blood lead level. (iii) The employer shall maintain each medical removal record for at least the duration of an employee's employment. (4) Availability. (ii) Environmental monitoring, medical removal, and medical records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request to employees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a)-(e) and (2)-(i). Medical removal records shall be provided in the same manner as environmental monitoring records. (5) Transfer of records. (ii) The employer shall also comply with any additional requirements involving transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). (o) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (ii) Without interfering with the monitoring, observers shall be entitled to: (A) Receive an explanation of the measurement procedures; (B) Observe all steps related to the monitoring of lead performed at the place of exposure; and (C) Record the results obtained or receive copies of the results when returned by the laboratory. (p) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.1025—Substance Data Sheet for Occupational Exposure to Lead i. Substance Identification A. Substance: B. Compounds Covered by the Standard: C. Uses: D. Permissible Exposure: 3 E. Action Level: 3 ii. health hazard data A. Ways in which lead enters your body. Lead can be absorbed into your body by inhalation (breathing) and ingestion (eating). Lead (except for certain organic lead compounds not covered by the standard, such as tetraethyl lead) is not absorbed through your skin. When lead is scattered in the air as a dust, fume or mist it can be inhaled and absorbed through you lungs and upper respiratory tract. Inhalation of airborne lead is generally the most important source of occupational lead absorption. You can also absorb lead through your digestive system if lead gets into your mouth and is swallowed. If you handle food, cigarettes, chewing tobacco, or make-up which have lead on them or handle them with hands contaminated with lead, this will contribute to ingestion. A significant portion of the lead that you inhale or ingest gets into your blood stream. Once in your blood stream, lead is circulated throughout your body and stored in various organs and body tissues. Some of this lead is quickly filtered out of your body and excreted, but some remains in the blood and other tissues. As exposure to lead continues, the amount stored in your body will increase if you are absorbing more lead than your body is excreting. Even though you may not be aware of any immediate symptoms of disease, this lead stored in your tissues can be slowly causing irreversible damage, first to individual cells, then to your organs and whole body systems. B. Effects of overexposure to lead Short term (acute) overexposure. (2) Long-term (chronic) overexposure. Damage to the central nervous system in general and the brain (encephalopathy) in particular is one of the most severe forms of lead poisoning. The most severe, often fatal, form of encephalopathy may be preceded by vomiting, a feeling of dullness progressing to drowsiness and stupor, poor memory, restlessness, irritability, tremor, and convulsions. It may arise suddenly with the onset of seizures, followed by coma, and death. There is a tendency for muscular weakness to develop at the same time. This weakness may progress to paralysis often observed as a characteristic “wrist drop” or “foot drop” and is a manifestation of a disease to the nervous system called peripheral neuropathy. Chronic overexposure to lead also results in kidney disease with few, if any, symptoms appearing until extensive and most likely permanent kidney damage has occurred. Routine laboratory tests reveal the presence of this kidney disease only after about two-thirds of kidney function is lost. When overt symptoms of urinary dysfunction arise, it is often too late to correct or prevent worsening conditions, and progression to kidney dialysis or death is possible. Chronic overexposure to lead impairs the reproductive systems of both men and women. Overexposure to lead may result in decreased sex drive, impotence and sterility in men. Lead can alter the structure of sperm cells raising the risk of birth defects. There is evidence of miscarriage and stillbirth in women whose husbands were exposed to lead or who were exposed to lead themselves. Lead exposure also may result in decreased fertility, and abnormal menstrual cycles in women. The course of pregnancy may be adversely affected by exposure to lead since lead crosses the placental barrier and poses risks to developing fetuses. Children born of parents either one of whom were exposed to excess lead levels are more likely to have birth defects, mental retardation, behavioral disorders or die during the first year of childhood. Overexposure to lead also disrupts the blood-forming system resulting in decreased hemoglobin (the substance in the blood that carries oxygen to the cells) and ultimately anemia. Anemia is characterized by weakness, pallor and fatigability as a result of decreased oxygen carrying capacity in the blood. (3) Health protection goals of the standard. The measurement of your blood lead level is the most useful indicator of the amount of lead being absorbed by your body. Blood lead levels (PbB) are most often reported in units of milligrams (mg) or micrograms (µg) of lead (1 mg = 1000 µg) per 100 grams (100g), 100 milliters (100 ml) or deciliter (dl) of blood. These three units are essentially the same. Sometime PbB's are expressed in the form of mg% or µg%. This is a shorthand notation for 100g, 100 ml, or dl. PbB measurements show the amount of lead circulating in your blood stream, but do not give any information about the amount of lead stored in your various tissues. PbB measurements merely show current absorption of lead, not the effect that lead is having on your body or the effects that past lead exposure may have already caused. Past research into lead-related diseases, however, has focused heavily on associations between PbBs and various diseases. As a result, your PbB is an important indicator of the likelihood that you will gradually acquire a lead-related health impairment or disease. Once your blood lead level climbs above 40 µg/100g, your risk of disease increases. There is a wide variability of individual response to lead, thus it is difficult to say that a particular PbB in a given person will cause a particular effect. Studies have associated fatal encephalopathy with PbBs as low as 150 µg/100g. Other studies have shown other forms of diseases in some workers with PbBs well below 80 µg/100g. Your PbB is a crucial indicator of the risks to your health, but one other factor is also extremely important. This factor is the length of time you have had elevated PbBs. The longer you have an elevated PbB, the greater the risk that large quantities of lead are being gradually stored in your organs and tissues (body burden). The greater your overall body burden, the greater the chances of substantial permanent damage. The best way to prevent all forms of lead-related impairments and diseases—both short term and long term- is to maintain your PbB below 40 µg/100g. The provisions of the standard are designed with this end in mind. Your employer has prime responsibility to assure that the provisions of the standard are complied with both by the company and by individual workers. You as a worker, however, also have a responsibility to assist your employer in complying with the standard. You can play a key role in protecting your own health by learning about the lead hazards and their control, learning what the standard requires, following the standard where it governs your own actions, and seeing that your employer complies with provisions governing his actions. (4) Reporting signs and symptoms of health problems. The standard contains a procedure whereby you can obtain a second opinion by a physician of your choice if the employer selected the initial physician. Appendix B to § 1910.1025—Employee Standard Summary This appendix summarizes key provisions of the standard that you as a worker should become familiar with. i. permissible exposure limit (pel)—paragraph ( c The standards sets a permissible exposure limit (PEL) of fifty micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (50 µg/m 3 This standard recognizes that your daily exposure to lead can extend beyond a typical 8-hour workday as the result of overtime or other alterations in your work schedule. To deal with this, the standard contains a formula which reduces your permissible exposure when you are exposed more than 8 hours. For example, if you are exposed to lead for 10 hours a day, the maximum permitted average exposure would be 40 µg/m 3 ii. exposure monitoring—paragraph ( d If lead is present in the workplace where you work in any quantity, your employer is required to make an initial determination of whether the action level is exceeded for any employee. This initial determination must include instrument monitoring of the air for the presence of lead and must cover the exposure of a representative number of employees who are reasonably believed to have the highest exposure levels. If your employer has conducted appropriate air sampling for lead in the past year he may use these results. If there have been any employee complaints of symptoms which may be attributable to exposure to lead or if there is any other information or observations which would indicate employee exposure to lead, this must also be considered as part of the initial determination. This initial determination must have been completed by March 31, 1979. If this initial determination shows that a reasonable possibility exists that any 3 In carrying out this air monitoring program, your employer is not required to monitor the exposure of every employee, but he must monitor a representative number of employees and job types. Enough sampling must be done to enable each employee's exposure level to be reasonably least one full shift (at least 7 hours) air sample. In addition, these air samples must be taken under conditions which represent each employee's regular, If you are exposed to lead and air sampling is performed, your employer is required to quickly notify you in writing of air monitoring results which represent your exposure. If the results indicate your exposure exceeds the PEL (without regard to your use of respirators), then your employer must also notify you of this in writing, and provide you with a description of the corrective action that will be taken to reduce your exposure. Your exposure must be rechecked by monitoring every six months if your exposure is over the action level but below the PEL. Air monitoring must be repeated every 3 months if you are exposed over the PEL. Your employer may discontinue monitoring for you if 2 consecutive measurements, taken at least two weeks apart, are below the action level. However, whenever there is a production, process, control, or personnel change at your workplace which may result in new or additional exposure to lead, or whenever there is any other reason to suspect a change which may result in new or additional exposure to lead, your employer must perform additional monitoring. iii. methods of compliance—paragraph ( e Your employer is required to assure that no employee is exposed to lead in excess of the PEL. The standard establishes a priority of methods to be used to meet the PEL. iv. respiratory protection—paragraph ( f Your employer is required to provide and assure your use of respirators when your exposure to lead is not controlled below the PEL by other means. The employer must pay the cost of the respirator. Whenever you request one, your employer is also required to provide you a respirator even if your air exposure level does not exceed the PEL. You might desire a respirator when, for example, you have received medical advice that your lead absorption should be decreased. Or, you may intend to have children in the near future, and want to reduce the level of lead in your body to minimize adverse reproductive effects. While respirators are the least satisfactory means of controlling your exposure, they are capable of providing significant protection if properly chosen, fitted, worn, cleaned, maintained, and replaced when they stop providing adequate protection. Your employer is required to select respirators from the seven types listed in Table II of the Respiratory Protection section of the standard (§ 1910.1025(f)). Any respirator chosen must be approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under the provisions of 42 CFR part 84. This respirator selection table will enable your employer to choose a type of respirator that will give you a proper amount of protection based on your airborne lead exposure. Your employer may select a type of respirator that provides greater protection than that required by the standard; that is, one recommended for a higher concentration of lead than is present in your workplace. For example, a powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) is much more protective than a typical negative pressure respirator, and may also be more comfortable to wear. A PAPR has a filter, cartridge, or canister to clean the air, and a power source that continuously blows filtered air into your breathing zone. Your employer might make a PAPR available to you to ease the burden of having to wear a respirator for long periods of time. The standard provides that you can obtain a PAPR upon request. Your employer must also start a Respiratory Protection Program. This program must include written procedures for the proper selection, use, cleaning, storage, and maintenance of respirators. Your employer must ensure that your respirator facepiece fits properly. Proper fit of a respirator facepiece is critical to your protection from airborne lead. Obtaining a proper fit on each employee may require your employer to make available several different types of respirator masks. To ensure that your respirator fits properly and that facepiece leakage is minimal, your employer must give you either a qualitative or quantitative fit test as specified in appendix A of the Respiratory Protection standard located at 29 CFR 1910.134. You must also receive from your employer proper training in the use of respirators. Your employer is required to teach you how to wear a respirator, to know why it is needed, and to understand its limitations. The standard provides that if your respirator uses filter elements, you must be given an opportunity to change the filter elements whenever an increase in breathing resistance is detected. You also must be permitted to periodically leave your work area to wash your face and respirator facepiece whenever necessary to prevent skin irritation. If you ever have difficulty in breathing during a fit test or while using a respirator, your employer must make a medical examination available to you to determine whether you can safely wear a respirator. The result of this examination may be to give you a positive pressure respirator (which reduces breathing resistance) or to provide alternative means of protection. v. protective work clothing and equipment—paragraph ( g If you are exposed to lead above the PEL, or if you are exposed to lead compounds such as lead arsenate or lead azide which can cause skin and eye irritation, your employer must provide you with protective work clothing and equipment appropriate for the hazard. If work clothing is provided, it must be provided in a clean and dry condition at least weekly, and daily if your airborne exposure to lead is greater than 200 µg/m 3 vi. housekeeping—paragraph ( h Your employer must establish a housekeeping program sufficient to maintain all surfaces as free as practicable of accumulations of lead dust. Vacuuming is the preferred method of meeting this requirement, and the use of compressed air to clean floors and other surfaces is absolutely prohibited. Dry or wet sweeping, shoveling, or brushing may not be used except where vaccuming or other equally effective methods have been tried and do not work. Vacuums must be used and emptied in a manner which minimizes the reentry of lead into the workplace. vii. hygiene facilities and practices—paragraph ( i The standard requires that change rooms, showers, and filtered air lunchrooms be constructed and made available to workers exposed to lead above the PEL. When the PEL is exceeded the employer must assure that food and beverage is not present or consumed, tobacco products are not present or used, and cosmetics are not applied, except in these facilities. Change rooms, showers, and lunchrooms, must be used by workers exposed in excess of the PEL. After showering, no All of the facilities and hygiene practices just discussed are essential to minimize additional sources of lead absorption from inhalation or ingestion of lead that may accumulate on you, your clothes, or your possessions. Strict compliance with these provisions can virtually eliminate several sources of lead exposure which significantly contribute to excessive lead absorption. viii. medical surveillance—paragraph ( j The medical surveillance program is part of the standard's comprehensive approach to the prevention of lead-related disease. Its purpose is to supplement the main thrust of the standard which is aimed at minimizing airborne concentrations of lead and sources of ingestion. Only medical surveillance can determine if the other provisions of the standard have affectively protected you as an individual. Compliance with the standard's provision will protect most workers from the adverse effects of lead exposure, but may not be satisfactory to protect individual workers (1) who have high body burdens of lead acquired over past years, (2) who have additional uncontrolled sources of non-occupational lead exposure, (3) who exhibit unusual variations in lead absorption rates, or (4) who have specific non-work related medical conditions which could be aggravated by lead exposure (e.g., renal disease, anemia). In addition, control systems may fail, or hygiene and respirator programs may be inadequate. Periodic medical surveillance of individual workers will help detect those failures. Medical surveillance will also be important to protect your reproductive ability—regardless of whether you are a man or woman. All medical surveillance required by the standard must be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician. The employer must provide required medical surveillance without cost to employees and at a reasonable time and place. The standard's medical surveillance program has two parts-periodic biological monitoring and medical examinations. Your employer's obligation to offer you medical surveillance is triggered by the results of the air monitoring program. Medical surveillance must be made available to all employees who are exposed in excess of the action level for more than 30 days a year. The initial phase of the medical surveillance program, which includes blood lead level tests and medical examinations, must be completed for all covered employees no later than August 28, 1979. Priority within this first round of medical surveillance must be given to employees whom the employer believes to be at greatest risk from continued exposure (for example, those with the longest prior exposure to lead, or those with the highest current exposure). Thereafter, the employer must periodically make medical surveillance—both biological monitoring and medical examinations—available to all covered employees. Biological monitoring under the standard consists of blood lead level (PbB) and zinc protoporphyrin tests at least every 6 months after the initial PbB test. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) test is a very useful blood test which measures an effect of lead on your body. Thus biological monitoring under the standard is currently limited to PbB testing. If a worker's PbB exceeds 40 µg/100g the monitoring frequency must be increased from every 6 months to at least every 2 months and not reduced until two consecutive PbBs indicate a blood lead level below 40 µg/100g. Each time your PbB is determined to be over 40 µg/100g, your employer must notify you of this in writing within five working days of his receipt of the test results. The employer must also inform you that the standard requires temporary medical removal with economic protection when your PbB exceeds certain criteria. (See Discussion of Medical Removal Protection—Paragraph (k).) During the first year of the standard, this removal criterion is 80 µg/100g. Anytime your PbB exceeds 80 µg/100g your employer must make available to you a prompt follow-up PbB test to ascertain your PbB. If the two tests both exceed 80 µg/100g and you are temporarily removed, then your employer must make successive PbB tests available to you on a monthly basis during the period of your removal. Medical examinations beyond the initial one must be made available on an annual basis if your blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/100g at any time during the preceding year. The initial examination will provide information to establish a baseline to which subsequent data can be compared. An initial medical examination must also be made available (prior to assignment) for each employee being assigned for the first time to an area where the airborne concentration of lead equals or exceeds the action level. In addition, a medical examination or consultation must be made available as soon as possible if you notify your employer that you are experiencing signs or symptoms commonly associated with lead poisoning or that you have difficulty breathing while wearing a respirator or during a respirator fit test. You must also be provided a medical examination or consultation if you notify your employer that you desire medical advice concerning the effects of current or past exposure to lead on your ability to procreate a healthy child. Finally, appropriate follow-up medical examinations or consultations may also be provided for employees who have been temporarily removed from exposure under the medical removal protection provisions of the standard. (See part IX, below.) The standard specifies the minimum content of pre-assignment and annual medical examinations. The content of other types of medical examinations and consultations is left up to the sound discretion of the examining physician. Pre-assignment and annual medical examinations must include (1) a detailed work history and medical history, (2) a thorough physical examination, and (3) a series of laboratory tests designed to check your blood chemistry and your kidney function. In addition, at any time upon your request, a laboratory evaluation of male fertility will be made (microscopic examination of a sperm sample), or a pregnancy test will be given. The standard does not require that you participate in any of the medical procedures, tests, etc. which your employer is required to make available to you. Medical surveillance can, however, play a very important role in protecting your health. You are strongly encouraged, therefore, to participate in a meaningful fashion. The standard contains a multiple physician review mechanism which would give you a chance to have a physician of your choice directly participate in the medical surveillance program. If you were dissatisfied with an examination by a physician chosen by your employer, you could select a second physician to conduct an independent analysis. The two doctors would attempt to resolve any differences of opinion, and select a third physician to resolve any firm dispute. Generally your employer will choose the physician who conducts medical surveillance under the lead standard—unless you and your employer can agree on the choice of a physician or physicians. Some companies and unions have agreed in advance, for example, to use certain independent medical laboratories or panels of physicians. Any of these arrangements are acceptable so long as required medical surveillance is made available to workers. The standard requires your employer to provide certain information to a physician to aid in his or her examination of you. This information includes (1) the standard and its appendices, (2) a description of your duties as they relate to lead exposure, (3) your exposure level, (4) a description of personal protective equipment you wear, (5) prior blood lead level results, and (6) prior written medical opinions concerning you that the employer has. After a medical examination or consultation the physician must prepare a written report which must contain (1) the physician's opinion as to whether you have any medical condition which places you at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to lead, (2) any recommended special protective measures to be provided to you, (3) any blood lead level determinations, and (4) any recommended limitation on your use of respirators. This last element must include a determination of whether you can wear a powered air purifying respirator (PAPR) if you are found unable to wear a negative pressure respirator. The medical surveillance program of the lead standard may at some point in time serve to notify certain workers that they have acquired a disease or other adverse medical condition as a result of occupational lead exposure. If this is true, these workers might have legal rights to compensation from public agencies, their employers, firms that supply hazardous products to their employers, or other persons. Some states have laws, including worker compensation laws, that disallow a worker who learns of a job-related health impairment to sue, unless the worker sues within a short period of time after learning of the impairment. (This period of time may be a matter of months or years.) An attorney can be consulted about these possibilities. It should be stressed that OSHA is in no way trying to either encourage or discourage claims or lawsuits. However, since results of the standard's medical surveillance program can significantly affect the legal remedies of a worker who has acquired a job-related disease or impairment, it is proper for OSHA to make you aware of this. The medical surveillance section of the standard also contains provisions dealing with chelation. Chelation is the use of certain drugs (administered in pill form or injected into the body) to reduce the amount of lead absorbed in body tissues. Experience accumulated by the medical and scientific communities has largely confirmed the effectiveness of this type of therapy for the treatment of very severe lead poisoning. On the other hand, it has also been established that there can be a long list of extremely harmful side effects associated with the use of chelating agents. The medical community has balanced the advantages and disadvantages resulting from the use of chelating agents in various circumstances and has established when the use of these agents is acceptable. The standard includes these accepted limitations due to a history of abuse of chelation therapy by some lead companies. The most widely used chelating agents are calcium disodium EDTA, (Ca Na 2 The standard prohibits “prophylactic chelation” of any employee by any person the employer retains, supervises or controls. “Prophylactic chelation” is the routine use of chelating or similarly acting drugs to prevent routinely The standard allows the use of “therapeutic” or “diagnostic” chelation if administered under the supervision of a licensed physician in a clinical setting with thorough and appropriate medical monitoring. Therapeutic chelation responds to severe lead poisoning where there are marked symptoms. Diagnostic chelation involved giving a patient a dose of the drug then collecting all urine excreted for some period of time as an aid to the diagnosis of lead poisoning. In cases where the examining physician determines that chelation is appropriate, you must be notified in writing of this fact before such treatment. This will inform you of a potentially harmful treatment, and allow you to obtain a second opinion. ix. medical removal protection—paragraph ( k Excessive lead absorption subjects you to increased risk of disease. Medical removal protection (MRP) is a means of protecting you when, for whatever reasons, other methods, such as engineering controls, work practices, and respirators, have failed to provide the protection you need. MRP involves the temproary removal of a worker from his or her regular job to a place of significantly lower exposure without any loss of earnings, seniority, or other employment rights or benefits. The purpose of this program is to cease further lead absorption and allow your body to naturally excrete lead which has previously been absorbed. Temporary medical removal can result from an elevated blood lead level, or a medical opinion. Up to 18 months of protection is provided as a result of either form of removal. The vast majority of removed workers, however, will return to their former jobs long before this eighteen month period expires. The standard contains special provisions to deal with the extraordinary but possible case where a longterm worker's blood lead level does not adequately decline during eighteen months of removal. During the first year of the standard, if your blood lead level is 80 µg/100g or above you must be removed from any exposure where your air lead level without a respirator would be 100 µg/m 3 Removal blood lead (µg/100 g) Air lead (µg/m 3 Return blood lead (µg/100 g) After Mar. 1, 1980 70 and above 50 and above At or below 50. After Mar. 1, 1981 60 and above 30 and above At or below 40. After Mar. 1, 1983 50 and above averaged over six months 30 and above Do. You may also be removed from exposure even if your blood lead levels are below these criteria if a final medical determination indicates that you temporarily need reduced lead exposure for medical reasons. If the physician who is implementing your employers medical program makes a final written opinion recommending your removal or other special protective measures, your employer must implement the physician's recommendation. If you are removed in this manner, you may only be returned when the doctor indicates that it is safe for you to do so. The standard does not give specific instructions dealing with what an employer must do with a removed worker. Your job assignment upon removal is a matter for you, your employer and your union (if any) to work out consistent with existing procedures for job assignments. Each removal must be accomplished in a manner consistent with existing collective bargaining relationships. Your employer is given broad discretion to implement temporary removals so long as no attempt is made to override existing agreements. Similarly, a removed worker is provided no right to veto an employer's choice which satisfies the standard. In most cases, employers will likely transfer removed employees to other jobs with sufficiently low lead exposure. Alternatively, a worker's hours may be reduced so that the time weighted average exposure is reduced, or he or she may be temporarily laid off if no other alternative is feasible. In all of these situation, MRP benefits must be provided during the period of removal—i.e., you continue to receive the same earnings, seniority, and other rights and benefits you would have had if you had not been removed. Earnings includes more than just your base wage; it includes overtime, shift differentials, incentives, and other compensation you would have earned if you had not been removed. During the period of removal you must also be provided with appropriate follow-up medical surveillance. If you were removed because your blood lead level was too high, you must be provided with a monthly blood test. If a medical opinion caused your removal, you must be provided medical tests or examinations that the doctor believes to be appropriate. If you do not participate in this follow up medical surveillance, you may lose your eligibility for MRP benefits. When you are medically eligible to return to your former job, your employer must return you to your “former job status.” This means that you are entitled to the position, wages, benefits, etc., you would have had if you had not been removed. If you would still be in your old job if no removal had occurred that is where you go back. If not, you are returned consistent with whatever job assignment discretion your employer would have had if no removal had occurred. MRP only seeks to maintain your rights, not expand them or diminish them. If you are removed under MRP and you are also eligible for worker compensation or other compensation for lost wages, your employer's MRP benefits obligation is reduced by the amount that you actually The standard also covers situations where an employer voluntarily x. employee information and training—paragraph ( l Your employer is required to provide an information and training program for all employees exposed to lead above the action level or who may suffer skin or eye irritation from lead. This program must inform these employees of the specific hazards associated with their work environment, protective measures which can be taken, the danger of lead to their bodies (including their reproductive systems), and their rights under the standard. In addition your employer must make readily available to all employees, including those exposed below the action level, a copy of the standard and its appendices and must distribute to all employees any materials provided to the employer by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Your employer is required to complete this training program for all employees by August 28, 1979. After this date, all new employees must be trained prior to initial assignment to areas where there is a possibility of exposure over the action level. This training program must also be provided at least annually thereafter. xi. SIGNS—PARAGRAPH (m) The standard requires that the following warning sign be posted in the work areas when the exposure to lead exceeds the PEL: DANGER LEAD MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS AREA However, prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified above: WARNING LEAD WORK AREA POISON NO SMOKING OR EATING xii. recordkeeping—paragraph ( n Your employer is required to keep all records of exposure monitoring for airborne lead. These records must include the name and job classification of employees measured, details of the sampling and analytic techniques, the results of this sampling, and the type of respiratory protection being worn by the person sampled. Your employer is also required to keep all records of biological monitoring and medical examination results. These must include the names of the employees, the physician's written opinion, and a copy of the results of the examination. All of the above kinds of records must be kept for 40 years, or for at least 20 years after your termination of employment, whichever is longer. Recordkeeping is also required if you are temporarily removed from your job under the medical removal protection program. This record must include your name, the date of your removal and return, how the removal was or is being accomplished, and whether or not the reason for the removal was an elevated blood lead level. Your employer is required to keep each medical removal record only for as long as the duration of an employee's employment. The standard requires that if you request to see or copy environmental monitoring, blood lead level monitoring, or medical removal records, they must be made available to you or to a representative that you authorize. Your union also has access to these records. Medical records other than PbB's must also be provided upon request to you, to your physician or to any other person whom you may specifically designate. Your union does not have access to your personal medical records unless you authorize their access. xiii. observations of monitoring—paragraph ( o When air monitoring for lead is performed at your workplace as required by this standard, your employer must allow you or someone you designate to act as an observer of the monitoring. Observers are entitled to an explanation of the measurement procedure, and to record the results obtained. Since results will not normally be available at the time of the monitoring, observers are entitled to record or receive the results of the monitoring when returned by the laboratory. Your employer is required to provide the observer with any personal protective devices required to be worn by employees working in the area that is being monitored. The employer must require the observer to wear all such equipment and to comply with all other applicable safety and health procedures. xiv. for additional information A. Copies of the Standard and explanatory material may be obtained by writing or calling the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department of Labor, room N2634, 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W., Washington, DC 20210. Telephone: (202) 219-7894. 1. The standard and summary of the statement of reasons (preamble), Federal Register, 2. The full statement of reasons (preamble) Federal Register, 3. Partial Administrative Stay and Corrections to the standard, (44 FR 5446-5448) January 26, 1979. 4. Notice of the Partial Judicial Stay (44 FR 14554-14555) March 13, 1979. 5. Corrections to the preamble, Federal Register, 6. Additional correction to the preamble concerning the construction industry, Federal Register, 7. Appendices to the standard (Appendices A, B, C), Federal Register, 8. Corrections to appendices, Federal Register, 9. Revision to the standard and an additional appendix (Appendix D), Federal Register, 10. Notice of reopening of lead rulemaking for nine remand industry sectors, Federal Register, 11. Statement of reasons, Federal Register, 12. Statement of reasons, Federal Register, 13. Correction to appendix B, Federal Register, 14. Correction to appendices, Federal Register, B. Additional information about the standard, its enforcement, and your employer's compliance can be obtained from the nearest OSHA Area Office listed in your telephone directory under United States Government/Department of Labor. Appendix C to § 1910.1025—Medical Surveillance Guidelines introduction The primary purpose of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 is to assure, so far as possible, safe and healthful working conditions for every working man and woman. The occupational health standard for inorganic lead 1 1 Under this final standard in effect as of March 1, 1979, occupational exposure to inorganic lead is to be limited to 50 µg/m 3 3 The standard also provides for a program of biological monitoring and medical surveillance for all employees exposed to levels of inorganic lead above the action level of 30 µg/m 3 The purpose of this document is to outline the medical surveillance provisions of the standard for inorganic lead, and to provide further information to the physician regarding the examination and evaluation of workers exposed to inorganic lead. Section 1 provides a detailed description of the monitoring procedure including the required frequency of blood testing for exposed workers, provisions for medical removal protection (MRP), the recommended right of the employee to a second medical opinion, and notification and recordkeeping requirements of the employer. A discussion of the requirements for respirator use and respirator monitoring and OSHA's position on prophylactic chelation therapy are also included in this section. Section 2 discusses the toxic effects and clinical manifestations of lead poisoning and effects of lead intoxication on enzymatic pathways in heme synthesis. The adverse effects on both male and female reproductive capacity and on the fetus are also discussed. Section 3 outlines the recommended medical evaluation of the worker exposed to inorganic lead including details of the medical history, physical examination, and recommended laboratory tests, which are based on the toxic effects of lead as discussed in Section 2. Section 4 provides detailed information concerning the laboratory tests available for the monitoring of exposed workers. Included also is a discussion of the relative value of each test and the limitations and precautions which are necessary in the interpretation of the laboratory results. Table 1 Permissible airborne lead levels by industry (µg/m 3 1 Effective date Mar. 1, 1979 Mar. 1, 1980 Mar. 1, 1981 Mar. 1, 1982 Mar. 1, 1984 Mar. 1, 1989 (final) 1. Primary lead production 200 200 200 100 100 50 2. Secondary lead production 200 200 200 100 50 50 3. Lead-acid battery manufacturing 200 200 100 100 50 50 4. Nonferrous foundries 200 100 100 100 50 50 5. Lead pigment manufacturing 200 200 200 100 50 50 6. All other industries 200 50 50 50 50 50 1 3 i. medical surveillance and monitoring requirements for workers exposed to inorganic lead Under the occupational health standard for inorganic lead, a program of biological monitoring and medical surveillance is to be made available to all employees exposed to lead above the action level of 30 µg/m 3 Under this program, the blood lead level of all employees who are exposed to lead above the action level of 30 µg/m 3 An annual medical examination and consultation performed under the guidelines discussed in Section 3 is to be made available to each employee for whom a blood test conducted at any time during the preceding 12 months indicated a blood lead level at or above 40 µg/100 g. Also, an examination is to be given to all employees prior to their assignment to an area in which airborne lead concentrations reach or exceed the action level. In addition, a medical examination must be provided as soon as possible after notification by an employee that the employee has developed signs or symptoms commonly associated with lead intoxication, that the employee desires medical advice regarding lead exposure and the ability to procreate a healthy child, or that the employee has demonstrated difficulty in breathing during a respirator fitting test or during respirator use. An examination is also to be made available to each employee removed from exposure to lead due to a risk of sustaining material impairment to health, or otherwise limited or specially protected pursuant to medical recommendations. Results of biological monitoring or the recommendations of an examining physician may necessitate removal of an employee from further lead exposure pursuant to the standard's medical removal protection (MRP) program. The object of the MRP program is to provide temporary medical removal to workers either with substantially elevated blood lead levels or otherwise at risk of sustaining material health impairment from continued substantial exposure to lead. The following guidelines which are summarized in Table 2 were created under the standard for the temporary removal of an exposed employee and his or her subsequent return to work in an exposure area. Table 2 Effective date Mar. 1, 1979 Mar. 1, 1980 Mar. 1, 1981 Mar. 1, 1982 Mar. 1, 1983 (final) A. Blood lead level requiring employee medical removal. (Level must be confirmed with second follow-up blood lead level within two weeks of first report.) ≥80 µg/100 g ≥70µg/100 g ≥60 µg/100 g ≥60 µg/100 g ≥60µg/100 g or average of last three blood samples or all blood samples over previous 6 months (whichever is over a longer time period) is 50 µg/100 g or greater unless last blood sample is 40 µg/100 g or less. B. Frequency which employees exposed to action level of lead (30 µg/m 3 1. Last blood lead level less than 40 µg/100 g Every 6 months Every 6 months Every 6 months Every 6 months Every 6 months. 2. Last blood lead level between 40 µg/100 g and level requiring medical removal (see A above) Every 2 months Every 2 months Every 2 months Every 2 months Every 2 months. 3. Employees removed from exposure to lead because of an elevated blood lead level Every 1 month Every 1 month Every 1 month Every 1 month Every 1 month. C. Permissible airborne exposure limit for workers removed from work due to an elevated blood lead level (without regard to respirator protection) 100 µg/m 3 50 µg/m 3 30 µg/m 3 30 µg/m 3 30 µg/m 3 D. Blood lead level confirmed with a second blood analysis, at which employee may return to work. Permissible exposure without regard to respirator protection is listed by industry in Table I ·60 µg/100 g ·50 µg/100 g ·40 µg/100 g ·40 µg/100 g ·40 µg/100 g. Note: Under the standard's ultimate worker removal criteria, a worker is to be removed from any work having any eight hour TWA exposure to lead of 30 µg/m 3 During the first two years that the ultimate removal criteria are being phased in, the return criteria have been set to assure that a worker's blood lead level has substantially declined during the period of removal. From March 1, 1979 to March 1, 1980, the blood lead level requiring employee medical removal is 80 µg/100 g. Workers found to have a confirmed blood lead at this level or greater need only be removed from work having a daily 8 hour TWA exposure to lead at or above 100 µg/m 3 3 As part of the standard, the employer is required to notify in writing each employee whose blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/100 g. In addition each such employee is to be informed that the standard requires medical removal with MRP benefits, discussed below, when an employee's blood lead level exceeds the above defined limits. In addition to the above blood lead level criteria, temporary worker removal may also take place as a result of medical determinations and recommendations. Written medical opinions must be prepared after each examination pursuant to the standard. If the examining physician includes a medical finding, determination or opinion that the employee has a medical condition which places the employee at increased risk of material health impairment from exposure to lead, then the employee must be removed from exposure to lead at or above the action level. Alternatively, if the examining physician recommends special protective measures for an employee (e.g., use of a powered air purifying respirator) or recommends limitations on an employee's exposure to lead, then the employer must implement these recommendations. Recommendations may be more stringent than the specific provisions of the standard. The examining physician, therefore, is given broad flexibility to tailor special protective procedures to the needs of individual employees. This flexibility extends to the evaluation and management of pregnant workers and male and female workers who are planning to raise children. Based on the history, physical examination, and laboratory studies, the physician might recommend special protective measures or medical removal for an employee who is pregnant or who is planning to conceive a child when, in the physician's judgment, continued exposure to lead at the current job would pose a significant risk. The return of the employee to his or her former job status, or the removal of special protections or limitations, depends upon the examining physician determining that the employee is no longer at increased risk of material impairment or that special measures are no longer needed. During the period of any form of special protection or removal, the employer must maintain the worker's earnings, seniority, and other employment rights and benefits (as though the worker had not been removed) for a period of up to 18 months. This economic protection will maximize meaningful worker participation in the medical surveillance program, and is appropriate as part of the employer's overall obligation to provide a safe and healthful workplace. The provisions of MRP benefits during the employee's removal period may, however, be conditioned upon participation in medical surveillance. On rare occasions, an employee's blood lead level may not acceptably decline within 18 months of removal. This situation will arise only in unusual circumstances, thus the standard relies on an individual medical examination to determine how to protect such an employee. This medical determination is to be based on both laboratory values, including lead levels, zinc protoporphyrin levels, blood counts, and other tests felt to be warranted, as well as the physician's judgment that any symptoms or findings on physical examination are a result of lead toxicity. The medical determination may be that the employee is incapable of ever safely returning to his or her former job status. The medical determination may provide additional removal time past 18 months for some employees or specify special protective measures to be implemented. The lead standard provides for a multiple physician review in cases where the employee wishes a second opinion concerning potential lead poisoning or toxicity. If an employee wishes a second opinion, he or she can make an appointment with a physician of his or her choice. This second physician will review the findings, recommendations or determinations of the first physician and conduct any examinations, consultations or tests deemed necessary in an attempt to make a final medical determination. If the first and second physicians do not agree in their assessment they must try to resolve their differences. If they cannot reach an agreement then they must designate a third physician to resolve the dispute. The employer must provide examining and consulting physicians with the following specific information: a copy of the lead regulations and all appendices, a description of the employee's duties as related to exposure, the exposure level to lead and any other toxic substances (if applicable), a description of personal protective equipment used, blood lead levels, and all prior written medical opinions regarding the employee in the employer's possession or control. The employer must also obtain from the physician and provide the employee with a written medical opinion containing blood lead levels, the physicians's opinion as to whether the employee is at risk of material impairment to health, any recommended protective measures for the employee if further exposure is permitted, as well as any recommended limitations upon an employee's use of respirators. Employers must instruct each physician not to reveal to the employer in writing or in any other way his or her findings, laboratory results, or diagnoses which are felt to be unrelated to occupational lead exposure. They must also instruct each physician to advise the employee of any occupationally or non-occupationally related medical condition requiring further treatment or evaluation. The standard provides for the use of respirators where engineering and other primary controls have not been fully implemented. However, the use of respirator protection shall not be used in lieu of temporary medical removal due to elevated blood lead levels or findings that an employee is at risk of material health impairment. This is based on the numerous inadequacies of respirators including skin rash where the facepiece makes contact with the skin, unacceptable stress to breathing in some workers with underlying cardiopulmonary impairment, difficulty in providing adequate fit, the tendency for respirators to create additional hazards by interfering with vision, hearing, and mobility, and the difficulties of assuring the maximum effectiveness of a complicated work practice program involving respirators. Respirators do, however, serve a useful function where engineering and work practice controls are inadequate by providing supplementary, interim, or short-term protection, provided they are properly selected for the environment in which the employee will be working, properly fitted to the employee, maintained and cleaned periodically, and worn by the employee when required. In its final standard on occupational exposure to inorganic lead, OSHA has prohibited prophylactic chelation. Diagnostic and therapeutic chelation are permitted only under the supervision of a licensed physician with appropriate medical monitoring in an acceptable clinical setting. The decision to initiate chelation therapy must be made on an individual basis and take into account the severity of symptoms felt to be a result of lead toxicity along with blood lead levels, ZPP levels, and other laboratory tests as appropriate. EDTA and penicillamine which are the primary chelating agents used in the therapy of occupational lead poisoning have significant potential side effects and their use must be justified on the basis of expected benefits to the worker. Unless frank and severe symptoms are present, therapeutic chelation is not recommended given the opportunity to remove a worker from exposure and allow the body to naturally excrete accumulated lead. As a diagnostic aid, the chelation mobilization test using CA-EDTA has limited applicability. According to some investigators, the test can differentiate between lead-induced and other nephropathies. The test may also provide an estimation of the mobile fraction of the total body lead burden. Employers are required to assure that accurate records are maintained on exposure monitoring, medical surveillance, and medical removal for each employee. Exposure monitoring and medical surveillance records must be kept for 40 years or the duration of employment plus 20 years, whichever is longer, while medical removal records must be maintained for the duration of employment. All records required under the standard must be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health and the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. Employers must also make environmental and biological monitoring and medical removal records available to affected employees and to former employees or their authorized employee representatives. Employees or their specifically designated representatives have access to their entire medical surveillance records. In addition, the standard requires that the employer inform all workers exposed to lead at or above the action level of the provisions of the standard and all its appendices, the purpose and description of medical surveillance and provisions for medical removal protection if temporary removal is required. An understanding of the potential health effects of lead exposure by all exposed employees along with full understanding of their rights under the lead standard is essential for an effective monitoring program. ii. adverse health effects of inorganic lead Although the toxicity of lead has been known for 2,000 years, the knowledge of the complex relationship between lead exposure and human response is still being refined. Significant research into the toxic properties of lead continues throughout the world, and it should be anticipated that our understanding of thresholds of effects and margins of safety will be improved in future years. The provisions of the lead standard are founded on two prime medical judgments: first, the prevention of adverse health effects from exposure to lead throughout a working lifetime requires that worker blood lead levels be maintained at or below 40 µg/100 g and second, the blood lead levels of workers, male or female, who intend to parent in the near future should be maintained below 30 µg/100 g to minimize adverse reproductive health effects to the parents and developing fetus. The adverse effects of lead on reproduction are being actively researched and OSHA encourages the physician to remain abreast of recent developments in the area to best advise pregnant workers or workers planning to conceive children. The spectrum of health effects caused by lead exposure can be subdivided into five developmental stages: normal, physiological changes of uncertain significance, pathophysiological changes, overt symptoms (morbidity), and mortality. Within this process there are no sharp distinctions, but rather a continuum of effects. Boundaries between categories overlap due to the wide variation of individual responses and exposures in the working population. OSHA's development of the lead standard focused on pathophysiological changes as well as later stages of disease. 1. Heme Synthesis Inhibition. Another enzyme, ferrochelatase, is also inhibited at low blood lead levels. Inhibition of ferrochelatase leads to increased free erythrocyte protoporphyrin (FEP) in the blood which can then bind to zinc to yield zinc protoporphyrin. At a blood lead level of 50 µg/100 g or greater, nearly 100% of the population will have an increase in FEP. There is also an exponential relationship between blood lead levels greater than 40 µg/100 g and the associated ZPP level, which has led to the development of the ZPP screening test for lead exposure. While the significance of these effects is subject to debate, it is OSHA's position that these enzyme disturbances are early stages of a disease process which may eventually result in the clinical symptoms of lead poisoning. Whether or not the effects do progress to the later stages of clinical disease, disruption of these enzyme processes over a working lifetime is considered to be a material impairment of health. One of the eventual results of lead-induced inhibition of enzymes in the heme synthesis pathway is anemia which can be asymptomatic if mild but associated with a wide array of symptoms including dizziness, fatigue, and tachycardia when more severe. Studies have indicated that lead levels as low as 50 µg/100 g can be associated with a definite decreased hemoglobin, although most cases of lead-induced anemia, as well as shortened red-cell survival times, occur at lead levels exceeding 80 µg/100 g. Inhibited hemoglobin synthesis is more common in chronic cases whereas shortened erythrocyte life span is more common in acute cases. In lead-induced anemias, there is usually a reticulocytosis along with the presence of basophilic stippling, and ringed sideroblasts, although none of the above are pathognomonic for lead-induced anemia. 2. Neurological Effects. The most severe and acute form of lead poisoning which usually follows ingestion or inhalation of large amounts of lead is acute encephalopathy which may arise precipitously with the onset of intractable seizures, coma, cardiorespiratory arrest, and death within 48 hours. While there is disagreement about what exposure levels are needed to produce the earliest symptoms, most experts agree that symptoms definitely can occur at blood lead levels of 60 µg/100 g whole blood and therefore recommend a 40 µg/100 g maximum. The central nervous system effects frequently are not reversible following discontinued exposure or chelation therapy and when improvement does occur, it is almost always only partial. The peripheral neuropathy resulting from lead exposure characteristically involves only motor function with minimal sensory damage and has a marked predilection for the extensor muscles of the most active extremity. The peripheral neuropathy can occur with varying degrees of severity. The earliest and mildest form which can be detected in workers with blood lead levels as low as 50 µg/100 g is manifested by slowing of motor nerve conduction velocity often without clinical symptoms. With progression of the neuropathy there is development of painless extensor muscle weakness usually involving the extensor muscles of the fingers and hand in the most active upper extremity, followed in severe cases by wrist drop or, much less commonly, foot drop. In addition to slowing of nerve conduction, electromyographical studies in patients with blood lead levels greater than 50 µg/100 g have demonstrated a decrease in the number of acting motor unit potentials, an increase in the duration of motor unit potentials, and spontaneous pathological activity including fibrillations and fasciculations. Whether these effects occur at levels of 40 µg/100 g is undetermined. While the peripheral neuropathies can occasionally be reversed with therapy, again such recovery is not assured particularly in the more severe neuropathies and often improvement is only partial. The lack of reversibility is felt to be due in part to segmental demyelination. 3. Gastrointestinal. 4. Renal. Early kidney disease is difficult to detect. The urinalysis is normal in early lead nephropathy and the blood urea nitrogen and serum creatinine increase only when two-thirds of kidney function is lost. Measurement of creatinine clearance can often detect earlier disease as can other methods of measurement of glomerular filtration rate. An abnormal Ca-EDTA mobilization test has been used to differentiate between lead-induced and other nephropathies, but this procedure is not widely accepted. A form of Fanconi syndrome with aminoaciduria, glycosuria, and hyperphosphaturia indicating severe injury to the proximal renal tubules is occasionally seen in children. 5. Reproductive effects. Women exposed to lead may experience menstrual disturbances including dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia and amenorrhea. Following exposure to lead, women have a higher frequency of sterility, premature births, spontaneous miscarriages, and stillbirths. Germ cells can be affected by lead and cause genetic damage in the egg or sperm cells before conception and result in failure to implant, miscarriage, stillbirth, or birth defects. Infants of mothers with lead poisoning have a higher mortality during the first year and suffer from lowered birth weights, slower growth, and nervous system disorders. Lead can pass through the placental barrier and lead levels in the mother's blood are comparable to concentrations of lead in the umbilical cord at birth. Transplacental passage becomes detectable at 12-14 weeks of gestation and increases until birth. There is little direct data on damage to the fetus from exposure to lead but it is generally assumed that the fetus and newborn would be at least as susceptible to neurological damage as young children. Blood lead levels of 50-60 µg/100 g in children can cause significant neurobehavioral impairments and there is evidence of hyperactivity at blood levels as low as 25 µg/100 g. Given the overall body of literature concerning the adverse health effects of lead in children, OSHA feels that the blood lead level in children should be maintained below 30 µg/100 g with a population mean of 15 µg/100 g. Blood lead levels in the fetus and newborn likewise should not exceed 30 µg/100 g. Because of lead's ability to pass through the placental barrier and also because of the demonstrated adverse effects of lead on reproductive function in both the male and female as well as the risk of genetic damage of lead on both the ovum and sperm, OSHA recommends a 30 µg/100 g maximum permissible blood lead level in both males and females who wish to bear children. 6. Other toxic effects. iii. medical evaluation The most important principle in evaluating a worker for any occupational disease including lead poisoning is a high index of suspicion on the part of the examining physician. As discussed in Section 2, lead can affect numerous organ systems and produce a wide array of signs and symptoms, most of which are non-specific and subtle in nature at least in the early stages of disease. Unless serious concern for lead toxicity is present, many of the early clues to diagnosis may easily be overlooked. The crucial initial step in the medical evaluation is recognizing that a worker's employment can result in exposure to lead. The worker will frequently be able to define exposures to lead and lead containing materials but often will not volunteer this information unless specifically asked. In other situations the worker may not know of any exposures to lead but the suspicion might be raised on the part of the physician because of the industry or occupation of the worker. Potential occupational exposure to lead and its compounds occur in at least 120 occupations, including lead smelting, the manufacture of lead storage batteries, the manufacture of lead pigments and products containing pigments, solder manufacture, shipbuilding and ship repair, auto manufacturing, construction, and painting. Once the possibility for lead exposure is raised, the focus can then be directed toward eliciting information from the medical history, physical exam, and finally from laboratory data to evaluate the worker for potential lead toxicity. A complete and detailed work history is important in the initial evaluation. A listing of all previous employment with information on work processes, exposure to fumes or dust, known exposures to lead or other toxic substances, respiratory protection used, and previous medical surveillance should all be included in the worker's record. Where exposure to lead is suspected, information concerning on-the-job personal hygiene, smoking or eating habits in work areas, laundry procedures, and use of any protective clothing or respiratory protection equipment should be noted. A complete work history is essential in the medical evaluation of a worker with suspected lead toxicity, especially when long term effects such as neurotoxicity and nephrotoxicity are considered. The medical history is also of fundamental importance and should include a listing of all past and current medical conditions, current medications including proprietary drug intake, previous surgeries and hospitalizations, allergies, smoking history, alcohol consumption, and also non-occupational lead exposures such as hobbies (hunting, riflery). Also known childhood exposures should be elicited. Any previous history of hematological, neurological, gastrointestinal, renal, psychological, gynecological, genetic, or reproductive problems should be specifically noted. A careful and complete review must be performed to assess both recognized complaints and subtle or slowly acquired symptoms which the worker might not appreciate as being significant. The review of symptoms should include the following: General—weight loss, fatigue, decreased appetite. Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat (HEENT)—headaches, visual disturbances or decreased visual acuity, hearing deficits or tinnitus, pigmentation of the oral mucosa, or metallic taste in mouth. Cardio-pulmonary—shortness of breath, cough, chest pains, palpitations, or orthopnea. Gastrointestinal—nausea, vomiting, heartburn, abdominal pain, constipation or diarrhea. Neurologic—irritability, insomnia, weakness (fatigue), dizziness, loss of memory, confusion, hallucinations, incoordination, ataxia, decreased strength in hands or feet, disturbances in gait, difficulty in climbing stairs, or seizures. Hematologic—pallor, easy fatigability, abnormal blood loss, melena. Reproductive (male and female and spouse where relevant)—history of infertility, impotence, loss of libido, abnormal menstrual periods, history of miscarriages, stillbirths, or children with birth defects. Musculo-skeletal—muscle and joint pains. The physical examination should emphasize the neurological, gastrointestinal, and cardiovascular systems. The worker's weight and blood pressure should be recorded and the oral mucosa checked for pigmentation characteristic of a possible Burtonian or lead line on the gingiva. It should be noted, however, that the lead line may not be present even in severe lead poisoning if good oral hygiene is practiced. The presence of pallor on skin examination may indicate an anemia, which if severe might also be associated with a tachycardia. If an anemia is suspected, an active search for blood loss should be undertaken including potential blood loss through the gastrointestinal tract. A complete neurological examination should include an adequate mental status evaluation including a search for behavioral and psychological disturbances, memory testing, evaluation for irritability, insomnia, hallucinations, and mental clouding. Gait and coordination should be examined along with close observation for tremor. A detailed evaluation of peripheral nerve function including careful sensory and motor function testing is warranted. Strength testing particularly of extensor muscle groups of all extremities is of fundamental importance. Cranial nerve evaluation should also be included in the routine examination. The abdominal examination should include auscultation for bowel sounds and abdominal bruits and palpation for organomegaly, masses, and diffuse abdominal tenderness. Cardiovascular examination should evaluate possible early signs of congestive heart failure. Pulmonary status should be addressed particularly if respirator protection is contemplated. As part of the medical evaluation, the lead standard requires the following laboratory studies: 1. Blood lead level 2. Hemoglobin and hematocrit determinations, red cell indices, and examination of the peripheral blood smear to evaluate red blood cell morphology 3. Blood urea nitrogen 4. Serum creatinine 5. Routine urinalysis with microscopic examination. 6. A zinc protoporphyrin level In addition to the above, the physician is authorized to order any further laboratory or other tests which he or she deems necessary in accordance with sound medical practice. The evaluation must also include pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation of male fertility if requested by the employee. Additional tests which are probably not warranted on a routine basis but may be appropriate when blood lead and ZPP levels are equivocal include delta aminolevulinic acid and coproporphyrin concentrations in the urine, and dark-field illumination for detection of basophilic stippling in red blood cells. If an anemia is detected further studies including a careful examination of the peripheral smear, reticulocyte count, stool for occult blood, serum iron, total iron binding capacity, bilirubin, and, if appropriate, vitamin B12 and folate may be of value in attempting to identify the cause of the anemia. If a peripheral neuropathy is suspected, nerve conduction studies are warranted both for diagnosis and as a basis to monitor any therapy. If renal disease is questioned, a 24 hour urine collection for creatinine clearance, protein, and electrolytes may be indicated. Elevated uric acid levels may result from lead-induced renal disease and a serum uric acid level might be performed. An electrocardiogram and chest x-ray may be obtained as deemed appropriate. Sophisticated and highly specialized testing should not be done routinely and where indicated should be under the direction of a specialist. iv. laboratory evaluation The blood lead level at present remains the single most important test to monitor lead exposure and is the test used in the medical surveillance program under the lead standard to guide employee medical removal. The ZPP has several advantages over the blood lead level. Because of its relatively recent development and the lack of extensive data concerning its interpretation, the ZPP currently remains an ancillary test. This section will discuss the blood lead level and ZPP in detail and will outline their relative advantages and disadvantages. Other blood tests currently available to evaluate lead exposure will also be reviewed. The blood lead level is a good index of current or recent lead absorption when there is no anemia present and when the worker has not taken any chelating agents. However, blood lead levels along with urinary lead levels do not necessarily indicate the total body burden of lead and are not adequate measures of past exposure. One reason for this is that lead has a high affinity for bone and up to 90% of the body's total lead is deposited there. A very important component of the total lead body burden is lead in soft tissue (liver, kidney, and brain). This fraction of the lead body burden, the biologically active lead, is not entirely reflected by blood lead levels since it is a function of the dynamics of lead absorption, distribution, deposition in bone and excretion. Following discontinuation of exposure to lead, the excess body burden is only slowly mobilized from bone and other relatively stable body stores and excreted. Consequently, a high blood lead level may only represent recent heavy exposure to lead without a significant total body excess and likewise a low blood lead level does not exclude an elevated total body burden of lead. Also due to its correlation with recent exposures, the blood lead level may vary considerably over short time intervals. To minimize laboratory error and erroneous results due to contamination, blood specimens must be carefully collected after thorough cleaning of the skin with appropriate methods using lead-free blood containers and analyzed by a reliable laboratory. Under the standard, samples must be analyzed in laboratories which are approved by the Center for Disease Control (CDC) or which have received satisfactory grades in proficiency testing by the CDC in the previous year. Analysis is to be made using atomic absorption spectrophotometry, anodic stripping voltammetry or any method which meets the accuracy requirements set forth by the standard. The determination of lead in urine is generally considered a less reliable monitoring technique than analysis of whole blood primarily due to individual variability in urinary excretion capacity as well as the technical difficulty of obtaining accurate 24 hour urine collections. In addition, workers with renal insufficiency, whether due to lead or some other cause, may have decreased lead clearance and consequently urine lead levels may underestimate the true lead burden. Therefore, urine lead levels should not be used as a routine test. The zinc protoporphyrin test, unlike the blood lead determination, measures an adverse metabolic effect of lead and as such is a better indicator of lead toxicity than the level of blood lead itself. The level of ZPP reflects lead absorption over the preceding 3 to 4 months, and therefore is a better indicator of lead body burden. The ZPP requires more time than the blood lead to read significantly elevated levels; the return to normal after discontinuing lead exposure is also slower. Furthermore, the ZPP test is simpler, faster, and less expensive to perform and no contamination is possible. Many investigators believe it is the most reliable means of monitoring chronic lead absorption. Zinc protoporphyrin results from the inhibition of the enzyme ferrochelatase which catalyzes the insertion of an iron molecule into the protoporphyrin molecule, which then becomes heme. If iron is not inserted into the molecule then zinc, having a greater affinity for protoporphyrin, takes the place of the iron, forming ZPP. An elevation in the level of circulating ZPP may occur at blood lead levels as low as 20-30 µg/100 g in some workers. Once the blood lead level has reached 40 µg/100 g there is more marked rise in the ZPP value from its normal range of less than 100 µg/100 ml. Increases in blood lead levels beyond 40 µg/100 g are associated with exponential increases in ZPP. Whereas blood lead levels fluctuate over short time spans, ZPP levels remain relatively stable. ZPP is measured directly in red blood cells and is present for the cell's entire 120 day life-span. Therefore, the ZPP level in blood reflects the average ZPP production over the previous 3-4 months and consequently the average lead exposure during that time interval. It is recommended that a hematocrit be determined whenever a confirmed ZPP of 50 µg/100 ml whole blood is obtained to rule out a significant underlying anemia. If the ZPP is in excess of 100 µg/100 ml and not associated with abnormal elevations in blood lead levels, the laboratory should be checked to be sure that blood leads were determined using atomic absorption spectrophotometry anodic stripping voltammetry, or any method which meets the accuracy requirements set forth by the standard by a CDC approved laboratory which is experienced in lead level determinations. Repeat periodic blood lead studies should be obtained in all individuals with elevated ZPP levels to be certain that an associated elevated blood lead level has not been missed due to transient fluctuations in blood leads. ZPP has a characteristic fluorescence spectrum with a peak at 594 nm which is detectable with a hematofluorimeter. The hematofluorimeter is accurate and portable and can provide on-site, instantaneous results for workers who can be frequently tested via a finger prick. However, careful attention must be given to calibration and quality control procedures. Limited data on blood lead—ZPP correlations and the ZPP levels which are associated with the adverse health effects discussed in Section 2 are the major limitations of the test. Also it is difficult to correlate ZPP levels with environmental exposure and there is some variation of response with age and sex. Nevertheless, the ZPP promises to be an important diagnostic test for the early detection of lead toxicity and its value will increase as more data is collected regarding its relationship to other manifestations of lead poisoning. Levels of delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA) in the urine are also used as a measure of lead exposure. Increasing concentrations of ALA are believed to result from the inhibition of the enzyme delta-aminolevulinic acid dehydrase (ALA-D). Although the test is relatively easy to perform, inexpensive, and rapid, the disadvantages include variability in results, the necessity to collect a complete 24 hour urine sample which has a specific gravity greater than 1.010, and also the fact that ALA decomposes in the presence of light. The pattern of porphyrin excretion in the urine can also be helpful in identifying lead intoxication. With lead poisoning, the urine concentrations of coproporphyrins I and II, porphobilinogen and uroporphyrin I rise. The most important increase, however, is that of coproporphyrin III; levels may exceed 5,000 µg/1 in the urine in lead poisoned individuals, but its correlation with blood lead levels and ZPP are not as good as those of ALA. Increases in urinary porphyrins are not diagnostic of lead toxicity and may be seen in porphyria, some liver diseases, and in patients with high reticulocyte counts. Summary. 3 Even with adequate worker education on the adverse health effects of lead and appropriate training in work practices, personal hygiene and other control measures, the physician has a primary responsibility for evaluating potential lead toxicity in the worker. It is only through a careful and detailed medical and work history, a complete physical examination and appropriate laboratory testing that an accurate assessment can be made. Many of the adverse health effects of lead toxicity are either irreversible or only partially reversible and therefore early detection of disease is very important. This document outlines the medical monitoring program as defined by the occupational safety and health standard for inorganic lead. It reviews the adverse health effects of lead poisoning and describes the important elements of the history and physical examinations as they relate to these adverse effects. Finally, the appropriate laboratory testing for evaluating lead exposure and toxicity is presented. It is hoped that this review and discussion will give the physician a better understanding of the OSHA standard with the ultimate goal of protecting the health and well-being of the worker exposed to lead under his or her care. [43 FR 53007, Nov. 14, 1978] Editorial Note: For Federal Register www.govinfo.gov. § 1910.1026 Chromium (VI). (a) Scope. (2) Exposures that occur in the application of pesticides regulated by the Environmental Protection Agency or another Federal government agency (e.g., the treatment of wood with preservatives); (3) Exposures to portland cement; or (4) Where the employer has objective data demonstrating that a material containing chromium or a specific process, operation, or activity involving chromium cannot release dusts, fumes, or mists of chromium (VI) in concentrations at or above 0.5 µgm/m 3 (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Assistant Secretary Chromium (VI) [hexavalent chromium or Cr(VI)] Director Emergency Employee exposure High-efficiency particulate air [HEPA] filter means a filter Historical monitoring data Objective data Physician or other licensed health care professional [PLHCP] i.e. Regulated area This section (c) Permissible exposure limit (PEL). 3 (d) Exposure determination General. (2) Scheduled monitoring option. (ii) If initial monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level, the employer may discontinue monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring. (iii) If monitoring reveals employee exposures to be at or above the action level, the employer shall perform periodic monitoring at least every six months. (iv) If monitoring reveals employee exposures to be above the PEL, the employer shall perform periodic monitoring at least every three months. (v) If periodic monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level, and the result is confirmed by the result of another monitoring taken at least seven days later, the employer may discontinue the monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring. (vi) The employer shall perform additional monitoring when there has been any change in the production process, raw materials, equipment, personnel, work practices, or control methods that may result in new or additional exposures to chromium (VI), or when the employer has any reason to believe that new or additional exposures have occurred. (3) Performance-oriented option. (4) Employee notification of determination results. (ii) Whenever the exposure determination indicates that employee exposure is above the PEL, the employer shall describe in the written notification the corrective action being taken to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL. (5) Accuracy of measurement. (6) Observation of monitoring. (ii) When observation of monitoring requires entry into an area where the use of protective clothing or equipment is required, the employer shall provide the observer with clothing and equipment and shall assure that the observer uses such clothing and equipment and complies with all other applicable safety and health procedures. (e) Regulated areas Establishment. (2) Demarcation. (3) Access. (i) Persons authorized by the employer and required by work duties to be present in the regulated area; (ii) Any person entering such an area as a designated representative of employees for the purpose of exercising the right to observe monitoring procedures under paragraph (d) of this section; or (iii) Any person authorized by the Occupational Safety and Health Act or regulations issued under it to be in a regulated area. (f) Methods of compliance Engineering and work practice controls. (ii) Where painting of aircraft or large aircraft parts is performed in the aerospace industry, the employer shall use engineering and work practice controls to reduce and maintain employee exposure to chromium (VI) to or below 25 µgm/m 3 (iii) Where the employer can demonstrate that a process or task does not result in any employee exposure to chromium (VI) above the PEL for 30 or more days per year (12 consecutive months), the requirement to implement engineering and work practice controls to achieve the PEL does not apply to that process or task. (2) Prohibition of rotation. (g) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work practice controls; (ii) Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activities, for which engineering and work practice controls are not feasible; (iii) Work operations for which an employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work practice controls and such controls are not sufficient to reduce exposures to or below the PEL; (iv) Work operations where employees are exposed above the PEL for fewer than 30 days per year, and the employer has elected not to implement engineering and work practice controls to achieve the PEL; or (v) Emergencies. (2) Respiratory protection program. (h) Protective work clothing and equipment Provision and use. (2) Removal and storage. (ii) The employer shall ensure that no employee removes chromium (VI)-contaminated protective clothing or equipment from the workplace, except for those employees whose job it is to launder, clean, maintain, or dispose of such clothing or equipment. (iii) When contaminated protective clothing or equipment is removed for laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or disposal, the employer shall ensure that it is stored and transported in sealed, impermeable bags or other closed, impermeable containers. (iv) The employer shall ensure that bags or containers of contaminated protective clothing or equipment that are removed from change rooms for laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or disposal are labeled in accordance with the requirements of the Hazard Communication Standard, § 1910.1200. (3) Cleaning and replacement. (ii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of chromium (VI) from protective clothing and equipment by blowing, shaking, or any other means that disperses chromium (VI) into the air or onto an employee's body. (iii) The employer shall inform any person who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment contaminated with chromium (VI) of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to chromium (VI) and that the clothing and equipment should be laundered or cleaned in a manner that minimizes skin or eye contact with chromium (VI) and effectively prevents the release of airborne chromium (VI) in excess of the PEL. (i) Hygiene areas and practices General. (2) Change rooms. (3) Washing facilities. (ii) The employer shall ensure that employees who have skin contact with chromium (VI) wash their hands and faces at the end of the work shift and prior to eating, drinking, smoking, chewing tobacco or gum, applying cosmetics, or using the toilet. (4) Eating and drinking areas. (ii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not enter eating and drinking areas with protective work clothing or equipment unless surface chromium (VI) has been removed from the clothing and equipment by methods that do not disperse chromium (VI) into the air or onto an employee's body. (5) Prohibited activities. (j) Housekeeping General. (i) All surfaces are maintained as free as practicable of accumulations of chromium (VI). (ii) All spills and releases of chromium (VI) containing material are cleaned up promptly. (2) Cleaning methods. (ii) Dry shoveling, dry sweeping, and dry brushing may be used only where HEPA-filtered vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of exposure to chromium (VI) have been tried and found not to be effective. (iii) The employer shall not allow compressed air to be used to remove chromium (VI) from any surface unless: (A) The compressed air is used in conjunction with a ventilation system designed to capture the dust cloud created by the compressed air; or (B) No alternative method is feasible. (iv) The employer shall ensure that cleaning equipment is handled in a manner that minimizes the reentry of chromium (VI) into the workplace. (3) Disposal. (i) Waste, scrap, debris, and any other materials contaminated with chromium (VI) and consigned for disposal are collected and disposed of in sealed, impermeable bags or other closed, impermeable containers. (ii) Bags or containers of waste, scrap, debris, and any other materials contaminated with chromium (VI) that are consigned for disposal are labeled in accordance with the requirements of the Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200. (k) Medical surveillance General. (A) Who are or may be occupationally exposed to chromium (VI) at or above the action level for 30 or more days a year; (B) Experiencing signs or symptoms of the adverse health effects associated with chromium (VI) exposure; or (C) Exposed in an emergency. (ii) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures required by this section are performed by or under the supervision of a PLHCP. (2) Frequency. (i) Within 30 days after initial assignment, unless the employee has received a chromium (VI) related medical examination that meets the requirements of this paragraph within the last twelve months; (ii) Annually; (iii) Within 30 days after a PLHCP's written medical opinion recommends an additional examination; (iv) Whenever an employee shows signs or symptoms of the adverse health effects associated with chromium (VI) exposure; (v) Within 30 days after exposure during an emergency which results in an uncontrolled release of chromium (VI); or (vi) At the termination of employment, unless the last examination that satisfied the requirements of paragraph (k) of this section was less than six months prior to the date of termination. (3) Contents of examination. (i) A medical and work history, with emphasis on: Past, present, and anticipated future exposure to chromium (VI); any history of respiratory system dysfunction; any history of asthma, dermatitis, skin ulceration, or nasal septum perforation; and smoking status and history; (ii) A physical examination of the skin and respiratory tract; and (iii) Any additional tests deemed appropriate by the examining PLHCP. (4) Information provided to the PLHCP. (i) A description of the affected employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to chromium (VI); (ii) The employee's former, current, and anticipated levels of occupational exposure to chromium (VI); (iii) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used that equipment; and (iv) Information from records of employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the affected employee, currently within the control of the employer. (5) PLHCP's written medical opinion. (A) The PLHCP's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from further exposure to chromium (VI); (B) Any recommended limitations upon the employee's exposure to chromium (VI) or upon the use of personal protective equipment such as respirators; (C) A statement that the PLHCP has explained to the employee the results of the medical examination, including any medical conditions related to chromium (VI) exposure that require further evaluation or treatment, and any special provisions for use of protective clothing or equipment. (ii) The PLHCP shall not reveal to the employer specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure to chromium (VI). (iii) The employer shall provide a copy of the PLHCP's written medical opinion to the examined employee within two weeks after receiving it. (l) Communication of chromium (VI) hazards to employees Hazard communication—general (ii) In classifying the hazards of chromium (VI) at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer, eye irritation, and skin sensitization. (iii) Employers shall include chromium (VI) in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of chromium (VI) and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (l)(2) of this section. (2) Employee information and training. (A) The contents of this section; and (B) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program required by paragraph (k) of this section. (ii) The employer shall make a copy of this section readily available without cost to all affected employees. (m) Recordkeeping Air monitoring data. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement for each sample taken; (B) The operation involving exposure to chromium (VI) that is being monitored; (C) Sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) Number, duration, and the results of samples taken; (E) Type of personal protective equipment, such as respirators worn; and (F) Name and job classification of all employees represented by the monitoring, indicating which employees were actually monitored. (iii) The employer shall ensure that exposure records are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (2) Historical monitoring data. (ii) The record shall include information that reflects the following conditions: (A) The data were collected using methods that meet the accuracy requirements of paragraph (d)(5) of this section; (B) The processes and work practices that were in use when the historical monitoring data were obtained are essentially the same as those to be used during the job for which exposure is being determined; (C) The characteristics of the chromium (VI) containing material being handled when the historical monitoring data were obtained are the same as those on the job for which exposure is being determined; (D) Environmental conditions prevailing when the historical monitoring data were obtained are the same as those on the job for which exposure is being determined; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exception. (iii) The employer shall ensure that historical exposure records are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (3) Objective data. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The chromium containing material in question; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol and results of testing, or analysis of the material for the release of chromium (VI); (D) A description of the process, operation, or activity and how the data support the determination; and (E) Other data relevant to the process, operation, activity, material, or employee exposures. (iii) The employer shall ensure that objective data are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (4) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include the following information about the employee: (A) Name; (B) A copy of the PLHCP's written opinions; (C) A copy of the information provided to the PLHCP as required by paragraph (k)(4) of this section. (iii) The employer shall ensure that medical records are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (n) Dates. (2) For employers with 19 or fewer employees, all obligations of this section, except engineering controls required by paragraph (f) of this section, commence May 30, 2007. (3) Except as provided in (n)(4), for all employers, engineering controls required by paragraph (f) of this section shall be implemented no later than May 31, 2010. (4) In facilities that become parties to the settlement agreement included in appendix A, engineering controls required by paragraph (f) of this section shall be implemented no later than December 31, 2008. Appendix A to § 1910.1026 In the United States Court of Appeals for the Third Circuit Surface Finishing Industry Council et al., Petitioners, v. U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Respondent. [Docket No. 06-2272 and consolidated cases] Public Citizen Health Research Group et al., Petitioners, v. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, United States Department of Labor, Respondent. [Docket No. 06-1818] Settlement Agreement The parties to this Settlement Agreement (“Agreement”) are the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, United States Department of Labor (“OSHA”), the Surface Finishing Industry Council or its successors (“SFIC”), surface-finishing and metal-finishing facilities which have opted into this Agreement pursuant to paragraph 7 (“Company” or “Companies”), Public Citizen Health Research Group (“HRG”), and the United Steel, Paper and Forestry, Rubber, Manufacturing, Energy, Allied Industrial and Service Workers International Union (“Steelworkers”). Whereas 3 Whereas, Whereas, Now, therefore, 1. Term of this Agreement. 2. Accelerated implementation of engineering controls. 3 3. Compliance plan and monitoring. 4. Respirator use. 3 3 5. Employee information and training. 6. Enforcement. Federal Register 7. Opt-In Date for Companies to become parties to this Agreement. Federal Register 8. Effect on third parties. 3 9. OSHA inspections. 10. Scope of Agreement. 11. Effect of invalidation of the Standard. 12. Withdrawal of Petitions and Interventions. 13. Attorneys' fees. 14. Support of Agreement. Agreed to this 25th day of October, 2006. Baruch A. Fellner, Counsel for SFIC, Gibson, Dunn & Crutcher LLP, 1050 Connecticut Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20036, (202) 955-8500. Lauren S. Goodman, Counsel for OSHA, United States Department of Labor, Office of the Solicitor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210, (202) 693-5445. Scott L. Nelson, Counsel for HRG and the Steelworkers, Public Citizen Litigation Group, 1600 20th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20009, (202) 588-7724. Exhibit A Available Engineering and Work Practice Controls The Companies agree that work towards the implementation of these available engineering and work practice controls should not be delayed to accommodate their completion by December 31, 2008. The Companies are encouraged to implement from among these controls as soon as practicable. 1. Parts Transfer Practices • Minimize droplet formation. • Minimize air current flow. • Slow part speeds as feasible. 2. Plating Bath Surface Tension Management and Fume Suppression • Lower surface tension. • Fume suppressants. 3. Facility Air Disturbance Monitoring • Improvement of local exhaust ventilation (LEV) capture efficiency. 4. Technology Enhancements In Lieu of LEV Retrofitting • Eductors. 5. Different Means of Chromium Additions • Liquid Chromium. • Hydration of flakes before addition. 6. Dust Control • Better housekeeping. 7. Improvement and Maintenance of Existing LEVs • Improvement and maintenance of existing LEVs. 8. Other Controls • Other methods. Exhibit B Workplace Tasks Requiring Respirators Where PEL Is Exceeded Some well-known and relatively few, discrete tasks related to metal finishing activities result in potentially higher workplace exposures of hexavalent chromium. Where the applicable PEL for hexavalent chromium is exceeded, respirators shall be worn to conduct the following activities: (1) Hexavalent chromium chemical additions. In order to have the metal deposited onto the part, hexavalent chromium must be added to the plating tank periodically. This is a discrete activity that involves the addition of either a dry flake of hexavalent chromium chemicals or a liquid solution of hexavalent chromium into the plating tank. Respirators shall be worn during the period it takes to add the hexavalent chromium chemical to the tank. (2) Hexavalent chromium preparation and mixing. Different mixtures of hexavalent chromium chemicals are needed for different types of chromium plating processes. For example, hard chromium plating can require higher concentrations of hexavalent chromium because a thicker coating and longer plating process may be needed for the critical product quality and performance. Similarly, different types of decorative chromium plating processes may need different levels of hexavalent chromium and other chemicals such as catalysts. These mixtures can be in the form of dry flakes or liquid solutions. All of these different hexavalent chromium chemical mixtures are generally prepared by metal finishing suppliers and distributors. Some metal finishing companies may also prepare hexavalent chromium solutions from the dry flakes prior to addition to the plating tanks. Respirators shall be worn during the period it takes to prepare these hexavalent chromium mixtures and solutions whether the activity is conducted at a chemical supplier or a metal finishing company. (3) Hexavalent chromium tank cleaning. Occasionally, the tanks used for chromium plating may need to be emptied and cleaned. This process would involve the draining of the solution and then the removal of any residues in the tank. Workers cleaning out these tanks may have to enter the tank or reach into it to remove the residues. Respirators (as well as other appropriate PPE) shall be worn during the period it takes to clean the tanks and prepare them for use again. (4) Hexavalent chromium painting operations. Some metal finishing operations apply paints with higher concentrations of hexavalent chromium to a line of parts, particularly for aerospace applications when a high degree of corrosion protection is needed for critical product performance. Paints are generally applied in such operations with some type of spray mechanism or similar dispersion practice. In some instances, it may be difficult to keep workplace exposures below the PEL for such paint spraying activities. Respirators shall be worn during such spray painting operations. [71 FR 10374, Feb. 28, 2006, as amended at 71 FR 63242, Oct. 30, 2006; 73 FR 75585, Dec. 12, 2008; 75 FR 12686, Mar. 17, 2010; 77 FR 17781, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1910.1027 Cadmium. (a) Scope. (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Assistant Secretary Authorized person Director Employee exposure Final medical determination High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter Regulated area This section (c) Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL). 3 (d) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) Determinations of employee exposure shall be made from breathing zone air samples that reflect the monitored employee's regular, daily 8-hour TWA exposure to cadmium. (iii) Eight-hour TWA exposures shall be determined for each employee on the basis of one or more personal breathing zone air samples reflecting full shift exposure on each shift, for each job classification, in each work area. Where several employees perform the same job tasks, in the same job classification, on the same shift, in the same work area, and the length, duration, and level of cadmium exposures are similar, an employer may sample a representative fraction of the employees instead of all employees in order to meet this requirement. In representative sampling, the employer shall sample the employee(s) expected to have the highest cadmium exposures. (2) Specific. (ii) Where the employer has monitored after September 14, 1991, under conditions that in all important aspects closely resemble those currently prevailing and where that monitoring satisfies all other requirements of this section, including the accuracy and confidence levels of paragraph (d)(6) of this section, the employer may rely on such earlier monitoring results to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section. (iii) Where the employer has objective data, as defined in paragraph (n)(2) of this section, demonstrating that employee exposure to cadmium will not exceed the action level under the expected conditions of processing, use, or handling, the employer may rely upon such data instead of implementing initial monitoring. (3) Monitoring Frequency (periodic monitoring). (ii) If the initial monitoring or the periodic monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level and that result is confirmed by the results of another monitoring taken at least seven days later, the employer may discontinue the monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring. (4) Additional Monitoring. (5) Employee Notification of Monitoring Results. (ii) Wherever monitoring results indicate that employee exposure exceeds the PEL, the employer shall include in the written notice a statement that the PEL has been exceeded and a description of the corrective action being taken by the employer to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL. (6) Accuracy of measurement. (e) Regulated areas Establishment. (2) Demarcation. (3) Access. (4) Provision of respirators. (5) Prohibited activities. (f) Methods of compliance Compliance hierarchy. (ii) Except as specified in paragraphs (f)(1) (iii) and (iv) of this section, in industries where a separate engineering control air limit (SECAL) has been specified for particular processes (See Table 1 in this paragraph (f)(1)(ii)), the employer shall implement engineering and work practice controls to reduce and maintain employee exposure at or below the SECAL, except to the extent that the employer can demonstrate that such controls are not feasible. Table I—Separate Engineering Control Airborne Limits (SECALs) for Processes in Selected Industries Industry Process SECAL (µg/m 3 Nickel cadmium battery Plate making, plate preparation 50 All other processes 15 Zinc/Cadmium refining* Cadmium refining, casting, melting, oxide production, sinter plant 50 Pigment manufacture Calcine, crushing, milling, blending 50 All other processes 15 Stabilizers* Cadmium oxide charging, crushing, drying, blending 50 Lead smelting* Sinter plant, blast furnace, baghouse, yard area 50 Plating* Mechanical plating 15 *Processes in these industries that are not specified in this table must achieve the PEL using engineering controls and work practices as required in f(1)(i). (iii) The requirement to implement engineering and work practice controls to achieve the PEL or, where applicable, the SECAL does not apply where the employer demonstrates the following: (A) The employee is only intermittently exposed; and (B) The employee is not exposed above the PEL on 30 or more days per year (12 consecutive months). (iv) Wherever engineering and work practice controls are required and are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL or, where applicable, the SECAL, the employer nonetheless shall implement such controls to reduce exposures to the lowest levels achievable. The employer shall supplement such controls with respiratory protection that complies with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section and the PEL. (v) The employer shall not use employee rotation as a method of compliance. (2) Compliance program. (ii) Written compliance programs shall include at least the following: (A) A description of each operation in which cadmium is emitted; e.g., machinery used, material processed, controls in place, crew size, employee job responsibilities, operating procedures, and maintenance practices; (B) A description of the specific means that will be employed to achieve compliance, including engineering plans and studies used to determine methods selected for controlling exposure to cadmium, as well as, where necessary, the use of appropriate respiratory protection to achieve the PEL; (C) A report of the technology considered in meeting the PEL; (D) Air monitoring data that document the sources of cadmium emissions; (E) A detailed schedule for implementation of the program, including documentation such as copies of purchase orders for equipment, construction contracts, etc.; (F) A work practice program that includes items required under paragraphs (h), (i), and (j) of this section; (G) A written plan for emergency situations, as specified in paragraph (h) of this section; and (H) Other relevant information. (iii) The written compliance programs shall be reviewed and updated at least annually, or more often if necessary, to reflect significant changes in the employer's compliance status. (iv) Written compliance programs shall be provided upon request for examination and copying to affected employees, designated employee representatives as well as to the Assistant Secretary, and the Director. (3) Mechanical ventilation. (ii) Measurements of the system's effectiveness in controlling exposure shall be made as necessary within five working days of any change in production, process, or control that might result in a significant increase in employee exposure to cadmium. (iii) Recirculation of air. If air from exhaust ventilation is recirculated into the workplace, the system shall have a high efficiency filter and be monitored to assure effectiveness. (iv) Procedures shall be developed and implemented to minimize employee exposure to cadmium when maintenance of ventilation systems and changing of filters is being conducted. (g) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls when employee exposure levels exceed the PEL. (ii) Maintenance and repair activities, and brief or intermittent operations, for which employee exposures exceed the PEL and engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible or are not required. (iii) Activities in regulated areas specified in paragraph (e) of this section. (iv) Work operations for which the employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work-practice controls and such controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the PEL. (v) Work operations for which an employee is exposed to cadmium at or above the action level, and the employee requests a respirator. (vi) Work operations for which an employee is exposed to cadmium above the PEL and engineering controls are not required by paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section. (vii) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (ii) No employees must use a respirator if, based on their most recent medical examination, the examining physician determines that they will be unable to continue to function normally while using a respirator. If the physician determines that the employee must be limited in, or removed from, their current job because of their inability to use a respirator, the limitation or removal must be in accordance with paragraphs (l) (11) and (12) of this section. (iii) If an employee has breathing difficulty during fit testing or respirator use, the employer must provide the employee with a medical examination in accordance with paragraph (l)(6)(ii) of this section to determine if the employee can use a respirator while performing the required duties. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (B) Provide employees with full facepiece respirators when they experience eye irritation. (C) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators. (ii) The employer must provide an employee with a powered air-purifying respirator instead of a negative-pressure respirator when an employee who is entitled to a respirator chooses to use this type of respirator and such a respirator provides adequate protection to the employee. (h) Emergency situations. (i) Protective work clothing and equipment Provision and use. (i) Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing; (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and boots or foot coverings; and (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or other appropriate protective equipment that complies with 29 CFR 1910.133. (2) Removal and storage. (ii) The employer shall assure that no employee takes cadmium-contaminated protective clothing or equipment from the workplace, except for employees authorized to do so for purposes of laundering, cleaning, maintaining, or disposing of cadmium contaminated protective clothing and equipment at an appropriate location or facility away from the workplace. (iii) The employer shall assure that contaminated protective clothing and equipment, when removed for laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or disposal, is placed and stored in sealed, impermeable bags or other closed, impermeable containers that are designed to prevent dispersion of cadmium dust. (iv) The employer shall assure that bags or containers of contaminated protective clothing and equipment that are to be taken out of the change rooms or the workplace for laundering, cleaning, maintenance or disposal shall bear labels in accordance with paragraph (m)(3) of this section. (3) Cleaning, replacement, and disposal. (ii) The employer also is responsible for repairing or replacing required protective clothing and equipment as needed to maintain its effectiveness. When rips or tears are detected while an employee is working they shall be immediately mended, or the worksuit shall be immediately replaced. (iii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of cadmium from protective clothing and equipment by blowing, shaking, or any other means that disperses cadmium into the air. (iv) The employer shall assure that any laundering of contaminated clothing or cleaning of contaminated equipment in the workplace is done in a manner that prevents the release of airborne cadmium in excess of the permissible exposure limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section. (v) The employer shall inform any person who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment contaminated with cadmium of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to cadmium and that the clothing and equipment should be laundered or cleaned in a manner to effectively prevent the release of airborne cadmium in excess of the PEL. (j) Hygiene areas and practices General. (2) Change rooms. (3) Showers and handwashing facilities. (ii) The employer shall assure that employees whose airborne exposure to cadmium is above the PEL wash their hands and faces prior to eating, drinking, smoking, chewing tobacco or gum, or applying cosmetics. (4) Lunchroom facilities. 3 (ii) The employer shall assure that employees do not enter lunchroom facilities with protective work clothing or equipment unless surface cadmium has been removed from the clothing and equipment by HEPA vacuuming or some other method that removes cadmium dust without dispersing it. (k) Housekeeping. (2) All spills and sudden releases of material containing cadmium shall be cleaned up as soon as possible. (3) Surfaces contaminated with cadmium shall, wherever possible, be cleaned by vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of cadmium becoming airborne. (4) HEPA-filtered vacuuming equipment or equally effective filtration methods shall be used for vacuuming. The equipment shall be used and emptied in a manner that minimizes the reentry of cadmium into the workplace. (5) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only where vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of cadmium becoming airborne have been tried and found not to be effective. (6) Compressed air shall not be used to remove cadmium from any surface unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with a ventilation system designed to capture the dust cloud created by the compressed air. (7) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers, personal protective equipment, and clothing contaminated with cadmium and consigned for disposal shall be collected and disposed of in sealed impermeable bags or other closed, impermeable containers. These bags and containers shall be labeled in accordance with paragraph (m) of this section. (l) Medical surveillance General Scope. (B) Previously exposed—The employer shall also institute a medical surveillance program for all employees who prior to the effective date of this section might previously have been exposed to cadmium at or above the action level by the employer, unless the employer demonstrates that the employee did not prior to the effective date of this section work for the employer in jobs with exposure to cadmium for an aggregated total of more than 60 months. (ii) To determine an employee's fitness for using a respirator, the employer shall provide the limited medical examination specified in paragraph (l)(6) of this section. (iii) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures required by this standard are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician, who has read and is familiar with the health effects section of appendix A to this section, the regulatory text of this section, the protocol for sample handling and laboratory selection in appendix F to this section, and the questionnaire of appendix D to this section. These examinations and procedures shall be provided without cost to the employee and at a time and place that is reasonable and convenient to employees. (iv) The employer shall assure that the collecting and handling of biological samples of cadmium in urine (CdU), cadmium in blood (CdB), and beta-2 microglobulin in urine (β 2 2 (2) Initial examination. (ii) The initial (preplacement) medical examination shall include: (A) A detailed medical and work history, with emphasis on: Past, present, and anticipated future exposure to cadmium; any history of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, reproductive, and/or musculo-skeletal system dysfunction; current usage of medication with potential nephrotoxic side-effects; and smoking history and current status; and (B) Biological monitoring that includes the following tests: ( 1 ( 2 2 ( 3 (iii) Recent Examination: An initial examination is not required to be provided if adequate records show that the employee has been examined in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this section within the past 12 months. In that case, such records shall be maintained as part of the employee's medical record and the prior exam shall be treated as if it were an initial examination for the purposes of paragraphs (l)(3) and (4) of this section. (3) Actions triggered by initial biological monitoring: 2 (A) For currently exposed employees, who are subject to medical surveillance under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(A) of this section, the employer shall provide the minimum level of periodic medical surveillance in accordance with the requirements in paragraph (l)(4)(i) of this section; and (B) For previously exposed employees, who are subject to medical surveillance under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(B) of this section, the employer shall provide biological monitoring for CdU, β 2 (ii) For all employees who are subject to medical surveillance under paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the results of the initial biological monitoring tests show the level of CdU to exceed 3 µg/g Cr, the level of β 2 (A) Within two weeks after receipt of biological monitoring results, reassess the employee's occupational exposure to cadmium as follows: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 (B) Within 30 days after the exposure reassessment, specified in paragraph (l)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, take reasonable steps to correct any deficiencies found in the reassessment that may be responsible for the employee's excess exposure to cadmium; and, (C) Within 90 days after receipt of biological monitoring results, provide a full medical examination to the employee in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. After completing the medical examination, the examining physician shall determine in a written medical opinion whether to medically remove the employee. If the physician determines that medical removal is not necessary, then until the employee's CdU level falls to or below 3 µg/g Cr, β 2 ( 1 ( 2 (iii) For all employees who are subject to medical surveillance under paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the results of the initial biological monitoring tests show the level of CdU to be in excess of 15 µg/g Cr, or the level of CdB to be in excess of 15 µg/lwb, or the level of β 2 2 2 (A) Periodically reassess the employee's occupational exposure to cadmium; (B) Provide biological monitoring in accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section on a quarterly basis; and (C) Provide semiannual medical examinations in accordance with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. (iv) For all employees to whom medical surveillance is provided, beginning on January 1, 1999, and in lieu of paragraphs (l)(3)(i)-(iii) of this section: (A) If the results of the initial biological monitoring tests show the employee's CdU level to be at or below 3 µg/g Cr, β 2 (B) If the results of the initial biological monitoring tests show the level of CdU to exceed 3 µg/g Cr, the level of β 2 (C) If the results of the initial biological monitoring tests show the level of CdU to be in excess of 7 µg/g Cr, or the level of CdB to be in excess of 10 µg/lwb, or the level of β 2 2 2 (4) Periodic medical surveillance. (ii) The periodic medical examination shall include: (A) A detailed medical and work history, or update thereof, with emphasis on: Past, present and anticipated future exposure to cadmium; smoking history and current status; reproductive history; current use of medications with potential nephrotoxic side-effects; any history of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, and/or musculo-skeletal system dysfunction; and as part of the medical and work history, for employees who wear respirators, questions 3-11 and 25-32 in appendix D to this section; (B) A complete physical examination with emphasis on: Blood pressure, the respiratory system, and the urinary system; (C) A 14 inch by 17 inch or other reasonably-sized standard film or digital posterior-anterior chest X-ray (after the initial X-ray, the frequency of chest X-rays is to be determined by the examining physician); (D) Pulmonary function tests, including forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume at 1 second (FEV1); (E) Biological monitoring, as required in paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section; (F) Blood analysis, in addition to the analysis required under paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including blood urea nitrogen, complete blood count, and serum creatinine; (G) Urinalysis, in addition to the analysis required under paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including the determination of albumin, glucose, and total and low molecular weight proteins; (H) For males over 40 years old, prostate palpation, or other at least as effective diagnostic test(s); and (I) Any additional tests deemed appropriate by the examining physician. (iii) Periodic biological monitoring shall be provided in accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section. (iv) If the results of periodic biological monitoring or the results of biological monitoring performed as part of the periodic medical examination show the level of the employee's CdU, β 2 (v) For previously exposed employees under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(B) of this section: (A) If the employee's levels of CdU did not exceed 3 µg/g Cr, CdB did not exceed 5 µg/lwb, and β 2 (B) If the initial biological monitoring results for CdU, CdB, or β 2 2 2 (C) However, if the results of the follow-up tests specified in paragraph (l)(4)(v)(A) or (B) of this section indicate that the level of the employee's CdU, β 2 (vi) A routine, biennial medical examination is not required to be provided in accordance with paragraphs (l)(3)(i) and (l)(4) of this section if adequate medical records show that the employee has been examined in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section within the past 12 months. In that case, such records shall be maintained by the employer as part of the employee's medical record, and the next routine, periodic medical examination shall be made available to the employee within two years of the previous examination. (5) Actions triggered by medical examinations. (A) Periodically reassess: The employee's work practices and personal hygiene; the employee's respirator use, if any; the employee's smoking history and status; the respiratory protection program; the hygiene facilities; and the maintenance and effectiveness of the relevant engineering controls; (B) Within 30 days after the reassessment, take all reasonable steps to correct the deficiencies found in the reassessment that may be responsible for the employee's excess exposure to cadmium; (C) Provide semiannual medical reexaminations to evaluate the abnormal clinical sign(s) of cadmium toxicity until the results are normal or the employee is medically removed; and (D) Where the results of tests for total proteins in urine are abnormal, provide a more detailed medical evaluation of the toxic effects of cadmium on the employee's renal system. (6) Examination for respirator use. (A) A detailed medical and work history, or update thereof, with emphasis on: Past exposure to cadmium; smoking history and current status; any history of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, and/or musculoskeletal system dysfunction; a description of the job for which the respirator is required; and questions 3-11 and 25-32 in appendix D to this section; (B) A blood pressure test; (C) Biological monitoring of the employee's levels of CdU, CdB and β 2 (D) Any other test or procedure that the examining physician deems appropriate. (ii) After reviewing all the information obtained from the medical examination required in paragraph (l)(6)(i) of this section, the physician shall determine whether the employee is fit to wear a respirator. (iii) Whenever an employee has exhibited difficulty in breathing during a respirator fit test or during use of a respirator, the employer, as soon as possible, shall provide the employee with a periodic medical examination in accordance with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section to determine the employee's fitness to wear a respirator. (iv) Where the results of the examination required under paragraph (l)(6)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section are abnormal, medical limitation or prohibition of respirator use shall be considered. If the employee is allowed to wear a respirator, the employee's ability to continue to do so shall be periodically evaluated by a physician. (7) Emergency examinations. (ii) The examination shall include the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section, with emphasis on the respiratory system, other organ systems considered appropriate by the examining physician, and symptoms of acute overexposure, as identified in paragraphs II (B)(1)-(2) and IV of appendix A to this section. (8) Termination of employment examination. (ii) However, for employees covered by paragraph (l)(1)(i)(B) of this section, if the employer has discontinued all periodic medical surveillance under paragraph (l)(4)(v) of this section, no termination of employment medical examination is required. (9) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this standard and appendices; (ii) A description of the affected employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to cadmium; (iii) The employee's former, current, and anticipated future levels of occupational exposure to cadmium; (iv) A description of any personal protective equipment, including respirators, used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used that equipment; and (v) relevant results of previous biological monitoring and medical examinations. (10) Physician's written medical opinion. (A) The physician's diagnosis for the employee; (B) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from further exposure to cadmium, including any indications of potential cadmium toxicity; (C) The results of any biological or other testing or related evaluations that directly assess the employee's absorption of cadmium; (D) Any recommended removal from, or limitation on the activities or duties of the employee or on the employee's use of personal protective equipment, such as respirators; (E) A statement that the physician has clearly and carefully explained to the employee the results of the medical examination, including all biological monitoring results and any medical conditions related to cadmium exposure that require further evaluation or treatment, and any limitation on the employee's diet or use of medications. (ii) The employer promptly shall obtain a copy of the results of any biological monitoring provided by an employer to an employee independently of a medical examination under paragraphs (l)(2) and (l)(4) of this section, and, in lieu of a written medical opinion, an explanation sheet explaining those results. (iii) The employer shall instruct the physician not to reveal orally or in the written medical opinion given to the employer specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure to cadmium. (11) Medical Removal Protection (MRP) General. (B) The employer shall medically remove an employee in accordance with paragraph (l)(11) of this section regardless of whether at the time of removal a job is available into which the removed employee may be transferred. (C) Whenever an employee is medically removed under paragraph (l)(11) of this section, the employer shall transfer the removed employee to a job where the exposure to cadmium is within the permissible levels specified in that paragraph as soon as one becomes available. (D) For any employee who is medically removed under the provisions of paragraph (l)(11)(i) of this section, the employer shall provide follow-up biological monitoring in accordance with (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section at least every three months and follow-up medical examinations semi-annually at least every six months until in a written medical opinion the examining physician determines that either the employee may be returned to his/her former job status as specified under paragraph (l)(11)(iv)-(v) of this section or the employee must be permanently removed from excess cadmium exposure. (E) The employer may not return an employee who has been medically removed for any reason to his/her former job status until a physician determines in a written medical opinion that continued medical removal is no longer necessary to protect the employee's health. (ii) Where an employee is found unfit to wear a respirator under paragraph (l)(6)(ii) of this section, the employer shall remove the employee from work where exposure to cadmium is above the PEL. (iii) Where removal is based on any reason other than the employee's inability to wear a respirator, the employer shall remove the employee from work where exposure to cadmium is at or above the action level. (iv) Except as specified in paragraph (l)(11)(v) of this section, no employee who was removed because his/her level of CdU, CdB and/or β 2 2 (v) However, when in the examining physician's opinion continued exposure to cadmium will not pose an increased risk to the employee's health and there are special circumstances that make continued medical removal an inappropriate remedy, the physician shall fully discuss these matters with the employee, and then in a written determination may return a worker to his/her former job status despite what would otherwise be unacceptably high biological monitoring results. Thereafter, the returned employee shall continue to be provided with medical surveillance as if he/she were still on medical removal until the employee's levels of CdU fall to or below 3 µg/g Cr, CdB falls to or below 5 µg/lwb, and β 2 (vi) Where an employer, although not required by paragraph (l)(11)(i)-(iii) of this section to do so, removes an employee from exposure to cadmium or otherwise places limitations on an employee due to the effects of cadmium exposure on the employee's medical condition, the employer shall provide the same medical removal protection benefits to that employee under paragraph (l)(12) of this section as would have been provided had the removal been required under paragraph (l)(11)(i)-(iii) of this section. (12) Medical Removal Protection Benefits (MRPB). (ii) For purposes of this section, the requirement that the employer provide MRPB means that the employer shall maintain the total normal earnings, seniority, and all other employee rights and benefits of the removed employee, including the employee's right to his/her former job status, as if the employee had not been removed from the employee's job or otherwise medically limited. (iii) Where, after 18 months on medical removal because of elevated biological monitoring results, the employee's monitoring results have not declined to a low enough level to permit the employee to be returned to his/her former job status: (A) The employer shall make available to the employee a medical examination pursuant to this section in order to obtain a final medical determination as to whether the employee may be returned to his/her former job status or must be permanently removed from excess cadmium exposure; and (B) The employer shall assure that the final medical determination indicates whether the employee may be returned to his/her former job status and what steps, if any, should be taken to protect the employee's health. (iv) The employer may condition the provision of MRPB upon the employee's participation in medical surveillance provided in accordance with this section. (13) Multiple physician review. (A) Review any findings, determinations, or recommendations of the initial physician; and (B) Conduct such examinations, consultations, and laboratory tests as the second physician deems necessary to facilitate this review. (ii) The employer shall promptly notify an employee of the right to seek a second medical opinion after each occasion that an initial physician provided by the employer conducts a medical examination or consultation pursuant to this section. The employer may condition its participation in, and payment for, multiple physician review upon the employee doing the following within fifteen (15) days after receipt of this notice, or receipt of the initial physician's written opinion, whichever is later: (A) Informing the employer that he or she intends to seek a medical opinion; and (B) Initiating steps to make an appointment with a second physician. (iii) If the findings, determinations, or recommendations of the second physician differ from those of the initial physician, then the employer and the employee shall assure that efforts are made for the two physicians to resolve any disagreement. (iv) If the two physicians have been unable to quickly resolve their disagreement, then the employer and the employee, through their respective physicians, shall designate a third physician to: (A) Review any findings, determinations, or recommendations of the other two physicians; and (B) Conduct such examinations, consultations, laboratory tests, and discussions with the other two physicians as the third physician deems necessary to resolve the disagreement among them. (v) The employer shall act consistently with the findings, determinations, and recommendations of the third physician, unless the employer and the employee reach an agreement that is consistent with the recommendations of at least one of the other two physicians. (14) Alternate physician determination. (15) Information the employer must provide the employee. (ii) The employer shall provide the employee with a copy of the employee's biological monitoring results and an explanation sheet explaining the results within two weeks after receipt thereof. (iii) Within 30 days after a request by an employee, the employer shall provide the employee with the information the employer is required to provide the examining physician under paragraph (l)(9) of this section. (16) Reporting. (m) Communication of cadmium hazards to employees Hazard communication.—general. (ii) In classifying the hazards of cadmium at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer; lung effects; kidney effects; and acute toxicity effects. (iii) Employers shall include cadmium in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of cadmium and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (m)(4) of this section. (2) Warning signs. (ii) Warning signs required by paragraph (m)(2)(i) of this section shall bear the following legend: DANGER CADMIUM MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AND KIDNEYS WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (iii) The employer shall ensure that signs required by this paragraph (m)(2) are illuminated, cleaned, and maintained as necessary so that the legend is readily visible. (iv) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (m)(2)(ii) of this section: DANGER CADMIUM CANCER HAZARD CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS REQUIRED IN THIS AREA (3) Warning labels. (ii) The warning labels for containers of contaminated protective clothing, equipment, waste, scrap, or debris shall include at least the following information: DANGER CONTAINS CADMIUM MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AND KIDNEYS AVOID CREATING DUST (iii) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on shipping and storage containers containing cadmium, cadmium compounds, or cadmium contaminated clothing, equipment, waste, scrap, or debris in lieu of the labeling requirements specified in paragraphs (m)(1)(i) and (m)(3)(ii) of this section: DANGER CONTAINS CADMIUM CANCER HAZARD AVOID CREATING DUST CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE (iv) Where feasible, installed cadmium products shall have a visible label or other indication that cadmium is present. (4) Employee information and training. (ii) Training shall be provided prior to or at the time of initial assignment to a job involving potential exposure to cadmium and at least annually thereafter. (iii) The employer shall make the training program understandable to the employee and shall assure that each employee is informed of the following: (A) The health hazards associated with cadmium exposure, with special attention to the information incorporated in appendix A to this section; (B) The quantity, location, manner of use, release, and storage of cadmium in the workplace and the specific nature of operations that could result in exposure to cadmium, especially exposures above the PEL; (C) The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job assignment; (D) The measures employees can take to protect themselves from exposure to cadmium, including modification of such habits as smoking and personal hygiene, and specific procedures the employer has implemented to protect employees from exposure to cadmium such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and the provision of personal protective equipment; (E) The purpose, proper selection, fitting, proper use, and limitations of respirators and protective clothing; (F) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program required by paragraph (l) of this section; (G) The contents of this section and its appendices; and (H) The employee's rights of access to records under § 1910.1020(e) and (g). (iv) Additional access to information and training program and materials. (A) The employer shall make a copy of this section and its appendices readily available without cost to all affected employees and shall provide a copy if requested. (B) The employer shall provide to the Assistant Secretary or the Director, upon request, all materials relating to the employee information and the training program. (n) Recordkeeping Exposure monitoring. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The monitoring date, duration, and results in terms of an 8-hour TWA of each sample taken; (B) The name and job classification of the employees monitored and of all other employees whose exposures the monitoring is intended to represent; (C) A description of the sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) The type of respiratory protective device, if any, worn by the monitored employee; (E) A notation of any other conditions that might have affected the monitoring results. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (2) Objective data for exemption from requirement for initial monitoring. (ii) The employer shall establish and maintain a record of the objective data for at least 30 years. (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information about the employee: (A) Name and description of the duties; (B) A copy of the physician's written opinions and an explanation sheet for biological monitoring results; (C) A copy of the medical history, and the results of any physical examination and all test results that are required to be provided by this section, including biological tests, X-rays, pulmonary function tests, etc., or that have been obtained to further evaluate any condition that might be related to cadmium exposure; (D) The employee's medical symptoms that might be related to exposure to cadmium; and (E) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by paragraph (l)(9)(ii)-(v) of this section. (iii) The employer shall assure that this record is maintained for the duration of employment plus thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (4) Availability. (ii) Within 15 days after a request, the employer shall make an employee's medical records required to be kept by paragraph (n)(3) of this section available for examination and copying to the subject employee, to designated representatives, to anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee, and after the employee's death or incapacitation, to the employee's family members. (o) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (p) Dates Effective date. (2) Start-up dates. (i) Exposure monitoring. (ii) Regulated areas. (iii) Respiratory protection. (iv) Compliance program. (v) Methods of compliance. (vi) Hygiene and lunchroom facilities. (B) Change rooms, showers, and lunchroom facilities shall be completed as soon as possible and in any event no later than 1 year after the effective date of this section. (vii) Employee information and training. (viii) Medical surveillance. (q) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.1027—Substance Safety Data Sheet Cadmium I. Substance Identification A. Substance: Cadmium. B. 8-Hour, Time-weighted-average, Permissible Exposure Limit (TWA PEL): 1. TWA PEL: Five micrograms of cadmium per cubic meter of air 5 µg/m 3 C. Appearance: Cadmium metal—soft, blue-white, malleable, lustrous metal or grayish-white powder. Some cadmium compounds may also appear as a brown, yellow, or red powdery substance. II. Health Hazard Data A. Routes of Exposure. Cadmium can cause local skin or eye irritation. Cadmium can affect your health if you inhale it or if you swallow it. B. Effects of Overexposure. 1. Short-term (acute) exposure: Cadmium is much more dangerous by inhalation than by ingestion. High exposures to cadmium that may be immediately dangerous to life or health occur in jobs where workers handle large quantities of cadmium dust or fume; heat cadmium-containing compounds or cadmium-coated surfaces; weld with cadmium solders or cut cadmium-containing materials such as bolts. 2. Severe exposure may occur before symptoms appear. Early symptoms may include mild irritation of the upper respiratory tract, a sensation of constriction of the throat, a metallic taste and/or a cough. A period of 1-10 hours may precede the onset of rapidly progressing shortness of breath, chest pain, and flu-like symptoms with weakness, fever, headache, chills, sweating and muscular pain. Acute pulmonary edema usually develops within 24 hours and reaches a maximum by three days. If death from asphyxia does not occur, symptoms may resolve within a week. 3. Long-term (chronic) exposure. Repeated or long-term exposure to cadmium, even at relatively low concentrations, may result in kidney damage and an increased risk of cancer of the lung and of the prostate. C. Emergency First Aid Procedures. 1. Eye exposure: Direct contact may cause redness or pain. Wash eyes immediately with large amounts of water, lifting the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention immediately. 2. Skin exposure: Direct contact may result in irritation. Remove contaminated clothing and shoes immediately. Wash affected area with soap or mild detergent and large amounts of water. Get medical attention immediately. 3. Ingestion: Ingestion may result in vomiting, abdominal pain, nausea, diarrhea, headache and sore throat. Treatment for symptoms must be administered by medical personnel. Under no circumstances should the employer allow any person whom he retains, employs, supervises or controls to engage in therapeutic chelation. Such treatment is likely to translocate cadmium from pulmonary or other tissue to renal tissue. Get medical attention immediately. 4. Inhalation: If large amounts of cadmium are inhaled, the exposed person must be moved to fresh air at once. If breathing has stopped, perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation. Administer oxygen if available. Keep the affected person warm and at rest. Get medical attention immediately. 5. Rescue: Move the affected person from the hazardous exposure. If the exposed person has been overcome, attempt rescue only after notifying at least one other person of the emergency and putting into effect established emergency procedures. Do not become a casualty yourself. Understand your emergency rescue procedures and know the location of the emergency equipment before the need arises. III. Employee Information A. Protective Clothing and Equipment. 1. Respirators: You may be required to wear a respirator for non-routine activities; in emergencies; while your employer is in the process of reducing cadmium exposures through engineering controls; and where engineering controls are not feasible. If respirators are worn in the future, they must have a joint Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) label of approval. Cadmium does not have a detectable odor except at levels well above the permissible exposure limits. If you can smell cadmium while wearing a respirator, proceed immediately to fresh air. If you experience difficulty breathing while wearing a respirator, tell your employer. 2. Protective Clothing: You may be required to wear impermeable clothing, gloves, foot gear, a face shield, or other appropriate protective clothing to prevent skin contact with cadmium. Where protective clothing is required, your employer must provide clean garments to you as necessary to assure that the clothing protects you adequately. The employer must replace or repair protective clothing that has become torn or otherwise damaged. 3. Eye Protection: You may be required to wear splash-proof or dust resistant goggles to prevent eye contact with cadmium. B. Employer Requirements. 1. Medical: If you are exposed to cadmium at or above the action level, your employer is required to provide a medical examination, laboratory tests and a medical history according to the medical surveillance provisions under paragraph (1) of this standard. (See summary chart and tables in this appendix A.) These tests shall be provided without cost to you. In addition, if you are accidentally exposed to cadmium under conditions known or suspected to constitute toxic exposure to cadmium, your employer is required to make special tests available to you. 2. Access to Records: All medical records are kept strictly confidential. You or your representative are entitled to see the records of measurements of your exposure to cadmium. Your medical examination records can be furnished to your personal physician or designated representative upon request by you to your employer. 3. Observation of Monitoring: Your employer is required to perform measurements that are representative of your exposure to cadmium and you or your designated representative are entitled to observe the monitoring procedure. You are entitled to observe the steps taken in the measurement procedure, and to record the results obtained. When the monitoring procedure is taking place in an area where respirators or personal protective clothing and equipment are required to be worn, you or your representative must also be provided with, and must wear the protective clothing and equipment. C. Employee Requirements—You will not be able to smoke, eat, drink, chew gum or tobacco, or apply cosmetics while working with cadmium in regulated areas. You will also not be able to carry or store tobacco products, gum, food, drinks or cosmetics in regulated areas because these products easily become contaminated with cadmium from the workplace and can therefore create another source of unnecessary cadmium exposure. Some workers will have to change out of work clothes and shower at the end of the day, as part of their workday, in order to wash cadmium from skin and hair. Handwashing and cadmium-free eating facilities shall be provided by the employer and proper hygiene should always be performed before eating. It is also recommended that you do not smoke or use tobacco products, because among other things, they naturally contain cadmium. For further information, read the labeling on such products. IV. Physician Information A. Introduction. The medical surveillance provisions of paragraph (1) generally are aimed at accomplishing three main interrelated purposes: First, identifying employees at higher risk of adverse health effects from excess, chronic exposure to cadmium; second, preventing cadmium-induced disease; and third, detecting and minimizing existing cadmium-induced disease. The core of medical surveillance in this standard is the early and periodic monitoring of the employee's biological indicators of: (a) Recent exposure to cadmium; (b) cadmium body burden; and (c) potential and actual kidney damage associated with exposure to cadmium. The main adverse health effects associated with cadmium overexposure are lung cancer and kidney dysfunction. It is not yet known how to adequately biologically monitor human beings to specifically prevent cadmium-induced lung cancer. By contrast, the kidney can be monitored to provide prevention and early detection of cadmium-induced kidney damage. Since, for non-carcinogenic effects, the kidney is considered the primary target organ of chronic exposure to cadmium, the medical surveillance provisions of this standard effectively focus on cadmium-induced kidney disease. Within that focus, the aim, where possible, is to prevent the onset of such disease and, where necessary, to minimize such disease as may already exist. The by-products of successful prevention of kidney disease are anticipated to be the reduction and prevention of other cadmium-induced diseases. B. Health Effects. The major health effects associated with cadmium overexposure are described below. 1. Kidney: The most prevalent non-malignant disease observed among workers chronically exposed to cadmium is kidney dysfunction. Initially, such dysfunction is manifested as proteinuria. The proteinuria associated with cadmium exposure is most commonly characterized by excretion of low-molecular weight proteins (15,000 to 40,000 MW) accompanied by loss of electrolytes, uric acid, calcium, amino acids, and phosphate. The compounds commonly excreted include: beta-2-microglobulin (β 2 et al. It has also been observed that exposure to cadmium may lead to urinary excretion of high-molecular weight proteins such as albumin, immunoglobulin G, and glycoproteins (Ex. 29). Excretion of high-molecular weight proteins is typically indicative of damage to the glomeruli of the kidney. Bernard et al. Several studies indicate that the onset of low-molecular weight proteinuria is a sign of irreversible kidney damage (Friberg et al. et al. et al. et al. 2 2 Some studies indicate that such proteinuria may be progressive; levels of β 2 et al. When cadmium exposure continues after the onset of proteinuria, chronic nephrotoxicity may occur (Friberg, Ex. 29). Uremia results from the inability of the glomerulus to adequately filter blood. This leads to severe disturbance of electrolyte concentrations and may lead to various clinical complications including kidney stones (L-140-50). After prolonged exposure to cadmium, glomerular proteinuria, glucosuria, aminoaciduria, phosphaturia, and hypercalciuria may develop (Exs. 8-86, 4-28, 14-18). Phosphate, calcium, glucose, and amino acids are essential to life, and under normal conditions, their excretion should be regulated by the kidney. Once low molecular weight proteinuria has developed, these elements dissipate from the human body. Loss of glomerular function may also occur, manifested by decreased glomerular filtration rate and increased serum creatinine. Severe cadmium-induced renal damage may eventually develop into chronic renal failure and uremia (Ex. 55). Studies in which animals are chronically exposed to cadmium confirm the renal effects observed in humans (Friberg et al. 2. Biological Markers It is universally recognized that the best measures of cadmium exposures and its effects are measurements of cadmium in biological fluids, especially urine and blood. Of the two, CdU is conventionally used to determine body burden of cadmium in workers without kidney disease. CdB is conventionally used to monitor for recent exposure to cadmium. In addition, levels of CdU and CdB historically have been used to predict the percent of the population likely to develop kidney disease (Thun et al. The third biological parameter upon which OSHA relies for medical surveillance is Beta-2-microglobulin in urine (β 2 2 Excess β 2 2 Three issues confront the physicians in the use of β 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Specific recommendations for ways to measure β 2 2 2 2 3. Lung and Prostate Cancer The primary sites for cadmium-associated cancer appear to be the lung and the prostate (L-140-50). Evidence for an association between cancer and cadmium exposure derives from both epidemiological studies and animal experiments. Mortality from prostate cancer associated with cadmium is slightly elevated in several industrial cohorts, but the number of cases is small and there is not clear dose-response relationship. More substantive evidence exists for lung cancer. The major epidemiological study of lung cancer was conducted by Thun et al. The primary evidence for quantifying a link between lung cancer and cadmium exposure from animal studies derives from two rat bioassay studies; one by Takenaka et al. Based on the above cited studies, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) classified cadmium as “B1”, a probable human carcinogen, in 1985 (Ex. 4-4). The International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) in 1987 also recommended that cadmium be listed as “2A”, a probable human carcinogen (Ex. 4-15). The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) has recently recommended that cadmium be labeled as a carcinogen. Since 1984, NIOSH has concluded that cadmium is possibly a human carcinogen and has recommended that exposures be controlled to the lowest level feasible. 4. Non-carcinogenic Effects Acute pneumonitis occurs 10 to 24 hours after initial acute inhalation of high levels of cadmium fumes with symptoms such as fever and chest pain (Exs. 30, 8-86B). In extreme exposure cases pulmonary edema may develop and cause death several days after exposure. Little actual exposure measurement data is available on the level of airborne cadmium exposure that causes such immediate adverse lung effects, nonetheless, it is reasonable to believe a cadmium concentration of approximately 1 mg/m 3 In addition to acute lung effects and chronic renal effects, long term exposure to cadmium may cause other severe effects on the respiratory system. Reduced pulmonary function and chronic lung disease indicative of emphysema have been observed in workers who have had prolonged exposure to cadmium dust or fumes (Exs. 4-29, 4-22, 4-42, 4-50, 4-63). In a study of workers conducted by Kazantzis et al. 3 Cadmium need not be respirable to constitute a hazard. Inspirable cadmium particles that are too large to be respirable but small enough to enter the tracheobronchial region of the lung can lead to bronchoconstriction, chronic pulmonary disease, and cancer of that portion of the lung. All of these diseases have been associated with occupational exposure to cadmium (Ex. 8-86B). Particles that are constrained by their size to the extra-thoracic regions of the respiratory system such as the nose and maxillary sinuses can be swallowed through mucocillary clearance and be absorbed into the body (ACGIH, Ex. 8-692). The impaction of these particles in the upper airways can lead to anosmia, or loss of sense of smell, which is an early indication of overexposure among workers exposed to heavy metals. This condition is commonly reported among cadmium-exposed workers (Ex. 8-86-B). C. Medical Surveillance In general, the main provisions of the medical surveillance section of the standard, under paragraphs (l)(1)-(17) of the regulatory text, are as follows: 1. Workers exposed above the action level are covered; 2. Workers with intermittent exposures are not covered; 3. Past workers who are covered receive biological monitoring for at least one year; 4. Initial examinations include a medical questionnaire and biological monitoring of cadmium in blood (CdB), cadmium in urine (CdU), and Beta-2-microglobulin in urine (β 2 5. Biological monitoring of these three analytes is performed at least annually; full medical examinations are performed biennially; 6. Until five years from the effective date of the standard, medical removal is required when CdU is greater than 15 µg/gram creatinine (g Cr), or CdB is greater than 15 µg/liter whole blood (lwb), or β 2 7. Beginning five years after the standard is in effect, medical removal triggers will be reduced; 8. Medical removal protection benefits are to be provided for up to 18 months; 9. Limited initial medical examinations are required for respirator usage; 10. Major provisions are fully described under section (l) of the regulatory text; they are outlined here as follows: A. Eligibility B. Biological monitoring C. Actions triggered by levels of CdU, CdB, and β 2 D. Periodic medical surveillance E. Actions triggered by periodic medical surveillance (See appendix A Summary Chart and Tables in Attachment-1.) F. Respirator usage G. Emergency medical examinations H. Termination examination I. Information to physician J. Physician's medical opinion K. Medical removal protection L. Medical removal protection benefits M. Multiple physician review N. Alternate physician review O. Information employer gives to employee P. Recordkeeping Q. Reporting on OSHA form 200 11. The above mentioned summary of the medical surveillance provisions, the summary chart, and tables for the actions triggered at different levels of CdU, CdB and β 2 D. Recommendations to Physicians 1. It is strongly recommended that patients with tubular proteinuria are counseled on: The hazards of smoking; avoidance of nephrotoxins and certain prescriptions and over-the-counter medications that may exacerbate kidney symptoms; how to control diabetes and/or blood pressure; proper hydration, diet, and exercise (Ex. 19-2). A list of prominent or common nephrotoxins is attached. (See appendix A Attachment-2.) 2. DO NOT CHELATE; KNOW WHICH DRUGS ARE NEPHROTOXINS OR ARE ASSOCIATED WITH NEPHRITIS. 3. The gravity of cadmium-induced renal damage is compounded by the fact there is no medical treatment to prevent or reduce the accumulation of cadmium in the kidney (Ex. 8-619). Dr. Friberg, a leading world expert on cadmium toxicity, indicated in 1992, that there is no form of chelating agent that could be used without substantial risk. He stated that tubular proteinuria has to be treated in the same way as other kidney disorders (Ex. 29). 4. After the results of a workers' biological monitoring or medical examination are received the employer is required to provide an information sheet to the patient, briefly explaining the significance of the results. (See Attachment 3 of this appendix A.) 5. For additional information the physician is referred to the following additional resources: a. The physician can always obtain a copy of the preamble, with its full discussion of the health effects, from OSHA's Computerized Information System (OCIS). b. The Docket Officer maintains a record of the rulemaking. The Cadmium Docket (H-057A), is located at 200 Constitution Ave. NW., room N-2625, Washington, DC 20210; telephone: 202-219-7894. c. The following articles and exhibits in particular from that docket (H-057A): Exhibit number Author and paper title 8-447 Lauwerys et. al., 4-67 Takenaka, S., H. Oldiges, H. Konig, D. Hochrainer, G. Oberdorster. “Carcinogenicity of Cadmium Chloride Aerosols in Wistar Rats”. JNCI 4-68 Thun, M.J., T.M. Schnoor, A.B. Smith, W.E. Halperin, R.A. Lemen. “Mortality Among a Cohort of U.S. Cadmium Production Workers—An Update.” JNCI 4-25 Elinder, C.G., Kjellstrom, T., Hogstedt, C., et al. Brit. J. Ind. Med. 4-26 Ellis, K.J. et al., J. Toxicol. Environ. Health 4-27 Ellis, K.J., S.H. Cohn and T.J. Smith. “Cadmium Inhalation Exposure Estimates: Their Significance with Respect to Kidney and Liver Cadmium Burden.” J. Toxicol. Environ. Health 4-28 Falck, F.Y., Jr., Fine, L.J., Smith, R.G., McClatchey, K.D., Annesley, T., England, B., and Schork, A.M. “Occupational Cadmium Exposure and Renal Status.” Am. J. Ind. Med. 8-86A Friberg, L., C.G. Elinder, et al. 8-86B Friberg, L., C.G. Elinder, et al. L-140-45 Elinder, C.G., “Cancer Mortality of Cadmium Workers”, Brit. J. Ind. Med., L-140-50 Thun, M., Elinder, C.G., Friberg, L, “Scientific Basis for an Occupational Standard for Cadmium, Am. J. Ind. Med. V. Information Sheet The information sheet (appendix A Attachment-3.) or an equally explanatory one should be provided to you after any biological monitoring results are reviewed by the physician, or where applicable, after any medical examination. Attachment 1—Appendix A Summary Chart and Tables A and B of Actions Triggered by Biological Monitoring Appendix A Summary Chart: Section (1)(3) Medical Surveillance Categorizing Biological Monitoring Results (A) Biological monitoring results categories are set forth in appendix A Table A for the periods ending December 31, 1998 and for the period beginning January 1, 1999. (B) The results of the biological monitoring for the initial medical exam and the subsequent exams shall determine an employee's biological monitoring result category. Actions Triggered by Biological Monitoring (A) (i) The actions triggered by biological monitoring for an employee are set forth in appendix A Table B. (ii) The biological monitoring results for each employee under section (1)(3) shall determine the actions required for that employee. That is, for any employee in biological monitoring category C, the employer will perform all of the actions for which there is an X in column C of appendix A Table B. (iii) An employee is assigned the alphabetical category (“A” being the lowest) depending upon the test results of the three biological markers. (iv) An employee is assigned category A if monitoring results for all three biological markers fall at or below the levels indicated in the table listed for category A. (v) An employee is assigned category B if any monitoring result for any of the three biological markers fall within the range of levels indicated in the table listed for category B, providing no result exceeds the levels listed for category B. (vi) An employee is assigned category C if any monitoring result for any of the three biological markers are above the levels listed for category C. (B) The user of appendix A Tables A and B should know that these tables are provided only to facilitate understanding of the relevant provisions of paragraph (l)(3) of this section. appendix A Tables A and B are not meant to add to or subtract from the requirements of those provisions. Appendix A Table A—Categorization of Biological Monitoring Results Applicable Through 1998 Only Biological marker Monitoring result categories A B C Cadmium in urine (CdU) (µg/g creatinine) ≤3 >3 and ≤15 >15 β 2 2 ≤300 >300 and ≤1500 >1500* Cadmium in blood (CdB) (µg/liter whole blood) ≤5 >5 and ≤15 >15 * If an employee's β 2 Applicable Beginning January 1, 1999 Biological marker Monitoring result categories A B C Cadmium in urine (CdU) (µg/g creatinine) ≤3 >3 and ≤7 >7 β 2 2 ≤300 >300 and ≤750 >750* Cadmium in blood (CdB) (µg/liter whole blood) ≤5 >5 and ≤10 >10 * If an employee's β 2 Appendix A Table B—Actions Determined by Biological Monitoring This table presents the actions required based on the monitoring result in appendix A Table A. Each item is a separate requirement in citing non-compliance. For example, a medical examination within 90 days for an employee in category B is separate from the requirement to administer a periodic medical examination for category B employees on an annual basis. Required actions Monitoring result category A 1 B 1 C 1 (1) Biological monitoring: (a) Annual. X (b) Semiannual X (c) Quarterly X (2) Medical examination: (a) Biennial X (b) Annual. X (c) Semiannual. X (d) Within 90 days X X (3) Assess within two weeks: (a) Excess cadmium exposure X X (b) Work practices X X (c) Personal hygiene X X (d) Respirator usage X X (e) Smoking history X X (f) Hygiene facilities X X (g) Engineering controls X X (h) Correct within 30 days X X (i) Periodically assess exposures X (4) Discretionary medical removal X X (5) Mandatory medical removal X 2 1 2 Appendix A—Attachment 2—List of Medications A list of the more common medications that a physician, and the employee, may wish to review is likely to include some of the following: (1) Anticonvulsants: Paramethadione, phenytoin, trimethadone; (2) antihypertensive drugs: Captopril, methyldopa; (3) antimicrobials: Aminoglycosides, amphotericin B, cephalosporins, ethambutol; (4) antineoplastic agents: Cisplatin, methotrexate, mitomycin-C, nitrosoureas, radiation; (4) sulfonamide diuretics: Acetazolamide, chlorthalidone, furosemide, thiazides; (5) halogenated alkanes, hydrocarbons, and solvents that may occur in some settings: Carbon tetrachloride, ethylene glycol, toluene; iodinated radiographic contrast media; nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs; and, (7) other miscellaneous compounds: Acetominophen, allopurinol, amphetamines, azathioprine, cimetidine, cyclosporine, lithium, methoxyflurane, methysergide, D-penicillamine, phenacetin, phenendione. A list of drugs associated with acute interstitial nephritis includes: (1) Antimicrobial drugs: Cephalosporins, chloramphenicol, colistin, erythromycin, ethambutol, isoniazid, para-aminosalicylic acid, penicillins, polymyxin B, rifampin, sulfonamides, tetracyclines, and vancomycin; (2) other miscellaneous drugs: Allopurinol, antipyrene, azathioprine, captopril, cimetidine, clofibrate, methyldopa, phenindione, phenylpropanolamine, phenytoin, probenecid, sulfinpyrazone, sulfonamid diuretics, triamterene; and, (3) metals: Bismuth, gold. This list have been derived from commonly available medical textbooks (e.g., Ex. 14-18). The list has been included merely to facilitate the physician's, employer's, and employee's understanding. The list does not represent an official OSHA opinion or policy regarding the use of these medications for particular employees. The use of such medications should be under physician discretion. Attachment 3—Biological Monitoring and Medical Examination Results Employee Testing Date Cadmium in Urine ___ µg/g Cr—Normal Levels: ≤3 µg/g Cr. Cadmium in Blood ___ µg/lwb—Normal Levels: ≤5 µg/lwb. Beta-2-microglobulin in Urine ___ µg/g Cr—Normal Levels: ≤300 µg/g Cr. Physical Examination Results: N/A ___ Satisfactory ___ Unsatisfactory ___ (see physician again). Physician's Review of Pulmonary Function Test: N/A ___ Normal ___ Abnormal ___. Next biological monitoring or medical examination scheduled for The biological monitoring program has been designed for three main purposes: 1) to identify employees at risk of adverse health effects from excess, chronic exposure to cadmium; 2) to prevent cadmium-induced disease(s); and 3) to detect and minimize existing cadmium-induced disease(s). The levels of cadmium in the urine and blood provide an estimate of the total amount of cadmium in the body. The amount of a specific protein in the urine (beta-2-microglobulin) indicates changes in kidney function. All three tests must be evaluated together. A single mildly elevated result may not be important if testing at a later time indicates that the results are normal and the workplace has been evaluated to decrease possible sources of cadmium exposure. The levels of cadmium or beta-2-microglobulin may change over a period of days to months and the time needed for those changes to occur is different for each worker. If the results for biological monitoring are above specific “high levels” [cadmium urine greater than 10 micrograms per gram of creatinine (µg/g Cr), cadmium blood greater than 10 micrograms per liter of whole blood (µg/lwb), or beta-2-microglobulin greater than 1000 micrograms per gram of creatinine (µg/g Cr)], the worker has a much greater chance of developing other kidney diseases. One way to measure for kidney function is by measuring beta-2-microglobulin in the urine. Beta-2-microglobulin is a protein which is normally found in the blood as it is being filtered in the kidney, and the kidney reabsorbs or returns almost all of the beta-2-microglobulin to the blood. A very small amount (less than 300 µg/g Cr in the urine) of beta-2-microglobulin is not reabsorbed into the blood, but is released in the urine. If cadmium damages the kidney, the amount of beta-2-microglobulin in the urine increases because the kidney cells are unable to reabsorb the beta-2-microglobulin normally. An increase in the amount of beta-2-microglobulin in the urine is a very early sign of kidney dysfunction. A small increase in beta-2-microglobulin in the urine will serve as an early warning sign that the worker may be absorbing cadmium from the air, cigarettes contaminated in the workplace, or eating in areas that are cadmium contaminated. Even if cadmium causes permanent changes in the kidney's ability to reabsorb beta-2-microglobulin, and the beta-2-microglobulin is above the “high levels”, the loss of kidney function may not lead to any serious health problems. Also, renal function naturally declines as people age. The risk for changes in kidney function for workers who have biological monitoring results between the “normal values” and the “high levels” is not well known. Some people are more cadmium-tolerant, while others are more cadmium-susceptible. For anyone with even a slight increase of beta-2-microglobulin, cadmium in the urine, or cadmium in the blood, it is very important to protect the kidney from further damage. Kidney damage can come from other sources than excess cadmium-exposure so it is also recommended that if a worker's levels are “high” he/she should receive counseling about drinking more water; avoiding cadmium-tainted tobacco and certain medications (nephrotoxins, acetaminophen); controlling diet, vitamin intake, blood pressure and diabetes; etc. Appendix B to § 1910.1027—Substance Technical Guidelines for Cadmium I. Cadmium Metal A. Physical and Chemical Data. 1. Substance Identification. Chemical name: Formula: Molecular Weight: Chemical Abstracts Service (CAS) Registry No.: Other Identifiers: Synonyms: 2. Physical data. Boiling point: Melting point: Specific Gravity: 2 Solubility: Appearance: B. Fire, Explosion and Reactivity Data. 1. Fire. Fire and Explosion Hazards: Flash point: Extinguishing media: 2. Reactivity. Conditions contributing to instability: Incompatibilities: Hazardous decomposition products: C. Spill, Leak and Disposal Procedures. 1. Steps to be taken if the materials is released or spilled. II. Cadmium Oxide A. Physical and Chemical Date. 1. Substance identification. Chemical name: Formula: Molecular Weight: CAS No.: Other Identifiers: Synonyms: 2. Physical data. Boiling point (760 mm Hg): Melting point: Specific Gravity: 2 Solubility: Appearance: B. Fire, Explosion and Reactivity Data. 1. Fire. Fire and Explosion Hazards: Flash point: Extinguishing media: 2. Reactivity. Conditions contributing to instability: Incompatibilities: 2 Hazardous decomposition products: C. Spill Leak and Disposal Procedures. 1. Steps to be taken if the material is released or spilled. III. Cadmium Sulfide. A. Physical and Chemical Data. 1. Substance Identification. Chemical name: Formula: Molecular weight: CAS No. Other Identifiers: Synonyms: 2. Physical data. Boiling point (760 mm. Hg): 2 Melting point: Specific Gravity: 2 Solubility: Appearance: B. Fire, Explosion and Reactivity Data. 1. Fire. Fire and Explosion Hazards: Flash point: Extinguishing media: 2. Reactivity. Conditions contributing to instability: Incompatibilities: Hazardous decomposition products: C. Spill Leak and Disposal Procedures. 1. Steps to be taken if the material is released or spilled. IV. Cadmium Chloride. A. Physical and Chemical Data. 1. Substance Identification. Chemcail name: Formula: 2 Molecular weight: CAS No. Other Identifiers: Synonyms: 2. Physical data. Boiling point (760 mm Hg): Melting point: Specific Gravity: 2 Solubility: Appearance: B. Fire, Explosion and Reactivity Data. 1. Fire. Fire and Explosion Hazards: Flash point: Extinguishing media: 2. Reactivity. Conditions contributing to instability: Incompatibilities: Hazardous decomposition products: C. Spill Leak and Disposal Procedures. 1. Steps to be taken if the materials is released or spilled. Appendix C to § 1910.1027 [Reserved] Appendix D to § 1910.1027—Occupational Health History Interview With Reference to Cadmium Exposure Appendix E to § 1910.1027—Cadmium in Workplace Atmospheres Method Number: ID-189 Matrix: Air OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits: 5 µg/m 3 3 Collection Procedure: A known volume of air is drawn through a 37-mm diameter filter cassette containing a 0.8-µm mixed cellulose ester membrane filter (MCEF). Recommended Air Volume: 960 L Recommended Sampling Rate: 2.0 L/min Analytical Procedure: Air filter samples are digested with nitric acid. After digestion, a small amount of hydrochloric acid is added. The samples are then diluted to volume with deionized water and analyzed by either flame atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS) or flameless atomic absorption spectroscopy using a heated graphite furnace atomizer (AAS-HGA). Detection Limits: Qualitative: 0.2 µg/m 3 3 Quantitative: 0.70 µg/m 3 3 Precision and Accuracy: (Flame AAS Analysis and AAS-HGA Analysis): Validation Level: 2.5 to 10 µg/m 3 3 CV 1 Analytical Bias: + 4.0%, −5.8% Overall Analytical Error:±6.0%, ±14.2% Method Classification: Validated Date: June, 1992 Inorganic Service Branch II, OSHA Salt Lake Technical Center, Salt Lake City, Utah Commercial manufacturers and products mentioned in this method are for descriptive use only and do not constitute endorsements by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from other sources can be substituted. 1. Introduction 1.1. Scope This method describes the collection of airborne elemental cadmium and cadmium compounds on 0.8-µm mixed cellulose ester membrane filters and their subsequent analysis by either flame atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS) or flameless atomic absorption spectroscopy using a heated graphite furnace atomizer (AAS-HGA). It is applicable for both TWA and Action Level TWA Permissible Exposure Level (PEL) measurements. The two atomic absorption analytical techniques included in the method do not differentiate between cadmium fume and cadmium dust samples. They also do not differentiate between elemental cadmium and its compounds. 1.2. Principle Airborne elemental cadmium and cadmium compounds are collected on a 0.8-µm mixed cellulose ester membrane filter (MCEF). The air filter samples are digested with concentrated nitric acid to destroy the organic matrix and dissolve the cadmium analytes. After digestion, a small amount of concentrated hydrochloric acid is added to help dissolve other metals which may be present. The samples are diluted to volume with deionized water and then aspirated into the oxidizing air/acetylene flame of an atomic absorption spectrophotometer for analysis of elemental cadmium. If the concentration of cadmium in a sample solution is too low for quantitation by this flame AAS analytical technique, and the sample is to be averaged with other samples for TWA calculations, aliquots of the sample and a matrix modifier are later injected onto a L'vov platform in a pyrolytically-coated graphite tube of a Zeeman atomic absorption spectrophotometer/graphite furnace assembly for analysis of elemental cadmium. The matrix modifier is added to stabilize the cadmium metal and minimize sodium chloride as an interference during the high temperature charring step of the analysis (5.1., 5.2.). 1.3. History Previously, two OSHA sampling and analytical methods for cadmium were used concurrently (5.3., 5.4.). Both of these methods also required 0.8-µm mixed cellulose ester membrane filters for the collection of air samples. These cadmium air filter samples were analyzed by either flame atomic absorption spectroscopy (5.3.) or inductively coupled plasma/atomic emission spectroscopy (ICP-AES) (5.4.). Neither of these two analytical methods have adequate sensitivity for measuring workplace exposure to airborne cadmium at the new lower TWA and Action Level TWA PEL levels when consecutive samples are taken on one employee and the sample results need to be averaged with other samples to determine a single TWA. The inclusion of two atomic absorption analytical techniques in the new sampling and analysis method for airborne cadmium permits quantitation of sample results over a broad range of exposure levels and sampling periods. The flame AAS analytical technique included in this method is similar to the previous procedure given in the General Metals Method ID-121 (5.3.) with some modifications. The sensitivity of the AAS-HGA analytical technique included in this method is adequate to measure exposure levels at 1/10 1.4. Properties (5.5.) Elemental cadmium is a silver-white, blue-tinged, lustrous metal which is easily cut with a knife. It is slowly oxidized by moist air to form cadmium oxide. It is insoluble in water, but reacts readily with dilute nitric acid. Some of the physical properties and other descriptive information of elemental cadmium are given below: CAS No. 7440-43-9 Atomic Number 48 Atomic Symbol Cd Atomic Weight 112.41 Melting Point 321 °C Boiling Point 765 °C Density 8.65 g/mL (25 °C) The properties of specific cadmium compounds are described in reference 5.5. 1.5. Method Performance A synopsis of method performance is presented below. Further information can be found in Section 4. 1.5.1. The qualitative and quantitative detection limits for the flame AAS analytical technique are 0.04 µg (0.004 µg/mL) and 0.14 µg (0.014 µg/mL) cadmium, respectively, for a 10 mL solution volume. These correspond, respectively, to 0.2 µg/m 3 3 1.5.2. The qualitative and quantitative detection limits for the AAS-HGA analytical technique are 0.44 ng (0.044 ng/mL) and 1.5 ng (0.15 ng/mL) cadmium, respectively, for a 10 mL solution volume. These correspond, respectively, to 0.007 µg/m 3 3 1.5.3. The average recovery by the flame AAS analytical technique of 17 spiked MCEF samples containing cadmium in the range of 0.5 to 2.0 times the TWA target concentration of 5 µg/m 3 1 1.5.4. The average recovery by the AAS-HGA analytical technique of 18 spiked MCEF samples containing cadmium in the range of 0.5 to 2.0 times the Action Level TWA target concentration of 2.5 µg/m 3 1 1.5.5. Sensitivity in flame atomic absorption is defined as the characteristic concentration of an element required to produce a signal of 1% absorbance (0.0044 absorbance units). Sensitivity values are listed for each element by the atomic absorption spectrophotometer manufacturer and have proved to be a very valuable diagnostic tool to determine if instrumental parameters are optimized and if the instrument is performing up to specification. The sensitivity of the spectrophotometer used in the validation of the flame AAS analytical technique agreed with the manufacturer specifications (5.6.); the 2 µg/mL cadmium standard gave an absorbance reading of 0.350 abs. units. 1.5.6. Sensitivity in graphite furnace atomic absorption is defined in terms of the characteristic mass, the number of picograms required to give an integrated absorbance value of 0.0044 absorbance-second (5.7.). Data suggests that under Stabilized Temperature Platform Furnace (STPF) conditions (see Section 1.6.2.), characteristic mass values are transferable between properly functioning instruments to an accuracy of about 20% (5.2.). The characteristic mass for STPF analysis of cadmium with Zeeman background correction listed by the manufacturer of the instrument used in the validation of the AAS-HGA analytical technique was 0.35 pg. The experimental characteristic mass value observed during the determination of the working range and detection limits of the AAS-HGA analytical technique was 0.41 pg. 1.6. Interferences 1.6.1. High concentrations of silicate interfere in determining cadmium by flame AAS (5.6.). However, silicates are not significantly soluble in the acid matrix used to prepare the samples. 1.6.2. Interferences, such as background absorption, are reduced to a minimum in the AAS-HGA analytical technique by taking full advantage of the Stabilized Temperature Platform Furnace (STPF) concept. STPF includes all of the following parameters (5.2.): a. Integrated Absorbance, b. Fast Instrument Electronics and Sampling Frequency, c. Background Correction, d. Maximum Power Heating, e. Atomization off the L'vov platform in a pyrolytically coated graphite tube, f. Gas Stop during Atomization, g. Use of Matrix Modifiers. 1.7. Toxicology (5.14.) Information listed within this section is synopsis of current knowledge of the physiological effects of cadmium and is not intended to be used as the basis for OSHA policy. IARC classifies cadmium and certain of its compounds as Group 2A carcinogens (probably carcinogenic to humans). Cadmium fume is intensely irritating to the respiratory tract. Workplace exposure to cadmium can cause both chronic and acute effects. Acute effects include tracheobronchitis, pneumonitis, and pulmonary edema. Chronic effects include anemia, rhinitis/anosmia, pulmonary emphysema, proteinuria and lung cancer. The primary target organs for chronic disease are the kidneys (non-carcinogenic) and the lungs (carcinogenic). 2. Sampling 2.1. Apparatus 2.1.1. Filter cassette unit for air sampling: A 37-mm diameter mixed cellulose ester membrane filter with a pore size of 0.8-µm contained in a 37-mm polystyrene two- or three-piece cassette filter holder (part no. MAWP 037 A0, Millipore Corp., Bedford, MA). The filter is supported with a cellulose backup pad. The cassette is sealed prior to use with a shrinkable gel band. 2.1.2. A calibrated personal sampling pump whose flow is determined to an accuracy of ±5% at the recommended flow rate with the filter cassette unit in line. 2.2. Procedure 2.2.1. Attach the prepared cassette to the calibrated sampling pump (the backup pad should face the pump) using flexible tubing. Place the sampling device on the employee such that air is sampled from the breathing zone. 2.2.2. Collect air samples at a flow rate of 2.0 L/min. If the filter does not become overloaded, a full-shift (at least seven hours) sample is strongly recommended for TWA and Action Level TWA measurements with a maximum air volume of 960 L. If overloading occurs, collect consecutive air samples for shorter sampling periods to cover the full workshift. 2.2.3. Replace the end plugs into the filter cassettes immediately after sampling. Record the sampling conditions. 2.2.4. Securely wrap each sample filter cassette end-to-end with an OSHA Form 21 sample seal. 2.2.5. Submit at least one blank sample with each set of air samples. The blank sample should be handled the same as the other samples except that no air is drawn through it. 2.2.6. Ship the samples to the laboratory for analysis as soon as possible in a suitable container designed to prevent damage in transit. 3. Analysis 3.1. Safety Precautions 3.1.1. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing and gloves at all times. 3.1.2. Handle acid solutions with care. Handle all cadmium samples and solutions with extra care (see Sect. 1.7.). Avoid their direct contact with work area surfaces, eyes, skin and clothes. Flush acid solutions which contact the skin or eyes with copious amounts of water. 3.1.3. Perform all acid digestions and acid dilutions in an exhaust hood while wearing a face shield. To avoid exposure to acid vapors, do not remove beakers containing concentrated acid solutions from the exhaust hood until they have returned to room temperature and have been diluted or emptied. 3.1.4. Exercise care when using laboratory glassware. Do not use chipped pipets, volumetric flasks, beakers or any glassware with sharp edges exposed in order to avoid the possibility of cuts or abrasions. 3.1.5. Never pipet by mouth. 3.1.6. Refer to the instrument instruction manuals and SOPs (5.8., 5.9.) for proper and safe operation of the atomic absorption spectrophotometer, graphite furnace atomizer and associated equipment. 3.1.7. Because metallic elements and other toxic substances are vaporized during AAS flame or graphite furnace atomizer operation, it is imperative that an exhaust vent be used. Always ensure that the exhaust system is operating properly during instrument use. 3.2. Apparatus for Sample and Standard Preparation 3.2.1. Hot plate, capable of reaching 150 °C, installed in an exhaust hood. 3.2.2. Phillips beakers, 125 mL. 3.2.3. Bottles, narrow-mouth, polyethylene or glass with leakproof caps: used for storage of standards and matrix modifier. 3.2.4. Volumetric flasks, volumetric pipets, beakers and other associated general laboratory glassware. 3.2.5. Forceps and other associated general laboratory equipment. 3.3. Apparatus for Flame AAS Analysis 3.3.1. Atomic absorption spectrophotometer consisting of a(an): Nebulizer and burner head Pressure regulating devices capable of maintaining constant oxidant and fuel pressures Optical system capable of isolating the desired wavelength of radiation (228.8 nm) Adjustable slit Light measuring and amplifying device Display, strip chart, or computer interface for indicating the amount of absorbed radiation Cadmium hollow cathode lamp or electrodeless discharge lamp (EDL) and power supply 3.3.2. Oxidant: compressed air, filtered to remove water, oil and other foreign substances. 3.3.3. Fuel: standard commercially available tanks of acetylene dissolved in acetone; tanks should be equipped with flash arresters. Caution: 3.3.4. Pressure-reducing valves: two gauge, two-stage pressure regulators to maintain fuel and oxidant pressures somewhat higher than the controlled operating pressures of the instrument. 3.3.5. Exhaust vent installed directly above the spectrophotometer burner head. 3.4. Apparatus for AAS-HGA Analysis 3.4.1. Atomic absorption spectrophotometer consisting of a(an): Heated graphite furnace atomizer (HGA) with argon purge system Pressure-regulating devices capable of maintaining constant argon purge pressure Optical system capable of isolating the desired wavelength of radiation (228.8 nm) Adjustable slit Light measuring and amplifying device Display, strip chart, or computer interface for indicating the amount of absorbed radiation (as integrated absorbance, peak area) Background corrector: Zeeman or deuterium arc. The Zeeman background corrector is recommended Cadmium hollow cathode lamp or electrodeless discharge lamp (EDL) and power supply Autosampler capable of accurately injecting 5 to 20 µL sample aliquots onto the L'vov Platform in a graphite tube 3.4.2. Pyrolytically coated graphite tubes containing solid, pyrolytic L'vov platforms. 3.4.3. Polyethylene sample cups, 2.0 to 2.5 mL, for use with the autosampler. 3.4.4. Inert purge gas for graphite furnace atomizer: compressed gas cylinder of purified argon. 3.4.5. Two gauge, two-stage pressure regulator for the argon gas cylinder. 3.4.6. Cooling water supply for graphite furnace atomizer. 3.4.7. Exhaust vent installed directly above the graphite furnace atomizer. 3.5. Reagents All reagents should be ACS analytical reagent grade or better. 3.5.1. Deionized water with a specific conductance of less than 10 µS. 3.5.2. Concentrated nitric acid, HNO 3 3.5.3. Concentrated hydrochloric acid, HCl. 3.5.4. Ammonium phosphate, monobasic, NH 4 2 4 3.5.5. Magnesium nitrate, Mg(NO 3 2 2 3.5.6. Diluting solution (4% HNO 3 3 3.5.7. Cadmium standard stock solution, 1,000 µg/mL: Use a commercially available certified 1,000 µg/mL cadmium standard or, alternatively, dissolve 1.0000 g of cadmium metal in a minimum volume of 1:1 HCl and dilute to 1 L with 4% HNO 3 3.5.8. Matrix modifier for AAS-HGA analysis: Dissolve 1.0 g NH 4 2 4 3 2 2 3 3.5.9 Nitric Acid, 1:1 HNO 3 2 3 2 3.5.10. Nitric acid, 10% v/v: Carefully add 100 mL of concentrated HNO 3 2 3.6. Glassware Preparation 3.6.1. Clean Phillips beakers by refluxing with 1:1 nitric acid on a hot plate in a fume hood. Thoroughly rinse with deionized water and invert the beakers to allow them to drain dry. 3.6.2. Rinse volumetric flasks and all other glassware with 10% nitric acid and deionized water prior to use. 3.7. Standard Preparation for Flame AAS Analysis 3.7.1. Dilute stock solutions: Prepare 1, 5, 10 and 100 µg/mL cadmium standard stock solutions by making appropriate serial dilutions of 1,000 µg/mL cadmium standard stock solution with the diluting solution described in Section 3.5.6. 3.7.2. Working standards: Prepare cadmium working standards in the range of 0.02 to 2.0 µg/mL by making appropriate serial dilutions of the dilute stock solutions with the same diluting solution. A suggested method of preparation of the working standards is given below. Working standard Std solution Aliquot Final vol. (µg/mL) (µg/mL) (mL) (mL) 0.02 1 10 500 0.05 5 5 500 0.1 10 5 500 0.2 10 10 500 0.5 10 25 500 1 100 5 500 2 100 10 500 Store the working standards in 500-mL, narrow-mouth polyethylene or glass bottles with leak proof caps. Prepare every twelve months. 3.8. Standard Preparation for AAS-HGA Analysis 3.8.1. Dilute stock solutions: Prepare 10, 100 and 1,000 ng/mL cadmium standard stock solutions by making appropriate ten-fold serial dilutions of the 1,000 µg/mL cadmium standard stock solution with the diluting solution described in Section 3.5.6. 3.8.2. Working standards: Prepare cadmium working standards in the range of 0.2 to 20 ng/mL by making appropriate serial dilutions of the dilute stock solutions with the same diluting solution. A suggested method of preparation of the working standards is given below. Working standard Std solution Aliquot Final vol. (ng/mL) (ng/mL) (mL) (mL) 0.2 10 2 100 0.5 10 5 100 1 10 10 100 2 100 2 100 5 100 5 100 10 100 10 100 20 1,000 2 100 Store the working standards in narrow-mouth polyethylene or glass bottles with leakproof caps. Prepare monthly. 3.9. Sample Preparation 3.9.1. Carefully transfer each sample filter with forceps from its filter cassette unit to a clean, separate 125-mL Phillips beaker along with any loose dust found in the cassette. Label each Phillips beaker with the appropriate sample number. 3.9.2. Digest the sample by adding 5 mL of concentrated nitric acid (HNO 3 3.9.3. After completing the HNO 3 3.9.4. Quantitatively transfer each cooled air sample solution from each Phillips beaker to a clean 10-mL volumetric flask. Dilute each flask to volume with deionized water and mix well. 3.10. Flame AAS Analysis Analyze all of the air samples for their cadmium content by flame atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS) according to the instructions given below. 3.10.1. Set up the atomic absorption spectrophotometer for the air/acetylene flame analysis of cadmium according to the SOP (5.8.) or the manufacturer's operational instructions. For the source lamp, use the cadmium hollow cathode or electrodeless discharge lamp operated at the manufacturer's recommended rating for continuous operation. Allow the lamp to warm up 10 to 20 min or until the energy output stabilizes. Optimize conditions such as lamp position, burner head alignment, fuel and oxidant flow rates, etc. See the SOP or specific instrument manuals for details. Instrumental parameters for the Perkin-Elmer Model 603 used in the validation of this method are given in Attachment 1. 3.10.2. Aspirate and measure the absorbance of a standard solution of cadmium. The standard concentration should be within the linear range. For the instrumentation used in the validation of this method a 2 µg/mL cadmium standard gives a net absorbance reading of about 0.350 abs. units (see Section 1.5.5.) when the instrument and the source lamp are performing to manufacturer specifications. 3.10.3. To increase instrument response, scale expand the absorbance reading of the aspirated 2 µg/mL working standard approximately four times. Increase the integration time to at least 3 seconds to reduce signal noise. 3.10.4. Autozero the instrument while aspirating a deionized water blank. Monitor the variation in the baseline absorbance reading (baseline noise) for a few minutes to insure that the instrument, source lamp and associated equipment are in good operating condition. 3.10.5. Aspirate the working standards and samples directly into the flame and record their absorbance readings. Aspirate the deionized water blank immediately after every standard or sample to correct for and monitor any baseline drift and noise. Record the baseline absorbance reading of each deionized water blank. Label each standard and sample reading and its accompanying baseline reading. 3.10.6. It is recommended that the entire series of working standards be analyzed at the beginning and end of the analysis of a set of samples to establish a concentration-response curve, ensure that the standard readings agree with each other and are reproducible. Also, analyze a working standard after every five or six samples to monitor the performance of the spectrophotometer. Standard readings should agree within ±10 to 15% of the readings obtained at the beginning of the analysis. 3.10.7. Bracket the sample readings with standards during the analysis. If the absorbance reading of a sample is above the absorbance reading of the highest working standard, dilute the sample with diluting solution and reanalyze. Use the appropriate dilution factor in the calculations. 3.10.8. Repeat the analysis of approximately 10% of the samples for a check of precision. 3.10.9. If possible, analyze quality control samples from an independent source as a check on analytical recovery and precision. 3.10.10. Record the final instrument settings at the end of the analysis. Date and label the output. 3.11. AAS-HGA Analysis Initially analyze all of the air samples for their cadmium content by flame atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS) according to the instructions given in Section 3.10. If the concentration of cadmium in a sample solution is less than three times the quantitative detection limit [0.04 µg/mL (40 ng/mL) for the instrumentation used in the validation] and the sample results are to be averaged with other samples for TWA calculations, proceed with the AAS-HGA analysis of the sample as described below. 3.11.1. Set up the atomic absorption spectrophotometer and HGA for flameless atomic absorption analysis of cadmium according to the SOP (5.9.) or the manufacturer's operational instructions and allow the instrument to stabilize. The graphite furnace atomizer is equipped with a pyrolytically coated graphite tube containing a pyrolytic platform. For the source lamp, use a cadmium hollow cathode or electrodeless discharge lamp operated at the manufacturer's recommended setting for graphite furnace operation. The Zeeman background corrector and EDL are recommended for use with the L'vov platform. Instrumental parameters for the Perkin-Elmer Model 5100 spectrophotometer and Zeeman HGA-600 graphite furnace used in the validation of this method are given in Attachment 2. 3.11.2. Optimize the energy reading of the spectrophotometer at 228.8 nm by adjusting the lamp position and the wavelength according to the manufacturer's instructions. 3.11.3. Set up the autosampler to inject a 5-µL aliquot of the working standard, sample or reagent blank solution onto the L'vov platform along with a 10-µL overlay of the matrix modifier. 3.11.4. Analyze the reagent blank (diluting solution, Section 3.5.6.) and then autozero the instrument before starting the analysis of a set of samples. It is recommended that the reagent blank be analyzed several times during the analysis to assure the integrated absorbance (peak area) reading remains at or near zero. 3.11.5. Analyze a working standard approximately midway in the linear portion of the working standard range two or three times to check for reproducibility and sensitivity (see sections 1.5.5. and 1.5.6.) before starting the analysis of samples. Calculate the experimental characteristic mass value from the average integrated absorbance reading and injection volume of the analyzed working standard. Compare this value to the manufacturer's suggested value as a check of proper instrument operation. 3.11.6. Analyze the reagent blank, working standard, and sample solutions. Record and label the peak area (abs-sec) readings and the peak and background peak profiles on the printer/plotter. 3.11.7. It is recommended the entire series of working standards be analyzed at the beginning and end of the analysis of a set of samples. Establish a concentration-response curve and ensure standard readings agree with each other and are reproducible. Also, analyze a working standard after every five or six samples to monitor the performance of the system. Standard readings should agree within ±15% of the readings obtained at the beginning of the analysis. 3.11.8. Bracket the sample readings with standards during the analysis. If the peak area reading of a sample is above the peak area reading of the highest working standard, dilute the sample with the diluting solution and reanalyze. Use the appropriate dilution factor in the calculations. 3.11.9. Repeat the analysis of approximately 10% of the samples for a check of precision. 3.11.10. If possible, analyze quality control samples from an independent source as a check of analytical recovery and precision. 3.11.11. Record the final instrument settings at the end of the analysis. Date and label the output. 3.12. Calculations Note: Standards used for HGA analysis are in ng/mL. Total amounts of cadmium from calculations will be in ng (not µg) unless a prior conversion is made. 3.12.1. Correct for baseline drift and noise in flame AAS analysis by subtracting each baseline absorbance reading from its corresponding working standard or sample absorbance reading to obtain the net absorbance reading for each standard and sample. 3.12.2. Use a least squares regression program to plot a concentration-response curve of net absorbance reading (or peak area for HGA analysis) versus concentration (µg/mL or ng/mL) of cadmium in each working standard. 3.12.3. Determine the concentration (µg/mL or ng/mL) of cadmium in each sample from the resulting concentration-response curve. If the concentration of cadmium in a sample solution is less than three times the quantitative detection limit [0.04 µg/mL (40 ng/mL) for the instrumentation used in the validation of the method] and if consecutive samples were taken on one employee and the sample results are to be averaged with other samples to determine a single TWA, reanalyze the sample by AAS-HGA as described in Section 3.11. and report the AAS-HGA analytical results. 3.12.4. Calculate the total amount (µg or ng) of cadmium in each sample from the sample solution volume (mL): W = (C)(sample vol, mL)(DF) Where: W = Total cadmium in sample C = Calculated concentration of cadmium DF = Dilution Factor (if applicable) 3.12.5. Make a blank correction for each air sample by subtracting the total amount of cadmium in the corresponding blank sample from the total amount of cadmium in the sample. 3.12.6. Calculate the concentration of cadmium in an air sample (mg/m 3 3 mg/m 3 bc or µg/m 3 bc Where: W bc 4. Backup Data 4.1. Introduction 4.1.1. The purpose of this evaluation is to determine the analytical method recovery, working standard range, and qualitative and quantitative detection limits of the two atomic absorption analytical techniques included in this method. The evaluation consisted of the following experiments: 1. An analysis of 24 samples (six samples each at 0.1, 0.5, 1 and 2 times the TWA-PEL) for the analytical method recovery study of the flame AAS analytical technique. 2. An analysis of 18 samples (six samples each at 0.5, 1 and 2 times the Action Level TWA-PEL) for the analytical method recovery study of the AAS-HGA analytical technique. 3. Multiple analyses of the reagent blank and a series of standard solutions to determine the working standard range and the qualitative and quantitative detection limits for both atomic absorption analytical techniques. 4.1.2. The analytical method recovery results at all test levels were calculated from concentration-response curves and statistically examined for outliers at the 99% confidence level. Possible outliers were determined using the Treatment of Outliers test (5.10.). In addition, the sample results of the two analytical techniques, at 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 times their target concentrations, were tested for homogeneity of variances also at the 99% confidence level. Homogeneity of the coefficients of variation was determined using the Bartlett's test (5.11.). The overall analytical error (OAE) at the 95% confidence level was calculated using the equation (5.12.): OAE = ±[| Bias| + (1.96)(CV 1 4.1.3. A derivation of the International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC) detection limit equation (5.13.) was used to determine the qualitative and quantitative detection limits for both atomic absorption analytical techniques: C ld Where: C ld k = 3 for the Qualitative Detection Limit at the 99.86% Confidence Level = 10 for the Quantitative Detection Limit at the 99.99% Confidence Level. sd = standard deviation of the reagent blank (Rbl) readings. m = analytical sensitivity or slope as calculated by linear regression. 4.1.4. Collection efficiencies of metallic fume and dust atmospheres on 0.8-µm mixed cellulose ester membrane filters are well documented and have been shown to be excellent (5.11.). Since elemental cadmium and the cadmium component of cadmium compounds are nonvolatile, stability studies of cadmium spiked MCEF samples were not performed. 4.2. Equipment 4.2.1. A Perkin-Elmer (PE) Model 603 spectrophotometer equipped with a manual gas control system, a stainless steel nebulizer, a burner mixing chamber, a flow spoiler and a 10 cm. (one-slot) burner head was used in the experimental validation of the flame AAS analytical technique. A PE cadmium hollow cathode lamp, operated at the manufacturer's recommended current setting for continuous operation (4 mA), was used as the source lamp. Instrument parameters are listed in Attachment 1. 4.2.2. A PE Model 5100 spectrophotometer, Zeeman HGA-600 graphite furnace atomizer and AS-60 HGA autosampler were used in the experimental validation of the AAS-HGA analytical technique. The spectrophotometer was equipped with a PE Series 7700 professional computer and Model PR-310 printer. A PE System 2 cadmium electrodeless discharge lamp, operated at the manufacturer's recommended current setting for modulated operation (170 mA), was used as the source lamp. Instrument parameters are listed in Attachment 2. 4.3. Reagents 4.3.1. J.T. Baker Chem. Co. (Analyzed grade) concentrated nitric acid, 69.0-71.0%, and concentrated hydrochloric acid, 36.5-38.0%, were used to prepare the samples and standards. 4.3.2. Ammonium phosphate, monobasic, NH 4 2 4 3 2 2 4.4. Standard Preparation for Flame AAS Analysis 4.4.1. Dilute stock solutions: Prepared 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 and 100 µg/mL cadmium standard stock solutions by making appropriate serial dilutions of a commercially available 1,000 µg/mL cadmium standard stock solution (RICCA Chemical Co., Lot# A102) with the diluting solution (4% HNO 3 4.4.2. Analyzed Standards: Prepared cadmium standards in the range of 0.001 to 2.0 µg/mL by pipetting 2 to 10 mL of the appropriate dilute cadmium stock solution into a 100-mL volumetric flask and diluting to volume with the diluting solution. (See Section 3.7.2.) 4.5. Standard Preparation for AAS-HGA Analysis 4.5.1. Dilute stock solutions: Prepared 1, 10, 100 and 1,000 ng/mL cadmium standard stock solutions by making appropriate serial dilutions of a commercially available 1,000 µg/mL cadmium standard stock solution (J.T. Baker Chemical Co., Instra-analyzed, Lot# D22642) with the diluting solution (4% HNO 3 4.5.2. Analyzed Standards: Prepared cadmium standards in the range of 0.1 to 40 ng/mL by pipetting 2 to 10 mL of the appropriate dilute cadmium stock solution into a 100-mL volumetric flask and diluting to volume with the diluting solution. (See Section 3.8.2.) 4.6. Detection Limits and Standard Working Range for Flame AAS Analysis 4.6.1. Analyzed the reagent blank solution and the entire series of cadmium standards in the range of 0.001 to 2.0 µg/mL three to six times according to the instructions given in Section 3.10. The diluting solution (4% HNO 3 4.6.2. The net absorbance readings of the reagent blank and the low concentration Cd standards from 0.001 to 0.1 µg/mL and the statistical analysis of the results are shown in Table I. The standard deviation, sd, of the six net absorbance readings of the reagent blank is 1.05 abs. units. The slope, m, as calculated by a linear regression plot of the net absorbance readings (shown in Table II) of the 0.02 to 1.0 µg/mL cadmium standards versus their concentration is 772.7 abs. units/(µg/mL). 4.6.3. If these values for sd and the slope, m, are used in Eqn. 1 (Sect. 4.1.3.), the qualitative and quantitative detection limits as determined by the IUPAC Method are: C ld = 0.0041 µg/mL for the qualitative detection limit. C ld = 0.014 µg/mL for the quantitative detection limit. The qualitative and quantitative detection limits for the flame AAS analytical technique are 0.041 µg and 0.14 µg cadmium, respectively, for a 10 mL solution volume. These correspond, respectively, to 0.2 µg/m 3 3 4.6.4. The recommended Cd standard working range for flame AAS analysis is 0.02 to 2.0 µg/mL. The net absorbance readings of the reagent blank and the recommended working range standards and the statistical analysis of the results are shown in Table II. The standard of lowest concentration in the working range, 0.02 µg/mL, is slightly greater than the calculated quantitative detection limit, 0.014 µg/mL. The standard of highest concentration in the working range, 2.0 µg/mL, is at the upper end of the linear working range suggested by the manufacturer (5.6.). Although the standard net absorbance readings are not strictly linear at concentrations above 0.5 µg/mL, the deviation from linearity is only about 10% at the upper end of the recommended standard working range. The deviation from linearity is probably caused by the four-fold expansion of the signal suggested in the method. As shown in Table II, the precision of the standard net absorbance readings are excellent throughout the recommended working range; the relative standard deviations of the readings range from 0.009 to 0.064. 4.7. Detection Limits and Standard Working Range for AAS-HGA Analysis 4.7.1. Analyzed the reagent blank solution and the entire series of cadmium standards in the range of 0.1 to 40 ng/mL according to the instructions given in Section 3.11. The diluting solution (4% HNO 3 4.7.2. The peak area (abs-sec) readings of the reagent blank and the low concentration Cd standards from 0.1 to 2.0 ng/mL and statistical analysis of the results are shown in Table III. Five of the reagent blank peak area readings were zero and the sixth reading was 1 and was an outlier. The near lack of a blank signal does not satisfy a strict interpretation of the IUPAC method for determining the detection limits. Therefore, the standard deviation of the six peak area readings of the 0.2 ng/mL cadmium standard, 0.75 abs-sec, was used to calculate the detection limits by the IUPAC method. The slope, m, as calculated by a linear regression plot of the peak area (abs-sec) readings (shown in Table IV) of the 0.2 to 10 ng/mL cadmium standards versus their concentration is 51.5 abs-sec/(ng/mL). 4.7.3. If 0.75 abs-sec (sd) and 51.5 abs-sec/(ng/mL) (m) are used in Eqn. 1 (Sect. 4.1.3.), the qualitative and quantitative detection limits as determined by the IUPAC method are: C ld = 0.044 ng/mL for the qualitative detection limit. C ld The qualitative and quantitative detection limits for the AAS-HGA analytical technique are 0.44 ng and 1.5 ng cadmium, respectively, for a 10 mL solution volume. These correspond, respectively, to 0.007 µg/m 3 3 4.7.4. The peak area (abs-sec) readings of the Cd standards from 0.2 to 40 ng/mL and the statistical analysis of the results are given in Table IV. The recommended standard working range for AAS-HGA analysis is 0.2 to 20 ng/mL. The standard of lowest concentration in the recommended working range is slightly greater than the calculated quantitative detection limit, 0.15 ng/mL. The deviation from linearity of the peak area readings of the 20 ng/mL standard, the highest concentration standard in the recommended working range, is approximately 10%. The deviations from linearity of the peak area readings of the 30 and 40 ng/mL standards are significantly greater than 10%. As shown in Table IV, the precision of the peak area readings are satisfactory throughout the recommended working range; the relative standard deviations of the readings range from 0.025 to 0.083. 4.8. Analytical Method Recovery for Flame AAS Analysis 4.8.1. Four sets of spiked MCEF samples were prepared by injecting 20 µL of 10, 50, 100 and 200 µg/mL dilute cadmium stock solutions on 37 mm diameter filters (part no. AAWP 037 00, Millipore Corp., Bedford, MA) with a calibrated micropipet. The dilute stock solutions were prepared by making appropriate serial dilutions of a commercially available 1,000 µg/mL cadmium standard stock solution (RICCA Chemical Co., Lot# A102) with the diluting solution (4% HNO 3 3 4.8.2. The air-dried spiked filters were digested and analyzed for their cadmium content by flame atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS) following the procedure described in Section 3. The 0.02 to 2.0µg/mL cadmium standards (the suggested working range) were used in the analysis of the spiked filters. 4.8.3. The results of the analysis are given in Table V. One result at 0.5 times the TWA PEL target concentration was an outlier and was excluded from statistical analysis. Experimental justification for rejecting it is that the outlier value was probably due to a spiking error. The coefficients of variation for the three test levels at 0.5 to 2.0 times the TWA PEL target concentration passed the Bartlett's test and were pooled. 4.8.4. The average recovery of the six spiked filter samples at 0.1 times the TWA PEL target concentration was 118.2% with a coefficient of variation (CV 1 1 4.9. Analytical Method Recovery for AAS-HGA Analysis 4.9.1. Three sets of spiked MCEF samples were prepared by injecting 15µL of 5, 10 and 20 µg/mL dilute cadmium stock solutions on 37 mm diameter filters (part no. AAWP 037 00, Millipore Corp., Bedford, MA) with a calibrated micropipet. The dilute stock solutions were prepared by making appropriate serial dilutions of a commercially available certified 1,000 µg/mL cadmium standard stock solution (Fisher Chemical Co., Lot# 913438-24) with the diluting solution (4% HNO 3 3 4.9.2. The air-dried spiked filters were digested and analyzed for their cadmium content by flameless atomic absorption spectroscopy using a heated graphite furnace atomizer following the procedure described in Section 3. A five-fold dilution of the spiked filter samples at 2 times the Action Level TWA was made prior to their analysis. The 0.05 to 20 ng/mL cadmium standards were used in the analysis of the spiked filters. 4.9.3. The results of the analysis are given in Table VI. There were no outliers. The coefficients of variation for the three test levels at 0.5 to 2.0 times the Action Level TWA PEL passed the Bartlett's test and were pooled. The average recovery of the spiked filter samples was 94.2% with a pooled coefficient of variation (CV 1 4.10. Conclusions The experiments performed in this evaluation show the two atomic absorption analytical techniques included in this method to be precise and accurate and have sufficient sensitivity to measure airborne cadmium over a broad range of exposure levels and sampling periods. 5. References 5.1. Slavin, W. Graphite Furnace AAS—A Source Book; Perkin-Elmer Corp., Spectroscopy Div.: Ridgefield, CT, 1984; p. 18 and pp. 83-90. 5.2. Grosser, Z., Ed.; Techniques in Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry; Perkin-Elmer Corp., Spectroscopy Div.: Ridgefield, CT, 1985. 5.3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Salt Lake Technical Center: Metal and Metalloid Particulate in Workplace Atmospheres (Atomic Absorption) (USDOL/OSHA Method No. ID-121). In OSHA Analytical Methods Manual 2nd ed. Cincinnati, OH: American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, 1991. 5.4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Salt Lake Technical Center: Metal and Metalloid Particulate in Workplace Atmospheres (ICP) (USDOL/OSHA Method No. ID-125G). In OSHA Analytical Methods Manual 2nd ed. Cincinnati, OH: American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, 1991. 5.5. Windholz, M., Ed.; The Merck Index, 10th ed.; Merck & Co.: Rahway, NJ, 1983. 5.6. Analytical Methods for Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry, The Perkin-Elmer Corporation: Norwalk, CT, 1982. 5.7. Slavin, W., D.C. Manning, G. Carnrick, and E. Pruszkowska: Properties of the Cadmium Determination with the Platform Furnace and Zeeman Background Correction. Spectrochim. Acta 38B:1157-1170 (1983). 5.8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Salt Lake Technical Center: Standard Operating Procedure for Atomic Absorption. Salt Lake City, UT: USDOL/OSHA-SLTC, In progress. 5.9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Salt Lake Technical Center: AAS-HGA Standard Operating Procedure. Salt Lake City, UT: USDOL/OSHA-SLTC, In progress. 5.10. Mandel, J.: Accuracy and Precision, Evaluation and Interpretation of Analytical Results, The Treatment of Outliers. In Treatise On Analytical Chemistry, 2nd ed., Vol.1, edited by I. M. Kolthoff and P. J. Elving. New York: John Wiley and Sons, 1978. pp. 282-285. 5.11. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health: Documentation of the NIOSH Validation Tests by D. Taylor, R. Kupel, and J. Bryant (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 77-185). Cincinnati, OH: National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, 1977. 5.12. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Analytical Laboratory: Precision and Accuracy Data Protocol for Laboratory Validations. In OSHA Analytical Methods Manual 1st ed. Cincinnati, OH: American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (Pub. No. ISBN: 0-936712-66-X), 1985. 5.13. Long, G.L. and J.D. Winefordner: Limit of Detection—A Closer Look at the IUPAC Definition. Anal.Chem. 55:712A-724A (1983). 5.14. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists: Documentation of Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices. 5th ed. Cincinnati, OH: American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, 1986. Table I—Cd Detection Limit Study [Flame AAS Analysis] STD (µg/mL) Absorbance reading at 228.8 nm Statistical analysis Reagent blank 5 2 n = 6. 0.001 6 6 n = 6. 0.002 5 7 n = 6. 0.005 7 7 n = 6. 0.010 10 9 n = 6. 0.020 20 23 n = 6. 0.050 42 42 n = 6. 0.10 84 n = 3. Table II—Cd Standard Working Range Study [Flame AAS Analysis] STD (µg/mL) Absorbance reading at 228.8 nm Statistical analysis Reagent blank 5 2 n = 6. 0.020 20 23 n = 6. 0.050 42 42 n = 6. 0.10 84 n = 3. 0.20 161 n = 3. 0.50 391 n = 3. 1.00 760 n = 3. 2.00 1416 n = 3. Table III—Cd Detection Limit Study [AAS-HGA Analysis] STD (ng/mL) Peak area readings × 10 3 Statistical analysis Reagent blank 0 0 n = 6. 0.1 8 6 n = 6. 0.2 11 13 n = 6. 0.5 28 33 n = 6. 1.0 52 55 n = 6. 2.0 101 112 n = 6. Table IV—Cd Standard Working Range Study [AAS-HGA Analysis] STD (ng/mL) Peak area readings × 10 3 Statistical analysis 0.2 11 13 n = 6. 0.5 28 33 n = 6. 1.0 52 55 n = 6. 2.0 101 112 n = 6. 5.0 247 265 n = 6. 10.0 495 520 n = 6. 20.0 950 953 n = 6. 30.0 1269 1291 n = 6. 40.0 1505 1567 n = 6. Table V—Analytical Method Recovery [Flame AAS Analysis] Test level 0.5 × Percent rec. µg taken 1.0 × Percent rec. µg taken 2.0 × Percent rec. µg taken µg found µg found µg found 1.00 1.0715 107.2 2.00 2.0688 103.4 4.00 4.1504 103.8 1.00 1.0842 108.4 2.00 2.0174 100.9 4.00 4.1108 102.8 1.00 1.0842 108.4 2.00 2.0431 102.2 4.00 4.0581 101.5 1.00 *1.0081 *100.8 2.00 2.0431 102.2 4.00 4.0844 102.1 1.00 1.0715 107.2 2.00 2.0174 100.9 4.00 4.1504 103.8 1.00 1.0842 108.4 2.00 2.0045 100.2 4.00 4.1899 104.7 n= 5 6 6 mean = 107.9 101.6 103.1 std dev = 0.657 1.174 1.199 CV 1 0.006 0.011 0.012 CV 1 * Rejected as an outlier—this value did not pass the outlier T-test at the 99% confidence level. Test level 0.1 × Percent rec. µg taken µg found 0.200 0.2509 125.5 0.200 0.2509 125.5 0.200 0.2761 138.1 0.200 0.2258 112.9 0.200 0.2258 112.9 0.200 0.1881 94.1 n= 6 mean = 118.2 std dev = 15.1 CV 1 0.128 Table VI—Analytical Method Recovery [AAS-HGA analysis] Test level 0.5 × Percent rec. ng taken 1.0 × Percent rec. ng taken 2.0 × Percent rec. ng taken ng found ng found ng found 75 71.23 95.0 150 138.00 92.0 300 258.43 86.1 75 71.47 95.3 150 138.29 92.2 300 258.46 86.2 75 70.02 93.4 150 136.30 90.9 300 280.55 93.5 75 77.34 103.1 150 146.62 97.7 300 288.34 96.1 75 78.32 104.4 150 145.17 96.8 300 261.74 87.2 75 71.96 95.9 150 144.88 96.6 300 277.22 92.4 n= 6 6 6 mean = 97.9 94.4 90.3 std dev = 4.66 2.98 4.30 CV 1 0.048 0.032 0.048 CV 1 Attachment 1 Instrumental Parameters for Flame AAS Analysis Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer (Perkin-Elmer Model 603) Flame: Air/Acetylene—lean, blue Oxidant Flow: 55 Fuel Flow: 32 Wavelength: 228.8 nm Slit: 4 (0.7 nm) Range: UV Signal: Concentration (4 exp) Integration Time: 3 sec Attachment 2 Instrumental Parameters for HGA Analysis Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer (Perkin-Elmer Model 5100) Signal Type: Zeeman AA Slitwidth: 0.7 nm Wavelength: 228.8 nm Measurement: Peak Area Integration Time: 6.0 sec BOC Time: 5 sec BOC = Background Offset Correction. Zeeman Graphite Furnace (Perkin-Elmer Model HGA-600) Step Ramp time (sec) Hold time (sec) Temp. (°C) Argon flow (mL/min) Read (sec) 1) Predry 5 10 90 300 2) Dry 30 10 140 300 3) Char 10 20 900 300 4) Cool Down 1 8 30 300 5) Atomize 0 5 1600 0 −1 6) Burnout 1 8 2500 300 Appendix F to § 1910.1027—Nonmandatory Protocol for Biological Monitoring 1.00 Introduction Under the final OSHA cadmium rule (29 CFR part 1910), monitoring of biological specimens and several periodic medical examinations are required for eligible employees. These medical examinations are to be conducted regularly, and medical monitoring is to include the periodic analysis of cadmium in blood (CDB), cadmium in urine (CDU) and beta-2-microglobulin in urine (B2MU). As CDU and B2MU are to be normalized to the concentration of creatinine in urine (CRTU), then CRTU must be analyzed in conjunction with CDU and B2MU analyses. The purpose of this protocol is to provide procedures for establishing and maintaining the quality of the results obtained from the analyses of CDB, CDU and B2MU by commercial laboratories. Laboratories conforming to the provisions of this nonmandatory protocol shall be known as “participating laboratories.” The biological monitoring data from these laboratories will be evaluated by physicians responsible for biological monitoring to determine the conditions under which employees may continue to work in locations exhibiting airborne-cadmium concentrations at or above defined actions levels (see paragraphs (l)(3) and (l)(4) of the final rule). These results also may be used to support a decision to remove workers from such locations. Under the medical monitoring program for cadmium, blood and urine samples must be collected at defined intervals from workers by physicians responsible for medical monitoring; these samples are sent to commercial laboratories that perform the required analyses and report results of these analyses to the responsible physicians. To ensure the accuracy and reliability of these laboratory analyses, the laboratories to which samples are submitted should participate in an ongoing and efficacious proficiency testing program. Availability of proficiency testing programs may vary with the analyses performed. To test proficiency in the analysis of CDB, CDU and B2MU, a laboratory should participate either in the interlaboratory comparison program operated by the Centre de Toxicologie du Quebec (CTQ) or an equivalent program. (Currently, no laboratory in the U.S. performs proficiency testing on CDB, CDU or B2MU.) Under this program, CTQ sends participating laboratories 18 samples of each analyte (CDB, CDU and/or B2MU) annually for analysis. Participating laboratories must return the results of these analyses to CTQ within four to five weeks after receiving the samples. The CTQ program pools analytical results from many participating laboratories to derive consensus mean values for each of the samples distributed. Results reported by each laboratory then are compared against these consensus means for the analyzed samples to determine the relative performance of each laboratory. The proficiency of a participating laboratory is a function of the extent of agreement between results submitted by the participating laboratory and the consensus values for the set of samples analyzed. Proficiency testing for CRTU analysis (which should be performed with CDU and B2MU analyses to evaluate the results properly) also is recommended. In the U.S., only the College of American Pathologists (CAP) currently conducts CRTU proficiency testing; participating laboratories should be accredited for CRTU analysis by the CAP. Results of the proficiency evaluations will be forwarded to the participating laboratory by the proficiency-testing laboratory, as well as to physicians designated by the participating laboratory to receive this information. In addition, the participating laboratory should, on request, submit the results of their internal Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) program for each analytic procedure ( i.e. QA/QC information, along with the actual biological specimen measurements, should be provided to the responsible physician using standard formats. These physicians then may collate the QA/QC information with proficiency test results to compare the relative performance of laboratories, as well as to facilitate evaluation of the worker monitoring data. This information supports decisions made by the physician with regard to the biological monitoring program, and for mandating medical removal. This protocol describes procedures that may be used by the responsible physicians to identify laboratories most likely to be proficient in the analysis of samples used in the biological monitoring of cadmium; also provided are procedures for record keeping and reporting by laboratories participating in proficiency testing programs, and recommendations to assist these physicians in interpreting analytical results determined by participating laboratories. As the collection and handling of samples affects the quality of the data, recommendations are made for these tasks. Specifications for analytical methods to be used in the medical monitoring program are included in this protocol as well. In conclusion, this document is intended as a supplement to characterize and maintain the quality of medical monitoring data collected under the final cadmium rule promulgated by OSHA (29 CFR part 1910). OSHA has been granted authority under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 to protect workers from the effects of exposure to hazardous substances in the work place and to mandate adequate monitoring of workers to determine when adverse health effects may be occurring. This nonmandatory protocol is intended to provide guidelines and recommendations to improve the accuracy and reliability of the procedures used to analyze the biological samples collected as part of the medical monitoring program for cadmium. 2.0 Definitions When the terms below appear in this protocol, use the following definitions. Accuracy: Arithmetic Mean: Blind Samples: Coefficient of Variation: Compliance Samples: Control Charts: Control Limits: Control Samples: F/T: Geometric Mean: Geometric Standard Deviation: Limit of Detection: Mean: arithmetic mean arithmetic mean Performance: Pools: Precision: Proficiency: Proficiency Samples: Quality or Data Quality: Quality Control (QC) Samples: Sensitivity: Standard Deviation: Standards: Target Value: 2 Theoretical Value (or Theoretical Amount): Value or Measurement Value: Variance: 3.0 Protocol This protocol provides procedures for characterizing and maintaining the quality of analytic results derived for the medical monitoring program mandated for workers under the final cadmium rule. 3.1 Overview The goal of this protocol is to assure that medical monitoring data are of sufficient quality to facilitate proper interpretation. The data quality objectives (DQOs) defined for the medical monitoring program are summarized in Table 1. Based on available information, the DQOs presented in Table 1 should be achievable by the majority of laboratories offering the required analyses commercially; OSHA recommends that only laboratories meeting these DQOs be used for the analysis of biological samples collected for monitoring cadmium exposure. Table 1—Recommended Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) for the Cadmium Medical Monitoring Program Analyte/concentration pool Limit of detection Precision (CV) (%) Accuracy Cadmium in blood 0.5 µg/l ±1 µg/l or 15% of the mean. ≤2 µg/l 40 >2µg/l 20 Cadmium in urine 0.5 µg/g creatinine ±1 µg/l or 15% of the mean. ≤2 µg/l creatinine 40 >2µg/l creatinine 20 β-2-microglobulin in urine: 100 µg/g creatine 100 µg/g creatinine 5 ±15% of the mean. To satisfy the DQOs presented in Table 1, OSHA provides the following guidelines: 1. Procedures for the collection and handling of blood and urine are specified (Section 3.4.1 of this protocol); 2. Preferred analytic methods for the analysis of CDB, CDU and B2MU are defined (and a method for the determination of CRTU also is specified since CDU and B2MU results are to be normalized to the level of CRTU). 3. Procedures are described for identifying laboratories likely to provide the required analyses in an accurate and reliable manner; 4. These guidelines (Sections 3.2.1 to 3.2.3, and Section 3.3) include recommendations regarding internal QA/QC programs for participating laboratories, as well as levels of proficiency through participation in an interlaboratory proficiency program; 5. Procedures for QA/QC record keeping (Section 3.3.2), and for reporting QC/QA results are described (Section 3.3.3); and, 6. Procedures for interpreting medical monitoring results are specified (Section 3.4.3). Methods recommended for the biological monitoring of eligible workers are: 1. The method of Stoeppler and Brandt (1980) for CDB determinations (limit of detection: 0.5 µg/l); 2. The method of Pruszkowska et al. (1983) for CDU determinations (limit of detection: 0.5 µg/l of urine); and, 3. The Pharmacia Delphia test kit (Pharmacia 1990) for the determination of B2MU (limit of detection: 100 µg/l urine). Because both CDU and B2MU should be reported in µg/g CRTU, an independent determination of CRTU is recommended. Thus, both the OSHA Salt Lake City Technical Center (OSLTC) method (OSHA, no date) and the Jaffe method (Du Pont, no date) for the determination of CRTU are specified under this protocol ( i.e. Laboratories using alternate methods should submit sufficient data to the responsible physicians demonstrating that the alternate method is capable of satisfying the defined data quality objectives of the program. Such laboratories also should submit a QA/QC plan that documents the performance of the alternate method in a manner entirely equivalent to the QA/QC plans proposed in Section 3.3.1. 3.2 Duties of the Responsible Physician The responsible physician will evaluate biological monitoring results provided by participating laboratories to determine whether such laboratories are proficient and have satisfied the QA/QC recommendations. In determining which laboratories to employ for this purpose, these physicians should review proficiency and QA/QC data submitted to them by the participating laboratories. Participating laboratories should demonstrate proficiency for each analyte (CDU, CDB and B2MU) sampled under the biological monitoring program. Participating laboratories involved in analyzing CDU and B2MU also should demonstrate proficiency for CRTU analysis, or provide evidence of a contract with a laboratory proficient in CRTU analysis. 3.2.1 Recommendations for Selecting Among Existing Laboratories OSHA recommends that existing laboratories providing commercial analyses for CDB, CDU and/or B2MU for the medical monitoring program satisfy the following criteria: 1. Should have performed commercial analyses for the appropriate analyte (CDB, CDU and/or B2MU) on a regular basis over the last 2 years; 2. Should provide the responsible physician with an internal QA/QC plan; 3. If performing CDU or B2MU analyses, the participating laboratory should be accredited by the CAP for CRTU analysis, and should be enrolled in the corresponding CAP survey (note that alternate credentials may be acceptable, but acceptability is to be determined by the responsible physician); and, 4. Should have enrolled in the CTQ interlaboratory comparison program for the appropriate analyte (CDB, CDU and/or B2MU). Participating laboratories should submit appropriate documentation demonstrating compliance with the above criteria to the responsible physician. To demonstrate compliance with the first of the above criteria, participating laboratories should submit the following documentation for each analyte they plan to analyze (note that each document should cover a period of at least 8 consecutive quarters, and that the period designated by the term “regular analyses” is at least once a quarter): 1. Copies of laboratory reports providing results from regular analyses of the appropriate analyte (CDB, CDU and/or B2MU); 2. Copies of 1 or more signed and executed contracts for the provision of regular analyses of the appropriate analyte (CDB, CDU and/or B2MU); or, 3. Copies of invoices sent to 1 or more clients requesting payment for the provision of regular analyses of the appropriate analyte (CDB, CDU and/or B2MU). Whatever the form of documentation submitted, the specific analytic procedures conducted should be identified directly. The forms that are copied for submission to the responsible physician also should identify the laboratory which provided these analyses. To demonstrate compliance with the second of the above criteria, a laboratory should submit to the responsible physician an internal QA/QC plan detailing the standard operating procedures to be adopted for satisfying the recommended QA/QC procedures for the analysis of each specific analyte (CDB, CDU and/or B2MU). Procedures for internal QA/QC programs are detailed in Section 3.3.1 below. To satisfy the third of the above criteria, laboratories analyzing for CDU or B2MU also should submit a QA/QC plan for creatinine analysis (CRTU); the QA/QC plan and characterization analyses for CRTU must come from the laboratory performing the CRTU analysis, even if the CRTU analysis is being performed by a contract laboratory. Laboratories enrolling in the CTQ program (to satisfy the last of the above criteria) must remit, with the enrollment application, an initial fee of approximately $100 per analyte. (Note that this fee is only an estimate, and is subject to revision without notice.) Laboratories should indicate on the application that they agree to have proficiency test results sent by the CTQ directly to the physicians designated by participating laboratories. Once a laboratory's application is processed by the CTQ, the laboratory will be assigned a code number which will be provided to the laboratory on the initial confirmation form, along with identification of the specific analytes for which the laboratory is participating. Confirmation of participation will be sent by the CTQ to physicians designated by the applicant laboratory. 3.2.2 Recommended Review of Laboratories Selected To Perform Analyses Six months after being selected initially to perform analyte determinations, the status of participating laboratories should be reviewed by the responsible physicians. Such reviews should then be repeated every 6 months or whenever additional proficiency or QA/QC documentation is received (whichever occurs first). As soon as the responsible physician has received the CTQ results from the first 3 rounds of proficiency testing ( i.e. The status of each participating laboratory should be determined for each analyte ( i.e. To continue participation for CDU and/or B2MU analyse, laboratories also should either maintain accreditation for CRTU analysis in the CAP program and participate in the CAP surveys, or they should contract the CDU and B2MU analyses to a laboratory which satisfies these requirements (or which can provide documentation of accreditation/participation in an equivalent program). The performance requirement for CDB analysis is defined as an analytical result within ±1 µg/l blood or 15% of the consensus mean (whichever is greater). For samples exhibiting a consensus mean less than 1 µg/l, the performance requirement is defined as a concentration between the detection limit of the analysis and a maximum of 2 µg/l. The purpose for redefining the acceptable interval for low CDB values is to encourage proper reporting of the actual values obtained during measurement; laboratories, therefore, will not be penalized (in terms of a narrow range of acceptability) for reporting measured concentrations smaller than 1 µg/l. The performance requirement for CDU analysis is defined as an analytical result within ±1 µg/l urine or 15% of the consensus mean (whichever is greater). For samples exhibiting a consensus mean less than 1 µg/l urine, the performance requirement is defined as a concentration between the detection limit of the analysis and a maximum of 2 µg/l urine. Laboratories also should demonstrate proficiency in creatinine analysis as defined by the CAP. Note that reporting CDU results, other than for the CTQ proficiency samples ( i.e. The performance requirement for B2MU is defined as analytical results within ±15% of the consensus mean. Note that reporting B2MU results, other than for CTQ proficiency samples ( i.e. There are no recommended performance checks for CRTU analyses. As stated previously, laboratories performing CRTU analysis in support of CDU or B2MU analyses should be accredited by the CAP, and participating in the CAP's survey for CRTU. Following the first review, the status of each participating laboratory should be reevaluated at regular intervals ( i.e. After a year of collecting proficiency test results, the following proficiency criterion should be added to the set of criteria used to determine the participating laboratory's status (for analyzing CDB, CDU and/or B2MU): A participating laboratory should not fail performance requirements for more than 4 samples from the 6 most recent consecutive rounds used to assess proficiency for CDB, CDU and/or B2MU separately ( i.e. 3.2.3 Recommendations for Selecting Among Newly-Formed Laboratories (or Laboratories That Previously Failed To Meet the Protocol Guidelines) OSHA recommends that laboratories that have not previously provided commercial analyses of CDB, CDU and/or B2MU (or have done so for a period less than 2 years), or which have provided these analyses for 2 or more years but have not conformed previously with these protocol guidelines, should satisfy the following provisions for each analyte for which determinations are to be made prior to being selected to analyze biological samples under the medical monitoring program: 1. Submit to the responsible physician an internal QA/QC plan detailing the standard operating procedures to be adopted for satisfying the QA/QC guidelines (guidelines for internal QA/QC programs are detailed in Section 3.3.1); 2. Submit to the responsible physician the results of the initial characterization analyses for each analyte for which determinations are to be made; 3. Submit to the responsible physician the results, for the initial 6-month period, of the internal QA/QC program for each analyte for which determinations are to be made (if no commercial analyses have been conducted previously, a minimum of 2 mock standardization trials for each analyte should be completed per month for a 6-month period); 4. Enroll in the CTQ program for the appropriate analyte for which determinations are to be made, and arrange to have the CTQ program submit the initial confirmation of participation and proficiency test results directly to the designated physicians. Note that the designated physician should receive results from 3 completed rounds from the CTQ program before approving a laboratory for participation in the biological monitoring program; 5. Laboratories seeking participation for CDU and/or B2MU analyses should submit to the responsible physician documentation of accreditation by the CAP for CRTU analyses performed in conjunction with CDU and/or B2MU determinations (if CRTU analyses are conducted by a contract laboratory, this laboratory should submit proof of CAP accreditation to the responsible physician); and, 6. Documentation should be submitted on an appropriate form. To participate in CDB, CDU and/or B2MU analyses, the laboratory should satisfy the above criteria for a minimum of 2 of the 3 proficiency samples provided in each of the 3 rounds of the CTQ program over a 6-month period; this procedure should be completed for each appropriate analyte. Proficiency should be maintained for each analyte to continue participation. Note that laboratories seeking participation for CDU or B2MU also should address the performance requirements for CRTU, which involves providing evidence of accreditation by the CAP and participation in the CAP surveys (or an equivalent program). The performance requirement for CDB analysis is defined as an analytical result within ±1 µg/l or 15% of the consensus mean (whichever is greater). For samples exhibiting a consensus mean less than 1 µg/l, the performance requirement is defined as a concentration between the detection limit of the analysis and a maximum of 2 µg/l. The purpose of redefining the acceptable interval for low CDB values is to encourage proper reporting of the actual values obtained during measurement; laboratories, therefore, will not be penalized (in terms of a narrow range of acceptability) for reporting measured concentrations less than 1 µg/l. The performance requirement for CDU analysis is defined as an analytical result within ±1 µg/l urine or 15% of the consensus mean (whichever is greater). For samples exhibiting a consensus mean less than 1 µg/l urine, the performance requirement is defined as a concentration that falls between the detection limit of the analysis and a maximum of 2 µg/l urine. Performance requirements for the companion CRTU analysis (defined by the CAP) also should be met. Note that reporting CDU results, other than for CTQ proficiency testing should be accompanied with results of CRTU analyses, and these 2 sets of results should be combined to provide a measure of CDU in units of µg/g CRTU. The performance requirement for B2MU is defined as an analytical result within ±15% of the consensus mean. Note that reporting B2MU results, other than for CTQ proficiency testing should be accompanied with results of CRTU analysis, these 2 sets of results should be combined to provide a measure of B2MU in units of µg/g CRTU. Once a new laboratory has been approved by the responsible physician for conducting analyte determinations, the status of this approval should be reviewed periodically by the responsible physician as per the criteria presented under Section 3.2.2. Laboratories which have failed previously to gain approval of the responsible physician for conducting determinations of 1 or more analytes due to lack of compliance with the criteria defined above for existing laboratories (Section 3.2.1), may obtain approval by satisfying the criteria for newly-formed laboratories defined under this section; for these laboratories, the second of the above criteria may be satisfied by submitting a new set of characterization analyses for each analyte for which determinations are to be made. Reevaluation of these laboratories is discretionary on the part of the responsible physician. Reevaluation, which normally takes about 6 months, may be expedited if the laboratory can achieve 100% compliance with the proficiency test criteria using the 6 samples of each analyte submitted to the CTQ program during the first 2 rounds of proficiency testing. For laboratories seeking reevaluation for CDU or B2MU analysis, the guidelines for CRTU analyses also should be satisfied, including accreditation for CRTU analysis by the CAP, and participation in the CAP survey program (or accreditation/participation in an equivalent program). 3.2.4 Future Modifications to the Protocol Guidelines As participating laboratories gain experience with analyses for CDB, CDU and B2MU, it is anticipated that the performance achievable by the majority of laboratories should improve until it approaches that reported by the research groups which developed each method. OSHA, therefore, may choose to recommend stricter performance guidelines in the future as the overall performance of participating laboratories improves. 3.3 Guidelines for Record Keeping and Reporting To comply with these guidelines, participating laboratories should satisfy the above-stated performance and proficiency recommendations, as well as the following internal QA/QC, record keeping, and reporting provisions. If a participating laboratory fails to meet the provisions of these guidelines, it is recommended that the responsible physician disapprove further analyses of biological samples by that laboratory until it demonstrates compliance with these guidelines. On disapproval, biological samples should be sent to a laboratory that can demonstrate compliance with these guidelines, at least until the former laboratory is reevaluated by the responsible physician and found to be in compliance. The following record keeping and reporting procedures should be practiced by participating laboratories. 3.3.1 Internal Quality Assurance/Quality Control Procedures Laboratories participating in the cadmium monitoring program should develop and maintain an internal quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) program that incorporates procedures for establishing and maintaining control for each of the analytic procedures (determinations of CDB, CDU and/or B2MU) for which the laboratory is seeking participation. For laboratories analyzing CDU and/or B2MU, a QA/QC program for CRTU also should be established. Written documentation of QA/QC procedures should be described in a formal QA/QC plan; this plan should contain the following information: Sample acceptance and handling procedures ( i.e. 3.3.1.1 QA/QC procedures for establishing control of CDB and CDU analyses The QA/QC program for CDB and CDU should address, at a minimum, procedures involved in calibration, establishment of control limits, internal QC analyses and maintaining control, and corrective-action protocols. Participating laboratory should develop and maintain procedures to assure that analyses of compliance samples are within control limits, and that these procedures are documented thoroughly in a QA/QC plan. A nonmandatory QA/QC protocol is presented in Attachment 1. This attachment is illustrative of the procedures that should be addressed in a proper QA/QC program. Calibration. Calibration is being maintained if the standard is within ±15% of its theoretical value. If a standard is more than ±15% of its theoretical value, the run has exceeded control limits due to calibration error; the entire set of samples then should be reanalyzed after recalibrating or the results should be recalculated based on a statistical curve derived from that set of standards. It is essential that the value of the highest standard analyzed be higher than the highest sample analyzed; it may be necessary, therefore, to run a high standard at the end of the run, which has been selected based on results obtained over the course of the run ( i.e. Standards should be kept fresh; as samples age, they should be compared with new standards and replaced if necessary. Internal Quality Control Analyses. Internal QC samples may be obtained as commercially-available reference materials and/or they may be internally prepared. Internally-prepared samples should be well characterized and traced, or compared to a reference material for which a consensus value is available. Levels of cadmium contained in QC samples should not be known to the analyst prior to reporting the results of the analysis. Internal QC results should be plotted or charted in a manner which describes sample recovery and laboratory control limits. Internal Control Limits. When laboratory limits are exceeded, analytic work should terminate until the source of error is determined and corrected; compliance samples affected by the error should be reanalyzed. In addition, the laboratory protocol should address any unusual trends that develop which may be biasing the results. Numerous, consecutive results above or below laboratory mean recoveries, or outside laboratory statistical limits, indicate that problems may have developed. Corrective Actions. In addition to these actions, laboratories should include whatever additional actions are necessary to assure that accurate data are reported to the responsible physicians. Reference Materials. Cadmium in Blood (CDB) 1. Centre de Toxicologie du Quebec, Le Centre Hospitalier de l'Universite Laval, 2705 boul. Laurier, Quebec, Que., Canada G1V 4G2. (Prepared 6 times per year at 1-15 µg Cd/l.) 2. H. Marchandise, Community Bureau of Reference-BCR, Directorate General XII, Commission of the European Communities, 200, rue de la Loi, B-1049, Brussels, Belgium. (Prepared as Bl CBM-1 at 5.37 µg Cd/l, and Bl CBM-2 at 12.38 µg Cd/l.) 3. Kaulson Laboratories Inc., 691 Bloomfield Ave., Caldwell, NJ 07006; tel: (201) 226-9494, FAX (201) 226-3244. (Prepared as #0141 [As, Cd, Hg, Pb] at 2 levels.) Cadmium in Urine (CDU) 1. Centre de Toxicologie du Quebec, Le Centre Hospitalier de l'Universite Laval, 2705 boul. Laurier, Quebec, Que., Canada G1V 4G2. (Prepared 6 times per year.) 2. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Dept. of Commerce, Gaithersburg, MD; tel: (301) 975-6776. (Prepared as SRM 2670 freeze-dried urine [metals]; set includes normal and elevated levels of metals; cadmium is certified for elevated level of 88.0 µg/l in reconstituted urine.) 3. Kaulson Laboratories Inc., 691 Bloomfield Ave., Caldwell, NJ 07006; tel: (201) 226-9494, FAX (201) 226-3244. (Prepared as #0140 [As, Cd, Hg, Pb] at 2 levels.) 3.3.1.2 QA/QC procedures for establishing control of B2MU A written, detailed QA/QC plan for B2MU analysis should be developed. The QA/QC plan should contain a protocol similar to those protocols developed for the CDB/CDU analyses. Differences in analyses may warrant some differences in the QA/QC protocol, but procedures to ensure analytical integrity should be developed and followed. Examples of performance summaries that can be provided include measurements of accuracy ( i.e. i.e. 3.3.2 Procedures for Record Keeping To satisfy reporting requirements for commercial analyses of CDB, CDU and/or B2MU performed for the medical monitoring program mandated under the cadmium rule, participating laboratories should maintain the following documentation for each analyte: 1. For each analytic instrument on which analyte determinations are made, records relating to the most recent calibration and QC sample analyses; 2. For these instruments, a tabulated record for each analyte of those determinations found to be within and outside of control limits over the past 2 years; 3. Results for the previous 2 years of the QC sample analyses conducted under the internal QA/QC program (this information should be: Provided for each analyte for which determinations are made and for each analytic instrument used for this purpose, sufficient to demonstrate that internal QA/QC programs are being executed properly, and consistent with data sent to responsible physicians. 4. Duplicate copies of monitoring results for each analyte sent to clients during the previous 5 years, as well as associated information; supporting material such as chain-of-custody forms also should be retained; and, 5. Proficiency test results and related materials received while participating in the CTQ interlaboratory program over the past 2 years; results also should be tabulated to provide a serial record of relative error (derived per Section 3.3.3 below). 3.3.3 Reporting Procedures Participating laboratories should maintain these documents: QA/QC program plans; QA/QC status reports; CTQ proficiency program reports; and, analytical data reports. The information that should be included in these reports is summarized in Table 2; a copy of each report should be sent to the responsible physician. Table 2—Reporting Procedures for Laboratories Participating in the Cadmium Medical Monitoring Program Report Frequency (time frame) Contents 1 QA/QC Program Plan Once (initially) A detailed description of the QA/QC protocol to be established by the laboratory to maintain control of analyte determinations. 2 QA/QC Status Report Every 2 months Results of the QC samples incorporated into regular runs for each instrument (over the period since the last report). 3 Proficiency Report Attached to every data report Results from the last full year of proficiency samples submitted to the CTQ program and Results of the 100 most recent QC samples incorporated into regular runs for each instrument. 4 Analytical Data Report For all reports of data results Date the sample was received; Date the sample was analyzed; Appropriate chain-of-custody information; Types of analyses performed; Results of the requested analyses and Copy of the most current proficiency report. As noted in Section 3.3.1, a QA/QC program plan should be developed that documents internal QA/QC procedures (defined under Section 3.3.1) to be implemented by the participating laboratory for each analyte; this plan should provide a list identifying each instrument used in making analyte determinations. A QA/QC status report should be written bimonthly for each analyte. In this report, the results of the QC program during the reporting period should be reported for each analyte in the following manner: The number (N) of QC samples analyzed during the period; a table of the target levels defined for each sample and the corresponding measured values; the mean of F/T value (as defined below) for the set of QC samples run during the period; and, use of X As noted in Section 2, an F/T value for a QC sample is the ratio of the measured concentration of analyte to the established ( i.e. The standard deviation, σ The nonmandatory QA/QC protocol (see Attachment 1) indicates that QC samples should be divided into several discrete pools, and a separate estimate of precision for each pools then should be derived. Several precision estimates should be provided for concentrations which differ in average value. These precision measures may be used to document improvements in performance with regard to the combined pool. Participating laboratories should use the CTQ proficiency program for each analyte. Results of the this program will be sent by CTQ directly to physicians designated by the participating laboratories. Proficiency results from the CTQ program are used to establish the accuracy of results from each participating laboratory, and should be provided to responsible physicians for use in trend analysis. A proficiency report consisting of these proficiency results should accompany data reports as an attachment. For each analyte, the proficiency report should include the results from the 6 previous proficiency rounds in the following format: 1. Number (N) of samples analyzed; 2. Mean of the target levels, (1/N)Σ i i 3. Mean of the measurements, (1/N)Σ i i 4. A measure of error defined by: (1/N)Σ(T i i 2 Analytical data reports should be submitted to responsible physicians directly. For each sample, report the following information: The date the sample was received; the date the sample was analyzed; appropriate chain-of-custody information; the type(s) of analyses performed; and, the results of the analyses. This information should be reported on a form similar to the form provided an appropriate form. The most recent proficiency program report should accompany the analytical data reports (as an attachment). Confidence intervals for the analytical results should be reported as X±2σ For CDU or B2MU results, which are combined with CRTU measurements for proper reporting, the 95% confidence limits are derived from the limits for CDU or B2MU, (p), and the limits for CRTU, (q), as follows: For these calculations, X ±p is the measurement and confidence limits for CDU or B2MU, and Y ±q is the measurement and confidence limit for CRTU. Participating laboratories should notify responsible physicians as soon as they receive information indicating a change in their accreditation status with the CTQ or the CAP. These physicians should not be expected to wait until formal notice of a status change has been received from the CTQ or the CAP. 3.4 Instructions to Physicians Physicians responsible for the medical monitoring of cadmium-exposed workers must collect the biological samples from workers; they then should select laboratories to perform the required analyses, and should interpret the analytic results. 3.4.1 Sample Collection and Holding Procedures Blood Samples. To the extent possible, blood samples should be collected from workers at the same time of day. Workers should shower or thoroughly wash their hands and arms before blood samples are drawn. The following materials are needed for blood sample collection: Alcohol wipes; sterile gauze sponges; band-aids; 20-gauge, 1.5-in. stainless steel needles (sterile); preprinted labels; tourniquets; vacutainer holders; 3-ml “metal free” vacutainer tubes ( i.e. Whole blood samples are taken by venipuncture. Each blue-capped tube should be labeled or coded for the worker and company before the sample is drawn. (Blue-capped tubes are recommended instead of red-capped tubes because the latter may consist of red coloring pigment containing cadmium, which could contaminate the samples.) Immediately after sampling, the vacutainer tubes must be thoroughly mixed by inverting the tubes at least 10 times manually or mechanically using a Vortex device (for 15 sec). Samples should be refrigerated immediately or stored on ice until they can be packed for shipment to the participating laboratory for analysis. The CDC recommends that blood samples be shipped with a “cool pak” to keep the samples cold during shipment. However, the CTQ routinely ships and receives blood samples for cadmium analysis that have not been kept cool during shipment. The CTQ has found no deterioration of cadmium in biological fluids that were shipped via parcel post without a cooling agent, even though these deliveries often take 2 weeks to reach their destination. Urine Samples. Single “spot” samples are recommended. As B2M can degrade in the bladder, workers should first empty their bladder and then drink a large glass of water at the start of the visit. Urine samples then should be collected within 1 hour. Separate samples should be collected for CDU and B2MU using the following materials: Sterile urine collection cups (250 ml); small sealable plastic bags; preprinted labels; 15-ml polypropylene or polyethylene screw-cap tubes; lab gloves (“metal free”); and, preservatives (as indicated). The sealed collection cup should be kept in the plastic bag until collection time. The workers should wash their hands with soap and water before receiving the collection cup. The collection cup should not be opened until just before voiding and the cup should be sealed immediately after filling. It is important that the inside of the container and cap are not touched by, or come into contact with, the body, clothing or other surfaces. For CDU analyzes, the cup is swirled gently to resuspend any solids, and the 15-ml tube is filled with 10-12 ml urine. The CDC recommends the addition of 100 µl concentrated HNO 3 For B2M, the urine sample should be collected directly into a polyethylene bottle previously washed with dilute nitric acid. The pH of the urine should be measured and adjusted to 8.0 with 0.1 N NaOH immediately following collection. Samples should be frozen and stored at −20 °C until testing is performed. The B2M in the samples should be stable for 2 days when stored at 2-8 °C, and for at least 2 months at −20 °C. Repeated freezing and thawing should be avoided to prevent denaturing the B2M (Pharmacia 1990). 3.4.2 Recommendations for Evaluating Laboratories Using standard error data and the results of proficiency testing obtained from CTQ, responsible physicians can make an informed choice of which laboratory to select to analyze biological samples. In general, laboratories with small standard errors and little disparity between target and measured values tend to make precise and accurate sample determinations. Estimates of precision provided to the physicians with each set of monitoring results can be compared to previously-reported proficiency and precision estimates. The latest precision estimates should be at least as small as the standard error reported previously by the laboratory. Moreover, there should be no indication that precision is deteriorating ( i.e. 3.4.3 Use and Interpretation of Results When the responsible physician has received the CDB, CDU and/or B2MU results, these results must be compared to the action levels discussed in the final rule for cadmium. The comparison of the sample results to action levels is straightforward. The measured value reported from the laboratory can be compared directly to the action levels; if the reported value exceeds an action level, the required actions must be initiated. 4.0 Background Cadmium is a naturally-occurring environmental contaminant to which humans are continually exposed in food, water, and air. The average daily intake of cadmium by the U.S. population is estimated to be 10-20 µg/day. Most of this intake is via ingestion, for which absorption is estimated at 4-7% (Kowal et al. 1979). An additional nonoccupational source of cadmium is smoking tobacco; smoking a pack of cigarettes a day adds an additional 2-4 µg cadmium to the daily intake, assuming absorption via inhalation of 25-35% (Nordberg and Nordberg 1988; Friberg and Elinder 1988; Travis and Haddock 1980). Exposure to cadmium fumes and dusts in an occupational setting where air concentrations are 20-50 µg/m 3 Cadmium introduced into the body through inhalation or ingestion is transported by the albumin fraction of the blood plasma to the liver, where it accumulates and is stored principally as a bound form complexed with the protein metallothionein. Metallothionein-bound cadmium is the main form of cadmium subsequently transported to the kidney; it is these 2 organs, the liver and kidney, in which the majority of the cadmium body burden accumulates. As much as one half of the total body burden of cadmium may be found in the kidneys (Nordberg and Nordberg 1988). Once cadmium has entered the body, elimination is slow; about 0.02% of the body burden is excreted per day via urinary/fecal elimination. The whole-body half-life of cadmium is 10-35 years, decreasing slightly with increasing age (Travis and Haddock 1980). The continual accumulation of cadmium is the basis for its chronic noncarcinogenic toxicity. This accumulation makes the kidney the target organ in which cadmium toxicity usually is first observed (Piscator 1964). Renal damage may occur when cadmium levels in the kidney cortex approach 200 µg/g wet tissue-weight (Travis and Haddock 1980). The kinetics and internal distribution of cadmium in the body are complex, and depend on whether occupational exposure to cadmium is ongoing or has terminated. In general, cadmium in blood is related principally to recent cadmium exposure, while cadmium in urine reflects cumulative exposure ( i.e. 4.1 Health Effects Studies of workers in a variety of industries indicate that chronic exposure to cadmium may be linked to several adverse health effects including kidney dysfunction, reduced pulmonary function, chronic lung disease and cancer ( Federal Register Cancer. One study (Thun et al. 1985) contains sufficiently quantitative estimates of cadmium exposure to allow evaluation of dose-response relationships between cadmium exposure and lung cancer. A statistically significant excess of lung cancer attributed to cadmium exposure was found in this study, even after accounting for confounding variables such as coexposure to arsenic and smoking habits (Meridian Research, Inc. 1989). Evidence for quantifying a link between lung cancer and cadmium exposure comes from a single study (Takenaka et al. 1983). In this study, dose-response relationships developed from animal data were extrapolated to humans using a variety of models. OSHA chose the multistage risk model for estimating the risk of cancer for humans using these animal data. Animal injection studies also suggest an association between cadmium exposure and cancer, particularly observations of an increased incidence of tumors at sites remote from the point of injection. The International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) (Supplement 7, 1987) indicates that this, and related, evidence is sufficient to classify cadmium as an animal carcinogen. However, the results of these injection studies cannot be used to quantify risks attendant to human occupational exposures due to differences in routes of exposure (Meridian Research, Inc. 1989). Based on the above-cited studies, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) classifies cadmium as “B1,” a probable human carcinogen (USEPA 1985). IARC in 1987 recommended that cadmium be listed as a probable human carcinogen. Kidney Dysfunction. Exposure to cadmium also may lead to urinary excretion of high-molecular weight proteins such as albumin, immunoglobulin G, and glycoproteins (Meridian Research, Inc. 1989; Roth Associates, Inc. 1989). Excretion of high-molecular weight proteins is indicative of damage to the glomeruli of the kidney. Bernard et al. (1979) suggest that cadmium-associated damage to the glomeruli and damage to the proximal tubules of the kidney develop independently of each other, but may occur in the same individual. Several studies indicate that the onset of low-molecular weight proteinuria is a sign of irreversible kidney damage (Friberg et al. 1974; Roels et al. 1982; Piscator 1984; Elinder et al. 1985; Smith et al. 1986). For many workers, once sufficiently elevated levels of B2M are observed in association with cadmium exposure, such levels do not appear to return to normal even when cadmium exposure is eliminated by removal of the worker from the cadmium-contaminated work environment (Friberg, exhibit 29, 1990). Some studies indicate that cadmium-induced proteinuria may be progressive; levels of B2MU increase even after cadmium exposure has ceased (Elinder et al. 1985). Other researchers have reached similar conclusions (Frieburg testimony, OSHA docket exhibit 29, Elinder testimony, OSHA docket exhibit 55, and OSHA docket exhibits 8-86B). Such observations are not universal, however (Smith et al. 1986; Tsuchiya 1976). Studies in which proteinuria has not been observed, however, may have initiated the reassessment too early (Meridian Research, Inc.1989; Roth Associates, Inc. 1989; Roels 1989). A quantitative assessment of the risks of developing kidney dysfunction as a result of cadmium exposure was performed using the data from Ellis et al. (1984) and Falck et al. (1983). Meridian Research, Inc. (1989) and Roth Associates, Inc. (1989) employed several mathematical models to evaluate the data from the 2 studies, and the results indicate that cumulative cadmium exposure levels between 5 and 100 µg-years/m 3 When cadmium exposure continues past the onset of early kidney damage (manifested as proteinuria), chronic nephrotoxicity may occur (Meridian Research, Inc. 1989; Roth Associates, Inc. 1989). Uremia, which is the loss of the glomerulus' ability to adequately filter blood, may result. This condition leads to severe disturbance of electrolyte concentrations, which may result in various clinical complications including atherosclerosis, hypertension, pericarditis, anemia, hemorrhagic tendencies, deficient cellular immunity, bone changes, and other problems. Progression of the disease may require dialysis or a kidney transplant. Studies in which animals are chronically exposed to cadmium confirm the renal effects observed in humans (Friberg et al. 1986). Animal studies also confirm cadmium-related problems with calcium metabolism and associated skeletal effects, which also have been observed among humans. Other effects commonly reported in chronic animal studies include anemia, changes in liver morphology, immunosuppression and hypertension. Some of these effects may be associated with cofactors; hypertension, for example, appears to be associated with diet, as well as with cadmium exposure. Animals injected with cadmium also have shown testicular necrosis. 4.2 Objectives for Medical Monitoring In keeping with the observation that renal disease tends to be the earliest clinical manifestation of cadmium toxicity, the final cadmium standard mandates that eligible workers must be medically monitored to prevent this condition (as well as cadmimum-induced cancer). The objectives of medical-monitoring, therefore, are to: Identify workers at significant risk of adverse health effects from excess, chronic exposure to cadmium; prevent future cases of cadmium-induced disease; detect and minimize existing cadmium-induced disease; and, identify workers most in need of medical intervention. The overall goal of the medical monitoring program is to protect workers who may be exposed continuously to cadmium over a 45-year occupational lifespan. Consistent with this goal, the medical monitoring program should assure that: 1. Current exposure levels remain sufficiently low to prevent the accumulation of cadmium body burdens sufficient to cause disease in the future by monitoring CDB as an indicator of recent cadmium exposure; 2. Cumulative body burdens, especially among workers with undefined historical exposures, remain below levels potentially capable of leading to damage and disease by assessing CDU as an indicator of cumulative exposure to cadmium; and, 3. Health effects are not occurring among exposed workers by determining B2MU as an early indicator of the onset of cadmium-induced kidney disease. 4.3 Indicators of Cadmium Exposure and Disease Cadmium is present in whole blood bound to albumin, in erythrocytes, and as a metallothionein-cadmium complex. The metallothionein-cadmium complex that represents the primary transport mechanism for cadmium delivery to the kidney. CDB concentrations in the general, nonexposed population average 1 µg Cd/l whole blood, with smokers exhibiting higher levels (see Section 5.1.6). Data presented in Section 5.1.6 shows that 95% of the general population not occupationally exposed to cadmium have CDB levels less than 5 µg Cd/l. If total body burdens of cadmium remain low, CDB concentrations indicate recent exposure ( i.e. i.e. Among occupationally-exposed workers, the occupational history of exposure to cadmium must be evaluated to interpret CDB levels. New workers, or workers with low exposures to cadmium, exhibit CDB levels that are representative of recent exposures, similar to the general population. However, for workers with a history of chronic exposure to cadmium, who have accumulated significant stores of cadmium in the kidneys/liver, part of the CDB concentrations appear to indicate body burden. If such workers are removed from cadmium exposure, their CDB levels remain elevated, possibly for years, reflecting prior long-term accumulation of cadmium in body tissues. This condition tends to occur, however, only beyond some threshold exposure value, and possibly indicates the capacity of body tissues to accumulate cadmium which cannot be excreted readily (Friberg and Elinder 1988; Nordberg and Nordberg 1988). CDU is widely used as an indicator of cadmium body burdens (Nordberg and Nordberg 1988). CDU is the major route of elimination and, when CDU is measured, it is commonly expressed either as µg Cd/l urine (unadjusted), µg Cd/l urine (adjusted for specific gravity), or µg Cd/g CRTU (see Section 5.2.1). The metabolic model for CDU is less complicated than CDB, since CDU is dependentin large part on the body ( i.e. CDU is bound principally to metallothionein, regardless of whether the cadmium originates from metallothionein in plasma or from the cadmium pool accumulated in the renal tubules. Therefore, measurement of metallothionein in urine may provide information similar to CDU, while avoiding the contamination problems that may occur during collection and handling urine for cadmium analysis (Nordberg and Nordberg 1988). However, a commercial method for the determination of metallothionein at the sensitivity levels required under the final cadmium rule is not currently available; therefore, analysis of CDU is recommended. Among the general population not occupationally exposed to cadmium, CDU levels average less than 1 µg/l (see Section 5.2.7). Normalized for creatinine (CRTU), the average CDU concentration of the general population is less than 1 µg/g CRTU. As cadmium accumulates over the lifespan, CDU increases with age. Also, cigarette smokers may eventually accumulate twice the cadmium body burden of nonsmokers, CDU is slightly higher in smokers than in nonsmokers, even several years after smoking cessation (Nordberg and Nordberg 1988). Despite variations due to age and smoking habits, 95% of those not occupationally exposed to cadmium exhibit levels of CDU less than 3 µg/g CRTU (based on the data presented in Section 5.2.7). About 0.02% of the cadmium body burden is excreted daily in urine. When the critical cadmium concentration (about 200 ppm) in the kidney is reached, or if there is sufficient cadmium-induced kidney dysfunction, dramatic increases in CDU are observed (Nordberg and Nordberg 1988). Above 200 ppm, therefore, CDU concentrations cease to be an indicator of cadmium body burden, and are instead an index of kidney failure. Proteinuria is an index of kidney dysfunction, and is defined by OSHA to be a material impairment. Several small proteins may be monitored as markers for proteinuria. Below levels indicative of proteinuria, these small proteins may be early indicators of increased risk of cadmium-induced renal tubular disease. Analytes useful for monitoring cadmium-induced renal tubular damage include: 1. β-2-Microglobulin (B2M), currently the most widely used assay for detecting kidney dysfunction, is the best characterized analyte available (Iwao et al. 1980; Chia et al. 1989); 2. Retinol Binding Protein (RBP) is more stable than B2M in acidic urine ( i.e. 3. N-Acetyl-B-Glucosaminidase (NAG) is the analyte of an assay that is simple, inexpensive, reliable, and correlates with cadmium levels under 10 µg/g CRTU, but the assay is less sensitive than RBP or B2M (Kawada et al. 1989); 4. Metallothionein (MT) correlates with cadmium and B2M levels, and may be a better predictor of cadmium exposure than CDU and B2M (Kawada et al. 1989); 5. Tamm-Horsfall Glycoprotein (THG) increases slightly with elevated cadmium levels, but this elevation is small compared to increases in urinary albumin, RBP, or B2M (Bernard and Lauwerys 1990); 6. Albumin (ALB), determined by the biuret method, is not sufficiently sensitive to serve as an early indicator of the onset of renal disease (Piscator 1962); 7. Albumin (ALB), determined by the Amido Black method, is sensitive and reproducible, but involves a time-consuming procedure (Piscator 1962); 8. Glycosaminoglycan (GAG) increases among cadmium workers, but the significance of this effect is unknown because no relationship has been found between elevated GAG and other indices of tubular damage (Bernard and Lauwerys 1990); 9. Trehalase seems to increase earlier than B2M during cadmium exposure, but the procedure for analysis is complicated and unreliable (Iwata et al. 1988); and, 10. Kallikrein is observed at lower concentrations among cadmium-exposed workers than among normal controls (Roels et al. 1990). Of the above analytes, B2M appears to be the most widely used and best characterized analyte to evaluate the presence/absence, as well as the extent of, cadmium-induced renal tubular damage (Kawada, Koyama, and Suzuki 1989; Shaikh and Smith 1984; Nogawa 1984). However, it is important that samples be collected and handled so as to minimize B2M degradation under acidic urine conditions. The threshold value of B2MU commonly used to indicate the presence of kidney damage 300 µg/g CRTU (Kjellstrom et al. 1977a; Buchet et al. 1980; and Kowal and Zirkes 1983). This value represents the upper 95th or 97.5th percentile level of urinary excretion observed among those without tubular dysfunction (Elinder, exbt L-140-45, OSHA docket H057A). In agreement with these conclusions, the data presented in Section 5.3.7 of this protocol generally indicate that the level of 300 µg/g CRTU appears to define the boundary for kidney dysfunction. It is not clear, however, that this level represents the upper 95th percentile of values observed among those who fail to demonstrate proteinuria effects. Although elevated B2MU levels appear to be a fairly specific indicator of disease associated with cadmium exposure, other conditions that may lead to elevated B2MU levels include high fevers from influenza, extensive physical exercise, renal disease unrelated to cadmium exposure, lymphomas, and AIDS (Iwao et al. 1980; Schardun and van Epps 1987). Elevated B2M levels observed in association with high fevers from influenza or from extensive physical exercise are transient, and will return to normal levels once the fever has abated or metabolic rates return to baseline values following exercise. The other conditions linked to elevated B2M levels can be diagnosed as part of a properly-designed medical examination. Consequently, monitoring B2M, when accompanied by regular medical examinations and CDB and CDU determinations (as indicators of present and past cadmium exposure), may serve as a specific, early indicator of cadmium-induced kidney damage. 4.4 Criteria for Medical Monitoring of Cadmium Workers Medical monitoring mandated by the final cadmium rule includes a combination of regular medical examinations and periodic monitoring of 3 analytes: CDB, CDU and B2MU. As indicated above, CDB is monitored as an indicator of current cadmium exposure, while CDU serves as an indicator of the cadmium body burden; B2MU is assessed as an early marker of irreversible kidney damage and disease. The final cadmium rule defines a series of action levels that have been developed for each of the 3 analytes to be monitored. These action levels serve to guide the responsible physician through a decision-making process. For each action level that is exceeded, a specific response is mandated. The sequence of action levels, and the attendant actions, are described in detail in the final cadmium rule. Other criteria used in the medical decision-making process relate to tests performed during the medical examination (including a determination of the ability of a worker to wear a respirator). These criteria, however, are not affected by the results of the analyte determinations addressed in the above paragraphs and, consequently, will not be considered further in these guidelines. 4.5 Defining to Quality and Proficiency of the Analyte Determinations As noted above in Sections 2 and 3, the quality of a measurement should be defined along with its value to properly interpret the results. Generally, it is necessary to know the accuracy and the precision of a measurement before it can be properly evaluated. The precision of the data from a specific laboratory indicates the extent to which the repeated measurements of the same sample vary within that laboratory. The accuracy of the data provides an indication of the extent to which these results deviate from average results determined from many laboratories performing the same measurement ( i.e. Another data quality criterion required to properly evaluate measurement results is the limit of detection of that measurement. For measurements to be useful, the range of the measurement which is of interest for biological monitoring purposes must lie entirely above the limit of detection defined for that measurement. The overall quality of a laboratory's results is termed the performance of that laboratory. The degree to which a laboratory satisfies a minimum performance level is referred to as the proficiency of the laboratory. A successful medical monitoring program, therefore, should include procedures developed for monitoring and recording laboratory performance; these procedures can be used to identify the most proficient laboratories. 5.0 Overview of Medical Monitoring Tests for CDB, CDU, B2MU and CRTU To evaluate whether available methods for assessing CDB, CDU, B2MU and CRTU are adequate for determining the parameters defined by the proposed action levels, it is necessary to review procedures available for sample collection, preparation and analysis. A variety of techniques for these purposes have been used historically for the determination of cadmium in biological matrices (including CDB and CDU), and for the determination of specific proteins in biological matrices (including B2MU). However, only the most recent techniques are capable of satisfying the required accuracy, precision and sensitivity ( i.e. 5.1 Measuring Cadmium in Blood (CDB) Analysis of biological samples for cadmium requires strict analytical discipline regarding collection and handling of samples. In addition to occupational settings, where cadmium contamination would be apparent, cadmium is a ubiquitous environmental contaminant, and much care should be exercised to ensure that samples are not contaminated during collection, preparation or analysis. Many common chemical reagents are contaminated with cadmium at concentrations that will interfere with cadmium analysis; because of the widespread use of cadmium compounds as colored pigments in plastics and coatings, the analyst should continually monitor each manufacturer's chemical reagents and collection containers to prevent contamination of samples. Guarding against cadmium contamination of biological samples is particularly important when analyzing blood samples because cadmium concentrations in blood samples from nonexposed populations are generally less than 2 µg/l (2 ng/ml), while occupationally-exposed workers can be at medical risk to cadmium toxicity if blood concentrations exceed 5 µg/l (ACGIH 1991 and 1992). This narrow margin between exposed and unexposed samples requires that exceptional care be used in performing analytic determinations for biological monitoring for occupational cadmium exposure. Methods for quantifying cadmium in blood have improved over the last 40 years primarily because of improvements in analytical instrumentation. Also, due to improvements in analytical techniques, there is less need to perform extensive multi-step sample preparations prior to analysis. Complex sample preparation was previously required to enhance method sensitivity (for cadmium), and to reduce interference by other metals or components of the sample. 5.1.1 Analytical Techniques Used To Monitor Cadmium in Biological Matrices Table 3—Comparison of Analytical Procedures/Instrumentation for Determination of Cadmium in Biological Samples Analytical procedure Limit of detection [ng/(g or ml)] Specified biological matrix Reference Comments Flame Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy (FAAS) ≥1.0 Any matrix Perkin-Elmer (1982) Not sensitive enough for biomonitoring without extensive sample digestion, metal chelation and organic solvent extraction. Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy (GFAAS) 0.04 Urine Pruszkowska et al. (1983) Methods of choice for routine cadmium analysis. ≥0.20 Blood Stoeppler and Brandt (1980) Inductively-Coupled Argon-Plasma Atomic Emission Spectroscopy (ICAP AES) 2.0 Any matrix NIOSH (1984A) Requires extensive sample preparation and concentration of metal with chelating resin. Advantage is simultaneous analyses for as many as 10 metals from 1 sample. Neutron Activation Gamma Spectroscopy (NA) 1.5 In vivo (liver) Ellis et al. (1983) Only available in vivo Isotope Dilution Mass Spectroscopy (IDMS) <1.0 Any matrix Michiels and DeBievre (1986) Suitable for absolute determination of cadmium in reference materials; expensive. Differential Pulse Anodic Stripping Voltammetry (DPASV) <1.0 Any matrix Stoeppler and Brandt (1980) Suitable for absolute determination of cadmium in reference materials; efficient method to check accuracy of analytical method. A number of analytical techniques have been used for determining cadmium concentrations in biological materials. A summary of the characteristics of the most widely employed techniques is presented in Table 3. The technique most suitable for medical monitoring for cadmium is atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS). To obtain a measurement using AAS, a light source ( i.e. To determine the amount of a specific metallic element in a sample using AAS, the sample is dissolved in a solvent and aspirated into a high-temperature flame as an aerosol. At high temperatures, the solvent is rapidly evaporated or decomposed and the solute is initially solidified; the majority of the sample elements then are transformed into an atomic vapor. Next, a light beam is focused above the flame and the amount of metal in the sample can be determined by measuring the degree of absorbance of the atoms of the target element released by the flame at a characteristic wavelength. A more refined atomic absorption technique, flameless AAS, substitutes an electrothermal, graphite furnace for the flame. An aliquot (10-100 µl) of the sample is pipetted into the cold furnace, which is then heated rapidly to generate an atomic vapor of the element. AAS is a sensitive and specific method for the elemental analysis of metals; its main drawback is nonspecific background absorbtion and scattering of the light beam by particles of the sample as it decomposes at high temperatures; nonspecific absorbance reduces the sensitivity of the analytical method. The problem of nonspecific absorbance and scattering can be reduced by extensive sample pretreatment, such as ashing and/or acid digestion of the sample to reduce its organic content. Current AAS instruments employ background correction devices to adjust electronically for background absorbtion and scattering. A common method to correct for background effects is to use a deuterium arc lamp as a second light source. A continuum light source, such as the deuterium lamp, emits a broad spectrum of wavelengths instead of specific wavelengths characteristic of a particular element, as with the hollow cathode tube. With this system, light from the primary source and the continuum source are passed alternately through the sample cell. The target element effectively absorbs light only from the primary source (which is much brighter than the continuum source at the characteristic wavelengths), while the background matrix absorbs and scatters light from both sources equally. Therefore, when the ratio of the two beams is measured electronically, the effect of nonspecific background absorption and scattering is eliminated. A less common, but more sophisticated, backgrond correction system is based on the Zeeman effect, which uses a magnetically-activated light polarizer to compensate electronically for nonspecific absorbtion and scattering. Atomic emission spectroscopy with inductively-coupled argon plasma (AES-ICAP) is widely used to analyze for metals. With this instrument, the sample is aspirated into an extremely hot argon plasma flame, which excites the metal atoms; emission spectra specific for the sample element then are generated. The quanta of emitted light passing through a monochrometer are amplified by photomultiplier tubes and measured by a photodetector to determine the amount of metal in the sample. An advantage of AES-ICAP over AAS is that multi-elemental analyses of a sample can be performed by simultaneously measuring specific elemental emission energies. However, AES-ICAP lacks the sensitivity of AAS, exhibiting a limit of detection which is higher than the limit of detection for graphite-furnace AAS (Table 3). Neutron activation (NA) analysis and isotope dilution mass spectrometry (IDMS) are 2 additional, but highly specialized, methods that have been used for cadmium determinations. These methods are expensive because they require elaborate and sophisticated instrumentation. NA analysis has the distinct advantage over other analytical methods of being able to determine cadmium body burdens in specific organs (e.g., liver, kidney) in vivo (Ellis et al. 1983). Neutron bombardment of the target transforms cadmium-113 to cadmium-114, which promptly decays (<10 −14 IDMS analysis, a definitive but laborious method, is based on the change in the ratio of 2 isotopes of cadmium (cadmium 111 and 112) that occurs when a known amount of the element (with an artificially altered ratio of the same isotopes [i.e., a cadmium 111 “spike”] is added to a weighed aliquot of the sample (Michiels and De Bievre 1986). 5.1.2 Methods Developed for CDB Determinations A variety of methods have been used for preparing and analyzing CDB samples; most of these methods rely on one of the analytical techniques described above. Among the earliest reports, Princi (1947) and Smith et al. (1955) employed a colorimetric procedure to analyze for CDB and CDU. Samples were dried and digested through several cycles with concentrated mineral acids (HNO 3 2 4 2 2 Colorimetric procedures for cadmium analyses were replaced by methods based on atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS) in the early 1960s, but many of the complex sample preparation procedures were retained. Kjellstrom (1979) reports that in Japanese, American and Swedish laboratories during the early 1970s, blood samples were wet ashed with mineral acids or ashed at high temperature and wetted with nitric acid. The cadmium in the digest was complexed with metal chelators including diethyl dithiocarbamate (DDTC), ammonium pyrrolidine dithiocarbamate (APDC) or diphenylthiocarbazone (dithizone) in ammonia-citrate buffer and extracted with methyl isobutyl ketone (MIBK). The resulting solution then was analyzed by flame AAS or graphite-furnace AAS forcadmium determinations using deuterium-lamp background correction. In the late 1970s, researchers began developing simpler preparation procedures. Roels et al. (1978) and Roberts and Clark (1986) developed simplified digestion procedures. Using the Roberts and Clark method, a 0.5 ml aliquot of blood is collected and transferred to a digestion tube containing 1 ml concentrated HNO 3 2 2 3 The current trend in the preparation of blood samples is to dilute the sample and add matrix modifiers to reduce background interference, rather than digesting the sample to reduce organic content. The method of Stoeppler and Brandt (1980), and the abbreviated procedure published in the American Public Health Association's (APHA) Methods for Biological Monitoring 3 Using the method of Stoeppler and Brandt (1980), aliquots (50-200 µl) of whole blood that have been stabilized with EDTA are pipetted into clean polystyrene tubes and mixed with 150-600 µl of 1 M HNO 3 Claeys-Thoreau (1982) and DeBenzo et al. (1990) diluted blood samples at a ratio of 1:10 with a matrix modifier (0.2% Triton X-100, a wetting agent) for direct determinations of CDB. DeBenzo et al. also demonstrated that aqueous standards of cadmium, instead of spiked, whole-blood samples, could be used to establish calibration curves if standards and samples are treated with additional small volumes of matrix modifiers ( i.e. 3 These direct dilution procedures for CDB analysis are simple and rapid. Laboratories can process more than 100 samples a day using a dedicated graphite-furnace AAS, an auto-sampler, and either a Zeeman- or a deuterium-background correction system. Several authors emphasize using optimum settings for graphite-furnace temperatures during the drying, charring, and atomization processes associated with the flameless AAS method, and the need to run frequent QC samples when performing automated analysis. 5.1.3 Sample Collection and Handling Sample collection procedures are addressed primarily to identify ways to minimize the degree of variability that may be introduced by sample collection during medical monitoring. It is unclear at this point the extent to which collection procedures contribute to variability among CDB samples. Sources of variation that may result from sampling procedures include time-of-day effects and introduction of external contamination during the collection process. To minimize these sources, strict adherence to a sample collection protocol is recommended. Such a protocol must include provisions for thorough cleaning of the site from which blood will be extracted; also, every effort should be made to collect samples near the same time of day. It is also important to recognize that under the recent OSHA blood-borne pathogens standard (29 CFR 1910.1030), blood samples and certain body fluids must be handled and treated as if they are infectious. 5.1.4 Best Achievable Performance The best achievable performance using a particular method for CDB determinations is assumed to be equivalent to the performance reported by research laboratories in which the method was developed. For their method, Roberts and Clark (1986) demonstrated a limit of detection of 0.4 µg Cd/l in whole blood, with a linear response curve from 0.4 to 16.0 µg Cd/l. They report a coefficient of variation (CV) of 6.7% at 8.0 µg/l. The APHA (1988) reports a range of 1.0-25 µg/l, with a CV of 7.3% (concentration not stated). Insufficient documentation was available to critique this method. Stoeppler and Brandt (1980) achieved a detection limit of 0.2 µg Cd/l whole blood, with a linear range of 0.4-12.0 µg Cd/l, and a CV of 15-30%, for samples at <1.0 µg/l. Improved precision (CV of 3.8%) was reported for CDB concentrations at 9.3 µg/l. 5.1.5 General Method Performance For any particular method, the performance expected from commercial laboratories may be somewhat lower than that reported by the research laboratory in which the method was developed. With participation in appropriate proficiency programs and use of a proper in-house QA/QC program incorporating provisions for regular corrective actions, the performance of commercial laboratories is expected to approach that reported by research laboratories. Also, the results reported for existing proficiency programs serve as a gauge of the likely level of performance that currently can be expected from commercial laboratories offering these analyses. Weber (1988) reports on the results of the proficiency program run by the Centre de Toxicologie du Quebec (CTQ). As indicated previously, participants in that program receive 18 blood samples per year having cadmium concentrations ranging from 0.2-20 µg/l. Currently, 76 laboratories are participating in this program. The program is established for several analytes in addition to cadmium, and not all of these laboratories participate in the cadmium proficiency-testing program. Under the CTQ program, cadmium results from individual laboratories are compared against the consensus mean derived for each sample. Results indicate that after receiving 60 samples ( i.e. The CTQ also evaluates the performance of participating laboratories against a less severe standard: ±2 µg/l or 15% of the mean, whichever is greater (Weber 1988); 90% of participating laboratories are able to satisfy this standard after approximately 3 years in the program. (The 15% criterion is used for concentrations in excess of 13 µg/l.) On any single sample of the last 15 samples, the percentage of laboratories falling within the specified range is between 80 and 95% (except for a single test for which only 60% of the laboratories achieved the desired performance). Based on the data presented in Weber (1988), the CV for analysis of CDB is nearly constant at 20% for cadmium concentrations exceeding 5 µg/l, and increases for cadmium concentrations below 5 µg/l. At 2 µg/l, the reported CV rises to approximately 40%. At 1 µg/l, the reported CV is approximately 60%. Participating laboratories also tend to overestimate concentrations for samples exhibiting concentrations less than 2 µg/l (see Figure 11 of Weber 1988). This problem is due in part to the proficiency evaluation criterion that allows reporting a minimum ±2.0 µg/l for evaluated CDB samples. There is currently little economic or regulatory incentive for laboratories participating in the CTQ program to achieve greater accuracy for CDB samples containing cadmium at concentrations less than 2.0 µg/l, even if the laboratory has the experience and competency to distinguish among lower concentrations in the samples obtained from the CTQ. The collective experience of international agencies and investigators demonstrate the need for a vigorous QC program to ensure that CDB values reported by participating laboratories are indeed reasonably accurate. As Friberg (1988) stated: “Information about the quality of published data has often been lacking. This is of concern as assessment of metals in trace concentrations in biological media are fraught with difficulties from the collection, handling, and storage of samples to the chemical analyses. This has been proven over and over again from the results of interlaboratory testing and quality control exercises. Large variations in results were reported even from ‘experienced’ laboratories.” The UNEP/WHO global study of cadmium biological monitoring set a limit for CDB accuracy using the maximum allowable deviation method at Y = X±(0.1X + 1) for a targeted concentration of 10 µg Cd/l (Friberg and Vahter 1983). The performance of participating laboratories over a concentration range of 1.5-12 µg/l was reported by Lind et al. (1987). Of the 3 QC runs conducted during 1982 and 1983, 1 or 2 of the 6 laboratories failed each run. For the years 1983 and 1985, between zero and 2 laboratories failed each of the consecutive QC runs. In another study (Vahter and Friberg 1988), QC samples consisting of both external (unknown) and internal (stated) concentrations were distributed to laboratories participating in the epidemiology research. In this study, the maximum acceptable deviation between the regression analysis of reported results and reference values was set at Y = X±(0.05X + 0.2) for a concentration range of 0.3-5.0 µg Cd/l. It is reported that only 2 of 5 laboratories had acceptable data after the first QC set, and only 1 of 5 laboratories had acceptable data after the second QC set. By the fourth QC set, however, all 5 laboratories were judged proficient. The need for high quality CDB monitoring is apparent when the toxicological and biological characteristics of this metal are considered; an increase in CDB from 2 to 4 µg/l could cause a doubling of the cadmium accumulation in the kidney, a critical target tissue for selective cadmium accumulation (Nordberg and Nordberg 1988). Historically, the CDC's internal QC program for CDB cadmium monitoring program has found achievable accuracy to be ±10% of the true value at CDB concentrations ≥5.0 µg/l (Paschal 1990). Data on the performance of laboratories participating in this program currently are not available. 5.1.6 Observed CDB Concentrations As stated in Section 4.3, CDB concentrations are representative of ongoing levels of exposure to cadmium. Among those who have been exposed chronically to cadmium for extended periods, however, CDB may contain a component attributable to the general cadmium body burden. 5.1.6.1 CDB Concentrations Among Unexposed Samples Numerous studies have been conducted examining CDB concentrations in the general population, and in control groups used for comparison with cadmium-exposed workers. A number of reports have been published that present erroneously high values of CDB (Nordberg and Nordberg 1988). This problem was due to contamination of samples during sampling and analysis, and to errors in analysis. Early AAS methods were not sufficiently sensitive to accurately estimate CDB concentrations. Table 4 presents results of recent studies reporting CDB levels for the general U.S. population not exposed occupationally to cadmium. Other surveys of tissue cadmium using U.S. samples and conducted as part of a cooperative effort among Japan, Sweden and the U.S., did not collect CDB data because standard analytical methodologies were unavailable, and because of analytic problems (Kjellstrom 1979; SWRI 1978). Table 4—Blood Cadmium Concentrations of U.S. Population Not Occupationally Exposed to Cadmium a Study No. No. in study (n) Sex Age Smoking habits b Arithmetic mean (±S.D.) c Absolute range or (95% CI) d Geometric mean (±GSD) e Lower 95th percentile of distribution f Upper 95th percentile of distribution f Reference 1 80 M 4 to 69 NS,S 1.13 0.35-3.3 0.98±1.71 0.4 2.4 Kowal et al. (1979). 88 F 4 to 69 NS,S 1.03 0.21-3.3 0.91±1.63 0.4 2.0 115 M/F 4 to 69 NS 0.95 0.21-3.3 0.85±1.59 0.4 1.8 31 M/F 4 to 69 S 1.54 0.4-3.3 1.37±1.65 0.6 3.2 2 10 M Adults (?) 2.0±2.1 (0.5-5.0) g g Ellis et al. (1983). 3 24 M Adults NS 0.6±1/87 0.2 1.8 Frieberg and Vahter (1983). 20 M Adults S 1.2±2.13 0.3 4.4 64 F Adults NS 0.5±1.85 0.2 1.4 39 F Adults S 0.8±2.22 0.2 3.1 4 32 M Adults S,NS 1.2±2.0 0.4 3.9 Thun et al. (1989). 5 35 M Adults (?) 2.1±2.1 (0.5-7.3) g g Mueller et al. (1989). a b c d e f g Arithmetic and/or geometric means and standard deviations are provided in Table 4 for measurements among the populations defined in each study listed. The range of reported measurements and/or the 95% upper and lower confidence intervals for the means are presented when this information was reported in a study. For studies reporting either an arithmetic or geometric standard deviation along with a mean, the lower and upper 95th percentile for the distribution also were derived and reported in the table. The data provided in table 4 from Kowal et al. (1979) are from studies conducted between 1974 and 1976 evaluating CDB levels for the general population in Chicago, and are considered to be representative of the U.S. population. These studies indicate that the average CDB concentration among those not occupationally exposed to cadmium is approximately 1 µg/l. In several other studies presented in Table 4, measurements are reported separately for males and females, and for smokers and nonsmokers. The data in this table indicate that similar CDB levels are observed among males and females in the general population, but that smokers tend to exhibit higher CDB levels than nonsmokers. Based on the Kowal et al. (1979) study, smokers not occupationally exposed to cadmium exhibit an average CDB level of 1.4 µg/l. In general, nonsmokers tend to exhibit levels ranging to 2 µg/l, while levels observed among smokers range to 5 µg/l. Based on the data presented in Table 4, 95% of those not occupationally exposed to cadmium exhibit CDB levels less than 5 µg/l. 5.1.6.2 CDB concentrations among exposed workers Table 5 is a summary of results from studies reporting CDB levels among workers exposed to cadmium in the work place. As in Table 4, arithmetic and/or geometric means and standard deviations are provided if reported in the listed studies. The absolute range, or the 95% confidence interval around the mean, of the data in each study are provided when reported. In addition, the lower and upper 95th percentile of the distribution are presented for each study i which a mean and corresponding standard deviation were reported. Table 5 also provides estimates of the duration, and level, of exposure to cadmium in the work place if these data were reported in the listed studies. The data presented in table 5 suggest that CDB levels are dose related. Sukuri et al. (1983) show that higher CDB levels are observed among workers experiencing higher work place exposure. This trend appears to be true of the studies listed in the table. CDB levels reported in table 5 are higher among those showing signs of cadmium-related kidney damage than those showing no such damage. Lauwerys et al. (1976) report CDB levels among workers with kidney lesions that generally are above the levels reported for workers without kidney lesions. Ellis et al. (1983) report a similar observation comparing workers with and without renal dysfunction, although they found more overlap between the 2 groups than Lauwerys et al. Table 5—Blood Cadmium in Workers Exposed to Cadmium in the Workplace Study number Work environment (worker population monitored) Number in study Employment in years (mean) Mean concentration of cadmium in air (µg/m 3 Concentrations of Cadmium in blood a Arithmetic mean (±S.D.) b Absolute range or (95% C.I.) c Geometric mean (GSD) d Lower 95th percentile of range e f Upper 95th percentile of range e f Reference 1 Ni-Cd battery plant and Cd production plant: 3-40 ≤90 Lauwerys et al. 1976. (Workers without kidney lesions) 96 21.4±1.9 (18) (25) (Workers with kidney lesions) 25 38.8±3.8 (32) (45) 2 Ni-Cd battery plant: Adamsson et al. (1979). (Smokers) 7 (5) 10.1 22.7 7.3-67.2 (Nonsmokers) 8 (9) 7.0 7.0 4.9-10.5 3 Cadmium alloy plant: Sukuri et al. 1982. (High exposure group) 7 (10.6) [1,000-5 yrs; 20.8±7.1 (7.3) (34) (Low exposure group) 9 (7.3) 40-5 yrs] 7.1±1.1 (5.1) (9.1) 4 Retrospective study of workers with renal problems: 19 15-41 Roels et al. 1982. (Before removal) (27.2) 39.9±3.7 11-179 (34) (46) (After removal) g 14.1±5.6 5.7-27.4 (4.4) (24) 5 Cadmium production plant: Ellis et al. 1983. (Workers without renal dysfunction) 33 1-34 15±5.7 7-31 (5.4) (25) (Workers with renal dysfunction) 18 10-34 24±8.5 10-34 (9.3) (39) 6 Cd-Cu alloy plant 75 Up to 39 8.8±1.1 7.5 10 Mason et al. 1988. 7 Cadmium recovery operation—Current (19) and former (26) workers 45 (19.0) 7.9±2.0 2.5 25 Thun et al. 1989. 8 Cadmium recovery operation 40 10.2±5.3 2.2-18.8 (1.3) (19) Mueller et al. 1989. a b c d e f g The data in table 5 also indicate that CDB levels are higher among those experiencing current occupational exposure than those who have been removed from such exposure. Roels et al. (1982) indicate that CDB levels observed among workers experiencing ongoing exposure in the work place are almost entirely above levels observed among workers removed from such exposure. This finding suggests that CDB levels decrease once cadmium exposure has ceased. A comparison of the data presented in tables 4 and 5 indicates that CDB levels observed among cadmium-exposed workers is significantly higher than levels observed among the unexposed groups. With the exception of 2 studies presented in table 5 (1 of which includes former workers in the sample group tested), the lower 95th percentile for CDB levels among exposed workers are greater than 5 µg/l, which is the value of the upper 95th percentile for CDB levels observed among those who are not occupationally exposed. Therefore, a CDB level of 5 µg/l represents a threshold above which significant work place exposure to cadmium may be occurring. 5.1.7 Conclusions and Recommendations for CDB Based on the above evaluation, the following recommendations are made for a CDB proficiency program. 5.1.7.1 Recommended method The method of Stoeppler and Brandt (1980) should be adopted for analyzing CDB. This method was selected over other methods for its straightforward sample-preparation procedures, and because limitations of the method were described adequately. It also is the method used by a plurality of laboratories currently participating in the CTQ proficiency program. In a recent CTQ interlaboratory comparison report (CTQ 1991), analysis of the methods used by laboratories to measure CDB indicates that 46% (11 of 24) of the participating laboratories used the Stoeppler and Brandt methodology (HNO 3 Laboratories may adopt alternate methods, but it is the responsibility of the laboratory to demonstrate that the alternate methods meet the data quality objectives defined for the Stoeppler and Brandt method (see Section 5.1.7.2 below). 5.1.7.2 Data quality objectives Based on the above evaluation, the following data quality objectives (DQOs) should facilitate interpretation of analytical results. Limit of Detection. Accuracy. Currently, approximately 12 laboratories in the CTQ program are achieving an accuracy for CDB analysis within the more severe constraints of ±1 µg/l or 15% (whichever is greater). Later, as laboratories gain experience, they should achieve the level of accuracy exhibited by these 12 laboratories. The experience in the CTQ program has shown that, even without incentives, laboratories benefit from the feedback of the program; after they have analyzed 40-50 control samples from the program, performance improves to the point where about 60% of the laboratories can meet the stricter criterion of ±1 µg/l or 15% (Weber 1988). Thus, this stricter target accuracy is a reasonable DQO. Precision. For internal QC samples (see Section 3.3.1), laboratories should attain an overall precision near 25%. For CDB samples with concentrations less than 2 µg/l, a target precision of 40% is reasonable, while precisions of 20% should be achievable for concentrations greater than 2 µg/l. Although these values are more strict than values observed in the CTQ interlaboratory program reported by Webber (1988), they are within the achievable limits reported by Stoeppler and Brandt (1980). 5.1.7.3 Quality assurance/quality control Commercial laboratories providing measurement of CDB should adopt an internal QA/QC program that incorporates the following components: Strict adherence to the selected method, including all calibration requirements; regular incorporation of QC samples during actual runs; a protocol for corrective actions, and documentation of these actions; and, participation in an interlaboratory proficiency program. Note that the nonmandatory QA/QC program presented in Attachment 1 is based on the Stoeppler and Brandt method for CDB analysis. Should an alternate method be adopted, the laboratory should develop a QA/QC program satisfying the provisions of Section 3.3.1. 5.2 Measuring Cadmium in Urine (CDU) As in the case of CDB measurement, proper determination of CDU requires strict analytical discipline regarding collection and handling of samples. Because cadmium is both ubiquitous in the environment and employed widely in coloring agents for industrial products that may be used during sample collection, preparation and analysis, care should be exercised to ensure that samples are not contaminated during the sampling procedure. Methods for CDU determination share many of the same features as those employed for the determination of CDB. Thus, changes and improvements to methods for measuring CDU over the past 40 years parallel those used to monitor CDB. The direction of development has largely been toward the simplification of sample preparation techniques made possible because of improvements in analytic techniques. 5.2.1 Units of CDU Measurement Procedures adopted for reporting CDU concentrations are not uniform. In fact, the situation for reporting CDU is more complicated than for CDB, where concentrations are normalized against a unit volume of whole blood. Concentrations of solutes in urine vary with several biological factors (including the time since last voiding and the volume of liquid consumed over the last few hours); as a result, solute concentrations should be normalized against another characteristic of urine that represents changes in solute concentrations. The 2 most common techniques are either to standardize solute concentrations against the concentration of creatinine, or to standardize solute concentrations against the specific gravity of the urine. Thus, CDU concentrations have been reported in the literature as “uncorrected” concentrations of cadmium per volume of urine ( i.e. i.e. i.e. i.e. While it is agreed generally that urine values of analytes should be normalized for reporting purposes, some debate exists over what correction method should be used. The medical community has long favored normalization based on creatinine concentration, a common urinary constituent. Creatinine is a normal product of tissue catabolism, is excreted at a uniform rate, and the total amount excreted per day is constant on a day-to-day basis (NIOSH 1984b). While this correction method is accepted widely in Europe, and within some occupational health circles, Kowals (1983) argues that the use of specific gravity ( i.e. Kowals (1983) found that urinary creatinine (CRTU) is lower in females than males, and also varies with age. Creatinine excretion is highest in younger males (20-30 years old), decreases at middle age (50-60 years), and may rise slightly in later years. Thus, cadmium concentrations may be underestimated for some workers with high CRTU levels. Within a single void urine collection, urine concentration of any analyte will be affected by recent consumption of large volumes of liquids, and by heavy physical labor in hot environments. The absolute amount of analyte excreted may be identical, but concentrations will vary widely so that urine must be corrected for specific gravity ( i.e. Despite some shortcomings, reporting solute concentrations as a function of creatinine concentration is accepted generally; OSHA therefore recommends that CDU levels be reported as the mass of cadmium per unit mass of creatinine (µg/g CTRU). Reporting CDU as µg/g CRTU requires an additional analytical process beyond the analysis of cadmium: Samples must be analyzed independently for creatinine so that results may be reported as the ratio of cadmium to creatinine concentrations found in the urine sample. Consequently, the overall quality of the analysis depends on the combined performance by a laboratory on these 2 determinations. The analysis used for CDU determinations is addressed below in terms of µg Cd/l, with analysis of creatinine addressed separately. Techniques for assessing creatinine are discussed in Section 5.4. Techniques for deriving cadmium as a ratio of CRTU, and the confidence limits for independent measurements of cadmium and CRTU, are provided in Section 3.3.3. 5.2.2 Analytical Techniques Used To Monitor CDU Analytical techniques used for CDU determinations are similar to those employed for CDB determinations; these techniques are summarized in Table 3. As with CDB monitoring, the technique most suitable for CDU determinations is atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS). AAS methods used for CDU determinations typically employ a graphite furnace, with background correction made using either the deuterium-lamp or Zeeman techniques; Section 5.1.1 provides a detailed description of AAS methods. 5.2.3 Methods Developed for CDU Determinations Princi (1947), Smith et al. (1955), Smith and Kench (1957), and Tsuchiya (1967) used colorimetric procedures similar to those described in the CDB section above to estimate CDU concentrations. In these methods, urine (50 ml) is reduced to dryness by heating in a sand bath and digested (wet ashed) with mineral acids. Cadmium then is complexed with dithiazone, extracted with chloroform and quantified by spectrophotometry. These early studies typically report reagent blank values equivalent to 0.3 µg Cd/l, and CDU concentrations among nonexposed control groups at maximum levels of 10 µg Cd/l—erroneously high values when compared to more recent surveys of cadmium concentrations in the general population. By the mid-1970s, most analytical procedures for CDU analysis used either wet ashing (mineral acid) or high temperatures (>400 °C) to digest the organic matrix of urine, followed by cadmium chelation with APDC or DDTC solutions and extraction with MIBK. The resulting aliquots were analyzed by flame or graphite-furnace AAS (Kjellstrom 1979). Improvements in control over temperature parameters with electrothermal heating devices used in conjunction with flameless AAS techniques, and optimization of temperature programs for controlling the drying, charring, and atomization processes in sample analyses, led to improved analytical detection of diluted urine samples without the need for sample digestion or ashing. Roels et al. (1978) successfully used a simple sample preparation, dilution of 1.0 ml aliquots of urine with 0.1 N HNO 3 In the method described by Pruszkowska et al. (1983), which has become the preferred method for CDU analysis, urine samples were diluted at a ratio of 1:5 with water; diammonium hydrogenphosphate in dilute HNO 3 5.2.4 Sample Collection and Handling Sample collection procedures for CDU may contribute to variability observed among CDU measurements. Sources of variation attendant to sampling include time-of-day, the interval since ingestion of liquids, and the introduction of external contamination during the collection process. Therefore, to minimize contributions from these variables, strict adherence to a sample-collection protocol is recommended. This protocol should include provisions for normalizing the conditions under which urine is collected. Every effort also should be made to collect samples during the same time of day. Collection of urine samples from an industrial work force for biological monitoring purposes usually is performed using “spot” ( i.e. To minimize the interval during which sample urine resides in the bladder, the following adaption to the “spot” collection procedure is recommended: The bladder should first be emptied, and then a large glass of water should be consumed; the sample may be collected within an hour after the water is consumed. 5.2.5 Best Achievable Performance Performance using a particular method for CDU determinations is assumed to be equivalent to the performance reported by the research laboratories in which the method was developed. Pruszkowska et al. (1983) report a detection limit of 0.04 µg/l CDU, with a CV of <4% between 0-5 µg/l. The CDC reports a minimum CDU detection limit of 0.07 µg/l using a modified method based on Pruszkowska et al. (1983). No CV is stated in this protocol; the protocol contains only rejection criteria for internal QC parameters used during accuracy determinations with known standards (Attachment 8 of exhibit 106 of OSHA docket H057A). Stoeppler and Brandt (1980) report a CDU detection limit of 0.2 µ/l for their methodology. 5.2.6 General Method Performance For any particular method, the expected initial performance from commercial laboratories may be somewhat lower than that reported by the research laboratory in which the method was developed. With participation in appropriate proficiency programs, and use of a proper in-house QA/QC program incorporating provisions for regular corrective actions, the performance of commercial laboratories may be expected to improve and approach that reported by a research laboratories. The results reported for existing proficiency programs serve to specify the initial level of performance that likely can be expected from commercial laboratories offering analysis using a particular method. Weber (1988) reports on the results of the CTQ proficiency program, which includes CDU results for laboratories participating in the program. Results indicate that after receiving 60 samples ( i.e. Another report from the CTQ (1991) summarizes preliminary CDU results from their 1991 interlaboratory program. According to the report, for 3 CDU samples with values of 9.0, 16.8, 31.5 µg/l, acceptable results (target of ±2 µg/l or 15 % of the consensus mean, whichever is greater) were achieved by only 44-52% of the 34 laboratories participating in the CDU program. The overall CVs for these 3 CDU samples among the 34 participating laboratories were 31%, 25%, and 49%, respectively. The reason for this poor performance has not been determined. A more recent report from the CTQ (Weber, private communication) indicates that 36% of the laboratories in the program have been able to achieve the target of ±1 µg/l or 15% for more than 75% of the samples analyzed over the last 5 years, while 45% of participating laboratories achieved a target of ±2 µg/l or 15% for more than 75% of the samples analyzed over the same period. Note that results reported in the interlaboratory programs are in terms of µg Cd/l of urine, unadjusted for creatinine. The performance indicated, therefore, is a measure of the performance of the cadmium portion of the analyses, and does not include variation that may be introduced during the analysis of CRTU. 5.2.7 Observed CDU Concentrations Prior to the onset of renal dysfunction, CDU concentrations provide a general indication of the exposure history ( i.e. 5.2.7.1 Range of CDU concentrations observed among unexposed samples Surveys of CDU concentrations in the general population were first reported from cooperative studies among industrial countries ( i.e. Kowal and Zirkes (1983) reported CDU concentrations for almost 1,000 samples collected during 1978-79 from the general U.S. adult population ( i.e. Based on further statistical examination of these data, including the lifestyle characteristics of this group, Kowal (1988) suggested increased cadmium absorption ( i.e. CDU levels presented in Table 6 are adjusted for age and gender. Results suggest that CDU levels may be slightly different among men and women ( i.e. Table 6—Urine Cadmium Concentrations in the U.S. Adult Population: Normal and Concentration-Adjusted Values by Age and Sex 1 Geometric means (and geometric standard deviations) Unadjusted (µg/l) SG-adjusted 2 Creatine-adjusted (µg/g) Sex: Male (n = 484) 0.55 (2.9) 0.73 (2.6) 0.55 (2.7) Female (n = 498) 0.49 (3.0) 0.86 (2.7) 0.78 (2.7) Age: 20-29 (n = 222) 0.32 (3.0) 0.43 (2.7) 0.32 (2.7) 30-39 (n = 141) 0.46 (3.2) 0.70 (2.8) 0.54 (2.7) 40-49 (n = 142) 0.50 (3.0) 0.81 (2.6) 0.70 (2.7) 50-59 (n = 117) 0.61 (2.9) 0.99 (2.4) 0.90 (2.3) 60-69 (n = 272) 0.76 (2.6) 1.16 (2.3) 1.03 (2.3) 1 2 Table 7—Urine Cadmium Concentrations in the U.S. Adult Population: Cumulative Frequency Distribution of Urinary Cadmium (N = 982) 1 Range of concentrations Unadjusted (µg/l) percent SG-adjusted (µg/l at 1.020) percent Creatine-adjusted (µg/g) percent <0.5 43.9 28.0 35.8 0.6-1.0 71.7 56.4 65.6 1.1-1.5 84.4 74.9 81.4 1.6-2.0 91.3 84.7 88.9 2.1-3.0 97.3 94.4 95.8 3.1-4.0 98.8 97.4 97.2 4.1-5.0 99.4 98.2 97.9 5.1-10.0 99.6 99.4 99.3 10.0-20.0 99.8 99.6 99.6 1 The data in the Table 6 indicate the geometric mean of CDU levels observed among the general population is 0.52 µ/g Cd/l urine (unadjusted), with a geometric standard deviation of 3.0. Normalized for creatinine, the geometric mean for the population is 0.66 µ/g CRTU, with a geometric standard deviation of 2.7. Table 7 provides the distributions of CDU concentrations for the general population studied by Kowal and Zirkes. The data in this table indicate that 95% of the CDU levels observed among those not occupationally exposed to cadmium are below 3 µ/g CRTU. 5.2.7.2 Range of CDU concentrations observed among exposed workers Table 8 is a summary of results from available studies of CDU concentrations observed among cadmium-exposed workers. In this table, arithmetic and/or geometric means and standard deviations are provided if reported in these studies. The absolute range for the data in each study, or the 95% confidence interval around the mean of each study, also are provided when reported. The lower and upper 95th percentile of the distribution are presented for each study in which a mean and corresponding standard deviation were reported. Table 8 also provides estimates of the years of exposure, and the levels of exposure, to cadmium in the work place if reported in these studies. Concentrations reported in this table are in µ/g CRTU, unless otherwise stated. Table 8—Urine Cadmium Concentrations in Workers Exposed to Cadmium in the Workplace Study number Work environment (worker population monitored) Number in Study (n) Employment in years (mean) Mean Concentration of cadmium in air (µg/m 3 Concentration of cadmium in Urine a Arithmetic mean (±S.D.) b Absolute range or (95% C.I.) c Geometric mean (GSD) d Lower 95th percentile of range e f Upper 95th percentile of range e f Reference 1 Ni-Cd battery plant and Cd production plant 3-40 ≤90 Lauwerys et al. 1976. (Workers without kidney lesions) 96 16.3±16.7 (0) (44) (Workers with kidney lesions) 25 48.2±42.6 (0) (120) 2 Ni-Cd battery plant Adamsson et al. (1979). (Smokers) 7 (5) 10.1 5.5 1.0-14.7 (Nonsmokers) 8 (9) 7.0 3.6 0.5-9.3 3 Cadmium salts production facility 148 (15.4) 15.8 2-150 Butchet et al. 1980. 4 Retrospective study of workers with renal problems 19 15-41 Roels et al. 1982. (Before removal) (27.2) 39.4±28.1 10.8-117 (0) (88) (After removal) (4.2) g 16.4±9.0 80-42.3 (1.0) (32) 5 Cadmium production plant Ellis et al. 1983. (Workers without renal dysfunction) 33 1-34 9.4±6.9 2-27 (0) (21) (Workers with renal dysfunction) 18 10-34 22.8±12.7 8-55 (1) (45) 6 Cd-Cu alloy plant 75 Up to 39 Note h 6.9±9.4 (0) (23) Mason et al. 1988. 7 Cadmium recovery operation 45 (19) 87 9.3±6.9 (0) (21) Thun et al. 1989. 8 Pigment manufacturing plant 29 (12.8) 0.18-3.0 0.2-9.5 1.1 Mueller et al. 1989. 9 Pigment manufacturing plant 26 (12.1) ≤3.0 1.25±2.45 0.3 6 Kawada et al. 1990. a b c d e f g h Data in Table 8 from Lauwerys et al. (1976) and Ellis et al. (1983) indicate that CDU concentrations are higher among those exhibiting kidney lesions or dysfunction than among those lacking these symptoms. Data from the study by Roels et al. (1982) indicate that CDU levels decrease among workers removed from occupational exposure to cadmium in comparison to workers experiencing ongoing exposure. In both cases, however, the distinction between the 2 groups is not as clear as with CDB; there is more overlap in CDU levels observed among each of the paired populations than is true for corresponding CDB levels. As with CDB levels, the data in Table 8 suggest increased CDU concentrations among workers who experienced increased overall exposure. Although a few occupationally-exposed workers in the studies presented in Table 8 exhibit CDU levels below 3 µg/g CRTU, most of those workers exposed to cadmium levels in excess of the PEL defined in the final cadmium rule exhibit CDU levels above 3 µg/g CRTU; this level represents the upper 95th percentile of the CDU distribution observed among those who are not occupationally exposed to cadmium (Table 7). The mean CDU levels reported in Table 8 among occupationally-exposed groups studied (except 2) exceed 3 µg/g CRTU. Correspondingly, the level of exposure reported in these studies (with 1 exception) are significantly higher than what workers will experience under the final cadmium rule. The 2 exceptions are from the studies by Mueller et al. (1989) and Kawada et al. (1990); these studies indicate that workers exposed to cadmium during pigment manufacture do not exhibit CDU levels as high as those levels observed among workers exposed to cadmium in other occupations. Exposure levels, however, were lower in the pigment manufacturing plants studied. Significantly, workers removed from occupational cadmium exposure for an average of 4 years still exhibited CDU levels in excess of 3 µg/g CRTU (Roels et al. 1982). In the single-exception study with a reported level of cadmium exposure lower than levels proposed in the final rule ( i.e. i.e. Based on the above data, a CDU level of 3 µg/g CRTU appear to represent a threshold above which significant work place exposure to cadmium occurs over the work span of those being monitored. Note that this threshold is not as distinct as the corresponding threshold described for CDB. In general, the variability associated with CDU measurements among exposed workers appears to be higher than the variability associated with CDB measurements among similar workers. 5.2.8 Conclusions and Recommendations for CDU The above evaluation supports the following recommendations for a CDU proficiency program. These recommendations address only sampling and analysis procedures for CDU determinations specifically, which are to be reported as an unadjusted µg Cd/l urine. Normalizing this result to creatinine requires a second analysis for CRTU so that the ratio of the 2 measurements can be obtained. Creatinine analysis is addressed in Section 5.4. Formal procedures for combining the 2 measurements to derive a value and a confidence limit for CDU in µg/g CRTU are provided in Section 3.3.3. 5.2.8.1 Recommended method The method of Pruszkowska et al. (1983) should be adopted for CDU analysis. This method is recommended because it is simple, straightforward and reliable ( i.e. A synopsis of the methods used by laboratories to determine CDU under the interlaboratory program administered by the CTQ (1991) indicates that more than 78% (24 of 31) of the participating laboratories use a dilution method to prepare urine samples for CDU analysis. Laboratories may adopt alternate methods, but it is the responsibility of the laboratory to demonstrate that the alternate methods provide results of comparable quality to the Pruszkowska method. 5.2.8.2 Data quality objectives The following data quality objectives should facilitate interpretation of analytical results, and are achievable based on the above evaluation. Limit of Detection. i.e. The CDC reports a minimum detection limit for CDU of 0.07 µg/l using a modified Pruszkowska method. This limit of detection was defined as 3 times the standard deviation calculated from 10 repeated measurements of a “low level” CDU test sample (Attachment 8 of exhibit 106 of OSHA docket H057A). Stoeppler and Brandt (1980) report a limit of detection for CDU of 0.2 µg/l using an aqueous dilution (1:2) of the urine samples. Accuracy. Precision. 5.2.8.3 Quality assurance/quality control Commercial laboratories providing CDU determinations should adopt an internal QA/QC program that incorporates the following components: Strict adherence to the selected method, including calibration requirements; regular incorporation of QC samples during actual runs; a protocol for corrective actions, and documentation of such actions; and, participation in an interlaboratory proficiency program. Note that the nonmandatory program presented in Attachment 1 as an example of an acceptable QA/QC program, is based on using the Pruszkowska method for CDU analysis. Should an alternate method be adopted by a laboratory, the laboratory should develop a QA/QC program equivalent to the nonmandatory program, and which satisfies the provisions of Section 3.3.1. 5.3 Monitoring β-2-Microglobulin in Urine (B2MU) As indicated in Section 4.3, B2MU appears to be the best of several small proteins that may be monitored as early indicators of cadmium-induced renal damage. Several analytic techniques are available for measuring B2M. 5.3.1 Units of B2MU Measurement Procedures adopted for reporting B2MU levels are not uniform. In these guidelines, OSHA recommends that B2MU levels be reported as µg/g CRTU, similar to reporting CDU concentrations. Reporting B2MU normalized to the concentration of CRTU requires an additional analytical process beyond the analysis of B2M: Independent analysis for creatinine so that results may be reported as a ratio of the B2M and creatinine concentrations found in the urine sample. Consequently, the overall quality of the analysis depends on the combined performance on these 2 analyses. The analysis used for B2MU determinations is described in terms of µg B2M/l urine, with analysis of creatinine addressed separately. Techniques used to measure creatinine are provided in Section 5.4. Note that Section 3.3.3 provides techniques for deriving the value of B2M as function of CRTU, and the confidence limits for independent measurements of B2M and CRTU. 5.3.2 Analytical Techniques Used To Monitor B2MU One of the earliest tests used to measure B2MU was the radial immunodiffusion technique. This technique is a simple and specific method for identification and quantitation of a number of proteins found in human serum and other body fluids when the protein is not readily differentiated by standard electrophoretic procedures. A quantitative relationship exists between the concentration of a protein deposited in a well that is cut into a thin agarose layer containing the corresponding monospecific antiserum, and the distance that the resultant complex diffuses. The wells are filled with an unknown serum and the standard (or control), and incubated in a moist environment at room temperature. After the optimal point of diffusion has been reached, the diameters of the resulting precipition rings are measured. The diameter of a ring is related to the concentration of the constituent substance. For B2MU determinations required in the medical monitoring program, this method requires a process that may be insufficient to concentrate the protein to levels that are required for detection. Radioimmunoassay (RIA) techniques are used widely in immunologic assays to measure the concentration of antigen or antibody in body-fluid samples. RIA procedures are based on competitive-binding techniques. If antigen concentration is being measured, the principle underlying the procedure is that radioactive-labeled antigen competes with the sample's unlabeled antigen for binding sites on a known amount of immobile antibody. When these 3 components are present in the system, an equilibrium exists. This equilibrium is followed by a separation of the free and bound forms of the antigen. Either free or bound radioactive-labeled antigen can be assessed to determine the amount of antigen in the sample. The analysis is performed by measuring the level of radiation emitted either by the bound complex following removal of the solution containing the free antigen, or by the isolated solution containing the residual-free antigen. The main advantage of the RIA method is the extreme sensitivity of detection for emitted radiation and the corresponding ability to detect trace amounts of antigen. Additionally, large numbers of tests can be performed rapidly. The enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) techniques are similar to RIA techniques except that nonradioactive labels are employed. This technique is safe, specific and rapid, and is nearly as sensitive as RIA techniques. An enzyme-labeled antigen is used in the immunologic assay; the labeled antigen detects the presence and quantity of unlabeled antigen in the sample. In a representative ELISA test, a plastic plate is coated with antibody (e.g., antibody to B2M). The antibody reacts with antigen (B2M) in the urine and forms an antigen-antibody complex on the plate. A second anti-B2M antibody ( i.e. In a fluorescent ELISA technique (such as the one employed in the Pharmacia Delphia test for B2M), the labeled enzyme is bound to a strong fluorescent dye. In the Pharmacia Delphia test, an antigen bound to a fluorescent dye competes with unlabeled antigen in the sample for a predetermined amount of specific, immobile antibody. Once equilibrium is reached, the immobile phase is removed from the labeled antigen in the sample solution and washed; an enhancement solution then is added that liberates the fluorescent dye from the bound antigen-antibody complex. The enhancement solution also contains a chelate that complexes with the fluorescent dye in solution; this complex increases the fluorescent properties of the dye so that it is easier to detect. To determine the quantity of B2M in a sample using the Pharmacia Delphia test, the intensity of the fluorescence of the enhancement solution is measured. This intensity is proportional to the concentration of labeled antigen that bound to the immobile antibody phase during the initial competition with unlabeled antigen from the sample. Consequently, the intensity of the fluorescence is an inverse function of the concentration of antigen (B2M) in the original sample. The relationship between the fluorescence level and the B2M concentration in the sample is determined using a series of graded standards, and extrapolating these standards to find the concentration of the unknown sample. 5.3.3 Methods Developed for B2MU Determinations B2MU usually is measured by radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA); however, other methods (including gel electrophoresis, radial immunodiffusion, and nephelometric assays) also have been described (Schardun and van Epps 1987). RIA and ELISA methods are preferred because they are sensitive at concentrations as low as micrograms per liter, require no concentration processes, are highly reliable and use only a small sample volume. Based on a survey of the literature, the ELISA technique is recommended for monitoring B2MU. While RIAs provide greater sensitivity (typically about 1 µg/l, Evrin et al. 1971), they depend on the use of radioisotopes; use of radioisotopes requires adherence to rules and regulations established by the Atomic Energy Commission, and necessitates an expensive radioactivity counter for testing. Radioisotopes also have a relatively short half-life, which corresponds to a reduced shelf life, thereby increasing the cost and complexity of testing. In contrast, ELISA testing can be performed on routine laboratory spectrophotometers, do not i.e. 5.3.4 Sample Collection and Handling As with CDB or CDU, sample collection procedures are addressed primarily to identify ways to minimize the degree of variability introduced by sample collection during medical monitoring. It is unclear the extent to which sample collection contributes to B2MU variability. Sources of variation include time-of-day effects, the interval since consuming liquids and the quantity of liquids consumed, and the introduction of external contamination during the collection process. A special problem unique to B2M sampling is the sensitivity of this protein to degradation under acid conditions commonly found in the bladder. To minimize this problem, strict adherence to a sampling protocol is recommended. The protocol should include provisions for normalizing the conditions under which the urine is collected. Clearly, it is important to minimize the interval urine spends in the bladder. It also is recommended that every effort be made to collect samples during the same time of day. Collection of urine samples for biological monitoring usually is performed using “spot” ( i.e. To minimize the interval that sample urine resides in the bladder, the following adaption to the “spot” collection procedure is recommended: The bladder should be emptied and then a large glass of water should be consumed; the sample then should be collected within an hour after the water is consumed. 5.3.5 Best Achievable Performance The best achievable performance is assumed to be equivalent to the performance reported by the manufacturers of the Pharmacia Delphia test kits (Pharmacia 1990). According to the insert that comes with these kits, QC results should be within ±2 SDs of the mean for each control sample tested; a CV of less than or equal to 5.2% should be maintained. The total CV reported for test kits is less than or equal to 7.2%. 5.3.6 General Method Performance Unlike analyses for CDB and CDU, the Pharmacia Delphia test is standardized in a commercial kit that controls for many sources of variation. In the absence of data to the contrary, it is assumed that the achievable performance reported by the manufacturer of this test kit will serve as an achievable performance objective. The CTQ proficiency testing program for B2MU analysis is expected to use the performance parameters defined by the test kit manufacturer as the basis of the B2MU proficiency testing program. Note that results reported for the test kit are expressed in terms of µg B2M/l of urine, and have not been adjusted for creatinine. The indicated performance, therefore, is a measure of the performance of the B2M portion of the analyses only, and does not include variation that may have been introduced during the analysis of creatinine. 5.3.7 Observed B2MU Concentrations As indicated in Section 4.3, the concentration of B2MU may serve as an early indicator of the onset of kidney damage associated with cadmium exposure. 5.3.7.1 Range of B2MU concentrations among unexposed samples Most of the studies listed in Table 9 report B2MU levels for those who were not occupationally exposed to cadmium. Studies noted in the second column of this table (which contain the footnote “d”) reported B2MU concentrations among cadmium-exposed workers who, nonetheless, showed no Table 9—B-2-Microglobulin Concentrations Observed in Urine Among Those not Occupationally Exposed to Cadmium Study No. No. in study Geometric mean Geometric standard deviation Lower 95th percentile of distribution a Upper 95th percentile of distribution a Reference 1 133 m b 115 µg/g c 4.03 12 1,140 µg/g c Ishizaki et al. 1989. 2 161 f b 146 µg/g c 3.11 23 940 µg/g c Ishizaki et al. 1989. 3 10 84 µg/g Ellis et al. 1983. 4 203 76 µg/l Stewart and Hughes 1981. 5 9 103 µg/g Chia et al. 1989. 6 47 d 86 µg/L 1.9 30 µg/1 250 µg/L Kjellstrom et al. 1977. 7 1,000 e 68.1 µg/gr Cr f 3.1 m & f <10 µg/gr Cr h 320 µg/gr Cr h Kowal 1983. 8 87 71 µg/g i 7 h 200 h Buchet et al. 1980. 9 10 0.073 mg/24h Evrin et al. 1971. 10 59 156 µg/g 1.1 j 130 180 Mason et al. 1988. 11 8 118 µg/g Iwao et al. 1980. 12 34 79 µg/g Wibowo et al. 1982. 13 41 m 400 µg/gr Cr k Falck et al. 1983. 14 35 n 67 Roels et al. 1991. 15 31 d 63 Roels et al. 1991. 16 36 d 77 i Miksche et al. 1981. 17 18 n 130 Kawada et al. 1989. 18 32 p 122 Kawada et al. 1989. 19 18 d 295 1.4 170 510 Thun et al. 1989. a—Based on an assumed lognormal distribution. b—m = males, f = females. c—Aged general population from non-polluted area; 47.9% population aged 50-69; 52.1% ≥70 years of age; values reported in study. d—Exposed workers without proteinuria. e—492 females, 484 male. f—Creatinine adjusted; males = 68.1 µg/g Cr, females = 64.3 µg/g Cr. h—Reported in the study. i—Arithmetic mean. j—Geometric standard error. k—Upper 95% tolerance limits: for Falck this is based on the 24 hour urine sample. n—Controls. p—Exposed synthetic resin and pigment workers without proteinuria; Cadmium in urine levels up to 10 µg/g Cr. To the extent possible, the studies listed in Table 9 provide geometric means and geometric standard deviations for measurements among the groups defined in each study. For studies reporting a geometric standard deviation along with a mean, the lower and upper 95th percentile for these distributions were derived and reported in the table. The data provided from 15 of the 19 studies listed in Table 9 indicate that the geometric mean concentration of B2M observed among those who were not occupationally exposed to cadmium is 70-170 µg/g CRTU. Data from the 4 remaining studies indicate that exposed workers who exhibit no signs of proteinuria show mean B2MU levels of 60-300 µg/g CRTU. B2MU values in the study by Thun et al. (1989), however, appear high in comparison to the other 3 studies. If this study is removed, B2MU levels for those who are not occupationally exposed to cadmium are similar to B2MU levels found among cadmium-exposed workers who exhibit no signs of kidney dysfunction. Although the mean is high in the study by Thun et al., the range of measurements reported in this study is within the ranges reported for the other studies. Determining a reasonable upper limit from the range of B2M concentrations observed among those who do not exhibit signs of proteinuria is problematic. Elevated B2MU levels are among the signs used to define the onset of kidney dysfunction. Without access to the raw data from the studies listed in Table 9, it is necessary to rely on reported standard deviations to estimate an upper limit for normal B2MU concentrations ( i.e. i.e. i.e. 5.3.7.2 Range of B2MU concentrations among exposed workers Table 10 presents results from studies reporting B2MU determinations among those occupationally exposed to cadmium in the work place; in some of these studies, kidney dysfunction was observed among exposed workers, while other studies did not make an effort to distinguish among exposed workers based on kidney dysfunction. As with Table 9, this table provides geometric means and geometric standard deviations for the groups defined in each study if available. For studies reporting a geometric standard deviation along with a mean, the lower and upper 95th percentiles for the distributions are derived and reported in the table. Table 10—B-2-Microglobulin Concentrations Observed in Urine Among Occupationally-Exposed workers Study No. N Concentration of B-2-Microglobulin in urine Reference Geometric mean (µg/g) a Geom std dev L 95% of range b U 95% of range b 1 1,42 160 6.19 8.1 3,300 Ishizaki et al., 1989. 2 1,75 260 6.50 12 5,600 Ishizaki et al., 1989. 3 33 210 Ellis et al., 1983. 4 65 210 Chia et al., 1989. 5 c 5,700 6.49 d d Kjellstrom et al., 1977. 6 148 e f f Buchet et al., 1980. 7 37 160 3.90 17 1,500 Kenzaburo et al., 1979. 8 c 3,300 8.7 d d Mason et al., 1988. 9 c 6,100 5.99 f f Falck et al., 1983. 10 c 3,900 2.96 d d Elinder et al., 1985. 11 c 300 Roels et al., 1991. 12 g 7,400 Roels et al., 1991. 13 c h Roels et al., 1989. 14 10 690 Iwao et al., 1980. 15 34 71 Wibowo et al., 1982. 16 c 4,700 6.49 d d Thun et al., 1989. a b c 2 2 d e f g h 2 The data provided in Table 10 indicate that the mean B2MU concentration observed among workers experiencing occupational exposure to cadmium (but with undefined levels of proteinuria) is 160-7400 µg/g CRTU. One of these studies reports geometric means lower than this range ( i.e. Seven of the studies listed in Table 10 report a range of B2MU levels among those diagnosed as having renal dysfunction. As indicated in this table, renal dysfunction (proteinuria) is defined in several of these studies by B2MU levels in excess of 300 µg/g CRTU (see footnote “c” of Table 10); therefore, the range of B2MU levels observed in these studies is a function of the operational definition used to identify those with renal dysfunction. Nevertheless, a B2MU level of 300 µg/g CRTU appears to be a meaningful threshold for identifying those having early signs of kidney damage. While levels much higher than 300 µg/g CRTU have been observed among those with renal dysfunction, the vast majority of those not occupationally exposed to cadmium exhibit much lower B2MU concentrations (see Table 9). Similarly, the vast majority of workers not The 300 µg/g CRTU level for B2MU proposed in the above paragraph has support among researchers as the threshold level that distinguishes between cadmium-exposed workers with and without kidney dysfunction. For example, in the guide for physicians who must evaluate cadmium-exposed workers written for the Cadmium Council by Dr. Lauwerys, levels of B2M greater than 200-300 µg/g CRTU are considered to require additional medical evaluation for kidney dysfunction (exhibit 8-447, OSHA docket H057A). The most widely used test for measuring B2M ( i.e. Dr. Elinder, chairman of the Department of Nephrology at the Karolinska Institute, testified at the hearings on the proposed cadmium rule. According to Dr. Elinder (exhibit L-140-45, OSHA docket H057A), the normal concentration of B2MU has been well documented (Evrin and Wibell 1972; Kjellstrom et al. 1977a; Elinder et al. 1978, 1983; Buchet et al. 1980; Jawaid et al. 1983; Kowal and Zirkes, 1983). Elinder stated that the upper 95 or 97.5 percentiles for B2MU among those without tubular dysfunction is below 300 µg/g CRTU (Kjellstrom et al. 1977a; Buchet et al. 1980; Kowal and Zirkes, 1983). Elinder defined levels of B2M above 300 µg/g CRTU as “slight” proteinuria. 5.3.8 Conclusions and Recommendations for B2MU Based on the above evaluation, the following recommendations are made for a B2MU proficiency testing program. Note that the following discussion addresses only sampling and analysis for B2MU determinations ( i.e. 5.3.8.1 Recommended method The Pharmacia Delphia method (Pharmacia 1990) should be adopted as the standard method for B2MU determinations. Laboratories may adopt alternate methods, but it is the responsibility of the laboratory to demonstrate that alternate methods provide results of comparable quality to the Pharmacia Delphia method. 5.3.8.2 Data quality objectives The following data quality objectives should facilitate interpretation of analytical results, and should be achievable based on the above evaluation. Limit of Detection. Accuracy. Due to the low levels of B2MU to be measured generally, it is anticipated that the analysis of creatinine will contribute relatively little to the overall variability observed among creatinine-normalized B2MU levels (see Section 5.4). The initial level of accuracy for reporting B2MU levels under this program should be set at ±15%. Precision. i.e. i.e. 5.3.8.3 Quality assurance/quality control Commercial laboratories providing measurement of B2MU should adopt an internal QA/QC program that incorporates the following components: Strict adherence to the Pharmacia Delphia method, including calibration requirements; regular use of QC samples during routine runs; a protocol for corrective actions, and documentation of these actions; and, participation in an interlaboratory proficiency program. Procedures that may be used to address internal QC requirements are presented in Attachment 1. Due to differences between analyses for B2MU and CDB/CDU, specific values presented in Attachment 1 may have to be modified. Other components of the program (including characterization runs), however, can be adapted to a program for B2MU. 5.4 Monitoring Creatinine in Urine (CRTU) Because CDU and B2MU should be reported relative to concentrations of CRTU, these concentrations should be determined in addition CDU and B2MU determinations. 5.4.1 Units of CRTU Measurement CDU should be reported as µg Cd/g CRTU, while B2MU should be reported as µg B2M/g CRTU. To derive the ratio of cadmium or B2M to creatinine, CRTU should be reported in units of g crtn/l of urine. Depending on the analytical method, it may be necessary to convert results of creatinine determinations accordingly. 5.4.2 Analytical Techniques Used To Monitor CRTU Of the techniques available for CRTU determinations, an absorbance spectrophotometric technique and a high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) technique are identified as acceptable in this protocol. 5.4.3 Methods Developed for CRTU Determinations CRTU analysise performed in support of either CDU or B2MU determinations should be performed using either of the following 2 methods: 1. The Du Pont method ( i.e. 2. The OSHA SLC Technical Center (OSLTC) method, in which creatinine in an aliquot of sample is separated using an HPLC column equipped with a UV detector; the resulting peak is quantified using an electrical integrator (a copy of this method is provided in Attachment 3 of this protocol). 5.4.4 Sample Collection and Handling CRTU samples should be segregated from samples collected for CDU or B2MU analysis. Sample-collection techniques have been described under Section 5.2.4. Samples should be preserved either to stabilize CDU (with HNO 3 5.4.5 General Method Performance Data from the OSLTC indicate that a CV of 5% should be achievable using the OSLTC method (Septon, L private communication). The achievable accuracy of this method has not been determined. Results reported in surveys conducted by the CAP (CAP 1991a, 1991b and 1992) indicate that a CV of 5% is achievable. The accuracy achievable for CRTU determinations has not been reported. Laboratories performing creatinine analysis under this protocol should be CAP accredited and should be active participants in the CAP surveys. 5.4.6 Observed CRTU Concentrations Published data suggest the range of CRTU concentrations is 1.0-1.6 g in 24-hour urine samples (Harrison 1987). These values are equivalent to about 1 g/l urine. 5.4.7 Conclusions and Recommendations for CRTU 5.4.7.1 Recommended method Use either the Jaffe method (Attachment 2) or the OSLTC method (Attachment 3). Alternate methods may be acceptable provided adequate performance is demonstrated in the CAP program. 5.4.7.2 Data quality objectives Limit of Detection. Accuracy. Precision. 6.0 References Adamsson E, Piscator M, and Nogawa K. (1979). Pulmonary and gastrointestinal exposure to cadmium oxide dust in a battery factory. Environmental Health Perspectives, 28, American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH). (1986). Documentation of the Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices. Bernard A, Buchet J, Roels H, Masson P, and Lauwerys R. (1979). Renal excretion of proteins and enzymes in workers exposed to cadmium. European Journal of Clinical Investigation, 9, Bernard A and Lauwerys R. (1990). Early markers of cadmium nephrotoxicity: Biological significance and predictive value. Toxocological and Environmental Chemistry, 27, Braunwald E, Isselbacher K, Petersdorf R, Wilson J, Martin J, and Fauci A (Eds.). (1987). Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine. Buchet J, Roels H, Bernard I, and Lauwerys R. (1980). Assessment of renal funcion of workers exposed to inorganic lead, cadmium, or mercury vapor. Journal of Occupational Medicine, CAP. (1991). Urine Chemistry, Series 1: Survey (Set U-B). College of American Pathologists. CAP. (1991). Urine Chemistry, Series 1: Survey (Set U-C). College of American Pathologists. CAP. (1992). Urine Chemistry, Series 1: Survey (Set U-A). College of American Pathologists. CDC. (1986). Centers for Disease Control, Division of Environmental Health Laboratory Sciences, Center for Environmental Health, Atlanta, Georgia. Docket No. 106A. Lake Couer d'Alene, Idaho cadmium and lead study: 86-0030, Specimen collection and shipping protocol. CDC. (1990). Centers for Disease Control, Nutritional Biochemistry Branch. 4/27/90 Draft SOP for Method 0360A “Determination of cadmium in urine by graphite furnace atomic absorption spectrometry with Zeeman background correction. Centre de Toxicologie du Quebec. (1991). Interlaboratory comparison program report for run #2. Shipping date 3/11/91. Addition BLR 9/19. Chia K, Ong C, Ong H, and Endo G. (1989). Renal tubular function of workers exposed to low levels of cadmium. British Journal of Industrial Medicine, 46, Claeys-Thoreau F. (1982). Determination of low levels of cadmium and lead in biological fluids with simple dilution by atomic absorption spectrophotometry using Zeeman effect background absorption and the L'Vov platform. Atomic Spectroscopy, 3, DeBenzo Z, Fraile R, and Carrion N. (1990). Electrothermal atomization atomic absorption spectrometry with stabilized aqueous standards for the determination of cadmium in whole blood. Analytica Chimica Acta, 231, Elinder C, Edling C, Lindberg E, Kagedal B, and Vesterberg O. (1985). Assessment of renal function in workers previously exposed to cadmium. British Journal of Internal Medicine, 42, Ellis K, Cohn S, and Smith T. (1985). Cadmium inhalation exposure estimates: Their significance with respect to kidney and liver cadmium burden. Journal of Toxicology and Environmental Health, 15, Ellis K, Yasumura S, Vartsky D, and Cohn S. (1983). Evaluation of biological indicators of body burden of cadmium in humans. Fundamentals and Applied Toxicology, 3, Ellis K, Yeun K, Yasumura S, and Cohn S. (1984). Dose-response analysis of cadmium in man: Body burden vs kidney function. Environmental Research, 33, Evrin P, Peterson A, Wide I, and Berggard I. (1971). Radioimmunoassay of B-2-microglobulin in human biological fluids. Scandanavian Journal of Clinical Laboratory Investigation, 28, Falck F, Fine L, Smith R, Garvey J, Schork A, England B, McClatchey K, and Linton J. (1983). Metallothionein and occupational exposure to cadmium. British Journal of Industrial Medicine, 40, Federal Register. Friberg, Exhibit 29, (1990). Exhibit No. 29 of the OSHA Federal Docket H057A. Washington, DC. Friberg L. (1988). Quality assurance. In T. Clarkson (Ed.), Biological Monitoring of Toxic Metals Friberg L, and Elinder C. (1988). Cadmium toxicity in humans. In Essential and Trace Elements in Human Health and Disease Friberg L, Elinder F, et al. (1986). Cadmium and Health: A Toxicological and Epidemiological Appraisal. Volume II, Effects and Response. Friberg L, Piscator M, Nordberg G, and Kjellstrom T. (1974). Cadmium in the Environment Friberg L and Vahter M. (1983). Assessment of exposure to lead and cadmium through biological monitoring: Results of a UNEP/WHO global study. Environmental Research, 30, Gunter E, and Miller D. (1986). Laboratory procedures used by the division of environmental health laboratory sciences center for environmental health, Centers for Disease Control for the hispanic health and nutrition examination survey (HHANES). Atlanta, GA: Centers for Disease Control. Harrison. (1987). Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine. Braunwald, E; Isselbacher, KJ; Petersdorf, RG; Wilson, JD; Martin, JB; and Fauci, AS Eds. Eleventh Ed. McGraw Hill Book Company. San Francisco. Henry J. (1991). Clinical Diagnosis and Management by Laboratory Methods IARC (1987). IRAC Monographs on the Evaluation of Carcinogenic Risks to Humans. Overall Evaluation of Carcinogenicity: Update of Volume 1-42. Ishizaki M, Kido T, Honda R, Tsuritani I, Yamada Y, Nakagawa H, and Nogawa K. (1989). Dose-response relationship between urinary cadmium and B-2-microglobulin in a Japanese environmentally cadmium exposed population. Toxicology, 58, Iwao S, Tsuchiya K, and Sakurai H. (1980). Serum and urinary B-2-microglobulin among cadmium-exposed workers. Journal of Occupational Medicine, 22, Iwata K, Katoh T, Morikawa Y, Aoshima K, Nishijo M, Teranishi H, and Kasuya M. (1988). Urinary trehalase activity as an indicator of kidney injury due to environmental cadmium exposure. Archives of Toxicology, 62, Kawada T, Koyama H, and Suzuki S. (1989). Cadmium, NAG activity, and B-2-microglobulin in the urine of cadmium pigment workers. British Journal of Industrial Medicine, 46, Kawada T, Tohyama C, and Suzuki S. (1990). Significance of the excretion of urinary indicator proteins for a low level of occupational exposure to cadmium. International Archives of Occupational Environmental Health, 62, Kjellstrom T. (1979). Exposure and accumulation of cadmium in populations from Japan, the United States, and Sweden. Environmental Health Perspectives, 28, Kjellstrom T, Evrin P, and Rahnster B. (1977). Dose-response analysis of cadmium-induced tubular proteinuria. Environmental Research, 13, Kjellstrom T, Shiroishi K, and Evrin P. (1977). Urinary B-2-microglobulin excretion among people exposed to cadmium in the general environment. Environmental Research, 13, Kneip T, & Crable J (Eds.). (1988). Method 107. Cadmium in blood. Methods for biological monitoring Kowal N. (1988). Urinary cadmium and B-2-microglobulin: Correlation with nutrition and smoking history. Journal of Toxicology and Environmental Health, 25, Kowal N, Johnson D, Kraemer D, and Pahren H. (1979). Normal levels of cadmium in diet, urine, blood, and tissues of inhabitants of the United States. Journal of Toxicology and Environmental Health, 5, Kowal N and Zirkes M. (1983). Urinary cadmium and B-2-microglobulin: Normal values and concentration adjustment. Journal of Toxicology and Environmental Health, 11, Lauwerys R, Buchet J, and Roels H. (1976). The relationship between cadmium exposure or body burden and the concentration of cadmium in blood and urine in man. International Archives of Occupational and Environmental Health, 36, Lauwerys R, Roels H, Regniers, Buchet J, and Bernard A. (1979). Significance of cadmium concentration in blood and in urine in workers exposed to cadmium. Environmental Research, 20, Lind B, Elinder C, Friberg L, Nilsson B, Svartengren M, and Vahter M. (1987). Quality control in the analysis of lead and cadmium in blood. Fresenius' Zeitschrift fur Analytical Chemistry, 326, Mason H, Davison A, Wright A, Guthrie C, Fayers P, Venables K, Smith N, Chettle D, Franklin D, Scott M, Holden H, Gompertz D, and Newman-Taylor A. (1988). Relations between liver cadmium, cumulative exposure, and renal function in cadmium alloy workers. British Journal of Industrial Medicine, 45, Meridian Research, Inc. (1989). Quantitative Assessment of Cancer Risks Associated with Occupational Exposure to Cd. Meridian Research, Inc and Roth Associates, Inc. (1989). Quantitative Assessment of the Risk of Kidney Dysfunction Associated with Occupational Exposure to Cd. Micheils E and DeBievre P. (1986). Method 25-Determination of cadmium in whole blood by isotope dilution mass spectrometry. O'Neill I, Schuller P, and Fishbein L (Eds.), Environmental Carcinogens Selected Methods of Analysis Mueller P, Smith S, Steinberg K, and Thun M. (1989). Chronic renal tubular effects in relation to urine cadmium levels. Nephron, 52, NIOSH. (1984a). Elements in blood or tissues. Method 8005 issued 5/15/85 and Metals in urine. Method 8310 issued 2/15/84 In P. Eller (Ed.), NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods NIOSH. (1984b). Lowry L. Section F: Special considerations for biological samples in NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods Nordberg G and Nordberg M. (1988). Biological monitoring of cadmium. In T. Clarkson, L. Friberg, G. Nordberg, and P. Sager (Eds.), Biological Monitoring of Toxic Metals, Nogawa K. (1984). Biologic indicators of cadmium nephrotoxicity in persons with low-level cadmium exposure. Environmental Health Perspectives, 54, OSLTC (no date). Analysis of Creatinine for the Normalization of Cadmium and Beta-2-Microglobulin Concentrations in Urine. OSHA Salt Lake Technical Center. Salt Lake City, UT. Paschal. (1990). Attachment 8 of exhibit 106 of the OSHA docket H057A. Perkin-Elmer Corporation. (1982). Analytical Methods for Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy. Perkin-Elmer Corporation. (1977). Analytical Methods Using the HGA Graphite Furnace. Pharmacia Diagnostics. (1990). Pharmacia DELFIA system B-2-microglobulin kit insert. Uppsala, Sweden: Pharmacia Diagnostics. Piscator M. (1962). Proteinuria in chronic cadmium poisoning. Archives of Environmental Health,5, Potts, C.L. (1965). Cadmium Proteinuria—The Health Battery Workers Exposed to Cadmium Oxide dust. Ann Occup Hyg, 3:55-61, 1965. Princi F. (1947). A study of industrial exposures to cadmium. Journal of Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology, 29, Pruszkowska E, Carnick G, and Slavin W. (1983). Direct determination of cadmium in urine with use of a stabilized temperature platform furnace and Zeeman background correction. Clinical Chemistry, 29, Roberts C and Clark J. (1986). Improved determination of cadmium in blood and plasma by flameless atomic absorption spectroscopy. Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, 36, Roelandts I. (1989). Biological reference materials. Soectrochimica Acta, 44B, Roels H, Buchet R, Lauwerys R, Bruaux P, Clays-Thoreau F, Laafontaine A, Overschelde J, and Verduyn J. (1978). Lead and cadmium absorption among children near a nonferrous metal plant. Environmental Research, 15, Roels H, Djubgang J, Buchet J, Bernard A, and Lauwerys R. (1982). Evolution of cadmium-induced renal dysfunction in workers removed from exposure. Scandanavian Journal of Work and Environmental Health, 8, Roels H, Lauwerys R, and Buchet J. (1989). Health significance of cadmium induced renal dysfunction: A five year follow-up. British Journal of Industrial Medicine, 46, Roels J, Lauwerys R, Buchet J, Bernard A, Chettle D, Harvey T, and Al-Haddad I. (1981). In vivo measurements of liver and kidney cadmium in workers exposed to this metal: Its significance with respect to cadmium in blood and urine. Environmental Research, 26, Roels H, Lauwerys R, Buchet J, Bernard A, Lijnen P, and Houte G. (1990). Urinary kallikrein activity in workers exposed to cadmium, lead, or mercury vapor. British Journal of Industrial Medicine, 47, Sakurai H, Omae K, Toyama T, Higashi T, and Nakadate T. (1982). Cross-sectional study of pulmonary function in cadmium alloy workers. Scandanavian Journal of Work and Environmental Health, 8, Schardun G and van Epps L. (1987). B-2-microglobulin: Its significance in the evaluation of renal function. Kidney International, 32, Shaikh Z, and Smith L. (1984). Biological indicators of cadmium exposure and toxicity. Experentia, 40, Smith J and Kench J. (1957). Observations on urinary cadmium and protein excretion in men exposed to cadmium oxide dust and fume. British Journal of Industrial Medicine, 14, Smith J, Kench J, and Lane R. (1955). Determination of Cadmium in urine and observations on urinary cadmium and protein excretion in men exposed to cadmium oxide dust. British Journal of Industrial Medicine, 12, SWRI (Southwest Research Institute). (1978). The distribution of cadmium and other metals in human tissues. Health Effects Research Lab, Research Triangle Park, NC, Population Studies Division. NTIS No. PB-285-200. Stewart M and Hughes E. (1981). Urinary B-2-microglobulin in the biological monitoring of cadmium workers. British Journal of Industrial Medicine, 38, Stoeppler K and Brandt M. (1980). Contributions to automated trace analysis. part V. Determination of cadmium in whole blood and urine by electrothermal atomic absorption spectrophotometry. Fresenius' Zeitschrift fur Analytical Chemistry, 300, Takenaka et al. (1983). Carcinogencity of Cd Chloride Aerosols in White Rates. Thun M, Osorio A, Schober S, Hannon W, Lewis B, and Halperin W. (1989). Nephropathy in cadmium workers: Assessment of risk from airborne occupational exposure to cadmium. British Journal of Industrial Medicine, 46, Thun M, Schnorr T, Smith A, Halperin W, and Lemen R. (1985). Mortality among a cohort of US cadmium production workers—an update. Journal of the National Cancer Institute, 74, Travis D and Haddock A. (1980). Interpretation of the observed age-dependency of cadmium body burdens in man. Environmental Research, 22, Tsuchiya K. (1967). Proteinuria of workers exposed to cadmium fume. Archives of Environmental Health, 14, Tsuchiya K. (1976). Proteinuria of cadmium workers. Journal of Occupational Medicine, 18, Tsuchiya K, Iwao S, Sugita M, Sakurai H. (1979). Increased urinary B-2-microglobulin in cadmium exposure: Dose-effect relationship and biological significance of B-2-microglobulin. Environmental Health Perspectives, 28, USEPA. (1985). Updated Mutagenicity and Carcinogenicity Assessments of Cd: Addendum to the Health Assessment Document for Cd (May 1981). Final Report. June 1985. Vahter M and Friberg L. (1988). Quality control in integrated human exposure monitoring of lead and cadmium. Fresenius' Zeitschrift fur Analytical Chemistry, 332, Weber J. (1988). An interlaboratory comparison programme for several toxic substances in blood and urine. The Science of the Total Environment, 71, Weber J. (1991a). Accuracy and precision of trace metal determinations in biological fluids. In K. Subramanian, G. Iyengar, and K. Okamot (Eds.), Biological Trace Element Research Weber J. (1991b). Personal communication about interlaboratory program and shipping biological media samples for cadmium analyses. Wibowo A, Herber R, van Deyck W, and Zielhuis R. (1982). Biological assessment of exposure in factories with second degree usage of cadmium compounds. International Archives of Occupational Environmental Health, 49, Attachment 1—Nonmandatory Protocol for an Internal Quality Assurance/Quality Control Program The following is an example of the type of internal quality assurance/quality control program that assures adequate control to satisfy OSHA requirements under this protocol. However, other approaches may also be acceptable. As indicated in Section 3.3.1 of the protocol, the QA/QC program for CDB and CDU should address, at a minimum, the following: • calibration; • establishment of control limits; • internal QC analyses and maintaining control; and • corrective action protocols. This illustrative program includes both initial characterization runs to establish the performance of the method and ongoing analysis of quality control samples intermixed with compliance samples to maintain control. Calibration Before any analytical runs are conducted, the analytic instrument must be calibrated. This is to be done at the beginning of each day on which quality control samples and/or compliance samples are run. Once calibration is established, quality control samples or compliance samples may be run. Regardless of the type of samples run, every fifth sample must be a standard to assure that the calibration is holding. Calibration is defined as holding if every standard is within plus or minus (±) 15% of its theoretical value. If a standard is more than plus or minus 15% of its theoretical value, then the run is out of control due to calibration error and the entire set of samples must either be reanalyzed after recalibrating or results should be recalculated based on a statistical curve derived from the measurement of all standards. It is essential that the highest standard run is higher than the highest sample run. To assure that this is the case, it may be necessary to run a high standard at the end of the run, which is selected based on the results obtained over the course of the run. All standards should be kept fresh, and as they get old, they should be compared with new standards and replaced if they exceed the new standards by ±15%. Initial Characterization Runs and Establishing Control A participating laboratory should establish four pools of quality control samples for each of the analytes for which determinations will be made. The concentrations of quality control samples within each pool are to be centered around each of the four target levels for the particular analyte identified in Section 4.4 of the protocol. Within each pool, at least 4 quality control samples need to be established with varying concentrations ranging between plus or minus 50% of the target value of that pool. Thus for the medium-high cadmium in blood pool, the theoretical values of the quality control samples may range from 5 to 15 µg/l, (the target value is 10 µg/l). At least 4 unique theoretical values must be represented in this pool. The range of theoretical values of plus or minus 50% of the target value of a pool means that there will be overlap of the pools. For example, the range of values for the medium-low pool for cadmium in blood is 3.5 to 10.5 µg/l while the range of values for the medium-high pool is 5 to 15 µg/l. Therefore, it is possible for a quality control sample from the medium-low pool to have a higher concentration of cadmium than a quality control sample from the medium-high pool. Quality control samples may be obtained as commercially available reference materials, internally prepared, or both. Internally prepared samples should be well characterized and traced or compared to a reference material for which a consensus value for concentration is available. Levels of analyte in the quality control samples must be concealed from the analyst prior to the reporting of analytical results. Potential sources of materials that may be used to construct quality control samples are listed in Section 3.3.1 of the protocol. Before any compliance samples are analyzed, control limits must be established. Control limits should be calculated for every pool of each analyte for which determinations will be made and control charts should be kept for each pool of each analyte. A separate set of control charts and control limits should be established for each analytical instrument in a laboratory that will be used for analysis of compliance samples. At the beginning of this QA/QC program, control limits should be based on the results of the analysis of 20 quality control samples from each pool of each analyte. For any given pool, the 20 quality control samples should be run on 20 different days. Although no more than one sample should be run from any single pool on a particular day, a laboratory may run quality control samples from different pools on the same day. This constitutes a set of initial characterization runs. For each quality control sample analyzed, the value F/T (defined in the glossary) should be calculated. To calculate the control limits for a pool of an analyte, it is first necessary to calculate the mean, X and σ is calculated as Where N is the number of quality control samples run for a pool. The control limit for a particular pool is then given by the mean plus or minus 2 standard deviations (X ±3σ). The control limits may be no greater than 40% of the mean F/T value. If three standard deviations are greater than 40% of the mean F/T value, then analysis of compliance samples may not begin. 1 1 Internal Quality Control Analyses and Maintaining Control Once control limits have been established for each pool of an analyte, analysis of compliance samples may begin. During any run of compliance samples, quality control samples are to be interspersed at a rate of no less than 5% of the compliance sample workload. When quality control samples are run, however, they should be run in sets consisting of one quality control sample from each pool. Therefore, it may be necessary, at times, to intersperse quality control samples at a rate greater than 5%. There should be at least one set of quality control samples run with any analysis of compliance samples. At a minimum, for example, 4 quality control samples should be run even if only 1 compliance sample is run. Generally, the number of quality control samples that should be run are a multiple of four with the minimum equal to the smallest multiple of four that is greater than 5% of the total number of samples to be run. For example, if 300 compliance samples of an analyte are run, then at least 16 quality control samples should be run (16 is the smallest multiple of four that is greater than 15, which is 5% of 300). Control charts for each pool of an analyte (and for each instrument in the laboratory to be used for analysis of compliance samples) should be established by plotting F/T versus date as the quality control sample results are reported. On the graph there should be lines representing the control limits for the pool, the mean F/T limits for the pool, and the theoretical F/T of 1.000. Lines representing plus or minus (±) σ Figure 1—Theoretical Example of a Control Chart for a Pool of an Analyte 1.162 (Upper Control Limit) X 1.096 (Upper 2σ X X 1.000 (Theoretical Mean) X X 0.964 (Mean) X X X X 0.832 (Lower 2σ X 0.766 (Lower Control Limit) March 2 2 3 5 6 9 10 13 16 17 All quality control samples should be plotted on the chart, and the charts should be checked for visual trends. If a quality control sample falls above or below the control limits for its pool, then corrective steps must be taken (see the section on corrective actions below). Once a laboratory's program has been established, control limits should be updated every 2 months. The updated control limits should be calculated from the results of the last 100 quality control samples run for each pool. If 100 quality control samples from a pool have not been run at the time of the update, then the limits should be based on as many as have been run provided at least 20 quality control samples from each pool have been run over 20 different days. The trends that should be looked for on the control charts are: 1. 10 consecutive quality control samples falling above or below the mean; 2. 3 consecutive quality control samples falling more than 2σ from the mean (above or below the 2σ lines of the chart); or 3. the mean calculated to update the control limits falls more than 10% above or below the theoretical mean of 1.000. If any of these trends is observed, then all analysis must be stopped, and an investigation into the causes of the errors must begin. Before the analysis of compliance samples may resume, the inadequacies must be remedied and the control limits must be reestablished for that pool of an analyte. Reestablishment of control limits will entail running 20 sets of quality control samples over 20 days. Note that alternative procedures for defining internal quality control limits may also be acceptable. Limits may be based, for example, on proficiency testing, such as ±1 µg or 15% of the mean (whichever is greater). These should be clearly defined. Corrective actions Corrective action is the term used to describe the identification and remediation of errors occurring within an analysis. Corrective action is necessary whenever the result of the analysis of any quality control sample falls outside of the established control limits. The steps involved may include simple things like checking calculations of basic instrument maintenance, or it may involve more complicated actions like major instrument repair. Whatever the source of error, it must be identified and corrected (and a Corrective Action Report (CAR) must be completed. CARs should be kept on file by the laboratory. Attachment 2—Creatinine in Urine (Jaffe Procedure) Intended use: The CREA pack is used in the Du Pont ACA ® discrete clinical analyzer to quantitatively measure creatinine in serum and urine. Summary: The CREA method employs a modification of the kinetic Jaffe reaction reported by Larsen. This method has been reported to be less susceptible than conventional methods to interference from non-creatinine, Jaffe-positive compounds. 1 A split sample comparison between the CREA method and a conventional Jaffe procedure on Autoanalyzer ® showed a good correlation. (See Specific Performance Characteristics). *Note: Numbered subscripts refer to the bibliography and lettered subscripts refer to footnotes. Autoanalyzer ®, is a registered trademark of Technicon Corp., Tarrytown, NY. Principles of Procedure: In the presence of a strong base such as NaOH, picrate reacts with creatinine to form a red chromophore. The rate of increasing absorbance at 510 nm due to the formation of this chromophore during a 17.07-second measurement period is directly proportional to the creatinine concentration in the sample. Reagents: Compartment a Form Ingredient Quantity b No. 2, 3, & 4 Liquid Picrate 0.11 mmol. 6 Liquid NaOH (for pH adjustment) c a. Compartments are numbered 1-7, with compartment #7 located closest to pack fill position #2. b. Nominal value at manufacture. c. See Precautions. Precautions: Compartment #6 contains 75µL of 10 N NaOH; avoid contact; skin irritant; rinse contacted area with water. Comply with OSHA'S Bloodborne Pathogens Standard while handling biological samples (29 CFR 1910.1039). Used packs contain human body fluids; handle with appropriate care. FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE Mixing and Diluting: Mixing and diluting are automatically performed by the ACA ® discrete clinical analyzer. The sample cup must contain sufficient quantity to accommodate the sample volume plus the “dead volume”; precise cup filling is not required. Sample Cup Volumes (µL) Analyzer Standard Microsystem Dead Total Dead Total II, III 120 3000 10 500 IV, SX 120 3000 30 500 V 90 3000 10 500 Storage of Unprocessed Packs: Store at 2-8 °C. Do not freeze. Do not expose to temperatures above 35 °C or to direct sunlight. Expiration: Refer to EXPIRATION DATE on the tray label. Specimen Collection: Serum or urine can be collected and stored by normal procedures. 2 Known Interfering Substances 3 • Serum Protein Influence—Serum protein levels exert a direct influence on the CREA assay. The following should be taken into account when this method is used for urine samples and when it is calibrated: Aqueous creatinine standards or urine specimens will give CREA results depressed by approximately 0.7 mg/dL [62 µmol/L] d All urine specimens should be diluted with an albumin solution to give a final protein concentration of at least 3 g/dL [30 g/L]. Du Pont Enzyme Diluent (Cat. #790035-901) may be used for this purpose. • High concentration of endrogenous bilirubin (>20 mg/dL [>342 µmol/L]) will give depressed CREA results (average depression 0.8 mg/dL [71 µmol/L]). 4 • Grossly hemolyzed (hemoglobin >100 mg/dL [>62 µmol/L]) or visibly lipemic specimens may cause falsely elevated CREA results. 5 6 • The following cephalosporin antibiotics do not interfere with the CREA method when present at the concentrations indicated. Systematic inaccuracies (bias) due to these substances are less than or equal to 0.1 mg/dL [8.84 µmol/L] at CREA concentrations of approximately 1 mg/dL [88 µmol/L]. Antibiotic Peak serum level 7 8 9 Drug concentration mg/dL [mmol/L] mg/dL [mmol/L] Cephaloridine 1.4 0.3 25 6.0 Cephalexin 0.6-2.0 0.2-0.6 25 7.2 Cephamandole 1.3-2.5 0.3-0.5 25 4.9 Cephapirin 2.0 D0.4 25 5.6 Cephradine 1.5-2.0 0.4-0.6 25 7.1 Cefazolin 2.5-5.0 0.55-1.1 50 11.0 • The following cephalosporin antibiotics have been shown to affect CREA results when present at the indicated concentrations. System inaccuracies (bias) due to these substances are greater that 0.1 mg/dL [8.84 µmol/L] at CREA concentrations of: Antibiotic Peak serum level 8 10 Drug concentration mg/dL [mmol/L] mg/dL [mmol/L] Effect Cephalothin 1-6 0.2-1.5 100 25.2 ↓20-25% Cephoxitin 2.0 0.5 5.0 1.2 ↑35-40% • The single wavelength measurement used in this method eliminates interference from chromophores whose 510 nm absorbance is constant throughout the measurement period. • Each laboratory should determine the acceptability of its own blood collection tubes and serum separation products. Variations in these products may exist between manufacturers and, at times, from lot to lot. d. Systeme International d'unites (S.I. Units) are in brackets. Procedure: Test Materials Item II, III Du Pont Cat. No. IV, SX Du Pont Cat. No. V Du Pont Cat. No. ACA ® CREA Analytical Test Pack 701976901 701976901 701976901 Sample System Kit or 710642901 710642901 713697901 Micro Sample System Kit and 702694901 710356901 NA Micro Sample System Holders 702785000 NA NA DYLUX ® Photosensitive Printer Paper 700036000 NA NA Thermal Printer Paper NA 710639901 713645901 Du Pont Purified Water 704209901 710615901 710815901 Cell Wash Solution 701864901 710664901 710864901 Test Steps: The operator need only load the sample kit and appropriate test pack(s) into a properly prepared ACA ® discrete clinical analyzer. It automatically advances the pack(s) through the test steps and prints a result(s). See the Instrument Manual of the ACA ® analyzer for details of mechanical travel of the test pack(s). Preset Creatinine (CREA)—Test Conditions • Sample Volume: 200 µL • Diluent: Purified Water • Temperature: 37.0 ±0.1 °C • Reaction Period: 29 seconds • Type of Measurement: Rate • Measurement Period: 17.07 seconds • Wavelength: 510 nm • Units: mg/dL [µmol/L] CALIBRATION: The general calibration procedure is described in the Calibration/Verification chapter of the Manuals. The following information should be considered when calibrating the CREA method. • Assay Range: 0-20 mg/mL [0-1768 µmol/L] e • Reference Material: Protein containing primary standards f g • Suggested Calibration Levels: 1,5,20, mg/mL [88, 442, 1768 µmol/L]. • Calibration Scheme: 3 levels, 3 packs per level. • Frequency: Each new pack lot. Every 3 months for any one pack lot. e. For the results in S.I. units [µmol/L] the conversion factory is 88.4. f. Refer to the Creatinine Standard Preparation and Calibration Procedure available on request from a Du Pont Representative. g. If the Du Pont Chemistry Controls are being used, prepare them according to the instructions on the product insert sheets. Preset Creatinine (CREA) Test Conditions Item ACA ® II analyzer ACA ® III, IV, SX, V analyzer Count by One (1) NA Decimal Point 0.0 mg/dL 000.0 mg/dL Location [000.0 µmol/L] [000 µmol/L] Assigned Starting 999.8 −1.000 E1 Point or Offset C o [9823.] [−8.840 E2] Scale Factor or Assigned 0.2000 h 2.004 E-1 h Linear Term C 1 [0.3536 µmol/L/count] [1.772E1] h. The preset scale factor (linear term) was derived from the molar absorptivity of the indicator and is based on an absorbance to activity relationship (sensitivity) of 0.596 (mA/min)/(U/L). Due to small differences in filters and electronic components between instruments, the actual scale factor (linear term) may differ slightly from that given above. Quality Control: Two types of quality control procedures are recommended: • General Instrument Check. Refer to the Filter Balance Procedure and the Absorbance Test Method described in the ACA Analyzer Instrument Manual. Refer also to the ABS Test Methodology literature. • Creatinine Method Check. At least once daily run a CREA test on a solution of known creatinine activity such as an assayed control or calibration standard other than that used to calibrate the CREA method. For further details review the Quality Assurance Section of the Chemistry Manual. The result obtained should fall within acceptable limits defined by the day-to-day variability of the system as measured in the user's laboratory. (See SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS for guidance.) If the result falls outside the laboratory's acceptable limits, follow the procedure outlined in the Chemistry Troubleshooting Section of the Chemistry Manual. A possible system malfunction is indicated when analysis of a sample with five consecutive test packs gives the following results: Level SD 1 mg/dL >0.15 mg/dL [88 µmol/L] [>13 µmol/L] 20 mg/dL >0.68 mg/dL [1768 µmol/L] [>60 µmol/L] Refer to the procedure outlined in the Trouble Shooting Section of the Manual. Results: The ACA ® analyzer automatically calculates and prints the CREA result in mg/dL [µmol/L]. Limitation of Procedure: Results >20 mg/dL [1768 µmol/L]: • Dilute with suitable protein base diluent. Reassay. Correct for diluting before reporting. The reporting system contains error messages to warn the operator of specific malfunctions. Any report slip containing a letter code or word immediately following the numerical value should not be reported. Refer to the Manual for the definition of error codes. Reference Interval Serum: 11 i Males 0.8-1.3 md/dL Females 0.6-1.0 md/dL Urine: 12 Males 0.6-2.5 g/24 hr Females 0.6-1.5 g/24 hr i. Reference interval data obtained from 200 apparently healthy individuals (71 males, 129 females) between the ages of 19 and 72. Each laboratory should establish its own reference intervals for CREA as performed on the analyzer. Specific Performance Characteristics j Reproducibility k Material Mean Standard deviation (% CV) Within-run Between-day Lyophilized 1.3 0.05 (3.7) 0.05 (3.7) Control [115] [4.4] [4.4] Lyophilized 20.6 0.12 (0.6) 0.37 (1.8) Control [1821] [10.6] [32.7] Correlation—Regression Statistics l Comparative method Slope Intercept Correlation coefficient n Autoanalyzer ® 1.03 0.03[2.7] 0.997 260 j. All specific performance characteristics tests were run after normal recommended equipment quality control checks were performed (see Instrument Manual). k. Specimens at each level were analyzed in duplicate for twenty days. The within-run and between-day standard deviations were calculated by the analysis of variance method. l. Model equation for regression statistics is: Assay Range m 0.0-20.0 mg/dl [0-1768 µmol] m. See REPRODUCIBILITY for method performance within the assay range. Analytical Specificity See KNOWN INTERFERING SUBSTANCES section for details. Bibliography 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Attachment 3—Analysis of Creatinine for the Normalization of Cadmium and Beta-2-Microglobulin Concentrations in Urine (OSLTC Procedure). Matrix: Urine. Target concentration: 1.1 g/L (this amount is representative of creatinine concentrations found in urine). Procedure: A 1.0 mL aliquot of urine is passed through a C18 SEP-PAK ® (Waters Associates). Approximately 30 mL of HPLC (high performance liquid chromatography) grade water is then run through the SEP-PAK. The resulting solution is diluted to volume in a 100-mL volumetric flask and analyzed by HPLC using an ultraviolet (UV) detector. Special requirements: After collection, samples should be appropriately stabilized for cadmium (Cd) analysis by using 10% high purity (with low Cd background levels) nitric acid (exactly 1.0 mL of 10% nitric acid per 10 mL of urine) or stabilized for Beta-2-Microglobulin (B2M) by taking to pH 7 with dilute NaOH (exactly 1.0 mL of 0.11 N NaOH per 10 mL of urine). If not immediately analyzed, the samples should be frozen and shipped by overnight mail in an insulated container. Dated: January 1992. David B. Armitage, Duane Lee, Chemists. Organic Service Branch II, OSHA Technical Center, Salt Lake City, Utah 1. General Discussion 1.1 Background 1.1.1. History of procedure Creatinine has been analyzed by several methods in the past. The earliest methods were of the wet chemical type. As an example, creatinine reacts with sodium picrate in basic solution to form a red complex, which is then analyzed colorimetrically (Refs. 5.1. and 5.2.). Since industrial hygiene laboratories will be analyzing for Cd and B2M in urine, they will be normalizing those concentrations to the concentration of creatinine in urine. A literature search revealed several HPLC methods (Refs. 5.3., 5.4., 5.5. and 5.6.) for creatinine in urine and because many industrial hygiene laboratories have HPLC equipment, it was desirable to develop an industrial hygiene HPLC method for creatinine in urine. The method of Hausen, Fuchs, and Wachter was chosen as the starting point for method development. SEP-PAKs were used for sample clarification and cleanup in this method to protect the analytical column. The urine aliquot which has been passed through the SEP-PAK is then analyzed by reverse-phase HPLC using ion-pair techniques. This method is very similar to that of Ogata and Taguchi (Ref. 5.6.), except they used centrifugation for sample clean-up. It is also of note that they did a comparison of their HPLC results to those of the Jaffe method (a picric acid method commonly used in the health care industry) and found a linear relationship of close to 1:1. This indicates that either HPLC or colorimetric methods may be used to measure creatinine concentrations in urine. 1.1.2. Physical properties (Ref. 5.7.) Molecular weight: 113.12 Molecular formula: C 4 7 3 Chemical name: 2-amino-1,5-dihydro-1-methyl-4H-imidazol-4-one CAS No.: 60-27-5 Melting point: 300 °C (decomposes) Appearance: white powder Solubility: soluble in water; slightly soluble in alcohol; practically insoluble in acetone, ether, and chloroform Synonyms: 1-methylglycocyamidine, 1-methylhydantoin-2-imide Structure: see Figure #1 1.2. Advantages 1.2.1. This method offers a simple, straightforward, and specific alternative method to the Jaffe method. 1.2.2. HPLC instrumentation is commonly found in many industrial hygiene laboratories. 2. Sample stabilization procedure 2.1. Apparatus Metal-free plastic container for urine sample. 2.2. Reagents 2.2.1. Stabilizing Solution— (1) Nitric acid (10%, high purity with low Cd background levels) for stabilizing urine for Cd analysis or (2) NaOH, 0.11 N, for stabilizing urine for B2M analysis. 2.2.2. HPLC grade water 2.3. Technique 2.3.1. Stabilizing solution is added to the urine sample (see section 2.2.1.). The stabilizing solution should be such that for each 10 mL of urine, add exactly 1.0 mL of stabilizer solution. (Never add water or urine to acid or base. Always add acid or base to water or urine.) Exactly 1.0 mL of 0.11 N NaOH added to 10 mL of urine should result in a pH of 7. Or add 1.0 mL of 10% nitric acid to 10 mL of urine. 2.3.2. After sample collection seal the plastic bottle securely and wrap it with an appropriate seal. Urine samples should be frozen and then shipped by overnight mail (if shipping is necessary) in an insulated container. (Do not fill plastic bottle too full. This will allow for expansion of contents during the freezing process.) 2.4. The Effect of Preparation and Stabilization Techniques on Creatinine Concentrations Three urine samples were prepared by making one sample acidic, not treating a second sample, and adjusting a third sample to pH 7. The samples were analyzed in duplicate by two different procedures. For the first procedure a 1.0 mL aliquot of urine was put in a 100-mL volumetric flask, diluted to volume with HPLC grade water, and then analyzed directly on an HPLC. The other procedure used SEP-PAKs. The SEP-PAK was rinsed with approximately 5 mL of methanol followed by approximately 10 mL of HPLC grade water and both rinses were discarded. Then, 1.0 mL of the urine sample was put through the SEP-PAK, followed by 30 mL of HPLC grade water. The urine and water were transferred to a 100-mL volumetric flask, diluted to volume with HPLC grade water, and analyzed by HPLC. These three urine samples were analyzed on the day they were obtained and then frozen. The results show that whether the urine is acidic, untreated or adjusted to pH 7, the resulting answer for creatinine is essentially unchanged. The purpose of stabilizing the urine by making it acidic or neutral is for the analysis of Cd or B2M respectively. Comparison of Preparation & Stabilization Techniques Sample w/o SEP-PAK g/L creatinine with SEP-PAK g/L creatinine Acid 1.10 1.10 Acid 1.11 1.10 Untreated 1.12 1.11 Untreated 1.11 1.12 pH 7 1.08 1.02 pH 7 1.11 1.08 2.5. Storage After 4 days and 54 days of storage in a freezer, the samples were thawed, brought to room temperature and analyzed using the same procedures as in section 2.4. The results of several days of storage show that the resulting answer of creatinine is essentially unchanged. Storage Data Sample 4 days 54 days w/o SEP-PAK g/L creatinine with SEP-PAK g/L creatinine w/o SEP-PAK g/L creatinine with SEP-PAK g/L creatinine Acid 1.09 1.09 1.08 1.09 Acid 1.10 1.10 1.09 1.10 Acid 1.09 1.09 Untreated 1.13 1.14 1.09 1.11 Untreated 1.15 1.14 1.10 1.10 Untreated 1.09 1.10 pH 7 1.14 1.13 1.12 1.12 pH 7 1.14 1.13 1.12 1.12 pH 7 1.12 1.12 2.6. Interferences None. 2.7. Safety precautions 2.7.1. Make sure samples are properly sealed and frozen before shipment to avoid leakage. 2.7.2. Follow the appropriate shipping procedures. The following modified special safety precautions are based on those recommended by the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) (Ref. 5.8.). and OSHA's Bloodborne Pathogens standard (29 CFR 1910.1039). 2.7.3. Wear gloves, lab coat, and safety glasses while handling all human urine products. Disposable plastic, glass, and paper (pipet tips, gloves, etc.) that contact urine should be placed in a biohazard autoclave bag. These bags should be kept in appropriate containers until sealed and autoclaved. Wipe down all work surfaces with 10% sodium hypochlorite solution when work is finished. 2.7.4. Dispose of all biological samples and diluted specimens in a biohazard autoclave bag at the end of the analytical run. 2.7.5. Special care should be taken when handling and dispensing nitric acid. Always remember to add acid to water (or urine). Nitric acid is a corrosive chemical capable of severe eye and skin damage. Wear metal-free gloves, a lab coat, and safety glasses. If the nitric acid comes in contact with any part of the body, quickly wash with copious quantities of water for at least 15 minutes. 2.7.6. Special care should be taken when handling and dispensing NaOH. Always remember to add base to water (or urine). NaOH can cause severe eye and skin damage. Always wear the appropriate gloves, a lab coat, and safety glasses. If the NaOH comes in contact with any part of the body, quickly wash with copious quantities of water for at least 15 minutes. 3. Analytical procedure 3.1. Apparatus 3.1.1. A high performance liquid chromatograph equipped with pump, sample injector and UV detector. 3.1.2. A C18 HPLC column; 25 cm × 4.6 mm I.D. 3.1.3. An electronic integrator, or some other suitable means of determining analyte response. 3.1.4. Stripchart recorder. 3.1.5. C18 SEP-PAKs (Waters Associates) or equivalent. 3.1.6. Luer-lock syringe for sample preparation (5 mL or 10 mL). 3.1.7. Volumetric pipettes and flasks for standard and sample preparation. 3.1.8. Vacuum system to aid sample preparation (optional). 3.2. Reagents 3.2.1. Water, HPLC grade. 3.2.2. Methanol, HPLC grade. 3.2.3. PIC B-7 ® (Waters Associates) in small vials. 3.2.4. Creatinine, anhydrous, Sigma hemical Corp., purity not listed. 3.2.5. 1-Heptanesulfonic acid, sodium salt monohydrate. 3.2.6. Phosphoric acid. 3.2.7. Mobile phase. It can be prepared by mixing one vial of PIC B-7 into a 1 L solution of 50% methanol and 50% water. The mobile phase can also be made by preparing a solution that is 50% methanol and 50% water with 0.005M heptanesulfonic acid and adjusting the pH of the solution to 3.5 with phosphoric acid. 3.3. Standard preparation 3.3.1. Stock standards are prepared by weighing 10 to 15 mg of creatinine. This is transferred to a 25-mL volumetric flask and diluted to volume with HPLC grade water. 3.3.2. Dilutions to a working range of 3 to 35 µg/mL are made in either HPLC grade water or HPLC mobile phase (standards give the same detector response in either solution). 3.4. Sample preparation 3.4.1. The C18 SEP-PAK is connected to a Luer-lock syringe. It is rinsed with 5 mL HPLC grade methanol and then 10 mL of HPLC grade water. These rinses are discarded. 3.4.2. Exactly 1.0 mL of urine is pipetted into the syringe. The urine is put through the SEP-PAK into a suitable container using a vacuum system. 3.4.3. The walls of the syringe are rinsed in several stages with a total of approximately 30 mL of HPLC grade water. These rinses are put through the SEP-PAK into the same container. The resulting solution is transferred to a 100-mL volumetric flask and then brought to volume with HPLC grade water. 3.5. Analysis (conditions and hardware are those used in this evaluation.) 3.5.1. Instrument conditions Column: Zorbax ® ODS, 5-6 µm particle size; 25 cm × 4.6 mm I.D. Mobile phase: See Section 3.2.7. Detector: Dual wavelength UV; 229 nm (primary) 254 nm (secondary) Flow rate: 0.7 mL/ minute Retention time: 7.2 minutes Sensitivity: 0.05 AUFS Injection volume: 20µl 3.5.2. Chromatogram (see Figure #2) 3.6. Interferences 3.6.1. Any compound that has the same retention time as creatinine and absorbs at 229 nm is an interference. 3.6.2. HPLC conditions may be varied to circumvent interferences. In addition, analysis at another UV wavelength ( i.e. 3.7. Calculations 3.7.1. A calibration curve is constructed by plotting detector response versus standard concentration (See Figure #3). 3.7.2. The concentration of creatinine in a sample is determined by finding the concentration corresponding to its detector response. (See Figure #3). 3.7.3. The µg/mL creatinine from section 3.7.2. is then multiplied by 100 (the dilution factor). This value is equivalent to the micrograms of creatinine in the 1.0 mL stabilized urine aliquot or the milligrams of creatinine per liter of urine. The desired units, g/L, is determined by the following relationship: 3.7.4. The resulting value for creatinine is used to normalize the urinary concentration of the desired analyte (A) (Cd or B2M) by using the following formula. Where A is the desired analyte. The protocol of reporting such normalized results is µg A/g creatinine. 3.8. Safety precautions See section 2.7. 4. Conclusions The determination of creatinine in urine by HPLC is a good alternative to the Jaffe method for industrial hygiene laboratories. Sample clarification with SEP-PAKs did not change the amount of creatinine found in urine samples. However, it does protect the analytical column. The results of this creatinine in urine procedure are unaffected by the pH of the urine sample under the conditions tested by this procedure. Therefore, no special measures are required for creatinine analysis whether the urine sample has been stabilized with 10% nitric acid for the Cd analysis or brought to a pH of 7 with 0.11 N NaOH for the B2M analysis. 5. References 5.1. Clark, L.C.; Thompson, H.L.; Anal. Chem. 5.2. Peters, J.H.; J. Biol. Chem. 5.3. Hausen, V.A.; Fuchs, D.; Wachter, H.; J. Clin. Chem. Clin. Biochem. 5.4. Clark, P.M.S.; Kricka L.J.; Patel, A.; J. Liq. Chrom. 5.5. Ballerini, R.; Chinol, M.; Cambi, A.; J. Chrom. 5.6. Ogata, M.; Taguchi, T.; Industrial Health 5.7. “Merck Index”, 11th ed.; Windholz, Martha Ed.; Merck: Rahway, N.J., 1989; p 403. 5.8. Kimberly, M.; “Determination of Cadmium in Urine by Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrometry with Zeeman Background Correction.”, [57 FR 42389, Sept. 14, 1992, as amended at 57 FR 49272, Oct. 30, 1992; 58 FR 21781, Apr. 23, 1993; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1288, Jan. 8, 1998; 70 FR 1142, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16672, 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50189, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75585, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33608, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17781, Mar. 26, 2012; 84 FR 21477, May 14, 2019; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1910.1028 Benzene. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section does not apply to: (i) The storage, transportation, distribution, dispensing, sale or use of gasoline, motor fuels, or other fuels containing benzene subsequent to its final discharge from bulk wholesale storage facilities, except that operations where gasoline or motor fuels are dispensed for more than 4 hours per day in an indoor location are covered by this section. (ii) Loading and unloading operations at bulk wholesale storage facilities which use vapor control systems for all loading and unloading operations, except for the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1200 as incorporated into this section and the emergency provisions of paragraphs (g) and (i)(4) of this section. (iii) The storage, transportation, distribution or sale of benzene or liquid mixtures containing more than 0.1 percent benzene in intact containers or in transportation pipelines while sealed in such a manner as to contain benzene vapors or liquid, except for the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1200 as incorporated into this section and the emergency provisions of paragraphs (g) and (i)(4) of this section. (iv) Containers and pipelines carrying mixtures with less than 0.1 percent benzene and natural gas processing plants processing gas with less than 0.1 percent benzene. (v) Work operations where the only exposure to benzene is from liquid mixtures containing 0.5 percent or less of benzene by volume, or the vapors released from such liquids until September 12, 1988; work operations where the only exposure to benzene is from liquid mixtures containing 0.3 percent or less of benzene by volume or the vapors released from such liquids from September 12, 1988, to September 12, 1989; and work operations where the only exposure to benzene is from liquid mixtures containing 0.1 percent or less of benzene by volume or the vapors released from such liquids after September 12, 1989; except that tire building machine operators using solvents with more than 0.1 percent benzene are covered by paragraph (i) of this section. (vi) Oil and gas drilling, production and servicing operations. (vii) Coke oven batteries. (3) The cleaning and repair of barges and tankers which have contained benzene are excluded from paragraph (f) methods of compliance, paragraph (e)(1) exposure monitoring-general, and paragraph (e)(6) accuracy of monitoring. Engineering and work practice controls shall be used to keep exposures below 10 ppm unless it is proven to be not feasible. (b) Definitions. Action level Assistant Secretary Authorized person Benzene 6 6 Bulk wholesale storage facility Container Day Director Emergency Employee exposure Regulated area Vapor control system (c) Permissible exposure limits (PELs) Time-weighted average limit (TWA). (2) Short-term exposure limit (STEL). (d) Regulated areas. (2) Access to regulated areas shall be limited to authorized persons. (3) Regulated areas shall be determined from the rest of the workplace in any manner that minimizes the number of employees exposed to benzene within the regulated area. (e) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) Representative 8-hour TWA employee exposures shall be determined on the basis of one sample or samples representing the full shift exposure for each job classification in each work area. (iii) Determinations of compliance with the STEL shall be made from 15 minute employee breathing zone samples measured at operations where there is reason to believe exposures are high, such as where tanks are opened, filled, unloaded or gauged; where containers or process equipment are opened and where benzene is used for cleaning or as a solvent in an uncontrolled situation. The employer may use objective data, such as measurements from brief period measuring devices, to determine where STEL monitoring is needed. (iv) Except for initial monitoring as required under paragraph (e)(2) of this section, where the employer can document that one shift will consistently have higher employee exposures for an operation, the employer shall only be required to determine representative employee exposure for that operation during the shift on which the highest exposure is expected. (2) Initial monitoring. (ii) The initial monitoring required under paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section shall be completed by 60 days after the effective date of this standard or within 30 days of the introduction of benzene into the workplace. Where the employer has monitored within one year prior to the effective date of this standard and the monitoring satisfies all other requirements of this section, the employer may rely on such earlier monitoring results to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section. (3) Periodic monitoring and monitoring frequency. (ii) If the monitoring required by paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section reveals employee exposure above the TWA, the employer shall repeat such monitoring for each such employee at least every six (6) months. (iii) The employer may alter the monitoring schedule from every six months to annually for any employee for whom two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart indicate that the employee exposure has decreased to the TWA or below, but is at or above the action level. (iv) Monitoring for the STEL shall be repeated as necessary to evaluate exposures of employees subject to short term exposures. (4) Termination of monitoring. (ii) If the periodic monitoring required by paragraph (e)(3) of this section reveals that employee exposures, as indicated by at least two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level the employer may discontinue the monitoring for that employee, except as otherwise required by paragraph (e)(5). (5) Additional monitoring. (ii) Whenever spills, leaks, ruptures or other breakdowns occur that may lead to employee exposure, the employer shall monitor (using area or personal sampling) after the cleanup of the spill or repair of the leak, rupture or other breakdown to ensure that exposures have returned to the level that existed prior to the incident. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. (7) Employee notification of monitoring results. (ii) Whenever the PELs are exceeded, the written notification required by paragraph (e)(7)(i) of this section shall contain the corrective action being taken by the employer to reduce the employee exposure to or below the PEL, or shall refer to a document available to the employee which states the corrective actions to be taken. (f) Methods of compliance Engineering controls and work practices. (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering controls and work practices which can be instituted are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the PELs, the employer shall use them to reduce employee exposure to the lowest levels achievable by these controls and shall supplement them by the use of respiratory protection which complies with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section. (iii) Where the employer can document that benzene is used in a workplace less than a total of 30 days per year, the employer shall use engineering controls, work practice controls or respiratory protection or any combination of these controls to reduce employee exposure to benzene to or below the PELs, except that employers shall use engineering and work practice controls, if feasible, to reduce exposure to or below 10 ppm as an 8-hour TWA. (2) Compliance program. (ii) The written program shall include a schedule for development and implementation of the engineering and work practice controls. These plans shall be reviewed and revised as appropriate based on the most recent exposure monitoring data, to reflect the current status of the program. (iii) Written compliance programs shall be furnished upon request for examination and copying to the Assistant Secretary, the Director, affected employees and designated employee representatives. (g) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Work operations for which the employer establishes that compliance with either the TWA or STEL through the use of engineering and work-practice controls is not feasible; for example, some maintenance and repair activities, vessel cleaning, or other operations for which engineering and work-practice controls are infeasible because exposures are intermittent and limited in duration. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient, or are not required under paragraph (f)(1)(iii) of this section, to reduce employee exposure to or below the PELs. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (ii) For air-purifying respirators, the employer must replace the air-purifying element at the expiration of its service life or at the beginning of each shift in which such elements are used, whichever comes first. (iii) If NIOSH approves an air-purifying element with an end-of-service-life indicator for benzene, such an element may be used until the indicator shows no further useful life. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (B) Provide employees with any organic vapor gas mask or any self-contained breathing apparatus with a full facepiece to use for escape. (C) Use an organic vapor cartridge or canister with powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators, and a chin-style canister with full facepiece gas masks. (D) Ensure that canisters used with non-powered air-purifying respirators have a minimum service life of four hours when tested at 150 ppm benzene at a flow rate of 64 liters per minute (LPM), a temperature of 25 °C, and a relative humidity of 85%; for canisters used with tight-fitting or loose-fitting powered air-purifying respirators, the flow rates for testing must be 115 LPM and 170 LPM, respectively. (ii) Any employee who cannot use a negative-pressure respirator must be allowed to use a respirator with less breathing resistance, such as a powered air-purifying respirator or supplied-air respirator. (h) Protective clothing and equipment. (i) Medical surveillance General. (ii) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician and that all laboratory tests are conducted by an accredited laboratory. (iii) The employer shall assure that persons other than licensed physicians who administer the pulmonary function testing required by this section shall complete a training course in spirometry sponsored by an appropriate governmental, academic or professional institution. (iv) The employer shall assure that all examinations and procedures are provided without cost to the employee and at a reasonable time and place. (2) Initial examination. (A) A detailed occupational history which includes: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 ( 7 (B) A complete physical examination. (C) Laboratory tests. (D) Additional tests as necessary in the opinion of the examining physician, based on alterations to the components of the blood or other signs which may be related to benzene exposure; and (E) For all workers required to wear respirators for at least 30 days a year, the physical examination shall pay special attention to the cardiopulmonary system and shall include a pulmonary function test. (ii) No initial medical examination is required to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (i)(2)(i) of this section if adequate records show that the employee has been examined in accordance with the procedures of paragraph (i)(2)(i) of this section within the twelve months prior to the effective date of this standard. (3) Periodic examinations. (A) A brief history regarding any new exposure to potential marrow toxins, changes in medicinal drug use, and the appearance of physical signs relating to blood disorders: (B) A complete blood count including a leukocyte count with differential, quantitative thrombocyte count, hemoglobin, hematocrit, erythrocyte count and erythrocyte indices (MCV, MCH, MCHC); and (C) Appropriate additional tests as necessary, in the opinion of the examining physician, in consequence of alterations in the components of the blood or other signs which may be related to benzene exposure. (ii) Where the employee develops signs and symptoms commonly associated with toxic exposure to benzene, the employer shall provide the employee with an additional medical examination which shall include those elements considered appropriate by the examining physician. (iii) For persons required to use respirators for at least 30 days a year, a pulmonary function test shall be performed every three (3) years. A specific evaluation of the cardiopulmonary system shall be made at the time of the pulmonary function test. (4) Emergency examinations. (ii) If the result of the urinary phenol test is below 75 mg phenol/L of urine, no further testing is required. (iii) If the result of the urinary phenol test is equal to or greater than 75 mg phenol/L of urine, the employer shall provide the employee with a complete blood count including an erythrocyte count, leukocyte count with differential and thrombocyte count at monthly intervals for a duration of three (3) months following the emergency exposure. (iv) If any of the conditions specified in paragraph (i)(5)(i) of this section exists, then the further requirements of paragraph (i)(5) of this section shall be met and the employer shall, in addition, provide the employees with periodic examinations if directed by the physician. (5) Additional examinations and referrals. (A) The hemoglobin level or the hematocrit falls below the normal limit [outside the 95% confidence interval (C.I.)] as determined by the laboratory for the particular geographic area and/or these indices show a persistent downward trend from the individual's pre-exposure norms; provided these findings cannot be explained by other medical reasons. (B) The thrombocyte (platelet) count varies more than 20 percent below the employee's most recent values or falls outside the normal limit (95% C.I.) as determined by the laboratory. (C) The leukocyte count is below 4,000 per mm 3 (ii) If the abnormality persists, the examining physician shall refer the employee to a hematologist or an internist for further evaluation unless the physician has good reason to believe such referral is unnecessary. (See appendix C for examples of conditions where a referral may be unnecessary.) (iii) The employer shall provide the hematologist or internist with the information required to be provided to the physician under paragraph (i)(6) of this section and the medical record required to be maintained by paragraph (k)(2)(ii) of this section. (iv) The hematologist's or internist's evaluation shall include a determination as to the need for additional tests, and the employer shall assure that these tests are provided. (6) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this regulation and its appendices; (ii) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposure; (iii) The employee's actual or representative exposure level: (iv) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used; and (v) Information from previous employment-related medical examinations of the affected employee which is not otherwise available to the examining physician. (7) Physician's written opinions. (A) The occupationally pertinent results of the medical examination and tests; (B) The physician's opinion concerning whether the employee has any detected medical conditions which would place the employee's health at greater than normal risk of material impairment from exposure to benzene; (C) The physician's recommended limitations upon the employee's exposure to benzene or upon the employee's use of protective clothing or equipment and respirators. (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions resulting from benzene exposure which require further explanation or treatment. (ii) The written opinion obtained by the employer shall not reveal specific records, findings and diagnoses that have no bearing on the employee's ability to work in a benzene-exposed workplace. (8) Medical removal plan. (ii) Following the examination and evaluation by the hematologist/internist, a decision to remove an employee from areas where benzene exposure is above the action level or to allow the employee to return to areas where benzene exposure is above the action level shall be made by the physician in consultation with the hematologist/internist. This decision shall be communicated in writing to the employer and employee. In the case of removal, the physician shall state the required probable duration of removal from occupational exposure to benzene above the action level and the requirements for future medical examinations to review the decision. (iii) For any employee who is removed pursuant to paragraph (i)(8)(ii) of this section, the employer shall provide a follow-up examination. The physician, in consultation with the hematologist/internist, shall make a decision within 6 months of the date the employee was removed as to whether the employee shall be returned to the usual job or whether the employee should be removed permanently. (iv) Whenever an employee is temporarily removed from benzene exposure pursuant to paragraph (i)(8)(i) or (i)(8)(ii) of this section, the employer shall transfer the employee to a comparable job for which the employee is qualified (or can be trained for in a short period) and where benzene exposures are as low as possible, but in no event higher than the action level. The employer shall maintain the employee's current wage rate, seniority and other benefits. If there is no such job available, the employer shall provide medical removal protection benefits until such a job becomes available or for 6 months, whichever comes first. (v) Whenever an employee is removed permanently from benzene exposure based on a physician's recommendation pursuant to paragraph (i)(8)(iii) of this section, the employee shall be given the opportunity to transfer to another position which is available or later becomes available for which the employee is qualified (or can be trained for in a short period) and where benzene exposures are as low as possible but in no event higher than the action level. The employer shall assure that such employee suffers no reduction in current wage rate, seniority or other benefits as a result of the transfer. (9) Medical removal protection benefits. (ii) For the purposes of this section, the requirement that an employer provide medical removal protection benefits means that the employer shall maintain the current wage rate, seniority and other benefits of an employee as though the employee had not been removed. (iii) The employer's obligation to provide medical removal protection benefits to a removed employee shall be reduced to the extent that the employee receives compensation for earnings lost during the period of removal either from a publicly or employer-funded compensation program, or from employment with another employer made possible by virtue of the employee's removal. (j) Communication of hazards Hazard communication general. (ii) In classifying the hazards of benzene at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer; central nervous system effects; blood effects; aspiration; skin, eye, and respiratory tract irritation; and flammability. (iii) Employers shall include benzene in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of benzene and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (j)(3) of this section. (2) Warning signs and labels. DANGER BENZENE MAY CAUSE CANCER HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND VAPOR DO NOT SMOKE WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (ii) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (j)(2)(i) of this section: DANGER BENZENE CANCER HAZARD FLAMMABLE—NO SMOKING AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATOR REQUIRED (iii) The employer shall ensure that labels or other appropriate forms of warning are provided for containers of benzene within the workplace. There is no requirement to label pipes. The labels shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (j)(1) of this section and § 1910.1200(f). (iv) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers shall include the following legend or similar language on the labels or other appropriate forms of warning: DANGER CONTAINS BENZENE CANCER HAZARD (3) Information and training. (ii) The training program shall be in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200(h) (1) and (2), and shall include specific information on benzene for each category of information included in that section. (iii) In addition to the information required under 29 CFR 1910.1200, the employer shall: (A) Provide employees with an explanation of the contents of this section, including Appendices A and B, and indicate to them where the standard is available; and (B) Describe the medical surveillance program required under paragraph (i) of this section, and explain the information contained in appendix C. (k) Recordkeeping Exposure measurements. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The dates, number, duration, and results of each of the samples taken, including a description of the procedure used to determine representative employee exposures; (B) A description of the sampling and analytical methods used; (C) A description of the type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any; and (D) The name, job classification and exposure levels of the employee monitored and all other employees whose exposure the measurement is intended to represent. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least 30 years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20. (2) Medical surveillance. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The name of the employee; (B) The employer's copy of the physician's written opinion on the initial, periodic and special examinations, including results of medical examinations and all tests, opinions and recommendations; (C) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to benzene; (D) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by paragraphs (i)(6) (ii) through (v) of this section; and (E) A copy of the employee's medical and work history related to exposure to benzene or any other hematologic toxins. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least the duration of employment plus 30 years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20. (3) Availability. (ii) Employee exposure monitoring records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request for examination and copying to employees, employee representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20 (a) through (e) and (g) through (i). (iii) Employee medical records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request for examination and copying, to the subject employee, to anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee, and to the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20. (4) Transfer of records. (l) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (m) [Reserved] (n) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.1028—Substance Safety Data Sheet, Benzene I. Substance Identification A. Substance: Benzene. B. Permissible Exposure: Except as to the use of gasoline, motor fuels and other fuels subsequent to discharge from bulk terminals and other exemptions specified in § 1910.1028(a)(2): 1. Airborne: The maximum time-weighted average (TWA) exposure limit is 1 part of benzene vapor per million parts of air (1 ppm) for an 8-hour workday and the maximum short-term exposure limit (STEL) is 5 ppm for any 15-minute period. 2. Dermal: Eye contact shall be prevented and skin contact with liquid benzene shall be limited. C. Appearance and odor: Benzene is a clear, colorless liquid with a pleasant, sweet odor. The odor of benzene does not provide adequate warning of its hazard. II. Health Hazard Data A. Ways in which benzene affects your health. B. Effects of overexposure. 2. Long-term (chronic) exposure. Repeated or prolonged exposure to benzene, even at relatively low concentrations, may result in various blood disorders, ranging from anemia to leukemia, an irreversible, fatal disease. Many blood disorders associated with benzene exposure may occur without symptoms. III. Protective Clothing and Equipment A. Respirators. B. Protective Clothing. C. Eye and Face Protection. IV. Emergency and First Aid Procedures A. Eye and face exposure. B. Skin exposure. C. Breathing. D. Swallowing. V. Medical Requirements If you are exposed to benzene at a concentration at or above 0.5 ppm as an 8-hour time-weighted average, or have been exposed at or above 10 ppm in the past while employed by your current employer, your employer is required to provide a medical examination and history and laboratory tests within 60 days of the effective date of this standard and annually thereafter. These tests shall be provided without cost to you. In addition, if you are accidentally exposed to benzene (either by ingestion, inhalation, or skin/eye contact) under emergency conditions known or suspected to constitute toxic exposure to benzene, your employer is required to make special laboratory tests available to you. VI. Observation of Monitoring Your employer is required to perform measurements that are representative of your exposure to benzene and you or your designated representative are entitled to observe the monitoring procedure. You are entitled to observe the steps taken in the measurement procedure, and to record the results obtained. When the monitoring procedure is taking place in an area where respirators or personal protective clothing and equipment are required to be worn, you or your representative must also be provided with, and must wear the protective clothing and equipment. VII. Access to Records You or your representative are entitled to see the records of measurements of your exposure to benzene upon written request to your employer. Your medical examination records can be furnished to yourself, your physician or designated representative upon request by you to your employer. VIII. Precautions for Safe Use, Handling and Storage Benzene liquid is highly flammable. It should be stored in tightly closed containers in a cool, well ventilated area. Benzene vapor may form explosive mixtures in air. All sources of ignition must be controlled. Use nonsparking tools when opening or closing benzene containers. Fire extinguishers, where provided, must be readily available. Know where they are located and how to operate them. Smoking is prohibited in areas where benzene is used or stored. Ask your supervisor where benzene is used in your area and for additional plant safety rules. Appendix B to § 1910.1028—Substance Technical Guidelines, Benzene I. Physical and Chemical Data A. Substance identification. 1. Synonyms: 2. Formula: 6 6 B. Physical data. 1. Boiling Point (760 mm Hg); 80.1 °C (176 °F) 2. Specific Gravity (water = 1): 0.879 3. Vapor Density (air = 1): 2.7 4. Melting Point: 5.5 °C (42 °F) 5. Vapor Pressure at 20 °C (68 °F): 75 mm Hg 6. Solubility in Water: .06% 7. Evaporation Rate (ether = 1): 2.8 8. Appearance and Odor: Clear, colorless liquid with a distinctive sweet odor. II. Fire, Explosion, and Reactivity Hazard Data A. Fire. 1. Flash Point (closed cup): −11 °C (12 °F) 2. Autoignition Temperature: 580 °C (1076 °F) 3. Flammable limits in Air. % by Volume: Lower: 1.3%, Upper: 7.5% 4. Extinguishing Media: Carbon dioxide, dry chemical, or foam. 5. Special Fire-Fighting procedures: Do not use solid stream of water, since stream will scatter and spread fire. Fine water spray can be used to keep fire-exposed containers cool. 6. Unusual fire and explosion hazards: Benzene is a flammable liquid. Its vapors can form explosive mixtures. All ignition sources must be controlled when benzene is used, handled, or stored. Where liquid or vapor may be released, such areas shall be considered as hazardous locations. Benzene vapors are heavier than air; thus the vapors may travel along the ground and be ignited by open flames or sparks at locations remote from the site at which benzene is handled. 7. Benzene is classified as a 1 B flammable liquid for the purpose of conforming to the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.106. A concentration exceeding 3,250 ppm is considered a potential fire explosion hazard. Locations where benzene may be present in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures are considered Class I Group D for the purposes of conforming to the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.309. B. Reactivity. 1. Conditions contributing to instability: Heat. 2. Incompatibility: Heat and oxidizing materials. 3. Hazardous decomposition products: Toxic gases and vapors (such as carbon monoxide). III. Spill and Leak Procedures A. Steps to be taken if the material is released or spilled. As much benzene as possible should be absorbed with suitable materials, such as dry sand or earth. That remaining must be flushed with large amounts of water. Do not flush benzene into a confined space, such as a sewer, because of explosion danger. Remove all ignition sources. Ventilate enclosed places. B. Waste disposal method. Disposal methods must conform to other jurisdictional regulations. If allowed, benzene may be disposed of: (a) By absorbing it in dry sand or earth and disposing in a sanitary landfill; (b) if small quantities, by removing it to a safe location from buildings or other combustible sources, pouring it in dry sand or earth and cautiously igniting it; and (c) if large quantities, by atomizing it in a suitable combustion chamber. IV. Miscellaneous Precautions A. High exposure to benzene can occur when transferring the liquid from one container to another. Such operations should be well ventilated and good work practices must be established to avoid spills. B. Use non-sparking tools to open benzene containers which are effectively grounded and bonded prior to opening and pouring. C. Employers must advise employees of all plant areas and operations where exposure to benzene could occur. Common operations in which high exposures to benzene may be encountered are: the primary production and utilization of benzene, and transfer of benzene. Appendix C to § 1910.1028—Medical Surveillance Guidelines for Benzene I. Route of Entry Inhalation; skin absorption. II. Toxicology Benzene is primarily an inhalation hazard. Systemic absorption may cause depression of the hematopoietic system, pancytopenia, aplastic anemia, and leukemia. Inhalation of high concentrations can affect central nervous system function. Aspiration of small amounts of liquid benzene immediately causes pulmonary edema and hemorrhage of pulmonary tissue. There is some absorption through the skin. Absorption may be more rapid in the case of abraded skin, and benzene may be more readily absorbed if it is present in a mixture or as a contaminant in solvents which are readily absorbed. The defatting action of benzene may produce primary irritation due to repeated or prolonged contact with the skin. High concentration are irritating to the eyes and the mucuous membranes of the nose, and respiratory tract. III. Signs and Symptoms Direct skin contact with benzene may cause erythema. Repeated or prolonged contact may result in drying, scaling dermatitis, or development of secondary skin infections. In addition, there is benzene absorption through the skin. Local effects of benzene vapor or liquid on the eye are slight. Only at very high concentrations is there any smarting sensation in the eye. Inhalation of high concentrations of benzene may have an initial stimulatory effect on the central nervous system characterized by exhilaration, nervous excitation, and/or giddiness, followed by a period of depression, drowsiness, or fatigue. A sensation of tightness in the chest accompanied by breathlessness may occur and ultimately the victim may lose consciousness. Tremors, convulsions and death may follow from respiratory paralysis or circulatory collapse in a few minutes to several hours following severe exposures. The detrimental effect on the blood-forming system of prolonged exposure to small quantities of benzene vapor is of extreme importance. The hematopoietic system is the chief target for benzene's toxic effects which are manifested by alterations in the levels of formed elements in the peripheral blood. These effects have occurred at concentrations of benzene which may not cause irritation of mucous membranes, or any unpleasant sensory effects. Early signs and symptoms of benzene morbidity are varied, often not readily noticed and non-specific. Subjective complaints of headache, dizziness, and loss of appetite may precede or follow clinical signs. Rapid pulse and low blood pressure, in addition to a physical appearance of anemia, may accompany a subjective complaint of shortness of breath and excessive tiredness. Bleeding from the nose, gums, or mucous membranes, and the development of purpuric spots (small bruises) may occur as the condition progresses. Clinical evidence of leukopenia, anemia, and thrombocytopenia, singly or in combination, has been frequently reported among the first signs. Bone marrow may appear normal, aplastic, or hyperplastic, and may not, in all situations, correlate with peripheral blood forming tissues. Because of variations in the susceptibility to benzene morbidity, there is no “typical” blood picture. The onset of effects of prolonged benzene exposure may be delayed for many months or years after the actual exposure has ceased and identification or correlation with benzene exposure must be sought out in the occupational history. IV. Treatment of Acute Toxic Effects Remove from exposure immediately. Make sure you are adequately protected and do not risk being overcome by fumes. Give oxygen or artificial resuscitation if indicated. Flush eyes, wash skin if contaminated and remove all contaminated clothing. Symptoms of intoxication may persist following severe exposures. Recovery from mild exposures is usually rapid and complete. V. Surveillance and Preventive Considerations A. General The principal effects of benzene exposure which form the basis for this regulation are pathological changes in the hematopoietic system, reflected by changes in the peripheral blood and manifesting clinically as pancytopenia, aplastic anemia, and leukemia. Consequently, the medical surveillance program is designed to observe, on a regular basis, blood indices for early signs of these effects, and although early signs of leukemia are not usually available, emerging diagnostic technology and innovative regimes make consistent surveillance for leukemia, as well as other hematopoietic effects, essential. Initial examinations are to be provided within 60 days of the effective date of this standard, or at the time of initial assignment, and periodic examinations annually thereafter. There are special provisions for medical tests in the event of hematologic abnormalities or for emergency situations. The blood values which require referral to a hematologist or internist are noted in the standard in paragraph (i)(5). The standard specifies that blood abnormalities that persist must be referred “unless the physician has good reason to believe such referral is unnecessary” (paragraph (i)(5)). Examples of conditions that could make a referral unnecessary despite abnormal blood limits are iron or folate deficiency, menorrhagia, or blood loss due to some unrelated medical abnormality. Symptoms and signs of benzene toxicity can be non-specific. Only a detailed history and appropriate investigative procedures will enable a physician to rule out or confirm conditions that place the employee at increased risk. To assist the examining physician with regard to which laboratory tests are necessary and when to refer an employee to the specialist, OSHA has established the following guidelines. B. Hematology Guidelines A minimum battery of tests is to be performed by strictly standardized methods. 1. Red cell, white cell, platelet counts, white blood cell differential, hematacrit and red cell indices must be performed by an accredited laboratory. The normal ranges for the red cell and white cell counts are influenced by altitude, race, and sex, and therefore should be determined by the accredited laboratory in the specific area where the tests are performed. Either a decline from an absolute normal or an individual's base line to a subnormal value or a rise to a supra-normal value, are indicative of potential toxicity, particularly if all blood parameters decline. The normal total white blood count is approximately 7,200/mm 3 Certain abnormalities found through routine screening are of greater significance in the benzene-exposed worker and require prompt consultation with a specialist, namely: a. Thrombocytopenia. b. A trend of decreasing white cell, red cell, or platelet indices in an individual over time is more worrisome than an isolated abnormal finding at one test time. The importance of trend highlights the need to compare an individual's test results to baseline and/or previous periodic tests. c. A constellation or pattern of abnormalities in the different blood indices is of more significance than a single abnormality. A low white count not associated with any abnormalities in other cell indices may be a normal statistical variation, whereas if the low white count is accompanied by decreases in the platelet and/or red cell indices, such a pattern is more likely to be associated with benzene toxicity and merits thorough investigation. Anemia, leukopenia, macrocytosis or an abnormal differential white blood cell count should alert the physician to further investigate and/or refer the patient if repeat tests confirm the abnormalities. If routine screening detects an abnormality, follow-up tests which may be helpful in establishing the etiology of the abnormality are the peripheral blood smear and the reticulocyte count. The extreme range of normal for reticulocytes is 0.4 to 2.5 percent of the red cells, the usual range being 0.5 to 1.2 percent of the red cells, but the typical value is in the range of 0.8 to 1.0 percent. A decline in reticulocytes to levels of less than 0.4 percent is to be regarded as possible evidence (unless another specific cause is found) of benzene toxicity requiring accelerated surveillance. An increase in reticulocyte levels to about 2.5 percent may also be consistent with (but is not as characteristic of) benzene toxicity. 2. An important diagnostic test is a careful examination of the peripheral blood smear. As with reticulocyte count the smear should be with fresh uncoagulated blood obtained from a needle tip following venipuncture or from a drop of earlobe blood (capillary blood). If necessary, the smear may, under certain limited conditions, be made from a blood sample anticoagulated with EDTA (but never with oxalate or heparin). When the smear is to be prepared from a specimen of venous blood which has been collected by a commercial Vacutainer ® type tube containing neutral EDTA, the smear should be made as soon as possible after the venesection. A delay of up to 12 hours is permissible between the drawing of the blood specimen into EDTA and the preparation of the smear if the blood is stored at refrigerator (not freezing) temperature. 3. The minimum mandatory observations to be made from the smear are: a. The differential white blood cell count. b. Description of abnormalities in the appearance of red cells. c. Description of any abnormalities in the platelets. d. A careful search must be made throughout of every blood smear for immature white cells such as band forms (in more than normal proportion, i.e., over 10 percent of the total differential count), any number of metamyelocytes, myelocytes or myeloblasts. Any nucleate or multinucleated red blood cells should be reported. Large “giant” platelets or fragments of megakaryocytes must be recognized. An increase in the proportion of band forms among the neutrophilic granulocytes is an abnormality deserving special mention, for it may represent a change which should be considered as an early warning of benzene toxicity in the absence of other causative factors (most commonly infection). Likewise, the appearance of metamyelocytes, in the absence of another probable cause, is to be considered a possible indication of benzene-induced toxicity. An upward trend in the number of basophils, which normally do not exceed about 2.0 percent of the total white cells, is to be regarded as possible evidence of benzene toxicity. A rise in the eosinophil count is less specific but also may be suspicious of toxicity if the rises above 6.0 percent of the total white count. The normal range of monocytes is from 2.0 to 8.0 percent of the total white count with an average of about 5.0 percent. About 20 percent of individuals reported to have mild but persisting abnormalities caused by exposure to benzene show a persistent monocytosis. The findings of a monocyte count which persists at more than 10 to 12 percent of the normal white cell count (when the total count is normal) or persistence of an absolute monocyte count in excess of 800/mm 3 A less frequent but more serious indication of benzene toxicity is the finding in the peripheral blood of the so-called “pseudo” (or acquired) Pelger-Huet anomaly. In this anomaly many, or sometimes the majority, of the neutrophilic granulocytes possess two round nuclear segements—less often one or three round segments—rather than three normally elongated segments. When this anomaly is not hereditary, it is often but not invariably predictive of subsequent leukemia. However, only about two percent of patients who ultimately develop acute myelogenous leukemia show the acquired Pelger-Huet anomaly. Other tests that can be administered to investigate blood abnormalities are discussed below; however, such procedures should be undertaken by the hematologist. An uncommon sign, which cannot be detected from the smear, but can be elicited by a “sucrose water test” of peripheral blood, is transient paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria (PNH), which may first occur insidiously during a period of established aplastic anemia, and may be followed within one to a few years by the appearance of rapidly fatal acute myelogenous leukemia. Clinical detection of PNH, which occurs in only one or two percent of those destined to have acute myelogenous leukemia, may be difficult; if the “sucrose water test” is positive, the somewhat more definitive Ham test, also known as the acid-serum hemolysis test, may provide confirmation. e. Individuals documented to have developed acute myelogenous leukemia years after initial exposure to benzene may have progressed through a preliminary phase of hematologic abnormality. In some instances pancytopenia ( i.e. The findings of basophilic stippling in circulating red blood cells (usually found in 1 to 5% of red cells following marrow injury), and detection in the bone marrow of what are termed “ringed sideroblasts” must be taken seriously, as they have been noted in recent years to be premonitory signs of subsequent leukemia. Recently peroxidase-staining of circulating or marrow neutrophil granulocytes, employing benzidine dihydrochloride, have revealed the disappearance of, or diminution in, peroxidase in a sizable proportion of the granulocytes, and this has been reported as an early sign of leukemia. However, relatively few patients have been studied to date. Granulocyte granules are normally strongly peroxidase positive. A steady decline in leukocyte alkaline phosphatase has also been reported as suggestive of early acute leukemia. Exposure to benzene may cause an early rise in serum iron, often but not always associated with a fall in the reticulocyte count. Thus, serial measurements of serum iron levels may provide a means of determining whether or not there is a trend representing sustained suppression of erythropoiesis. Measurement of serum iron, determination of peroxidase and of alkaline phosphatase activity in peripheral granulocytes can be performed in most pathology laboratories. Peroxidase and alkaline phosphatase staining are usually undertaken when the index of suspecion for leukemia is high. Appendix D to § 1910.1028—Sampling and Analytical Methods for Benzene Monitoring and Measurement Procedures Measurements taken for the purpose of determining employee exposure to benzene are best taken so that the representative average 8-hour exposure may be determined from a single 8-hour sample or two (2) 4-hour samples. Short-time interval samples (or grab samples) may also be used to determine average exposure level if a minimum of five measurements are taken in a random manner over the 8-hour work shift. Random sampling means that any portion of the work shift has the same change of being sampled as any other. The arithmetic average of all such random samples taken on one work shift is an estimate of an employee's average level of exposure for that work shift. Air samples should be taken in the employee's breathing zone (air that would most nearly represent that inhaled by the employee). Sampling and analysis must be performed with procedures meeting the requirements of the standard. There are a number of methods available for monitoring employee exposures to benzene. The sampling and analysis may be performed by collection of the benzene vaptor or charcoal absorption tubes, with subsequent chemical analysis by gas chromatography. Sampling and analysis may also be performed by portable direct reading instruments, real-time continuous monitoring systems, passive dosimeters or other suitable methods. The employer has the obligation of selecting a monitoring method which meets the accuracy and precision requirements of the standard under his unique field conditions. The standard requires that the method of monitoring must have an accuracy, to a 95 percent confidence level, of not less than plus or minus 25 percent for concentrations of benzene greater than or equal to 0.5 ppm. The OSHA Laboratory modified NIOSH Method S311 and evaluated it at a benzene air concentration of 1 ppm. A procedure for determining the benzene concentration in bulk material samples was also evalauted. This work, reported in OSHA Laboratory Method No. 12, includes the following two analytical procedures: I. OSHA Method 12 for Air Samples Analyte: Benzene Matrix: Air Procedure: Adsorption on charcoal, desorption with carbon disulfide, analysis by GC. Detection limit: 0.04 ppm Recommended air volume and sampling rate: 10L to 0.2 L/min. 1. Principle of the Method. 1.1 A known volume of air is drawn through a charcoal tube to trap the organic vapors present. 1.2. The charcoal in the tube is transferred to a small, stoppered vial, and the anlyte is desorbed with carbon disulfide. 1.3. An aliquot of the desorbed sample is injected into a gas chromatograph. 1.4 The area of the resulting peak is determined and compared with areas obtained from standards. 2. Advantages and disadvantages of the method. 2.1 The sampling device is small, portable, and involved no liquids. Interferences are minimal, and most of those which do occur can be eliminated by altering chromatographic conditions. The samples are analyzed by means of a quick, instrumental method. 2.2 The amount of sample which can be taken is limited by the number of milligrams that the tube will hold before overloading. When the sample value obtained for the backup section of the charcoal tube exceeds 25 percent of that found on the front section, the possibility of sample loss exists. 3. Apparatus. 3.1 A calibrated personal sampling pump whose flow can be determined within ±5 percent at the recommended flow rate. 3.2. Charcoal tubes: Glass with both ends flame sealed, 7 cm long with a 6-mm O.D. and a 4-mm I.D., containing 2 sections of 20/40 mesh activated charcoal separated by a 2-mm portion of urethane foam. The activated charcoal is prepared from coconut shells and is fired at 600 °C prior to packing. The adsorbing section contains 100 mg of charcoal, the back-up section 50 mg. A 3-mm portion of urethane foam is placed between the outlet end of the tube and the back-up section. A plug of silanized glass wool is placed in front of the adsorbing section. The pressure drop across the tube must be less than one inch of mercury at a flow rate of 1 liter per minute. 3.3. Gas chromatograph equipped with a flame ionization detector. 3.4. Column (10-ft × 1/8 3.5. An electronic integrator or some other suitable method for measuring peak area. 3.6. Two-milliliter sample vials with Teflon-lined caps. 3.7. Microliter syringes: 10-microliter (10-µL syringe, and other convenient sizes for making standards, 1-µL syringe for sample injections. 3.8. Pipets: 1.0 mL delivery pipets 3.9. Volumetric flasks: convenient sizes for making standard solutions. 4. Reagents. 4.1. Chromatographic quality carbon disulfide (CS 2 Heat under reflux for 2 to 3 hours, 500 mL of carbon disulfide, 10 mL concentrated sulfuric acid, and 5 drops of concentrated nitric acid. The benzene is converted to nitrobenzene. The carbon disulfide layer is removed, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, and distilled. The recovered carbon disulfide should be benzene free. (It has recently been determined that benzene can also be removed by passing the carbon disulfide through 13x molecular sieve). 4.2. Benzene, reagent grade. 4.3. p-Cymene, reagent grade, (internal standard). 4.4. Desorbing reagent. The desorbing reagent is prepared by adding 0.05 mL of p-cymene per milliliter of carbon disulfide. (The internal standard offers a convenient means correcting analytical response for slight inconsistencies in the size of sample injections. If the external standard technique is preferred, the internal standard can be eliminated). 4.5. Purified GC grade helium, hydrogen and air. 5. Procedure. 5.1. Cleaning of equipment. All glassware used for the laboratory analysis should be properly cleaned and free of organics which could interfere in the analysis. 5.2. Calibration of personal pumps. Each pump must be calibrated with a representative charcoal tube in the line. 5.3. Collection and shipping of samples. 5.3.1. Immediately before sampling, break the ends of the tube to provide an opening at least one-half the internal diameter of the tube (2 mm). 5.3.2. The smaller section of the charcoal is used as the backup and should be placed nearest the sampling pump. 5.3.3. The charcoal tube should be placed in a vertical position during sampling to minimize channeling through the charcoal. 5.3.4 Air being sampled should not be passed through any hose or tubing before entering the charcoal tube. 5.3.5. A sample size of 10 liters is recommended. Sample at a flow rate of approximately 0.2 liters per minute. The flow rate should be known with an accuracy of at least ±5 percent. 5.3.6. The charcoal tubes should be capped with the supplied plastic caps immediately after sampling. 5.3.7. Submit at least one blank tube (a charcoal tube subjected to the same handling procedures, without having any air drawn through it) with each set of samples. 5.3.8. Take necessary shipping and packing precautions to minimize breakage of samples. 5.4. Analysis of samples. 5.4.1. Preparation of samples. In preparation for analysis, each charcoal tube is scored with a file in front of the first section of charcoal and broken open. The glass wool is removed and discarded. The charcoal in the first (larger) section is transferred to a 2-ml vial. The separating section of foam is removed and discarded; the second section is transferred to another capped vial. These two sections are analyzed separately. 5.4.2. Desorption of samples. Prior to analysis, 1.0 mL of desorbing solution is pipetted into each sample container. The desorbing solution consists of 0.05 µL internal standard per mL of carbon disulfide. The sample vials are capped as soon as the solvent is added. Desorption should be done for 30 minutes with occasional shaking. 5.4.3. GC conditions. Typical operating conditions for the gas chromatograph are: 1.30 mL/min (60 psig) helium carrier gas flow. 2.30 mL/min (40 psig) hydrogen gas flow to detector. 3.240 mL/min (40 psig) air flow to detector. 4.150 °C injector temperature. 5.250 °C detector temperature. 6.100 °C column temperature. 5.4.4. Injection size. 1 µL. 5.4.5. Measurement of area. The peak areas are measured by an electronic integrator or some other suitable form of area measurement. 5.4.6. An internal standard procedure is used. The integrator is calibrated to report results in ppm for a 10 liter air sample after correction for desorption efficiency. 5.5. Determination of desorption efficiency. 5.5.1. Importance of determination. The desorption efficiency of a particular compound can vary from one laboratory to another and from one lot of chemical to another. Thus, it is necessary to determine, at least once, the percentage of the specific compound that is removed in the desorption process, provided the same batch of charcoal is used. 5.5.2. Procedure for determining desorption efficiency. The reference portion of the charcoal tube is removed. To the remaining portion, amounts representing 0.5X, 1X, and 2X and (X represents target concentration) based on a 10 L air sample are injected into several tubes at each level. Dilutions of benzene with carbon disulfide are made to allow injection of measurable quantities. These tubes are then allowed to equilibrate at least overnight. Following equilibration they are analyzed following the same procedure as the samples. Desorption efficiency is determined by dividing the amount of benzene found by amount spiked on the tube. 6. Calibration and standards. A series of standards varying in concentration over the range of interest is prepared and analyzed under the same GC conditions that will be used on the samples. A calibration curve is prepared by plotting concentration (µg/mL) versus peak area. 7. Calculations. Benzene air concentration can be calculated from the following equation: mg/m 3 Where: A = µg/mL benzene, obtained from the calibration curve B = desorption volume (1 mL) C = Liters of air sampled D = desorption efficiency The concentration in mg/m 3 ppm = (mg/m 3 Where: 24.46 = molar volume of an ideal gas 25 °C and 760 mm 78.11 = molecular weight of benzene 8. Backup Data. 8.1 Detection limit—Air Samples. The detection limit for the analytical procedure is 1.28 ng with a coefficient of variation of 0.023 at this level. This would be equivalent to an air concentration of 0.04 ppm for a 10 L air sample. This amount provided a chromatographic peak that could be identifiable in the presence of possible interferences. The detection limit data were obtained by making 1 µL injections of a 1.283 µg/mL standard. Injection Area Count 1 655.4 2 617.5 3 662.0 X 4 641.1 SD = 14.9 5 636.4 CV = 0.023 6 629.2 8.2. Pooled coefficient of variation—Air Samples. The pooled coefficient of variation for the analytical procedure was determined by 1 µL replicate injections of analytical standards. The standards were 16.04, 32.08, and 64.16 µg/mL, which are equivalent to 0.5, 1.0, and 2.0 ppm for a 10 L air sample respectively. Injection Area Counts 0.5 ppm 1.0 ppm 2.0 ppm 1 3996.5 8130.2 16481 2 4059.4 8235.6 16493 3 4052.0 8307.9 16535 4 4027.2 8263.2 16609 5 4046.8 8291.1 16552 6 4137.9 8288.8 16618 X 4053.3 8254.0 16548.3 SD= 47.2 62.5 57.1 CV = 0.0116 0.0076 0.0034 C 8.3. Storage data—Air Samples Samples were generated at 1.03 ppm benzene at 80% relative humidity, 22 °C, and 643 mm. All samples were taken for 50 minutes at 0.2 L/min. Six samples were analyzed immediately and the rest of the samples were divided into two groups by fifteen samples each. One group was stored at refrigerated temperature of −25 °C, and the other group was stored at ambient temperature (approximately 23 °C). These samples were analyzed over a period of fifteen days. The results are tabulated below. Percent Recovery Day analyzed Refrigerated Ambient 0 97.4 98.7 98.9 97.4 98.7 98.9 0 97.1 100.6 100.9 97.1 100.6 100.9 2 95.8 96.4 95.4 95.4 96.6 96.9 5 93.9 93.7 92.4 92.4 94.3 94.1 9 93.6 95.5 94.6 95.2 95.6 96.6 13 94.3 95.3 93.7 91.0 95.0 94.6 15 96.8 95.8 94.2 92.9 96.3 95.9 8.4. Desorption data. Samples were prepared by injecting liquid benzene onto the A section of charcoal tubes. Samples were prepared that would be equivalent to 0.5, 1.0, and 2.0 ppm for a 10 L air sample. Percent Recovery Sample 0.5 ppm 1.0 ppm 2.0 ppm 1 99.4 98.8 99.5 2 99.5 98.7 99.7 3 99.2 98.6 99.8 4 99.4 99.1 100.0 5 99.2 99.0 99.7 6 99.8 99.1 99.9 X 99.4 98.9 99.8 SD= 0.22 0.21 0.18 CV = 0.0022 0.0021 0.0018 X 8.5. Carbon disulfide. Carbon disulfide from a number of sources was analyzed for benzene contamination. The results are given in the following table. The benzene contamiant can be removed with the procedures given in section 4.1. Sample µg Benzene/mL ppm equivalent (for 10 L air sample) Aldrich Lot 83017 4.20 0.13 Baker Lot 720364 1.01 0.03 Baker Lot 822351 1.01 0.03 Malinkrodt Lot WEMP 1.74 0.05 Malinkrodt Lot WDSJ 5.65 0.18 Malinkrodt Lot WHGA 2.90 0.09 Treated CS 2 II. OSHA Laboratory Method No. 12 for Bulk Samples Analyte: Benzene. Matrix: Bulk Samples. Procedure: Bulk Samples are analyzed directly by high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC). Detection limits: 0.01% by volume. 1. Principle of the method. 1.1. An aliquot of the bulk sample to be analyzed is injected into a liquid chromatograph. 1.2. The peak area for benzene is determined and compared to areas obtained from standards. 2. Advantages and disadvantages of the method. 2.1. The analytical procedure is quick, sensitive, and reproducible. 2.2. Reanalysis of samples is possible. 2.3. Interferences can be circumvented by proper selection of HPLC parameters. 2.4. Samples must be free of any particulates that may clog the capillary tubing in the liquid chromatograph. This may require distilling the sample or clarifying with a clarification kit. 3. Apparatus. 3.1. Liquid chromatograph equipped with a UV detector. 3.2. HPLC Column that will separate benzene from other components in the bulk sample being analyzed. The column used for validation studies was a Waters uBondapack C18, 30 cm × 3.9 mm. 3.3. A clarification kit to remove any particulates in the bulk if necessary. 3.4. A micro-distillation apparatus to distill any samples if necessary. 3.5. An electronic integrator or some other suitable method of measuring peak areas. 3.6. Microliter syringes—10 µL syringe and other convenient sizes for making standards. 10 µL syringe for sample injections. 3.7. Volumetric flasks, 5 mL and other convenient sizes for preparing standards and making dilutions. 4. Reagents. 4.1. Benzene, reagent grade. 4.2. HPLC grade water, methyl alcohol, and isopropyl alcohol. 5. Collection and shipment of samples. 5.1. Samples should be transported in glass containers with Teflon-lined caps. 5.2. Samples should not be put in the same container used for air samples. 6. Analysis of samples. 6.1. Sample preparation. If necessary, the samples are distilled or clarified. Samples are analyzed undiluted. If the benzene concentration is out of the working range, suitable dilutions are made with isopropyl alcohol. 6.2. HPLC conditions. The typical operating conditions for the high performance liquid chromatograph are: 1. Mobile phase—Methyl alcohol/water, 50/50 1. Analytical wavelength—254 nm 3. Injection size—10 µL 6.3. Measurement of peak area and calibration. Peak areas are measured by an integrator or other suitable means. The integrator is calibrated to report results % in benzene by volume. 7. Calculations. Since the integrator is programmed to report results in % benzene by volume in an undiluted sample, the following equation is used: % Benzene by Volume = A × B Where: A = % by volume on report B = Dilution Factor (B = 1 for undiluted sample) 8. Backup Data. 8.1. Detection limit—Bulk Samples. The detection limit for the analytical procedure for bulk samples is 0.88 µg, with a coefficient of variation of 0.019 at this level. This amount provided a chromatographic peak that could be identifiable in the presence of possible interferences. The detection limit date were obtained by making 10 µL injections of a 0.10% by volume standard. Injection Area Count 1 45386 2 44214 3 43822 X 4 44062 SD = 852.5 6 42724 CV = 0.019 8.2. Pooled coefficient of variation—Bulk Samples. The pooled coefficient of variation for analytical procedure was determined by 50 µL replicate injections of analytical standards. The standards were 0.01, 0.02, 0.04, 0.10, 1.0, and 2.0% benzene by volume. Area count (Percent) Injection No. 0.01 0.02 0.04 0.10 1.0 2.0 1 45386 84737 166097 448497 4395380 9339150 2 44241 84300 170832 441299 4590800 9484900 3 43822 83835 164160 443719 4593200 9557580 4 44062 84381 164445 444842 4642350 9677060 5 44006 83012 168398 442564 4646430 9766240 6 42724 81957 173002 443975 4646260 X 44040.1 83703.6 167872 444149 4585767 9564986 SD = 852.5 1042.2 3589.8 2459.1 96839.3 166233 CV = 0.0194 0.0125 0.0213 0.0055 0.0211 0.0174 C 0.017 [52 FR 34562, Sept. 11, 1987, as amended at 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1289, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 20099, Apr. 23, 1998; 70 FR 1142, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50189, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75585, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33608, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17781, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1910.1029 Coke oven emissions. (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions. Authorized person Beehive oven Coke oven Coke oven battery Coke oven emissions Director Emergency Existing coke oven battery Rehabilitated coke oven battery Secretary Stage charging Sequential charging Pipeline charging Green plush (c) Permissible exposure limit. 3 (d) Regulated areas. (2) The employer shall establish the following as regulated areas: (i) The coke oven battery including topside and its machinery, pushside and its machinery, coke side and its machinery, and the battery ends; the wharf; and the screening station; (ii) The beehive oven and its machinery. (e) Exposure monitoring and measurement Monitoring program. (ii) The employer shall obtain measurements which are representative of each employee's exposure to coke oven emissions over an eight-hour period. All measurements shall determine exposure without regard to the use of respiratory protection. (iii) The employer shall collect fullshift (for at least seven continuous hours) personal samples, including at least one sample during each shift for each battery and each job classification within the regulated areas including at least the following job classifications: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i ( j ( k ( l ( m ( n ( o ( p (iv) The employer shall repeat the monitoring and measurements required by this paragraph (e)(1) at least every three months. (2) Redetermination. (3) Employee notification. (ii) Whenever such results indicate that the representative employee exposure exceeds the permissible exposure limit, the employer shall, in such notification, inform each employee of that fact and of the corrective action being taken to reduce exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit. (4) Accuracy of measurement. 3 (f) Methods of compliance. (1) Priority of compliance methods Existing coke oven batteries. a ( b (ii) New or rehabilitated coke oven batteries. a ( b a (iii) Beehive ovens. a ( b a (2) Engineering controls Charging. ( a ( 1 b ( 2 b b 3 iv ( 3 b d e f h ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i (ii) Coking. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (3) Work practice controls Charging. ( a ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 ( 7 ( b ( 1 d ( 2 ( 3 ( i ( ii ( iii b 3 ii ( iv ( v ( vi ( vii ( c (ii) Coking. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (iii) Pushing. ( a ( b ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 (iv) Maintenance and repair. ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i ( 1 ( 2 (4) Filtered air. (ii) The employer shall provide standby pulpits on the battery topside, at the wharf, and at ther screening station, equipped with positive-pressure, temperature controlled filtered air. (5) Emergencies. (6) Compliance program. (ii) The written program shall include at least the following: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (iii) If, after implementing all controls required by paragraph (f)(2)-(f)(4) of this section, or after January 20, 1980, whichever is sooner, or after completion of a new or rehabilitated battery the permissible exposure limit is still exceeded, the employer shall develop a detailed written program and schedule for the implementation of any additional engineering controls and work practices necessary to reduce exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit. (iv) Written plans for such programs shall be submitted, upon request, to the Secretary and the Director, and shall be available at the worksite for examination and copying by the Secretary, the Director, and the authorized employee representative. The plans required under paragraph (f)(6) of this section shall be revised and updated at least annually to reflect the current status of the program. (7) Training in compliance procedures. (g) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activity, for which engineering and work-practice controls are technologically not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (3) Respirator selection. (h) Protective clothing and equipment Provision and use. (i) Flame resistant jacket and pants; (ii) Flame resistant gloves; (iii) Face shields or vented goggles which comply with § 1910.133(a)(2) of this part; (iv) Footwear providing insulation from hot surfaces for footwear; (v) Safety shoes which comply with § 1910.136 of this part; and (vi) Protective helmets which comply with § 1910.135 of this part. (2) Cleaning and replacement. (ii) The employer shall clean, launder, or dispose of protective clothing required by paragraphs (h)(1) (i) and (ii) of this section. (iii) The employer shall repair or replace the protective clothing and equipment as needed to maintain their effectiveness. (iv) The employer shall assure that all protective clothing is removed at the completion of a work shift only in change rooms prescribed in paragraph (i)(1) of this section. (v) The employer shall assure that contaminated protective clothing which is to be cleaned, laundered, or disposed of, is placed in a closable container in the change room. (vi) The employer shall inform any person who cleans or launders protective clothing required by this section, of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to coke oven emissions. (i) Hygiene facilities and practices Change rooms. (2) Showers. (ii) The employer shall provide shower facilities in accordance with § 1910.141(d)(3) of this part. (3) Lunchrooms. (4) Lavatories. (ii) The employer shall provide lavatory facilities in accordance with § 1910.141(d) (1) and (2) of this part. (5) Prohibition of activities in the regulated area. (ii) Drinking water may be consumed in the regulated area. (j) Medical surveillance General requirements. (ii) This program shall provide each employee covered under paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this section with an opportunity for medical examinations in accordance with this paragraph (j). (iii) The employer shall inform any employee who refuses any required medical examination of the possible health consequences of such refusal and shall obtain a signed statement from the employee indicating that the employee understands the risk involved in the refusal to be examined. (iv) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician, and are provided without cost to the employee. (2) Initial examinations. (i) A work history and medical history which shall include smoking history and the presence and degree of respiratory symptoms, such as breathlessness, cough, sputum production, and wheezing; (ii) A 14- by 17-inch or other reasonably-sized standard film or digital posterior-anterior chest X-ray; (iii) Pulmonary function tests including forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume at one second (FEV 1.0) with recording of type of equipment used; (iv) Weight; (v) A skin examination; (vi) Urinalysis for sugar, albumin, and hematuria; and (vii) A urinary cytology examination. (3) Periodic examinations. (ii) The employer must provide the examinations specified in paragraphs (j)(2)(i) and (iii) through (vii) of this section at least annually for employees 45 years of age or older or with five (5) or more years employment in the regulated area. (iii) Whenever an employee who is 45 years of age or older or with five (5) or more years employment in a regulated area transfers or is transferred from employment in a regulated area, the employer must continue to provide the examinations specified in paragraphs (j)(2)(i) and (iii) through (vii) of this section at least annually as long as that employee is employed by the same employer or a successor employer. (4) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this regulation and its Appendixes; (ii) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposure; (iii) The employee's exposure level or estimated exposure level; (iv) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used; and (v) Information from previous medical examinations of the affected employee which is not readily available to the examining physician. (5) Physician's written opinion. ( a ( b ( c ( d (ii) The employer shall instruct the physician not to reveal in the written opinion specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure. (iii) The employer shall provide a copy of the written opinion to the affected employee. (k) Employee information and training Training program. (ii) The training program shall be provided as of January 27, 1977 for employees who are employed in the regulated area at that time or at the time of initial assignment to a regulated area. (iii) The training program shall be provided at least annually for all employees who are employed in the regulated area, except that training regarding the occupational safety and health hazards associated with exposure to coke oven emissions and the purpose, proper use, and limitations of respiratory protective devices shall be provided at least quarterly until January 20, 1978. (iv) The training program shall include informing each employee of: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (2) Access to training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide upon request all materials relating to the employee information and training program to the Secretary and the Director. (l) Communication of hazards Hazard communication—general. (2) Signs. DANGER COKE OVEN EMISSIONS MAY CAUSE CANCER DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (ii) In addition, the employer shall post signs in the areas where the permissible exposure limit is exceeded bearing the legend: WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN THIS AREA (iii) The employer shall ensure that no statement appears on or near any sign required by this paragraph (l) which contradicts or detracts from the effects of the required sign. (iv) The employer shall ensure that signs required by this paragraph (l)(2) are illuminated and cleaned as necessary so that the legend is readily visible. (v) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (l)(2)(i) of this section: DANGER CANCER HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY NO SMOKING OR EATING (vi) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this section: DANGER RESPIRATOR REQUIRED (3) Labels. CONTAMINATED WITH COKE EMISSIONS MAY CAUSE CANCER DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR SHAKING (ii) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on contaminated protective clothing and equipment in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section: CAUTION CLOTHING CONTAMINATED WITH COKE EMISSIONS DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR SHAKING (m) Recordkeeping Exposure measurements. (i) This record shall include: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (ii) The employer shall maintain this record for at lest 40 years or for the duration of employment plus 20 years, whichever is longer. (2) Medical surveillance. (i) The record shall include: ( a ( b ( c ( d (ii) The employer shall keep, or assure that the examining physician keeps, the following medical records: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h (iii) The employer shall maintain medical records required under paragraph (m)(2) of this section for at least 40 years, or for the duration of employment plus 20 years, whichever is longer. (3) Availability. (ii) Employee exposure measurement records and employee medical records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request to employees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020(a)-(e) and (g)-(i). (4) Transfer of records. (ii) The employer shall also comply with any additional requirements involving transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). (n) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (ii) Without interfering with the measurement, observers shall be entitled to: ( a ( b ( c (o) [Reserved] (p) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.1029—Coke Oven Emissions Substance Information Sheet i. Substance Identification A. Substance: B. Definition: C. Permissible Exposure Limit: D. Regulated areas: ii. Health Hazard Data Exposure to coke oven emissions is a cause of lung cancer, and kidney cancer, in humans. Although there have not been an excess number of skin cancer cases in humans, repeated skin contact with coke oven emissions should be avoided. iii. Protective Clothing and Equipment A. Respirators: B. Protective clothing: iv. Hygiene Facilities and Practices You must not eat, drink, smoke, chew gum or tobacco, or apply cosmetics in the regulated area, except that drinking water is permitted. Your employer is required to provide lunchrooms and other areas for these purposes. Your employer is required to provide showers, washing facilities, and change rooms. If you work in a regulated area, you must wash your face, and hands before eating. You must shower at the end of the work shift. Do not take used protective clothing out of the change rooms without your employer's permission. Your employer is required to provide for laundering or cleaning of your protective clothing. v. Signs and Labels Your employer is required to post warning signs and labels for your protection. Signs must be posted in regulated areas. The signs must warn that a cancer hazard is present, that only authorized employees may enter the area, and that no smoking or eating is allowed. In regulated areas where coke oven emissions are above the permissible exposure limit, the signs should also warn that respirators must be worn. vi. Medical Examinations If you work in a regulated area at least 30 days per year, your employer is required to provide you with a medical examination every year. The initial medical examination must include a medical history, a chest X-ray, pulmonary function test, weight comparison, skin examination, a urinalysis, and a urine cytology exam for early detection of urinary cancer. Periodic examinations shall include all tests required in the initial examination, except that (1) the x-ray is to be performed during initial examination only and (2) the urine cytologic test is to be performed only on those employees who are 45 years or older or who have worked for 5 or more years in the regulated area. The examining physician will provide a written opinion to your employer containing the results of the medical exams. You should also receive a copy of this opinion. vii. Observation of Monitoring Your employer is required to monitor your exposure to coke oven emissions and you are entitled to observe the monitoring procedure. You are entitled to receive an explanation of the measurement procedure, observe the steps taken in the measurement procedure, and to record the results obtained. When the monitoring procedure is taking place in an area where respirators or personal protective clothing and equipment are required to be worn, you must also be provided with and must wear the protective clothing and equipment. viii. Access to Records You or your representative are entitled to records of your exposure to coke oven emissions upon request to your employer. Your medical examination records can be furnished to your physician upon request to your employer. ix. Training and Education Additional information on all of these items plus training as to hazards of coke oven emissions and the engineering and work practice controls associated with your job will also be provided by your employer. Appendix B to § 1910.1029—Industrial Hygiene and Medical Surveillance Guidelines i. industrial hygiene guidelines A. Sampling Samples collected should be full shift (at least 7-hour) samples. Sampling should be done using a personal sampling pump with pulsation damper at a flow rate of 2 liters per minute. Samples should be collected on 0.8 micrometer pore size silver membrane filters (37 mm diameter) preceded by Gelman glass fiber type A-E filters encased in three-piece plastic (polystyrene) field monitor cassettes. The cassette face cap should be on and the plug removed. The rotameter should be checked every hour to ensure that proper flow rates are maintained. A minimum of three full-shift samples should be collected for each job classification on each battery, at least one from each shift. If disparate results are obtained for particular job classification, sampling should be repeated. It is advisable to sample each shift on more than one day to account for environmental variables (wind, precipitation, etc.) which may affect sampling. Differences in exposures among different work shifts may indicate a need to improve work practices on a particular shift. Sampling results from different shifts for each job classification should not be averaged. Multiple samples from same shift on each battery may be used to calculate an average exposure for a particular job classification. B. Analysis. 1. All extraction glassware is cleaned with dichromic acid cleaning solution, rinsed with tap water, then dionized water, acetone, and allowed to dry completely. The glassware is rinsed with nanograde benzene before use. The Teflon cups are cleaned with benzene then with acetone. 2. Pre-weigh the 2 ml Teflon cups to one hundredth of a milligram (0.01 mg) on an autobalance AD 2 Tare weight of the cups is about 50 mg. 3. Place the silver membrane filter and glass fiber filter into a 15 ml test tube. 4. Extract with 5 ml of benzene for five minutes in an ultrasonic cleaner. 5. Filter the extract in 15 ml medium glass fritted funnels. 6. Rinse test tube and filters with two 1.5 ml aliquots of benzene and filter through the fritted glass funnel. 7. Collect the extract and two rinses in a 10 ml Kontes graduated evaporative concentrator. 8. Evaporate down to 1 ml while rinsing the sides with benzene. 9. Pipet 0.5 ml into the Teflon cup and evaporate to dryness in a vacuum oven at 40 °C for 3 hours. 10. Weigh the Teflon cup and the weight gain is due to the benzene soluble residue in half the Sample. ii. medical surveillance guidelines A. General. 1 B. Pulmonary function tests. Pulmonary function tests should be performed in a manner which minimizes subject and operator bias. There has been shown to be learning effects with regard to the results obtained from certain tests, such as FEV 1.0. Best results can be obtained by multiple trials for each subject. The best of three trials or the average of the last three of five trials may be used in obtaining reliable results. The type of equipment used (manufacturer, model, etc.) should be recorded with the results as reliability and accuracy varies and such information may be important in the evaluation of test results. Care should be exercised to obtain the best possible testing equipment. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, 41 FR 46784, Oct. 22, 1976, as amended at 42 FR 3304, Jan. 18, 1977; 45 FR 35283, May 23, 1980; 50 FR 37353, 37354, Sept. 13, 1985; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1290, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33468, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1142, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16672, 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50189, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75585, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33608, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17782, Mar. 26, 2012; 84 FR 21490, May 14, 2019] § 1910.1030 Bloodborne pathogens. (a) Scope and Application. (b) Definitions. Assistant Secretary Blood Bloodborne Pathogens Clinical Laboratory Contaminated Contaminated Laundry Contaminated Sharps Decontamination Director Engineering controls Exposure Incident Handwashing facilities Licensed Healthcare Professional HBV HIV Needleless systems (1) The collection of bodily fluids or withdrawal of body fluids after initial venous or arterial access is established; (2) The administration of medication or fluids; or (3) Any other procedure involving the potential for occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens due to percutaneous injuries from contaminated sharps. Occupational Exposure Other Potentially Infectious Materials (1) The following human body fluids: semen, vaginal secretions, cerebrospinal fluid, synovial fluid, pleural fluid, pericardial fluid, peritoneal fluid, amniotic fluid, saliva in dental procedures, any body fluid that is visibly contaminated with blood, and all body fluids in situations where it is difficult or impossible to differentiate between body fluids; (2) Any unfixed tissue or organ (other than intact skin) from a human (living or dead); and (3) HIV-containing cell or tissue cultures, organ cultures, and HIV- or HBV-containing culture medium or other solutions; and blood, organs, or other tissues from experimental animals infected with HIV or HBV. Parenteral Personal Protective Equipment Production Facility Regulated Waste Research Laboratory Sharps with engineered sharps injury protections Source Individual Sterilize Universal Precautions Work Practice Controls (c) Exposure control Exposure Control Plan. (ii) The Exposure Control Plan shall contain at least the following elements: (A) The exposure determination required by paragraph (c)(2), (B) The schedule and method of implementation for paragraphs (d) Methods of Compliance, (e) HIV and HBV Research Laboratories and Production Facilities, (f) Hepatitis B Vaccination and Post-Exposure Evaluation and Follow-up, (g) Communication of Hazards to Employees, and (h) Recordkeeping, of this standard, and (C) The procedure for the evaluation of circumstances surrounding exposure incidents as required by paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this standard. (iii) Each employer shall ensure that a copy of the Exposure Control Plan is accessible to employees in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20(e). (iv) The Exposure Control Plan shall be reviewed and updated at least annually and whenever necessary to reflect new or modified tasks and procedures which affect occupational exposure and to reflect new or revised employee positions with occupational exposure. The review and update of such plans shall also: (A) Reflect changes in technology that eliminate or reduce exposure to bloodborne pathogens; and (B) Document annually consideration and implementation of appropriate commercially available and effective safer medical devices designed to eliminate or minimize occupational exposure. (v) An employer, who is required to establish an Exposure Control Plan shall solicit input from non-managerial employees responsible for direct patient care who are potentially exposed to injuries from contaminated sharps in the identification, evaluation, and selection of effective engineering and work practice controls and shall document the solicitation in the Exposure Control Plan. (vi) The Exposure Control Plan shall be made available to the Assistant Secretary and the Director upon request for examination and copying. (2) Exposure determination. (A) A list of all job classifications in which all employees in those job classifications have occupational exposure; (B) A list of job classifications in which some employees have occupational exposure, and (C) A list of all tasks and procedures or groups of closely related task and procedures in which occupational exposure occurs and that are performed by employees in job classifications listed in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (c)(2)(i)(B) of this standard. (ii) This exposure determination shall be made without regard to the use of personal protective equipment. (d) Methods of compliance General. (2) Engineering and work practice controls. (ii) Engineering controls shall be examined and maintained or replaced on a regular schedule to ensure their effectiveness. (iii) Employers shall provide handwashing facilities which are readily accessible to employees. (iv) When provision of handwashing facilities is not feasible, the employer shall provide either an appropriate antiseptic hand cleanser in conjunction with clean cloth/paper towels or antiseptic towelettes. When antiseptic hand cleansers or towelettes are used, hands shall be washed with soap and running water as soon as feasible. (v) Employers shall ensure that employees wash their hands immediately or as soon as feasible after removal of gloves or other personal protective equipment. (vi) Employers shall ensure that employees wash hands and any other skin with soap and water, or flush mucous membranes with water immediately or as soon as feasible following contact of such body areas with blood or other potentially infectious materials. (vii) Contaminated needles and other contaminated sharps shall not be bent, recapped, or removed except as noted in paragraphs (d)(2)(vii)(A) and (d)(2)(vii)(B) below. Shearing or breaking of contaminated needles is prohibited. (A) Contaminated needles and other contaminated sharps shall not be bent, recapped or removed unless the employer can demonstrate that no alternative is feasible or that such action is required by a specific medical or dental procedure. (B) Such bending, recapping or needle removal must be accomplished through the use of a mechanical device or a one-handed technique. (viii) Immediately or as soon as possible after use, contaminated reusable sharps shall be placed in appropriate containers until properly reprocessed. These containers shall be: (A) Puncture resistant; (B) Labeled or color-coded in accordance with this standard; (C) Leakproof on the sides and bottom; and (D) In accordance with the requirements set forth in paragraph (d)(4)(ii)(E) for reusable sharps. (ix) Eating, drinking, smoking, applying cosmetics or lip balm, and handling contact lenses are prohibited in work areas where there is a reasonable likelihood of occupational exposure. (x) Food and drink shall not be kept in refrigerators, freezers, shelves, cabinets or on countertops or benchtops where blood or other potentially infectious materials are present. (xi) All procedures involving blood or other potentially infectious materials shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize splashing, spraying, spattering, and generation of droplets of these substances. (xii) Mouth pipetting/suctioning of blood or other potentially infectious materials is prohibited. (xiii) Specimens of blood or other potentially infectious materials shall be placed in a container which prevents leakage during collection, handling, processing, storage, transport, or shipping. (A) The container for storage, transport, or shipping shall be labeled or color-coded according to paragraph (g)(1)(i) and closed prior to being stored, transported, or shipped. When a facility utilizes Universal Precautions in the handling of all specimens, the labeling/color-coding of specimens is not necessary provided containers are recognizable as containing specimens. This exemption only applies while such specimens/containers remain within the facility. Labeling or color-coding in accordance with paragraph (g)(1)(i) is required when such specimens/containers leave the facility. (B) If outside contamination of the primary container occurs, the primary container shall be placed within a second container which prevents leakage during handling, processing, storage, transport, or shipping and is labeled or color-coded according to the requirements of this standard. (C) If the specimen could puncture the primary container, the primary container shall be placed within a secondary container which is puncture-resistant in addition to the above characteristics. (xiv) Equipment which may become contaminated with blood or other potentially infectious materials shall be examined prior to servicing or shipping and shall be decontaminated as necessary, unless the employer can demonstrate that decontamination of such equipment or portions of such equipment is not feasible. (A) A readily observable label in accordance with paragraph (g)(1)(i)(H) shall be attached to the equipment stating which portions remain contaminated. (B) The employer shall ensure that this information is conveyed to all affected employees, the servicing representative, and/or the manufacturer, as appropriate, prior to handling, servicing, or shipping so that appropriate precautions will be taken. (3) Personal protective equipment Provision. (ii) Use. (iii) Accessibility. (iv) Cleaning, Laundering, and Disposal. (v) Repair and Replacement. (vi) If a garment(s) is penetrated by blood or other potentially infectious materials, the garment(s) shall be removed immediately or as soon as feasible. (vii) All personal protective equipment shall be removed prior to leaving the work area. (viii) When personal protective equipment is removed it shall be placed in an appropriately designated area or container for storage, washing, decontamination or disposal. (ix) Gloves. (A) Disposable (single use) gloves such as surgical or examination gloves, shall be replaced as soon as practical when contaminated or as soon as feasible if they are torn, punctured, or when their ability to function as a barrier is compromised. (B) Disposable (single use) gloves shall not be washed or decontaminated for re-use. (C) Utility gloves may be decontaminated for re-use if the integrity of the glove is not compromised. However, they must be discarded if they are cracked, peeling, torn, punctured, or exhibit other signs of deterioration or when their ability to function as a barrier is compromised. (D) If an employer in a volunteer blood donation center judges that routine gloving for all phlebotomies is not necessary then the employer shall: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( i ( ii ( iii (x) Masks, Eye Protection, and Face Shields. (xi) Gowns, Aprons, and Other Protective Body Clothing. (xii) Surgical caps or hoods and/or shoe covers or boots shall be worn in instances when gross contamination can reasonably be anticipated (e.g., autopsies, orthopaedic surgery). (4) Housekeeping General. (ii) All equipment and environmental and working surfaces shall be cleaned and decontaminated after contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials. (A) Contaminated work surfaces shall be decontaminated with an appropriate disinfectant after completion of procedures; immediately or as soon as feasible when surfaces are overtly contaminated or after any spill of blood or other potentially infectious materials; and at the end of the work shift if the surface may have become contaminated since the last cleaning. (B) Protective coverings, such as plastic wrap, aluminum foil, or imperviously-backed absorbent paper used to cover equipment and environmental surfaces, shall be removed and replaced as soon as feasible when they become overtly contaminated or at the end of the workshift if they may have become contaminated during the shift. (C) All bins, pails, cans, and similar receptacles intended for reuse which have a reasonable likelihood for becoming contaminated with blood or other potentially infectious materials shall be inspected and decontaminated on a regularly scheduled basis and cleaned and decontaminated immediately or as soon as feasible upon visible contamination. (D) Broken glassware which may be contaminated shall not be picked up directly with the hands. It shall be cleaned up using mechanical means, such as a brush and dust pan, tongs, or forceps. (E) Reusable sharps that are contaminated with blood or other potentially infectious materials shall not be stored or processed in a manner that requires employees to reach by hand into the containers where these sharps have been placed. (iii) Regulated Waste Contaminated Sharps Discarding and Containment. 1 ( i ( ii ( iii ( iv ( 2 ( i ( ii ( iii ( 3 ( i ( ii ( A ( B ( C ( 4 (B) Other Regulated Waste Containment 1 ( i ( ii ( iii ( iv ( 2 ( i ( ii ( iii ( iv (C) Disposal of all regulated waste shall be in accordance with applicable regulations of the United States, States and Territories, and political subdivisions of States and Territories. (iv) Laundry. 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) The employer shall ensure that employees who have contact with contaminated laundry wear protective gloves and other appropriate personal protective equipment. (C) When a facility ships contaminated laundry off-site to a second facility which does not utilize Universal Precautions in the handling of all laundry, the facility generating the contaminated laundry must place such laundry in bags or containers which are labeled or color-coded in accordance with paragraph (g)(1)(i). (e) HIV and HBV Research Laboratories and Production Facilities. (2) Research laboratories and production facilities shall meet the following criteria: (i) Standard microbiological practices. (ii) Special practices. (B) Contaminated materials that are to be decontaminated at a site away from the work area shall be placed in a durable, leakproof, labeled or color-coded container that is closed before being removed from the work area. (C) Access to the work area shall be limited to authorized persons. Written policies and procedures shall be established whereby only persons who have been advised of the potential biohazard, who meet any specific entry requirements, and who comply with all entry and exit procedures shall be allowed to enter the work areas and animal rooms. (D) When other potentially infectious materials or infected animals are present in the work area or containment module, a hazard warning sign incorporating the universal biohazard symbol shall be posted on all access doors. The hazard warning sign shall comply with paragraph (g)(1)(ii) of this standard. (E) All activities involving other potentially infectious materials shall be conducted in biological safety cabinets or other physical-containment devices within the containment module. No work with these other potentially infectious materials shall be conducted on the open bench. (F) Laboratory coats, gowns, smocks, uniforms, or other appropriate protective clothing shall be used in the work area and animal rooms. Protective clothing shall not be worn outside of the work area and shall be decontaminated before being laundered. (G) Special care shall be taken to avoid skin contact with other potentially infectious materials. Gloves shall be worn when handling infected animals and when making hand contact with other potentially infectious materials is unavoidable. (H) Before disposal all waste from work areas and from animal rooms shall either be incinerated or decontaminated by a method such as autoclaving known to effectively destroy bloodborne pathogens. (I) Vacuum lines shall be protected with liquid disinfectant traps and high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters or filters of equivalent or superior efficiency and which are checked routinely and maintained or replaced as necessary. (J) Hypodermic needles and syringes shall be used only for parenteral injection and aspiration of fluids from laboratory animals and diaphragm bottles. Only needle-locking syringes or disposable syringe-needle units ( i.e. (K) All spills shall be immediately contained and cleaned up by appropriate professional staff or others properly trained and equipped to work with potentially concentrated infectious materials. (L) A spill or accident that results in an exposure incident shall be immediately reported to the laboratory director or other responsible person. (M) A biosafety manual shall be prepared or adopted and periodically reviewed and updated at least annually or more often if necessary. Personnel shall be advised of potential hazards, shall be required to read instructions on practices and procedures, and shall be required to follow them. (iii) Containment equipment. (B) Biological safety cabinets shall be certified when installed, whenever they are moved and at least annually. (3) HIV and HBV research laboratories shall meet the following criteria: (i) Each laboratory shall contain a facility for hand washing and an eye wash facility which is readily available within the work area. (ii) An autoclave for decontamination of regulated waste shall be available. (4) HIV and HBV production facilities shall meet the following criteria: (i) The work areas shall be separated from areas that are open to unrestricted traffic flow within the building. Passage through two sets of doors shall be the basic requirement for entry into the work area from access corridors or other contiguous areas. Physical separation of the high-containment work area from access corridors or other areas or activities may also be provided by a double-doored clothes-change room (showers may be included), airlock, or other access facility that requires passing through two sets of doors before entering the work area. (ii) The surfaces of doors, walls, floors and ceilings in the work area shall be water resistant so that they can be easily cleaned. Penetrations in these surfaces shall be sealed or capable of being sealed to facilitate decontamination. (iii) Each work area shall contain a sink for washing hands and a readily available eye wash facility. The sink shall be foot, elbow, or automatically operated and shall be located near the exit door of the work area. (iv) Access doors to the work area or containment module shall be self-closing. (v) An autoclave for decontamination of regulated waste shall be available within or as near as possible to the work area. (vi) A ducted exhaust-air ventilation system shall be provided. This system shall create directional airflow that draws air into the work area through the entry area. The exhaust air shall not be recirculated to any other area of the building, shall be discharged to the outside, and shall be dispersed away from occupied areas and air intakes. The proper direction of the airflow shall be verified ( i.e. (5) Training Requirements. (f) Hepatitis B vaccination and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up General. (ii) The employer shall ensure that all medical evaluations and procedures including the hepatitis B vaccine and vaccination series and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up, including prophylaxis, are: (A) Made available at no cost to the employee; (B) Made available to the employee at a reasonable time and place; (C) Performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician or by or under the supervision of another licensed healthcare professional; and (D) Provided according to recommendations of the U.S. Public Health Service current at the time these evaluations and procedures take place, except as specified by this paragraph (f). (iii) The employer shall ensure that all laboratory tests are conducted by an accredited laboratory at no cost to the employee. (2) Hepatitis B Vaccination. (ii) The employer shall not make participation in a prescreening program a prerequisite for receiving hepatitis B vaccination. (iii) If the employee initially declines hepatitis B vaccination but at a later date while still covered under the standard decides to accept the vaccination, the employer shall make available hepatitis B vaccination at that time. (iv) The employer shall assure that employees who decline to accept hepatitis B vaccination offered by the employer sign the statement in appendix A. (v) If a routine booster dose(s) of hepatitis B vaccine is recommended by the U.S. Public Health Service at a future date, such booster dose(s) shall be made available in accordance with section (f)(1)(ii). (3) Post-exposure Evaluation and Follow-up. (i) Documentation of the route(s) of exposure, and the circumstances under which the exposure incident occurred; (ii) Identification and documentation of the source individual, unless the employer can establish that identification is infeasible or prohibited by state or local law; (A) The source individual's blood shall be tested as soon as feasible and after consent is obtained in order to determine HBV and HIV infectivity. If consent is not obtained, the employer shall establish that legally required consent cannot be obtained. When the source individual's consent is not required by law, the source individual's blood, if available, shall be tested and the results documented. (B) When the source individual is already known to be infected with HBV or HIV, testing for the source individual's known HBV or HIV status need not be repeated. (C) Results of the source individual's testing shall be made available to the exposed employee, and the employee shall be informed of applicable laws and regulations concerning disclosure of the identity and infectious status of the source individual. (iii) Collection and testing of blood for HBV and HIV serological status; (A) The exposed employee's blood shall be collected as soon as feasible and tested after consent is obtained. (B) If the employee consents to baseline blood collection, but does not give consent at that time for HIV serologic testing, the sample shall be preserved for at least 90 days. If, within 90 days of the exposure incident, the employee elects to have the baseline sample tested, such testing shall be done as soon as feasible. (iv) Post-exposure prophylaxis, when medically indicated, as recommended by the U.S. Public Health Service; (v) Counseling; and (vi) Evaluation of reported illnesses. (4) Information Provided to the Healthcare Professional. (ii) The employer shall ensure that the healthcare professional evaluating an employee after an exposure incident is provided the following information: (A) A copy of this regulation; (B) A description of the exposed employee's duties as they relate to the exposure incident; (C) Documentation of the route(s) of exposure and circumstances under which exposure occurred; (D) Results of the source individual's blood testing, if available; and (E) All medical records relevant to the appropriate treatment of the employee including vaccination status which are the employer's responsibility to maintain. (5) Healthcare Professional's Written Opinion. (i) The healthcare professional's written opinion for Hepatitis B vaccination shall be limited to whether Hepatitis B vaccination is indicated for an employee, and if the employee has received such vaccination. (ii) The healthcare professional's written opinion for post-exposure evaluation and follow-up shall be limited to the following information: (A) That the employee has been informed of the results of the evaluation; and (B) That the employee has been told about any medical conditions resulting from exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials which require further evaluation or treatment. (iii) All other findings or diagnoses shall remain confidential and shall not be included in the written report. (6) Medical recordkeeping. (g) Communication of hazards to employees Labels and signs Labels. (B) Labels required by this section shall include the following legend: (C) These labels shall be fluorescent orange or orange-red or predominantly so, with lettering and symbols in a contrasting color. (D) Labels shall be affixed as close as feasible to the container by string, wire, adhesive, or other method that prevents their loss or unintentional removal. (E) Red bags or red containers may be substituted for labels. (F) Containers of blood, blood components, or blood products that are labeled as to their contents and have been released for transfusion or other clinical use are exempted from the labeling requirements of paragraph (g). (G) Individual containers of blood or other potentially infectious materials that are placed in a labeled container during storage, transport, shipment or disposal are exempted from the labeling requirement. (H) Labels required for contaminated equipment shall be in accordance with this paragraph and shall also state which portions of the equipment remain contaminated. (I) Regulated waste that has been decontaminated need not be labeled or color-coded. (ii) Signs. (Name of the Infectious Agent) (Special requirements for entering the area) (Name, telephone number of the laboratory director or other responsible person.) (B) These signs shall be fluorescent orange-red or predominantly so, with lettering and symbols in a contrasting color. (2) Information and Training. (ii) Training shall be provided as follows: (A) At the time of initial assignment to tasks where occupational exposure may take place; (B) At least annually thereafter. (iii) [Reserved] (iv) Annual training for all employees shall be provided within one year of their previous training. (v) Employers shall provide additional training when changes such as modification of tasks or procedures or institution of new tasks or procedures affect the employee's occupational exposure. The additional training may be limited to addressing the new exposures created. (vi) Material appropriate in content and vocabulary to educational level, literacy, and language of employees shall be used. (vii) The training program shall contain at a minimum the following elements: (A) An accessible copy of the regulatory text of this standard and an explanation of its contents; (B) A general explanation of the epidemiology and symptoms of bloodborne diseases; (C) An explanation of the modes of transmission of bloodborne pathogens; (D) An explanation of the employer's exposure control plan and the means by which the employee can obtain a copy of the written plan; (E) An explanation of the appropriate methods for recognizing tasks and other activities that may involve exposure to blood and other potentially infectious materials; (F) An explanation of the use and limitations of methods that will prevent or reduce exposure including appropriate engineering controls, work practices, and personal protective equipment; (G) Information on the types, proper use, location, removal, handling, decontamination and disposal of personal protective equipment; (H) An explanation of the basis for selection of personal protective equipment; (I) Information on the hepatitis B vaccine, including information on its efficacy, safety, method of administration, the benefits of being vaccinated, and that the vaccine and vaccination will be offered free of charge; (J) Information on the appropriate actions to take and persons to contact in an emergency involving blood or other potentially infectious materials; (K) An explanation of the procedure to follow if an exposure incident occurs, including the method of reporting the incident and the medical follow-up that will be made available; (L) Information on the post-exposure evaluation and follow-up that the employer is required to provide for the employee following an exposure incident; (M) An explanation of the signs and labels and/or color coding required by paragraph (g)(1); and (N) An opportunity for interactive questions and answers with the person conducting the training session. (viii) The person conducting the training shall be knowledgeable in the subject matter covered by the elements contained in the training program as it relates to the workplace that the training will address. (ix) Additional Initial Training for Employees in HIV and HBV Laboratories and Production Facilities. Employees in HIV or HBV research laboratories and HIV or HBV production facilities shall receive the following initial training in addition to the above training requirements. (A) The employer shall assure that employees demonstrate proficiency in standard microbiological practices and techniques and in the practices and operations specific to the facility before being allowed to work with HIV or HBV. (B) The employer shall assure that employees have prior experience in the handling of human pathogens or tissue cultures before working with HIV or HBV. (C) The employer shall provide a training program to employees who have no prior experience in handling human pathogens. Initial work activities shall not include the handling of infectious agents. A progression of work activities shall be assigned as techniques are learned and proficiency is developed. The employer shall assure that employees participate in work activities involving infectious agents only after proficiency has been demonstrated. (h) Recordkeeping Medical Records. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The name of the employee; (B) A copy of the employee's hepatitis B vaccination status including the dates of all the hepatitis B vaccinations and any medical records relative to the employee's ability to receive vaccination as required by paragraph (f)(2); (C) A copy of all results of examinations, medical testing, and follow-up procedures as required by paragraph (f)(3); (D) The employer's copy of the healthcare professional's written opinion as required by paragraph (f)(5); and (E) A copy of the information provided to the healthcare professional as required by paragraphs (f)(4)(ii)(B)(C) and (D). (iii) Confidentiality. The employer shall ensure that employee medical records required by paragraph (h)(1) are: (A) Kept confidential; and (B) Not disclosed or reported without the employee's express written consent to any person within or outside the workplace except as required by this section or as may be required by law. (iv) The employer shall maintain the records required by paragraph (h) for at least the duration of employment plus 30 years in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (2) Training Records. (A) The dates of the training sessions; (B) The contents or a summary of the training sessions; (C) The names and qualifications of persons conducting the training; and (D) The names and job titles of all persons attending the training sessions. (ii) Training records shall be maintained for 3 years from the date on which the training occurred. (3) Availability. (ii) Employee training records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request for examination and copying to employees, to employee representatives, to the Director, and to the Assistant Secretary. (iii) Employee medical records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request for examination and copying to the subject employee, to anyone having written consent of the subject employee, to the Director, and to the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (4) Transfer of Records. (5) Sharps injury log. (A) The type and brand of device involved in the incident, (B) The department or work area where the exposure incident occurred, and (C) An explanation of how the incident occurred. (ii) The requirement to establish and maintain a sharps injury log shall apply to any employer who is required to maintain a log of occupational injuries and illnesses under 29 CFR part 1904. (iii) The sharps injury log shall be maintained for the period required by 29 CFR 1904.33. (i) Dates Effective Date. (2) The Exposure Control Plan required by paragraph (c) of this section shall be completed on or before May 5, 1992. (3) Paragraphs (g)(2) Information and Training and (h) Recordkeeping of this section shall take effect on or before June 4, 1992. (4) Paragraphs (d)(2) Engineering and Work Practice Controls, (d)(3) Personal Protective Equipment, (d)(4) Housekeeping, (e) HIV and HBV Research Laboratories and Production Facilities, (f) Hepatitis B Vaccination and Post-Exposure Evaluation and Follow-up, and (g)(1) Labels and Signs of this section, shall take effect July 6, 1992. Appendix A to Section 1910.1030—Hepatitis B Vaccine Declination (Mandatory) I understand that due to my occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials I may be at risk of acquiring hepatitis B virus (HBV) infection. I have been given the opportunity to be vaccinated with hepatitis B vaccine, at no charge to myself. However, I decline hepatitis B vaccination at this time. I understand that by declining this vaccine, I continue to be at risk of acquiring hepatitis B, a serious disease. If in the future I continue to have occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials and I want to be vaccinated with hepatitis B vaccine, I can receive the vaccination series at no charge to me. [56 FR 64175, Dec. 6, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 12717, Apr. 13, 1992; 57 FR 29206, July 1, 1992; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 66 FR 5325, Jan. 18, 2001; 71 FR 16672, 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 73 FR 75586, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33608, June 8, 2011; 76 FR 80740, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 19934, Apr. 3, 2012] § 1910.1043 Cotton dust. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section does not apply to the handling or processing of woven or knitted materials; to maritime operations covered by 29 CFR Parts 1915 and 1918; to harvesting or ginning of cotton; or to the construction industry. (3) Only paragraphs (h) Medical surveillance, (k)(2) through (4) Recordkeeping—Medical Records, and appendices B, C and D of this section apply in all work places where employees exposed to cotton dust engage in cottonseed processing or waste processing operations. (4) This section applies to yarn manufacturing and slashing and weaving operations exclusively using washed cotton (as defined by paragraph (n) of this section) only to the extent specified by paragraph (n) of this section. (5) This section, in its entirety, applies to the control of all employees exposure to the cotton dust generated in the preparation of washed cotton from opening until the cotton is thoroughly wetted. (6) This section does not apply to knitting, classing or warehousing operations except that employers with these operations, if requested by NIOSH, shall grant NIOSH access to their employees and workplaces for exposure monitoring and medical examinations for purposes of a health study to be performed by NIOSH on a sampling basis. (b) Definitions. Assistant Secretary Blow down Blow off Cotton dust Director Equivalent Instrument Lint-free respirable cotton dust Vertical elutriator cotton dust sampler vertical elutriator Waste processing Yarn manufacturing (c) Permissible exposure limits and action levels Permissible exposure limits (PEL). 3 (ii) The employer shall assure that no employee who is exposed to cotton dust in textile mill waste house operations or is exposed in yarn manufacturing to dust from “lower grade washed cotton” as defined in paragraph (n)(5) of this section is exposed to airborne concentrations of lint-free respirable cotton dust greater than 500 µg/m 3 (iii) The employer shall assure that no employee who is exposed to cotton dust in the textile processes known as slashing and weaving is exposed to airborne concentrations of lint-free respirable cotton dust greater than 750 µg/m 3 (2) Action levels. 3 (ii) The action level for waste houses for textile operations is an airborne concentration of lint-free respirable cotton dust of 250 µg/m 3 (iii) The action level for the textile processes known as slashing and weaving is an airborne concentration of lint-free respirable cotton dust of 375 µg/m 3 (d) Exposure monitoring and measurement General. (ii) The sampling device to be used shall be either the vertical elutriator cotton dust sampler or an equivalent instrument. (iii) If an alternative to the vertical elutriator cotton dust sampler is used, the employer shall establish equivalency by reference to an OSHA opinion or by documenting, based on data developed by the employer or supplied by the manufacturer, that the alternative sampling devices meets the following criteria: (A) It collects respirable particulates in the same range as the vertical elutriator (approximately 15 microns); (B) Replicate exposure data used to establish equivalency are collected in side-by-side field and laboratory comparisons; and (C) A minimum of 100 samples over the range of 0.5 to 2 times the permissible exposure limit are collected, and 90% of these samples have an accuracy range of plus or minus 25 per cent of the vertical elutriator reading with a 95% confidence level as demonstrated by a statistically valid protocol. (An acceptable protocol for demonstrating equivalency is described in appendix E of this section.) (iv) OSHA will issue a written opinion stating that an instrument is equivalent to a vertical elutriator cotton dust sampler if (A) A manufacturer or employer requests an opinion in writing and supplies the following information: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) if OSHA finds, based on information submitted about the instrument, that the instrument meets the requirements for equivalency specified by paragraph (d) of this section. (2) Initial monitoring. (3) Periodic monitoring. (ii) If the initial monitoring required by paragraph (d)(2) of this section or any subsequent monitoring reveals employee exposure to be above the PEL, the employer shall repeat the monitoring for those employees at least every six months. (iii) Whenever there has been a production, process, or control change which may result in new or additional exposure to cotton dust, or whenever the employer has any other reason to suspect an increase in employee exposure, the employer shall repeat the monitoring and measurements for those employees affected by the change or increase. (4) Employee notification. (ii) Whenever the results indicate that the employee's exposure exceeds the applicable permissible exposure limit specified in paragraph (c) of this section, the employer shall include in the written notice a statement that the permissible exposure limit was exceeded and a description of the corrective action taken to reduce exposure below the permissible exposure limit. (e) Methods of compliance Engineering and work practice controls. (2) Whenever feasible engineering and work practice controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit, the employer shall nonetheless institute these controls to reduce exposure to the lowest feasible level, and shall supplement these controls with the use of respirators which shall comply with the provisions of paragraph (f) of this section. (3) Compliance program. (ii) The written program shall include at least the following: (A) A description of each operation or process resulting in employee exposure to cotton dust at levels greater than the PEL; (B) Engineering plans and other studies used to determine the controls for each process; (C) A report of the technology considered in meeting the permissible exposure limit; (D) Monitoring data obtained in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section; (E) A detailed schedule for development and implementation of engineering and work practice controls, including exposure levels projected to be achieved by such controls; (F) Work practice program; and (G) Other relevant information. (iii) The employer's schedule as set forth in the compliance program, shall project completion of the implementation of the compliance program no later than March 27, 1984 or as soon as possible if monitoring after March 27, 1984 reveals exposures over the PEL, except as provided in paragraph (m)(2)(ii)(B) of this section. (iv) The employer shall complete the steps set forth in his program by the dates in the schedule. (v) Written programs shall be submitted, upon request, to the Assistant Secretary and the Director, and shall be available at the worksite for examination and copying by the Assistant Secretary, the Director, and any affected employee or their designated representatives. (vi) The written program required under paragraph (e)(3) of this section shall be revised and updated when necessary to reflect the current status of the program and current exposure levels. (4) Mechanical ventilation. (f) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Maintenance and repair activities for which engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the permissible exposure limits. (iv) Work operations specified under paragraph (g)(1) of this section. (v) Periods for which an employee requests a respirator. (2) Respirator program. (ii) Whenever a physician determines that an employee who works in an area in which the cotton-dust concentration exceeds the PEL is unable to use a respirator, including a powered air-purifying respirator, the employee must be given the opportunity to transfer to an available position, or to a position that becomes available later, that has a cotton-dust concentration at or below the PEL. The employer must ensure that such employees retain their current wage rate or other benefits as a result of the transfer. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134; however, employers must not select or use filtering facepieces for protection against cotton dust concentrations greater than five times (5 × ) the PEL. (B) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators used at cotton dust concentrations greater than ten times (10 × ) the PEL. (ii) Employers must provide an employee with a powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) instead of a non-powered air-purifying respirator selected according to paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this standard when the employee chooses to use a PAPR and it provides adequate protection to the employee as specified by paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this standard. (g) Work practices. (1) Compressed air “blow down” cleaning shall be prohibited where alternative means are feasible. Where compressed air is used for cleaning, the employees performing the “blow down” or “blow off” shall wear suitable respirators. Employees whose presence is not required to perform “blow down” or “blow of” shall be required to leave the area affected by the “blow down” or “blow off” during this cleaning operation. (2) Cleaning of clothing or floors with compressed air shall be prohibited. (3) Floor sweeping shall be performed with a vacuum or with methods designed to minimize dispersal of dust. (4) In areas where employees are exposed to concentrations of cotton dust greater than the permissible exposure limit, cotton and cotton waste shall be stacked, sorted, baled, dumped, removed or otherwise handled by mechanical means, except where the employer can show that it is infeasible to do so. Where infeasible, the method used for handling cotton and cotton waste shall be the method which reduces exposure to the lowest level feasible. (h) Medical surveillance General. (ii) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician and are provided without cost to the employee. (iii) Persons other than licensed physicians, who administer the pulmonary function testing required by this section shall have completed a NIOSH-approved training course in spirometry. (2) Initial examinations. (i) A medical history; (ii) The standardized questionnaire contained in appendix B; and (iii) A pulmonary function measurement, including forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume in one second (FEV 1 1 1 1 1 (iv) Based upon the questionnaire results, each employee shall be graded according to Schilling's byssinosis classification system. (3) Periodic examinations. (ii) Medical surveillance as required in paragraph (h)(3)(i) of this section shall be provided every six months for all employees in the following categories: (A) An FEV 1 1 (B) An FEV 1 (C) Where, in the opinion of the physician, any significant change in questionnaire findings, pulmonary function results, or other diagnostic tests have occurred. (iii) An employee whose FEV 1 (iv) A comparison shall be made between the current examination results and those of previous examinations and a determination made by the physician as to whether there has been a significant change. (4) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this regulation and its Appendices: (ii) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposure; (iii) The employee's exposure level or anticipated exposure level; (iv) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used; and (v) Information from previous medical examinations of the affected employee which is not readily available to the examining physician. (5) Physician's written opinion. (A) The results of the medical examination and tests including the FEV 1 1 (B) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions which would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment of the employee's health from exposure to cotton dust; (C) The physician's recommended limitations upon the employee's exposure to cotton dust or upon the employee's use of respirators including a determination of whether an employee can wear a negative pressure respirator, and where the employee cannot, a determination of the employee's ability to wear a powered air purifying respirator; and, (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions which require further examination or treatment. (ii) The written opinion obtained by the employer shall not reveal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure. (i) Employee education and training Training program. (ii) The training program shall be provided prior to initial assignment and shall be repeated annually for each employee exposed to cotton dust, when job assignments or work processes change and when employee performance indicates a need for retraining. (2) Access to training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide all materials relating to the employee training and information program to the Assistant Secretary and the Director upon request. (j) Signs. DANGER COTTON DUST CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS (BYSSINOSIS) WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN THIS AREA (2) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (j)(1) of this section: WARNING COTTON DUST WORK AREA MAY CAUSE ACUTE OR DELAYED LUNG INJURY (BYSSINOSIS) RESPIRATORS REQUIRED IN THIS AREA (k) Recordkeeping Exposure measurements. (ii) The record shall include: (A) A log containing the items listed in paragraph IV (a) of appendix A, and the dates, number, duration, and results of each of the samples taken, including a description of the procedure used to determine representative employee exposure; (B) The type of protective devices worn, if any, and length of time worn; and (C) The names, job classifications, and exposure levels of employees whose exposure the measurement is intended to represent. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least 20 years. (2) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include: (A) The name and description of the duties of the employee; (B) A copy of the medical examination results including the medical history, questionnaire response, results of all tests, and the physician's recommendation; (C) A copy of the physician's written opinion; (D) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to cotton dust; (E) A copy of this standard and its appendices, except that the employer may keep one copy of the standard and the appendices for all employees, provided that he references the standard and appendices in the medical surveillance record of each employee; and (F) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by paragraph (h)(4) of this section. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least 20 years. (3) Availability. (ii) Employee exposure measurement records and employee medical records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request to employees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a) through (e) and (g) through (i). (4) Transfer of records. (ii) The employer shall also comply with any additional requirements involving transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). (l) Observation of monitoring. (2) Whenever observation of the measuring or monitoring of employee exposure to cotton dust requires entry into an area where the use of personal protective equipment is required, the employer shall provide the observer with and assure the use of such equipment and shall require the observer to comply with all other applicable safety and health procedures. (3) Without interfering with the measurement, observers shall be entitled to: (i) An explanation of the measurement procedures: (ii) An opportunity to observe all steps related to the measurement of airborne concentrations of cotton dust performed at the place of exposure; and (iii) An opportunity to record the results obtained. (m) Washed Cotton Exemptions. (2) Initial requirements. (ii) An employer who handles or processes cotton which has been washed in a facility not under the employer's control and claims an exemption or partial exemption under this paragraph, must obtain from the cotton washer and make available at the worksite, to the Assistant Secretary, to any affected employee, or to their designated representative the following: (A) A certification by the washer of the cotton of the grade of cotton, the type of washing process, and that the batch meets the requirements of this paragraph; (B) Sufficient accurate documentation by the washer of the cotton grades and washing process; and (C) An authorization by the washer that the Assistant Secretary or the Director may inspect the washer's washing facilities and documentation of the process. (3) Medical and dyed cotton. (4) Higher grade washed cotton. (i) On a continuous batt system or a rayon rinse system including the following conditions: (A) With water; (B) At a temperature of no less than 60 °C; (C) With a water-to-fiber ratio of no less than 40:1; and (D) With the bacterial levels in the wash water controlled to limit bacterial contamination of the cotton. (ii) On a batch kier washing system including the following conditions: (A) With water; (B) With cotton fiber mechanically opened and thoroughly prewetted before forming the cake; (C) For low-temperature processing, at a temperature of no less than 60 °C with a water-to-fiber ratio of no less than 40:1; or, for high-temperature processing, at a temperature of no less than 93 °C with a water-to-fiber ratio of no less than 15:1; (D) With a minimum of one wash cycle followed by two rinse cycles for each batch, using fresh water in each cycle, and (E) With bacterial levels in the wash water controlled to limit bacterial contamination of the cotton. (5) Lower grade washed cotton. (6) Mixed grades of washed cotton. (n) Appendices. (2) Appendix A of this section contains information which is not intended to create any additional obligations not otherwise imposed or to detract from any existing obligations. (3) Appendix E of this section is a protocol which may be followed in the validation of alternative measuring devices as equivalent to the vertical elutriator cotton dust sampler. Other protocols may be used if it is demonstrated that they are statistically valid, meet the requirements in paragraph (d)(l)(iii) of this section, and are appropriate for demonstrating equivalency. Appendix A to § 1910.1043—Air Sampling and Analytical Procedures for Determining Concentrations of Cotton Dust i. sampling locations The sampling procedures must be designed so that samples of the actual dust concentrations are collected accurately and consistently and reflect the concentrations of dust at the place and time of sampling. Sufficient number of 6-hour area samples in each distinct work area of the plant should be collected at locations which provide representative samples of air to which the worker is exposed. In order to avoid filter overloading, sampling time may be shortened when sampling in dusty areas. Samples in each work area should be gathered simultaneously or sequentially during a normal operating period. The daily time-weighted average (TWA) exposure of each worker can then be determined by using the following formula: Summation of hours spent in each location and the dust concentration in that location. Total hours exposed A time-weighted average concentration should be computed for each worker and properly logged and maintained on file for review. ii. sampling equipment (a) Sampler. The instrument selected for monitoring is the Lumsden-Lynch vertical elutriator. It should operate at a flow rate of 7.4±0.2 liters/minute. The samplers should be cleaned prior to sampling. The pumps should be monitored during sampling. (b) Filter Holder. A three-piece cassette constructed of polystyrene designed to hold a 37-mm diameter filter should be used. Care must be exercised to insure that an adequate seal exists between elements of the cassette. (c) Filers and Support Pads. The membrane filters used should be polyvinyl chloride with a 5-um pore size and 37-mm diameter. A support pad, commonly called a backup pad, should be used under the filter membrane in the field monitor cassette. (d) Balance. A balance sensitive to 10 micrograms should be used. (e) Monitoring equipment for use in Class III hazardous locations must be approved for use in such locations, in accordance with the requirements of the OSHA electrical standards in subpart S of part 1910. iii. instrument calibration procedure Samplers shall be calibrated when first received from the factory, after repair, and after receiving any abuse. The samplers should be calibrated in the laboratory both before they are used in the field and after they have been used to collect a large number of field samples. The primary standard, such as a spirometer or other standard calibrating instruments such as a wet test meter or a large bubble meter or dry gas meter, should be used. Instructions for calibration with the wet test meter follow. If another calibration device is selected, equivalent procedures should be used: (a) Level wet test meter. Check the water level which should just touch the calibration point at the left side of the meter. If water level is low, add water 1-2 °F. warmer than room temperature of till point. Run the meter for 30 minutes before calibration; (b) Place the polyvinyl chloride membrane filter in the filter cassette; (c) Assemble the calibration sampling train; (d) Connect the wet test meter to the train. The pointer on the meter should run clockwise and a pressure drop of not more than 1.0 inch of water indicated. If the pressure drop is greater than 1.0, disconnect and check the system; (e) Operate the system for ten minutes before starting the calibration; (f) Check the vacuum gauge on the pump to insure that the pressure drop across the orifice exceeds 17 inches of mercury; (g) Record the following on calibration data sheets: (1) Wet test meter reading, start and finish; (2) Elapsed time, start and finish (at least two minutes); (3) Pressure drop at manometer; (4) Air temperature; (5) Barometric pressure; and (6) Limiting orifice number; (h) Calculate the flow rate and compare against the flow of 7.4±0.2 liters/minute. If flow is between these limits, perform calibration again, average results, and record orifice number and flow rate. If flow is not within these limits, discard or modify orifice and repeat procedure; (i) Record the name of the person performing the calibration, the date, serial number of the wet test meter, and the number of the critical orifices being calibrated. iv. sampling procedure (a) Sampling data sheets should include a log of: (1) The date of the sample collection; (2) The time of sampling; (3) The location of the sampler; (4) The sampler serial number; (5) The cassette number; (6) The time of starting and stopping the sampling and the duration of sampling; (7) The weight of the filter before and after sampling; (8) The weight of dust collected (corrected for controls); (9) The dust concentration measured; (10) Other pertinent information; and (11) Name of person taking sample (b) Assembly of filter cassette should be as follows: (1) Loosely assemble 3-piece cassette; (2) Number cassette; (3) Place absorbant pad in cassette; (4) Weigh filter to an accuracy of 10 µg; (5) Place filter in cassette; (6) Record weight of filter in log, using cassette number for identification; (7) Fully assemble cassette, using pressure to force parts tightly together; (8) Install plugs top and bottom; (9) Put shrink band on cassette, covering joint between center and bottom parts of cassette; and (10) Set cassette aside until shrink band dries thoroughly. (c) Sampling collection should be performed as follows: (1) Clean lint out of the motor and elutriator; (2) Install vertical elutriator in sampling locations specified above with inlet 4 1/2 1/2 (3) Remove top section of cassette; (4) Install cassette in ferrule of elutriator; (5) Tape cassette to ferrule with masking tape or similar material for air-tight seal; (6) Remove bottom plug of cassette and attach hose containing critical orifice; (7) Start elutriator pump and check to see if gauge reads above 17 in. of Hg vacuum; (8) Record starting time, cassette number, and sampler number; (9) At end of sampling period stop pump and record time; and (10) Controls with each batch of samples collected, two additional filter cassettes should be subjected to exactly the same handling as the samples, except that they are not opened. These control filters should be weighed in the same manner as the sample filters. Any difference in weight in the control filters would indicate that the procedure for handling sample filters may not be adequate and should be evaluated to ascertain the cause of the difference, whether and what necessary corrections must be made, and whether additional samples must be collected. (d) Shipping. The cassette with samples should be collected, along with the appropriate number of blanks, and shipped to the analytical laboratory in a suitable container to prevent damage in transit. (e) Weighing of the sample should be achieved as follows: (1) Remove shrink band; (2) Remove top and middle sections of cassette and botton plug; (3) Remove filter from cassette and weigh to an accuracy of 10 µg; and (4) Record weight in log against original weight (f) Calculation of volume of air sampled should be determined as follows: (1) From starting and stopping times of sampling period, determine length of time in minutes of sampling period; and (2) Multiply sampling time in minutes by flow rate of critical orifice in liters per minute and divide by 1000 to find air quantity in cubic meters. (g) Calculation of Dust Concentrations should be made as follows: (1) Substract weight of clean filter from dirty filter and apply control correction to find actual weight of sample. Record this weight (in µg) in log; and (2) Divide mass of sample in µg by air volume in cubic meters to find dust concentration in µg/m. Record in log. Appendix B-I to § 1910.1043—Respiratory Questionnaire Appendix B-II to § 1910.1043—Respiratory Questionnaire for Non-Textile Workers for the Cotton Industry Appendix B-III to § 1910.1043—Abbreviated Respiratory Questionnaire Appendix C to § 1910.1043—[Reserved] Appendix D to § 1910.1043—Pulmonary Function Standards for Cotton Dust Standard The spirometric measurements of pulmonary function shall conform to the following minimum standards, and these standards are not intended to preclude additional testing or alternate methods which can be determined to be superior. I. Apparatus a. The instrument shall be accurate to within ±50 milliliters or within ±3 percent of reading, whichever is greater. b. 1. Instruments purchased on or before May 14, 2020 should be capable of measuring vital capacity from 0 to 7 liters BTPS 2. Instruments purchased after May 14, 2020 should be capable of measuring vital capacity from 0 to 8 liters BTPS. c. The instrument shall have a low inertia and offer low resistance to airflow such that the resistance to airflow at 12 liters per second must be less than 1.5 cm H 2 d. The zero time point for the purpose of timing the FEV 1 e. 1. Instruments purchased on or before May 14, 2020 that incorporate measurements of airflow to determine volume shall conform to the same volume accuracy stated in paragraph (a) of this section I when presented with flow rates from at least 0 to 12 liters per second. 2. Instruments purchased after May 14, 2020 that incorporate measurements of airflow to determine volume shall conform to the same volume accuracy stated in paragraph (a) of this section I when presented with flow rates from at least 0 to 14 liters per second. f. The instrument or user of the instrument must have a means of correcting volumes to body temperature saturated with water vapor (BTPS) under conditions of varying ambient spirometer temperatures and barometric pressures. g. 1. Instruments purchased on or before May 14, 2020 shall provide a tracing or display of either flow versus volume or volume versus time during the entire forced expiration. A tracing or display is necessary to determine whether the patient has performed the test properly. The tracing must be stored and available for recall and must be of sufficient size that hand measurements may be made within the volume accuracy requirements of paragraph (a) of this section I. If a paper record is made it must have a paper speed of at least 2 cm/sec and a volume sensitivity of at least 10.0 mm of chart per liter of volume. 2. Instruments purchased after May 14, 2020 shall provide during testing a paper tracing or real-time display of flow versus volume and volume versus time for the entire forced expiration. Such a tracing or display is necessary to determine whether the worker has performed the test properly. Flow-volume and volume-time curves must be stored and available for recall. Real-time displays shall have a volume scale of at least 5 mm/L, a time scale of at least 10 mm/s, and a flow scale of at least 2.5 mm/L/s, when both flow-volume and volume-time displays are visible. If hand measurements will be made, paper tracings must be of sufficient size to allow those measurements to be made within the volume accuracy requirements of paragraph (a) of this section I. If a paper record is made it must have a paper speed of at least 2 cm/sec and a volume sensitivity of at least 10.0 mm of chart per liter of volume. h. 1. Instruments purchased on or before May 14, 2020 shall be capable of accumulating volume for a minimum of 10 seconds and shall not stop accumulating volume before (i) the volume change for a 0.5-second interval is less than 25 milliliters, or (ii) the flow is less than 50 milliliters per second for a 0.5 second interval. 2. Instruments purchased after May 14, 2020 shall be capable of accumulating volume for a minimum of 15 seconds and shall not stop accumulating volume before the volume change for a 1-second interval is less than 25 milliliters. i. The forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume in 1 second (FEV 1 j. 1. Instruments purchased on or before May 14, 2020 must be capable of being calibrated in the field with respect to the FEV 1 1 2. Instruments purchased after May 14, 2020 must be capable of having its calibration checked in the field and be recalibrated, if necessary, if the spirometer requires the technician to do so. The volume-calibration syringe shall provide a volume displacement of at least 3 liters and shall be accurate to within ± 0.5 percent of 3 liters (15 milliliters). II. Technique for Measurement of Forced Vital Capacity Maneuver a. Use of a nose clip is recommended but not required. The procedures shall be explained in simple terms to the worker who shall be instructed to loosen any tight clothing and stand in front of the apparatus. The worker may sit, but care should be taken on repeat testing that the same position be used and, if possible, the same spirometer. Particular attention shall be given to ensure that the chin is slightly elevated with the neck slightly extended. The worker shall be instructed to make a full inspiration from a normal breathing pattern and then blow into the apparatus, without interruption, as hard, fast, and completely as possible. At least three and no more than eight forced expirations shall be carried out. During the maneuvers, the worker shall be observed for compliance with instruction. The expirations shall be checked visually for technical acceptability and repeatability from flow-volume or volume-time tracings or displays. The following efforts shall be judged technically unacceptable when the worker: 1. Has not reached full inspiration preceding the forced expiration, 2. Has not used maximal effort during the entire forced expiration, 3. Has not tried to exhale continuously for at least 6 seconds and the volume-time curve shows no change in volume (<0.025 L) for at least one second, 4. Has coughed in the first second or closed the glottis, 5. Has an obstructed mouthpiece or a leak around the mouthpiece (obstruction due to tongue being placed in front of mouthpiece, false teeth falling in front of mouthpiece, etc.), 6. Has an unsatisfactory start of expiration, one characterized by excessive hesitation (or false starts), and, therefore, not allowing back extrapolation of time 0 (extrapolated volume on the volume-time tracing must be less than 150 milliliters or 5 percent of the FVC, whichever is greater.), and 7. Has an excessive variability between the acceptable curves. The difference between the two largest FVCs from the satisfactory tracings shall not exceed 150 milliliters and the difference between the two largest FEV 1 b. Calibration checks of the volume accuracy of the instrument for recording FVC and FEV 1 III. Interpretation of Spirogram a. The first step in evaluating a spirogram should be to determine whether or not the worker has performed the test properly or as described in section II of this appendix. From the three satisfactory tracings, the forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume in 1 second (FEV 1 1 b. [Reserved] IV. Qualifications of Personnel Administering the Test Technicians who perform pulmonary function testing should have the basic knowledge required to produce meaningful results. Training consisting of approximately 16 hours of formal instruction should cover the following areas. a. Basic physiology of the forced vital-capacity maneuver and the determinants of airflow limitation, with emphasis on the relation to repeatability of results. b. Instrumentation requirements, including calibration check procedures, sources of error, and their correction. c. Performance of the testing including worker coaching, recognition of improperly performed maneuvers and corrective actions. d. Data quality with emphasis on repeatability. e. Actual use of the equipment under supervised conditions. f. Measurement of tracings and calculations of results. [43 FR 27394, June 23, 1978; 43 FR 35035, Aug. 8, 1978, as amended at 45 FR 67340, Oct. 10, 1980; 50 FR 51173, Dec. 13, 1985; 51 FR 24325, July 3, 1986; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1290, Jan. 8, 1998; 65 FR 76567, Dec. 7, 2000; 70 FR 1142, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16672, 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50189, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75586, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33609, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17782, Mar. 26, 2012; 84 FR 21490, May 14, 2019] § 1910.1044 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section does not apply to: (i) Exposure to DBCP which results solely from the application and use of DBCP as a pesticide; or (ii) The storage, transportation, distribution or sale of DBCP in intact containers sealed in such a manner as to prevent exposure to DBCP vapors or liquid, except for the requirements of paragraphs (i), (n) and (o) of this section. (b) Definitions. Authorized person Authorized person DBCP Director Emergency OSHA Area Office Assistant Secretary (c) Permissible exposure limit Inhalation. (2) Dermal and eye exposure. (d) [Reserved] (e) Regulated areas. (2) The employer shall limit access to regulated areas to authorized persons. (f) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) For the purposes of this paragraph, employee exposure is that exposure which would occur if the employee were not using a respirator. (2) Initial. (3) Frequency. (ii) If the monitoring required by this section reveals employee exposures to be in excess of the permissible exposure limit, the employer must repeat these measurements for each such employee at least quarterly. The employer must continue quarterly monitoring until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least seven (7) days apart, are at or below the permissible exposure limit. Thereafter the employer must monitor at least every 6 months. (4) Additional. (5) Employee notification. (ii) Whenever the results indicate that employee exposure exceeds the permissible exposure limit, the employer shall include in the written notice a statement that the permissible exposure limit was exceeded and a description of the corrective action being taken to reduce exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit. (6) Accuracy of measurement. (g) Methods of compliance Priority of compliance methods. (2) Compliance program. (ii) The written program shall include a detailed schedule for development and implementation of the engineering and work practice controls. These plans must be revised at least annually to reflect the current status of the program. (iii) Written plans for these compliance programs shall be submitted upon request to the Assistant Secretary and the Director, and shall be available at the worksite for examination and copying by the Assistant Secretary, the Director, and any affected employee or designated representative of employees. (iv) The employer shall institute and maintain at least the controls described in his most recent written compliance program. (h) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Maintenance and repair activities for which engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (3) Respirator selection. (i) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate atmosphere-supplying respirator specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (ii) Provide employees with one of the following respirator options to use for entry into, or escape from, unknown DBCP concentrations: (A) A combination respirator that includes a supplied-air respirator with a full facepiece operated in a pressure-demand or other positive-pressure or continuous-flow mode, as well as an auxiliary self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) operated in a pressure-demand or positive-pressure mode. (B) An SCBA with a full facepiece operated in a pressure-demand or other positive-pressure mode. (i) Emergency situations Written plans. (ii) Appropriate portions of the plan shall be implemented in the event of an emergency. (2) Employees engaged in correcting emergency conditions shall be equipped as required in paragraphs (h) and (j) of this section until the emergency is abated. (3) Evacuation. (4) Alerting employees. (5) Medical surveillance. (6) Exposure monitoring. (ii) In workplaces not normally subject to periodic monitoring, the employer may terminate monitoring when two consecutive measurements indicate exposures below the permissible exposure limit. (j) Protective clothing and equipments Provision and use. (2) Removal and storage. (ii) The employer shall assure that employees promptly remove any protective clothing and equipment which becomes contaminated with DBCP-containing liquids and solids. This clothing shall not be reworn until the DBCP has been removed from the clothing or equipment. (iii) The employer shall assure that no employee takes DBCP contaminated protective devices and work clothing out of the change room, except those employees authorized to do so for the purpose of laundering, maintenance, of disposal. (iv) DBCP-contaminated protective devices and work clothing shall be placed and stored in closed containers which prevent dispersion of the DBCP outside the container. (v) Containers of DBCP-contaminated protective devices or work clothing which are to be taken out of change rooms or the workplace for cleaning, maintenance or disposal shall bear labels with the following information: CONTAMINATED WITH 1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (DBCP), MAY CAUSE CANCER. (3) Cleaning and replacement. (ii) The employer shall inform any person who launders or clean DBCP-contaminated protective clothing or equipment of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to DBCP. (iii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of DBCP from protective clothing and equipment by blowing or shaking. (k) Housekeeping Surfaces. (ii) Dry sweeping and the use of compressed air for the cleaning of floors and other surfaces is prohibited where DBCP dusts or liquids are present. (iii) Where vacuuming methods are selected to clean floors and other surfaces, either portable units or a permanent system may be used. ( a ( b (iv) Cleaning of floors and other surfaces contaminated with DBCP-containing dusts shall not be performed by washing down with a hose, unless a fine spray has first been laid down. (2) Liquids. (3) Waste disposal. (l) Hygiene facilities and practices Change rooms. (2) Showers. (ii) The employer shall assure that employees whose skin becomes contaminated with DBCP-containing liquids or solids immediately wash or shower to remove any DBCP from the skin. (iii) The employer shall provide shower facilities in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3). (3) Lunchrooms. (4) Lavatories. (ii) The employer shall provide a sufficient number of lavatory facilities which comply with 29 CFR 1910.141(d) (1) and (2). (5) Prohibition of activities in regulated areas. (m) Medical surveillance General. (ii) All medical examinations and procedures shall be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician, and shall be provided without cost to the employee. (2) Frequency and content. (i) A medical and occupational history including reproductive history. (ii) A physical examination, including examination of the genito-urinary tract, testicle size and body habitus, including a determination of sperm count. (iii) A serum specimen shall be obtained and the following determinations made by radioimmunoassay techniques utilizing National Institutes of Health (NIH) specific antigen or one of equivalent sensitivity: ( a ( b ( c (iv) Any other tests deemed appropriate by the examining physician. (3) Additional examinations. (4) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this regulation and its appendices; (ii) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposure; (iii) The level of DBCP to which the employee is exposed; and (iv) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used. (5) Physician's written opinion. ( a ( b ( c (ii) The employer shall instruct the physician not to reveal in the written opinion specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure. (6) Emergency situations. (n) Employee information and training Training program. (ii) The employer shall assure that each employee is informed of the following: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (2) Access to training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide, upon request, all materials relating to the employee information and training program to the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (o) Communication of hazards Hazard communication—general. (ii) In classifying the hazards of DBCP at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer; reproductive effects; liver effects; kidney effects; central nervous system effects; skin, eye and respiratory tract irritation; and acute toxicity effects. (iii) Employers shall include DBCP in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of DBCP and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (n) of this section. (iv) The employer shall ensure that no statement appears on or near any sign or label required by this paragraph (o) which contradicts or detracts from the meaning of the required sign or label. (2) Signs. DANGER 1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane MAY CAUSE CANCER WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (ii) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (o)(2) of this section: DANGER 1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (Insert appropriate trade or common names) CANCER HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATOR REQUIRED (3) Labels. (ii) The employer shall ensure that the precautionary labels required by this paragraph (o)(3) are readily visible and legible. (iii) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on containers of DBCP or products containing DBCP, DBCP-contaminated protective devices or work clothing or DBCP-contaminated portable vacuums in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraphs (j)(2)(v), (k)(l)(iii)(b) and (o)(1)(i) of this section: DANGER 1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane CANCER HAZARD (p) Recordkeeping Exposure monitoring. (ii) This record shall include: ( a ( b ( c ( d (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least 40 years or the duration of employment plus 20 years, whichever is longer. (2) Medical surveillance. (ii) This record shall include: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least 40 years or the duration of employment plus 20 years, whichever is longer. (3) Availability. (ii) Employee exposure monitoring records and employee medical records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request to employees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a) through (e) and (g) through (i). (4) Transfer of records. (ii) The employer shall also comply with any additional requirements involving transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). (q) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (ii) Without interfering with the monitoring or measurement, observers shall be entitled to: ( a ( b ( c (r) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.1044—Substance Safety Data Sheet For DBCP i. Substance Identification A. Synonyms and trades names: DBCP; Dibromochloropropane; Fumazone (Dow Chemical Company TM); Nemafume; Nemagon (Shell Chemical Co. TM); Nemaset; BBC 12; and OS 1879. B. Permissible exposure: 1. Airborne. 2. Dermal. C. Appearance and odor: Technical grade DBCP is a dense yellow or amber liquid with a pungent odor. It may also appear in granular form, or blended in varying concentrations with other liquids. D. Uses: DBCP is used to control nematodes, very small worm-like plant parasites, on crops including cotton, soybeans, fruits, nuts, vegetables and ornamentals. ii. Health Hazard Data A. Routes of entry: Employees may be exposed: 1. Through inhalation (breathing); 2. Through ingestion (swallowing); 3. Skin contact; and 4. Eye contact. B. Effects of exposure: 1. Acute exposure. 2. Chronic exposure. 3. Reporting Signs and Symptoms. iii. Emergency First Aid Procedures A. Eye exposure. B. Skin exposure. C. Breathing. D. Swallowing. E. Rescue. iv. Respirators and Protective Clothing A. Respirators. B. Protective clothing. DBCP must never be allowed to remain on the skin. Clothing and shoes must not be allowed to become contaminated with DBCP, and if they do, they must be promptly removed and not worn again until completely free of DBCP. Turn in impermeable clothing that has developed leaks for repair or replacement. C. Eye protection. v. Precautions for Safe Use, Handling, and Storage A. DBCP must be stored in tightly closed containers in a cool, well-ventilated area. B. If your work clothing may have become contaminated with DBCP, or liquids or dusts containing DBCP, you must change into uncontaminated clothing before leaving the work premises. C. You must promptly remove any protective clothing that becomes contaminated with DBCP. This clothing must not be reworn until the DBCP is removed from the clothing. D. If your skin becomes contaminated with DBCP, you must immediately and thoroughly wash or shower with soap or mild detergent and water to remove any DBCP from your skin. E. You must not keep food, beverages, cosmetics, or smoking materials, nor eat or smoke, in regulated areas. F. If you work in a regulated area, you must wash your hands thoroughly with soap or mild detergent and water, before eating, smoking or using toilet facilities. G. If you work in a regulated area, you must remove any protective equipment or clothing before leaving the regulated area. H. Ask your supervisor where DBCP is used in your work area and for any additional safety and health rules. vi. Access to Information A. Each year, your employer is required to inform you of the information contained in this Substance Safety Data Sheet for DBCP. In addition, your employer must instruct you in the safe use of DBCP, emergency procedures, and the correct use of protective equipment. B. Your employer is required to determine whether you are being exposed to DBCP. You or your representative have the right to observe employee exposure measurements and to record the result obtained. Your employer is required to inform you of your exposure. If your employer determines that you are being overexposed, he is required to inform you of the actions which are being taken to reduce your exposure. C. Your employer is required to keep records of your exposure and medical examinations. Your employer is required to keep exposure and medical data for at least 40 years or the duration of your employment plus 20 years, whichever is longer. D. Your employer is required to release exposure and medical records to you, your physician, or other individual designated by you upon your written request. Appendix B to § 1910.1044—Substance Technical Guidelines for DBCP i. Physical and Chemical Data A. Substance Identification 1. Synonyms: 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane; DBCP, Fumazone; Nemafume; Nemagon; Nemaset; BBC 12; OS 1879. DBCP is also included in agricultural pesticides and fumigants which include the phrase “Nema—” in their name. 2. Formula: C3H5Br2 C1. 3. Molecular Weight: 236. B. Physical Data: 1. Boiling point (760 mm HG): 195C (383F) 2. Specific gravity (water = 1): 2.093. 3. Vapor density (air = 1 at boiling point of DBCP): Data not available. 4. Melting point: 6C (43F). 5. Vapor pressure at 20C (68F): 0.8 mm Hg 6. Solubility in water: 1000 ppm. 7. Evaporation rate (Butyl Acetate = 1): very much less than 1. 8. Appearance and odor: Dense yellow or amber liquid with a pungent odor at high concentrations. Any detectable odor of DBCP indicates overexposure. ii. Fire Explosion and Reactivity Hazard Data A. Fire 1. Flash point: 170F (77C) 2. Autoignition temperature: Data not available. 3. Flammable limits in air, percent by volume: Data not available. 4. Extinguishing media: Carbon dioxide, dry chemical. 5. Special fire-fighting procedures: Do not use a solid stream of water since a stream will scatter and spread the fire. Use water spray to cool containers exposed to a fire. 6. Unusual fire and explosion hazards: None known. 7. For purposes of complying with the requirements of § 1910.106, liquid DBCP is classified as a Category 4 flammable liquid. 8. For the purpose of complying with § 1910.309, the classification of hazardous locations as described in article 500 of the National Electrical Code for DBCP shall be Class I, Group D. 9. For the purpose of compliance with § 1910.157, DBCP is classified as a Class B fire hazard. 10. For the purpose of compliance with § 1910.178, locations classified as hazardous locations due to the presence of DBCP shall be Class I, Group D. 11. Sources of ignition are prohibited where DBCP presents a fire or explosion hazard. B. Reactivity 1. Conditions contributing to instability: None known. 2. Incompatibilities: Reacts with chemically active metals, such as aluminum, magnesium and tin alloys. 3. Hazardous decomposition products: Toxic gases and vapors (such as HBr, HCl and carbon monoxide) may be released in a fire involving DBCP. 4. Special precautions: DBCP will attack some rubber materials and coatings. iii. Spill, Leak and Disposal Procedures A. If DBCP is spilled or leaked, the following steps should be taken: 1. The area should be evacuated at once and re-entered only after thorough ventilation. 2. Ventilate area of spill or leak. 3. If in liquid form, collect for reclamation or absorb in paper, vermiculite, dry sand, earth or similar material. 4. If in solid form, collect spilled material in the most convenient and safe manner for reclamation or for disposal. B. Persons not wearing protective equipment must be restricted from areas of spills or leaks until cleanup has been completed. C. Waste Disposal Methods: 1. For small quantities of liquid DBCP, absorb on paper towels, remove to a safe place (such as a fume hood) and burn the paper. Large quantities can be reclaimed or collected and atomized in a suitable combustion chamber equipped with an appropriate effluent gas cleaning device. If liquid DBCP is absorbed in vermiculite, dry sand, earth or similar material and placed in sealed containers it may be disposed of in a State-approved sanitary landfill. 2. If in solid form, for small quantities, place on paper towels, remove to a safe place (such as a fume hood) and burn. Large quantities may be reclaimed. However, if this is not practical, dissolve in a flammable solvent (such as alcohol) and atomize in a suitable combustion chamber equipped with an appropriate effluent gas cleaning device. DBCP in solid form may also be disposed in a state-approved sanitary landfill. iv. Monitoring and Measurement Procedures A. Exposure above the permissible exposure limit. 1. Eight Hour Exposure Evaluation: 2. Monitoring Techniques: B. Since many of the duties relating to employee protection are dependent on the results of monitoring and measuring procedures, employers should assure that the evaluation of employee exposures is performed by a competent industrial hygienist or other technically qualified person. v. Protective Clothing Employees should be required to wear appropriate protective clothing to prevent any possibility of skin contact with DBCP. Because DBCP is absorbed through the skin, it is important to prevent skin contact with both liquid and solid forms of DBCP. Protective clothing should include impermeable coveralls or similar fullbody work clothing, gloves, headcoverings, and workshoes or shoe coverings. Standard rubber and neoprene gloves do not offer adequate protection and should not be relied upon to keep DBCP off the skin. DBCP should never be allowed to remain on the skin. Clothing and shoes should not be allowed to become contaminated with the material, and if they do, they should be promptly removed and not worn again until completely free of the material. Any protective clothing which has developed leaks or is otherwise found to be defective should be repaired or replaced. Employees should also be required to wear splash-proof safety goggles where there is any possibility of DBCP contacting the eyes. vi. Housekeeping and Hygiene Facilities 1. The workplace must be kept clean, orderly and in a sanitary condition; 2. Dry sweeping and the use of compressed air is unsafe for the cleaning of floors and other surfaces where DBCP dust or liquids are found. To minimize the contamination of air with dust, vacuuming with either portable or permanent systems must be used. If a portable unit is selected, the exhaust must be attached to the general workplace exhaust ventilation system, or collected within the vacuum unit equipped with high efficiency filters or other appropriate means of contamination removal and not used for other purposes. Units used to collect DBCP must be labeled. 3. Adequate washing facilities with hot and cold water must be provided, and maintained in a sanitary condition. Suitable cleansing agents should also be provided to assure the effective removal of DBCP from the skin. 4. Change or dressing rooms with individual clothes storage facilities must be provided to prevent the contamination of street clothes with DBCP. Because of the hazardous nature of DBCP, contaminated protective clothing must be stored in closed containers for cleaning or disposal. vii. Miscellaneous Precautions A. Store DBCP in tightly closed containers in a cool, well ventilated area. B. Use of supplied-air suits or other impervious clothing (such as acid suits) may be necessary to prevent skin contact with DBCP. Supplied-air suits should be selected, used, and maintained under the supervision of persons knowlegeable in the limitations and potential life-endangering characteristics of supplied-air suits. C. The use of air-conditioned suits may be necessary in warmer climates. D. Advise employees of all areas and operations where exposure to DBCP could occur. viii. Common Operations Common operations in which exposure to DBCP is likely to occur are: during its production; and during its formulation into pesticides and fumigants. Appendix C to § 1910.1044—Medical Surveillance Guidelines For DBCP i. Route of Entry Inhalation; skin absorption ii. Toxicology Recent data collected on workers involved in the manufacture and formulation of DBCP has shown that DBCP can cause sterility at very low levels of exposure. This finding is supported by studies showing that DBCP causes sterility in animals. Chronic exposure to DBCP resulted in pronounced necrotic action on the parenchymatous organs ( i.e. iii. Signs and Symptoms A. Inhalation: Nausea, eye irritation, conjunctivitis, respiratory irritation, pulmonary congestion or edema, CNS depression with apathy, sluggishness, and ataxia. B. Dermal: Erythema or inflammation and dermatitis on repeated exposure. iv. Special Tests A. Semen analysis: In performing semen analyses certain minimal but specific criteria should be met: 1. It is recommended that a minimum of three valid semen analyses be obtained in order to make a determination of an individual's average sperm count. 2. A period of sexual abstinence is necessary prior to the collection of each masturbatory sample. It is recommended that intercourse or masturbation be performed 48 hours before the actual specimen collection. A period of 48 hours of abstinence would follow; then the masturbatory sample would be collected. 3. Each semen specimen should be collected in a clean, widemouthed, glass jar (not necessarily pre-sterilized) in a manner designated by the examining physician. Any part of the seminal fluid exam should be initialed only after liquifaction 4. Semen volume should be measured to the nearest 1/10 5. Sperm density should be determined using routine techniques involving the use of a white cell pipette and a hemocytometer chamber. The immobilizing fluid most effective and most easily obtained for this process is distilled water. 6. Thin, dry smears of the semen should be made for a morphologic classification of the sperm forms and should be stained with either hematoxalin or the more difficult, yet more precise, Papanicolaou technique. Also of importance to record is obvious sperm agglutination, pyospermia, delayed liquifaction (greater than 30 minutes), and hyperviscosity. In addition, pH, using nitrazine paper, should be determined. 7. A total morphology evaluation should include percentages of the following: a. Normal (oval) forms, b. Tapered forms, c. Amorphous forms (include large and small sperm shapes), d. Duplicated (either heads or tails) forms, and e. Immature forms. 8. Each sample should be evaluated for sperm viability motility B. Serum determinations: 1. Serum follicle stimulating hormone (FSH); 2. Serum luteinizing hormone (LH); and 3. Serum total estrogen (females only). v. Treatment Remove from exposure immediately, give oxygen or artificial resuscitation if indicated. Contaminated clothing and shoes should be removed immediately. Flush eyes and wash contaminated skin. If swallowed and the person is conscious, induce vomiting. Recovery from mild exposures is usually rapid and complete. vi. Surveillance and Preventive Considerations A. Other considerations. B. Surveillance and screening. 1. Liver disease. 2. Renal disease. 3. Skin desease. 4. Blood dyscrasias. 5. Reproductive disorders. References 1. Reznik, Ya. B. and Sprinchan, G. K.: Experimental Data on the Gonadotoxic effect of Nemagon, Gig. Sanit., 2. Faydysh, E. V., Rakhmatullaev, N. N. and Varshavskii, V. A.: The Cytotoxic Action of Nemagon in a Subacute Experiment, Med. Zh. Uzbekistana, 3. Rakhmatullaev, N. N.: Hygienic Characteristics of the Nematocide Nemagon in Relation to Water Pollution Control, Hyg. Sanit., 4. Olson, W. A. et al.: Journal of the National Cancer Institute, 5. Torkelson, T. R. et al.: Toxicology and Applied Pharmacology, 3, 1961 pp. 545-559. [43 FR 11527, Mar. 17, 1978, as amended at 45 FR 35283, May 23, 1980; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35310, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1291, Jan. 8, 1998; 70 FR 1142, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16772, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50189, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75586, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33609, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17782, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, Feb. 8, 2013] § 1910.1045 Acrylonitrile. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section does not apply to exposures which result solely from the processing, use, and handling of the following materials: (i) ABS resins, SAN resins, nitrile barrier resins, solid nitrile elastomers, and acrylic and modacrylic fibers, when these listed materials are in the form of finished polymers, and products fabricated from such finished polymers; (ii) Materials made from and/or containing AN for which objective data is reasonably relied upon to demonstrate that the material is not capable of releasing AN in airborne concentrations in excess of 1 ppm as an eight (8)-hour time-weighted average, under the expected conditions of processing, use, and handling which will cause the greatest possible release; and (iii) Solid materials made from and/or containing AN which will not be heated above 170 °F during handling, use, or processing. (3) An employer relying upon exemption under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) shall maintain records of the objective data supporting that exemption, and of the basis of the employer's reliance on the data, as provided in paragraph (q) of this section. (b) Definitions. Acrylonitrile AN 2 Action level Assistant Secretary Authorized person Decontamination Emergency Liquid AN OSHA Area Office (c) Permissible exposure limits Inhalation. Time weighted average limit (TWA). (ii) Ceiling limit. (2) Dermal and eye exposure. (d) [Reserved] (e) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) For the purposes of this section, employee exposure is that exposure which would occur if the employee were not using a respirator. (2) Initial monitoring. (3) Frequency. (ii) If the monitoring required by this section reveals employee exposure to be at or above the action level but at or below the permissible exposure limits, the employer must repeat such monitoring for each such employee at least every 6 months. The employer must continue these measurements every 6 months until at least two consecutive measurements taken at least seven (7) days a part, are below the action level, and thereafter the employer may discontinue monitoring for that employee. (iii) If the monitoring required by this section reveals employee exposure to be in excess of the permissible exposure limits, the employer must repeat these determinations for each such employee at least quarterly. The employer must continue these quarterly measurements until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least seven (7) days apart, are at or below the permissible exposure limits, and thereafter the employer must monitor at least every 6 months. (4) Additional monitoring. (5) Employee notification. (ii) Whenever the results indicate that the representative employee exposure exceeds the permissible exposure limits, the employer shall include in the written notice a statement that the permissible exposure limits were exceeded and a description of the corrective action being taken to reduce exposure to or below the permissible exposure limits. (6) Accuracy of measurement. (f) Regulated areas. (2) Regulated areas shall be demarcated and segregated from the rest of the workplace, in any manner that minimizes the number of persons who will be exposed to AN. (3) Access to regulated areas shall be limited to authorized persons or to persons otherwise authorized by the act or regulations issued pursuant thereto. (4) The employer shall assure that food or beverages are not present or consumed, tobacco products are not present or used, and cosmetics are not applied in the regulated area. (g) Methods of compliance Engineering and work practice controls. (ii) Wherever the engineering and work practice controls which can be instituted are not sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the permissible exposure limits, the employer shall nonetheless use them to reduce exposures to the lowest levels achievable by these controls, and shall supplement them by the use of respiratory protection which complies with the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section. (2) Compliance program. (ii) Written plans for these compliance programs shall include at least the following: (A) A description of each operation or process resulting in employee exposure to AN above the permissible exposure limits; (B) An outline of the nature of the engineering controls and work practices to be applied to the operation or process in question; (C) A report of the technology considered in meeting the permissible exposure limits; (D) A schedule for implementation of engineering and work practice controls for the operation or process, which shall project completion no later than November 2, 1980; and (E) Other relevant information. (iii) The employer shall complete the steps set forth in the compliance program by the dates in the schedule. (iv) Written plans shall be submitted upon request to the Assistant Secretary and the Director, and shall be available at the worksite for examination and copying by the Assistant Secretary, the Director, or any affected employee or representative. (v) The plans required by this paragraph must be revised and updated at least annually to reflect the current status of the program. (h) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activities or reactor cleaning, for which the employer establishes that engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the permissible exposure limits. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (ii) If air-purifying respirators (chemical-cartridge or chemical-canister types) are used: (A) The air-purifying canister or cartridge must be replaced prior to the expiration of its service life or at the completion of each shift, whichever occurs first. (B) A label must be attached to the cartridge or canister to indicate the date and time at which it is first installed on the respirator. (3) Respirator selection. (i) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (ii) For escape, provide employees with any organic vapor respirator or any self-contained breathing apparatus permitted for use under paragraph (h)(3)(i) of this standard. (i) Emergency situations Written plans. (ii) The plan shall specifically provide that employees engaged in correcting emergency conditions shall be equipped as required in paragraph (h) of this section until the emergency is abated. (iii) Employees not engaged in correcting the emergency shall be evacuated from the area and shall not be permitted to return until the emergency is abated. (2) Alerting employees. (j) Protective clothing and equipment Provision and use. (2) Cleaning and replacement. (ii) The employer shall assure that impermeable protective clothing which contacts or is likely to have contacted liquid AN shall be decontaminated before being removed by the employee. (iii) The employer shall assure that an employee whose nonimpermeable clothing becomes wetted with liquid AN shall immediately remove that clothing and proceed to shower. The clothing shall be decontaminated before it is removed from the regulated area. (iv) The employer shall assure that no employee removes protective clothing or equipment from the change room, except for those employees authorized to do so for the purpose of laundering, maintenance, or disposal. (v) The employer shall inform any person who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to AN. (k) Housekeeping. (2) For operations involving liquid AN, the employer shall institute a program for detecting leaks and spills of liquid AN, including regular visual inspections. (3) Where spills of liquid AN are detected, the employer shall assure that surfaces contacted by the liquid AN are decontaminated. Employees not engaged in decontamination activities shall leave the area of the spill, and shall not be permitted in the area until decontamination is completed. (l) Waste disposal. (m) Hygiene facilities and practices. (2) The employer shall assure that employees wearing protective clothing or equipment for protection from skin contact with liquid AN shall shower at the end of the work shift. (3) The employer shall assure that, in the event of skin or eye exposure to liquid AN, the affected employee shall shower immediately to minimize the danger of skin absorption. (4) The employer shall assure that employees working in the regulated area wash their hands and faces prior to eating. (n) Medical surveillance General. (ii) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician, and that they shall be provided without cost to the employee. (2) Initial examinations. (i) A work history and medical history with special attention to skin, respiratory, and gastrointestinal systems, and those nonspecific symptoms, such as headache, nausea, vomiting, dizziness, weakness, or other central nervous system dysfunctions that may be associated with acute or with chronic exposure to AN; (ii) A complete physical examination giving particular attention to the peripheral and central nervous system, gastrointestinal system, respiratory system, skin, and thyroid; (iii) A 14- by 17-inch or other reasonably-sized standard film or digital posterior-anterior chest X-ray; and (iv) Further tests of the intestinal tract, including fecal occult blood screening, for all workers 40 years of age or older, and for any other affected employees for whom, in the opinion of the physician, such testing is appropriate. (3) Periodic examinations. (ii) If an employee has not had the examination specified in paragraphs (n)(2)(i), (ii), and (iv) of this section within 6 months preceding termination of employment, the employer shall make such examination available to the employee prior to such termination. (4) Additional examinations. (5) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this standard and its appendixes; (ii) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposure; (iii) The employee's representative exposure level; (iv) The employee's anticipated or estimated exposure level (for preplacement examinations or in cases of exposure due to an emergency); (v) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used; and (vi) Information from previous medical examinations of the affected employee, which is not otherwise available to the examining physician. (6) Physician's written opinion. (A) The results of the medical examination and test performed; (B) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical condition(s) which would place the employee at an increased risk of material impairment of the employee's health from exposure to AN; (C) Any recommended limitations upon the employee's exposure to AN or upon the use of protective clothing and equipment such as respirators; and (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions which require further examination or treatment. (ii) The employer shall instruct the physician not to reveal in the written opinion specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure to AN. (iii) The employer shall provide a copy of the written opinion to the affected employee. (o) Employee information and training Training program. (ii) Training shall be provided at the time of initial assignment, or upon institution of the training program, and at least annually thereafter, and the employer shall assure that each employee is informed of the following: (A) The information contained in appendixes A and B; (B) The quantity, location, manner of use, release, or storage of AN, and the specific nature of operations which could result in exposure to AN, as well as any necessary protective steps; (C) The purpose, proper use, and limitations of respirators and protective clothing; (D) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program required by paragraph (n) of this section; (E) The emergency procedures developed, as required by paragraph (i) of this section; (F) Engineering and work practice controls, their function, and the employee's relationship to these controls; and (G) A review of this standard. (2) Access to training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide, upon request, all materials relating to the employee information and training program to the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (p) Communication of hazards Hazard communication—general. (ii) In classifying the hazards of AN and AN-based materials at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer; central nervous system effects; liver effects; skin sensitization; skin, respiratory, and eye irritation; acute toxicity effects; and flammability. (iii) Employers shall include AN and AN-based materials in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of AN and AN-based materials and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (o) of this section. (iv) The employer shall ensure that no statement appears on or near any sign or label required by this paragraph (p) that contradicts or detracts from the required sign or label. (2) Signs. DANGER ACRYLONITRILE (AN) MAY CAUSE CANCER RESPIRATORY PROTECTION MAY BE REQURED IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (ii) The employer shall ensure that signs required by this paragraph (p)(2) are illuminated and cleaned as necessary so that the legend is readily visible. (iii) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (p)(2)(i) of this section: DANGER ACRYLONITRILE (AN) CANCER HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS MAY BE REQUIRED (3) Labels. (ii) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on precautionary labels required by this paragraph (p)(3) in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraph (p)(1) of this section: DANGER CONTAINS ACRYLONITRILE (AN) CANCER HAZARD (iii) The employer shall ensure that the precautionary labels required by this paragraph (p)(3) are readily visible and legible. (q) Recordkeeping Objective data for exempted operations. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The material qualifying for exemption; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol, results of testing, and/or analysis of the material for the release of AN; (D) A description of the operation exempted and how the data supports the exemption; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, and processing covered by the exemption. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of the employer's reliance upon such objective data. (2) Exposure monitoring. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The dates, number, duration, and results of each of the samples taken, including a description of the sampling procedure used to determine representative employee exposure; (B) A description of the sampling and analytical methods used and the data relied upon to establish that the methods used meet the accuracy and precision requirements of paragraph (e)(6) of this section; (C) Type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any; and (D) Name and job classification of the employee monitored and of all other employees whose exposure the measurement is intended to represent. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least forty (40) years, or for the duration of employment plus twenty (20) years, whichever is longer. (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) This record shall include: (A) A copy of the physician's written opinions; (B) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to AN; (C) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by paragraph (n)(5) of this section; and (D) A copy of the employee's medical and work history. (iii) The employer shall assure that this record be maintained for at least forty (40) years, or for the duration of employment plus twenty (20) years, whichever is longer. (4) Availability. (ii) Records required by paragraphs (q)(1) through (q)(3) of this section shall be provided upon request to employees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a) through (e) and (q) through (i). Records required by paragraph (q)(1) shall be provided in the same manner as exposure monitoring records. (5) Transfer of records. (ii) The employer shall also comply with any additional requirements involving transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). (r) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (ii) Without interfering with the monitoring, observers shall be entitled: (A) To receive an explanation of the measurement procedures; (B) To observe all steps related to the measurement of airborne concentrations of AN performed at the place of exposure; and (C) To record the results obtained. (s) [Reserved] (t) Appendixes. Appendix A to § 1910.1045—Substance Safety Data Sheet for Acrylonitrile i. Substance Identification A. Substance: Acrylonitrile (CH 2 B. Synonyms: Propenenitrile; vinyl cyanide; cyanoethylene; AN; VCN; acylon; carbacryl; fumigrian; ventox. C. Acrylonitrile can be found as a liquid or vapor, and can also be found in polymer resins, rubbers, plastics, polyols, and other polymers having acrylonitrile as a raw or intermediate material. D. AN is used in the manufacture of acrylic and modiacrylic fibers, acrylic plastics and resins, speciality polymers, nitrile rubbers, and other organic chemicals. It has also been used as a fumigant. E. Appearance and odor: Colorless to pale yellow liquid with a pungent odor which can only be detected at concentrations above the permissible exposure level, in a range of 13-19 parts AN per million parts of air (13-19 ppm). F. Permissible exposure: Exposure may not exceed either: 1. Two parts AN per million parts of air (2 ppm) averaged over the 8-hour workday; or 2. Ten parts AN per million parts of air (10 ppm) averaged over any 15-minute period in the workday. 3. In addition, skin and eye contact with liquid AN is prohibited. ii. Health Hazard Data A. Acrylonitrile can affect your body if you inhale the vapor (breathing), if it comes in contact with your eyes or skin, or if you swallow it. It may enter your body through your skin. B. Effects of overexposure: 1. Short-term exposure: Acrylonitrile can cause eye irritation, nausea, vomiting, headache, sneezing, weakness, and light-headedness. At high concentrations, the effects of exposure may go on to loss of consciousness and death. When acrylonitrile is held in contact with the skin after being absorbed into shoe leather or clothing, it may produce blisters following several hours of no apparent effect. Unless the shoes or clothing are removed immediately and the area washed, blistering will occur. Usually there is no pain or inflammation associated with blister formation. 2. Long-term exposure: Acrylonitrile has been shown to cause cancer in laboratory animals and has been associated with higher incidences of cancer in humans. Repeated or prolonged exposure of the skin to acrylonitrile may produce irritation and dermatitis. 3. Reporting signs and symptoms: You should inform your employer if you develop any signs or symptoms and suspect they are caused by exposure to acrylonitrile. iii. Emergency First Aid Procedures A. Eye exposure: If acrylonitrile gets into your eyes, wash your eyes immediately with large amounts of water, lifting the lower and upper lids occasionally. Get medical attention immediately. Contact lenses should not be worn when working with this chemical. B. Skin exposure: If acrylonitrile gets on your skin, immediately wash the contaminated skin with water. If acrylonitrile soaks through your clothing, especially your shoes, remove the clothing immediately and wash the skin with water. If symptoms occur after washing, get medical attention immediately. Thoroughly wash the clothing before reusing. Contaminated leather shoes or other leather articles should be discarded. C. Inhalation: If you or any other person breathes in large amounts of acrylonitrile, move the exposed person to fresh air at once. If breathing has stopped, perform artificial respiration. Keep the affected person warm and at rest. Get medical attention as soon as possible. D. Swallowing: When acrylonitrile has been swallowed, give the person large quantities of water immediately. After the water has been swallowed, try to get the person to vomit by having him touch the back of his throat with his finger. Do not make an unconscious person vomit. Get medical attention immediately. E. Rescue: Move the affected person from the hazardous exposure. If the exposed person has been overcome, notify someone else and put into effect the established emergency procedures. Do not become a casualty yourself. Understand your emergency rescue procedures and know the location of the emergency equipment before the need arises. F. Special first aid procedures: First aid kits containing an adequate supply (at least two dozen) of amyl nitrite pearls, each containing 0.3 ml, should be maintained at each site where acrylonitrile is used. When a person is suspected of receiving an overexposure to acrylonitrile, immediately remove that person from the contaminated area using established rescue procedures. Contaminated clothing must be removed and the acrylonitrile washed from the skin immediately. Artificial respiration should be started at once if breathing has stopped. If the person is unconscious, amyl nitrite may be used as an antidote by a properly trained individual in accordance with established emergency procedures. Medical aid should be obtained immediately. iv. Respirators and Protective Clothing A. Respirators. You may be required to wear a respirator for nonroutine activities, in emergencies, while your employer is in the process of reducing acrylonitrile exposures through engineering controls, and in areas where engineering controls are not feasible. If respirators are worn, they must have a label issued by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health under the provisions of 42 CFR part 84 stating that the respirators have been approved for use with organic vapors. For effective protection, respirators must fit your face and head snugly. Respirators must not be loosened or removed in work situations where their use is required. Acrylonitrile does not have a detectable odor except at levels above the permissible exposure limits. Do not depend on odor to warn you when a respirator cartridge or canister is exhausted. Cartridges or canisters must be changed daily or before the end-of-service-life, whichever comes first. Reuse of these may allow acrylonitrille to gradually filter through the cartridge and cause exposures which you cannot detect by odor. If you can smell acrylonitrile while wearing a respirator, proceed immediately to fresh air. If you experience difficulty breathing while wearing a respirator, tell your employer. B. Supplied-air suits: In some work situations, the wearing of supplied-air suits may be necessary. Your employer must instruct you in their proper use and operation. C. Protective clothing: You must wear impervious clothing, gloves, face shield, or other appropriate protective clothing to prevent skin contact with liquid acrylonitrile. Where protective clothing is required, your employer is required to provide clean garments to you as necessary to assume that the clothing protects you adequately. Replace or repair impervious clothing that has developed leaks. Acrylonitrile should never be allowed to remain on the skin. Clothing and shoes which are not impervious to acrylonitrile should not be allowed to become contaminated with acrylonitrile, and if they do the clothing and shoes should be promptly removed and decontaminated. The clothing should be laundered or discarded after the AN is removed. Once acrylonitrile penetrates shoes or other leather articles, they should not be worn again. D. Eye protection: You must wear splashproof safety goggles in areas where liquid acrylonitrile may contact your eyes. In addition, contact lenses should not be worn in areas where eye contact with acrylonitrile can occur. v. Precautions for Safe Use, Handling, and Storage A. Acrylonitrile is a flammable liquid, and its vapors can easily form explosive mixtures in air. B. Acrylonitrile must be stored in tightly closed containers in a cool, well-ventilated area, away from heat, sparks, flames, strong oxidizers (especially bromine), strong bases, copper, copper alloys, ammonia, and amines. C. Sources of ignition such as smoking and open flames are prohibited wherever acrylonitrile is handled, used, or stored in a manner that could create a potential fire or explosion hazard. D. You should use non-sparking tools when opening or closing metal containers of acrylonitrile, and containers must be bonded and grounded when pouring or transferring liquid acrylonitrile. E. You must immediately remove any non-impervious clothing that becomes wetted with acrylonitrile, and this clothing must not be reworn until the acrylonitrile is removed from the clothing. F. Impervious clothing wet with liquid acrylonitrile can be easily ignited. This clothing must be washed down with water before you remove it. G. If your skin becomes wet with liquid acrylonitrile, you must promptly and thoroughly wash or shower with soap or mild detergent to remove any acrylonitrile from your skin. H. You must not keep food, beverages, or smoking materials, nor are you permitted to eat or smoke in regulated areas where acrylonitrile concentrations are above the permissible exposure limits. I. If you contact liquid acrylonitrile, you must wash your hands thoroughly with soap or mild detergent and water before eating, smoking, or using toilet facilities. J. Fire extinguishers and quick drenching facilities must be readily available, and you should know where they are and how to operate them. K. Ask your supervisor where acrylonitrile is used in your work area and for any additional plant safety and health rules. vi. Access to Information A. Each year, your employer is required to inform you of the information contained in this Substance Safety Data Sheet for acrylonitrile. In addition, you employer must instruct you in the proper work practices for using acrylonitrile, emergency procedures, and the correct use of protective equipment. B. Your employer is required to determine whether you are being exposed to acrylonitrile. You or your representative has the right to observe employee measurements and to record the results obtained. Your employer is required to inform you of your exposure. If your employer determines that you are being overexposed, he or she is required to inform you of the actions which are being taken to reduce your exposure to within permissible exposure limits. C. Your employer is required to keep records of your exposures and medical examinations. These records must be kept by the employer for at least forty (40) years or for the period of your employment plus twenty (20) years, whichever is longer. D. Your employer is required to release your exposure and medical records to you or your representative upon your request. Appendix B to § 1910.1045—Substance Technical Guidelines for Acrylonitrile i. Physical and Chemical Data A. Substance identification: 1. Synonyms: AN; VCN; vinyl cyanide; propenenitrile; cyanoethylene; Acrylon; Carbacryl; Fumigrain; Ventox. 2. Formula: CH2 = CHCN. 3. Molecular weight: 53.1. B. Physical data: 1. Boiling point (760 mm Hg): 77.3 °C (171 °F); 2. Specific gravity (water = 1): 0.81 (at 20 °C or 68 °F); 3. Vapor density (air = 1 at boiling point of acrylonitrile): 1.83; 4. Melting point: −83 °C (−117 °F); 5. Vapor pressure (@20 °F): 83 mm Hg; 6. Solubility in water, percent by weight @20 °C (68 °F): 7.35; 7. Evaporation rate (Butyl Acetate = 1): 4.54; and 8. Appearance and odor: Colorless to pale yellow liquid with a pungent odor at concentrations above the permissible exposure level. Any detectable odor of acrylonitrile may indicate overexposure. ii. Fire, Explosion, and Reactivity Hazard Data A. Fire: 1. Flash point: −1 °C (30 °F) (closed cup). 2. Autoignition temperature: 481 °C (898 °F). 3. Flammable limits air, percent by volume: Lower: 3, Upper: 17. 4. Extinguishing media: Alcohol foam, carbon dioxide, and dry chemical. 5. Special fire-fighting procedures: Do not use a solid stream of water, since the stream will scatter and spread the fire. Use water to cool containers exposed to a fire. 6. Unusual fire and explosion hazards: Acrylonitrile is a flammable liquid. Its vapors can easily form explosive mixtures with air. All ignition sources must be controlled where acrylonitrile is handled, used, or stored in a manner that could create a potential fire or explosion hazard. Acrylonitrile vapors are heavier than air and may travel along the ground and be ignited by open flames or sparks at locations remote from the site at which acrylonitrile is being handled. 7. For purposes of compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.106, acrylonitrile is classified as a class IB flammable liquid. For example, 7,500 ppm, approximately one-fourth of the lower flammable limit, would be considered to pose a potential fire and explosion hazard. 8. For purposes of compliance with 29 CFR 1910.157, acrylonitrile is classified as a Class B fire hazard. 9. For purpose of compliance with 29 CFR 1919.309, locations classified as hazardous due to the presence of acrylonitrile shall be Class I, Group D. B. Reactivity: 1. Conditions contributing to instability: Acrylonitrile will polymerize when hot, and the additional heat liberated by the polymerization may cause containers to explode. Pure AN may self-polymerize, with a rapid build-up of pressure, resulting in an explosion hazard. Inhibitors are added to the commercial product to prevent self-polymerization. 2. Incompatibilities: Contact with strong oxidizers (especially bromine) and strong bases may cause fires and explosions. Contact with copper, copper alloys, ammonia, and amines may start serious decomposition. 3. Hazardous decompostion products: Toxic gases and vapors (such as hydrogen cyanide, oxides of nitrogen, and carbon monoxide) may be released in a fire involving acrylonitrile and certain polymers made from acrylonitrile. 4. Special precautions: Liquid acrylonitrile will attack some forms of plastics, rubbers, and coatings. iii. Spill, Leak, and Disposal Procedures A. If acrylonitrile is spilled or leaked, the following steps should be taken: 1. Remove all ignition sources. 2. The area should be evacuated at once and re-entered only after the area has been thoroughly ventilated and washed down with water. 3. If liquid acrylonitrile or polymer intermediate, collect for reclamation or absorb in paper, vermiculite, dry sand, earth, or similar material, or wash down with water into process sewer system. B. Persons not wearing protective equipment should be restricted from areas of spills or leaks until clean-up has been completed. C. Waste disposal methods: Waste material shall be disposed of in a manner that is not hazardous to employees or to the general population. Spills of acrylonitrile and flushing of such spills shall be channeled for appropriate treatment or collection for disposal. They shall not be channeled directly into the sanitary sewer system. In selecting the method of waste disposal, applicable local, State, and Federal regulations should be consulted. iv. Monitoring and Measurement Procedures A. Exposure above the Permissible Exposure Limit: 1. Eight-hour exposure evaluation: Measurements taken for the purpose of determining employee exposure under this section are best taken so that the average 8-hour exposure may be determined from a single 8-hour sample or two (2) 4-hour samples. Air samples should be taken in the employee's breathing zone (air that would most nearly represent that inhaled by the employee.) 2. Ceiling evaluation: Measurements taken for the purpose of determining employee exposure under this section must be taken during periods of maximum expected airborne concentrations of acrylonitrile in the employee's breathing zone. A minimum of three (3) measurements should be taken on one work shift. The average of all measurements taken is an estimate of the employee's ceiling exposure. 3. Monitoring techniques: The sampling and analysis under this section may be performed by collecting the acrylonitrile vapor on charcoal adsorption tubes or other composition adsorption tubes, with subsequent chemical analysis. Sampling and analysis may also be performed by instruments such as real-time continuous monitoring systems, portable direct-reading instruments, or passive dosimeters. Analysis of resultant samples should be by gas chromatograph. Appendix D lists methods of sampling and analysis which have been tested by NIOSH and OSHA for use with acrylonitrile. NIOSH and OSHA have validated modifications of NIOSH Method S-156 (See appendix D) under laboratory conditions for concentrations below 1 ppm. The employer has the obligation of selecting a monitoring method which meets the accuracy and precision requirements of the standard under his unique field conditions. The standard requires that methods of monitoring must be accurate, to a 95-percent confidence level, to ±35-percent for concentrations of AN at or above 2 ppm, and to ±50-percent for concentrations below 2 ppm. In addition to the methods described in appendix D, there are numerous other methods available for monitoring for AN in the workplace. Details on these other methods have been submitted by various companies to the rulemaking record, and are available at the OSHA Docket Office. B. Since many of the duties relating to employee exposure are dependent on the results of monitoring and measuring procedures, employers shall assure that the evaluation of employee exposures is performed by a competent industrial hygienist or other technically qualified person. v. Protective Clothing Employees shall be provided with and required to wear appropriate protective clothing to prevent any possibility of skin contact with liquid AN. Because acrylonitrile is absorbed through the skin, it is important to prevent skin contact with liquid AN. Protective clothing shall include impermeable coveralls or similar full-body work clothing, gloves, head-coverings, as appropriate to protect areas of the body which may come in contact with liquid AN. Employers should ascertain that the protective garmets are impermeable to acrylonitrile. Non-impermeable clothing and shoes should not be allowed to become contaminated with liquid AN. If permeable clothing does become contaminated, it should be promptly removed, placed in a regulated area for removal of the AN, and not worn again until the AN is removed. If leather footwear or other leather garments become wet from acrylonitrile, they should be replaced and not worn again, due to the ability of leather to absorb acrylonitrile and hold it against the skin. Since there is no pain associated with the blistering which may result from skin contact with liquid AN, it is essential that the employee be informed of this hazard so that he or she can be protected. Any protective clothing which has developed leaks or is otherwise found to be defective shall be repaired or replaced. Clean protective clothing shall be provided to the employee as necessary to assure its protectiveness. Whenever impervious clothing becomes wet with liquid AN, it shall be washed down with water before being removed by the employee. Employees are also required to wear splash-proof safety goggles where there is any possibility of acrylonitrile contacting the eyes. vi. Housekeeping and Hygiene Facilities For purposes of complying with 29 CFR 1910.141, the following items should be emphasized: A. The workplace should be kept clean, orderly, and in a sanitary condition. The employer is required to institute a leak and spill detection program for operations involving liquid AN in order to detect sources of fugitive AN emissions. B. Dry sweeping and the use of compressed air is unsafe for the cleaning of floors and other surfaces where liquid AN may be found. C. Adequate washing facilities with hot and cold water are to be provided, and maintained in a sanitary condition. Suitable cleansing agents are also to be provided to assure the effective removal of acrylonitrile from the skin. D. Change or dressing rooms with individual clothes storage facilities must be provided to prevent the contamination of street clothes with acrylonitrile. Because of the hazardous nature of acrylonitrile, contaminated protective clothing should be placed in a regulated area designated by the employer for removal of the AN before the clothing is laundered or disposed of. vii. Miscellaneous Precautions A. Store acrylonitrile in tightly-closed containers in a cool, well-ventilated area and take necessary precautions to avoid any explosion hazard. B. High exposures to acrylonitrile can occur when transferring the liquid from one container to another. C. Non-sparking tools must be used to open and close metal acrylonitrile containers. These containers must be effectively grounded and bonded prior to pouring. D. Never store uninhibited acrylonitrile. E. Acrylonitrile vapors are not inhibited. They may form polymers and clog vents of storage tanks. F. Use of supplied-air suits or other impervious coverings may be necessary to prevent skin contact with and provide respiratory protection from acrylonitrile where the concentration of acrylonitrile is unknown or is above the ceiling limit. Supplied-air suits should be selected, used, and maintained under the immediate supervision of persons knowledgeable in the limitations and potential life-endangering characteristics of supplied-air suits. G. Employers shall advise employees of all areas and operations where exposure to acrylonitrile could occur. viii. Common Operations Common operations in which exposure to acrylonitrile is likely to occur include the following: Manufacture of the acrylonitrile monomer; synthesis of acrylic fibers, ABS, SAN, and nitrile barrier plastics and resins, nitrile rubber, surface coatings, specialty chemicals, use as a chemical intermediate, use as a fumigant and in the cyanoethylation of cotton. Appendix C to § 1910.1045—Medical Surveillance Guidelines for Acrylonitrile i. route of entry Inhalation; skin absorption; ingestion. ii. toxicology Acrylonitrile vapor is an asphyxiant due to inhibitory action on metabolic enzyme systems. Animals exposed to 75 or 100 ppm for 7 hours have shown signs of anoxia; in some animals which died at the higher level, cyanomethemoglobin was found in the blood. Two human fatalities from accidental poisioning have been reported; one was caused by inhalation of an unknown concentration of the vapor, and the other was thought to be caused by skin absorption or inhalation. Most cases of intoxication from industrial exposure have been mild, with rapid onset of eye irritation, headache, sneezing, and nausea. Weakness, lightheadedness, and vomiting may also occur. Exposure to high concentrations may produce profound weakness, asphyxia, and death. The vapor is a severe eye irritant. Prolonged skin contract with the liquid may result in absorption with systemic effects, and in the formation of large blisters after a latent period of several hours. Although there is usually little or no pain or inflammation, the affected skin resembles a second-degree thermal burn. Solutions spilled on exposed skin, or on areas covered only by a light layer of clothing, evaporate rapidly, leaving no irritation, or, at the most, mild transient redness. Repeated spills on exposed skin may result in dermatitis due to solvent effects. Results after 1 year of a planned 2-year animal study on the effects of exposure to acrylonitrile have indicated that rats ingesting as little as 35 ppm in their drinking water develop tumors of the central nervous system. The interim results of this study have been supported by a similar study being conducted by the same laboratory, involving exposure of rats by inhalation of acrylonitrile vapor, which has shown similar types of tumors in animals exposed to 80 ppm. In addition, the preliminary results of an epidemiological study being performed by duPont on a cohort of workers in their Camden, S.C. acrylic fiber plant indicate a statistically significant increase in the incidence of colon and lung cancers among employees exposed to acrylonitrile. iii. signs and symptoms of acute overexposure Asphyxia and death can occur from exposure to high concentrations of acrylonitrile. Symptoms of overexposure include eye irritation, headache, sneezing, nausea and vomiting, weakness, and light-headedness. Prolonged skin contact can cause blisters on the skin with appearance of a second-degree burn, but with little or no pain. Repeated skin contact may produce scaling dermatits. iv. treatment of acute overexposure Remove employee from exposure. Immediately flush eyes with water and wash skin with soap or mild detergent and water. If AN has been swallowed, and person is conscious, induce vomiting. Give artificial resuscitation if indicated. More severe cases, such as those associated with loss of consciousness, may be treated by the intravenous administration of sodium nitrite, followed by sodium thiosulfate, although this is not as effective for acrylonitrile poisoning as for inorganic cyanide poisoning. v. surveillance and preventive considerations A. As noted above, exposure to acrylonitrile has been linked to increased incidence of cancers of the colon and lung in employees of the duPont acrylic fiber plant in Camden, S.C. In addition, the animal testing of acrylonitrile has resulted in the development of cancers of the central nervous system in rats exposed by either inhalation or ingestion. The physician should be aware of the findings of these studies in evaluating the health of employees exposed to acrylonitrile. Most reported acute effects of occupational exposure to acrylonitrile are due to its ability to cause tissue anoxia and asphyxia. The effects are similar to those caused by hydrogen cyanide. Liquid acrylonitrile can be absorbed through the skin upon prolonged contact. The liquid readily penetrates leather, and will produce burns of the feet if footwear contaminated with acrylonitrile is not removed. It is important for the physician to become familiar with the operating conditions in which exposure to acrylonitrile may occur. Those employees with skin diseases may not tolerate the wearing of whatever protective clothing may be necessary to protect them from exposure. In addition, those with chronic respiratory disease may not tolerate the wearing of negative-pressure respirators. B. Surveillance and screening. Medical histories and laboratory examinations are required for each employee subject to exposure to acrylonitrile above the action level. The employer must screen employees for history of certain medical conditions which might place the employee at increased risk from exposure. 1. Central nervous system dysfunction. 2. Respiratory disease. 3. Gastrointestinal disease. 4. Skin disease. 5. General. Appendix D to § 1910.1045—Sampling and Analytical Methods for Acrylonitrile There are many methods available for monitoring employee exposures to acrylonitrile. Most of these involve the use of charcoal tubes and sampling pumps, with analysis by gas chromatograph. The essential differences between the charcoal tube methods include, among others, the use of different desorbing solvents, the use of different lots of charcoal, and the use of different equipment for analysis of the samples. Besides charcoal, considerable work has been performed on methods using porous polymer sampling tubes and passive dosimeters. In addition, there are several portable gas analyzers and monitoring units available on the open market. This appendix contains details for the methods which have been tested at OSHA Analytical Laboratory in Salt Lake City, and NIOSH in Cincinnati. Each is a variation on NIOSH Method S-156, which is also included for reference. This does not indicate that these methods are the only ones which will be satisfactory. There also may be workplace situations in which these methods are not adequate, due to such factors as high humidity. Copies of the other methods available to OSHA are available in the rulemaking record, and may be obtained from the OSHA Docket Office. These include, the Union Carbide, Monsanto, Dow Chemical and Dow Badische methods, as well as NISOH Method P & CAM 127. Employers who note problems with sample breakthrough should try larger charcoal tubes. Tubes of larger capacity are available, and are often used for sampling vinyl chloride. In addition, lower flow rates and shorter sampling times should be beneficial in minimizing breakthrough problems. Whatever method the employer chooses, he must assure himself of the method's accuracy and precision under the unique conditions present in his workplace. NIOSH Method S-156 (Unmodified) Analyte: Acrylonitrile. Matrix: Air. Procedure: Absorption on charcoal, desorption with methanol, GC. 1. Principle of the method 1.1 A known volume of air is drawn through a charcoal tube to trap the organic vapors present. 1.2 The charcoal in the tube is transferred to a small, stoppered sample container, and the analyte is desorbed with methanol. 1.3 An aliquot of the desorbed sample is injected into a gas chromatograph. 1.4 The area of the resulting peak is determined and compared with areas obtained for standards. 2. Range and sensitivity. 2.1 This method was validated over the range of 17.5-70.0 mg/cu m at an atmospheric temperature and pressure of 22 °C and 760 MM Hg, using a 20-liter sample. Under the conditions of sample size (20-liters) the probable useful range of this method is 4.5-135 mg-cu m. The method is capable of measuring much smaller amounts if the desorption efficiency is adequate. Desorption efficiency must be determined over the range used. 2.2 The upper limit of the range of the method is dependent on the adsorptive capacity of the charcoal tube. This capacity varies with the concentrations of acrylonitrile and other substances in the air. The first section of the charcoal tube was found to hold at least 3.97 mg of acrylonitrile when a test atmosphere containing 92.0 mg/cu m of acrylonitrile in air was sampled 0.18 liter per minute for 240 minutes; at that time the concentration of acrylonitrile in the effluent was less than 5 percent of that in the influent. (The charcoal tube consists of two sections of activated charcoal separated by a section of urethane foam. See section 6.2.) If a particular atmosphere is suspected of containing a large amount of contaminant, a smaller sampling volume should be taken. 3. Interference. 3.1 When the amount of water in the air is so great that condensation actually occurs in the tube, organic vapors will not be trapped efficiently. Preliminary experiments using toluene indicate that high humidity severely decreases the breakthrough volume. 3.2 When interfering compounds are known or suspected to be present in the air, such information, including their suspected identities, should be transmitted with the sample. 3.3 It must be emphasized that any compound which has the same retention time as the analyte at the operating conditions described in this method is an interference. Retention time data on a single column cannot be considered proof of chemical identity. 3.4 If the possibility of interference exists, separation conditions (column packing, temperature, etc.) must be changed to circumvent the problem. 4. Precision and accuracy. 4.1 The Coefficient of Variation (CV T 4.2 On the average the concentrations obtained at the 20 ppm level using the overall sampling and analytical method were 6.0 percent lower than the “true” concentrations for a limited number of laboratory experiments. Any difference between the “found” and “true” concentrations may not represent a bias in the sampling and analytical method, but rather a random variation from the experimentally determined “true” concentration. Therefore, no recovery correction should be applied to the final result in section 10.5. 5. Advantages and disadvantages of the method. 5.1 The sampling device is small, portable, and involves no liquids. Interferences are minimal, and most of those which do occur can be eliminated by altering chromatographic conditions. The tubes are analyzed by means of a quick, instrumental method. The method can also be used for the simultaneous analysis of two or more substances suspected to be present in the same sample by simply changing gas chromatographic conditions. 5.2 One disadvantage of the method is that the amount of sample which can be taken is limited by the number of milligrams that the tube will hold before overloading. When the sample value obtained for the backup section of the charcoal tube exceeds 25 percent of that found on the front section, the possibility of sample loss exists. 5.3 Furthermore, the precision of the method is limited by the reproducibility of the pressure drop across the tubes. This drop will affect the flow rate and cause the volume to be imprecise, because the pump is usually calibrated for one tube only. 6. Apparatus. 6.1 A calibrated personal sampling pump whose flow can be determined within ±5 percent at the recommended flow rate. (Reference 11.3). 6.2 Charcoal tubes: Glass tubes with both ends flame sealed, 7 cm long with a 6-mm O.D. and a 4-mm I.D., containing 2 sections of 20/40 mesh activated charcoal separated by a 2-mm portion of urethane foam. The activated charcoals prepared from coconut shells and is fired at 600 °C prior to packing. The adsorbing section contains 100 mg of charcoal, the backup section 50 mg. A 3-mm portion of urethane foam is placed between the outlet end of the tube and the backup section. A plug of silicated glass wool is placed in front of the adsorbing section. The pressure drop across the tube must be less than 1 inch of mercury at a flow rate of 1 liter per minute. 6.3 Gas chromatograph equipped with a flame ionization detector. 6.4 Column (4-ft × 1/4 6.5 An electronic integrator or some other suitable method for measuring peak areas. 6.6 Two-milliliter sample containers with glass stoppers or Teflon-lined caps. If an automatic sample injector is used, the associated vials may be used. 6.7 Microliter syringes: 10-microliter and other convenient sizes for making standards. 6.8 Pipets: 1.0-ml delivery pipets. 6.9 Volumetric flask: 10-ml or convenient sizes for making standard solutions. 7. Reagents. 7.1 Chromatographic quality methanol. 7.2 Acrylonitrile, reagent grade. 7.3 Hexane, reagent grade. 7.4 Purified nitrogen. 7.5 Prepurified hydrogen. 7.6 Filtered compressed air. 8. Procedure. 8.1 Cleaning of equipment. All glassware used for the laboratory analysis should be detergent washed and thoroughly rinsed with tap water and distilled water. 8.2 Calibration of personal pumps. Each personal pump must be calibrated with a representative charcoal tube in the line. This will minimize errors associated with uncertainties in the sample volume collected. 8.3 Collection and shipping of samples. 8.3.1 Immediately before sampling, break the ends of the tube to provide an opening at least one-half the internal diameter of the tube (2 mm). 8.3.2 The smaller section of charcoal is used as a backup and should be positioned nearest the sampling pump. 8.3.3 The charcoal tube should be placed in a vertical direction during sampling to minimize channeling through the charcoal. 8.3.4 Air being sampled should not be passed through any hose or tubing before entering the charcoal tube. 8.3.5 A maximum sample size of 20 liters is recommended. Sample at a flow of 0.20 liter per minute or less. The flow rate should be known with an accuracy of at least ±5 percent. 8.3.6 The temperature and pressure of the atmosphere being sampled should be recorded. If pressure reading is not available, record the elevation. 8.3.7 The charcoal tubes should be capped with the supplied plastic caps immediately after sampling. Under no circumstances should rubber caps be used. 8.3.8 With each batch of 10 samples submit one tube from the same lot of tubes which was used for sample collection and which is subjected to exactly the same handling as the samples except that no air is drawn through it. Label this as a blank. 8.3.9 Capped tubes should be packed tightly and padded before they are shipped to minimize tube breakage during shipping. 8.3.10 A sample of the bulk material should be submitted to the laboratory in a glass container with a Teflon-lined cap. This sample should not be transported in the same container as the charcoal tubes. 8.4 Analysis of samples. 8.4.1 Preparation of samples. In preparation for analysis, each charcoal tube is scored with a file in front of the first section of charcoal and broken open. The glass wool is removed and discarded. The charcoal in the first (larger) section is transferred to a 2-ml stoppered sample container. The separating section of foam is removed and discarded; the second section is transferred to another stoppered container. These two sections are analyzed separately. 8.4.2 Desorption of samples. Prior to analysis, 1.0 ml of methanol is pipetted into each sample container. Desorption should be done for 30 minutes. Tests indicate that this is adequate if the sample is agitated occasionally during this period. If an automatic sample injector is used, the sample vials should be capped as soon as the solvent is added to minimize volatilization. 8.4.3 GC conditions. The typical operating conditions for the gas chromatograph are: 1. 50 ml/min (60 psig) nitrogen carrier gas flow. 2. 65 ml/min (24 psig) hydrogen gas flow to detector. 3. 500 ml/min (50 psig) air flow to detector. 4. 235 °C injector temperature. 5. 255 °C manifold temperature (detector). 6. 155 °C column temperature. 8.4.4 Injection. The first step in the analysis is the injection of the sample into the gas chromatograph. To eliminate difficulties arising from blowback or distillation within the syringe needle, one should employ the solvent flush injection technique. The 10-microliter syringe is first flushed with solvent several times to wet the barrel and plunger. Three microliters of solvent are drawn into the syringe to increase the accuracy and reproducibility of the injected sample volume. The needle is removed from the solvent, and the plunger is pulled back about 0.2 microliter to separate the solvent flush from the sample with a pocket of air to be used as a marker. The needle is then immersed in the sample, and a 5-microliter aliquot is withdrawn, taking into consideration the volume of the needle, since the sample in the needle will be completely injected. After the needle is removed from the sample and prior to injection, the plunger is pulled back 1.2 microliters to minimize evaporation of the sample from the tip of the needle. Observe that the sample occupies 4.9-5.0 microliters in the barrel of the syringe. Duplicate injections of each sample and standard should be made. No more than a 3 percent difference in area is to be expected. An automatic sample injector can be used if it is shown to give reproducibility at least as good as the solvent flush method. 8.4.5 Measurement of area. The area of the sample peak is measured by an electronic integrator or some other suitable form of area measurement, and preliminary results are read from a standard curve prepared as discussed below. 8.5 Determination of desorption efficiency. 8.5.1 Importance of determination. The desorption efficiency of a particular compound can vary from one laboratory to another and also from one batch of charcoal to another. Thus, it is necessary to determine at least once the percentage of the specific compound that is removed in the desorption process, provided the same batch of charcoal is used. 8.5.2 Procedure for determining desorption efficiency. Activated charcoal equivalent to the amount in the first section of the sampling tube (100 mg) is measured into a 2.5 in, 4-mm I.D. glass tube, flame sealed at one end. This charcoal must be from the same batch as that used in obtaining the samples and can be obtained from unused charcoal tubes. The open end is capped with Parafilm. A known amount of hexane solution of acrylonitrile containing 0.239 g/ml is injected directly into the activated charcoal with a microliter syringe, and tube is capped with more Parafilm. When using an automatic sample injector, the sample injector vials, capped with Teflon-faced septa, may be used in place of the glass tube. The amount injected is equivalent to that present in a 20-liter air sample at the selected level. Six tubes at each of three levels (0.5X, 1X, and 2X of the standard) are prepared in this manner and allowed to stand for at least overnight to assure complete adsorption of the analyte onto the charcoal. These tubes are referred to as the sample. A parallel blank tube should be treated in the same manner except that no sample is added to it. The sample and blank tubes are desorbed and analyzed in exactly the same manner as the sampling tube described in section 8.4. Two or three standards are prepared by injecting the same volume of compound into 1.0 ml of methanol with the same syringe used in the preparation of the samples. These are analyzed with the samples. The desorption efficiency (D.E.) equals the average weight in mg recovered from the tube divided by the weight in mg added to the tube, or The desorption efficiency is dependent on the amount of analyte collected on the charcoal. Plot the desorption efficiency versus weight of analyte found. This curve is used in section 10.4 to correct for adsorption losses. 9. Calibration and standards. It is convenient to express concentration of standards in terms of mg/1.0 ml methanol, because samples are desorbed in this amount of methanol. The density of the analyte is used to convert mg into microliters for easy measurement with a microliter syringe. A series of standards, varying in concentration over the range of interest, is prepared and analyzed under the same GC conditions and during the same time period as the unknown samples. Curves are established by plotting concentration in mg/1.0 ml versus peak area. Note: Since no internal standard is used in the method, standard solutions must be analyzed at the same time that the sample analysis is done. This will minimize the effect of known day-to-day variations and variations during the same day of the FID response. 10. Calculations. 10.1 Read the weight, in mg, corresponding to each peak area from the standard curve. No volume corrections are needed, because the standard curve is based on mg/1.0 ml methanol and the volume of sample injected is identical to the volume of the standards injected. 10.2 Corrections for the bank must be made for each sample. mg = mg sample−mg blank Where: mg sample = mg found in front section of sample tube. mg sample = mg found in front section of blank tube. A similar procedure is followed for the backup sections. 10.3 Add the weights found in the front and backup sections to get the total weight in the sample. 10.4 Read the desorption efficiency from the curve (see sec. 8.5.2) for the amount found in the front section. Divide the total weight by this desorption efficiency to obtain the corrected mg/sample. 10.5 The concentration of the analyte in the air sampled can be expressed in mg/cu m. 10.6 Another method of expressing concentration is ppm. ppm = m mg/cu × 24.45/M.W. × 760/P × T. + 273/298 Where: P T 24.45 = Molar volume (liter/mole) at 25 °C and 760 mm Hg. M.W. 760 = Standard pressure (mm Hg). 298 = Standard temperature (°K). 11. References. 11.1 White, L. D. et al., “A Convenient Optimized Method for the Analysis of Selected Solvent Vapors in the Industrial Atmosphere,” Amer. Ind. Hyg. Assoc. J., 31: 11.2 Documentation of NIOSH Validation Tests, NIOSH Contract No. CDC-99-74-45. 11.3 Final Report, NIOSH Contract HSM-99-71-31, “Personal Sampler Pump for Charcoal Tubes,” September 15, 1972. NIOSH Modification of NIOSH Method S-156 The NIOSH recommended method for low levels for acrylonitrile is a modification of method S-156. It differs in the following respects: (1) Samples are desorbed using 1 ml of 1 percent acetone in CS 2 (2) The analytical column and conditions are: Column: 20 percent SP-1000 on 80/100 Supelcoport 10 feet × 1/8 Conditions: Injector temperature: 200 °C. Detector temperature: 100 °C. Column temperature: 85 °C. Helium flow: 25 ml/min. Air flow: 450 ml/min. Hydrogen flow: 55 ml/min. (3) A 2 µl injection of the desorbed analyte is used. (4) A sampling rate of 100 ml/min is recommended. OSHA Laboratory Modification of NIOSH Method S-156 Analyte: Acrylonitrile. Matrix: Air. Procedure: Adsorption on charcoal, desorption with methanol, GC. 1. Principle of the Method 1.1 A known volume of air is drawn through a charcoal tube to trap the organic vapors present. 1.2 The charcoal in the tube is transferred to a small, stoppered sample vial, and the analyte is desorbed with methanol. 1.3 An aliquot of the desorbed sample is injected into a gas chromatograph. 1.4 The area of the resulting peak is determined and compared with areas obtained for standards. 2. Advantages and disadvantages of the method. 2.1 The sampling device is small, portable, and involves no liquids. Interferences are minimal, and most of those which do occur can be eliminated by altering chromatographic conditions. The tubes are analyzed by means of a quick, instrumental method. 2.2 This method may not be adequate for the simultaneous analysis of two or more substances. 2.3 The amount of sample which can be taken is limited by the number of milligrams that the tube will hold before overloading. When the sample value obtained for the backup section of the charcoal tube exceeds 25 percent of that found on the front section, the possibility of sample loss exists. 2.4 The precision of the method is limited by the reproducibility of the pressure drop across the tubes. This drop will affect the flow rate and cause the volume to be imprecise, because the pump is usually calibrated for one tube only. 3. Apparatus. 3.1 A calibrated personal sampling pump whose flow can be determined within ±5 percent at the recommended flow rate. 3.2 Charcoal tubes: Glass tube with both ends flame sealed, 7 cm long with a 6-mm O.D. and a 4-mm I.D., containing 2 sections of 20/40 mesh activated charcoal separated by a 2-mm portion of urethane foam. The activated charcoal is prepared from coconut shells and is fired at 600 °C prior to packing. The adsorbing section contains 100 mg of charcoal, the back-up section 50 mg. A 3-mm portion of urethane foam is placed between the outlet end of the tube and the back-up section. A plug of sililated glass wool is placed in front of the adsorbing section. The pressure drop across the tube must be less than one inch of mercury at a flow rate of 1 liter per minute. 3.3 Gas chromatograph equipped with a nitrogen phosphorus detector. 3.4 Column (10-ft × 1/8″-in stainless steel) packed with 100/120 Supelcoport coated with 10 percent SP 1000. 3.5 An electronic integrator or some other suitable method for measuring peak area. 3.6 Two-milliliter sample vials with Teflon-lined caps 3.7 Microliter syringes: 10-microliter, and other convenient sizes for making standards. 3.8 Pipets: 1.0-ml delivery pipets. 3.9 Volumetric flasks: convenient sizes for making standard solutions. 4. Reagents. 4.1 Chromatographic quality methanol. 4.2 Acrylonitrile, reagent grade. 4.3 Filtered compressed air. 4.4 Purified hydrogen. 4.5 Purified helium. 5. Procedure. 5.1 Cleaning of equipment. All glassware used for the laboratory analysis should be properly cleaned and free of organics which could interfere in the analysis. 5.2 Calibration of personal pumps. Each pump must be calibrated with a representative charcoal tube in the line. 5.3 Collection and shipping of samples. 5.3.1 Immediately before sampling, break the ends of the tube to provide an opening at least one-half the internal diameter of the tube (2 mm). 5.3.2 The smaller section of the charcoal is used as the backup and should be placed nearest the sampling pump. 5.3.3 The charcoal should be placed in a vertical position during sampling to minimize channeling through the charcoal. 5.3.4 Air being sampled should not be passed through any hose or tubing before entering the charcoal tube. 5.3.5 A sample size of 20 liters is recommended. Sample at a flow rate of approximately 0.2 liters per minute. The flow rate should be known with an accuracy of at least ±5 percent. 5.3.6 The temperature and pressure of the atmosphere being sampled should be recorded. 5.3.7 The charcoal tubes should be capped with the supplied plastic caps immediately after sampling. Rubber caps should not be used. 5.3.8 Submit at least one blank tube (a charcoal tube subjected to the same handling procedures, without having any air drawn through it) with each set of samples. 5.3.9. Take necessary shipping and packing precautions to minimize breakage of samples. 5.4 Analysis of samples. 5.4.1 Preparation of samples. In preparation for analysis, each charcoal tube is scored with a file in front of the first section of charcoal and broken open. The glass wool is removed and discarded. The charcoal in the first (larger) section is transferred to a 2-ml vial. The separating section of foam is removed and discarded; the section is transferred to another capped vial. These two sections are analyzed separately. 5.4.2 Desorption of samples. Prior to analysis, 1.0 ml of methanol is pipetted into each sample container. Desorption should be done for 30 minutes in an ultrasonic bath. The sample vials are recapped as soon as the solvent is added. 5.4.3 GC conditions. The typical operating conditions for the gas chromatograph are: 1. 30 ml/min (60 psig) helium carrier gas flow. 2. 3.0 ml/min (30 psig) hydrogen gas flow to detector. 3. 50 ml/min (60 psig) air flow to detector. 4. 200 °C injector temperature. 5. 200 °C dejector temperature. 6. 100 °C column temperature. 5.4.4 Injection. Solvent flush technique or equivalent. 5.4.5 Measurement of area. The area of the sample peak is measured by an electronic integator or some other suitable form of area measurement, and preliminary results are read from a standard curve prepared as discussed below. 5.5 Determination of desorption efficiency. 5.5.1 Importance of determination. The desorption efficiency of a particular compound can vary from one laboratory to another and also from one batch of charcoal to another. Thus, it is necessary to determine, at least once, the percentage of the specific compound that is removed in the desorption process, provided the same batch of charcoal is used. 5.5.2 Procedure for determining desorption efficiency. The reference portion of the charcoal tube is removed. To the remaining portion, amounts representing 0.5X, 1X, and 2X (X represents TLV) based on a 20 l air sample are injected onto several tubes at each level. Dilutions of acrylonitrile with methanol are made to allow injection of measurable quantities. These tubes are then allowed to equilibrate at least overnight. Following equilibration they are analyzed following the same procedure as the samples A curve of the desorption efficiency amt recovered/amt added is plotted versus amount of analyte found. This curve is used to correct for adsorption losses. 6. Calibration and standards. A series of standards, varying in concentration over the range of interest, is prepared and analyzed under the same GC conditions and during the same time period as the unknown samples. Curves are prepared by plotting concentration versus peak area. Note: Since no internal standard is used in the method, standard solutions must be analyzed at the same time that the sample analysis is done. This will minimize the effect of known day-to-day variations and variations during the same day of the NPD response. Multiple injections are necessary. 7. Calculations. Read the weight, corresponding to each peak area from the standard curve, correct for the blank, correct for the desorption efficiency, and make necessary air volume corrections. 8. Reference. [43 FR 45809, Oct. 3, 1978, as amended at 45 FR 35283, May 23, 1980; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35310, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1291, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 20099, Apr. 23, 1998; 70 FR 1142, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16672, 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50190, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75586, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33609, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17783, Mar. 26, 2012; 84 FR 21518, May 14, 2019] § 1910.1047 Ethylene oxide. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section does not apply to the processing, use, or handling of products containing EtO where objective data are reasonably relied upon that demonstrate that the product is not capable of releasing EtO in airborne concentrations at or above the action level, and may not reasonably be foreseen to release EtO in excess of the excursion limit, under the expected conditions of processing, use, or handling that will cause the greatest possible release. (3) Where products containing EtO are exempted under paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the employer shall maintain records of the objective data supporting that exemption and the basis for the employer's reliance on the data, as provided in paragraph (k)(1) of this section. (b) Definitions: Action level Assistant Secretary Authorized person Director Emergency Employee exposure Ethylene oxide EtO 2 4 (c) Permissible exposure limits 8-hour time weighted average (TWA). (2) Excursion limit. (d) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) Representative 8-hour TWA employee exposure shall be determined on the basis of one or more samples representing full-shift exposure for each shift for each job classification in each work area. Representative 15-minute short-term employee exposures shall be determined on the basis of one or more samples representing 15-minute exposures associated with operations that are most likely to produce exposures above the excursion limit for each shift for each job classification in each work area. (iii) Where the employer can document that exposure levels are equivalent for similar operations in different work shifts, the employer need only determine representative employee exposure for that operation during one shift. (2) Initial monitoring. (ii) Where the employer has monitored after June 15, 1983 and the monitoring satisfies all other requirements of this section, the employer may rely on such earlier monitoring results to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section. (iii) Where the employer has previously monitored for the excursion limit and the monitoring satisfies all other requirements of this sections, the employer may rely on such earlier monitoring results to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section. (3) Monitoring frequency (periodic monitoring). (ii) If the monitoring required by paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section reveals employee exposure above the 8-hour TWA, the employer shall repeat such monitoring for each such employee at least every 3 months. (iii) The employer may alter the monitoring schedule from quarterly to semiannually for any employee for whom two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart indicate that the employee's exposure has decreased to or below the 8-hour TWA. (iv) If the monitoring required by paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section reveals employee exposure above the 15 minute excursion limit, the employer shall repeat such monitoring for each such employee at least every 3 months, and more often as necessary to evaluate exposure the employee's short-term exposures. (4) Termination of monitoring. (ii) If the periodic monitoring required by paragraph (d)(3) of this section reveals that employee exposures, as indicated by at least two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level, the employer may discontinue TWA monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring. (iii) If the initial monitoring required by paragraph (d)(2)(1) of this section reveals employee exposure to be at or below the excursion limit, the employer may discontinue excursion limit monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by the initial monitoring. (iv) If the periodic monitoring required by paragraph (d)(3) of this section reveals that employee exposures, as indicated by at least two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart, are at or below the excursion limit, the employer may discontinue excursion limit monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring. (5) Additional monitoring. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. (ii) Monitoring shall be accurate, to a confidence level of 95 percent, to within plus or minus 35 percent for airborne concentrations of EtO at the excursion limit. (7) Employee notification of monitoring results. (ii) The written notification required by paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this section shall contain the corrective action being taken by the employer to reduce employee exposure to or below the TWA and/or excursion limit, wherever monitoring results indicated that the TWA and/or excursion limit has been exceeded. (e) Regulated areas. (2) Access to regulated areas shall be limited to authorized persons. (3) Regulated areas shall be demarcated in any manner that minimizes the number of employees within the regulated area. (f) Methods of compliance Engineering controls and work practices. (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering controls and work practices that can be instituted are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the TWA and to or below the excursion limit, the employer shall use them to reduce employee exposure to the lowest levels achievable by these controls and shall supplement them by the use of respiratory protection that complies with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section. (iii) Engineering controls are generally infeasible for the following operations: collection of quality assurance sampling from sterilized materials removal of biological indicators from sterilized materials: loading and unloading of tank cars; changing of ethylene oxide tanks on sterilizers; and vessel cleaning. For these operations, engineering controls are required only where the Assistant Secretary demonstrates that such controls are feasible. (2) Compliance program. (ii) The compliance program shall include a schedule for periodic leak detection surveys and a written plan for emergency situations, as specified in paragraph (h)(i) of this section. (iii) Written plans for a program required in paragraph (f)(2) shall be developed and furnished upon request for examination and copying to the Assistant Secretary, the Director, affected employees and designated employee representatives. Such plans shall be reviewed at least every 12 months, and shall be updated as necessary to reflect significant changes in the status of the employer's compliance program. (iv) The employer shall not implement a schedule of employee rotation as a means of compliance with the TWA or excursion limit. (g) Respiratory protection and personal protective equipment General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activities and vessel cleaning, for which engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the TWA. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (3) Respirator selection. (i) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134; however, employers must not select or use half masks of any type because EtO may cause eye irritation or injury. (ii) Equip each air-purifying, full facepiece respirator with a front-or back-mounted canister approved for protection against ethylene oxide. (iii) For escape, provide employees with any respirator permitted for use under paragraphs (g)(3)(i) and (ii) of this standard. (4) Protective clothing and equipment. (h) Emergency situations Written plan. (ii) The plan shall specifically provide that employees engaged in correcting emergency conditions shall be equipped with respiratory protection as required by paragraph (g) of this section until the emergency is abated. (iii) The plan shall include the elements prescribed in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39, “Emergency action plans” and “Fire prevention plans,” respectively. (2) Alerting employees. (i) Medical Surveillance General Employees covered. (B) The employer shall make available medical examinations and consultations to all employees who have been exposed to EtO in an emergency situation. (ii) Examination by a physician. (2) Medical examinations and consultations Frequency. (A) Prior to assignment of the employee to an area where exposure may be at or above the action level for at least 30 days a year. (B) At least annually each employee exposed at or above the action level for at least 30 days in the past year. (C) At termination of employment or reassignment to an area where exposure to EtO is not at or above the action level for at least 30 days a year. (D) As medically appropriate for any employee exposed during an emergency. (E) As soon as possible, upon notification by an employee either (1) that the employee has developed signs or symptoms indicating possible overexposure to EtO, or (2) that the employee desires medical advice concerning the effects of current or past exposure to EtO on the employee's ability to produce a healthy child. (F) If the examining physician determines that any of the examinations should be provided more frequently than specified, the employer shall provide such examinations to affected employees at the frequencies recommended by the physician. (ii) Content. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (B) The content of medical examinations or consultation made available pursuant to paragraph (i)(2)(i)(E) of this section shall be determined by the examining physician, and shall include pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation of fertility, if requested by the employee and deemed appropriate by the physician. (3) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this standard and Appendices A, B, and C. (ii) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposure. (iii) The employee's representative exposure level or anticipated exposure level. (iv) A description of any personal protective and respiratory equipment used or to be used. (v) Information from previous medical examinations of the affected employee that is not otherwise available to the examining physician. (4) Physician's written opinion. (A) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions that would place the employee at an increased risk of material health impairment from exposure to EtO; (B) Any recommended limitations on the employee or upon the use of personal protective equipment such as clothing or respirators; and (C) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and of any medical conditions resulting from EtO exposure that require further explanation or treatment. (ii) The employer shall instruct the physician not to reveal in the written opinion given to the employer specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure to EtO. (iii) The employer shall provide a copy of the physician's written opinion to the affected employee within 15 days from its receipt. (j) Communication of hazards Hazard communication—general. (ii) In classifying the hazards of EtO at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer; reproductive effects; mutagenicity; central nervous system; skin sensitization; skin, eye and respiratory tract irritation; acute toxicity effects; and flammability. (iii) Employers shall include EtO in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of EtO and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (j)(3) of this section. (2) Signs and labels Signs. DANGER ETHYLENE OXIDE MAY CAUSE CANCER MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (B) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (j)(2)(i)(A) of this section: DANGER ETHYLENE OXIDE CANCER HAZARD AND REPRODUCTIVE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED TO BE WORN IN THIS AREA (ii) Labels. (B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on containers of EtO in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this section: ( 1 CONTAINS ETHYLENE OXIDE CANCER HAZARD AND REPRODUCTIVE HAZARD; ( 2 (C) The labeling requirements under this section do not apply where EtO is used as a pesticide, as such term is defined in the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (7 U.S.C. 136 et seq. (3) Information and training. (ii) Employees shall be informed of the following: (A) The requirements of this section with an explanation of its contents, including Appendices A and B; (B) Any operations in their work area where EtO is present; (C) The location and availability of the written EtO final rule; and (D) The medical surveillance program required by paragraph (i) of this section with an explanation of the information in appendix C. (iii) Employee training shall include at least: (A) Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of EtO in the work area (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, etc.); (B) The physical and health hazards of EtO; (C) The measures employees can take to protect themselves from hazards associated with EtO exposure, including specific procedures the employer has implemented to protect employees from exposure to EtO, such as work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used; and (D) The details of the hazard communication program developed by the employer, including an explanation of the labeling system and how employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information. (k) Recordkeeping Objective data for exempted operations. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The product qualifying for exemption; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol, results of testing, and/or analysis of the material for the release of EtO; (D) A description of the operation exempted and how the data support the exemption; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exemption. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of the employer's reliance upon such objective data. (2) Exposure measurements. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement; (B) The operation involving exposure to EtO which is being monitored; (C) Sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) Number, duration, and results of samples taken; (E) Type of protective devices worn, if any; and (F) Name and exposure of the employees whose exposures are represented. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information: (A) The name of the employee; (B) Physicians' written opinions; (C) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to EtO; and (D) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by paragraph (i)(3) of this section. (iii) The employer shall ensure that this record is maintained for the duration of employment plus thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (4) Availability. (ii) The employer, upon request, shall make any exemption and exposure records required by paragraphs (k) (1) and (2) of this section available for examination and copying to affected employees, former employees, designated representatives and the Assistant Secretary, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a) through (e) and (g) through (i). (iii) The employer, upon request, shall make employee medical records required by paragraph (k)(3) of this section available for examination and copying to the subject employee, anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee, and the Assistant Secretary, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (5) Transfer of records. (l) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (m) [Reserved] (n) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.1047—Substance Safety Data Sheet for Ethylene Oxide (Non-Mandatory) i. Substance Identification A. Substance: Ethylene oxide (C 2 4 B. Synonyms: dihydrooxirene, dimethylene oxide, EO, 1,2-epoxyethane, EtO, ETO, oxacyclopropane, oxane, oxidoethane, alpha/beta-oxidoethane, oxiran, oxirane. C. Ethylene oxide can be found as a liquid or vapor. D. EtO is used in the manufacture of ethylene glycol, surfactants, ethanolamines, glycol ethers, and other organic chemicals. EtO is also used as a sterilant and fumigant. E. Appearance and odor: Colorless liquid below 10.7 °C (51.3 °F) or colorless gas with ether-like odor detected at approximately 700 parts EtO per million parts of air (700 ppm). F. Permissible Exposure: Exposure may not exceed 1 part EtO per million parts of air averaged over the 8-hour workday. ii. Health Hazard Data A. Ethylene oxide can cause bodily harm if you inhale the vapor, if it comes into contact with your eyes or skin, or if you swallow it. B. Effects of overexposure: 1. Ethylene oxide in liquid form can cause eye irritation and injury to the cornea, frostbite, and severe irritation and blistering of the skin upon prolonged or confined contact. Ingestion of EtO can cause gastric irritation and liver injury. Acute effects from inhalation of EtO vapors include respiratory irritation and lung injury, headache, nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, shortness of breath, and cyaonosis (blue or purple coloring of skin). Exposure has also been associated with the occurrence of cancer, reproductive effects, mutagenic changes, neurotoxicity, and sensitization. 1. EtO has been shown to cause cancer in laboratory animals and has been associated with higher incidences of cancer in humans. Adverse reproductive effects and chromosome damage may also occur from EtO exposure. a. Reporting signs and symptoms: You should inform your employer if you develop any signs or symptoms and suspect that they are caused by exposure to EtO. iii. Emergency First Aid Procedures A. Eye exposure: If EtO gets into your eyes, wash your eyes immediately with large amounts of water, lifting the lower and upper eyelids. Get medical attention immediately. Contact lenses should not be worn when working with this chemical. B. Skin exposure: If EtO gets on your skin, immediately wash the contaminated skin with water. If EtO soaks through your clothing, especially your shoes, remove the clothing immediately and wash the skin with water using an emergency deluge shower. Get medical attention immediately. Thoroughly wash contaminated clothing before reusing. Contaminated leather shoes or other leather articles should not be reused and should be discarded. C. Inhalation: If large amounts of EtO are inhaled, the exposed person must be moved to fresh air at once. If breathing has stopped, perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation. Keep the affected person warm and at rest. Get medical attention immediately. D. Swallowing: When EtO has been swallowed, give the person large quantities of water immediately. After the water has been swallowed, try to get the person to vomit by having him or her touch the back of the throat with his or her finger. Do not make an unconscious person vomit. Get medical attention immediately. E. Rescue: Move the affected person from the hazardous exposure. If the exposed person has been overcome, attempt rescue only after notifying at least one other person of the emergency and putting into effect established emergency procedures. Do not become a casualty yourself. Understand your emergency rescue procedures and know the location of the emergency equipment before the need arises. iv. Respirators and Protective Clothing A. Respirators. You may be required to wear a respirator for nonroutine activities, in emergencies, while your employer is in the process of reducing EtO exposures through engineering controls, and in areas where engineering controls are not feasible. As of the effective date of this standard, only air-supplied, positive-pressure, full-facepiece respirators are approved for protection against EtO. If air-purifying respirators are worn in the future, they must have a label issued by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health under the provisions of 42 CFR part 84 stating that the respirators have been approved for use with ethylene oxide. For effective protection, respirators must fit your face and head snugly. Respirators must not be loosened or removed in work situations where their use is required. EtO does not have a detectable odor except at levels well above the permissible exposure limits. If you can smell EtO while wearing a respirator, proceed immediately to fresh air. If you experience difficulty breathing while wearing a respirator, tell your employer. B. Protective clothing: You may be required to wear impermeable clothing, gloves, a face shield, or other appropriate protective clothing to prevent skin contact with liquid EtO or EtO-containing solutions. Where protective clothing is required, your employer must provide clean garments to you as necessary to assure that the clothing protects you adequately. Replace or repair protective clothing that has become torn or otherwise damaged. EtO must never be allowed to remain on the skin. Clothing and shoes which are not impermeable to EtO should not be allowed to become contaminated with EtO, and if they do, the clothing should be promptly removed and decontaminated. Contaminated leather shoes should be discarded. Once EtO penetrates shoes or other leather articles, they should not be worn again. C. Eye protection: You must wear splashproof safety goggles in areas where liquid EtO or EtO-containing solutions may contact your eyes. In addition, contact lenses should not be worn in areas where eye contact with EtO can occur. v. Precautions for Safe Use, Handling, and Storage A. EtO is a flammable liquid, and its vapors can easily form explosive mixtures in air. B. EtO must be stored in tighly closed containers in a cool, well-ventilated area, away from heat, sparks, flames, strong oxidizers, alkalines, and acids, strong bases, acetylide-forming metals such as cooper, silver, mercury and their alloys. C. Sources of ignition such as smoking material, open flames and some electrical devices are prohibited wherever EtO is handled, used, or stored in a manner that could create a potential fire or explosion hazard. D. You should use non-sparking tools when opening or closing metal containers of EtO, and containers must be bonded and grounded in the rare instances in which liquid EtO is poured or transferred. E. Impermeable clothing wet with liquid EtO or EtO-containing solutions may be easily ignited. If your are wearing impermeable clothing and are splashed with liquid EtO or EtO-containing solution, you should immediately remove the clothing while under an emergency deluge shower. F. If your skin comes into contact with liquid EtO or EtO-containing solutions, you should immediately remove the EtO using an emergency deluge shower. G. You should not keep food, beverages, or smoking materials in regulated areas where employee exposures are above the permissible exposure limits. H. Fire extinguishers and emergency deluge showers for quick drenching should be readily available, and you should know where they are and how to operate them. I. Ask your supervisor where EtO is used in your work area and for any additional plant safety and health rules. vi. Access to Information A. Each year, your employer is required to inform you of the information contained in this standard and appendices for EtO. In addition, your employer must instruct you in the proper work practices for using EtO emergency procedures, and the correct use of protective equipment. B. Your employer is required to determine whether you are being exposed to EtO. You or your representative has the right to observe employee measurements and to record the results obtained. Your employer is required to inform you of your exposure. If your employer determine that you are being overexposed, he or she is required to inform you of the actions which are being taken to reduce your exposure to within permissible exposure limits. C. Your employer is required to keep records of your exposures and medical examinations. These exposure records must be kept by the employer for at least thirty (30) years. Medical records must be kept for the period of your employment plus thirty (30) years. D. Your employer is required to release your exposure and medical records to your physician or designated representative upon your written request. vii. Sterilant Use of Eto in Hospitals and Health Care Facilities This section of appendix A, for informational purposes, sets forth EPA's recommendations for modifications in workplace design and practice in hospitals and health care facilities for which the Environmental Protection Agency has registered EtO for uses as a sterilant or fumigant under the Federal Insecticide, Funigicide, and Rodenticide Act, 7 U.S.C. 136 et seq. Federal Register Register, 1. Workplace Design a. Installation of gas line hand valves. b. Installation of capture boxes. The installation of a “capture box” will be required for those work place layouts where the floor drain is located in the same room as the sterilizer or in a room where workers are normally present. A “capture box” is a piece of equipment that totally encloses the floor drain where the discharge from the sterilizer is pumped. The “capture box” is to be vented directly to a non-recirculating or dedicated ventilation system. Sufficient air intake should be allowed at the bottom of the box to handle the volume of air that is ventilated from the top of the box. The “capture box” can be made of metal, plastic, wood or other equivalent material. The box is intended to reduce levels of EtO discharged into the work room atmosphere. The use of a “capture box” is not required if: (1) The vacuum pump discharge floor drain is located in a well ventilated equipment or other room where workers are not normally present or (2) the water sealed vacuum pump discharges directly to a closed sealed sewer line (check local plumbing codes). If it is impractical to install a vented “capture box” and a well ventilated equipment or other room is not feasible, a box that can be sealed over the floor drain may be used if: (1) The floor drain is located in a room where workers are not normally present and EtO cannot leak into an occupied area, and (2) the sterilizer in use is less than 12 cubic feet in capacity (check local plumbing codes). c. Ventilation of aeration units Existing aeration units. ii. Installation of new aerator units (where none exist). d. Ventilation during cylinder change. i. Location of cylinders in a well ventilated equipment room or other room where workers are not normally present. ii. Installation of a flexible hose (at least 4″ in diameter) to a non-recirculating or dedicated ventilation system and located in the area of cylinder change in such a way that the hose can be positioned at the point where the sterilizer gas line is disconnected from the cylinder. iii. Installation of a hood that is part of a non-recirculating or dedicated system and positioned no more than one foot above the point where the change of cylinders takes place. e. Ventilation of sterilizer door area. f. Ventilation of sterilizer relief valve. i. Through a pipe connected to the outlet of the relief valve ventilated directly outdoors at a point high enough to be away from passers by, and not near any windows that open, or near any air conditioning or ventilation air intakes. ii. Through a connection to an existing or new non-recirculating or dedicated ventilation system. iii. Through a connection to a well ventilated equipment or other room where workers are not normally present. g. Ventilation systems. h. Installation of alarm systems. 2. Workplace Practices All the workplace practices discussed in this unit must be permanently posted near the door of each sterilizer prior to use by any operator. a. Changing of supply line filters. i. Close the cylinder valve and the hose valve. ii. Disconnect the cylinder hose (piping) from the cylinder. iii. Open the hose valve and bleed slowly into a proper ventilating system at or near the in-use supply cylinders. iv. Vacate the area until the line is empty. v. Change the filter. vi. Reconnect the lines and reverse the value position. vii. Check hoses, filters, and valves for leaks with a fluorocarbon leak detector (for those sterilizers using the 88 percent chlorofluorocarbon, 12 percent ethylene oxide mixture (12/88)). b. Restricted access area. ii. All personnel must be excluded from the restricted area when certain operations are in progress, such as discharging a vacuum pump, emptying a sterilizer liquid line, or venting a non-purge sterilizer with the door ajar or other operations where EtO might be released directly into the face of workers. c. Door opening procedures. Sterilizers with purge cycles. ii. Sterilizers without purge cycles. d. Chamber unloading procedures. ii. If rolling carts are used, they should be pulled not pushed by the sterilizer operators to avoid offgassing exposure. e. Maintenance. i. Leak detection. ii. Maintenance procedures. Appendix B to § 1910.1047—Substance Technical Guidelines for Ethylene Oxide (Non-Mandatory) i. Physical and Chemical Data A. Substance identification: 1. Synonyms: dihydrooxirene, dimethylene oxide, EO, 1,2-epoxyethane, EtO ETO oxacyclopropane, oxane, oxidoethane, alpha/beta-oxidoethane, oxiran, oxirane. 2. Formula: (C 2 4 3. Molecular weight: 44.06 B. Physical data: 1. Boiling point (760 mm Hg): 10.70 °C (51.3 °F); 2. Specific gravity (water = 1): 0.87 (at 20 °C or 68 °F) 3. Vapor density (air = 1): 1.49; 4. Vapor pressure (at 20 °C); 1,095 mm Hg; 5. Solubility in water: complete; 6. Appearance and odor: colorless liquid; gas at temperature above 10.7 °F or 51.3 °C with ether-like odor above 700 ppm. ii. Fire, Explosion, and Reactivity Hazard Data A. Fire: 1. Flash point: less than O °F (open cup); 2. Stability: decomposes violently at temperatures above 800 °F; 3. Flammable limits in air, percent by volume: Lower: 3, Upper: 100; 4. Extinguishing media: Carbon dioxide for small fires, polymer or alcohol foams for large fires; 5. Special fire fighting procedures: Dilution of ethylene oxide with 23 volumes of water renders it non-flammable; 6. Unusual fire and explosion hazards: Vapors of EtO will burn without the presence of air or other oxidizers. EtO vapors are heavier than air and may travel along the ground and be ignited by open flames or sparks at locations remote from the site at which EtO is being used. 7. For purposes of compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.106, EtO is classified as a flammable gas. For example, 7,500 ppm, approximately one-fourth of the lower flammable limit, would be considered to pose a potential fire and explosion hazard. 8. For purposes of compliance with 29 CFR 1910.155, EtO is classified as a Class B fire hazard. 9. For purpose of compliance with 29 CFR 1919.307, locations classified as hazardous due to the presence of EtO shall be Class I. B. Reactivity: 1. Conditions contributing to instability: EtO will polymerize violently if contaminated with aqueous alkalies, amines, mineral acids, metal chlorides, or metal oxides. Violent decomposition will also occur at temperatures above 800 °F; 2. Incompatabilities: Alkalines and acids; 3. Hazardous decomposition products: Carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide. iii. Spill, Leak, and Disposal Procedures A. If EtO is spilled or leaked, the following steps should be taken: 1. Remove all ignition sources. 2. The area should be evacuated at once and re-entered only after the area has been thoroughly ventilated and washed down with water. B. Persons not wearing appropriate protective equipment should be restricted from areas of spills or leaks until cleanup has been completed. C. Waste disposal methods: Waste material should be disposed of in a manner that is not hazardous to employees or to the general population. In selecting the method of waste disposal, applicable local, State, and Federal regulations should be consulted. iv. Monitoring and Measurement Procedures A. Exposure above the Permissible Exposure Limit: 1. Eight-hour exposure evaluation: Measurements taken for the purpose of determining employee exposure under this section are best taken with consecutive samples covering the full shift. Air samples should be taken in the employee's breathing zone (air that would most nearly represent that inhaled by the employee.) 2. Monitoring techniques: The sampling and analysis under this section may be performed by collection of the EtO vapor on charcoal adsorption tubes or other composition adsorption tubes, with subsequent chemical analysis. Sampling and analysis may also be performed by instruments such as real-time continuous monitoring systems, portable direct reading instruments, or passive dosimeters as long as measurements taken using these methods accurately evaluate the concentration of EtO in employees' breathing zones. Appendix D describes the validated method of sampling and analysis which has been tested by OSHA for use with EtO. Other available methods are also described in appendix D. The employer has the obligation of selecting a monitoring method which meets the accuracy and precision requirements of the standard under his unique field conditions. The standard requires that the method of monitoring should be accurate, to a 95 percent confidence level, to plus or minus 25 percent for concentrations of EtO at 1 ppm, and to plus or minus 35 percent for concentrations at 0.5 ppm. In addition to the method described in appendix D, there are numerous other methods available for monitoring for EtO in the workplace. Details on these other methods have been submitted by various companies to the rulemaking record, and are available at the OSHA Docket Office. B. Since many of the duties relating to employee exposure are dependent on the results of measurement procedures, employers should assure that the evaluation of employee exposures is performed by a technically qualified person. v. Protective Clothing and Equipment Employees should be provided with and be required to wear appropriate protective clothing wherever there is significant potential for skin contact with liquid EtO or EtO-containing solutions. Protective clothing shall include impermeable coveralls or similar full-body work clothing, gloves, and head coverings, as appropriate to protect areas of the body which may come in contact with liquid EtO or EtO-containing solutions. Employers should ascertain that the protective garments are impermeable to EtO. Permeable clothing, including items made of rubber, and leather shoes should not be allowed to become contaminated with liquid EtO. If permeable clothing does become contaminated, it should be immediately removed, while the employer is under an emergency deluge shower. If leather footwear or other leather garments become wet from EtO they should be discarded and not be worn again, because leather absorbs EtO and holds it against the skin. Any protective clothing that has been damaged or is otherwise found to be defective should be repaired or replaced. Clean protective clothing should be provided to the employee as necessary to assure employee protection. Whenever impermeable clothing becomes wet with liquid EtO, it should be washed down with water before being removed by the employee. Employees are also required to wear splash-proof safety goggles where there is any possibility of EtO contacting the eyes. vi. Miscellaneous Precautions A. Store EtO in tightly closed containers in a cool, well-ventilated area and take all necessary precautions to avoid any explosion hazard. B. Non-sparking tools must be used to open and close metal containers. These containers must be effectively grounded and bonded. C. Do not incinerate EtO cartridges, tanks or other containers. D. Employers should advise employees of all areas and operations where exposure to EtO occur. vii. Common Operations Common operations in which exposure to EtO is likely to occur include the following: Manufacture of EtO, surfactants, ethanolamines, glycol ethers, and specialty chemicals, and use as a sterilant in the hospital, health product and spice industries. Appendix C to § 1910.1047—Medical Surveillance Guidelines for Ethylene Oxide (Non-Mandatory) i. route of entry Inhalation. ii. toxicology Clinical evidence of adverse effects associated with the exposure to EtO is present in the form of increased incidence of cancer in laboratory animals (leukemia, stomach, brain), mutation in offspring in animals, and resorptions and spontaneous abortions in animals and human populations respectively. Findings in humans and experimental animals exposed to airborne concentrations of EtO also indicate damage to the genetic material (DNA). These include hemoglobin alkylation, unsecheduled DNA synthesis, sister chromatid exchange chromosomal aberration, and functional sperm abnormalities. Ethylene oxide in liquid form can cause eye irritation and injury to the cornea, frostbite, severe irritation, and blistering of the skin upon prolonged or confined contact. Ingestion of EtO can cause gastric irritation and liver injury. Other effects from inhalation of EtO vapors include respiratory irritation and lung injury, headache, nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, dyspnea and cyanosis. iii. signs and symptoms of acute overexposure The early effects of acute overexposure to EtO are nausea and vomiting, headache, and irritation of the eyes and respiratory passages. The patient may notice a “peculiar taste” in the mouth. Delayed effects can include pulmonary edema, drowsiness, weakness, and incoordination. Studies suggest that blood cell changes, an increase in chromosomal aberrations, and spontaneous abortion may also be causally related to acute overexposure to EtO. Skin contact with liquid or gaseous EtO causes characteristic burns and possibly even an allergic-type sensitization. The edema and erythema occurring from skin contact with EtO progress to vesiculation with a tendency to coalesce into blebs with desquamation. Healing occurs within three weeks, but there may be a residual brown pigmentation. A 40-80% solution is extremely dangerous, causing extensive blistering after only brief contact. Pure liquid EtO causes frostbite because of rapid evaporation. In contrast, the eye is relatively insensitive to EtO, but there may be some irritation of the cornea. Most reported acute effects of occupational exposure to EtO are due to contact with EtO in liquid phase. The liquid readily penetrates rubber and leather, and will produce blistering if clothing or footwear contaminated with EtO are not removed. iv. surveillance and preventive considerations As noted above, exposure to EtO has been linked to an increased risk of cancer and reproductive effects including decreased male fertility, fetotoxicity, and spontaneous abortion. EtO workers are more likely to have chromosomal damage than similar groups not exposed to EtO. At the present, limited studies of chronic effects in humans resulting from exposure to EtO suggest a causal association with leukemia. Animal studies indicate leukemia and cancers at other sites (brain, stomach) as well. The physician should be aware of the findings of these studies in evaluating the health of employees exposed to EtO. Adequate screening tests to determine an employee's potential for developing serious chronic diseases, such as cancer, from exposure to EtO do not presently exist. Laboratory tests may, however, give evidence to suggest that an employee is potentially overexposed to EtO. It is important for the physician to become familiar with the operating conditions in which exposure to EtO is likely to occur. The physician also must become familiar with the signs and symptoms that indicate a worker is receiving otherwise unrecognized and unacceptable exposure to EtO. These elements are especially important in evaluating the medical and work histories and in conducting the physical exam. When an unacceptable exposure in an active employee is identified by the physician, measures taken by the employer to lower exposure should also lower the risk of serious long-term consequences. The employer is required to institute a medical surveillance program for all employees who are or will be exposed to EtO at or above the action level (0.5 ppm) for at least 30 days per year, without regard to respirator use. All examinations and procedures must be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician at a reasonable time and place for the employee and at no cost to the employee. Although broad latitude in prescribing specific tests to be included in the medical surveillance program is extended to the examining physician, OSHA requires inclusion of the following elements in the routine examination: (i) Medical and work histories with special emphasis directed to symptoms related to the pulmonary, hematologic, neurologic, and reproductive systems and to the eyes and skin. (ii) Physical examination with particular emphasis given to the pulmonary, hematologic, neurologic, and reproductive systems and to the eyes and skin. (iii) Complete blood count to include at least a white cell count (including differential cell count), red cell count, hematocrit, and hemoglobin. (iv) Any laboratory or other test which the examining physician deems necessary by sound medical practice. If requested by the employee, the medical examinations shall include pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation of fertility as deemed appropriate by the physician. In certain cases, to provide sound medical advice to the employer and the employee, the physician must evaluate situations not directly related to EtO. For example, employees with skin diseases may be unable to tolerate wearing protective clothing. In addition those with chronic respiratory diseases may not tolerate the wearing of negative pressure (air purifying) respirators. Additional tests and procedures that will help the physician determine which employees are medically unable to wear such respirators should include: An evaluation of cardiovascular function, a baseline chest x-ray to be repeated at five year intervals, and a pulmonary function test to be repeated every three years. The pulmonary function test should include measurement of the employee's forced vital capacity (FVC), forced expiratory volume at one second (FEV1), as well as calculation of the ratios of FEV1 to FVC, and measured FVC and measured FEV1 to expected values corrected for variation due to age, sex, race, and height. The employer is required to make the prescribed tests available at least annually to employees who are or will be exposed at or above the action level, for 30 or more days per year; more often than specified if recommended by the examining physician; and upon the employee's termination of employment or reassignment to another work area. While little is known about the long term consequences of high short-term exposures, it appears prudent to monitor such affected employees closely in light of existing health data. The employer shall provide physician recommended examinations to any employee exposed to EtO in emergency conditions. Likewise, the employer shall make available medical consultations including physician recommended exams to employees who believe they are suffering signs or symptoms of exposure to EtO. The employer is required to provide the physician with the following informatin: a copy of this standard and its appendices; a description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee exposure level; and information from the employee's previous medical examinations which is not readily available to the examining physician. Making this information available to the physician will aid in the evaluation of the employee's health in relation to assigned duties and fitness to wear personal protective equipment, when required. The employer is required to obtain a written opinion from the examining physician containing the results of the medical examinations; the physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions which would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment of his or her health from exposure to EtO; any recommended restrictions upon the employee's exposure to EtO, or upon the use of protective clothing or equipment such as respirators; and a statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and of any medical conditions which require further explanation or treatment. This written opinion must not reveal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure to EtO, and a copy of the opinion must be provided to the affected employee. The purpose in requiring the examining physician to supply the employer with a written opinion is to provide the employer with a medical basis to aid in the determination of initial placement of employees and to assess the employee's ability to use protective clothing and equipment. Appendix D to § 1910.1047—Sampling and Analytical Methods for Ethylene Oxide (Non-Mandatory) A number of methods are available for monitoring employee exposures to EtO. Most of these involve the use of charcoal tubes and sampling pumps, followed by analysis of the samples by gas chromatograph. The essential differences between the charcoal tube methods include, among others, the use of different desorbing solvents, the use of different lots of charcoal, and the use of different equipment for analysis of the samples. Besides charcoal, methods using passive dosimeters, gas sampling bags, impingers, and detector tubes have been utilized for determination of EtO exposure. In addition, there are several commercially available portable gas analyzers and monitoring units. This appendix contains details for the method which has been tested at the OSHA Analytical Laboratory in Salt Lake City. Inclusion of this method in the appendix does not mean that this method is the only one which will be satisfactory. Copies of descriptions of other methods available are available in the rulemaking record, and may be obtained from the OSHA Docket Office. These include the Union Carbide, Dow Chemical, 3M, and DuPont methods, as well as NIOSH Method S-286. These methods are briefly described at the end of this appendix. Employers who note problems with sample breakthrough using the OSHA or other charcoal methods should try larger charcoal tubes. Tubes of larger capacity are available. In addition, lower flow rates and shorter sampling times should be beneficial in minimizing breakthrough problems. Whatever method the employer chooses, he must assure himself of the method's accuracy and precision under the unique conditions present in his workplace. Ethylene Oxide Method No.: 30. Matrix: Air. Target Concentration: 1.0 ppm (1.8 mg/m 3 Procedure: Samples are collected on two charcoal tubes in series and desorbed with 1% CS 2 Recommended Air Volume and Sampling Rate: 1 liter and 0.05 Lpm. Detection Limit of the Overall Procedure: 13.3 ppb (0.024 mg/m 3 Reliable Quantitation Limit: 52.2 ppb (0.094 mg/m 3 Standard Error of Estimate: 6.59% (See Backup Section 4.6). Special Requirements: Samples must be analyzed within 15 days of sampling date. Status of Method: The sampling and analytical method has been subjected to the established evaluation procedures of the Organic Method Evaluations Branch. Date: August 1981. Chemist: Wayne D. Potter. Organic Solvents Branch, OSHA Analytical Laboratory, Salt Lake City, Utah 1. General Discussion. 1.1 Background. 1.1.1 History of Procedure. Ethylene oxide samples analyzed at the OSHA Laboratory have normally been collected on activated charcoal and desorbed with carbon disulfide. The analysis is performed with a gas chromatograph equipped with a FID (Flame ionization detector) as described in NIOSH Method S286 (Ref. 5.1). This method is based on a PEL of 50 ppm and has a detection limit of about 1 ppm. Recent studies have prompted the need for a method to analyze and detect ethylene oxide at very low concentrations. Several attempts were made to form an ultraviolet (UV) sensitive derivative with ethylene oxide for analysis with HPLC. Among those tested that gave no detectable product were: p-anisidine, methylimidazole, aniline, and 2,3,6-trichlorobenzoic acid. Each was tested with catalysts such as triethylamine, aluminum chloride, methylene chloride and sulfuric acid but no detectable derivative was produced. The next derivatization attempt was to react ethylene oxide with HBr to form 2-bromoethanol. This reaction was successful. An ECD (electron capture detector) gave a very good response for 2-bromoethanol due to the presence of bromine. The use of carbon disulfide as the desorbing solvent gave too large a response and masked the 2-bromoethanol. Several other solvents were tested for both their response on the ECD and their ability to desorb ethylene oxide from the charcoal. Among those tested were toluene, xylene, ethyl benzene, hexane, cyclohexane and benzene. Benzene was the only solvent tested that gave a suitable response on the ECD and a high desorption. It was found that the desorption efficiency was improved by using 1% CS 2 1.1.2 Physical Properties (Ref. 5.2-5.4). Synonyms: Oxirane; dimethylene oxide, 1,2-epoxy-ethane; oxane; C 2 4 Molecular Weight: 44.06 Boiling Point: 10.7 °C (51.3°) Melting Point: −111 °C Description: Colorless, flammable gas Vapor Pressure: 1095 mm. at 20 °C Odor: Ether-like odor Lower Explosive Limits: 3.0% (by volume) Flash Point (TOC): Below 0 °F Molecular Structure: CH 2 2 1.2 Limit Defining Parameters. 1.2.1 Detection Limit of the Analytical Procedure. The detection limit of the analytical procedure is 12.0 picograms of ethylene oxide per injection. This is the amount of analyte which will give a peak whose height is five times the height of the baseline noise. (See Backup Data Section 4.1). 1.2.2 Detection Limit of the Overall Procedure. The detection limit of the overall procedure is 24.0 ng of ethylene oxide per sample. This is the amount of analyte spiked on the sampling device which allows recovery of an amount of analyte equivalent to the detection limit of the analytical procedure. (See Backup Data Section 4.2). 1.2.3 Reliable Quantitation Limit. The reliable quantitation limit is 94.0 nanograms of ethylene oxide per sample. This is the smallest amount of analyte which can be quantitated within the requirements of 75% recovery and 95% confidence limits. (See Backup Data Section 4.2). It must be recognized that the reliable quantitation limit and detection limits reported in the method are based upon optimization of the instrument for the smallest possible amount of analyte. When the target concentration of an analyte is exceptionally higher than these limits, they may not be attainable at the routine operating parameters. In this case, the limits reported on analysis reports will be based on the operating parameters used during the analysis of the samples. 1.2.4 Sensitivity. The sensitivity of the analytical procedure over a concentration range representing 0.5 to 2 times the target concentration based on the recommended air volume is 34105 area units per µg/mL. The sensitivity is determined by the slope of the calibration curve (See Backup Data Section 4.3). The sensitivity will vary somewhat with the particular instrument used in the analysis. 1.2.5 Recovery. The recovery of analyte from the collection medium must be 75% or greater. The average recovery from spiked samples over the range of 0.5 to 2 times the target concentration is 88.0% (See Backup Section 4.4). At lower concentrations the recovery appears to be non-linear. 1.2.6 Precision (Analytical Method Only). The pooled coefficient of variation obtained from replicate determination of analytical standards at 0.5X, 1X and 2X the target concentration is 0.036 (See Backup Data Section 4.5). 1.2.7 Precision (Overall Procedure). The overall procedure must provide results at the target concentration that are 25% of better at the 95% confidence level. The precision at the 95% confidence level for the 15 day storage test is plus or minus 12.9% (See Backup Data Section 4.6). This includes an additional plus or minus 5% for sampling error. 1.3 Advantages. 1.3.1 The sampling procedure is convenient. 1.3.2 The analytical procedure is very sensitive and reproducible. 1.3.3 Reanalysis of samples is possible. 1.3.4 Samples are stable for at least 15 days at room temperature. 1.3.5 Interferences are reduced by the longer GC retention time of the new derivative. 1.4 Disadvantages. 1.4.1 Two tubes in series must be used because of possible breakthrough and migration. 1.4.2 The precision of the sampling rate may be limited by the reproducibility of the pressure drop across the tubes. The pumps are usually calibrated for one tube only. 1.4.3 The use of benzene as the desorption solvent increases the hazards of analysis because of the potential carcinogenic effects of benzene. 1.4.4 After repeated injections there can be a buildup of residue formed on the electron capture detector which decreases sensitivity. 1.4.5 Recovery from the charcoal tubes appears to be nonlinear at low concentrations. 2. Sampling Procedure. 2.1 Apparatus. 2.1.1 A calibrated personal sampling pump whose flow can be determined within plus or minus 5% of the recommended flow. 2.1.2 SKC Lot 120 Charcoal tubes: glass tube with both ends flame sealed, 7 cm long with a 6 mm O.D. and a 4-mm I.D., containing 2 sections of coconut shell charcoal separated by a 2-mm portion of urethane foam. The adsorbing section contains 100 mg of charcoal, the backup section 50 mg. A 3-mm portion of urethane foam is placed between the outlet end of the tube and the backup section. A plug of silylated glass wool is placed in front of the adsorbing section. 2.2 Reagents. 2.2.1 None required. 2.3 Sampling Technique. 2.3.1 Immediately before sampling, break the ends of the charcoal tubes. All tubes must be from the same lot. 2.3.2 Connect two tubes in series to the sampling pump with a short section of flexible tubing. A minimum amount of tubing is used to connect the two sampling tubes together. The tube closer to the pump is used as a backup. This tube should be identified as the backup tube. 2.3.3 The tubes should be placed in a vertical position during sampling to minimize channeling. 2.3.4 Air being sampled should not pass through any hose or tubing before entering the charcoal tubes. 2.3.5 Seal the charcoal tubes with plastic caps immediately after sampling. Also, seal each sample with OSHA seals lengthwise. 2.3.6 With each batch of samples, submit at least one blank tube from the same lot used for samples. This tube should be subjected to exactly the same handling as the samples (break, seal, transport) except that no air is drawn through it. 2.3.7 Transport the samples (and corresponding paperwork) to the lab for analysis. 2.3.8 If bulk samples are submitted for analysis, they shoud be transported in glass containers with Teflon-lined caps. These samples must be mailed separately from the container used for the charcoal tubes. 2.4 Breakthrough. 2.4.1 The breakthrough (5% breakthrough) volume for a 3.0 mg/m ethylene oxide sample stream at approximately 85% relative humidity, 22 °C and 633 mm is 2.6 liters sampled at 0.05 liters per minute. This is equivalent to 7.8 µg of ethylene oxide. Upon saturation of the tube it appeared that the water may be displacing ethylene oxide during sampling. 2.5 Desorption Efficiency. 2.5.1 The desorption efficiency, from liquid injection onto charcoal tubes, averaged 88.0% from 0.5 to 2.0 × the target concentration for a 1.0 liter air sample. At lower ranges it appears that the desorption efficiency is non-linear (See Backup Data Section 4.2). 2.5.2 The desorption efficiency may vary from one laboratory to another and also from one lot of charcoal to another. Thus, it is necessary to determine the desorption efficiency for a particular lot of charcoal. 2.6 Recommended Air Volume and Sampling Rate. 2.6.1 The recommended air volume is 1.0 liter. 2.6.2 The recommended maximum sampling rate is 0.05 Lpm. 2.7 Interferences. 2.7.1 Ethylene glycol and Freon 12 at target concentration levels did not interfere with the collection of ethylene oxide. 2.7.2 Suspected interferences should be listed on the sample data sheets. 2.7.3 The relative humidity may affect the sampling procedure. 2.8 Safety Precautions. 2.8.1 Attach the sampling equipment to the employee so that it does not interfere with work performance. 2.8.2 Wear safety glasses when breaking the ends of the sampling tubes. 2.8.3 If possible, place the sampling tubes in a holder so the sharp end is not exposed while sampling. 3. Analytical Method. 3.1 Apparatus. 3.1.1 Gas chromatograph equipped with a linearized electron capture detector. 3.1.2 GC column capable of separating the derivative of ethylene oxide (2-bromoethanol) from any interferences and the 1% CS 2 1/8 3.1.3 An electronic integrator or some other suitable method of measuring peak areas. 3.1.4 Two milliliter vials with Teflon-lined caps. 3.1.5 Gas tight syringe—500 µL or other convenient sizes for preparing standards. 3.1.6 Microliter syringes—10 µL or other convenient sizes for diluting standards and 1 µL for sample injections. 3.1.7 Pipets for dispensing the 1% CS 2 3.1.8 Volumetric flasks—5 mL and other convenient sizes for preparing standards. 3.1.9 Disposable Pasteur pipets. 3.2 Reagents. 3.2.1 Benzene, reagent grade. 3.2.2 Carbon Disulfide, reagent grade. 3.2.3 Ethylene oxide, 99.7% pure. 3.2.4 Hydrobromic Acid, 48% reagent grade. 3.2.5 Sodium Carbonate, anhydrous, reagent grade. 3.2.6 Desorbing reagent, 99% Benzene/1% CS 2 3.3 Sample Preparation. 3.3.1 The front and back sections of each sample are transferred to separate 2-mL vials. 3.3.2 Each sample is desorbed with 1.0 mL of desorbing reagent. 3.3.3 The vials are sealed immediately and allowed to desorb for one hour with occasional shaking. 3.3.4 Desorbing reagent is drawn off the charcoal with a disposable pipet and put into clean 2-mL vials. 3.3.5 One drop of HBr is added to each vial. Vials are resealed and HBr is mixed well with the desorbing reagent. 3.3.6 About 0.15 gram of sodium carbonate is carefully added to each vial. Vials are again resealed and mixed well. 3.4 Standard Preparation. 3.4.1 Standards are prepared by injecting the pure ethylene oxide gas into the desorbing reagent. 3.4.2 A range of standards are prepared to make a calibration curve. A concentration of 1.0 µL of ethylene oxide gas per 1 mL desorbing reagent is equivalent to 1.0 ppm air concentration (all gas volumes at 25 °C and 760 mm) for the recommended 1 liter air sample. This amount is uncorrected for desorption efficiency (See Backup Data Section 4.2. for desorption efficiency corrections). 3.4.3 One drop of HBr per mL of standard is added and mixed well. 3.4.4 About 0.15 grams of sodium carbonate is carefully added for each drop of HBr (A small reaction will occur). 3.5 Analysis. 3.5.1 GC Conditions. Nitrogen flow rate—10mL/min. Injector Temperature—250 °C Detector Temperature—300 °C Column Temperature—100 °C Injection size—0.8 µL Elution time—3.9 minutes 3.5.2 Peak areas are measured by an integrator or other suitable means. 3.5.3 The integrator results are in area units and a calibration curve is set up with concentration vs. area units. 3.6 Interferences. 3.6.1 Any compound having the same retention time of 2-bromoethanol is a potential interference. Possible interferences should be listed on the sample data sheets. 3.6.2 GC parameters may be changed to circumvent interferences. 3.6.3 There are usually trace contaminants in benzene. These contaminants, however, posed no problem of interference. 3.6.4 Retention time data on a single column is not considered proof of chemical identity. Samples over the 1.0 ppm target level should be confirmed by GC/Mass Spec or other suitable means. 3.7 Calculations 3.7.1 The concentration in µg/mL for a sample is determined by comparing the area of a particular sample to the calibration curve, which has been prepared from analytical standards. 3.7.2 The amount of analyte in each sample is corrected for desorption efficiency by use of a desorption curve. 3.7.3 Analytical results (A) from the two tubes that compose a particular air sample are added together. 3.7.4 The concentration for a sample is calculated by the following equation: where: A = µg/mL B = desorption volume in milliliters C = air volume in liters. 3.7.5 To convert mg/m 3 where: mg/m 3 24.45 = molar volume at 25 °C and 760mm Hg 44.05 = molecular weight of ETO. 3.8 Safety Precautions 3.8.1 Ethylene oxide and benzene are potential carcinogens and care must be exercised when working with these compounds. 3.8.2 All work done with the solvents (preparation of standards, desorption of samples, etc.) should be done in a hood. 3.8.3 Avoid any skin contact with all of the solvents. 3.8.4 Wear safety glasses at all times. 3.8.5 Avoid skin contact with HBr because it is highly toxic and a strong irritant to eyes and skin. 4. Backup Data. 4.1 Detection Limit Data. The detection limit was determined by injecting 0.8 µL of a 0.015 µg/mL standard of ethylene oxide into 1% CS 2 −5 3 4.2 Desorption Efficiency. Ethylene oxide was spiked onto charcoal tubes and the following recovery data was obtained. Amount spiked (µg) Amount recovered (µg) Percent recovery 4.5 4.32 96.0 3.0 2.61 87.0 2.25 2.025 90.0 1.5 1.365 91.0 1.5 1.38 92.0 .75 .6525 87.0 .375 .315 84.0 .375 .312 83.2 .1875 .151 80.5 .094 .070 74.5 At lower amounts the recovery appears to be non-linear. 4.3 Sensitivity Data. The following data was used to determine the calibration curve. Injection 0.5 × .75 µg/mL 1 × 1.5 µg/mL 2 × 3.0 µg/mL 1 30904 59567 111778 2 30987 62914 106016 3 32555 58578 106122 4 32242 57173 109716 X 31672 59558 108408 Slope = 34.105. 4.4 Recovery. The recovery was determined by spiking ethylene oxide onto lot 120 charcoal tubes and desorbing with 1% CS 2 Percent Recovery Sample 0.5x 1.0x 2.0x 1 88.7 95.0 91.7 2 83.8 95.0 87.3 3 84.2 91.0 86.0 4 88.0 91.0 83.0 5 88.0 86.0 85.0 X 86.5 90.5 87.0 Weighted Average = 88.2. 4.5 Precision of the Analytical Procedure. The following data was used to determine the precision of the analytical method: Concentration 0.5 × .75 µg/mL 1 × 1.5 µg/mL 2 × 3.0 µg/mL Injection .7421 1.4899 3.1184 .7441 1.5826 3.0447 .7831 1.4628 2.9149 .7753 1.4244 2.9185 Average .7612 1.4899 2.9991 Standard Deviation .0211 .0674 .0998 CV .0277 .0452 .0333 CV + 0.036 4.6 Storage Data. Samples were generated at 1.5 mg/m 3 Percent Recovery Day analyzed Refrigerated Ambient 1 87.0 87.0 1 93.0 93.0 1 94.0 94.0 1 92.0 92.0 4 92.0 91.0 4 93.0 88.0 4 91.0 89.0 6 92.0 6 92.0 8 92.0 8 86.0 10 91.7 10 95.5 10 95.7 11 90.0 11 82.0 13 78.0 13 81.4 13 82.4 14 78.5 14 72.1 18 66.0 18 68.0 19 64.0 19 77.0 4.7 Breakthrough Data. Breakthrough studies were done at 2 ppm (3.6 mg/m 3 Tube No. Time (minutes) Percent breakthrough 1 10 ( 1 2 20 ( 1 3 30 ( 1 4 40 1.23 5 50 3.46 6 60 18.71 7 70 39.2 8 80 53.3 9 90 72.0 10 100 96.0 11 110 113.0 12 120 133.9 1 The 5% breakthrough volume was reached when 2.6 liters of test atmosphere were drawn through the charcoal tubes. 5. References. 5.1 “NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods,” 2nd ed. NIOSH: Cincinnati, 1977; Method S286. 5.2 “IARC Monographs on the Evaluation of Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Man,” International Agency for Research on Cancer: Lyon, 1976; Vol. II, p. 157. 5.3 Sax., N.I. “Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials,” 4th ed.; Van Nostrand Reinhold Company. New York, 1975; p. 741. 5.4 “The Condensed Chemical Dictionary”, 9th ed.; Hawley, G.G., ed.; Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, New York, 1977; p. 361. Summary of Other Sampling Procedures OSHA believes that served other types of monitoring equipment and techniques exist for monitoring time-weighted averages. Considerable research and method development is currently being performed, which will lead to improvements and a wider variety of monitoring techniques. A combination of monitoring procedures can be used. There probably is no one best method for monitoring personal exposure to ethylene oxide in all cases. There are advantages, disadvantages, and limitations to each method. The method of choice will depend on the need and requirements. Some commonly used methods include the use of charcoal tubes, passive dosimeters, Tedler gas sampling bags, detector tubes, photoionization detection units, infrared detection units and gas chromatographs. A number of these methods are described below. A. Charcoal Tube Sampling Procedures Qazi-Ketcham method ASTM-proposed method than −5 °C, and analysis within three weeks to prevent migration and sample loss. Two types of charcoal tubes are being tested—Pittsburgh Coconut-Based (PCB) and Columbia JXC charcoal. This collaborative study will give an indication of the inter- and intralaboratory precision and accuracy of the ASTM-proposed method. Several laboratories have considerable expertise using the Qazi-Ketcham and Dow methods. B. Passive Monitors—Ethylene oxide diffuses into the monitor and is collected in the sampling media. The DuPont Pro-Tek badge collects EtO in an absorbing solution, which is analyzed colorimetrically to determine the amount of EtO present. The 3M 350 badge collects the EtO on chemically treated charcoal. Other passive monitors are currently being developed and tested. Both 3M and DuPont have submitted data indicating their dosimeters meet the precision and accuracy requirements of the proposed ethylene oxide standard. Both presented laboratory validation data to 0.2 ppm (Exs. 11-65, 4-20, 108, 109, 130). C. Tedlar Gas Sampling Bags-Samples are collected by drawing a known volume of air into a Tedlar gas sampling bag. The ethylene oxide concentration is often determined on-site using a portable gas chromatograph or portable infrared spectometer. D. Detector tubes—A known volume of air is drawn through a detector tube using a small hand pump. The concentration of EtO is related to the length of stain developed in the tube. Detector tubes are economical, easy to use, and give an immediate readout. Unfortunately, partly because they are nonspecific, their accuracy is often questionable. Since the sample is taken over a short period of time, they may be useful for determining the source of leaks. E. Direct Reading Instruments—There are numerous types of direct reading instruments, each having its own strengths and weaknesses (Exs. 135B, 135C, 107, 11-78, 11-153). Many are relatively new, offering greater sensitivity and specificity. Popular ethylene oxide direct reading instruments include infrared detection units, photoionization detection units, and gas chromatographs. Portable infrared analyzers provide an immediate, continuous indication of a concentration value; making them particularly useful for locating high concentration pockets, in leak detection and in ambient air monitoring. In infrared detection units, the amount of infrared light absorbed by the gas being analyzed at selected infrared wavelengths is related to the concentration of a particular component. Various models have either fixed or variable infrared filters, differing cell pathlengths, and microcomputer controls for greater sensitivity, automation, and interference elimination. A fairly recent detection system is photoionization detection. The molecules are ionized by high energy ultraviolet light. The resulting current is measured. Since different substances have different ionization potentials, other organic compounds may be ionized. The lower the lamp energy, the better the selectivity. As a continuous monitor, photoionization detection can be useful for locating high concentration pockets, in leak detection, and continuous ambient air monitoring. Both portable and stationary gas chromatographs are available with various types of detectors, including photoionization detectors. A gas chromatograph with a photoionization detector retains the photionization sensitivity, but minimizes or eliminates interferences. For several GC/PID units, the sensitivity is in the 0.1-0.2 ppm EtO range. The GC/PID with microprocessors can sample up to 20 sample points sequentially, calculate and record data, and activate alarms or ventilation systems. Many are quite flexible and can be configured to meet the specific analysis needs for the workplace. DuPont presented their laboratory validation data of the accuracy of the Qazi-Ketcham charcoal tube, the PCB charcoal tube, Miran 103 IR analyzer, 3M #3550 monitor and the Du Pont C-70 badge. Quoting Elbert V. Kring: We also believe that OSHA's proposed accuracy in this standard is appropriate. At plus or minus 25 percent at one part per million, and plus or minus 35 percent below that. And, our data indicates there's only one monitoring method, right now, that we've tested thoroughly, that meets that accuracy requirements. That is the Du Pont Pro-Tek badge* * *. We also believe that this kind of data should be confirmed by another independent laboratory, using the same type dynamic chamber testing (Tr. 1470) Additional data by an independent laboratory following their exact protocol was not submitted. However, information was submitted on comparisons and precision and accuracy of those monitoring procedures which indicate far better precision and accuracy of those monitoring procedures than that obtained by Du Pont (Ex. 4-20, 130, 11-68, 11-133, 130, 135A). The accuracy of any method depends to a large degree upon the skills and experience of those who not only collect the samples but also those who analyze the samples. Even for methods that are collaboratively tested, some laboratories are closer to the true values than others. Some laboratories may meet the precision and accuracy requirements of the method; others may consistently far exceed them for the same method. [49 FR 25796, June 22, 1984, as amended at 50 FR 9801, Mar. 12, 1985; 50 FR 41494, Oct. 11, 1985; 51 FR 25053, July 10, 1986; 53 FR 11436, 11437, Apr. 6, 1988; 53 FR 27960, July 26, 1988; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1292, Jan. 8, 1998; 67 FR 67965, Nov. 7, 2002; 70 FR 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16672, 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50190, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75586, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33609, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17783, Mar. 26, 2012; 84 FR 21490, May 14, 2019] § 1910.1048 Formaldehyde. (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions. Action level Assistant Secretary Authorized person Director Emergency Employee exposure Formaldehyde (c) Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) TWA: (2) Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL): (d) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) Exception. (iii) When an employee's exposure is determined from representative sampling, the measurements used shall be representative of the employee's full shift or short-term exposure to formaldehyde, as appropriate. (iv) Representative samples for each job classification in each work area shall be taken for each shift unless the employer can document with objective data that exposure levels for a given job classification are equivalent for different work shifts. (2) Initial monitoring. (i) Unless the employer chooses to measure the exposure of each employee potentially exposed to formaldehyde, the employer shall develop a representative sampling strategy and measure sufficient exposures within each job classification for each workshift to correctly characterize and not underestimate the exposure of any employee within each exposure group. (ii) The initial monitoring process shall be repeated each time there is a change in production, equipment, process, personnel, or control measures which may result in new or additional exposure to formaldehyde. (iii) If the employer receives reports of signs or symptoms of respiratory or dermal conditions associated with formaldehyde exposure, the employer shall promptly monitor the affected employee's exposure. (3) Periodic monitoring. (ii) If the last monitoring results reveal employee exposure at or above the action level, the employer shall repeat monitoring of the employees at least every 6 months. (iii) If the last monitoring results reveal employee exposure at or above the STEL, the employer shall repeat monitoring of the employees at least once a year under worst conditions. (4) Termination of monitoring. (5) Accuracy of monitoring. (6) Employee notification of monitoring results. (7) Observation of monitoring. (ii) When observation of the monitoring of employee exposure to formaldehyde requires entry into an area where the use of protective clothing or equipment is required, the employer shall provide the clothing and equipment to the observer, require the observer to use such clothing and equipment, and assure that the observer complies with all other applicable safety and health procedures. (e) Regulated areas Signs. DANGER FORMALDEHYDE MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES SKIN, EYE, AND RESPIRATORY IRRITATION AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (ii) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this section: DANGER FORMALDEHYDE IRRITANT AND POTENTIAL CANCER HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (2) The employer shall limit access to regulated areas to authorized persons who have been trained to recognize the hazards of formaldehyde. (3) An employer at a multiemployer worksite who establishes a regulated area shall communicate the access restrictions and locations of these areas to other employers with work operations at that worksite. (f) Methods of compliance Engineering controls and work practices. (2) Exception. (g) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activities or vessel cleaning, for which the employer establishes that engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the PELs. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (ii) When employees use air-purifying respirators with chemical cartridges or canisters that do not contain end-of-service-life indicators approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, employers must replace these cartridges or canisters as specified by paragraphs (d)(3)(iii)(B)(1) and (B)(2) of 29 CFR 1910.134, or at the end of the workshift, whichever condition occurs first. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (B) Equip each air-purifying, full facepiece respirator with a canister or cartridge approved for protection against formaldehyde. (C) For escape, provide employees with one of the following respirator options: A self-contained breathing apparatus operated in the demand or pressure-demand mode; or a full facepiece respirator having a chin-style, or a front-or back-mounted industrial-size, canister or cartridge approved for protection against formaldehyde. (ii) Employers may substitute an air-purifying, half mask respirator for an air-purifying, full facepiece respirator when they equip the half mask respirator with a cartridge approved for protection against formaldehyde and provide the affected employee with effective gas-proof goggles. (iii) Employers must provide employees who have difficulty using negative pressure respirators with powered air-purifying respirators permitted for use under paragraph (g)(3)(i)(A) of this standard and that affords adequate protection against formaldehyde exposures. (h) Protective equipment and clothing. (1) Selection. (i) All contact of the eyes and skin with liquids containing 1 percent or more formaldehyde shall be prevented by the use of chemical protective clothing made of material impervious to formaldehyde and the use of other personal protective equipment, such as goggles and face shields, as appropriate to the operation. (ii) Contact with irritating or sensitizing materials shall be prevented to the extent necessary to eliminate the hazard. (iii) Where a face shield is worn, chemical safety goggles are also required if there is a danger of formaldehyde reaching the area of the eye. (iv) Full body protection shall be worn for entry into areas where concentrations exceed 100 ppm and for emergency reentry into areas of unknown concentration. (2) Maintenance of protective equipment and clothing. (ii) When formaldehyde-contaminated clothing and equipment is ventilated, the employer shall establish storage areas so that employee exposure is minimized. (A) Signs. DANGER FORMALDEHYDE-CONTAMINATED [CLOTHING] EQUIPMENT MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES SKIN, EYE AND RESPIRATORY IRRITATION DO NOT BREATHE VAPOR DO NOT GET ON SKIN (B) Labels. DANGER FORMALDEHYDE-CONTAMINATED [CLOTHING] EQUIPMENT MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES SKIN, EYE, AND RESPIRATORY IRRITATION DO NOT BREATHE VAPOR DO NOT GET ON SKIN (C) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)(A) of this section: DANGER FORMALDEHYDE-CONTAMINATED [CLOTHING] EQUIPMENT AVOID INHALATION AND SKIN CONTACT (D) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on containers of protective clothing and equipment in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraphs (h)(2)(ii)(B) of this section: DANGER FORMALDEHYDE-CONTAMINATED [CLOTHING] EQUIPMENT AVOID INHALATION AND SKIN CONTACT (iii) The employer shall assure that only persons trained to recognize the hazards of formaldehyde remove the contaminated material from the storage area for purposes of cleaning, laundering, or disposal. (iv) The employer shall assure that no employee takes home equipment or clothing that is contaminated with formaldehyde. (v) The employer shall repair or replace all required protective clothing and equipment for each affected employee as necessary to assure its effectiveness. (vi) The employer shall inform any person who launders, cleans, or repairs such clothing or equipment of formaldehyde's potentially harmful effects and of procedures to safely handle the clothing and equipment. (i) Hygiene protection. (2) If employees' skin may become spashed with solutions containing 1 percent or greater formaldehyde, for example, because of equipment failure or improper work practices, the employer shall provide conveniently located quick drench showers and assure that affected employees use these facilities immediately. (3) If there is any possibility that an employee's eyes may be splashed with solutions containing 0.1 percent or greater formaldehyde, the employer shall provide acceptable eyewash facilities within the immediate work area for emergency use. (j) Housekeeping. (1) Preventative maintenance of equipment, including surveys for leaks, shall be undertaken at regular intervals. (2) In work areas where spillage may occur, the employer shall make provisions to contain the spill, to decontaminate the work area, and to dispose of the waste. (3) The employer shall assure that all leaks are repaired and spills are cleaned promptly by employees wearing suitable protective equipment and trained in proper methods for cleanup and decontamination. (4) Formaldehyde-contaminated waste and debris resulting from leaks or spills shall be placed for disposal in sealed containers bearing a label warning of formaldehyde's presence and of the hazards associated with formaldehyde. The employer shall ensure that the labels are in accordance with paragraph (m) of this section. (k) Emergencies. (l) Medical surveillance Employees covered. (ii) The employer shall make medical surveillance available for employees who develop signs and symptoms of overexposure to formaldehyde and for all employees exposed to formaldehyde in emergencies. When determining whether an employee may be experiencing signs and symptoms of possible overexposure to formaldehyde, the employer may rely on the evidence that signs and symptoms associated with formaldehyde exposure will occur only in exceptional circumstances when airborne exposure is less than 0.1 ppm and when formaldehyde is present in material in concentrations less than 0.1 percent. (2) Examination by a physician. (3) Medical disease questionnaire. (i) Administration of a medical disease questionnaire, such as in appendix D, which is designed to elicit information on work history, smoking history, any evidence of eye, nose, or throat irritation; chronic airway problems or hyperreactive airway disease: allergic skin conditions or dermatitis; and upper or lower respiratory problems. (ii) A determination by the physician, based on evaluation of the medical disease questionnaire, of whether a medical examination is necessary for employees not required to wear respirators to reduce exposure to formaldehyde. (4) Medical examinations. (i) A physical examination with emphasis on evidence of irritation or sensitization of the skin and respiratory system, shortness of breath, or irritation of the eyes. (ii) Laboratory examinations for respirator wearers consisting of baseline and annual pulmonary function tests. As a minimum, these tests shall consist of forced vital capacity (FVC), forced expiratory volume in one second (FEV 1 (iii) Any other test which the examining physician deems necessary to complete the written opinion. (iv) Counseling of employees having medical conditions that would be directly or indirectly aggravated by exposure to formaldehyde on the increased risk of impairment of their health. (5) Examinations for employees exposed in an emergency. (i) The examination shall include a medical and work history with emphasis on any evidence of upper or lower respiratory problems, allergic conditions, skin reaction or hypersensitivity, and any evidence of eye, nose, or throat irritation. (ii) Other examinations shall consist of those elements considered appropriate by the examining physician. (6) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this standard and appendix A, C, D, and E; (ii) A description of the affected employee's job duties as they relate to the employee's exposure to formaldehyde; (iii) The representative exposure level for the employee's job assignment; (iv) Information concerning any personal protective equipment and respiratory protection used or to be used by the employee; and (v) Information from previous medical examinations of the affected employee within the control of the employer. (vi) In the event of a nonroutine examination because of an emergency, the employer shall provide to the physician as soon as possible: A description of how the emergency occurred and the exposure the victim may have received. (7) Physician's written opinion. (A) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any medical condition that would place the employee at an increased risk of material impairment of health from exposure to formaldehyde; (B) Any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure or changes in the use of personal protective equipment, including respirators; (C) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of any medical conditions which would be aggravated by exposure to formaldehyde, whether these conditions may have resulted from past formaldehyde exposure or from exposure in an emergency, and whether there is a need for further examination or treatment. (ii) The employer shall provide for retention of the results of the medical examination and tests conducted by the physician. (iii) The employer shall provide a copy of the physician's written opinion to the affected employee within 15 days of its receipt. (8) Medical removal. (ii) An employee's report of signs or symptoms of possible overexposure to formaldehyde shall be evaluated by a physician selected by the employer pursuant to paragraph (l)(3). If the physician determines that a medical examination is not necessary under paragraph (l)(3)(ii), there shall be a two-week evaluation and remediation period to permit the employer to ascertain whether the signs or symptoms subside untreated or with the use of creams, gloves, first aid treatment or personal protective equipment. Industrial hygiene measures that limit the employee's exposure to formaldehyde may also be implemented during this period. The employee shall be referred immediately to a physician prior to expiration of the two-week period if the signs or symptoms worsen. Earnings, seniority and benefits may not be altered during the two-week period by virtue of the report. (iii) If the signs or symptoms have not subsided or been remedied by the end of the two-week period, or earlier if signs or symptoms warrant, the employee shall be examined by a physician selected by the employer. The physician shall presume, absent contrary evidence, that observed dermal irritation or dermal sensitization are not attributable to formaldehyde when products to which the affected employee is exposed contain less than 0.1% formaldehyde. (iv) Medical examinations shall be conducted in compliance with the requirements of paragraph (l)(5) (i) and (ii). Additional guidelines for conducting medical exams are contained in appendix C. (v) If the physician finds that significant irritation of the mucosa of the eyes or of the upper airways, respiratory sensitization, dermal irritation, or dermal sensitization result from workplace formaldehyde exposure and recommends restrictions or removal, the employer shall promptly comply with the restrictions or recommendation of removal. In the event of a recommendation of removal, the employer shall remove the effected employee from the current formaldehyde exposure and if possible, transfer the employee to work having no or significantly less exposure to formaldehyde. (vi) When an employee is removed pursuant to paragraph (l)(8)(v), the employer shall transfer the employee to comparable work for which the employee is qualified or can be trained in a short period (up to 6 months), where the formaldehyde exposures are as low as possible, but not higher than the action level. The employeer shall maintain the employee's current earnings, seniority, and other benefits. If there is no such work available, the employer shall maintain the employee's current earnings, seniority and other benefits until such work becomes available, until the employee is determined to be unable to return to workplace formaldehyde exposure, until the employee is determined to be able to return to the original job status, or for six months, whichever comes first. (vii) The employer shall arrange for a follow-up medical examination to take place within six months after the employee is removed pursuant to this paragraph. This examination shall determine if the employee can return to the original job status, or if the removal is to be permanent. The physician shall make a decision within six months of the date the employee was removed as to whether the employee can be returned to the original job status, or if the removal is to be permanent. (viii) An employer's obligation to provide earnings, seniority and other benefits to a removed employee may be reduced to the extent that the employee receives compensation for earnings lost during the period of removal either from a publicly or employer-funded compensation program or from employment with another employer made possible by virtue of the employee's removal. (ix) In making determinations of the formaldehyde content of materials under this paragraph the employer may rely on objective data. (9) Multiple physician review. (ii) The employer shall promptly notify an employee of the right to seek a second medical opinion after each occasion that an initial physician conducts a medical examination or consultation for the purpose of medical removal or restriction. (iii) The employer may condition its participation in, and payment for, the multiple physician review mechanism upon the employee doing the following within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the notification of the right to seek a second medical opinion, or receipt of the initial physician's written opinion, whichever is later; (A) The employee informs the employer of the intention to seek a second medical opinion, and (B) The employee initiates steps to make an appointment with a second physician. (iv) If the findings, determinations or recommendations of the second physician differ from those of the initial physician, then the employer and the employee shall assure that efforts are made for the two physicians to resolve the disagreement. If the two physicians are unable to quickly resolve their disagreement, then the employer and the employee through their respective physicians shall designate a third physician who shall be a specialist in the field at issue: (A) To review the findings, determinations or recommendations of the prior physicians; and (B) To conduct such examinations, consultations, laboratory tests and discussions with the prior physicians as the third physician deems necessary to resolve the disagreement of the prior physicians. (v) In the alternative, the employer and the employee or authorized employee representative may jointly designate such third physician. (vi) The employer shall act consistent with the findings, determinations and recommendations of the third physician, unless the employer and the employee reach an agreement which is otherwise consistent with the recommendations of at least one of the three physicians. (m) Communication of hazards Hazard communication—General. (ii) In classifying the hazards of formaldehyde at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer; skin and respiratory sensitization; eye, skin and respiratory tract irritation; acute toxicity effects; and flammability. (iii) Employers shall include formaldehyde in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of formaldehyde and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (n) of this section. (iv) Paragraphs (m)(1)(i), (m)(1)(ii), and (m)(1)(iii) of this section apply to chemicals associated with formaldehyde gas, all mixtures or solutions composed of greater than 0.1 percent formaldehyde, and materials capable of releasing formaldehyde into the air at concentrations reaching or exceeding 0.1 ppm. (v) In making the determinations of anticipated levels of formaldehyde release, the employer may rely on objective data indicating the extent of potential formaldehyde release under reasonably foreseeable conditions of use. (2)(i) In addition to the requirements in paragraphs (m)(1) through (m)(1)(iv) of this section, for materials listed in paragraph (m)(1)(iv) capable of releasing formaldehyde at levels above 0.5 ppm, labels shall appropriately address all hazards as defined in paragraph (d) of § 1910.1200 and Appendices A and B to § 1910.1200, including cancer and respiratory sensitization, and shall contain the hazard statement “May Cause Cancer.” (ii) As a minimum, for all materials listed in paragraph (m)(1)(i) and (iv) of this section capable of releasing formaldehyde at levels of 0.1 ppm to 0.5 ppm, labels shall identify that the product contains formaldehyde; list the name and address of the responsible party; and state that physical and health hazard information is readily available from the employer and from safety data sheets. (iii) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the phrase “Potential Cancer Hazard” in lieu of “May Cause Cancer” as specified in paragraph (m)(2)(i) of this section. (n) Employee information and training Participation. (2) Frequency. (3) Training program. (i) A discussion of the contents of this regulation and the contents of the Material Safety Data Sheet. (ii) The purpose for and a description of the medical surveillance program required by this standard, including: (A) A description of the potential health hazards associated with exposure to formaldehyde and a description of the signs and symptoms of exposure to formaldehyde. (B) Instructions to immediately report to the employer the development of any adverse signs or symptoms that the employee suspects is attributable to formaldehyde exposure. (iii) Description of operations in the work area where formaldehyde is present and an explanation of the safe work practices appropriate for limiting exposure to formaldehyde in each job; (iv) The purpose for, proper use of, and limitations of personal protective clothing and equipment; (v) Instructions for the handling of spills, emergencies, and clean-up procedures; (vi) An explanation of the importance of engineering and work practice controls for employee protection and any necessary instruction in the use of these controls; and (vii) A review of emergency procedures including the specific duties or assignments of each employee in the event of an emergency. (4) Access to training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide, upon request, all training materials relating to the employee training program to the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (o) Recordkeeping Exposure measurements. (i) The date of measurement; (ii) The operation being monitored; (iii) The methods of sampling and analysis and evidence of their accuracy and precision; (iv) The number, durations, time, and results of samples taken; (v) The types of protective devices worn; and (vi) The names, job classifications, and exposure estimates of the employees whose exposures are represented by the actual monitoring results. (2) Exposure determinations. (3) Medical surveillance. (i) The name of the employee; (ii) The physician's written opinion; (iii) A list of any employee health complaints that may be related to exposure to formaldehyde; and (iv) A copy of the medical examination results, including medical disease questionnaires and results of any medical tests required by the standard or mandated by the examining physician. (4) Respirator fit testing. (ii) This record shall include: (A) A copy of the protocol selected for respirator fit testing. (B) A copy of the results of any fit testing performed. (C) The size and manufacturer of the types of respirators available for selection. (D) The date of the most recent fit testing, the name of each tested employee, and the respirator type and facepiece selected. (5) Record retention. (i) Exposure records and determinations shall be kept for at least 30 years. (ii) Medical records shall be kept for the duration of employment plus 30 years. (iii) Respirator fit testing records shall be kept until replaced by a more recent record. (6) Availability of records. (ii) The employer shall make employee exposure records, including estimates made from representative monitoring and available upon request for examination, and copying to the subject employee, or former employee, and employee representatives in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a)-(e) and (g)-(i). (iii) Employee medical records required by this standard shall be provided upon request for examination and coying, to the subject employee or former employee or to anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee or former employee in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a)-(e) and (g)-(i). Appendix A to § 1910.1048—Substance Technical Guidelines for Formalin The following Substance Technical Guideline for Formalin provides information on uninhibited formalin solution (37% formaldehyde, no methanol stabilizer). It is designed to inform employees at the production level of their rights and duties under the formaldehyde standard whether their job title defines them as workers or supervisors. Much of the information provided is general; however, some information is specific for formalin. When employee exposure to formaldehyde is from resins capable of releasing formaldehyde, the resin itself and other impurities or decomposition products may also be toxic, and employers should include this information as well when informing employees of the hazards associated with the materials they handle. The precise hazards associated with exposure to formaldehyde depend both on the form (solid, liquid, or gas) of the material and the concentration of formaldehyde present. For example, 37-50 percent solutions of formaldehyde present a much greater hazard to the skin and eyes from spills or splashes than solutions containing less than 1 percent formaldehyde. Individual Substance Technical Guidelines used by the employer for training employees should be modified to properly give information on the material actually being used. Substance Identification Chemical Name: Chemical Family: Chemical Formula: Molecular Weight: Chemical Abstracts Service Number (CAS Number): Synonyms: Components and Contaminants Percent: Percent: (Note—Inhibited solutions contain methanol.) Other Contaminants: Exposure Limits: OSHA TWA—0.75 ppm OSHA STEL—2 ppm Physical Data Description: Boiling point: Specific Gravity: 2 pH: Solubility in Water: Solvent Solubility: Vapor Density: Odor Threshold: Fire and Explosion Hazard Moderate fire and explosion hazard when exposed to heat or flame. The flash point of 37% formaldehyde solutions is above normal room temperature, but the explosion range is very wide, from 7 to 73% by volume in air. Reaction of formaldehyde with nitrogen dioxide, nitromethane, perchloric acid and aniline, or peroxyformic acid yields explosive compounds. Flash Point: Lower Explosion Limit: Upper Explosion Limit: Autoignition Temperature: Flammability (OSHA): Category 4 flammable liquid Extinguishing Media: Use of water spray to flush spills can also dilute the spill to produce nonflammable mixtures. Water runoff, however, should be contained for treatment. National Fire Protection Association Section 325M Designation: Health: Flammability: Reactivity: Reactivity Stability: Incompatibility (Materials to Avoid): Hazardous Combustion or Decomposition Products: Oxygen from the air can oxidize formaldehyde to formic acid, especially when heated. Formic acid is corrosive. Health Hazard Data Acute Effects of Exposure Ingestion (Swallowing): Inhalation (Breathing): Skin (Dermal): Eye Contact: Note. The perception of formaldehyde by odor and eye irritation becomes less sensitive with time as one adapts to formaldehyde. This can lead to overexposure if a worker is relying on formaldehyde's warning properties to alert him or her to the potential for exposure. Acute Animal Toxicity: Oral, Oral, Inhalation, Inhalation, Inhalation, Chronic Effects of Exposure Carcinogenicity: Mutagenicity: in vitro Toxicity: Emergency and First Aid Procedures Ingestion (Swallowing): Inhalation (Breathing): Skin Contact: Eye Contact: Emergency Procedures Emergencies: If a spill of appreciable quantity occurs, leave the area quickly unless you have specific emergency duties. Do not touch spilled material. Designated persons may stop the leak and shut off ignition sources if these procedures can be done without risk. Designated persons should isolate the hazard area and deny entry except for necessary people protected by suitable protective clothing and respirators adequate for the exposure. Use water spray to reduce vapors. Do not smoke, and prohibit all flames or flares in the hazard area. Special Firefighting Procedures: Spill, Leak, and Disposal Procedures Occupational Spill: Waste Disposal: Monitoring and Measurement Procedures Monitoring Requirements: Evaluation of 8-hour Exposure: Short-term Exposure Evaluation: Monitoring Techniques: Notification of Results: Protective Equipment and Clothing [Material impervious to formaldehyde is needed if the employee handles formaldehyde solutions of 1% or more. Other employees may also require protective clothing or equipment to prevent dermatitis.] Respiratory Protection: Protective Gloves: Eye Protection: Other Protective Equipment: If you are splashed with formaldehyde, use the emergency showers and eyewash fountains provided by your employer immediately to prevent serious injury. Report the incident to your supervisor and obtain necessary medical support. Entry Into an IDLH Atmosphere Enter areas where the formaldehyde concentration might be 100 ppm or more only with complete body protection including a self-contained breathing apparatus with a full facepiece operated in a positive pressure mode or a supplied air respirator with full facepiece and operated in a positive pressure mode. This equipment is essential to protect your life and health under such extreme conditions. Engineering Controls Ventilation is the most widely applied engineering control method for reducing the concentration of airborne substances in the breathing zones of workers. There are two distinct types of ventilation. Local Exhaust: General (Mechanical): Work Practices: Medical Surveillance Medical surveillance helps to protect employees' health. You are encouraged strongly to participate in the medical surveillance program. Your employer must make a medical surveillance program available at no expense to you and at a reasonable time and place if you are exposed to formaldehyde at concentrations above 0.5 ppm as an 8-hour average or 2 ppm over any 15-minute period. You will be offered medical surveillance at the time of your initial assignment and once a year afterward as long as your exposure is at least 0.5 ppm (TWA) or 2 ppm (STEL). Even if your exposure is below these levels, you should inform your employer if you have signs and symptoms that you suspect, through your training, are related to your formaldehyde exposure because you may need medical surveillance to determine if your health is being impaired by your exposure. The surveillance plan includes: (a) A medical disease questionnaire. (b) A physical examination if the physician determines this is necessary. If you are required to wear a respirator, your employer must offer you a physical examination and a pulmonary function test every year. The physician must collect all information needed to determine if you are at increased risk from your exposure to formaldehyde. At the physician's discretion, the medical examination may include other tests, such as a chest x-ray, to make this determination. After a medical examination the physician will provide your employer with a written opinion which includes any special protective measures recommended and any restrictions on your exposure. The physician must inform you of any medical conditions you have which would be aggravated by exposure to formaldehyde. All records from your medical examinations, including disease surveys, must be retained at your employer's expense. Emergencies If you are exposed to formaldehyde in an emergency and develop signs or symptoms associated with acute toxicity from formaldehyde exposure, your employer must provide you with a medical examination as soon as possible. This medical examination will include all steps necessary to stabilize your health. You may be kept in the hospital for observation if your symptoms are severe to ensure that any delayed effects are recognized and treated. Appendix B to § 1910.1048—Sampling Strategy and Analytical Methods for Formaldehyde To protect the health of employees, exposure measurements must be unbiased and representative of employee exposure. The proper measurement of employee exposure requires more than a token commitment on the part of the employer. OSHA's mandatory requirements establish a baseline; under the best of circumstances all questions regarding employee exposure will be answered. Many employers, however, will wish to conduct more extensive monitoring before undertaking expensive commitments, such as engineering controls, to assure that the modifications are truly necessary. The following sampling strategy, which was developed at NIOSH by Nelson A. Leidel, Kenneth A. Busch, and Jeremiah R. Lynch and described in NIOSH publication No. 77-173 (Occupational Exposure Sampling Strategy Manual) will assist the employer in developing a strategy for determining the exposure of his or her employees. There is no one correct way to determine employee exposure. Obviously, measuring the exposure of every employee exposed to formaldehyde will provide the most information on any given day. Where few employees are exposed, this may be a practical solution. For most employers, however, use of the following strategy will give just as much information at less cost. Exposure data collected on a single day will not automatically guarantee the employer that his or her workplace is always in compliance with the formaldehyde standard. This does not imply, however, that it is impossible for an employer to be sure that his or her worksite is in compliance with the standard. Indeed, a properly designed sampling strategy showing that all employees are exposed below the PELs, at least with a 95 percent certainty, is compelling evidence that the exposure limits are being achieved provided that measurements are conducted using valid sampling strategy and approved analytical methods. There are two PELs, the TWA concentration and the STEL. Most employers will find that one of these two limits is more critical in the control of their operations, and OSHA expects that the employer will concentrate monitoring efforts on the critical component. If the more difficult exposure is controlled, this information, along with calculations to support the assumptions, should be adequate to show that the other exposure limit is also being achieved. Sampling Strategy Determination of the Need for Exposure Measurements The employer must determine whether employees may be exposed to concentrations in excess of the action level. This determination becomes the first step in an employee exposure monitoring program that minimizes employer sampling burdens while providing adequate employee protection. If employees may be exposed above the action level, the employer must measure exposure. Otherwise, an objective determination that employee exposure is low provides adequate evidence that exposure potential has been examined. The employer should examine all available relevant information, eg. If the employer cannot determine that employee exposure is less than the action level and the STEL, employee exposure monitoring will have to be conducted. Workplace Material Survey The primary purpose of a survey of raw material is to determine if formaldehyde is being used in the work environment and if so, the conditions under which formaldehyde is being used. The first step is to tabulate all situations where formaldehyde is used in a manner such that it may be released into the workplace atmosphere or contaminate the skin. This information should be available through analysis of company records and information on the MSDSs available through provisions of this standard and the Hazard Communication standard. If there is an indication from materials handling records and accompanying MSDSs that formaldehyde is being used in the following types of processes or work operations, there may be a potential for releasing formaldehyde into the workplace atmosphere: (1) Any operation that involves grinding, sanding, sawing, cutting, crushing, screening, sieving, or any other manipulation of material that generates formaldehyde-bearing dust (2) Any processes where there have been employee complaints or symptoms indicative of exposure to formaldehyde (3) Any liquid or spray process involving formaldehyde (4) Any process that uses formaldehyde in preserved tissue (5) Any process that involves the heating of a formaldehyde-bearing resin. Processes and work operations that use formaldehyde in these manners will probably require further investigation at the worksite to determine the extent of employee monitoring that should be conducted. Workplace Observations To this point, the only intention has been to provide an indication as to the existence of potentially exposed employees. With this information, a visit to the workplace is needed to observe work operations, to identify potential health hazards, and to determine whether any employees may be exposed to hazardous concentrations of formaldehyde. In many circumstances, sources of formaldehyde can be identified through the sense of smell. However, this method of detection should be used with caution because of olfactory fatigue. Employee location in relation to source of formaldehyde is important in determining if an employee may be significantly exposed to formaldehyde. In most instances, the closer a worker is to the source, the higher the probability that a significant exposure will occur. Other characteristics should be considered. Certain high temperature operations give rise to higher evaporation rates. Locations of open doors and windows provide natural ventilation that tend to dilute formaldehyde emissions. General room ventilation also provides a measure of control. Calculation of Potential Exposure Concentrations By knowing the ventilation rate in a workplace and the quantity of formaldehyde generated, the employer may be able to determine by calculation if the PELs might be exceeded. To account for poor mixing of formaldehyde into the entire room, locations of fans and proximity of employees to the work operation, the employer must include a safety factor. If an employee is relatively close to a source, particularly if he or she is located downwind, a safety factor of 100 may be necessary. For other situations, a factor of 10 may be acceptable. If the employer can demonstrate through such calculations that employee exposure does not exceed the action level or the STEL, the employer may use this information as objective data to demonstrate compliance with the standard. Sampling Strategy Once the employer determines that there is a possibility of substantial employee exposure to formaldehyde, the employer is obligated to measure employee exposure. The next step is selection of a maximum risk employee. When there are different processes where employees may be exposed to formaldehyde, a maximum risk employee should be selected for each work operation. Selection of the maximum risk employee requires professional judgment. The best procedure for selecting the maximum risk employee is to observe employees and select the person closest to the source of formaldehyde. Employee mobility may affect this selection; eg. When many employees perform essentially the same task, a maximum risk employee cannot be selected. In this circumstance, it is necessary to resort to random sampling of the group of workers. The objective is to select a subgroup of adequate size so that there is a high probability that the random sample will contain at least one worker with high exposure if one exists. The number of persons in the group influences the number that need to be sampled to ensure that at least one individual from the highest 10 percent exposure group is contained in the sample. For example, to have 90 percent confidence in the results, if the group size is 10, nine should be sampled; for 50, only 18 need to be sampled. If measurement shows exposure to formaldehyde at or above the action level or the STEL, the employer needs to identify all other employees who may be exposed at or above the action level or STEL and measure or otherwise accurately characterize the exposure of these employees. Whether representative monitoring or random sampling are conducted, the purpose remains the same—to determine if the exposure of any employee is above the action level. If the exposure of the most exposed employee is less than the action level and the STEL, regardless of how the employee is identified, then it is reasonable to assume that measurements of exposure of the other employees in that operation would be below the action level and the STEL. Exposure Measurements There is no “best” measurement strategy for all situations. Some elements to consider in developing a strategy are: (1) Availability and cost of sampling equipment (2) Availability and cost of analytic facilities (3) Availability and cost of personnel to take samples (4) Location of employees and work operations (5) Intraday and interday variations in the process (6) Precision and accuracy of sampling and analytic methods, and (7) Number of samples needed. Samples taken for determining compliance with the STEL differ from those that measure the TWA concentration in important ways. STEL samples are best taken in a nonrandom fashion using all available knowledge relating to the area, the individual, and the process to obtain samples during periods of maximum expected concentrations. At least three measurements on a shift are generally needed to spot gross errors or mistakes; however, only the highest value represents the STEL. If an operation remains constant throughout the workshift, a much greater number of samples would need to be taken over the 32 discrete nonoverlapping periods in an 8-hour workshift to verify compliance with a STEL. If employee exposure is truly uniform throughout the workshift, however, an employer in compliance with the l ppm TWA would be in compliance with the 2 ppm STEL, and this determination can probably be made using objective data. Need To Repeat the Monitoring Strategy Interday and intraday fluctuations in employee exposure are mostly influenced by the physical processes that generate formaldehyde and the work habits of the employee. Hence, in-plant process variations influence the employer's determination of whether or not additional controls need to be imposed. Measurements that employee exposure is low on a day that is not representative of worst conditions may not provide sufficient information to determine whether or not additional engineering controls should be installed to achieve the PELs. The person responsible for conducting sampling must be aware of systematic changes which will negate the validity of the sampling results. Systematic changes in formaldehyde exposure concentration for an employee can occur due to: (1) The employee changing patterns of movement in the workplace (2) Closing of plant doors and windows (3) Changes in ventilation from season to season (4) Decreases in ventilation efficiency or abrupt failure of engineering control equipment (5) Changes in the production process or work habits of the employee. Any of these changes, if they may result in additional exposure that reaches the next level of action ( i.e. A number of methods are suitable for measuring employee exposure to formaldehyde or for characterizing emissions within the worksite. The preamble to this standard describes some methods that have been widely used or subjected to validation testing. A detailed analytical procedure derived from the OSHA Method 52 for acrolein and formaldehyde is presented below for informational purposes. Inclusion of OSHA's method in this appendix in no way implies that it is the only acceptable way to measure employee exposure to formaldehyde. Other methods that are free from significant interferences and that can determine formaldehyde at the permissible exposure limits within ±25 percent of the “true” value at the 95 percent confidence level are also acceptable. Where applicable, the method shou1d a1so be capab1e of measuring formaldehyde at the action level to ±35 percent of the “true” value with a 95 percent confidence level. OSHA encourages emp1oyers to choose methods that will be best for their individual needs. The employer must exercise caution, however, in choosing an appropriate method since some techniques suffer from interferences that are likely to be present in workplaces of certain industry sectors where formaldehyde is used. OSHA's Analytical Laboratory Method Method No: Matrix: Target Concentration: 3 Procedures: Recommended Sampling Rate and Air Volumes: Reliable Quantitation Limit: 3 Standard Error of Estimate at the Target Concentration: Status of the Method: Date: 1. General Discussion 1.1 Background: This work was undertaken to resolve the sample stability problems associated with acrolein and also to eliminate the need to use bubb1ers to sample formaldehyde. A goal of this work was to develop and/or to evaluate a common sampling and analytical procedure for acrolein and formaldehyde. NIOSH has developed independent methodologies for acrolein and formaldehyde which recommend the use of reagent-coated adsorbent tubes to collect the aldehydes as stable derivatives. The formaldehyde sampling tubes contain Chromosorb 102 adsorbent coated with N-benzylethanolamine (BEA) which reacts with formaldehyde vapor to form a stable oxazolidine compound. The acrolein sampling tubes contain XAD-2 adsorbent coated with 2-(hydroxymethyl)piperidine (2-HMP) which reacts with acrolein vapor to form a different, stable oxazolidine derivative. Acrolein does not appear to react with BEA to give a suitable reaction product. Therefore, the formaldehyde procedure cannot provide a common method for both aldehydes. However, formaldehyde does react with 2-HMP to form a very suitable reaction product. It is the quantitative reaction of acrolein and formaldehyde with 2-HMP that provides the basis for this evaluation. This sampling and analytical procedure is very similar to the method recommended by NIOSH for acrolein. Some changes in the NIOSH methodology were necessary to permit the simultaneous determination of both aldehydes and also to accommodate OSHA laboratory equipment and analytical techniques. 1.2 Limit-defining parameters: 1.2.1 Detection limits of the analytical procedure: 1.2.2 Detection limits of the overall procedure: 3 1.2.3 Reliable quantitation limits: 3 The reliable quantitation limit and detection limits reported in the method are based upon optimization of the instrument for the smallest possible amount of analyte. When the target concentration of an analyte is exceptionally higher than these limits, they may not be attainable at the routine operating parameters. 1.2.4 Sensitivity: 1.2.5 Recovery: 1.2.6 Precision (analytical method only): 1.2.7 Precision (overall procedure): 1.2.8 Reproducibility: 1.3 Advantages: 1.3.1 The sampling and analytical procedures permit the simultaneous determination of acrolein and formaldehyde. 1.3.2 Samples are stable following storage at ambient temperature for at least 18 days. 1.4 Disadvantages: 2. Sampling Procedure 2.1 Apparatus: 2.1.1 Samples are collected by use of a personal sampling pump that can be calibrated to within ±5% of the recommended 0.1 L/min sampling rate with the sampling tube in line. 2.1.2 Samples are collected with laboratory prepared sampling tubes. The sampling tube is constructed of silane treated glass and is about 8-cm long. The ID is 4 mm and the OD is 6 mm. One end of the tube is tapered so that a glass wool end plug will hold the contents of the tube in place during sampling. The other end of the sampling tube is open to its full 4-mm ID to facilitate packing of the tube. Both ends of the tube are fire-polished for safety. The tube is packed with a 75-mg backup section, located nearest the tapered end and a 150-mg sampling section of pretreated XAD-2 adsorbent which has been coated with 2-HMP. The two sections of coated adsorbent are separated and retained with small plugs of silanized glass wool. Following packing, the sampling tubes are sealed with two 7/32 2.1.3 Sampling tubes, similar to those recommended in this method, are marketed by Supelco, Inc. These tubes were not available when this work was initiated; therefore, they were not evaluated. 2.2 Reagents: 2.3 Technique: 2.3.1 Properly label the sampling tube before sampling and then remove the plastic end caps. 2.3.2 Attach the sampling tube to the pump using a section of flexible plastic tubing such that the large, front section of the sampling tube is exposed directly to the atmosphere. Do not place any tubing ahead of the sampling tube. The sampling tube should be attached in the worker's breathing zone in a vertical manner such that it does not impede work performance. 2.3.3 After sampling for the appropriate time, remove the sampling tube from the pump and then seal the tube with plastic end caps. 2.3.4 Include at least one blank for each sampling set. The blank should be handled in the same manner as the samples with the exception that air is not drawn through it. 2.3.5 List any potential interferences on the sample data sheet. 2.4 Breakthrough: 2.4.1 Breakthrough was defined as the relative amount of analyte found on a backup sample in relation to the total amount of analyte collected on the sampling train. 2.4.2 For formaldehyde collected from test atmospheres containing 6 times the PEL, the average 5% breakthrough air volume was 41 L. The sampling rate was 0.1 L/min and the average mass of formaldehyde collected was 250 µg. 2.5 Desorption Efficiency: 2.6 Recommended Air Volume and Sampling Rate: 2.6.1 The recommended air volume for formaldehyde is 24 L. 2.6.2 The recommended sampling rate is 0.1 L/min. 2.7 Interferences: 2.7.1 Any collected substance that is capable of reacting 2-HMP and thereby depleting the derivatizing agent is a potential interference. Chemicals which contain a carbonyl group, such as acetone, may be capable or reacting with 2-HMP. 2.7.2 There are no other known interferences to the sampling method. 2.8 Safety Precautions: 2.8.1 Attach the sampling equipment to the worker in such a manner that it well not interfere with work performance or safety. 2.8.2 Follow all safety practices that apply to the work area being sampled. 3. Analytical Procedure 3.1 Apparatus: 3.1.1 A gas chromatograph (GC), equipped with a nitrogen selective detector. A Hewlett-Packard Model 5840A GC fitted with a nitrogen-phosphorus flame ionization detector (NPD) was used for this evaluation. Injections were performed using a Hewlett-Packard Model 7671A automatic sampler. 3.1.2 A GC column capable of resolving the analytes from any interference. A 6 ft × 1/4 3.1.3 Vials, glass 2-mL with Teflon-lined caps. 3.1.4 Volumetric flasks, pipets, and syringes for preparing standards, making dilutions, and performing injections. 3.2 Reagents: 3.2.1 Toluene and dimethylformamide. Burdick and Jackson solvents were used in this evaluation. 3.2.2 Helium, hydrogen, and air, GC grade. 3.2.3 Formaldehyde, 37%, by weight, in water. Aldrich Chemical, ACS Reagent Grade formaldehyde was used in this evaluation. 3.2.4 Amberlite XAD-2 adsorbent coated with 2-(hydroxymethyl—piperidine (2-HMP), 10% by weight (Section 4). 3.2.5 Desorbing solution with internal standard. This solution was prepared by adding 20 µL of dimethylformamide to 100 mL of toluene. 3.3 Standard preparation: 3.3.1 Formaldehyde: 3.3.2 It is recommended that analytical standards be prepared about 16 hours before the air samples are to be analyzed in order to ensure the complete reaction of the analytes with 2-HMP. However, rate studies have shown the reaction to be greater than 95% complete after 4 hours. Therefore, one or two standards can be analyzed after this reduced time if sample results are outside the concentration range of the prepared standards. 3.3.3 Place 150-mg portions of coated XAD-2 adsorbent, from the same lot number as used to collect the air samples, into each of several glass 2-mL vials. Seal each vial with a Teflon-lined cap. 3.3.4 Prepare fresh analytical standards each day by injecting appropriate amounts of the diluted analyte directly onto 150-mg portions of coated adsorbent. It is permissible to inject both acrolein and formaldehyde on the same adsorbent portion. Allow the standards to stand at room temperature. A standard, approximately the target levels, was prepared by injecting 11 µL of the acrolein and 12 µL of the formaldehyde stock standards onto a single coated XAD-2 adsorbent portion. 3.3.5 Prepare a sufficient number of standards to generate the calibration curves. Analytical standard concentrations should bracket sample concentrations. Thus, if samples are not in the concentration range of the prepared standards, additional standards must be prepared to determine detector response. 3.3.7 Desorb the standards in the same manner as the samples following the 16-hour reaction time. 3.4 Sample preparation: 3.4.1 Transfer the 150-mg section of the sampling tube to a 2-mL vial. Place the 75-mg section in a separate vial. If the glass wool plugs contain a significant number of adsorbent beads, place them with the appropriate sampling tube section. Discard the glass wool plugs if they do not contain a significant number of adsorbent beads. 3.4.2 Add 1 mL of desorbing solution to each vial. 3.4.3 Seal the vials with Teflon-lined caps and then allow them to desorb for one hour. Shake the vials by hand with vigorous force several times during the desorption time. 3.4.4 Save the used sampling tubes to be cleaned and recycled. 3.5 Analysis: 3.5.1 GC Conditions Column Temperature: Bi-level temperature program—First level: 100 to 140 °C at 4 °C/min following completion of the first level. Second level: 140 to 180 °C at 20 °C/min following completion of the first level. Isothermal period: Hold column at 180 °C until the recorder pen returns to baseline (usually about 25 min after injection). Injector temperature: Helium flow rate: Injection volume: GC column: 1/4 NPD conditions: Hydrogen flow rate: 3 mL/min Air flow rate: 50 mL/min Detector temperature: 275 °C 3.5.2 Chromatogram: 3.5.3 Use a suitable method, such as electronic integration, to measure detector response. 3.5.4 Use an internal standard method to prepare the calibration curve with several standard solutions of different concentrations. Prepare the calibration curve daily. Program the integrator to report results in µg/mL. 3.5.5 Bracket sample concentrations with standards. 3.6 Interferences (Analytical) 3.6.1 Any compound with the same general retention time as the analytes and which also gives a detector response is a potential interference. Possible interferences should be reported to the laboratory with submitted samples by the industrial hygienist. 3.6.2 GC parameters (temperature, column, etc.) may be changed to circumvent interferences. 3.6.3 A useful means of structure designation is GC/MS. It is recommended this procedure be used to confirm samples whenever possible. 3.6.4 The coated adsorbent usually contains a very small amount of residual formaldehyde derivative (Section 4.8). 3.7 Calculations: 3.7.1 Results are obtained by use of calibration curves. Calibration curves are prepared by plotting detector response against concentration for each standard. The best line through the data points is determined by curve fitting. 3.7.2 The concentration, in µg/mL, for a particular sample is determined by comparing its detector response to the calibration curve. If either of the analytes is found on the backup section, it is added to the amount found on the front section. Blank corrections should be performed before adding the results together. 3.7.3 The acrolein and/or formaldehyde air concentration can be expressed using the following equation: mg/m 3 where A = µg/mL from 3.7.2, B = desorption volume, and C = L of air sampled. No desorption efficiency corrections are required. 3.7.4 The following equation can be used to convert results in mg/m 3 ppm = (mg/m 3 where mg/m 3 4. Backup Data 4.1 Backup data on detection limits, reliable quantitation limits, sensitivity and precision of the analytical method, breakthrough, desorption efficiency, storage, reproducibility, and generation of test atmospheres are available in OSHA Method 52, developed by the Organics Methods Evaluation Branch, OSHA Analytical Laboratory, Salt Lake City, Utah. 4.2 Procedure to Coat XAD-2 Adsorbent with 2-HMP: 4.2.1 Apparatus: 4.2.2 Reagents: 4.2.2.1 Methanol, isooctane, and toluene. 4.2.2.2 2-(Hydroxymethyl)piperidine. 4.2.2.3 Amberlite XAD-2 non-ionic polymeric adsorbent, 20 to 60 mesh, Aldrich Chemical XAD-2 was used in this evaluation. 4.2.3 Procedure: The coated adsorbent is now ready to be packed into sampling tubes. The sampling tubes should be stored in a sealed container to prevent contamination. Sampling tubes should be stored in the dark at room temperature. The sampling tubes should be segregated by coated adsorbent lot number. A sufficient amount of each lot number of coated adsorbent should be retained to prepare analytical standards for use with air samples from that lot number. 4.3 A Procedure to Determine Formaldehyde by Acid Titration: Place 50 mL of 0.1 M sodium sulfite and three drops of thymophthalein indicator into a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask. Titrate the contents of the flask to a colorless endpoint with 0.1 N HCl (usually one or two drops is sufficient). Transfer 10 mL of the formaldehyde/methanol solution (prepared in 3.3.1) into the same flask and titrate the mixture with 0.1 N HCl, again, to a colorless endpoint. The formaldehyde concentration of the standard may be calculated by the following equation: This method is based on the quantitative liberation of sodium hydroxide when formaldehyde reacts with sodium sulfite to form the formaldehyde-bisulfite addition product. The volume of sample may be varied depending on the formaldehyde content but the solution to be titrated must contain excess sodium sulfite. Formaldehyde solutions containing substantial amounts of acid or base must be neutralized before analysis. Appendix C to § 1910.1048—Medical Surveillance—Formaldehyde I. Health Hazards The occupational health hazards of formaldehyde are primarily due to its toxic effects after inhalation, after direct contact with the skin or eyes by formaldehyde in liquid or vapor form, and after ingestion. II. Toxicology A. Acute Effects of Exposure 1. Inhalation (breathing): 2. Eye contact: 3. Skin contact: 4. Ingestion: B. Chronic Effects of Exposure Long term exposure to formaldehyde has been shown to be associated with an increased risk of cancer of the nose and accessory sinuses, nasopharyngeal and oropharyngeal cancer, and lung cancer in humans. Animal experiments provide conclusive evidence of a causal relationship between nasal cancer in rats and formaldehyde exposure. Concordant evidence of carcinogenicity includes DNA binding, genotoxicity in short-term tests, and cytotoxic changes in the cells of the target organ suggesting both preneoplastic changes and a dose-rate effect. Formaldehyde is a complete carcinogen and appears to exert an effect on at least two stages of the carcinogenic process. III. Surveillance considerations A. History 1. Medical and occupational history: 2. Respiratory history: In addition, generalized airway hypersensitivity can result from exposures to a single sensitizing agent. The examiner should, therefore, elicit any prior history of exposure to pulmonary irritants, and any short- or long-term effects of that exposure. Smoking is known to decrease mucociliary clearance of materials deposited during respiration in the nose and upper airways. This may increase a worker's exposure to inhaled materials such as formaldehyde vapor. In addition, smoking is a potential confounding factor in the investigation of any chronic respiratory disease, including cancer. For these reasons, a complete smoking history should be obtained. 3. Skin Disorders: 4. History of atopic or allergic diseases: 5. Use of disease questionnaires: B. Physical Examination 1. Mucosa of eyes and airways: 2. Pulmonary system: 3. Skin: C. Additional Examinations or Tests The physician may deem it necessary to perform other medical examinations or tests as indicated. The standard provides a mechanism whereby these additional investigations are covered under the standard for occupational exposure to formaldehyde. D. Emergencies The examination of workers exposed in an emergency should be directed at the organ systems most likely to be affected. Much of the content of the examination will be similar to the periodic examination unless the patient has received a severe acute exposure requiring immediate attention to prevent serious consequences. If a severe overexposure requiring medical intervention or hospitalization has occurred, the physician must be alert to the possibility of delayed symptoms. Followup nonroutine examinations may be necessary to assure the patient's well-being. E. Employer Obligations The employer is required to provide the physician with the following information: A copy of this standard and appendices A, C, D, and E; a description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to his or her exposure concentration; an estimate of the employee's exposure including duration (e.g., 15 hr/wk, three 8-hour shifts, full-time); a description of any personal protective equipment, including respirators, used by the employee; and the results of any previous medical determinations for the affected employee related to formaldehyde exposure to the extent that this information is within the employer's control. F. Physician's Obligations The standard requires the employer to obtain a written statement from the physician. This statement must contain the physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any medical condition which would place him or her at increased risk of impaired health from exposure to formaldehyde or use of respirators, as appropriate. The physician must also state his opinion regarding any restrictions that should be placed on the employee's exposure to formaldehyde or upon the use of protective clothing or equipment such as respirators. If the employee wears a respirator as a result of his or her exposure to formaldehyde, the physician's opinion must also contain a statement regarding the suitability of the employee to wear the type of respirator assigned. Finally, the physician must inform the employer that the employee has been told the results of the medical examination and of any medical conditions which require further explanation or treatment. This written opinion is not to contain any information on specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure to formaldehyde. The purpose in requiring the examining physician to supply the employer with a written opinion is to provide the employer with a medical basis to assist the employer in placing employees initially, in assuring that their health is not being inpaired by formaldehyde, and to assess the employee's ability to use any required protective equipment. Appendix D to § 1910.1048—Nonmandatory Medical Disease Questionnaire [57 FR 22310, May 27, 1992; 57 FR 27161, June 18, 1992; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1292, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 20099, Apr. 23, 1998; 70 FR 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16672, 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50190, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75586, Dec. 12, 2008; 77 FR 17784, Mar. 26, 2012; 84 FR 21518, May 14, 2019] § 1910.1050 Methylenedianiline. (a) Scope and application. (2) Except as provided in paragraphs (a)(8) and (e)(5) of this section, this section does not apply to the processing, use, and handling of products containing MDA where initial monitoring indicates that the product is not capable of releasing MDA in excess of the action level under the expected conditions of processing, use, and handling which will cause the greatest possible release; and where no “dermal exposure to MDA” can occur. (3) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(8) of this section, this section does not apply to the processing, use, and handling of products containing MDA where objective data are reasonably relied upon which demonstrate the product is not capable of releasing MDA under the expected conditions of processing, use, and handling which will cause the greatest possible release; and where no “dermal exposure to MDA” can occur. (4) This section does not apply to the storage, transportation, distribution or sale of MDA in intact containers sealed in such a manner as to contain the MDA dusts, vapors, or liquids, except for the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1200 and paragraph (d) of this section. (5) This section does not apply to the construction industry as defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b). (Exposure to MDA in the construction industry is covered by 29 CFR 1926.60). (6) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(8) of this section, this section does not apply to materials in any form which contain less than 0.1% MDA by weight or volume. (7) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(8) of this section, this section does not apply to “finished articles containing MDA.” (8) Where products containing MDA are exempted under paragraphs (a)(2) through (a)(7) of this section, the employer shall maintain records of the initial monitoring results or objective data supporting that exemption and the basis for the employer's reliance on the data, as provided in the recordkeeping provision of paragraph (n) of this section. (b) Definitions. Action level Assistant Secretary Authorized person Container Dermal exposure to MDA (i) Liquid, powdered, granular, or flaked mixtures containing MDA in concentrations greater than 0.1% by weight or volume; and (ii) Materials other than “finished articles” containing MDA in concentrations greater than 0.1% by weight or volume. Director Emergency Employee exposure Finished article containing MDA (i) Which is formed to a specific shape or design during manufacture; (ii) Which has end use function(s) dependent in whole or part upon its shape or design during end use; and (iii) Where applicable, is an item which is fully cured by virtue of having been subjected to the conditions (temperature, time) necessary to complete the desired chemical reaction. 4,4′ Methylenedianiline or MDA Regulated areas STEL (c) Permissible exposure limits (PEL). (d) Emergency situations Written plan. (ii) The plan shall specifically provide that employees engaged in correcting emergency conditions shall be equipped with the appropriate personal protective equipment and clothing as required in paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section until the emergency is abated. (iii) The plan shall specifically include provisions for alerting and evacuating affected employees as well as the elements prescribed in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39, “Emergency action plans” and “Fire prevention plans,” respectively. (2) Alerting employees. (e) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) Representative employee exposure shall be determined on the basis of one or more samples representing full shift exposure for each shift for each job classification in each work area where exposure to MDA may occur. (iii) Where the employer can document that exposure levels are equivalent for similar operations in different work shifts, the employer shall only be required to determine representative employee exposure for that operation during one shift. (2) Initial monitoring. (3) Periodic monitoring and monitoring frequency. (ii) If the monitoring required by paragraph (e)(2) of this section reveals employee exposure above the PELs, the employer shall repeat such monitoring for each such employee at least every three (3) months. (iii) The employer may alter the monitoring schedule from every three months to every six months for any employee for whom two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart indicate that the employee exposure has decreased to below the TWA but above the action level. (4) Termination of monitoring. (ii) If the periodic monitoring required by paragraph (e)(3) of this section reveals that employee exposures, as indicated by at least two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level the employer may discontinue the monitoring for that employee, except as otherwise required by paragraph (e)(5) of this section. (5) Additional monitoring. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. (7) Employee notification of monitoring results. (ii) The written notification required by paragraph (e)(7)(i) of this section shall contain the corrective action being taken by the employer to reduce the employee exposure to or below the PELs, wherever the PELs are exceeded. (8) Visual monitoring. (i) Determine the source of exposure; (ii) Implement protective measures to correct the hazard; and (iii) Maintain records of the corrective actions in accordance with paragraph (n) of this section. (f) Regulated areas Establishment Airborne exposures. (ii) Dermal exposures. (2) Demarcation. (3) Access. (4) Personal protective equipment and clothing. (5) Prohibited activities. (g) Methods of compliance Engineering controls and work practices. (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering controls and work practices which can be instituted are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the PELs, the employer shall use them to reduce employee exposure to the lowest levels achievable by these controls and shall supplement them by the use of respiratory protective devices which comply with the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section. (2) Compliance program. (ii) Upon request this written program shall be furnished for examination and copying to the Assistant Secretary, the Director, affected employees, and designated employee representatives. The employer shall review and, as necessary, update such plans at least once every 12 months to make certain they reflect the current status of the program. (3) Employee rotation. (h) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Work operations for which the employer establishes that engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (B) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators. (C) For escape, provide employees with one of the following respirator options: Any self-contained breathing apparatus with a full facepiece or hood operated in the positive-pressure or continuous-flow mode; or a full facepiece air-purifying respirator. (D) Provide a combination HEPA filter and organic vapor canister or cartridge with powered or non-powered air-purifying respirators when MDA is in liquid form or used as part of a process requiring heat. (ii) Any employee who cannot use a negative-pressure respirator must be given the option of using a positive-pressure respirator, or a supplied-air respirator operated in the continuous-flow or pressure-demand mode. (i) Protective work clothing and equipment Provision and use. (i) Aprons, coveralls or other full-body work clothing; (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and foot coverings; and (iii) Face shields, chemical goggles; or (iv) Other appropriate protective equipment which comply with § 1910.133. (2) Removal and storage. (ii) The employer shall ensure that, during their work shift, employees remove all other MDA-contaminated protective work clothing or equipment before leaving a regulated area. (iii) The employer shall ensure that no employee takes MDA-contaminated work clothing or equipment out of the change room, except those employees authorized to do so for the purpose of laundering, maintenance, or disposal. (iv) MDA-contaminated work clothing or equipment shall be placed and stored in closed containers which prevent dispersion of the MDA outside the container. (v) Containers of MDA-contaminated protective work clothing or equipment which are to be taken out of change rooms or the workplace for cleaning, maintenance, or disposal, shall bear labels warning of the hazards of MDA. (3) Cleaning and replacement. (ii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of MDA from protective work clothing or equipment by blowing, shaking, or any methods which allow MDA to re-enter the workplace. (iii) The employer shall ensure that laundering of MDA-contaminated clothing shall be done so as to prevent the release of MDA in the workplace. (iv) Any employer who gives MDA-contaminated clothing to another person for laundering shall inform such person of the requirement to prevent the release of MDA. (v) The employer shall inform any person who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment contaminated with MDA of the potentially harmful effects of exposure. (vi) MDA-contaminated clothing shall be transported in properly labeled, sealed, impermeable bags or containers. (j) Hygiene facilities and practices Change rooms. (ii) Change rooms must be equipped with separate storage for protective clothing and equipment and for street clothes which prevents MDA contamination of street clothes. (2) Showers. (A) Shower facilities required by this paragraph shall comply with § 1910.141(d)(3). (B) The employer shall ensure that employees who are required to shower pursuant to the provisions contained herein do not leave the workplace wearing any protective clothing or equipment worn during the work shift. (ii) Where dermal exposure to MDA occurs, the employer shall ensure that materials spilled or deposited on the skin are removed as soon as possible by methods which do not facilitate the dermal absorption of MDA. (3) Lunch facilities Availability and construction. (B) Lunch areas located within the workplace and in areas where there is the potential for airborne exposure to MDA at or above the PEL shall have a positive pressure, temperature controlled, filtered air supply. (C) Lunch areas may not be located in areas within the workplace where the potential for dermal exposure to MDA exists. (ii) The employer shall ensure that employees who have been subjected to dermal exposure to MDA or who have been exposed to MDA above the PEL wash their hands and faces with soap and water prior to eating, drinking, smoking, or applying cosmetics. (iii) The employer shall ensure that employees exposed to MDA do not enter lunch facilities with MDA-contaminated protective work clothing or equipment. (k) Communication of hazards Hazard communication—general. (i) Chemical manufacturers, importers, distributors and employers shall comply with all requirements of the Hazard Communication Standard (HCS) (§ 1910.1200) for MDA. (ii) In classifying the hazards of MDA at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer; liver effects; and skin sensitization. (iii) Employers shall include MDA in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of MDA and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (k)(4) of this section. (2) Signs and labels Signs. DANGER MDA MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (B) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (k)(2)(i)(A) of this section: DANGER MDA MAY CAUSE CANCER LIVER TOXIN AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED TO BE WORN IN THIS AREA (ii) Labels. (A) For pure MDA: DANGER CONTAINS MDA MAY CAUSE CANCER LIVER TOXIN (B) For mixtures containing MDA: DANGER CONTAINS MDA CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH MAY CAUSE CANCER LIVER TOXIN (3) Safety data sheets (SDS). (4) Information and training. (ii) In addition to the information required under 29 CFR 1910.1200, the employer shall: (A) Provide an explanation of the contents of this section, including appendices A and B, and indicate to employees where a copy of the standard is available; (B) Describe the medical surveillance program required under paragraph (m) of this section, and explain the information contained in appendix C; and (C) Describe the medical removal provision required under paragraph (m) of this section. (5) Access to training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide to the Assistant Secretary and the Director, upon request, all information and training materials relating to the employee information and training program. (l) Housekeeping. (2) The employer shall institute a program for detecting MDA leaks, spills, and discharges, including regular visual inspections of operations involving liquid or solid MDA. (3) All leaks shall be repaired and liquid or dust spills cleaned up promptly. (4) Surfaces contaminated with MDA may not be cleaned by the use of compressed air. (5) Shoveling, dry sweeping, and other methods of dry clean-up of MDA may be used where HEPA-filtered vacuuming and/or wet cleaning are not feasible or practical. (6) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment, and clothing contaminated with MDA shall be collected and disposed of in a manner to prevent the re-entry of MDA into the workplace. (m) Medical surveillance General. (A) Employees exposed at or above the action level for 30 or more days per year; (B) Employees who are subject to dermal exposure to MDA for 15 or more days per year; (C) Employees who have been exposed in an emergency situation; (D) Employees whom the employer, based on results from compliance with paragraph (e)(8) of this section, has reason to believe are being dermally exposed; and (E) Employees who show signs or symptoms of MDA exposure. (ii) The employer shall ensure that all medical examinations and procedures are performed by, or under the supervision of, a licensed physician, at a reasonable time and place, and provided without cost to the employee. (2) Initial examinations. (A) A detailed history which includes: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) A physical examination which includes all routine physical examination parameters, skin examination, and signs of liver disease. (C) Laboratory tests including: ( 1 ( 2 (D) Additional tests as necessary in the opinion of the physician. (ii) No initial medical examination is required if adequate records show that the employee has been examined in accordance with the requirements of this section within the previous six months prior to the effective date of this standard or prior to the date of initial assignment. (3) Periodic examinations. (A) A brief history regarding any new exposure to potential liver toxins, changes in drug, tobacco, and alcohol intake, and the appearance of physical signs relating to the liver, and the skin; (B) The appropriate tests and examinations including liver function tests and skin examinations; and (C) Appropriate additional tests or examinations as deemed necessary by the physician. (ii) If in the physicians' opinion the results of liver function tests indicate an abnormality, the employee shall be removed from further MDA exposure in accordance with paragraph (m)(9) of this section. Repeat liver function tests shall be conducted on advice of the physician. (4) Emergency examinations. (5) Additional examinations. (6) Multiple physician review mechanism. (A) To review any findings, determinations, or recommendations of the initial physician; and (B) To conduct such examinations, consultations, and laboratory tests as the second physician deems necessary to facilitate this review. (ii) The employer shall promptly notify an employee of the right to seek a second medical opinion after each occasion that an initial physician conducts a medical examination or consultation pursuant to this section. The employer may condition its participation in, and payment for, the multiple physician review mechanism upon the employee doing the following within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the foregoing notification, or receipt of the initial physician's written opinion, whichever is later: (A) The employee informing the employer that he or she intends to seek a second medical opinion, and (B) The employee initiating steps to make an appointment with a second physician. (iii) If the findings, determinations, or recommendations of the second physician differ from those of the initial physician, then the employer and the employee shall assure that efforts are made for the two physicians to resolve any disagreement. (iv) If the two physicians have been unable to resolve quickly their disagreement, then the employer and the employee through their respective physicians shall designate a third physician; (A) To review any findings, determinations, or recommendations of the prior physicians; and (B) To conduct such examinations, consultations, laboratory tests, and discussions with the prior physicians as the third physician deems necessary to resolve the disagreement of the prior physicians. (v) The employer shall act consistent with the findings, determinations, and recommendations of the third physician, unless the employer and the employee reach an agreement which is otherwise consistent with the recommendations of at least one of the three physicians. (7) Information provided to the examining and consulting physicians. (A) A copy of this regulation and its appendices; (B) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's potential exposure to MDA; (C) The employee's current actual or representative MDA exposure level; (D) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used; and (E) Information from previous employment-related medical examinations of the affected employee. (ii) The employer shall provide the foregoing information to a second physician under this section upon request either by the second physician, or by the employee. (8) Physician's written opinion. (A) The occupationally-pertinent results of the medical examination and tests; (B) The physician's opinion concerning whether the employee has any detected medical conditions which would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment of health from exposure to MDA; (C) The physician's recommended limitations upon the employee's exposure to MDA or upon the employee's use of protective clothing or equipment and respirators; and (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions resulting from MDA exposure which require further explanation or treatment. (ii) The written opinion obtained by the employer shall not reveal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposures. (9) Medical removal Temporary medical removal of an employee Temporary removal resulting from occupational exposure. ( 1 ( 2 (B) Temporary removal due to a final medical determination. ( 2 ( 3 (ii) Return of the employee to former job status. ( 1 ( 2 (B) For the purposes of this section, the requirement that an employer return an employee to his or her former job status is not intended to expand upon or restrict any rights an employee has or would have had, absent temporary medical removal, to a specific job classification or position under the terms of a collective bargaining agreement. (iii) Removal of other employee special protective measure or limitations. (iv) Employer options pending a final medical determination. (A) Removal. (B) Return. ( 1 ( 2 (v) Medical removal protection benefits Provisions of medical removal protection benefits. (B) Definition of medical removal protection benefits. (C) Follow-up medical surveillance during the period of employee removal or limitations. (D) Workers' compensation claims. (E) Other credits. (F) Employees who do not recover within the 6 months of removal. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of an employee. (n) Recordkeeping Monitoring data for exempted employers. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The product qualifying for exemption; (B) The source of the monitoring data (e.g., was monitoring performed by the employer or a private contractor); (C) The testing protocol, results of testing, and/or analysis of the material for the release of MDA; (D) A description of the operation exempted and how the data support the exemption (e.g., are the monitoring data representative of the conditions at the affected facility); and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exemption. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of the employer's reliance upon such objective data. (2) Objective data for exempted employers. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The product qualifying for exemption; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol, results of testing, and/or analysis of the material for the release of MDA; (D) A description of the operation exempted and how the data support the exemption; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exemption. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of the employer's reliance upon such objective data. (3) Exposure measurements. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The dates, number, duration, and results of each of the samples taken, including a description of the procedure used to determine representative employee exposures; (B) Identification of the sampling and analytical methods used; (C) A description of the type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any; and (D) The name, job classification and exposure levels of the employee monitored and all other employees whose exposure the measurement is intended to represent. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least 30 years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (4) Medical surveillance. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The name and description of the duties of the employee; (B) The employer's copy of the physician's written opinion on the initial, periodic, and any special examinations, including results of medical examination and all tests, opinions, and recommendations; (C) Results of any airborne exposure monitoring done for that employee and the representative exposure levels supplied to the physician; and (D) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to MDA; (iii) The employer shall keep, or assure that the examining physician keeps, the following medical records: (A) A copy of this standard and its appendices, except that the employer may keep one copy of the standard and its appendices for all employees provided the employer references the standard and its appendices in the medical surveillance record of each employee; (B) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by any paragraphs in the regulatory text; (C) A description of the laboratory procedures and a copy of any standards or guidelines used to interpret the test results or references to the information; (D) A copy of the employee's medical and work history related to exposure to MDA; and (iv) The employer shall maintain this record for at least the duration of employment plus 30 years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (5) Medical removals. (ii) Each record shall include: (A) The name of the employee; (B) The date of each occasion that the employee was removed from current exposure to MDA as well as the corresponding date on which the employee was returned to his or her former job status; (C) A brief explanation of how each removal was or is being accomplished; and (D) A statement with respect to each removal indicating the reason for the removal. (iii) The employer shall maintain each medical removal record for at least the duration of an employee's employment plus 30 years. (6) Availability. (ii) Employee exposure monitoring records required by this section shall be provided upon request for examination and copying to employees, employee representatives, and the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a)-(e) and (g)-(i). (iii) Employee medical records required by this section shall be provided upon request for examination and copying, to the subject employee, to anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee, and to the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (7) Transfer of records. (o) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (p) [Reserved] (q) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.1050—Substance Data Sheet, for 4,4′-Methylenedianiline I. Substance Identification A. Substance: Methylenedianiline (MDA) B. Permissible Exposure: 1. Airborne: Ten parts per billion parts of air (10 ppb), time-weighted average (TWA) for an 8-hour workday and an action level of five parts per billion parts of air (5 ppb). 2. Dermal: Eye contact and skin contact with MDA are not permitted. C. Appearance and odor: White to tan solid; amine odor II. Health Hazard Data A. Ways in which MDA affects your health. B. Effects of overexposure. 2. Long-term (chronic) exposure. 3. Reporting signs and symptoms. III. Protective Clothing and Equipment A. Respirators. Respirators are required for those operations in which engineering controls or work-practice controls are not adequate or feasible to reduce exposure to the permissible limit. If respirators are worn, they must have a label issued by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health under the provisions of 42 CFR part 84 stating that the respirators have been approved for this purpose, and cartridges and canisters must be replaced in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134. If you experience difficulty breathing while wearing a respirator, you can request a positive-pressure respirator from your employer. You must be thoroughly trained to use the assigned respirator, and the training must be provided by your employer. MDA does not have a detectable odor except at levels well above the permissible exposure limits. Do not depend on odor to warn you when a respirator canister is exhausted. If you can smell MDA while wearing a respirator, proceed immediately to fresh air. If you experience difficulty breathing while wearing a respirator, tell your employer. B. Protective Clothing. MDA should never be allowed to remain on the skin. Clothing and shoes which are not impervious to MDA should not be allowed to become contaminated with MDA, and if they do, the clothing and shoes should be promptly removed and decontaminated. The clothing should be laundered to remove MDA or discarded. Once MDA penetrates shoes or other leather articles, they should not be worn again. C. Eye protection. IV. Emergency and First Aid Procedures A. Eye and face exposure. B. Skin exposure. C. Breathing. D. Swallowing. V. Medical Requirements If you are exposed to MDA at a concentration at or above the action level for more than 30 days per year, or exposed to liquid mixtures more than 15 days per year, your employer is required to provide a medical examination, including a medical history and laboratory tests, within 60 days of the effective date of this standard and annually thereafter. These tests shall be provided without cost to you. In addition, if you are accidentally exposed to MDA (either by ingestion, inhalation, or skin/eye contact) under conditions known or suspected to constitute toxic exposure to MDA, your employer is required to make special examinations and tests available to you. VI. Observation of Monitoring Your employer is required to perform measurements that are representative of your exposure to MDA and you or your designated representative are entitled to observe the monitoring procedure. You are entitled to observe the steps taken in the measurement procedure and to record the results obtained. When the monitoring procedure is taking place in an area where respirators or personal protective clothing and equipment are required to be worn, you and your representative must also be provided with, and must wear, the protective clothing and equipment. VII. Access to Records You or your representative are entitled to see the records of measurements of your exposure to MDA upon written request to your employer. Your medical examination records can be furnished to your physician or designated representative upon request by you to your employer. VIII. Precautions for Safe Use, Handling and Storage A. Material is combustible. B. Emergency clean-up. Appendix B to § 1910.1050—Substance Technical Guidelines, MDA I. Identification A. Substance identification. 1. Synonyms: CAS No. 101-77-9. 4,4′-methylenedianiline; 4,4′-methylenebisaniline; methylenedianiline; dianilinomethane. 2. Formula: C 13 14 2 II. Physical Data 1. Appearance and Odor: White to tan solid; amine odor 2. Molecular Weight: 198.26 3. Boiling Point: 398-399 degrees C at 760 mm Hg 4. Melting Point: 88-93 degrees C (190-100 degrees F) 5. Vapor Pressure: 9 mmHg at 232 degrees C 6. Evaporation Rate (n-butyl acetate = 1): Negligible 7. Vapor Density (Air = 1): Not Applicable 8. Volatile Fraction by Weight: Negligible 9. Specific Gravity (Water = 1): Slight 10. Heat of Combustion: −8.40 kcal/g 11. Solubility in Water: Slightly soluble in cold water, very soluble in alcohol, benzene, ether, and many organic solvents. III. Fire, Explosion, and Reactivity Hazard Data 1. Flash Point: 190 degrees C (374 degrees F) Setaflash closed cup 2. Flash Point: 226 degrees C (439 degrees F) Cleveland open cup 3. Extinguishing Media: Water spray; Dry Chemical; Carbon dioxide. 4. Special Fire Fighting Procedures: Wear self-contained breathing apparatus and protective clothing to prevent contact with skin and eyes. 5. Unusual Fire and Explosion Hazards: Fire or excessive heat may cause production of hazardous decomposition products. IV. Reactivity Data 1. Stability: Stable 2. Incompatibility: Strong oxidizers 3. Hazardous Decomposition Products: As with any other organic material, combustion may produce carbon monoxide. Oxides of nitrogen may also be present. 4. Hazardous Polymerization: Will not occur. V. Spill and Leak Procedures 1. Sweep material onto paper and place in fiber carton. 2. Package appropriately for safe feed to an incinerator or dissolve in compatible waste solvents prior to incineration. 3. Dispose of in an approved incinerator equipped with afterburner and scrubber or contract with licensed chemical waste disposal service. 4. Discharge treatment or disposal may be subject to federal, state, or local laws. 5. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment. VI. Special Storage and Handling Precautions A. High exposure to MDA can occur when transferring the substance from one container to another. Such operations should be well ventilated and good work practices must be established to avoid spills. B. Pure MDA is a solid with a low vapor pressure. Grinding or heating operations increase the potential for exposure. C. Store away from oxidizing materials. D. Employers shall advise employees of all areas and operations where exposure to MDA could occur. VII. Housekeeping and Hygiene Facilities A. The workplace should be kept clean, orderly, and in a sanitary condition. The employer should institute a leak and spill detection program for operations involving MDA in order to detect sources of fugitive MDA emissions. B. Adequate washing facilities with hot and cold water are to be provided and maintained in a sanitary condition. Suitable cleansing agents should also be provided to assure the effective removal of MDA from the skin. VIII. Common Operations Common operations in which exposure to MDA is likely to occur include the following: Manufacture of MDA; Manufacture of Methylene diisocyanate; Curing agent for epoxy resin structures; Wire coating operations; and filament winding. Appendix C to § 1910.1050—Medical Surveillance Guidelines for MDA I. Route of Entry Inhalation; skin absorption; ingestion. MDA can be inhaled, absorbed through the skin, or ingested. II. Toxicology MDA is a suspect carcinogen in humans. There are several reports of liver disease in humans and animals resulting from acute exposure to MDA. A well documented case of an acute cardiomyopathy secondary to exposure to MDA is on record. Numerous human cases of hepatitis secondary to MDA are known. Upon direct contact MDA may also cause damage to the eyes. Dermatitis and skin sensitization have been observed. Almost all forms of acute environmental hepatic injury in humans involve the hepatic parenchyma and produce hepatocellular jaundice. This agent produces intrahepatic cholestasis. The clinical picture consists of cholestatic jaundice, preceded or accompanied by abdominal pain, fever, and chills. Onset in about 60% of all observed cases is abrupt with severe abdominal pain. In about 30% of observed cases, the illness presented and evolved more slowly and less dramatically, with only slight abdominal pain. In about 10% of the cases only jaundice was evident. The cholestatic nature of the jaundice is evident in the prominence of itching, the histologic predominance of bile stasis, and portal inflammatory infiltration, accompanied by only slight parenchymal injury in most cases, and by the moderately elevated transaminase values. Acute, high doses, however, have been known to cause hepatocellular damage resulting in elevated SGPT, SGOT, alkaline phosphatase and bilirubin. Absorption through the skin is rapid. MDA is metabolized and excreted over a 48-hour period. Direct contact may be irritating to the skin, causing dermatitis. Also MDA which is deposited on the skin is not thoroughly removed through washing. MDA may cause bladder cancer in humans. Animal data supporting this assumption is not available nor is conclusive human data. However, human data collected on workers at a helicopter manufacturing facility where MDA is used suggests a higher incidence of bladder cancer among exposed workers. III. Signs and Symptoms Skin may become yellow from contact with MDA. Repeated or prolonged contact with MDA may result in recurring dermatitis (red-itchy, cracked skin) and eye irritation. Inhalation, ingestion or absorption through the skin at high concentrations may result in hepatitis, causing symptoms such as fever and chills, nausea and vomiting, dark urine, anorexia, rash, right upper quadrant pain and jaundice. Corneal burns may occur when MDA is splashed in the eyes. IV. Treatment of Acute Toxic Effects/Emergency Situation If MDA gets into the eyes, immediately wash eyes with large amounts of water. If MDA is splashed on the skin, immediately wash contaminated skin with mild soap or detergent. Employee should be removed from exposure and given proper medical treatment. Medical tests required under the emergency section of the medical surveillance section (M)(4) must be conducted. If the chemical is swallowed do not induce vomiting but remove by gastric lavage. Appendix D to § 1910.1050—Sampling and Analytical Methods for MDA Monitoring and Measurement Procedures Measurements taken for the purpose of determining employee exposure to MDA are best taken so that the representative average 8-hour exposure may be determined from a single 8-hour sample or two (2) 4-hour samples. Short-time interval samples (or grab samples) may also be used to determine average exposure level if a minimum of five measurements are taken in a random manner over the 8-hour work shift. Random sampling means that any portion of the work shift has the same chance of being sampled as any other. The arithmetic average of all such random samples taken on one work shift is an estimate of an employee's average level of exposure for that work shift. Air samples should be taken in the employee's breathing zone (air that would most nearly represent that inhaled by the employee). There are a number of methods available for monitoring employee exposures to MDA. The method OSHA currently uses is included below. The employer, however, has the obligation of selecting any monitoring method which meets the accuracy and precision requirements of the standard under his unique field conditions. The standard requires that the method of monitoring must have an accuracy, to a 95 percent confidence level, of not less than plus or minus 25 percent for the select PEL. OSHA Methodology Sampling Procedure Apparatus Samples are collected by use of a personal sampling pump that can be calibrated within ±5% of the recommended flow rate with the sampling filter in line. Samples are collected on 37 mm Gelman type A/E glass fiber filters treated with sulfuric acid. The filters are prepared by soaking each filter with 0.5 mL of 0.26N H 2 4 2 4 2 4 After sampling, the filters are carefully removed from the cassettes and individually transferred to small vials containing approximately 2 mL deionized water. The vials must be tightly sealed. The water can be added before or after the filters are transferred. The vials must be sealable and capable of holding at least 7 mL of liquid. Small glass scintillation vials with caps containing Teflon liners are recommended. Reagents Deionized water is needed for addition to the vials. Sampling Technique Immediately before sampling, remove the plastic plugs from the filter cassettes. Attach the cassette to the sampling pump with flexible tubing and place the cassette in the employee's breathing zone. After sampling, seal the cassettes with plastic plugs until the filters are transferred to the vials containing deionized water. At some convenient time within 10 hours of sampling, transfer the sample filters to vials. Seal the small vials lengthwise. Submit at least one blank filter with each sample set. Blanks should be handled in the same manner as samples, but no air is drawn through them. Record sample volumes (in L of air) for each sample, along with any potential interferences. Retention Efficiency A retention efficiency study was performed by drawing 100 L of air (80% relative humidity) at 1 L/min through sample filters that had been spiked with 0.814 µg MDA. Instead of using backup pads, blank acid-treated filters were used as backups in each cassette. Upon analysis, the top filters were found to have an average of 91.8% of the spiked amount. There was no MDA found on the bottom filters, so the amount lost was probably due to the slight instability of the MDA salt. Extraction Efficiency The average extraction efficiency for six filters spiked at the target concentration is 99.6%. The stability of extracted and derivatized samples was verified by reanalyzing the above six samples the next day using fresh standards. The average extraction efficiency for the reanalyzed samples is 98.7%. Recommended Air Volume and Sampling Rate The recommended air volume is 100 L. The recommended sampling rate is 1 L/min. Interferences (Sampling) MDI appears to be a positive interference. It was found that when MDI was spiked onto an acid-treated filter, the MDI converted to MDA after air was drawn through it. Suspected interferences should be reported to the laboratory with submitted samples. Safety Precautions (Sampling) Attach the sampling equipment to the employees so that it will not interfere with work performance or safety. Follow all safety procedures that apply to the work area being sampled. Analytical Procedure Apparatus: The following are required for analysis. A GC equipped with an electron capture detector. For this evaluation a Tracor 222 Gas Chromatograph equipped with a Nickel 63 High Temperature Electron Capture Detector and a Linearizer was used. A GC column capable of separating the MDA derivative from the solvent and interferences. A 6 ft × 2 mm ID glass column packed with 3% OV-101 coated on 100/120 Gas Chrom Q was used in this evaluation. A electronic integrator or some other suitable means of measuring peak areas or heights. Small resealable vials with Teflon-lined caps capable of holding 4 mL. A dispenser or pipet for toluene capable of delivering 2.0 mL. Pipets (or repipets with plastic or Teflon tips) capable of delivering 1 mL for the sodium hydroxide and buffer solutions. A repipet capable of delivering 25 µL HFAA. Syringes for preparation of standards and injection of standards and samples into a GC. Volumetric flasks and pipets to dilute the pure MDA in preparation of standards. Disposable pipets to transfer the toluene layers after the samples are extracted. Reagents 0.5 NaOH prepared from reagent grade NaOH. Toluene, pesticide grade. Burdick and Jackson distilled in glass toluene was used. Heptafluorobutyric acid anhydride (HFAA). HFAA from Pierce Chemical Company was used. pH 7.0 phosphate buffer, prepared from 136 g potassium dihydrogen phosphate and 1 L deionized water. The pH is adjusted to 7.0 with saturated sodium hydroxide solution. 4,4′ -Methylenedianiline (MDA), reagent grade. Standard Preparation Concentrated stock standards are prepared by diluting pure MDA with toluene. Analytical standards are prepared by injecting uL amounts of diluted stock standards into vials that contain 2.0 mL toluene. 25 uL HFAA are added to each vial and the vials are capped and shaken for 10 seconds. After 10 min, 1 mL of buffer is added to each vial. The vials are recapped and shaken for 10 seconds. After allowing the layers to separate, aliquots of the toluene (upper) layers are removed with a syringe and analyzed by GC. Analytical standard concentrations should bracket sample concentrations. Thus, if samples fall out of the range of prepared standards, additional standards must be prepared to ascertain detector response. Sample Preparation The sample filters are received in vials containing deionized water. 1 mL of 0.5N NaOH and 2.0 mL toluene are added to each vial. The vials are recapped and shaken for 10 min. After allowing the layers to separate, approximately 1 mL aliquots of the toluene (upper) layers are transferred to separate vials with clean disposable pipets. The toluene layers are treated and analyzed. Analysis GC conditions Zone temperatures: Column—220 degrees C Injector—235 degrees C Detector—335 degrees C Gas flows, Ar/CH 4 (95/5) Purge—40 mL/min Injection volume: 5.0 uL Column: 6 ft × 1/8 Retention time of MDA derivative: 3.5 min Chromatogram Peak areas or heights are measured by an integrator or other suitable means. A calibration curve is constructed by plotting response (peak areas or heights) of standard injections versus ug of MDA per sample. Sample concentrations must be bracketed by standards. Interferences (Analytical) Any compound that gives an electron capture detector response and has the same general retention time as the HFAA derivative of MDA is a potential interference. Suspected interferences reported to the laboratory with submitted samples by the industrial hygienist must be considered before samples are derivatized. GC parameters may be changed to possibly circumvent interferences. Retention time on a single column is not considered proof of chemical identity. Analyte identity should be confirmed by GC/MS if possible. Calculations The analyte concentration for samples is obtained from the calibration curve in terms of ug MDA per sample. The extraction efficiency is 100%. If any MDA is found on the blank, that amount is subtracted from the sample amounts. The air concentrations are calculated using the following formulae. µg/m 3 ppb = (µg/m 3 3 Safety Precautions (Analytical) Avoid skin contact and inhalation of all chemicals. Restrict the use of all chemicals to a fume hood if possible. Wear safety glasses and a lab coat at all times while in the lab area. [57 FR 35666, Aug. 10, 1992, as amended at 57 FR 49649, Nov. 3, 1992; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1293, Jan. 8, 1998; 67 FR 67965, Nov. 7, 2002; 71 FR 16672, 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50190, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75586, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33609, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17785, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1910.1051 1,3-Butadiene. (a) Scope and application. (2)(i) Except for the recordkeeping provisions in paragraph (m)(1) of this section, this section does not apply to the processing, use, or handling of products containing BD or to other work operations and streams in which BD is present where objective data are reasonably relied upon that demonstrate the work operation or the product or the group of products or operations to which it belongs may not reasonably be foreseen to release BD in airborne concentrations at or above the action level or in excess of the STEL under the expected conditions of processing, use, or handling that will cause the greatest possible release or in any plausible accident. (ii) This section also does not apply to work operations, products or streams where the only exposure to BD is from liquid mixtures containing 0.1% or less of BD by volume or the vapors released from such liquids, unless objective data become available that show that airborne concentrations generated by such mixtures can exceed the action level or STEL under reasonably predictable conditions of processing, use or handling that will cause the greatest possible release. (iii) Except for labeling requirements and requirements for emergency response, this section does not apply to the storage, transportation, distribution or sale of BD or liquid mixtures in intact containers or in transportation pipelines sealed in such a manner as to fully contain BD vapors or liquid. (3) Where products or processes containing BD are exempted under paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the employer shall maintain records of the objective data supporting that exemption and the basis for the employer's reliance on the data, as provided in paragraph (m)(1) of this section. (b) Definitions: Action level Assistant Secretary Authorized person 1,3-Butadiene 2 2 Business day Complete Blood Count (CBC) Day Director Emergency situation Employee exposure Objective data Permissible Exposure Limits, PELs Physician or other licensed health care professional i.e. Regulated area This section (c) Permissible exposure limits (PELs) Time-weighted average (TWA) limit. (2) Short-term exposure limit (STEL). (d) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) Representative 8-hour TWA employee exposure shall be determined on the basis of one or more samples representing full-shift exposure for each shift and for each job classification in each work area. (iii) Representative 15-minute short-term employee exposures shall be determined on the basis of one or more samples representing 15-minute exposures associated with operations that are most likely to produce exposures above the STEL for each shift and for each job classification in each work area. (iv) Except for the initial monitoring required under paragraph (d)(2) of this section, where the employer can document that exposure levels are equivalent for similar operations on different work shifts, the employer need only determine representative employee exposure for that operation from the shift during which the highest exposure is expected. (2) Initial monitoring. (ii) Where the employer has monitored within two years prior to the effective date of this section and the monitoring satisfies all other requirements of this section, the employer may rely on such earlier monitoring results to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section, provided that the conditions under which the initial monitoring was conducted have not changed in a manner that may result in new or additional exposures. (3) Periodic monitoring and its frequency. (ii) If the initial monitoring required by paragraph (d)(2) of this section reveals employee exposure to be above the 8-hour TWA limit, the employer shall repeat the representative monitoring required by paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section at least every three months until the employer has collected two samples per quarter (each at least 7 days apart) within a two-year period, after which such monitoring must occur at least every six months. (iii) If the initial monitoring required by paragraph (d)(2) of this section reveals employee exposure to be above the STEL, the employer shall repeat the representative monitoring required by paragraph (d)(1)(iii) of this section at least every three months until the employer has collected two samples per quarter (each at least 7 days apart) within a two-year period, after which such monitoring must occur at least every six months. (iv) The employer may alter the monitoring schedule from every six months to annually for any required representative monitoring for which two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart indicate that employee exposure has decreased to or below the 8-hour TWA, but is at or above the action level. (4) Termination of monitoring. (ii) If the periodic monitoring required by paragraph (d)(3) of this section reveals that employee exposures, as indicated by at least two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level and at or below the STEL, the employer may discontinue the monitoring for those employees who are represented by such monitoring. (5) Additional monitoring. (ii) Whenever spills, leaks, ruptures or other breakdowns occur that may lead to employee exposure above the 8-hr TWA limit or above the STEL, the employer shall monitor [using leak source, such as direct reading instruments, area or personal monitoring], after the cleanup of the spill or repair of the leak, rupture or other breakdown, to ensure that exposures have returned to the level that existed prior to the incident. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. (7) Employee notification of monitoring results. (ii) The employer shall, within 15 business days after receipt of any monitoring performed under this section indicating the 8-hour TWA or STEL has been exceeded, provide the affected employees, in writing, with information on the corrective action being taken by the employer to reduce employee exposure to or below the 8-hour TWA or STEL and the schedule for completion of this action. (8) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (ii) Observation procedures. (e) Regulated areas. (2) Access to regulated areas shall be limited to authorized persons. (3) Regulated areas shall be demarcated from the rest of the workplace in any manner that minimizes the number of employees exposed to BD within the regulated area. (4) An employer at a multi-employer worksite who establishes a regulated area shall communicate the access restrictions and locations of these areas to other employers with work operations at that worksite whose employees may have access to these areas. (f) Methods of compliance Engineering controls and work practices. (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering controls and work practices which can be instituted are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the 8-hour TWA or STEL, the employer shall use them to reduce employee exposure to the lowest levels achievable by these controls and shall supplement them by the use of respiratory protection that complies with the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section. (2) Compliance plan. (ii) The written compliance plan shall include a schedule for the development and implementation of the engineering controls and work practice controls including periodic leak detection surveys. (iii) Copies of the compliance plan required in paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be furnished upon request for examination and copying to the Assistant Secretary, the Director, affected employees and designated employee representatives. Such plans shall be reviewed at least every 12 months, and shall be updated as necessary to reflect significant changes in the status of the employer's compliance program. (iv) The employer shall not implement a schedule of employee rotation as a means of compliance with the PELs. (g) Exposure Goal Program. (2) Written plans for the exposure goal program shall be furnished upon request for examination and copying to the Assistant Secretary, the Director, affected employees and designated employee representatives. (3) Such plans shall be updated as necessary to reflect significant changes in the status of the exposure goal program. (4) Respirator use is not required in the exposure goal program. (5) The exposure goal program shall include the following items unless the employer can demonstrate that the item is not feasible, will have no significant effect in reducing employee exposures, or is not necessary to achieve exposures below the action level: (i) A leak prevention, detection, and repair program. (ii) A program for maintaining the effectiveness of local exhaust ventilation systems. (iii) The use of pump exposure control technology such as, but not limited to, mechanical double-sealed or seal-less pumps. (iv) Gauging devices designed to limit employee exposure, such as magnetic gauges on rail cars. (v) Unloading devices designed to limit employee exposure, such as a vapor return system. (vi) A program to maintain BD concentration below the action level in control rooms by use of engineering controls. (h) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Non-routine work operations that are performed infrequently and for which employee exposures are limited in duration. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the PELs. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (ii) If air-purifying respirators are used, the employer must replace the air-purifying filter elements according to the replacement schedule set for the class of respirators listed in Table 1 of this section, and at the beginning of each work shift. (iii) Instead of using the replacement schedule listed in Table 1 of this section, the employer may replace cartridges or canisters at 90% of their expiration service life, provided the employer: (A) Demonstrates that employees will be adequately protected by this procedure. (B) Uses BD breakthrough data for this purpose that have been derived from tests conducted under worst-case conditions of humidity, temperature, and air-flow rate through the filter element, and the employer also describes the data supporting the cartridge-or canister-change schedule, as well as the basis for using the data in the employer's respirator program. (iv) A label must be attached to each filter element to indicate the date and time it is first installed on the respirator. (v) If NIOSH approves an end-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) for an air-purifying filter element, the element may be used until the ESLI shows no further useful service life or until the element is replaced at the beginning of the next work shift, whichever occurs first. (vi) Regardless of the air-purifying element used, if an employee detects the odor of BD, the employer must replace the air-purifying element immediately. (3) Respirator selection. Table 1—Minimum Requirements for Respiratory Protection for Airborne BD Concentration of airborne BD (ppm) or condition of use Minimum required respirator Less than or equal to 5 ppm (5 times PEL) (a) Air-purifying half mask or full facepiece respirator equipped with approved BD or organic vapor cartridges or canisters. Cartridges or canisters shall be replaced every 4 hours. Less than or equal to 10 ppm (10 times PEL) (a) Air-purifying half mask or full facepiece respirator equipped with approved BD or organic vapor cartridges or canisters. Cartridges or canisters shall be replaced every 3 hours. Less than or equal to 25 ppm (25 times PEL) (a) Air-purifying full facepiece respirator equipped with approved BD or organic vapor cartridges or canisters. Cartridges or canisters shall be replaced every 2 hours. (b) Any powered air-purifying respirator equipped with approved BD or organic vapor cartridges. PAPR cartridges shall be replaced every 2 hours. (c) Continuous flow supplied air respirator equipped with a hood or helmet. Less than or equal to 50 ppm (50 times PEL) (a) Air-purifying full facepiece respirator equipped with approved BD or organic vapor cartridges or canisters. Cartridges or canisters shall be replaced every (1) hour. (b) Powered air-purifying respirator equipped with a tight-fitting facepiece and an approved BD or organic vapor cartridges. PAPR cartridges shall be replaced every (1) hour. Less than or equal to 1,000 ppm (1,000 times PEL) (a) Supplied air respirator equipped with a half mask of full facepiece and operated in a pressure demand or other positive pressure mode. Greater than 1000 ppm unknown concentration, or firefighting (a) Self-contained breathing apparatus equipped with a full facepiece and operated in a pressure demand or other positive pressure mode. (b) Any supplied air respirator equipped with a full facepiece and operated in a pressure demand or other positive pressure mode in combination with an auxiliary self-contained breathing apparatus operated in a pressure demand or other positive pressure mode. Escape from IDLH conditions (a) Any positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus with an appropriate service life. (b) A air-purifying full facepiece respirator equipped with a front or back mounted BD or organic vapor canister. Notes: (ii) Air-purifying respirators must have filter elements approved by NIOSH for organic vapors or BD. (iii) When an employee whose job requires the use of a respirator cannot use a negative-pressure respirator, the employer must provide the employee with a respirator that has less breathing resistance than the negative-pressure respirator, such as a powered air-purifying respirator or supplied-air respirator, when the employee is able to use it and if it provides the employee adequate protection. (i) Protective clothing and equipment. (j) Emergency situations. Written plan. (k) Medical screening and surveillance Employees covered. (i) Each employee with exposure to BD at concentrations at or above the action level on 30 or more days or for employees who have or may have exposure to BD at or above the PELs on 10 or more days a year; (ii) Employers (including successor owners) shall continue to provide medical screening and surveillance for employees, even after transfer to a non-BD exposed job and regardless of when the employee is transferred, whose work histories suggest exposure to BD: (A) At or above the PELs on 30 or more days a year for 10 or more years; (B) At or above the action level on 60 or more days a year for 10 or more years; or (C) Above 10 ppm on 30 or more days in any past year; and (iii) Each employee exposed to BD following an emergency situation. (2) Program administration. (ii) Physical examinations, health questionnaires, and medical procedures shall be performed or administered by a physician or other licensed health care professional. (iii) Laboratory tests shall be conducted by an accredited laboratory. (3) Frequency of medical screening activities. (i) For each employee covered under paragraphs (j)(1) (i)-(ii) of this section, a health questionnaire and complete blood count with differential and platelet count (CBC) every year, and a physical examination as specified below: (A) An initial physical examination that meets the requirements of this rule, if twelve months or more have elapsed since the last physical examination conducted as part of a medical screening program for BD exposure; (B) Before assumption of duties by the employee in a job with BD exposure; (C) Every 3 years after the initial physical examination; (D) At the discretion of the physician or other licensed health care professional reviewing the annual health questionnaire and CBC; (E) At the time of employee reassignment to an area where exposure to BD is below the action level, if the employee's past exposure history does not meet the criteria of paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section for continued coverage in the screening and surveillance program, and if twelve months or more have elapsed since the last physical examination; and (F) At termination of employment if twelve months or more have elapsed since the last physical examination. (ii) Following an emergency situation, medical screening shall be conducted as quickly as possible, but not later than 48 hours after the exposure. (iii) For each employee who must wear a respirator, physical ability to perform the work and use the respirator must be determined as required by 29 CFR 1910.134. (4) Content of medical screening. (A) A baseline health questionnaire that includes a comprehensive occupational and health history and is updated annually. Particular emphasis shall be placed on the hematopoietic and reticuloendothelial systems, including exposure to chemicals, in addition to BD, that may have an adverse effect on these systems, the presence of signs and symptoms that might be related to disorders of these systems, and any other information determined by the examining physician or other licensed health care professional to be necessary to evaluate whether the employee is at increased risk of material impairment of health from BD exposure. Health questionnaires shall consist of the sample forms in appendix C to this section, or be equivalent to those samples; (B) A complete physical examination, with special emphasis on the liver, spleen, lymph nodes, and skin; (C) A CBC; and (D) Any other test which the examining physician or other licensed health care professional deems necessary to evaluate whether the employee may be at increased risk from exposure to BD. (ii) Medical screening for employees exposed to BD in an emergency situation shall focus on the acute effects of BD exposure and at a minimum include: A CBC within 48 hours of the exposure and then monthly for three months; and a physical examination if the employee reports irritation of the eyes, nose throat, lungs, or skin, blurred vision, coughing, drowsiness, nausea, or headache. Continued employee participation in the medical screening and surveillance program, beyond these minimum requirements, shall be at the discretion of the physician or other licensed health care professional. (5) Additional medical evaluations and referrals. (ii) The specialist to whom the employee is referred under this paragraph shall determine the appropriate content for the medical evaluation, e.g., examinations, diagnostic tests and procedures, etc. (6) Information provided to the physician or other licensed health care professional. (i) A copy of this section including its appendices; (ii) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's BD exposure; (iii) The employee's actual or representative BD exposure level during employment tenure, including exposure incurred in an emergency situation; (iv) A description of pertinent personal protective equipment used or to be used; and (v) Information, when available, from previous employment-related medical evaluations of the affected employee which is not otherwise available to the physician or other licensed health care professional or the specialist. (7) The written medical opinion. (A) The occupationally pertinent results of the medical evaluation; (B) A medical opinion concerning whether the employee has any detected medical conditions which would place the employee's health at increased risk of material impairment from exposure to BD; (C) Any recommended limitations upon the employee's exposure to BD; and (D) A statement that the employee has been informed of the results of the medical evaluation and any medical conditions resulting from BD exposure that require further explanation or treatment. (ii) The written medical opinion provided to the employer shall not reveal specific records, findings, and diagnoses that have no bearing on the employee's ability to work with BD. Note: However, this provision does not negate the ethical obligation of the physician or other licensed health care professional to transmit any other adverse findings directly to the employee. (8) Medical surveillance. (ii) Information learned from medical surveillance activities must be disseminated to covered employees, as defined in paragraph (k)(1) of this section, in a manner that ensures the confidentiality of individual medical information. (l) Communication of BD hazards to employees Hazard communication—general. (ii) In classifying the hazards of BD at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer; eye and respiratory tract irritation; central nervous system effects; and flammability. (iii) Employers shall include BD in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of BD and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (l)(2) of this section. (2) Employee information and training. (ii) The employer shall train each employee who is potentially exposed to BD at or above the action level or the STEL in accordance with the requirements of this section. The employer shall institute a training program, ensure employee participation in the program, and maintain a record of the contents of such program. (iii) Training shall be provided prior to or at the time of initial assignment to a job potentially involving exposure to BD at or above the action level or STEL and at least annually thereafter. (iv) The training program shall be conducted in a manner that the employee is able to understand. The employee shall ensure that each employee exposed to BD over the action level or STEL is informed of the following: (A) The health hazards associated with BD exposure, and the purpose and a description of the medical screening and surveillance program required by this section; (B) The quantity, location, manner of use, release, and storage of BD and the specific operations that could result in exposure to BD, especially exposures above the PEL or STEL; (C) The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job assignment, and emergency procedures and personal protective equipment; (D) The measures employees can take to protect themselves from exposure to BD. (E) The contents of this standard and its appendices, and (F) The right of each employee exposed to BD at or above the action level or STEL to obtain: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (3) Access to information and training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide to the Assistant Secretary or the Director, or the designated employee representatives, upon request, all materials relating to the employee information and the training program. (m) Recordkeeping Objective data for exemption from initial monitoring. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The product or activity qualifying for exemption; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol, results of testing, and analysis of the material for the release of BD; (D) A description of the operation exempted and how the data support the exemption; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exemption. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of the employer's reliance upon such objective data. (2) Exposure measurements. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement; (B) The operation involving exposure to BD which is being monitored; (C) Sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) Number, duration, and results of samples taken; (E) Type of protective devices worn, if any; and (F) Name and exposure of the employees whose exposures are represented. (G) The written corrective action and the schedule for completion of this action required by paragraph (d)(7)(ii) of this section. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least 30 years in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (3) [Reserved] (4) Medical screening and surveillance. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information: (A) The name of the employee; (B) Physician's or other licensed health care professional's written opinions as described in paragraph (k)(7) of this section; (C) A copy of the information provided to the physician or other licensed health care professional as required by paragraphs (k)(7)(ii)-(iv) of this section. (iii) Medical screening and surveillance records shall be maintained for each employee for the duration of employment plus 30 years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (5) Availability. (ii) Access to records required to be maintained by paragraphs (l)(1)-(3) of this section shall be granted in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020(e). (6) Transfer of records. (ii) The employer shall transfer medical and exposure records as set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). (n) [Reserved] (o) Appendices. (2) Appendices A, B, C, D, and F to this section are informational and are not intended to create any additional obligations not otherwise imposed or to detract from any existing obligations. Appendix A to § 1910.1051—Substance Safety Data Sheet For 1,3-Butadiene (Non-Mandatory) I. Substance Identification A. Substance: 1,3-Butadiene (CH 2 2 B. Synonyms: 1,3-Butadiene (BD); butadiene; biethylene; bi-vinyl; divinyl; butadiene-1,3; buta-1,3-diene; erythrene; NCI-C50602; CAS-106-99-0. C. BD can be found as a gas or liquid. D. BD is used in production of styrene-butadiene rubber and polybutadiene rubber for the tire industry. Other uses include copolymer latexes for carpet backing and paper coating, as well as resins and polymers for pipes and automobile and appliance parts. It is also used as an intermediate in the production of such chemicals as fungicides. E. Appearance and odor: BD is a colorless, non-corrosive, flammable gas with a mild aromatic odor at standard ambient temperature and pressure. F. Permissible exposure: Exposure may not exceed 1 part BD per million parts of air averaged over the 8-hour workday, nor may short-term exposure exceed 5 parts of BD per million parts of air averaged over any 15-minute period in the 8-hour workday. II. Health Hazard Data A. BD can affect the body if the gas is inhaled or if the liquid form, which is very cold (cryogenic), comes in contact with the eyes or skin. B. Effects of overexposure: Breathing very high levels of BD for a short time can cause central nervous system effects, blurred vision, nausea, fatigue, headache, decreased blood pressure and pulse rate, and unconsciousness. There are no recorded cases of accidental exposures at high levels that have caused death in humans, but this could occur. Breathing lower levels of BD may cause irritation of the eyes, nose, and throat. Skin contact with liquefied BD can cause irritation and frostbite. C. Long-term (chronic) exposure: BD has been found to be a potent carcinogen in rodents, inducing neoplastic lesions at multiple target sites in mice and rats. A recent study of BD-exposed workers showed that exposed workers have an increased risk of developing leukemia. The risk of leukemia increases with increased exposure to BD. OSHA has concluded that there is strong evidence that workplace exposure to BD poses an increased risk of death from cancers of the lymphohematopoietic system. D. Reporting signs and symptoms: You should inform your supervisor if you develop any of these signs or symptoms and suspect that they are caused by exposure to BD. III. Emergency First Aid Procedures In the event of an emergency, follow the emergency plan and procedures designated for your work area. If you have been trained in first aid procedures, provide the necessary first aid measures. If necessary, call for additional assistance from co-workers and emergency medical personnel. A. Eye and Skin Exposures: If there is a potential that liquefied BD can come in contact with eye or skin, face shields and skin protective equipment must be provided and used. If liquefied BD comes in contact with the eye, immediately flush the eyes with large amounts of water, occasionally lifting the lower and the upper lids. Flush repeatedly. Get medical attention immediately. Contact lenses should not be worn when working with this chemical. In the event of skin contact, which can cause frostbite, remove any contaminated clothing and flush the affected area repeatedly with large amounts of tepid water. B. Breathing: If a person breathes in large amounts of BD, move the exposed person to fresh air at once. If breathing has stopped, begin cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) if you have been trained in this procedure. Keep the affected person warm and at rest. Get medical attention immediately. C. Rescue: Move the affected person from the hazardous exposure. If the exposed person has been overcome, call for help and begin emergency rescue procedures. Use extreme caution so that you do not become a casualty. Understand the plant's emergency rescue procedures and know the locations of rescue equipment before the need arises. IV. Respirators and Protective Clothing A. Respirators: Good industrial hygiene practices recommend that engineering and work practice controls be used to reduce environmental concentrations to the permissible exposure level. However, there are some exceptions where respirators may be used to control exposure. Respirators may be used when engineering and work practice controls are not technically feasible, when such controls are in the process of being installed, or when these controls fail and need to be supplemented or during brief, non-routine, intermittent exposure. Respirators may also be used in situations involving non-routine work operations which are performed infrequently and in which exposures are limited in duration, and in emergency situations. In some instances cartridge respirator use is allowed, but only with strict time constraints. For example, at exposure below 5 ppm BD, a cartridge (or canister) respirator, either full or half face, may be used, but the cartridge must be replaced at least every 4 hours, and it must be replaced every 3 hours when the exposure is between 5 and 10 ppm. If the use of respirators is necessary, the only respirators permitted are those that have been approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). In addition to respirator selection, a complete respiratory protection program must be instituted which includes regular training, maintenance, fit testing, inspection, cleaning, and evaluation of respirators. If you can smell BD while wearing a respirator, proceed immediately to fresh air, and change cartridge (or canister) before re-entering an area where there is BD exposure. If you experience difficulty in breathing while wearing a respirator, tell your supervisor. B. Protective Clothing: Employees should be provided with and required to use impervious clothing, gloves, face shields (eight-inch minimum), and other appropriate protective clothing necessary to prevent the skin from becoming frozen by contact with liquefied BD (or a vessel containing liquid BD). Employees should be provided with and required to use splash-proof safety goggles where liquefied BD may contact the eyes. V. Precautions for Safe Use, Handling, and Storage A. Fire and Explosion Hazards: BD is a flammable gas and can easily form explosive mixtures in air. It has a lower explosive limit of 2%, and an upper explosive limit of 11.5%. It has an autoignition temperature of 420 °C (788 °F). Its vapor is heavier than air (vapor density, 1.9) and may travel a considerable distance to a source of ignition and flash back. Usually it contains inhibitors to prevent self-polymerization (which is accompanied by evolution of heat) and to prevent formation of explosive peroxides. At elevated temperatures, such as in fire conditions, polymerization may take place. If the polymerization takes place in a container, there is a possibility of violent rupture of the container. B. Hazard: Slightly toxic. Slight respiratory irritant. Direct contact of liquefied BD on skin may cause freeze burns and frostbite. C. Storage: Protect against physical damage to BD containers. Outside or detached storage of BD containers is preferred. Inside storage should be in a cool, dry, well-ventilated, noncombustible location, away from all possible sources of ignition. Store cylinders vertically and do not stack. Do not store with oxidizing material. D. Usual Shipping Containers: Liquefied BD is contained in steel pressure apparatus. E. Electrical Equipment: Electrical installations in Class I hazardous locations, as defined in Article 500 of the National Electrical Code, should be in accordance with Article 501 of the Code. If explosion-proof electrical equipment is necessary, it shall be suitable for use in Group B. Group D equipment may be used if such equipment is isolated in accordance with Section 501-5(a) by sealing all conduit 1/2 F. Fire Fighting: Stop flow of gas. Use water to keep fire-exposed containers cool. Fire extinguishers and quick drenching facilities must be readily available, and you should know where they are and how to operate them. G. Spill and Leak: Persons not wearing protective equipment and clothing should be restricted from areas of spills or leaks until clean-up has been completed. If BD is spilled or leaked, the following steps should be taken: 1. Eliminate all ignition sources. 2. Ventilate area of spill or leak. 3. If in liquid form, for small quantities, allow to evaporate in a safe manner. 4. Stop or control the leak if this can be done without risk. If source of leak is a cylinder and the leak cannot be stopped in place, remove the leaking cylinder to a safe place and repair the leak or allow the cylinder to empty. H. Disposal: This substance, when discarded or disposed of, is a hazardous waste according to Federal regulations (40 CFR part 261). It is listed as hazardous waste number D001 due to its ignitability. The transportation, storage, treatment, and disposal of this waste material must be conducted in compliance with 40 CFR parts 262, 263, 264, 268 and 270. Disposal can occur only in properly permitted facilities. Check state and local regulation of any additional requirements as these may be more restrictive than federal laws and regulation. I. You should not keep food, beverages, or smoking materials in areas where there is BD exposure, nor should you eat or drink in such areas. J. Ask your supervisor where BD is used in your work area and ask for any additional plant safety and health rules. VI. Medical Requirements Your employer is required to offer you the opportunity to participate in a medical screening and surveillance program if you are exposed to BD at concentrations exceeding the action level (0.5 ppm BD as an 8-hour TWA) on 30 days or more a year, or at or above the 8 hr TWA (1 ppm) or STEL (5 ppm for 15 minutes) on 10 days or more a year. Exposure for any part of a day counts. If you have had exposure to BD in the past, but have been transferred to another job, you may still be eligible to participate in the medical screening and surveillance program. The OSHA rule specifies the past exposures that would qualify you for participation in the program. These past exposure are work histories that suggest the following: (1) That you have been exposed at or above the PELs on 30 days a year for 10 or more years; (2) that you have been exposed at or above the action level on 60 days a year for 10 or more years; or (3) that you have been exposed above 10 ppm on 30 days in any past year. Additionally, if you are exposed to BD in an emergency situation, you are eligible for a medical examination within 48 hours. The basic medical screening program includes a health questionnaire, physical examination, and blood test. These medical evaluations must be offered to you at a reasonable time and place, and without cost or loss of pay. VII. Observation of Monitoring Your employer is required to perform measurements that are representative of your exposure to BD and you or your designated representative are entitled to observe the monitoring procedure. You are entitled to observe the steps taken in the measurement procedure, and to record the results obtained. When the monitoring procedure is taking place in an area where respirators or personal protective clothing and equipment are required to be worn, you or your representative must also be provided with, and must wear, the protective clothing and equipment. VIII. Access to Information A. Each year, your employer is required to inform you of the information contained in this appendix. In addition, your employer must instruct you in the proper work practices for using BD, emergency procedures, and the correct use of protective equipment. B. Your employer is required to determine whether you are being exposed to BD. You or your representative has the right to observe employee measurements and to record the results obtained. Your employer is required to inform you of your exposure. If your employer determines that you are being overexposed, he or she is required to inform you of the actions which are being taken to reduce your exposure to within permissible exposure limits and of the schedule to implement these actions. C. Your employer is required to keep records of your exposures and medical examinations. These records must be kept by the employer for at least thirty (30) years. D. Your employer is required to release your exposure and medical records to you or your representative upon your request. Appendix B to § 1910.1051—Substance Technical Guidelines for 1,3-Butadiene (Non-Mandatory) I. Physical and Chemical Data A. Substance identification: 1. Synonyms: 1,3-Butadiene (BD); butadiene; biethylene; bivinyl; divinyl; butadiene-1,3; buta-1,3-diene; erythrene; NCI-C50620; CAS-106-99-0. 2. Formula: CH 2 2 3. Molecular weight: 54.1. B. Physical data: 1. Boiling point (760 mm Hg): −4.7 °C (23.5 °F). 2. Specific gravity (water = 1): 0.62 at 20 °C (68 °F). 3. Vapor density (air = 1 at boiling point of BD): 1.87. 4. Vapor pressure at 20 °C (68 °F): 910 mm Hg. 5. Solubility in water, g/100 g water at 20 °C (68 °F): 0.05. 6. Appearance and odor: Colorless, flammable gas with a mildly aromatic odor. Liquefied BD is a colorless liquid with a mildly aromatic odor. II. Fire, Explosion, and Reactivity Hazard Data A. Fire: 1. Flash point: −76 °C (−105 °F) for take out; liquefied BD; Not applicable to BD gas. 2. Stability: A stabilizer is added to the monomer to inhibit formation of polymer during storage. Forms explosive peroxides in air in absence of inhibitor. 3. Flammable limits in air, percent by volume: Lower: 2.0; Upper: 11.5. 4. Extinguishing media: Carbon dioxide for small fires, polymer or alcohol foams for large fires. 5. Special fire fighting procedures: Fight fire from protected location or maximum possible distance. Stop flow of gas before extinguishing fire. Use water spray to keep fire-exposed cylinders cool. 6. Unusual fire and explosion hazards: BD vapors are heavier than air and may travel to a source of ignition and flash back. Closed containers may rupture violently when heated. 7. For purposes of compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.106, BD is classified as a flammable gas. For example, 7,500 ppm, approximately one-fourth of the lower flammable limit, would be considered to pose a potential fire and explosion hazard. 8. For purposes of compliance with 29 CFR 1910.155, BD is classified as a Class B fire hazard. 9. For purposes of compliance with 29 CFR 1910.307, locations classified as hazardous due to the presence of BD shall be Class I. B. Reactivity: 1. Conditions contributing to instability: Heat. Peroxides are formed when inhibitor concentration is not maintained at proper level. At elevated temperatures, such as in fire conditions, polymerization may take place. 2. Incompatibilities: Contact with strong oxidizing agents may cause fires and explosions. The contacting of crude BD (not BD monomer) with copper and copper alloys may cause formations of explosive copper compounds. 3. Hazardous decomposition products: Toxic gases (such as carbon monoxide) may be released in a fire involving BD. 4. Special precautions: BD will attack some forms of plastics, rubber, and coatings. BD in storage should be checked for proper inhibitor content, for self-polymerization, and for formation of peroxides when in contact with air and iron. Piping carrying BD may become plugged by formation of rubbery polymer. C. Warning Properties: 1. Odor Threshold: An odor threshold of 0.45 ppm has been reported in The American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) Report, Odor Thresholds for Chemicals with Established Occupational Health Standards. 2. Eye Irritation Level: Workers exposed to vapors of BD (concentration or purity unspecified) have complained of irritation of eyes, nasal passages, throat, and lungs. Dogs and rabbits exposed experimentally to as much as 6700 ppm for 7 1/2 3. Evaluation of Warning Properties: Since the mean odor threshold is about half of the 1 ppm PEL, and more than 10-fold below the 5 ppm STEL, most wearers of air purifying respirators should still be able to detect breakthrough before a significant overexposure to BD occurs. III. Spill, Leak, and Disposal Procedures A. Persons not wearing protective equipment and clothing should be restricted from areas of spills or leaks until cleanup has been completed. If BD is spilled or leaked, the following steps should be taken: 1. Eliminate all ignition sources. 2. Ventilate areas of spill or leak. 3. If in liquid form, for small quantities, allow to evaporate in a safe manner. 4. Stop or control the leak if this can be done without risk. If source of leak is a cylinder and the leak cannot be stopped in place, remove the leaking cylinder to a safe place and repair the leak or allow the cylinder to empty. B. Disposal: This substance, when discarded or disposed of, is a hazardous waste according to Federal regulations (40 CFR part 261). It is listed by the EPA as hazardous waste number D001 due to its ignitability. The transportation, storage, treatment, and disposal of this waste material must be conducted in compliance with 40 CFR parts 262, 263, 264, 268 and 270. Disposal can occur only in properly permitted facilities. Check state and local regulations for any additional requirements because these may be more restrictive than federal laws and regulations. IV. Monitoring and Measurement Procedures A. Exposure above the Permissible Exposure Limit (8-hr TWA) or Short-Term Exposure Limit (STEL): 1. 8-hr TWA exposure evaluation: Measurements taken for the purpose of determining employee exposure under this standard are best taken with consecutive samples covering the full shift. Air samples must be taken in the employee's breathing zone (air that would most nearly represent that inhaled by the employee). 2. STEL exposure evaluation: Measurements must represent 15 minute exposures associated with operations most likely to exceed the STEL in each job and on each shift. 3. Monitoring frequencies: Table 1 gives various exposure scenarios and their required monitoring frequencies, as required by the final standard for occupational exposure to butadiene. Table 1—Five Exposure Scenarios and Their Associated Monitoring Frequencies Action level 8-hr TWA STEL Required monitoring activity −* − − No 8-hr TWA or STEL monitoring required. + * − − No STEL monitoring required. Monitor 8-hr TWA annually. + + − No STEL monitoring required. Periodic monitoring 8-hr TWA, in accordance with (d)(3)(ii).** + + + Periodic monitoring 8-hr TWA, in accordance with (d)(3)(ii)**. Periodic monitoring STEL, in accordance with (d)(3)(iii). + − + Periodic monitoring STEL, in accordance with (d)(3)(iii). Monitor 8-hr TWA, annually. * Exposure Scenario, Limit Exceeded: + = Yes, −= No. ** The employer may decrease the frequency of exposure monitoring to annually when at least 2 consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart show exposures to be below the 8 hr TWA, but at or above the action level. 4. Monitoring techniques: appendix D describes the validated method of sampling and analysis which has been tested by OSHA for use with BD. The employer has the obligation of selecting a monitoring method which meets the accuracy and precision requirements of the standard under his or her unique field conditions. The standard requires that the method of monitoring must be accurate, to a 95 percent confidence level, to plus or minus 25 percent for concentrations of BD at or above 1 ppm, and to plus or minus 35 percent for concentrations below 1 ppm. V. Personal Protective Equipment A. Employees should be provided with and required to use impervious clothing, gloves, face shields (eight-inch minimum), and other appropriate protective clothing necessary to prevent the skin from becoming frozen from contact with liquid BD. B. Any clothing which becomes wet with liquid BD should be removed immediately and not re-worn until the butadiene has evaporated. C. Employees should be provided with and required to use splash proof safety goggles where liquid BD may contact the eyes. VI. Housekeeping and Hygiene Facilities For purposes of complying with 29 CFR 1910.141, the following items should be emphasized: A. The workplace should be kept clean, orderly, and in a sanitary condition. B. Adequate washing facilities with hot and cold water are to be provided and maintained in a sanitary condition. VII. Additional Precautions A. Store BD in tightly closed containers in a cool, well-ventilated area and take all necessary precautions to avoid any explosion hazard. B. Non-sparking tools must be used to open and close metal containers. These containers must be effectively grounded. C. Do not incinerate BD cartridges, tanks or other containers. D. Employers must advise employees of all areas and operations where exposure to BD might occur. Appendix C to § 1910.1051—Medical Screening and Surveillance for 1,3-Butadiene (Non-Mandatory) I. Basis for Medical Screening and Surveillance Requirements A. Route of Entry Inhalation B. Toxicology Inhalation of BD has been linked to an increased risk of cancer, damage to the reproductive organs, and fetotoxicity. Butadiene can be converted via oxidation to epoxybutene and diepoxybutane, two genotoxic metabolites that may play a role in the expression of BD's toxic effects. BD has been tested for carcinogenicity in mice and rats. Both species responded to BD exposure by developing cancer at multiple primary organ sites. Early deaths in mice were caused by malignant lymphomas, primarily lymphocytic type, originating in the thymus. Mice exposed to BD have developed ovarian or testicular atrophy. Sperm head morphology tests also revealed abnormal sperm in mice exposed to BD; lethal mutations were found in a dominant lethal test. In light of these results in animals, the possibility that BD may adversely affect the reproductive systems of male and female workers must be considered. Additionally, anemia has been observed in animals exposed to butadiene. In some cases, this anemia appeared to be a primary response to exposure; in other cases, it may have been secondary to a neoplastic response. C. Epidemiology Epidemiologic evidence demonstrates that BD exposure poses an increased risk of leukemia. Mild alterations of hematologic parameters have also been observed in synthetic rubber workers exposed to BD. II. Potential Adverse Health Effects A. Acute Skin contact with liquid BD causes characteristic burns or frostbite. BD is gaseous form can irritate the eyes, nasal passages, throat, and lungs. Blurred vision, coughing, and drowsiness may also occur. Effects are mild at 2,000 ppm and pronounced at 8,000 ppm for exposures occurring over the full workshift. At very high concentrations in air, BD is an anesthetic, causing narcosis, respiratory paralysis, unconsciousness, and death. Such concentrations are unlikely, however, except in an extreme emergency because BD poses an explosion hazard at these levels. B. Chronic The principal adverse health effects of concern are BD-induced lymphoma, leukemia and potential reproductive toxicity. Anemia and other changes in the peripheral blood cells may be indicators of excessive exposure to BD. C. Reproductive Workers may be concerned about the possibility that their BD exposure may be affecting their ability to procreate a healthy child. For workers with high exposures to BD, especially those who have experienced difficulties in conceiving, miscarriages, or stillbirths, appropriate medical and laboratory evaluation of fertility may be necessary to determine if BD is having any adverse effect on the reproductive system or on the health of the fetus. III. Medical Screening Components At-A-Glance A. Health Questionnaire The most important goal of the health questionnaire is to elicit information from the worker regarding potential signs or symptoms generally related to leukemia or other blood abnormalities. Therefore, physicians or other licensed health care professionals should be aware of the presenting symptoms and signs of lymphohematopoietic disorders and cancers, as well as the procedures necessary to confirm or exclude such diagnoses. Additionally, the health questionnaire will assist with the identification of workers at greatest risk of developing leukemia or adverse reproductive effects from their exposures to BD. Workers with a history of reproductive difficulties or a personal or family history of immune deficiency syndromes, blood dyscrasias, lymphoma, or leukemia, and those who are or have been exposed to medicinal drugs or chemicals known to affect the hematopoietic or lymphatic systems may be at higher risk from their exposure to BD. After the initial administration, the health questionnaire must be updated annually. B. Complete Blood Count (CBC) The medical screening and surveillance program requires an annual CBC, with differential and platelet count, to be provided for each employee with BD exposure. This test is to be performed on a blood sample obtained by phlebotomy of the venous system or, if technically feasible, from a fingerstick sample of capillary blood. The sample is to be analyzed by an accredited laboratory. Abnormalities in a CBC may be due to a number of different etiologies. The concern for workers exposed to BD includes, but is not limited to, timely identification of lymphohematopoietic cancers, such as leukemia and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma. Abnormalities of portions of the CBC are identified by comparing an individual's results to those of an established range of normal values for males and females. A substantial change in any individual employee's CBC may also be viewed as “abnormal” for that individual even if all measurements fall within the population-based range of normal values. It is suggested that a flowsheet for laboratory values be included in each employee's medical record so that comparisons and trends in annual CBCs can be easily made. A determination of the clinical significance of an abnormal CBC shall be the responsibility of the examining physician, other licensed health care professional, or medical specialist to whom the employee is referred. Ideally, an abnormal CBC should be compared to previous CBC measurements for the same employee, when available. Clinical common sense may dictate that a CBC value that is very slightly outside the normal range does not warrant medical concern. A CBC abnormality may also be the result of a temporary physical stressor, such as a transient viral illness, blood donation, or menorrhagia, or laboratory error. In these cases, the CBC should be repeated in a timely fashion, i.e., within 6 weeks, to verify that return to the normal range has occurred. A clinically significant abnormal CBC should result in removal of the employee from further exposure to BD. Transfer of the employee to other work duties in a BD-free environment would be the preferred recommendation. C. Physical Examination The medical screening and surveillance program requires an initial physical examination for workers exposed to BD; this examination is repeated once every three years. The initial physical examination should assess each worker's baseline general health and rule out clinical signs of medical conditions that may be caused by or aggravated by occupational BD exposure. The physical examination should be directed at identification of signs of lymphohematopoietic disorders, including lymph node enlargement, splenomegaly, and hepatomegaly. Repeated physical examinations should update objective clinical findings that could be indicative of interim development of a lymphohematopoietic disorder, such as lymphoma, leukemia, or other blood abnormality. Physical examinations may also be provided on an as needed basis in order to follow up on a positive answer on the health questionnaire, or in response to an abnormal CBC. Physical examination of workers who will no longer be working in jobs with BD exposure are intended to rule out lymphohematopoietic disorders. The need for physical examinations for workers concerned about adverse reproductive effects from their exposure to BD should be identified by the physician or other licensed health care professional and provided accordingly. For these workers, such consultations and examinations may relate to developmental toxicity and reproductive capacity. Physical examination of workers acutely exposed to significant levels of BD should be especially directed at the respiratory system, eyes, sinuses, skin, nervous system, and any region associated with particular complaints. If the worker has received a severe acute exposure, hospitalization may be required to assure proper medical management. Since this type of exposure may place workers at greater risk of blood abnormalities, a CBC must be obtained within 48 hours and repeated at one, two, and three months. Appendix D to § 1910.1051—Sampling and Analytical Method for 1,3-Butadiene (Non-Mandatory) OSHA Method No.: Matrix: Target concentration: 3 Procedure: Recommended sampling rate and air volume: Detection limit of the overall procedure: 3 Reliable quantitation limit: 3 Standard error of estimate at the target concentration: Special requirements: Status of method: 1. Background This work was undertaken to develop a sampling and analytical procedure for BD at 1 ppm. The current method recommended by OSHA for collecting BD uses activated coconut shell charcoal as the sampling medium (Ref. 5.2). This method was found to be inadequate for use at low BD levels because of sample instability. The stability of samples has been significantly improved through the use of a specially cleaned charcoal which is coated with 4-tert-butylcatechol (TBC). TBC is a polymerization inhibitor for BD (Ref. 5.3). 1.1.1 Toxic effects Symptoms of human exposure to BD include irritation of the eyes, nose and throat. It can also cause coughing, drowsiness and fatigue. Dermatitis and frostbite can result from skin exposure to liquid BD. (Ref. 5.1) NIOSH recommends that BD be handled in the workplace as a potential occupational carcinogen. This recommendation is based on two inhalation studies that resulted in cancers at multiple sites in rats and in mice. BD has also demonstrated mutagenic activity in the presence of a liver microsomal activating system. It has also been reported to have adverse reproductive effects. (Ref. 5.1) 1.1.2. Potential workplace exposure About 90% of the annual production of BD is used to manufacture styrene-butadiene rubber and Polybutadiene rubber. Other uses include: Polychloroprene rubber, acrylonitrile butadiene-stryene resins, nylon intermediates, styrene-butadiene latexes, butadiene polymers, thermoplastic elastomers, nitrile resins, methyl methacrylate-butadiene styrene resins and chemical intermediates. (Ref. 5.1) 1.1.3. Physical properties (Ref. 5.1) CAS No.: 106-99-0 Molecular weight: 54.1 Appearance: Colorless gas Boiling point: −4.41 °C (760 mm Hg) Freezing point: −108.9 °C Vapor pressure: 2 atm @ 15.3 °C; 5 atm @ 47 °C Explosive limits: 2 to 11.5% (by volume in air) Odor threshold: 0.45 ppm Structural formula: H 2 2 Synonyms: BD; biethylene; bivinyl; butadiene; divinyl; buta-1,3-diene; alpha-gamma-butadiene; erythrene; NCI-C50602; pyrrolylene; vinylethylene. 1.2. Limit defining parameters The analyte air concentrations listed throughout this method are based on an air volume of 3 L and a desorption volume of 1 mL. Air concentrations listed in ppm are referenced to 25 °C and 760 mm Hg. 1.2.1. Detection limit of the analytical procedure The detection limit of the analytical procedure was 304 pg per injection. This was the amount of BD which gave a response relative to the interferences present in a standard. 1.2.2. Detection limit of the overall procedure The detection limit of the overall procedure was 0.60 µg per sample (90 ppb or 200 µg/m 3 1.2.3. Reliable quantitation limit The reliable quantitation limit was 1.03 µg per sample (155 ppb or 343 µg/m 3 1.2.4. Sensitivity 1 1 The sensitivity of the analytical procedure over a concentration range representing 0.6 to 2 times the target concentration, based on the recommended air volume, was 387 area units per µg/mL. This value was determined from the slope of the calibration curve. The sensitivity may vary with the particular instrument used in the analysis. 1.2.5. Recovery The recovery of BD from samples used in storage tests remained above 77% when the samples were stored at ambient temperature and above 94% when the samples were stored at refrigerated temperature. These values were determined from regression lines which were calculated from the storage data. The recovery of the analyte from the collection device must be at least 75% following storage. 1.2.6. Precision (analytical method only) The pooled coefficient of variation obtained from replicate determinations of analytical standards over the range of 0.6 to 2 times the target concentration was 0.011. 1.2.7. Precision (overall procedure) The precision at the 95% confidence level for the refrigerated temperature storage test was ±12.7%. This value includes an additional ±5% for sampling error. The overall procedure must provide results at the target concentrations that are ±25% at the 95% confidence level. 1.2.8. Reproducibility Samples collected from a controlled test atmosphere and a draft copy of this procedure were given to a chemist unassociated with this evaluation. The average recovery was 97.2% and the standard deviation was 6.2%. 2. Sampling procedure 2.1. Apparatus 2.1.1. 2.1.2. 7/32 2.2. Reagents None required. 2.3. Technique 2.3.1. 2.3.2. 2.3.3. 2.3.4. 2.3.5. 2.3.6. 2.4. Breakthrough (Breakthrough was defined as the relative amount of analyte found on the backup section of the tube in relation to the total amount of analyte collected on the sampling tube. Five-percent breakthrough occurred after sampling a test atmosphere containing 2.0 ppm BD for 90 min at 0.05 L/min. At the end of this time 4.5 L of air had been sampled and 20.1 µg of the analyte was collected. The relative humidity of the sampled air was 80% at 23 °C.) Breakthrough studies have shown that the recommended sampling procedure can be used at air concentrations higher than the target concentration. The sampling time, however, should be reduced to 45 min if both the expected BD level and the relative humidity of the sampled air are high. 2.5. Desorption efficiency The average desorption efficiency for BD from TBC coated charcoal over the range from 0.6 to 2 times the target concentration was 96.4%. The efficiency was essentially constant over the range studied. 2.6. Recommended air volume and sampling rate 2.6.1. 2.6.2. 2.7. Interferences There are no known interferences to the sampling method. 2.8. Safety precautions 2.8.1. 2.8.2. 3. Analytical procedure 3.1. Apparatus 3.1.1. 2 2 3.1.2. 3 3 1/8 3.1.3. 3.1.4. 3.2. Reagents 3.2.1. 4 4 The benzene contaminant that was present in the carbon disulfide was used as an internal standard (ISTD) in this evaluation. 3.2.2. 3.2.3. 5 5 3.3. Standard preparation 3.3.1. 6 6 3.3.2. MV = (760/BP)(273 + t)/(273)(22.41) Where: MV = ambient molar volume BP = ambient barometric pressure T = ambient temperature µg/µL = 54.09/MV µg/standard = (µg/µL)(µL) BD used to prepare the standard 3.4. Sample preparation 3.4.1. 3.4.2. 3.4.3. 3.4.4. 3.4.5. 3.5. Analysis 3.5.1. Column temperature: 95 °C Injector temperature: 180 °C Detector temperature: 275 °C Carrier gas flow rate: 30 mL/min Injection volume: 0.80 µL GC column: 20-ft × 1/8 FFAP on 80/100 Chromabsorb W-AW-DMCS. 3.5.2. 3.5.3. 3.5.4. 3.5.5. 3.6. Interferences (analytical) 3.6.1. 3.6.2. 3.6.3. 3.7. Calculations 3.7.1. 3.7.2. 3.7.3. mg/m 3 Where: A = µg/mL from Section 3.7.2 B = volume C = L of air sampled D = efficiency 3.7.4. 3 ppm = (mg/m 3 Where: mg/m 3 24.46 = molar volume of an ideal gas at 760 mm Hg and 25 °C. 3.8. Safety precautions (analytical) 3.8.1. 3.8.2. 3.8.3. 4. Additional Information 4.1. A procedure to prepare specially cleaned charcoal coated with TBC 4.1.1. Apparatus 4.1.1.1. 4.1.1.2. 8 8 4.1.1.3. 4.1.1.4. 4.1.1.5. 4.1.2. Reagents 4.1.2.1. 9 9 4.1.2.2. 10 10 4.1.2.3. 11 11 4.1.2.4. 4.1.3. Procedure Weigh 30g of charcoal into a 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask. Add about 250 mL of 10% phosphoric acid to the flask and then swirl the mixture. Stir the mixture for 1 hour using a magnetic stirrer. Filter the mixture using a fitted Buchner funnel. Wash the charcoal several times with 250-mL portions of deionized water to remove all traces of the acid. Transfer the washed charcoal to the tube furnace quartz tube. Place the quartz tube in the furnace and then connect the nitrogen gas purge to the tube. Fire the charcoal to 700 °C. Maintain that temperature for at least 1 hour. After the charcoal has cooled to room temperature, transfer it to a tared beaker. Determine the weight of the charcoal and then add an amount of TBC which is 10% of the charcoal, by weight. CAUTION-TBC is toxic and should only be handled in a fume hood while wearing gloves. Carefully mix the contents of the beaker and then transfer the mixture to a 4-oz bottle. Stopper the bottle with a clean rubber stopper which has been wrapped with Teflon tape. Clamp the bottle in a water bath so that the water level is above the charcoal level. Gently heat the bath to 60 °C and then maintain that temperature for 1 hour. Cool the charcoal to room temperature and then transfer the coated charcoal to a suitable container. The coated charcoal is now ready to be packed into sampling tubes. The sampling tubes should be stored in a sealed container to prevent contamination. Sampling tubes should be stored in the dark at room temperature. The sampling tubes should be segregated by coated adsorbent lot number. 4.2 Chromatograms The chromatograms were obtained using the recommended analytical method. The chart speed was set at 1 cm/min for the first three min and then at 0.2 cm/min for the time remaining in the analysis. The peak which elutes just before BD is a reaction product between an impurity on the charcoal and TBC. This peak is always present, but it is easily resolved from the analyte. The peak which elutes immediately before benzene is an oxidation product of TBC. 5. References 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. Chem. Eng. News Appendix E to § 1910.1051 [Reserved] Appendix F to § 1910.1051—Medical Questionnaires (Non-Mandatory) [61 FR 56831, Nov. 4, 1996, as amended at 63 FR 1294, Jan. 8, 1998; 67 FR 67965, Nov. 7, 2002; 70 FR 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16672, 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 73 FR 75587, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33609, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17785, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, Feb. 8, 2013; 84 FR 21527, May 14, 2019] § 1910.1052 Methylene chloride. This occupational health standard establishes requirements for employers to control occupational exposure to methylene chloride (MC). Employees exposed to MC are at increased risk of developing cancer, adverse effects on the heart, central nervous system and liver, and skin or eye irritation. Exposure may occur through inhalation, by absorption through the skin, or through contact with the skin. MC is a solvent which is used in many different types of work activities, such as paint stripping, polyurethane foam manufacturing, and cleaning and degreasing. Under the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section, each covered employer must make an initial determination of each employee's exposure to MC. If the employer determines that employees are exposed below the action level, the only other provisions of this section that apply are that a record must be made of the determination, the employees must receive information and training under paragraph (l) of this section and, where appropriate, employees must be protected from contact with liquid MC under paragraph (h) of this section. The provisions of the MC standard are as follows: (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions. Action level Assistant Secretary Authorized person Director Emergency Employee exposure Methylene chloride 2 2 Physician or other licensed health care professional i.e. Regulated area Symptom This section (c) Permissible exposure limits (PELs) Eight-hour time-weighted average (TWA) PEL. (2) Short-term exposure limit (STEL). (d) Exposure monitoring Characterization of employee exposure. (A) Taking a personal breathing zone air sample of each employee's exposure; or (B) Taking personal breathing zone air samples that are representative of each employee's exposure. (ii) Representative samples. (A) 8-hour TWA PEL. (B) Short-term exposure limits. (C) Exception. (iii) Accuracy of monitoring. (A) Within plus or minus 25 percent for airborne concentrations of MC above the 8-hour TWA PEL or the STEL; or (B) Within plus or minus 35 percent for airborne concentrations of MC at or above the action level but at or below the 8-hour TWA PEL. (2) Initial determination. (i) Where objective data demonstrate that MC cannot be released in the workplace in airborne concentrations at or above the action level or above the STEL. The objective data shall represent the highest MC exposures likely to occur under reasonably foreseeable conditions of processing, use, or handling. The employer shall document the objective data exemption as specified in paragraph (m) of this section; (ii) Where the employer has performed exposure monitoring within 12 months prior to April 10, 1997 and that exposure monitoring meets all other requirements of this section, and was conducted under conditions substantially equivalent to existing conditions; or (iii) Where employees are exposed to MC on fewer than 30 days per year (e.g., on a construction site), and the employer has measurements by direct-reading instruments which give immediate results (such as a detector tube) and which provide sufficient information regarding employee exposures to determine what control measures are necessary to reduce exposures to acceptable levels. (3) Periodic monitoring. Table 1—Initial Determination Exposure Scenarios and Their Associated Monitoring Frequencies Exposure scenario Required monitoring activity Below the action level and at or below the STEL No 8-hour TWA or STEL monitoring required. Below the action level and above the STEL No 8-hour TWA monitoring required; monitor STEL exposures every three months. At or above the action level, at or below the TWA, and at or below the STEL Monitor 8-hour TWA exposures every six months. At or above the action level, at or below the TWA, and above the STEL Monitor 8-hour TWA exposures every six months and monitor STEL exposures every three months. Above the TWA and at or below the STEL Monitor 8-hour TWA exposures every three months. In addition, without regard to the last sentence of the note to paragraph (d)(3), the following employers must monitor STEL exposures every three months until either the date by which they must achieve the 8-hour TWA PEL under paragraph (n) of this section or the date by which they in fact achieve the 8-hour TWA PEL, whichever comes first: employers engaged in polyurethane foam manufacturing; foam fabrication; furniture refinishing; general aviation aircraft stripping; product formulation; use of MC-based adhesives for boat building and repair, recreational vehicle manufacture, van conversion, or upholstery; and use of MC in construction work for restoration and preservation of buildings, painting and paint removal, cabinet making, or floor refinishing and resurfacing. Above the TWA and above the STEL Monitor 8-hour TWA exposures and STEL exposures every three months. Note to paragraph ( d The employer may decrease the frequency of 8-hour TWA exposure monitoring to every six months when at least two consecutive measurements taken at least seven days apart show exposures to be at or below the 8-hour TWA PEL. The employer may discontinue the periodic 8-hour TWA monitoring for employees where at least two consecutive measurements taken at least seven days apart are below the action level. The employer may discontinue the periodic STEL monitoring for employees where at least two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart are at or below the STEL. (4) Additional monitoring. (ii) Where exposure monitoring is performed due to a spill, leak, rupture or equipment breakdown, the employer shall clean-up the MC and perform the appropriate repairs before monitoring. (5) Employee notification of monitoring results. (ii) Whenever monitoring results indicate that employee exposure is above the 8-hour TWA PEL or the STEL, the employer shall describe in the written notification the corrective action being taken to reduce employee exposure to or below the 8-hour TWA PEL or STEL and the schedule for completion of this action. (6) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (ii) Observation procedures. (e) Regulated areas. (2) The employer shall limit access to regulated areas to authorized persons. (3) The employer shall supply a respirator, selected in accordance with paragraph (h)(3) of this section, to each person who enters a regulated area and shall require each affected employee to use that respirator whenever MC exposures are likely to exceed the 8-hour TWA PEL or STEL. Note to paragraph ( e An employer who has implemented all feasible engineering, work practice and administrative controls (as required in paragraph (f) of this section), and who has established a regulated area (as required by paragraph (e)(1) of this section) where MC exposure can be reliably predicted to exceed the 8-hour TWA PEL or the STEL only on certain days (for example, because of work or process schedule) would need to have affected employees use respirators in that regulated area only on those days. (4) The employer shall ensure that, within a regulated area, employees do not engage in non-work activities which may increase dermal or oral MC exposure. (5) The employer shall ensure that while employees are wearing respirators, they do not engage in activities (such as taking medication or chewing gum or tobacco) which interfere with respirator seal or performance. (6) The employer shall demarcate regulated areas from the rest of the workplace in any manner that adequately establishes and alerts employees to the boundaries of the area and minimizes the number of authorized employees exposed to MC within the regulated area. (7) An employer at a multi-employer worksite who establishes a regulated area shall communicate the access restrictions and locations of these areas to all other employers with work operations at that worksite. (f) Methods of compliance Engineering and work practice controls. (2) Prohibition of rotation. (3) Leak and spill detection. (ii) The employer shall ensure that all incidental leaks are repaired and that incidental spills are cleaned promptly by employees who use the appropriate personal protective equipment and are trained in proper methods of cleanup. Note to paragraph ( f ii See appendix A of this section for examples of procedures that satisfy this requirement. Employers covered by this standard may also be subject to the hazardous waste and emergency response provisions contained in 29 CFR 1910.120 (q). (g) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods when an employee's exposure to MC exceeds the 8-hour TWA PEL, or STEL (for example, when an employee is using MC in a regulated area). (ii) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (iii) A few work operations, such as some maintenance operations and repair activities, for which the employer demonstrates that engineering and work-practice controls are infeasible. (iv) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the PELs. (v) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (ii) Employers who provide employees with gas masks with organic-vapor canisters for the purpose of emergency escape must replace the canisters after any emergency use and before the gas masks are returned to service. (3) Respirator selection. (i) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate atmosphere-supplying respirator specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134; however, employers must not select or use half masks of any type because MC may cause eye irritation or damage. (ii) For emergency escape, provide employees with one of the following respirator options: A self-contained breathing apparatus operated in the continuous-flow or pressure-demand mode; or a gas mask with an organic vapor canister. (4) Medical evaluation. (i) Have a physician or other licensed health-care professional (PLHCP) evaluate the employee's ability to use such respiratory protection. (ii) Ensure that the PLHCP provides their findings in a written opinion to the employee and the employer. (h) Protective Work Clothing and Equipment. (2) The employer shall clean, launder, repair and replace all protective clothing and equipment required by this paragraph as needed to maintain their effectiveness. (3) The employer shall be responsible for the safe disposal of such clothing and equipment. Note to paragraph ( h See appendix A for examples of disposal procedures that will satisfy this requirement. (i) Hygiene facilities. (2) If it is reasonably foreseeable that an employee's eyes may contact solutions containing 0.1 percent or greater MC (for example through splashes, spills or improper work practices), the employer shall provide appropriate eyewash facilities within the immediate work area for emergency use, and shall ensure that affected employees use those facilities when necessary. (j) Medical surveillance Affected employees. (i) At or above the action level on 30 or more days per year, or above the 8- hour TWA PEL or the STEL on 10 or more days per year; (ii) Above the 8-TWA PEL or STEL for any time period where an employee has been identified by a physician or other licensed health care professional as being at risk from cardiac disease or from some other serious MC-related health condition and such employee requests inclusion in the medical surveillance program; (iii) During an emergency. (2) Costs. (3) Medical personnel. (4) Frequency of medical surveillance. (i) Initial surveillance. (ii) Periodic medical surveillance. (A) For employees 45 years of age or older, within 12 months of the initial surveillance or any subsequent medical surveillance; and (B) For employees younger than 45 years of age, within 36 months of the initial surveillance or any subsequent medical surveillance. (iii) Termination of employment or reassignment. (iv) Additional surveillance. (5) Content of medical surveillance Medical and work history. Note to paragraph ( j i See appendix B of this section for an example of a medical and work history format that would satisfy this requirement. (ii) Physical examination. (iii) Laboratory surveillance. Note to paragraph ( j iii See appendix B of this section for information regarding medical tests. Laboratory surveillance may include before- and after-shift carboxyhemoglobin determinations, resting ECG, hematocrit, liver function tests and cholesterol levels. (iv) Other information or reports. (6) Content of emergency medical surveillance. (i) Appropriate emergency treatment and decontamination of the exposed employee; (ii) Comprehensive physical examination with special emphasis on the nervous system, cardiovascular system, lungs, liver and skin, including blood pressure and pulse; (iii) Updated medical and work history, as appropriate for the medical condition of the employee; and (iv) Laboratory surveillance, as indicated by the employee's health status. Note to paragraph ( j iv See appendix B for examples of tests which may be appropriate. (7) Additional examinations and referrals. (8) Information provided to the physician or other licensed health care professional. (i) A copy of this section including its applicable appendices; (ii) A description of the affected employee's past, current and anticipated future duties as they relate to the employee's MC exposure; (iii) The employee's former or current exposure levels or, for employees not yet occupationally exposed to MC, the employee's anticipated exposure levels and the frequency and exposure levels anticipated to be associated with emergencies; (iv) A description of any personal protective equipment, such as respirators, used or to be used; and (v) Information from previous employment-related medical surveillance of the affected employee which is not otherwise available to the physician or other licensed health care professional. (9) Written medical opinions. (A) The physician or other licensed health care professional's opinion concerning whether exposure to MC may contribute to or aggravate the employee's existing cardiac, hepatic, neurological (including stroke) or dermal disease or whether the employee has any other medical condition(s) that would place the employee's health at increased risk of material impairment from exposure to MC. (B) Any recommended limitations upon the employee's exposure to MC, including removal from MC exposure, or upon the employee's use of respirators, protective clothing, or other protective equipment. (C) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician or other licensed health care professional that MC is a potential occupational carcinogen, of risk factors for heart disease, and the potential for exacerbation of underlying heart disease by exposure to MC through its metabolism to carbon monoxide; and (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician or other licensed health care professional of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions resulting from MC exposure which require further explanation or treatment. (ii) The employer shall instruct the physician or other licensed health care professional not to reveal to the employer, orally or in the written opinion, any specific records, findings, and diagnoses that have no bearing on occupational exposure to MC. Note to paragraph ( j ii The written medical opinion may also include information and opinions generated to comply with other OSHA health standards. (10) Medical presumption. (11) Medical Removal Protection (MRP (A) Except as provided in paragraph (j)(10) of this section, when a medical determination recommends removal because the employee's exposure to MC may contribute to or aggravate the employee's existing cardiac, hepatic, neurological (including stroke), or skin disease, the employer must provide medical removal protection benefits to the employee and either: ( 1 ( 2 (B) If comparable work is not available and the employer is able to demonstrate that removal and the costs of extending MRP benefits to an additional employee, considering feasibility in relation to the size of the employer's business and the other requirements of this standard, make further reliance on MRP an inappropriate remedy, the employer may retain the additional employee in the existing job until transfer or removal becomes appropriate, provided: ( 1 ( 2 (C) The employer shall maintain in effect any job-related protective measures or limitations, other than removal, for as long as a medical determination recommends them to be necessary. (ii) End of MRP benefits and return of the employee to former job status. (A) The employer may cease providing MRP benefits at the earliest of the following: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) For the purposes of this paragraph (j), the requirement that an employer return an employee to the employee's former job status is not intended to expand upon or restrict any rights an employee has or would have had, absent temporary medical removal, to a specific job classification or position under the terms of a collective bargaining agreement. (12) Medical removal protection benefits. (ii) During the period of time that an employee is removed from exposure to MC, the employer may condition the provision of medical removal protection benefits upon the employee's participation in follow-up medical surveillance made available pursuant to this section. (iii) If a removed employee files a workers' compensation claim for a MC-related disability, the employer shall continue the MRP benefits required by this paragraph until either the claim is resolved or the 6-month period for payment f MRP benefits has passed, whichever occurs first. To the extent the employee is entitled to indemnity payments for earnings lost during the period of removal, the employer's obligation to provide medical removal protection benefits to the employee shall be reduced by the amount of such indemnity payments. (iv) The employer's obligation to provide medical removal protection benefits to a removed employee shall be reduced to the extent that the employee receives compensation for earnings lost during the period of removal from either a publicly or an employer-funded compensation program, or receives income from employment with another employer made possible by virtue of the employee's removal. (13) Voluntary removal or restriction of an employee. (14) Multiple health care professional review mechanism. (ii) If the employee does not agree with the opinion of the employer-selected PLHCP, notifies the employer of that fact, and takes steps to make an appointment with a second PLHCP within 15 days of receiving a copy of the written opinion of the initial PLHCP, the employer shall pay for the PLHCP chosen by the employee to perform at least the following: (A) Review any findings, determinations or recommendations of the initial PLHCP; and (B) Conduct such examinations, consultations, and laboratory tests as the PLHCP deems necessary to facilitate this review. (iii) If the findings, determinations or recommendations of the second PLHCP differ from those of the initial PLHCP, then the employer and the employee shall instruct the two health care professionals to resolve the disagreement. (iv) If the two health care professionals are unable to resolve their disagreement within 15 days, then those two health care professionals shall jointly designate a PLHCP who is a specialist in the field at issue. The employer shall pay for the specialist to perform at least the following: (A) Review the findings, determinations, and recommendations of the first two PLHCPs; and (B) Conduct such examinations, consultations, laboratory tests and discussions with the prior PLHCPs as the specialist deems necessary to resolve the disagreements of the prior health care professionals. (v) The written opinion of the specialist shall be the definitive medical determination. The employer shall act consistent with the definitive medical determination, unless the employer and employee agree that the written opinion of one of the other two PLHCPs shall be the definitive medical determination. (vi) The employer and the employee or authorized employee representative may agree upon the use of any expeditious alternate health care professional determination mechanism in lieu of the multiple health care professional review mechanism provided by this paragraph so long as the alternate mechanism otherwise satisfies the requirements contained in this paragraph. (k) Hazard communication Hazard communication—general. (ii) In classifying the hazards of MC at least the following hazards are to be addressed: Cancer, cardiac effects (including elevation of carboxyhemoglobin), central nervous system effects, liver effects, and skin and eye irritation. (iii) Employers shall include MC in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS (§ 1910.1200). Employers shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of MC and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of HCS and paragraph (l) of this section. (2) [Reserved] (l) Employee information and training. (2) The employer shall ensure that information and training is presented in a manner that is understandable to the employees. (3) In addition to the information required under the Hazard Communication Standard at 29 CFR 1910.1200, 29 CFR 1915.1200, or 29 CFR 1926.59, as appropiate: (i) The employer shall inform each affected employee of the requirements of this section and information available in its appendices, as well as how to access or obtain a copy of it in the workplace; (ii) Wherever an employee's exposure to airborne concentrations of MC exceeds or can reasonably be expected to exceed the action level, the employer shall inform each affected employee of the quantity, location, manner of use, release, and storage of MC and the specific operations in the workplace that could result in exposure to MC, particularly noting where exposures may be above the 8-hour TWA PEL or STEL; (4) The employer shall train each affected employee as required under the Hazard Communication standard at 29 CFR 1910.1200, 29 CFR 1915.1200, or 29 CFR 1926.59, as appropiate. (5) The employer shall re-train each affected employee as necessary to ensure that each employee exposed above the action level or the STEL maintains the requisite understanding of the principles of safe use and handling of MC in the workplace. (6) Whenever there are workplace changes, such as modifications of tasks or procedures or the institution of new tasks or procedures, which increase employee exposure, and where those exposures exceed or can reasonably be expected to exceed the action level, the employer shall update the training as necessary to ensure that each affected employee has the requisite proficiency. (7) An employer whose employees are exposed to MC at a multi-employer worksite shall notify the other employers with work operations at that site in accordance with the requirements of the Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200, 29 CFR 1915.1200, or 29 CFR 1926.59, as appropiate. (8) The employer shall provide to the Assistant Secretary or the Director, upon request, all available materials relating to employee information and training. (m) Recordkeeping Objective data. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The MC-containing material in question; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol, results of testing, and/or analysis of the material for the release of MC; (D) A description of the operation exempted under paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section and how the data support the exemption; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exemption. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of the employer's reliance upon such objective data. (2) Exposure measurements. (ii) Where the employer has 20 or more employees, this record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement for each sample taken; (B) The operation involving exposure to MC which is being monitored; (C) Sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) Number, duration, and results of samples taken; (E) Type of personal protective equipment, such as respiratory protective devices, worn, if any; and (F) Name, job classification and exposure of all of the employees represented by monitoring, indicating which employees were actually monitored. (iii) Where the employer has fewer than 20 employees, the record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement for each sample taken; (B) Number, duration, and results of samples taken; and (C) Name, job classification and exposure of all of the employees represented by monitoring, indicating which employees were actually monitored. (iv) The employer shall maintain this record for at least thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information: (A) The name and description of the duties of the employee; (B) Written medical opinions; and (C) Any employee medical conditions related to exposure to MC. (iii) The employer shall ensure that this record is maintained for the duration of employment plus thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (4) Availability. Note to paragraph ( m i All records required to be maintained by this section may be kept in the most administratively convenient form (for example, electronic or computer records would satisfy this requirement). (ii) The employer, upon request, shall make any employee exposure and objective data records required by this section available for examination and copying by affected employees, former employees, and designated representatives in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (iii) The employer, upon request, shall make employee medical records required to be kept by this section available for examination and copying by the subject employee and by anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (5) Transfer of records. (n) [Reserved] (o) Appendices. Note to paragraph ( o The requirement of 29 CFR 1910.1052(g)(1) to use respiratory protection whenever an employee's exposure to methylene chloride exceeds or can reasonably be expected to exceed the 8-hour TWA PEL is hereby stayed until August 31, 1998 for employers engaged in polyurethane foam manufacturing; foam fabrication; furniture refinishing; general aviation aircraft stripping; formulation of products containing methylene chloride; boat building and repair; recreational vehicle manufacture; van conversion; upholstery; and use of methylene chloride in construction work for restoration and preservation of buildings, painting and paint removal, cabinet making and/or floor refinishing and resurfacing. The requirement of 29 CFR 1910.1052(f)(1) to implement engineering controls to achieve the 8-hour TWA PEL and STEL is hereby stayed until December 10, 1998 for employers with more than 100 employees engaged in polyurethane foam manufacturing and for employers with more than 20 employees engaged in foam fabrication; furniture refinishing; general aviation aircraft stripping; formulation of products containing methylene chloride; boat building and repair; recreational vehicle manufacture; van conversion; upholstery; and use of methylene chloride in construction work for restoration and preservation of buildings, painting and paint removal, cabinet making and/or floor refinishing and resurfacing. Appendix A to Section 1910.1052—Substance Safety Data Sheet and Technical Guidelines for Methylene Chloride I. Substance Identification A. Substance: Methylene chloride (CH 2 2 B. Synonyms: MC, Dichloromethane (DCM); Methylene dichloride; Methylene bichloride; Methane dichloride; CAS: 75-09-2; NCI-C50102. C. Physical data: 1. Molecular weight: 84.9. 2. Boiling point (760 mm Hg): 39.8 °C (104 °F). 3. Specific gravity (water = 1): 1.3. 4. Vapor density (air = 1 at boiling point): 2.9. 5. Vapor pressure at 20 °C (68 °F): 350 mm Hg. 6. Solubility in water, g/100 g water at 20 °C (68 °F) = 1.32. 7. Appearance and odor: colorless liquid with a chloroform-like odor. D. Uses: MC is used as a solvent, especially where high volatility is required. It is a good solvent for oils, fats, waxes, resins, bitumen, rubber and cellulose acetate and is a useful paint stripper and degreaser. It is used in paint removers, in propellant mixtures for aerosol containers, as a solvent for plastics, as a degreasing agent, as an extracting agent in the pharmaceutical industry and as a blowing agent in polyurethane foams. Its solvent property is sometimes increased by mixing with methanol, petroleum naphtha or tetrachloroethylene. E. Appearance and odor: MC is a clear colorless liquid with a chloroform-like odor. It is slightly soluble in water and completely miscible with most organic solvents. F. Permissible exposure: Exposure may not exceed 25 parts MC per million parts of air (25 ppm) as an eight-hour time-weighted average (8-hour TWA PEL) or 125 parts of MC per million parts of air (125 ppm) averaged over a 15-minute period (STEL). II. Health Hazard Data A. MC can affect the body if it is inhaled or if the liquid comes in contact with the eyes or skin. It can also affect the body if it is swallowed. B. Effects of overexposure: 1. Short-term Exposure: MC is an anesthetic. Inhaling the vapor may cause mental confusion, light-headedness, nausea, vomiting, and headache. Continued exposure may cause increased light-headedness, staggering, unconsciousness, and even death. High vapor concentrations may also cause irritation of the eyes and respiratory tract. Exposure to MC may make the symptoms of angina (chest pains) worse. Skin exposure to liquid MC may cause irritation. If liquid MC remains on the skin, it may cause skin burns. Splashes of the liquid into the eyes may cause irritation. 2. Long-term (chronic) exposure: The best evidence that MC causes cancer is from laboratory studies in which rats, mice and hamsters inhaled MC 6 hours per day, 5 days per week for 2 years. MC exposure produced lung and liver tumors in mice and mammary tumors in rats. No carcinogenic effects of MC were found in hamsters. There are also some human epidemiological studies which show an association between occupational exposure to MC and increases in biliary (bile duct) cancer and a type of brain cancer. Other epidemiological studies have not observed a relationship between MC exposure and cancer. OSHA interprets these results to mean that there is suggestive (but not absolute) evidence that MC is a human carcinogen. C. Reporting signs and symptoms: You should inform your employer if you develop any signs or symptoms and suspect that they are caused by exposure to MC. D. Warning Properties: 1. Odor Threshold: Different authors have reported varying odor thresholds for MC. Kirk-Othmer and Sax both reported 25 to 50 ppm; Summer and May both reported 150 ppm; Spector reports 320 ppm. Patty, however, states that since one can become adapted to the odor, MC should not be considered to have adequate warning properties. 2. Eye Irritation Level: Kirk-Othmer reports that “MC vapor is seriously damaging to the eyes.” Sax agrees with Kirk-Othmer's statement. The ACGIH Documentation of TLVs states that irritation of the eyes has been observed in workers exposed to concentrations up to 5000 ppm. 3. Evaluation of Warning Properties: Since a wide range of MC odor thresholds are reported (25-320 ppm), and human adaptation to the odor occurs, MC is considered to be a material with poor warning properties. III. Emergency First Aid Procedures In the event of emergency, institute first aid procedures and send for first aid or medical assistance. A. Eye and Skin Exposures: If there is a potential for liquid MC to come in contact with eye or skin, face shields and skin protective equipment must be provided and used. If liquid MC comes in contact with the eye, get medical attention. Contact lenses should not be worn when working with this chemical. B. Breathing: If a person breathes in large amounts of MC, move the exposed person to fresh air at once. If breathing has stopped, perform cardiopulmorary resuscitation. Keep the affected person warm and at rest. Get medical attention as soon as possible. C. Rescue: Move the affected person from the hazardous exposure immediately. If the exposed person has been overcome, notify someone else and put into effect the established emergency rescue procedures. Understand the facility's emergency rescue procedures and know the locations of rescue equipment before the need arises. Do not become a casualty yourself. IV. Respirators, Protective Clothing, and Eye Protection A. Respirators: Good industrial hygiene practices recommend that engineering controls be used to reduce environmental concentrations to the permissible exposure level. However, there are some exceptions where respirators may be used to control exposure. Respirators may be used when engineering and work practice controls are not feasible, when such controls are in the process of being installed, or when these controls fail and need to be supplemented. Respirators may also be used for operations which require entry into tanks or closed vessels, and in emergency situations. If the use of respirators is necessary, the only respirators permitted are those that have been approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) or the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). Supplied-air respirators are required In addition to respirator selection, a complete written respiratory protection program should be instituted which includes regular training, maintenance, inspection, cleaning, and evaluation. If you can smell MC while wearing a respirator, proceed immediately to fresh air. If you experience difficulty in breathing while wearing a respirator, tell your employer. B. Protective Clothing: Employees must be provided with and required to use impervious clothing, gloves, face shields (eight-inch minimum), and other appropriate protective clothing necessary to prevent repeated or prolonged skin contact with liquid MC or contact with vessels containing liquid MC. Any clothing which becomes wet with liquid MC should be removed immediately and not reworn until the employer has ensured that the protective clothing is fit for reuse. Contaminated protective clothing should be placed in a regulated area designated by the employer for removal of MC before the clothing is laundered or disposed of. Clothing and equipment should remain in the regulated area until all of the MC contamination has evaporated; clothing and equipment should then be laundered or disposed of as appropriate. C. Eye Protection: Employees should be provided with and required to use splash-proof safety goggles where liquid MC may contact the eyes. V. Housekeeping and Hygiene Facilities For purposes of complying with 29 CFR 1910.141, the following items should be emphasized: A. The workplace should be kept clean, orderly, and in a sanitary condition. The employer should institute a leak and spill detection program for operations involving liquid MC in order to detect sources of fugitive MC emissions. B. Emergency drench showers and eyewash facilities are recommended. These should be maintained in a sanitary condition. Suitable cleansing agents should also be provided to assure the effective removal of MC from the skin. C. Because of the hazardous nature of MC, contaminated protective clothing should be placed in a regulated area designated by the employer for removal of MC before the clothing is laundered or disposed of. VI. Precautions for Safe Use, Handling, and Storage A. Fire and Explosion Hazards: MC has no flash point in a conventional closed tester, but it forms flammable vapor-air mixtures at approximately 100 °C (212 °F), or higher. It has a lower explosion limit of 12%, and an upper explosion limit of 19% in air. It has an autoignition temperature of 556.1 °C (1033 °F), and a boiling point of 39.8 °C (104 °F). It is heavier than water with a specific gravity of 1.3. It is slightly soluble in water. B. Reactivity Hazards: Conditions contributing to the instability of MC are heat and moisture. Contact with strong oxidizers, caustics, and chemically active metals such as aluminum or magnesium powder, sodium and potassium may cause fires and explosions. Special precautions: Liquid MC will attack some forms of plastics, rubber, and coatings. C. Toxicity: Liquid MC is painful and irritating if splashed in the eyes or if confined on the skin by gloves, clothing, or shoes. Vapors in high concentrations may cause narcosis and death. Prolonged exposure to vapors may cause cancer or exacerbate cardiac disease. D. Storage: Protect against physical damage. Because of its corrosive properties, and its high vapor pressure, MC should be stored in plain, galvanized or lead lined, mild steel containers in a cool, dry, well ventilated area away from direct sunlight, heat source and acute fire hazards. E. Piping Material: All piping and valves at the loading or unloading station should be of material that is resistant to MC and should be carefully inspected prior to connection to the transport vehicle and periodically during the operation. F. Usual Shipping Containers: Glass bottles, 5- and 55-gallon steel drums, tank cars, and tank trucks. Note: This section addresses MC exposure in marine terminal and longshore employment only where leaking or broken packages allow MC exposure that is not addressed through compliance with 29 CFR parts 1917 and 1918, respectively. G. Electrical Equipment: Electrical installations in Class I hazardous locations as defined in Article 500 of the National Electrical Code, should be installed according to Article 501 of the code; and electrical equipment should be suitable for use in atmospheres containing MC vapors. See Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code (NFPA No. 325M), Chemical Safety Data Sheet SD-86 (Manufacturing Chemists' Association, Inc.). H. Fire Fighting: When involved in fire, MC emits highly toxic and irritating fumes such as phosgene, hydrogen chloride and carbon monoxide. Wear breathing apparatus and use water spray to keep fire-exposed containers cool. Water spray may be used to flush spills away from exposures. Extinguishing media are dry chemical, carbon dioxide, foam. For purposes of compliance with 29 CFR 1910.307, locations classified as hazardous due to the presence of MC shall be Class I. I. Spills and Leaks: Persons not wearing protective equipment and clothing should be restricted from areas of spills or leaks until cleanup has been completed. If MC has spilled or leaked, the following steps should be taken: 1. Remove all ignition sources. 2. Ventilate area of spill or leak. 3. Collect for reclamation or absorb in vermiculite, dry sand, earth, or a similar material. J. Methods of Waste Disposal: Small spills should be absorbed onto sand and taken to a safe area for atmospheric evaporation. Incineration is the preferred method for disposal of large quantities by mixing with a combustible solvent and spraying into an incinerator equipped with acid scrubbers to remove hydrogen chloride gases formed. Complete combustion will convert carbon monoxide to carbon dioxide. Care should be taken for the presence of phosgene. K. You should not keep food, beverage, or smoking materials, or eat or smoke in regulated areas where MC concentrations are above the permissible exposure limits. L. Portable heating units should not be used in confined areas where MC is used. M. Ask your supervisor where MC is used in your work area and for any additional plant safety and health rules. VII. Medical Requirements Your employer is required to offer you the opportunity to participate in a medical surveillance program if you are exposed to MC at concentrations at or above the action level (12.5 ppm 8-hour TWA) for more than 30 days a year or at concentrations exceeding the PELs (25 ppm 8-hour TWA or 125 ppm 15-minute STEL) for more than 10 days a year. If you are exposed to MC at concentrations over either of the PELs, your employer will also be required to have a physician or other licensed health care professional ensure that you are able to wear the respirator that you are assigned. Your employer must provide all medical examinations relating to your MC exposure at a reasonable time and place and at no cost to you. VIII. Monitoring and Measurement Procedures A. Exposure above the Permissible Exposure Limit: 1. Eight-hour exposure evaluation: Measurements taken for the purpose of determining employee exposure under this section are best taken with consecutive samples covering the full shift. Air samples must be taken in the employee's breathing zone. 2. Monitoring techniques: The sampling and analysis under this section may be performed by collection of the MC vapor on two charcoal adsorption tubes in series or other composition adsorption tubes, with subsequent chemical analysis. Sampling and analysis may also be performed by instruments such as real-time continuous monitoring systems, portable direct reading instruments, or passive dosimeters as long as measurements taken using these methods accurately evaluate the concentration of MC in employees” breathing zones. OSHA method 80 is an example of a validated method of sampling and analysis of MC. Copies of this method are available from OSHA or can be downloaded from the Internet at http://www.osha.gov. B. Since many of the duties relating to employee exposure are dependent on the results of measurement procedures, employers must assure that the evaluation of employee exposure is performed by a technically qualified person. IX. Observation of Monitoring Your employer is required to perform measurements that are representative of your exposure to MC and you or your designated representative are entitled to observe the monitoring procedure. You are entitled to observe the steps taken in the measurement procedure, and to record the results obtained. When the monitoring procedure is taking place in an area where respirators or personal protective clothing and equipment are required to be worn, you or your representative must also be provided with, and must wear, protective clothing and equipment. X. Access to Information A. Your employer is required to inform you of the information contained in this Appendix. In addition, your employer must instruct you in the proper work practices for using MC, emergency procedures, and the correct use of protective equipment. B. Your employer is required to determine whether you are being exposed to MC. You or your representative has the right to observe employee measurements and to record the results obtained. Your employer is required to inform you of your exposure. If your employer determines that you are being over exposed, he or she is required to inform you of the actions which are being taken to reduce your exposure to within permissible exposure limits. C. Your employer is required to keep records of your exposures and medical examinations. These records must be kept by the employer for at least thirty (30) years. D. Your employer is required to release your exposure and medical records to you or your representative upon your request. E. Your employer is required to provide labels and safety data sheets (SDSs) for all materials, mixtures or solutions composed of greater than 0.1 percent MC. These materials, mixtures or solutions would be classified and labeled in accordance with § 1910.1200. Danger Contains Methylene Chloride Potential Cancer Hazard May worsen heart disease because methylene chloride is converted to carbon monoxide in the body. May cause dizziness, headache, irritation of the throat and lungs, loss of consciousness and death at high concentrations (for example, if used in a poorly ventilated room). Avoid Skin Contact. XI. Common Operations and Controls The following list includes some common operations in which exposure to MC may occur and control methods which may be effective in each case: Operations Controls Use as solvent in paint and varnish removers; manufacture of aerosols; cold cleaning and ultrasonic cleaning; and as a solvent in furniture stripping General dilution ventilation; local exhaust ventilation; personal protective equipment; substitution. Use as solvent in vapor degreasing Process enclosure; local exhaust ventilation; chilling coils; substitution. Use as a secondary refrigerant in air conditioning and scientific testing General dilution ventilation; local exhaust ventilation; personal protective equipment. Appendix B to Section 1910.1052—Medical Surveillance for Methylene Chloride I. Primary Route of Entry Inhalation. II. Toxicology Methylene Chloride (MC) is primarily an inhalation hazard. The principal acute hazardous effects are the depressant action on the central nervous system, possible cardiac toxicity and possible liver toxicity. The range of CNS effects are from decreased eye/hand coordination and decreased performance in vigilance tasks to narcosis and even death of individuals exposed at very high doses. Cardiac toxicity is due to the metabolism of MC to carbon monoxide, and the effects of carbon monoxide on heart tissue. Carbon monoxide displaces oxygen in the blood, decreases the oxygen available to heart tissue, increasing the risk of damage to the heart, which may result in heart attacks in susceptible individuals. Susceptible individuals include persons with heart disease and those with risk factors for heart disease. Elevated liver enzymes and irritation to the respiratory passages and eyes have also been reported for both humans and experimental animals exposed to MC vapors. MC is metabolized to carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide via two separate pathways. Through the first pathway, MC is metabolized to carbon monoxide as an end-product via the P-450 mixed function oxidase pathway located in the microsomal fraction of the cell. This biotransformation of MC to carbon monoxide occurs through the process of microsomal oxidative dechlorination which takes place primarily in the liver. The amount of conversion to carbon monoxide is significant as measured by the concentration of carboxyhemoglobin, up to 12% measured in the blood following occupational exposure of up to 610 ppm. Through the second pathway, MC is metabolized to carbon dioxide as an end product (with formaldehyde and formic acid as metabolic intermediates) via the glutathione dependent enzyme found in the cytosolic fraction of the liver cell. Metabolites along this pathway are believed to be associated with the carcinogenic activity of MC. MC has been tested for carcinogenicity in several laboratory rodents. These rodent studies indicate that there is clear evidence that MC is carcinogenic to male and female mice and female rats. Based on epidemiologic studies, OSHA has concluded that there is suggestive evidence of increased cancer risk in MC-related worker populations. The epidemiological evidence is consistent with the finding of excess cancer in the experimental animal studies. NIOSH regards MC as a potential occupational carcinogen and the International Agency for Research Cancer (IARC) classifies MC as an animal carcinogen. OSHA considers MC as a suspected human carcinogen. III. Medical Signs and Symptoms of Acute Exposure Skin exposure to liquid MC may cause irritation or skin burns. Liquid MC can also be irritating to the eyes. MC is also absorbed through the skin and may contribute to the MC exposure by inhalation. At high concentrations in air, MC may cause nausea, vomiting, light-headedness, numbness of the extremities, changes in blood enzyme levels, and breathing problems, leading to bronchitis and pulmonary edema, unconsciousness and even death. At lower concentrations in air, MC may cause irritation to the skin, eye, and respiratory tract and occasionally headache and nausea. Perhaps the greatest problem from exposure to low concentrations of MC is the CNS effects on coordination and alertness that may cause unsafe operations of machinery and equipment, leading to self-injury or accidents. Low levels and short duration exposures do not seem to produce permanent disability, but chronic exposures to MC have been demonstrated to produce liver toxicity in animals, and therefore, the evidence is suggestive for liver toxicity in humans after chronic exposure. Chronic exposure to MC may also cause cancer. IV. Surveillance and Preventive Considerations As discussed in sections II and III of this appendix, MC is classified as a suspect or potential human carcinogen. It is a central nervous system (CNS) depressant and a skin, eye and respiratory tract irritant. At extremely high concentrations, MC has caused liver damage in animals. MC principally affects the CNS, where it acts as a narcotic. The observation of the symptoms characteristic of CNS depression, along with a physical examination, provides the best detection of early neurological disorders. Since exposure to MC also increases the carboxyhemoglobin level in the blood, ambient carbon monoxide levels would have an additive effect on that carboxyhemoglobin level. Based on such information, a periodic post-shift carboxyhemoglobin test as an index of the presence of carbon monoxide in the blood is recommended, but not required, for medical surveillance. Based on the animal evidence and three epidemiologic studies previously mentioned, OSHA concludes that MC is a suspect human carcinogen. The medical surveillance program is designed to observe exposed workers on a regular basis. While the medical surveillance program cannot detect MC-induced cancer at a preneoplastic stage, OSHA anticipates that, as in the past, early detection and treatments of cancers leading to enhanced survival rates will continue to evolve. A. Medical and Occupational History The medical and occupational work history plays an important role in the initial evaluation of workers exposed to MC. It is therefore extremely important for the examining physician or other licensed health care professional to evaluate the MC-exposed worker carefully and completely and to focus the examination on MC's potentially associated health hazards. The medical evaluation must include an annual detailed work and medical history with special emphasis on cardiac history and neurological symptoms. An important goal of the medical history is to elicit information from the worker regarding potential signs or symptoms associated with increased levels of carboxyhemoglobin due to the presence of carbon monoxide in the blood. Physicians or other licensed health care professionals should ensure that the smoking history of all MC exposed employees is known. Exposure to MC may cause a significant increase in carboxyhemoglobin level in all exposed persons. However, smokers as well as workers with anemia or heart disease and those concurrently exposed to carbon monoxide are at especially high risk of toxic effects because of an already reduced oxygen carrying capacity of the blood. A comprehensive or interim medical and work history should also include occurrence of headache, dizziness, fatigue, chest pain, shortness of breath, pain in the limbs, and irritation of the skin and eyes. In addition, it is important for the physician or other licensed health care professional to become familiar with the operating conditions in which exposure to MC is likely to occur. The physician or other licensed health care professional also must become familiar with the signs and symptoms that may indicate that a worker is receiving otherwise unrecognized and exceptionally high exposure levels of MC. An example of a medical and work history that would satisfy the requirement for a comprehensive or interim work history is represented by the following: The following is a list of recommended questions and issues for the self-administered questionnaire for methylene chloride exposure. Appendix C to Section 1910.1052—Questions and Answers—Methylene Chloride Control in Furniture Stripping [62 FR 1601, Jan. 10, 1997, as amended at 62 FR 42667, Aug. 8, 1997; 62 FR 54383, Oct. 20, 1997; 62 FR 66277, Dec. 18, 1997; 63 FR 1295, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 20099, Apr. 23, 1998; 63 FR 50729, Sept. 22, 1998; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50190, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75587, Dec. 12, 2008; 77 FR 17785, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, Feb. 8, 2013; 84 FR 21555, May 14, 2019] § 1910.1053 Respirable crystalline silica. (a) Scope and application. (i) Construction work as defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b) (occupational exposures to respirable crystalline silica in construction work are covered under 29 CFR 1926.1153); (ii) Agricultural operations covered under 29 CFR part 1928; and (iii) Exposures that result from the processing of sorptive clays. (2) This section does not apply where the employer has objective data demonstrating that employee exposure to respirable crystalline silica will remain below 25 micrograms per cubic meter of air (25 µg/m 3 (3) This section does not apply if the employer complies with 29 CFR 1926.1153 and: (i) The task performed is indistinguishable from a construction task listed on Table 1 in paragraph (c) of 29 CFR 1926.1153; and (ii) The task will not be performed regularly in the same environment and conditions. (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Assistant Secretary Director Employee exposure High-efficiency particulate air [HEPA] filter Objective data Physician or other licensed health care professional [PLHCP] i.e., Regulated area Respirable crystalline silica Specialist This section (c) Permissible exposure limit (PEL). 3 (d) Exposure assessment General. (2) Performance option. (3) Scheduled monitoring option. (ii) If initial monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level, the employer may discontinue monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring. (iii) Where the most recent exposure monitoring indicates that employee exposures are at or above the action level but at or below the PEL, the employer shall repeat such monitoring within six months of the most recent monitoring. (iv) Where the most recent exposure monitoring indicates that employee exposures are above the PEL, the employer shall repeat such monitoring within three months of the most recent monitoring. (v) Where the most recent (non-initial) exposure monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level, the employer shall repeat such monitoring within six months of the most recent monitoring until two consecutive measurements, taken 7 or more days apart, are below the action level, at which time the employer may discontinue monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring, except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(4) of this section. (4) Reassessment of exposures. (5) Methods of sample analysis. (6) Employee notification of assessment results. (ii) Whenever an exposure assessment indicates that employee exposure is above the PEL, the employer shall describe in the written notification the corrective action being taken to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL. (7) Observation of monitoring. (ii) When observation of monitoring requires entry into an area where the use of protective clothing or equipment is required for any workplace hazard, the employer shall provide the observer with protective clothing and equipment at no cost and shall ensure that the observer uses such clothing and equipment. (e) Regulated areas Establishment. (2) Demarcation. (ii) The employer shall post signs at all entrances to regulated areas that bear the legend specified in paragraph (j)(2) of this section. (3) Access. (A) Persons authorized by the employer and required by work duties to be present in the regulated area; (B) Any person entering such an area as a designated representative of employees for the purpose of exercising the right to observe monitoring procedures under paragraph (d) of this section; and (C) Any person authorized by the Occupational Safety and Health Act or regulations issued under it to be in a regulated area. (4) Provision of respirators. (f) Methods of compliance Engineering and work practice controls. (2) Written exposure control plan. (A) A description of the tasks in the workplace that involve exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (B) A description of the engineering controls, work practices, and respiratory protection used to limit employee exposure to respirable crystalline silica for each task; and (C) A description of the housekeeping measures used to limit employee exposure to respirable crystalline silica. (ii) The employer shall review and evaluate the effectiveness of the written exposure control plan at least annually and update it as necessary. (iii) The employer shall make the written exposure control plan readily available for examination and copying, upon request, to each employee covered by this section, their designated representatives, the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (3) Abrasive blasting. (g) Respiratory protection General. (i) Where exposures exceed the PEL during periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work practice controls; (ii) Where exposures exceed the PEL during tasks, such as certain maintenance and repair tasks, for which engineering and work practice controls are not feasible; (iii) During tasks for which an employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work practice controls and such controls are not sufficient to reduce exposures to or below the PEL; and (iv) During periods when the employee is in a regulated area. (2) Respiratory protection program. (h) Housekeeping. (2) The employer shall not allow compressed air to be used to clean clothing or surfaces where such activity could contribute to employee exposure to respirable crystalline silica unless: (i) The compressed air is used in conjunction with a ventilation system that effectively captures the dust cloud created by the compressed air; or (ii) No alternative method is feasible. (i) Medical surveillance General. (ii) The employer shall ensure that all medical examinations and procedures required by this section are performed by a PLHCP as defined in paragraph (b) of this section. (2) Initial examination (i) A medical and work history, with emphasis on: Past, present, and anticipated exposure to respirable crystalline silica, dust, and other agents affecting the respiratory system; any history of respiratory system dysfunction, including signs and symptoms of respiratory disease (e.g., shortness of breath, cough, wheezing); history of tuberculosis; and smoking status and history; (ii) A physical examination with special emphasis on the respiratory system; (iii) A chest X-ray (a single posteroanterior radiographic projection or radiograph of the chest at full inspiration recorded on either film (no less than 14 x 17 inches and no more than 16 x 17 inches) or digital radiography systems), interpreted and classified according to the International Labour Office (ILO) International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses by a NIOSH-certified B Reader; (iv) A pulmonary function test to include forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume in one second (FEV 1 1 (v) Testing for latent tuberculosis infection; and (vi) Any other tests deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. (3) Periodic examinations. (4) Information provided to the PLHCP. (i) A description of the employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (ii) The employee's former, current, and anticipated levels of occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (iii) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used or will use that equipment; and (iv) Information from records of employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the employee and currently within the control of the employer. (5) PLHCP's written medical report for the employee (i) A statement indicating the results of the medical examination, including any medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to respirable crystalline silica and any medical conditions that require further evaluation or treatment; (ii) Any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators; (iii) Any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica; and (iv) A statement that the employee should be examined by a specialist (pursuant to paragraph (i)(7) of this section) if the chest X-ray provided in accordance with this section is classified as 1/0 or higher by the B Reader, or if referral to a specialist is otherwise deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. (6) PLHCP's written medical opinion for the employer. (A) The date of the examination; (B) A statement that the examination has met the requirements of this section; and (C) Any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators. (ii) If the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion shall also contain either or both of the following: (A) Any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (B) A statement that the employee should be examined by a specialist (pursuant to paragraph (i)(7) of this section) if the chest X-ray provided in accordance with this section is classified as 1/0 or higher by the B Reader, or if referral to a specialist is otherwise deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. (iii) The employer shall ensure that each employee receives a copy of the written medical opinion described in paragraph (i)(6)(i) and (ii) of this section within 30 days of each medical examination performed. (7) Additional examinations. (ii) The employer shall ensure that the examining specialist is provided with all of the information that the employer is obligated to provide to the PLHCP in accordance with paragraph (i)(4) of this section. (iii) The employer shall ensure that the specialist explains to the employee the results of the medical examination and provides each employee with a written medical report within 30 days of the examination. The written report shall meet the requirements of paragraph (i)(5) (except paragraph (i)(5)(iv)) of this section. (iv) The employer shall obtain a written opinion from the specialist within 30 days of the medical examination. The written opinion shall meet the requirements of paragraph (i)(6) (except paragraph (i)(6)(i)(B) and (i)(6)(ii)(B)) of this section. (j) Communication of respirable crystalline silica hazards to employees Hazard communication. (2) Signs. DANGER RESPIRABLE CRYSTALLINE SILICA MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (3) Employee information and training. (A) The health hazards associated with exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (B) Specific tasks in the workplace that could result in exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (C) Specific measures the employer has implemented to protect employees from exposure to respirable crystalline silica, including engineering controls, work practices, and respirators to be used; (D) The contents of this section; and (E) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program required by paragraph (i) of this section. (ii) The employer shall make a copy of this section readily available without cost to each employee covered by this section. (k) Recordkeeping Air monitoring data. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement for each sample taken; (B) The task monitored; (C) Sampling and analytical methods used; (D) Number, duration, and results of samples taken; (E) Identity of the laboratory that performed the analysis; (F) Type of personal protective equipment, such as respirators, worn by the employees monitored; and (G) Name and job classification of all employees represented by the monitoring, indicating which employees were actually monitored. (iii) The employer shall ensure that exposure records are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (2) Objective data. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The crystalline silica-containing material in question; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol and results of testing; (D) A description of the process, task, or activity on which the objective data were based; and (E) Other data relevant to the process, task, activity, material, or exposures on which the objective data were based. (iii) The employer shall ensure that objective data are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include the following information about the employee: (A) Name; (B) A copy of the PLHCPs' and specialists' written medical opinions; and (C) A copy of the information provided to the PLHCPs and specialists. (iii) The employer shall ensure that medical records are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (l) Dates. (2) Except as provided for in paragraphs (l)(3) and (4) of this section, all obligations of this section commence June 23, 2018. (3) For hydraulic fracturing operations in the oil and gas industry: (i) All obligations of this section, except obligations for medical surveillance in paragraph (i)(1)(i) and engineering controls in paragraph (f)(1) of this section, commence June 23, 2018; (ii) Obligations for engineering controls in paragraph (f)(1) of this section commence June 23, 2021; and (iii) Obligations for medical surveillance in paragraph (i)(1)(i) commence in accordance with paragraph (l)(4) of this section. (4) The medical surveillance obligations in paragraph (i)(1)(i) commence on June 23, 2018, for employees who will be occupationally exposed to respirable crystalline silica above the PEL for 30 or more days per year. Those obligations commence June 23, 2020, for employees who will be occupationally exposed to respirable crystalline silica at or above the action level for 30 or more days per year. Appendix A to § 1910.1053—Methods of Sample Analysis This appendix specifies the procedures for analyzing air samples for respirable crystalline silica, as well as the quality control procedures that employers must ensure that laboratories use when performing an analysis required under 29 CFR 1910.1053 (d)(5). Employers must ensure that such a laboratory: 1. Evaluates all samples using the procedures specified in one of the following analytical methods: OSHA ID-142; NMAM 7500; NMAM 7602; NMAM 7603; MSHA P-2; or MSHA P-7; 2. Is accredited to ANS/ISO/IEC Standard 17025:2005 with respect to crystalline silica analyses by a body that is compliant with ISO/IEC Standard 17011:2004 for implementation of quality assessment programs; 3. Uses the most current National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) or NIST traceable standards for instrument calibration or instrument calibration verification; 4. Implements an internal quality control (QC) program that evaluates analytical uncertainty and provides employers with estimates of sampling and analytical error; 5. Characterizes the sample material by identifying polymorphs of respirable crystalline silica present, identifies the presence of any interfering compounds that might affect the analysis, and makes any corrections necessary in order to obtain accurate sample analysis; and 6. Analyzes quantitatively for crystalline silica only after confirming that the sample matrix is free of uncorrectable analytical interferences, corrects for analytical interferences, and uses a method that meets the following performance specifications: 6.1 6.2 6.3 Appendix B to § 1910.1053—Medical Surveillance Guidelines Introduction The purpose of this Appendix is to provide medical information and recommendations to aid physicians and other licensed health care professionals (PLHCPs) regarding compliance with the medical surveillance provisions of the respirable crystalline silica standard (29 CFR 1910.1053). Appendix B is for informational and guidance purposes only and none of the statements in Appendix B should be construed as imposing a mandatory requirement on employers that is not otherwise imposed by the standard. Medical screening and surveillance allow for early identification of exposure-related health effects in individual employee and groups of employees, so that actions can be taken to both avoid further exposure and prevent or address adverse health outcomes. Silica-related diseases can be fatal, encompass a variety of target organs, and may have public health consequences when considering the increased risk of a latent tuberculosis (TB) infection becoming active. Thus, medical surveillance of silica-exposed employees requires that PLHCPs have a thorough knowledge of silica-related health effects. This Appendix is divided into seven sections. Section 1 reviews silica-related diseases, medical responses, and public health responses. Section 2 outlines the components of the medical surveillance program for employees exposed to silica. Section 3 describes the roles and responsibilities of the PLHCP implementing the program and of other medical specialists and public health professionals. Section 4 provides a discussion of considerations, including confidentiality. Section 5 provides a list of additional resources and Section 6 lists references. Section 7 provides sample forms for the written medical report for the employee, the written medical opinion for the employer and the written authorization. 1. Recognition of Silica-Related Diseases 1.1. Overview. et al. Silicosis is an irreversible, often disabling, and sometimes fatal fibrotic lung disease. Progression of silicosis can occur despite removal from further exposure. Diagnosis of silicosis requires a history of exposure to silica and radiologic findings characteristic of silica exposure. Three different presentations of silicosis (chronic, accelerated, and acute) have been defined. Accelerated and acute silicosis are much less common than chronic silicosis. However, it is critical to recognize all cases of accelerated and acute silicosis because these are life-threatening illnesses and because they are caused by substantial overexposures to respirable crystalline silica. Although any case of silicosis indicates a breakdown in prevention, a case of acute or accelerated silicosis implies current high exposure and a very marked breakdown in prevention. In addition to silicosis, employees exposed to respirable crystalline silica, especially those with accelerated or acute silicosis, are at increased risks of contracting active TB and other infections (ATS 1997; Rees and Murray 2007). Exposure to respirable crystalline silica also increases an employee's risk of developing lung cancer, and the higher the cumulative exposure, the higher the risk (Steenland et al. 1.2. Chronic Silicosis. 1.2.1. Symptoms—shortness of breath and cough, although employees may not notice any symptoms early in the disease. Constitutional symptoms, such as fever, loss of appetite and fatigue, may indicate other diseases associated with silica exposure, such as TB infection or lung cancer. Employees with these symptoms should immediately receive further evaluation and treatment. 1.2.2. Physical Examination—may be normal or disclose dry rales or rhonchi on lung auscultation. 1.2.3. Spirometry—may be normal or may show only a mild restrictive or obstructive pattern. 1.2.4. Chest X-ray—classic findings are small, rounded opacities in the upper lung fields bilaterally. However, small irregular opacities and opacities in other lung areas can also occur. Rarely, “eggshell calcifications” in the hilar and mediastinal lymph nodes are seen. 1.2.5. Clinical Course—chronic silicosis in most cases is a slowly progressive disease. Under the respirable crystalline silica standard, the PLHCP is to recommend that employees with a 1/0 category X-ray be referred to an American Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine. The PLHCP and/or Specialist should counsel employees regarding work practices and personal habits that could affect employees' respiratory health. 1.3. Accelerated Silicosis. 1.3.1. Symptoms—shortness of breath, cough, and sometimes sputum production. Employees with exposure to respirable crystalline silica, and especially those with accelerated silicosis, are at high risk for activation of TB infections, atypical mycobacterial infections, and fungal superinfections. Constitutional symptoms, such as fever, weight loss, hemoptysis (coughing up blood), and fatigue may herald one of these infections or the onset of lung cancer. 1.3.2. Physical Examination—rales, rhonchi, or other abnormal lung findings in relation to illnesses present. Clubbing of the digits, signs of heart failure, and cor pulmonale may be present in severe lung disease. 1.3.3. Spirometry—restrictive or mixed restrictive/obstructive pattern. 1.3.4. Chest X-ray—small rounded and/or irregular opacities bilaterally. Large opacities and lung abscesses may indicate infections, lung cancer, or progression to complicated silicosis, also termed progressive massive fibrosis. 1.3.5. Clinical Course—accelerated silicosis has a rapid, severe course. Under the respirable crystalline silica standard, the PLHCP can recommend referral to a Board Certified Specialist in either Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine, as deemed appropriate, and referral to a Specialist is recommended whenever the diagnosis of accelerated silicosis is being considered. 1.4. Acute Silicosis. 1.4.1. Symptoms—sudden, progressive, and severe shortness of breath. Constitutional symptoms are frequently present and include fever, weight loss, fatigue, productive cough, hemoptysis (coughing up blood), and pleuritic chest pain. 1.4.2. Physical Examination—dyspnea at rest, cyanosis, decreased breath sounds, inspiratory rales, clubbing of the digits, and fever. 1.4.3. Spirometry—restrictive or mixed restrictive/obstructive pattern. 1.4.4. Chest X-ray—diffuse haziness of the lungs bilaterally early in the disease. As the disease progresses, the “ground glass” appearance of interstitial fibrosis will appear. 1.4.5. Clinical Course—employees with acute silicosis are at especially high risk of TB activation, nontuberculous mycobacterial infections, and fungal superinfections. Acute silicosis is immediately life-threatening. The employee should be urgently referred to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine for evaluation and treatment. Although any case of silicosis indicates a breakdown in prevention, a case of acute or accelerated silicosis implies a profoundly high level of silica exposure and may mean that other employees are currently exposed to dangerous levels of silica. 1.5. COPD. See et al. 1.6. Renal and Immune System. et al. 1.7. TB and Other Infections. See Mycobacterium avium-intracellulare Mycobacterium kansaii 1.8. Lung Cancer. et al. 2. Medical Surveillance PLHCPs who manage silica medical surveillance programs should have a thorough understanding of the many silica-related diseases and health effects outlined in Section 1 of this Appendix. At each clinical encounter, the PLHCP should consider silica-related health outcomes, with particular vigilance for acute and accelerated silicosis. In this Section, the required components of medical surveillance under the respirable crystalline silica standard are reviewed, along with additional guidance and recommendations for PLHCPs performing medical surveillance examinations for silica-exposed employees. 2.1. History 2.1.1. The respirable crystalline silica standard requires the following: A medical and work history, with emphasis on: Past, present, and anticipated exposure to respirable crystalline silica, dust, and other agents affecting the respiratory system; any history of respiratory system dysfunction, including signs and symptoms of respiratory disease (e.g., shortness of breath, cough, wheezing); history of TB; and smoking status and history. 2.1.2. Further, the employer must provide the PLHCP with the following information: 2.1.2.1. A description of the employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; 2.1.2.2. The employee's former, current, and anticipated levels of occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; 2.1.2.3. A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used or will use that equipment; and 2.1.2.4. Information from records of employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the employee and currently within the control of the employer. 2.1.3. Additional guidance and recommendations: A history is particularly important both in the initial evaluation and in periodic examinations. Information on past and current medical conditions (particularly a history of kidney disease, cardiac disease, connective tissue disease, and other immune diseases), medications, hospitalizations and surgeries may uncover health risks, such as immune suppression, that could put an employee at increased health risk from exposure to silica. This information is important when counseling the employee on risks and safe work practices related to silica exposure. 2.2. Physical Examination 2.2.1. The respirable crystalline silica standard requires the following: A physical examination, with special emphasis on the respiratory system. The physical examination must be performed at the initial examination and every three years thereafter. 2.2.2. Additional guidance and recommendations: Elements of the physical examination that can assist the PHLCP include: An examination of the cardiac system, an extremity examination (for clubbing, cyanosis, edema, or joint abnormalities), and an examination of other pertinent organ systems identified during the history. 2.3. TB Testing 2.3.1. The respirable crystalline silica standard requires the following: Baseline testing for TB on initial examination. 2.3.2. Additional guidance and recommendations: 2.3.2.1. Current CDC guidelines ( See 2.3.2.2. PLHCPs may use alternative TB tests, such as interferon-γ release assays (IGRAs), if sensitivity and specificity are comparable to TST (Mazurek et al. et al. 2.3.2.3. The silica standard allows the PLHCP to order additional tests or test at a greater frequency than required by the standard, if deemed appropriate. Therefore, PLHCPs might perform periodic (e.g., annual) TB testing as appropriate, based on employees' risk factors. For example, according to the American Thoracic Society (ATS), the diagnosis of silicosis or exposure to silica for 25 years or more are indications for annual TB testing (ATS 1997). PLHCPs should consult the current CDC guidance on risk factors for TB ( See 2.3.2.4. Employees with positive TB tests and those with indeterminate test results should be referred to the appropriate agency or specialist, depending on the test results and clinical picture. Agencies, such as local public health departments, or specialists, such as a pulmonary or infectious disease specialist, may be the appropriate referral. Active TB is a nationally notifiable disease. PLHCPs should be aware of the reporting requirements for their region. All States have TB Control Offices that can be contacted for further information. ( See 2.3.2.5. The following public health principles are key to TB control in the U.S. (ATS-CDC-IDSA 2005): ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 2.4. Pulmonary Function Testing 2.4.1. The respirable crystalline silica standard requires the following: Pulmonary function testing must be performed on the initial examination and every three years thereafter. The required pulmonary function test is spirometry and must include forced vital capacity (FVC), forced expiratory volume in one second (FEV 1 1 2.4.2. Additional guidance and recommendations: Spirometry provides information about individual respiratory status and can be used to track an employee's respiratory status over time or as a surveillance tool to follow individual and group respiratory function. For quality results, the ATS and the American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine (ACOEM) recommend use of the third National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES III) values, and ATS publishes recommendations for spirometry equipment (Miller et al. et al. Spirometry Testing in Occupational Health Programs: Best Practices for Healthcare Professionals, 2.5. Chest X-ray 2.5.1. The respirable crystalline silica standard requires the following: A single posteroanterior (PA) radiographic projection or radiograph of the chest at full inspiration recorded on either film (no less than 14 x 17 inches and no more than 16 x 17 inches) or digital radiography systems. A chest X-ray must be performed on the initial examination and every three years thereafter. The chest X-ray must be interpreted and classified according to the International Labour Office (ILO) International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses by a NIOSH-certified B Reader. Chest radiography is necessary to diagnose silicosis, monitor the progression of silicosis, and identify associated conditions such as TB. If the B reading indicates small opacities in a profusion of 1/0 or higher, the employee is to receive a recommendation for referral to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine. 2.5.2. Additional guidance and recommendations: Medical imaging has largely transitioned from conventional film-based radiography to digital radiography systems. The ILO Guidelines for the Classification of Pneumoconioses has historically provided film-based chest radiography as a referent standard for comparison to individual exams. However, in 2011, the ILO revised the guidelines to include a digital set of referent standards that were derived from the prior film-based standards. To assist in assuring that digitally-acquired radiographs are at least as safe and effective as film radiographs, NIOSH has prepared guidelines, based upon accepted contemporary professional recommendations ( See et al. et al. See 2.6. Other Testing. 3. Roles and Responsibilities 3.1. PLHCP. i.e. Once the medical surveillance examination is completed, the employer must ensure that the PLHCP explains to the employee the results of the medical examination and provides the employee with a written medical report within 30 days of the examination. The written medical report must contain a statement indicating the results of the medical examination, including any medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to respirable crystalline silica and any medical conditions that require further evaluation or treatment. In addition, the PLHCP's written medical report must include any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators, any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica, and a statement that the employee should be examined by a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational medicine if the chest X-ray is classified as 1/0 or higher by the B Reader, or if referral to a Specialist is otherwise deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. The PLHCP should discuss all findings and test results and any recommendations regarding the employee's health, worksite safety and health practices, and medical referrals for further evaluation, if indicated. In addition, it is suggested that the PLHCP offer to provide the employee with a complete copy of their examination and test results, as some employees may want this information for their own records or to provide to their personal physician or a future PLHCP. Employees are entitled to access their medical records. Under the respirable crystalline silica standard, the employer must ensure that the PLHCP provides the employer with a written medical opinion within 30 days of the employee examination, and that the employee also gets a copy of the written medical opinion for the employer within 30 days. The PLHCP may choose to directly provide the employee a copy of the written medical opinion. This can be particularly helpful to employees, such as construction employees, who may change employers frequently. The written medical opinion can be used by the employee as proof of up-to-date medical surveillance. The following lists the elements of the written medical report for the employee and written medical opinion for the employer. (Sample forms for the written medical report for the employee, the written medical opinion for the employer, and the written authorization are provided in Section 7 of this Appendix.) 3.1.1. The written medical report for the employee must include the following information: 3.1.1.1. A statement indicating the results of the medical examination, including any medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to respirable crystalline silica and any medical conditions that require further evaluation or treatment; 3.1.1.2. Any recommended limitations upon the employee's use of a respirator; 3.1.1.3. Any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica; and 3.1.1.4. A statement that the employee should be examined by a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine, where the standard requires or where the PLHCP has determined such a referral is necessary. The standard requires referral to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine for a chest X-ray B reading indicating small opacities in a profusion of 1/0 or higher, or if the PHLCP determines that referral to a Specialist is necessary for other silica-related findings. 3.1.2. The PLHCP's written medical opinion for the employer must include only the following information: 3.1.2.1. The date of the examination; 3.1.2.2. A statement that the examination has met the requirements of this section; and 3.1.2.3. Any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators. 3.1.2.4. If the employee provides the PLHCP with written authorization, the written opinion for the employer shall also contain either or both of the following: (1) (2) 3.1.2.5. In addition to the above referral for abnormal chest X-ray, the PLHCP may refer an employee to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine for other findings of concern during the medical surveillance examination if these findings are potentially related to silica exposure. 3.1.2.6. Although the respirable crystalline silica standard requires the employer to ensure that the PLHCP explains the results of the medical examination to the employee, the standard does not mandate how this should be done. The written medical opinion for the employer could contain a statement that the PLHCP has explained the results of the medical examination to the employee. 3.2. Medical Specialists. 3.2.1. The employer must provide the following information to the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine: 3.2.1.1. A description of the employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; 3.2.1.2. The employee's former, current, and anticipated levels of occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; 3.2.1.3. A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used or will use that equipment; and 3.2.1.4. Information from records of employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the employee and currently within the control of the employer. 3.2.2. The PLHCP should make certain that, with written authorization from the employee, the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine has any other pertinent medical and occupational information necessary for the specialist's evaluation of the employee's condition. 3.2.3. Once the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine has evaluated the employee, the employer must ensure that the Specialist explains to the employee the results of the medical examination and provides the employee with a written medical report within 30 days of the examination. The employer must also ensure that the Specialist provides the employer with a written medical opinion within 30 days of the employee examination. (Sample forms for the written medical report for the employee, the written medical opinion for the employer and the written authorization are provided in Section 7 of this Appendix.) 3.2.4. The Specialist's written medical report for the employee must include the following information: 3.2.4.1. A statement indicating the results of the medical examination, including any medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to respirable crystalline silica and any medical conditions that require further evaluation or treatment; 3.2.4.2. Any recommended limitations upon the employee's use of a respirator; and 3.2.4.3. Any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica. 3.2.5. The Specialist's written medical opinion for the employer must include the following information: 3.2.5.1. The date of the examination; and 3.2.5.2. Any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators. 3.2.5.3. If the employee provides the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine with written authorization, the written medical opinion for the employer shall also contain any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica. 3.2.5.4. Although the respirable crystalline silica standard requires the employer to ensure that the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine explains the results of the medical examination to the employee, the standard does not mandate how this should be done. The written medical opinion for the employer could contain a statement that the Specialist has explained the results of the medical examination to the employee. 3.2.6. After evaluating the employee, the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine should provide feedback to the PLHCP as appropriate, depending on the reason for the referral. OSHA believes that because the PLHCP has the primary relationship with the employer and employee, the Specialist may want to communicate his or her findings to the PLHCP and have the PLHCP simply update the original medical report for the employee and medical opinion for the employer. This is permitted under the standard, so long as all requirements and time deadlines are met. 3.3. Public Health Professionals. See 4. Confidentiality and Other Considerations The information that is provided from the PLHCP to the employee and employer under the medical surveillance section of OSHA's respirable crystalline silica standard differs from that of medical surveillance requirements in previous OSHA standards. The standard requires two separate written communications, a written medical report for the employee and a written medical opinion for the employer. The confidentiality requirements for the written medical opinion are more stringent than in past standards. For example, the information the PLHCP can (and must) include in his or her written medical opinion for the employer is limited to: The date of the examination, a statement that the examination has met the requirements of this section, and any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators. If the employee provides written authorization for the disclosure of any limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica, then the PLHCP can (and must) include that information in the written medical opinion for the employer as well. Likewise, with the employee's written authorization, the PLHCP can (and must) disclose the PLHCP's referral recommendation (if any) as part of the written medical opinion for the employer. However, the opinion to the employer must not include information regarding recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica or any referral recommendations without the employee's written authorization. The standard also places limitations on the information that the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine can provide to the employer without the employee's written authorization. The Specialist's written medical opinion for the employer, like the PLHCP's opinion, is limited to (and must contain): The date of the examination and any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators. If the employee provides written authorization, the written medical opinion can (and must) also contain any limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica. The PLHCP should discuss the implication of signing or not signing the authorization with the employee (in a manner and language that he or she understands) so that the employee can make an informed decision regarding the written authorization and its consequences. The discussion should include the risk of ongoing silica exposure, personal risk factors, risk of disease progression, and possible health and economic consequences. For instance, written authorization is required for a PLHCP to advise an employer that an employee should be referred to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine for evaluation of an abnormal chest X-ray (B-reading 1/0 or greater). If an employee does not sign an authorization, then the employer will not know and cannot facilitate the referral to a Specialist and is not required to pay for the Specialist's examination. In the rare case where an employee is diagnosed with acute or accelerated silicosis, co-workers are likely to be at significant risk of developing those diseases as a result of inadequate controls in the workplace. In this case, the PLHCP and/or Specialist should explain this concern to the affected employee and make a determined effort to obtain written authorization from the employee so that the PLHCP and/or Specialist can contact the employer. Finally, without written authorization from the employee, the PLHCP and/or Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine cannot provide feedback to an employer regarding control of workplace silica exposure, at least in relation to an individual employee. However, the regulation does not prohibit a PLHCP and/or Specialist from providing an employer with general recommendations regarding exposure controls and prevention programs in relation to silica exposure and silica-related illnesses, based on the information that the PLHCP receives from the employer such as employees' duties and exposure levels. Recommendations may include increased frequency of medical surveillance examinations, additional medical surveillance components, engineering and work practice controls, exposure monitoring and personal protective equipment. For instance, more frequent medical surveillance examinations may be a recommendation to employers for employees who do abrasive blasting with silica because of the high exposures associated with that operation. ACOEM's Code of Ethics and discussion is a good resource to guide PLHCPs regarding the issues discussed in this section ( See 5. Resources 5.1. American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine (ACOEM): ACOEM Code of Ethics. Accessed at: http://www.acoem.org/codeofconduct.aspx Raymond, L.W. and Wintermeyer, S. (2006) ACOEM evidenced-based statement on medical surveillance of silica-exposed workers: Medical surveillance of workers exposed to crystalline silica. J Occup Environ Med, 5.2. Center for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) Tuberculosis Web page: http://www.cdc.gov/tb/default.htm State TB Control Offices Web page: http://www.cdc.gov/tb/links/tboffices.htm Tuberculosis Laws and Policies Web page: http://www.cdc.gov/tb/programs/laws/default.htm CDC. (2013). Latent Tuberculosis Infection: A Guide for Primary Health Care Providers. Accessed at: http://www.cdc.gov/tb/publications/ltbi/pdf/targetedltbi.pdf 5.3. International Labour Organization International Labour Office (ILO). (2011) Guidelines for the use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses, Revised edition 2011. Occupational Safety and Health Series No. 22: http://www.ilo.org/safework/info/publications/WCMS_168260/lang-en/index.htm 5.4. National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) NIOSH B Reader Program Web page. (Information on interpretation of X-rays for silicosis and a list of certified B-readers). Accessed at: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/chestradiography/breader-info.html NIOSH Guideline (2011). Application of Digital Radiography for the Detection and Classification of Pneumoconiosis. NIOSH publication number 2011-198. Accessed at: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/2011-198/. NIOSH Hazard Review (2002), Health Effects of Occupational Exposure to Respirable Crystalline Silica. NIOSH publication number 2002-129: Accessed at http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/2002-129/ NIOSH Health Hazard Evaluations Programs. (Information on the NIOSH Health Hazard Evaluation (HHE) program, how to request an HHE and how to look up an HHE report). Accessed at: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/hhe/ 5.5. National Industrial Sand Association: Occupational Health Program for Exposure to Crystalline Silica in the Industrial Sand Industry. National Industrial Sand Association, 2nd ed. 2010. Can be ordered at: http://www.sand.org/silica-occupational-health-program 5.6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Contacting OSHA: http://www.osha.gov/html/Feed_Back.html OSHA's Clinicians Web page. (OSHA resources, regulations and links to help clinicians navigate OSHA's Web site and aid clinicians in caring for workers.) Accessed at: http://www.osha.gov/dts/oom/clinicians/index.html OSHA's Safety and Health Topics Web page on Silica. Accessed at: http://www.osha.gov/dsg/topics/silicacrystalline/index.html OSHA (2013). Spirometry Testing in Occupational Health Programs: Best Practices for Healthcare Professionals. (OSHA 3637-03 2013). Accessed at: http://www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3637.pdf OSHA/NIOSH (2011). Spirometry: OSHA/NIOSH Spirometry InfoSheet (OSHA 3415-1-11). (Provides guidance to employers). Accessed at http://www.osha.gov/Publications/osha3415.pdf OSHA/NIOSH (2011) Spirometry: OSHA/NIOSH Spirometry Worker Info. (OSHA 3418-3-11). Accessed at http://www.osha.gov/Publications/osha3418.pdf 5.7. Other Steenland, K. and Ward E. (2014). Silica: A lung carcinogen. CA Cancer J Clin, 6. References American Thoracic Society (ATS). Medical Section of the American Lung Association (1997). Adverse effects of crystalline silica exposure. Am J Respir Crit Care Med, American Thoracic Society (ATS), Centers for Disease Control (CDC), Infectious Diseases Society of America (IDSA) (2005). Controlling Tuberculosis in the United States. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report (MMWR), http://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/rr5412a1.htm. Brown, T. (2009). Silica exposure, smoking, silicosis and lung cancer—complex interactions. Occupational Medicine, Halldin, C.N., Petsonk, E.L., and Laney, A.S. (2014). Validation of the International Labour Office digitized standard images for recognition and classification of radiographs of pneumoconiosis. Acad Radiol, International Agency for Research on Cancer. (2012). Monographs on the evaluation of carcinogenic risks to humans: Arsenic, Metals, Fibers, and Dusts Silica Dust, Crystalline, in the Form of Quartz or Cristobalite. A Review of Human Carcinogens. Volume 100 C. Geneva, Switzerland: World Health Organization. Jalloul, A.S. and Banks D.E. (2007). Chapter 23. The health effects of silica exposure. In: Rom, W.N. and Markowitz, S.B. (Eds). Environmental and Occupational Medicine, 4th edition. Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins, Philadelphia, 365-387. Kramer, M.R., Blanc, P.D., Fireman, E., Amital, A., Guber, A., Rahman, N.A., and Shitrit, D. (2012). Artifical stone silicosis: Disease resurgence among artificial stone workers. Chest, Laney, A.S., Petsonk, E.L., and Attfield, M.D. (2011). Intramodality and intermodality comparisons of storage phosphor computed radiography and conventional film-screen radiography in the recognition of small pneumonconiotic opacities. Chest, Liu, Y., Steenland, K., Rong, Y., Hnizdo, E., Huang, X., Zhang, H., Shi, T., Sun, Y., Wu, T., and Chen, W. (2013). Exposure-response analysis and risk assessment for lung cancer in relationship to silica exposure: A 44-year cohort study of 34,018 workers. Am J Epi, Liu, Y., Rong, Y., Steenland, K., Christiani, D.C., Huang, X., Wu, T., and Chen, W. (2014). Long-term exposure to crystalline silica and risk of heart disease mortality. Epidemiology, Mazurek, G.H., Jereb, J., Vernon, A., LoBue, P., Goldberg, S., Castro, K. (2010). Updated guidelines for using interferon gamma release assays to detect Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection—United States. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report (MMWR), Miller, M.R., Hankinson, J., Brusasco, V., Burgos, F., Casaburi, R., Coates, A., Crapo, R., Enright, P., van der Grinten, C.P., Gustafsson, P., Jensen, R., Johnson, D.C., MacIntyre, N., McKay, R., Navajas, D., Pedersen, O.F., Pellegrino, R., Viegi, G., and Wanger, J. (2005). American Thoracic Society/European Respiratory Society (ATS/ERS) Task Force: Standardisation of Spirometry. Eur Respir J, National Toxicology Program (NTP) (2014). Report on Carcinogens, Thirteenth Edition. Silica, Crystalline (respirable Size). Research Triangle Park, NC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service. http://ntp.niehs.nih.gov/ntp/roc/content/profiles/silica.pdf. Occupational Safety and Health Administration/National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA/NIOSH) (2012). Hazard Alert. Worker exposure to silica during hydraulic fracturing. Occupational Safety and Health Administration/National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA/NIOSH) (2015). Hazard alert. Worker exposure to silica during countertop manufacturing, finishing, and installation. (OSHA-HA-3768-2015). Redlich, C.A., Tarlo, S.M., Hankinson, J.L., Townsend, M.C, Eschenbacher, W.L., Von Essen, S.G., Sigsgaard, T., Weissman, D.N. (2014). Official American Thoracic Society technical standards: Spirometry in the occupational setting. Am J Respir Crit Care Med Rees, D. and Murray, J. (2007). Silica, silicosis and tuberculosis. Int J Tuberc Lung Dis Shtraichman, O., Blanc, P.D., Ollech, J.E., Fridel, L., Fuks, L., Fireman, E., and Kramer, M.R. (2015). Outbreak of autoimmune disease in silicosis linked to artificial stone. Occup Med, Slater, M.L., Welland, G., Pai, M., Parsonnet, J., and Banaei, N. (2013). Challenges with QuantiFERON-TB gold assay for large-scale, routine screening of U.S. healthcare workers. Am J Respir Crit Care Med, Steenland, K., Mannetje, A., Boffetta, P., Stayner, L., Attfield, M., Chen, J., Dosemeci, M., DeKlerk, N., Hnizdo, E., Koskela, R., and Checkoway, H. (2001). International Agency for Research on Cancer. Pooled exposure-response analyses and risk assessment for lung cancer in 10 cohorts of silica-exposed workers: An IARC multicentre study. Cancer Causes Control, Steenland, K. and Ward E. (2014). Silica: A lung carcinogen. CA Cancer J Clin, Townsend, M.C. ACOEM Guidance Statement. (2011). Spirometry in the occupational health setting—2011 Update. J Occup Environ Med, 7. Sample Forms Three sample forms are provided. The first is a sample written medical report for the employee. The second is a sample written medical opinion for the employer. And the third is a sample written authorization form that employees sign to clarify what information the employee is authorizing to be released to the employer. [81 FR 16862, Mar. 25, 2016] § 1910.1096 Ionizing radiation. (a) Definitions applicable to this section Radiation (2) Radioactive material (3) Restricted area (4) Unrestricted area (5) Dose (6) Rad (7) Rem (i) A dose of 1 roentgen due to X- or gamma radiation; (ii) A dose of 1 rad due to X-, gamma, or beta radiation; (iii) A dose of 0.1 rad due to neutrons or high energy protons; (iv) A dose of 0.05 rad due to particles heavier than protons and with sufficient energy to reach the lens of the eye; (v) If it is more convenient to measure the neutron flux, or equivalent, than to determine the neutron dose in rads, as provided in paragraph (a)(7)(iii) of this section, 1 rem of neutron radiation may, for purposes of the provisions in this section be assumed to be equivalent to 14 million neutrons per square centimeter incident upon the body; or, if there is sufficient information to estimate with reasonable accuracy the approximate distribution in energy of the neutrons, the incident number of neutrons per square centimeter equivalent to 1 rem may be estimated from Table G-17: Table G-17—Neutron Flux Dose Equivalents Neutron energy (million electron volts (Mev)) Number of neutrons per square centimeter equivalent to a dose of 1 rem (neutrons/cm 2 Average flux to deliver 100 millirem in 40 hours (neutrons/cm 2 Thermal 970 × 10 6 670 0.0001 720 × 10 6 500 0.005 820 × 10 6 570 0.02 400 × 10 6 280 0.1 120 × 10 6 80 0.5 43 × 10 6 30 1.0 26 × 10 6 18 2.5 29 × 10 6 20 5.0 26 × 10 6 18 7.5 24 × 10 6 17 10 24 × 10 6 17 10 to 30 14 × 10 6 10 (8) For determining exposures to X- or gamma rays up to 3 Mev., the dose limits specified in this section may be assumed to be equivalent to the “air dose”. For the purpose of this section air dose (b) Exposure of individuals to radiation in restricted areas. Table G-18 Rems per calendar quarter Whole body: Head and trunk; active blood-forming organs; lens of eyes; or gonads 1 1 4 Hands and forearms; feet and ankles 18 3 4 Skin of whole body 7 1 2 (2) An employer may permit an individual in a restricted area to receive doses to the whole body greater than those permitted under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, so long as: (i) During any calendar quarter the dose to the whole body shall not exceed 3 rems; and (ii) The dose to the whole body, when added to the accumulated occupational dose to the whole body, shall not exceed 5 (N-18) rems, where “N” equals the individual's age in years at his last birthday; and (iii) The employer maintains adequate past and current exposure records which show that the addition of such a dose will not cause the individual to exceed the amount authorized in this subparagraph. As used in this subparagraph Dose to the whole body (3) No employer shall permit any employee who is under 18 years of age to receive in any period of one calendar quarter a dose in excess of 10 percent of the limits specified in Table G-18. (4) Calendar quarter (i) The first period of any year may begin on any date in January: Provided, (ii) The first period in a calendar year of 13 complete, consecutive calendar weeks; the second period in a calendar year of 13 complete, consecutive weeks; the third period in a calendar year of 13 complete, consecutive calendar weeks; the fourth period in a calendar year of 13 complete, consecutive calendar weeks. If at the end of a calendar year there are any days not falling within a complete calendar week of that year, such days shall be included within the last complete calendar week of that year. If at the beginning of any calendar year there are days not falling within a complete calendar week of that year, such days shall be included within the last complete calendar week of the previous year; or (iii) The four periods in a calendar year may consist of the first 14 complete, consecutive calendar weeks; the next 12 complete, consecutive calendar weeks, the next 14 complete, consecutive calendar weeks, and the last 12 complete, consecutive calendar weeks. If at the end of a calendar year there are any days not falling within a complete calendar week of that year, such days shall be included (for purposes of this section) within the last complete calendar week of the year. If at the beginning of any calendar year there are days not falling within a complete calendar week of that year, such days shall be included (for purposes of this section) within the last complete week of the previous year. (c) Exposure to airborne radioactive material. (2) No employer shall possess, use, or transfer radioactive material in such a manner as to cause any individual within a restricted area, who is under 18 years of age, to be exposed to airborne radioactive material in an average concentration in excess of the limits specified in Table II of appendix B to 10 CFR part 20. For purposes of this paragraph, concentrations may be averaged over periods not greater than 1 week. (3) Exposed (d) Precautionary procedures and personal monitoring. Survey (2) Every employer shall supply appropriate personnel monitoring equipment, such as film badges, pocket chambers, pocket dosimeters, or film rings, and shall require the use of such equipment by: (i) Each employee who enters a restricted area under such circumstances that he receives, or is likely to receive, a dose in any calendar quarter in excess of 25 percent of the applicable value specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section; and (ii) Each employee under 18 years of age who enters a restricted area under such circumstances that he receives, or is likely to receive, a dose in any calendar quarter in excess of 5 percent of the applicable value specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section; and (iii) Each employee who enters a high radiation area. (3) As used in this section: (i) Personnel monitoring equipment (ii) Radiation area (iii) High radiation area (e) Caution signs, labels, and signals General. Figure G-10 (ii) [Reserved] (2) Radiation area. CAUTION RADIATION AREA (3) High radiation area. CAUTION HIGH RADIATION AREA (ii) Each high radiation area shall be equipped with a control device which shall either cause the level of radiation to be reduced below that at which an individual might receive a dose of 100 millirems in 1 hour upon entry into the area or shall energize a conspicuous visible or audible alarm signal in such a manner that the individual entering and the employer or a supervisor of the activity are made aware of the entry. In the case of a high radiation area established for a period of 30 days or less, such control device is not required. (4) Airborne radioactivity area. airborne radioactivity area ( a ( b (ii) Each airborne radioactivity area shall be conspicuously posted with a sign or signs bearing the radiation caution symbol described in paragraph (e)(1) of this section and the words: CAUTION AIRBORNE RADIOACTIVITY AREA (5) Additional requirements. CAUTION RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (ii) Each area or room in which natural uranium or thorium is used or stored in an amount exceeding 100 times the quantity of such material specified in 10 CFR part 20 shall be conspicuously posted with a sign or signs bearing the radiation caution symbol described in paragraph (e)(1) of this section and the words: CAUTION RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (6) Containers. CAUTION RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (ii) Each container in which natural uranium or thorium is transported, stored, or used in a quantity greater than 10 times the quantity specified in appendix C to 10 CFR part 20 shall bear a durable, clearly visible label bearing the radiation caution symbol described in paragraph (e)(1) of this section and the words: CAUTION RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (iii) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs (e)(6) (i) and (ii) of this section a label shall not be required: ( a ( b (iv) Where containers are used for storage, the labels required in this subparagraph shall state also the quantities and kinds of radioactive materials in the containers and the date of measurement of the quantities. (f) Immediate evacuation warning signal Signal characteristics. 1 (ii) The signal generator shall not be less than 75 decibels at every location where an individual may be present whose immediate, rapid, and complete evacuation is essential. (iii) A sufficient number of signal units shall be installed such that the requirements of paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section are met at every location where an individual may be present whose immediate, rapid, and complete evacuation is essential. (iv) The signal shall be unique in the plant or facility in which it is installed. (v) The minimum duration of the signal shall be sufficient to insure that all affected persons hear the signal. (vi) The signal-generating system shall respond automatically to an initiating event without requiring any human action to sound the signal. (2) Design objectives. (ii) The signal-generating system shall be provided with an automatically activated secondary power supply which is adequate to simultaneously power all emergency equipment to which it is connected, if operation during power failure is necessary, except in those systems using batteries as the primary source of power. (iii) All components of the signal-generating system shall be located to provide maximum practicable protection against damage in case of fire, explosion, corrosive atmosphere, or other environmental extremes consistent with adequate system performance. (iv) The signal-generating system shall be designed with the minimum number of components necessary to make it function as intended, and should utilize components which do not require frequent servicing such as lubrication or cleaning. (v) Where several activating devices feed activating information to a central signal generator, failure of any activating device shall not render the signal-generator system inoperable to activating information from the remaining devices. (vi) The signal-generating system shall be designed to enhance the probability that alarm occurs only when immediate evacuation is warranted. The number of false alarms shall not be so great that the signal will come to be disregarded and shall be low enough to minimize personal injuries or excessive property damage that might result from such evacuation. (3) Testing. (ii) Once the system has been placed in service, periodic tests, inspections, and checks shall be made to minimize the possibility of malfunction. (iii) Following significant alterations or revisions to the system, tests and checks similar to the initial installation tests shall be made. (iv) Tests shall be designed to minimize hazards while conducting the tests. (v) Prior to normal operation the signal-generating system shall be checked physically and functionally to assure reliability and to demonstrate accuracy and performance. Specific tests shall include: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h (vi) In addition to the initial startup and operating tests, periodic scheduled performance tests and status checks must be made to insure that the system is at all times operating within design limits and capable of the required response. Specific periodic tests or checks or both shall include: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (vii) Periodic tests shall be scheduled on the basis of need, experience, difficulty, and disruption of operations. The entire system should be operationally tested at least quarterly. (viii) All employees whose work may necessitate their presence in an area covered by the signal shall be made familiar with the actual sound of the signal—preferably as it sounds at their work location. Before placing the system into operation, all employees normally working in the area shall be made acquainted with the signal by actual demonstration at their work locations. (g) Exceptions from posting requirements. (1) A room or area is not required to be posted with a caution sign because of the presence of a sealed source, provided the radiation level 12 inches from the surface of the source container or housing does not exceed 5 millirem per hour. (2) Rooms or other areas in onsite medical facilities are not required to be posted with caution signs because of the presence of patients containing radioactive material, provided that there are personnel in attendance who shall take the precautions necessary to prevent the exposure of any individual to radiation or radioactive material in excess of the limits established in the provisions of this section. (3) Caution signs are not required to be posted at areas or rooms containing radioactive materials for periods of less than 8 hours: Provided, (i) The materials are constantly attended during such periods by an individual who shall take the precautions necessary to prevent the exposure of any individual to radiation or radioactive materials in excess of the limits established in the provisions of this section; and (ii) Such area or room is subject to the employer's control. (h) Exemptions for radioactive materials packaged for shipment. (i) Instruction of personnel, posting. (2) All individuals working in or frequenting any portion of a radiation area shall be informed of the occurrence of radioactive materials or of radiation in such portions of the radiation area; shall be instructed in the safety problems associated with exposure to such materials or radiation and in precautions or devices to minimize exposure; shall be instructed in the applicable provisions of this section for the protection of employees from exposure to radiation or radioactive materials; and shall be advised of reports of radiation exposure which employees may request pursuant to the regulations in this section. (3) Each employer to whom this section applies shall post a current copy of its provisions and a copy of the operating procedures applicable to the work conspicuously in such locations as to insure that employees working in or frequenting radiation areas will observe these documents on the way to and from their place of employment, or shall keep such documents available for examination of employees upon request. (j) Storage of radioactive materials. (k) Waste disposal. (l) Notification of incidents Immediate notification. (i) Exposure of the whole body of any individual to 25 rems or more of radiation; exposure of the skin of the whole body of any individual to 150 rems or more of radiation; or exposure of the feet, ankles, hands, or forearms of any individual to 375 rems or more of radiation; or (ii) The release of radioactive material in concentrations which, if averaged over a period of 24 hours, would exceed 5,000 times the limit specified for such materials in Table II of appendix B to 10 CFR part 20. (2) Twenty-four hour notification. (i) Exposure of the whole body of any individual to 5 rems or more of radiation; exposure of the skin of the whole body of any individual to 30 rems or more of radiation; or exposure of the feet, ankles, hands, or forearms to 75 rems or more of radiation; or (ii) [Reserved] (m) Reports of overexposure and excessive levels and concentrations. (2) In any case where an employer is required pursuant to the provisions of this paragraph to report to the U.S. Department of Labor any exposure of an individual to radiation or to concentrations of radioactive material, the employer shall also notify such individual of the nature and extent of exposure. Such notice shall be in writing and shall contain the following statement: “You should preserve this report for future reference.” (n) Records. (2) Every employer shall maintain records in the same units used in tables in paragraph (b) of this section and appendix B to 10 CFR part 20. (o) Disclosure to former employee of individual employee's record. (2) [Reserved] (p) Nuclear Regulatory Commission licensees—NRC contractors operating NRC plants and facilities—NRC Agreement State licensees or registrants. (2) NRC contractors operating NRC plants and facilities: Any employer who possesses or uses source material, byproduct material, special nuclear material, or other radiation sources under a contract with the Nuclear Regulatory Commission for the operation of NRC plants and facilities and in accordance with the standards, procedures, and other requirements for radiation protection established by the Commission for such contract pursuant to the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as amended (42 U.S.C. 2011 et seq. (3) NRC-agreement State licensees or registrants: (i) Atomic Energy Act sources. et seq. (ii) Other sources. et seq. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, Nov. 7, 1978; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993. Redesignated at 61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996] § 1910.1200 Hazard communication. (a) Purpose. (2) This occupational safety and health standard is intended to address comprehensively the issue of classifying the potential hazards of chemicals, and communicating information concerning hazards and appropriate protective measures to employees, and to preempt any legislative or regulatory enactments of a state, or political subdivision of a state, pertaining to this subject. Classifying the potential hazards of chemicals and communicating information concerning hazards and appropriate protective measures to employees, may include, for example, but is not limited to, provisions for: developing and maintaining a written hazard communication program for the workplace, including lists of hazardous chemicals present; labeling of containers of chemicals in the workplace, as well as of containers of chemicals being shipped to other workplaces; preparation and distribution of safety data sheets to employees and downstream employers; and development and implementation of employee training programs regarding hazards of chemicals and protective measures. Under section 18 of the Act, no state or political subdivision of a state may adopt or enforce any requirement relating to the issue addressed by this Federal standard, except pursuant to a Federally-approved state plan. (b) Scope and application. (2) This section applies to any chemical which is known to be present in the workplace in such a manner that employees may be exposed under normal conditions of use or in a foreseeable emergency. (3) This section applies to laboratories only as follows: (i) Employers shall ensure that labels on incoming containers of hazardous chemicals are not removed or defaced; (ii) Employers shall maintain any safety data sheets that are received with incoming shipments of hazardous chemicals, and ensure that they are readily accessible during each workshift to laboratory employees when they are in their work areas; (iii) Employers shall ensure that laboratory employees are provided information and training in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section, except for the location and availability of the written hazard communication program under paragraph (h)(2)(iii) of this section; and, (iv) Laboratory employers that ship hazardous chemicals are considered to be either a chemical manufacturer or a distributor under this rule, and thus must ensure that any containers of hazardous chemicals leaving the laboratory are labeled in accordance with paragraph (f) of this section, and that a safety data sheet is provided to distributors and other employers in accordance with paragraphs (g)(6) and (g)(7) of this section. (4) In work operations where employees only handle chemicals in sealed containers which are not opened under normal conditions of use (such as are found in marine cargo handling, warehousing, or retail sales), this section applies to these operations only as follows: (i) Employers shall ensure that labels on incoming containers of hazardous chemicals are not removed or defaced; (ii) Employers shall maintain copies of any safety data sheets that are received with incoming shipments of the sealed containers of hazardous chemicals, shall obtain a safety data sheet as soon as possible for sealed containers of hazardous chemicals received without a safety data sheet if an employee requests the safety data sheet, and shall ensure that the safety data sheets are readily accessible during each work shift to employees when they are in their work area(s); and, (iii) Employers shall ensure that employees are provided with information and training in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section (except for the location and availability of the written hazard communication program under paragraph (h)(2)(iii) of this section), to the extent necessary to protect them in the event of a spill or leak of a hazardous chemical from a sealed container. (5) This section does not require labeling of the following chemicals: (i) Any pesticide as such term is defined in the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (7 U.S.C. 136 et seq. (ii) Any chemical substance or mixture as such terms are defined in the Toxic Substances Control Act (15 U.S.C. 2601 et seq. (iii) Any food, food additive, color additive, drug, cosmetic, or medical or veterinary device or product, including materials intended for use as ingredients in such products (e.g., flavors and fragrances), as such terms are defined in the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C. 301 et seq. et seq. (iv) Any distilled spirits (beverage alcohols), wine, or malt beverage intended for nonindustrial use, as such terms are defined in the Federal Alcohol Administration Act (27 U.S.C. 201 et seq. (v) Any consumer product or hazardous substance as those terms are defined in the Consumer Product Safety Act (15 U.S.C. 2051 et seq. et seq. (vi) Agricultural or vegetable seed treated with pesticides and labeled in accordance with the Federal Seed Act (7 U.S.C. 1551 et seq. (6) This section does not apply to: (i) Any hazardous waste as such term is defined by the Solid Waste Disposal Act, as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976, as amended (42 U.S.C. 6901 et seq. (ii) Any hazardous substance as such term is defined by the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA) (42 U.S.C. 9601 et seq. (iii) Tobacco or tobacco products; (iv) Wood or wood products, including lumber which will not be processed, where the chemical manufacturer or importer can establish that the only hazard they pose to employees is the potential for flammability or combustibility (wood or wood products which have been treated with a hazardous chemical covered by this standard, and wood which may be subsequently sawed or cut, generating dust, are not exempted); (v) Articles (as that term is defined in paragraph (c) of this section); (vi) Food or alcoholic beverages which are sold, used, or prepared in a retail establishment (such as a grocery store, restaurant, or drinking place), and foods intended for personal consumption by employees while in the workplace; (vii) Any drug, as that term is defined in the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C. 301 et seq. (viii) Cosmetics which are packaged for sale to consumers in a retail establishment, and cosmetics intended for personal consumption by employees while in the workplace; (ix) Any consumer product or hazardous substance, as those terms are defined in the Consumer Product Safety Act (15 U.S.C. 2051 et seq. et seq. (x) Nuisance particulates where the chemical manufacturer or importer can establish that they do not pose any physical hazard, health hazard, or other hazards covered under this section; (xi) Ionizing and nonionizing radiation; and, (xii) Biological hazards. (c) Definitions. Article (i) Which is formed to a specific shape or design during manufacture; (ii) Which has end use function(s) dependent in whole or in part upon its shape or design during end use; and (iii) Which under normal conditions of use does not release more than very small quantities, e.g., Assistant Secretary Bulk shipment i.e. Chemical Chemical manufacturer Chemical name Classification Combustible dust Commercial account Common name Container Designated representative Director Distributor Employee Employer Exposure or exposed Foreseeable emergency Gas (i) At 122 °F (50 °C) has a vapor pressure greater than 43.51 PSI (300 kPa) (absolute); or (ii) Is completely gaseous at 68 °F (20 °C) at a standard pressure of 14.69 PSI (101.3 kPa). Hazard category Hazardous chemical Hazard class Hazard not otherwise classified (HNOC) e.g., Hazard statement Health hazard Immediate outer package Immediate use Importer Label Label elements Liquid Mixture Physical hazard Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) i.e., Pictogram Precautionary statement Produce Product identifier Released for shipment Responsible party Safety data sheet (SDS) Signal word Simple asphyxiant Solid Specific chemical Substance Trade secret Use Work area Workplace (d) Hazard classification. (i) A change in the chemical's physical form; and (ii) Chemical reaction products associated with known or reasonably anticipated uses or applications. (2) Chemical manufacturers, importers or employers classifying chemicals shall identify and consider the full range of available scientific literature and other evidence concerning the potential hazards. There is no requirement to test the chemical to determine how to classify its hazards. Appendix A to § 1910.1200 shall be consulted for classification of health hazards, and Appendix B to § 1910.1200 shall be consulted for the classification of physical hazards. (3) Mixtures. (ii) When classifying mixtures they produce or import, chemical manufacturers and importers of mixtures may rely on the information provided on the current safety data sheets of the individual ingredients, except where the chemical manufacturer or importer knows, or in the exercise of reasonable diligence should know, that the safety data sheet misstates or omits information required by this section. (e) Written hazard communication program. (i) A list of the hazardous chemicals known to be present using a product identifier that is referenced on the appropriate safety data sheet (the list may be compiled for the workplace as a whole or for individual work areas); and, (ii) The methods the employer will use to inform employees of the hazards of non-routine tasks (for example, the cleaning of reactor vessels), and the hazards associated with chemicals contained in unlabeled pipes in their work areas. (2) Multi-employer workplaces. (i) The methods the employer will use to provide the other employer(s) on-site access to safety data sheets for each hazardous chemical the other employer(s)' employees may be exposed to while working; (ii) The methods the employer will use to inform the other employer(s) of any precautionary measures that need to be taken to protect employees during the workplace's normal operating conditions and in foreseeable emergencies; and, (iii) The methods the employer will use to inform the other employer(s) of the labeling system used in the workplace. (3) The employer may rely on an existing hazard communication program to comply with these requirements, provided that it meets the criteria established in this paragraph (e). (4) The employer shall make the written hazard communication program available, upon request, to employees, their designated representatives, the Assistant Secretary and the Director, in accordance with the requirements of § 1910.1020(e). (5) Where employees must travel between workplaces during a workshift, i.e., (f) Labels and other forms of warning Labels on shipped containers. (i) Product identifier; (ii) Signal word; (iii) Hazard statement(s); (iv) Pictogram(s); (v) Precautionary statement(s); (vi) Name, U.S. address, and U.S. telephone number of the chemical manufacturer, importer, or other responsible party. (2) The chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor shall ensure that the information provided under paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (v) of this section is in accordance with Appendix C to § 1910.1200, for each hazard class and associated hazard category for the hazardous chemical, prominently displayed, and in English (other languages may also be included if appropriate). (3) The chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor shall ensure that the information provided under paragraphs (f)(1)(ii) through (iv) of this section is located together on the label, tag, or mark. (4) Solid materials. (ii) The label may be transmitted with the initial shipment itself, or with the safety data sheet that is to be provided prior to or at the time of the first shipment; and, (iii) This exception to requiring labels on every container of hazardous chemicals is only for the solid material itself, and does not apply to hazardous chemicals used in conjunction with, or known to be present with, the material and to which employees handling the items in transit may be exposed (for example, cutting fluids or pesticides in grains). (5) Transportation. et seq. (ii) The label for bulk shipments of hazardous chemicals must be on the immediate container, transmitted with the shipping papers or the bills of lading, or, with the agreement of the receiving entity, transmitted by technological or electronic means so that it is immediately available to workers in printed form on the receiving end of shipment. (iii) Where a pictogram required by the Department of Transportation under title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations appears on a shipped container, the pictogram specified in appendix C.4 to this section for the same hazard is not required on the label. (6) Workplace labeling. Except as provided in paragraphs (f)(7) and (f)(8) of this section, the employer shall ensure that each container of hazardous chemicals in the workplace is labeled, tagged or marked with either: (i) The information specified under paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (v) of this section for labels on shipped containers; or, (ii) Product identifier and words, pictures, symbols, or combination thereof, which provide at least general information regarding the hazards of the chemicals, and which, in conjunction with the other information immediately available to employees under the hazard communication program, will provide employees with the specific information regarding the physical and health hazards of the hazardous chemical. (7) The employer may use signs, placards, process sheets, batch tickets, operating procedures, or other such written materials in lieu of affixing labels to individual stationary process containers, as long as the alternative method identifies the containers to which it is applicable and conveys the information required by paragraph (f)(6) of this section to be on a label. The employer shall ensure the written materials are readily accessible to the employees in their work area throughout each work shift. (8) The employer is not required to label portable containers into which hazardous chemicals are transferred from labeled containers, and which are intended only for the immediate use of the employee who performs the transfer. For purposes of this section, drugs which are dispensed by a pharmacy to a health care provider for direct administration to a patient are exempted from labeling. (9) The employer shall not remove or deface existing labels on incoming containers of hazardous chemicals, unless the container is immediately marked with the required information. (10) The employer shall ensure that workplace labels or other forms of warning are legible, in English, and prominently displayed on the container, or readily available in the work area throughout each work shift. Employers having employees who speak other languages may add the information in their language to the material presented, as long as the information is presented in English as well. (11) Label updates. (ii) If the chemical is not currently produced or imported, the chemical manufacturer, importer, distributor, or employer shall add the information to the label before the chemical is shipped or introduced into the workplace again. (12) Small container labelling. (ii) For a container less than or equal to 100 ml capacity, the chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor must include, at a minimum, the following information on the label of the container: (A) Product identifier; (B) Pictogram(s); (C) Signal word; (D) Chemical manufacturer's name and phone number; and (E) A statement that the full label information for the hazardous chemical is provided on the immediate outer package. (iii) For a container less than or equal to 3 ml capacity, where the chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor can demonstrate that any label interferes with the normal use of the container, no label is required, but the container must bear, at a minimum, the product identifier. (iv) For all small containers covered by paragraph (f)(12)(ii) or (iii) of this section, the immediate outer package must include: (A) The full label information required by paragraph (f)(1) of this section for each hazardous chemical in the immediate outer package. The label must not be removed or defaced, as required by paragraph (f)(9) of this section. (B) A statement that the small container(s) inside must be stored in the immediate outer package bearing the complete label when not in use. (g) Safety data sheets. (2) The chemical manufacturer or importer shall ensure that the safety data sheet is in English (although the employer may maintain copies in other languages as well), and includes at least the following section numbers and headings, and associated information under each heading, in the order listed (see appendix D to this section, for the specific content of each section of the safety data sheet): (i) Section 1, Identification; (ii) Section 2, Hazard(s) identification; (iii) Section 3, Composition/information on ingredients; (iv) Section 4, First-aid measures; (v) Section 5, Fire-fighting measures; (vi) Section 6, Accidental release measures; (vii) Section 7, Handling and storage; (viii) Section 8, Exposure controls/personal protection; (ix) Section 9, Physical and chemical properties; (x) Section 10, Stability and reactivity; (xi) Section 11, Toxicological information. (xii) Section 12, Ecological information; (xiii) Section 13, Disposal considerations; (xiv) Section 14, Transport information; (xv) Section 15, Regulatory information; and (xvi) Section 16, Other information, including date of preparation or last revision. Note 1 to paragraph ( g To be consistent with the GHS, an SDS must also include the headings in paragraphs (g)(2)(xii) through (g)(2)(xv) of this section in order. Note 2 to paragraph ( g OSHA will not be enforcing information requirements in sections 12 through 15, as these areas are not under its jurisdiction. (3) If no relevant information is found for any sub-heading within a section on the safety data sheet, the chemical manufacturer, importer or employer preparing the safety data sheet shall mark it to indicate that no applicable information was found. (4) Where complex mixtures have similar hazards and contents ( i.e. (5) The chemical manufacturer, importer or employer preparing the safety data sheet shall ensure that the information provided accurately reflects the scientific evidence used in making the hazard classification. If the chemical manufacturer, importer or employer preparing the safety data sheet becomes newly aware of any significant information regarding the hazards of a chemical, or ways to protect against the hazards, this new information shall be added to the safety data sheet within three months. If the chemical is not currently being produced or imported, the chemical manufacturer or importer shall add the information to the safety data sheet before the chemical is introduced into the workplace again. (6)(i) Chemical manufacturers or importers shall ensure that distributors and employers are provided an appropriate safety data sheet with their initial shipment, and with the first shipment after a safety data sheet is updated; (ii) The chemical manufacturer or importer shall either provide safety data sheets with the shipped containers or send them to the distributor or employer prior to or at the time of the shipment; (iii) If the safety data sheet is not provided with a shipment that has been labeled as a hazardous chemical, the distributor or employer shall obtain one from the chemical manufacturer or importer as soon as possible; and, (iv) The chemical manufacturer or importer shall also provide distributors or employers with a safety data sheet upon request. (7)(i) Distributors shall ensure that safety data sheets, and updated information, are provided to other distributors and employers with their initial shipment and with the first shipment after a safety data sheet is updated; (ii) The distributor shall either provide safety data sheets with the shipped containers, or send them to the other distributor or employer prior to or at the time of the shipment; (iii) Retail distributors selling hazardous chemicals to employers having a commercial account shall provide a safety data sheet to such employers upon request, and shall post a sign or otherwise inform them that a safety data sheet is available; (iv) Wholesale distributors selling hazardous chemicals to employers over-the-counter may also provide safety data sheets upon the request of the employer at the time of the over-the-counter purchase, and shall post a sign or otherwise inform such employers that a safety data sheet is available; (v) If an employer without a commercial account purchases a hazardous chemical from a retail distributor not required to have safety data sheets on file ( i.e., (vi) Wholesale distributors shall also provide safety data sheets to employers or other distributors upon request; and, (vii) Chemical manufacturers, importers, and distributors need not provide safety data sheets to retail distributors that have informed them that the retail distributor does not sell the product to commercial accounts or open the sealed container to use it in their own workplaces. (8) The employer shall maintain in the workplace copies of the required safety data sheets for each hazardous chemical, and shall ensure that they are readily accessible during each work shift to employees when they are in their work area(s). (Electronic access and other alternatives to maintaining paper copies of the safety data sheets are permitted as long as no barriers to immediate employee access in each workplace are created by such options.) (9) Where employees must travel between workplaces during a workshift, i.e., (10) Safety data sheets may be kept in any form, including as operating procedures, and may be stored in such a way to cover groups of hazardous chemicals in a work area where it may be more appropriate to address the hazards of a process rather than individual hazardous chemicals. However, the employer shall ensure that in all cases the required information is provided for each hazardous chemical, and is readily accessible during each work shift to employees when they are in their work area(s). (11) Safety data sheets shall also be made readily available, upon request, to designated representatives, the Assistant Secretary, and the Director, in accordance with the requirements of § 1910.1020(e). (h) Employee information and training. (2) Information. (i) The requirements of this section; (ii) Any operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are present; and, (iii) The location and availability of the written hazard communication program, including the required list(s) of hazardous chemicals, and safety data sheets required by this section. (3) Training. (i) Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released, etc.); (ii) The physical, health, simple asphyxiation, combustible dust, and pyrophoric gas hazards, as well as hazards not otherwise classified, of the chemicals in the work area; (iii) The measures employees can take to protect themselves from these hazards, including specific procedures the employer has implemented to protect employees from exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used; and, (iv) The details of the hazard communication program developed by the employer, including an explanation of the labels received on shipped containers and the workplace labeling system used by their employer; the safety data sheet, including the order of information and how employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information. (i) Trade secrets. (i) The claim that the information withheld is a trade secret can be supported; (ii) Information contained in the safety data sheet concerning the properties and effects of the hazardous chemical is disclosed; (iii) The safety data sheet indicates that the specific chemical identity and/or concentration or concentration range of composition is being withheld as a trade secret; (iv) If the concentration or concentration range is being claimed as a trade secret then the safety data sheet provides the ingredient's concentration as one of the prescribed ranges below in paragraphs (i)(1)(iv)(A) through (M) of this section. (A) from 0.1% to 1%; (B) from 0.5% to 1.5%; (C) from 1% to 5%; (D) from 3% to 7%; (E) from 5% to 10%; (F) from 7% to 13%; (G) from 10% to 30%; (H) from 15% to 40%; (I) from 30% to 60%; (J) from 45% to 70%; (K) from 60% to 80%; (L) from 65% to 85%; and (M) from 80% to 100%. (v) The prescribed concentration range used must be the narrowest range possible. If the exact concentration range falls between 0.1% and 30% and does not fit entirely into one of the prescribed concentration ranges of paragraphs (i)(1)(iv)(A) to (G) of this section, a single range created by the combination of two applicable consecutive ranges between paragraphs (i)(1)(iv)(A) and (G) of this section may be disclosed instead, provided that the combined concentration range does not include any range that falls entirely outside the exact concentration range in which the ingredient is present. (vi) Manufacturers may provide a range narrower than those prescribed in (i)(1)(v). (vii) The specific chemical identity and exact concentration or concentration range is made available to health professionals, employees, and designated representatives in accordance with the applicable provisions of this paragraph (i) of this section. (2) Where a treating PLHCP determines that a medical emergency exists and the specific chemical identity and/or specific concentration or concentration range of a hazardous chemical is necessary for emergency or first-aid treatment, the chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer shall immediately disclose the specific chemical identity or percentage composition of a trade secret chemical to that treating PLHCP, regardless of the existence of a written statement of need or a confidentiality agreement. The chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer may require a written statement of need and confidentiality agreement, in accordance with the provisions of paragraphs (i)(3) and (4) of this section, as soon as circumstances permit. (3) In non-emergency situations, a chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer shall, upon request, disclose a specific chemical identity or exact concentration or concentration range, otherwise permitted to be withheld under paragraph (i)(1) of this section, to a health professional (e.g., PLHCP, industrial hygienist, toxicologist, or epidemiologist) providing medical or other occupational health services to exposed employee(s), and to employees or designated representatives, if: (i) The request is in writing; (ii) The request describes with reasonable detail one or more of the following occupational health needs for the information: (A) To assess the hazards of the chemicals to which employees will be exposed; (B) To conduct or assess sampling of the workplace atmosphere to determine employee exposure levels; (C) To conduct pre-assignment or periodic medical surveillance of exposed employees; (D) To provide medical treatment to exposed employees; (E) To select or assess appropriate personal protective equipment for exposed employees; (F) To design or assess engineering controls or other protective measures for exposed employees; and, (G) To conduct studies to determine the health effects of exposure. (iii) The request explains in detail why the disclosure of the specific chemical identity or percentage composition is essential and that, in lieu thereof, the disclosure of the following information to the health professional, employee, or designated representative, would not satisfy the purposes described in paragraph (i)(3)(ii) of this section: (A) The properties and effects of the chemical; (B) Measures for controlling workers' exposure to the chemical; (C) Methods of monitoring and analyzing worker exposure to the chemical; and, (D) Methods of diagnosing and treating harmful exposures to the chemical; (iv) The request includes a description of the procedures to be used to maintain the confidentiality of the disclosed information; and, (v) The health professional, and the employer or contractor of the services of the health professional ( i.e. (4) The confidentiality agreement authorized by paragraph (i)(3)(iv) of this section: (i) May restrict the use of the information to the health purposes indicated in the written statement of need; (ii) May provide for appropriate legal remedies in the event of a breach of the agreement, including stipulation of a reasonable pre-estimate of likely damages; and, (iii) May not include requirements for the posting of a penalty bond. (5) Nothing in this standard is meant to preclude the parties from pursuing non-contractual remedies to the extent permitted by law. (6) If the health professional, employee, or designated representative receiving the trade secret information decides that there is a need to disclose it to OSHA, the chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer who provided the information shall be informed by the health professional, employee, or designated representative prior to, or at the same time as, such disclosure. (7) If the chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer denies a written request for disclosure of a specific chemical identity or percentage composition, the denial must: (i) Be provided to the health professional, employee, or designated representative, within thirty days of the request; (ii) Be in writing; (iii) Include evidence to support the claim that the specific chemical identity or percent of composition is a trade secret; (iv) State the specific reasons why the request is being denied; and, (v) Explain in detail how alternative information may satisfy the specific medical or occupational health need without revealing the trade secret. (8) The health professional, employee, or designated representative whose request for information is denied under paragraph (i)(3) of this section may refer the request and the written denial of the request to OSHA for consideration. (9) When a health professional, employee, or designated representative refers the denial to OSHA under paragraph (i)(8) of this section, OSHA shall consider the evidence to determine if: (i) The chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer has supported the claim that the specific chemical identity or percentage composition is a trade secret; (ii) The health professional, employee, or designated representative has supported the claim that there is a medical or occupational health need for the information; and, (iii) The health professional, employee or designated representative has demonstrated adequate means to protect the confidentiality. (10)(i) If OSHA determines that the specific chemical identity or percentage composition requested under paragraph (i)(3) of this section is not a “bona fide” trade secret, or that it is a trade secret, but the requesting health professional, employee, or designated representative has a legitimate medical or occupational health need for the information, has executed a written confidentiality agreement, and has shown adequate means to protect the confidentiality of the information, the chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer will be subject to citation by OSHA. (ii) If a chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer demonstrates to OSHA that the execution of a confidentiality agreement would not provide sufficient protection against the potential harm from the unauthorized disclosure of a trade secret, the Assistant Secretary may issue such orders or impose such additional limitations or conditions upon the disclosure of the requested chemical information as may be appropriate to assure that the occupational health services are provided without an undue risk of harm to the chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer. (11) If a citation for a failure to release trade secret information is contested by the chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer, the matter will be adjudicated before the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission in accordance with the Act's enforcement scheme and the applicable Commission rules of procedure. In accordance with the Commission rules, when a chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer continues to withhold the information during the contest, the Administrative Law Judge may review the citation and supporting documentation “in camera” or issue appropriate orders to protect the confidentiality of such matters. (12) Notwithstanding the existence of a trade secret claim, a chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer shall, upon request, disclose to the Assistant Secretary any information which this section requires the chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer to make available. Where there is a trade secret claim, such claim shall be made no later than at the time the information is provided to the Assistant Secretary so that suitable determinations of trade secret status can be made and the necessary protections can be implemented. (13) Nothing in this paragraph shall be construed as requiring the disclosure under any circumstances of process information which is a trade secret. (j) Dates Effective date. (2) Substances. (ii) For substances, all employers shall, as necessary, update any alternative workplace labeling used under paragraph (f)(6) of this section, update the hazard communication program required by paragraph (h)(1) of this section, and provide any additional employee training in accordance with paragraph (h)(3) of this section for newly identified physical hazard, or health hazards or other hazards covered under this section no later than November 20, 2026. (3) Mixtures. (ii) For mixtures, all employers shall, as necessary, update any alternative workplace labeling used under paragraph (f)(6) of this section, update the hazard communication program required by paragraph (h)(1) of this section, and provide any additional employee training in accordance with paragraph (h)(3) of this section for newly identified physical hazards, health hazards, or other hazards covered under this section no later than May 19, 2028. (4) Compliance. Appendix A to § 1910.1200—Health Hazard Criteria (Mandatory) A.0 General Classification Considerations A.0.1 Classification A.0.1.1 The term “hazard classification” is used to indicate that only the intrinsic hazardous properties of chemicals are considered. Hazard classification incorporates three steps: (a) Identification of relevant data regarding the hazards of a chemical; (b) Subsequent review of those data to ascertain the hazards associated with the chemical; (c) Determination of whether the chemical will be classified as hazardous and the degree of hazard. A.0.1.2 For many hazard classes, the criteria are semi-quantitative or qualitative and expert judgment is required to interpret the data for classification purposes. A.0.1.3 Where impurities, additives or individual constituents of a substance or mixture have been identified and are themselves classified, they should be taken into account during classification if they exceed the cut-off value/concentration limit for a given hazard class. A.0.2 Available Data, Test Methods and Test Data Quality A.0.2.1 There is no requirement for testing chemicals. A.0.2.2 The criteria for determining health hazards are test method neutral, i.e., A.0.2.3 The term “scientifically validated” refers to the process by which the reliability and the relevance of a procedure are established for a particular purpose. Any test that determines hazardous properties, which is conducted according to recognized scientific principles, can be used for purposes of a hazard determination for health hazards. Test conditions need to be standardized so that the results are reproducible with a given substance, and the standardized test yields “valid” data for defining the hazard class of concern. A.0.2.4 Existing test data are acceptable for classifying chemicals, although expert judgment also may be needed for classification purposes. A.0.2.5 The effect of a chemical on biological systems is influenced, by the physico-chemical properties of the substance and/or ingredients of the mixture and the way in which ingredient substances are biologically available. A chemical need not be classified when it can be shown by conclusive experimental data from scientifically validated test methods that the chemical is not biologically available. A.0.2.6 For classification purposes, epidemiological data and experience on the effects of chemicals on humans ( e.g., A.0.3 Classification Based on Weight of Evidence A.0.3.1 For some hazard classes, classification results directly when the data satisfy the criteria. For others, classification of a chemical shall be determined on the basis of the total weight of evidence using expert judgment. This means that all available information bearing on the classification of hazard shall be considered together, including the results of valid in vitro A.0.3.2 The quality and consistency of the data shall be considered. Information on chemicals related to the material being classified shall be considered as appropriate, as well as site of action and mechanism or mode of action study results. Both positive and negative results shall be considered together in a single weight-of-evidence determination. A.0.3.3 Positive effects which are consistent with the criteria for classification, whether seen in humans or animals, shall normally justify classification. Where evidence is available from both humans and animals and there is a conflict between the findings, the quality and reliability of the evidence from both sources shall be evaluated in order to resolve the question of classification. Reliable, good quality human data shall generally have precedence over other data. However, even well-designed and conducted epidemiological studies may lack a sufficient number of subjects to detect relatively rare but still significant effects, or to assess potentially confounding factors. Therefore, positive results from well-conducted animal studies are not necessarily negated by the lack of positive human experience but require an assessment of the robustness, quality and statistical power of both the human and animal data. A.0.3.4 Route of exposure, mechanistic information, and metabolism studies are pertinent to determining the relevance of an effect in humans. When such information raises doubt about relevance in humans, a lower classification may be warranted. When there is scientific evidence demonstrating that the mechanism or mode of action is not relevant to humans, the chemical should not be classified. A.0.3.5 Both positive and negative results are considered together in the weight of evidence determination. However, a single positive study performed according to good scientific principles and with statistically and biologically significant positive results may justify classification. A.0.4 Considerations for the Classification of Mixtures A.0.4.1 Except as provided in A.0.4.2, the process of classification of mixtures is based on the following sequence: (a) Where test data are available for the complete mixture, the classification of the mixture will always be based on those data; (b) Where test data are not available for the mixture itself, the bridging principles designated in each health hazard chapter of this appendix shall be considered for classification of the mixture; (c) If test data are not available for the mixture itself, and the available information is not sufficient to allow application of the above-mentioned bridging principles, then the method(s) described in each chapter for estimating the hazards based on the information known will be applied to classify the mixture ( e.g. A.0.4.2 An exception to the above order or precedence is made for Carcinogenicity, Germ Cell Mutagenicity, and Reproductive Toxicity. For these three hazard classes, mixtures shall be classified based upon information on the ingredient substances, unless on a case-by-case basis, justification can be provided for classifying based upon the mixture as a whole. See A.0.4.3 Use of cut-off values/concentration limits A.0.4.3.1 When classifying an untested mixture based on the hazards of its ingredients, cut-off values/concentration limits for the classified ingredients of the mixture are used for several hazard classes. While the adopted cut-off values/concentration limits adequately identify the hazard for most mixtures, there may be some that contain hazardous ingredients at lower concentrations than the specified cut-off values/concentration limits that still pose an identifiable hazard. There may also be cases where the cut-off value/concentration limit is considerably lower than the established non-hazardous level for an ingredient. A.0.4.3.2 If the classifier has information that the hazard of an ingredient will be evident ( i.e., A.0.4.3.3 In exceptional cases, conclusive data may demonstrate that the hazard of an ingredient will not be evident ( i.e., A.0.4.4 Synergistic or antagonistic effects When performing an assessment in accordance with these requirements, the evaluator must take into account all available information about the potential occurrence of synergistic effects among the ingredients of the mixture. Lowering classification of a mixture to a less hazardous category on the basis of antagonistic effects may be done only if the determination is supported by sufficient data. A.0.5 Bridging Principles for the Classification of Mixtures Where Test Data Are Not Available for the Complete Mixture A.0.5.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its toxicity, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data shall be used in accordance with the following bridging principles, subject to any specific provisions for mixtures for each hazard class. These principles ensure that the classification process uses the available data to the greatest extent possible in characterizing the hazards of the mixture. A.0.5.1.1 Dilution For mixtures classified in accordance with A.1 through A.10 of this Appendix, if a tested mixture is diluted with a diluent that has an equivalent or lower toxicity classification than the least toxic original ingredient, and which is not expected to affect the toxicity of other ingredients, then: (a) The new diluted mixture shall be classified as equivalent to the original tested mixture; or (b) For classification of acute toxicity in accordance with A.1 of this Appendix, paragraph A.1.3.6 (the additivity formula) shall be applied. A.0.5.1.2 Batching For mixtures classified in accordance with A.1 through A.10 of this Appendix, the toxicity of a tested production batch of a mixture can be assumed to be substantially equivalent to that of another untested production batch of the same mixture, when produced by or under the control of the same chemical manufacturer A.0.5.1.3 Concentration of mixtures For mixtures classified in accordance with A.1, A.2, A.3, A.4, A.8, A.9, or A.10 of this Appendix, if a tested mixture is classified in Category 1, and the concentration of the ingredients of the tested mixture that are in Category 1 is increased, the resulting untested mixture shall be classified in Category 1. A.0.5.1.4 Interpolation within one hazard category For mixtures classified in accordance with A.1, A.2, A.3, A.4, A.8, A.9, or A.10 of this Appendix, for three mixtures (A, B and C) with identical ingredients, where mixtures A and B have been tested and are in the same hazard category, and where untested mixture C has the same toxicologically active ingredients as mixtures A and B but has concentrations of toxicologically active ingredients intermediate to the concentrations in mixtures A and B, then mixture C is assumed to be in the same hazard category as A and B. A.0.5.1.5 Substantially similar mixtures For mixtures classified in accordance with A.1 through A.10 of this Appendix, given the following set of conditions: (a) Where there are two mixtures: (i) A + B; (ii) C + B; (b) The concentration of ingredient B is essentially the same in both mixtures; (c) The concentration of ingredient A in mixture (i) equals that of ingredient C in mixture (ii); (d) And data on toxicity for A and C are available and substantially equivalent; i.e., If mixture (i) or (ii) is already classified based on test data, the other mixture can be assigned the same hazard category. A.0.5.1.6 Aerosols For mixtures classified in accordance with A.1, A.2, A.3, A.4, A.8, or A.9 of this Appendix, an aerosol form of a mixture shall be classified in the same hazard category as the tested, non-aerosolized form of the mixture, provided the added propellant does not affect the toxicity of the mixture when spraying. A.1 Acute Toxicity A.1.1 Definition Acute toxicity i.e., A.1.2 Classification Criteria for Substances A.1.2.1 Substances can be allocated to one of four hazard categories based on acute toxicity by the oral, dermal or inhalation route according to the numeric cut-off criteria as shown in Table A.1.1. Acute toxicity values are expressed as (approximate) LD50 (oral, dermal) or LC 50 in vivo e.g. Table A.1.1—Acute Toxicity Estimate (ATE) Values and Criteria for Acute Toxicity Hazard Categories Exposure route Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Category 4 Oral (mg/kg bodyweight) ATE ≤ 5 >5 ATE ≤ 50 >50 ATE ≤ 300 >300 ATE ≤ 2000 see: Note (a) Note (b) Dermal (mg/kg bodyweight) ATE ≤ 50 >50 ATE ≤ 200 >200 ATE ≤ 1000 >1000 ATE ≤ 2000 see: Note (a) Note (b) Inhalation—Gases (ppmV) ATE ≤ 100 >100 ATE ≤ 500 >500 ATE ≤ 2500 >2500 ATE ≤ 20000 see: Note (a) Note (b) Note (c) Inhalation—Vapors (mg/l) ATE ≤ 0.5 >0.5 ATE ≤ 2.0 >2.0 ATE ≤ 10.0 >10.0 ATE ≤ 20.0 see: Note (a) Note (b) Note (c) Note (d) Inhalation -Dusts and Mists (mg/l) ATE ≤ 0.05 >0.05 ATE ≤ 0.5 >0.5 ATE ≤ 1.0 >1.0 ATE ≤ 5.0 see: Note (a) Note (b) Note (c) Note: Notes to table A.1.1: (a) The acute toxicity estimate (ATE) for the classification of a substance is derived using the LD50/LC50 where available; (b) The acute toxicity estimate (ATE) for the classification of a substance or ingredient in a mixture is derived using: (i) the LD 50 50 (ii) the appropriate conversion value from table 1.2 that relates to the results of a range test, or (iii) the appropriate conversion value from table 1.2 that relates to a classification category; (c) Inhalation cut-off values in the table are based on 4 hour testing exposures. Conversion of existing inhalation toxicity data which has been generated according to 1 hour exposure is achieved by dividing by a factor of 2 for gases and vapors and 4 for dusts and mists; (d) For some substances the test atmosphere will be a vapor which consists of a combination of liquid and gaseous phases. For other substances the test atmosphere may consist of a vapor which is nearly all the gaseous phase. In these latter cases, classification is based on ppmV as follows: Category 1 (100 ppmV), Category 2 (500 ppmV), Category 3 (2500 ppmV), Category 4 (20000 ppmV). The terms “dust”, “mist” and “vapor” are defined as follows: (i) Dust: solid particles of a substance or mixture suspended in a gas (usually air); (ii) Mist: liquid droplets of a substance or mixture suspended in a gas (usually air); (iii) Vapor: the gaseous form of a substance or mixture released from its liquid or solid state. A.1.2.3 The preferred test species for evaluation of acute toxicity by the oral and inhalation routes is the rat, while the rat or rabbit are preferred for evaluation of acute dermal toxicity. Test data already generated for the classification of chemicals under existing systems should be accepted when reclassifying these chemicals under the harmonized system. When experimental data for acute toxicity are available in several animal species, scientific judgment should be used in selecting the most appropriate LD 50 i.e., A.1.2.4 In addition to classification for inhalation toxicity, if data are available that indicates that the mechanism of toxicity was corrosivity of the substance or mixture, the classifier must consider if the chemical is corrosive to the respiratory tract. in vitro A.1.2.4.1 If the classifier determines the chemical is corrosive to the respiratory tract and data are available that indicate that the effect leads to lethality, then in addition to the appropriate acute toxicity pictogram and hazard statement, the chemical must be labelled with the hazard statement “corrosive to the respiratory tract” and the corrosive pictogram. A.1.2.4.2 If the classifier determines the chemical is corrosive to the respiratory tract and the effect does not lead to lethality, then the chemical must be addressed in the Specific Target Organ Toxicity hazard classes ( see A.1.3 Classification Criteria for Mixtures A.1.3.1 The approach to classification of mixtures for acute toxicity is tiered, and is dependent upon the amount of information available for the mixture itself and for its ingredients. The flow chart of Figure A.1.1 indicates the process that must be followed: Figure A.1.1: Tiered Approach to Classification of Mixtures for Acute Toxicity A.1.3.2 Classification of mixtures for acute toxicity may be carried out for each route of exposure, but is only required for one route of exposure as long as this route is followed (estimated or tested) for all ingredients and there is no relevant evidence to suggest acute toxicity by multiple routes. When there is relevant evidence of acute toxicity by multiple routes of exposure, classification is to be conducted for all appropriate routes of exposure. All available information shall be considered. The pictogram and signal word used shall reflect the most severe hazard category; and all relevant hazard statements shall be used. A.1.3.3 For purposes of classifying the hazards of mixtures in the tiered approach: (a) The “relevant ingredients” of a mixture are those which are present in concentrations ≥1% (weight/weight for solids, liquids, dusts, mists and vapors and volume/volume for gases). If there is reason to suspect that an ingredient present at a concentration <1% will affect classification of the mixture for acute toxicity, that ingredient shall also be considered relevant. Consideration of ingredients present at a concentration <1% is particularly important when classifying untested mixtures which contain ingredients that are classified in Category 1 and Category 2; (b) Where a classified mixture is used as an ingredient of another mixture, the actual or derived acute toxicity estimate (ATE) for that mixture is used when calculating the classification of the new mixture using the formulas in A.1.3.6.1 and A.1.3.6.2.4. (c) If the converted acute toxicity point estimates for all ingredients of a mixture are within the same category, then the mixture should be classified in that category. (d) When only range data (or acute toxicity hazard category information) are available for ingredients in a mixture, they may be converted to point estimates in accordance with Table A.1.2 when calculating the classification of the new mixture using the formulas in A.1.3.6.1 and A.1.3.6.2.4. A.1.3.4 Classification of mixtures where acute toxicity test data are available for the complete mixture Where the mixture itself has been tested to determine its acute toxicity, it is classified according to the same criteria as those used for substances, presented in Table A.1.1. If test data for the mixture are not available, the procedures presented below must be followed. A.1.3.5 Classification of mixtures where acute toxicity test data are not available for the complete mixture: bridging principles Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its acute toxicity, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data will be used in accordance with the following bridging principles as found in paragraph A.0.5 of this Appendix: Dilution, Batching, Concentration of mixtures, Interpolation within one hazard category, Substantially similar mixtures, and Aerosols. A.1.3.6 Classification of mixtures based on ingredients of the mixture (additivity formula) A.1.3.6.1 Data available for all ingredients. The acute toxicity estimate (ATE) of ingredients is considered as follows: (a) Include ingredients with a known acute toxicity, which fall into any of the acute hazard categories, or have an oral or dermal LD 50 (b) Ignore ingredients that are presumed not acutely toxic ( e.g., (c) Ignore ingredients if the data available are from a limit dose test (at the upper threshold for Category 4 for the appropriate route of exposure as provided in Table A.1.1) and do not show acute toxicity. Ingredients that fall within the scope of this paragraph are considered to be ingredients with a known acute toxicity estimate (ATE). See The ATE of the mixture is determined by calculation from the ATE values for all relevant ingredients according to the following formula below for oral, dermal or inhalation toxicity: Where: C i n ingredients and i is running from 1 to n; ATE i A.1.3.6.2 Data are not available for one or more ingredients of the mixture. A.1.3.6.2.1 Where an ATE is not available for an individual ingredient of the mixture, but available information provides a derived conversion value, the formula in A.1.3.6.1 may be applied. This information may include evaluation of: (a) Extrapolation between oral, dermal and inhalation acute toxicity estimates. Such an evaluation requires appropriate pharmacodynamic and pharmacokinetic data; (b) Evidence from human exposure that indicates toxic effects but does not provide lethal dose data; (c) Evidence from any other toxicity tests/assays available on the substance that indicates toxic acute effects but does not necessarily provide lethal dose data; or (d) Data from closely analogous substances using structure/activity relationships. A.1.3.6.2.2 This approach requires substantial supplemental technical information, and a highly trained and experienced expert, to reliably estimate acute toxicity. If sufficient information is not available to reliably estimate acute toxicity, proceed to the provisions of A.1.3.6.2.4. A.1.3.6.2.3 In the event that an ingredient with unknown acute toxicity is used in a mixture at a concentration ≥1%, and the mixture has not been classified based on testing of the mixture as a whole, the mixture cannot be attributed a definitive acute toxicity estimate. In this situation the mixture is classified based on the known ingredients only. Note: A statement that × percent of the mixture consists of ingredient(s) of unknown acute (oral/dermal/inhalation) toxicity is required on the label and safety data sheet in such cases; see appendix C to this section, Allocation of Label Elements and appendix D to this section, Safety Data Sheets). A.1.3.6.2.4 If the total concentration of the relevant ingredient(s) with unknown acute toxicity is ≤10% then the formula presented in A.1.3.6.1 must be used. If the total concentration of the relevant ingredient(s) with unknown acute toxicity is >10%, the formula presented in A.1.3.6.1 is corrected to adjust for the percentage of the unknown ingredient(s) as follows: Table A.1.2—Conversion From Experimentally Obtained Acute Toxicity Range Values (or Acute Toxicity Hazard Categories) to Acute Toxicity Point Estimates for Use in the Formulas for the Classification of Mixtures Exposure routes Classification category or experimentally obtained Converted acute toxicity point estimate Oral (mg/kg bodyweight) 0 < Category 1 ≤ 5 0.5 5 < Category 2 ≤ 50 5 50 < Category 3 ≤ 300 100 300 < Category 4 ≤ 2000 500 Dermal (mg/kg bodyweight) 0 < Category 1 ≤ 50 5 50 < Category 2 ≤ 200 50 200 < Category 3 ≤ 1000 300 1000 < Category 4 ≤ 2000 1100 Gases (ppmV) 0 < Category 1 ≤ 100 10 100 < Category 2 ≤ 500 100 500 < Category 3 ≤ 2500 700 2500 < Category 4 ≤ 20000 4500 Vapors (mg/l) 0 < Category 1 ≤ 0.5 0.05 0.5 < Category 2 ≤ 2.0 0.5 2.0 < Category 3 ≤ 10.0 3 10.0 < Category 4 ≤ 20.0 11 Dust/mist (mg/l) 0 < Category 1 ≤ 0.05 0.005 0.05 < Category 2 ≤ 0.5 0.05 0.5 < Category 3 ≤ 1.0 0.5 1.0 < Category 4 ≤ 5.0 1.5 Note: A.2 Skin Corrosion/Irritation A.2.1 Definitions and General Considerations A.2.1.1 Skin corrosion Skin irritation A.2.1.2 To classify, all available and relevant information on skin corrosion/irritation is collected and its quality in terms of adequacy and reliability is assessed. Wherever possible classification should be based on data generated using internationally validated and accepted methods, such as OECD Test Guidelines (TG) or equivalent methods. Sections A.2.2.1 to A.2.2.6 provide classification criteria for the different types of information that may be available. A.2.1.3 A tiered approach A.2.2 Classification Criteria for Substances Substances shall be allocated to one of the following categories within this hazard class: (a) Category 1 (Skin Corrosion) This category may be further divided into up to three sub-categories (1A, 1B, and 1C). Corrosive substances should be classified in Category 1 where data are not sufficient for sub-categorization. When data are sufficient, substances may be classified in one of the three sub-categories 1A, 1B, or 1C. (b) Category 2 (Skin Irritation) A.2.2.1 Classification Based on Standard Human Data Existing reliable and good quality human data on skin corrosion/irritation should be given high weight for classification. Existing human data could be derived from single or repeated exposure(s), for example in occupational, consumer, transport or emergency response scenarios and epidemiological and clinical studies in well-documented case reports and observations (see A.0.2.6 and A.0.3). Although human data from accident or poison center databases can provide evidence for classification, absence of incidents is not itself evidence for no classification, as exposures are generally unknown or uncertain. A.2.2.2 Classification Based on Standard Animal Test Data OECD TG 404 is the currently available internationally validated and accepted animal test for classification as skin corrosive or irritant (See Table A.2.1 and A.2.2) and is the standard animal test. The current version of OECD TG 404 uses a maximum of 3 animals. Results from animal studies conducted under previous versions of OECD TG 404 that used more than 3 animals are also considered standard animal tests. A.2.2.2.1 Skin Corrosion A.2.2.2.1.1 A substance is corrosive to the skin when it produces destruction of skin tissue, namely, visible necrosis through the epidermis and into the dermis, in at least one tested animal after initial exposure up to a 4-hour duration. A.2.2.2.1.2 Three sub-categories of Category 1 are provided in Table A.2.1, all of which shall be regulated as Category 1. Table A.2.1—Skin Corrosion Category and Sub-Categories a Criteria Category 1 Destruction of skin tissue, namely, visible necrosis through the epidermis and into the dermis, in at least one tested animal after exposure ≤4 h. Sub-category 1A Corrosive responses in at least one animal following exposure ≤3 min during an observation period ≤1 h. Sub-category 1B Corrosive responses in at least one animal following exposure >3 min and ≤1 h and observations ≤14 days. Sub-category 1C Corrosive responses in at least one animal after exposures >1 h and ≤ 4 h and observations ≤14 days. a A.2.2.2.2 Skin Irritation A.2.2.2.2.1 A substance is irritant to skin when it produces reversible damage to the skin following its application for up to 4 hours. A.2.2.2.2.2 A single irritant category (Category 2) is presented in the Table A.2.2. A substance is irritant to skin, when after the first application, it produces reversible damage to the skin following its application for up to 4 hours. An irritation category (Category 2) is provided that: (a) recognizes that some test substances may lead to effects which persist throughout the length of the test; and (b) acknowledges that animal responses in a test may be variable. A.2.2.2.2.3 Reversibility of skin lesions is another consideration in evaluating irritant responses. When inflammation persists to the end of the observation period in two or more test animals, taking into consideration alopecia (limited area), hyperkeratosis, hyperplasia and scaling, then a chemical should be considered to be an irritant. A.2.2.2.2.4 Animal irritant responses within a test can be quite variable, as they are with corrosion. A separate irritant criterion accommodates cases when there is a significant irritant response but less than the mean score criterion for a positive test. For example, a substance should be designated as an irritant if at least 1 of 3 tested animals shows a very elevated mean score according to test method used throughout the study, including lesions persisting at the end of an observation period of normally 14 days. Other responses should also fulfil this criterion. However, it should be ascertained that the responses are the result of chemical exposure. Addition of this criterion increases the sensitivity of the classification system. Table A.2.2—Skin Irritation Category a Criteria Irritant (Category 2) (1) Mean score of ≥2.3 ≤ 4.0 for erythema/eschar or for edema in at least 2 of 3 tested animals from grading at 24, 48, and 72 hours after patch removal or, if reactions are delayed, from grades on 3 consecutive days after the onset of skin reactions; or (2) Inflammation that persists to the end of the observation period normally 14 days in a least 2 animals, particularly taking into account alopecia (limited area), hyperkeratosis, hyperplasia, and scaling; or (3) In some cases where there is pronounced variability of response among animals, with very distinctive positive effects related to chemical exposure in a single animal but less than the criteria above. a A.2.2.3 Classification Based on In Vitro/Ex Vivo Data A.2.2.3.1 The currently available individual in vitro/ex vivo in vitro/ex vivo A.2.2.3.2 Wherever possible classification should be based on data generated using internationally validated and accepted in vitro/ex vivo In vitro/ex vivo A.2.2.3.3 Skin corrosion A.2.2.3.3.1 Where tests have been undertaken in accordance with OECD Test Guidelines (TGs) 430, 431, or 435, a substance is classified for skin corrosion in category 1 (and, where possible and required into sub-categories 1A, 1B, or 1C). A.2.2.3.3.2 Some in vitro/ex vivo A.2.2.3.3.3 A substance identified as not corrosive should be considered for classification as skin irritant. A.2.2.3.4 Skin irritation A.2.2.3.4.1 Where a conclusion of corrosivity can be excluded and where tests have been undertaken in accordance with OECD Test Guideline 439, a substance is classified for skin irritation in category 2. A.2.2.3.4.2 A negative result in an internationally accepted and validated in vitro/ex vivo e.g., A.2.2.4 Classification Based on Other, Existing Skin Data in Animals Other existing skin data in animals may be used for classification, but there may be limitations regarding the conclusions that can be drawn if a substance is highly toxic via the dermal route, an in vivo A.2.2.5 Classification Based on Chemical Properties Skin effects may be indicated by pH extremes such as ≤2 and ≥11.5 especially when associated with significant acid/alkaline reserve (buffering capacity). Generally, such substances are expected to produce significant effects on the skin. In the absence of any other information, a substance is considered corrosive (Skin Category 1) if it has a pH ≤2 or a pH ≥11.5. However, if consideration of acid/alkaline reserve suggests the substance may not be corrosive despite the low or high pH, this needs to be confirmed by other data, preferably from an appropriate validated in vitro/ex vivo A.2.2.6 Classification Based on Non-Test Methods A.2.2.6.1 Classification, including non-classification, can be based on non-test methods, with due consideration of reliability and applicability, on a case-by-case basis. Such methods include computer models predicting qualitative structure-activity relationships (structural alerts, SAR); quantitative structure-activity relationships (QSARs); computer expert systems; and read-across using analogue and category approaches. A.2.2.6.2 Read-across using analogue or category approaches requires sufficiently reliable test data on similar substance(s) and justification of the similarity of the tested substance(s) with the substance(s) to be classified. Where adequate justification of the read-across approach is provided, it has in general higher weight than (Q)SARs. A.2.2.6.3 Classification based on (Q)SARs requires sufficient data and validation of the model. The validity of the computer models and the prediction should be assessed using internationally recognized principles for the validation of (Q)SARs. With respect to reliability, lack of alerts in a SAR or expert system is not sufficient evidence for no classification. A.2.2.7 Classification in a Tiered Approach A.2.2.7.1 A tiered approach to the evaluation of initial information should be considered, where applicable (Figure A.2.1), recognizing that not all elements may be relevant. However, all available and relevant information of sufficient quality needs to be examined for consistency with respect to the resulting classification. A.2.2.7.2 In the tiered approach (Figure A.2.1), existing human and animal data form the highest tier, followed by in vitro/ex vivo A.2.2.7.3 Where information from several tiers is inconsistent and/or conflicting with respect to the resulting classification, information of sufficient quality from a higher tier is generally given a higher weight than information from a lower tier. However, when information from a lower tier would result in a stricter classification than information from a higher tier and there is concern for misclassification, then classification is determined by an overall weight of evidence approach. The same would apply in the case where there is human data indicating irritation but positive results from an in vitro/ex vivo Figure A.2.1—Application of the Tiered Approach for Skin Corrosion and Irritation (a) Before applying the approach, the explanatory text in A.2.2.7 should be consulted. Only adequate and reliable data of sufficient quality should be included in applying the tiered approach. (b) Information may be inconclusive for various reasons, e.g. —The available data may be of insufficient quality, or otherwise insufficient/inadequate for the purpose of classification, e.g., —The available data may be insufficient to conclude on the classification, e.g., —The method used to generate the available data may not be suitable for concluding on no classification (see A.2.2. for details). Specifically, in vitro/ex vivo A.2.3 Classification Criteria for Mixtures A.2.3.1 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for the Complete Mixture A.2.3.1.1 In general, the mixture shall be classified using the criteria for substances, taking into account the tiered approach to evaluate data for this hazard class (as illustrated in Figure A.2.1) and A.2.3.1.2 and A.2.3.1.3. If classification is not possible using the tiered approach, then the approach described in A.2.3.2, or, if that is not applicable A.2.2.3.3 should be followed. A.2.3.1.2 In vitro/ex vivo A.2.3.1.3 In the absence of any other information, a mixture is considered corrosive (Skin Category 1) if it has a pH ≤2 or a pH ≥11.5. However, if consideration of acid/alkaline reserve suggests the mixture may not be corrosive despite the low or high pH value, this needs to be confirmed by other data, preferably from an appropriate validated in vitro/ex vivo A.2.3.2 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Not Available for the Complete Mixture: Bridging Principles A.2.3.2.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its skin corrosion/irritation potential, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data will be used in accordance with the following bridging principles, as found in paragraph A.0.5 of this Appendix: Dilution, Batching, Concentration of mixtures, Interpolation within one hazard category, Substantially similar mixtures, and Aerosols. A.2.3.3 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for All Ingredients or Only for Some Ingredients of the Mixture A.2.3.3.1 In order to make use of all available data for purposes of classifying the skin corrosion/irritation hazards of mixtures, the following assumption has been made and is applied where appropriate in the tiered approach: The “relevant ingredients” of a mixture are those which are present in concentrations ≥1% (weight/weight for solids, liquids, dusts, mists and vapors and volume/volume for gases.). If the classifier has reason to suspect that an ingredient present at a concentration <1% will affect classification of the mixture for skin corrosion/irritation, that ingredient shall also be considered relevant. A.2.3.3.2 In general, the approach to classification of mixtures as corrosive or irritant to the skin when data are available on the ingredients, but not on the mixture as a whole, is based on the theory of additivity, such that each corrosive or irritant ingredient contributes to the overall corrosive or irritant properties of the mixture in proportion to its potency and concentration. A weighting factor of 10 is used for corrosive ingredients when they are present at a concentration below the concentration limit for classification with Category 1, but are at a concentration that will contribute to the classification of the mixture as an irritant. The mixture is classified as corrosive or irritant when the sum of the concentrations of such ingredients exceeds a cut-off value/concentration limit. A.2.3.3.3 Table A.2.3 below provides the cut-off value/concentration limits to be used to determine if the mixture is considered to be corrosive or irritant to the skin. A.2.3.3.4 Particular care shall be taken when classifying certain types of chemicals such as acids and bases, inorganic salts, aldehydes, phenols, and surfactants. The approach explained in A.2.3.3.1 and A.2.3.3.2 might not work given that many of such substances are corrosive or irritant at concentrations <1%. For mixtures containing strong acids or bases the pH should be used as classification criteria since pH will be a better indicator of corrosion than the concentration limits in Table A.2.3. A mixture containing corrosive or irritant ingredients that cannot be classified based on the additivity approach shown in Table A.2.3, due to chemical characteristics that make this approach unworkable, should be classified as skin corrosion Category 1 if it contains ≥1% of a corrosive ingredient and as skin irritation Category 2 when it contains ≥3% of an irritant ingredient. Classification of mixtures with ingredients for which the approach in Table A.2.3 does not apply is summarized in Table A.2.4 below. A.2.3.3.5 On occasion, reliable data may show that the skin corrosion/irritation of an ingredient will not be evident when present at a level above the generic cut-off values/concentration limits mentioned in Tables A.2.3 and A.2.4. In these cases the mixture could be classified according to those data ( See Use of cut-off values/concentration limits, paragraph A.0.4.3 of this Appendix A.2.3.3.6 If there are data showing that (an) ingredient(s) may be corrosive or irritant to skin at a concentration of <1% (corrosive) or <3% (irritant), the mixture shall be classified accordingly (See Use of cut-off values/concentration limits Table A.2.3—Concentration of Ingredients of a Mixture Classified as Skin Category 1 or 2 That Would Trigger Classification of the Mixture as Hazardous to Skin (Category 1 or 2) Sum of ingredients classified as: Concentration triggering classification of a mixture as: Skin corrosive Skin irritant Category 1 Category 2 Skin Category 1 ≥5% ≥1% but <5% Skin Category 2 ≥10% (10 × Skin Category 1) + Skin Category 2 ≥10% Note: Table A.2.4—Concentration of Ingredients of a Mixture When the Additivity Approach Does Not Apply, That Would Trigger Classification of the Mixture as Hazardous to Skin Ingredient Concentration (percent) Mixture classified as: Skin Acid with pH ≤2 ≥1 Category 1. Base with pH ≥11.5 ≥1 Category 1. Other corrosive (Category 1) ingredient ≥1 Category 1. Other irritant (Category 2) ingredient, including acids and bases ≥ 3 Category 2. A.3 Serious Eye Damage/Eye Irritation A.3.1 Definitions and General Considerations A.3.1.1 Serious eye damage Eye irritation A.3.1.2 Serious eye damage/eye irritation shall be classified using a tiered approach as detailed in Figure A.3.1. Emphasis shall be placed upon existing human data ( See in vitro See in vitro A.3.2 Classification Criteria for Substances Substances are allocated to one of the categories within this hazard class, Category 1 (serious eye damage) or Category 2 (eye irritation), as follows: (a) Category 1 (serious eye damage/irreversible effects on the eye): substances that have the potential to seriously damage the eyes (see Table A.3.1). (b) Category 2 (eye irritation/reversible effects on the eye): substances that have the potential to induce reversible eye irritation (see Table A.3.2). A.3.2.1 Classification Based on Standard Animal Test Data A.3.2.1.1 Serious eye damage (Category 1)/Irreversible effects on the eye A single hazard category is provided in Table A.3.1, for substances that have the potential to seriously damage the eyes. Category 1, irreversible effects on the eye, includes the criteria listed below. These observations include animals with grade 4 cornea lesions and other severe reactions (e.g., destruction of cornea) observed at any time during the test, as well as persistent corneal opacity, discoloration of the cornea by a dye substance, adhesion, pannus, and interference with the function of the iris or other effects that impair sight. In this context, persistent lesions are considered those which are not fully reversible within an observation period of normally 21 days. Category 1 also contains substances fulfilling the criteria of corneal opacity ≥ 3 and/or iritis > 1.5 observed in at least 2 of 3 tested animals detected in a Draize eye test with rabbits, because severe lesions like these usually do not reverse within a 21-day observation period. Table A.3.1—Serious Eye Damage/Irreversible Effects on the Eye Category a Criteria Category 1: Serious eye damage/Irreversible effects on the eye A substance that produces: (b) in at least 2 of 3 tested animals, a positive response of: (i) corneal opacity ≥3; and/or (ii) iritis >1.5; calculated as the mean scores following grading at 24, 48 and 72 hours after instillation of the test material. a A.3.2.1.2 Eye irritation (category 2)/reversible effects on the eye A single Category 2 is provided in Table A.3.2 for substances that have the potential to induce reversible eye irritation. When data are available, substances may be classified into Category 2A and Category 2B: (a) For substances inducing eye irritant effects reversing within an observation time of normally 21 days, Category 2A applies. (b) For substances inducing eye irritant effects reversing within an observation time of 7 days, Category 2B applies. When a substance is classified as Category 2, without further categorization, the classification criteria are the same as those for 2A. A.3.2.1.3 For those substances where there is pronounced variability among animal responses this information must be taken into account in determining the classification. Table A.3.2—Reversible Effects on the Eye Categories a Criteria Substances that have the potential to induce reversible eye irritation. Category 2/2A Substances that produce in at least 2 of 3 tested animals a positive response of: (a) corneal opacity ≥1; and/or. (b) iritis ≥1; and/or. (c) conjunctival redness ≥2; and/or. (d) conjunctival oedema (chemosis) ≥2. calculated as the mean scores following grading at 24, 48 and 72 hours after instillation of the test material, and which fully reverses within an observation period of normally 21 days. Category 2B Within Category 2A an eye irritant is considered mildly irritating to eyes (Category 2B) when the effects listed above are fully reversible within 7 days of observation. a A.3.2.2 Classification in a Tiered Approach A.3.2.2.1 A tiered approach to the evaluation of initial information shall be used where applicable, recognizing that all elements may not be relevant in certain cases (Figure A.3.1). A.3.2.2.2 Existing human and animal data should be the first line of analysis, as they give information directly relevant to effects on the eye. Possible skin corrosion shall be evaluated prior to consideration of any testing for serious eye damage/eye irritation in order to avoid testing for local effects on eyes with skin corrosive substances. A.3.2.2.3 In vitro A.3.2.2.4 Likewise, pH extremes like ≤2 and ≥11.5, may indicate serious eye damage, especially when associated with significant acid/alkaline reserve (buffering capacity). Generally, such substances are expected to produce significant effects on the eyes. In the absence of any other information, a substance is considered to cause serious eye damage (Category 1) if it has a pH ≤2 or ≥11.5. However, if consideration of acid/alkaline reserve suggests the substance may not cause serious eye damage despite the low or high pH value, this needs to be confirmed by other data, preferably by data from an appropriate validated in vitro A.3.2.2.5 In some cases sufficient information may be available from structurally related substances to make classification decisions. A.3.2.2.6 The tiered approach provides guidance on how to organize existing information and to make a weight-of-evidence decision about hazard assessment and hazard classification (ideally without conducting new animal tests). Animal testing with corrosive substances should be avoided wherever possible. Although information might be gained from the evaluation of single parameters within a tier, consideration should be given to the totality of existing information and making an overall weight of evidence determination. This is especially true when there is conflict in information available on some parameters. A.3.2.2.7 The tiered approach explains how to organize existing information and to make a weight-of-evidence decision about hazard assessment and hazard classification. Although information might be gained from the evaluation of single parameters within a tier, consideration should be given to the totality of existing information and making an overall weight of evidence determination. This is especially true when there is conflict in information available. Figure A.3.1—Tiered Evaluation for Serious Eye Damage and Eye Irritation (See Also Figure A.2.1) a b c d e f A.3.3 Classification Criteria for Mixtures A.3.3.1 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for the Complete Mixture A.3.3.1.1 The mixture will be classified using the criteria for substances, and taking into account the tiered approach to evaluate data for this hazard class (as illustrated in Figure A.3.1). A.3.3.1.2 When considering testing of the mixture, chemical manufacturers shall use a tiered approach as included in the criteria for classification of substances for skin corrosion and serious eye damage and eye irritation to help ensure an accurate classification, as well as to avoid unnecessary animal testing. In the absence of any other information, a mixture is considered to cause serious eye damage (Category 1) if it has a pH ≤2 or ≥11.5. However, if consideration of acid/alkaline reserve suggests the mixture may not have the potential to cause serious eye damage despite the low or high pH value, then further evaluation may be necessary. A.3.3.2 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Not Available for the Complete Mixture: Bridging Principles A.3.3.2.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its skin corrosivity or potential to cause serious eye damage or eye irritation, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data will be used in accordance with the following bridging principles, as found in paragraph A.0.5 of this Appendix: Dilution, Batching, Concentration of mixtures, Interpolation within one hazard category, Substantially similar mixtures, and Aerosols. A.3.3.3 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for All Ingredients or Only for Some Ingredients of the Mixture A.3.3.3.1 For purposes of classifying the serious eye damage/eye irritation hazards of mixtures in the tiered approach: The “relevant ingredients” of a mixture are those which are present in concentrations ≥1% (weight/weight for solids, liquids, dusts, mists and vapors and volume/volume for gases.) If the classifier has reason to suspect that an ingredient present at a concentration <1% will affect classification of the mixture for serious eye damage/eye irritation, that ingredient shall also be considered relevant. A.3.3.3.2 In general, the approach to classification of mixtures as seriously damaging to the eye or eye irritant when data are available on the ingredients, but not on the mixture as a whole, is based on the theory of additivity, such that each skin corrosive or serious eye damage/eye irritant ingredient contributes to the overall serious eye damage/eye irritation properties of the mixture in proportion to its potency and concentration. A weighting factor of 10 is used for skin corrosive and serious eye damaging ingredients when they are present at a concentration below the concentration limit for classification with Category 1, but are at a concentration that will contribute to the classification of the mixture as serious eye damaging/eye irritant. The mixture is classified as seriously damaging to the eye or eye irritant when the sum of the concentrations of such ingredients exceeds a threshold cut-off value/concentration limit. A.3.3.3.3 Table A.3.3 provides the cut-off value/concentration limits to be used to determine if the mixture must be classified as seriously damaging to the eye or an eye irritant. A.3.3.3.4 Particular care must be taken when classifying certain types of chemicals such as acids and bases, inorganic salts, aldehydes, phenols, and surfactants. The approach explained in A.3.3.3.1 and A.3.3.3.2 might not work given that many of such substances are seriously damaging to the eye/eye irritating at concentrations <1%. For mixtures containing strong acids or bases, the pH should be used as classification criteria ( See A.3.3.3.5 On occasion, reliable data may show that the irreversible/reversible eye effects of an ingredient will not be evident when present at a level above the generic cut-off values/concentration limits mentioned in Tables A.3.3 and A.3.4. In these cases the mixture could be classified according to those data ( See also Use of cut-off values/concentration limits A.3.3.3.6 If there are data showing that (an) ingredient(s) may be corrosive to the skin or seriously damaging to the eye/eye irritating at a concentration of ≤1% (corrosive to the skin or seriously damaging to the eye) or ≤3% (eye irritant), the mixture shall be classified accordingly ( See also Use of cut-off values/concentration limits Table A.3.3—Concentration of Ingredients of a Mixture Classified as Skin Category 1 and/or Eye Category 1 or 2 That Would Trigger Classification of the Mixtures as Hazardous to the Eye Sum of ingredients classified as Concentration triggering Serious eye damage Eye irritation Category 1 Category 2/2A Skin corrosion (Category 1) + Serious eye damage (Category 1) a ≥3% ≥1% but <3% Eye irritation (Category 2) ≥10% b 10 × (Skin corrosion (Category 1) + Serious eye damage (Category 1)) a ≥10% Notes: a b Table A.3.4—Concentration of Ingredients of a Mixture for Which the Additivity Approach Does Not Apply, That Would Trigger Classification of the Mixture as Hazardous to the Eye Ingredient Concentration Mixture classified as Acid with pH <2 ≥1 Serious eye damage (Category 1). Base with pH ≥11.5 ≥1 Serious eye damage (Category 1). Other skin corrosive or serious eye damage (Category 1) ingredients ≥1 Serious eye damage (Category 1). Other eye irritant (Category 2) ingredients ≥3 Eye irritation (Category 2). A.4 Respiratory or Skin Sensitization A.4.1 Definitions and General Considerations A.4.1.1 Respiratory sensitization Skin sensitization A.4.1.2 For the purpose of this chapter, sensitization includes two phases: the first phase is induction of specialized immunological memory in an individual by exposure to an allergen. The second phase is elicitation, i.e., A.4.1.3 For respiratory sensitization, the pattern of induction followed by elicitation phases is shared in common with skin sensitization. For skin sensitization, an induction phase is required in which the immune system learns to react; clinical symptoms can then arise when subsequent exposure is sufficient to elicit a visible skin reaction (elicitation phase). As a consequence, predictive tests usually follow this pattern in which there is an induction phase, the response to which is measured by a standardized elicitation phase, typically involving a patch test. The local lymph node assay is the exception, directly measuring the induction response. Evidence of skin sensitization in humans normally is assessed by a diagnostic patch test. A.4.1.4 Usually, for both skin and respiratory sensitization, lower levels are necessary for elicitation than are required for induction. A.4.1.5 The hazard class “respiratory or skin sensitization” is differentiated into: (a) Respiratory sensitization; and (b) Skin sensitization A.4.2 Classification Criteria for Substances A.4.2.1 Respiratory Sensitizers >A.4.2.1.1 Hazard Categories A.4.2.1.1.1 Effects seen in either humans or animals will normally justify classification in a weight of evidence approach for respiratory sensitizers. Substances may be allocated to one of the two sub-categories 1A or 1B using a weight of evidence approach in accordance with the criteria given in Table A.4.1 and on the basis of reliable and good quality evidence from human cases or epidemiological studies and/or observations from appropriate studies in experimental animals. A.4.2.1.1.2 Where data are not sufficient for sub-categorization, respiratory sensitizers shall be classified in Category 1. Table A.4.1—Hazard Category and Sub-Categories for Respiratory Sensitizers Category 1 Respiratory sensitizer A substance is classified as a respiratory sensitizer (a) if there is evidence in humans that the substance can lead to specific respiratory hypersensitivity and/or (b) if there are positive results from an appropriate animal test. 1 Sub-category 1A Substances showing a high frequency of occurrence in humans; or a probability of occurrence of a high sensitization rate in humans based on animal or other tests. 1 Sub-category 1B Substances showing a low to moderate frequency of occurrence in humans; or a probability of occurrence of a low to moderate sensitization rate in humans based on animal or other tests. 1 1 A.4.2.1.2 Human Evidence A.4.2.1.2.1 Evidence that a substance can lead to specific respiratory hypersensitivity will normally be based on human experience. In this context, hypersensitivity is normally seen as asthma, but other hypersensitivity reactions such as rhinitis/conjunctivitis and alveolitis are also considered. The condition will have the clinical character of an allergic reaction. However, immunological mechanisms do not have to be demonstrated. A.4.2.1.2.2 When considering the human evidence, it is necessary that in addition to the evidence from the cases, the following be taken into account: (a) The size of the population exposed; (b) The extent of exposure. A.4.2.1.3 The evidence referred to above could be: (a) Clinical history and data from appropriate lung function tests related to exposure to the substance, confirmed by other supportive evidence which may include: (i) In vivo e.g., (ii) In vitro e.g., (iii) Studies that may indicate other specific hypersensitivity reactions where immunological mechanisms of action have not been proven, e.g., (iv) A chemical structure related to substances known to cause respiratory hypersensitivity; (b) Data from positive bronchial challenge tests with the substance conducted according to accepted guidelines for the determination of a specific hypersensitivity reaction. A.4.2.1.2.4 Clinical history should include both medical and occupational history to determine a relationship between exposure to a specific substance and development of respiratory hypersensitivity. Relevant information includes aggravating factors both in the home and workplace, the onset and progress of the disease, family history and medical history of the patient in question. The medical history should also include a note of other allergic or airway disorders from childhood and smoking history. A.4.2.1.2.5 The results of positive bronchial challenge tests are considered to provide sufficient evidence for classification on their own. It is, however, recognized that in practice many of the examinations listed above will already have been carried out. A.4.2.1.3 Animal studies A.4.2.1.2.3 Data from appropriate animal studies 2 3 2 3 (a) Measurements of Immunoglobulin E (IgE) and other specific immunological parameters, for example in mice (b) Specific pulmonary responses in guinea pigs. A.4.2.2 Skin Sensitizers A.4.2.2.1 Hazard categories A.4.2.2.1.1 Effects seen in either humans or animals will normally justify classification in a weight of evidence approach for skin sensitizers. Substances may be allocated to one of the two sub-categories 1A or 1B using a weight of evidence approach in accordance with the criteria given in Table A.4.2 and on the basis of reliable and good quality evidence from human cases or epidemiological studies and/or observations from appropriate studies in experimental animals according to the guidance values provided in A.4.2.2.2.1 and A.4.2.2.3.2 for sub-category 1A and in A.4.2.2.2.2 and A.4.2.2.3.3 for sub-category 1B. A.4.2.2.1.2 Where data are not sufficient for sub-categorization, skin sensitizers shall be classified in Category 1. Table A.4.2—Hazard Category and Sub-Categories for Skin Sensitizers Category 1 Skin sensitizer A substance is classified as a skin sensitizer Sub-category 1A Substances showing a high frequency of occurrence in humans and/or a high potency in animals can be presumed to have the potential to produce significant sensitization in humans. Severity of reaction may also be considered. Sub-category 1B Substances showing a low to moderate frequency of occurrence in humans and/or a low to moderate potency in animals can be presumed to have the potential to produce sensitization in humans. Severity of reaction may also be considered. A.4.2.2.2 Human Evidence A.4.2.2.2.1 Human evidence for sub-category 1A may include: (a) Positive responses at ≤500 µg/cm2 (Human Repeat Insult Patch Test (HRIPT), Human Maximization Test (HMT)—induction threshold); (b) Diagnostic patch test data where there is a relatively high and substantial incidence of reactions in a defined population in relation to relatively low exposure; (c) Other epidemiological evidence where there is a relatively high and substantial incidence of allergic contact dermatitis in relation to relatively low exposure. A.4.2.2.2.2 Human evidence for sub-category 1B may include: (a) Positive responses at >500 µg/cm2 (HRIPT, HMT—induction threshold); (b) Diagnostic patch test data where there is a relatively low but substantial incidence of reactions in a defined population in relation to relatively high exposure; (c) Other epidemiological evidence where there is a relatively low but substantial incidence of allergic contact dermatitis in relation to relatively high exposure. A.4.2.2.3 Animal Studies A.4.2.2.3.1 For Category 1, when an adjuvant type test method for skin sensitization is used, a response of at least 30% of the animals is considered as positive. For a non-adjuvant Guinea pig test method, a response of at least 15% of the animals is considered positive. For Category 1, a stimulation index of three or more is considered a positive response in the local lymph node assay. 4 4 A.4.2.2.3.2 Animal test results for sub-category 1A can include data with values indicated in the following Table A.4.3: Table A.4.3—Animal Test Results for Sub-Category 1A Assay Criteria Local lymph node assay EC3 value ≤2%. Guinea pig maximization test ≥30% responding at ≤0.1% intradermal induction dose or Buehler assay ≥15% responding at ≤0.2% topical induction dose or Note: A.4.2.2.3.3 Animal test results for sub-category 1B can include data with values indicated in Table A.4.4 below: Table A.4.4—Animal Test Results for Sub-Category 1B Assay Criteria Local lymph node assay EC3 value >2%. Guinea pig maximization test ≥30% to <60% responding at >0.1% to ≤1% intradermal induction dose or Buehler assay ≥15% to <60% responding at >0.2% to ≤20% topical induction dose or Note: A.4.2.2.4 Specific Considerations A.4.2.2.4.1 For classification of a substance, evidence shall include one or more of the following using a weight of evidence approach: (a) Positive data from patch testing, normally obtained in more than one dermatology clinic; (b) Epidemiological studies showing allergic contact dermatitis caused by the substance. Situations in which a high proportion of those exposed exhibit characteristic symptoms are to be looked at with special concern, even if the number of cases is small; (c) Positive data from appropriate animal studies; (d) Positive data from experimental studies in humans (See paragraph A.0.2.6 of this Appendix); (e) Well documented episodes of allergic contact dermatitis, normally obtained in more than one dermatology clinic; (f) Severity of reaction. A.4.2.2.4.2 Evidence from animal studies is usually much more reliable than evidence from human exposure. However, in cases where evidence is available from both sources, and there is conflict between the results, the quality and reliability of the evidence from both sources must be assessed in order to resolve the question of classification on a case-by-case basis. Normally, human data are not generated in controlled experiments with volunteers for the purpose of hazard classification but rather as part of risk assessment to confirm lack of effects seen in animal tests. Consequently, positive human data on skin sensitization are usually derived from case-control or other, less defined studies. Evaluation of human data must, therefore, be carried out with caution as the frequency of cases reflect, in addition to the inherent properties of the substances, factors such as the exposure situation, bioavailability, individual predisposition and preventive measures taken. Negative human data should not normally be used to negate positive results from animal studies. For both animal and human data, consideration should be given to the impact of vehicle. A.4.2.2.4.3 If none of the above-mentioned conditions are met, the substance need not be classified as a skin sensitizer. However, a combination of two or more indicators of skin sensitization, as listed below, may alter the decision. This shall be considered on a case-by-case basis. (a) Isolated episodes of allergic contact dermatitis; (b) Epidemiological studies of limited power, e.g., (c) Data from animal tests, performed according to existing guidelines, which do not meet the criteria for a positive result described in A.4.2.2.3, but which are sufficiently close to the limit to be considered significant; (d) Positive data from non-standard methods; (e) Positive results from close structural analogues. A.4.2.2.4.4 Immunological contact urticaria A.4.2.2.4.4.1 Substances meeting the criteria for classification as respiratory sensitizers may, in addition, cause immunological contact urticaria. Consideration shall be given to classifying these substances as skin sensitizers. A.4.2.2.4.4.2 Substances which cause immunological contact urticaria without meeting the criteria for respiratory sensitizers shall be considered for classification as skin sensitizers. A.4.2.2.4.4.3 There is no recognized animal model available to identify substances which cause immunological contact urticaria. Therefore, classification will normally be based on human evidence, similar to that for skin sensitization. A.4.3 Classification Criteria for Mixtures A.4.3.1 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for the Complete Mixture When reliable and good quality evidence, as described in the criteria for substances, from human experience or appropriate studies in experimental animals, is available for the mixture, then the mixture shall be classified by weight of evidence evaluation of these data. Care must be exercised in evaluating data on mixtures that the dose used does not render the results inconclusive. A.4.3.2 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Not Available for the Complete Mixture: Bridging Principles A.4.3.2.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its sensitizing properties, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data will be used in accordance with the following agreed bridging principles as found in paragraph A.0.5 of this Appendix: Dilution, Batching, Concentration of mixtures, Interpolation within one hazard category/subcategory, Substantially similar mixtures, and Aerosols. A.4.3.3 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for All Ingredients or Only for Some Ingredients of the Mixture The mixture shall be classified as a respiratory or skin sensitizer when at least one ingredient has been classified as a respiratory or skin sensitizer and is present at or above the appropriate cut-off value/concentration limit for the specific endpoint as shown in Table A.4.5. Table A.4.5—Cut-Off Values/Concentration Limits of Ingredients of a Mixture Classified as Either Respiratory Sensitizers or Skin Sensitizers That Would Trigger Classification of the Mixture Ingredient classified as Cut-off values/concentration limits triggering classification of a mixture as Respiratory sensitizer Skin sensitizer Solid/liquid Gas All physical states Respiratory Sensitizer Category 1 ≥0.1 ≥0.1 Respiratory Sensitizer Sub-category 1A ≥0.1 ≥0.1 Respiratory Sensitizer Sub-category 1B ≥1.0 ≥0.2 Skin Sensitizer Category 1 ≥0.1 Skin Sensitizer Sub-category 1A ≥0.1 Skin Sensitizer Sub-category 1B ≥1.0 A.5 Germ Cell Mutagenicity A.5.1 Definitions and General Considerations A.5.1.1 Germ cell mutagenicity A.5.1.2 A mutation mutation mutagenic mutagen A.5.1.3 The more general terms genotoxic genotoxicity A.5.1.4 This hazard class is primarily concerned with chemicals that may cause mutations in the germ cells of humans that can be transmitted to the progeny. However, mutagenicity/genotoxicity tests in vitro in vivo A.5.2 Classification Criteria for Substances A.5.2.1 The classification system provides for two different categories of germ cell mutagens to accommodate the weight of evidence available. The two-category system is described in the Figure A.5.1. Figure A.5.1—Hazard Categories for Germ Cell Mutagens CATEGORY 1: Category 1A: Substances known to induce heritable mutations in germ cells of humans Positive evidence from human epidemiological studies. Category 1B: Substances which should be regarded as if they induce heritable mutations in the germ cells of humans (a) Positive result(s) from in vivo heritable germ cell mutagenicity tests in mammals; or (b) Positive result(s) from in vivo somatic cell mutagenicity tests in mammals, in combination with some evidence that the substance has potential to cause mutations to germ cells. This supporting evidence may, for example, be derived from mutagenicity/genotoxic tests in germ cells in vivo, or by demonstrating the ability of the substance or its metabolite(s) to interact with the genetic material of germ cells; or (c) Positive results from tests showing mutagenic effects in the germ cells of humans, without demonstration of transmission to progeny; for example, an increase in the frequency of aneuploidy in sperm cells of exposed people. CATEGORY 2: Positive evidence obtained from experiments in mammals and/or in some cases from in vitro experiments, obtained from: (a) Somatic cell mutagenicity tests in vivo, in mammals; or (b) Other in vivo somatic cell genotoxicity tests which are supported by positive results from in vitro mutagenicity assays. Note: Substances which are positive in in vitro mammalian mutagenicity assays, and which also show structure activity relationship to known germ cell mutagens, should be considered for classification as Category 2 mutagens. A.5.2.2 Specific considerations for classification of substances as germ cell mutagens: A.5.2.2.1 To arrive at a classification, test results are considered from experiments determining mutagenic and/or genotoxic effects in germ and/or somatic cells of exposed animals. Mutagenic and/or genotoxic effects determined in in vitro A.5.2.2.2 The system is hazard based, classifying chemicals on the basis of their intrinsic ability to induce mutations in germ cells. The scheme is, therefore, not meant for the (quantitative) risk assessment of chemical substances. A.5.2.2.3 Classification for heritable effects in human germ cells is made on the basis of scientifically validated tests. Evaluation of the test results shall be done using expert judgment and all the available evidence shall be weighed for classification. A.5.2.2.4 The classification of substances shall be based on the total weight of evidence available, using expert judgment. In those instances where a single well-conducted test is used for classification, it shall provide clear and unambiguously positive results. The relevance of the route of exposure used in the study of the substance compared to the route of human exposure should also be taken into account. A.5.3 Classification Criteria for Mixtures 5 5 A.5.3.1 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for All Ingredients or Only for Some Ingredients of the Mixture A.5.3.1.1 Classification of mixtures shall be based on the available test data for the individual ingredients of the mixture using cut-off values/concentration limits for the ingredients classified as germ cell mutagens. A.5.3.1.2 The mixture will be classified as a mutagen when at least one ingredient has been classified as a Category 1A, Category 1B or Category 2 mutagen and is present at or above the appropriate cut-off value/concentration limit as shown in Table A.5.1 below for Category 1 and 2 respectively. Table A.5.1—Cut-off Values/Concentration Limits of Ingredients of a Mixture Classified as Germ Cell Mutagens That Would Trigger Classification of the Mixture Ingredient classified as Cut-off/concentration limits Category 1 mutagen Category 2 mutagen Category 1A/B mutagen ≥0.1% Category 2 mutagen ≥1.0% Note: A.5.3.2 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for the Mixture Itself The classification may be modified on a case-by-case basis based on the available test data for the mixture as a whole. In such cases, the test results for the mixture as a whole must be shown to be conclusive taking into account dose and other factors such as duration, observations and analysis ( e.g., A.5.3.3 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Not Available for the Complete Mixture: Bridging Principles A.5.3.3.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its germ cell mutagenicity hazard, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data will be used in accordance with the following bridging principles as found in paragraph A.0.5 of this Appendix: Dilution, Batching, and Substantially similar mixtures. A.5.4 Examples of Scientifically Validated Test Methods A.5.4.1 Examples of in vivo (a) Rodent dominant lethal mutation test (OECD 478) (b) Mouse heritable translocation assay (OECD 485) (c) Mouse specific locus test A.5.4.2 Examples of in vivo (a) Mammalian bone marrow chromosome aberration test (OECD 475) (b) Mammalian erythrocyte micronucleus test (OECD 474) A.5.4.3 Examples of mutagenicity/genotoxicity tests in germ cells are: (a) Mutagenicity tests: (i) Mammalian spermatogonial chromosome aberration test (OECD 483) (ii) Spermatid micronucleus assay (b) Genotoxicity tests: (i) Sister chromatid exchange analysis in spermatogonia (ii) Unscheduled DNA synthesis test (UDS) in testicular cells A.5.4.4 Examples of genotoxicity tests in somatic cells are: (a) Liver Unscheduled DNA Synthesis (UDS) in vivo (b) Mammalian bone marrow Sister Chromatid Exchanges (SCE) A.5.4.5 Examples of in vitro (a) In vitro (b) In vitro (c) Bacterial reverse mutation tests (OECD 471) A.5.4.6 As new, scientifically validated tests arise, these may also be used in the total weight of evidence to be considered. A.6 Carcinogenicity A.6.1 Definitions Carcinogenicity Classification of a substance or mixture as posing a carcinogenic hazard is based on its inherent properties and does not provide information on the level of the human cancer risk which the use of the substance or mixture may represent. A.6.2 Classification Criteria for Substances 6 6 A.6.2.1 For the purpose of classification for carcinogenicity, substances are allocated to one of two categories based on strength of evidence and additional weight of evidence considerations. In certain instances, route-specific classification may be warranted. Figure A.6.1: Hazard Categories for Carcinogens A.6.2.2 Classification as a carcinogen is made on the basis of evidence from reliable and acceptable methods, and is intended to be used for substances which have an intrinsic property to produce such toxic effects. The evaluations are to be based on all existing data, peer-reviewed published studies and additional data accepted by regulatory agencies. A.6.2.3 Carcinogen classification A.6.2.4 Strength of evidence A.6.2.5 Weight of evidence: A.6.2.5.1 These factors can be viewed as either increasing or decreasing the level of concern for human carcinogenicity. The relative emphasis accorded to each factor depends upon the amount and coherence of evidence bearing on each. Generally, there is a requirement for more complete information to decrease than to increase the level of concern. Additional considerations should be used in evaluating the tumor findings and the other factors in a case-by-case manner. A.6.2.5.2 Some important factors which may be taken into consideration, when assessing the overall level of concern are: (a) Tumor type and background incidence; (b) Multisite responses; (c) Progression of lesions to malignancy; (d) Reduced tumor latency; Additional factors which may increase or decrease the level of concern include: (e) Whether responses are in single or both sexes; (f) Whether responses are in a single species or several species; (g) Structural similarity or not to a substance(s) for which there is good evidence of carcinogenicity; (h) Routes of exposure; (i) Comparison of absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion between test animals and humans; (j) The possibility of a confounding effect of excessive toxicity at test doses; and, (k) Mode of action and its relevance for humans, such as mutagenicity, cytotoxicity with growth stimulation, mitogenesis, immunosuppression. Mutagenicity: in vivo A.6.2.5.3 A substance that has not been tested for carcinogenicity may in certain instances be classified in Category 1A, Category 1B, or Category 2 based on tumor data from a structural analogue together with substantial support from consideration of other important factors such as formation of common significant metabolites, e.g., A.6.2.5.4 The classification should also take into consideration whether or not the substance is absorbed by a given route(s); or whether there are only local tumors at the site of administration for the tested route(s), and adequate testing by other major route(s) show lack of carcinogenicity. A.6.2.5.5 It is important that whatever is known of the physico-chemical, toxicokinetic and toxicodynamic properties of the substances, as well as any available relevant information on chemical analogues, i.e., A.6.3 Classification Criteria for Mixtures 7 7 A.6.3.1 The mixture shall be classified as a carcinogen when at least one ingredient has been classified as a Category 1 or Category 2 carcinogen and is present at or above the appropriate cut-off value/concentration limit as shown in Table A.6.1. Table A.6.1—Cut-Off Values/Concentration Limits of Ingredients of a Mixture Classified as Carcinogen That Would Trigger Classification of the Mixture Ingredient classified as Category 1 carcinogen Category 2 Category 1 carcinogen ≥0.1% Category 2 carcinogen ≥0.1% (note 1) Note: If a Category 2 carcinogen ingredient is present in the mixture at a concentration between 0.1% and 1%, information is required on the SDS for a product. However, a label warning is optional. If a Category 2 carcinogen ingredient is present in the mixture at a concentration of ≥1%, both an SDS and a label is required and the information must be included on each. A.6.3.2 Classification of mixtures when data are available for the complete mixture A mixture may be classified based on the available test data for the mixture as a whole. In such cases, the test results for the mixture as a whole must be shown to be conclusive taking into account dose and other factors such as duration, observations and analysis ( e.g., A.6.3.3 Classification of mixtures when data are not available for the complete mixture: bridging principles Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its carcinogenic hazard, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data will be used in accordance with the following bridging principles as found in paragraph A.0.5 of this Appendix: Dilution; Batching; and Substantially similar mixtures. A.6.4 Classification of Carcinogenicity 8 8 A.6.4.1 Chemical manufacturers, importers and employers evaluating chemicals may treat the following sources as establishing that a substance is a carcinogen or potential carcinogen for hazard communication purposes in lieu of applying the criteria described herein: A.6.4.1.1 National Toxicology Program (NTP), “Report on Carcinogens” (latest edition); A.6.4.1.2 International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) “Monographs on the Evaluation of Carcinogenic Risks to Humans” (latest editions) A.6.4.2 Where OSHA has included cancer as a health hazard to be considered by classifiers for a chemical covered by 29 CFR part 1910, subpart Z, chemical manufacturers, importers, and employers shall classify the chemical as a carcinogen. A.7 Reproductive Toxicity A.7.1 Definitions and General Considerations A.7.1.1 Reproductive toxicity Germ cell mutagenicity See A.7.1.2 Adverse effects on sexual function and fertility A.7.1.3 Adverse effects on development of the offspring A.7.1.4 Adverse effects on or via lactation are also included in reproductive toxicity, but for classification purposes, such effects are treated separately ( See A.7.2 Classification Criteria for Substances A.7.2.1 For the purpose of classification for reproductive toxicity, substances shall be classified in one of two categories in accordance with Figure A.7.1(a). Effects on sexual function and fertility, and on development, shall be considered. In addition, effects on or via lactation shall be classified in a separate hazard category in accordance with Figure A.7.1(b). Figure A.7.1(a): Hazard Categories for Reproductive Toxicants Figure A.7.1(b): Hazard Category for Effects On or Via Lactation A.7.2.2 Basis of Classification A.7.2.2.1 Classification is made on the basis of the criteria, outlined above, an assessment of the total weight of evidence, and the use of expert judgment. Classification as a reproductive toxicant is intended to be used for substances which have an intrinsic, specific property to produce an adverse effect on reproduction and substances should not be so classified if such an effect is produced solely as a non-specific secondary consequence of other toxic effects. A.7.2.2.2 In the evaluation of toxic effects on the developing offspring, it is important to consider the possible influence of maternal toxicity. A.7.2.2.3 For human evidence to provide the primary basis for a Category 1A classification there must be reliable evidence of an adverse effect on reproduction in humans. Evidence used for classification shall be from well conducted epidemiological studies, if available, which include the use of appropriate controls, balanced assessment, and due consideration of bias or confounding factors. Less rigorous data from studies in humans may be sufficient for a Category 1A classification if supplemented with adequate data from studies in experimental animals, but classification in Category 1B may also be considered. A.7.2.3 Weight of Evidence A.7.2.3.1 Classification as a reproductive toxicant is made on the basis of an assessment of the total weight of evidence using expert judgment. This means that all available information that bears on the determination of reproductive toxicity is considered together. Included is information such as epidemiological studies and case reports in humans and specific reproduction studies along with sub-chronic, chronic and special study results in animals that provide relevant information regarding toxicity to reproductive and related endocrine organs. Evaluation of substances chemically related to the material under study may also be included, particularly when information on the material is scarce. The weight given to the available evidence will be influenced by factors such as the quality of the studies, consistency of results, nature and severity of effects, level of statistical significance for intergroup differences, number of endpoints affected, relevance of route of administration to humans and freedom from bias. Both positive and negative results are considered together in a weight of evidence determination. However, a single, positive study performed according to good scientific principles and with statistically or biologically significant positive results may justify classification ( See A.7.2.3.2 Toxicokinetic studies in animals and humans, site of action and mechanism or mode of action study results may provide relevant information, which could reduce or increase concerns about the hazard to human health. If it is conclusively demonstrated that the clearly identified mechanism or mode of action has no relevance for humans or when the toxicokinetic differences are so marked that it is certain that the hazardous property will not be expressed in humans then a chemical which produces an adverse effect on reproduction in experimental animals should not be classified. A.7.2.3.3 In some reproductive toxicity studies in experimental animals the only effects recorded may be considered of low or minimal toxicological significance and classification may not necessarily be the outcome. These effects include, for example, small changes in semen parameters or in the incidence of spontaneous defects in the fetus, small changes in the proportions of common fetal variants such as are observed in skeletal examinations, or in fetal weights, or small differences in postnatal developmental assessments. A.7.2.3.4 Data from animal studies shall provide sufficient evidence of specific reproductive toxicity in the absence of other systemic toxic effects. However, if developmental toxicity occurs together with other toxic effects in the dam (mother), the potential influence of the generalized adverse effects should be assessed to the extent possible. The preferred approach is to consider adverse effects in the embryo/fetus first, and then evaluate maternal toxicity, along with any other factors which are likely to have influenced these effects, as part of the weight of evidence. In general, developmental effects that are observed at maternally toxic doses should not be automatically discounted. Discounting developmental effects that are observed at maternally toxic doses can only be done on a case-by-case basis when a causal relationship is established or refuted. A.7.2.3.5 If appropriate information is available it is important to try to determine whether developmental toxicity is due to a specific maternally mediated mechanism or to a non-specific secondary mechanism, like maternal stress and the disruption of homeostasis. Generally, the presence of maternal toxicity should not be used to negate findings of embryo/fetal effects, unless it can be clearly demonstrated that the effects are secondary non-specific effects. This is especially the case when the effects in the offspring are significant, e.g., A.7.2.4 Maternal Toxicity A.7.2.4.1 Development of the offspring throughout gestation and during the early postnatal stages can be influenced by toxic effects in the mother either through non-specific mechanisms related to stress and the disruption of maternal homeostasis, or by specific maternally-mediated mechanisms. So, in the interpretation of the developmental outcome to decide classification for developmental effects it is important to consider the possible influence of maternal toxicity. This is a complex issue because of uncertainties surrounding the relationship between maternal toxicity and developmental outcome. Expert judgment and a weight of evidence approach, using all available studies, shall be used to determine the degree of influence to be attributed to maternal toxicity when interpreting the criteria for classification for developmental effects. The adverse effects in the embryo/fetus shall be first considered, and then maternal toxicity, along with any other factors which are likely to have influenced these effects, as weight of evidence, to help reach a conclusion about classification. A.7.2.4.2 Based on pragmatic observation, it is believed that maternal toxicity may, depending on severity, influence development via non-specific secondary mechanisms, producing effects such as depressed fetal weight, retarded ossification, and possibly resorptions and certain malformations in some strains of certain species. However, the limited numbers of studies which have investigated the relationship between developmental effects and general maternal toxicity have failed to demonstrate a consistent, reproducible relationship across species. Developmental effects which occur even in the presence of maternal toxicity are considered to be evidence of developmental toxicity, unless it can be unequivocally demonstrated on a case by case basis that the developmental effects are secondary to maternal toxicity. Moreover, classification shall be considered where there is a significant toxic effect in the offspring, e.g., A.7.2.4.3 Classification shall not automatically be discounted for chemicals that produce developmental toxicity only in association with maternal toxicity, even if a specific maternally-mediated mechanism has been demonstrated. In such a case, classification in Category 2 may be considered more appropriate than Category 1. However, when a chemical is so toxic that maternal death or severe inanition results, or the dams (mothers) are prostrate and incapable of nursing the pups, it is reasonable to assume that developmental toxicity is produced solely as a secondary consequence of maternal toxicity and discount the developmental effects. Classification is not necessarily the outcome in the case of minor developmental changes, e.g., A.7.2.4.4 Some of the endpoints used to assess maternal toxicity are provided below. Data on these endpoints, if available, shall be evaluated in light of their statistical or biological significance and dose-response relationship. (a) Maternal mortality: An increased incidence of mortality among the treated dams over the controls shall be considered evidence of maternal toxicity if the increase occurs in a dose-related manner and can be attributed to the systemic toxicity of the test material. Maternal mortality greater than 10% is considered excessive and the data for that dose level shall not normally be considered to need further evaluation. (b) Mating index (Number of animals with seminal plugs or sperm/Number of mated × 100) (c) Fertility index (Number of animals with implants/Number of matings × 100) (d) Gestation length (If allowed to deliver) (e) Body weight and body weight change: Consideration of the maternal body weight change and/or adjusted (corrected) maternal body weight shall be included in the evaluation of maternal toxicity whenever such data are available. The calculation of an adjusted (corrected) mean maternal body weight change, which is the difference between the initial and terminal body weight minus the gravid uterine weight (or alternatively, the sum of the weights of the fetuses), may indicate whether the effect is maternal or intrauterine. In rabbits, the body weight gain may not be a useful indicator of maternal toxicity because of normal fluctuations in body weight during pregnancy. (f) Food and water consumption (if relevant): The observation of a significant decrease in the average food or water consumption in treated dams (mothers) compared to the control group may be useful in evaluating maternal toxicity, particularly when the test material is administered in the diet or drinking water. Changes in food or water consumption must be evaluated in conjunction with maternal body weights when determining if the effects noted are reflective of maternal toxicity or more simply, unpalatability of the test material in feed or water. (g) Clinical evaluations (including clinical signs, markers, and hematology and clinical chemistry studies): The observation of increased incidence of significant clinical signs of toxicity in treated dams (mothers) relative to the control group is useful in evaluating maternal toxicity. If this is to be used as the basis for the assessment of maternal toxicity, the types, incidence, degree and duration of clinical signs shall be reported in the study. Clinical signs of maternal intoxication include, but are not limited to: coma, prostration, hyperactivity, loss of righting reflex, ataxia, or labored breathing. (h) Post-mortem data: Increased incidence and/or severity of post-mortem findings may be indicative of maternal toxicity. This can include gross or microscopic pathological findings or organ weight data, including absolute organ weight, organ-to-body weight ratio, or organ-to-brain weight ratio. When supported by findings of adverse histopathological effects in the affected organ(s), the observation of a significant change in the average weight of suspected target organ(s) of treated dams (mothers), compared to those in the control group, may be considered evidence of maternal toxicity. A.7.2.5 Animal and Experimental Data A.7.2.5.1 A number of scientifically validated test methods are available, including methods for developmental toxicity testing ( e.g., e.g., A.7.2.5.2 Results obtained from screening tests (e.g., OECD Guidelines 421—Reproduction/Developmental Toxicity Screening Test, and 422—Combined Repeated Dose Toxicity Study with Reproduction/Development Toxicity Screening Test) can also be used to justify classification, although the quality of this evidence is less reliable than that obtained through full studies. A.7.2.5.3 Adverse effects or changes, seen in short- or long-term repeated dose toxicity studies, which are judged likely to impair reproductive function and which occur in the absence of significant generalized toxicity, may be used as a basis for classification, e.g., histopathological changes in the gonads. A.7.2.5.4 Evidence from in vitro A.7.2.5.5 It is preferable that animal studies are conducted using appropriate routes of administration which relate to the potential route of human exposure. However, in practice reproductive toxicity studies are commonly conducted using the oral route, and such studies will normally be suitable for evaluating the hazardous properties of the substance with respect to reproductive toxicity. However, if it can be conclusively demonstrated that the clearly identified mechanism or mode of action has no relevance for humans or when the toxicokinetic differences are so marked that it is certain that the hazardous property will not be expressed in humans then a substance which produces an adverse effect on reproduction in experimental animals should not be classified. A.7.2.5.6 Studies involving routes of administration such as intravenous or intraperitoneal injection, which may result in exposure of the reproductive organs to unrealistically high levels of the test substance, or elicit local damage to the reproductive organs, e.g., A.7.2.5.7 There is general agreement about the concept of a limit dose, above which the production of an adverse effect may be considered to be outside the criteria which lead to classification. Some test guidelines specify a limit dose, other test guidelines qualify the limit dose with a statement that higher doses may be necessary if anticipated human exposure is sufficiently high that an adequate margin of exposure would not be achieved. Also, due to species differences in toxicokinetics, establishing a specific limit dose may not be adequate for situations where humans are more sensitive than the animal model. A.7.2.5.8 In principle, adverse effects on reproduction seen only at very high dose levels in animal studies (for example doses that induce prostration, severe inappetence, excessive mortality) do not normally lead to classification, unless other information is available, for example, toxicokinetics information indicating that humans may be more susceptible than animals, to suggest that classification is appropriate. A.7.2.5.9 However, specification of the actual “limit dose” will depend upon the test method that has been employed to provide the test results. A.7.3 Classification Criteria for Mixtures 9 9 A.7.3.1 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for All Ingredients or Only for Some Ingredients of the Mixture A.7.3.1.1 The mixture shall be classified as a reproductive toxicant when at least one ingredient has been classified as a Category 1 or Category 2 reproductive toxicant and is present at or above the appropriate cut-off value/concentration limit specified in Table A.7.1 for Category 1 and 2, respectively. A.7.3.1.2 The mixture shall be classified for effects on or via lactation when at least one ingredient has been classified for effects on or via lactation and is present at or above the appropriate cut-off value/concentration limit specified in Table A.7.1 for the additional category for effects on or via lactation. Table A.7.1—Cut-Off Values/Concentration Limits of Ingredients of a Mixture Classified as Reproductive Toxicants or for Effects on or via Lactation That Trigger Classification of the Mixture Ingredients classified as: Cut-off values/concentration limits triggering classification of a mixture as: Category 1 Category 2 Additional Category 1 reproductive toxicant ≥0.1% Category 2 reproductive toxicant ≥0.1% Additional category for effects on or via lactation ≥0.1% A.7.3.2 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for the Complete Mixture Available test data for the mixture as a whole may be used for classification on a case-by-case basis. In such cases, the test results for the mixture as a whole must be shown to be conclusive taking into account dose and other factors such as duration, observations and analysis ( e.g., A.7.3.3 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Not Available for the Complete Mixture: Bridging Principles A.7.3.1.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its reproductive toxicity, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data shall be used in accordance with the following bridging principles as found in paragraph A.0.5 of this Appendix: Dilution, Batching, and Substantially similar mixtures. A.8 Specific Target Organ Toxicity Single Exposure A.8.1 Definitions and General Considerations A.8.1.1 Specific target organ toxicity—single exposure, (STOT-SE) SPECIFIC TARGET ORGAN TOXICITY—REPEATED EXPOSURE A.8.1.2 Classification identifies the chemical as being a specific target organ toxicant and, as such, it presents a potential for adverse health effects in people who are exposed to it. A.8.1.3 The adverse health effects produced by a single exposure include consistent and identifiable toxic effects in humans; or, in experimental animals, toxicologically significant changes which have affected the function or morphology of a tissue/organ, or have produced serious changes to the biochemistry or hematology of the organism, and these changes are relevant for human health. Human data is the primary source of evidence for this hazard class. A.8.1.4 Assessment shall take into consideration not only significant changes in a single organ or biological system but also generalized changes of a less severe nature involving several organs. A.8.1.5 Specific target organ toxicity can occur by any route that is relevant for humans, i.e., A.8.1.6 The classification criteria for specific target organ toxicity—single exposure are organized as criteria for substances Categories 1 and 2 ( See See See See A.8.2 Classification Criteria for Substances A.8.2.1 Substances of Category 1 and Category 2 A.8.2.1.1 Substances shall be classified for immediate or delayed effects separately, by the use of expert judgment on the basis of the weight of all evidence available, including the use of recommended guidance values ( See Figure A.8.1: Hazard Categories for Specific Target Organ Toxicity Following Single Exposure A.8.2.1.2 The relevant route(s) of exposure by which the classified substance produces damage shall be identified. A.8.2.1.3 Classification is determined by expert judgment, on the basis of the weight of all evidence available including the guidance presented below. A.8.2.1.4 Weight of evidence of all available data, including human incidents, epidemiology, and studies conducted in experimental animals is used to substantiate specific target organ toxic effects that merit classification. A.8.2.1.5 The information required to evaluate specific target organ toxicity comes either from single exposure in humans (e.g., exposure at home, in the workplace or environmentally), or from studies conducted in experimental animals. The standard animal studies in rats or mice that provide this information are acute toxicity studies which can include clinical observations and detailed macroscopic and microscopic examination to enable the toxic effects on target tissues/organs to be identified. Results of acute toxicity studies conducted in other species may also provide relevant information. A.8.2.1.6 In exceptional cases, based on expert judgment, it may be appropriate to place certain substances with human evidence of target organ toxicity in Category 2: (a) when the weight of human evidence is not sufficiently convincing to warrant Category 1 classification, and/or (b) based on the nature and severity of effects. Dose/concentration levels in humans shall not be considered in the classification and any available evidence from animal studies shall be consistent with the Category 2 classification. In other words, if there are also animal data available on the substance that warrant Category 1 classification, the chemical shall be classified as Category 1. A.8.2.1.7 Effects Considered To Support Classification for Category 1 and 2 A.8.2.1.7.1 Classification is supported by evidence associating single exposure to the substance with a consistent and identifiable toxic effect. A.8.2.1.7.2 Evidence from human experience/incidents is usually restricted to reports of adverse health consequences, often with uncertainty about exposure conditions, and may not provide the scientific detail that can be obtained from well-conducted studies in experimental animals. A.8.2.1.7.3 Evidence from appropriate studies in experimental animals can furnish much more detail, in the form of clinical observations, and macroscopic and microscopic pathological examination and this can often reveal hazards that may not be life-threatening but could indicate functional impairment. Consequently, all available evidence, and relevance to human health, must be taken into consideration in the classification process. Relevant toxic effects in humans and/or animals include, but are not limited to: (a) Morbidity resulting from single exposure; (b) Significant functional changes, more than transient in nature, in the respiratory system, central or peripheral nervous systems, other organs or other organ systems, including signs of central nervous system depression and effects on special senses ( e.g., (c) Any consistent and significant adverse change in clinical biochemistry, hematology, or urinalysis parameters; (d) Significant organ damage that may be noted at necropsy and/or subsequently seen or confirmed at microscopic examination; (e) Multi-focal or diffuse necrosis, fibrosis or granuloma formation in vital organs with regenerative capacity; (f) Morphological changes that are potentially reversible but provide clear evidence of marked organ dysfunction; and, (g) Evidence of appreciable cell death (including cell degeneration and reduced cell number) in vital organs incapable of regeneration. A.8.2.1.8 Effects Considered Not To Support Classification for Category 1 and 2 Effects may be seen in humans and/or animals that do not justify classification. Such effects include, but are not limited to: (a) Clinical observations or small changes in bodyweight gain, food consumption or water intake that may have some toxicological importance but that do not, by themselves, indicate “significant” toxicity; (b) Small changes in clinical biochemistry, hematology or urinalysis parameters and/or transient effects, when such changes or effects are of doubtful or of minimal toxicological importance; (c) Changes in organ weights with no evidence of organ dysfunction; (d) Adaptive responses that are not considered toxicologically relevant; and, (e) Substance-induced species-specific mechanisms of toxicity, i.e., A.8.2.1.9 Guidance Values To Assist With Classification Based on the Results Obtained From Studies Conducted in Experimental Animals for Category 1 and 2 A.8.2.1.9.1 In order to help reach a decision about whether a substance shall be classified or not, and to what degree it shall be classified (Category 1 vs. Category 2), dose/concentration “guidance values” are provided for consideration of the dose/concentration which has been shown to produce significant health effects. The principal argument for proposing such guidance values is that all chemicals are potentially toxic and there has to be a reasonable dose/concentration above which a degree of toxic effect is acknowledged. A.8.2.1.9.2 Thus, in animal studies, when significant toxic effects are observed that indicate classification, consideration of the dose/concentration at which these effects were seen, in relation to the suggested guidance values, provides useful information to help assess the need to classify (since the toxic effects are a consequence of the hazardous property(ies) and also the dose/concentration). A.8.2.1.9.3 The guidance value (C) ranges for single-dose exposure which has produced a significant non-lethal toxic effect are those applicable to acute toxicity testing, as indicated in Table A.8.1. Table A.8.1—Guidance Value Ranges for Single-Dose Exposures Route of exposure Units Guidance value ranges for: Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Oral (rat) mg/kg body weight C ≤ 300 2,000 ≥ C > 300 Guidance values do not apply. Dermal (rat or rabbit) mg/kg body weight C ≤ 1,000 2,000 ≥ C > 1,000 Inhalation (rat) gas ppmV/4h C ≤ 2,500 20,000 ≥ C > 2,500 Inhalation (rat) vapor mg/1/4h C ≤ 10 20 ≥ C > 10 Inhalation (rat) dust/mist/fume mg/l/4h C ≤ 1.0 5.0 ≥ C > 1.0 A.8.2.1.9.4 The guidance values and ranges mentioned in Table A.8.1 are intended only for guidance purposes, i.e., A.8.2.1.9.5 Thus, it is feasible that a specific profile of toxicity occurs at a dose/concentration below the guidance value, e.g., e.g., e.g., A.8.2.1.10 Other Considerations A.8.2.1.10.1 When a substance is characterized only by use of animal data the classification process includes reference to dose/concentration guidance values as one of the elements that contribute to the weight of evidence approach. A.8.2.1.10.2 When well-substantiated human data are available showing a specific target organ toxic effect that can be reliably attributed to single exposure to a substance, the substance shall be classified. Positive human data, regardless of probable dose, predominates over animal data. Thus, if a substance is unclassified because specific target organ toxicity observed was considered not relevant or significant to humans, if subsequent human incident data become available showing a specific target organ toxic effect, the substance shall be classified. A.8.2.1.10.3 A substance that has not been tested for specific target organ toxicity shall, where appropriate, be classified on the basis of data from a scientifically validated structure activity relationship and expert judgment-based extrapolation from a structural analogue that has previously been classified together with substantial support from consideration of other important factors such as formation of common significant metabolites. A.8.2.2 Substances of Category 3 A.8.2.2.1 Criteria for respiratory tract irritation The criteria for classifying substances as Category 3 for respiratory tract irritation are: (a) Respiratory irritant effects (characterized by localized redness, edema, pruritis and/or pain) that impair function with symptoms such as cough, pain, choking, and breathing difficulties are included. It is recognized that this evaluation is based primarily on human data; (b) Subjective human observations supported by objective measurements of clear respiratory tract irritation (RTI) ( e.g., (c) The symptoms observed in humans shall also be typical of those that would be produced in the exposed population rather than being an isolated idiosyncratic reaction or response triggered only in individuals with hypersensitive airways. Ambiguous reports simply of “irritation” should be excluded as this term is commonly used to describe a wide range of sensations including those such as smell, unpleasant taste, a tickling sensation, and dryness, which are outside the scope of classification for respiratory tract irritation; (d) There are currently no scientifically validated animal tests that deal specifically with RTI; however, useful information may be obtained from the single and repeated inhalation toxicity tests. For example, animal studies may provide useful information in terms of clinical signs of toxicity (dyspnoea, rhinitis etc.) and histopathology ( e.g., (e) This special classification will occur only when more severe organ effects including the respiratory system are not observed as those effects would require a higher classification. A.8.2.2.2 Criteria for Narcotic Effects The criteria for classifying substances in Category 3 for narcotic effects are: (a) Central nervous system depression including narcotic effects in humans such as drowsiness, narcosis, reduced alertness, loss of reflexes, lack of coordination, and vertigo are included. These effects can also be manifested as severe headache or nausea, and can lead to reduced judgment, dizziness, irritability, fatigue, impaired memory function, deficits in perception and coordination, reaction time, or sleepiness; and, (b) Narcotic effects observed in animal studies may include lethargy, lack of coordination righting reflex, narcosis, and ataxia. If these effects are not transient in nature, then they shall be considered for classification as Category 1 or 2. A.8.3 Classification Criteria for Mixtures A.8.3.1 Mixtures are classified using the same criteria as for substances, or alternatively as described below. As with substances, mixtures may be classified for specific target organ toxicity following single exposure, repeated exposure, or both. A.8.3.2 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for the Complete Mixture When reliable and good quality evidence from human experience or appropriate studies in experimental animals, as described in the criteria for substances, is available for the mixture, then the mixture shall be classified by weight of evidence evaluation of this data. Care shall be exercised in evaluating data on mixtures, that the dose, duration, observation or analysis, do not render the results inconclusive. A.8.3.3 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Not Available for the Complete Mixture: Bridging Principles A.8.3.3.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its specific target organ toxicity, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data shall be used in accordance with the following bridging principles as found in paragraph A.0.5 of this Appendix: Dilution, Batching, Concentration of mixtures, Interpolation within one hazard category, Substantially similar mixtures, or Aerosols. A.8.3.4 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for All Ingredients or Only for Some Ingredients of the Mixture A.8.3.4.1 Where there is no reliable evidence or test data for the specific mixture itself, and the bridging principles cannot be used to enable classification, then classification of the mixture is based on the classification of the ingredient substances. In this case, the mixture shall be classified as a specific target organ toxicant (specific organ specified), following single exposure, repeated exposure, or both when at least one ingredient has been classified as a Category 1 or Category 2 specific target organ toxicant and is present at or above the appropriate cut-off value/concentration limit specified in Table A.8.2 for Categories 1 and 2, respectively. Table A.8.2—Cut-Off Values/Concentration Limits of Ingredients of a Mixture Classified as a Specific Target Organ Toxicant That Would Trigger Classification of the Mixture as Category 1 or 2 Ingredient classified as Cut-off values/concentration Category 1 Category 2 Category 1 Target organ toxicant ≥1.0% Category 2 Target organ toxicant ≥1.0% A.8.3.4.2 These cut-off values and consequent classifications shall be applied equally and appropriately to both single- and repeated-dose target organ toxicants. A.8.3.4.3 Mixtures shall be classified for either or both single and repeated dose toxicity independently. A.8.3.4.4 Care shall be exercised when toxicants affecting more than one organ system are combined that the potentiation or synergistic interactions are considered, because certain substances can cause target organ toxicity at <1% concentration when other ingredients in the mixture are known to potentiate its toxic effect. A.8.3.4.5 Care shall be exercised when extrapolating the toxicity of a mixture that contains Category 3 ingredient(s). A cut-off value/concentration limit of 20%, considered as an additive of all Category 3 ingredients for each hazard endpoint, is appropriate; however, this cut-off value/concentration limit may be higher or lower depending on the Category 3 ingredient(s) involved and the fact that some effects such as respiratory tract irritation may not occur below a certain concentration while other effects such as narcotic effects may occur below this 20% value. Expert judgment shall be exercised. Respiratory tract irritation and narcotic effects are to be evaluated separately in accordance with the criteria given in A.8.2.2. When conducting classifications for these hazards, the contribution of each ingredient should be considered additive, unless there is evidence that the effects are not additive. A.8.3.4.6 In cases where the additivity approach is used for Category 3 ingredients, the “relevant ingredients” of a mixture are those which are present in concentrations ≥1% (w/w for solids, liquids, dusts, mists, and vapours and v/v for gases), unless there is a reason to suspect that an ingredient present at a concentration <1% is still relevant when classifying the mixture for respiratory tract irritation or narcotic effects. A.9 Specific Target Organ Toxicity—Repeated or Prolonged Exposure A.9.1 Definitions and General Considerations A.9.1.1 Specific target organ toxicity—repeated exposure (STOT-RE) SPECIFIC TARGET ORGAN TOXICITY—SINGLE EXPOSURE A.9.1.2 Classification identifies the substance or mixture as being a specific target organ toxicant and, as such, it may present a potential for adverse health effects in people who are exposed to it. A.9.1.3 These adverse health effects produced by repeated exposure include consistent and identifiable toxic effects in humans, or, in experimental animals, toxicologically significant changes which have affected the function or morphology of a tissue/organ, or have produced serious changes to the biochemistry or hematology of the organism and these changes are relevant for human health. Human data will be the primary source of evidence for this hazard class. A.9.1.4 Assessment shall take into consideration not only significant changes in a single organ or biological system but also generalized changes of a less severe nature involving several organs. A.9.1.5 Specific target organ toxicity can occur by any route that is relevant for humans, e.g., A.9.2 Classification Criteria for Substances A.9.2.1 Substances shall be classified as STOT—RE by expert judgment on the basis of the weight of all evidence available, including the use of recommended guidance values which take into account the duration of exposure and the dose/concentration which produced the effect(s), ( See Figure A.9.1—Hazard Categories for Specific Target Organ Toxicity Following Repeated Exposure CATEGORY 1: Substances are classified in Category 1 for specific target organ toxicity (repeated exposure) on the basis of: (a) reliable and good quality evidence from human cases or epidemiological studies; or, (b) observations from appropriate studies in experimental animals in which significant and/or severe toxic effects, of relevance to human health, were produced at generally low exposure concentrations. Guidance dose/concentration values are provided below ( See CATEGORY 2: Substances are classified in Category 2 for specific target organ toxicity (repeated exposure) on the basis of observations from appropriate studies in experimental animals in which significant toxic effects, of relevance to human health, were produced at generally moderate exposure concentrations. Guidance dose/concentration values are provided below ( See In exceptional cases human evidence can also be used to place a substance in Category 2 ( See Note: The primary target organ/system shall be identified where possible, or the substance shall be identified as a general toxicant. The data shall be carefully evaluated and, where possible, shall not include secondary effects (e.g., a hepatotoxicant can produce secondary effects in the nervous or gastro-intestinal systems). A.9.2.2 The relevant route of exposure by which the classified substance produces damage shall be identified. A.9.2.3 Classification is determined by expert judgment, on the basis of the weight of all evidence available including the guidance presented below. A.9.2.4 Weight of evidence of all data, including human incidents, epidemiology, and studies conducted in experimental animals, is used to substantiate specific target organ toxic effects that merit classification. A.9.2.5 The information required to evaluate specific target organ toxicity comes either from repeated exposure in humans, e.g., exposure at home, in the workplace or environmentally, or from studies conducted in experimental animals. The standard animal studies in rats or mice that provide this information are 28 day, 90 day or lifetime studies (up to 2 years) that include hematological, clinico-chemical and detailed macroscopic and microscopic examination to enable the toxic effects on target tissues/organs to be identified. Data from repeat dose studies performed in other species may also be used. Other long-term exposure studies, e.g., A.9.2.6 In exceptional cases, based on expert judgment, it may be appropriate to place certain substances with human evidence of specific target organ toxicity in Category 2: (a) when the weight of human evidence is not sufficiently convincing to warrant Category 1 classification, and/or (b) based on the nature and severity of effects. Dose/concentration levels in humans shall not be considered in the classification and any available evidence from animal studies shall be consistent with the Category 2 classification. In other words, if there are also animal data available on the substance that warrant Category 1 classification, the substance shall be classified as Category 1. A.9.2.7 Effects Considered To Support Classification A.9.2.7.1 Classification is supported by reliable evidence associating repeated exposure to the substance with a consistent and identifiable toxic effect. A.9.2.7.2 Evidence from human experience/incidents is usually restricted to reports of adverse health consequences, often with uncertainty about exposure conditions, and may not provide the scientific detail that can be obtained from well-conducted studies in experimental animals. A.9.2.7.3 Evidence from appropriate studies in experimental animals can furnish much more detail, in the form of clinical observations, hematology, clinical chemistry, macroscopic and microscopic pathological examination and this can often reveal hazards that may not be life-threatening but could indicate functional impairment. Consequently, all available evidence, and relevance to human health, must be taken into consideration in the classification process. Relevant toxic effects in humans and/or animals include, but are not limited to: (a) Morbidity or death resulting from repeated or long-term exposure. Morbidity or death may result from repeated exposure, even to relatively low doses/concentrations, due to bioaccumulation of the substance or its metabolites, or due to the overwhelming of the de-toxification process by repeated exposure; (b) Significant functional changes in the central or peripheral nervous systems or other organ systems, including signs of central nervous system depression and effects on special senses ( e.g., (c) Any consistent and significant adverse change in clinical biochemistry, hematology, or urinalysis parameters; (d) Significant organ damage that may be noted at necropsy and/or subsequently seen or confirmed at microscopic examination; (e) Multi-focal or diffuse necrosis, fibrosis or granuloma formation in vital organs with regenerative capacity; (f) Morphological changes that are potentially reversible but provide clear evidence of marked organ dysfunction ( e.g., (g) Evidence of appreciable cell death (including cell degeneration and reduced cell number) in vital organs incapable of regeneration. A.9.2.8 Effects Considered Not To Support Classification Effects may be seen in humans and/or animals that do not justify classification. Such effects include, but are not limited to: (a) Clinical observations or small changes in bodyweight gain, food consumption or water intake that may have some toxicological importance but that do not, by themselves, indicate “significant” toxicity; (b) Small changes in clinical biochemistry, hematology or urinalysis parameters and/or transient effects, when such changes or effects are of doubtful or of minimal toxicological importance; (c) Changes in organ weights with no evidence of organ dysfunction; (d) Adaptive responses that are not considered toxicologically relevant; (e) Substance-induced species-specific mechanisms of toxicity, i.e., A.9.2.9 Guidance Values To Assist With Classification Based on the Results Obtained From Studies Conducted in Experimental Animals A.9.2.9.1 In studies conducted in experimental animals, reliance on observation of effects alone, without reference to the duration of experimental exposure and dose/concentration, omits a fundamental concept of toxicology, i.e., A.9.2.9.2 In order to help reach a decision about whether a substance shall be classified or not, and to what degree it shall be classified (Category 1 vs. Category 2), dose/concentration “guidance values” are provided in Table A.9.1 for consideration of the dose/concentration which has been shown to produce significant health effects. The principal argument for proposing such guidance values is that all chemicals are potentially toxic and there has to be a reasonable dose/concentration above which a degree of toxic effect is acknowledged. Also, repeated-dose studies conducted in experimental animals are designed to produce toxicity at the highest dose used in order to optimize the test objective and so most studies will reveal some toxic effect at least at this highest dose. What is therefore to be decided is not only what effects have been produced, but also at what dose/concentration they were produced and how relevant is that for humans. A.9.2.9.3 Thus, in animal studies, when significant toxic effects are observed that indicate classification, consideration of the duration of experimental exposure and the dose/concentration at which these effects were seen, in relation to the suggested guidance values, provides useful information to help assess the need to classify (since the toxic effects are a consequence of the hazardous property(ies) and also the duration of exposure and the dose/concentration). A.9.2.9.4 The decision to classify at all can be influenced by reference to the dose/concentration guidance values at or below which a significant toxic effect has been observed. A.9.2.9.5 The guidance values refer to effects seen in a standard 90-day toxicity study conducted in rats. They can be used as a basis to extrapolate equivalent guidance values for toxicity studies of greater or lesser duration, using dose/exposure time extrapolation similar to Haber's rule for inhalation, which states essentially that the effective dose is directly proportional to the exposure concentration and the duration of exposure. The assessment should be done on a case- by-case basis; for example, for a 28-day study the guidance values below would be increased by a factor of three. A.9.2.9.6 Thus for Category 1 classification, significant toxic effects observed in a 90-day repeated-dose study conducted in experimental animals and seen to occur at or below the (suggested) guidance values (C) as indicated in Table A.9.1 would justify classification: Table A.9.1—Guidance Values To Assist in Category 1 Classification [Applicable to a 90-day study] Route of exposure Units Guidance values Oral (rat) mg/kg body weight/day C ≤ 10 Dermal (rat or rabbit) mg/kg body weight/day C ≤ 20 Inhalation (rat) gas ppmV/6h/day C ≤ 50 Inhalation (rat) vapor mg/liter/6h/day C ≤ 0.2 Inhalation (rat) dust/mist/fume mg/liter/6h/day C ≤ 0.02 A.9.2.9.7 For Category 2 classification, significant toxic effects observed in a 90-day repeated-dose study conducted in experimental animals and seen to occur within the (suggested) guidance value ranges as indicated in Table A.9.2 would justify classification: Table A.9.2—Guidance Values To Assist in Category 2 Classification [Applicable to a 90-day study] Route of exposure Units Guidance value range Oral (rat) mg/kg body weight/day 10 < C ≤ 100 Dermal (rat or rabbit) mg/kg body weight/day 20 < C ≤ 200 Inhalation (rat) gas ppmV/6h/day 50 < C ≤ 250 Inhalation (rat) vapor mg/liter/6h/day 0.2 < C ≤ 1.0 Inhalation (rat) dust/mist/fume mg/liter/6h/day 0.02 < C ≤ 0.2 A.9.2.9.8 The guidance values and ranges mentioned in A.2.9.9.6 and A.2.9.9.7 are intended only for guidance purposes, i.e., A.9.2.9.9 Thus, it is possible that a specific profile of toxicity occurs in repeat-dose animal studies at a dose/concentration below the guidance value, e.g., e.g., A.9.2.10 Other Considerations A.9.2.10.1 When a substance is characterized only by use of animal data the classification process includes reference to dose/concentration guidance values as one of the elements that contribute to the weight of evidence approach. A.9.2.10.2 When well-substantiated human data are available showing a specific target organ toxic effect that can be reliably attributed to repeated or prolonged exposure to a substance, the substance shall be classified. Positive human data, regardless of probable dose, predominates over animal data. Thus, if a substance is unclassified because no specific target organ toxicity was seen at or below the dose/concentration guidance value for animal testing, if subsequent human incident data become available showing a specific target organ toxic effect, the substance shall be classified. A.9.2.10.3 A substance that has not been tested for specific target organ toxicity may in certain instances, where appropriate, be classified on the basis of data from a scientifically validated structure activity relationship and expert judgment-based extrapolation from a structural analogue that has previously been classified together with substantial support from consideration of other important factors such as formation of common significant metabolites. A.9.3 Classification Criteria for Mixtures A.9.3.1 Mixtures are classified using the same criteria as for substances, or alternatively as described below. As with substances, mixtures may be classified for specific target organ toxicity following single exposure, repeated exposure, or both. A.9.3.2 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for the Complete Mixture When reliable and good quality evidence from human experience or appropriate studies in experimental animals, as described in the criteria for substances, is available for the mixture, then the mixture shall be classified by weight of evidence evaluation of these data. Care shall be exercised in evaluating data on mixtures, that the dose, duration, observation or analysis, do not render the results inconclusive. A.9.3.3 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Not Available for the Complete Mixture: Bridging Principles A.9.3.3.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its specific target organ toxicity, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data shall be used in accordance with the following bridging principles as found in paragraph A.0.5 of this Appendix: Dilution; Batching; Concentration of mixtures; Interpolation within one hazard category; Substantially similar mixtures; and Aerosols. A.9.3.4 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for All Ingredients or Only for Some Ingredients of the Mixture A.9.3.4.1 Where there is no reliable evidence or test data for the specific mixture itself, and the bridging principles cannot be used to enable classification, then classification of the mixture is based on the classification of the ingredient substances. In this case, the mixture shall be classified as a specific target organ toxicant (specific organ specified), following single exposure, repeated exposure, or both when at least one ingredient has been classified as a Category 1 or Category 2 specific target organ toxicant and is present at or above the appropriate cut-off value/concentration limit specified in Table A.9.3 for Category 1 and 2 respectively. Table A.9.3—Cut-Off Value/Concentration Limits of Ingredients of a Mixture Classified as a Specific Target Organ Toxicant That Would Trigger Classification of the Mixture as Category 1 or 2 Ingredient classified as Cut-off values/concentration Category 1 Category 2 Category 1 Target organ toxicant ≥1.0% Category 2 Target organ toxicant ≥1.0% A.9.3.4.2 These cut-off values and consequent classifications shall be applied equally and appropriately to both single- and repeated-dose target organ toxicants. A.9.3.4.3 Mixtures shall be classified for either or both single- and repeated-dose toxicity independently. A.9.3.4.4 Care shall be exercised when toxicants affecting more than one organ system are combined that the potentiation or synergistic interactions are considered, because certain substances can cause specific target organ toxicity at <1% concentration when other ingredients in the mixture are known to potentiate its toxic effect. A.10 Aspiration Hazard A.10.1 Definitions and General Considerations A.10.1.1 Aspiration hazard A.10.1.2 Aspiration A.10.1.3 Aspiration is initiated at the moment of inspiration, in the time required to take one breath, as the causative material lodges at the crossroad of the upper respiratory and digestive tracts in the laryngopharyngeal region. A.10.1.4 Aspiration of a substance or mixture can occur as it is vomited following ingestion. This may have consequences for labeling, particularly where, due to acute toxicity, a recommendation may be considered to induce vomiting after ingestion. However, if the substance/mixture also presents an aspiration toxicity hazard, the recommendation to induce vomiting may need to be modified. A.10.1.5 Specific Considerations A.10.1.5.1 The classification criteria refer to kinematic viscosity. The following provides the conversion between dynamic and kinematic viscosity: A.10.1.5.2 Although the definition of aspiration in A.10.1.1 includes the entry of solids into the respiratory system, classification according to (b) in table A.10.1 for Category 1 is intended to apply to liquid substances and mixtures only. A.10.1.5.3 Classification of aerosol/mist products Aerosol and mist products are usually dispensed in containers such as self- pressurized containers, trigger and pump sprayers. Classification for these products shall be considered if their use may form a pool of product in the mouth, which then may be aspirated. If the mist or aerosol from a pressurized container is fine, a pool may not be formed. On the other hand, if a pressurized container dispenses product in a stream, a pool may be formed that may then be aspirated. Usually, the mist produced by trigger and pump sprayers is coarse and therefore, a pool may be formed that then may be aspirated. When the pump mechanism may be removed and contents are available to be swallowed then the classification of the products should be considered. A.10.2 Classification Criteria for Substances Table A.10.1: Criteria for Aspiration Toxicity A.10.3 Classification Criteria for Mixtures A.10.3.1 Classification When Data Are Available for the Complete Mixture A mixture shall be classified in Category 1 based on reliable and good quality human evidence. A.10.3.2 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Not Available for the Complete Mixture: Bridging Principles A.10.3.2.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its aspiration toxicity, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazard of the mixture, these data shall be used in accordance with the following bridging principles as found in paragraph A.0.5 of this Appendix: Dilution; Batching; Concentration of mixtures; Interpolation within one hazard category; and Substantially similar mixtures. For application of the dilution bridging principle, the concentration of aspiration toxicants shall not be less than 10%. A.10.3.3 Classification of Mixtures When Data Are Available for All Ingredients or Only for Some Ingredients of the Mixture A.10.3.3.1 The “relevant ingredients” of a mixture are those which are present in concentrations ≥1%. A.10.3.3.2 Category 1 A.10.3.3.2.1 A mixture is classified as Category 1 when the sum of the concentrations of Category 1 ingredients is ≥10%, and the mixture has a kinematic viscosity of ≤20.5 mm 2 A.10.3.3.2.2 In the case of a mixture which separates into two or more distinct layers, the entire mixture is classified as Category 1 if in any distinct layer the sum of the concentrations of Category 1 ingredients is ≥10%, and it has a kinematic viscosity of ≤20.5 mm 2 Appendix B to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard Criteria (Mandatory) B.1 Explosives B.1.1 Definitions and General Considerations B.1.1.1 An explosive chemical A pyrotechnic chemical An explosive item A pyrotechnic item An unstable explosive An intentional explosive B.1.1.2 The class of explosives comprises: (a) Explosive chemicals; (b) Explosive items, except devices containing explosive chemicals in such quantity or of such a character that their inadvertent or accidental ignition or initiation shall not cause any effect external to the device either by projection, fire, smoke, heat or loud noise; and (c) Chemicals and items not included under (a) and (b) of this section which are manufactured with the view to producing a practical explosive or pyrotechnic effect. B.1.2 Classification Criteria Chemicals and items of this class shall be classified as unstable explosives or shall be assigned to one of the following six divisions depending on the type of hazard they present: (a) Division 1.1—Chemicals and items which have a mass explosion hazard (a mass explosion is one which affects almost the entire quantity present virtually instantaneously); (b) Division 1.2—Chemicals and items which have a projection hazard but not a mass explosion hazard; (c) Division 1.3—Chemicals and items which have a fire hazard and either a minor blast hazard or a minor projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard: (i) Combustion of which gives rise to considerable radiant heat; or (ii) Which burn one after another, producing minor blast or projection effects or both; (d) Division 1.4—Chemicals and items which present no significant hazard: chemicals and items which present only a small hazard in the event of ignition or initiation. The effects are largely confined to the package and no projection of fragments of appreciable size or range is to be expected. An external fire shall not cause virtually instantaneous explosion of almost the entire contents of the package; (e) Division 1.5—Very insensitive chemicals which have a mass explosion hazard: chemicals which have a mass explosion hazard but are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation or of transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions; (f) Division 1.6—Extremely insensitive items which do not have a mass explosion hazard: items which predominantly contain extremely insensitive detonating chemicals and which demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation. B.1.3 Additional Classification Considerations B.1.3.1 Explosives shall be classified as unstable explosives or shall be assigned to one of the six divisions identified in B.1.2 in accordance with the three step procedure in Part I of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6). The first step is to ascertain whether the substance or mixture has explosive effects (Test Series 1). The second step is the acceptance procedure (Test Series 2 to 4) and the third step is the assignment to a hazard division (Test Series 5 to 7). The assessment whether a candidate for “ammonium nitrate emulsion or suspension or gel, intermediate for blasting explosives (ANE)” is insensitive enough for inclusion as an oxidizing liquid ( see see Note 1: Classification of solid chemicals shall be based on tests performed on the chemical as presented. If, for example, for the purposes of supply or transport, the same chemical is to be presented in a physical form different from that which was tested and which is considered likely to materially alter its performance in a classification test, classification must be based on testing of the chemical in the new form. Note 2: Some explosive chemicals are wetted with water or alcohols, diluted with other substances or dissolved or suspended in water or other liquid substances to suppress or reduce their explosive properties or sensitivity. These chemicals shall be classified as desensitized explosives (see Chapter B.17). Note 3: Chemicals with a positive result in Test Series 2 in Part I, Section 12 of UN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6) which are exempted from classification as explosives (based on a negative result in Test Series 6 in Part I, Section 16 of UN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6)), still have explosive properties. The explosive properties of the chemical shall be communicated in Section 2 (Hazard identification) and Section 9 (Physical and chemical properties) of the Safety Data Sheet, as appropriate. B.1.3.2 Explosive properties are associated with the presence of certain chemical groups in a molecule which can react to produce very rapid increases in temperature or pressure. The screening procedure in B.1.3.1 is aimed at identifying the presence of such reactive groups and the potential for rapid energy release. If the screening procedure identifies the chemical as a potential explosive, the acceptance procedure ( see see Note: Neither a Series 1 type (a) propagation of detonation test nor a Series 2 type (a) test of sensitivity to detonative shock is necessary if the exothermic decomposition energy of organic materials is less than 800 J/g. B.1.3.3 If a mixture contains any known explosives, the acceptance procedure is necessary for classification. B.1.3.4 A chemical is not classified as explosive if: (a) There are no chemical groups associated with explosive properties present in the molecule. Examples of groups which may indicate explosive properties are given in Table A6.1 in Appendix 6 of the UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference; See (b) The substance contains chemical groups associated with explosive properties which include oxygen and the calculated oxygen balance is less than −200. The oxygen balance is calculated for the chemical reaction: CxHyOz + [x + (y/4)−(z/2)] O2 → x. CO 2 2 using the formula: oxygen balance = −1600 [2x + (y/2)−z]/molecular weight; or (c) The organic substance or a homogenous mixture of organic substances contains chemical groups associated with explosive properties but the exothermic decomposition energy is less than 500 J/g and the onset of exothermic decomposition is below 500 °C (932 °F). The exothermic decomposition energy may be determined using a suitable calorimetric technique; or (d) For mixtures of inorganic oxidizing substances with organic material(s), the concentration of the inorganic oxidizing substance is: (i) less than 15%, by mass, if the oxidizing substance is assigned to Category 1 or 2; (ii) less than 30%, by mass, if the oxidizing substance is assigned to Category 3. B.2 Flammable Gases B.2.1 Definition Flammable gas A pyrophoric gas A chemically unstable gas B.2.2 Classification Criteria B.2.2.1 A flammable gas shall be classified in Category 1A, 1B, or 2 in accordance with Table B.2.1: Table B.2.1: Criteria for Flammable Gases B.2.3 Additional Classification Considerations B.2.3.1 Flammability shall be determined by tests or by calculation in accordance with ISO 10156:1996 or ISO 10156:2017 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6) and, if using fundamental burning velocity for Category 1B, use Annex C: Method of test for burning velocity measurement of flammable gases of ISO 817:2014(E) (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6). Where insufficient data are available to use this method, equivalent validated methods may be used. B.2.3.2 Pyrophoricity shall be determined at 130 °F (54 °C) in accordance with either IEC 60079-20-1 or DIN 51794:2003 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6). B.2.3.3 The classification procedure for pyrophoric gases need not be applied when experience in production or handling shows that the substance does not ignite spontaneously on coming into contact with air at a temperature of 130 °F (54 °C) or below. Flammable gas mixtures, which have not been tested for pyrophoricity and which contain more than one percent pyrophoric components shall be classified as a pyrophoric gas. Expert judgement on the properties and physical hazards of pyrophoric gases and their mixtures should be used in assessing the need for classification of flammable gas mixtures containing one percent or less pyrophoric components. In this case, testing need only be considered if expert judgement indicates a need for additional data to support the classification process. B.2.3.4 Chemical instability shall be determined in accordance with the method described in Part III of the UN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6). If the calculations performed in accordance with ISO 10156:1996 or ISO 10156:2017 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6) show that a gas mixture is not flammable, no additional testing is required for determining chemical instability for classification purposes. B.3 Aerosols and Chemicals Under Pressure B.3.1 Aerosols B.3.1.1 Definition Aerosol B.3.1.2 Classification Criteria B.3.1.2.1 Aerosols are classified in one of three categories, depending on their flammable properties and their heat of combustion. Aerosols shall be considered for classification in Categories 1 or 2 if they contain more than 1% components (by mass) which are classified as flammable in accordance with this Appendix B, i.e.: Flammable gases ( see Flammable liquids ( see Flammable solids ( see or if their heat of combustion is at least 20 kJ/g. B.3.1.2.2 An aerosol shall be classified in one of the three categories for this class in accordance with Table B.3.1. Table B.3.1: Criteria for Aerosols B.3.2 Chemicals Under Pressure B.3.2.1 Definition C hemicals under pressure e.g., Note: Chemicals under pressure typically contain 50% or more by mass of liquids or solids whereas mixtures containing more than 50% gases are typically considered as gases under pressure. B.3.2.2 Classification Criteria B.3.2.2.1 Chemicals under pressure are classified in one of three categories of this hazard class, in accordance with Table B.3.2, depending on their content of flammable components and their heat of combustion B.3.2.2.2 Flammable components are components which are classified as flammable in accordance with the GHS criteria, i.e.: —Flammable gases ( see —Flammable liquids ( see —Flammable solids ( see Table B.3.2: Criteria for Chemicals Under Pressure B.3.3 Additional Classification Considerations B.3.3.1 To classify an aerosol, data on its flammable components, on its chemical heat of combustion and, if applicable, the results of the aerosol foam flammability test (for foam aerosols) and of the ignition distance test and enclosed space test (for spray aerosols) are necessary. B.3.3.2 The chemical heat of combustion (ΔHc), in kilojoules per gram (kJ/g), is the product of the theoretical heat of combustion (ΔHcomb), and a combustion efficiency, usually less than 1.0 (a typical combustion efficiency is 0.95 or 95%). For a composite formulation, the chemical heat of combustion is the summation of the weighted heats of combustion for the individual components, as follows: where: ΔH c ΔH c w(i) = mass fraction of component i in the product; n = total number of components in the product. B.3.3.3 The chemical heats of combustion shall be found in literature, calculated or determined by tests: (see ASTM D 240-02; Sections 86.1 to 86.3 of ISO 13943; and NFPA 30B (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6)). B.3.3.4 The Ignition Distance Test, Enclosed Space Ignition Test and Aerosol Foam Flammability Test shall be performed in accordance with sub-sections 31.4, 31.5 and 31.6 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6). B.4 Oxidizing Gases B.4.1 Definition Oxidizing gas Note: “Gases which cause or contribute to the combustion of other material more than air does” means pure gases or gas mixtures with an oxidizing power greater than 23.5% (as determined by a method specified in ISO 10156:1996, ISO 10156:2017 or 10156-2:2005 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6) or an equivalent testing method). B.4.2 Classification Criteria An oxidizing gas shall be classified in a single category for this class in accordance with Table B.4.1: Table B.4.1—Criteria for Oxidizing Gases Category Criteria 1 Any gas which may, generally by providing oxygen, cause or contribute to the combustion of other material more than air does. B.4.3 Additional Classification Considerations Classification shall be in accordance with tests or calculation methods as described in ISO 10156:1996, ISO 10156:2017 or 10156-2:2005 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6). B.5 Gases Under Pressure B.5.1 Definition Gases under pressure They comprise compressed gases, liquefied gases, dissolved gases and refrigerated liquefied gases. B.5.2 Classification Criteria Gases under pressure shall be classified in one of four groups in accordance with Table B.5.1: Table B.5.1: Criteria for Gases Under Pressure (1) The critical temperature is the temperature above which a pure gas cannot be liquefied, regardless of the degree of compression. Note: Aerosols and chemicals under pressure should not be classified as gases under pressure. See Appendix B.3 of this section. B.6 Flammable Liquids B.6.1 Definition Flammable liquid Flash point B.6.2 Classification Criteria A flammable liquid shall be classified in one of four categories in accordance with Table B.6.1 of this appendix: Table B.6.1: Criteria for Flammable Liquids B.6.3 Additional Classification Considerations The flash point shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D56-05, ASTM D3278, ASTM D3828, ASTM D93-08 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6), or any method specified in 29 CFR 1910.106(a)(14). It may also be determined by any other method specified in GHS Revision 7, Chapter 2.6. The initial boiling point shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D86-07a or ASTM D1078 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6). 1 1 B.7 Flammable Solids B.71 Definitions Flammable solid Readily combustible solids B.7.2 Classification Criteria B.7.2.1 Powdered, granular or pasty chemicals shall be classified as flammable solids when the time of burning of one or more of the test runs, performed in accordance with the test method described in Part III, sub-section 33.2.1 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6), is less than 45 s or the rate of burning is more than 2.2 mm/s (0.0866 in/s). B.7.2.2 Powders of metals or metal alloys shall be classified as flammable solids when they can be ignited and the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in 10 min or less. B.7.2.3 Solids which may cause fire through friction shall be classified in this class by analogy with existing entries ( e.g., B.7.2.4 A flammable solid shall be classified in one of the two categories for this class using Method N.1 as described in Part III, sub-section 33.2.1 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6), in accordance with Table B.7.1: Table B.7.1: Criteria for Flammable Solids B.8 Self-Reactive Chemicals B.8.1 Definitions Self-reactive chemicals A self-reactive chemical is regarded as possessing explosive properties when in laboratory testing the formulation is liable to detonate, to deflagrate rapidly or to show a violent effect when heated under confinement. B.8.2 Classification Criteria B.8.2.1 A self-reactive chemical shall be considered for classification in this class unless: (a) It is classified as an explosive according to B.1 of this appendix; (b) It is classified as an oxidizing liquid or an oxidizing solid according to B.13 or B.14 of this appendix, except that a mixture of oxidizing substances which contains 5% or more of combustible organic substances shall be classified as a self-reactive chemical according to the procedure defined in B.8.2.2; (c) It is classified as an organic peroxide according to B.15 of this appendix; (d) Its heat of decomposition is less than 300 J/g; or (e) Its self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) is greater than 75 °C (167 °F) for a 50 kg (110 lb) package. B.8.2.2 Mixtures of oxidizing substances, meeting the criteria for classification as oxidizing liquids or oxidizing solids, which contain 5% or more of combustible organic substances and which do not meet the criteria mentioned in B.8.2.1(a), (c), (d) or (e), shall be subjected to the self-reactive chemicals classification procedure in B.8.2.3. Such a mixture showing the properties of a self-reactive chemical type B to F shall be classified as a self-reactive chemical. B.8.2.3 Self-reactive chemicals shall be classified in one of the seven categories of “types A to G” for this class, according to the following principles: (a) Any self-reactive chemical which can detonate or deflagrate rapidly, as packaged, will be defined as self-reactive chemical TYPE A; (b) Any self-reactive chemical possessing explosive properties and which, as packaged, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in that package will be defined as self-reactive chemical TYPE B; (c) Any self-reactive chemical possessing explosive properties when the chemical as packaged cannot detonate or deflagrate rapidly or undergo a thermal explosion will be defined as self-reactive chemical TYPE C; (d) Any self-reactive chemical which in laboratory testing meets the criteria in (d)(i), (ii), or (iii) will be defined as self-reactive chemical TYPE D: (i) Detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or (ii) Does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or (iii) Does not detonate or deflagrate at all and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement; (e) Any self-reactive chemical which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates at all and shows low or no effect when heated under confinement will be defined as self-reactive chemical TYPE E; (f) Any self-reactive chemical which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive power will be defined as self-reactive chemical TYPE F; (g) Any self-reactive chemical which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows no effect when heated under confinement nor any explosive power, provided that it is thermally stable (self- accelerating decomposition temperature is 60 °C (140 °F) to 75 °C (167 °F) for a 50 kg (110 lb) package), and, for liquid mixtures, a diluent having a boiling point greater than or equal to 150 °C (302 °F) is used for desensitization will be defined as self-reactive chemical TYPE G. If the mixture is not thermally stable or a diluent having a boiling point less than 150 °C (302 °F) is used for desensitization, the mixture shall be defined as self-reactive chemical TYPE F. B.8.3 Additional Classification Considerations B.8.3.1 For purposes of classification, the properties of self-reactive chemicals shall be determined in accordance with test series A to H as described in Part II of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6). B.8.3.2 Self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) shall be determined in accordance with Part II, section 28 of UN ST/SG/AC.10, (incorporated by reference; see B.8.3.3 The classification procedures for self-reactive substances and mixtures need not be applied if: (a) There are no chemical groups present in the molecule associated with explosive or self-reactive properties; examples of such groups are given in Tables A6.1 and A6.2 in the Appendix 6 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6); or (b) For a single organic substance or a homogeneous mixture of organic substances, the estimated SADT is greater than 75 °C (167 °F) or the exothermic decomposition energy is less than 300 J/g. The onset temperature and decomposition energy may be estimated using a suitable calorimetric technique (See 20.3.3.3 in Part II of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6)). B.9 Pyrophoric Liquids B.9.1 Definition Pyrophoric liquid B.9.2 Classification Criteria A pyrophoric liquid shall be classified in a single category for this class using test N.3 in Part III, sub-section 33.3.1.5 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6), in accordance with Table B.9.1 of this appendix: Table B.9.1— Criteria for Pyrophoric Liquids Category Criteria 1 The liquid ignites within 5 min when added to an inert carrier and exposed to air, or it ignites or chars a filter paper on contact with air within 5 min. B.9.3 Additional Classification Considerations The classification procedure for pyrophoric liquids need not be applied when experience in production or handling shows that the chemical does not ignite spontaneously on coming into contact with air at normal temperatures ( i.e., B.10 Pyrophoric Solids B.10.1 Definition Pyrophoric solid B.10.2 Classification Criteria A pyrophoric solid shall be classified in a single category for this class using test N.2 in Part III, sub-section 33.3.1.4 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference; see § 1910.6), in accordance with Table B.10.1 of this appendix: Table B.10.1— Criteria for Pyrophoric Solids Category Criteria 1 The solid ignites within 5 min of coming into contact with air. Note: Classification of solid chemicals shall be based on tests performed on the chemical as presented. If, for example, for the purposes of supply or transport, the same chemical is to be presented in a physical form different from that which was tested and which is considered likely to materially alter its performance in a classification test, classification must be based on testing of the chemical in the new form. B.10.3 Additional Classification Considerations The classification procedure for pyrophoric solids need not be applied when experience in production or handling shows that the chemical does not ignite spontaneously on coming into contact with air at normal temperatures ( i.e., B.11—Self-Heating Chemicals B.11.1 Definition A self-heating chemical Note: Self-heating of a substance or mixture is a process where the gradual reaction of that substance or mixture with oxygen (in air) generates heat. If the rate of heat production exceeds the rate of heat loss, then the temperature of the substance or mixture will rise which, after an induction time, may lead to self-ignition and combustion. B.11.2 Classification Criteria B.11.2.1 A self-heating chemical shall be classified in one of the two categories for this class if, in tests performed in accordance with test method N.4 in Part III, sub-section 33.3.1.6 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6), the result meets the criteria shown in Table B.11.1. Table B.11.1— Criteria for Self-Heating Chemicals Category Criteria 1 A positive result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm sample cube at 140 ° C (284 ° F). 2 A negative result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140 ° C (284 ° F), a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm sample cube at 140 ° C (284 ° F), and: (a) The unit volume of the chemical is more than 3 m3; or (b) A positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 120 ° C (248 ° F) and the unit volume of the chemical is more than 450 liters; or (c) A positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 100 ° C (212 ° F). Note: Classification of solid chemicals shall be based on tests performed on the chemical as presented. If, for example, for the purposes of supply or transport, the same chemical is to be presented in a physical form different from that which was tested and which is considered likely to materially alter its performance in a classification test, classification must be based on testing of the chemical in the new form. B.11.2.2 Chemicals with a temperature of spontaneous combustion higher than 50 ° C (122 ° F) for a volume of 27 m3 shall not be classified as self-heating chemicals. B.11.2.3 Chemicals with a spontaneous ignition temperature higher than 50° C (122° F) for a volume of 450 liters shall not be classified in Category 1 of this class. B.11.3 Additional Classification Considerations B.11.3.1 The classification procedure for self-heating chemicals need not be applied if the results of a screening test can be adequately correlated with the classification test and an appropriate safety margin is applied. B.11.3.2 Examples of screening tests are: (a) The Grewer Oven test (VDI guideline 2263, part 1, 1990, Test methods for the Determination of the Safety Characteristics of Dusts) with an onset temperature 80°K above the reference temperature for a volume of 1 l; (b) The Bulk Powder Screening Test (Gibson, N. Harper, D. J. Rogers, R. Evaluation of the fire and explosion risks in drying powders, Plant Operations Progress, 4 (3), 181-189, 1985) with an onset temperature 60°K above the reference temperature for a volume of 1 l. B.12 Chemicals Which, in Contact With Water, Emit Flammable Gases B.12.1 Definition Chemicals which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases B.12.2 Classification Criteria B.12.2.1 A chemical which, in contact with water, emits flammable gases shall be classified in one of the three categories for this class, using test N.5 in Part III, sub-section 33.4.1.4 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6), in accordance with Table B.12.1 of this appendix: Table B.12.1—Criteria for Chemicals Which, in Contact With Water, Emit Flammable Gases Category Criteria 1 Any chemical which reacts vigorously with water at ambient temperatures and demonstrates generally a tendency for the gas produced to ignite spontaneously, or which reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures such that the rate of evolution of flammable gas is equal to or greater than 10 liters per kilogram of chemical over any one minute. 2 Any chemical which reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gas is equal to or greater than 20 liters per kilogram of chemical per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for Category 1. 3 Any chemical which reacts slowly with water at ambient temperatures such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gas is greater than 1 liter per kilogram of chemical per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for Categories 1 and 2. Note: B.12.2.2 A chemical is classified as a chemical which, in contact with water, emits flammable gases if spontaneous ignition takes place in any step of the test procedure. B.12.3 Additional Classification Considerations The classification procedure for this class need not be applied if: (a) The chemical structure of the chemical does not contain metals or metalloids; (b) Experience in production or handling shows that the chemical does not react with water, (e.g., the chemical is manufactured with water or washed with water); or (c) The chemical is known to be soluble in water to form a stable mixture. B.13 Oxidizing Liquids B.13.1 Definition Oxidizing liquid B.13.2 Classification Criteria An oxidizing liquid shall be classified in one of the three categories for this class using test O.2 in Part III, sub-section 34.4.2 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6), in accordance with Table B.13.1: Table B.13.1— Criteria for Oxidizing Liquids Category Criteria 1 Any chemical which, in the 1:1 mixture, by mass, of chemical and cellulose tested, spontaneously ignites; or the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of chemical and cellulose is less than that of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of 50% perchloric acid and cellulose; 2 Any chemical which, in the 1:1 mixture, by mass, of chemical and cellulose tested, exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of 40% aqueous sodium chlorate solution and cellulose; and the criteria for Category 1 are not met; 3 Any chemical which, in the 1:1 mixture, by mass, of chemical and cellulose tested, exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of 65% aqueous nitric acid and cellulose; and the criteria for Categories 1 and 2 are not met. B.13.3 Additional Classification Considerations B.13.3.1 For organic chemicals, the classification procedure for this class shall not be applied if: (a) The chemical does not contain oxygen, fluorine or chlorine; or (b) The chemical contains oxygen, fluorine or chlorine and these elements are chemically bonded only to carbon or hydrogen. B.13.3.2 For inorganic chemicals, the classification procedure for this class shall not be applied if the chemical does not contain oxygen or halogen atoms. B.13.3.3 In the event of divergence between test results and known experience in the handling and use of chemicals which shows them to be oxidizing, judgments based on known experience shall take precedence over test results. B.13.3.4 In cases where chemicals generate a pressure rise (too high or too low), caused by chemical reactions not characterizing the oxidizing properties of the chemical, the test described in Part III, sub-section 34.4.2 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6) shall be repeated with an inert substance ( e.g., B.14 Oxidizing Solids B.14.1 Definition Oxidizing solid B.14.2 Classification Criteria An oxidizing solid shall be classified in one of the three categories for this class using test O.1 in Part III, sub-section 34.4.1, of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6) or test O.3 in Part III, sub-section 34.4.3 of UN ST/SG/AC.10/11 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6), in accordance with Table B.14.1: Table B.14.1—Criteria for Oxidizing Solids Category Criteria using test O.1 Criteria using test O.3 1 Any chemical which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than the mean burning time of a 3:2 mixture, (by mass), of potassium bromate and cellulose Any chemical which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to- cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning rate greater than the mean burning rate of a 3:1 mixture (by mass) of calcium peroxide and cellulose. 2 Any chemical which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning time equal to or less than the mean burning time of a 2:3 mixture (by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose and the criteria for Category 1 are not met Any chemical which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to- cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning rate equal to or greater than the mean burning rate of a 1:1 mixture (by mass) of calcium peroxide and cellulose and the criteria for Category 1 are not met. 3 Any chemical which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning time equal to or less than the mean burning time of a 3:7 mixture (by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose and the criteria for Categories 1 and 2 are not met Any chemical which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to- cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning rate equal to or greater than the mean burning rate of a 1:2 mixture (by mass) of calcium peroxide and cellulose and the criteria for Categories 1 and 2 are not met. Note 1: Some oxidizing solids may present explosion hazards under certain conditions (e.g., when stored in large quantities). For example, some types of ammonium nitrate may give rise to an explosion hazard under extreme conditions and the “Resistance to detonation test” (International Maritime Solid Bulk Cargoes Code, IMO (IMSBC), Appendix 2, Section 5) may be used to assess this hazard. When information indicates that an oxidizing solid may present an explosion hazard, it shall be indicated on the Safety Data Sheet. Note 2: Classification of solid chemicals shall be based on tests performed on the chemical as presented. If, for example, for the purposes of supply or transport, the same chemical is to be presented in a physical form different from that which was tested and which is considered likely to materially alter its performance in a classification test, classification must be based on testing of the chemical in the new form. B.14.3 Additional Classification Considerations B.14.3.1 For organic chemicals, the classification procedure for this class shall not be applied if: (a) The chemical does not contain oxygen, fluorine or chlorine; or (b) The chemical contains oxygen, fluorine or chlorine and these elements are chemically bonded only to carbon or hydrogen. B.14.3.2 For inorganic chemicals, the classification procedure for this class shall not be applied if the chemical does not contain oxygen or halogen atoms. B.14.3.3 In the event of divergence between test results and known experience in the handling and use of chemicals which shows them to be oxidizing, judgements based on known experience shall take procedure over test results. B.15 Organic Peroxides B.15.1 Definition B.15.1.1 Organic peroxide (a) Be liable to explosive decomposition; (b) Burn rapidly; (c) Be sensitive to impact or friction; (d) React dangerously with other substances. B.15.1.2 An organic peroxide is regarded as possessing explosive properties when in laboratory testing the formulation is liable to detonate, to deflagrate rapidly or to show a violent effect when heated under confinement. B.15.2 Classification Criteria B.15.2.1 Any organic peroxide shall be considered for classification in this class, unless it contains: (a) Not more than 1.0% available oxygen from the organic peroxides when containing not more than 1.0% hydrogen peroxide; or (b) Not more than 0.5% available oxygen from the organic peroxides when containing more than 1.0% but not more than 7.0% hydrogen peroxide. Note: The available oxygen content (%) of an organic peroxide mixture is given by the formula: where: ni = number of peroxygen groups per molecule of organic peroxide i; ci = concentration (mass %) of organic peroxide i; mi = molecular mass of organic peroxide i. B.15.2.2 Organic peroxides shall be classified in one of the seven categories of “Types A to G” for this class, according to the following principles: (a) Any organic peroxide which, as packaged, can detonate or deflagrate rapidly shall be defined as organic peroxide TYPE A; (b) Any organic peroxide possessing explosive properties and which, as packaged, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in that package shall be defined as organic peroxide TYPE B; (c) Any organic peroxide possessing explosive properties when the chemical as packaged cannot detonate or deflagrate rapidly or undergo a thermal explosion shall be defined as organic peroxide TYPE C; (d) Any organic peroxide which in laboratory testing meets the criteria in (d)(i), (ii), or (iii) shall be defined as organic peroxide TYPE D: (i) Detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or (ii) Does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or (iii) Does not detonate or deflagrate at all and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement; (e) Any organic peroxide which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates at all and shows low or no effect when heated under confinement shall be defined as organic peroxide TYPE E; (f) Any organic peroxide which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive power shall be defined as organic peroxide TYPE F; (g) Any organic peroxide which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows no effect when heated under confinement nor any explosive power, provided that it is thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 60 ° C (140 ° F) or higher for a 50 kg (110 lb) package), and, for liquid mixtures, a diluent having a boiling point of not less than 150 ;° C (302 ° F) is used for desensitization, shall be defined as organic peroxide TYPE G. If the organic peroxide is not thermally stable or a diluent having a boiling point less than 150 ° C (302° F) is used for desensitization, it shall be defined as organic peroxide TYPE F. B.15.3 Additional Classification Considerations B.15.3.1 For purposes of classification, the properties of organic peroxides shall be determined in accordance with test series A to H as described in Part II of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6). B.15.3.2 Self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) shall be determined in accordance with UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6), Part II, section 28. B.15.3.3 Mixtures of organic peroxides may be classified as the same type of organic peroxide as that of the most dangerous ingredient. However, as two stable ingredients can form a thermally less stable mixture, the SADT of the mixture shall be determined. B.16 Corrosive to Metals B.16.1 Definition A chemical which is corrosive to metals B.16.2 Classification Criteria A chemical which is corrosive to metals shall be classified in a single category for this class, using the test in Part III, sub-section 37.4 of UN ST/SG/AC.10 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6), in accordance with Table B.16.1: Table B.16.1—Criteria for Chemicals Corrosive to Metal Category Criteria 1 Corrosion rate on either steel or aluminum surfaces exceeding 6.25 mm per year at a test temperature of 55 ° C (131 ° F) when tested on both materials. Note: Where an initial test on either steel or aluminium indicates the chemical being tested is corrosive the follow-up test on the other metal is not necessary. B.16.3 Additional Classification Considerations The specimen to be used for the test shall be made of the following materials: (a) For the purposes of testing steel, steel types S235JR+CR (1.0037 resp. St 37- 2), S275J2G3+CR (1.0144 resp. St 44-3), ISO 3574, Unified Numbering System (UNS) G 10200, or SAE 1020; (b) For the purposes of testing aluminium: non-clad types 7075-T6 or AZ5GU-T6. B.17 Desensitized Explosives B.17.1 Definitions and General Considerations Desensitized explosives 2 see 3 2 3 B.17.1.1 The class of desensitized explosives comprises: (a) Solid desensitized explosives: Note: This includes desensitization achieved by formation of hydrates of the substances. (b) Liquid desensitized explosives: B.17.2 Classification Criteria B.17.2.1 Any explosive which is desensitized shall be considered in this class, unless: (a) It is intended to produce a practical, explosive or pyrotechnic effect; or It has a mass explosion hazard according to test series 6 (a) or 6 (b) or its corrected burning rate according to the burning rate test described in part V, subsection 51.4 of UN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6) is greater than 1200 kg/min; or (b) Its exothermic decomposition energy is less than 300 J/g. Note 1: Substances or mixtures which meet the criterion (a) or (b) shall be classified as explosives (see Chapter B.1). Substances or mixtures which meet the criterion (c) may fall within the scope of other physical hazard classes. Note 2: The exothermic decomposition energy may be estimated using a suitable calorimetric technique (see section 20, sub-section 20.3.3.3 in Part II of UN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6). B.17.2.2 Desensitized explosives shall be classified in one of the four categories of this class depending on the corrected burning rate (Ac) using the test “burning rate test (external fire)” described in Part V, sub-section 51.4 of UN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6), according to Table B.17.1: Table B.17.1—Criteria for Desensitized Explosives Category Criteria 1 Desensitized explosives with a corrected burning rate (AC) equal to or greater than 300 kg/min but not more than 1200 kg/min. 2 Desensitized explosives with a corrected burning rate (AC) equal to or greater than 140 kg/min but less than 300 kg/min. 3 Desensitized explosives with a corrected burning rate (AC) equal to or greater than 60 kg/min but less than 140 kg/min. 4 Desensitized explosives with a corrected burning rate (AC) less than 60 kg/min. Note 1: Desensitized explosives shall be prepared so that they remain homogeneous and do not separate during normal storage and handling, particularly if desensitized by wetting. The manufacturer, importer, or distributor shall provide information in Section 10 of the safety data sheet about the shelf-life and instructions on verifying desensitization. Under certain conditions the content of desensitizing agent (e.g., phlegmatizer, wetting agent or treatment) may decrease during supply and use, and thus, the hazard potential of the desensitized explosive may increase. In addition, Sections 5 and/or 8 of the safety data sheet shall include advice on avoiding increased fire, blast or protection hazards when the chemical is not sufficiently desensitized. Note 2: Explosive properties of desensitized explosives shall be determined using data from Test Series 2 of UN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6) and shall be communicated in the safety data sheet. For testing of liquid desensitized explosives, refer to section 32, sub-section 32.3.2 of UN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (incorporated by reference, see 1910.6). Testing of solid desensitized explosives is addressed in section 33, sub-section 33.2.3 of UN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6). Note 3: Desensitized explosives do not fall additionally within the scope of chapters B.1 (explosives), B.6 (flammable liquids) and B.7 (flammable solids). B.17.3 Additional Classification Considerations B.17.3.1 The classification procedure for desensitized explosives does not apply if: (a) The substances or mixtures contain no explosives according to the criteria in Chapter B.1; or (b) The exothermic decomposition energy is less than 300 J/g. B.17.3.2 The exothermic decomposition energy shall be determined using the explosive already desensitized ( i.e., see Appendix C to § 1910.1200—Allocation of Label Elements (Mandatory) C.1 The label for each hazardous chemical shall include the product identifier used on the safety data sheet. C.1.1 The labels on shipped containers shall also include the name, address, and telephone number of the chemical manufacturer, importer, or responsible party. C.2 The label for each hazardous chemical that is classified shall include the signal word, hazard statement(s), pictogram(s), and precautionary statement(s) specified in C.4 for each hazard class and associated hazard category, except as provided for in C.2.1 through C.2.4. C.2.1 Precedence of Hazard Information C.2.1.1 If the signal word “Danger” is included, the signal word “Warning” shall not appear; C.2.1.2 If the skull and crossbones pictogram is included, the exclamation mark pictogram shall not appear where it is used for acute toxicity; C.2.1.3 If the corrosive pictogram is included, the exclamation mark pictogram shall not appear where it is used for skin or eye irritation; C.2.1.4 If the health hazard pictogram is included for respiratory sensitization, the exclamation mark pictogram shall not appear where it is used for skin sensitization or for skin or eye irritation. C.2.2 Hazard Statement Text C.2.2.1 The text of all applicable hazard statements shall appear on the label, except as otherwise specified. The information in italics shall be included as part of the hazard statement as provided. For example: “causes damage to organs (state all organs affected) through prolonged or repeated exposure (state route of exposure if no other routes of exposure cause the hazard)”. Hazard statements may be combined where appropriate to reduce the information on the label and improve readability, as long as all of the hazards are conveyed as required. C.2.2.2 If the chemical manufacturer, importer, or responsible party can demonstrate that all or part of the hazard statement is inappropriate to a specific substance or mixture, the corresponding statement may be omitted from the label. C.2.3 Pictograms C.2.3.1 Pictograms shall be in the shape of a square set at a point and shall include a black hazard symbol on a white background with a red frame sufficiently wide to be clearly visible. A square red frame set at a point without a hazard symbol is not a pictogram and is not permitted on the label. C.2.3.2 One of eight standard hazard symbols shall be used in each pictogram. The eight hazard symbols are depicted in Figure C.1. A pictogram using the exclamation mark symbol is presented in Figure C.2, for the purpose of illustration. Figure C.1—Hazard Symbols and Classes Figure C.2—Exclamation Mark Pictogram C.2.3.3 The exclamation mark pictogram is permitted (but not required) for HNOCs as long as the words “Hazard Not Otherwise Classified” or the letters “HNOC” appear below the pictogram. C.2.3.4 Pictograms may only appear once on a label. If multiple hazards require the use of the same pictogram, it may not appear a second time on the label. C.2.4 Precautionary Statement Text C.2.4.1 There are four types of precautionary statements presented, “prevention,” “response,” “storage,” and “disposal.” The core part of the precautionary statement is presented in bold print. This is the text, except as otherwise specified, that shall appear on the label. Where additional information is required, it is indicated in plain text. C.2.4.2 When a backslash or diagonal mark (/) appears in the precautionary statement text, it indicates that a choice has to be made between the separated phrases. In such cases, the chemical manufacturer, importer, or responsible party can choose the most appropriate phrase(s). For example, “Wear protective gloves/protective clothing/eye protection/face protection” could read “wear eye protection”. C.2.4.3 When three full stops (. . .) appear in the precautionary statement text, they indicate that all applicable conditions are not listed. For example, in “Use explosion-proof electrical/ventilating/lighting/. . ./equipment”, the use of “. . .” indicates that other equipment may need to be specified. In such cases, the chemical manufacturer, importer, or responsible party can choose the other conditions to be specified. C.2.4.4 When text in italics if dust clouds can occur C.2.4.5 Where square brackets ([ ]) appear around text in a precautionary statement, this indicates that the text in square brackets is not appropriate in every case and should be used only in certain circumstances. In these cases, conditions for use explaining when the text should be used are provided. For example, one precautionary statement states: “[In case of inadequate ventilation] wear respiratory protection.” This statement is given with the condition for use “- text in square brackets may be used if additional information is provided with the chemical at the point of use that explains what type of ventilation would be adequate for safe use”. This means that, if additional information is provided with the chemical explaining what type of ventilation would be adequate for safe use, the text in square brackets should be used and the statement would read: “In case of inadequate ventilation wear respiratory protection.” However, if the chemical is supplied without such ventilation information, the text in square brackets should not be used, and the precautionary statement should read: “Wear respiratory protection.” C.2.4.6 Precautionary statements may be combined or consolidated to save label space and improve readability. For example, “Keep cool” and “Keep away from heat, hot surfaces, sparks, open flames and other ignition sources. No smoking.” can be combined to read “Keep cool and away from heat, hot surfaces, sparks, open flames and other ignition sources. No smoking.” C.2.4.7 Precautionary statements may incorporate minor textual variations from the text prescribed in this Appendix if these variations assist in communicating safety information ( e.g. C.2.4.8 In most cases, the precautionary statements are independent ( e.g. C.2.4.9 If the chemical manufacturer, importer, or responsible party can demonstrate that a precautionary statement is inappropriate to a specific substance or mixture, the precautionary statement may be omitted from the label. C.2.4.10 Where a substance or mixture is classified for a number of health hazards, this may trigger multiple precautionary statements relating to medical response, e.g. In general, the following principles should be applied: (a) Where the classification of a substance or mixture triggers several different precautionary statements, a system of prioritization should be applied. If the same medical response statement is triggered multiple times, the label need only include one precautionary statement reflecting the response at the highest level with the greatest urgency, which should always be combined with at least one route of exposure or symptom “IF” statement. (b) Routes of exposure, including “IF exposed or concerned,” may be combined when triggered with a medical response statement. If the response statement is triggered with three or more routes of exposure, “IF exposed or concerned” may be used. However, relevant “IF” statements describing symptoms must be included in full. If a route of exposure is triggered multiple times, it need only be included once. (c) This does not apply to “Get medical advice/attention if you feel unwell” or “Get immediate medical advice/attention” when they are combined with an “If” statement and must appear without prioritization. C.3 Supplementary Hazard Information C.3.1 To ensure that non-standardized information does not lead to unnecessarily wide variation or undermine the required information, supplementary information on the label is limited to when it provides further detail and does not contradict or cast doubt on the validity of the standardized hazard information. C.3.2 Where the chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor chooses to add supplementary information on the label, the placement of supplemental information shall not impede identification of information required by this section. C.3.3 Where an ingredient with unknown acute toxicity is used in a mixture at a concentration ≥1%, and the mixture is not classified based on testing of the mixture as a whole, a statement that X% of the mixture consists of ingredient(s) of unknown acute toxicity (oral/dermal/inhalation) is required on the label and safety data sheet. C.4 Requirements for Signal Words, Hazard Statements, Pictograms, and Precautionary Statements C.4.10 REPRODUCTIVE TOXICITY (Classified in Accordance with Appendix A.7 of this section) C.4.10 REPRODUCTIVE TOXICITY (CONTINUED) (Classified in Accordance with Appendix A.7 of this section) (EFFECTS ON OR VIA LACTATION) C.4.14 EXPLOSIVES (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.1 of this section) C.4.14 EXPLOSIVES (CONTINUED) (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.1 of this section) C.4.14 EXPLOSIVES (CONTINUED) (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.1 of this section) C.4.14 EXPLOSIVES (CONTINUED) (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.1 of this section) C.4.14 EXPLOSIVES (CONTINUED) (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.1 of this section) C.4.16 AEROSOLS (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.3 of this section) C.4.16 AEROSOLS (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.3.1 of this section) C.4.16 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.3.2 of this section) C.4.16 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.3 of this section) C.4.19 FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.6 of this section) C.4.19 FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS (CONTINUED) (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.6 of this section) C.4.20 FLAMMABLE SOLIDS (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.7 of this section) C.4.21 SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCES AND MIXTURES (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.8 of this section) C.4.21 SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCES AND MIXTURES (CONTINUED) (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.8 of this section) C.4.21 SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCES AND MIXTURES (CONTINUED) (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.8 of this section) C.4.24 SELF-HEATING SUBSTANCES AND MIXTURES (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.11 of this section) C.4.30 DESENSITIZED EXPLOSIVES (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.17 of this section) C.4.30 DESENSITIZED EXPLOSIVES (Classified in Accordance with Appendix B.17 of this section) Appendix D to § 1910.1200 Safety Data Sheet (Mandatory) A safety data sheet (SDS) shall include the information specified in Table D.1 under the section number and heading indicated for sections 1-11 and 16. While each section of the SDS must contain all of the specified information, preparers of safety data sheets are not required to present the information in any particular order within each section. If no relevant information is found for any given subheading within a section, the SDS shall clearly indicate that no applicable information is available. Sections 12-15 may be included in the SDS, but are not mandatory. Table D.1. Minimum Information for an SDS Appendix E to § 1910.1200—Definition of “Trade Secret” (Mandatory) The following is a reprint of the Restatement of Torts b b. Definition of trade secret. Restatement of Torts Secrecy. Novelty and prior art. Appendix F to § 1910.1200—Guidance for Hazard Classifications Re: Carcinogenicity (Non-Mandatory) The mandatory criteria for classification of a chemical for carcinogenicity under HCS (§ 1910.1200) are found in Appendix A.6 to this section. This non-mandatory Appendix provides additional guidance on hazard classification for carcinogenicity. Part A of Appendix F includes background guidance provided by GHS based on the Preamble of the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) “Monographs on the Evaluation of Carcinogenic Risks to Humans” (2006). Part B provides IARC classification information. Part C provides background guidance from the National Toxicology Program (NTP) “Report on Carcinogens” (RoC), and Part D is a table that compares GHS carcinogen hazard categories to carcinogen classifications under IARC and NTP, allowing classifiers to be able to use information from IARC and NTP RoC carcinogen classifications to complete their classifications under the GHS, and thus the HCS. Part A: Background Guidance 1 1 As noted in Footnote 6 of Appendix A.6. to this section, the GHS includes as guidance for classifiers information taken from the Preamble of the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) “Monographs on the Evaluation of Carcinogenic Risks to Humans” (2006), providing guidance on the evaluation of the strength and evidence of carcinogenic risks to humans. This guidance also discusses some additional considerations in classification and an approach to analysis, rather than hard-and-fast rules. Part A is consistent with Appendix A.6, and should help in evaluating information to determine carcinogenicity. Carcinogenicity in humans: The evidence relevant to carcinogenicity from studies in humans is classified into one of the following categories: (a) Sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity: A causal relationship has been established between exposure to the agent and human cancer. That is, a positive relationship has been observed between the exposure and cancer in studies in which chance, bias and confounding could be ruled out with reasonable confidence. (b) Limited evidence of carcinogenicity: A positive association has been observed between exposure to the agent and cancer for which a causal interpretation is considered by the Working Group to be credible, but chance, bias or confounding could not be ruled out with reasonable confidence. In some instances, the above categories may be used to classify the degree of evidence related to carcinogenicity in specific organs or tissues. Carcinogenicity in experimental animals: The evidence relevant to carcinogenicity in experimental animals is classified into one of the following categories: (a) Sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity: A causal relationship has been established between the agent and an increased incidence of malignant neoplasms or of an appropriate combination of benign and malignant neoplasms in two or more species of animals or two or more independent studies in one species carried out at different times or in different laboratories or under different protocols. An increased incidence of tumors in both sexes of a single species in a well-conducted study, ideally conducted under Good Laboratory Practices, can also provide sufficient evidence. Exceptionally, a single study in one species and sex might be considered to provide sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity when malignant neoplasms occur to an unusual degree with regard to incidence, site, type of tumor or age at onset, or when there are strong findings of tumors at multiple sites. (b) Limited evidence of carcinogenicity: The data suggest a carcinogenic effect but are limited for making a definitive evaluation because, e.g. the evidence of carcinogenicity is restricted to a single experiment; there are unresolved questions regarding the adequacy of the design, conduct or interpretation of the studies; the agent increases the incidence only of benign neoplasms or lesions of uncertain neoplastic potential; or the evidence of carcinogenicity is restricted to studies that demonstrate only promoting activity in a narrow range of tissues or organs. Guidance on How To Consider Important Factors in Classification of Carcinogenicity (See Reference Section) The weight of evidence analysis called for in GHS and the HCS (§ 1910.1200) is an integrative approach that considers important factors in determining carcinogenic potential along with the strength of evidence analysis. The IPCS “ Conceptual Framework for Evaluating a Mode of Action for Chemical Carcinogenesis” Framework for Human Relevance Analysis of Information on Carcinogenic Modes of Action” et al., et al., Mode of Action Various documents on carcinogen assessment all note that mode of action in and of itself, or consideration of comparative metabolism, should be evaluated on a case-by-case basis and are part of an analytic evaluative approach. One must look closely at any mode of action in animal experiments, taking into consideration comparative toxicokinetics/toxicodynamics between the animal test species and humans to determine the relevance of the results to humans. This may lead to the possibility of discounting very specific effects of certain types of substances. Life stage-dependent effects on cellular differentiation may also lead to qualitative differences between animals and humans. Only if a mode of action of tumor development is conclusively determined not to be operative in humans may the carcinogenic evidence for that tumor be discounted. However, a weight of evidence evaluation for a substance calls for any other tumorigenic activity to be evaluated, as well. Responses in Multiple Animal Experiments Positive responses in several species add to the weight of evidence that a substance is a carcinogen. Taking into account all of the factors listed in A.6.2.5.2 and more, such chemicals with positive outcomes in two or more species would be provisionally considered to be classified in GHS Category 1B until human relevance of animal results are assessed in their entirety. It should be noted, however, that positive results for one species in at least two independent studies, or a single positive study showing unusually strong evidence of malignancy may also lead to Category 1B. Responses Are in One Sex or Both Sexes Any case of sex-specific tumors should be evaluated in light of the total tumorigenic response to the substance observed at other sites (multi-site responses or incidence above background) in determining the carcinogenic potential of the substance. If tumors are seen only in one sex of an animal species, the mode of action should be carefully evaluated to see if the response is consistent with the postulated mode of action. Effects seen only in one sex in a test species may be less convincing than effects seen in both sexes, unless there is a clear patho-physiological difference consistent with the mode of action to explain the single sex response. Confounding Effects of Excessive Toxicity or Localized Effects Tumors occurring only at excessive doses associated with severe toxicity generally have doubtful potential for carcinogenicity in humans. In addition, tumors occurring only at sites of contact and/or only at excessive doses need to be carefully evaluated for human relevance for carcinogenic hazard. For example, forestomach tumors, following administration by gavage of an irritating or corrosive, non-mutagenic chemical, may be of questionable relevance. However, such determinations must be evaluated carefully in justifying the carcinogenic potential for humans; any occurrence of other tumors at distant sites must also be considered. Tumor Type, Reduced Tumor Latency Unusual tumor types or tumors occurring with reduced latency may add to the weight of evidence for the carcinogenic potential of a substance, even if the tumors are not statistically significant. Toxicokinetic behavior is normally assumed to be similar in animals and humans, at least from a qualitative perspective. On the other hand, certain tumor types in animals may be associated with toxicokinetics or toxicodynamics that are unique to the animal species tested and may not be predictive of carcinogenicity in humans. Very few such examples have been agreed internationally. However, one example is the lack of human relevance of kidney tumors in male rats associated with compounds causing α2u-globulin nephropathy (IARC, Scientific Publication N° 147 2 2 Part B: International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) 3 3 IARC Carcinogen Classification Categories: Group 1: The agent is carcinogenic to humans This category is used when there is sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity sufficient sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity Group 2: This category includes agents for which, at one extreme, the degree of evidence of carcinogenicity in humans is almost sufficient, probably carcinogenic to humans possibly carcinogenic to humans probably carcinogenic possibly carcinogenic probably carcinogenic possibly carcinogenic. Group 2A: The agent is probably carcinogenic to human. This category is used when there is limited evidence of carcinogenicity sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity inadequate evidence of carcinogenicity sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity limited evidence of carcinogenicity Group 2B: The agent is possibly carcinogenic to humans. This category is used for agents for which there is limited evidence of carcinogenicity sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity inadequate evidence of carcinogenicity sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity inadequate evidence of carcinogenicity sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity Part C: National Toxicology Program (NTP), “Report on Carcinogens”, Background Guidance NTP Listing Criteria 4 4 See: The criteria for listing an agent, substance, mixture, or exposure circumstance in the Report on Carcinogens (RoC) are as follows: Known To Be A Human Carcinogen: There is sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity from studies in humans 5 5 Reasonably Anticipated To Be A Human Carcinogen: There is limited evidence of carcinogenicity from studies in humans that indicates that a causal interpretation is credible, but that alternative explanations, such as chance, bias, or confounding factors, could not adequately be excluded, or there is sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity from studies in experimental animals that indicates there is an increased incidence of malignant and/or a combination of malignant and benign tumors in multiple species or at multiple tissue sites, or by multiple routes of exposure, or to an unusual degree with regard to incidence, site, or type of tumor, or age at onset, or there is less than sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity in humans or laboratory animals; however, the agent, substance, or mixture belongs to a well-defined, structurally-related class of substances whose members are listed in a previous Report on Carcinogens as either known to be a human carcinogen or reasonably anticipated to be a human carcinogen, or there is convincing relevant information that the agent acts through mechanisms indicating it would likely cause cancer in humans. Conclusions regarding carcinogenicity in humans or experimental animals are based on scientific judgment, with consideration given to all relevant information. Relevant information includes, but is not limited to, dose response, route of exposure, chemical structure, metabolism, pharmacokinetics, sensitive sub-populations, genetic effects, or other data relating to mechanism of action or factors that may be unique to a given substance. For example, there may be substances for which there is evidence of carcinogenicity in laboratory animals, but there are compelling data indicating that the agent acts through mechanisms that do not operate in humans and would therefore not reasonably be anticipated to cause cancer in humans. Part D: Table Relating Approximate Equivalences Among IARC, NTP RoC, and GHS Carcinogenicity Classifications The following table may be used to perform hazard classifications for carcinogenicity under the HCS (§ 1910.1200). It relates the approximated GHS hazard categories for carcinogenicity to the classifications provided by IARC and NTP, as described in Parts B and C of this Appendix. Approximate Equivalences Among Carcinogen Classification Schemes IARC GHS NTP RoC Group 1 Category 1A Known. Group 2A Category 1B Reasonably Anticipated (See Note 1). Group 2B Category 2 Reasonably Anticipated (See Note 1). Note 1: 1. Limited evidence of carcinogenicity from studies in humans (corresponding to IARC 2A/GHS 1B); 2. Sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity from studies in experimental animals (again, essentially corresponding to IARC 2A/GHS 1B); 3. Less than sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity in humans or laboratory animals; however: a. The agent, substance, or mixture belongs to a well-defined, structurally-related class of substances whose members are listed in a previous RoC as either “Known” or “Reasonably Anticipated” to be a human carcinogen, or b. There is convincing relevant information that the agent acts through mechanisms indicating it would likely cause cancer in humans. *References Cohen, S.M., J. Klaunig, M.E. Meek, R.N. Hill, T. Pastoor, L. Lehman-McKeeman, J. Bucher, D.G. Longfellow, J. Seed, V. Dellarco, P. Fenner-Crisp, and D. Patton. 2004. Evaluating the human relevance of chemically induced animal tumors. Toxicol. Sci. Cohen, S.M., M.E. Meek, J.E. Klaunig, D.E. Patton, P.A. Fenner-Crisp. 2003. The human relevance of information on carcinogenic modes of action: Overview. Crit. Rev. Toxicol. Meek, M.E., J.R. Bucher, S.M. Cohen, V. Dellarco, R.N. Hill, L. Lehman-McKeeman, D.G. Longfellow, T. Pastoor, J. Seed, D.E. Patton. 2003. A framework for human relevance analysis of information on carcinogenic modes of action. Crit. Rev. Toxicol. Sonich-Mullin, C., R. Fielder, J. Wiltse, K. Baetcke, J. Dempsey, P. Fenner-Crisp, D. Grant, M. Hartley, A. Knapp, D. Kroese, I. Mangelsdorf, E. Meek, J.M. Rice, and M. Younes. 2001. The conceptual framework for evaluating a mode of action for chemical carcinogenesis. Reg. Toxicol. Pharm. International Programme on Chemical Safety Harmonization Group. 2004. Report of the First Meeting of the Cancer Working Group. World Health Organization. Report IPCS/HSC-CWG-1/04. Geneva. International Agency for Research on Cancer. IARC Monographs on the Evaluation of Carcinogenic Risks to Human. Preambles to Volumes. World Health Organization. Lyon, France. Cohen, S.M., P.A. Fenner-Crisp, and D.E. Patton. 2003. Special Issue: Cancer Modes of Action and Human Relevance. Critical Reviews in Toxicology, R.O. McClellan, ed., Volume 33/Issue 6. CRC Press. Capen, C.C., E. Dybing, and J.D. Wilbourn. 1999. Species differences in thyroid, kidney and urinary bladder carcinogenesis. International Agency for Research on Cancer, Scientific Publication N° 147. Doi, A.M., G. Hill, J. Seely, J.R. Hailey, G. Kissling, and J.R. Buchera. 2007. α2u-Globulin nephropathy and renal tumors in National Toxicology Program studies. Toxicol. Pathol. [59 FR 6170, Feb. 9, 1994, as amended at 59 FR 17479, Apr. 13, 1994; 59 FR 65948, Dec. 22, 1994; 61 FR 9245, Mar. 7, 1996; 77 FR 17785, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, Feb. 8, 2013; 89 FR 44356, May 20, 2024; 89 FR 81830, Oct. 9, 2024; 91 FR 565, Jan. 8, 2026; 91 FR 1696, Jan. 15, 2026; 91 FR 6760, Feb. 13, 2026] § 1910.1201 Retention of DOT markings, placards and labels. (a) Any employer who receives a package of hazardous material which is required to be marked, labeled or placarded in accordance with the U. S. Department of Transportation's Hazardous Materials Regulations (49 CFR Parts 171 through 180) shall retain those markings, labels and placards on the package until the packaging is sufficiently cleaned of residue and purged of vapors to remove any potential hazards. (b) Any employer who receives a freight container, rail freight car, motor vehicle, or transport vehicle that is required to be marked or placarded in accordance with the Hazardous Materials Regulations shall retain those markings and placards on the freight container, rail freight car, motor vehicle or transport vehicle until the hazardous materials which require the marking or placarding are sufficiently removed to prevent any potential hazards. (c) Markings, placards and labels shall be maintained in a manner that ensures that they are readily visible. (d) For non-bulk packages which will not be reshipped, the provisions of this section are met if a label or other acceptable marking is affixed in accordance with the Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200). (e) For the purposes of this section, the term “hazardous material” and any other terms not defined in this section have the same definition as in the Hazardous Materials Regulations (49 CFR Parts 171 through 180). [59 FR 36700, July 19, 1994] § 1910.1450 Occupational exposure to hazardous chemicals in laboratories. (a) Scope and application. (2) Where this section applies, it shall supersede, for laboratories, the requirements of all other OSHA health standards in 29 CFR part 1910, subpart Z, except as follows: (i) For any OSHA health standard, only the requirement to limit employee exposure to the specific permissible exposure limit shall apply for laboratories, unless that particular standard states otherwise or unless the conditions of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section apply. (ii) Prohibition of eye and skin contact where specified by any OSHA health standard shall be observed. (iii) Where the action level (or in the absence of an action level, the permissible exposure limit) is routinely exceeded for an OSHA regulated substance with exposure monitoring and medical surveillance requirements, paragraphs (d) and (g)(1)(ii) of this section shall apply. (3) This section shall not apply to: (i) Uses of hazardous chemicals which do not meet the definition of laboratory use, and in such cases, the employer shall comply with the relevant standard in 29 CFR part 1910, subpart Z, even if such use occurs in a laboratory. (ii) Laboratory uses of hazardous chemicals which provide no potential for employee exposure. Examples of such conditions might include: (A) Procedures using chemically-impregnated test media such as Dip-and-Read tests where a reagent strip is dipped into the specimen to be tested and the results are interpreted by comparing the color reaction to a color chart supplied by the manufacturer of the test strip; and (B) Commercially prepared kits such as those used in performing pregnancy tests in which all of the reagents needed to conduct the test are contained in the kit. (b) Definitions Action level Assistant Secretary Carcinogen select carcinogen Chemical Hygiene Officer Chemical Hygiene Plan Designated area Emergency Employee Hazardous chemical Health hazard Laboratory Laboratory scale Laboratory-type hood Walk-in hoods with adjustable sashes meet the above definition provided that the sashes are adjusted during use so that the airflow and the exhaust of air contaminants are not compromised and employees do not work inside the enclosure during the release of airborne hazardous chemicals. Laboratory use of hazardous chemicals (i) Chemical manipulations are carried out on a “laboratory scale;” (ii) Multiple chemical procedures or chemicals are used; (iii) The procedures involved are not part of a production process, nor in any way simulate a production process; and (iv) “Protective laboratory practices and equipment” are available and in common use to minimize the potential for employee exposure to hazardous chemicals. Medical consultation Mutagen Physical hazard Protective laboratory practices and equipment Reproductive toxins Select carcinogen (i) It is regulated by OSHA as a carcinogen; or (ii) It is listed under the category, “known to be carcinogens,” in the Annual Report on Carcinogens published by the National Toxicology Program (NTP) (latest edition); or (iii) It is listed under Group 1 (“carcinogenic to humans”) by the International Agency for Research on Cancer Monographs (IARC) (latest editions); or (iv) It is listed in either Group 2A or 2B by IARC or under the category, “reasonably anticipated to be carcinogens” by NTP, and causes statistically significant tumor incidence in experimental animals in accordance with any of the following criteria: (A) After inhalation exposure of 6-7 hours per day, 5 days per week, for a significant portion of a lifetime to dosages of less than 10 mg/m 3 (B) After repeated skin application of less than 300 (mg/kg of body weight) per week; or (C) After oral dosages of less than 50 mg/kg of body weight per day. (c) Permissible exposure limits. (d) Employee exposure determination Initial monitoring. (2) Periodic monitoring. (3) Termination of monitoring. (4) Employee notification of monitoring results. (e) Chemical hygiene plan—General. (1) Where hazardous chemicals as defined by this standard are used in the workplace, the employer shall develop and carry out the provisions of a written Chemical Hygiene Plan which is: (i) Capable of protecting employees from health hazards associated with hazardous chemicals in that laboratory and (ii) Capable of keeping exposures below the limits specified in paragraph (c) of this section. (2) The Chemical Hygiene Plan shall be readily available to employees, employee representatives and, upon request, to the Assistant Secretary. (3) The Chemical Hygiene Plan shall include each of the following elements and shall indicate specific measures that the employer will take to ensure laboratory employee protection: (i) Standard operating procedures relevant to safety and health considerations to be followed when laboratory work involves the use of hazardous chemicals; (ii) Criteria that the employer will use to determine and implement control measures to reduce employee exposure to hazardous chemicals including engineering controls, the use of personal protective equipment and hygiene practices; particular attention shall be given to the selection of control measures for chemicals that are known to be extremely hazardous; (iii) A requirement that fume hoods and other protective equipment are functioning properly and specific measures that shall be taken to ensure proper and adequate performance of such equipment; (iv) Provisions for employee information and training as prescribed in paragraph (f) of this section; (v) The circumstances under which a particular laboratory operation, procedure or activity shall require prior approval from the employer or the employer's designee before implementation; (vi) Provisions for medical consultation and medical examinations in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section; (vii) Designation of personnel responsible for implementation of the Chemical Hygiene Plan including the assignment of a Chemical Hygiene Officer and, if appropriate, establishment of a Chemical Hygiene Committee; and (viii) Provisions for additional employee protection for work with particularly hazardous substances. These include “select carcinogens,” reproductive toxins and substances which have a high degree of acute toxicity. Specific consideration shall be given to the following provisions which shall be included where appropriate: (A) Establishment of a designated area; (B) Use of containment devices such as fume hoods or glove boxes; (C) Procedures for safe removal of contaminated waste; and (D) Decontamination procedures. (4) The employer shall review and evaluate the effectiveness of the Chemical Hygiene Plan at least annually and update it as necessary. (f) Employee information and training. (2) Such information shall be provided at the time of an employee's initial assignment to a work area where hazardous chemicals are present and prior to assignments involving new exposure situations. The frequency of refresher information and training shall be determined by the employer. (3) Information. (i) The contents of this standard and its appendices which shall be made available to employees; (ii) The location and availability of the employer's Chemical Hygiene Plan; (iii) The permissible exposure limits for OSHA regulated substances or recommended exposure limits for other hazardous chemicals where there is no applicable OSHA standard; (iv) Signs and symptoms associated with exposures to hazardous chemicals used in the laboratory; and (v) The location and availability of known reference material on the hazards, safe handling, storage and disposal of hazardous chemicals found in the laboratory including, but not limited to, safety data sheets received from the chemical supplier. (4) Training. (A) Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released, etc.); (B) The physical and health hazards of chemicals in the work area; and (C) The measures employees can take to protect themselves from these hazards, including specific procedures the employer has implemented to protect employees from exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used. (ii) The employee shall be trained on the applicable details of the employer's written Chemical Hygiene Plan. (g) Medical consultation and medical examinations. (i) Whenever an employee develops signs or symptoms associated with a hazardous chemical to which the employee may have been exposed in the laboratory, the employee shall be provided an opportunity to receive an appropriate medical examination. (ii) Where exposure monitoring reveals an exposure level routinely above the action level (or in the absence of an action level, the PEL) for an OSHA regulated substance for which there are exposure monitoring and medical surveillance requirements, medical surveillance shall be established for the affected employee as prescribed by the particular standard. (iii) Whenever an event takes place in the work area such as a spill, leak, explosion or other occurrence resulting in the likelihood of a hazardous exposure, the affected employee shall be provided an opportunity for a medical consultation. Such consultation shall be for the purpose of determining the need for a medical examination. (2) All medical examinations and consultations shall be performed by or under the direct supervision of a licensed physician and shall be provided without cost to the employee, without loss of pay and at a reasonable time and place. (3) Information provided to the physician. (i) The identity of the hazardous chemical(s) to which the employee may have been exposed; (ii) A description of the conditions under which the exposure occurred including quantitative exposure data, if available; and (iii) A description of the signs and symptoms of exposure that the employee is experiencing, if any. (4) Physician's written opinion. (A) Any recommendation for further medical follow-up; (B) The results of the medical examination and any associated tests; (C) Any medical condition which may be revealed in the course of the examination which may place the employee at increased risk as a result of exposure to a hazardous chemical found in the workplace; and (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the consultation or medical examination and any medical condition that may require further examination or treatment. (ii) The written opinion shall not reveal specific findings of diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure. (h) Hazard identification. (i) Employers shall ensure that labels on incoming containers of hazardous chemicals are not removed or defaced. (ii) Employers shall maintain any safety data sheets that are received with incoming shipments of hazardous chemicals, and ensure that they are readily accessible to laboratory employees. (2) The following provisions shall apply to chemical substances developed in the laboratory: (i) If the composition of the chemical substance which is produced exclusively for the laboratory's use is known, the employer shall determine if it is a hazardous chemical as defined in paragraph (b) of this section. If the chemical is determined to be hazardous, the employer shall provide appropriate training as required under paragraph (f) of this section. (ii) If the chemical produced is a byproduct whose composition is not known, the employer shall assume that the substance is hazardous and shall implement paragraph (e) of this section. (iii) If the chemical substance is produced for another user outside of the laboratory, the employer shall comply with the Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) including the requirements for preparation of safety data sheets and labeling. (i) Use of respirators. (j) Recordkeeping. (2) The employer shall assure that such records are kept, transferred, and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20. (k) [Reserved] (l) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1910.1450—National Research Council Recommendations Concerning Chemical Hygiene In Laboratories (Non-Mandatory) To assist employers in developing an appropriate laboratory Chemical Hygiene Plan (CHP), the following non-mandatory recommendations were based on the National Research Council's (NRC) 2011 edition of “Prudent Practices in the Laboratory: Handling and Management of Chemical Hazards.” This reference, henceforth referred to as “Prudent Practices,” is available from the National Academies Press, 500 Fifth Street NW., Washington DC 20001 ( www.nap.edu “Prudent Practices” deals with both general laboratory safety and many types of chemical hazards, while the Laboratory standard is concerned primarily with chemical health hazards as a result of chemical exposures. The recommendations from “Prudent Practices” have been paraphrased, combined, or otherwise reorganized in order to adapt them for this purpose. However, their sense has not been changed. Section F contains information from the U.S. Chemical Safety Board's (CSB) Fiscal Year 2011 Annual Performance and Accountability report and Section F contains recommendations extracted from the CSB's 2011 case study, “Texas Tech University Laboratory Explosion,” available from: http://www.csb.gov/. Culture of Safety With the promulgation of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Laboratory standard (29 CFR 1910.1450), a culture of safety consciousness, accountability, organization, and education has developed in industrial, governmental, and academic laboratories. Safety and training programs have been implemented to promote the safe handling of chemicals from ordering to disposal, and to train laboratory personnel in safe practices. Laboratory personnel must realize that the welfare and safety of each individual depends on clearly defined attitudes of teamwork and personal responsibility. Learning to participate in this culture of habitual risk assessment, experiment planning, and consideration of worst-case possibilities—for oneself and one's fellow workers—is as much part of a scientific education as learning the theoretical background of experiments or the step-by-step protocols for doing them in a professional manner. A crucial component of chemical education for all personnel is to nurture basic attitudes and habits of prudent behavior so that safety is a valued and inseparable part of all laboratory activities throughout their career. Over the years, special techniques have been developed for handling chemicals safely. Local, state, and federal regulations hold institutions that sponsor chemical laboratories accountable for providing safe working environments. Beyond regulation, employers and scientists also hold themselves personally responsible for their own safety, the safety of their colleagues and the safety of the general public. A sound safety organization that is respected by all requires the participation and support of laboratory administrators, workers, and students. A successful health and safety program requires a daily commitment from everyone in the organization. To be most effective, safety and health must be balanced with, and incorporated into, laboratory processes. A strong safety and health culture is the result of positive workplace attitudes—from the chief executive officer to the newest hire; involvement and buy-in of all members of the workforce; mutual, meaningful, and measurable safety and health improvement goals; and policies and procedures that serve as reference tools, rather than obscure rules. In order to perform their work in a prudent manner, laboratory personnel must consider the health, physical, and environmental hazards of the chemicals they plan to use in an experiment. However, the ability to accurately identify and assess laboratory hazards must be taught and encouraged through training and ongoing organizational support. This training must be at the core of every good health and safety program. For management to lead, personnel to assess worksite hazards, and hazards to be eliminated or controlled, everyone involved must be trained. A. General Principles 1. Minimize All Chemical Exposures and Risks Because few laboratory chemicals are without hazards, general precautions for handling all laboratory chemicals should be adopted. In addition to these general guidelines, specific guidelines for chemicals that are used frequently or are particularly hazardous should be adopted. Laboratory personnel should conduct their work under conditions that minimize the risks from both known and unknown hazardous substances. Before beginning any laboratory work, the hazards and risks associated with an experiment or activity should be determined and the necessary safety precautions implemented. Every laboratory should develop facility-specific policies and procedures for the highest-risk materials and procedures used in their laboratory. To identify these, consideration should be given to past accidents, process conditions, chemicals used in large volumes, and particularly hazardous chemicals. Perform Risk Assessments for Hazardous Chemicals and Procedures Prior to Laboratory Work: (a) Identify chemicals to be used, amounts required, and circumstances of use in the experiment. Consider any special employee or laboratory conditions that could create or increase a hazard. Consult sources of safety and health information and experienced scientists to ensure that those conducting the risk assessment have sufficient expertise. (b) Evaluate the hazards posed by the chemicals and the experimental conditions. The evaluation should cover toxic, physical, reactive, flammable, explosive, radiation, and biological hazards, as well as any other potential hazards posed by the chemicals. (c) For a variety of physical and chemical reasons, reaction scale-ups pose special risks, which merit additional prior review and precautions. (d) Select appropriate controls to minimize risk, including use of engineering controls, administrative controls, and personal protective equipment (PPE) to protect workers from hazards. The controls must ensure that OSHA's Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs) are not exceeded. Prepare for contingencies and be aware of the institutional procedures in the event of emergencies and accidents. One sample approach to risk assessment is to answer these five questions: (a) What are the hazards? (b) What is the worst thing that could happen? (c) What can be done to prevent this from happening? (d) What can be done to protect from these hazards? (e) What should be done if something goes wrong? 2. Avoid Underestimation of Risk Even for substances of no known significant hazard, exposure should be minimized; when working with substances that present special hazards, special precautions should be taken. Reference should be made to the safety data sheet (SDS) that is provided for each chemical. Unless otherwise known, one should assume that any mixture will be more toxic than its most toxic component and that all substances of unknown toxicity are toxic. Determine the physical and health hazards associated with chemicals before working with them. This determination may involve consulting literature references, laboratory chemical safety summaries (LCSSs), SDSs, or other reference materials. Consider how the chemicals will be processed and determine whether the changing states or forms will change the nature of the hazard. Review your plan, operating limits, chemical evaluations and detailed risk assessment with other chemists, especially those with experience with similar materials and protocols. Before working with chemicals, know your facility's policies and procedures for how to handle an accidental spill or fire. Emergency telephone numbers should be posted in a prominent area. Know the location of all safety equipment and the nearest fire alarm and telephone. 3. Adhere to the Hierarchy of Controls The hierarchy of controls prioritizes intervention strategies based on the premise that the best way to control a hazard is to systematically remove it from the workplace, rather than relying on employees to reduce their exposure. The types of measures that may be used to protect employees (listed from most effective to least effective) are: engineering controls, administrative controls, work practices, and PPE. Engineering controls, such as chemical hoods, physically separate the employee from the hazard. Administrative controls, such as employee scheduling, are established by management to help minimize the employees' exposure time to hazardous chemicals. Work practice controls are tasks that are performed in a designated way to minimize or eliminate hazards. Personal protective equipment and apparel are additional protection provided under special circumstances and when exposure is unavoidable. Face and eye protection is necessary to prevent ingestion and skin absorption of hazardous chemicals. At a minimum, safety glasses, with side shields, should be used for all laboratory work. Chemical splash goggles are more appropriate than regular safety glasses to protect against hazards such as projectiles, as well as when working with glassware under reduced or elevated pressures (e.g., sealed tube reactions), when handling potentially explosive compounds (particularly during distillations), and when using glassware in high-temperature operations. Do not allow laboratory chemicals to come in contact with skin. Select gloves carefully to ensure that they are impervious to the chemicals being used and are of correct thickness to allow reasonable dexterity while also ensuring adequate barrier protection. Lab coats and gloves should be worn when working with hazardous materials in a laboratory. Wear closed-toe shoes and long pants or other clothing that covers the legs when in a laboratory where hazardous chemicals are used. Additional protective clothing should be used when there is significant potential for skin-contact exposure to chemicals. The protective characteristics of this clothing must be matched to the hazard. Never wear gloves or laboratory coats outside the laboratory or into areas where food is stored and consumed. 4. Provide Laboratory Ventilation The best way to prevent exposure to airborne substances is to prevent their escape into the working atmosphere by the use of hoods and other ventilation devices. To determine the best choice for laboratory ventilation using engineering controls for personal protection, employers are referred to Table 9.3 of the 2011 edition of “Prudent Practices.” Laboratory chemical hoods are the most important components used to protect laboratory personnel from exposure to hazardous chemicals. (a) Toxic or corrosive chemicals that require vented storage should be stored in vented cabinets instead of in a chemical hood. (b) Chemical waste should not be disposed of by evaporation in a chemical hood. (c) Keep chemical hood areas clean and free of debris at all times. (d) Solid objects and materials, such as paper, should be prevented from entering the exhaust ducts as they can reduce the air flow. (e) Chemical hoods should be maintained, monitored and routinely tested for proper performance. A laboratory ventilation system should include the following characteristics and practices: (a) Heating and cooling should be adequate for the comfort of workers and operation of equipment. Before modification of any building HVAC, the impact on laboratory or hood ventilation should be considered, as well as how laboratory ventilation changes may affect the building HVAC. (b) A negative pressure differential should exist between the amount of air exhausted from the laboratory and the amount supplied to the laboratory to prevent uncontrolled chemical vapors from leaving the laboratory. (c) Local exhaust ventilation devices should be appropriate to the materials and operations in the laboratory. (d) The air in chemical laboratories should be continuously replaced so that concentrations of odoriferous or toxic substances do not increase during the workday. (e) Laboratory air should not be recirculated but exhausted directly outdoors. (f) Air pressure should be negative with respect to the rest of the building. Local capture equipment and systems should be designed only by an experienced engineer or industrial hygienist. (g) Ventilation systems should be inspected and maintained on a regular basis. There should be no areas where air remains static or areas that have unusually high airflow velocities. Before work begins, laboratory workers should be provided with proper training that includes how to use the ventilation equipment, how to ensure that it is functioning properly, the consequences of improper use, what to do in the event of a system failure or power outage, special considerations, and the importance of signage and postings. 5. Institute a Chemical Hygiene Program A comprehensive chemical hygiene program is required. It should be designed to minimize exposures, injuries, illnesses and incidents. There should be a regular, continuing effort that includes program oversight, safe facilities, chemical hygiene planning, training, emergency preparedness and chemical security. The chemical hygiene program must be reviewed annually and updated as necessary whenever new processes, chemicals, or equipment is implemented. Its recommendations should be followed in all laboratories. 6. Observe the PELs and TLVs OSHA's Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs) must not be exceeded. The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists' Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) should also not be exceeded. B. Responsibilities Persons responsible for chemical hygiene include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Chemical Hygiene Officer (a) Establishes, maintains, and revises the chemical hygiene plan (CHP). (b) Creates and revises safety rules and regulations. (c) Monitors procurement, use, storage, and disposal of chemicals. (d) Conducts regular inspections of the laboratories, preparations rooms, and chemical storage rooms, and submits detailed laboratory inspection reports to administration. (e) Maintains inspection, personnel training, and inventory records. (f) Assists laboratory supervisors in developing and maintaining adequate facilities. (g) Seeks ways to improve the chemical hygiene program. 2. Department Chairperson or Director (a) Assumes responsibility for personnel engaged in the laboratory use of hazardous chemicals. (b) Provides the chemical hygiene officer (CHO) with the support necessary to implement and maintain the CHP. (c) After receipt of laboratory inspection report from the CHO, meets with laboratory supervisors to discuss cited violations and to ensure timely actions to protect trained laboratory personnel and facilities and to ensure that the department remains in compliance with all applicable federal, state, university, local and departmental codes and regulations. (d) Provides budgetary arrangements to ensure the health and safety of the departmental personnel, visitors, and students. 3. Departmental Safety Committee reviews accident reports and makes appropriate recommendations to the department chairperson regarding proposed changes in the laboratory procedures. 4. Laboratory Supervisor or Principal Investigator has overall responsibility for chemical hygiene in the laboratory, including responsibility to: (a) Ensure that laboratory personnel comply with the departmental CHP and do not operate equipment or handle hazardous chemicals without proper training and authorization. (b) Always wear personal protective equipment (PPE) that is compatible to the degree of hazard of the chemical. (c) Follow all pertinent safety rules when working in the laboratory to set an example. (d) Review laboratory procedures for potential safety problems before assigning to other laboratory personnel. (e) Ensure that visitors follow the laboratory rules and assumes responsibility for laboratory visitors. (f) Ensure that PPE is available and properly used by each laboratory employee and visitor. (g) Maintain and implement safe laboratory practices. (h) Provide regular, formal chemical hygiene and housekeeping inspections, including routine inspections of emergency equipment; (i) Monitor the facilities and the chemical fume hoods to ensure that they are maintained and function properly. Contact the appropriate person, as designated by the department chairperson, to report problems with the facilities or the chemical fume hoods. 5. Laboratory Personnel (a) Read, understand, and follow all safety rules and regulations that apply to the work area; (b) Plan and conduct each operation in accordance with the institutional chemical hygiene procedures; (c) Promote good housekeeping practices in the laboratory or work area. (d) Notify the supervisor of any hazardous conditions or unsafe work practices in the work area. (e) Use PPE as appropriate for each procedure that involves hazardous chemicals. C. The Laboratory Facility General Laboratory Design Considerations Wet chemical spaces and those with a higher degree of hazard should be separated from other spaces by a wall or protective barrier wherever possible. If the areas cannot be separated, then workers in lower hazard spaces may require additional protection from the hazards in connected spaces. 1. Laboratory Layout and Furnishing (a) Work surfaces should be chemically resistant, smooth, and easy to clean. (b) Hand washing sinks for hazardous materials may require elbow, foot, or electronic controls for safe operation. (c) Wet laboratory areas should have chemically resistant, impermeable, slip-resistant flooring. (d) Walls should be finished with a material that is easy to clean and maintain. (e) Doors should have view panels to prevent accidents and should open in the direction of egress. (f) Operable windows should not be present in laboratories, particularly if there are chemical hoods or other local ventilation systems present. 2. Safety Equipment and Utilities (a) An adequate number and placement of safety showers, eyewash units, and fire extinguishers should be provided for the laboratory. (b) Use of water sprinkler systems is resisted by some laboratories because of the presence of electrical equipment or water-reactive materials, but it is still generally safer to have sprinkler systems installed. A fire large enough to trigger the sprinkler system would have the potential to cause far more destruction than the local water damage. D. Chemical Hygiene Plan (CHP) The OSHA Laboratory standard defines a CHP as “a written program developed and implemented by the employer which sets forth procedures, equipment, personal protective equipment and work practices that are capable of protecting employees from the health hazards presented by hazardous chemicals used in that particular workplace.” (29 CFR 1910.1450(b)). The Laboratory Standard requires a CHP: “Where hazardous chemicals as defined by this standard are used in the workplace, the employer shall develop and carry out the provisions of a written Chemical Hygiene Plan.” (29 CFR 1910.1450(e)(1)). The CHP is the foundation of the laboratory safety program and must be reviewed and updated, as needed, and at least on an annual basis to reflect changes in policies and personnel. A CHP should be facility specific and can assist in promoting a culture of safety to protect workers from exposure to hazardous materials. 1. The Laboratory's CHP must be readily available to workers and capable of protecting workers from health hazards and minimizing exposure. Include the following topics in the CHP: (a) Individual chemical hygiene responsibilities; (b) Standard operating procedures; (c) Personal protective equipment, engineering controls and apparel; (d) Laboratory equipment; (e) Safety equipment; (f) Chemical management; (g) Housekeeping; (h) Emergency procedures for accidents and spills; (i) Chemical waste; (j) Training; (k) Safety rules and regulations; (l) Laboratory design and ventilation; (m) Exposure monitoring; (n) Compressed gas safety; (o) Medical consultation and examination. It should be noted that the nature of laboratory work may necessitate addressing biological safety, radiation safety and security issues. 2. Chemical Procurement, Distribution, and Storage Prudent chemical management includes the following processes: Chemical Procurement: (a) Information on proper handling, storage, and disposal should be known to those who will be involved before a substance is received. (b) Only containers with adequate identifying labels should be accepted. (c) Ideally, a central location should be used for receiving all chemical shipments. (d) Shipments with breakage or leakage should be refused or opened in a chemical hood. (e) Only the minimum amount of the chemical needed to perform the planned work should be ordered. (f) Purchases of high risk chemicals should be reviewed and approved by the CHO. (g) Proper protective equipment and handling and storage procedures should be in place before receiving a shipment. Chemical Storage: (a) Chemicals should be separated and stored according to hazard category and compatibility. (b) SDS and label information should be followed for storage requirements. (c) Maintain existing labels on incoming containers of chemicals and other materials. (d) Labels on containers used for storing hazardous chemicals must include the chemical identification and appropriate hazard warnings. (e) The contents of all other chemical containers and transfer vessels, including, but not limited to, beakers, flasks, reaction vessels, and process equipment, should be properly identified. (f) Chemical shipments should be dated upon receipt and stock rotated. (g) Peroxide formers should be dated upon receipt, again dated upon opening, and stored away from heat and light with tight-fitting, nonmetal lids. (h) Open shelves used for chemical storage should be secured to the wall and contain 3/4 (i) Consult the SDS and keep incompatibles separate during transport, storage, use, and disposal. (j) Oxidizers, reducing agents, and fuels should be stored separately to prevent contact in the event of an accident. (k) Chemicals should not be stored in the chemical hood, on the floor, in areas of egress, on the benchtop, or in areas near heat or in direct sunlight. (l) Laboratory-grade, flammable-rated refrigerators and freezers should be used to store sealed chemical containers of flammable liquids that require cool storage. Do not store food or beverages in the laboratory refrigerator. (m) Highly hazardous chemicals should be stored in a well-ventilated and secure area designated for that purpose. (n) Flammable chemicals should be stored in a spark-free environment and in approved flammable-liquid containers and storage cabinets. Grounding and bonding should be used to prevent static charge buildups when dispensing solvents. (o) Chemical storage and handling rooms should be controlled-access areas. They should have proper ventilation, appropriate signage, diked floors, and fire suppression systems. Chemical Handling: (a) As described above, a risk assessment should be conducted prior to beginning work with any hazardous chemical for the first time. (b) All SDS and label information should be read before using a chemical for the first time. (c) Trained laboratory workers should ensure that proper engineering controls (ventilation) and PPE are in place. Chemical Inventory: (a) Prudent management of chemicals in any laboratory is greatly facilitated by keeping an accurate inventory of the chemicals stored. (b) Unneeded items should be discarded or returned to the storeroom. Transporting Chemicals: (a) Secondary containment devices should be used when transporting chemicals. (b) When transporting chemicals outside of the laboratory or between stockrooms and laboratories, the transport container should be break-resistant. (c) High-traffic areas should be avoided. Transferring Chemicals: (a) Use adequate ventilation (such as a fume hood) when transferring even a small amount of a particularly hazardous substance (PHS). (b) While drum storage is not appropriate for laboratories, chemical stockrooms may purchase drum quantities of solvents used in high volumes. Ground and bond the drum and receiving vessel when transferring flammable liquids from a drum to prevent static charge buildup. (c) If chemicals from commercial sources are repackaged into transfer vessels, the new containers should be labeled with all essential information on the original container. Shipping Chemicals: 3. Waste Management A waste management plan should be in place before work begins on any laboratory activity. The plan should utilize the following hierarchy of practices: (a) Reduce waste sources. The best approach to minimize waste generation is by reducing the scale of operations, reducing its formation during operations, and, if possible, substituting less hazardous chemicals for a particular operation. (b) Reuse surplus materials. Only the amount of material necessary for an experiment should be purchased, and, if possible, materials should be reused. (c) Recycle waste. If waste cannot be prevented or minimized, the organization should consider recycling chemicals that can be safely recovered or used as fuel. (d) Dispose of waste properly. Sink disposal may not be appropriate. Proper waste disposal methods include incineration, treatment, and land disposal. The organization's environmental health and safety (EHS) office should be consulted in determining which methods are appropriate for different types of waste. Collection and Storage of Waste: (a) Chemical waste should be accumulated at or near the point of generation, under the control of laboratory workers. (b) Each waste type should be stored in a compatible container pending transfer or disposal. Waste containers should be clearly labeled and kept sealed when not in use. (c) Incompatible waste types should be kept separate to ensure that heat generation, gas evolution, or another reaction does not occur. (d) Waste containers should be segregated by how they will be managed. Waste containers should be stored in a designated location that does not interfere with normal laboratory operations. Ventilated storage and secondary containment may be appropriate for certain waste types. (e) Waste containers should be clearly labeled and kept sealed when not in use. Labels should include the accumulation start date and hazard warnings as appropriate. (f) Non-explosive electrical systems, grounding and bonding between floors and containers, and non-sparking conductive floors and containers should be used in the central waste accumulation area to minimize fire and explosion hazards. Fire suppression systems, specialized ventilation systems, and dikes should be installed in the central waste accumulation area. Waste management workers should be trained in proper waste handling procedures as well as contingency planning and emergency response. Trained laboratory workers most familiar with the waste should be actively involved in waste management decisions to ensure that the waste is managed safely and efficiently. Engineering controls should be implemented as necessary, and personal protective equipment should be worn by workers involved in waste management. 4. Inspection Program Maintenance and regular inspection of laboratory equipment are essential parts of the laboratory safety program. Management should participate in the design of a laboratory inspection program to ensure that the facility is safe and healthy, workers are adequately trained, and proper procedures are being followed. Types of inspections: The program should include an appropriate combination of routine inspections, self-audits, program audits, peer inspections, EHS inspections, and inspections by external entities. Elements of an inspection: (a) Inspectors should bring a checklist to ensure that all issues are covered and a camera to document issues that require correction. (b) Conversations with workers should occur during the inspection, as they can provide valuable information and allow inspectors an opportunity to show workers how to fix problems. (c) Issues resolved during the inspection should be noted. (d) An inspection report containing all findings and recommendations should be prepared for management and other appropriate workers. (e) Management should follow-up on the inspection to ensure that all corrections are implemented. 5. Medical Consultation and Examination The employer must provide all employees who work with hazardous chemicals an opportunity to receive medical attention, including any follow-up examinations that the examining physician determines to be necessary, whenever an employee develops signs or symptoms associated with a hazardous chemical to which the employee may have been exposed in the laboratory. If an employee encounters a spill, leak, explosion or other occurrence resulting in the likelihood of a hazardous exposure, the affected employee must be provided an opportunity for a medical consultation by a licensed physician. All medical examinations and consultations must be performed by or under the direct supervision of a licensed physician and must be provided without cost to the employee, without loss of pay and at a reasonable time and place. The identity of the hazardous chemical, a description of the incident, and any signs and symptoms that the employee may experience must be relayed to the physician. 6. Records All accident, fatality, illness, injury, and medical records and exposure monitoring records must be retained by the institution in accordance with the requirements of state and federal regulations (see 29 CFR part 1904 and § 1910.1450(j)). Any exposure monitoring results must be provided to affected laboratory staff within 15 working days after receipt of the results (29 CFR 1910.1450(d)(4)). 7. Signs Prominent signs of the following types should be posted: (a) Emergency telephone numbers of emergency personnel/facilities, supervisors, and laboratory workers; (b) Location signs for safety showers, eyewash stations, other safety and first aid equipment, and exits; and (c) Warnings at areas or equipment where special or unusual hazards exist. 8. Spills and Accidents Before beginning an experiment, know your facility's policies and procedures for how to handle an accidental release of a hazardous substance, a spill or a fire. Emergency response planning and training are especially important when working with highly toxic compounds. Emergency telephone numbers should be posted in a prominent area. Know the location of all safety equipment and the nearest fire alarm and telephone. Know who to notify in the event of an emergency. Be prepared to provide basic emergency treatment. Keep your co-workers informed of your activities so they can respond appropriately. Safety equipment, including spill control kits, safety shields, fire safety equipment, PPE, safety showers and eyewash units, and emergency equipment should be available in well-marked highly visible locations in all chemical laboratories. The laboratory supervisor or CHO is responsible for ensuring that all personnel are aware of the locations of fire extinguishers and are trained in their use. After an extinguisher has been used, designated personnel must promptly recharge or replace it (29 CFR 1910.157(c)(4)). The laboratory supervisor or CHO is also responsible for ensuring proper training and providing supplementary equipment as needed. Special care must be used when handling solutions of chemicals in syringes with needles. Do not recap needles, especially when they have been in contact with chemicals. Remove the needle and discard it immediately after use in the appropriate sharps containers. Blunt-tip needles are available from a number of commercial sources and should be used unless a sharp needle is required to puncture rubber septa or for subcutaneous injection. For unattended operations, laboratory lights should be left on, and signs should be posted to identify the nature of the experiment and the hazardous substances in use. Arrangements should be made, if possible, for other workers to periodically inspect the operation. Information should be clearly posted indicating who to contact in the event of an emergency. Depending on the nature of the hazard, special rules, precautions, and alert systems may be necessary. 9. Training and Information Personnel training at all levels within the organization, is essential. Responsibility and accountability throughout the organization are key elements in a strong safety and health program. The employer is required to provide employees with information and training to ensure that they are apprised of the hazards of chemicals present in their work area (29 CFR 1910.1450(f)). This information must be provided at the time of an employee's initial assignment to a work area where hazardous chemicals are present and prior to assignments involving new exposure situations. The frequency of refresher information and training should be determined by the employer. At a minimum, laboratory personnel should be trained on their facility's specific CHP, methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released), the physical and health hazards of chemicals in the work area and means to protect themselves from these hazards. Trained laboratory personnel must know shut-off procedures in case of an emergency. All SDSs must be made available to the employees. E. General Procedures for Working With Chemicals The risk of laboratory injuries can be reduced through adequate training, improved engineering, good housekeeping, safe work practice and personal behavior. 1. General Rules for Laboratory Work With Chemicals (a) Assigned work schedules should be followed unless a deviation is authorized by the laboratory supervisor. (b) Unauthorized experiments should not be performed. (c) Plan safety procedures before beginning any operation. (d) Follow standard operating procedures at all times. (e) Always read the SDS and label before using a chemical. (f) Wear appropriate PPE at all times. (g) To protect your skin from splashes, spills and drips, always wear long pants and closed-toe shoes. (h) Use appropriate ventilation when working with hazardous chemicals. (i) Pipetting should never be done by mouth. (j) Hands should be washed with soap and water immediately after working with any laboratory chemicals, even if gloves have been worn. (k) Eating, drinking, smoking, gum chewing, applying cosmetics, and taking medicine in laboratories where hazardous chemicals are used or stored should be strictly prohibited. (l) Food, beverages, cups, and other drinking and eating utensils should not be stored in areas where hazardous chemicals are handled or stored. (m) Laboratory refrigerators, ice chests, cold rooms, and ovens should not be used for food storage or preparation. (n) Contact the laboratory supervisor, Principal Investigator, CHO or EHS office with all safety questions or concerns. (o) Know the location and proper use of safety equipment. (p) Maintain situational awareness. (q) Make others aware of special hazards associated with your work. (r) Notify supervisors of chemical sensitivities or allergies. (s) Report all injuries, accidents, incidents, and near misses. (t) Unauthorized persons should not be allowed in the laboratory. (u) Report unsafe conditions to the laboratory supervisor or CHO. (v) Properly dispose of chemical wastes. Working Alone in the Laboratory Working alone in a laboratory is dangerous and should be strictly avoided. There have been many tragic accidents that illustrate this danger. Accidents are unexpected by definition, which is why coworkers should always be present. Workers should coordinate schedules to avoid working alone. Housekeeping Housekeeping can help reduce or eliminate a number of laboratory hazards. Proper housekeeping includes appropriate labeling and storage of chemicals, safe and regular cleaning of the facility, and proper arrangement of laboratory equipment. 2. Nanoparticles and Nanomaterials Nanoparticles and nanomaterials have different reactivities and interactions with biological systems than bulk materials, and understanding and exploiting these differences is an active area of research. However, these differences also mean that the risks and hazards associated with exposure to engineered nanomaterials are not well known. Because this is an area of ongoing research, consult trusted sources for the most up to date information available. Note that the higher reactivity of many nanoscale materials suggests that they should be treated as potential sources of ignition, accelerants, and fuel that could result in fire or explosion. Easily dispersed dry nanomaterials may pose the greatest health hazard because of the risk of inhalation. Operations involving these nanomaterials deserve more attention and more stringent controls than those where the nanomaterials are embedded in solid or suspended in liquid matrixes. Consideration should be given to all possible routes of exposure to nanomaterials including inhalation, ingestion, injection, and dermal contact (including eye and mucous membranes). Avoid handling nanomaterials in the open air in a free-particle state. Whenever possible, handle and store dispersible nanomaterials, whether suspended in liquids or in a dry particle form, in closed (tightly-sealed) containers. Unless cutting or grinding occurs, nanomaterials that are not in a free form (encapsulated in a solid or a nanocomposite) typically will not require engineering controls. If a synthesis is being performed to create nanomaterials, it is not enough to only consider the final material in the risk assessment, but consider the hazardous properties of the precursor materials as well. To minimize laboratory personnel exposure, conduct any work that could generate engineered nanoparticles in an enclosure that operates at a negative pressure differential compared to the laboratory personnel breathing zone. Limited data exist regarding the efficacy of PPE and ventilation systems against exposure to nanoparticles. However, until further information is available, it is prudent to follow standard chemical hygiene practices. Conduct a hazard evaluation to determine PPE appropriate for the level of hazard according to the requirements set forth in OSHA's Personal Protective Equipment standard (29 CFR 1910.132). 3. Highly Toxic and Explosive/Reactive Chemicals/Materials The use of highly toxic and explosive/reactive chemicals and materials has been an area of growing concern. The frequency of academic laboratory incidents in the U.S. is an area of significant concern for the Chemical Safety Board (CSB). The CSB issued a case study on an explosion at Texas Tech University in Lubbock, Texas, which severely injured a graduate student handling a high-energy metal compound. Since 2001, the CSB has gathered preliminary information on 120 different university laboratory incidents that resulted in 87 evacuations, 96 injuries, and three deaths. It is recommended that each facility keep a detailed inventory of highly toxic chemicals and explosive/reactive materials. There should be a record of the date of receipt, amount, location, and responsible individual for all acquisitions, syntheses, and disposal of these chemicals. A physical inventory should be performed annually to verify active inventory records. There should be a procedure in place to report security breaches, inventory discrepancies, losses, diversions, or suspected thefts. Procedures for disposal of highly toxic materials should be established before any experiments begin, possibly even before the chemicals are ordered. The procedures should address methods for decontamination of any laboratory equipment that comes into contact with highly toxic chemicals. All waste should be accumulated in clearly labeled impervious containers that are stored in unbreakable secondary containment. Highly reactive and explosive materials that may be used in the laboratory require appropriate procedures and training. An explosion can occur when a material undergoes a rapid reaction that results in a violent release of energy. Such reactions can happen spontaneously and can produce pressures, gases, and fumes that are hazardous. Some reagents pose a risk on contact with the atmosphere. It is prudent laboratory practice to use a safer alternative whenever possible. If at all possible, substitutes for highly acute, chronic, explosive, or reactive chemicals should be considered prior to beginning work and used whenever possible. 4. Compressed Gas Compressed gases expose laboratory personnel to both chemical and physical hazards. It is essential that these are monitored for leaks and have the proper labeling. By monitoring compressed gas inventories and disposing of or returning gases for which there is no immediate need, the laboratory can substantially reduce these risks. Leaking gas cylinders can cause serious hazards that may require an immediate evacuation of the area and activation of the emergency response system. Only appropriately trained hazmat responders may respond to stop a leaking gas cylinder under this situation. F. Safety Recommendations—Physical Hazards Physical hazards in the laboratory include combustible liquids, compressed gases, reactives, explosives and flammable chemicals, as well as high pressure/energy procedures, sharp objects and moving equipment. Injuries can result from bodily contact with rotating or moving objects, including mechanical equipment, parts, and devices. Personnel should not wear loose-fitting clothing, jewelry, or unrestrained long hair around machinery with moving parts. The Chemical Safety Board has identified the following key lessons for laboratories that address both physical and other hazards: (1) Ensure that research-specific hazards are evaluated and then controlled by developing specific written protocols and training. (2) Expand existing laboratory safety plans to ensure that all safety hazards, including physical hazards of chemicals, are addressed. (3) Ensure that the organization's EHS office reports directly to an identified individual/office with organizational authority to implement safety improvements. (4) Develop a verification program that ensures that the safety provisions of the CHP are communicated, followed, and enforced at all levels within the organization. (5) Document and communicate all laboratory near-misses and previous incidents to track safety, provide opportunities for education and improvement to drive safety changes at the university. (6) Manage the hazards unique to laboratory chemical research in the academic environment. Utilize available practice guidance that identifies and describes methodologies to assess and control hazards. (7) Written safety protocols and training are necessary to manage laboratory risk. G. Emergency Planning In addition to laboratory safety issues, laboratory personnel should be familiar with established facility policies and procedures regarding emergency situations. Topics may include, but are not limited to: (1) Evacuation procedures—when it is appropriate and alternate routes; (2) Emergency shutdown procedures—equipment shutdown and materials that should be stored safely; (3) Communications during an emergency—what to expect, how to report, where to call or look for information; (4) How and when to use a fire extinguisher; (5) Security issues—preventing tailgating and unauthorized access; (6) Protocol for absences due to travel restrictions or illness; (7) Safe practices for power outage; (8) Shelter in place—when it is appropriate; (9) Handling suspicious mail or phone calls; (10) Laboratory-specific protocols relating to emergency planning and response; (11) Handling violent behavior in the workplace; and (12) First-aid and CPR training, including automated external defibrillator training if available. It is prudent that laboratory personnel are also trained in how to respond to short-term, long-term and large-scale emergencies. Laboratory security can play a role in reducing the likelihood of some emergencies and assisting in preparation and response for others. Every institution, department, and individual laboratory should consider having an emergency preparedness plan. The level of detail of the plan will vary depending on the function of the group and institutional planning efforts already in place. Emergency planning is a dynamic process. As personnel, operations, and events change, plans will need to be updated and modified. To determine the type and level of emergency planning needed, laboratory personnel need to perform a vulnerability assessment. Periodic drills to assist in training and evaluation of the emergency plan are recommended as part of the training program. H. Emergency Procedures (1) Fire alarm policy. Most organizations use fire alarms whenever a building needs to be evacuated—for any reason. When a fire alarm sounds in the facility, evacuate immediately after extinguishing all equipment flames. Check on and assist others who may require help evacuating. (2) Emergency safety equipment. The following safety elements should be met: a. A written emergency action plan has been provided to workers; b. Fire extinguishers, eyewash units, and safety showers are available and tested on a regular basis; and c. Fire blankets, first-aid equipment, fire alarms, and telephones are available and accessible. (3) Chemical spills. Workers should contact the CHO or EHS office for instructions before cleaning up a chemical spill. All SDS and label instructions should be followed, and appropriate PPE should be worn during spill cleanup. (4) Accident procedures. In the event of an accident, immediately notify appropriate personnel and local emergency responders. Provide an SDS of any chemical involved to the attending physician. Complete an accident report and submit it to the appropriate office or individual within 24 hours. (5) Employee safety training program. New workers should attend safety training before they begin any activities. Additional training should be provided when they advance in their duties or are required to perform a task for the first time. Training documents should be recorded and maintained. Training should include hands-on instruction of how to use safety equipment appropriately. (6) Conduct drills. Practice building evacuations, including the use of alternate routes. Practice shelter-in-place, including plans for extended stays. Walk the fastest route from your work area to the nearest fire alarm, emergency eye wash and emergency shower. Learn how each is activated. In the excitement of an actual emergency, people rely on what they learned from drills, practice and training. (7) Contingency plans. All laboratories should have long-term contingency plans in place (e.g., for pandemics). Scheduling, workload, utilities and alternate work sites may need to be considered. I. Laboratory Security Laboratory security has evolved in the past decade, reducing the likelihood of some emergencies and assisting in preparation and response for others. Most security measures are based on the laboratory's vulnerability. Risks to laboratory security include, but are not limited to: (1) Theft or diversion of chemicals, biologicals, and radioactive or proprietary materials, mission-critical or high-value equipment; (2) Threats from activist groups; (3) Intentional release of, or exposure to, hazardous materials; (4) Sabotage or vandalism of chemicals or high-value equipment; (5) Loss or release of sensitive information; and (6) Rogue work or unauthorized laboratory experimentation. Security systems in the laboratory are used to detect and respond to a security breach, or a potential security breach, as well as to delay criminal activity by imposing multiple layered barriers of increasing stringency. A good laboratory security system will increase overall safety for laboratory personnel and the public, improve emergency preparedness by assisting with preplanning, and lower the organization's liability by incorporating more rigorous planning, staffing, training, and command systems and implementing emergency communications protocols, drills, background checks, card access systems, video surveillance, and other measures. The security plan should clearly delineate response to security issues, including the coordination of institution and laboratory personnel with both internal and external responders. Appendix B to § 1910.1450—References (Non-Mandatory) The following references are provided to assist the employer in the development of a Chemical Hygiene Plan. The materials listed below are offered as non-mandatory guidance. References listed here do not imply specific endorsement of a book, opinion, technique, policy or a specific solution for a safety or health problem. Other references not listed here may better meet the needs of a specific laboratory. (a) Materials for the development of the Chemical Hygiene Plan: 1. American Chemical Society, Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories, 4th edition, 1985. 2. Fawcett, H.H. and W. S. Wood, Safety and Accident Prevention in Chemical Operations, 2nd edition, Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1982. 3. Flury, Patricia A., Environmental Health and Safety in the Hospital Laboratory, Charles C. Thomas Publisher, Springfield IL, 1978. 4. Green, Michael E. and Turk, Amos, Safety in Working with Chemicals, Macmillan Publishing Co., NY, 1978. 5. Kaufman, James A., Laboratory Safety Guidelines, Dow Chemical Co., Box 1713, Midland, MI 48640, 1977. 6. National Institutes of Health, NIH Guidelines for the Laboratory use of Chemical Carcinogens, NIH Pub. No. 81-2385, GPO, Washington, DC 20402, 1981. 7. National Research Council, Prudent Practices for Disposal of Chemicals from Laboratories, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1983. 8. National Research Council, Prudent Practices for Handling Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1981. 9. Renfrew, Malcolm, Ed., Safety in the Chemical Laboratory, Vol. IV, J. Chem. Ed., 10. Steere, Norman V., Ed., Safety in the Chemical Laboratory, J. Chem. Ed. 11. Steere, Norman V., Handbook of Laboratory Safety, the Chemical Rubber Company Cleveland, OH, 1971. 12. Young, Jay A., Ed., Improving Safety in the Chemical Laboratory, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York, 1987. (b) Hazardous Substances Information: 1. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents in the Workroom Environment with Intended Changes, 6500 Glenway Avenue, Bldg. D-7 Cincinnati, OH 45211-4438 (latest edition). 2. Annual Report on Carcinogens, National Toxicology Program U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC, (latest edition). 3. Best Company, Best Safety Directory, Vols. I and II, Oldwick, N.J., 1981. 4. Bretherick, L., Handbook of Reactive Chemical Hazards, 2nd edition, Butterworths, London, 1979. 5. Bretherick, L., Hazards in the Chemical Laboratory, 3rd edition, Royal Society of Chemistry, London, 1986. 6. Code of Federal Regulations, 29 CFR part 1910 subpart Z. U.S. Govt. Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402 (latest edition). 7. IARC Monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Man, World Health Organization Publications Center, 49 Sheridan Avenue, Albany, New York 12210 (latest editions). 8. NIOSH/OSHA Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards. NIOSH Pub. No. 85-114, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC, 1985 (or latest edition). 9. Occupational Health Guidelines, NIOSH/OSHA NIOSH Pub. No. 81-123 U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC, 1981. 10. Patty, F.A., Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY (Five Volumes). 11. Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Revised Annually, for sale from Superintendent of Documents U.S. Govt. Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. 12. The Merck Index: An Encyclopedia of Chemicals and Drugs. Merck and Company Inc. Rahway, N.J., 1976 (or latest edition). 13. Sax, N.I. Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials, 5th edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold, NY., 1979. 14. Sittig, Marshall, Handbook of Toxic and Hazardous Chemicals, Noyes Publications, Park Ridge, NJ, 1981. (c) Information on Ventilation: 1. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists Industrial Ventilation (latest edition), 6500 Glenway Avenue, Bldg. D-7, Cincinnati, Ohio 45211-4438. 2. American National Standards Institute, Inc. American National Standards Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems ANSI Z 9.2-1979 American National Standards Institute, N.Y. 1979. 3. Imad, A.P. and Watson, C.L. Ventilation Index: An Easy Way to Decide about Hazardous Liquids, Professional Safety pp 15-18, April 1980. 4. National Fire Protection Association, Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals NFPA-45, 1982. Safety Standard for Laboratories in Health Related Institutions, NFPA, 56c, 1980. Fire Protection Guide on Hazardous Materials, 7th edition, 1978. National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. 5. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA), Standard for Laboratory Fume Hoods, SAMA LF7-1980, 1101 16th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20036. (d) Information on Availability of Referenced Material: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103. [55 FR 3327, Jan. 31, 1990; 55 FR 7967, Mar. 6, 1990; 55 FR 12111, Mar. 30, 1990; 57 FR 29204, July 1, 1992; 61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 76 FR 33609, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17887, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 4325, Jan. 22, 2013] §§ 1910.1451-1910.1499 [Reserved] All of subpart Z issued under 29 U.S.C. 655(b), except those substances that have exposure limits listed in Tables Z-1, Z-2, and Z-3 of § 1910.1000. The latter were issued under 29 U.S.C. 655(a). Section 1910.1000, Tables Z-1, Z-2 and Z-3 also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553, but not under 29 CFR part 1911 except for the arsenic (organic compounds), benzene, cotton dust, and chromium (VI) listings. Section 1910.1001 also issued under 40 U.S.C. 3704 and 5 U.S.C. 553. Section 1910.1002 also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553, but not under 29 U.S.C. 655 or 29 CFR part 1911. Sections 1910.1018, 1910.1029, and 1910.1200 also issued under 29 U.S.C. 653. Section 1910.1030 also issued under Public Law 106-430, 114 Stat. 1901. Section 1910.1201 also issued under 49 U.S.C. 1801-1819 and 5 U.S.C. 553.

Related documents

• 50 CFR Part 600 — Magnuson-Stevens Act Provisions#512148
• 50 CFR Part 622 — Fisheries of the Caribbean, Gulf of America, and South Atlantic#512149
• 50 CFR Part 635 — Atlantic Highly Migratory Species#512150
• 50 CFR Part 648 — Fisheries of the Northeastern United States#512151
• 50 CFR Part 660 — Fisheries off West Coast States#512152